This is The GNU C Library Reference Manual, for version 2.38.
Copyright © 1993–2023 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3 or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation; with the Invariant Sections being “Free Software Needs Free Documentation” and “GNU Lesser General Public License”, the Front-Cover texts being “A GNU Manual”, and with the Back-Cover Texts as in (a) below. A copy of the license is included in the section entitled "GNU Free Documentation License".
(a) The FSF’s Back-Cover Text is: “You have the freedom to copy and modify this GNU manual. Buying copies from the FSF supports it in developing GNU and promoting software freedom.”
Next: Introduction, Previous: (dir), Up: (dir) [Contents][Index]
malloc
malloc
malloc
malloc
-Related Functionsmalloc
gettext
family of functions
gettext
usesgettext
in GUI programsgettext
gettext
printf
inetd
Daemon
getopt
argp_parse
Functionargp_parse
argp_help
Functionargp_help
Functionsysconf
pathconf
Next: Error Reporting, Previous: Main Menu, Up: Main Menu [Contents][Index]
The C language provides no built-in facilities for performing such common operations as input/output, memory management, string manipulation, and the like. Instead, these facilities are defined in a standard library, which you compile and link with your programs.
The GNU C Library, described in this document, defines all of the library functions that are specified by the ISO C standard, as well as additional features specific to POSIX and other derivatives of the Unix operating system, and extensions specific to GNU systems.
The purpose of this manual is to tell you how to use the facilities of the GNU C Library. We have mentioned which features belong to which standards to help you identify things that are potentially non-portable to other systems. But the emphasis in this manual is not on strict portability.
Next: Standards and Portability, Up: Introduction [Contents][Index]
This manual is written with the assumption that you are at least somewhat familiar with the C programming language and basic programming concepts. Specifically, familiarity with ISO standard C (see ISO C), rather than “traditional” pre-ISO C dialects, is assumed.
The GNU C Library includes several header files, each of which provides definitions and declarations for a group of related facilities; this information is used by the C compiler when processing your program. For example, the header file stdio.h declares facilities for performing input and output, and the header file string.h declares string processing utilities. The organization of this manual generally follows the same division as the header files.
If you are reading this manual for the first time, you should read all of the introductory material and skim the remaining chapters. There are a lot of functions in the GNU C Library and it’s not realistic to expect that you will be able to remember exactly how to use each and every one of them. It’s more important to become generally familiar with the kinds of facilities that the library provides, so that when you are writing your programs you can recognize when to make use of library functions, and where in this manual you can find more specific information about them.
Next: Using the Library, Previous: Getting Started, Up: Introduction [Contents][Index]
This section discusses the various standards and other sources that the GNU C Library is based upon. These sources include the ISO C and POSIX standards, and the System V and Berkeley Unix implementations.
The primary focus of this manual is to tell you how to make effective use of the GNU C Library facilities. But if you are concerned about making your programs compatible with these standards, or portable to operating systems other than GNU, this can affect how you use the library. This section gives you an overview of these standards, so that you will know what they are when they are mentioned in other parts of the manual.
See Summary of Library Facilities, for an alphabetical list of the functions and other symbols provided by the library. This list also states which standards each function or symbol comes from.
Next: POSIX (The Portable Operating System Interface), Up: Standards and Portability [Contents][Index]
The GNU C Library is compatible with the C standard adopted by the American National Standards Institute (ANSI): American National Standard X3.159-1989—“ANSI C” and later by the International Standardization Organization (ISO): ISO/IEC 9899:1990, “Programming languages—C”. We here refer to the standard as ISO C since this is the more general standard in respect of ratification. The header files and library facilities that make up the GNU C Library are a superset of those specified by the ISO C standard.
If you are concerned about strict adherence to the ISO C standard, you should use the ‘-ansi’ option when you compile your programs with the GNU C compiler. This tells the compiler to define only ISO standard features from the library header files, unless you explicitly ask for additional features. See Feature Test Macros, for information on how to do this.
Being able to restrict the library to include only ISO C features is important because ISO C puts limitations on what names can be defined by the library implementation, and the GNU extensions don’t fit these limitations. See Reserved Names, for more information about these restrictions.
This manual does not attempt to give you complete details on the differences between ISO C and older dialects. It gives advice on how to write programs to work portably under multiple C dialects, but does not aim for completeness.
Next: Berkeley Unix, Previous: ISO C, Up: Standards and Portability [Contents][Index]
The GNU C Library is also compatible with the ISO POSIX family of standards, known more formally as the Portable Operating System Interface for Computer Environments (ISO/IEC 9945). They were also published as ANSI/IEEE Std 1003. POSIX is derived mostly from various versions of the Unix operating system.
The library facilities specified by the POSIX standards are a superset of those required by ISO C; POSIX specifies additional features for ISO C functions, as well as specifying new additional functions. In general, the additional requirements and functionality defined by the POSIX standards are aimed at providing lower-level support for a particular kind of operating system environment, rather than general programming language support which can run in many diverse operating system environments.
The GNU C Library implements all of the functions specified in ISO/IEC 9945-1:1996, the POSIX System Application Program Interface, commonly referred to as POSIX.1. The primary extensions to the ISO C facilities specified by this standard include file system interface primitives (see File System Interface), device-specific terminal control functions (see Low-Level Terminal Interface), and process control functions (see Processes).
Some facilities from ISO/IEC 9945-2:1993, the POSIX Shell and Utilities standard (POSIX.2) are also implemented in the GNU C Library. These include utilities for dealing with regular expressions and other pattern matching facilities (see Pattern Matching).
This manual documents various safety properties of GNU C Library functions, in lines that follow their prototypes and look like:
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe |
The properties are assessed according to the criteria set forth in the POSIX standard for such safety contexts as Thread-, Async-Signal- and Async-Cancel- -Safety. Intuitive definitions of these properties, attempting to capture the meaning of the standard definitions, follow.
MT-Safe
or Thread-Safe functions are safe to call in the presence
of other threads. MT, in MT-Safe, stands for Multi Thread.
Being MT-Safe does not imply a function is atomic, nor that it uses any of the memory synchronization mechanisms POSIX exposes to users. It is even possible that calling MT-Safe functions in sequence does not yield an MT-Safe combination. For example, having a thread call two MT-Safe functions one right after the other does not guarantee behavior equivalent to atomic execution of a combination of both functions, since concurrent calls in other threads may interfere in a destructive way.
Whole-program optimizations that could inline functions across library interfaces may expose unsafe reordering, and so performing inlining across the GNU C Library interface is not recommended. The documented MT-Safety status is not guaranteed under whole-program optimization. However, functions defined in user-visible headers are designed to be safe for inlining.
AS-Safe
or Async-Signal-Safe functions are safe to call from
asynchronous signal handlers. AS, in AS-Safe, stands for Asynchronous
Signal.
Many functions that are AS-Safe may set errno
, or modify the
floating-point environment, because their doing so does not make them
unsuitable for use in signal handlers. However, programs could
misbehave should asynchronous signal handlers modify this thread-local
state, and the signal handling machinery cannot be counted on to
preserve it. Therefore, signal handlers that call functions that may
set errno
or modify the floating-point environment must
save their original values, and restore them before returning.
AC-Safe
or Async-Cancel-Safe functions are safe to call when
asynchronous cancellation is enabled. AC in AC-Safe stands for
Asynchronous Cancellation.
The POSIX standard defines only three functions to be AC-Safe, namely
pthread_cancel
, pthread_setcancelstate
, and
pthread_setcanceltype
. At present the GNU C Library provides no
guarantees beyond these three functions, but does document which
functions are presently AC-Safe. This documentation is provided for use
by the GNU C Library developers.
Just like signal handlers, cancellation cleanup routines must configure the floating point environment they require. The routines cannot assume a floating point environment, particularly when asynchronous cancellation is enabled. If the configuration of the floating point environment cannot be performed atomically then it is also possible that the environment encountered is internally inconsistent.
MT-Unsafe
, AS-Unsafe
, AC-Unsafe
functions are not
safe to call within the safety contexts described above. Calling them
within such contexts invokes undefined behavior.
Functions not explicitly documented as safe in a safety context should be regarded as Unsafe.
Preliminary
safety properties are documented, indicating these
properties may not be counted on in future releases of
the GNU C Library.
Such preliminary properties are the result of an assessment of the properties of our current implementation, rather than of what is mandated and permitted by current and future standards.
Although we strive to abide by the standards, in some cases our
implementation is safe even when the standard does not demand safety,
and in other cases our implementation does not meet the standard safety
requirements. The latter are most likely bugs; the former, when marked
as Preliminary
, should not be counted on: future standards may
require changes that are not compatible with the additional safety
properties afforded by the current implementation.
Furthermore, the POSIX standard does not offer a detailed definition of safety. We assume that, by “safe to call”, POSIX means that, as long as the program does not invoke undefined behavior, the “safe to call” function behaves as specified, and does not cause other functions to deviate from their specified behavior. We have chosen to use its loose definitions of safety, not because they are the best definitions to use, but because choosing them harmonizes this manual with POSIX.
Please keep in mind that these are preliminary definitions and annotations, and certain aspects of the definitions are still under discussion and might be subject to clarification or change.
Over time, we envision evolving the preliminary safety notes into stable
commitments, as stable as those of our interfaces. As we do, we will
remove the Preliminary
keyword from safety notes. As long as the
keyword remains, however, they are not to be regarded as a promise of
future behavior.
Other keywords that appear in safety notes are defined in subsequent sections.
Next: Conditionally Safe Features, Previous: POSIX Safety Concepts, Up: POSIX (The Portable Operating System Interface) [Contents][Index]
Functions that are unsafe to call in certain contexts are annotated with keywords that document their features that make them unsafe to call. AS-Unsafe features in this section indicate the functions are never safe to call when asynchronous signals are enabled. AC-Unsafe features indicate they are never safe to call when asynchronous cancellation is enabled. There are no MT-Unsafe marks in this section.
lock
Functions marked with lock
as an AS-Unsafe feature may be
interrupted by a signal while holding a non-recursive lock. If the
signal handler calls another such function that takes the same lock, the
result is a deadlock.
Functions annotated with lock
as an AC-Unsafe feature may, if
cancelled asynchronously, fail to release a lock that would have been
released if their execution had not been interrupted by asynchronous
thread cancellation. Once a lock is left taken, attempts to take that
lock will block indefinitely.
corrupt
Functions marked with corrupt
as an AS-Unsafe feature may corrupt
data structures and misbehave when they interrupt, or are interrupted
by, another such function. Unlike functions marked with lock
,
these take recursive locks to avoid MT-Safety problems, but this is not
enough to stop a signal handler from observing a partially-updated data
structure. Further corruption may arise from the interrupted function’s
failure to notice updates made by signal handlers.
Functions marked with corrupt
as an AC-Unsafe feature may leave
data structures in a corrupt, partially updated state. Subsequent uses
of the data structure may misbehave.
heap
Functions marked with heap
may call heap memory management
functions from the malloc
/free
family of functions and are
only as safe as those functions. This note is thus equivalent to:
| AS-Unsafe lock | AC-Unsafe lock fd mem |
dlopen
Functions marked with dlopen
use the dynamic loader to load
shared libraries into the current execution image. This involves
opening files, mapping them into memory, allocating additional memory,
resolving symbols, applying relocations and more, all of this while
holding internal dynamic loader locks.
The locks are enough for these functions to be AS- and AC-Unsafe, but
other issues may arise. At present this is a placeholder for all
potential safety issues raised by dlopen
.
plugin
Functions annotated with plugin
may run code from plugins that
may be external to the GNU C Library. Such plugin functions are assumed to be
MT-Safe, AS-Unsafe and AC-Unsafe. Examples of such plugins are stack
unwinding libraries, name service switch (NSS) and character set
conversion (iconv) back-ends.
Although the plugins mentioned as examples are all brought in by means
of dlopen, the plugin
keyword does not imply any direct
involvement of the dynamic loader or the libdl
interfaces, those
are covered by dlopen
. For example, if one function loads a
module and finds the addresses of some of its functions, while another
just calls those already-resolved functions, the former will be marked
with dlopen
, whereas the latter will get the plugin
. When
a single function takes all of these actions, then it gets both marks.
i18n
Functions marked with i18n
may call internationalization
functions of the gettext
family and will be only as safe as those
functions. This note is thus equivalent to:
| MT-Safe env | AS-Unsafe corrupt heap dlopen | AC-Unsafe corrupt |
timer
Functions marked with timer
use the alarm
function or
similar to set a time-out for a system call or a long-running operation.
In a multi-threaded program, there is a risk that the time-out signal
will be delivered to a different thread, thus failing to interrupt the
intended thread. Besides being MT-Unsafe, such functions are always
AS-Unsafe, because calling them in signal handlers may interfere with
timers set in the interrupted code, and AC-Unsafe, because there is no
safe way to guarantee an earlier timer will be reset in case of
asynchronous cancellation.
Next: Other Safety Remarks, Previous: Unsafe Features, Up: POSIX (The Portable Operating System Interface) [Contents][Index]
For some features that make functions unsafe to call in certain contexts, there are known ways to avoid the safety problem other than refraining from calling the function altogether. The keywords that follow refer to such features, and each of their definitions indicate how the whole program needs to be constrained in order to remove the safety problem indicated by the keyword. Only when all the reasons that make a function unsafe are observed and addressed, by applying the documented constraints, does the function become safe to call in a context.
init
Functions marked with init
as an MT-Unsafe feature perform
MT-Unsafe initialization when they are first called.
Calling such a function at least once in single-threaded mode removes this specific cause for the function to be regarded as MT-Unsafe. If no other cause for that remains, the function can then be safely called after other threads are started.
Functions marked with init
as an AS- or AC-Unsafe feature use the
internal libc_once
machinery or similar to initialize internal
data structures.
If a signal handler interrupts such an initializer, and calls any
function that also performs libc_once
initialization, it will
deadlock if the thread library has been loaded.
Furthermore, if an initializer is partially complete before it is canceled or interrupted by a signal whose handler requires the same initialization, some or all of the initialization may be performed more than once, leaking resources or even resulting in corrupt internal data.
Applications that need to call functions marked with init
as an
AS- or AC-Unsafe feature should ensure the initialization is performed
before configuring signal handlers or enabling cancellation, so that the
AS- and AC-Safety issues related with libc_once
do not arise.
race
Functions annotated with race
as an MT-Safety issue operate on
objects in ways that may cause data races or similar forms of
destructive interference out of concurrent execution. In some cases,
the objects are passed to the functions by users; in others, they are
used by the functions to return values to users; in others, they are not
even exposed to users.
We consider access to objects passed as (indirect) arguments to
functions to be data race free. The assurance of data race free objects
is the caller’s responsibility. We will not mark a function as
MT-Unsafe or AS-Unsafe if it misbehaves when users fail to take the
measures required by POSIX to avoid data races when dealing with such
objects. As a general rule, if a function is documented as reading from
an object passed (by reference) to it, or modifying it, users ought to
use memory synchronization primitives to avoid data races just as they
would should they perform the accesses themselves rather than by calling
the library function. FILE
streams are the exception to the
general rule, in that POSIX mandates the library to guard against data
races in many functions that manipulate objects of this specific opaque
type. We regard this as a convenience provided to users, rather than as
a general requirement whose expectations should extend to other types.
In order to remind users that guarding certain arguments is their
responsibility, we will annotate functions that take objects of certain
types as arguments. We draw the line for objects passed by users as
follows: objects whose types are exposed to users, and that users are
expected to access directly, such as memory buffers, strings, and
various user-visible struct
types, do not give reason for
functions to be annotated with race
. It would be noisy and
redundant with the general requirement, and not many would be surprised
by the library’s lack of internal guards when accessing objects that can
be accessed directly by users.
As for objects that are opaque or opaque-like, in that they are to be
manipulated only by passing them to library functions (e.g.,
FILE
, DIR
, obstack
, iconv_t
), there might be
additional expectations as to internal coordination of access by the
library. We will annotate, with race
followed by a colon and the
argument name, functions that take such objects but that do not take
care of synchronizing access to them by default. For example,
FILE
stream unlocked
functions will be annotated, but
those that perform implicit locking on FILE
streams by default
will not, even though the implicit locking may be disabled on a
per-stream basis.
In either case, we will not regard as MT-Unsafe functions that may access user-supplied objects in unsafe ways should users fail to ensure the accesses are well defined. The notion prevails that users are expected to safeguard against data races any user-supplied objects that the library accesses on their behalf.
This user responsibility does not apply, however, to objects controlled
by the library itself, such as internal objects and static buffers used
to return values from certain calls. When the library doesn’t guard
them against concurrent uses, these cases are regarded as MT-Unsafe and
AS-Unsafe (although the race
mark under AS-Unsafe will be omitted
as redundant with the one under MT-Unsafe). As in the case of
user-exposed objects, the mark may be followed by a colon and an
identifier. The identifier groups all functions that operate on a
certain unguarded object; users may avoid the MT-Safety issues related
with unguarded concurrent access to such internal objects by creating a
non-recursive mutex related with the identifier, and always holding the
mutex when calling any function marked as racy on that identifier, as
they would have to should the identifier be an object under user
control. The non-recursive mutex avoids the MT-Safety issue, but it
trades one AS-Safety issue for another, so use in asynchronous signals
remains undefined.
When the identifier relates to a static buffer used to hold return
values, the mutex must be held for as long as the buffer remains in use
by the caller. Many functions that return pointers to static buffers
offer reentrant variants that store return values in caller-supplied
buffers instead. In some cases, such as tmpname
, the variant is
chosen not by calling an alternate entry point, but by passing a
non-NULL
pointer to the buffer in which the returned values are
to be stored. These variants are generally preferable in multi-threaded
programs, although some of them are not MT-Safe because of other
internal buffers, also documented with race
notes.
const
Functions marked with const
as an MT-Safety issue non-atomically
modify internal objects that are better regarded as constant, because a
substantial portion of the GNU C Library accesses them without
synchronization. Unlike race
, that causes both readers and
writers of internal objects to be regarded as MT-Unsafe and AS-Unsafe,
this mark is applied to writers only. Writers remain equally MT- and
AS-Unsafe to call, but the then-mandatory constness of objects they
modify enables readers to be regarded as MT-Safe and AS-Safe (as long as
no other reasons for them to be unsafe remain), since the lack of
synchronization is not a problem when the objects are effectively
constant.
The identifier that follows the const
mark will appear by itself
as a safety note in readers. Programs that wish to work around this
safety issue, so as to call writers, may use a non-recursve
rwlock
associated with the identifier, and guard all calls
to functions marked with const
followed by the identifier with a
write lock, and all calls to functions marked with the identifier
by itself with a read lock. The non-recursive locking removes the
MT-Safety problem, but it trades one AS-Safety problem for another, so
use in asynchronous signals remains undefined.
sig
Functions marked with sig
as a MT-Safety issue (that implies an
identical AS-Safety issue, omitted for brevity) may temporarily install
a signal handler for internal purposes, which may interfere with other
uses of the signal, identified after a colon.
This safety problem can be worked around by ensuring that no other uses of the signal will take place for the duration of the call. Holding a non-recursive mutex while calling all functions that use the same temporary signal; blocking that signal before the call and resetting its handler afterwards is recommended.
There is no safe way to guarantee the original signal handler is restored in case of asynchronous cancellation, therefore so-marked functions are also AC-Unsafe.
Besides the measures recommended to work around the MT- and AS-Safety problem, in order to avert the cancellation problem, disabling asynchronous cancellation and installing a cleanup handler to restore the signal to the desired state and to release the mutex are recommended.
term
Functions marked with term
as an MT-Safety issue may change the
terminal settings in the recommended way, namely: call tcgetattr
,
modify some flags, and then call tcsetattr
; this creates a window
in which changes made by other threads are lost. Thus, functions marked
with term
are MT-Unsafe. The same window enables changes made by
asynchronous signals to be lost. These functions are also AS-Unsafe,
but the corresponding mark is omitted as redundant.
It is thus advisable for applications using the terminal to avoid
concurrent and reentrant interactions with it, by not using it in signal
handlers or blocking signals that might use it, and holding a lock while
calling these functions and interacting with the terminal. This lock
should also be used for mutual exclusion with functions marked with
race:tcattr(fd)
, where fd is a file descriptor for
the controlling terminal. The caller may use a single mutex for
simplicity, or use one mutex per terminal, even if referenced by
different file descriptors.
Functions marked with term
as an AC-Safety issue are supposed to
restore terminal settings to their original state, after temporarily
changing them, but they may fail to do so if cancelled.
Besides the measures recommended to work around the MT- and AS-Safety problem, in order to avert the cancellation problem, disabling asynchronous cancellation and installing a cleanup handler to restore the terminal settings to the original state and to release the mutex are recommended.
Previous: Conditionally Safe Features, Up: POSIX (The Portable Operating System Interface) [Contents][Index]
Additional keywords may be attached to functions, indicating features that do not make a function unsafe to call, but that may need to be taken into account in certain classes of programs:
locale
Functions annotated with locale
as an MT-Safety issue read from
the locale object without any form of synchronization. Functions
annotated with locale
called concurrently with locale changes may
behave in ways that do not correspond to any of the locales active
during their execution, but an unpredictable mix thereof.
We do not mark these functions as MT- or AS-Unsafe, however, because
functions that modify the locale object are marked with
const:locale
and regarded as unsafe. Being unsafe, the latter
are not to be called when multiple threads are running or asynchronous
signals are enabled, and so the locale can be considered effectively
constant in these contexts, which makes the former safe.
env
Functions marked with env
as an MT-Safety issue access the
environment with getenv
or similar, without any guards to ensure
safety in the presence of concurrent modifications.
We do not mark these functions as MT- or AS-Unsafe, however, because
functions that modify the environment are all marked with
const:env
and regarded as unsafe. Being unsafe, the latter are
not to be called when multiple threads are running or asynchronous
signals are enabled, and so the environment can be considered
effectively constant in these contexts, which makes the former safe.
hostid
The function marked with hostid
as an MT-Safety issue reads from
the system-wide data structures that hold the “host ID” of the
machine. These data structures cannot generally be modified atomically.
Since it is expected that the “host ID” will not normally change, the
function that reads from it (gethostid
) is regarded as safe,
whereas the function that modifies it (sethostid
) is marked with
const:hostid
, indicating it may require special
care if it is to be called. In this specific case, the special care
amounts to system-wide (not merely intra-process) coordination.
sigintr
Functions marked with sigintr
as an MT-Safety issue access the
_sigintr
internal data structure without any guards to ensure
safety in the presence of concurrent modifications.
We do not mark these functions as MT- or AS-Unsafe, however, because
functions that modify the this data structure are all marked with
const:sigintr
and regarded as unsafe. Being unsafe, the latter
are not to be called when multiple threads are running or asynchronous
signals are enabled, and so the data structure can be considered
effectively constant in these contexts, which makes the former safe.
fd
Functions annotated with fd
as an AC-Safety issue may leak file
descriptors if asynchronous thread cancellation interrupts their
execution.
Functions that allocate or deallocate file descriptors will generally be marked as such. Even if they attempted to protect the file descriptor allocation and deallocation with cleanup regions, allocating a new descriptor and storing its number where the cleanup region could release it cannot be performed as a single atomic operation. Similarly, releasing the descriptor and taking it out of the data structure normally responsible for releasing it cannot be performed atomically. There will always be a window in which the descriptor cannot be released because it was not stored in the cleanup handler argument yet, or it was already taken out before releasing it. It cannot be taken out after release: an open descriptor could mean either that the descriptor still has to be closed, or that it already did so but the descriptor was reallocated by another thread or signal handler.
Such leaks could be internally avoided, with some performance penalty, by temporarily disabling asynchronous thread cancellation. However, since callers of allocation or deallocation functions would have to do this themselves, to avoid the same sort of leak in their own layer, it makes more sense for the library to assume they are taking care of it than to impose a performance penalty that is redundant when the problem is solved in upper layers, and insufficient when it is not.
This remark by itself does not cause a function to be regarded as AC-Unsafe. However, cumulative effects of such leaks may pose a problem for some programs. If this is the case, suspending asynchronous cancellation for the duration of calls to such functions is recommended.
mem
Functions annotated with mem
as an AC-Safety issue may leak
memory if asynchronous thread cancellation interrupts their execution.
The problem is similar to that of file descriptors: there is no atomic interface to allocate memory and store its address in the argument to a cleanup handler, or to release it and remove its address from that argument, without at least temporarily disabling asynchronous cancellation, which these functions do not do.
This remark does not by itself cause a function to be regarded as generally AC-Unsafe. However, cumulative effects of such leaks may be severe enough for some programs that disabling asynchronous cancellation for the duration of calls to such functions may be required.
cwd
Functions marked with cwd
as an MT-Safety issue may temporarily
change the current working directory during their execution, which may
cause relative pathnames to be resolved in unexpected ways in other
threads or within asynchronous signal or cancellation handlers.
This is not enough of a reason to mark so-marked functions as MT- or
AS-Unsafe, but when this behavior is optional (e.g., nftw
with
FTW_CHDIR
), avoiding the option may be a good alternative to
using full pathnames or file descriptor-relative (e.g. openat
)
system calls.
!posix
This remark, as an MT-, AS- or AC-Safety note to a function, indicates the safety status of the function is known to differ from the specified status in the POSIX standard. For example, POSIX does not require a function to be Safe, but our implementation is, or vice-versa.
For the time being, the absence of this remark does not imply the safety properties we documented are identical to those mandated by POSIX for the corresponding functions.
:identifier
Annotations may sometimes be followed by identifiers, intended to group
several functions that e.g. access the data structures in an unsafe way,
as in race
and const
, or to provide more specific
information, such as naming a signal in a function marked with
sig
. It is envisioned that it may be applied to lock
and
corrupt
as well in the future.
In most cases, the identifier will name a set of functions, but it may
name global objects or function arguments, or identifiable properties or
logical components associated with them, with a notation such as
e.g. :buf(arg)
to denote a buffer associated with the argument
arg, or :tcattr(fd)
to denote the terminal attributes of a
file descriptor fd.
The most common use for identifiers is to provide logical groups of functions and arguments that need to be protected by the same synchronization primitive in order to ensure safe operation in a given context.
/condition
Some safety annotations may be conditional, in that they only apply if a
boolean expression involving arguments, global variables or even the
underlying kernel evaluates to true. Such conditions as
/hurd
or /!linux!bsd
indicate the preceding marker only
applies when the underlying kernel is the HURD, or when it is neither
Linux nor a BSD kernel, respectively. /!ps
and
/one_per_line
indicate the preceding marker only applies when
argument ps is NULL, or global variable one_per_line is
nonzero.
When all marks that render a function unsafe are adorned with such conditions, and none of the named conditions hold, then the function can be regarded as safe.
Next: SVID (The System V Interface Description), Previous: POSIX (The Portable Operating System Interface), Up: Standards and Portability [Contents][Index]
The GNU C Library defines facilities from some versions of Unix which are not formally standardized, specifically from the 4.2 BSD, 4.3 BSD, and 4.4 BSD Unix systems (also known as Berkeley Unix) and from SunOS (a popular 4.2 BSD derivative that includes some Unix System V functionality). These systems support most of the ISO C and POSIX facilities, and 4.4 BSD and newer releases of SunOS in fact support them all.
The BSD facilities include symbolic links (see Symbolic Links), the
select
function (see Waiting for Input or Output), the BSD signal
functions (see BSD Signal Handling), and sockets (see Sockets).
Next: XPG (The X/Open Portability Guide), Previous: Berkeley Unix, Up: Standards and Portability [Contents][Index]
The System V Interface Description (SVID) is a document describing the AT&T Unix System V operating system. It is to some extent a superset of the POSIX standard (see POSIX (The Portable Operating System Interface)).
The GNU C Library defines most of the facilities required by the SVID that are not also required by the ISO C or POSIX standards, for compatibility with System V Unix and other Unix systems (such as SunOS) which include these facilities. However, many of the more obscure and less generally useful facilities required by the SVID are not included. (In fact, Unix System V itself does not provide them all.)
The supported facilities from System V include the methods for
inter-process communication and shared memory, the hsearch
and
drand48
families of functions, fmtmsg
and several of the
mathematical functions.
Previous: SVID (The System V Interface Description), Up: Standards and Portability [Contents][Index]
The X/Open Portability Guide, published by the X/Open Company, Ltd., is a more general standard than POSIX. X/Open owns the Unix copyright and the XPG specifies the requirements for systems which are intended to be a Unix system.
The GNU C Library complies to the X/Open Portability Guide, Issue 4.2, with all extensions common to XSI (X/Open System Interface) compliant systems and also all X/Open UNIX extensions.
The additions on top of POSIX are mainly derived from functionality available in System V and BSD systems. Some of the really bad mistakes in System V systems were corrected, though. Since fulfilling the XPG standard with the Unix extensions is a precondition for getting the Unix brand chances are good that the functionality is available on commercial systems.
Next: Roadmap to the Manual, Previous: Standards and Portability, Up: Introduction [Contents][Index]
This section describes some of the practical issues involved in using the GNU C Library.
Next: Macro Definitions of Functions, Up: Using the Library [Contents][Index]
Libraries for use by C programs really consist of two parts: header files that define types and macros and declare variables and functions; and the actual library or archive that contains the definitions of the variables and functions.
(Recall that in C, a declaration merely provides information that a function or variable exists and gives its type. For a function declaration, information about the types of its arguments might be provided as well. The purpose of declarations is to allow the compiler to correctly process references to the declared variables and functions. A definition, on the other hand, actually allocates storage for a variable or says what a function does.)
In order to use the facilities in the GNU C Library, you should be sure that your program source files include the appropriate header files. This is so that the compiler has declarations of these facilities available and can correctly process references to them. Once your program has been compiled, the linker resolves these references to the actual definitions provided in the archive file.
Header files are included into a program source file by the ‘#include’ preprocessor directive. The C language supports two forms of this directive; the first,
#include "header"
is typically used to include a header file header that you write yourself; this would contain definitions and declarations describing the interfaces between the different parts of your particular application. By contrast,
#include <file.h>
is typically used to include a header file file.h that contains definitions and declarations for a standard library. This file would normally be installed in a standard place by your system administrator. You should use this second form for the C library header files.
Typically, ‘#include’ directives are placed at the top of the C source file, before any other code. If you begin your source files with some comments explaining what the code in the file does (a good idea), put the ‘#include’ directives immediately afterwards, following the feature test macro definition (see Feature Test Macros).
For more information about the use of header files and ‘#include’ directives, see Header Files in The GNU C Preprocessor Manual.
The GNU C Library provides several header files, each of which contains the type and macro definitions and variable and function declarations for a group of related facilities. This means that your programs may need to include several header files, depending on exactly which facilities you are using.
Some library header files include other library header files automatically. However, as a matter of programming style, you should not rely on this; it is better to explicitly include all the header files required for the library facilities you are using. The GNU C Library header files have been written in such a way that it doesn’t matter if a header file is accidentally included more than once; including a header file a second time has no effect. Likewise, if your program needs to include multiple header files, the order in which they are included doesn’t matter.
Compatibility Note: Inclusion of standard header files in any order and any number of times works in any ISO C implementation. However, this has traditionally not been the case in many older C implementations.
Strictly speaking, you don’t have to include a header file to use a function it declares; you could declare the function explicitly yourself, according to the specifications in this manual. But it is usually better to include the header file because it may define types and macros that are not otherwise available and because it may define more efficient macro replacements for some functions. It is also a sure way to have the correct declaration.
Next: Reserved Names, Previous: Header Files, Up: Using the Library [Contents][Index]
If we describe something as a function in this manual, it may have a macro definition as well. This normally has no effect on how your program runs—the macro definition does the same thing as the function would. In particular, macro equivalents for library functions evaluate arguments exactly once, in the same way that a function call would. The main reason for these macro definitions is that sometimes they can produce an inline expansion that is considerably faster than an actual function call.
Taking the address of a library function works even if it is also defined as a macro. This is because, in this context, the name of the function isn’t followed by the left parenthesis that is syntactically necessary to recognize a macro call.
You might occasionally want to avoid using the macro definition of a function—perhaps to make your program easier to debug. There are two ways you can do this:
For example, suppose the header file stdlib.h declares a function
named abs
with
extern int abs (int);
and also provides a macro definition for abs
. Then, in:
#include <stdlib.h> int f (int *i) { return abs (++*i); }
the reference to abs
might refer to either a macro or a function.
On the other hand, in each of the following examples the reference is
to a function and not a macro.
#include <stdlib.h> int g (int *i) { return (abs) (++*i); } #undef abs int h (int *i) { return abs (++*i); }
Since macro definitions that double for a function behave in exactly the same way as the actual function version, there is usually no need for any of these methods. In fact, removing macro definitions usually just makes your program slower.
Next: Feature Test Macros, Previous: Macro Definitions of Functions, Up: Using the Library [Contents][Index]
The names of all library types, macros, variables and functions that come from the ISO C standard are reserved unconditionally; your program may not redefine these names. All other library names are reserved if your program explicitly includes the header file that defines or declares them. There are several reasons for these restrictions:
exit
to do something completely different from
what the standard exit
function does, for example. Preventing
this situation helps to make your programs easier to understand and
contributes to modularity and maintainability.
In addition to the names documented in this manual, reserved names include all external identifiers (global functions and variables) that begin with an underscore (‘_’) and all identifiers regardless of use that begin with either two underscores or an underscore followed by a capital letter are reserved names. This is so that the library and header files can define functions, variables, and macros for internal purposes without risk of conflict with names in user programs.
Some additional classes of identifier names are reserved for future extensions to the C language or the POSIX.1 environment. While using these names for your own purposes right now might not cause a problem, they do raise the possibility of conflict with future versions of the C or POSIX standards, so you should avoid these names.
float
and long double
arguments,
respectively.
In addition, some individual header files reserve names beyond those that they actually define. You only need to worry about these restrictions if your program includes that particular header file.
Previous: Reserved Names, Up: Using the Library [Contents][Index]
The exact set of features available when you compile a source file is controlled by which feature test macros you define.
If you compile your programs using ‘gcc -ansi’, you get only the ISO C library features, unless you explicitly request additional features by defining one or more of the feature macros. See GNU CC Command Options in The GNU CC Manual, for more information about GCC options.
You should define these macros by using ‘#define’ preprocessor
directives at the top of your source code files. These directives
must come before any #include
of a system header file. It
is best to make them the very first thing in the file, preceded only by
comments. You could also use the ‘-D’ option to GCC, but it’s
better if you make the source files indicate their own meaning in a
self-contained way.
This system exists to allow the library to conform to multiple standards.
Although the different standards are often described as supersets of each
other, they are usually incompatible because larger standards require
functions with names that smaller ones reserve to the user program. This
is not mere pedantry — it has been a problem in practice. For instance,
some non-GNU programs define functions named getline
that have
nothing to do with this library’s getline
. They would not be
compilable if all features were enabled indiscriminately.
This should not be used to verify that a program conforms to a limited standard. It is insufficient for this purpose, as it will not protect you from including header files outside the standard, or relying on semantics undefined within the standard.
If you define this macro, then the functionality from the POSIX.1 standard (IEEE Standard 1003.1) is available, as well as all of the ISO C facilities.
The state of _POSIX_SOURCE
is irrelevant if you define the
macro _POSIX_C_SOURCE
to a positive integer.
Define this macro to a positive integer to control which POSIX functionality is made available. The greater the value of this macro, the more functionality is made available.
If you define this macro to a value greater than or equal to 1
,
then the functionality from the 1990 edition of the POSIX.1 standard
(IEEE Standard 1003.1-1990) is made available.
If you define this macro to a value greater than or equal to 2
,
then the functionality from the 1992 edition of the POSIX.2 standard
(IEEE Standard 1003.2-1992) is made available.
If you define this macro to a value greater than or equal to 199309L
,
then the functionality from the 1993 edition of the POSIX.1b standard
(IEEE Standard 1003.1b-1993) is made available.
If you define this macro to a value greater than or equal to
199506L
, then the functionality from the 1995 edition of the
POSIX.1c standard (IEEE Standard 1003.1c-1995) is made available.
If you define this macro to a value greater than or equal to
200112L
, then the functionality from the 2001 edition of the
POSIX standard (IEEE Standard 1003.1-2001) is made available.
If you define this macro to a value greater than or equal to
200809L
, then the functionality from the 2008 edition of the
POSIX standard (IEEE Standard 1003.1-2008) is made available.
Greater values for _POSIX_C_SOURCE
will enable future extensions.
The POSIX standards process will define these values as necessary, and
the GNU C Library should support them some time after they become standardized.
The 1996 edition of POSIX.1 (ISO/IEC 9945-1: 1996) states that
if you define _POSIX_C_SOURCE
to a value greater than
or equal to 199506L
, then the functionality from the 1996
edition is made available. In general, in the GNU C Library, bugfixes to
the standards are included when specifying the base version; e.g.,
POSIX.1-2004 will always be included with a value of 200112L
.
If you define this macro, functionality described in the X/Open
Portability Guide is included. This is a superset of the POSIX.1 and
POSIX.2 functionality and in fact _POSIX_SOURCE
and
_POSIX_C_SOURCE
are automatically defined.
As the unification of all Unices, functionality only available in BSD and SVID is also included.
If the macro _XOPEN_SOURCE_EXTENDED
is also defined, even more
functionality is available. The extra functions will make all functions
available which are necessary for the X/Open Unix brand.
If the macro _XOPEN_SOURCE
has the value 500 this includes
all functionality described so far plus some new definitions from the
Single Unix Specification, version 2. The value 600
(corresponding to the sixth revision) includes definitions from SUSv3,
and using 700 (the seventh revision) includes definitions from
SUSv4.
If this macro is defined some extra functions are available which
rectify a few shortcomings in all previous standards. Specifically,
the functions fseeko
and ftello
are available. Without
these functions the difference between the ISO C interface
(fseek
, ftell
) and the low-level POSIX interface
(lseek
) would lead to problems.
This macro was introduced as part of the Large File Support extension (LFS).
If you define this macro an additional set of functions is made available which enables 32 bit systems to use files of sizes beyond the usual limit of 2GB. This interface is not available if the system does not support files that large. On systems where the natural file size limit is greater than 2GB (i.e., on 64 bit systems) the new functions are identical to the replaced functions.
The new functionality is made available by a new set of types and
functions which replace the existing ones. The names of these new objects
contain 64
to indicate the intention, e.g., off_t
vs. off64_t
and fseeko
vs. fseeko64
.
This macro was introduced as part of the Large File Support extension
(LFS). It is a transition interface for the period when 64 bit
offsets are not generally used (see _FILE_OFFSET_BITS
).
This macro determines which file system interface shall be used, one
replacing the other. Whereas _LARGEFILE64_SOURCE
makes the 64 bit interface available as an additional interface,
_FILE_OFFSET_BITS
allows the 64 bit interface to
replace the old interface.
If _FILE_OFFSET_BITS
is defined to the
value 32
, the 32 bit interface is used and
types like off_t
have a size of 32 bits on 32 bit
systems.
If the macro is defined to the value 64
, the large file interface
replaces the old interface. I.e., the functions are not made available
under different names (as they are with _LARGEFILE64_SOURCE
).
Instead the old function names now reference the new functions, e.g., a
call to fseeko
now indeed calls fseeko64
.
If the macro is not defined it currently defaults to 32
, but
this default is planned to change due to a need to update
time_t
for Y2038 safety, and applications should not rely on
the default.
This macro should only be selected if the system provides mechanisms for
handling large files. On 64 bit systems this macro has no effect
since the *64
functions are identical to the normal functions.
This macro was introduced as part of the Large File Support extension (LFS).
Define this macro to control the bit size of time_t
, and therefore
the bit size of all time_t
-derived types and the prototypes of all
related functions.
_TIME_BITS
is undefined, the bit size of time_t
is
architecture dependent. Currently it defaults to 64 bits on most
architectures. Although it defaults to 32 bits on some traditional
architectures (i686, ARM), this is planned to change and applications
should not rely on this.
_TIME_BITS
is defined to be 64, time_t
is defined
to be a 64-bit integer. On platforms where time_t
was
traditionally 32 bits, calls to proper syscalls depend on the
Linux kernel version on which the system is running. For Linux kernel
version above 5.1 syscalls supporting 64-bit time are used. Otherwise,
a fallback code is used with legacy (i.e. 32-bit) syscalls.
_TIME_BITS
is defined to be 32, time_t
is defined to
be a 32-bit integer where that is supported. This is not recommended,
as 32-bit time_t
stops working in the year 2038.
_TIME_BITS=64
can be defined only when
_FILE_OFFSET_BITS=64
is also defined.
By using this macro certain ports gain support for 64-bit time and as a result become immune to the Y2038 problem.
If this macro is defined, features from ISO C99 are included. Since these features are included by default, this macro is mostly relevant when the compiler uses an earlier language version.
If this macro is defined, ISO C11 extensions to ISO C99 are included.
If this macro is defined, ISO C2X extensions to ISO C11 are included. Only some features from this draft standard are supported by the GNU C Library.
If you define this macro to the value 1
, features from ISO/IEC
TR 24731-2:2010 (Dynamic Allocation Functions) are enabled. Only some
of the features from this TR are supported by the GNU C Library.
If you define this macro, features from ISO/IEC TS 18661-1:2014 (Floating-point extensions for C: Binary floating-point arithmetic) are enabled. Only some of the features from this TS are supported by the GNU C Library.
If you define this macro, features from ISO/IEC TS 18661-4:2015 (Floating-point extensions for C: Supplementary functions) are enabled. Only some of the features from this TS are supported by the GNU C Library.
If you define this macro, features from ISO/IEC TS 18661-3:2015 (Floating-point extensions for C: Interchange and extended types) are enabled. Only some of the features from this TS are supported by the GNU C Library.
If you define this macro, ISO C2X features defined in Annex F of that
standard are enabled. This affects declarations of the
totalorder
functions and functions related to NaN payloads.
If you define this macro, everything is included: ISO C89, ISO C99, POSIX.1, POSIX.2, BSD, SVID, X/Open, LFS, and GNU extensions. In the cases where POSIX.1 conflicts with BSD, the POSIX definitions take precedence.
If you define this macro, most features are included apart from X/Open, LFS and GNU extensions: the effect is to enable features from the 2008 edition of POSIX, as well as certain BSD and SVID features without a separate feature test macro to control them.
Be aware that compiler options also affect included features:
If this macro is defined, additional *at
interfaces are
included.
If this macro is defined to 1, security hardening is added to various library functions. If defined to 2, even stricter checks are applied. If defined to 3, the GNU C Library may also use checks that may have an additional performance overhead. See Fortification of function calls.
If this macro is defined, correct (but non compile-time constant) MINSIGSTKSZ, SIGSTKSZ and PTHREAD_STACK_MIN are defined.
These macros are obsolete. They have the same effect as defining
_POSIX_C_SOURCE
with the value 199506L
.
Some very old C libraries required one of these macros to be defined
for basic functionality (e.g. getchar
) to be thread-safe.
We recommend you use _GNU_SOURCE
in new programs. If you don’t
specify the ‘-ansi’ option to GCC, or other conformance options
such as -std=c99, and don’t define any of these macros
explicitly, the effect is the same as defining _DEFAULT_SOURCE
to 1.
When you define a feature test macro to request a larger class of features,
it is harmless to define in addition a feature test macro for a subset of
those features. For example, if you define _POSIX_C_SOURCE
, then
defining _POSIX_SOURCE
as well has no effect. Likewise, if you
define _GNU_SOURCE
, then defining either _POSIX_SOURCE
or
_POSIX_C_SOURCE
as well has no effect.
Previous: Using the Library, Up: Introduction [Contents][Index]
Here is an overview of the contents of the remaining chapters of this manual.
isspace
) and functions for
performing case conversion.
char
data type.
FILE *
objects). These are the normal C library functions
from stdio.h.
setjmp
and
longjmp
functions. These functions provide a facility for
goto
-like jumps which can jump from one function to another.
sizeof
operator and the symbolic constant NULL
, how to write functions
accepting variable numbers of arguments, and constants describing the
ranges and other properties of the numerical types. There is also a simple
debugging mechanism which allows you to put assertions in your code, and
have diagnostic messages printed if the tests fail.
If you already know the name of the facility you are interested in, you can look it up in Summary of Library Facilities. This gives you a summary of its syntax and a pointer to where you can find a more detailed description. This appendix is particularly useful if you just want to verify the order and type of arguments to a function, for example. It also tells you what standard or system each function, variable, or macro is derived from.
Next: Virtual Memory Allocation And Paging, Previous: Introduction, Up: Main Menu [Contents][Index]
Many functions in the GNU C Library detect and report error conditions, and sometimes your programs need to check for these error conditions. For example, when you open an input file, you should verify that the file was actually opened correctly, and print an error message or take other appropriate action if the call to the library function failed.
This chapter describes how the error reporting facility works. Your program should include the header file errno.h to use this facility.
Next: Error Codes, Up: Error Reporting [Contents][Index]
Most library functions return a special value to indicate that they have
failed. The special value is typically -1
, a null pointer, or a
constant such as EOF
that is defined for that purpose. But this
return value tells you only that an error has occurred. To find out
what kind of error it was, you need to look at the error code stored in the
variable errno
. This variable is declared in the header file
errno.h.
The variable errno
contains the system error number. You can
change the value of errno
.
Since errno
is declared volatile
, it might be changed
asynchronously by a signal handler; see Defining Signal Handlers.
However, a properly written signal handler saves and restores the value
of errno
, so you generally do not need to worry about this
possibility except when writing signal handlers.
The initial value of errno
at program startup is zero. In many
cases, when a library function encounters an error, it will set
errno
to a non-zero value to indicate what specific error
condition occurred. The documentation for each function lists the
error conditions that are possible for that function. Not all library
functions use this mechanism; some return an error code directly,
instead.
Warning: Many library functions may set errno
to some
meaningless non-zero value even if they did not encounter any errors,
and even if they return error codes directly. Therefore, it is
usually incorrect to check whether an error occurred by
inspecting the value of errno
. The proper way to check for
error is documented for each function.
Portability Note: ISO C specifies errno
as a
“modifiable lvalue” rather than as a variable, permitting it to be
implemented as a macro. For example, its expansion might involve a
function call, like *__errno_location ()
. In fact, that is
what it is
on GNU/Linux and GNU/Hurd systems. The GNU C Library, on each system, does
whatever is right for the particular system.
There are a few library functions, like sqrt
and atan
,
that return a perfectly legitimate value in case of an error, but also
set errno
. For these functions, if you want to check to see
whether an error occurred, the recommended method is to set errno
to zero before calling the function, and then check its value afterward.
All the error codes have symbolic names; they are macros defined in errno.h. The names start with ‘E’ and an upper-case letter or digit; you should consider names of this form to be reserved names. See Reserved Names.
The error code values are all positive integers and are all distinct,
with one exception: EWOULDBLOCK
and EAGAIN
are the same.
Since the values are distinct, you can use them as labels in a
switch
statement; just don’t use both EWOULDBLOCK
and
EAGAIN
. Your program should not make any other assumptions about
the specific values of these symbolic constants.
The value of errno
doesn’t necessarily have to correspond to any
of these macros, since some library functions might return other error
codes of their own for other situations. The only values that are
guaranteed to be meaningful for a particular library function are the
ones that this manual lists for that function.
Except on GNU/Hurd systems, almost any system call can return EFAULT
if
it is given an invalid pointer as an argument. Since this could only
happen as a result of a bug in your program, and since it will not
happen on GNU/Hurd systems, we have saved space by not mentioning
EFAULT
in the descriptions of individual functions.
In some Unix systems, many system calls can also return EFAULT
if
given as an argument a pointer into the stack, and the kernel for some
obscure reason fails in its attempt to extend the stack. If this ever
happens, you should probably try using statically or dynamically
allocated memory instead of stack memory on that system.
Next: Error Messages, Previous: Checking for Errors, Up: Error Reporting [Contents][Index]
The error code macros are defined in the header file errno.h. All of them expand into integer constant values. Some of these error codes can’t occur on GNU systems, but they can occur using the GNU C Library on other systems.
“Operation not permitted.” Only the owner of the file (or other resource) or processes with special privileges can perform the operation.
“No such file or directory.” This is a “file doesn’t exist” error for ordinary files that are referenced in contexts where they are expected to already exist.
“No such process.” No process matches the specified process ID.
“Interrupted system call.” An asynchronous signal occurred and prevented completion of the call. When this happens, you should try the call again.
You can choose to have functions resume after a signal that is handled,
rather than failing with EINTR
; see Primitives Interrupted by Signals.
“Input/output error.” Usually used for physical read or write errors.
“No such device or address.” The system tried to use the device represented by a file you specified, and it couldn’t find the device. This can mean that the device file was installed incorrectly, or that the physical device is missing or not correctly attached to the computer.
“Argument list too long.”
Used when the arguments passed to a new program
being executed with one of the exec
functions (see Executing a File) occupy too much memory space. This condition never arises on
GNU/Hurd systems.
“Exec format error.”
Invalid executable file format. This condition is detected by the
exec
functions; see Executing a File.
“Bad file descriptor.” For example, I/O on a descriptor that has been closed or reading from a descriptor open only for writing (or vice versa).
“No child processes.” This error happens on operations that are supposed to manipulate child processes, when there aren’t any processes to manipulate.
“Resource deadlock avoided.” Allocating a system resource would have resulted in a deadlock situation. The system does not guarantee that it will notice all such situations. This error means you got lucky and the system noticed; it might just hang. See File Locks, for an example.
“Cannot allocate memory.” The system cannot allocate more virtual memory because its capacity is full.
“Permission denied.” The file permissions do not allow the attempted operation.
“Bad address.” An invalid pointer was detected. On GNU/Hurd systems, this error never happens; you get a signal instead.
“Block device required.” A file that isn’t a block special file was given in a situation that requires one. For example, trying to mount an ordinary file as a file system in Unix gives this error.
“Device or resource busy.” A system resource that can’t be shared is already in use. For example, if you try to delete a file that is the root of a currently mounted filesystem, you get this error.
“File exists.” An existing file was specified in a context where it only makes sense to specify a new file.
“Invalid cross-device link.”
An attempt to make an improper link across file systems was detected.
This happens not only when you use link
(see Hard Links) but
also when you rename a file with rename
(see Renaming Files).
“No such device.” The wrong type of device was given to a function that expects a particular sort of device.
“Not a directory.” A file that isn’t a directory was specified when a directory is required.
“Is a directory.” You cannot open a directory for writing, or create or remove hard links to it.
“Invalid argument.” This is used to indicate various kinds of problems with passing the wrong argument to a library function.
“Too many open files.” The current process has too many files open and can’t open any more. Duplicate descriptors do count toward this limit.
In BSD and GNU, the number of open files is controlled by a resource
limit that can usually be increased. If you get this error, you might
want to increase the RLIMIT_NOFILE
limit or make it unlimited;
see Limiting Resource Usage.
“Too many open files in system.” There are too many distinct file openings in the entire system. Note that any number of linked channels count as just one file opening; see Linked Channels. This error never occurs on GNU/Hurd systems.
“Inappropriate ioctl for device.” Inappropriate I/O control operation, such as trying to set terminal modes on an ordinary file.
“Text file busy.” An attempt to execute a file that is currently open for writing, or write to a file that is currently being executed. Often using a debugger to run a program is considered having it open for writing and will cause this error. (The name stands for “text file busy”.) This is not an error on GNU/Hurd systems; the text is copied as necessary.
“File too large.” The size of a file would be larger than allowed by the system.
“No space left on device.” Write operation on a file failed because the disk is full.
“Illegal seek.” Invalid seek operation (such as on a pipe).
“Read-only file system.” An attempt was made to modify something on a read-only file system.
“Too many links.”
The link count of a single file would become too large.
rename
can cause this error if the file being renamed already has
as many links as it can take (see Renaming Files).
“Broken pipe.”
There is no process reading from the other end of a pipe.
Every library function that returns this error code also generates a
SIGPIPE
signal; this signal terminates the program if not handled
or blocked. Thus, your program will never actually see EPIPE
unless it has handled or blocked SIGPIPE
.
“Numerical argument out of domain.” Used by mathematical functions when an argument value does not fall into the domain over which the function is defined.
“Numerical result out of range.” Used by mathematical functions when the result value is not representable because of overflow or underflow.
“Resource temporarily unavailable.”
The call might work if you try again
later. The macro EWOULDBLOCK
is another name for EAGAIN
;
they are always the same in the GNU C Library.
This error can happen in a few different situations:
select
to find out
when the operation will be possible; see Waiting for Input or Output.
Portability Note: In many older Unix systems, this condition
was indicated by EWOULDBLOCK
, which was a distinct error code
different from EAGAIN
. To make your program portable, you should
check for both codes and treat them the same.
fork
can return this error. It indicates that the shortage is expected to
pass, so your program can try the call again later and it may succeed.
It is probably a good idea to delay for a few seconds before trying it
again, to allow time for other processes to release scarce resources.
Such shortages are usually fairly serious and affect the whole system,
so usually an interactive program should report the error to the user
and return to its command loop.
“Operation would block.”
In the GNU C Library, this is another name for EAGAIN
(above).
The values are always the same, on every operating system.
C libraries in many older Unix systems have EWOULDBLOCK
as a
separate error code.
“Operation now in progress.”
An operation that cannot complete immediately was initiated on an object
that has non-blocking mode selected. Some functions that must always
block (such as connect
; see Making a Connection) never return
EAGAIN
. Instead, they return EINPROGRESS
to indicate that
the operation has begun and will take some time. Attempts to manipulate
the object before the call completes return EALREADY
. You can
use the select
function to find out when the pending operation
has completed; see Waiting for Input or Output.
“Operation already in progress.” An operation is already in progress on an object that has non-blocking mode selected.
“Socket operation on non-socket.” A file that isn’t a socket was specified when a socket is required.
“Message too long.” The size of a message sent on a socket was larger than the supported maximum size.
“Protocol wrong type for socket.” The socket type does not support the requested communications protocol.
“Protocol not available.” You specified a socket option that doesn’t make sense for the particular protocol being used by the socket. See Socket Options.
“Protocol not supported.” The socket domain does not support the requested communications protocol (perhaps because the requested protocol is completely invalid). See Creating a Socket.
“Socket type not supported.” The socket type is not supported.
“Operation not supported.” The operation you requested is not supported. Some socket functions don’t make sense for all types of sockets, and others may not be implemented for all communications protocols. On GNU/Hurd systems, this error can happen for many calls when the object does not support the particular operation; it is a generic indication that the server knows nothing to do for that call.
“Protocol family not supported.” The socket communications protocol family you requested is not supported.
“Address family not supported by protocol.” The address family specified for a socket is not supported; it is inconsistent with the protocol being used on the socket. See Sockets.
“Address already in use.” The requested socket address is already in use. See Socket Addresses.
“Cannot assign requested address.” The requested socket address is not available; for example, you tried to give a socket a name that doesn’t match the local host name. See Socket Addresses.
“Network is down.” A socket operation failed because the network was down.
“Network is unreachable.” A socket operation failed because the subnet containing the remote host was unreachable.
“Network dropped connection on reset.” A network connection was reset because the remote host crashed.
“Software caused connection abort.” A network connection was aborted locally.
“Connection reset by peer.” A network connection was closed for reasons outside the control of the local host, such as by the remote machine rebooting or an unrecoverable protocol violation.
“No buffer space available.”
The kernel’s buffers for I/O operations are all in use. In GNU, this
error is always synonymous with ENOMEM
; you may get one or the
other from network operations.
“Transport endpoint is already connected.” You tried to connect a socket that is already connected. See Making a Connection.
“Transport endpoint is not connected.”
The socket is not connected to anything. You get this error when you
try to transmit data over a socket, without first specifying a
destination for the data. For a connectionless socket (for datagram
protocols, such as UDP), you get EDESTADDRREQ
instead.
“Destination address required.”
No default destination address was set for the socket. You get this
error when you try to transmit data over a connectionless socket,
without first specifying a destination for the data with connect
.
“Cannot send after transport endpoint shutdown.” The socket has already been shut down.
“Too many references: cannot splice.”
“Connection timed out.” A socket operation with a specified timeout received no response during the timeout period.
“Connection refused.” A remote host refused to allow the network connection (typically because it is not running the requested service).
“Too many levels of symbolic links.” Too many levels of symbolic links were encountered in looking up a file name. This often indicates a cycle of symbolic links.
“File name too long.”
Filename too long (longer than PATH_MAX
; see Limits on File System Capacity) or host name too long (in gethostname
or
sethostname
; see Host Identification).
“Host is down.” The remote host for a requested network connection is down.
“No route to host.” The remote host for a requested network connection is not reachable.
“Directory not empty.” Directory not empty, where an empty directory was expected. Typically, this error occurs when you are trying to delete a directory.
“Too many processes.”
This means that the per-user limit on new process would be exceeded by
an attempted fork
. See Limiting Resource Usage, for details on
the RLIMIT_NPROC
limit.
“Too many users.” The file quota system is confused because there are too many users.
“Disk quota exceeded.” The user’s disk quota was exceeded.
“Stale file handle.” This indicates an internal confusion in the file system which is due to file system rearrangements on the server host for NFS file systems or corruption in other file systems. Repairing this condition usually requires unmounting, possibly repairing and remounting the file system.
“Object is remote.” An attempt was made to NFS-mount a remote file system with a file name that already specifies an NFS-mounted file. (This is an error on some operating systems, but we expect it to work properly on GNU/Hurd systems, making this error code impossible.)
“RPC struct is bad.”
“RPC version wrong.”
“RPC program not available.”
“RPC program version wrong.”
“RPC bad procedure for program.”
“No locks available.” This is used by the file locking facilities; see File Locks. This error is never generated by GNU/Hurd systems, but it can result from an operation to an NFS server running another operating system.
“Inappropriate file type or format.” The file was the wrong type for the operation, or a data file had the wrong format.
On some systems chmod
returns this error if you try to set the
sticky bit on a non-directory file; see Assigning File Permissions.
“Authentication error.”
“Need authenticator.”
“Function not implemented.”
This indicates that the function called is
not implemented at all, either in the C library itself or in the
operating system. When you get this error, you can be sure that this
particular function will always fail with ENOSYS
unless you
install a new version of the C library or the operating system.
“Cannot exec a shared library directly.”
“Not supported.” A function returns this error when certain parameter values are valid, but the functionality they request is not available. This can mean that the function does not implement a particular command or option value or flag bit at all. For functions that operate on some object given in a parameter, such as a file descriptor or a port, it might instead mean that only that specific object (file descriptor, port, etc.) is unable to support the other parameters given; different file descriptors might support different ranges of parameter values.
If the entire function is not available at all in the implementation,
it returns ENOSYS
instead.
“Invalid or incomplete multibyte or wide character.” While decoding a multibyte character the function came along an invalid or an incomplete sequence of bytes or the given wide character is invalid.
“Inappropriate operation for background process.”
On GNU/Hurd systems, servers supporting the term
protocol return
this error for certain operations when the caller is not in the
foreground process group of the terminal. Users do not usually see this
error because functions such as read
and write
translate
it into a SIGTTIN
or SIGTTOU
signal. See Job Control,
for information on process groups and these signals.
“Translator died.” On GNU/Hurd systems, opening a file returns this error when the file is translated by a program and the translator program dies while starting up, before it has connected to the file.
“?.” The experienced user will know what is wrong.
“You really blew it this time.” You did what?
“Computer bought the farm.” Go home and have a glass of warm, dairy-fresh milk.
“Gratuitous error.” This error code has no purpose.
“Bad message.”
“Identifier removed.”
“Multihop attempted.”
“No data available.”
“Link has been severed.”
“No message of desired type.”
“Out of streams resources.”
“Device not a stream.”
“Value too large for defined data type.”
“Protocol error.”
“Timer expired.”
“Operation canceled.”
An asynchronous operation was canceled before it
completed. See Perform I/O Operations in Parallel. When you call aio_cancel
,
the normal result is for the operations affected to complete with this
error; see Cancellation of AIO Operations.
“Owner died.”
“State not recoverable.”
The following error codes are defined by the Linux/i386 kernel. They are not yet documented.
“Interrupted system call should be restarted.”
“Channel number out of range.”
“Level 2 not synchronized.”
“Level 3 halted.”
“Level 3 reset.”
“Link number out of range.”
“Protocol driver not attached.”
“No CSI structure available.”
“Level 2 halted.”
“Invalid exchange.”
“Invalid request descriptor.”
“Exchange full.”
“No anode.”
“Invalid request code.”
“Invalid slot.”
“File locking deadlock error.”
“Bad font file format.”
“Machine is not on the network.”
“Package not installed.”
“Advertise error.”
“Srmount error.”
“Communication error on send.”
“RFS specific error.”
“Name not unique on network.”
“File descriptor in bad state.”
“Remote address changed.”
“Can not access a needed shared library.”
“Accessing a corrupted shared library.”
“.lib section in a.out corrupted.”
“Attempting to link in too many shared libraries.”
“Streams pipe error.”
“Structure needs cleaning.”
“Not a XENIX named type file.”
“No XENIX semaphores available.”
“Is a named type file.”
“Remote I/O error.”
“No medium found.”
“Wrong medium type.”
“Required key not available.”
“Key has expired.”
“Key has been revoked.”
“Key was rejected by service.”
“Operation not possible due to RF-kill.”
“Memory page has hardware error.”
Previous: Error Codes, Up: Error Reporting [Contents][Index]
The library has functions and variables designed to make it easy for
your program to report informative error messages in the customary
format about the failure of a library call. The functions
strerror
and perror
give you the standard error message
for a given error code; the variable
program_invocation_short_name
gives you convenient access to the
name of the program that encountered the error.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Unsafe heap i18n | AC-Unsafe mem | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The strerror
function maps the error code (see Checking for Errors) specified by the errnum argument to a descriptive error
message string. The string is translated according to the current
locale. The return value is a pointer to this string.
The value errnum normally comes from the variable errno
.
You should not modify the string returned by strerror
. Also, if
you make subsequent calls to strerror
or strerror_l
, or
the thread that obtained the string exits, the returned pointer will be
invalidated.
As there is no way to restore the previous state after calling
strerror
, library code should not call this function because it
may interfere with application use of strerror
, invalidating the
string pointer before the application is done using it. Instead,
strerror_r
, snprintf
with the ‘%m’ or ‘%#m’
specifiers, strerrorname_np
, or strerrordesc_np
can be
used instead.
The strerror
function preserves the value of errno
and
cannot fail.
The function strerror
is declared in string.h.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Unsafe heap i18n | AC-Unsafe mem | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This function is like strerror
, except that the returned string
is translated according to locale (instead of the current locale
used by strerror
). Note that calling strerror_l
invalidates the pointer returned by strerror
and vice versa.
The function strerror_l
is defined by POSIX and is declared in
string.h.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Unsafe i18n | AC-Unsafe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The following description is for the GNU variant of the function,
used if _GNU_SOURCE
is defined. See Feature Test Macros.
The strerror_r
function works like strerror
but instead of
returning a pointer to a string that is managed by the GNU C Library, it can
use the user supplied buffer starting at buf for storing the
string.
At most n characters are written (including the NUL byte) to buf, so it is up to the user to select a buffer large enough. Whether returned pointer points to the buf array or not depends on the errnum argument. If the result string is not stored in buf, the string will not change for the remaining execution of the program.
The function strerror_r
as described above is a GNU extension and
it is declared in string.h. There is a POSIX variant of this
function, described next.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Unsafe i18n | AC-Unsafe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This variant of the strerror_r
function is used if a standard is
selected that includes strerror_r
, but _GNU_SOURCE
is not
defined. This POSIX variant of the function always writes the error
message to the specified buffer buf of size n bytes.
Upon success, strerror_r
returns 0. Two more return values are
used to indicate failure.
EINVAL
¶The errnum argument does not correspond to a known error constant.
ERANGE
¶The buffer size n is not large enough to store the entire error message.
Even if an error is reported, strerror_r
still writes as much of
the error message to the output buffer as possible. After a call to
strerror_r
, the value of errno
is unspecified.
If you want to use the always-copying POSIX semantics of
strerror_r
in a program that is potentially compiled with
_GNU_SOURCE
defined, you can use snprintf
with the
‘%m’ conversion specifier, like this:
int saved_errno = errno; errno = errnum; int ret = snprintf (buf, n, "%m"); errno = saved_errno; if (strerrorname_np (errnum) == NULL) return EINVAL; if (ret >= n) return ERANGE: return 0;
This function is declared in string.h if it is declared at all. It is a POSIX extension.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe race:stderr | AS-Unsafe corrupt i18n heap lock | AC-Unsafe corrupt lock mem fd | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This function prints an error message to the stream stderr
;
see Standard Streams. The orientation of stderr
is not
changed.
If you call perror
with a message that is either a null
pointer or an empty string, perror
just prints the error message
corresponding to errno
, adding a trailing newline.
If you supply a non-null message argument, then perror
prefixes its output with this string. It adds a colon and a space
character to separate the message from the error string corresponding
to errno
.
The function perror
is declared in stdio.h.
| MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This function returns the name describing the error errnum or
NULL
if there is no known constant with this value (e.g "EINVAL"
for EINVAL
). The returned string does not change for the
remaining execution of the program.
This function is a GNU extension, declared in the header file string.h.
| MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This function returns the message describing the error errnum or
NULL
if there is no known constant with this value (e.g "Invalid
argument" for EINVAL
). Different than strerror
the
returned description is not translated, and the returned string does not
change for the remaining execution of the program.
This function is a GNU extension, declared in the header file string.h.
strerror
and perror
produce the exact same message for any
given error code under the same locale; the precise text varies from
system to system. With the GNU C Library, the messages are fairly short;
there are no multi-line messages or embedded newlines. Each error
message begins with a capital letter and does not include any
terminating punctuation.
Many programs that don’t read input from the terminal are designed to
exit if any system call fails. By convention, the error message from
such a program should start with the program’s name, sans directories.
You can find that name in the variable
program_invocation_short_name
; the full file name is stored the
variable program_invocation_name
.
This variable’s value is the name that was used to invoke the program
running in the current process. It is the same as argv[0]
. Note
that this is not necessarily a useful file name; often it contains no
directory names. See Program Arguments.
This variable is a GNU extension and is declared in errno.h.
This variable’s value is the name that was used to invoke the program
running in the current process, with directory names removed. (That is
to say, it is the same as program_invocation_name
minus
everything up to the last slash, if any.)
This variable is a GNU extension and is declared in errno.h.
The library initialization code sets up both of these variables before
calling main
.
Portability Note: If you want your program to work with
non-GNU libraries, you must save the value of argv[0]
in
main
, and then strip off the directory names yourself. We
added these extensions to make it possible to write self-contained
error-reporting subroutines that require no explicit cooperation from
main
.
Here is an example showing how to handle failure to open a file
correctly. The function open_sesame
tries to open the named file
for reading and returns a stream if successful. The fopen
library function returns a null pointer if it couldn’t open the file for
some reason. In that situation, open_sesame
constructs an
appropriate error message using the strerror
function, and
terminates the program. If we were going to make some other library
calls before passing the error code to strerror
, we’d have to
save it in a local variable instead, because those other library
functions might overwrite errno
in the meantime.
#define _GNU_SOURCE #include <errno.h> #include <stdio.h> #include <stdlib.h> #include <string.h> FILE * open_sesame (char *name) { FILE *stream; errno = 0; stream = fopen (name, "r"); if (stream == NULL) { fprintf (stderr, "%s: Couldn't open file %s; %s\n", program_invocation_short_name, name, strerror (errno)); exit (EXIT_FAILURE); } else return stream; }
Using perror
has the advantage that the function is portable and
available on all systems implementing ISO C. But often the text
perror
generates is not what is wanted and there is no way to
extend or change what perror
does. The GNU coding standard, for
instance, requires error messages to be preceded by the program name and
programs which read some input files should provide information
about the input file name and the line number in case an error is
encountered while reading the file. For these occasions there are two
functions available which are widely used throughout the GNU project.
These functions are declared in error.h.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe locale | AS-Unsafe corrupt heap i18n | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The error
function can be used to report general problems during
program execution. The format argument is a format string just
like those given to the printf
family of functions. The
arguments required for the format can follow the format parameter.
Just like perror
, error
also can report an error code in
textual form. But unlike perror
the error value is explicitly
passed to the function in the errnum parameter. This eliminates
the problem mentioned above that the error reporting function must be
called immediately after the function causing the error since otherwise
errno
might have a different value.
error
prints first the program name. If the application
defined a global variable error_print_progname
and points it to a
function this function will be called to print the program name.
Otherwise the string from the global variable program_name
is
used. The program name is followed by a colon and a space which in turn
is followed by the output produced by the format string. If the
errnum parameter is non-zero the format string output is followed
by a colon and a space, followed by the error message for the error code
errnum. In any case is the output terminated with a newline.
The output is directed to the stderr
stream. If the
stderr
wasn’t oriented before the call it will be narrow-oriented
afterwards.
The function will return unless the status parameter has a
non-zero value. In this case the function will call exit
with
the status value for its parameter and therefore never return. If
error
returns, the global variable error_message_count
is
incremented by one to keep track of the number of errors reported.
Preliminary: | MT-Unsafe race:error_at_line/error_one_per_line locale | AS-Unsafe corrupt heap i18n | AC-Unsafe corrupt/error_one_per_line | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The error_at_line
function is very similar to the error
function. The only differences are the additional parameters fname
and lineno. The handling of the other parameters is identical to
that of error
except that between the program name and the string
generated by the format string additional text is inserted.
Directly following the program name a colon, followed by the file name pointed to by fname, another colon, and the value of lineno is printed.
This additional output of course is meant to be used to locate an error in an input file (like a programming language source code file etc).
If the global variable error_one_per_line
is set to a non-zero
value error_at_line
will avoid printing consecutive messages for
the same file and line. Repetition which are not directly following
each other are not caught.
Just like error
this function only returns if status is
zero. Otherwise exit
is called with the non-zero value. If
error
returns, the global variable error_message_count
is
incremented by one to keep track of the number of errors reported.
As mentioned above, the error
and error_at_line
functions
can be customized by defining a variable named
error_print_progname
.
If the error_print_progname
variable is defined to a non-zero
value the function pointed to is called by error
or
error_at_line
. It is expected to print the program name or do
something similarly useful.
The function is expected to print to the stderr
stream and
must be able to handle whatever orientation the stream has.
The variable is global and shared by all threads.
The error_message_count
variable is incremented whenever one of
the functions error
or error_at_line
returns. The
variable is global and shared by all threads.
The error_one_per_line
variable influences only
error_at_line
. Normally the error_at_line
function
creates output for every invocation. If error_one_per_line
is
set to a non-zero value error_at_line
keeps track of the last
file name and line number for which an error was reported and avoids
directly following messages for the same file and line. This variable
is global and shared by all threads.
A program which read some input file and reports errors in it could look like this:
{ char *line = NULL; size_t len = 0; unsigned int lineno = 0; error_message_count = 0; while (! feof_unlocked (fp)) { ssize_t n = getline (&line, &len, fp); if (n <= 0) /* End of file or error. */ break; ++lineno; /* Process the line. */ … if (Detect error in line) error_at_line (0, errval, filename, lineno, "some error text %s", some_variable); } if (error_message_count != 0) error (EXIT_FAILURE, 0, "%u errors found", error_message_count); }
error
and error_at_line
are clearly the functions of
choice and enable the programmer to write applications which follow the
GNU coding standard. The GNU C Library additionally contains functions which
are used in BSD for the same purpose. These functions are declared in
err.h. It is generally advised to not use these functions. They
are included only for compatibility.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe locale | AS-Unsafe corrupt heap i18n | AC-Unsafe corrupt lock mem | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The warn
function is roughly equivalent to a call like
error (0, errno, format, the parameters)
except that the global variables error
respects and modifies
are not used.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe locale | AS-Unsafe corrupt heap i18n | AC-Unsafe corrupt lock mem | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The vwarn
function is just like warn
except that the
parameters for the handling of the format string format are passed
in as a value of type va_list
.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe locale | AS-Unsafe corrupt heap | AC-Unsafe corrupt lock mem | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The warnx
function is roughly equivalent to a call like
error (0, 0, format, the parameters)
except that the global variables error
respects and modifies
are not used. The difference to warn
is that no error number
string is printed.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe locale | AS-Unsafe corrupt heap | AC-Unsafe corrupt lock mem | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The vwarnx
function is just like warnx
except that the
parameters for the handling of the format string format are passed
in as a value of type va_list
.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe locale | AS-Unsafe corrupt heap i18n | AC-Unsafe corrupt lock mem | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The err
function is roughly equivalent to a call like
error (status, errno, format, the parameters)
except that the global variables error
respects and modifies
are not used and that the program is exited even if status is zero.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe locale | AS-Unsafe corrupt heap i18n | AC-Unsafe corrupt lock mem | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The verr
function is just like err
except that the
parameters for the handling of the format string format are passed
in as a value of type va_list
.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe locale | AS-Unsafe corrupt heap | AC-Unsafe corrupt lock mem | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The errx
function is roughly equivalent to a call like
error (status, 0, format, the parameters)
except that the global variables error
respects and modifies
are not used and that the program is exited even if status
is zero. The difference to err
is that no error number
string is printed.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe locale | AS-Unsafe corrupt heap | AC-Unsafe corrupt lock mem | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The verrx
function is just like errx
except that the
parameters for the handling of the format string format are passed
in as a value of type va_list
.
Next: Character Handling, Previous: Error Reporting, Up: Main Menu [Contents][Index]
This chapter describes how processes manage and use memory in a system that uses the GNU C Library.
The GNU C Library has several functions for dynamically allocating virtual memory in various ways. They vary in generality and in efficiency. The library also provides functions for controlling paging and allocation of real memory.
Memory mapped I/O is not discussed in this chapter. See Memory-mapped I/O.
Next: Allocating Storage For Program Data, Up: Virtual Memory Allocation And Paging [Contents][Index]
One of the most basic resources a process has available to it is memory. There are a lot of different ways systems organize memory, but in a typical one, each process has one linear virtual address space, with addresses running from zero to some huge maximum. It need not be contiguous; i.e., not all of these addresses actually can be used to store data.
The virtual memory is divided into pages (4 kilobytes is typical). Backing each page of virtual memory is a page of real memory (called a frame) or some secondary storage, usually disk space. The disk space might be swap space or just some ordinary disk file. Actually, a page of all zeroes sometimes has nothing at all backing it – there’s just a flag saying it is all zeroes.
The same frame of real memory or backing store can back multiple virtual
pages belonging to multiple processes. This is normally the case, for
example, with virtual memory occupied by GNU C Library code. The same
real memory frame containing the printf
function backs a virtual
memory page in each of the existing processes that has a printf
call in its program.
In order for a program to access any part of a virtual page, the page must at that moment be backed by (“connected to”) a real frame. But because there is usually a lot more virtual memory than real memory, the pages must move back and forth between real memory and backing store regularly, coming into real memory when a process needs to access them and then retreating to backing store when not needed anymore. This movement is called paging.
When a program attempts to access a page which is not at that moment backed by real memory, this is known as a page fault. When a page fault occurs, the kernel suspends the process, places the page into a real page frame (this is called “paging in” or “faulting in”), then resumes the process so that from the process’ point of view, the page was in real memory all along. In fact, to the process, all pages always seem to be in real memory. Except for one thing: the elapsed execution time of an instruction that would normally be a few nanoseconds is suddenly much, much, longer (because the kernel normally has to do I/O to complete the page-in). For programs sensitive to that, the functions described in Locking Pages can control it.
Within each virtual address space, a process has to keep track of what is at which addresses, and that process is called memory allocation. Allocation usually brings to mind meting out scarce resources, but in the case of virtual memory, that’s not a major goal, because there is generally much more of it than anyone needs. Memory allocation within a process is mainly just a matter of making sure that the same byte of memory isn’t used to store two different things.
Processes allocate memory in two major ways: by exec and programmatically. Actually, forking is a third way, but it’s not very interesting. See Creating a Process.
Exec is the operation of creating a virtual address space for a process,
loading its basic program into it, and executing the program. It is
done by the “exec” family of functions (e.g. execl
). The
operation takes a program file (an executable), it allocates space to
load all the data in the executable, loads it, and transfers control to
it. That data is most notably the instructions of the program (the
text), but also literals and constants in the program and even
some variables: C variables with the static storage class (see Memory Allocation in C Programs).
Once that program begins to execute, it uses programmatic allocation to gain additional memory. In a C program with the GNU C Library, there are two kinds of programmatic allocation: automatic and dynamic. See Memory Allocation in C Programs.
Memory-mapped I/O is another form of dynamic virtual memory allocation. Mapping memory to a file means declaring that the contents of certain range of a process’ addresses shall be identical to the contents of a specified regular file. The system makes the virtual memory initially contain the contents of the file, and if you modify the memory, the system writes the same modification to the file. Note that due to the magic of virtual memory and page faults, there is no reason for the system to do I/O to read the file, or allocate real memory for its contents, until the program accesses the virtual memory. See Memory-mapped I/O.
Just as it programmatically allocates memory, the program can programmatically deallocate (free) it. You can’t free the memory that was allocated by exec. When the program exits or execs, you might say that all its memory gets freed, but since in both cases the address space ceases to exist, the point is really moot. See Program Termination.
A process’ virtual address space is divided into segments. A segment is a contiguous range of virtual addresses. Three important segments are:
Next: Resizing the Data Segment, Previous: Process Memory Concepts, Up: Virtual Memory Allocation And Paging [Contents][Index]
This section covers how ordinary programs manage storage for their data,
including the famous malloc
function and some fancier facilities
special to the GNU C Library and GNU Compiler.
malloc
Next: The GNU Allocator, Up: Allocating Storage For Program Data [Contents][Index]
The C language supports two kinds of memory allocation through the variables in C programs:
In GNU C, the size of the automatic storage can be an expression that varies. In other C implementations, it must be a constant.
A third important kind of memory allocation, dynamic allocation, is not supported by C variables but is available via GNU C Library functions.
Dynamic memory allocation is a technique in which programs determine as they are running where to store some information. You need dynamic allocation when the amount of memory you need, or how long you continue to need it, depends on factors that are not known before the program runs.
For example, you may need a block to store a line read from an input file; since there is no limit to how long a line can be, you must allocate the memory dynamically and make it dynamically larger as you read more of the line.
Or, you may need a block for each record or each definition in the input data; since you can’t know in advance how many there will be, you must allocate a new block for each record or definition as you read it.
When you use dynamic allocation, the allocation of a block of memory is an action that the program requests explicitly. You call a function or macro when you want to allocate space, and specify the size with an argument. If you want to free the space, you do so by calling another function or macro. You can do these things whenever you want, as often as you want.
Dynamic allocation is not supported by C variables; there is no storage class “dynamic”, and there can never be a C variable whose value is stored in dynamically allocated space. The only way to get dynamically allocated memory is via a system call (which is generally via a GNU C Library function call), and the only way to refer to dynamically allocated space is through a pointer. Because it is less convenient, and because the actual process of dynamic allocation requires more computation time, programmers generally use dynamic allocation only when neither static nor automatic allocation will serve.
For example, if you want to allocate dynamically some space to hold a
struct foobar
, you cannot declare a variable of type struct
foobar
whose contents are the dynamically allocated space. But you can
declare a variable of pointer type struct foobar *
and assign it the
address of the space. Then you can use the operators ‘*’ and
‘->’ on this pointer variable to refer to the contents of the space:
{ struct foobar *ptr = malloc (sizeof *ptr); ptr->name = x; ptr->next = current_foobar; current_foobar = ptr; }
Next: Unconstrained Allocation, Previous: Memory Allocation in C Programs, Up: Allocating Storage For Program Data [Contents][Index]
The malloc
implementation in the GNU C Library is derived from ptmalloc
(pthreads malloc), which in turn is derived from dlmalloc (Doug Lea malloc).
This malloc
may allocate memory
in two different ways depending on their size
and certain parameters that may be controlled by users. The most common way is
to allocate portions of memory (called chunks) from a large contiguous area of
memory and manage these areas to optimize their use and reduce wastage in the
form of unusable chunks. Traditionally the system heap was set up to be the one
large memory area but the GNU C Library malloc
implementation maintains
multiple such areas to optimize their use in multi-threaded applications. Each
such area is internally referred to as an arena.
As opposed to other versions, the malloc
in the GNU C Library does not round
up chunk sizes to powers of two, neither for large nor for small sizes.
Neighboring chunks can be coalesced on a free
no matter what their size
is. This makes the implementation suitable for all kinds of allocation
patterns without generally incurring high memory waste through fragmentation.
The presence of multiple arenas allows multiple threads to allocate
memory simultaneously in separate arenas, thus improving performance.
The other way of memory allocation is for very large blocks, i.e. much larger
than a page. These requests are allocated with mmap
(anonymous or via
/dev/zero; see Memory-mapped I/O)). This has the great advantage
that these chunks are returned to the system immediately when they are freed.
Therefore, it cannot happen that a large chunk becomes “locked” in between
smaller ones and even after calling free
wastes memory. The size
threshold for mmap
to be used is dynamic and gets adjusted according to
allocation patterns of the program. mallopt
can be used to statically
adjust the threshold using M_MMAP_THRESHOLD
and the use of mmap
can be disabled completely with M_MMAP_MAX
;
see Malloc Tunable Parameters.
A more detailed technical description of the GNU Allocator is maintained in the GNU C Library wiki. See https://sourceware.org/glibc/wiki/MallocInternals.
It is possible to use your own custom malloc
instead of the
built-in allocator provided by the GNU C Library. See Replacing malloc
.
Next: Allocation Debugging, Previous: The GNU Allocator, Up: Allocating Storage For Program Data [Contents][Index]
The most general dynamic allocation facility is malloc
. It
allows you to allocate blocks of memory of any size at any time, make
them bigger or smaller at any time, and free the blocks individually at
any time (or never).
malloc
malloc
malloc
malloc
-Related Functions
Next: Examples of malloc
, Up: Unconstrained Allocation [Contents][Index]
To allocate a block of memory, call malloc
. The prototype for
this function is in stdlib.h.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Unsafe lock | AC-Unsafe lock fd mem | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This function returns a pointer to a newly allocated block size
bytes long, or a null pointer (setting errno
)
if the block could not be allocated.
The contents of the block are undefined; you must initialize it yourself
(or use calloc
instead; see Allocating Cleared Space).
Normally you would convert the value to a pointer to the kind of object
that you want to store in the block. Here we show an example of doing
so, and of initializing the space with zeros using the library function
memset
(see Copying Strings and Arrays):
struct foo *ptr = malloc (sizeof *ptr); if (ptr == 0) abort (); memset (ptr, 0, sizeof (struct foo));
You can store the result of malloc
into any pointer variable
without a cast, because ISO C automatically converts the type
void *
to another type of pointer when necessary. However, a cast
is necessary if the type is needed but not specified by context.
Remember that when allocating space for a string, the argument to
malloc
must be one plus the length of the string. This is
because a string is terminated with a null character that doesn’t count
in the “length” of the string but does need space. For example:
char *ptr = malloc (length + 1);
See Representation of Strings, for more information about this.
Next: Freeing Memory Allocated with malloc
, Previous: Basic Memory Allocation, Up: Unconstrained Allocation [Contents][Index]
malloc
If no more space is available, malloc
returns a null pointer.
You should check the value of every call to malloc
. It is
useful to write a subroutine that calls malloc
and reports an
error if the value is a null pointer, returning only if the value is
nonzero. This function is conventionally called xmalloc
. Here
it is:
void * xmalloc (size_t size) { void *value = malloc (size); if (value == 0) fatal ("virtual memory exhausted"); return value; }
Here is a real example of using malloc
(by way of xmalloc
).
The function savestring
will copy a sequence of characters into
a newly allocated null-terminated string:
char * savestring (const char *ptr, size_t len) { char *value = xmalloc (len + 1); value[len] = '\0'; return memcpy (value, ptr, len); }
The block that malloc
gives you is guaranteed to be aligned so
that it can hold any type of data. On GNU systems, the address is
always a multiple of eight on 32-bit systems, and a multiple of 16 on
64-bit systems. Only rarely is any higher boundary (such as a page
boundary) necessary; for those cases, use aligned_alloc
or
posix_memalign
(see Allocating Aligned Memory Blocks).
Note that the memory located after the end of the block is likely to be
in use for something else; perhaps a block already allocated by another
call to malloc
. If you attempt to treat the block as longer than
you asked for it to be, you are liable to destroy the data that
malloc
uses to keep track of its blocks, or you may destroy the
contents of another block. If you have already allocated a block and
discover you want it to be bigger, use realloc
(see Changing the Size of a Block).
Portability Notes:
malloc (0)
returns a non-null pointer to a newly allocated size-zero block;
other implementations may return NULL
instead.
POSIX and the ISO C standard allow both behaviors.
malloc
call sets errno
,
but ISO C does not require this and non-POSIX implementations
need not set errno
when failing.
malloc
always fails when size exceeds
PTRDIFF_MAX
, to avoid problems with programs that subtract
pointers or use signed indexes. Other implementations may succeed in
this case, leading to undefined behavior later.
Next: Changing the Size of a Block, Previous: Examples of malloc
, Up: Unconstrained Allocation [Contents][Index]
malloc
When you no longer need a block that you got with malloc
, use the
function free
to make the block available to be allocated again.
The prototype for this function is in stdlib.h.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Unsafe lock | AC-Unsafe lock fd mem | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The free
function deallocates the block of memory pointed at
by ptr.
Freeing a block alters the contents of the block. Do not expect to find any data (such as a pointer to the next block in a chain of blocks) in the block after freeing it. Copy whatever you need out of the block before freeing it! Here is an example of the proper way to free all the blocks in a chain, and the strings that they point to:
struct chain { struct chain *next; char *name; } void free_chain (struct chain *chain) { while (chain != 0) { struct chain *next = chain->next; free (chain->name); free (chain); chain = next; } }
Occasionally, free
can actually return memory to the operating
system and make the process smaller. Usually, all it can do is allow a
later call to malloc
to reuse the space. In the meantime, the
space remains in your program as part of a free-list used internally by
malloc
.
The free
function preserves the value of errno
, so that
cleanup code need not worry about saving and restoring errno
around a call to free
. Although neither ISO C nor
POSIX.1-2017 requires free
to preserve errno
, a future
version of POSIX is planned to require it.
There is no point in freeing blocks at the end of a program, because all of the program’s space is given back to the system when the process terminates.
Next: Allocating Cleared Space, Previous: Freeing Memory Allocated with malloc
, Up: Unconstrained Allocation [Contents][Index]
Often you do not know for certain how big a block you will ultimately need at the time you must begin to use the block. For example, the block might be a buffer that you use to hold a line being read from a file; no matter how long you make the buffer initially, you may encounter a line that is longer.
You can make the block longer by calling realloc
or
reallocarray
. These functions are declared in stdlib.h.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Unsafe lock | AC-Unsafe lock fd mem | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The realloc
function changes the size of the block whose address is
ptr to be newsize.
Since the space after the end of the block may be in use, realloc
may find it necessary to copy the block to a new address where more free
space is available. The value of realloc
is the new address of the
block. If the block needs to be moved, realloc
copies the old
contents.
If you pass a null pointer for ptr, realloc
behaves just
like ‘malloc (newsize)’.
Otherwise, if newsize is zero
realloc
frees the block and returns NULL
.
Otherwise, if realloc
cannot reallocate the requested size
it returns NULL
and sets errno
; the original block
is left undisturbed.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Unsafe lock | AC-Unsafe lock fd mem | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The reallocarray
function changes the size of the block whose address
is ptr to be long enough to contain a vector of nmemb elements,
each of size size. It is equivalent to ‘realloc (ptr,
nmemb * size)’, except that reallocarray
fails safely if
the multiplication overflows, by setting errno
to ENOMEM
,
returning a null pointer, and leaving the original block unchanged.
reallocarray
should be used instead of realloc
when the new size
of the allocated block is the result of a multiplication that might overflow.
Portability Note: This function is not part of any standard. It was first introduced in OpenBSD 5.6.
Like malloc
, realloc
and reallocarray
may return a null
pointer if no memory space is available to make the block bigger. When this
happens, the original block is untouched; it has not been modified or
relocated.
In most cases it makes no difference what happens to the original block
when realloc
fails, because the application program cannot continue
when it is out of memory, and the only thing to do is to give a fatal error
message. Often it is convenient to write and use subroutines,
conventionally called xrealloc
and xreallocarray
,
that take care of the error message
as xmalloc
does for malloc
:
void * xreallocarray (void *ptr, size_t nmemb, size_t size) { void *value = reallocarray (ptr, nmemb, size); if (value == 0) fatal ("Virtual memory exhausted"); return value; } void * xrealloc (void *ptr, size_t size) { return xreallocarray (ptr, 1, size); }
You can also use realloc
or reallocarray
to make a block
smaller. The reason you would do this is to avoid tying up a lot of memory
space when only a little is needed.
In several allocation implementations, making a block smaller sometimes
necessitates copying it, so it can fail if no other space is available.
Portability Notes:
realloc (ptr, 0)
might free the block and return a non-null pointer to a size-zero
object, or it might fail and return NULL
without freeing the block.
The ISO C17 standard allows these variations.
PTRDIFF_MAX
in size, to avoid problems with programs
that subtract pointers or use signed indexes. Other implementations may
succeed, leading to undefined behavior later.
realloc
and
reallocarray
are guaranteed to change nothing and return the same
address that you gave. However, POSIX and ISO C allow the functions
to relocate the object or fail in this situation.
Next: Allocating Aligned Memory Blocks, Previous: Changing the Size of a Block, Up: Unconstrained Allocation [Contents][Index]
The function calloc
allocates memory and clears it to zero. It
is declared in stdlib.h.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Unsafe lock | AC-Unsafe lock fd mem | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This function allocates a block long enough to contain a vector of
count elements, each of size eltsize. Its contents are
cleared to zero before calloc
returns.
You could define calloc
as follows:
void * calloc (size_t count, size_t eltsize) { void *value = reallocarray (0, count, eltsize); if (value != 0) memset (value, 0, count * eltsize); return value; }
But in general, it is not guaranteed that calloc
calls
reallocarray
and memset
internally. For example, if the
calloc
implementation knows for other reasons that the new
memory block is zero, it need not zero out the block again with
memset
. Also, if an application provides its own
reallocarray
outside the C library, calloc
might not use
that redefinition. See Replacing malloc
.
Next: Malloc Tunable Parameters, Previous: Allocating Cleared Space, Up: Unconstrained Allocation [Contents][Index]
The address of a block returned by malloc
or realloc
in
GNU systems is always a multiple of eight (or sixteen on 64-bit
systems). If you need a block whose address is a multiple of a higher
power of two than that, use aligned_alloc
or posix_memalign
.
aligned_alloc
and posix_memalign
are declared in
stdlib.h.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Unsafe lock | AC-Unsafe lock fd mem | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The aligned_alloc
function allocates a block of size bytes whose
address is a multiple of alignment. The alignment must be a
power of two.
The aligned_alloc
function returns a null pointer on error and sets
errno
to one of the following values:
ENOMEM
There was insufficient memory available to satisfy the request.
EINVAL
alignment is not a power of two.
This function was introduced in ISO C11 and hence may have better
portability to modern non-POSIX systems than posix_memalign
.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Unsafe lock | AC-Unsafe lock fd mem | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The memalign
function allocates a block of size bytes whose
address is a multiple of boundary. The boundary must be a
power of two! The function memalign
works by allocating a
somewhat larger block, and then returning an address within the block
that is on the specified boundary.
The memalign
function returns a null pointer on error and sets
errno
to one of the following values:
ENOMEM
There was insufficient memory available to satisfy the request.
EINVAL
boundary is not a power of two.
The memalign
function is obsolete and aligned_alloc
or
posix_memalign
should be used instead.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Unsafe lock | AC-Unsafe lock fd mem | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The posix_memalign
function is similar to the memalign
function in that it returns a buffer of size bytes aligned to a
multiple of alignment. But it adds one requirement to the
parameter alignment: the value must be a power of two multiple of
sizeof (void *)
.
If the function succeeds in allocation memory a pointer to the allocated
memory is returned in *memptr
and the return value is zero.
Otherwise the function returns an error value indicating the problem.
The possible error values returned are:
ENOMEM
There was insufficient memory available to satisfy the request.
EINVAL
alignment is not a power of two multiple of sizeof (void *)
.
This function was introduced in POSIX 1003.1d. Although this function is
superseded by aligned_alloc
, it is more portable to older POSIX
systems that do not support ISO C11.
Preliminary: | MT-Unsafe init | AS-Unsafe init lock | AC-Unsafe init lock fd mem | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
Using valloc
is like using memalign
and passing the page size
as the value of the first argument. It is implemented like this:
void * valloc (size_t size) { return memalign (getpagesize (), size); }
How to get information about the memory subsystem? for more information about the memory subsystem.
The valloc
function is obsolete and aligned_alloc
or
posix_memalign
should be used instead.
Next: Heap Consistency Checking, Previous: Allocating Aligned Memory Blocks, Up: Unconstrained Allocation [Contents][Index]
You can adjust some parameters for dynamic memory allocation with the
mallopt
function. This function is the general SVID/XPG
interface, defined in malloc.h.
Preliminary: | MT-Unsafe init const:mallopt | AS-Unsafe init lock | AC-Unsafe init lock | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
When calling mallopt
, the param argument specifies the
parameter to be set, and value the new value to be set. Possible
choices for param, as defined in malloc.h, are:
M_MMAP_MAX
¶The maximum number of chunks to allocate with mmap
. Setting this
to zero disables all use of mmap
.
The default value of this parameter is 65536
.
This parameter can also be set for the process at startup by setting the
environment variable MALLOC_MMAP_MAX_
to the desired value.
M_MMAP_THRESHOLD
¶All chunks larger than this value are allocated outside the normal
heap, using the mmap
system call. This way it is guaranteed
that the memory for these chunks can be returned to the system on
free
. Note that requests smaller than this threshold might still
be allocated via mmap
.
If this parameter is not set, the default value is set as 128 KiB and the threshold is adjusted dynamically to suit the allocation patterns of the program. If the parameter is set, the dynamic adjustment is disabled and the value is set statically to the input value.
This parameter can also be set for the process at startup by setting the
environment variable MALLOC_MMAP_THRESHOLD_
to the desired value.
M_PERTURB
¶If non-zero, memory blocks are filled with values depending on some
low order bits of this parameter when they are allocated (except when
allocated by calloc
) and freed. This can be used to debug the
use of uninitialized or freed heap memory. Note that this option does not
guarantee that the freed block will have any specific values. It only
guarantees that the content the block had before it was freed will be
overwritten.
The default value of this parameter is 0
.
This parameter can also be set for the process at startup by setting the
environment variable MALLOC_PERTURB_
to the desired value.
M_TOP_PAD
¶This parameter determines the amount of extra memory to obtain from the system when an arena needs to be extended. It also specifies the number of bytes to retain when shrinking an arena. This provides the necessary hysteresis in heap size such that excessive amounts of system calls can be avoided.
The default value of this parameter is 0
.
This parameter can also be set for the process at startup by setting the
environment variable MALLOC_TOP_PAD_
to the desired value.
M_TRIM_THRESHOLD
¶This is the minimum size (in bytes) of the top-most, releasable chunk that will trigger a system call in order to return memory to the system.
If this parameter is not set, the default value is set as 128 KiB and the threshold is adjusted dynamically to suit the allocation patterns of the program. If the parameter is set, the dynamic adjustment is disabled and the value is set statically to the provided input.
This parameter can also be set for the process at startup by setting the
environment variable MALLOC_TRIM_THRESHOLD_
to the desired value.
M_ARENA_TEST
¶This parameter specifies the number of arenas that can be created before the
test on the limit to the number of arenas is conducted. The value is ignored if
M_ARENA_MAX
is set.
The default value of this parameter is 2 on 32-bit systems and 8 on 64-bit systems.
This parameter can also be set for the process at startup by setting the
environment variable MALLOC_ARENA_TEST
to the desired value.
M_ARENA_MAX
¶This parameter sets the number of arenas to use regardless of the number of cores in the system.
The default value of this tunable is 0
, meaning that the limit on the
number of arenas is determined by the number of CPU cores online. For 32-bit
systems the limit is twice the number of cores online and on 64-bit systems, it
is eight times the number of cores online. Note that the default value is not
derived from the default value of M_ARENA_TEST and is computed independently.
This parameter can also be set for the process at startup by setting the
environment variable MALLOC_ARENA_MAX
to the desired value.
Next: Statistics for Memory Allocation with malloc
, Previous: Malloc Tunable Parameters, Up: Unconstrained Allocation [Contents][Index]
You can ask malloc
to check the consistency of dynamic memory by
using the mcheck
function and preloading the malloc debug library
libc_malloc_debug using the LD_PRELOAD environment variable.
This function is a GNU extension, declared in mcheck.h.
Preliminary: | MT-Unsafe race:mcheck const:malloc_hooks | AS-Unsafe corrupt | AC-Unsafe corrupt | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
Calling mcheck
tells malloc
to perform occasional
consistency checks. These will catch things such as writing
past the end of a block that was allocated with malloc
.
The abortfn argument is the function to call when an inconsistency
is found. If you supply a null pointer, then mcheck
uses a
default function which prints a message and calls abort
(see Aborting a Program). The function you supply is called with
one argument, which says what sort of inconsistency was detected; its
type is described below.
It is too late to begin allocation checking once you have allocated
anything with malloc
. So mcheck
does nothing in that
case. The function returns -1
if you call it too late, and
0
otherwise (when it is successful).
The easiest way to arrange to call mcheck
early enough is to use
the option ‘-lmcheck’ when you link your program; then you don’t
need to modify your program source at all. Alternatively you might use
a debugger to insert a call to mcheck
whenever the program is
started, for example these gdb commands will automatically call mcheck
whenever the program starts:
(gdb) break main Breakpoint 1, main (argc=2, argv=0xbffff964) at whatever.c:10 (gdb) command 1 Type commands for when breakpoint 1 is hit, one per line. End with a line saying just "end". >call mcheck(0) >continue >end (gdb) …
This will however only work if no initialization function of any object
involved calls any of the malloc
functions since mcheck
must be called before the first such function.
Preliminary: | MT-Unsafe race:mcheck const:malloc_hooks | AS-Unsafe corrupt | AC-Unsafe corrupt | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The mprobe
function lets you explicitly check for inconsistencies
in a particular allocated block. You must have already called
mcheck
at the beginning of the program, to do its occasional
checks; calling mprobe
requests an additional consistency check
to be done at the time of the call.
The argument pointer must be a pointer returned by malloc
or realloc
. mprobe
returns a value that says what
inconsistency, if any, was found. The values are described below.
This enumerated type describes what kind of inconsistency was detected in an allocated block, if any. Here are the possible values:
MCHECK_DISABLED
mcheck
was not called before the first allocation.
No consistency checking can be done.
MCHECK_OK
No inconsistency detected.
MCHECK_HEAD
The data immediately before the block was modified. This commonly happens when an array index or pointer is decremented too far.
MCHECK_TAIL
The data immediately after the block was modified. This commonly happens when an array index or pointer is incremented too far.
MCHECK_FREE
The block was already freed.
Another possibility to check for and guard against bugs in the use of
malloc
, realloc
and free
is to set the environment
variable MALLOC_CHECK_
. When MALLOC_CHECK_
is set to a
non-zero value less than 4, a special (less efficient) implementation is
used which is designed to be tolerant against simple errors, such as
double calls of free
with the same argument, or overruns of a
single byte (off-by-one bugs). Not all such errors can be protected
against, however, and memory leaks can result. Like in the case of
mcheck
, one would need to preload the libc_malloc_debug
library to enable MALLOC_CHECK_
functionality. Without this
preloaded library, setting MALLOC_CHECK_
will have no effect.
Any detected heap corruption results in immediate termination of the process.
There is one problem with MALLOC_CHECK_
: in SUID or SGID binaries
it could possibly be exploited since diverging from the normal programs
behavior it now writes something to the standard error descriptor.
Therefore the use of MALLOC_CHECK_
is disabled by default for
SUID and SGID binaries. It can be enabled again by the system
administrator by adding a file /etc/suid-debug (the content is
not important it could be empty).
So, what’s the difference between using MALLOC_CHECK_
and linking
with ‘-lmcheck’? MALLOC_CHECK_
is orthogonal with respect to
‘-lmcheck’. ‘-lmcheck’ has been added for backward
compatibility. Both MALLOC_CHECK_
and ‘-lmcheck’ should
uncover the same bugs - but using MALLOC_CHECK_
you don’t need to
recompile your application.
Next: Summary of malloc
-Related Functions, Previous: Heap Consistency Checking, Up: Unconstrained Allocation [Contents][Index]
malloc
You can get information about dynamic memory allocation by calling the
mallinfo2
function. This function and its associated data type
are declared in malloc.h; they are an extension of the standard
SVID/XPG version.
This structure type is used to return information about the dynamic memory allocator. It contains the following members:
size_t arena
This is the total size of memory allocated with sbrk
by
malloc
, in bytes.
size_t ordblks
This is the number of chunks not in use. (The memory allocator
size_ternally gets chunks of memory from the operating system, and then
carves them up to satisfy individual malloc
requests;
see The GNU Allocator.)
size_t smblks
This field is unused.
size_t hblks
This is the total number of chunks allocated with mmap
.
size_t hblkhd
This is the total size of memory allocated with mmap
, in bytes.
size_t usmblks
This field is unused and always 0.
size_t fsmblks
This field is unused.
size_t uordblks
This is the total size of memory occupied by chunks handed out by
malloc
.
size_t fordblks
This is the total size of memory occupied by free (not in use) chunks.
size_t keepcost
This is the size of the top-most releasable chunk that normally borders the end of the heap (i.e., the high end of the virtual address space’s data segment).
Preliminary: | MT-Unsafe init const:mallopt | AS-Unsafe init lock | AC-Unsafe init lock | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This function returns information about the current dynamic memory usage
in a structure of type struct mallinfo2
.
Previous: Statistics for Memory Allocation with malloc
, Up: Unconstrained Allocation [Contents][Index]
malloc
-Related FunctionsHere is a summary of the functions that work with malloc
:
void *malloc (size_t size)
Allocate a block of size bytes. See Basic Memory Allocation.
void free (void *addr)
Free a block previously allocated by malloc
. See Freeing Memory Allocated with malloc
.
void *realloc (void *addr, size_t size)
Make a block previously allocated by malloc
larger or smaller,
possibly by copying it to a new location. See Changing the Size of a Block.
void *reallocarray (void *ptr, size_t nmemb, size_t size)
Change the size of a block previously allocated by malloc
to
nmemb * size
bytes as with realloc
. See Changing the Size of a Block.
void *calloc (size_t count, size_t eltsize)
Allocate a block of count * eltsize bytes using
malloc
, and set its contents to zero. See Allocating Cleared Space.
void *valloc (size_t size)
Allocate a block of size bytes, starting on a page boundary. See Allocating Aligned Memory Blocks.
void *aligned_alloc (size_t size, size_t alignment)
Allocate a block of size bytes, starting on an address that is a multiple of alignment. See Allocating Aligned Memory Blocks.
int posix_memalign (void **memptr, size_t alignment, size_t size)
Allocate a block of size bytes, starting on an address that is a multiple of alignment. See Allocating Aligned Memory Blocks.
void *memalign (size_t size, size_t boundary)
Allocate a block of size bytes, starting on an address that is a multiple of boundary. See Allocating Aligned Memory Blocks.
int mallopt (int param, int value)
Adjust a tunable parameter. See Malloc Tunable Parameters.
int mcheck (void (*abortfn) (void))
Tell malloc
to perform occasional consistency checks on
dynamically allocated memory, and to call abortfn when an
inconsistency is found. See Heap Consistency Checking.
struct mallinfo2 mallinfo2 (void)
Return information about the current dynamic memory usage.
See Statistics for Memory Allocation with malloc
.
Next: Replacing malloc
, Previous: Unconstrained Allocation, Up: Allocating Storage For Program Data [Contents][Index]
A complicated task when programming with languages which do not use garbage collected dynamic memory allocation is to find memory leaks. Long running programs must ensure that dynamically allocated objects are freed at the end of their lifetime. If this does not happen the system runs out of memory, sooner or later.
The malloc
implementation in the GNU C Library provides some
simple means to detect such leaks and obtain some information to find
the location. To do this the application must be started in a special
mode which is enabled by an environment variable. There are no speed
penalties for the program if the debugging mode is not enabled.
Next: Example program excerpts, Up: Allocation Debugging [Contents][Index]
Preliminary: | MT-Unsafe env race:mtrace init | AS-Unsafe init heap corrupt lock | AC-Unsafe init corrupt lock fd mem | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The mtrace
function provides a way to trace memory allocation
events in the program that calls it. It is disabled by default in the
library and can be enabled by preloading the debugging library
libc_malloc_debug using the LD_PRELOAD
environment
variable.
When the mtrace
function is called it looks for an environment
variable named MALLOC_TRACE
. This variable is supposed to
contain a valid file name. The user must have write access. If the
file already exists it is truncated. If the environment variable is not
set or it does not name a valid file which can be opened for writing
nothing is done. The behavior of malloc
etc. is not changed.
For obvious reasons this also happens if the application is installed
with the SUID or SGID bit set.
If the named file is successfully opened, mtrace
installs special
handlers for the functions malloc
, realloc
, and
free
. From then on, all uses of these functions are traced and
protocolled into the file. There is now of course a speed penalty for all
calls to the traced functions so tracing should not be enabled during normal
use.
This function is a GNU extension and generally not available on other systems. The prototype can be found in mcheck.h.
Preliminary: | MT-Unsafe race:mtrace locale | AS-Unsafe corrupt heap | AC-Unsafe corrupt mem lock fd | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The muntrace
function can be called after mtrace
was used
to enable tracing the malloc
calls. If no (successful) call of
mtrace
was made muntrace
does nothing.
Otherwise it deinstalls the handlers for malloc
, realloc
,
and free
and then closes the protocol file. No calls are
protocolled anymore and the program runs again at full speed.
This function is a GNU extension and generally not available on other systems. The prototype can be found in mcheck.h.
Next: Some more or less clever ideas, Previous: How to install the tracing functionality, Up: Allocation Debugging [Contents][Index]
Even though the tracing functionality does not influence the runtime
behavior of the program it is not a good idea to call mtrace
in
all programs. Just imagine that you debug a program using mtrace
and all other programs used in the debugging session also trace their
malloc
calls. The output file would be the same for all programs
and thus is unusable. Therefore one should call mtrace
only if
compiled for debugging. A program could therefore start like this:
#include <mcheck.h> int main (int argc, char *argv[]) { #ifdef DEBUGGING mtrace (); #endif … }
This is all that is needed if you want to trace the calls during the
whole runtime of the program. Alternatively you can stop the tracing at
any time with a call to muntrace
. It is even possible to restart
the tracing again with a new call to mtrace
. But this can cause
unreliable results since there may be calls of the functions which are
not called. Please note that not only the application uses the traced
functions, also libraries (including the C library itself) use these
functions.
This last point is also why it is not a good idea to call muntrace
before the program terminates. The libraries are informed about the
termination of the program only after the program returns from
main
or calls exit
and so cannot free the memory they use
before this time.
So the best thing one can do is to call mtrace
as the very first
function in the program and never call muntrace
. So the program
traces almost all uses of the malloc
functions (except those
calls which are executed by constructors of the program or used
libraries).
Next: Interpreting the traces, Previous: Example program excerpts, Up: Allocation Debugging [Contents][Index]
You know the situation. The program is prepared for debugging and in all debugging sessions it runs well. But once it is started without debugging the error shows up. A typical example is a memory leak that becomes visible only when we turn off the debugging. If you foresee such situations you can still win. Simply use something equivalent to the following little program:
#include <mcheck.h> #include <signal.h> static void enable (int sig) { mtrace (); signal (SIGUSR1, enable); } static void disable (int sig) { muntrace (); signal (SIGUSR2, disable); } int main (int argc, char *argv[]) { … signal (SIGUSR1, enable); signal (SIGUSR2, disable); … }
I.e., the user can start the memory debugger any time s/he wants if the
program was started with MALLOC_TRACE
set in the environment.
The output will of course not show the allocations which happened before
the first signal but if there is a memory leak this will show up
nevertheless.
Previous: Some more or less clever ideas, Up: Allocation Debugging [Contents][Index]
If you take a look at the output it will look similar to this:
= Start [0x8048209] - 0x8064cc8 [0x8048209] - 0x8064ce0 [0x8048209] - 0x8064cf8 [0x80481eb] + 0x8064c48 0x14 [0x80481eb] + 0x8064c60 0x14 [0x80481eb] + 0x8064c78 0x14 [0x80481eb] + 0x8064c90 0x14 = End
What this all means is not really important since the trace file is not
meant to be read by a human. Therefore no attention is given to
readability. Instead there is a program which comes with the GNU C Library
which interprets the traces and outputs a summary in an
user-friendly way. The program is called mtrace
(it is in fact a
Perl script) and it takes one or two arguments. In any case the name of
the file with the trace output must be specified. If an optional
argument precedes the name of the trace file this must be the name of
the program which generated the trace.
drepper$ mtrace tst-mtrace log No memory leaks.
In this case the program tst-mtrace
was run and it produced a
trace file log. The message printed by mtrace
shows there
are no problems with the code, all allocated memory was freed
afterwards.
If we call mtrace
on the example trace given above we would get a
different output:
drepper$ mtrace errlog - 0x08064cc8 Free 2 was never alloc'd 0x8048209 - 0x08064ce0 Free 3 was never alloc'd 0x8048209 - 0x08064cf8 Free 4 was never alloc'd 0x8048209 Memory not freed: ----------------- Address Size Caller 0x08064c48 0x14 at 0x80481eb 0x08064c60 0x14 at 0x80481eb 0x08064c78 0x14 at 0x80481eb 0x08064c90 0x14 at 0x80481eb
We have called mtrace
with only one argument and so the script
has no chance to find out what is meant with the addresses given in the
trace. We can do better:
drepper$ mtrace tst errlog - 0x08064cc8 Free 2 was never alloc'd /home/drepper/tst.c:39 - 0x08064ce0 Free 3 was never alloc'd /home/drepper/tst.c:39 - 0x08064cf8 Free 4 was never alloc'd /home/drepper/tst.c:39 Memory not freed: ----------------- Address Size Caller 0x08064c48 0x14 at /home/drepper/tst.c:33 0x08064c60 0x14 at /home/drepper/tst.c:33 0x08064c78 0x14 at /home/drepper/tst.c:33 0x08064c90 0x14 at /home/drepper/tst.c:33
Suddenly the output makes much more sense and the user can see immediately where the function calls causing the trouble can be found.
Interpreting this output is not complicated. There are at most two
different situations being detected. First, free
was called for
pointers which were never returned by one of the allocation functions.
This is usually a very bad problem and what this looks like is shown in
the first three lines of the output. Situations like this are quite
rare and if they appear they show up very drastically: the program
normally crashes.
The other situation which is much harder to detect are memory leaks. As
you can see in the output the mtrace
function collects all this
information and so can say that the program calls an allocation function
from line 33 in the source file /home/drepper/tst-mtrace.c four
times without freeing this memory before the program terminates.
Whether this is a real problem remains to be investigated.
Next: Obstacks, Previous: Allocation Debugging, Up: Allocating Storage For Program Data [Contents][Index]
malloc
The GNU C Library supports replacing the built-in malloc
implementation
with a different allocator with the same interface. For dynamically
linked programs, this happens through ELF symbol interposition, either
using shared object dependencies or LD_PRELOAD
. For static
linking, the malloc
replacement library must be linked in before
linking against libc.a
(explicitly or implicitly).
Note: Failure to provide a complete set of replacement
functions (that is, all the functions used by the application,
the GNU C Library, and other linked-in libraries) can lead to static linking
failures, and, at run time, to heap corruption and application crashes.
Replacement functions should implement the behavior documented for
their counterparts in the GNU C Library; for example, the replacement
free
should also preserve errno
.
The minimum set of functions which has to be provided by a custom
malloc
is given in the table below.
malloc
free
calloc
realloc
These malloc
-related functions are required for the GNU C Library to
work.1
The malloc
implementation in the GNU C Library provides additional
functionality not used by the library itself, but which is often used by
other system libraries and applications. A general-purpose replacement
malloc
implementation should provide definitions of these
functions, too. Their names are listed in the following table.
aligned_alloc
malloc_usable_size
memalign
posix_memalign
pvalloc
valloc
In addition, very old applications may use the obsolete cfree
function.
Further malloc
-related functions such as mallopt
or
mallinfo2
will not have any effect or return incorrect statistics
when a replacement malloc
is in use. However, failure to replace
these functions typically does not result in crashes or other incorrect
application behavior, but may result in static linking failures.
There are other functions (reallocarray
, strdup
, etc.) in
the GNU C Library that are not listed above but return newly allocated memory to
callers. Replacement of these functions is not supported and may produce
incorrect results. The GNU C Library implementations of these functions call
the replacement allocator functions whenever available, so they will work
correctly with malloc
replacement.
Next: Automatic Storage with Variable Size, Previous: Replacing malloc
, Up: Allocating Storage For Program Data [Contents][Index]
An obstack is a pool of memory containing a stack of objects. You can create any number of separate obstacks, and then allocate objects in specified obstacks. Within each obstack, the last object allocated must always be the first one freed, but distinct obstacks are independent of each other.
Aside from this one constraint of order of freeing, obstacks are totally general: an obstack can contain any number of objects of any size. They are implemented with macros, so allocation is usually very fast as long as the objects are usually small. And the only space overhead per object is the padding needed to start each object on a suitable boundary.
Next: Preparing for Using Obstacks, Up: Obstacks [Contents][Index]
The utilities for manipulating obstacks are declared in the header file obstack.h.
An obstack is represented by a data structure of type struct
obstack
. This structure has a small fixed size; it records the status
of the obstack and how to find the space in which objects are allocated.
It does not contain any of the objects themselves. You should not try
to access the contents of the structure directly; use only the functions
described in this chapter.
You can declare variables of type struct obstack
and use them as
obstacks, or you can allocate obstacks dynamically like any other kind
of object. Dynamic allocation of obstacks allows your program to have a
variable number of different stacks. (You can even allocate an
obstack structure in another obstack, but this is rarely useful.)
All the functions that work with obstacks require you to specify which
obstack to use. You do this with a pointer of type struct obstack
*
. In the following, we often say “an obstack” when strictly
speaking the object at hand is such a pointer.
The objects in the obstack are packed into large blocks called
chunks. The struct obstack
structure points to a chain of
the chunks currently in use.
The obstack library obtains a new chunk whenever you allocate an object
that won’t fit in the previous chunk. Since the obstack library manages
chunks automatically, you don’t need to pay much attention to them, but
you do need to supply a function which the obstack library should use to
get a chunk. Usually you supply a function which uses malloc
directly or indirectly. You must also supply a function to free a chunk.
These matters are described in the following section.
Next: Allocation in an Obstack, Previous: Creating Obstacks, Up: Obstacks [Contents][Index]
Each source file in which you plan to use the obstack functions must include the header file obstack.h, like this:
#include <obstack.h>
Also, if the source file uses the macro obstack_init
, it must
declare or define two functions or macros that will be called by the
obstack library. One, obstack_chunk_alloc
, is used to allocate
the chunks of memory into which objects are packed. The other,
obstack_chunk_free
, is used to return chunks when the objects in
them are freed. These macros should appear before any use of obstacks
in the source file.
Usually these are defined to use malloc
via the intermediary
xmalloc
(see Unconstrained Allocation). This is done with
the following pair of macro definitions:
#define obstack_chunk_alloc xmalloc #define obstack_chunk_free free
Though the memory you get using obstacks really comes from malloc
,
using obstacks is faster because malloc
is called less often, for
larger blocks of memory. See Obstack Chunks, for full details.
At run time, before the program can use a struct obstack
object
as an obstack, it must initialize the obstack by calling
obstack_init
.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe race:obstack-ptr | AS-Safe | AC-Safe mem | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
Initialize obstack obstack-ptr for allocation of objects. This
function calls the obstack’s obstack_chunk_alloc
function. If
allocation of memory fails, the function pointed to by
obstack_alloc_failed_handler
is called. The obstack_init
function always returns 1 (Compatibility notice: Former versions of
obstack returned 0 if allocation failed).
Here are two examples of how to allocate the space for an obstack and initialize it. First, an obstack that is a static variable:
static struct obstack myobstack; … obstack_init (&myobstack);
Second, an obstack that is itself dynamically allocated:
struct obstack *myobstack_ptr = (struct obstack *) xmalloc (sizeof (struct obstack)); obstack_init (myobstack_ptr);
The value of this variable is a pointer to a function that
obstack
uses when obstack_chunk_alloc
fails to allocate
memory. The default action is to print a message and abort.
You should supply a function that either calls exit
(see Program Termination) or longjmp
(see Non-Local Exits) and doesn’t return.
void my_obstack_alloc_failed (void) … obstack_alloc_failed_handler = &my_obstack_alloc_failed;
Next: Freeing Objects in an Obstack, Previous: Preparing for Using Obstacks, Up: Obstacks [Contents][Index]
The most direct way to allocate an object in an obstack is with
obstack_alloc
, which is invoked almost like malloc
.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe race:obstack-ptr | AS-Safe | AC-Unsafe corrupt mem | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This allocates an uninitialized block of size bytes in an obstack
and returns its address. Here obstack-ptr specifies which obstack
to allocate the block in; it is the address of the struct obstack
object which represents the obstack. Each obstack function or macro
requires you to specify an obstack-ptr as the first argument.
This function calls the obstack’s obstack_chunk_alloc
function if
it needs to allocate a new chunk of memory; it calls
obstack_alloc_failed_handler
if allocation of memory by
obstack_chunk_alloc
failed.
For example, here is a function that allocates a copy of a string str
in a specific obstack, which is in the variable string_obstack
:
struct obstack string_obstack; char * copystring (char *string) { size_t len = strlen (string) + 1; char *s = (char *) obstack_alloc (&string_obstack, len); memcpy (s, string, len); return s; }
To allocate a block with specified contents, use the function
obstack_copy
, declared like this:
Preliminary: | MT-Safe race:obstack-ptr | AS-Safe | AC-Unsafe corrupt mem | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This allocates a block and initializes it by copying size
bytes of data starting at address. It calls
obstack_alloc_failed_handler
if allocation of memory by
obstack_chunk_alloc
failed.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe race:obstack-ptr | AS-Safe | AC-Unsafe corrupt mem | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
Like obstack_copy
, but appends an extra byte containing a null
character. This extra byte is not counted in the argument size.
The obstack_copy0
function is convenient for copying a sequence
of characters into an obstack as a null-terminated string. Here is an
example of its use:
char * obstack_savestring (char *addr, int size) { return obstack_copy0 (&myobstack, addr, size); }
Contrast this with the previous example of savestring
using
malloc
(see Basic Memory Allocation).
Next: Obstack Functions and Macros, Previous: Allocation in an Obstack, Up: Obstacks [Contents][Index]
To free an object allocated in an obstack, use the function
obstack_free
. Since the obstack is a stack of objects, freeing
one object automatically frees all other objects allocated more recently
in the same obstack.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe race:obstack-ptr | AS-Safe | AC-Unsafe corrupt | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
If object is a null pointer, everything allocated in the obstack is freed. Otherwise, object must be the address of an object allocated in the obstack. Then object is freed, along with everything allocated in obstack-ptr since object.
Note that if object is a null pointer, the result is an
uninitialized obstack. To free all memory in an obstack but leave it
valid for further allocation, call obstack_free
with the address
of the first object allocated on the obstack:
obstack_free (obstack_ptr, first_object_allocated_ptr);
Recall that the objects in an obstack are grouped into chunks. When all the objects in a chunk become free, the obstack library automatically frees the chunk (see Preparing for Using Obstacks). Then other obstacks, or non-obstack allocation, can reuse the space of the chunk.
Next: Growing Objects, Previous: Freeing Objects in an Obstack, Up: Obstacks [Contents][Index]
The interfaces for using obstacks may be defined either as functions or as macros, depending on the compiler. The obstack facility works with all C compilers, including both ISO C and traditional C, but there are precautions you must take if you plan to use compilers other than GNU C.
If you are using an old-fashioned non-ISO C compiler, all the obstack “functions” are actually defined only as macros. You can call these macros like functions, but you cannot use them in any other way (for example, you cannot take their address).
Calling the macros requires a special precaution: namely, the first operand (the obstack pointer) may not contain any side effects, because it may be computed more than once. For example, if you write this:
obstack_alloc (get_obstack (), 4);
you will find that get_obstack
may be called several times.
If you use *obstack_list_ptr++
as the obstack pointer argument,
you will get very strange results since the incrementation may occur
several times.
In ISO C, each function has both a macro definition and a function definition. The function definition is used if you take the address of the function without calling it. An ordinary call uses the macro definition by default, but you can request the function definition instead by writing the function name in parentheses, as shown here:
char *x; void *(*funcp) (); /* Use the macro. */ x = (char *) obstack_alloc (obptr, size); /* Call the function. */ x = (char *) (obstack_alloc) (obptr, size); /* Take the address of the function. */ funcp = obstack_alloc;
This is the same situation that exists in ISO C for the standard library functions. See Macro Definitions of Functions.
Warning: When you do use the macros, you must observe the precaution of avoiding side effects in the first operand, even in ISO C.
If you use the GNU C compiler, this precaution is not necessary, because various language extensions in GNU C permit defining the macros so as to compute each argument only once.
Next: Extra Fast Growing Objects, Previous: Obstack Functions and Macros, Up: Obstacks [Contents][Index]
Because memory in obstack chunks is used sequentially, it is possible to build up an object step by step, adding one or more bytes at a time to the end of the object. With this technique, you do not need to know how much data you will put in the object until you come to the end of it. We call this the technique of growing objects. The special functions for adding data to the growing object are described in this section.
You don’t need to do anything special when you start to grow an object.
Using one of the functions to add data to the object automatically
starts it. However, it is necessary to say explicitly when the object is
finished. This is done with the function obstack_finish
.
The actual address of the object thus built up is not known until the object is finished. Until then, it always remains possible that you will add so much data that the object must be copied into a new chunk.
While the obstack is in use for a growing object, you cannot use it for ordinary allocation of another object. If you try to do so, the space already added to the growing object will become part of the other object.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe race:obstack-ptr | AS-Safe | AC-Unsafe corrupt mem | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The most basic function for adding to a growing object is
obstack_blank
, which adds space without initializing it.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe race:obstack-ptr | AS-Safe | AC-Unsafe corrupt mem | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
To add a block of initialized space, use obstack_grow
, which is
the growing-object analogue of obstack_copy
. It adds size
bytes of data to the growing object, copying the contents from
data.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe race:obstack-ptr | AS-Safe | AC-Unsafe corrupt mem | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This is the growing-object analogue of obstack_copy0
. It adds
size bytes copied from data, followed by an additional null
character.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe race:obstack-ptr | AS-Safe | AC-Unsafe corrupt mem | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
To add one character at a time, use the function obstack_1grow
.
It adds a single byte containing c to the growing object.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe race:obstack-ptr | AS-Safe | AC-Unsafe corrupt mem | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
Adding the value of a pointer one can use the function
obstack_ptr_grow
. It adds sizeof (void *)
bytes
containing the value of data.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe race:obstack-ptr | AS-Safe | AC-Unsafe corrupt mem | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
A single value of type int
can be added by using the
obstack_int_grow
function. It adds sizeof (int)
bytes to
the growing object and initializes them with the value of data.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe race:obstack-ptr | AS-Safe | AC-Unsafe corrupt | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
When you are finished growing the object, use the function
obstack_finish
to close it off and return its final address.
Once you have finished the object, the obstack is available for ordinary allocation or for growing another object.
This function can return a null pointer under the same conditions as
obstack_alloc
(see Allocation in an Obstack).
When you build an object by growing it, you will probably need to know
afterward how long it became. You need not keep track of this as you grow
the object, because you can find out the length from the obstack just
before finishing the object with the function obstack_object_size
,
declared as follows:
Preliminary: | MT-Safe race:obstack-ptr | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This function returns the current size of the growing object, in bytes.
Remember to call this function before finishing the object.
After it is finished, obstack_object_size
will return zero.
If you have started growing an object and wish to cancel it, you should finish it and then free it, like this:
obstack_free (obstack_ptr, obstack_finish (obstack_ptr));
This has no effect if no object was growing.
You can use obstack_blank
with a negative size argument to make
the current object smaller. Just don’t try to shrink it beyond zero
length—there’s no telling what will happen if you do that.
Next: Status of an Obstack, Previous: Growing Objects, Up: Obstacks [Contents][Index]
The usual functions for growing objects incur overhead for checking whether there is room for the new growth in the current chunk. If you are frequently constructing objects in small steps of growth, this overhead can be significant.
You can reduce the overhead by using special “fast growth” functions that grow the object without checking. In order to have a robust program, you must do the checking yourself. If you do this checking in the simplest way each time you are about to add data to the object, you have not saved anything, because that is what the ordinary growth functions do. But if you can arrange to check less often, or check more efficiently, then you make the program faster.
The function obstack_room
returns the amount of room available
in the current chunk. It is declared as follows:
Preliminary: | MT-Safe race:obstack-ptr | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This returns the number of bytes that can be added safely to the current growing object (or to an object about to be started) in obstack obstack-ptr using the fast growth functions.
While you know there is room, you can use these fast growth functions for adding data to a growing object:
Preliminary: | MT-Safe race:obstack-ptr | AS-Safe | AC-Unsafe corrupt mem | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The function obstack_1grow_fast
adds one byte containing the
character c to the growing object in obstack obstack-ptr.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe race:obstack-ptr | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The function obstack_ptr_grow_fast
adds sizeof (void *)
bytes containing the value of data to the growing object in
obstack obstack-ptr.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe race:obstack-ptr | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The function obstack_int_grow_fast
adds sizeof (int)
bytes
containing the value of data to the growing object in obstack
obstack-ptr.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe race:obstack-ptr | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The function obstack_blank_fast
adds size bytes to the
growing object in obstack obstack-ptr without initializing them.
When you check for space using obstack_room
and there is not
enough room for what you want to add, the fast growth functions
are not safe. In this case, simply use the corresponding ordinary
growth function instead. Very soon this will copy the object to a
new chunk; then there will be lots of room available again.
So, each time you use an ordinary growth function, check afterward for
sufficient space using obstack_room
. Once the object is copied
to a new chunk, there will be plenty of space again, so the program will
start using the fast growth functions again.
Here is an example:
void add_string (struct obstack *obstack, const char *ptr, int len) { while (len > 0) { int room = obstack_room (obstack); if (room == 0) { /* Not enough room. Add one character slowly, which may copy to a new chunk and make room. */ obstack_1grow (obstack, *ptr++); len--; } else { if (room > len) room = len; /* Add fast as much as we have room for. */ len -= room; while (room-- > 0) obstack_1grow_fast (obstack, *ptr++); } } }
Next: Alignment of Data in Obstacks, Previous: Extra Fast Growing Objects, Up: Obstacks [Contents][Index]
Here are functions that provide information on the current status of allocation in an obstack. You can use them to learn about an object while still growing it.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Unsafe corrupt | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This function returns the tentative address of the beginning of the currently growing object in obstack-ptr. If you finish the object immediately, it will have that address. If you make it larger first, it may outgrow the current chunk—then its address will change!
If no object is growing, this value says where the next object you allocate will start (once again assuming it fits in the current chunk).
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Unsafe corrupt | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This function returns the address of the first free byte in the current
chunk of obstack obstack-ptr. This is the end of the currently
growing object. If no object is growing, obstack_next_free
returns the same value as obstack_base
.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe race:obstack-ptr | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This function returns the size in bytes of the currently growing object. This is equivalent to
obstack_next_free (obstack-ptr) - obstack_base (obstack-ptr)
Next: Obstack Chunks, Previous: Status of an Obstack, Up: Obstacks [Contents][Index]
Each obstack has an alignment boundary; each object allocated in the obstack automatically starts on an address that is a multiple of the specified boundary. By default, this boundary is aligned so that the object can hold any type of data.
To access an obstack’s alignment boundary, use the macro
obstack_alignment_mask
, whose function prototype looks like
this:
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The value is a bit mask; a bit that is 1 indicates that the corresponding bit in the address of an object should be 0. The mask value should be one less than a power of 2; the effect is that all object addresses are multiples of that power of 2. The default value of the mask is a value that allows aligned objects to hold any type of data: for example, if its value is 3, any type of data can be stored at locations whose addresses are multiples of 4. A mask value of 0 means an object can start on any multiple of 1 (that is, no alignment is required).
The expansion of the macro obstack_alignment_mask
is an lvalue,
so you can alter the mask by assignment. For example, this statement:
obstack_alignment_mask (obstack_ptr) = 0;
has the effect of turning off alignment processing in the specified obstack.
Note that a change in alignment mask does not take effect until
after the next time an object is allocated or finished in the
obstack. If you are not growing an object, you can make the new
alignment mask take effect immediately by calling obstack_finish
.
This will finish a zero-length object and then do proper alignment for
the next object.
Next: Summary of Obstack Functions, Previous: Alignment of Data in Obstacks, Up: Obstacks [Contents][Index]
Obstacks work by allocating space for themselves in large chunks, and then parceling out space in the chunks to satisfy your requests. Chunks are normally 4096 bytes long unless you specify a different chunk size. The chunk size includes 8 bytes of overhead that are not actually used for storing objects. Regardless of the specified size, longer chunks will be allocated when necessary for long objects.
The obstack library allocates chunks by calling the function
obstack_chunk_alloc
, which you must define. When a chunk is no
longer needed because you have freed all the objects in it, the obstack
library frees the chunk by calling obstack_chunk_free
, which you
must also define.
These two must be defined (as macros) or declared (as functions) in each
source file that uses obstack_init
(see Creating Obstacks).
Most often they are defined as macros like this:
#define obstack_chunk_alloc malloc #define obstack_chunk_free free
Note that these are simple macros (no arguments). Macro definitions with
arguments will not work! It is necessary that obstack_chunk_alloc
or obstack_chunk_free
, alone, expand into a function name if it is
not itself a function name.
If you allocate chunks with malloc
, the chunk size should be a
power of 2. The default chunk size, 4096, was chosen because it is long
enough to satisfy many typical requests on the obstack yet short enough
not to waste too much memory in the portion of the last chunk not yet used.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This returns the chunk size of the given obstack.
Since this macro expands to an lvalue, you can specify a new chunk size by assigning it a new value. Doing so does not affect the chunks already allocated, but will change the size of chunks allocated for that particular obstack in the future. It is unlikely to be useful to make the chunk size smaller, but making it larger might improve efficiency if you are allocating many objects whose size is comparable to the chunk size. Here is how to do so cleanly:
if (obstack_chunk_size (obstack_ptr) < new-chunk-size) obstack_chunk_size (obstack_ptr) = new-chunk-size;
Previous: Obstack Chunks, Up: Obstacks [Contents][Index]
Here is a summary of all the functions associated with obstacks. Each
takes the address of an obstack (struct obstack *
) as its first
argument.
void obstack_init (struct obstack *obstack-ptr)
Initialize use of an obstack. See Creating Obstacks.
void *obstack_alloc (struct obstack *obstack-ptr, int size)
Allocate an object of size uninitialized bytes. See Allocation in an Obstack.
void *obstack_copy (struct obstack *obstack-ptr, void *address, int size)
Allocate an object of size bytes, with contents copied from address. See Allocation in an Obstack.
void *obstack_copy0 (struct obstack *obstack-ptr, void *address, int size)
Allocate an object of size+1 bytes, with size of them copied from address, followed by a null character at the end. See Allocation in an Obstack.
void obstack_free (struct obstack *obstack-ptr, void *object)
Free object (and everything allocated in the specified obstack more recently than object). See Freeing Objects in an Obstack.
void obstack_blank (struct obstack *obstack-ptr, int size)
Add size uninitialized bytes to a growing object. See Growing Objects.
void obstack_grow (struct obstack *obstack-ptr, void *address, int size)
Add size bytes, copied from address, to a growing object. See Growing Objects.
void obstack_grow0 (struct obstack *obstack-ptr, void *address, int size)
Add size bytes, copied from address, to a growing object, and then add another byte containing a null character. See Growing Objects.
void obstack_1grow (struct obstack *obstack-ptr, char data-char)
Add one byte containing data-char to a growing object. See Growing Objects.
void *obstack_finish (struct obstack *obstack-ptr)
Finalize the object that is growing and return its permanent address. See Growing Objects.
int obstack_object_size (struct obstack *obstack-ptr)
Get the current size of the currently growing object. See Growing Objects.
void obstack_blank_fast (struct obstack *obstack-ptr, int size)
Add size uninitialized bytes to a growing object without checking that there is enough room. See Extra Fast Growing Objects.
void obstack_1grow_fast (struct obstack *obstack-ptr, char data-char)
Add one byte containing data-char to a growing object without checking that there is enough room. See Extra Fast Growing Objects.
int obstack_room (struct obstack *obstack-ptr)
Get the amount of room now available for growing the current object. See Extra Fast Growing Objects.
int obstack_alignment_mask (struct obstack *obstack-ptr)
The mask used for aligning the beginning of an object. This is an lvalue. See Alignment of Data in Obstacks.
int obstack_chunk_size (struct obstack *obstack-ptr)
The size for allocating chunks. This is an lvalue. See Obstack Chunks.
void *obstack_base (struct obstack *obstack-ptr)
Tentative starting address of the currently growing object. See Status of an Obstack.
void *obstack_next_free (struct obstack *obstack-ptr)
Address just after the end of the currently growing object. See Status of an Obstack.
Previous: Obstacks, Up: Allocating Storage For Program Data [Contents][Index]
The function alloca
supports a kind of half-dynamic allocation in
which blocks are allocated dynamically but freed automatically.
Allocating a block with alloca
is an explicit action; you can
allocate as many blocks as you wish, and compute the size at run time. But
all the blocks are freed when you exit the function that alloca
was
called from, just as if they were automatic variables declared in that
function. There is no way to free the space explicitly.
The prototype for alloca
is in stdlib.h. This function is
a BSD extension.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The return value of alloca
is the address of a block of size
bytes of memory, allocated in the stack frame of the calling function.
Do not use alloca
inside the arguments of a function call—you
will get unpredictable results, because the stack space for the
alloca
would appear on the stack in the middle of the space for
the function arguments. An example of what to avoid is foo (x,
alloca (4), y)
.
alloca
ExampleAs an example of the use of alloca
, here is a function that opens
a file name made from concatenating two argument strings, and returns a
file descriptor or minus one signifying failure:
int open2 (char *str1, char *str2, int flags, int mode) { char *name = (char *) alloca (strlen (str1) + strlen (str2) + 1); stpcpy (stpcpy (name, str1), str2); return open (name, flags, mode); }
Here is how you would get the same results with malloc
and
free
:
int open2 (char *str1, char *str2, int flags, int mode) { char *name = malloc (strlen (str1) + strlen (str2) + 1); int desc; if (name == 0) fatal ("virtual memory exceeded"); stpcpy (stpcpy (name, str1), str2); desc = open (name, flags, mode); free (name); return desc; }
As you can see, it is simpler with alloca
. But alloca
has
other, more important advantages, and some disadvantages.
Next: Disadvantages of alloca
, Previous: alloca
Example, Up: Automatic Storage with Variable Size [Contents][Index]
alloca
Here are the reasons why alloca
may be preferable to malloc
:
alloca
wastes very little space and is very fast. (It is
open-coded by the GNU C compiler.)
alloca
does not have separate pools for different sizes of
blocks, space used for any size block can be reused for any other size.
alloca
does not cause memory fragmentation.
longjmp
(see Non-Local Exits)
automatically free the space allocated with alloca
when they exit
through the function that called alloca
. This is the most
important reason to use alloca
.
To illustrate this, suppose you have a function
open_or_report_error
which returns a descriptor, like
open
, if it succeeds, but does not return to its caller if it
fails. If the file cannot be opened, it prints an error message and
jumps out to the command level of your program using longjmp
.
Let’s change open2
(see alloca
Example) to use this
subroutine:
int open2 (char *str1, char *str2, int flags, int mode) { char *name = (char *) alloca (strlen (str1) + strlen (str2) + 1); stpcpy (stpcpy (name, str1), str2); return open_or_report_error (name, flags, mode); }
Because of the way alloca
works, the memory it allocates is
freed even when an error occurs, with no special effort required.
By contrast, the previous definition of open2
(which uses
malloc
and free
) would develop a memory leak if it were
changed in this way. Even if you are willing to make more changes to
fix it, there is no easy way to do so.
Next: GNU C Variable-Size Arrays, Previous: Advantages of alloca
, Up: Automatic Storage with Variable Size [Contents][Index]
alloca
These are the disadvantages of alloca
in comparison with
malloc
:
alloca
, so it is less
portable. However, a slower emulation of alloca
written in C
is available for use on systems with this deficiency.
Previous: Disadvantages of alloca
, Up: Automatic Storage with Variable Size [Contents][Index]
In GNU C, you can replace most uses of alloca
with an array of
variable size. Here is how open2
would look then:
int open2 (char *str1, char *str2, int flags, int mode) { char name[strlen (str1) + strlen (str2) + 1]; stpcpy (stpcpy (name, str1), str2); return open (name, flags, mode); }
But alloca
is not always equivalent to a variable-sized array, for
several reasons:
alloca
remains until the end of the function.
alloca
within a loop, allocating an
additional block on each iteration. This is impossible with
variable-sized arrays.
NB: If you mix use of alloca
and variable-sized arrays
within one function, exiting a scope in which a variable-sized array was
declared frees all blocks allocated with alloca
during the
execution of that scope.
Next: Memory Protection, Previous: Allocating Storage For Program Data, Up: Virtual Memory Allocation And Paging [Contents][Index]
The symbols in this section are declared in unistd.h.
You will not normally use the functions in this section, because the functions described in Allocating Storage For Program Data are easier to use. Those are interfaces to a GNU C Library memory allocator that uses the functions below itself. The functions below are simple interfaces to system calls.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
brk
sets the high end of the calling process’ data segment to
addr.
The address of the end of a segment is defined to be the address of the last byte in the segment plus 1.
The function has no effect if addr is lower than the low end of the data segment. (This is considered success, by the way.)
The function fails if it would cause the data segment to overlap another segment or exceed the process’ data storage limit (see Limiting Resource Usage).
The function is named for a common historical case where data storage and the stack are in the same segment. Data storage allocation grows upward from the bottom of the segment while the stack grows downward toward it from the top of the segment and the curtain between them is called the break.
The return value is zero on success. On failure, the return value is
-1
and errno
is set accordingly. The following errno
values are specific to this function:
ENOMEM
The request would cause the data segment to overlap another segment or exceed the process’ data storage limit.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This function is the same as brk
except that you specify the new
end of the data segment as an offset delta from the current end
and on success the return value is the address of the resulting end of
the data segment instead of zero.
This means you can use ‘sbrk(0)’ to find out what the current end of the data segment is.
Next: Locking Pages, Previous: Resizing the Data Segment, Up: Virtual Memory Allocation And Paging [Contents][Index]
When a page is mapped using mmap
, page protection flags can be
specified using the protection flags argument. See Memory-mapped I/O.
The following flags are available:
PROT_WRITE
¶The memory can be written to.
PROT_READ
¶The memory can be read. On some architectures, this flag implies that
the memory can be executed as well (as if PROT_EXEC
had been
specified at the same time).
PROT_EXEC
¶The memory can be used to store instructions which can then be executed.
On most architectures, this flag implies that the memory can be read (as
if PROT_READ
had been specified).
PROT_NONE
¶This flag must be specified on its own.
The memory is reserved, but cannot be read, written, or executed. If
this flag is specified in a call to mmap
, a virtual memory area
will be set aside for future use in the process, and mmap
calls
without the MAP_FIXED
flag will not use it for subsequent
allocations. For anonymous mappings, the kernel will not reserve any
physical memory for the allocation at the time the mapping is created.
The operating system may keep track of these flags separately even if
the underlying hardware treats them the same for the purposes of access
checking (as happens with PROT_READ
and PROT_EXEC
on some
platforms). On GNU systems, PROT_EXEC
always implies
PROT_READ
, so that users can view the machine code which is
executing on their system.
Inappropriate access will cause a segfault (see Program Error Signals).
After allocation, protection flags can be changed using the
mprotect
function.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
A successful call to the mprotect
function changes the protection
flags of at least length bytes of memory, starting at
address.
address must be aligned to the page size for the mapping. The
system page size can be obtained by calling sysconf
with the
_SC_PAGESIZE
parameter (see Definition of sysconf
). The system
page size is the granularity in which the page protection of anonymous
memory mappings and most file mappings can be changed. Memory which is
mapped from special files or devices may have larger page granularity
than the system page size and may require larger alignment.
length is the number of bytes whose protection flags must be changed. It is automatically rounded up to the next multiple of the system page size.
protection is a combination of the PROT_*
flags described
above.
The mprotect
function returns 0 on success and -1
on failure.
The following errno
error conditions are defined for this
function:
ENOMEM
The system was not able to allocate resources to fulfill the request. This can happen if there is not enough physical memory in the system for the allocation of backing storage. The error can also occur if the new protection flags would cause the memory region to be split from its neighbors, and the process limit for the number of such distinct memory regions would be exceeded.
EINVAL
address is not properly aligned to a page boundary for the mapping, or length (after rounding up to the system page size) is not a multiple of the applicable page size for the mapping, or the combination of flags in protection is not valid.
EACCES
The file for a file-based mapping was not opened with open flags which are compatible with protection.
EPERM
The system security policy does not allow a mapping with the specified
flags. For example, mappings which are both PROT_EXEC
and
PROT_WRITE
at the same time might not be allowed.
If the mprotect
function is used to make a region of memory
inaccessible by specifying the PROT_NONE
protection flag and
access is later restored, the memory retains its previous contents.
On some systems, it may not be possible to specify additional flags which were not present when the mapping was first created. For example, an attempt to make a region of memory executable could fail if the initial protection flags were ‘PROT_READ | PROT_WRITE’.
In general, the mprotect
function can be used to change any
process memory, no matter how it was allocated. However, portable use
of the function requires that it is only used with memory regions
returned by mmap
or mmap64
.
On some systems, further restrictions can be added to specific pages using memory protection keys. These restrictions work as follows:
pkey_alloc
function, and applied to pages using
pkey_mprotect
.
pkey_set
and pkey_get
functions.
PROT_
* protection flags
set by mprotect
or pkey_mprotect
.
New threads and subprocesses inherit the access rights of the current thread. If a protection key is allocated subsequently, existing threads (except the current) will use an unspecified system default for the access rights associated with newly allocated keys.
Upon entering a signal handler, the system resets the access rights of the current thread so that pages with the default key can be accessed, but the access rights for other protection keys are unspecified.
Applications are expected to allocate a key once using
pkey_alloc
, and apply the key to memory regions which need
special protection with pkey_mprotect
:
int key = pkey_alloc (0, PKEY_DISABLE_ACCESS); if (key < 0) /* Perform error checking, including fallback for lack of support. */ ...; /* Apply the key to a special memory region used to store critical data. */ if (pkey_mprotect (region, region_length, PROT_READ | PROT_WRITE, key) < 0) ...; /* Perform error checking (generally fatal). */
If the key allocation fails due to lack of support for memory protection
keys, the pkey_mprotect
call can usually be skipped. In this
case, the region will not be protected by default. It is also possible
to call pkey_mprotect
with a key value of -1, in which
case it will behave in the same way as mprotect
.
After key allocation assignment to memory pages, pkey_set
can be
used to temporarily acquire access to the memory region and relinquish
it again:
if (key >= 0 && pkey_set (key, 0) < 0) ...; /* Perform error checking (generally fatal). */ /* At this point, the current thread has read-write access to the memory region. */ ... /* Revoke access again. */ if (key >= 0 && pkey_set (key, PKEY_DISABLE_ACCESS) < 0) ...; /* Perform error checking (generally fatal). */
In this example, a negative key value indicates that no key had been allocated, which means that the system lacks support for memory protection keys and it is not necessary to change the the access rights of the current thread (because it always has access).
Compared to using mprotect
to change the page protection flags,
this approach has two advantages: It is thread-safe in the sense that
the access rights are only changed for the current thread, so another
thread which changes its own access rights concurrently to gain access
to the mapping will not suddenly see its access rights revoked. And
pkey_set
typically does not involve a call into the kernel and a
context switch, so it is more efficient.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Unsafe corrupt | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
Allocate a new protection key. The flags argument is reserved and
must be zero. The restrictions argument specifies access rights
which are applied to the current thread (as if with pkey_set
below). Access rights of other threads are not changed.
The function returns the new protection key, a non-negative number, or -1 on error.
The following errno
error conditions are defined for this
function:
ENOSYS
The system does not implement memory protection keys.
EINVAL
The flags argument is not zero.
The restrictions argument is invalid.
The system does not implement memory protection keys or runs in a mode in which memory protection keys are disabled.
ENOSPC
All available protection keys already have been allocated.
The system does not implement memory protection keys or runs in a mode in which memory protection keys are disabled.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
Deallocate the protection key, so that it can be reused by
pkey_alloc
.
Calling this function does not change the access rights of the freed
protection key. The calling thread and other threads may retain access
to it, even if it is subsequently allocated again. For this reason, it
is not recommended to call the pkey_free
function.
ENOSYS
The system does not implement memory protection keys.
EINVAL
The key argument is not a valid protection key.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
Similar to mprotect
, but also set the memory protection key for
the memory region to key
.
Some systems use memory protection keys to emulate certain combinations
of protection flags. Under such circumstances, specifying an
explicit protection key may behave as if additional flags have been
specified in protection, even though this does not happen with the
default protection key. For example, some systems can support
PROT_EXEC
-only mappings only with a default protection key, and
memory with a key which was allocated using pkey_alloc
will still
be readable if PROT_EXEC
is specified without PROT_READ
.
If key is -1, the default protection key is applied to the
mapping, just as if mprotect
had been called.
The pkey_mprotect
function returns 0 on success and
-1 on failure. The same errno
error conditions as for
mprotect
are defined for this function, with the following
addition:
EINVAL
The key argument is not -1 or a valid memory protection
key allocated using pkey_alloc
.
ENOSYS
The system does not implement memory protection keys, and key is not -1.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
Change the access rights of the current thread for memory pages with the protection key key to rights. If rights is zero, no additional access restrictions on top of the page protection flags are applied. Otherwise, rights is a combination of the following flags:
PKEY_DISABLE_WRITE
¶Subsequent attempts to write to memory with the specified protection key will fault.
PKEY_DISABLE_ACCESS
¶Subsequent attempts to write to or read from memory with the specified protection key will fault.
Operations not specified as flags are not restricted. In particular,
this means that the memory region will remain executable if it was
mapped with the PROT_EXEC
protection flag and
PKEY_DISABLE_ACCESS
has been specified.
Calling the pkey_set
function with a protection key which was not
allocated by pkey_alloc
results in undefined behavior. This
means that calling this function on systems which do not support memory
protection keys is undefined.
The pkey_set
function returns 0 on success and -1
on failure.
The following errno
error conditions are defined for this
function:
EINVAL
The system does not support the access rights restrictions expressed in the rights argument.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
Return the access rights of the current thread for memory pages with
protection key key. The return value is zero or a combination of
the PKEY_DISABLE_
* flags; see the pkey_set
function.
Calling the pkey_get
function with a protection key which was not
allocated by pkey_alloc
results in undefined behavior. This
means that calling this function on systems which do not support memory
protection keys is undefined.
Previous: Memory Protection, Up: Virtual Memory Allocation And Paging [Contents][Index]
You can tell the system to associate a particular virtual memory page with a real page frame and keep it that way — i.e., cause the page to be paged in if it isn’t already and mark it so it will never be paged out and consequently will never cause a page fault. This is called locking a page.
The functions in this chapter lock and unlock the calling process’ pages.
Next: Locked Memory Details, Up: Locking Pages [Contents][Index]
Because page faults cause paged out pages to be paged in transparently, a process rarely needs to be concerned about locking pages. However, there are two reasons people sometimes are:
A process that needs to lock pages for this reason probably also needs priority among other processes for use of the CPU. See Process CPU Priority And Scheduling.
In some cases, the programmer knows better than the system’s demand paging allocator which pages should remain in real memory to optimize system performance. In this case, locking pages can help.
Be aware that when you lock a page, that’s one fewer page frame that can be used to back other virtual memory (by the same or other processes), which can mean more page faults, which means the system runs more slowly. In fact, if you lock enough memory, some programs may not be able to run at all for lack of real memory.
Next: Functions To Lock And Unlock Pages, Previous: Why Lock Pages, Up: Locking Pages [Contents][Index]
A memory lock is associated with a virtual page, not a real frame. The paging rule is: If a frame backs at least one locked page, don’t page it out.
Memory locks do not stack. I.e., you can’t lock a particular page twice so that it has to be unlocked twice before it is truly unlocked. It is either locked or it isn’t.
A memory lock persists until the process that owns the memory explicitly unlocks it. (But process termination and exec cause the virtual memory to cease to exist, which you might say means it isn’t locked any more).
Memory locks are not inherited by child processes. (But note that on a modern Unix system, immediately after a fork, the parent’s and the child’s virtual address space are backed by the same real page frames, so the child enjoys the parent’s locks). See Creating a Process.
Because of its ability to impact other processes, only the superuser can lock a page. Any process can unlock its own page.
The system sets limits on the amount of memory a process can have locked and the amount of real memory it can have dedicated to it. See Limiting Resource Usage.
In Linux, locked pages aren’t as locked as you might think. Two virtual pages that are not shared memory can nonetheless be backed by the same real frame. The kernel does this in the name of efficiency when it knows both virtual pages contain identical data, and does it even if one or both of the virtual pages are locked.
But when a process modifies one of those pages, the kernel must get it a separate frame and fill it with the page’s data. This is known as a copy-on-write page fault. It takes a small amount of time and in a pathological case, getting that frame may require I/O.
To make sure this doesn’t happen to your program, don’t just lock the pages. Write to them as well, unless you know you won’t write to them ever. And to make sure you have pre-allocated frames for your stack, enter a scope that declares a C automatic variable larger than the maximum stack size you will need, set it to something, then return from its scope.
Previous: Locked Memory Details, Up: Locking Pages [Contents][Index]
The symbols in this section are declared in sys/mman.h. These functions are defined by POSIX.1b, but their availability depends on your kernel. If your kernel doesn’t allow these functions, they exist but always fail. They are available with a Linux kernel.
Portability Note: POSIX.1b requires that when the mlock
and munlock
functions are available, the file unistd.h
define the macro _POSIX_MEMLOCK_RANGE
and the file
limits.h
define the macro PAGESIZE
to be the size of a
memory page in bytes. It requires that when the mlockall
and
munlockall
functions are available, the unistd.h file
define the macro _POSIX_MEMLOCK
. The GNU C Library conforms to
this requirement.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
mlock
locks a range of the calling process’ virtual pages.
The range of memory starts at address addr and is len bytes long. Actually, since you must lock whole pages, it is the range of pages that include any part of the specified range.
When the function returns successfully, each of those pages is backed by (connected to) a real frame (is resident) and is marked to stay that way. This means the function may cause page-ins and have to wait for them.
When the function fails, it does not affect the lock status of any pages.
The return value is zero if the function succeeds. Otherwise, it is
-1
and errno
is set accordingly. errno
values
specific to this function are:
ENOMEM
EPERM
The calling process is not superuser.
EINVAL
len is not positive.
ENOSYS
The kernel does not provide mlock
capability.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This function is similar to mlock
. If flags is zero, a
call to mlock2
behaves exactly as the equivalent call to mlock
.
The flags argument must be a combination of zero or more of the following flags:
MLOCK_ONFAULT
¶Only those pages in the specified address range which are already in memory are locked immediately. Additional pages in the range are automatically locked in case of a page fault and allocation of memory.
Like mlock
, mlock2
returns zero on success and -1
on failure, setting errno
accordingly. Additional errno
values defined for mlock2
are:
EINVAL
The specified (non-zero) flags argument is not supported by this system.
You can lock all a process’ memory with mlockall
. You
unlock memory with munlock
or munlockall
.
To avoid all page faults in a C program, you have to use
mlockall
, because some of the memory a program uses is hidden
from the C code, e.g. the stack and automatic variables, and you
wouldn’t know what address to tell mlock
.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
munlock
unlocks a range of the calling process’ virtual pages.
munlock
is the inverse of mlock
and functions completely
analogously to mlock
, except that there is no EPERM
failure.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
mlockall
locks all the pages in a process’ virtual memory address
space, and/or any that are added to it in the future. This includes the
pages of the code, data and stack segment, as well as shared libraries,
user space kernel data, shared memory, and memory mapped files.
flags is a string of single bit flags represented by the following
macros. They tell mlockall
which of its functions you want. All
other bits must be zero.
MCL_CURRENT
¶Lock all pages which currently exist in the calling process’ virtual address space.
MCL_FUTURE
¶Set a mode such that any pages added to the process’ virtual address
space in the future will be locked from birth. This mode does not
affect future address spaces owned by the same process so exec, which
replaces a process’ address space, wipes out MCL_FUTURE
.
See Executing a File.
When the function returns successfully, and you specified
MCL_CURRENT
, all of the process’ pages are backed by (connected
to) real frames (they are resident) and are marked to stay that way.
This means the function may cause page-ins and have to wait for them.
When the process is in MCL_FUTURE
mode because it successfully
executed this function and specified MCL_CURRENT
, any system call
by the process that requires space be added to its virtual address space
fails with errno
= ENOMEM
if locking the additional space
would cause the process to exceed its locked page limit. In the case
that the address space addition that can’t be accommodated is stack
expansion, the stack expansion fails and the kernel sends a
SIGSEGV
signal to the process.
When the function fails, it does not affect the lock status of any pages or the future locking mode.
The return value is zero if the function succeeds. Otherwise, it is
-1
and errno
is set accordingly. errno
values
specific to this function are:
ENOMEM
EPERM
The calling process is not superuser.
EINVAL
Undefined bits in flags are not zero.
ENOSYS
The kernel does not provide mlockall
capability.
You can lock just specific pages with mlock
. You unlock pages
with munlockall
and munlock
.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
munlockall
unlocks every page in the calling process’ virtual
address space and turns off MCL_FUTURE
future locking mode.
The return value is zero if the function succeeds. Otherwise, it is
-1
and errno
is set accordingly. The only way this
function can fail is for generic reasons that all functions and system
calls can fail, so there are no specific errno
values.
Next: String and Array Utilities, Previous: Virtual Memory Allocation And Paging, Up: Main Menu [Contents][Index]
Programs that work with characters and strings often need to classify a character—is it alphabetic, is it a digit, is it whitespace, and so on—and perform case conversion operations on characters. The functions in the header file ctype.h are provided for this purpose.
Since the choice of locale and character set can alter the
classifications of particular character codes, all of these functions
are affected by the current locale. (More precisely, they are affected
by the locale currently selected for character classification—the
LC_CTYPE
category; see Locale Categories.)
The ISO C standard specifies two different sets of functions. The
one set works on char
type characters, the other one on
wchar_t
wide characters (see Introduction to Extended Characters).
Next: Case Conversion, Up: Character Handling [Contents][Index]
This section explains the library functions for classifying characters.
For example, isalpha
is the function to test for an alphabetic
character. It takes one argument, the character to test as an
unsigned char
value, and returns a nonzero integer if the
character is alphabetic, and zero otherwise. You would use it like
this:
if (isalpha ((unsigned char) c)) printf ("The character `%c' is alphabetic.\n", c);
Each of the functions in this section tests for membership in a
particular class of characters; each has a name starting with ‘is’.
Each of them takes one argument, which is a character to test. The
character argument must be in the value range of unsigned char
(0
to 255 for the GNU C Library). On a machine where the char
type is
signed, it may be necessary to cast the argument to unsigned
char
, or mask it with ‘& 0xff’. (On unsigned char
machines, this step is harmless, so portable code should always perform
it.) The ‘is’ functions return an int
which is treated as a
boolean value.
All ‘is’ functions accept the special value EOF
and return
zero. (Note that EOF
must not be cast to unsigned char
for this to work.)
As an extension, the GNU C Library accepts signed char
values as
‘is’ functions arguments in the range -128 to -2, and returns the
result for the corresponding unsigned character. However, as there
might be an actual character corresponding to the EOF
integer
constant, doing so may introduce bugs, and it is recommended to apply
the conversion to the unsigned character range as appropriate.
The attributes of any given character can vary between locales. See Locales and Internationalization, for more information on locales.
These functions are declared in the header file ctype.h.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
Returns true if c is a lower-case letter. The letter need not be from the Latin alphabet, any alphabet representable is valid.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
Returns true if c is an upper-case letter. The letter need not be from the Latin alphabet, any alphabet representable is valid.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
Returns true if c is an alphabetic character (a letter). If
islower
or isupper
is true of a character, then
isalpha
is also true.
In some locales, there may be additional characters for which
isalpha
is true—letters which are neither upper case nor lower
case. But in the standard "C"
locale, there are no such
additional characters.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
Returns true if c is a decimal digit (‘0’ through ‘9’).
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
Returns true if c is an alphanumeric character (a letter or
number); in other words, if either isalpha
or isdigit
is
true of a character, then isalnum
is also true.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
Returns true if c is a hexadecimal digit. Hexadecimal digits include the normal decimal digits ‘0’ through ‘9’ and the letters ‘A’ through ‘F’ and ‘a’ through ‘f’.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
Returns true if c is a punctuation character. This means any printing character that is not alphanumeric or a space character.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
Returns true if c is a whitespace character. In the standard
"C"
locale, isspace
returns true for only the standard
whitespace characters:
' '
space
'\f'
formfeed
'\n'
newline
'\r'
carriage return
'\t'
horizontal tab
'\v'
vertical tab
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
Returns true if c is a blank character; that is, a space or a tab. This function was originally a GNU extension, but was added in ISO C99.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
Returns true if c is a graphic character; that is, a character that has a glyph associated with it. The whitespace characters are not considered graphic.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
Returns true if c is a printing character. Printing characters include all the graphic characters, plus the space (‘ ’) character.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
Returns true if c is a control character (that is, a character that is not a printing character).
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
Returns true if c is a 7-bit unsigned char
value that fits
into the US/UK ASCII character set. This function is a BSD extension
and is also an SVID extension.
Next: Character class determination for wide characters, Previous: Classification of Characters, Up: Character Handling [Contents][Index]
This section explains the library functions for performing conversions
such as case mappings on characters. For example, toupper
converts any character to upper case if possible. If the character
can’t be converted, toupper
returns it unchanged.
These functions take one argument of type int
, which is the
character to convert, and return the converted character as an
int
. If the conversion is not applicable to the argument given,
the argument is returned unchanged.
Compatibility Note: In pre-ISO C dialects, instead of
returning the argument unchanged, these functions may fail when the
argument is not suitable for the conversion. Thus for portability, you
may need to write islower(c) ? toupper(c) : c
rather than just
toupper(c)
.
These functions are declared in the header file ctype.h.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
If c is an upper-case letter, tolower
returns the corresponding
lower-case letter. If c is not an upper-case letter,
c is returned unchanged.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
If c is a lower-case letter, toupper
returns the corresponding
upper-case letter. Otherwise c is returned unchanged.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This function converts c to a 7-bit unsigned char
value
that fits into the US/UK ASCII character set, by clearing the high-order
bits. This function is a BSD extension and is also an SVID extension.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This is identical to tolower
, and is provided for compatibility
with the SVID. See SVID (The System V Interface Description).
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This is identical to toupper
, and is provided for compatibility
with the SVID.
Next: Notes on using the wide character classes, Previous: Case Conversion, Up: Character Handling [Contents][Index]
Amendment 1 to ISO C90 defines functions to classify wide
characters. Although the original ISO C90 standard already defined
the type wchar_t
, no functions operating on them were defined.
The general design of the classification functions for wide characters
is more general. It allows extensions to the set of available
classifications, beyond those which are always available. The POSIX
standard specifies how extensions can be made, and this is already
implemented in the GNU C Library implementation of the localedef
program.
The character class functions are normally implemented with bitsets, with a bitset per character. For a given character, the appropriate bitset is read from a table and a test is performed as to whether a certain bit is set. Which bit is tested for is determined by the class.
For the wide character classification functions this is made visible.
There is a type classification type defined, a function to retrieve this
value for a given class, and a function to test whether a given
character is in this class, using the classification value. On top of
this the normal character classification functions as used for
char
objects can be defined.
The wctype_t
can hold a value which represents a character class.
The only defined way to generate such a value is by using the
wctype
function.
This type is defined in wctype.h.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe locale | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
wctype
returns a value representing a class of wide
characters which is identified by the string property. Besides
some standard properties each locale can define its own ones. In case
no property with the given name is known for the current locale
selected for the LC_CTYPE
category, the function returns zero.
The properties known in every locale are:
"alnum" | "alpha" | "cntrl" | "digit" |
"graph" | "lower" | "print" | "punct" |
"space" | "upper" | "xdigit" |
This function is declared in wctype.h.
To test the membership of a character to one of the non-standard classes the ISO C standard defines a completely new function.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This function returns a nonzero value if wc is in the character
class specified by desc. desc must previously be returned
by a successful call to wctype
.
This function is declared in wctype.h.
To make it easier to use the commonly-used classification functions,
they are defined in the C library. There is no need to use
wctype
if the property string is one of the known character
classes. In some situations it is desirable to construct the property
strings, and then it is important that wctype
can also handle the
standard classes.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe locale | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This function returns a nonzero value if wc is an alphanumeric
character (a letter or number); in other words, if either iswalpha
or iswdigit
is true of a character, then iswalnum
is also
true.
This function can be implemented using
iswctype (wc, wctype ("alnum"))
It is declared in wctype.h.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe locale | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
Returns true if wc is an alphabetic character (a letter). If
iswlower
or iswupper
is true of a character, then
iswalpha
is also true.
In some locales, there may be additional characters for which
iswalpha
is true—letters which are neither upper case nor lower
case. But in the standard "C"
locale, there are no such
additional characters.
This function can be implemented using
iswctype (wc, wctype ("alpha"))
It is declared in wctype.h.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe locale | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
Returns true if wc is a control character (that is, a character that is not a printing character).
This function can be implemented using
iswctype (wc, wctype ("cntrl"))
It is declared in wctype.h.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe locale | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
Returns true if wc is a digit (e.g., ‘0’ through ‘9’). Please note that this function does not only return a nonzero value for decimal digits, but for all kinds of digits. A consequence is that code like the following will not work unconditionally for wide characters:
n = 0; while (iswdigit (*wc)) { n *= 10; n += *wc++ - L'0'; }
This function can be implemented using
iswctype (wc, wctype ("digit"))
It is declared in wctype.h.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe locale | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
Returns true if wc is a graphic character; that is, a character that has a glyph associated with it. The whitespace characters are not considered graphic.
This function can be implemented using
iswctype (wc, wctype ("graph"))
It is declared in wctype.h.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe locale | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
Returns true if wc is a lower-case letter. The letter need not be from the Latin alphabet, any alphabet representable is valid.
This function can be implemented using
iswctype (wc, wctype ("lower"))
It is declared in wctype.h.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe locale | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
Returns true if wc is a printing character. Printing characters include all the graphic characters, plus the space (‘ ’) character.
This function can be implemented using
iswctype (wc, wctype ("print"))
It is declared in wctype.h.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe locale | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
Returns true if wc is a punctuation character. This means any printing character that is not alphanumeric or a space character.
This function can be implemented using
iswctype (wc, wctype ("punct"))
It is declared in wctype.h.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe locale | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
Returns true if wc is a whitespace character. In the standard
"C"
locale, iswspace
returns true for only the standard
whitespace characters:
L' '
space
L'\f'
formfeed
L'\n'
newline
L'\r'
carriage return
L'\t'
horizontal tab
L'\v'
vertical tab
This function can be implemented using
iswctype (wc, wctype ("space"))
It is declared in wctype.h.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe locale | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
Returns true if wc is an upper-case letter. The letter need not be from the Latin alphabet, any alphabet representable is valid.
This function can be implemented using
iswctype (wc, wctype ("upper"))
It is declared in wctype.h.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe locale | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
Returns true if wc is a hexadecimal digit. Hexadecimal digits include the normal decimal digits ‘0’ through ‘9’ and the letters ‘A’ through ‘F’ and ‘a’ through ‘f’.
This function can be implemented using
iswctype (wc, wctype ("xdigit"))
It is declared in wctype.h.
The GNU C Library also provides a function which is not defined in the ISO C standard but which is available as a version for single byte characters as well.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe locale | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
Returns true if wc is a blank character; that is, a space or a tab. This function was originally a GNU extension, but was added in ISO C99. It is declared in wchar.h.
Next: Mapping of wide characters., Previous: Character class determination for wide characters, Up: Character Handling [Contents][Index]
The first note is probably not astonishing but still occasionally a
cause of problems. The iswXXX
functions can be implemented
using macros and in fact, the GNU C Library does this. They are still
available as real functions but when the wctype.h header is
included the macros will be used. This is the same as the
char
type versions of these functions.
The second note covers something new. It can be best illustrated by a (real-world) example. The first piece of code is an excerpt from the original code. It is truncated a bit but the intention should be clear.
int is_in_class (int c, const char *class) { if (strcmp (class, "alnum") == 0) return isalnum (c); if (strcmp (class, "alpha") == 0) return isalpha (c); if (strcmp (class, "cntrl") == 0) return iscntrl (c); … return 0; }
Now, with the wctype
and iswctype
you can avoid the
if
cascades, but rewriting the code as follows is wrong:
int is_in_class (int c, const char *class) { wctype_t desc = wctype (class); return desc ? iswctype ((wint_t) c, desc) : 0; }
The problem is that it is not guaranteed that the wide character representation of a single-byte character can be found using casting. In fact, usually this fails miserably. The correct solution to this problem is to write the code as follows:
int is_in_class (int c, const char *class) { wctype_t desc = wctype (class); return desc ? iswctype (btowc (c), desc) : 0; }
See Converting Single Characters, for more information on btowc
.
Note that this change probably does not improve the performance
of the program a lot since the wctype
function still has to make
the string comparisons. It gets really interesting if the
is_in_class
function is called more than once for the
same class name. In this case the variable desc could be computed
once and reused for all the calls. Therefore the above form of the
function is probably not the final one.
Previous: Notes on using the wide character classes, Up: Character Handling [Contents][Index]
The classification functions are also generalized by the ISO C
standard. Instead of just allowing the two standard mappings, a
locale can contain others. Again, the localedef
program
already supports generating such locale data files.
This data type is defined as a scalar type which can hold a value
representing the locale-dependent character mapping. There is no way to
construct such a value apart from using the return value of the
wctrans
function.
This type is defined in wctype.h.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe locale | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The wctrans
function has to be used to find out whether a named
mapping is defined in the current locale selected for the
LC_CTYPE
category. If the returned value is non-zero, you can use
it afterwards in calls to towctrans
. If the return value is
zero no such mapping is known in the current locale.
Beside locale-specific mappings there are two mappings which are guaranteed to be available in every locale:
"tolower" | "toupper" |
These functions are declared in wctype.h.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
towctrans
maps the input character wc
according to the rules of the mapping for which desc is a
descriptor, and returns the value it finds. desc must be
obtained by a successful call to wctrans
.
This function is declared in wctype.h.
For the generally available mappings, the ISO C standard defines
convenient shortcuts so that it is not necessary to call wctrans
for them.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe locale | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
If wc is an upper-case letter, towlower
returns the corresponding
lower-case letter. If wc is not an upper-case letter,
wc is returned unchanged.
towlower
can be implemented using
towctrans (wc, wctrans ("tolower"))
This function is declared in wctype.h.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe locale | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
If wc is a lower-case letter, towupper
returns the corresponding
upper-case letter. Otherwise wc is returned unchanged.
towupper
can be implemented using
towctrans (wc, wctrans ("toupper"))
This function is declared in wctype.h.
The same warnings given in the last section for the use of the wide
character classification functions apply here. It is not possible to
simply cast a char
type value to a wint_t
and use it as an
argument to towctrans
calls.
Next: Character Set Handling, Previous: Character Handling, Up: Main Menu [Contents][Index]
Operations on strings (null-terminated byte sequences) are an important part of
many programs. The GNU C Library provides an extensive set of string
utility functions, including functions for copying, concatenating,
comparing, and searching strings. Many of these functions can also
operate on arbitrary regions of storage; for example, the memcpy
function can be used to copy the contents of any kind of array.
It’s fairly common for beginning C programmers to “reinvent the wheel” by duplicating this functionality in their own code, but it pays to become familiar with the library functions and to make use of them, since this offers benefits in maintenance, efficiency, and portability.
For instance, you could easily compare one string to another in two
lines of C code, but if you use the built-in strcmp
function,
you’re less likely to make a mistake. And, since these library
functions are typically highly optimized, your program may run faster
too.
Next: String and Array Conventions, Up: String and Array Utilities [Contents][Index]
This section is a quick summary of string concepts for beginning C programmers. It describes how strings are represented in C and some common pitfalls. If you are already familiar with this material, you can skip this section.
A string is a null-terminated array of bytes of type char
,
including the terminating null byte. String-valued
variables are usually declared to be pointers of type char *
.
Such variables do not include space for the contents of a string; that has
to be stored somewhere else—in an array variable, a string constant,
or dynamically allocated memory (see Allocating Storage For Program Data). It’s up to
you to store the address of the chosen memory space into the pointer
variable. Alternatively you can store a null pointer in the
pointer variable. The null pointer does not point anywhere, so
attempting to reference the string it points to gets an error.
A multibyte character is a sequence of one or more bytes that
represents a single character using the locale’s encoding scheme; a
null byte always represents the null character. A multibyte
string is a string that consists entirely of multibyte
characters. In contrast, a wide string is a null-terminated
sequence of wchar_t
objects. A wide-string variable is usually
declared to be a pointer of type wchar_t *
, by analogy with
string variables and char *
. See Introduction to Extended Characters.
By convention, the null byte, '\0'
,
marks the end of a string and the null wide character,
L'\0'
, marks the end of a wide string. For example, in
testing to see whether the char *
variable p points to a
null byte marking the end of a string, you can write
!*p
or *p == '\0'
.
A null byte is quite different conceptually from a null pointer,
although both are represented by the integer constant 0
.
A string literal appears in C program source as a multibyte
string between double-quote characters (‘"’). If the
initial double-quote character is immediately preceded by a capital
‘L’ (ell) character (as in L"foo"
), it is a wide string
literal. String literals can also contribute to string
concatenation: "a" "b"
is the same as "ab"
.
For wide strings one can use either
L"a" L"b"
or L"a" "b"
. Modification of string literals is
not allowed by the GNU C compiler, because literals are placed in
read-only storage.
Arrays that are declared const
cannot be modified
either. It’s generally good style to declare non-modifiable string
pointers to be of type const char *
, since this often allows the
C compiler to detect accidental modifications as well as providing some
amount of documentation about what your program intends to do with the
string.
The amount of memory allocated for a byte array may extend past the null byte that marks the end of the string that the array contains. In this document, the term allocated size is always used to refer to the total amount of memory allocated for an array, while the term length refers to the number of bytes up to (but not including) the terminating null byte. Wide strings are similar, except their sizes and lengths count wide characters, not bytes.
A notorious source of program bugs is trying to put more bytes into a string than fit in its allocated size. When writing code that extends strings or moves bytes into a pre-allocated array, you should be very careful to keep track of the length of the string and make explicit checks for overflowing the array. Many of the library functions do not do this for you! Remember also that you need to allocate an extra byte to hold the null byte that marks the end of the string.
Originally strings were sequences of bytes where each byte represented a single character. This is still true today if the strings are encoded using a single-byte character encoding. Things are different if the strings are encoded using a multibyte encoding (for more information on encodings see Introduction to Extended Characters). There is no difference in the programming interface for these two kind of strings; the programmer has to be aware of this and interpret the byte sequences accordingly.
But since there is no separate interface taking care of these
differences the byte-based string functions are sometimes hard to use.
Since the count parameters of these functions specify bytes a call to
memcpy
could cut a multibyte character in the middle and put an
incomplete (and therefore unusable) byte sequence in the target buffer.
To avoid these problems later versions of the ISO C standard introduce a second set of functions which are operating on wide characters (see Introduction to Extended Characters). These functions don’t have the problems the single-byte versions have since every wide character is a legal, interpretable value. This does not mean that cutting wide strings at arbitrary points is without problems. It normally is for alphabet-based languages (except for non-normalized text) but languages based on syllables still have the problem that more than one wide character is necessary to complete a logical unit. This is a higher level problem which the C library functions are not designed to solve. But it is at least good that no invalid byte sequences can be created. Also, the higher level functions can also much more easily operate on wide characters than on multibyte characters so that a common strategy is to use wide characters internally whenever text is more than simply copied.
The remaining of this chapter will discuss the functions for handling wide strings in parallel with the discussion of strings since there is almost always an exact equivalent available.
Next: String Length, Previous: Representation of Strings, Up: String and Array Utilities [Contents][Index]
This chapter describes both functions that work on arbitrary arrays or blocks of memory, and functions that are specific to strings and wide strings.
Functions that operate on arbitrary blocks of memory have names
beginning with ‘mem’ and ‘wmem’ (such as memcpy
and
wmemcpy
) and invariably take an argument which specifies the size
(in bytes and wide characters respectively) of the block of memory to
operate on. The array arguments and return values for these functions
have type void *
or wchar_t
. As a matter of style, the
elements of the arrays used with the ‘mem’ functions are referred
to as “bytes”. You can pass any kind of pointer to these functions,
and the sizeof
operator is useful in computing the value for the
size argument. Parameters to the ‘wmem’ functions must be of type
wchar_t *
. These functions are not really usable with anything
but arrays of this type.
In contrast, functions that operate specifically on strings and wide
strings have names beginning with ‘str’ and ‘wcs’
respectively (such as strcpy
and wcscpy
) and look for a
terminating null byte or null wide character instead of requiring an explicit
size argument to be passed. (Some of these functions accept a specified
maximum length, but they also check for premature termination.)
The array arguments and return values for these
functions have type char *
and wchar_t *
respectively, and
the array elements are referred to as “bytes” and “wide
characters”.
In many cases, there are both ‘mem’ and ‘str’/‘wcs’ versions of a function. The one that is more appropriate to use depends on the exact situation. When your program is manipulating arbitrary arrays or blocks of storage, then you should always use the ‘mem’ functions. On the other hand, when you are manipulating strings it is usually more convenient to use the ‘str’/‘wcs’ functions, unless you already know the length of the string in advance. The ‘wmem’ functions should be used for wide character arrays with known size.
Some of the memory and string functions take single characters as
arguments. Since a value of type char
is automatically promoted
into a value of type int
when used as a parameter, the functions
are declared with int
as the type of the parameter in question.
In case of the wide character functions the situation is similar: the
parameter type for a single wide character is wint_t
and not
wchar_t
. This would for many implementations not be necessary
since wchar_t
is large enough to not be automatically
promoted, but since the ISO C standard does not require such a
choice of types the wint_t
type is used.
Next: Copying Strings and Arrays, Previous: String and Array Conventions, Up: String and Array Utilities [Contents][Index]
You can get the length of a string using the strlen
function.
This function is declared in the header file string.h.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The strlen
function returns the length of the
string s in bytes. (In other words, it returns the offset of the
terminating null byte within the array.)
For example,
strlen ("hello, world") ⇒ 12
When applied to an array, the strlen
function returns
the length of the string stored there, not its allocated size. You can
get the allocated size of the array that holds a string using
the sizeof
operator:
char string[32] = "hello, world"; sizeof (string) ⇒ 32 strlen (string) ⇒ 12
But beware, this will not work unless string is the array itself, not a pointer to it. For example:
char string[32] = "hello, world";
char *ptr = string;
sizeof (string)
⇒ 32
sizeof (ptr)
⇒ 4 /* (on a machine with 4 byte pointers) */
This is an easy mistake to make when you are working with functions that take string arguments; those arguments are always pointers, not arrays.
It must also be noted that for multibyte encoded strings the return
value does not have to correspond to the number of characters in the
string. To get this value the string can be converted to wide
characters and wcslen
can be used or something like the following
code can be used:
/* The input is instring
. The length is expected inn
. */ { mbstate_t t; char *scopy = string; /* In initial state. */ memset (&t, '\0', sizeof (t)); /* Determine number of characters. */ n = mbsrtowcs (NULL, &scopy, strlen (scopy), &t); }
This is cumbersome to do so if the number of characters (as opposed to bytes) is needed often it is better to work with wide characters.
The wide character equivalent is declared in wchar.h.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The wcslen
function is the wide character equivalent to
strlen
. The return value is the number of wide characters in the
wide string pointed to by ws (this is also the offset of
the terminating null wide character of ws).
Since there are no multi wide character sequences making up one wide character the return value is not only the offset in the array, it is also the number of wide characters.
This function was introduced in Amendment 1 to ISO C90.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
If the array s of size maxlen contains a null byte,
the strnlen
function returns the length of the string s in
bytes. Otherwise it
returns maxlen. Therefore this function is equivalent to
(strlen (s) < maxlen ? strlen (s) : maxlen)
but it
is more efficient and works even if s is not null-terminated so
long as maxlen does not exceed the size of s’s array.
char string[32] = "hello, world"; strnlen (string, 32) ⇒ 12 strnlen (string, 5) ⇒ 5
This function is a GNU extension and is declared in string.h.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
wcsnlen
is the wide character equivalent to strnlen
. The
maxlen parameter specifies the maximum number of wide characters.
This function is a GNU extension and is declared in wchar.h.
Next: Concatenating Strings, Previous: String Length, Up: String and Array Utilities [Contents][Index]
You can use the functions described in this section to copy the contents of strings, wide strings, and arrays. The ‘str’ and ‘mem’ functions are declared in string.h while the ‘w’ functions are declared in wchar.h.
A helpful way to remember the ordering of the arguments to the functions in this section is that it corresponds to an assignment expression, with the destination array specified to the left of the source array. Most of these functions return the address of the destination array; a few return the address of the destination’s terminating null, or of just past the destination.
Most of these functions do not work properly if the source and destination arrays overlap. For example, if the beginning of the destination array overlaps the end of the source array, the original contents of that part of the source array may get overwritten before it is copied. Even worse, in the case of the string functions, the null byte marking the end of the string may be lost, and the copy function might get stuck in a loop trashing all the memory allocated to your program.
All functions that have problems copying between overlapping arrays are
explicitly identified in this manual. In addition to functions in this
section, there are a few others like sprintf
(see Formatted Output Functions) and scanf
(see Formatted Input Functions).
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The memcpy
function copies size bytes from the object
beginning at from into the object beginning at to. The
behavior of this function is undefined if the two arrays to and
from overlap; use memmove
instead if overlapping is possible.
The value returned by memcpy
is the value of to.
Here is an example of how you might use memcpy
to copy the
contents of an array:
struct foo *oldarray, *newarray; int arraysize; … memcpy (new, old, arraysize * sizeof (struct foo));
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The wmemcpy
function copies size wide characters from the object
beginning at wfrom into the object beginning at wto. The
behavior of this function is undefined if the two arrays wto and
wfrom overlap; use wmemmove
instead if overlapping is possible.
The following is a possible implementation of wmemcpy
but there
are more optimizations possible.
wchar_t * wmemcpy (wchar_t *restrict wto, const wchar_t *restrict wfrom, size_t size) { return (wchar_t *) memcpy (wto, wfrom, size * sizeof (wchar_t)); }
The value returned by wmemcpy
is the value of wto.
This function was introduced in Amendment 1 to ISO C90.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The mempcpy
function is nearly identical to the memcpy
function. It copies size bytes from the object beginning at
from
into the object pointed to by to. But instead of
returning the value of to it returns a pointer to the byte
following the last written byte in the object beginning at to.
I.e., the value is ((void *) ((char *) to + size))
.
This function is useful in situations where a number of objects shall be copied to consecutive memory positions.
void * combine (void *o1, size_t s1, void *o2, size_t s2) { void *result = malloc (s1 + s2); if (result != NULL) mempcpy (mempcpy (result, o1, s1), o2, s2); return result; }
This function is a GNU extension.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The wmempcpy
function is nearly identical to the wmemcpy
function. It copies size wide characters from the object
beginning at wfrom
into the object pointed to by wto. But
instead of returning the value of wto it returns a pointer to the
wide character following the last written wide character in the object
beginning at wto. I.e., the value is wto + size
.
This function is useful in situations where a number of objects shall be copied to consecutive memory positions.
The following is a possible implementation of wmemcpy
but there
are more optimizations possible.
wchar_t * wmempcpy (wchar_t *restrict wto, const wchar_t *restrict wfrom, size_t size) { return (wchar_t *) mempcpy (wto, wfrom, size * sizeof (wchar_t)); }
This function is a GNU extension.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
memmove
copies the size bytes at from into the
size bytes at to, even if those two blocks of space
overlap. In the case of overlap, memmove
is careful to copy the
original values of the bytes in the block at from, including those
bytes which also belong to the block at to.
The value returned by memmove
is the value of to.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
wmemmove
copies the size wide characters at wfrom
into the size wide characters at wto, even if those two
blocks of space overlap. In the case of overlap, wmemmove
is
careful to copy the original values of the wide characters in the block
at wfrom, including those wide characters which also belong to the
block at wto.
The following is a possible implementation of wmemcpy
but there
are more optimizations possible.
wchar_t * wmempcpy (wchar_t *restrict wto, const wchar_t *restrict wfrom, size_t size) { return (wchar_t *) mempcpy (wto, wfrom, size * sizeof (wchar_t)); }
The value returned by wmemmove
is the value of wto.
This function is a GNU extension.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This function copies no more than size bytes from from to to, stopping if a byte matching c is found. The return value is a pointer into to one byte past where c was copied, or a null pointer if no byte matching c appeared in the first size bytes of from.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This function copies the value of c (converted to an
unsigned char
) into each of the first size bytes of the
object beginning at block. It returns the value of block.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This function copies the value of wc into each of the first size wide characters of the object beginning at block. It returns the value of block.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This copies bytes from the string from (up to and including
the terminating null byte) into the string to. Like
memcpy
, this function has undefined results if the strings
overlap. The return value is the value of to.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This copies wide characters from the wide string wfrom (up to and
including the terminating null wide character) into the string
wto. Like wmemcpy
, this function has undefined results if
the strings overlap. The return value is the value of wto.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Unsafe heap | AC-Unsafe mem | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This function copies the string s into a newly
allocated string. The string is allocated using malloc
; see
Unconstrained Allocation. If malloc
cannot allocate space
for the new string, strdup
returns a null pointer. Otherwise it
returns a pointer to the new string.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Unsafe heap | AC-Unsafe mem | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This function copies the wide string ws
into a newly allocated string. The string is allocated using
malloc
; see Unconstrained Allocation. If malloc
cannot allocate space for the new string, wcsdup
returns a null
pointer. Otherwise it returns a pointer to the new wide string.
This function is a GNU extension.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This function is like strcpy
, except that it returns a pointer to
the end of the string to (that is, the address of the terminating
null byte to + strlen (from)
) rather than the beginning.
For example, this program uses stpcpy
to concatenate ‘foo’
and ‘bar’ to produce ‘foobar’, which it then prints.
#include <string.h> #include <stdio.h> int main (void) { char buffer[10]; char *to = buffer; to = stpcpy (to, "foo"); to = stpcpy (to, "bar"); puts (buffer); return 0; }
This function is part of POSIX.1-2008 and later editions, but was available in the GNU C Library and other systems as an extension long before it was standardized.
Its behavior is undefined if the strings overlap. The function is declared in string.h.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This function is like wcscpy
, except that it returns a pointer to
the end of the string wto (that is, the address of the terminating
null wide character wto + wcslen (wfrom)
) rather than the beginning.
This function is not part of ISO or POSIX but was found useful while developing the GNU C Library itself.
The behavior of wcpcpy
is undefined if the strings overlap.
wcpcpy
is a GNU extension and is declared in wchar.h.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This macro is similar to strdup
but allocates the new string
using alloca
instead of malloc
(see Automatic Storage with Variable Size). This means of course the returned string has the same
limitations as any block of memory allocated using alloca
.
For obvious reasons strdupa
is implemented only as a macro;
you cannot get the address of this function. Despite this limitation
it is a useful function. The following code shows a situation where
using malloc
would be a lot more expensive.
#include <paths.h> #include <string.h> #include <stdio.h> const char path[] = _PATH_STDPATH; int main (void) { char *wr_path = strdupa (path); char *cp = strtok (wr_path, ":"); while (cp != NULL) { puts (cp); cp = strtok (NULL, ":"); } return 0; }
Please note that calling strtok
using path directly is
invalid. It is also not allowed to call strdupa
in the argument
list of strtok
since strdupa
uses alloca
(see Automatic Storage with Variable Size) can interfere with the parameter
passing.
This function is only available if GNU CC is used.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This is a partially obsolete alternative for memmove
, derived from
BSD. Note that it is not quite equivalent to memmove
, because the
arguments are not in the same order and there is no return value.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This is a partially obsolete alternative for memset
, derived from
BSD. Note that it is not as general as memset
, because the only
value it can store is zero.
Next: Truncating Strings while Copying, Previous: Copying Strings and Arrays, Up: String and Array Utilities [Contents][Index]
The functions described in this section concatenate the contents of a string or wide string to another. They follow the string-copying functions in their conventions. See Copying Strings and Arrays. ‘strcat’ is declared in the header file string.h while ‘wcscat’ is declared in wchar.h.
As noted below, these functions are problematic as their callers may have performance issues.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The strcat
function is similar to strcpy
, except that the
bytes from from are concatenated or appended to the end of
to, instead of overwriting it. That is, the first byte from
from overwrites the null byte marking the end of to.
An equivalent definition for strcat
would be:
char * strcat (char *restrict to, const char *restrict from) { strcpy (to + strlen (to), from); return to; }
This function has undefined results if the strings overlap.
As noted below, this function has significant performance issues.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The wcscat
function is similar to wcscpy
, except that the
wide characters from wfrom are concatenated or appended to the end of
wto, instead of overwriting it. That is, the first wide character from
wfrom overwrites the null wide character marking the end of wto.
An equivalent definition for wcscat
would be:
wchar_t * wcscat (wchar_t *wto, const wchar_t *wfrom) { wcscpy (wto + wcslen (wto), wfrom); return wto; }
This function has undefined results if the strings overlap.
As noted below, this function has significant performance issues.
Programmers using the strcat
or wcscat
functions (or the
strlcat
, strncat
and wcsncat
functions defined in
a later section, for that matter)
can easily be recognized as lazy and reckless. In almost all situations
the lengths of the participating strings are known (it better should be
since how can one otherwise ensure the allocated size of the buffer is
sufficient?) Or at least, one could know them if one keeps track of the
results of the various function calls. But then it is very inefficient
to use strcat
/wcscat
. A lot of time is wasted finding the
end of the destination string so that the actual copying can start.
This is a common example:
/* This function concatenates arbitrarily many strings. The last
parameter must be NULL
. */
char *
concat (const char *str, …)
{
va_list ap, ap2;
size_t total = 1;
va_start (ap, str);
va_copy (ap2, ap);
/* Determine how much space we need. */
for (const char *s = str; s != NULL; s = va_arg (ap, const char *))
total += strlen (s);
va_end (ap);
char *result = malloc (total);
if (result != NULL)
{
result[0] = '\0';
/* Copy the strings. */
for (s = str; s != NULL; s = va_arg (ap2, const char *))
strcat (result, s);
}
va_end (ap2);
return result;
}
This looks quite simple, especially the second loop where the strings are actually copied. But these innocent lines hide a major performance penalty. Just imagine that ten strings of 100 bytes each have to be concatenated. For the second string we search the already stored 100 bytes for the end of the string so that we can append the next string. For all strings in total the comparisons necessary to find the end of the intermediate results sums up to 5500! If we combine the copying with the search for the allocation we can write this function more efficiently:
char * concat (const char *str, …) { size_t allocated = 100; char *result = malloc (allocated); if (result != NULL) { va_list ap; size_t resultlen = 0; char *newp; va_start (ap, str); for (const char *s = str; s != NULL; s = va_arg (ap, const char *)) { size_t len = strlen (s); /* Resize the allocated memory if necessary. */ if (resultlen + len + 1 > allocated) { allocated += len; newp = reallocarray (result, allocated, 2); allocated *= 2; if (newp == NULL) { free (result); return NULL; } result = newp; } memcpy (result + resultlen, s, len); resultlen += len; } /* Terminate the result string. */ result[resultlen++] = '\0'; /* Resize memory to the optimal size. */ newp = realloc (result, resultlen); if (newp != NULL) result = newp; va_end (ap); } return result; }
With a bit more knowledge about the input strings one could fine-tune
the memory allocation. The difference we are pointing to here is that
we don’t use strcat
anymore. We always keep track of the length
of the current intermediate result so we can save ourselves the search for the
end of the string and use mempcpy
. Please note that we also
don’t use stpcpy
which might seem more natural since we are handling
strings. But this is not necessary since we already know the
length of the string and therefore can use the faster memory copying
function. The example would work for wide characters the same way.
Whenever a programmer feels the need to use strcat
she or he
should think twice and look through the program to see whether the code cannot
be rewritten to take advantage of already calculated results.
The related functions strlcat
, strncat
,
wcscat
and wcsncat
are almost always unnecessary, too.
Again: it is almost always unnecessary to use functions like strcat
.
Next: String/Array Comparison, Previous: Concatenating Strings, Up: String and Array Utilities [Contents][Index]
The functions described in this section copy or concatenate the possibly-truncated contents of a string or array to another, and similarly for wide strings. They follow the string-copying functions in their header conventions. See Copying Strings and Arrays. The ‘str’ functions are declared in the header file string.h and the ‘wc’ functions are declared in the file wchar.h.
As noted below, these functions are problematic as their callers may have truncation-related bugs and performance issues.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This function is similar to strcpy
but always copies exactly
size bytes into to.
If from does not contain a null byte in its first size
bytes, strncpy
copies just the first size bytes. In this
case no null terminator is written into to.
Otherwise from must be a string with length less than
size. In this case strncpy
copies all of from,
followed by enough null bytes to add up to size bytes in all.
The behavior of strncpy
is undefined if the strings overlap.
This function was designed for now-rarely-used arrays consisting of non-null bytes followed by zero or more null bytes. It needs to set all size bytes of the destination, even when size is much greater than the length of from. As noted below, this function is generally a poor choice for processing strings.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This function is similar to wcscpy
but always copies exactly
size wide characters into wto.
If wfrom does not contain a null wide character in its first
size wide characters, then wcsncpy
copies just the first
size wide characters. In this case no null terminator is
written into wto.
Otherwise wfrom must be a wide string with length less than
size. In this case wcsncpy
copies all of wfrom,
followed by enough null wide characters to add up to size wide
characters in all.
The behavior of wcsncpy
is undefined if the strings overlap.
This function is the wide-character counterpart of strncpy
and
suffers from most of the problems that strncpy
does. For
example, as noted below, this function is generally a poor choice for
processing strings.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Unsafe heap | AC-Unsafe mem | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This function is similar to strdup
but always copies at most
size bytes into the newly allocated string.
If the length of s is more than size, then strndup
copies just the first size bytes and adds a closing null byte.
Otherwise all bytes are copied and the string is terminated.
This function differs from strncpy
in that it always terminates
the destination string.
As noted below, this function is generally a poor choice for processing strings.
strndup
is a GNU extension.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This function is similar to strndup
but like strdupa
it
allocates the new string using alloca
see Automatic Storage with Variable Size. The same advantages and limitations of strdupa
are
valid for strndupa
, too.
This function is implemented only as a macro, just like strdupa
.
Just as strdupa
this macro also must not be used inside the
parameter list in a function call.
As noted below, this function is generally a poor choice for processing strings.
strndupa
is only available if GNU CC is used.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This function is similar to stpcpy
but copies always exactly
size bytes into to.
If the length of from is more than size, then stpncpy
copies just the first size bytes and returns a pointer to the
byte directly following the one which was copied last. Note that in
this case there is no null terminator written into to.
If the length of from is less than size, then stpncpy
copies all of from, followed by enough null bytes to add up
to size bytes in all. This behavior is rarely useful, but it
is implemented to be useful in contexts where this behavior of the
strncpy
is used. stpncpy
returns a pointer to the
first written null byte.
This function is not part of ISO or POSIX but was found useful while developing the GNU C Library itself.
Its behavior is undefined if the strings overlap. The function is declared in string.h.
As noted below, this function is generally a poor choice for processing strings.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This function is similar to wcpcpy
but copies always exactly
wsize wide characters into wto.
If the length of wfrom is more than size, then
wcpncpy
copies just the first size wide characters and
returns a pointer to the wide character directly following the last
non-null wide character which was copied last. Note that in this case
there is no null terminator written into wto.
If the length of wfrom is less than size, then wcpncpy
copies all of wfrom, followed by enough null wide characters to add up
to size wide characters in all. This behavior is rarely useful, but it
is implemented to be useful in contexts where this behavior of the
wcsncpy
is used. wcpncpy
returns a pointer to the
first written null wide character.
This function is not part of ISO or POSIX but was found useful while developing the GNU C Library itself.
Its behavior is undefined if the strings overlap.
As noted below, this function is generally a poor choice for processing strings.
wcpncpy
is a GNU extension.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This function is like strcat
except that not more than size
bytes from from are appended to the end of to, and
from need not be null-terminated. A single null byte is also
always appended to to, so the total
allocated size of to must be at least size + 1
bytes
longer than its initial length.
The strncat
function could be implemented like this:
char * strncat (char *to, const char *from, size_t size) { size_t len = strlen (to); memcpy (to + len, from, strnlen (from, size)); to[len + strnlen (from, size)] = '\0'; return to; }
The behavior of strncat
is undefined if the strings overlap.
As a companion to strncpy
, strncat
was designed for
now-rarely-used arrays consisting of non-null bytes followed by zero
or more null bytes. As noted below, this function is generally a poor
choice for processing strings. Also, this function has significant
performance issues. See Concatenating Strings.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This function is like wcscat
except that not more than size
wide characters from from are appended to the end of to,
and from need not be null-terminated. A single null wide
character is also always appended to to, so the total allocated
size of to must be at least wcsnlen (wfrom,
size) + 1
wide characters longer than its initial length.
The wcsncat
function could be implemented like this:
wchar_t * wcsncat (wchar_t *restrict wto, const wchar_t *restrict wfrom, size_t size) { size_t len = wcslen (wto); memcpy (wto + len, wfrom, wcsnlen (wfrom, size) * sizeof (wchar_t)); wto[len + wcsnlen (wfrom, size)] = L'\0'; return wto; }
The behavior of wcsncat
is undefined if the strings overlap.
As noted below, this function is generally a poor choice for processing strings. Also, this function has significant performance issues. See Concatenating Strings.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This function copies the string from to the destination array to, limiting the result’s size (including the null terminator) to size. The caller should ensure that size includes room for the result’s terminating null byte.
If size is greater than the length of the string from,
this function copies the non-null bytes of the string
from to the destination array to,
and terminates the copy with a null byte. Like other
string functions such as strcpy
, but unlike strncpy
, any
remaining bytes in the destination array remain unchanged.
If size is nonzero and less than or equal to the the length of the string from, this function copies only the first ‘size - 1’ bytes to the destination array to, and writes a terminating null byte to the last byte of the array.
This function returns the length of the string from. This means that truncation occurs if and only if the returned value is greater than or equal to size.
The behavior is undefined if to or from is a null pointer, or if the destination array’s size is less than size, or if the string from overlaps the first size bytes of the destination array.
As noted below, this function is generally a poor choice for processing strings. Also, this function has a performance issue, as its time cost is proportional to the length of from even when size is small.
This function is derived from OpenBSD 2.4.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This function is a variant of strlcpy
for wide strings.
The size argument counts the length of the destination buffer in
wide characters (and not bytes).
This function is derived from BSD.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This function appends the string from to the string to, limiting the result’s total size (including the null terminator) to size. The caller should ensure that size includes room for the result’s terminating null byte.
This function copies as much as possible of the string from into the array at to of size bytes, starting at the terminating null byte of the original string to. In effect, this appends the string from to the string to. Although the resulting string will contain a null terminator, it can be truncated (not all bytes in from may be copied).
This function returns the sum of the original length of to and the length of from. This means that truncation occurs if and only if the returned value is greater than or equal to size.
The behavior is undefined if to or from is a null pointer, or if the destination array’s size is less than size, or if the destination array does not contain a null byte in its first size bytes, or if the string from overlaps the first size bytes of the destination array.
As noted below, this function is generally a poor choice for processing strings. Also, this function has significant performance issues. See Concatenating Strings.
This function is derived from OpenBSD 2.4.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This function is a variant of strlcat
for wide strings.
The size argument counts the length of the destination buffer in
wide characters (and not bytes).
This function is derived from BSD.
Because these functions can abruptly truncate strings or wide strings, they are generally poor choices for processing them. When copying or concatening multibyte strings, they can truncate within a multibyte character so that the result is not a valid multibyte string. When combining or concatenating multibyte or wide strings, they may truncate the output after a combining character, resulting in a corrupted grapheme. They can cause bugs even when processing single-byte strings: for example, when calculating an ASCII-only user name, a truncated name can identify the wrong user.
Although some buffer overruns can be prevented by manually replacing calls to copying functions with calls to truncation functions, there are often easier and safer automatic techniques, such as fortification (see Fortification of function calls) and AddressSanitizer (see Program Instrumentation Options in Using GCC). Because truncation functions can mask application bugs that would otherwise be caught by the automatic techniques, these functions should be used only when the application’s underlying logic requires truncation.
Note: GNU programs should not truncate strings or wide
strings to fit arbitrary size limits. See Writing
Robust Programs in The GNU Coding Standards. Instead of
string-truncation functions, it is usually better to use dynamic
memory allocation (see Unconstrained Allocation) and functions
such as strdup
or asprintf
to construct strings.
Next: Collation Functions, Previous: Truncating Strings while Copying, Up: String and Array Utilities [Contents][Index]
You can use the functions in this section to perform comparisons on the contents of strings and arrays. As well as checking for equality, these functions can also be used as the ordering functions for sorting operations. See Searching and Sorting, for an example of this.
Unlike most comparison operations in C, the string comparison functions return a nonzero value if the strings are not equivalent rather than if they are. The sign of the value indicates the relative ordering of the first part of the strings that are not equivalent: a negative value indicates that the first string is “less” than the second, while a positive value indicates that the first string is “greater”.
The most common use of these functions is to check only for equality. This is canonically done with an expression like ‘! strcmp (s1, s2)’.
All of these functions are declared in the header file string.h.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The function memcmp
compares the size bytes of memory
beginning at a1 against the size bytes of memory beginning
at a2. The value returned has the same sign as the difference
between the first differing pair of bytes (interpreted as unsigned
char
objects, then promoted to int
).
If the contents of the two blocks are equal, memcmp
returns
0
.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The function wmemcmp
compares the size wide characters
beginning at a1 against the size wide characters beginning
at a2. The value returned is smaller than or larger than zero
depending on whether the first differing wide character is a1 is
smaller or larger than the corresponding wide character in a2.
If the contents of the two blocks are equal, wmemcmp
returns
0
.
On arbitrary arrays, the memcmp
function is mostly useful for
testing equality. It usually isn’t meaningful to do byte-wise ordering
comparisons on arrays of things other than bytes. For example, a
byte-wise comparison on the bytes that make up floating-point numbers
isn’t likely to tell you anything about the relationship between the
values of the floating-point numbers.
wmemcmp
is really only useful to compare arrays of type
wchar_t
since the function looks at sizeof (wchar_t)
bytes
at a time and this number of bytes is system dependent.
You should also be careful about using memcmp
to compare objects
that can contain “holes”, such as the padding inserted into structure
objects to enforce alignment requirements, extra space at the end of
unions, and extra bytes at the ends of strings whose length is less
than their allocated size. The contents of these “holes” are
indeterminate and may cause strange behavior when performing byte-wise
comparisons. For more predictable results, perform an explicit
component-wise comparison.
For example, given a structure type definition like:
struct foo { unsigned char tag; union { double f; long i; char *p; } value; };
you are better off writing a specialized comparison function to compare
struct foo
objects instead of comparing them with memcmp
.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The strcmp
function compares the string s1 against
s2, returning a value that has the same sign as the difference
between the first differing pair of bytes (interpreted as
unsigned char
objects, then promoted to int
).
If the two strings are equal, strcmp
returns 0
.
A consequence of the ordering used by strcmp
is that if s1
is an initial substring of s2, then s1 is considered to be
“less than” s2.
strcmp
does not take sorting conventions of the language the
strings are written in into account. To get that one has to use
strcoll
.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The wcscmp
function compares the wide string ws1
against ws2. The value returned is smaller than or larger than zero
depending on whether the first differing wide character is ws1 is
smaller or larger than the corresponding wide character in ws2.
If the two strings are equal, wcscmp
returns 0
.
A consequence of the ordering used by wcscmp
is that if ws1
is an initial substring of ws2, then ws1 is considered to be
“less than” ws2.
wcscmp
does not take sorting conventions of the language the
strings are written in into account. To get that one has to use
wcscoll
.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe locale | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This function is like strcmp
, except that differences in case are
ignored, and its arguments must be multibyte strings.
How uppercase and lowercase characters are related is
determined by the currently selected locale. In the standard "C"
locale the characters Ä and ä do not match but in a locale which
regards these characters as parts of the alphabet they do match.
strcasecmp
is derived from BSD.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe locale | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This function is like wcscmp
, except that differences in case are
ignored. How uppercase and lowercase characters are related is
determined by the currently selected locale. In the standard "C"
locale the characters Ä and ä do not match but in a locale which
regards these characters as parts of the alphabet they do match.
wcscasecmp
is a GNU extension.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This function is the similar to strcmp
, except that no more than
size bytes are compared. In other words, if the two
strings are the same in their first size bytes, the
return value is zero.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This function is similar to wcscmp
, except that no more than
size wide characters are compared. In other words, if the two
strings are the same in their first size wide characters, the
return value is zero.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe locale | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This function is like strncmp
, except that differences in case
are ignored, and the compared parts of the arguments should consist of
valid multibyte characters.
Like strcasecmp
, it is locale dependent how
uppercase and lowercase characters are related.
strncasecmp
is a GNU extension.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe locale | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This function is like wcsncmp
, except that differences in case
are ignored. Like wcscasecmp
, it is locale dependent how
uppercase and lowercase characters are related.
wcsncasecmp
is a GNU extension.
Here are some examples showing the use of strcmp
and
strncmp
(equivalent examples can be constructed for the wide
character functions). These examples assume the use of the ASCII
character set. (If some other character set—say, EBCDIC—is used
instead, then the glyphs are associated with different numeric codes,
and the return values and ordering may differ.)
strcmp ("hello", "hello") ⇒ 0 /* These two strings are the same. */ strcmp ("hello", "Hello") ⇒ 32 /* Comparisons are case-sensitive. */ strcmp ("hello", "world") ⇒ -15 /* The byte'h'
comes before'w'
. */ strcmp ("hello", "hello, world") ⇒ -44 /* Comparing a null byte against a comma. */ strncmp ("hello", "hello, world", 5) ⇒ 0 /* The initial 5 bytes are the same. */ strncmp ("hello, world", "hello, stupid world!!!", 5) ⇒ 0 /* The initial 5 bytes are the same. */
Preliminary: | MT-Safe locale | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The strverscmp
function compares the string s1 against
s2, considering them as holding indices/version numbers. The
return value follows the same conventions as found in the
strcmp
function. In fact, if s1 and s2 contain no
digits, strverscmp
behaves like strcmp
(in the sense that the sign of the result is the same).
The comparison algorithm which the strverscmp
function implements
differs slightly from other version-comparison algorithms. The
implementation is based on a finite-state machine, whose behavior is
approximated below.
isdigit
function and are
thus subject to the current locale.
The treatment of leading zeros and the tie-breaking extension characters (which in effect propagate across non-digit/digit sequence boundaries) differs from other version-comparison algorithms.
strverscmp ("no digit", "no digit") ⇒ 0 /* same behavior as strcmp. */ strverscmp ("item#99", "item#100") ⇒ <0 /* same prefix, but 99 < 100. */ strverscmp ("alpha1", "alpha001") ⇒ >0 /* different number of leading zeros (0 and 2). */ strverscmp ("part1_f012", "part1_f01") ⇒ >0 /* lexicographical comparison with leading zeros. */ strverscmp ("foo.009", "foo.0") ⇒ <0 /* different number of leading zeros (2 and 1). */
strverscmp
is a GNU extension.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This is an obsolete alias for memcmp
, derived from BSD.
Next: Search Functions, Previous: String/Array Comparison, Up: String and Array Utilities [Contents][Index]
In some locales, the conventions for lexicographic ordering differ from the strict numeric ordering of character codes. For example, in Spanish most glyphs with diacritical marks such as accents are not considered distinct letters for the purposes of collation. On the other hand, in Czech the two-character sequence ‘ch’ is treated as a single letter that is collated between ‘h’ and ‘i’.
You can use the functions strcoll
and strxfrm
(declared in
the headers file string.h) and wcscoll
and wcsxfrm
(declared in the headers file wchar) to compare strings using a
collation ordering appropriate for the current locale. The locale used
by these functions in particular can be specified by setting the locale
for the LC_COLLATE
category; see Locales and Internationalization.
In the standard C locale, the collation sequence for strcoll
is
the same as that for strcmp
. Similarly, wcscoll
and
wcscmp
are the same in this situation.
Effectively, the way these functions work is by applying a mapping to transform the characters in a multibyte string to a byte sequence that represents the string’s position in the collating sequence of the current locale. Comparing two such byte sequences in a simple fashion is equivalent to comparing the strings with the locale’s collating sequence.
The functions strcoll
and wcscoll
perform this translation
implicitly, in order to do one comparison. By contrast, strxfrm
and wcsxfrm
perform the mapping explicitly. If you are making
multiple comparisons using the same string or set of strings, it is
likely to be more efficient to use strxfrm
or wcsxfrm
to
transform all the strings just once, and subsequently compare the
transformed strings with strcmp
or wcscmp
.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe locale | AS-Unsafe heap | AC-Unsafe mem | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The strcoll
function is similar to strcmp
but uses the
collating sequence of the current locale for collation (the
LC_COLLATE
locale). The arguments are multibyte strings.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe locale | AS-Unsafe heap | AC-Unsafe mem | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The wcscoll
function is similar to wcscmp
but uses the
collating sequence of the current locale for collation (the
LC_COLLATE
locale).
Here is an example of sorting an array of strings, using strcoll
to compare them. The actual sort algorithm is not written here; it
comes from qsort
(see Array Sort Function). The job of the
code shown here is to say how to compare the strings while sorting them.
(Later on in this section, we will show a way to do this more
efficiently using strxfrm
.)
/* This is the comparison function used withqsort
. */ int compare_elements (const void *v1, const void *v2) { char * const *p1 = v1; char * const *p2 = v2; return strcoll (*p1, *p2); } /* This is the entry point—the function to sort strings using the locale’s collating sequence. */ void sort_strings (char **array, int nstrings) { /* Sorttemp_array
by comparing the strings. */ qsort (array, nstrings, sizeof (char *), compare_elements); }
Preliminary: | MT-Safe locale | AS-Unsafe heap | AC-Unsafe mem | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The function strxfrm
transforms the multibyte string
from using the
collation transformation determined by the locale currently selected for
collation, and stores the transformed string in the array to. Up
to size bytes (including a terminating null byte) are
stored.
The behavior is undefined if the strings to and from overlap; see Copying Strings and Arrays.
The return value is the length of the entire transformed string. This
value is not affected by the value of size, but if it is greater
or equal than size, it means that the transformed string did not
entirely fit in the array to. In this case, only as much of the
string as actually fits was stored. To get the whole transformed
string, call strxfrm
again with a bigger output array.
The transformed string may be longer than the original string, and it may also be shorter.
If size is zero, no bytes are stored in to. In this
case, strxfrm
simply returns the number of bytes that would
be the length of the transformed string. This is useful for determining
what size the allocated array should be. It does not matter what
to is if size is zero; to may even be a null pointer.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe locale | AS-Unsafe heap | AC-Unsafe mem | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The function wcsxfrm
transforms wide string wfrom
using the collation transformation determined by the locale currently
selected for collation, and stores the transformed string in the array
wto. Up to size wide characters (including a terminating null
wide character) are stored.
The behavior is undefined if the strings wto and wfrom overlap; see Copying Strings and Arrays.
The return value is the length of the entire transformed wide
string. This value is not affected by the value of size, but if
it is greater or equal than size, it means that the transformed
wide string did not entirely fit in the array wto. In
this case, only as much of the wide string as actually fits
was stored. To get the whole transformed wide string, call
wcsxfrm
again with a bigger output array.
The transformed wide string may be longer than the original wide string, and it may also be shorter.
If size is zero, no wide characters are stored in to. In this
case, wcsxfrm
simply returns the number of wide characters that
would be the length of the transformed wide string. This is
useful for determining what size the allocated array should be (remember
to multiply with sizeof (wchar_t)
). It does not matter what
wto is if size is zero; wto may even be a null pointer.
Here is an example of how you can use strxfrm
when
you plan to do many comparisons. It does the same thing as the previous
example, but much faster, because it has to transform each string only
once, no matter how many times it is compared with other strings. Even
the time needed to allocate and free storage is much less than the time
we save, when there are many strings.
struct sorter { char *input; char *transformed; }; /* This is the comparison function used withqsort
to sort an array ofstruct sorter
. */ int compare_elements (const void *v1, const void *v2) { const struct sorter *p1 = v1; const struct sorter *p2 = v2; return strcmp (p1->transformed, p2->transformed); } /* This is the entry point—the function to sort strings using the locale’s collating sequence. */ void sort_strings_fast (char **array, int nstrings) { struct sorter temp_array[nstrings]; int i; /* Set uptemp_array
. Each element contains one input string and its transformed string. */ for (i = 0; i < nstrings; i++) { size_t length = strlen (array[i]) * 2; char *transformed; size_t transformed_length; temp_array[i].input = array[i]; /* First try a buffer perhaps big enough. */ transformed = (char *) xmalloc (length); /* Transformarray[i]
. */ transformed_length = strxfrm (transformed, array[i], length); /* If the buffer was not large enough, resize it and try again. */ if (transformed_length >= length) { /* Allocate the needed space. +1 for terminating'\0'
byte. */ transformed = xrealloc (transformed, transformed_length + 1); /* The return value is not interesting because we know how long the transformed string is. */ (void) strxfrm (transformed, array[i], transformed_length + 1); } temp_array[i].transformed = transformed; } /* Sorttemp_array
by comparing transformed strings. */ qsort (temp_array, nstrings, sizeof (struct sorter), compare_elements); /* Put the elements back in the permanent array in their sorted order. */ for (i = 0; i < nstrings; i++) array[i] = temp_array[i].input; /* Free the strings we allocated. */ for (i = 0; i < nstrings; i++) free (temp_array[i].transformed); }
The interesting part of this code for the wide character version would look like this:
void sort_strings_fast (wchar_t **array, int nstrings) { … /* Transformarray[i]
. */ transformed_length = wcsxfrm (transformed, array[i], length); /* If the buffer was not large enough, resize it and try again. */ if (transformed_length >= length) { /* Allocate the needed space. +1 for terminatingL'\0'
wide character. */ transformed = xreallocarray (transformed, transformed_length + 1, sizeof *transformed); /* The return value is not interesting because we know how long the transformed string is. */ (void) wcsxfrm (transformed, array[i], transformed_length + 1); } …
Note the additional multiplication with sizeof (wchar_t)
in the
realloc
call.
Compatibility Note: The string collation functions are a new feature of ISO C90. Older C dialects have no equivalent feature. The wide character versions were introduced in Amendment 1 to ISO C90.
Next: Finding Tokens in a String, Previous: Collation Functions, Up: String and Array Utilities [Contents][Index]
This section describes library functions which perform various kinds of searching operations on strings and arrays. These functions are declared in the header file string.h.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This function finds the first occurrence of the byte c (converted
to an unsigned char
) in the initial size bytes of the
object beginning at block. The return value is a pointer to the
located byte, or a null pointer if no match was found.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This function finds the first occurrence of the wide character wc in the initial size wide characters of the object beginning at block. The return value is a pointer to the located wide character, or a null pointer if no match was found.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
Often the memchr
function is used with the knowledge that the
byte c is available in the memory block specified by the
parameters. But this means that the size parameter is not really
needed and that the tests performed with it at runtime (to check whether
the end of the block is reached) are not needed.
The rawmemchr
function exists for just this situation which is
surprisingly frequent. The interface is similar to memchr
except
that the size parameter is missing. The function will look beyond
the end of the block pointed to by block in case the programmer
made an error in assuming that the byte c is present in the block.
In this case the result is unspecified. Otherwise the return value is a
pointer to the located byte.
When looking for the end of a string, use strchr
.
This function is a GNU extension.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The function memrchr
is like memchr
, except that it searches
backwards from the end of the block defined by block and size
(instead of forwards from the front).
This function is a GNU extension.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The strchr
function finds the first occurrence of the byte
c (converted to a char
) in the string
beginning at string. The return value is a pointer to the located
byte, or a null pointer if no match was found.
For example,
strchr ("hello, world", 'l') ⇒ "llo, world" strchr ("hello, world", '?') ⇒ NULL
The terminating null byte is considered to be part of the string, so you can use this function get a pointer to the end of a string by specifying zero as the value of the c argument.
When strchr
returns a null pointer, it does not let you know
the position of the terminating null byte it has found. If you
need that information, it is better (but less portable) to use
strchrnul
than to search for it a second time.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The wcschr
function finds the first occurrence of the wide
character wc in the wide string
beginning at wstring. The return value is a pointer to the
located wide character, or a null pointer if no match was found.
The terminating null wide character is considered to be part of the wide
string, so you can use this function get a pointer to the end
of a wide string by specifying a null wide character as the
value of the wc argument. It would be better (but less portable)
to use wcschrnul
in this case, though.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
strchrnul
is the same as strchr
except that if it does
not find the byte, it returns a pointer to string’s terminating
null byte rather than a null pointer.
This function is a GNU extension.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
wcschrnul
is the same as wcschr
except that if it does not
find the wide character, it returns a pointer to the wide string’s
terminating null wide character rather than a null pointer.
This function is a GNU extension.
One useful, but unusual, use of the strchr
function is when one wants to have a pointer pointing to the null byte
terminating a string. This is often written in this way:
s += strlen (s);
This is almost optimal but the addition operation duplicated a bit of
the work already done in the strlen
function. A better solution
is this:
s = strchr (s, '\0');
There is no restriction on the second parameter of strchr
so it
could very well also be zero. Those readers thinking very
hard about this might now point out that the strchr
function is
more expensive than the strlen
function since we have two abort
criteria. This is right. But in the GNU C Library the implementation of
strchr
is optimized in a special way so that strchr
actually is faster.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The function strrchr
is like strchr
, except that it searches
backwards from the end of the string string (instead of forwards
from the front).
For example,
strrchr ("hello, world", 'l') ⇒ "ld"
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The function wcsrchr
is like wcschr
, except that it searches
backwards from the end of the string wstring (instead of forwards
from the front).
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This is like strchr
, except that it searches haystack for a
substring needle rather than just a single byte. It
returns a pointer into the string haystack that is the first
byte of the substring, or a null pointer if no match was found. If
needle is an empty string, the function returns haystack.
For example,
strstr ("hello, world", "l") ⇒ "llo, world" strstr ("hello, world", "wo") ⇒ "world"
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This is like wcschr
, except that it searches haystack for a
substring needle rather than just a single wide character. It
returns a pointer into the string haystack that is the first wide
character of the substring, or a null pointer if no match was found. If
needle is an empty string, the function returns haystack.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
wcswcs
is a deprecated alias for wcsstr
. This is the
name originally used in the X/Open Portability Guide before the
Amendment 1 to ISO C90 was published.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe locale | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This is like strstr
, except that it ignores case in searching for
the substring. Like strcasecmp
, it is locale dependent how
uppercase and lowercase characters are related, and arguments are
multibyte strings.
For example,
strcasestr ("hello, world", "L") ⇒ "llo, world" strcasestr ("hello, World", "wo") ⇒ "World"
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This is like strstr
, but needle and haystack are byte
arrays rather than strings. needle-len is the
length of needle and haystack-len is the length of
haystack.
This function is a GNU extension.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The strspn
(“string span”) function returns the length of the
initial substring of string that consists entirely of bytes that
are members of the set specified by the string skipset. The order
of the bytes in skipset is not important.
For example,
strspn ("hello, world", "abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz") ⇒ 5
In a multibyte string, characters consisting of more than one byte are not treated as single entities. Each byte is treated separately. The function is not locale-dependent.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The wcsspn
(“wide character string span”) function returns the
length of the initial substring of wstring that consists entirely
of wide characters that are members of the set specified by the string
skipset. The order of the wide characters in skipset is not
important.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The strcspn
(“string complement span”) function returns the length
of the initial substring of string that consists entirely of bytes
that are not members of the set specified by the string stopset.
(In other words, it returns the offset of the first byte in string
that is a member of the set stopset.)
For example,
strcspn ("hello, world", " \t\n,.;!?") ⇒ 5
In a multibyte string, characters consisting of more than one byte are not treated as a single entities. Each byte is treated separately. The function is not locale-dependent.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The wcscspn
(“wide character string complement span”) function
returns the length of the initial substring of wstring that
consists entirely of wide characters that are not members of the
set specified by the string stopset. (In other words, it returns
the offset of the first wide character in string that is a member of
the set stopset.)
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The strpbrk
(“string pointer break”) function is related to
strcspn
, except that it returns a pointer to the first byte
in string that is a member of the set stopset instead of the
length of the initial substring. It returns a null pointer if no such
byte from stopset is found.
For example,
strpbrk ("hello, world", " \t\n,.;!?") ⇒ ", world"
In a multibyte string, characters consisting of more than one byte are not treated as single entities. Each byte is treated separately. The function is not locale-dependent.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The wcspbrk
(“wide character string pointer break”) function is
related to wcscspn
, except that it returns a pointer to the first
wide character in wstring that is a member of the set
stopset instead of the length of the initial substring. It
returns a null pointer if no such wide character from stopset is found.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
index
is another name for strchr
; they are exactly the same.
New code should always use strchr
since this name is defined in
ISO C while index
is a BSD invention which never was available
on System V derived systems.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
rindex
is another name for strrchr
; they are exactly the same.
New code should always use strrchr
since this name is defined in
ISO C while rindex
is a BSD invention which never was available
on System V derived systems.
Next: Erasing Sensitive Data, Previous: Search Functions, Up: String and Array Utilities [Contents][Index]
It’s fairly common for programs to have a need to do some simple kinds
of lexical analysis and parsing, such as splitting a command string up
into tokens. You can do this with the strtok
function, declared
in the header file string.h.
Preliminary: | MT-Unsafe race:strtok | AS-Unsafe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
A string can be split into tokens by making a series of calls to the
function strtok
.
The string to be split up is passed as the newstring argument on
the first call only. The strtok
function uses this to set up
some internal state information. Subsequent calls to get additional
tokens from the same string are indicated by passing a null pointer as
the newstring argument. Calling strtok
with another
non-null newstring argument reinitializes the state information.
It is guaranteed that no other library function ever calls strtok
behind your back (which would mess up this internal state information).
The delimiters argument is a string that specifies a set of delimiters that may surround the token being extracted. All the initial bytes that are members of this set are discarded. The first byte that is not a member of this set of delimiters marks the beginning of the next token. The end of the token is found by looking for the next byte that is a member of the delimiter set. This byte in the original string newstring is overwritten by a null byte, and the pointer to the beginning of the token in newstring is returned.
On the next call to strtok
, the searching begins at the next
byte beyond the one that marked the end of the previous token.
Note that the set of delimiters delimiters do not have to be the
same on every call in a series of calls to strtok
.
If the end of the string newstring is reached, or if the remainder of
string consists only of delimiter bytes, strtok
returns
a null pointer.
In a multibyte string, characters consisting of more than one byte are not treated as single entities. Each byte is treated separately. The function is not locale-dependent.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
A string can be split into tokens by making a series of calls to the
function wcstok
.
The string to be split up is passed as the newstring argument on
the first call only. The wcstok
function uses this to set up
some internal state information. Subsequent calls to get additional
tokens from the same wide string are indicated by passing a
null pointer as the newstring argument, which causes the pointer
previously stored in save_ptr to be used instead.
The delimiters argument is a wide string that specifies a set of delimiters that may surround the token being extracted. All the initial wide characters that are members of this set are discarded. The first wide character that is not a member of this set of delimiters marks the beginning of the next token. The end of the token is found by looking for the next wide character that is a member of the delimiter set. This wide character in the original wide string newstring is overwritten by a null wide character, the pointer past the overwritten wide character is saved in save_ptr, and the pointer to the beginning of the token in newstring is returned.
On the next call to wcstok
, the searching begins at the next
wide character beyond the one that marked the end of the previous token.
Note that the set of delimiters delimiters do not have to be the
same on every call in a series of calls to wcstok
.
If the end of the wide string newstring is reached, or
if the remainder of string consists only of delimiter wide characters,
wcstok
returns a null pointer.
Warning: Since strtok
and wcstok
alter the string
they is parsing, you should always copy the string to a temporary buffer
before parsing it with strtok
/wcstok
(see Copying Strings and Arrays). If you allow strtok
or wcstok
to modify
a string that came from another part of your program, you are asking for
trouble; that string might be used for other purposes after
strtok
or wcstok
has modified it, and it would not have
the expected value.
The string that you are operating on might even be a constant. Then
when strtok
or wcstok
tries to modify it, your program
will get a fatal signal for writing in read-only memory. See Program Error Signals. Even if the operation of strtok
or wcstok
would not require a modification of the string (e.g., if there is
exactly one token) the string can (and in the GNU C Library case will) be
modified.
This is a special case of a general principle: if a part of a program does not have as its purpose the modification of a certain data structure, then it is error-prone to modify the data structure temporarily.
The function strtok
is not reentrant, whereas wcstok
is.
See Signal Handling and Nonreentrant Functions, for a discussion of where and why reentrancy is
important.
Here is a simple example showing the use of strtok
.
#include <string.h> #include <stddef.h> … const char string[] = "words separated by spaces -- and, punctuation!"; const char delimiters[] = " .,;:!-"; char *token, *cp; … cp = strdupa (string); /* Make writable copy. */ token = strtok (cp, delimiters); /* token => "words" */ token = strtok (NULL, delimiters); /* token => "separated" */ token = strtok (NULL, delimiters); /* token => "by" */ token = strtok (NULL, delimiters); /* token => "spaces" */ token = strtok (NULL, delimiters); /* token => "and" */ token = strtok (NULL, delimiters); /* token => "punctuation" */ token = strtok (NULL, delimiters); /* token => NULL */
The GNU C Library contains two more functions for tokenizing a string which overcome the limitation of non-reentrancy. They are not available available for wide strings.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
Just like strtok
, this function splits the string into several
tokens which can be accessed by successive calls to strtok_r
.
The difference is that, as in wcstok
, the information about the
next token is stored in the space pointed to by the third argument,
save_ptr, which is a pointer to a string pointer. Calling
strtok_r
with a null pointer for newstring and leaving
save_ptr between the calls unchanged does the job without
hindering reentrancy.
This function is defined in POSIX.1 and can be found on many systems which support multi-threading.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This function has a similar functionality as strtok_r
with the
newstring argument replaced by the save_ptr argument. The
initialization of the moving pointer has to be done by the user.
Successive calls to strsep
move the pointer along the tokens
separated by delimiter, returning the address of the next token
and updating string_ptr to point to the beginning of the next
token.
One difference between strsep
and strtok_r
is that if the
input string contains more than one byte from delimiter in a
row strsep
returns an empty string for each pair of bytes
from delimiter. This means that a program normally should test
for strsep
returning an empty string before processing it.
This function was introduced in 4.3BSD and therefore is widely available.
Here is how the above example looks like when strsep
is used.
#include <string.h> #include <stddef.h> … const char string[] = "words separated by spaces -- and, punctuation!"; const char delimiters[] = " .,;:!-"; char *running; char *token; … running = strdupa (string); token = strsep (&running, delimiters); /* token => "words" */ token = strsep (&running, delimiters); /* token => "separated" */ token = strsep (&running, delimiters); /* token => "by" */ token = strsep (&running, delimiters); /* token => "spaces" */ token = strsep (&running, delimiters); /* token => "" */ token = strsep (&running, delimiters); /* token => "" */ token = strsep (&running, delimiters); /* token => "" */ token = strsep (&running, delimiters); /* token => "and" */ token = strsep (&running, delimiters); /* token => "" */ token = strsep (&running, delimiters); /* token => "punctuation" */ token = strsep (&running, delimiters); /* token => "" */ token = strsep (&running, delimiters); /* token => NULL */
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The GNU version of the basename
function returns the last
component of the path in filename. This function is the preferred
usage, since it does not modify the argument, filename, and
respects trailing slashes. The prototype for basename
can be
found in string.h. Note, this function is overridden by the XPG
version, if libgen.h is included.
Example of using GNU basename
:
#include <string.h> int main (int argc, char *argv[]) { char *prog = basename (argv[0]); if (argc < 2) { fprintf (stderr, "Usage %s <arg>\n", prog); exit (1); } … }
Portability Note: This function may produce different results on different systems.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This is the standard XPG defined basename
. It is similar in
spirit to the GNU version, but may modify the path by removing
trailing ’/’ bytes. If the path is made up entirely of ’/’
bytes, then "/" will be returned. Also, if path is
NULL
or an empty string, then "." is returned. The prototype for
the XPG version can be found in libgen.h.
Example of using XPG basename
:
#include <libgen.h> int main (int argc, char *argv[]) { char *prog; char *path = strdupa (argv[0]); prog = basename (path); if (argc < 2) { fprintf (stderr, "Usage %s <arg>\n", prog); exit (1); } … }
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The dirname
function is the compliment to the XPG version of
basename
. It returns the parent directory of the file specified
by path. If path is NULL
, an empty string, or
contains no ’/’ bytes, then "." is returned. The prototype for this
function can be found in libgen.h.
Next: Shuffling Bytes, Previous: Finding Tokens in a String, Up: String and Array Utilities [Contents][Index]
Sensitive data, such as cryptographic keys, should be erased from memory after use, to reduce the risk that a bug will expose it to the outside world. However, compiler optimizations may determine that an erasure operation is “unnecessary,” and remove it from the generated code, because no correct program could access the variable or heap object containing the sensitive data after it’s deallocated. Since erasure is a precaution against bugs, this optimization is inappropriate.
The function explicit_bzero
erases a block of memory, and
guarantees that the compiler will not remove the erasure as
“unnecessary.”
#include <string.h> extern void encrypt (const char *key, const char *in, char *out, size_t n); extern void genkey (const char *phrase, char *key); void encrypt_with_phrase (const char *phrase, const char *in, char *out, size_t n) { char key[16]; genkey (phrase, key); encrypt (key, in, out, n); explicit_bzero (key, 16); }
In this example, if memset
, bzero
, or a hand-written
loop had been used, the compiler might remove them as “unnecessary.”
Warning: explicit_bzero
does not guarantee that
sensitive data is completely erased from the computer’s memory.
There may be copies in temporary storage areas, such as registers and
“scratch” stack space; since these are invisible to the source code,
a library function cannot erase them.
Also, explicit_bzero
only operates on RAM. If a sensitive data
object never needs to have its address taken other than to call
explicit_bzero
, it might be stored entirely in CPU registers
until the call to explicit_bzero
. Then it will be
copied into RAM, the copy will be erased, and the original will remain
intact. Data in RAM is more likely to be exposed by a bug than data
in registers, so this creates a brief window where the data is at
greater risk of exposure than it would have been if the program didn’t
try to erase it at all.
Declaring sensitive variables as volatile
will make both the
above problems worse; a volatile
variable will be stored
in memory for its entire lifetime, and the compiler will make
more copies of it than it would otherwise have. Attempting to
erase a normal variable “by hand” through a
volatile
-qualified pointer doesn’t work at all—because the
variable itself is not volatile
, some compilers will ignore the
qualification on the pointer and remove the erasure anyway.
Having said all that, in most situations, using explicit_bzero
is better than not using it. At present, the only way to do a more
thorough job is to write the entire sensitive operation in assembly
language. We anticipate that future compilers will recognize calls to
explicit_bzero
and take appropriate steps to erase all the
copies of the affected data, wherever they may be.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
explicit_bzero
writes zero into len bytes of memory
beginning at block, just as bzero
would. The zeroes are
always written, even if the compiler could determine that this is
“unnecessary” because no correct program could read them back.
Note: The only optimization that explicit_bzero
disables is removal of “unnecessary” writes to memory. The compiler
can perform all the other optimizations that it could for a call to
memset
. For instance, it may replace the function call with
inline memory writes, and it may assume that block cannot be a
null pointer.
Portability Note: This function first appeared in OpenBSD 5.5
and has not been standardized. Other systems may provide the same
functionality under a different name, such as explicit_memset
,
memset_s
, or SecureZeroMemory
.
The GNU C Library declares this function in string.h, but on other systems it may be in strings.h instead.
Next: Obfuscating Data, Previous: Erasing Sensitive Data, Up: String and Array Utilities [Contents][Index]
The function below addresses the perennial programming quandary: “How do I take good data in string form and painlessly turn it into garbage?” This is not a difficult thing to code for oneself, but the authors of the GNU C Library wish to make it as convenient as possible.
To erase data, use explicit_bzero
(see Erasing Sensitive Data); to obfuscate it reversibly, use memfrob
(see Obfuscating Data).
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
strfry
performs an in-place shuffle on string. Each
character is swapped to a position selected at random, within the
portion of the string starting with the character’s original position.
(This is the Fisher-Yates algorithm for unbiased shuffling.)
Calling strfry
will not disturb any of the random number
generators that have global state (see Pseudo-Random Numbers).
The return value of strfry
is always string.
Portability Note: This function is unique to the GNU C Library. It is declared in string.h.
Next: Encode Binary Data, Previous: Shuffling Bytes, Up: String and Array Utilities [Contents][Index]
The memfrob
function reversibly obfuscates an array of binary
data. This is not true encryption; the obfuscated data still bears a
clear relationship to the original, and no secret key is required to
undo the obfuscation. It is analogous to the “Rot13” cipher used on
Usenet for obscuring offensive jokes, spoilers for works of fiction,
and so on, but it can be applied to arbitrary binary data.
Programs that need true encryption—a transformation that completely obscures the original and cannot be reversed without knowledge of a secret key—should use a dedicated cryptography library, such as libgcrypt.
Programs that need to destroy data should use
explicit_bzero
(see Erasing Sensitive Data), or possibly
strfry
(see Shuffling Bytes).
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The function memfrob
obfuscates length bytes of data
beginning at mem, in place. Each byte is bitwise xor-ed with
the binary pattern 00101010 (hexadecimal 0x2A). The return value is
always mem.
memfrob
a second time on the same data returns it to
its original state.
Portability Note: This function is unique to the GNU C Library. It is declared in string.h.
Next: Argz and Envz Vectors, Previous: Obfuscating Data, Up: String and Array Utilities [Contents][Index]
To store or transfer binary data in environments which only support text one has to encode the binary data by mapping the input bytes to bytes in the range allowed for storing or transferring. SVID systems (and nowadays XPG compliant systems) provide minimal support for this task.
Preliminary: | MT-Unsafe race:l64a | AS-Unsafe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This function encodes a 32-bit input value using bytes from the
basic character set. It returns a pointer to a 7 byte buffer which
contains an encoded version of n. To encode a series of bytes the
user must copy the returned string to a destination buffer. It returns
the empty string if n is zero, which is somewhat bizarre but
mandated by the standard.
Warning: Since a static buffer is used this function should not
be used in multi-threaded programs. There is no thread-safe alternative
to this function in the C library.
Compatibility Note: The XPG standard states that the return
value of l64a
is undefined if n is negative. In the GNU
implementation, l64a
treats its argument as unsigned, so it will
return a sensible encoding for any nonzero n; however, portable
programs should not rely on this.
To encode a large buffer l64a
must be called in a loop, once for
each 32-bit word of the buffer. For example, one could do something
like this:
char * encode (const void *buf, size_t len) { /* We know in advance how long the buffer has to be. */ unsigned char *in = (unsigned char *) buf; char *out = malloc (6 + ((len + 3) / 4) * 6 + 1); char *cp = out, *p; /* Encode the length. */ /* Using ‘htonl’ is necessary so that the data can be decoded even on machines with different byte order. ‘l64a’ can return a string shorter than 6 bytes, so we pad it with encoding of 0 ('.') at the end by hand. */ p = stpcpy (cp, l64a (htonl (len))); cp = mempcpy (p, "......", 6 - (p - cp)); while (len > 3) { unsigned long int n = *in++; n = (n << 8) | *in++; n = (n << 8) | *in++; n = (n << 8) | *in++; len -= 4; p = stpcpy (cp, l64a (htonl (n))); cp = mempcpy (p, "......", 6 - (p - cp)); } if (len > 0) { unsigned long int n = *in++; if (--len > 0) { n = (n << 8) | *in++; if (--len > 0) n = (n << 8) | *in; } cp = stpcpy (cp, l64a (htonl (n))); } *cp = '\0'; return out; }
It is strange that the library does not provide the complete functionality needed but so be it.
To decode data produced with l64a
the following function should be
used.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The parameter string should contain a string which was produced by
a call to l64a
. The function processes at least 6 bytes of
this string, and decodes the bytes it finds according to the table
below. It stops decoding when it finds a byte not in the table,
rather like atoi
; if you have a buffer which has been broken into
lines, you must be careful to skip over the end-of-line bytes.
The decoded number is returned as a long int
value.
The l64a
and a64l
functions use a base 64 encoding, in
which each byte of an encoded string represents six bits of an
input word. These symbols are used for the base 64 digits:
0 | 1 | 2 | 3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 | |
0 | . | / | 0 | 1 | 2 | 3 | 4 | 5 |
8 | 6 | 7 | 8 | 9 | A | B | C | D |
16 | E | F | G | H | I | J | K | L |
24 | M | N | O | P | Q | R | S | T |
32 | U | V | W | X | Y | Z | a | b |
40 | c | d | e | f | g | h | i | j |
48 | k | l | m | n | o | p | q | r |
56 | s | t | u | v | w | x | y | z |
This encoding scheme is not standard. There are some other encoding methods which are much more widely used (UU encoding, MIME encoding). Generally, it is better to use one of these encodings.
Previous: Encode Binary Data, Up: String and Array Utilities [Contents][Index]
argz vectors are vectors of strings in a contiguous block of
memory, each element separated from its neighbors by null bytes
('\0'
).
Envz vectors are an extension of argz vectors where each element is a
name-value pair, separated by a '='
byte (as in a Unix
environment).
Next: Envz Functions, Up: Argz and Envz Vectors [Contents][Index]
Each argz vector is represented by a pointer to the first element, of
type char *
, and a size, of type size_t
, both of which can
be initialized to 0
to represent an empty argz vector. All argz
functions accept either a pointer and a size argument, or pointers to
them, if they will be modified.
The argz functions use malloc
/realloc
to allocate/grow
argz vectors, and so any argz vector created using these functions may
be freed by using free
; conversely, any argz function that may
grow a string expects that string to have been allocated using
malloc
(those argz functions that only examine their arguments or
modify them in place will work on any sort of memory).
See Unconstrained Allocation.
All argz functions that do memory allocation have a return type of
error_t
, and return 0
for success, and ENOMEM
if an
allocation error occurs.
These functions are declared in the standard include file argz.h.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Unsafe heap | AC-Unsafe mem | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The argz_create
function converts the Unix-style argument vector
argv (a vector of pointers to normal C strings, terminated by
(char *)0
; see Program Arguments) into an argz vector with
the same elements, which is returned in argz and argz_len.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Unsafe heap | AC-Unsafe mem | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The argz_create_sep
function converts the string
string into an argz vector (returned in argz and
argz_len) by splitting it into elements at every occurrence of the
byte sep.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
Returns the number of elements in the argz vector argz and argz_len.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The argz_extract
function converts the argz vector argz and
argz_len into a Unix-style argument vector stored in argv,
by putting pointers to every element in argz into successive
positions in argv, followed by a terminator of 0
.
Argv must be pre-allocated with enough space to hold all the
elements in argz plus the terminating (char *)0
((argz_count (argz, argz_len) + 1) * sizeof (char *)
bytes should be enough). Note that the string pointers stored into
argv point into argz—they are not copies—and so
argz must be copied if it will be changed while argv is
still active. This function is useful for passing the elements in
argz to an exec function (see Executing a File).
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The argz_stringify
converts argz into a normal string with
the elements separated by the byte sep, by replacing each
'\0'
inside argz (except the last one, which terminates the
string) with sep. This is handy for printing argz in a
readable manner.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Unsafe heap | AC-Unsafe mem | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The argz_add
function adds the string str to the end of the
argz vector *argz
, and updates *argz
and
*argz_len
accordingly.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Unsafe heap | AC-Unsafe mem | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The argz_add_sep
function is similar to argz_add
, but
str is split into separate elements in the result at occurrences of
the byte delim. This is useful, for instance, for
adding the components of a Unix search path to an argz vector, by using
a value of ':'
for delim.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Unsafe heap | AC-Unsafe mem | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The argz_append
function appends buf_len bytes starting at
buf to the argz vector *argz
, reallocating
*argz
to accommodate it, and adding buf_len to
*argz_len
.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Unsafe heap | AC-Unsafe mem | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
If entry points to the beginning of one of the elements in the
argz vector *argz
, the argz_delete
function will
remove this entry and reallocate *argz
, modifying
*argz
and *argz_len
accordingly. Note that as
destructive argz functions usually reallocate their argz argument,
pointers into argz vectors such as entry will then become invalid.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Unsafe heap | AC-Unsafe mem | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The argz_insert
function inserts the string entry into the
argz vector *argz
at a point just before the existing
element pointed to by before, reallocating *argz
and
updating *argz
and *argz_len
. If before
is 0
, entry is added to the end instead (as if by
argz_add
). Since the first element is in fact the same as
*argz
, passing in *argz
as the value of
before will result in entry being inserted at the beginning.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The argz_next
function provides a convenient way of iterating
over the elements in the argz vector argz. It returns a pointer
to the next element in argz after the element entry, or
0
if there are no elements following entry. If entry
is 0
, the first element of argz is returned.
This behavior suggests two styles of iteration:
char *entry = 0; while ((entry = argz_next (argz, argz_len, entry))) action;
(the double parentheses are necessary to make some C compilers shut up
about what they consider a questionable while
-test) and:
char *entry; for (entry = argz; entry; entry = argz_next (argz, argz_len, entry)) action;
Note that the latter depends on argz having a value of 0
if
it is empty (rather than a pointer to an empty block of memory); this
invariant is maintained for argz vectors created by the functions here.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Unsafe heap | AC-Unsafe mem | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
Replace any occurrences of the string str in argz with
with, reallocating argz as necessary. If
replace_count is non-zero, *replace_count
will be
incremented by the number of replacements performed.
Previous: Argz Functions, Up: Argz and Envz Vectors [Contents][Index]
Envz vectors are just argz vectors with additional constraints on the form of each element; as such, argz functions can also be used on them, where it makes sense.
Each element in an envz vector is a name-value pair, separated by a '='
byte; if multiple '='
bytes are present in an element, those
after the first are considered part of the value, and treated like all other
non-'\0'
bytes.
If no '='
bytes are present in an element, that element is
considered the name of a “null” entry, as distinct from an entry with an
empty value: envz_get
will return 0
if given the name of null
entry, whereas an entry with an empty value would result in a value of
""
; envz_entry
will still find such entries, however. Null
entries can be removed with the envz_strip
function.
As with argz functions, envz functions that may allocate memory (and thus
fail) have a return type of error_t
, and return either 0
or
ENOMEM
.
These functions are declared in the standard include file envz.h.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The envz_entry
function finds the entry in envz with the name
name, and returns a pointer to the whole entry—that is, the argz
element which begins with name followed by a '='
byte. If
there is no entry with that name, 0
is returned.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The envz_get
function finds the entry in envz with the name
name (like envz_entry
), and returns a pointer to the value
portion of that entry (following the '='
). If there is no entry with
that name (or only a null entry), 0
is returned.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Unsafe heap | AC-Unsafe mem | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The envz_add
function adds an entry to *envz
(updating *envz
and *envz_len
) with the name
name, and value value. If an entry with the same name
already exists in envz, it is removed first. If value is
0
, then the new entry will be the special null type of entry
(mentioned above).
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Unsafe heap | AC-Unsafe mem | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The envz_merge
function adds each entry in envz2 to envz,
as if with envz_add
, updating *envz
and
*envz_len
. If override is true, then values in envz2
will supersede those with the same name in envz, otherwise not.
Null entries are treated just like other entries in this respect, so a null entry in envz can prevent an entry of the same name in envz2 from being added to envz, if override is false.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The envz_strip
function removes any null entries from envz,
updating *envz
and *envz_len
.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Unsafe heap | AC-Unsafe mem | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The envz_remove
function removes an entry named name from
envz, updating *envz
and *envz_len
.
Next: Locales and Internationalization, Previous: String and Array Utilities, Up: Main Menu [Contents][Index]
Character sets used in the early days of computing had only six, seven, or eight bits for each character: there was never a case where more than eight bits (one byte) were used to represent a single character. The limitations of this approach became more apparent as more people grappled with non-Roman character sets, where not all the characters that make up a language’s character set can be represented by 2^8 choices. This chapter shows the functionality that was added to the C library to support multiple character sets.
A variety of solutions are available to overcome the differences between character sets with a 1:1 relation between bytes and characters and character sets with ratios of 2:1 or 4:1. The remainder of this section gives a few examples to help understand the design decisions made while developing the functionality of the C library.
A distinction we have to make right away is between internal and external representation. Internal representation means the representation used by a program while keeping the text in memory. External representations are used when text is stored or transmitted through some communication channel. Examples of external representations include files waiting in a directory to be read and parsed.
Traditionally there has been no difference between the two representations. It was equally comfortable and useful to use the same single-byte representation internally and externally. This comfort level decreases with more and larger character sets.
One of the problems to overcome with the internal representation is handling text that is externally encoded using different character sets. Assume a program that reads two texts and compares them using some metric. The comparison can be usefully done only if the texts are internally kept in a common format.
For such a common format (= character set) eight bits are certainly no longer enough. So the smallest entity will have to grow: wide characters will now be used. Instead of one byte per character, two or four will be used instead. (Three are not good to address in memory and more than four bytes seem not to be necessary).
As shown in some other part of this manual,
a completely new family has been created of functions that can handle wide
character texts in memory. The most commonly used character sets for such
internal wide character representations are Unicode and ISO 10646
(also known as UCS for Universal Character Set). Unicode was originally
planned as a 16-bit character set; whereas, ISO 10646 was designed to
be a 31-bit large code space. The two standards are practically identical.
They have the same character repertoire and code table, but Unicode specifies
added semantics. At the moment, only characters in the first 0x10000
code positions (the so-called Basic Multilingual Plane, BMP) have been
assigned, but the assignment of more specialized characters outside this
16-bit space is already in progress. A number of encodings have been
defined for Unicode and ISO 10646 characters:
UCS-2 is a 16-bit word that can only represent characters
from the BMP, UCS-4 is a 32-bit word than can represent any Unicode
and ISO 10646 character, UTF-8 is an ASCII compatible encoding where
ASCII characters are represented by ASCII bytes and non-ASCII characters
by sequences of 2-6 non-ASCII bytes, and finally UTF-16 is an extension
of UCS-2 in which pairs of certain UCS-2 words can be used to encode
non-BMP characters up to 0x10ffff
.
To represent wide characters the char
type is not suitable. For
this reason the ISO C standard introduces a new type that is
designed to keep one character of a wide character string. To maintain
the similarity there is also a type corresponding to int
for
those functions that take a single wide character.
This data type is used as the base type for wide character strings.
In other words, arrays of objects of this type are the equivalent of
char[]
for multibyte character strings. The type is defined in
stddef.h.
The ISO C90 standard, where wchar_t
was introduced, does not
say anything specific about the representation. It only requires that
this type is capable of storing all elements of the basic character set.
Therefore it would be legitimate to define wchar_t
as char
,
which might make sense for embedded systems.
But in the GNU C Library wchar_t
is always 32 bits wide and, therefore,
capable of representing all UCS-4 values and, therefore, covering all of
ISO 10646. Some Unix systems define wchar_t
as a 16-bit type
and thereby follow Unicode very strictly. This definition is perfectly
fine with the standard, but it also means that to represent all
characters from Unicode and ISO 10646 one has to use UTF-16 surrogate
characters, which is in fact a multi-wide-character encoding. But
resorting to multi-wide-character encoding contradicts the purpose of the
wchar_t
type.
wint_t
is a data type used for parameters and variables that
contain a single wide character. As the name suggests this type is the
equivalent of int
when using the normal char
strings. The
types wchar_t
and wint_t
often have the same
representation if their size is 32 bits wide but if wchar_t
is
defined as char
the type wint_t
must be defined as
int
due to the parameter promotion.
This type is defined in wchar.h and was introduced in Amendment 1 to ISO C90.
As there are for the char
data type macros are available for
specifying the minimum and maximum value representable in an object of
type wchar_t
.
The macro WCHAR_MIN
evaluates to the minimum value representable
by an object of type wint_t
.
This macro was introduced in Amendment 1 to ISO C90.
The macro WCHAR_MAX
evaluates to the maximum value representable
by an object of type wint_t
.
This macro was introduced in Amendment 1 to ISO C90.
Another special wide character value is the equivalent to EOF
.
The macro WEOF
evaluates to a constant expression of type
wint_t
whose value is different from any member of the extended
character set.
WEOF
need not be the same value as EOF
and unlike
EOF
it also need not be negative. In other words, sloppy
code like
{ int c; … while ((c = getc (fp)) < 0) … }
has to be rewritten to use WEOF
explicitly when wide characters
are used:
{ wint_t c; … while ((c = getwc (fp)) != WEOF) … }
This macro was introduced in Amendment 1 to ISO C90 and is defined in wchar.h.
These internal representations present problems when it comes to storage and transmittal. Because each single wide character consists of more than one byte, they are affected by byte-ordering. Thus, machines with different endianesses would see different values when accessing the same data. This byte ordering concern also applies for communication protocols that are all byte-based and therefore require that the sender has to decide about splitting the wide character in bytes. A last (but not least important) point is that wide characters often require more storage space than a customized byte-oriented character set.
For all the above reasons, an external encoding that is different from
the internal encoding is often used if the latter is UCS-2 or UCS-4.
The external encoding is byte-based and can be chosen appropriately for
the environment and for the texts to be handled. A variety of different
character sets can be used for this external encoding (information that
will not be exhaustively presented here–instead, a description of the
major groups will suffice). All of the ASCII-based character sets
fulfill one requirement: they are "filesystem safe." This means that
the character '/'
is used in the encoding only to
represent itself. Things are a bit different for character sets like
EBCDIC (Extended Binary Coded Decimal Interchange Code, a character set
family used by IBM), but if the operating system does not understand
EBCDIC directly the parameters-to-system calls have to be converted
first anyhow.
In most uses of ISO 2022 the defined character sets do not allow state changes that cover more than the next character. This has the big advantage that whenever one can identify the beginning of the byte sequence of a character one can interpret a text correctly. Examples of character sets using this policy are the various EUC character sets (used by Sun’s operating systems, EUC-JP, EUC-KR, EUC-TW, and EUC-CN) or Shift_JIS (SJIS, a Japanese encoding).
But there are also character sets using a state that is valid for more than one character and has to be changed by another byte sequence. Examples for this are ISO-2022-JP, ISO-2022-KR, and ISO-2022-CN.
0xc2 0x61
(non-spacing acute accent, followed by lower-case ‘a’) to get the “small
a with acute” character. To get the acute accent character on its own,
one has to write 0xc2 0x20
(the non-spacing acute followed by a
space).
Character sets like ISO 6937 are used in some embedded systems such as teletex.
There were a few other attempts to encode ISO 10646 such as UTF-7, but UTF-8 is today the only encoding that should be used. In fact, with any luck UTF-8 will soon be the only external encoding that has to be supported. It proves to be universally usable and its only disadvantage is that it favors Roman languages by making the byte string representation of other scripts (Cyrillic, Greek, Asian scripts) longer than necessary if using a specific character set for these scripts. Methods like the Unicode compression scheme can alleviate these problems.
The question remaining is: how to select the character set or encoding to use. The answer: you cannot decide about it yourself, it is decided by the developers of the system or the majority of the users. Since the goal is interoperability one has to use whatever the other people one works with use. If there are no constraints, the selection is based on the requirements the expected circle of users will have. In other words, if a project is expected to be used in only, say, Russia it is fine to use KOI8-R or a similar character set. But if at the same time people from, say, Greece are participating one should use a character set that allows all people to collaborate.
The most widely useful solution seems to be: go with the most general character set, namely ISO 10646. Use UTF-8 as the external encoding and problems about users not being able to use their own language adequately are a thing of the past.
One final comment about the choice of the wide character representation
is necessary at this point. We have said above that the natural choice
is using Unicode or ISO 10646. This is not required, but at least
encouraged, by the ISO C standard. The standard defines at least a
macro __STDC_ISO_10646__
that is only defined on systems where
the wchar_t
type encodes ISO 10646 characters. If this
symbol is not defined one should avoid making assumptions about the wide
character representation. If the programmer uses only the functions
provided by the C library to handle wide character strings there should
be no compatibility problems with other systems.
Next: Restartable Multibyte Conversion Functions, Previous: Introduction to Extended Characters, Up: Character Set Handling [Contents][Index]
A Unix C library contains three different sets of functions in two families to handle character set conversion. One of the function families (the most commonly used) is specified in the ISO C90 standard and, therefore, is portable even beyond the Unix world. Unfortunately this family is the least useful one. These functions should be avoided whenever possible, especially when developing libraries (as opposed to applications).
The second family of functions got introduced in the early Unix standards (XPG2) and is still part of the latest and greatest Unix standard: Unix 98. It is also the most powerful and useful set of functions. But we will start with the functions defined in Amendment 1 to ISO C90.
Next: Non-reentrant Conversion Function, Previous: Overview about Character Handling Functions, Up: Character Set Handling [Contents][Index]
The ISO C standard defines functions to convert strings from a multibyte representation to wide character strings. There are a number of peculiarities:
LC_CTYPE
category of the current locale is used; see
Locale Categories.
Despite these limitations the ISO C functions can be used in many
contexts. In graphical user interfaces, for instance, it is not
uncommon to have functions that require text to be displayed in a wide
character string if the text is not simple ASCII. The text itself might
come from a file with translations and the user should decide about the
current locale, which determines the translation and therefore also the
external encoding used. In such a situation (and many others) the
functions described here are perfect. If more freedom while performing
the conversion is necessary take a look at the iconv
functions
(see Generic Charset Conversion).
Next: Representing the state of the conversion, Up: Restartable Multibyte Conversion Functions [Contents][Index]
We already said above that the currently selected locale for the
LC_CTYPE
category decides the conversion that is performed
by the functions we are about to describe. Each locale uses its own
character set (given as an argument to localedef
) and this is the
one assumed as the external multibyte encoding. The wide character
set is always UCS-4 in the GNU C Library.
A characteristic of each multibyte character set is the maximum number of bytes that can be necessary to represent one character. This information is quite important when writing code that uses the conversion functions (as shown in the examples below). The ISO C standard defines two macros that provide this information.
MB_LEN_MAX
specifies the maximum number of bytes in the multibyte
sequence for a single character in any of the supported locales. It is
a compile-time constant and is defined in limits.h.
MB_CUR_MAX
expands into a positive integer expression that is the
maximum number of bytes in a multibyte character in the current locale.
The value is never greater than MB_LEN_MAX
. Unlike
MB_LEN_MAX
this macro need not be a compile-time constant, and in
the GNU C Library it is not.
MB_CUR_MAX
is defined in stdlib.h.
Two different macros are necessary since strictly ISO C90 compilers do not allow variable length array definitions, but still it is desirable to avoid dynamic allocation. This incomplete piece of code shows the problem:
{
char buf[MB_LEN_MAX];
ssize_t len = 0;
while (! feof (fp))
{
fread (&buf[len], 1, MB_CUR_MAX - len, fp);
/* … process buf */
len -= used;
}
}
The code in the inner loop is expected to have always enough bytes in
the array buf to convert one multibyte character. The array
buf has to be sized statically since many compilers do not allow a
variable size. The fread
call makes sure that MB_CUR_MAX
bytes are always available in buf. Note that it isn’t
a problem if MB_CUR_MAX
is not a compile-time constant.
Next: Converting Single Characters, Previous: Selecting the conversion and its properties, Up: Restartable Multibyte Conversion Functions [Contents][Index]
In the introduction of this chapter it was said that certain character sets use a stateful encoding. That is, the encoded values depend in some way on the previous bytes in the text.
Since the conversion functions allow converting a text in more than one step we must have a way to pass this information from one call of the functions to another.
A variable of type mbstate_t
can contain all the information
about the shift state needed from one call to a conversion
function to another.
mbstate_t
is defined in wchar.h. It was introduced in
Amendment 1 to ISO C90.
To use objects of type mbstate_t
the programmer has to define such
objects (normally as local variables on the stack) and pass a pointer to
the object to the conversion functions. This way the conversion function
can update the object if the current multibyte character set is stateful.
There is no specific function or initializer to put the state object in any specific state. The rules are that the object should always represent the initial state before the first use, and this is achieved by clearing the whole variable with code such as follows:
{
mbstate_t state;
memset (&state, '\0', sizeof (state));
/* from now on state can be used. */
…
}
When using the conversion functions to generate output it is often necessary to test whether the current state corresponds to the initial state. This is necessary, for example, to decide whether to emit escape sequences to set the state to the initial state at certain sequence points. Communication protocols often require this.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The mbsinit
function determines whether the state object pointed
to by ps is in the initial state. If ps is a null pointer or
the object is in the initial state the return value is nonzero. Otherwise
it is zero.
mbsinit
was introduced in Amendment 1 to ISO C90 and is
declared in wchar.h.
Code using mbsinit
often looks similar to this:
{ mbstate_t state; memset (&state, '\0', sizeof (state)); /* Use state. */ … if (! mbsinit (&state)) { /* Emit code to return to initial state. */ const wchar_t empty[] = L""; const wchar_t *srcp = empty; wcsrtombs (outbuf, &srcp, outbuflen, &state); } … }
The code to emit the escape sequence to get back to the initial state is
interesting. The wcsrtombs
function can be used to determine the
necessary output code (see Converting Multibyte and Wide Character Strings). Please note that with
the GNU C Library it is not necessary to perform this extra action for the
conversion from multibyte text to wide character text since the wide
character encoding is not stateful. But there is nothing mentioned in
any standard that prohibits making wchar_t
use a stateful
encoding.
Next: Converting Multibyte and Wide Character Strings, Previous: Representing the state of the conversion, Up: Restartable Multibyte Conversion Functions [Contents][Index]
The most fundamental of the conversion functions are those dealing with single characters. Please note that this does not always mean single bytes. But since there is very often a subset of the multibyte character set that consists of single byte sequences, there are functions to help with converting bytes. Frequently, ASCII is a subset of the multibyte character set. In such a scenario, each ASCII character stands for itself, and all other characters have at least a first byte that is beyond the range 0 to 127.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Unsafe corrupt heap lock dlopen | AC-Unsafe corrupt lock mem fd | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The btowc
function (“byte to wide character”) converts a valid
single byte character c in the initial shift state into the wide
character equivalent using the conversion rules from the currently
selected locale of the LC_CTYPE
category.
If (unsigned char) c
is no valid single byte multibyte
character or if c is EOF
, the function returns WEOF
.
Please note the restriction of c being tested for validity only in
the initial shift state. No mbstate_t
object is used from
which the state information is taken, and the function also does not use
any static state.
The btowc
function was introduced in Amendment 1 to ISO C90
and is declared in wchar.h.
Despite the limitation that the single byte value is always interpreted in the initial state, this function is actually useful most of the time. Most characters are either entirely single-byte character sets or they are extensions to ASCII. But then it is possible to write code like this (not that this specific example is very useful):
wchar_t * itow (unsigned long int val) { static wchar_t buf[30]; wchar_t *wcp = &buf[29]; *wcp = L'\0'; while (val != 0) { *--wcp = btowc ('0' + val % 10); val /= 10; } if (wcp == &buf[29]) *--wcp = L'0'; return wcp; }
Why is it necessary to use such a complicated implementation and not
simply cast '0' + val % 10
to a wide character? The answer is
that there is no guarantee that one can perform this kind of arithmetic
on the character of the character set used for wchar_t
representation. In other situations the bytes are not constant at
compile time and so the compiler cannot do the work. In situations like
this, using btowc
is required.
There is also a function for the conversion in the other direction.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Unsafe corrupt heap lock dlopen | AC-Unsafe corrupt lock mem fd | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The wctob
function (“wide character to byte”) takes as the
parameter a valid wide character. If the multibyte representation for
this character in the initial state is exactly one byte long, the return
value of this function is this character. Otherwise the return value is
EOF
.
wctob
was introduced in Amendment 1 to ISO C90 and
is declared in wchar.h.
There are more general functions to convert single characters from multibyte representation to wide characters and vice versa. These functions pose no limit on the length of the multibyte representation and they also do not require it to be in the initial state.
Preliminary: | MT-Unsafe race:mbrtowc/!ps | AS-Unsafe corrupt heap lock dlopen | AC-Unsafe corrupt lock mem fd | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The mbrtowc
function (“multibyte restartable to wide
character”) converts the next multibyte character in the string pointed
to by s into a wide character and stores it in the location
pointed to by pwc. The conversion is performed according
to the locale currently selected for the LC_CTYPE
category. If
the conversion for the character set used in the locale requires a state,
the multibyte string is interpreted in the state represented by the
object pointed to by ps. If ps is a null pointer, a static,
internal state variable used only by the mbrtowc
function is
used.
If the next multibyte character corresponds to the null wide character,
the return value of the function is 0 and the state object is
afterwards in the initial state. If the next n or fewer bytes
form a correct multibyte character, the return value is the number of
bytes starting from s that form the multibyte character. The
conversion state is updated according to the bytes consumed in the
conversion. In both cases the wide character (either the L'\0'
or the one found in the conversion) is stored in the string pointed to
by pwc if pwc is not null.
If the first n bytes of the multibyte string possibly form a valid
multibyte character but there are more than n bytes needed to
complete it, the return value of the function is (size_t) -2
and
no value is stored in *pwc
. The conversion state is
updated and all n input bytes are consumed and should not be
submitted again. Please note that this can happen even if n has a
value greater than or equal to MB_CUR_MAX
since the input might
contain redundant shift sequences.
If the first n
bytes of the multibyte string cannot possibly form
a valid multibyte character, no value is stored, the global variable
errno
is set to the value EILSEQ
, and the function returns
(size_t) -1
. The conversion state is afterwards undefined.
As specified, the mbrtowc
function could deal with multibyte
sequences which contain embedded null bytes (which happens in Unicode
encodings such as UTF-16), but the GNU C Library does not support such
multibyte encodings. When encountering a null input byte, the function
will either return zero, or return (size_t) -1)
and report a
EILSEQ
error. The iconv
function can be used for
converting between arbitrary encodings. See Generic Character Set Conversion Interface.
mbrtowc
was introduced in Amendment 1 to ISO C90 and
is declared in wchar.h.
A function that copies a multibyte string into a wide character string while at the same time converting all lowercase characters into uppercase could look like this:
wchar_t * mbstouwcs (const char *s) { /* Include the null terminator in the conversion. */ size_t len = strlen (s) + 1; wchar_t *result = reallocarray (NULL, len, sizeof (wchar_t)); if (result == NULL) return NULL; wchar_t *wcp = result; mbstate_t state; memset (&state, '\0', sizeof (state)); while (true) { wchar_t wc; size_t nbytes = mbrtowc (&wc, s, len, &state); if (nbytes == 0) { /* Terminate the result string. */ *wcp = L'\0'; break; } else if (nbytes == (size_t) -2) { /* Truncated input string. */ errno = EILSEQ; free (result); return NULL; } else if (nbytes == (size_t) -1) { /* Some other error (including EILSEQ). */ free (result); return NULL; } else { /* A character was converted. */ *wcp++ = towupper (wc); len -= nbytes; s += nbytes; } } return result; }
In the inner loop, a single wide character is stored in wc
, and
the number of consumed bytes is stored in the variable nbytes
.
If the conversion is successful, the uppercase variant of the wide
character is stored in the result
array and the pointer to the
input string and the number of available bytes is adjusted. If the
mbrtowc
function returns zero, the null input byte has not been
converted, so it must be stored explicitly in the result.
The above code uses the fact that there can never be more wide characters in the converted result than there are bytes in the multibyte input string. This method yields a pessimistic guess about the size of the result, and if many wide character strings have to be constructed this way or if the strings are long, the extra memory required to be allocated because the input string contains multibyte characters might be significant. The allocated memory block can be resized to the correct size before returning it, but a better solution might be to allocate just the right amount of space for the result right away. Unfortunately there is no function to compute the length of the wide character string directly from the multibyte string. There is, however, a function that does part of the work.
Preliminary: | MT-Unsafe race:mbrlen/!ps | AS-Unsafe corrupt heap lock dlopen | AC-Unsafe corrupt lock mem fd | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The mbrlen
function (“multibyte restartable length”) computes
the number of at most n bytes starting at s, which form the
next valid and complete multibyte character.
If the next multibyte character corresponds to the NUL wide character, the return value is 0. If the next n bytes form a valid multibyte character, the number of bytes belonging to this multibyte character byte sequence is returned.
If the first n bytes possibly form a valid multibyte
character but the character is incomplete, the return value is
(size_t) -2
. Otherwise the multibyte character sequence is invalid
and the return value is (size_t) -1
.
The multibyte sequence is interpreted in the state represented by the
object pointed to by ps. If ps is a null pointer, a state
object local to mbrlen
is used.
mbrlen
was introduced in Amendment 1 to ISO C90 and
is declared in wchar.h.
The attentive reader now will note that mbrlen
can be implemented
as
mbrtowc (NULL, s, n, ps != NULL ? ps : &internal)
This is true and in fact is mentioned in the official specification.
How can this function be used to determine the length of the wide
character string created from a multibyte character string? It is not
directly usable, but we can define a function mbslen
using it:
size_t
mbslen (const char *s)
{
mbstate_t state;
size_t result = 0;
size_t nbytes;
memset (&state, '\0', sizeof (state));
while ((nbytes = mbrlen (s, MB_LEN_MAX, &state)) > 0)
{
if (nbytes >= (size_t) -2)
/* Something is wrong. */
return (size_t) -1;
s += nbytes;
++result;
}
return result;
}
This function simply calls mbrlen
for each multibyte character
in the string and counts the number of function calls. Please note that
we here use MB_LEN_MAX
as the size argument in the mbrlen
call. This is acceptable since a) this value is larger than the length of
the longest multibyte character sequence and b) we know that the string
s ends with a NUL byte, which cannot be part of any other multibyte
character sequence but the one representing the NUL wide character.
Therefore, the mbrlen
function will never read invalid memory.
Now that this function is available (just to make this clear, this function is not part of the GNU C Library) we can compute the number of wide characters required to store the converted multibyte character string s using
wcs_bytes = (mbslen (s) + 1) * sizeof (wchar_t);
Please note that the mbslen
function is quite inefficient. The
implementation of mbstouwcs
with mbslen
would have to
perform the conversion of the multibyte character input string twice, and
this conversion might be quite expensive. So it is necessary to think
about the consequences of using the easier but imprecise method before
doing the work twice.
Preliminary: | MT-Unsafe race:wcrtomb/!ps | AS-Unsafe corrupt heap lock dlopen | AC-Unsafe corrupt lock mem fd | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The wcrtomb
function (“wide character restartable to
multibyte”) converts a single wide character into a multibyte string
corresponding to that wide character.
If s is a null pointer, the function resets the state stored in
the object pointed to by ps (or the internal mbstate_t
object) to the initial state. This can also be achieved by a call like
this:
wcrtombs (temp_buf, L'\0', ps)
since, if s is a null pointer, wcrtomb
performs as if it
writes into an internal buffer, which is guaranteed to be large enough.
If wc is the NUL wide character, wcrtomb
emits, if
necessary, a shift sequence to get the state ps into the initial
state followed by a single NUL byte, which is stored in the string
s.
Otherwise a byte sequence (possibly including shift sequences) is written
into the string s. This only happens if wc is a valid wide
character (i.e., it has a multibyte representation in the character set
selected by locale of the LC_CTYPE
category). If wc is no
valid wide character, nothing is stored in the strings s,
errno
is set to EILSEQ
, the conversion state in ps
is undefined and the return value is (size_t) -1
.
If no error occurred the function returns the number of bytes stored in the string s. This includes all bytes representing shift sequences.
One word about the interface of the function: there is no parameter specifying the length of the array s, so the caller has to make sure that there is enough space available, otherwise buffer overruns can occur. This version of the GNU C Library does not assume that s is at least MB_CUR_MAX bytes long, but programs that need to run on GNU C Library versions that have this assumption documented in the manual must comply with this limit.
wcrtomb
was introduced in Amendment 1 to ISO C90 and is
declared in wchar.h.
Using wcrtomb
is as easy as using mbrtowc
. The following
example appends a wide character string to a multibyte character string.
Again, the code is not really useful (or correct), it is simply here to
demonstrate the use and some problems.
char * mbscatwcs (char *s, size_t len, const wchar_t *ws) { mbstate_t state; /* Find the end of the existing string. */ char *wp = strchr (s, '\0'); len -= wp - s; memset (&state, '\0', sizeof (state)); do { size_t nbytes; if (len < MB_CUR_LEN) { /* We cannot guarantee that the next character fits into the buffer, so return an error. */ errno = E2BIG; return NULL; } nbytes = wcrtomb (wp, *ws, &state); if (nbytes == (size_t) -1) /* Error in the conversion. */ return NULL; len -= nbytes; wp += nbytes; } while (*ws++ != L'\0'); return s; }
First the function has to find the end of the string currently in the
array s. The strchr
call does this very efficiently since a
requirement for multibyte character representations is that the NUL byte
is never used except to represent itself (and in this context, the end
of the string).
After initializing the state object the loop is entered where the first
task is to make sure there is enough room in the array s. We
abort if there are not at least MB_CUR_LEN
bytes available. This
is not always optimal but we have no other choice. We might have less
than MB_CUR_LEN
bytes available but the next multibyte character
might also be only one byte long. At the time the wcrtomb
call
returns it is too late to decide whether the buffer was large enough. If
this solution is unsuitable, there is a very slow but more accurate
solution.
… if (len < MB_CUR_LEN) { mbstate_t temp_state; memcpy (&temp_state, &state, sizeof (state)); if (wcrtomb (NULL, *ws, &temp_state) > len) { /* We cannot guarantee that the next character fits into the buffer, so return an error. */ errno = E2BIG; return NULL; } } …
Here we perform the conversion that might overflow the buffer so that
we are afterwards in the position to make an exact decision about the
buffer size. Please note the NULL
argument for the destination
buffer in the new wcrtomb
call; since we are not interested in the
converted text at this point, this is a nice way to express this. The
most unusual thing about this piece of code certainly is the duplication
of the conversion state object, but if a change of the state is necessary
to emit the next multibyte character, we want to have the same shift state
change performed in the real conversion. Therefore, we have to preserve
the initial shift state information.
There are certainly many more and even better solutions to this problem. This example is only provided for educational purposes.
Next: A Complete Multibyte Conversion Example, Previous: Converting Single Characters, Up: Restartable Multibyte Conversion Functions [Contents][Index]
The functions described in the previous section only convert a single character at a time. Most operations to be performed in real-world programs include strings and therefore the ISO C standard also defines conversions on entire strings. However, the defined set of functions is quite limited; therefore, the GNU C Library contains a few extensions that can help in some important situations.
Preliminary: | MT-Unsafe race:mbsrtowcs/!ps | AS-Unsafe corrupt heap lock dlopen | AC-Unsafe corrupt lock mem fd | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The mbsrtowcs
function (“multibyte string restartable to wide
character string”) converts the NUL-terminated multibyte character
string at *src
into an equivalent wide character string,
including the NUL wide character at the end. The conversion is started
using the state information from the object pointed to by ps or
from an internal object of mbsrtowcs
if ps is a null
pointer. Before returning, the state object is updated to match the state
after the last converted character. The state is the initial state if the
terminating NUL byte is reached and converted.
If dst is not a null pointer, the result is stored in the array pointed to by dst; otherwise, the conversion result is not available since it is stored in an internal buffer.
If len wide characters are stored in the array dst before reaching the end of the input string, the conversion stops and len is returned. If dst is a null pointer, len is never checked.
Another reason for a premature return from the function call is if the
input string contains an invalid multibyte sequence. In this case the
global variable errno
is set to EILSEQ
and the function
returns (size_t) -1
.
In all other cases the function returns the number of wide characters
converted during this call. If dst is not null, mbsrtowcs
stores in the pointer pointed to by src either a null pointer (if
the NUL byte in the input string was reached) or the address of the byte
following the last converted multibyte character.
Like mbstowcs
the dst parameter may be a null pointer and
the function can be used to count the number of wide characters that
would be required.
mbsrtowcs
was introduced in Amendment 1 to ISO C90 and is
declared in wchar.h.
The definition of the mbsrtowcs
function has one important
limitation. The requirement that dst has to be a NUL-terminated
string provides problems if one wants to convert buffers with text. A
buffer is not normally a collection of NUL-terminated strings but instead a
continuous collection of lines, separated by newline characters. Now
assume that a function to convert one line from a buffer is needed. Since
the line is not NUL-terminated, the source pointer cannot directly point
into the unmodified text buffer. This means, either one inserts the NUL
byte at the appropriate place for the time of the mbsrtowcs
function call (which is not doable for a read-only buffer or in a
multi-threaded application) or one copies the line in an extra buffer
where it can be terminated by a NUL byte. Note that it is not in general
possible to limit the number of characters to convert by setting the
parameter len to any specific value. Since it is not known how
many bytes each multibyte character sequence is in length, one can only
guess.
There is still a problem with the method of NUL-terminating a line right
after the newline character, which could lead to very strange results.
As said in the description of the mbsrtowcs
function above, the
conversion state is guaranteed to be in the initial shift state after
processing the NUL byte at the end of the input string. But this NUL
byte is not really part of the text (i.e., the conversion state after
the newline in the original text could be something different than the
initial shift state and therefore the first character of the next line
is encoded using this state). But the state in question is never
accessible to the user since the conversion stops after the NUL byte
(which resets the state). Most stateful character sets in use today
require that the shift state after a newline be the initial state–but
this is not a strict guarantee. Therefore, simply NUL-terminating a
piece of a running text is not always an adequate solution and,
therefore, should never be used in generally used code.
The generic conversion interface (see Generic Charset Conversion)
does not have this limitation (it simply works on buffers, not
strings), and the GNU C Library contains a set of functions that take
additional parameters specifying the maximal number of bytes that are
consumed from the input string. This way the problem of
mbsrtowcs
’s example above could be solved by determining the line
length and passing this length to the function.
Preliminary: | MT-Unsafe race:wcsrtombs/!ps | AS-Unsafe corrupt heap lock dlopen | AC-Unsafe corrupt lock mem fd | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The wcsrtombs
function (“wide character string restartable to
multibyte string”) converts the NUL-terminated wide character string at
*src
into an equivalent multibyte character string and
stores the result in the array pointed to by dst. The NUL wide
character is also converted. The conversion starts in the state
described in the object pointed to by ps or by a state object
local to wcsrtombs
in case ps is a null pointer. If
dst is a null pointer, the conversion is performed as usual but the
result is not available. If all characters of the input string were
successfully converted and if dst is not a null pointer, the
pointer pointed to by src gets assigned a null pointer.
If one of the wide characters in the input string has no valid multibyte
character equivalent, the conversion stops early, sets the global
variable errno
to EILSEQ
, and returns (size_t) -1
.
Another reason for a premature stop is if dst is not a null pointer and the next converted character would require more than len bytes in total to the array dst. In this case (and if dst is not a null pointer) the pointer pointed to by src is assigned a value pointing to the wide character right after the last one successfully converted.
Except in the case of an encoding error the return value of the
wcsrtombs
function is the number of bytes in all the multibyte
character sequences which were or would have been (if dst was
not a null) stored in dst. Before returning, the state in the
object pointed to by ps (or the internal object in case ps
is a null pointer) is updated to reflect the state after the last
conversion. The state is the initial shift state in case the
terminating NUL wide character was converted.
The wcsrtombs
function was introduced in Amendment 1 to
ISO C90 and is declared in wchar.h.
The restriction mentioned above for the mbsrtowcs
function applies
here also. There is no possibility of directly controlling the number of
input characters. One has to place the NUL wide character at the correct
place or control the consumed input indirectly via the available output
array size (the len parameter).
Preliminary: | MT-Unsafe race:mbsnrtowcs/!ps | AS-Unsafe corrupt heap lock dlopen | AC-Unsafe corrupt lock mem fd | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The mbsnrtowcs
function is very similar to the mbsrtowcs
function. All the parameters are the same except for nmc, which is
new. The return value is the same as for mbsrtowcs
.
This new parameter specifies how many bytes at most can be used from the
multibyte character string. In other words, the multibyte character
string *src
need not be NUL-terminated. But if a NUL byte
is found within the nmc first bytes of the string, the conversion
stops there.
Like mbstowcs
the dst parameter may be a null pointer and
the function can be used to count the number of wide characters that
would be required.
This function is a GNU extension. It is meant to work around the problems mentioned above. Now it is possible to convert a buffer with multibyte character text piece by piece without having to care about inserting NUL bytes and the effect of NUL bytes on the conversion state.
A function to convert a multibyte string into a wide character string and display it could be written like this (this is not a really useful example):
void
showmbs (const char *src, FILE *fp)
{
mbstate_t state;
int cnt = 0;
memset (&state, '\0', sizeof (state));
while (1)
{
wchar_t linebuf[100];
const char *endp = strchr (src, '\n');
size_t n;
/* Exit if there is no more line. */
if (endp == NULL)
break;
n = mbsnrtowcs (linebuf, &src, endp - src, 99, &state);
linebuf[n] = L'\0';
fprintf (fp, "line %d: \"%S\"\n", linebuf);
}
}
There is no problem with the state after a call to mbsnrtowcs
.
Since we don’t insert characters in the strings that were not in there
right from the beginning and we use state only for the conversion
of the given buffer, there is no problem with altering the state.
Preliminary: | MT-Unsafe race:wcsnrtombs/!ps | AS-Unsafe corrupt heap lock dlopen | AC-Unsafe corrupt lock mem fd | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The wcsnrtombs
function implements the conversion from wide
character strings to multibyte character strings. It is similar to
wcsrtombs
but, just like mbsnrtowcs
, it takes an extra
parameter, which specifies the length of the input string.
No more than nwc wide characters from the input string
*src
are converted. If the input string contains a NUL
wide character in the first nwc characters, the conversion stops at
this place.
The wcsnrtombs
function is a GNU extension and just like
mbsnrtowcs
helps in situations where no NUL-terminated input
strings are available.
Previous: Converting Multibyte and Wide Character Strings, Up: Restartable Multibyte Conversion Functions [Contents][Index]
The example programs given in the last sections are only brief and do
not contain all the error checking, etc. Presented here is a complete
and documented example. It features the mbrtowc
function but it
should be easy to derive versions using the other functions.
int file_mbsrtowcs (int input, int output) { /* Note the use ofMB_LEN_MAX
.MB_CUR_MAX
cannot portably be used here. */ char buffer[BUFSIZ + MB_LEN_MAX]; mbstate_t state; int filled = 0; int eof = 0; /* Initialize the state. */ memset (&state, '\0', sizeof (state)); while (!eof) { ssize_t nread; ssize_t nwrite; char *inp = buffer; wchar_t outbuf[BUFSIZ]; wchar_t *outp = outbuf; /* Fill up the buffer from the input file. */ nread = read (input, buffer + filled, BUFSIZ); if (nread < 0) { perror ("read"); return 0; } /* If we reach end of file, make a note to read no more. */ if (nread == 0) eof = 1; /*filled
is now the number of bytes inbuffer
. */ filled += nread; /* Convert those bytes to wide characters–as many as we can. */ while (1) { size_t thislen = mbrtowc (outp, inp, filled, &state); /* Stop converting at invalid character; this can mean we have read just the first part of a valid character. */ if (thislen == (size_t) -1) break; /* We want to handle embedded NUL bytes but the return value is 0. Correct this. */ if (thislen == 0) thislen = 1; /* Advance past this character. */ inp += thislen; filled -= thislen; ++outp; } /* Write the wide characters we just made. */ nwrite = write (output, outbuf, (outp - outbuf) * sizeof (wchar_t)); if (nwrite < 0) { perror ("write"); return 0; } /* See if we have a real invalid character. */ if ((eof && filled > 0) || filled >= MB_CUR_MAX) { error (0, 0, "invalid multibyte character"); return 0; } /* If any characters must be carried forward, put them at the beginning ofbuffer
. */ if (filled > 0) memmove (buffer, inp, filled); } return 1; }
Next: Generic Charset Conversion, Previous: Restartable Multibyte Conversion Functions, Up: Character Set Handling [Contents][Index]
The functions described in the previous chapter are defined in Amendment 1 to ISO C90, but the original ISO C90 standard also contained functions for character set conversion. The reason that these original functions are not described first is that they are almost entirely useless.
The problem is that all the conversion functions described in the original ISO C90 use a local state. Using a local state implies that multiple conversions at the same time (not only when using threads) cannot be done, and that you cannot first convert single characters and then strings since you cannot tell the conversion functions which state to use.
These original functions are therefore usable only in a very limited set of situations. One must complete converting the entire string before starting a new one, and each string/text must be converted with the same function (there is no problem with the library itself; it is guaranteed that no library function changes the state of any of these functions). For the above reasons it is highly requested that the functions described in the previous section be used in place of non-reentrant conversion functions.
Preliminary: | MT-Unsafe race | AS-Unsafe corrupt heap lock dlopen | AC-Unsafe corrupt lock mem fd | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The mbtowc
(“multibyte to wide character”) function when called
with non-null string converts the first multibyte character
beginning at string to its corresponding wide character code. It
stores the result in *result
.
mbtowc
never examines more than size bytes. (The idea is
to supply for size the number of bytes of data you have in hand.)
mbtowc
with non-null string distinguishes three
possibilities: the first size bytes at string start with
valid multibyte characters, they start with an invalid byte sequence or
just part of a character, or string points to an empty string (a
null character).
For a valid multibyte character, mbtowc
converts it to a wide
character and stores that in *result
, and returns the
number of bytes in that character (always at least 1 and never
more than size).
For an invalid byte sequence, mbtowc
returns -1. For an
empty string, it returns 0, also storing '\0'
in
*result
.
If the multibyte character code uses shift characters, then
mbtowc
maintains and updates a shift state as it scans. If you
call mbtowc
with a null pointer for string, that
initializes the shift state to its standard initial value. It also
returns nonzero if the multibyte character code in use actually has a
shift state. See States in Non-reentrant Functions.
Preliminary: | MT-Unsafe race | AS-Unsafe corrupt heap lock dlopen | AC-Unsafe corrupt lock mem fd | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The wctomb
(“wide character to multibyte”) function converts
the wide character code wchar to its corresponding multibyte
character sequence, and stores the result in bytes starting at
string. At most MB_CUR_MAX
characters are stored.
wctomb
with non-null string distinguishes three
possibilities for wchar: a valid wide character code (one that can
be translated to a multibyte character), an invalid code, and
L'\0'
.
Given a valid code, wctomb
converts it to a multibyte character,
storing the bytes starting at string. Then it returns the number
of bytes in that character (always at least 1 and never more
than MB_CUR_MAX
).
If wchar is an invalid wide character code, wctomb
returns
-1. If wchar is L'\0'
, it returns 0
, also
storing '\0'
in *string
.
If the multibyte character code uses shift characters, then
wctomb
maintains and updates a shift state as it scans. If you
call wctomb
with a null pointer for string, that
initializes the shift state to its standard initial value. It also
returns nonzero if the multibyte character code in use actually has a
shift state. See States in Non-reentrant Functions.
Calling this function with a wchar argument of zero when
string is not null has the side-effect of reinitializing the
stored shift state as well as storing the multibyte character
'\0'
and returning 0.
Similar to mbrlen
there is also a non-reentrant function that
computes the length of a multibyte character. It can be defined in
terms of mbtowc
.
Preliminary: | MT-Unsafe race | AS-Unsafe corrupt heap lock dlopen | AC-Unsafe corrupt lock mem fd | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The mblen
function with a non-null string argument returns
the number of bytes that make up the multibyte character beginning at
string, never examining more than size bytes. (The idea is
to supply for size the number of bytes of data you have in hand.)
The return value of mblen
distinguishes three possibilities: the
first size bytes at string start with valid multibyte
characters, they start with an invalid byte sequence or just part of a
character, or string points to an empty string (a null character).
For a valid multibyte character, mblen
returns the number of
bytes in that character (always at least 1
and never more than
size). For an invalid byte sequence, mblen
returns
-1. For an empty string, it returns 0.
If the multibyte character code uses shift characters, then mblen
maintains and updates a shift state as it scans. If you call
mblen
with a null pointer for string, that initializes the
shift state to its standard initial value. It also returns a nonzero
value if the multibyte character code in use actually has a shift state.
See States in Non-reentrant Functions.
The function mblen
is declared in stdlib.h.
Next: States in Non-reentrant Functions, Previous: Non-reentrant Conversion of Single Characters, Up: Non-reentrant Conversion Function [Contents][Index]
For convenience the ISO C90 standard also defines functions to convert entire strings instead of single characters. These functions suffer from the same problems as their reentrant counterparts from Amendment 1 to ISO C90; see Converting Multibyte and Wide Character Strings.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Unsafe corrupt heap lock dlopen | AC-Unsafe corrupt lock mem fd | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The mbstowcs
(“multibyte string to wide character string”)
function converts the null-terminated string of multibyte characters
string to an array of wide character codes, storing not more than
size wide characters into the array beginning at wstring.
The terminating null character counts towards the size, so if size
is less than the actual number of wide characters resulting from
string, no terminating null character is stored.
The conversion of characters from string begins in the initial shift state.
If an invalid multibyte character sequence is found, the mbstowcs
function returns a value of -1. Otherwise, it returns the number
of wide characters stored in the array wstring. This number does
not include the terminating null character, which is present if the
number is less than size.
Here is an example showing how to convert a string of multibyte characters, allocating enough space for the result.
wchar_t * mbstowcs_alloc (const char *string) { size_t size = strlen (string) + 1; wchar_t *buf = xmalloc (size * sizeof (wchar_t)); size = mbstowcs (buf, string, size); if (size == (size_t) -1) return NULL; buf = xreallocarray (buf, size + 1, sizeof *buf); return buf; }
If wstring is a null pointer then no output is written and the conversion proceeds as above, and the result is returned. In practice such behaviour is useful for calculating the exact number of wide characters required to convert string. This behaviour of accepting a null pointer for wstring is an XPG4.2 extension that is not specified in ISO C and is optional in POSIX.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Unsafe corrupt heap lock dlopen | AC-Unsafe corrupt lock mem fd | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The wcstombs
(“wide character string to multibyte string”)
function converts the null-terminated wide character array wstring
into a string containing multibyte characters, storing not more than
size bytes starting at string, followed by a terminating
null character if there is room. The conversion of characters begins in
the initial shift state.
The terminating null character counts towards the size, so if size is less than or equal to the number of bytes needed in wstring, no terminating null character is stored.
If a code that does not correspond to a valid multibyte character is
found, the wcstombs
function returns a value of -1.
Otherwise, the return value is the number of bytes stored in the array
string. This number does not include the terminating null character,
which is present if the number is less than size.
Previous: Non-reentrant Conversion of Strings, Up: Non-reentrant Conversion Function [Contents][Index]
In some multibyte character codes, the meaning of any particular byte sequence is not fixed; it depends on what other sequences have come earlier in the same string. Typically there are just a few sequences that can change the meaning of other sequences; these few are called shift sequences and we say that they set the shift state for other sequences that follow.
To illustrate shift state and shift sequences, suppose we decide that
the sequence 0200
(just one byte) enters Japanese mode, in which
pairs of bytes in the range from 0240
to 0377
are single
characters, while 0201
enters Latin-1 mode, in which single bytes
in the range from 0240
to 0377
are characters, and
interpreted according to the ISO Latin-1 character set. This is a
multibyte code that has two alternative shift states (“Japanese mode”
and “Latin-1 mode”), and two shift sequences that specify particular
shift states.
When the multibyte character code in use has shift states, then
mblen
, mbtowc
, and wctomb
must maintain and update
the current shift state as they scan the string. To make this work
properly, you must follow these rules:
mblen (NULL,
0)
. This initializes the shift state to its standard initial value.
Here is an example of using mblen
following these rules:
void scan_string (char *s) { int length = strlen (s); /* Initialize shift state. */ mblen (NULL, 0); while (1) { int thischar = mblen (s, length); /* Deal with end of string and invalid characters. */ if (thischar == 0) break; if (thischar == -1) { error ("invalid multibyte character"); break; } /* Advance past this character. */ s += thischar; length -= thischar; } }
The functions mblen
, mbtowc
and wctomb
are not
reentrant when using a multibyte code that uses a shift state. However,
no other library functions call these functions, so you don’t have to
worry that the shift state will be changed mysteriously.
Previous: Non-reentrant Conversion Function, Up: Character Set Handling [Contents][Index]
The conversion functions mentioned so far in this chapter all had in
common that they operate on character sets that are not directly
specified by the functions. The multibyte encoding used is specified by
the currently selected locale for the LC_CTYPE
category. The
wide character set is fixed by the implementation (in the case of the GNU C Library
it is always UCS-4 encoded ISO 10646).
This has of course several problems when it comes to general character conversion:
LC_CTYPE
category, one has to change the LC_CTYPE
locale using
setlocale
.
Changing the LC_CTYPE
locale introduces major problems for the rest
of the programs since several more functions (e.g., the character
classification functions, see Classification of Characters) use the
LC_CTYPE
category.
LC_CTYPE
selection is global and shared by all
threads.
wchar_t
representation, there is at least a two-step
process necessary to convert a text using the functions above. One would
have to select the source character set as the multibyte encoding,
convert the text into a wchar_t
text, select the destination
character set as the multibyte encoding, and convert the wide character
text to the multibyte (= destination) character set.
Even if this is possible (which is not guaranteed) it is a very tiring work. Plus it suffers from the other two raised points even more due to the steady changing of the locale.
The XPG2 standard defines a completely new set of functions, which has none of these limitations. They are not at all coupled to the selected locales, and they have no constraints on the character sets selected for source and destination. Only the set of available conversions limits them. The standard does not specify that any conversion at all must be available. Such availability is a measure of the quality of the implementation.
In the following text first the interface to iconv
and then the
conversion function, will be described. Comparisons with other
implementations will show what obstacles stand in the way of portable
applications. Finally, the implementation is described in so far as might
interest the advanced user who wants to extend conversion capabilities.
iconv
exampleiconv
Implementationsiconv
Implementation in the GNU C Library
Next: A complete iconv
example, Up: Generic Charset Conversion [Contents][Index]
This set of functions follows the traditional cycle of using a resource: open–use–close. The interface consists of three functions, each of which implements one step.
Before the interfaces are described it is necessary to introduce a data type. Just like other open–use–close interfaces the functions introduced here work using handles and the iconv.h header defines a special type for the handles used.
This data type is an abstract type defined in iconv.h. The user must not assume anything about the definition of this type; it must be completely opaque.
Objects of this type can be assigned handles for the conversions using
the iconv
functions. The objects themselves need not be freed, but
the conversions for which the handles stand for have to.
The first step is the function to create a handle.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe locale | AS-Unsafe corrupt heap lock dlopen | AC-Unsafe corrupt lock mem fd | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The iconv_open
function has to be used before starting a
conversion. The two parameters this function takes determine the
source and destination character set for the conversion, and if the
implementation has the possibility to perform such a conversion, the
function returns a handle.
If the wanted conversion is not available, the iconv_open
function
returns (iconv_t) -1
. In this case the global variable
errno
can have the following values:
EMFILE
The process already has OPEN_MAX
file descriptors open.
ENFILE
The system limit of open files is reached.
ENOMEM
Not enough memory to carry out the operation.
EINVAL
The conversion from fromcode to tocode is not supported.
It is not possible to use the same descriptor in different threads to perform independent conversions. The data structures associated with the descriptor include information about the conversion state. This must not be messed up by using it in different conversions.
An iconv
descriptor is like a file descriptor as for every use a
new descriptor must be created. The descriptor does not stand for all
of the conversions from fromset to toset.
The GNU C Library implementation of iconv_open
has one
significant extension to other implementations. To ease the extension
of the set of available conversions, the implementation allows storing
the necessary files with data and code in an arbitrary number of
directories. How this extension must be written will be explained below
(see The iconv
Implementation in the GNU C Library). Here it is only important to say
that all directories mentioned in the GCONV_PATH
environment
variable are considered only if they contain a file gconv-modules.
These directories need not necessarily be created by the system
administrator. In fact, this extension is introduced to help users
writing and using their own, new conversions. Of course, this does not
work for security reasons in SUID binaries; in this case only the system
directory is considered and this normally is
prefix/lib/gconv. The GCONV_PATH
environment
variable is examined exactly once at the first call of the
iconv_open
function. Later modifications of the variable have no
effect.
The iconv_open
function was introduced early in the X/Open
Portability Guide, version 2. It is supported by all commercial
Unices as it is required for the Unix branding. However, the quality and
completeness of the implementation varies widely. The iconv_open
function is declared in iconv.h.
The iconv
implementation can associate large data structure with
the handle returned by iconv_open
. Therefore, it is crucial to
free all the resources once all conversions are carried out and the
conversion is not needed anymore.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Unsafe corrupt heap lock dlopen | AC-Unsafe corrupt lock mem | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The iconv_close
function frees all resources associated with the
handle cd, which must have been returned by a successful call to
the iconv_open
function.
If the function call was successful the return value is 0.
Otherwise it is -1 and errno
is set appropriately.
Defined errors are:
EBADF
The conversion descriptor is invalid.
The iconv_close
function was introduced together with the rest
of the iconv
functions in XPG2 and is declared in iconv.h.
The standard defines only one actual conversion function. This has, therefore, the most general interface: it allows conversion from one buffer to another. Conversion from a file to a buffer, vice versa, or even file to file can be implemented on top of it.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe race:cd | AS-Safe | AC-Unsafe corrupt | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The iconv
function converts the text in the input buffer
according to the rules associated with the descriptor cd and
stores the result in the output buffer. It is possible to call the
function for the same text several times in a row since for stateful
character sets the necessary state information is kept in the data
structures associated with the descriptor.
The input buffer is specified by *inbuf
and it contains
*inbytesleft
bytes. The extra indirection is necessary for
communicating the used input back to the caller (see below). It is
important to note that the buffer pointer is of type char
and the
length is measured in bytes even if the input text is encoded in wide
characters.
The output buffer is specified in a similar way. *outbuf
points to the beginning of the buffer with at least
*outbytesleft
bytes room for the result. The buffer
pointer again is of type char
and the length is measured in
bytes. If outbuf or *outbuf
is a null pointer, the
conversion is performed but no output is available.
If inbuf is a null pointer, the iconv
function performs the
necessary action to put the state of the conversion into the initial
state. This is obviously a no-op for non-stateful encodings, but if the
encoding has a state, such a function call might put some byte sequences
in the output buffer, which perform the necessary state changes. The
next call with inbuf not being a null pointer then simply goes on
from the initial state. It is important that the programmer never makes
any assumption as to whether the conversion has to deal with states.
Even if the input and output character sets are not stateful, the
implementation might still have to keep states. This is due to the
implementation chosen for the GNU C Library as it is described below.
Therefore an iconv
call to reset the state should always be
performed if some protocol requires this for the output text.
The conversion stops for one of three reasons. The first is that all characters from the input buffer are converted. This actually can mean two things: either all bytes from the input buffer are consumed or there are some bytes at the end of the buffer that possibly can form a complete character but the input is incomplete. The second reason for a stop is that the output buffer is full. And the third reason is that the input contains invalid characters.
In all of these cases the buffer pointers after the last successful conversion, for the input and output buffers, are stored in inbuf and outbuf, and the available room in each buffer is stored in inbytesleft and outbytesleft.
Since the character sets selected in the iconv_open
call can be
almost arbitrary, there can be situations where the input buffer contains
valid characters, which have no identical representation in the output
character set. The behavior in this situation is undefined. The
current behavior of the GNU C Library in this situation is to
return with an error immediately. This certainly is not the most
desirable solution; therefore, future versions will provide better ones,
but they are not yet finished.
If all input from the input buffer is successfully converted and stored
in the output buffer, the function returns the number of non-reversible
conversions performed. In all other cases the return value is
(size_t) -1
and errno
is set appropriately. In such cases
the value pointed to by inbytesleft is nonzero.
EILSEQ
The conversion stopped because of an invalid byte sequence in the input.
After the call, *inbuf
points at the first byte of the
invalid byte sequence.
E2BIG
The conversion stopped because it ran out of space in the output buffer.
EINVAL
The conversion stopped because of an incomplete byte sequence at the end of the input buffer.
EBADF
The cd argument is invalid.
The iconv
function was introduced in the XPG2 standard and is
declared in the iconv.h header.
The definition of the iconv
function is quite good overall. It
provides quite flexible functionality. The only problems lie in the
boundary cases, which are incomplete byte sequences at the end of the
input buffer and invalid input. A third problem, which is not really
a design problem, is the way conversions are selected. The standard
does not say anything about the legitimate names, a minimal set of
available conversions. We will see how this negatively impacts other
implementations, as demonstrated below.
Next: Some Details about other iconv
Implementations, Previous: Generic Character Set Conversion Interface, Up: Generic Charset Conversion [Contents][Index]
iconv
exampleThe example below features a solution for a common problem. Given that
one knows the internal encoding used by the system for wchar_t
strings, one often is in the position to read text from a file and store
it in wide character buffers. One can do this using mbsrtowcs
,
but then we run into the problems discussed above.
int
file2wcs (int fd, const char *charset, wchar_t *outbuf, size_t avail)
{
char inbuf[BUFSIZ];
size_t insize = 0;
char *wrptr = (char *) outbuf;
int result = 0;
iconv_t cd;
cd = iconv_open ("WCHAR_T", charset);
if (cd == (iconv_t) -1)
{
/* Something went wrong. */
if (errno == EINVAL)
error (0, 0, "conversion from '%s' to wchar_t not available",
charset);
else
perror ("iconv_open");
/* Terminate the output string. */
*outbuf = L'\0';
return -1;
}
while (avail > 0)
{
size_t nread;
size_t nconv;
char *inptr = inbuf;
/* Read more input. */
nread = read (fd, inbuf + insize, sizeof (inbuf) - insize);
if (nread == 0)
{
/* When we come here the file is completely read.
This still could mean there are some unused
characters in the inbuf
. Put them back. */
if (lseek (fd, -insize, SEEK_CUR) == -1)
result = -1;
/* Now write out the byte sequence to get into the
initial state if this is necessary. */
iconv (cd, NULL, NULL, &wrptr, &avail);
break;
}
insize += nread;
/* Do the conversion. */
nconv = iconv (cd, &inptr, &insize, &wrptr, &avail);
if (nconv == (size_t) -1)
{
/* Not everything went right. It might only be
an unfinished byte sequence at the end of the
buffer. Or it is a real problem. */
if (errno == EINVAL)
/* This is harmless. Simply move the unused
bytes to the beginning of the buffer so that
they can be used in the next round. */
memmove (inbuf, inptr, insize);
else
{
/* It is a real problem. Maybe we ran out of
space in the output buffer or we have invalid
input. In any case back the file pointer to
the position of the last processed byte. */
lseek (fd, -insize, SEEK_CUR);
result = -1;
break;
}
}
}
/* Terminate the output string. */
if (avail >= sizeof (wchar_t))
*((wchar_t *) wrptr) = L'\0';
if (iconv_close (cd) != 0)
perror ("iconv_close");
return (wchar_t *) wrptr - outbuf;
}
This example shows the most important aspects of using the iconv
functions. It shows how successive calls to iconv
can be used to
convert large amounts of text. The user does not have to care about
stateful encodings as the functions take care of everything.
An interesting point is the case where iconv
returns an error and
errno
is set to EINVAL
. This is not really an error in the
transformation. It can happen whenever the input character set contains
byte sequences of more than one byte for some character and texts are not
processed in one piece. In this case there is a chance that a multibyte
sequence is cut. The caller can then simply read the remainder of the
takes and feed the offending bytes together with new character from the
input to iconv
and continue the work. The internal state kept in
the descriptor is not unspecified after such an event as is the
case with the conversion functions from the ISO C standard.
The example also shows the problem of using wide character strings with
iconv
. As explained in the description of the iconv
function above, the function always takes a pointer to a char
array and the available space is measured in bytes. In the example, the
output buffer is a wide character buffer; therefore, we use a local
variable wrptr of type char *
, which is used in the
iconv
calls.
This looks rather innocent but can lead to problems on platforms that
have tight restriction on alignment. Therefore the caller of iconv
has to make sure that the pointers passed are suitable for access of
characters from the appropriate character set. Since, in the
above case, the input parameter to the function is a wchar_t
pointer, this is the case (unless the user violates alignment when
computing the parameter). But in other situations, especially when
writing generic functions where one does not know what type of character
set one uses and, therefore, treats text as a sequence of bytes, it might
become tricky.
Next: The iconv
Implementation in the GNU C Library, Previous: A complete iconv
example, Up: Generic Charset Conversion [Contents][Index]
iconv
ImplementationsThis is not really the place to discuss the iconv
implementation
of other systems but it is necessary to know a bit about them to write
portable programs. The above mentioned problems with the specification
of the iconv
functions can lead to portability issues.
The first thing to notice is that, due to the large number of character sets in use, it is certainly not practical to encode the conversions directly in the C library. Therefore, the conversion information must come from files outside the C library. This is usually done in one or both of the following ways:
This solution is problematic as it requires a great deal of effort to apply to all character sets (potentially an infinite set). The differences in the structure of the different character sets is so large that many different variants of the table-processing functions must be developed. In addition, the generic nature of these functions make them slower than specifically implemented functions.
This solution provides much more flexibility. The C library itself contains only very little code and therefore reduces the general memory footprint. Also, with a documented interface between the C library and the loadable modules it is possible for third parties to extend the set of available conversion modules. A drawback of this solution is that dynamic loading must be available.
Some implementations in commercial Unices implement a mixture of these possibilities; the majority implement only the second solution. Using loadable modules moves the code out of the library itself and keeps the door open for extensions and improvements, but this design is also limiting on some platforms since not many platforms support dynamic loading in statically linked programs. On platforms without this capability it is therefore not possible to use this interface in statically linked programs. The GNU C Library has, on ELF platforms, no problems with dynamic loading in these situations; therefore, this point is moot. The danger is that one gets acquainted with this situation and forgets about the restrictions on other systems.
A second thing to know about other iconv
implementations is that
the number of available conversions is often very limited. Some
implementations provide, in the standard release (not special
international or developer releases), at most 100 to 200 conversion
possibilities. This does not mean 200 different character sets are
supported; for example, conversions from one character set to a set of 10
others might count as 10 conversions. Together with the other direction
this makes 20 conversion possibilities used up by one character set. One
can imagine the thin coverage these platforms provide. Some Unix vendors
even provide only a handful of conversions, which renders them useless for
almost all uses.
This directly leads to a third and probably the most problematic point.
The way the iconv
conversion functions are implemented on all
known Unix systems and the availability of the conversion functions from
character set A to B and the conversion from
B to C does not imply that the
conversion from A to C is available.
This might not seem unreasonable and problematic at first, but it is a quite big problem as one will notice shortly after hitting it. To show the problem we assume to write a program that has to convert from A to C. A call like
cd = iconv_open ("C", "A");
fails according to the assumption above. But what does the program do now? The conversion is necessary; therefore, simply giving up is not an option.
This is a nuisance. The iconv
function should take care of this.
But how should the program proceed from here on? If it tries to convert
to character set B, first the two iconv_open
calls
cd1 = iconv_open ("B", "A");
and
cd2 = iconv_open ("C", "B");
will succeed, but how to find B?
Unfortunately, the answer is: there is no general solution. On some systems guessing might help. On those systems most character sets can convert to and from UTF-8 encoded ISO 10646 or Unicode text. Besides this only some very system-specific methods can help. Since the conversion functions come from loadable modules and these modules must be stored somewhere in the filesystem, one could try to find them and determine from the available file which conversions are available and whether there is an indirect route from A to C.
This example shows one of the design errors of iconv
mentioned
above. It should at least be possible to determine the list of available
conversions programmatically so that if iconv_open
says there is no
such conversion, one could make sure this also is true for indirect
routes.
Previous: Some Details about other iconv
Implementations, Up: Generic Charset Conversion [Contents][Index]
iconv
Implementation in the GNU C LibraryAfter reading about the problems of iconv
implementations in the
last section it is certainly good to note that the implementation in
the GNU C Library has none of the problems mentioned above. What
follows is a step-by-step analysis of the points raised above. The
evaluation is based on the current state of the development (as of
January 1999). The development of the iconv
functions is not
complete, but basic functionality has solidified.
The GNU C Library’s iconv
implementation uses shared loadable
modules to implement the conversions. A very small number of
conversions are built into the library itself but these are only rather
trivial conversions.
All the benefits of loadable modules are available in the GNU C Library
implementation. This is especially appealing since the interface is
well documented (see below), and it, therefore, is easy to write new
conversion modules. The drawback of using loadable objects is not a
problem in the GNU C Library, at least on ELF systems. Since the
library is able to load shared objects even in statically linked
binaries, static linking need not be forbidden in case one wants to use
iconv
.
The second mentioned problem is the number of supported conversions. Currently, the GNU C Library supports more than 150 character sets. The way the implementation is designed the number of supported conversions is greater than 22350 (150 times 149). If any conversion from or to a character set is missing, it can be added easily.
Particularly impressive as it may be, this high number is due to the
fact that the GNU C Library implementation of iconv
does not have
the third problem mentioned above (i.e., whenever there is a conversion
from a character set A to B and from
B to C it is always possible to convert from
A to C directly). If the iconv_open
returns an error and sets errno
to EINVAL
, there is no
known way, directly or indirectly, to perform the wanted conversion.
Triangulation is achieved by providing for each character set a conversion from and to UCS-4 encoded ISO 10646. Using ISO 10646 as an intermediate representation it is possible to triangulate (i.e., convert with an intermediate representation).
There is no inherent requirement to provide a conversion to ISO 10646 for a new character set, and it is also possible to provide other conversions where neither source nor destination character set is ISO 10646. The existing set of conversions is simply meant to cover all conversions that might be of interest.
All currently available conversions use the triangulation method above, making conversion run unnecessarily slow. If, for example, somebody often needs the conversion from ISO-2022-JP to EUC-JP, a quicker solution would involve direct conversion between the two character sets, skipping the input to ISO 10646 first. The two character sets of interest are much more similar to each other than to ISO 10646.
In such a situation one easily can write a new conversion and provide it
as a better alternative. The GNU C Library iconv
implementation
would automatically use the module implementing the conversion if it is
specified to be more efficient.
iconv
iconv
module data structuresiconv
module interfacesAll information about the available conversions comes from a file named
gconv-modules, which can be found in any of the directories along
the GCONV_PATH
. The gconv-modules files are line-oriented
text files, where each of the lines has one of the following formats:
alias
define an alias name for a character
set. Two more words are expected on the line. The first word
defines the alias name, and the second defines the original name of the
character set. The effect is that it is possible to use the alias name
in the fromset or toset parameters of iconv_open
and
achieve the same result as when using the real character set name.
This is quite important as a character set has often many different
names. There is normally an official name but this need not correspond to
the most popular name. Besides this many character sets have special
names that are somehow constructed. For example, all character sets
specified by the ISO have an alias of the form ISO-IR-nnn
where nnn is the registration number. This allows programs that
know about the registration number to construct character set names and
use them in iconv_open
calls. More on the available names and
aliases follows below.
module
introduce an available conversion
module. These lines must contain three or four more words.
The first word specifies the source character set, the second word the destination character set of conversion implemented in this module, and the third word is the name of the loadable module. The filename is constructed by appending the usual shared object suffix (normally .so) and this file is then supposed to be found in the same directory the gconv-modules file is in. The last word on the line, which is optional, is a numeric value representing the cost of the conversion. If this word is missing, a cost of 1 is assumed. The numeric value itself does not matter that much; what counts are the relative values of the sums of costs for all possible conversion paths. Below is a more precise description of the use of the cost value.
Returning to the example above where one has written a module to directly convert from ISO-2022-JP to EUC-JP and back. All that has to be done is to put the new module, let its name be ISO2022JP-EUCJP.so, in a directory and add a file gconv-modules with the following content in the same directory:
module ISO-2022-JP// EUC-JP// ISO2022JP-EUCJP 1 module EUC-JP// ISO-2022-JP// ISO2022JP-EUCJP 1
To see why this is sufficient, it is necessary to understand how the
conversion used by iconv
(and described in the descriptor) is
selected. The approach to this problem is quite simple.
At the first call of the iconv_open
function the program reads
all available gconv-modules files and builds up two tables: one
containing all the known aliases and another that contains the
information about the conversions and which shared object implements
them.
iconv
The set of available conversions form a directed graph with weighted
edges. The weights on the edges are the costs specified in the
gconv-modules files. The iconv_open
function uses an
algorithm suitable for search for the best path in such a graph and so
constructs a list of conversions that must be performed in succession
to get the transformation from the source to the destination character
set.
Explaining why the above gconv-modules files allows the
iconv
implementation to resolve the specific ISO-2022-JP to
EUC-JP conversion module instead of the conversion coming with the
library itself is straightforward. Since the latter conversion takes two
steps (from ISO-2022-JP to ISO 10646 and then from ISO 10646 to
EUC-JP), the cost is 1+1 = 2. The above gconv-modules
file, however, specifies that the new conversion modules can perform this
conversion with only the cost of 1.
A mysterious item about the gconv-modules file above (and also
the file coming with the GNU C Library) are the names of the character
sets specified in the module
lines. Why do almost all the names
end in //
? And this is not all: the names can actually be
regular expressions. At this point in time this mystery should not be
revealed, unless you have the relevant spell-casting materials: ashes
from an original DOS 6.2 boot disk burnt in effigy, a crucifix
blessed by St. Emacs, assorted herbal roots from Central America, sand
from Cebu, etc. Sorry! The part of the implementation where
this is used is not yet finished. For now please simply follow the
existing examples. It’ll become clearer once it is. –drepper
A last remark about the gconv-modules is about the names not
ending with //
. A character set named INTERNAL
is often
mentioned. From the discussion above and the chosen name it should have
become clear that this is the name for the representation used in the
intermediate step of the triangulation. We have said that this is UCS-4
but actually that is not quite right. The UCS-4 specification also
includes the specification of the byte ordering used. Since a UCS-4 value
consists of four bytes, a stored value is affected by byte ordering. The
internal representation is not the same as UCS-4 in case the byte
ordering of the processor (or at least the running process) is not the
same as the one required for UCS-4. This is done for performance reasons
as one does not want to perform unnecessary byte-swapping operations if
one is not interested in actually seeing the result in UCS-4. To avoid
trouble with endianness, the internal representation consistently is named
INTERNAL
even on big-endian systems where the representations are
identical.
iconv
module data structuresSo far this section has described how modules are located and considered to be used. What remains to be described is the interface of the modules so that one can write new ones. This section describes the interface as it is in use in January 1999. The interface will change a bit in the future but, with luck, only in an upwardly compatible way.
The definitions necessary to write new modules are publicly available in the non-standard header gconv.h. The following text, therefore, describes the definitions from this header file. First, however, it is necessary to get an overview.
From the perspective of the user of iconv
the interface is quite
simple: the iconv_open
function returns a handle that can be used
in calls to iconv
, and finally the handle is freed with a call to
iconv_close
. The problem is that the handle has to be able to
represent the possibly long sequences of conversion steps and also the
state of each conversion since the handle is all that is passed to the
iconv
function. Therefore, the data structures are really the
elements necessary to understanding the implementation.
We need two different kinds of data structures. The first describes the conversion and the second describes the state etc. There are really two type definitions like this in gconv.h.
This data structure describes one conversion a module can perform. For each function in a loaded module with conversion functions there is exactly one object of this type. This object is shared by all users of the conversion (i.e., this object does not contain any information corresponding to an actual conversion; it only describes the conversion itself).
struct __gconv_loaded_object *__shlib_handle
const char *__modname
int __counter
All these elements of the structure are used internally in the C library to coordinate loading and unloading the shared object. One must not expect any of the other elements to be available or initialized.
const char *__from_name
const char *__to_name
__from_name
and __to_name
contain the names of the source and
destination character sets. They can be used to identify the actual
conversion to be carried out since one module might implement conversions
for more than one character set and/or direction.
gconv_fct __fct
gconv_init_fct __init_fct
gconv_end_fct __end_fct
These elements contain pointers to the functions in the loadable module. The interface will be explained below.
int __min_needed_from
int __max_needed_from
int __min_needed_to
int __max_needed_to;
These values have to be supplied in the init function of the module. The
__min_needed_from
value specifies how many bytes a character of
the source character set at least needs. The __max_needed_from
specifies the maximum value that also includes possible shift sequences.
The __min_needed_to
and __max_needed_to
values serve the
same purpose as __min_needed_from
and __max_needed_from
but
this time for the destination character set.
It is crucial that these values be accurate since otherwise the conversion functions will have problems or not work at all.
int __stateful
This element must also be initialized by the init function.
int __stateful
is nonzero if the source character set is stateful.
Otherwise it is zero.
void *__data
This element can be used freely by the conversion functions in the
module. void *__data
can be used to communicate extra information
from one call to another. void *__data
need not be initialized if
not needed at all. If void *__data
element is assigned a pointer
to dynamically allocated memory (presumably in the init function) it has
to be made sure that the end function deallocates the memory. Otherwise
the application will leak memory.
It is important to be aware that this data structure is shared by all
users of this specification conversion and therefore the __data
element must not contain data specific to one specific use of the
conversion function.
This is the data structure that contains the information specific to each use of the conversion functions.
char *__outbuf
char *__outbufend
These elements specify the output buffer for the conversion step. The
__outbuf
element points to the beginning of the buffer, and
__outbufend
points to the byte following the last byte in the
buffer. The conversion function must not assume anything about the size
of the buffer but it can be safely assumed there is room for at
least one complete character in the output buffer.
Once the conversion is finished, if the conversion is the last step, the
__outbuf
element must be modified to point after the last byte
written into the buffer to signal how much output is available. If this
conversion step is not the last one, the element must not be modified.
The __outbufend
element must not be modified.
int __is_last
This element is nonzero if this conversion step is the last one. This information is necessary for the recursion. See the description of the conversion function internals below. This element must never be modified.
int __invocation_counter
The conversion function can use this element to see how many calls of the conversion function already happened. Some character sets require a certain prolog when generating output, and by comparing this value with zero, one can find out whether it is the first call and whether, therefore, the prolog should be emitted. This element must never be modified.
int __internal_use
This element is another one rarely used but needed in certain
situations. It is assigned a nonzero value in case the conversion
functions are used to implement mbsrtowcs
et.al. (i.e., the
function is not used directly through the iconv
interface).
This sometimes makes a difference as it is expected that the
iconv
functions are used to translate entire texts while the
mbsrtowcs
functions are normally used only to convert single
strings and might be used multiple times to convert entire texts.
But in this situation we would have problem complying with some rules of
the character set specification. Some character sets require a prolog,
which must appear exactly once for an entire text. If a number of
mbsrtowcs
calls are used to convert the text, only the first call
must add the prolog. However, because there is no communication between the
different calls of mbsrtowcs
, the conversion functions have no
possibility to find this out. The situation is different for sequences
of iconv
calls since the handle allows access to the needed
information.
The int __internal_use
element is mostly used together with
__invocation_counter
as follows:
if (!data->__internal_use
&& data->__invocation_counter == 0)
/* Emit prolog. */
…
This element must never be modified.
mbstate_t *__statep
The __statep
element points to an object of type mbstate_t
(see Representing the state of the conversion). The conversion of a stateful character
set must use the object pointed to by __statep
to store
information about the conversion state. The __statep
element
itself must never be modified.
mbstate_t __state
This element must never be used directly. It is only part of this structure to have the needed space allocated.
iconv
module interfacesWith the knowledge about the data structures we now can describe the conversion function itself. To understand the interface a bit of knowledge is necessary about the functionality in the C library that loads the objects with the conversions.
It is often the case that one conversion is used more than once (i.e.,
there are several iconv_open
calls for the same set of character
sets during one program run). The mbsrtowcs
et.al. functions in
the GNU C Library also use the iconv
functionality, which
increases the number of uses of the same functions even more.
Because of this multiple use of conversions, the modules do not get
loaded exclusively for one conversion. Instead a module once loaded can
be used by an arbitrary number of iconv
or mbsrtowcs
calls
at the same time. The splitting of the information between conversion-
function-specific information and conversion data makes this possible.
The last section showed the two data structures used to do this.
This is of course also reflected in the interface and semantics of the functions that the modules must provide. There are three functions that must have the following names:
gconv_init
The gconv_init
function initializes the conversion function
specific data structure. This very same object is shared by all
conversions that use this conversion and, therefore, no state information
about the conversion itself must be stored in here. If a module
implements more than one conversion, the gconv_init
function will
be called multiple times.
gconv_end
The gconv_end
function is responsible for freeing all resources
allocated by the gconv_init
function. If there is nothing to do,
this function can be missing. Special care must be taken if the module
implements more than one conversion and the gconv_init
function
does not allocate the same resources for all conversions.
gconv
This is the actual conversion function. It is called to convert one
block of text. It gets passed the conversion step information
initialized by gconv_init
and the conversion data, specific to
this use of the conversion functions.
There are three data types defined for the three module interface functions and these define the interface.
This specifies the interface of the initialization function of the module. It is called exactly once for each conversion the module implements.
As explained in the description of the struct __gconv_step
data
structure above the initialization function has to initialize parts of
it.
__min_needed_from
__max_needed_from
__min_needed_to
__max_needed_to
These elements must be initialized to the exact numbers of the minimum and maximum number of bytes used by one character in the source and destination character sets, respectively. If the characters all have the same size, the minimum and maximum values are the same.
__stateful
This element must be initialized to a nonzero value if the source character set is stateful. Otherwise it must be zero.
If the initialization function needs to communicate some information
to the conversion function, this communication can happen using the
__data
element of the __gconv_step
structure. But since
this data is shared by all the conversions, it must not be modified by
the conversion function. The example below shows how this can be used.
#define MIN_NEEDED_FROM 1 #define MAX_NEEDED_FROM 4 #define MIN_NEEDED_TO 4 #define MAX_NEEDED_TO 4 int gconv_init (struct __gconv_step *step) { /* Determine which direction. */ struct iso2022jp_data *new_data; enum direction dir = illegal_dir; enum variant var = illegal_var; int result; if (__strcasecmp (step->__from_name, "ISO-2022-JP//") == 0) { dir = from_iso2022jp; var = iso2022jp; } else if (__strcasecmp (step->__to_name, "ISO-2022-JP//") == 0) { dir = to_iso2022jp; var = iso2022jp; } else if (__strcasecmp (step->__from_name, "ISO-2022-JP-2//") == 0) { dir = from_iso2022jp; var = iso2022jp2; } else if (__strcasecmp (step->__to_name, "ISO-2022-JP-2//") == 0) { dir = to_iso2022jp; var = iso2022jp2; } result = __GCONV_NOCONV; if (dir != illegal_dir) { new_data = (struct iso2022jp_data *) malloc (sizeof (struct iso2022jp_data)); result = __GCONV_NOMEM; if (new_data != NULL) { new_data->dir = dir; new_data->var = var; step->__data = new_data; if (dir == from_iso2022jp) { step->__min_needed_from = MIN_NEEDED_FROM; step->__max_needed_from = MAX_NEEDED_FROM; step->__min_needed_to = MIN_NEEDED_TO; step->__max_needed_to = MAX_NEEDED_TO; } else { step->__min_needed_from = MIN_NEEDED_TO; step->__max_needed_from = MAX_NEEDED_TO; step->__min_needed_to = MIN_NEEDED_FROM; step->__max_needed_to = MAX_NEEDED_FROM + 2; } /* Yes, this is a stateful encoding. */ step->__stateful = 1; result = __GCONV_OK; } } return result; }
The function first checks which conversion is wanted. The module from which this function is taken implements four different conversions; which one is selected can be determined by comparing the names. The comparison should always be done without paying attention to the case.
Next, a data structure, which contains the necessary information about
which conversion is selected, is allocated. The data structure
struct iso2022jp_data
is locally defined since, outside the
module, this data is not used at all. Please note that if all four
conversions this module supports are requested there are four data
blocks.
One interesting thing is the initialization of the __min_
and
__max_
elements of the step data object. A single ISO-2022-JP
character can consist of one to four bytes. Therefore the
MIN_NEEDED_FROM
and MAX_NEEDED_FROM
macros are defined
this way. The output is always the INTERNAL
character set (aka
UCS-4) and therefore each character consists of exactly four bytes. For
the conversion from INTERNAL
to ISO-2022-JP we have to take into
account that escape sequences might be necessary to switch the character
sets. Therefore the __max_needed_to
element for this direction
gets assigned MAX_NEEDED_FROM + 2
. This takes into account the
two bytes needed for the escape sequences to signal the switching. The
asymmetry in the maximum values for the two directions can be explained
easily: when reading ISO-2022-JP text, escape sequences can be handled
alone (i.e., it is not necessary to process a real character since the
effect of the escape sequence can be recorded in the state information).
The situation is different for the other direction. Since it is in
general not known which character comes next, one cannot emit escape
sequences to change the state in advance. This means the escape
sequences have to be emitted together with the next character.
Therefore one needs more room than only for the character itself.
The possible return values of the initialization function are:
__GCONV_OK
The initialization succeeded
__GCONV_NOCONV
The requested conversion is not supported in the module. This can happen if the gconv-modules file has errors.
__GCONV_NOMEM
Memory required to store additional information could not be allocated.
The function called before the module is unloaded is significantly easier. It often has nothing at all to do; in which case it can be left out completely.
The task of this function is to free all resources allocated in the
initialization function. Therefore only the __data
element of
the object pointed to by the argument is of interest. Continuing the
example from the initialization function, the finalization function
looks like this:
void gconv_end (struct __gconv_step *data) { free (data->__data); }
The most important function is the conversion function itself, which can get quite complicated for complex character sets. But since this is not of interest here, we will only describe a possible skeleton for the conversion function.
The conversion function can be called for two basic reasons: to convert
text or to reset the state. From the description of the iconv
function it can be seen why the flushing mode is necessary. What mode
is selected is determined by the sixth argument, an integer. This
argument being nonzero means that flushing is selected.
Common to both modes is where the output buffer can be found. The
information about this buffer is stored in the conversion step data. A
pointer to this information is passed as the second argument to this
function. The description of the struct __gconv_step_data
structure has more information on the conversion step data.
What has to be done for flushing depends on the source character set.
If the source character set is not stateful, nothing has to be done.
Otherwise the function has to emit a byte sequence to bring the state
object into the initial state. Once this all happened the other
conversion modules in the chain of conversions have to get the same
chance. Whether another step follows can be determined from the
__is_last
element of the step data structure to which the first
parameter points.
The more interesting mode is when actual text has to be converted. The first step in this case is to convert as much text as possible from the input buffer and store the result in the output buffer. The start of the input buffer is determined by the third argument, which is a pointer to a pointer variable referencing the beginning of the buffer. The fourth argument is a pointer to the byte right after the last byte in the buffer.
The conversion has to be performed according to the current state if the
character set is stateful. The state is stored in an object pointed to
by the __statep
element of the step data (second argument). Once
either the input buffer is empty or the output buffer is full the
conversion stops. At this point, the pointer variable referenced by the
third parameter must point to the byte following the last processed
byte (i.e., if all of the input is consumed, this pointer and the fourth
parameter have the same value).
What now happens depends on whether this step is the last one. If it is
the last step, the only thing that has to be done is to update the
__outbuf
element of the step data structure to point after the
last written byte. This update gives the caller the information on how
much text is available in the output buffer. In addition, the variable
pointed to by the fifth parameter, which is of type size_t
, must
be incremented by the number of characters (not bytes) that were
converted in a non-reversible way. Then, the function can return.
In case the step is not the last one, the later conversion functions have to get a chance to do their work. Therefore, the appropriate conversion function has to be called. The information about the functions is stored in the conversion data structures, passed as the first parameter. This information and the step data are stored in arrays, so the next element in both cases can be found by simple pointer arithmetic:
int gconv (struct __gconv_step *step, struct __gconv_step_data *data, const char **inbuf, const char *inbufend, size_t *written, int do_flush) { struct __gconv_step *next_step = step + 1; struct __gconv_step_data *next_data = data + 1; …
The next_step
pointer references the next step information and
next_data
the next data record. The call of the next function
therefore will look similar to this:
next_step->__fct (next_step, next_data, &outerr, outbuf, written, 0)
But this is not yet all. Once the function call returns the conversion
function might have some more to do. If the return value of the function
is __GCONV_EMPTY_INPUT
, more room is available in the output
buffer. Unless the input buffer is empty, the conversion functions start
all over again and process the rest of the input buffer. If the return
value is not __GCONV_EMPTY_INPUT
, something went wrong and we have
to recover from this.
A requirement for the conversion function is that the input buffer pointer (the third argument) always point to the last character that was put in converted form into the output buffer. This is trivially true after the conversion performed in the current step, but if the conversion functions deeper downstream stop prematurely, not all characters from the output buffer are consumed and, therefore, the input buffer pointers must be backed off to the right position.
Correcting the input buffers is easy to do if the input and output character sets have a fixed width for all characters. In this situation we can compute how many characters are left in the output buffer and, therefore, can correct the input buffer pointer appropriately with a similar computation. Things are getting tricky if either character set has characters represented with variable length byte sequences, and it gets even more complicated if the conversion has to take care of the state. In these cases the conversion has to be performed once again, from the known state before the initial conversion (i.e., if necessary the state of the conversion has to be reset and the conversion loop has to be executed again). The difference now is that it is known how much input must be created, and the conversion can stop before converting the first unused character. Once this is done the input buffer pointers must be updated again and the function can return.
One final thing should be mentioned. If it is necessary for the
conversion to know whether it is the first invocation (in case a prolog
has to be emitted), the conversion function should increment the
__invocation_counter
element of the step data structure just
before returning to the caller. See the description of the struct
__gconv_step_data
structure above for more information on how this can
be used.
The return value must be one of the following values:
__GCONV_EMPTY_INPUT
All input was consumed and there is room left in the output buffer.
__GCONV_FULL_OUTPUT
No more room in the output buffer. In case this is not the last step this value is propagated down from the call of the next conversion function in the chain.
__GCONV_INCOMPLETE_INPUT
The input buffer is not entirely empty since it contains an incomplete character sequence.
The following example provides a framework for a conversion function. In case a new conversion has to be written the holes in this implementation have to be filled and that is it.
int gconv (struct __gconv_step *step, struct __gconv_step_data *data, const char **inbuf, const char *inbufend, size_t *written, int do_flush) { struct __gconv_step *next_step = step + 1; struct __gconv_step_data *next_data = data + 1; gconv_fct fct = next_step->__fct; int status; /* If the function is called with no input this means we have to reset to the initial state. The possibly partly converted input is dropped. */ if (do_flush) { status = __GCONV_OK; /* Possible emit a byte sequence which put the state object into the initial state. */ /* Call the steps down the chain if there are any but only if we successfully emitted the escape sequence. */ if (status == __GCONV_OK && ! data->__is_last) status = fct (next_step, next_data, NULL, NULL, written, 1); } else { /* We preserve the initial values of the pointer variables. */ const char *inptr = *inbuf; char *outbuf = data->__outbuf; char *outend = data->__outbufend; char *outptr; do { /* Remember the start value for this round. */ inptr = *inbuf; /* The outbuf buffer is empty. */ outptr = outbuf; /* For stateful encodings the state must be safe here. */ /* Run the conversion loop.status
is set appropriately afterwards. */ /* If this is the last step, leave the loop. There is nothing we can do. */ if (data->__is_last) { /* Store information about how many bytes are available. */ data->__outbuf = outbuf; /* If any non-reversible conversions were performed, add the number to*written
. */ break; } /* Write out all output that was produced. */ if (outbuf > outptr) { const char *outerr = data->__outbuf; int result; result = fct (next_step, next_data, &outerr, outbuf, written, 0); if (result != __GCONV_EMPTY_INPUT) { if (outerr != outbuf) { /* Reset the input buffer pointer. We document here the complex case. */ size_t nstatus; /* Reload the pointers. */ *inbuf = inptr; outbuf = outptr; /* Possibly reset the state. */ /* Redo the conversion, but this time the end of the output buffer is atouterr
. */ } /* Change the status. */ status = result; } else /* All the output is consumed, we can make another run if everything was ok. */ if (status == __GCONV_FULL_OUTPUT) status = __GCONV_OK; } } while (status == __GCONV_OK); /* We finished one use of this step. */ ++data->__invocation_counter; } return status; }
This information should be sufficient to write new modules. Anybody doing so should also take a look at the available source code in the GNU C Library sources. It contains many examples of working and optimized modules.
Next: Message Translation, Previous: Character Set Handling, Up: Main Menu [Contents][Index]
Different countries and cultures have varying conventions for how to communicate. These conventions range from very simple ones, such as the format for representing dates and times, to very complex ones, such as the language spoken.
Internationalization of software means programming it to be able to adapt to the user’s favorite conventions. In ISO C, internationalization works by means of locales. Each locale specifies a collection of conventions, one convention for each purpose. The user chooses a set of conventions by specifying a locale (via environment variables).
All programs inherit the chosen locale as part of their environment. Provided the programs are written to obey the choice of locale, they will follow the conventions preferred by the user.
Next: Choosing a Locale, Up: Locales and Internationalization [Contents][Index]
Each locale specifies conventions for several purposes, including the following:
Some aspects of adapting to the specified locale are handled
automatically by the library subroutines. For example, all your program
needs to do in order to use the collating sequence of the chosen locale
is to use strcoll
or strxfrm
to compare strings.
Other aspects of locales are beyond the comprehension of the library. For example, the library can’t automatically translate your program’s output messages into other languages. The only way you can support output in the user’s favorite language is to program this more or less by hand. The C library provides functions to handle translations for multiple languages easily.
This chapter discusses the mechanism by which you can modify the current locale. The effects of the current locale on specific library functions are discussed in more detail in the descriptions of those functions.
Next: Locale Categories, Previous: What Effects a Locale Has, Up: Locales and Internationalization [Contents][Index]
The simplest way for the user to choose a locale is to set the
environment variable LANG
. This specifies a single locale to use
for all purposes. For example, a user could specify a hypothetical
locale named ‘espana-castellano’ to use the standard conventions of
most of Spain.
The set of locales supported depends on the operating system you are using, and so do their names, except that the standard locale called ‘C’ or ‘POSIX’ always exist. See Locale Names.
In order to force the system to always use the default locale, the
user can set the LC_ALL
environment variable to ‘C’.
A user also has the option of specifying different locales for different purposes—in effect, choosing a mixture of multiple locales. See Locale Categories.
For example, the user might specify the locale ‘espana-castellano’ for most purposes, but specify the locale ‘usa-english’ for currency formatting. This might make sense if the user is a Spanish-speaking American, working in Spanish, but representing monetary amounts in US dollars.
Note that both locales ‘espana-castellano’ and ‘usa-english’, like all locales, would include conventions for all of the purposes to which locales apply. However, the user can choose to use each locale for a particular subset of those purposes.
Next: How Programs Set the Locale, Previous: Choosing a Locale, Up: Locales and Internationalization [Contents][Index]
The purposes that locales serve are grouped into categories, so
that a user or a program can choose the locale for each category
independently. Here is a table of categories; each name is both an
environment variable that a user can set, and a macro name that you can
use as the first argument to setlocale
.
The contents of the environment variable (or the string in the second
argument to setlocale
) has to be a valid locale name.
See Locale Names.
LC_COLLATE
¶This category applies to collation of strings (functions strcoll
and strxfrm
); see Collation Functions.
LC_CTYPE
¶This category applies to classification and conversion of characters, and to multibyte and wide characters; see Character Handling, and Character Set Handling.
LC_MONETARY
¶This category applies to formatting monetary values; see Generic Numeric Formatting Parameters.
LC_NUMERIC
¶This category applies to formatting numeric values that are not monetary; see Generic Numeric Formatting Parameters.
LC_TIME
¶This category applies to formatting date and time values; see Formatting Calendar Time.
LC_MESSAGES
¶This category applies to selecting the language used in the user interface for message translation (see The Uniforum approach to Message Translation; see X/Open Message Catalog Handling) and contains regular expressions for affirmative and negative responses.
LC_ALL
¶This is not a category; it is only a macro that you can use
with setlocale
to set a single locale for all purposes. Setting
this environment variable overwrites all selections by the other
LC_*
variables or LANG
.
LANG
¶If this environment variable is defined, its value specifies the locale to use for all purposes except as overridden by the variables above.
When developing the message translation functions it was felt that the
functionality provided by the variables above is not sufficient. For
example, it should be possible to specify more than one locale name.
Take a Swedish user who better speaks German than English, and a program
whose messages are output in English by default. It should be possible
to specify that the first choice of language is Swedish, the second
German, and if this also fails to use English. This is
possible with the variable LANGUAGE
. For further description of
this GNU extension see User influence on gettext
.
Next: Standard Locales, Previous: Locale Categories, Up: Locales and Internationalization [Contents][Index]
A C program inherits its locale environment variables when it starts up.
This happens automatically. However, these variables do not
automatically control the locale used by the library functions, because
ISO C says that all programs start by default in the standard ‘C’
locale. To use the locales specified by the environment, you must call
setlocale
. Call it as follows:
setlocale (LC_ALL, "");
to select a locale based on the user choice of the appropriate environment variables.
You can also use setlocale
to specify a particular locale, for
general use or for a specific category.
The symbols in this section are defined in the header file locale.h.
Preliminary: | MT-Unsafe const:locale env | AS-Unsafe init lock heap corrupt | AC-Unsafe init corrupt lock mem fd | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The function setlocale
sets the current locale for category
category to locale.
If category is LC_ALL
, this specifies the locale for all
purposes. The other possible values of category specify a
single purpose (see Locale Categories).
You can also use this function to find out the current locale by passing
a null pointer as the locale argument. In this case,
setlocale
returns a string that is the name of the locale
currently selected for category category.
The string returned by setlocale
can be overwritten by subsequent
calls, so you should make a copy of the string (see Copying Strings and Arrays) if you want to save it past any further calls to
setlocale
. (The standard library is guaranteed never to call
setlocale
itself.)
You should not modify the string returned by setlocale
. It might
be the same string that was passed as an argument in a previous call to
setlocale
. One requirement is that the category must be
the same in the call the string was returned and the one when the string
is passed in as locale parameter.
When you read the current locale for category LC_ALL
, the value
encodes the entire combination of selected locales for all categories.
If you specify the same “locale name” with LC_ALL
in a
subsequent call to setlocale
, it restores the same combination
of locale selections.
To be sure you can use the returned string encoding the currently selected locale at a later time, you must make a copy of the string. It is not guaranteed that the returned pointer remains valid over time.
When the locale argument is not a null pointer, the string returned
by setlocale
reflects the newly-modified locale.
If you specify an empty string for locale, this means to read the appropriate environment variable and use its value to select the locale for category.
If a nonempty string is given for locale, then the locale of that name is used if possible.
The effective locale name (either the second argument to
setlocale
, or if the argument is an empty string, the name
obtained from the process environment) must be a valid locale name.
See Locale Names.
If you specify an invalid locale name, setlocale
returns a null
pointer and leaves the current locale unchanged.
Here is an example showing how you might use setlocale
to
temporarily switch to a new locale.
#include <stddef.h>
#include <locale.h>
#include <stdlib.h>
#include <string.h>
void
with_other_locale (char *new_locale,
void (*subroutine) (int),
int argument)
{
char *old_locale, *saved_locale;
/* Get the name of the current locale. */
old_locale = setlocale (LC_ALL, NULL);
/* Copy the name so it won’t be clobbered by setlocale
. */
saved_locale = strdup (old_locale);
if (saved_locale == NULL)
fatal ("Out of memory");
/* Now change the locale and do some stuff with it. */
setlocale (LC_ALL, new_locale);
(*subroutine) (argument);
/* Restore the original locale. */
setlocale (LC_ALL, saved_locale);
free (saved_locale);
}
Portability Note: Some ISO C systems may define additional locale categories, and future versions of the library will do so. For portability, assume that any symbol beginning with ‘LC_’ might be defined in locale.h.
Next: Locale Names, Previous: How Programs Set the Locale, Up: Locales and Internationalization [Contents][Index]
The only locale names you can count on finding on all operating systems are these three standard ones:
"C"
This is the standard C locale. The attributes and behavior it provides are specified in the ISO C standard. When your program starts up, it initially uses this locale by default.
"POSIX"
This is the standard POSIX locale. Currently, it is an alias for the standard C locale.
""
The empty name says to select a locale based on environment variables. See Locale Categories.
Defining and installing named locales is normally a responsibility of the system administrator at your site (or the person who installed the GNU C Library). It is also possible for the user to create private locales. All this will be discussed later when describing the tool to do so.
If your program needs to use something other than the ‘C’ locale, it will be more portable if you use whatever locale the user specifies with the environment, rather than trying to specify some non-standard locale explicitly by name. Remember, different machines might have different sets of locales installed.
Next: Accessing Locale Information, Previous: Standard Locales, Up: Locales and Internationalization [Contents][Index]
The following command prints a list of locales supported by the system:
locale -a
Portability Note: With the notable exception of the standard locale names ‘C’ and ‘POSIX’, locale names are system-specific.
Most locale names follow XPG syntax and consist of up to four parts:
language[_territory[.codeset]][@modifier]
Beside the first part, all of them are allowed to be missing. If the full specified locale is not found, less specific ones are looked for. The various parts will be stripped off, in the following order:
For example, the locale name ‘de_AT.iso885915@euro’ denotes a German-language locale for use in Austria, using the ISO-8859-15 (Latin-9) character set, and with the Euro as the currency symbol.
In addition to locale names which follow XPG syntax, systems may provide aliases such as ‘german’. Both categories of names must not contain the slash character ‘/’.
If the locale name starts with a slash ‘/’, it is treated as a
path relative to the configured locale directories; see LOCPATH
below. The specified path must not contain a component ‘..’, or
the name is invalid, and setlocale
will fail.
Portability Note: POSIX suggests that if a locale name starts
with a slash ‘/’, it is resolved as an absolute path. However,
the GNU C Library treats it as a relative path under the directories listed
in LOCPATH
(or the default locale directory if LOCPATH
is unset).
Locale names which are longer than an implementation-defined limit are
invalid and cause setlocale
to fail.
As a special case, locale names used with LC_ALL
can combine
several locales, reflecting different locale settings for different
categories. For example, you might want to use a U.S. locale with ISO
A4 paper format, so you set LANG
to ‘en_US.UTF-8’, and
LC_PAPER
to ‘de_DE.UTF-8’. In this case, the
LC_ALL
-style combined locale name is
LC_CTYPE=en_US.UTF-8;LC_TIME=en_US.UTF-8;LC_PAPER=de_DE.UTF-8;…
followed by other category settings not shown here.
The path used for finding locale data can be set using the
LOCPATH
environment variable. This variable lists the
directories in which to search for locale definitions, separated by a
colon ‘:’.
The default path for finding locale data is system specific. A typical
value for the LOCPATH
default is:
/usr/share/locale
The value of LOCPATH
is ignored by privileged programs for
security reasons, and only the default directory is used.
Next: A dedicated function to format numbers, Previous: Locale Names, Up: Locales and Internationalization [Contents][Index]
There are several ways to access locale information. The simplest way is to let the C library itself do the work. Several of the functions in this library implicitly access the locale data, and use what information is provided by the currently selected locale. This is how the locale model is meant to work normally.
As an example take the strftime
function, which is meant to nicely
format date and time information (see Formatting Calendar Time).
Part of the standard information contained in the LC_TIME
category is the names of the months. Instead of requiring the
programmer to take care of providing the translations the
strftime
function does this all by itself. %A
in the format string is replaced by the appropriate weekday
name of the locale currently selected by LC_TIME
. This is an
easy example, and wherever possible functions do things automatically
in this way.
But there are quite often situations when there is simply no function
to perform the task, or it is simply not possible to do the work
automatically. For these cases it is necessary to access the
information in the locale directly. To do this the C library provides
two functions: localeconv
and nl_langinfo
. The former is
part of ISO C and therefore portable, but has a brain-damaged
interface. The second is part of the Unix interface and is portable in
as far as the system follows the Unix standards.
localeconv
: It is portable but …Together with the setlocale
function the ISO C people
invented the localeconv
function. It is a masterpiece of poor
design. It is expensive to use, not extensible, and not generally
usable as it provides access to only LC_MONETARY
and
LC_NUMERIC
related information. Nevertheless, if it is
applicable to a given situation it should be used since it is very
portable. The function strfmon
formats monetary amounts
according to the selected locale using this information.
Preliminary: | MT-Unsafe race:localeconv locale | AS-Unsafe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The localeconv
function returns a pointer to a structure whose
components contain information about how numeric and monetary values
should be formatted in the current locale.
You should not modify the structure or its contents. The structure might
be overwritten by subsequent calls to localeconv
, or by calls to
setlocale
, but no other function in the library overwrites this
value.
localeconv
’s return value is of this data type. Its elements are
described in the following subsections.
If a member of the structure struct lconv
has type char
,
and the value is CHAR_MAX
, it means that the current locale has
no value for that parameter.
These are the standard members of struct lconv
; there may be
others.
char *decimal_point
char *mon_decimal_point
These are the decimal-point separators used in formatting non-monetary
and monetary quantities, respectively. In the ‘C’ locale, the
value of decimal_point
is "."
, and the value of
mon_decimal_point
is ""
.
char *thousands_sep
char *mon_thousands_sep
These are the separators used to delimit groups of digits to the left of
the decimal point in formatting non-monetary and monetary quantities,
respectively. In the ‘C’ locale, both members have a value of
""
(the empty string).
char *grouping
char *mon_grouping
These are strings that specify how to group the digits to the left of
the decimal point. grouping
applies to non-monetary quantities
and mon_grouping
applies to monetary quantities. Use either
thousands_sep
or mon_thousands_sep
to separate the digit
groups.
Each member of these strings is to be interpreted as an integer value of
type char
. Successive numbers (from left to right) give the
sizes of successive groups (from right to left, starting at the decimal
point.) The last member is either 0
, in which case the previous
member is used over and over again for all the remaining groups, or
CHAR_MAX
, in which case there is no more grouping—or, put
another way, any remaining digits form one large group without
separators.
For example, if grouping
is "\04\03\02"
, the correct
grouping for the number 123456787654321
is ‘12’, ‘34’,
‘56’, ‘78’, ‘765’, ‘4321’. This uses a group of 4
digits at the end, preceded by a group of 3 digits, preceded by groups
of 2 digits (as many as needed). With a separator of ‘,’, the
number would be printed as ‘12,34,56,78,765,4321’.
A value of "\03"
indicates repeated groups of three digits, as
normally used in the U.S.
In the standard ‘C’ locale, both grouping
and
mon_grouping
have a value of ""
. This value specifies no
grouping at all.
char int_frac_digits
char frac_digits
These are small integers indicating how many fractional digits (to the right of the decimal point) should be displayed in a monetary value in international and local formats, respectively. (Most often, both members have the same value.)
In the standard ‘C’ locale, both of these members have the value
CHAR_MAX
, meaning “unspecified”. The ISO standard doesn’t say
what to do when you find this value; we recommend printing no
fractional digits. (This locale also specifies the empty string for
mon_decimal_point
, so printing any fractional digits would be
confusing!)
Next: Printing the Sign of a Monetary Amount, Previous: Generic Numeric Formatting Parameters, Up: localeconv
: It is portable but … [Contents][Index]
These members of the struct lconv
structure specify how to print
the symbol to identify a monetary value—the international analog of
‘$’ for US dollars.
Each country has two standard currency symbols. The local currency symbol is used commonly within the country, while the international currency symbol is used internationally to refer to that country’s currency when it is necessary to indicate the country unambiguously.
For example, many countries use the dollar as their monetary unit, and when dealing with international currencies it’s important to specify that one is dealing with (say) Canadian dollars instead of U.S. dollars or Australian dollars. But when the context is known to be Canada, there is no need to make this explicit—dollar amounts are implicitly assumed to be in Canadian dollars.
char *currency_symbol
The local currency symbol for the selected locale.
In the standard ‘C’ locale, this member has a value of ""
(the empty string), meaning “unspecified”. The ISO standard doesn’t
say what to do when you find this value; we recommend you simply print
the empty string as you would print any other string pointed to by this
variable.
char *int_curr_symbol
The international currency symbol for the selected locale.
The value of int_curr_symbol
should normally consist of a
three-letter abbreviation determined by the international standard
ISO 4217 Codes for the Representation of Currency and Funds,
followed by a one-character separator (often a space).
In the standard ‘C’ locale, this member has a value of ""
(the empty string), meaning “unspecified”. We recommend you simply print
the empty string as you would print any other string pointed to by this
variable.
char p_cs_precedes
char n_cs_precedes
char int_p_cs_precedes
char int_n_cs_precedes
These members are 1
if the currency_symbol
or
int_curr_symbol
strings should precede the value of a monetary
amount, or 0
if the strings should follow the value. The
p_cs_precedes
and int_p_cs_precedes
members apply to
positive amounts (or zero), and the n_cs_precedes
and
int_n_cs_precedes
members apply to negative amounts.
In the standard ‘C’ locale, all of these members have a value of
CHAR_MAX
, meaning “unspecified”. The ISO standard doesn’t say
what to do when you find this value. We recommend printing the
currency symbol before the amount, which is right for most countries.
In other words, treat all nonzero values alike in these members.
The members with the int_
prefix apply to the
int_curr_symbol
while the other two apply to
currency_symbol
.
char p_sep_by_space
char n_sep_by_space
char int_p_sep_by_space
char int_n_sep_by_space
These members are 1
if a space should appear between the
currency_symbol
or int_curr_symbol
strings and the
amount, or 0
if no space should appear. The
p_sep_by_space
and int_p_sep_by_space
members apply to
positive amounts (or zero), and the n_sep_by_space
and
int_n_sep_by_space
members apply to negative amounts.
In the standard ‘C’ locale, all of these members have a value of
CHAR_MAX
, meaning “unspecified”. The ISO standard doesn’t say
what you should do when you find this value; we suggest you treat it as
1 (print a space). In other words, treat all nonzero values alike in
these members.
The members with the int_
prefix apply to the
int_curr_symbol
while the other two apply to
currency_symbol
. There is one specialty with the
int_curr_symbol
, though. Since all legal values contain a space
at the end of the string one either prints this space (if the currency
symbol must appear in front and must be separated) or one has to avoid
printing this character at all (especially when at the end of the
string).
Previous: Printing the Currency Symbol, Up: localeconv
: It is portable but … [Contents][Index]
These members of the struct lconv
structure specify how to print
the sign (if any) of a monetary value.
char *positive_sign
char *negative_sign
These are strings used to indicate positive (or zero) and negative monetary quantities, respectively.
In the standard ‘C’ locale, both of these members have a value of
""
(the empty string), meaning “unspecified”.
The ISO standard doesn’t say what to do when you find this value; we
recommend printing positive_sign
as you find it, even if it is
empty. For a negative value, print negative_sign
as you find it
unless both it and positive_sign
are empty, in which case print
‘-’ instead. (Failing to indicate the sign at all seems rather
unreasonable.)
char p_sign_posn
char n_sign_posn
char int_p_sign_posn
char int_n_sign_posn
These members are small integers that indicate how to
position the sign for nonnegative and negative monetary quantities,
respectively. (The string used for the sign is what was specified with
positive_sign
or negative_sign
.) The possible values are
as follows:
0
The currency symbol and quantity should be surrounded by parentheses.
1
Print the sign string before the quantity and currency symbol.
2
Print the sign string after the quantity and currency symbol.
3
Print the sign string right before the currency symbol.
4
Print the sign string right after the currency symbol.
CHAR_MAX
“Unspecified”. Both members have this value in the standard ‘C’ locale.
The ISO standard doesn’t say what you should do when the value is
CHAR_MAX
. We recommend you print the sign after the currency
symbol.
The members with the int_
prefix apply to the
int_curr_symbol
while the other two apply to
currency_symbol
.
Previous: localeconv
: It is portable but …, Up: Accessing Locale Information [Contents][Index]
When writing the X/Open Portability Guide the authors realized that the
localeconv
function is not enough to provide reasonable access to
locale information. The information which was meant to be available
in the locale (as later specified in the POSIX.1 standard) requires more
ways to access it. Therefore the nl_langinfo
function
was introduced.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe locale | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The nl_langinfo
function can be used to access individual
elements of the locale categories. Unlike the localeconv
function, which returns all the information, nl_langinfo
lets the caller select what information it requires. This is very
fast and it is not a problem to call this function multiple times.
A second advantage is that in addition to the numeric and monetary
formatting information, information from the
LC_TIME
and LC_MESSAGES
categories is available.
The type nl_item
is defined in nl_types.h. The argument
item is a numeric value defined in the header langinfo.h.
The X/Open standard defines the following values:
CODESET
¶nl_langinfo
returns a string with the name of the coded character
set used in the selected locale.
ABDAY_1
¶ABDAY_2
¶ABDAY_3
¶ABDAY_4
¶ABDAY_5
¶ABDAY_6
¶ABDAY_7
¶nl_langinfo
returns the abbreviated weekday name. ABDAY_1
corresponds to Sunday.
DAY_1
¶DAY_2
¶DAY_3
¶DAY_4
¶DAY_5
¶DAY_6
¶DAY_7
¶Similar to ABDAY_1
, etc., but here the return value is the
unabbreviated weekday name.
ABMON_1
¶ABMON_2
¶ABMON_3
¶ABMON_4
¶ABMON_5
¶ABMON_6
¶ABMON_7
¶ABMON_8
¶ABMON_9
¶ABMON_10
¶ABMON_11
¶ABMON_12
¶The return value is the abbreviated name of the month, in the
grammatical form used when the month forms part of a complete date.
ABMON_1
corresponds to January.
MON_1
¶MON_2
¶MON_3
¶MON_4
¶MON_5
¶MON_6
¶MON_7
¶MON_8
¶MON_9
¶MON_10
¶MON_11
¶MON_12
¶Similar to ABMON_1
, etc., but here the month names are not
abbreviated. Here the first value MON_1
also corresponds to
January.
ALTMON_1
¶ALTMON_2
¶ALTMON_3
¶ALTMON_4
¶ALTMON_5
¶ALTMON_6
¶ALTMON_7
¶ALTMON_8
¶ALTMON_9
¶ALTMON_10
¶ALTMON_11
¶ALTMON_12
¶Similar to MON_1
, etc., but here the month names are in the
grammatical form used when the month is named by itself. The
strftime
functions use these month names for the conversion
specifier %OB
(see Formatting Calendar Time).
Note that not all languages need two different forms of the month names,
so the strings returned for MON_…
and ALTMON_…
may or may not be the same, depending on the locale.
NB: ABALTMON_…
constants corresponding to the
%Ob
conversion specifier are not currently provided, but are
expected to be in a future release. In the meantime, it is possible
to use _NL_ABALTMON_…
.
AM_STR
¶PM_STR
¶The return values are strings which can be used in the representation of time as an hour from 1 to 12 plus an am/pm specifier.
Note that in locales which do not use this time representation these strings might be empty, in which case the am/pm format cannot be used at all.
D_T_FMT
¶The return value can be used as a format string for strftime
to
represent time and date in a locale-specific way.
D_FMT
¶The return value can be used as a format string for strftime
to
represent a date in a locale-specific way.
T_FMT
¶The return value can be used as a format string for strftime
to
represent time in a locale-specific way.
T_FMT_AMPM
¶The return value can be used as a format string for strftime
to
represent time in the am/pm format.
Note that if the am/pm format does not make any sense for the
selected locale, the return value might be the same as the one for
T_FMT
.
ERA
¶The return value represents the era used in the current locale.
Most locales do not define this value. An example of a locale which does define this value is the Japanese one. In Japan, the traditional representation of dates includes the name of the era corresponding to the then-emperor’s reign.
Normally it should not be necessary to use this value directly.
Specifying the E
modifier in their format strings causes the
strftime
functions to use this information. The format of the
returned string is not specified, and therefore you should not assume
knowledge of it on different systems.
ERA_YEAR
¶The return value gives the year in the relevant era of the locale.
As for ERA
it should not be necessary to use this value directly.
ERA_D_T_FMT
¶This return value can be used as a format string for strftime
to
represent dates and times in a locale-specific era-based way.
ERA_D_FMT
¶This return value can be used as a format string for strftime
to
represent a date in a locale-specific era-based way.
ERA_T_FMT
¶This return value can be used as a format string for strftime
to
represent time in a locale-specific era-based way.
ALT_DIGITS
¶The return value is a representation of up to 100 values used to
represent the values 0 to 99. As for ERA
this
value is not intended to be used directly, but instead indirectly
through the strftime
function. When the modifier O
is
used in a format which would otherwise use numerals to represent hours,
minutes, seconds, weekdays, months, or weeks, the appropriate value for
the locale is used instead.
INT_CURR_SYMBOL
¶The same as the value returned by localeconv
in the
int_curr_symbol
element of the struct lconv
.
CURRENCY_SYMBOL
¶CRNCYSTR
¶The same as the value returned by localeconv
in the
currency_symbol
element of the struct lconv
.
CRNCYSTR
is a deprecated alias still required by Unix98.
MON_DECIMAL_POINT
¶The same as the value returned by localeconv
in the
mon_decimal_point
element of the struct lconv
.
MON_THOUSANDS_SEP
¶The same as the value returned by localeconv
in the
mon_thousands_sep
element of the struct lconv
.
MON_GROUPING
¶The same as the value returned by localeconv
in the
mon_grouping
element of the struct lconv
.
POSITIVE_SIGN
¶The same as the value returned by localeconv
in the
positive_sign
element of the struct lconv
.
NEGATIVE_SIGN
¶The same as the value returned by localeconv
in the
negative_sign
element of the struct lconv
.
INT_FRAC_DIGITS
¶The same as the value returned by localeconv
in the
int_frac_digits
element of the struct lconv
.
FRAC_DIGITS
¶The same as the value returned by localeconv
in the
frac_digits
element of the struct lconv
.
P_CS_PRECEDES
¶The same as the value returned by localeconv
in the
p_cs_precedes
element of the struct lconv
.
P_SEP_BY_SPACE
¶The same as the value returned by localeconv
in the
p_sep_by_space
element of the struct lconv
.
N_CS_PRECEDES
¶The same as the value returned by localeconv
in the
n_cs_precedes
element of the struct lconv
.
N_SEP_BY_SPACE
¶The same as the value returned by localeconv
in the
n_sep_by_space
element of the struct lconv
.
P_SIGN_POSN
¶The same as the value returned by localeconv
in the
p_sign_posn
element of the struct lconv
.
N_SIGN_POSN
¶The same as the value returned by localeconv
in the
n_sign_posn
element of the struct lconv
.
INT_P_CS_PRECEDES
¶The same as the value returned by localeconv
in the
int_p_cs_precedes
element of the struct lconv
.
INT_P_SEP_BY_SPACE
¶The same as the value returned by localeconv
in the
int_p_sep_by_space
element of the struct lconv
.
INT_N_CS_PRECEDES
¶The same as the value returned by localeconv
in the
int_n_cs_precedes
element of the struct lconv
.
INT_N_SEP_BY_SPACE
¶The same as the value returned by localeconv
in the
int_n_sep_by_space
element of the struct lconv
.
INT_P_SIGN_POSN
¶The same as the value returned by localeconv
in the
int_p_sign_posn
element of the struct lconv
.
INT_N_SIGN_POSN
¶The same as the value returned by localeconv
in the
int_n_sign_posn
element of the struct lconv
.
DECIMAL_POINT
¶RADIXCHAR
¶The same as the value returned by localeconv
in the
decimal_point
element of the struct lconv
.
The name RADIXCHAR
is a deprecated alias still used in Unix98.
THOUSANDS_SEP
¶THOUSEP
¶The same as the value returned by localeconv
in the
thousands_sep
element of the struct lconv
.
The name THOUSEP
is a deprecated alias still used in Unix98.
GROUPING
¶The same as the value returned by localeconv
in the
grouping
element of the struct lconv
.
YESEXPR
¶The return value is a regular expression which can be used with the
regex
function to recognize a positive response to a yes/no
question. The GNU C Library provides the rpmatch
function for
easier handling in applications.
NOEXPR
¶The return value is a regular expression which can be used with the
regex
function to recognize a negative response to a yes/no
question.
YESSTR
¶The return value is a locale-specific translation of the positive response to a yes/no question.
Using this value is deprecated since it is a very special case of message translation, and is better handled by the message translation functions (see Message Translation).
The use of this symbol is deprecated. Instead message translation should be used.
NOSTR
¶The return value is a locale-specific translation of the negative response
to a yes/no question. What is said for YESSTR
is also true here.
The use of this symbol is deprecated. Instead message translation should be used.
The file langinfo.h defines a lot more symbols but none of them are official. Using them is not portable, and the format of the return values might change. Therefore we recommended you not use them.
Note that the return value for any valid argument can be used
in all situations (with the possible exception of the am/pm time formatting
codes). If the user has not selected any locale for the
appropriate category, nl_langinfo
returns the information from the
"C"
locale. It is therefore possible to use this function as
shown in the example below.
If the argument item is not valid, a pointer to an empty string is returned.
An example of nl_langinfo
usage is a function which has to
print a given date and time in a locale-specific way. At first one
might think that, since strftime
internally uses the locale
information, writing something like the following is enough:
size_t i18n_time_n_data (char *s, size_t len, const struct tm *tp) { return strftime (s, len, "%X %D", tp); }
The format contains no weekday or month names and therefore is
internationally usable. Wrong! The output produced is something like
"hh:mm:ss MM/DD/YY"
. This format is only recognizable in the
USA. Other countries use different formats. Therefore the function
should be rewritten like this:
size_t i18n_time_n_data (char *s, size_t len, const struct tm *tp) { return strftime (s, len, nl_langinfo (D_T_FMT), tp); }
Now it uses the date and time format of the locale selected when the program runs. If the user selects the locale correctly there should never be a misunderstanding over the time and date format.
Next: Yes-or-No Questions, Previous: Accessing Locale Information, Up: Locales and Internationalization [Contents][Index]
We have seen that the structure returned by localeconv
as well as
the values given to nl_langinfo
allow you to retrieve the various
pieces of locale-specific information to format numbers and monetary
amounts. We have also seen that the underlying rules are quite complex.
Therefore the X/Open standards introduce a function which uses such locale information, making it easier for the user to format numbers according to these rules.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe locale | AS-Unsafe heap | AC-Unsafe mem | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The strfmon
function is similar to the strftime
function
in that it takes a buffer, its size, a format string,
and values to write into the buffer as text in a form specified
by the format string. Like strftime
, the function
also returns the number of bytes written into the buffer.
There are two differences: strfmon
can take more than one
argument, and, of course, the format specification is different. Like
strftime
, the format string consists of normal text, which is
output as is, and format specifiers, which are indicated by a ‘%’.
Immediately after the ‘%’, you can optionally specify various flags
and formatting information before the main formatting character, in a
similar way to printf
:
The single byte character f is used for this field as the numeric fill character. By default this character is a space character. Filling with this character is only performed if a left precision is specified. It is not just to fill to the given field width.
The number is printed without grouping the digits according to the rules of the current locale. By default grouping is enabled.
At most one of these flags can be used. They select which format to
represent the sign of a currency amount. By default, and if
‘+’ is given, the locale equivalent of +/- is used. If
‘(’ is given, negative amounts are enclosed in parentheses. The
exact format is determined by the values of the LC_MONETARY
category of the locale selected at program runtime.
The output will not contain the currency symbol.
The output will be formatted left-justified instead of right-justified if it does not fill the entire field width.
The next part of the specification is an optional field width. If no width is specified 0 is taken. During output, the function first determines how much space is required. If it requires at least as many characters as given by the field width, it is output using as much space as necessary. Otherwise, it is extended to use the full width by filling with the space character. The presence or absence of the ‘-’ flag determines the side at which such padding occurs. If present, the spaces are added at the right making the output left-justified, and vice versa.
So far the format looks familiar, being similar to the printf
and
strftime
formats. However, the next two optional fields
introduce something new. The first one is a ‘#’ character followed
by a decimal digit string. The value of the digit string specifies the
number of digit positions to the left of the decimal point (or
equivalent). This does not include the grouping character when
the ‘^’ flag is not given. If the space needed to print the number
does not fill the whole width, the field is padded at the left side with
the fill character, which can be selected using the ‘=’ flag and by
default is a space. For example, if the field width is selected as 6
and the number is 123, the fill character is ‘*’ the result
will be ‘***123’.
The second optional field starts with a ‘.’ (period) and consists
of another decimal digit string. Its value describes the number of
characters printed after the decimal point. The default is selected
from the current locale (frac_digits
, int_frac_digits
, see
see Generic Numeric Formatting Parameters). If the exact representation needs more digits
than given by the field width, the displayed value is rounded. If the
number of fractional digits is selected to be zero, no decimal point is
printed.
As a GNU extension, the strfmon
implementation in the GNU C Library
allows an optional ‘L’ next as a format modifier. If this modifier
is given, the argument is expected to be a long double
instead of
a double
value.
Finally, the last component is a format specifier. There are three specifiers defined:
Use the locale’s rules for formatting an international currency value.
Use the locale’s rules for formatting a national currency value.
Place a ‘%’ in the output. There must be no flag, width specifier or modifier given, only ‘%%’ is allowed.
As for printf
, the function reads the format string
from left to right and uses the values passed to the function following
the format string. The values are expected to be either of type
double
or long double
, depending on the presence of the
modifier ‘L’. The result is stored in the buffer pointed to by
s. At most maxsize characters are stored.
The return value of the function is the number of characters stored in
s, including the terminating NULL
byte. If the number of
characters stored would exceed maxsize, the function returns
-1 and the content of the buffer s is unspecified. In this
case errno
is set to E2BIG
.
A few examples should make clear how the function works. It is
assumed that all the following pieces of code are executed in a program
which uses the USA locale (en_US
). The simplest
form of the format is this:
strfmon (buf, 100, "@%n@%n@%n@", 123.45, -567.89, 12345.678);
The output produced is
"@$123.45@-$567.89@$12,345.68@"
We can notice several things here. First, the widths of the output
numbers are different. We have not specified a width in the format
string, and so this is no wonder. Second, the third number is printed
using thousands separators. The thousands separator for the
en_US
locale is a comma. The number is also rounded.
.678 is rounded to .68 since the format does not specify a
precision and the default value in the locale is 2. Finally,
note that the national currency symbol is printed since ‘%n’ was
used, not ‘i’. The next example shows how we can align the output.
strfmon (buf, 100, "@%=*11n@%=*11n@%=*11n@", 123.45, -567.89, 12345.678);
The output this time is:
"@ $123.45@ -$567.89@ $12,345.68@"
Two things stand out. Firstly, all fields have the same width (eleven characters) since this is the width given in the format and since no number required more characters to be printed. The second important point is that the fill character is not used. This is correct since the white space was not used to achieve a precision given by a ‘#’ modifier, but instead to fill to the given width. The difference becomes obvious if we now add a width specification.
strfmon (buf, 100, "@%=*11#5n@%=*11#5n@%=*11#5n@", 123.45, -567.89, 12345.678);
The output is
"@ $***123.45@-$***567.89@ $12,456.68@"
Here we can see that all the currency symbols are now aligned, and that the space between the currency sign and the number is filled with the selected fill character. Note that although the width is selected to be 5 and 123.45 has three digits left of the decimal point, the space is filled with three asterisks. This is correct since, as explained above, the width does not include the positions used to store thousands separators. One last example should explain the remaining functionality.
strfmon (buf, 100, "@%=0(16#5.3i@%=0(16#5.3i@%=0(16#5.3i@", 123.45, -567.89, 12345.678);
This rather complex format string produces the following output:
"@ USD 000123,450 @(USD 000567.890)@ USD 12,345.678 @"
The most noticeable change is the alternative way of representing
negative numbers. In financial circles this is often done using
parentheses, and this is what the ‘(’ flag selected. The fill
character is now ‘0’. Note that this ‘0’ character is not
regarded as a numeric zero, and therefore the first and second numbers
are not printed using a thousands separator. Since we used the format
specifier ‘i’ instead of ‘n’, the international form of the
currency symbol is used. This is a four letter string, in this case
"USD "
. The last point is that since the precision right of the
decimal point is selected to be three, the first and second numbers are
printed with an extra zero at the end and the third number is printed
without rounding.
Previous: A dedicated function to format numbers, Up: Locales and Internationalization [Contents][Index]
Some non GUI programs ask a yes-or-no question. If the messages (especially the questions) are translated into foreign languages, be sure that you localize the answers too. It would be very bad habit to ask a question in one language and request the answer in another, often English.
The GNU C Library contains rpmatch
to give applications easy
access to the corresponding locale definitions.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe locale | AS-Unsafe corrupt heap lock dlopen | AC-Unsafe corrupt lock mem fd | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The function rpmatch
checks the string in response for whether
or not it is a correct yes-or-no answer and if yes, which one. The
check uses the YESEXPR
and NOEXPR
data in the
LC_MESSAGES
category of the currently selected locale. The
return value is as follows:
1
The user entered an affirmative answer.
0
The user entered a negative answer.
-1
The answer matched neither the YESEXPR
nor the NOEXPR
regular expression.
This function is not standardized but available beside in the GNU C Library at least also in the IBM AIX library.
This function would normally be used like this:
… /* Use a safe default. */ _Bool doit = false; fputs (gettext ("Do you really want to do this? "), stdout); fflush (stdout); /* Prepare thegetline
call. */ line = NULL; len = 0; while (getline (&line, &len, stdin) >= 0) { /* Check the response. */ int res = rpmatch (line); if (res >= 0) { /* We got a definitive answer. */ if (res > 0) doit = true; break; } } /* Free whatgetline
allocated. */ free (line);
Note that the loop continues until a read error is detected or until a definitive (positive or negative) answer is read.
Next: Searching and Sorting, Previous: Locales and Internationalization, Up: Main Menu [Contents][Index]
The program’s interface with the user should be designed to ease the user’s task. One way to ease the user’s task is to use messages in whatever language the user prefers.
Printing messages in different languages can be implemented in different ways. One could add all the different languages in the source code and choose among the variants every time a message has to be printed. This is certainly not a good solution since extending the set of languages is cumbersome (the code must be changed) and the code itself can become really big with dozens of message sets.
A better solution is to keep the message sets for each language in separate files which are loaded at runtime depending on the language selection of the user.
The GNU C Library provides two different sets of functions to support
message translation. The problem is that neither of the interfaces is
officially defined by the POSIX standard. The catgets
family of
functions is defined in the X/Open standard but this is derived from
industry decisions and therefore not necessarily based on reasonable
decisions.
As mentioned above, the message catalog handling provides easy extendability by using external data files which contain the message translations. I.e., these files contain for each of the messages used in the program a translation for the appropriate language. So the tasks of the message handling functions are
The two approaches mainly differ in the implementation of this last step. Decisions made in the last step influence the rest of the design.
The catgets
functions are based on the simple scheme:
Associate every message to translate in the source code with a unique identifier. To retrieve a message from a catalog file solely the identifier is used.
This means for the author of the program that s/he will have to make sure the meaning of the identifier in the program code and in the message catalogs is always the same.
Before a message can be translated the catalog file must be located. The user of the program must be able to guide the responsible function to find whatever catalog the user wants. This is separated from what the programmer had in mind.
All the types, constants and functions for the catgets
functions
are defined/declared in the nl_types.h header file.
catgets
function familycatgets
interfacecatgets
function familyPreliminary: | MT-Safe env | AS-Unsafe heap | AC-Unsafe mem | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The catopen
function tries to locate the message data file named
cat_name and loads it when found. The return value is of an
opaque type and can be used in calls to the other functions to refer to
this loaded catalog.
The return value is (nl_catd) -1
in case the function failed and
no catalog was loaded. The global variable errno
contains a code
for the error causing the failure. But even if the function call
succeeded this does not mean that all messages can be translated.
Locating the catalog file must happen in a way which lets the user of the program influence the decision. It is up to the user to decide about the language to use and sometimes it is useful to use alternate catalog files. All this can be specified by the user by setting some environment variables.
The first problem is to find out where all the message catalogs are stored. Every program could have its own place to keep all the different files but usually the catalog files are grouped by languages and the catalogs for all programs are kept in the same place.
To tell the catopen
function where the catalog for the program
can be found the user can set the environment variable NLSPATH
to
a value which describes her/his choice. Since this value must be usable
for different languages and locales it cannot be a simple string.
Instead it is a format string (similar to printf
’s). An example
is
/usr/share/locale/%L/%N:/usr/share/locale/%L/LC_MESSAGES/%N
First one can see that more than one directory can be specified (with
the usual syntax of separating them by colons). The next things to
observe are the format string, %L
and %N
in this case.
The catopen
function knows about several of them and the
replacement for all of them is of course different.
%N
This format element is substituted with the name of the catalog file.
This is the value of the cat_name argument given to
catgets
.
%L
This format element is substituted with the name of the currently selected locale for translating messages. How this is determined is explained below.
%l
(This is the lowercase ell.) This format element is substituted with the
language element of the locale name. The string describing the selected
locale is expected to have the form
lang[_terr[.codeset]]
and this format uses the
first part lang.
%t
This format element is substituted by the territory part terr of the name of the currently selected locale. See the explanation of the format above.
%c
This format element is substituted by the codeset part codeset of the name of the currently selected locale. See the explanation of the format above.
%%
Since %
is used as a meta character there must be a way to
express the %
character in the result itself. Using %%
does this just like it works for printf
.
Using NLSPATH
allows arbitrary directories to be searched for
message catalogs while still allowing different languages to be used.
If the NLSPATH
environment variable is not set, the default value
is
prefix/share/locale/%L/%N:prefix/share/locale/%L/LC_MESSAGES/%N
where prefix is given to configure
while installing the GNU C Library
(this value is in many cases /usr
or the empty string).
The remaining problem is to decide which must be used. The value
decides about the substitution of the format elements mentioned above.
First of all the user can specify a path in the message catalog name
(i.e., the name contains a slash character). In this situation the
NLSPATH
environment variable is not used. The catalog must exist
as specified in the program, perhaps relative to the current working
directory. This situation in not desirable and catalogs names never
should be written this way. Beside this, this behavior is not portable
to all other platforms providing the catgets
interface.
Otherwise the values of environment variables from the standard
environment are examined (see Standard Environment Variables). Which
variables are examined is decided by the flag parameter of
catopen
. If the value is NL_CAT_LOCALE
(which is defined
in nl_types.h) then the catopen
function uses the name of
the locale currently selected for the LC_MESSAGES
category.
If flag is zero the LANG
environment variable is examined.
This is a left-over from the early days when the concept of locales
had not even reached the level of POSIX locales.
The environment variable and the locale name should have a value of the
form lang[_terr[.codeset]]
as explained above.
If no environment variable is set the "C"
locale is used which
prevents any translation.
The return value of the function is in any case a valid string. Either it is a translation from a message catalog or it is the same as the string parameter. So a piece of code to decide whether a translation actually happened must look like this:
{ char *trans = catgets (desc, set, msg, input_string); if (trans == input_string) { /* Something went wrong. */ } }
When an error occurs the global variable errno
is set to
The catalog does not exist.
The set/message tuple does not name an existing element in the message catalog.
While it sometimes can be useful to test for errors programs normally will avoid any test. If the translation is not available it is no big problem if the original, untranslated message is printed. Either the user understands this as well or s/he will look for the reason why the messages are not translated.
Please note that the currently selected locale does not depend on a call
to the setlocale
function. It is not necessary that the locale
data files for this locale exist and calling setlocale
succeeds.
The catopen
function directly reads the values of the environment
variables.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The function catgets
has to be used to access the message catalog
previously opened using the catopen
function. The
catalog_desc parameter must be a value previously returned by
catopen
.
The next two parameters, set and message, reflect the internal organization of the message catalog files. This will be explained in detail below. For now it is interesting to know that a catalog can consist of several sets and the messages in each thread are individually numbered using numbers. Neither the set number nor the message number must be consecutive. They can be arbitrarily chosen. But each message (unless equal to another one) must have its own unique pair of set and message numbers.
Since it is not guaranteed that the message catalog for the language selected by the user exists the last parameter string helps to handle this case gracefully. If no matching string can be found string is returned. This means for the programmer that
It is somewhat uncomfortable to write a program using the catgets
functions if no supporting functionality is available. Since each
set/message number tuple must be unique the programmer must keep lists
of the messages at the same time the code is written. And the work
between several people working on the same project must be coordinated.
We will see how some of these problems can be relaxed a bit (see How to use the catgets
interface).
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Unsafe heap | AC-Unsafe corrupt mem | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The catclose
function can be used to free the resources
associated with a message catalog which previously was opened by a call
to catopen
. If the resources can be successfully freed the
function returns 0
. Otherwise it returns -1
and the
global variable errno
is set. Errors can occur if the catalog
descriptor catalog_desc is not valid in which case errno
is
set to EBADF
.
Next: Generate Message Catalogs files, Previous: The catgets
function family, Up: X/Open Message Catalog Handling [Contents][Index]
The only reasonable way to translate all the messages of a function and
store the result in a message catalog file which can be read by the
catopen
function is to write all the message text to the
translator and let her/him translate them all. I.e., we must have a
file with entries which associate the set/message tuple with a specific
translation. This file format is specified in the X/Open standard and
is as follows:
$
followed by a whitespace character are comment and are also ignored.
$set
followed by a whitespace character an additional argument
is required to follow. This argument can either be:
How to use the symbolic names is explained in section How to use the catgets
interface.
It is an error if a symbol name appears more than once. All following messages are placed in a set with this number.
$delset
followed by a whitespace character an additional argument
is required to follow. This argument can either be:
In both cases all messages in the specified set will be removed. They
will not appear in the output. But if this set is later again selected
with a $set
command again messages could be added and these
messages will appear in the output.
$quote
, the quoting character used for this input file is
changed to the first non-whitespace character following
$quote
. If no non-whitespace character is present before the
line ends quoting is disabled.
By default no quoting character is used. In this mode strings are
terminated with the first unescaped line break. If there is a
$quote
sequence present newline need not be escaped. Instead a
string is terminated with the first unescaped appearance of the quote
character.
A common usage of this feature would be to set the quote character to
"
. Then any appearance of the "
in the strings must
be escaped using the backslash (i.e., \"
must be written).
If the start of the line is a number the message number is obvious. It is an error if the same message number already appeared for this set.
If the leading token was an identifier the message number gets
automatically assigned. The value is the current maximum message
number for this set plus one. It is an error if the identifier was
already used for a message in this set. It is OK to reuse the
identifier for a message in another thread. How to use the symbolic
identifiers will be explained below (see How to use the catgets
interface). There is
one limitation with the identifier: it must not be Set
. The
reason will be explained below.
The text of the messages can contain escape characters. The usual bunch
of characters known from the ISO C language are recognized
(\n
, \t
, \v
, \b
, \r
, \f
,
\\
, and \nnn
, where nnn is the octal coding of
a character code).
Important: The handling of identifiers instead of numbers for the set and messages is a GNU extension. Systems strictly following the X/Open specification do not have this feature. An example for a message catalog file is this:
$ This is a leading comment. $quote " $set SetOne 1 Message with ID 1. two " Message with ID \"two\", which gets the value 2 assigned" $set SetTwo $ Since the last set got the number 1 assigned this set has number 2. 4000 "The numbers can be arbitrary, they need not start at one."
This small example shows various aspects:
$
followed by
a whitespace.
"
. Otherwise the quotes in the
message definition would have to be omitted and in this case the
message with the identifier two
would lose its leading whitespace.
While this file format is pretty easy it is not the best possible for
use in a running program. The catopen
function would have to
parse the file and handle syntactic errors gracefully. This is not so
easy and the whole process is pretty slow. Therefore the catgets
functions expect the data in another more compact and ready-to-use file
format. There is a special program gencat
which is explained in
detail in the next section.
Files in this other format are not human readable. To be easy to use by programs it is a binary file. But the format is byte order independent so translation files can be shared by systems of arbitrary architecture (as long as they use the GNU C Library).
Details about the binary file format are not important to know since
these files are always created by the gencat
program. The
sources of the GNU C Library also provide the sources for the
gencat
program and so the interested reader can look through
these source files to learn about the file format.
Next: How to use the catgets
interface, Previous: Format of the message catalog files, Up: X/Open Message Catalog Handling [Contents][Index]
The gencat
program is specified in the X/Open standard and the
GNU implementation follows this specification and so processes
all correctly formed input files. Additionally some extension are
implemented which help to work in a more reasonable way with the
catgets
functions.
The gencat
program can be invoked in two ways:
`gencat [Option …] [Output-File [Input-File …]]`
This is the interface defined in the X/Open standard. If no Input-File parameter is given, input will be read from standard input. Multiple input files will be read as if they were concatenated. If Output-File is also missing, the output will be written to standard output. To provide the interface one is used to from other programs a second interface is provided.
`gencat [Option …] -o Output-File [Input-File …]`
The option ‘-o’ is used to specify the output file and all file arguments are used as input files.
Beside this one can use - or /dev/stdin for Input-File to denote the standard input. Corresponding one can use - and /dev/stdout for Output-File to denote standard output. Using - as a file name is allowed in X/Open while using the device names is a GNU extension.
The gencat
program works by concatenating all input files and
then merging the resulting collection of message sets with a
possibly existing output file. This is done by removing all messages
with set/message number tuples matching any of the generated messages
from the output file and then adding all the new messages. To
regenerate a catalog file while ignoring the old contents therefore
requires removing the output file if it exists. If the output is
written to standard output no merging takes place.
The following table shows the options understood by the gencat
program. The X/Open standard does not specify any options for the
program so all of these are GNU extensions.
Print the version information and exit.
Print a usage message listing all available options, then exit successfully.
Do not merge the new messages from the input files with the old content of the output file. The old content of the output file is discarded.
This option is used to emit the symbolic names given to sets and
messages in the input files for use in the program. Details about how
to use this are given in the next section. The name parameter to
this option specifies the name of the output file. It will contain a
number of C preprocessor #define
s to associate a name with a
number.
Please note that the generated file only contains the symbols from the input files. If the output is merged with the previous content of the output file the possibly existing symbols from the file(s) which generated the old output files are not in the generated header file.
Previous: Generate Message Catalogs files, Up: X/Open Message Catalog Handling [Contents][Index]
catgets
interfaceThe catgets
functions can be used in two different ways. By
following slavishly the X/Open specs and not relying on the extension
and by using the GNU extensions. We will take a look at the former
method first to understand the benefits of extensions.
Since the X/Open format of the message catalog files does not allow symbol names we have to work with numbers all the time. When we start writing a program we have to replace all appearances of translatable strings with something like
catgets (catdesc, set, msg, "string")
catgets is retrieved from a call to catopen
which is
normally done once at the program start. The "string"
is the
string we want to translate. The problems start with the set and
message numbers.
In a bigger program several programmers usually work at the same time on the program and so coordinating the number allocation is crucial. Though no two different strings must be indexed by the same tuple of numbers it is highly desirable to reuse the numbers for equal strings with equal translations (please note that there might be strings which are equal in one language but have different translations due to difference contexts).
The allocation process can be relaxed a bit by different set numbers for
different parts of the program. So the number of developers who have to
coordinate the allocation can be reduced. But still lists must be keep
track of the allocation and errors can easily happen. These errors
cannot be discovered by the compiler or the catgets
functions.
Only the user of the program might see wrong messages printed. In the
worst cases the messages are so irritating that they cannot be
recognized as wrong. Think about the translations for "true"
and
"false"
being exchanged. This could result in a disaster.
The problems mentioned in the last section derive from the fact that:
By constantly using symbolic names and by providing a method which maps the string content to a symbolic name (however this will happen) one can prevent both problems above. The cost of this is that the programmer has to write a complete message catalog file while s/he is writing the program itself.
This is necessary since the symbolic names must be mapped to numbers
before the program sources can be compiled. In the last section it was
described how to generate a header containing the mapping of the names.
E.g., for the example message file given in the last section we could
call the gencat
program as follows (assume ex.msg contains
the sources).
gencat -H ex.h -o ex.cat ex.msg
This generates a header file with the following content:
#define SetTwoSet 0x2 /* ex.msg:8 */ #define SetOneSet 0x1 /* ex.msg:4 */ #define SetOnetwo 0x2 /* ex.msg:6 */
As can be seen the various symbols given in the source file are mangled
to generate unique identifiers and these identifiers get numbers
assigned. Reading the source file and knowing about the rules will
allow to predict the content of the header file (it is deterministic)
but this is not necessary. The gencat
program can take care for
everything. All the programmer has to do is to put the generated header
file in the dependency list of the source files of her/his project and
add a rule to regenerate the header if any of the input files change.
One word about the symbol mangling. Every symbol consists of two parts:
the name of the message set plus the name of the message or the special
string Set
. So SetOnetwo
means this macro can be used to
access the translation with identifier two
in the message set
SetOne
.
The other names denote the names of the message sets. The special
string Set
is used in the place of the message identifier.
If in the code the second string of the set SetOne
is used the C
code should look like this:
catgets (catdesc, SetOneSet, SetOnetwo, " Message with ID \"two\", which gets the value 2 assigned")
Writing the function this way will allow to change the message number and even the set number without requiring any change in the C source code. (The text of the string is normally not the same; this is only for this example.)
To illustrate the usual way to work with the symbolic version numbers here is a little example. Assume we want to write the very complex and famous greeting program. We start by writing the code as usual:
#include <stdio.h> int main (void) { printf ("Hello, world!\n"); return 0; }
Now we want to internationalize the message and therefore replace the message with whatever the user wants.
#include <nl_types.h> #include <stdio.h> #include "msgnrs.h" int main (void) { nl_catd catdesc = catopen ("hello.cat", NL_CAT_LOCALE); printf (catgets (catdesc, SetMainSet, SetMainHello, "Hello, world!\n")); catclose (catdesc); return 0; }
We see how the catalog object is opened and the returned descriptor used in the other function calls. It is not really necessary to check for failure of any of the functions since even in these situations the functions will behave reasonable. They simply will be return a translation.
What remains unspecified here are the constants SetMainSet
and
SetMainHello
. These are the symbolic names describing the
message. To get the actual definitions which match the information in
the catalog file we have to create the message catalog source file and
process it using the gencat
program.
$ Messages for the famous greeting program. $quote " $set Main Hello "Hallo, Welt!\n"
Now we can start building the program (assume the message catalog source file is named hello.msg and the program source file hello.c):
% gencat -H msgnrs.h -o hello.cat hello.msg % cat msgnrs.h #define MainSet 0x1 /* hello.msg:4 */ #define MainHello 0x1 /* hello.msg:5 */ % gcc -o hello hello.c -I. % cp hello.cat /usr/share/locale/de/LC_MESSAGES % echo $LC_ALL de % ./hello Hallo, Welt! %
The call of the gencat
program creates the missing header file
msgnrs.h as well as the message catalog binary. The former is
used in the compilation of hello.c while the later is placed in a
directory in which the catopen
function will try to locate it.
Please check the LC_ALL
environment variable and the default path
for catopen
presented in the description above.
Previous: X/Open Message Catalog Handling, Up: Message Translation [Contents][Index]
Sun Microsystems tried to standardize a different approach to message translation in the Uniforum group. There never was a real standard defined but still the interface was used in Sun’s operating systems. Since this approach fits better in the development process of free software it is also used throughout the GNU project and the GNU gettext package provides support for this outside the GNU C Library.
The code of the libintl from GNU gettext is the same as the code in the GNU C Library. So the documentation in the GNU gettext manual is also valid for the functionality here. The following text will describe the library functions in detail. But the numerous helper programs are not described in this manual. Instead people should read the GNU gettext manual (see GNU gettext utilities in Native Language Support Library and Tools). We will only give a short overview.
Though the catgets
functions are available by default on more
systems the gettext
interface is at least as portable as the
former. The GNU gettext package can be used wherever the
functions are not available.
Next: Programs to handle message catalogs for gettext
, Up: The Uniforum approach to Message Translation [Contents][Index]
gettext
family of functionsThe paradigms underlying the gettext
approach to message
translations is different from that of the catgets
functions the
basic functionally is equivalent. There are functions of the following
categories:
gettext
usesgettext
in GUI programsgettext
Next: How to determine which catalog to be used, Up: The gettext
family of functions [Contents][Index]
The gettext
functions have a very simple interface. The most
basic function just takes the string which shall be translated as the
argument and it returns the translation. This is fundamentally
different from the catgets
approach where an extra key is
necessary and the original string is only used for the error case.
If the string which has to be translated is the only argument this of
course means the string itself is the key. I.e., the translation will
be selected based on the original string. The message catalogs must
therefore contain the original strings plus one translation for any such
string. The task of the gettext
function is to compare the
argument string with the available strings in the catalog and return the
appropriate translation. Of course this process is optimized so that
this process is not more expensive than an access using an atomic key
like in catgets
.
The gettext
approach has some advantages but also some
disadvantages. Please see the GNU gettext manual for a detailed
discussion of the pros and cons.
All the definitions and declarations for gettext
can be found in
the libintl.h header file. On systems where these functions are
not part of the C library they can be found in a separate library named
libintl.a (or accordingly different for shared libraries).
Preliminary: | MT-Safe env | AS-Unsafe corrupt heap lock dlopen | AC-Unsafe corrupt lock fd mem | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The gettext
function searches the currently selected message
catalogs for a string which is equal to msgid. If there is such a
string available it is returned. Otherwise the argument string
msgid is returned.
Please note that although the return value is char *
the
returned string must not be changed. This broken type results from the
history of the function and does not reflect the way the function should
be used.
Please note that above we wrote “message catalogs” (plural). This is a specialty of the GNU implementation of these functions and we will say more about this when we talk about the ways message catalogs are selected (see How to determine which catalog to be used).
The gettext
function does not modify the value of the global
errno
variable. This is necessary to make it possible to write
something like
printf (gettext ("Operation failed: %m\n"));
Here the errno
value is used in the printf
function while
processing the %m
format element and if the gettext
function would change this value (it is called before printf
is
called) we would get a wrong message.
So there is no easy way to detect a missing message catalog besides comparing the argument string with the result. But it is normally the task of the user to react on missing catalogs. The program cannot guess when a message catalog is really necessary since for a user who speaks the language the program was developed in, the message does not need any translation.
The remaining two functions to access the message catalog add some
functionality to select a message catalog which is not the default one.
This is important if parts of the program are developed independently.
Every part can have its own message catalog and all of them can be used
at the same time. The C library itself is an example: internally it
uses the gettext
functions but since it must not depend on a
currently selected default message catalog it must specify all ambiguous
information.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe env | AS-Unsafe corrupt heap lock dlopen | AC-Unsafe corrupt lock fd mem | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The dgettext
function acts just like the gettext
function. It only takes an additional first argument domainname
which guides the selection of the message catalogs which are searched
for the translation. If the domainname parameter is the null
pointer the dgettext
function is exactly equivalent to
gettext
since the default value for the domain name is used.
As for gettext
the return value type is char *
which is an
anachronism. The returned string must never be modified.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe env | AS-Unsafe corrupt heap lock dlopen | AC-Unsafe corrupt lock fd mem | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The dcgettext
adds another argument to those which
dgettext
takes. This argument category specifies the last
piece of information needed to localize the message catalog. I.e., the
domain name and the locale category exactly specify which message
catalog has to be used (relative to a given directory, see below).
The dgettext
function can be expressed in terms of
dcgettext
by using
dcgettext (domain, string, LC_MESSAGES)
instead of
dgettext (domain, string)
This also shows which values are expected for the third parameter. One
has to use the available selectors for the categories available in
locale.h. Normally the available values are LC_CTYPE
,
LC_COLLATE
, LC_MESSAGES
, LC_MONETARY
,
LC_NUMERIC
, and LC_TIME
. Please note that LC_ALL
must not be used and even though the names might suggest this, there is
no relation to the environment variable of this name.
The dcgettext
function is only implemented for compatibility with
other systems which have gettext
functions. There is not really
any situation where it is necessary (or useful) to use a different value
than LC_MESSAGES
for the category parameter. We are
dealing with messages here and any other choice can only be irritating.
As for gettext
the return value type is char *
which is an
anachronism. The returned string must never be modified.
When using the three functions above in a program it is a frequent case
that the msgid argument is a constant string. So it is worthwhile to
optimize this case. Thinking shortly about this one will realize that
as long as no new message catalog is loaded the translation of a message
will not change. This optimization is actually implemented by the
gettext
, dgettext
and dcgettext
functions.
Next: Additional functions for more complicated situations, Previous: What has to be done to translate a message?, Up: The gettext
family of functions [Contents][Index]
The functions to retrieve the translations for a given message have a remarkable simple interface. But to provide the user of the program still the opportunity to select exactly the translation s/he wants and also to provide the programmer the possibility to influence the way to locate the search for catalogs files there is a quite complicated underlying mechanism which controls all this. The code is complicated the use is easy.
Basically we have two different tasks to perform which can also be
performed by the catgets
functions:
There can be arbitrarily many packages installed and they can follow different guidelines for the placement of their files.
This is the functionality required by the specifications for
gettext
and this is also what the catgets
functions are
able to do. But there are some problems unresolved:
de
, german
, or
deutsch
and the program should always react the same.
de_DE.ISO-8859-1
which means German, spoken in Germany,
coded using the ISO 8859-1 character set there is the possibility
that a message catalog matching this exactly is not available. But
there could be a catalog matching de
and if the character set
used on the machine is always ISO 8859-1 there is no reason why this
later message catalog should not be used. (We call this message
inheritance.)
We can divide the configuration actions in two parts: the one is performed by the programmer, the other by the user. We will start with the functions the programmer can use since the user configuration will be based on this.
As the functions described in the last sections already mention separate
sets of messages can be selected by a domain name. This is a
simple string which should be unique for each program part that uses a
separate domain. It is possible to use in one program arbitrarily many
domains at the same time. E.g., the GNU C Library itself uses a domain
named libc
while the program using the C Library could use a
domain named foo
. The important point is that at any time
exactly one domain is active. This is controlled with the following
function.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Unsafe lock heap | AC-Unsafe lock mem | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The textdomain
function sets the default domain, which is used in
all future gettext
calls, to domainname. Please note that
dgettext
and dcgettext
calls are not influenced if the
domainname parameter of these functions is not the null pointer.
Before the first call to textdomain
the default domain is
messages
. This is the name specified in the specification of
the gettext
API. This name is as good as any other name. No
program should ever really use a domain with this name since this can
only lead to problems.
The function returns the value which is from now on taken as the default
domain. If the system went out of memory the returned value is
NULL
and the global variable errno
is set to ENOMEM
.
Despite the return value type being char *
the return string must
not be changed. It is allocated internally by the textdomain
function.
If the domainname parameter is the null pointer no new default domain is set. Instead the currently selected default domain is returned.
If the domainname parameter is the empty string the default domain
is reset to its initial value, the domain with the name messages
.
This possibility is questionable to use since the domain messages
really never should be used.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Unsafe heap | AC-Unsafe mem | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The bindtextdomain
function can be used to specify the directory
which contains the message catalogs for domain domainname for the
different languages. To be correct, this is the directory where the
hierarchy of directories is expected. Details are explained below.
For the programmer it is important to note that the translations which
come with the program have to be placed in a directory hierarchy starting
at, say, /foo/bar. Then the program should make a
bindtextdomain
call to bind the domain for the current program to
this directory. So it is made sure the catalogs are found. A correctly
running program does not depend on the user setting an environment
variable.
The bindtextdomain
function can be used several times and if the
domainname argument is different the previously bound domains
will not be overwritten.
If the program which wish to use bindtextdomain
at some point of
time use the chdir
function to change the current working
directory it is important that the dirname strings ought to be an
absolute pathname. Otherwise the addressed directory might vary with
the time.
If the dirname parameter is the null pointer bindtextdomain
returns the currently selected directory for the domain with the name
domainname.
The bindtextdomain
function returns a pointer to a string
containing the name of the selected directory name. The string is
allocated internally in the function and must not be changed by the
user. If the system went out of core during the execution of
bindtextdomain
the return value is NULL
and the global
variable errno
is set accordingly.
Next: How to specify the output character set gettext
uses, Previous: How to determine which catalog to be used, Up: The gettext
family of functions [Contents][Index]
The functions of the gettext
family described so far (and all the
catgets
functions as well) have one problem in the real world
which has been neglected completely in all existing approaches. What
is meant here is the handling of plural forms.
Looking through Unix source code before the time anybody thought about internationalization (and, sadly, even afterwards) one can often find code similar to the following:
printf ("%d file%s deleted", n, n == 1 ? "" : "s");
After the first complaints from people internationalizing the code people
either completely avoided formulations like this or used strings like
"file(s)"
. Both look unnatural and should be avoided. First
tries to solve the problem correctly looked like this:
if (n == 1) printf ("%d file deleted", n); else printf ("%d files deleted", n);
But this does not solve the problem. It helps languages where the plural form of a noun is not simply constructed by adding an ‘s’ but that is all. Once again people fell into the trap of believing the rules their language uses are universal. But the handling of plural forms differs widely between the language families. There are two things we can differ between (and even inside language families);
But other language families have only one form or many forms. More information on this in an extra section.
The consequence of this is that application writers should not try to
solve the problem in their code. This would be localization since it is
only usable for certain, hardcoded language environments. Instead the
extended gettext
interface should be used.
These extra functions are taking instead of the one key string two
strings and a numerical argument. The idea behind this is that using
the numerical argument and the first string as a key, the implementation
can select using rules specified by the translator the right plural
form. The two string arguments then will be used to provide a return
value in case no message catalog is found (similar to the normal
gettext
behavior). In this case the rules for Germanic language
are used and it is assumed that the first string argument is the singular
form, the second the plural form.
This has the consequence that programs without language catalogs can
display the correct strings only if the program itself is written using
a Germanic language. This is a limitation but since the GNU C Library
(as well as the GNU gettext
package) is written as part of the
GNU package and the coding standards for the GNU project require programs
to be written in English, this solution nevertheless fulfills its
purpose.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe env | AS-Unsafe corrupt heap lock dlopen | AC-Unsafe corrupt lock fd mem | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The ngettext
function is similar to the gettext
function
as it finds the message catalogs in the same way. But it takes two
extra arguments. The msgid1 parameter must contain the singular
form of the string to be converted. It is also used as the key for the
search in the catalog. The msgid2 parameter is the plural form.
The parameter n is used to determine the plural form. If no
message catalog is found msgid1 is returned if n == 1
,
otherwise msgid2
.
An example for the use of this function is:
printf (ngettext ("%d file removed", "%d files removed", n), n);
Please note that the numeric value n has to be passed to the
printf
function as well. It is not sufficient to pass it only to
ngettext
.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe env | AS-Unsafe corrupt heap lock dlopen | AC-Unsafe corrupt lock fd mem | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The dngettext
is similar to the dgettext
function in the
way the message catalog is selected. The difference is that it takes
two extra parameters to provide the correct plural form. These two
parameters are handled in the same way ngettext
handles them.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe env | AS-Unsafe corrupt heap lock dlopen | AC-Unsafe corrupt lock fd mem | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The dcngettext
is similar to the dcgettext
function in the
way the message catalog is selected. The difference is that it takes
two extra parameters to provide the correct plural form. These two
parameters are handled in the same way ngettext
handles them.
A description of the problem can be found at the beginning of the last section. Now there is the question how to solve it. Without the input of linguists (which was not available) it was not possible to determine whether there are only a few different forms in which plural forms are formed or whether the number can increase with every new supported language.
Therefore the solution implemented is to allow the translator to specify
the rules of how to select the plural form. Since the formula varies
with every language this is the only viable solution except for
hardcoding the information in the code (which still would require the
possibility of extensions to not prevent the use of new languages). The
details are explained in the GNU gettext
manual. Here only a
bit of information is provided.
The information about the plural form selection has to be stored in the
header entry (the one with the empty msgid
string). It looks
like this:
Plural-Forms: nplurals=2; plural=n == 1 ? 0 : 1;
The nplurals
value must be a decimal number which specifies how
many different plural forms exist for this language. The string
following plural
is an expression using the C language
syntax. Exceptions are that no negative numbers are allowed, numbers
must be decimal, and the only variable allowed is n
. This
expression will be evaluated whenever one of the functions
ngettext
, dngettext
, or dcngettext
is called. The
numeric value passed to these functions is then substituted for all uses
of the variable n
in the expression. The resulting value then
must be greater or equal to zero and smaller than the value given as the
value of nplurals
.
The following rules are known at this point. The language with families are listed. But this does not necessarily mean the information can be generalized for the whole family (as can be easily seen in the table below).2
Some languages only require one single form. There is no distinction between the singular and plural form. An appropriate header entry would look like this:
Plural-Forms: nplurals=1; plural=0;
Languages with this property include:
Hungarian
Japanese, Korean
Turkish
This is the form used in most existing programs since it is what English uses. A header entry would look like this:
Plural-Forms: nplurals=2; plural=n != 1;
(Note: this uses the feature of C expressions that boolean expressions have to value zero or one.)
Languages with this property include:
Danish, Dutch, English, German, Norwegian, Swedish
Estonian, Finnish
Greek
Hebrew
Italian, Portuguese, Spanish
Esperanto
Exceptional case in the language family. The header entry would be:
Plural-Forms: nplurals=2; plural=n>1;
Languages with this property include:
French, Brazilian Portuguese
The header entry would be:
Plural-Forms: nplurals=3; plural=n%10==1 && n%100!=11 ? 0 : n != 0 ? 1 : 2;
Languages with this property include:
Latvian
The header entry would be:
Plural-Forms: nplurals=3; plural=n==1 ? 0 : n==2 ? 1 : 2;
Languages with this property include:
Gaeilge (Irish)
The header entry would look like this:
Plural-Forms: nplurals=3; \ plural=n%10==1 && n%100!=11 ? 0 : \ n%10>=2 && (n%100<10 || n%100>=20) ? 1 : 2;
Languages with this property include:
Lithuanian
The header entry would look like this:
Plural-Forms: nplurals=3; \ plural=n%100/10==1 ? 2 : n%10==1 ? 0 : (n+9)%10>3 ? 2 : 1;
Languages with this property include:
Croatian, Czech, Russian, Ukrainian
The header entry would look like this:
Plural-Forms: nplurals=3; \ plural=(n==1) ? 1 : (n>=2 && n<=4) ? 2 : 0;
Languages with this property include:
Slovak
The header entry would look like this:
Plural-Forms: nplurals=3; \ plural=n==1 ? 0 : \ n%10>=2 && n%10<=4 && (n%100<10 || n%100>=20) ? 1 : 2;
Languages with this property include:
Polish
The header entry would look like this:
Plural-Forms: nplurals=4; \ plural=n%100==1 ? 0 : n%100==2 ? 1 : n%100==3 || n%100==4 ? 2 : 3;
Languages with this property include:
Slovenian
Next: How to use gettext
in GUI programs, Previous: Additional functions for more complicated situations, Up: The gettext
family of functions [Contents][Index]
gettext
usesgettext
not only looks up a translation in a message catalog, it
also converts the translation on the fly to the desired output character
set. This is useful if the user is working in a different character set
than the translator who created the message catalog, because it avoids
distributing variants of message catalogs which differ only in the
character set.
The output character set is, by default, the value of nl_langinfo
(CODESET)
, which depends on the LC_CTYPE
part of the current
locale. But programs which store strings in a locale independent way
(e.g. UTF-8) can request that gettext
and related functions
return the translations in that encoding, by use of the
bind_textdomain_codeset
function.
Note that the msgid argument to gettext
is not subject to
character set conversion. Also, when gettext
does not find a
translation for msgid, it returns msgid unchanged –
independently of the current output character set. It is therefore
recommended that all msgids be US-ASCII strings.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Unsafe heap | AC-Unsafe mem | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The bind_textdomain_codeset
function can be used to specify the
output character set for message catalogs for domain domainname.
The codeset argument must be a valid codeset name which can be used
for the iconv_open
function, or a null pointer.
If the codeset parameter is the null pointer,
bind_textdomain_codeset
returns the currently selected codeset
for the domain with the name domainname. It returns NULL
if
no codeset has yet been selected.
The bind_textdomain_codeset
function can be used several times.
If used multiple times with the same domainname argument, the
later call overrides the settings made by the earlier one.
The bind_textdomain_codeset
function returns a pointer to a
string containing the name of the selected codeset. The string is
allocated internally in the function and must not be changed by the
user. If the system went out of core during the execution of
bind_textdomain_codeset
, the return value is NULL
and the
global variable errno
is set accordingly.
Next: User influence on gettext
, Previous: How to specify the output character set gettext
uses, Up: The gettext
family of functions [Contents][Index]
gettext
in GUI programsOne place where the gettext
functions, if used normally, have big
problems is within programs with graphical user interfaces (GUIs). The
problem is that many of the strings which have to be translated are very
short. They have to appear in pull-down menus which restricts the
length. But strings which are not containing entire sentences or at
least large fragments of a sentence may appear in more than one
situation in the program but might have different translations. This is
especially true for the one-word strings which are frequently used in
GUI programs.
As a consequence many people say that the gettext
approach is
wrong and instead catgets
should be used which indeed does not
have this problem. But there is a very simple and powerful method to
handle these kind of problems with the gettext
functions.
As an example consider the following fictional situation. A GUI program has a menu bar with the following entries:
+------------+------------+--------------------------------------+ | File | Printer | | +------------+------------+--------------------------------------+ | Open | | Select | | New | | Open | +----------+ | Connect | +----------+
To have the strings File
, Printer
, Open
,
New
, Select
, and Connect
translated there has to be
at some point in the code a call to a function of the gettext
family. But in two places the string passed into the function would be
Open
. The translations might not be the same and therefore we
are in the dilemma described above.
One solution to this problem is to artificially extend the strings to make them unambiguous. But what would the program do if no translation is available? The extended string is not what should be printed. So we should use a slightly modified version of the functions.
To extend the strings a uniform method should be used. E.g., in the example above, the strings could be chosen as
Menu|File Menu|Printer Menu|File|Open Menu|File|New Menu|Printer|Select Menu|Printer|Open Menu|Printer|Connect
Now all the strings are different and if now instead of gettext
the following little wrapper function is used, everything works just
fine:
char * sgettext (const char *msgid) { char *msgval = gettext (msgid); if (msgval == msgid) msgval = strrchr (msgid, '|') + 1; return msgval; }
What this little function does is to recognize the case when no
translation is available. This can be done very efficiently by a
pointer comparison since the return value is the input value. If there
is no translation we know that the input string is in the format we used
for the Menu entries and therefore contains a |
character. We
simply search for the last occurrence of this character and return a
pointer to the character following it. That’s it!
If one now consistently uses the extended string form and replaces
the gettext
calls with calls to sgettext
(this is normally
limited to very few places in the GUI implementation) then it is
possible to produce a program which can be internationalized.
With advanced compilers (such as GNU C) one can write the
sgettext
functions as an inline function or as a macro like this:
#define sgettext(msgid) \ ({ const char *__msgid = (msgid); \ char *__msgstr = gettext (__msgid); \ if (__msgval == __msgid) \ __msgval = strrchr (__msgid, '|') + 1; \ __msgval; })
The other gettext
functions (dgettext
, dcgettext
and the ngettext
equivalents) can and should have corresponding
functions as well which look almost identical, except for the parameters
and the call to the underlying function.
Now there is of course the question why such functions do not exist in the GNU C Library? There are two parts of the answer to this question.
|
which is a quite good choice because it
resembles a notation frequently used in this context and it also is a
character not often used in message strings.
But what if the character is used in message strings. Or if the chose
character is not available in the character set on the machine one
compiles (e.g., |
is not required to exist for ISO C; this is
why the iso646.h file exists in ISO C programming environments).
There is only one more comment to make left. The wrapper function above requires that the translations strings are not extended themselves. This is only logical. There is no need to disambiguate the strings (since they are never used as keys for a search) and one also saves quite some memory and disk space by doing this.
Previous: How to use gettext
in GUI programs, Up: The gettext
family of functions [Contents][Index]
gettext
The last sections described what the programmer can do to internationalize the messages of the program. But it is finally up to the user to select the message s/he wants to see. S/He must understand them.
The POSIX locale model uses the environment variables LC_COLLATE
,
LC_CTYPE
, LC_MESSAGES
, LC_MONETARY
, LC_NUMERIC
,
and LC_TIME
to select the locale which is to be used. This way
the user can influence lots of functions. As we mentioned above, the
gettext
functions also take advantage of this.
To understand how this happens it is necessary to take a look at the various components of the filename which gets computed to locate a message catalog. It is composed as follows:
dir_name/locale/LC_category/domain_name.mo
The default value for dir_name is system specific. It is computed from the value given as the prefix while configuring the C library. This value normally is /usr or /. For the former the complete dir_name is:
/usr/share/locale
We can use /usr/share since the .mo files containing the
message catalogs are system independent, so all systems can use the same
files. If the program executed the bindtextdomain
function for
the message domain that is currently handled, the dir_name
component is exactly the value which was given to the function as
the second parameter. I.e., bindtextdomain
allows overwriting
the only system dependent and fixed value to make it possible to
address files anywhere in the filesystem.
The category is the name of the locale category which was selected
in the program code. For gettext
and dgettext
this is
always LC_MESSAGES
, for dcgettext
this is selected by the
value of the third parameter. As said above it should be avoided to
ever use a category other than LC_MESSAGES
.
The locale component is computed based on the category used. Just
like for the setlocale
function here comes the user selection
into the play. Some environment variables are examined in a fixed order
and the first environment variable set determines the return value of
the lookup process. In detail, for the category LC_xxx
the
following variables in this order are examined:
LANGUAGE
LC_ALL
LC_xxx
LANG
This looks very familiar. With the exception of the LANGUAGE
environment variable this is exactly the lookup order the
setlocale
function uses. But why introduce the LANGUAGE
variable?
The reason is that the syntax of the values these variables can have is
different to what is expected by the setlocale
function. If we
would set LC_ALL
to a value following the extended syntax that
would mean the setlocale
function will never be able to use the
value of this variable as well. An additional variable removes this
problem plus we can select the language independently of the locale
setting which sometimes is useful.
While for the LC_xxx
variables the value should consist of
exactly one specification of a locale the LANGUAGE
variable’s
value can consist of a colon separated list of locale names. The
attentive reader will realize that this is the way we manage to
implement one of our additional demands above: we want to be able to
specify an ordered list of languages.
Back to the constructed filename we have only one component missing.
The domain_name part is the name which was either registered using
the textdomain
function or which was given to dgettext
or
dcgettext
as the first parameter. Now it becomes obvious that a
good choice for the domain name in the program code is a string which is
closely related to the program/package name. E.g., for the GNU C Library
the domain name is libc
.
A limited piece of example code should show how the program is supposed to work:
{ setlocale (LC_ALL, ""); textdomain ("test-package"); bindtextdomain ("test-package", "/usr/local/share/locale"); puts (gettext ("Hello, world!")); }
At the program start the default domain is messages
, and the
default locale is "C". The setlocale
call sets the locale
according to the user’s environment variables; remember that correct
functioning of gettext
relies on the correct setting of the
LC_MESSAGES
locale (for looking up the message catalog) and
of the LC_CTYPE
locale (for the character set conversion).
The textdomain
call changes the default domain to
test-package
. The bindtextdomain
call specifies that
the message catalogs for the domain test-package
can be found
below the directory /usr/local/share/locale.
If the user sets in her/his environment the variable LANGUAGE
to de
the gettext
function will try to use the
translations from the file
/usr/local/share/locale/de/LC_MESSAGES/test-package.mo
From the above descriptions it should be clear which component of this filename is determined by which source.
In the above example we assumed the LANGUAGE
environment
variable to be de
. This might be an appropriate selection but what
happens if the user wants to use LC_ALL
because of the wider
usability and here the required value is de_DE.ISO-8859-1
? We
already mentioned above that a situation like this is not infrequent.
E.g., a person might prefer reading a dialect and if this is not
available fall back on the standard language.
The gettext
functions know about situations like this and can
handle them gracefully. The functions recognize the format of the value
of the environment variable. It can split the value is different pieces
and by leaving out the only or the other part it can construct new
values. This happens of course in a predictable way. To understand
this one must know the format of the environment variable value. There
is one more or less standardized form, originally from the X/Open
specification:
language[_territory[.codeset]][@modifier]
Less specific locale names will be stripped in the order of the following list:
codeset
normalized codeset
territory
modifier
The language
field will never be dropped for obvious reasons.
The only new thing is the normalized codeset
entry. This is
another goodie which is introduced to help reduce the chaos which
derives from the inability of people to standardize the names of
character sets. Instead of ISO-8859-1 one can often see 8859-1,
88591, iso8859-1, or iso_8859-1. The normalized
codeset
value is generated from the user-provided character set name by
applying the following rules:
"iso"
.
So all of the above names will be normalized to iso88591
. This
allows the program user much more freedom in choosing the locale name.
Even this extended functionality still does not help to solve the
problem that completely different names can be used to denote the same
locale (e.g., de
and german
). To be of help in this
situation the locale implementation and also the gettext
functions know about aliases.
The file /usr/share/locale/locale.alias (replace /usr with whatever prefix you used for configuring the C library) contains a mapping of alternative names to more regular names. The system manager is free to add new entries to fill her/his own needs. The selected locale from the environment is compared with the entries in the first column of this file ignoring the case. If they match, the value of the second column is used instead for the further handling.
In the description of the format of the environment variables we already mentioned the character set as a factor in the selection of the message catalog. In fact, only catalogs which contain text written using the character set of the system/program can be used (directly; there will come a solution for this some day). This means for the user that s/he will always have to take care of this. If in the collection of the message catalogs there are files for the same language but coded using different character sets the user has to be careful.
Previous: The gettext
family of functions, Up: The Uniforum approach to Message Translation [Contents][Index]
gettext
The GNU C Library does not contain the source code for the programs to
handle message catalogs for the gettext
functions. As part of
the GNU project the GNU gettext package contains everything the
developer needs. The functionality provided by the tools in this
package by far exceeds the abilities of the gencat
program
described above for the catgets
functions.
There is a program msgfmt
which is the equivalent program to the
gencat
program. It generates from the human-readable and
-editable form of the message catalog a binary file which can be used by
the gettext
functions. But there are several more programs
available.
The xgettext
program can be used to automatically extract the
translatable messages from a source file. I.e., the programmer need not
take care of the translations and the list of messages which have to be
translated. S/He will simply wrap the translatable string in calls to
gettext
et.al and the rest will be done by xgettext
. This
program has a lot of options which help to customize the output or
help to understand the input better.
Other programs help to manage the development cycle when new messages appear in the source files or when a new translation of the messages appears. Here it should only be noted that using all the tools in GNU gettext it is possible to completely automate the handling of message catalogs. Besides marking the translatable strings in the source code and generating the translations the developers do not have anything to do themselves.
Next: Pattern Matching, Previous: Message Translation, Up: Main Menu [Contents][Index]
This chapter describes functions for searching and sorting arrays of arbitrary objects. You pass the appropriate comparison function to be applied as an argument, along with the size of the objects in the array and the total number of elements.
hsearch
function.tsearch
function.Next: Array Search Function, Up: Searching and Sorting [Contents][Index]
In order to use the sorted array library functions, you have to describe how to compare the elements of the array.
To do this, you supply a comparison function to compare two elements of
the array. The library will call this function, passing as arguments
pointers to two array elements to be compared. Your comparison function
should return a value the way strcmp
(see String/Array Comparison) does: negative if the first argument is “less” than the
second, zero if they are “equal”, and positive if the first argument
is “greater”.
Here is an example of a comparison function which works with an array of
numbers of type double
:
int compare_doubles (const void *a, const void *b) { const double *da = (const double *) a; const double *db = (const double *) b; return (*da > *db) - (*da < *db); }
The header file stdlib.h defines a name for the data type of comparison functions. This type is a GNU extension.
int comparison_fn_t (const void *, const void *);
Next: Array Sort Function, Previous: Defining the Comparison Function, Up: Searching and Sorting [Contents][Index]
Generally searching for a specific element in an array means that potentially all elements must be checked. The GNU C Library contains functions to perform linear search. The prototypes for the following two functions can be found in search.h.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The lfind
function searches in the array with *nmemb
elements of size bytes pointed to by base for an element
which matches the one pointed to by key. The function pointed to
by compar is used to decide whether two elements match.
The return value is a pointer to the matching element in the array
starting at base if it is found. If no matching element is
available NULL
is returned.
The mean runtime of this function is *nmemb
/2. This
function should only be used if elements often get added to or deleted from
the array in which case it might not be useful to sort the array before
searching.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The lsearch
function is similar to the lfind
function. It
searches the given array for an element and returns it if found. The
difference is that if no matching element is found the lsearch
function adds the object pointed to by key (with a size of
size bytes) at the end of the array and it increments the value of
*nmemb
to reflect this addition.
This means for the caller that if it is not sure that the array contains
the element one is searching for the memory allocated for the array
starting at base must have room for at least size more
bytes. If one is sure the element is in the array it is better to use
lfind
so having more room in the array is always necessary when
calling lsearch
.
To search a sorted array for an element matching the key, use the
bsearch
function. The prototype for this function is in
the header file stdlib.h.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The bsearch
function searches the sorted array array for an object
that is equivalent to key. The array contains count elements,
each of which is of size size bytes.
The compare function is used to perform the comparison. This function is called with two pointer arguments and should return an integer less than, equal to, or greater than zero corresponding to whether its first argument is considered less than, equal to, or greater than its second argument. The elements of the array must already be sorted in ascending order according to this comparison function.
The return value is a pointer to the matching array element, or a null pointer if no match is found. If the array contains more than one element that matches, the one that is returned is unspecified.
This function derives its name from the fact that it is implemented using the binary search algorithm.
Next: Searching and Sorting Example, Previous: Array Search Function, Up: Searching and Sorting [Contents][Index]
To sort an array using an arbitrary comparison function, use the
qsort
function. The prototype for this function is in
stdlib.h.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Unsafe corrupt | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The qsort
function sorts the array array. The array
contains count elements, each of which is of size size.
The compare function is used to perform the comparison on the array elements. This function is called with two pointer arguments and should return an integer less than, equal to, or greater than zero corresponding to whether its first argument is considered less than, equal to, or greater than its second argument.
Warning: If two objects compare as equal, their order after sorting is unpredictable. That is to say, the sorting is not stable. This can make a difference when the comparison considers only part of the elements. Two elements with the same sort key may differ in other respects.
Although the object addresses passed to the comparison function lie
within the array, they need not correspond with the original locations
of those objects because the sorting algorithm may swap around objects
in the array before making some comparisons. The only way to perform
a stable sort with qsort
is to first augment the objects with a
monotonic counter of some kind.
Here is a simple example of sorting an array of doubles in numerical order, using the comparison function defined above (see Defining the Comparison Function):
{ double *array; int size; … qsort (array, size, sizeof (double), compare_doubles); }
The qsort
function derives its name from the fact that it was
originally implemented using the “quick sort” algorithm.
The implementation of qsort
in this library might not be an
in-place sort and might thereby use an extra amount of memory to store
the array.
Next: The hsearch
function., Previous: Array Sort Function, Up: Searching and Sorting [Contents][Index]
Here is an example showing the use of qsort
and bsearch
with an array of structures. The objects in the array are sorted
by comparing their name
fields with the strcmp
function.
Then, we can look up individual objects based on their names.
#include <stdlib.h> #include <stdio.h> #include <string.h> /* Define an array of critters to sort. */ struct critter { const char *name; const char *species; }; struct critter muppets[] = { {"Kermit", "frog"}, {"Piggy", "pig"}, {"Gonzo", "whatever"}, {"Fozzie", "bear"}, {"Sam", "eagle"}, {"Robin", "frog"}, {"Animal", "animal"}, {"Camilla", "chicken"}, {"Sweetums", "monster"}, {"Dr. Strangepork", "pig"}, {"Link Hogthrob", "pig"}, {"Zoot", "human"}, {"Dr. Bunsen Honeydew", "human"}, {"Beaker", "human"}, {"Swedish Chef", "human"} }; int count = sizeof (muppets) / sizeof (struct critter); /* This is the comparison function used for sorting and searching. */ int critter_cmp (const void *v1, const void *v2) { const struct critter *c1 = v1; const struct critter *c2 = v2; return strcmp (c1->name, c2->name); } /* Print information about a critter. */ void print_critter (const struct critter *c) { printf ("%s, the %s\n", c->name, c->species); }
/* Do the lookup into the sorted array. */
void
find_critter (const char *name)
{
struct critter target, *result;
target.name = name;
result = bsearch (&target, muppets, count, sizeof (struct critter),
critter_cmp);
if (result)
print_critter (result);
else
printf ("Couldn't find %s.\n", name);
}
/* Main program. */
int
main (void)
{
int i;
for (i = 0; i < count; i++)
print_critter (&muppets[i]);
printf ("\n");
qsort (muppets, count, sizeof (struct critter), critter_cmp);
for (i = 0; i < count; i++)
print_critter (&muppets[i]);
printf ("\n");
find_critter ("Kermit");
find_critter ("Gonzo");
find_critter ("Janice");
return 0;
}
The output from this program looks like:
Kermit, the frog Piggy, the pig Gonzo, the whatever Fozzie, the bear Sam, the eagle Robin, the frog Animal, the animal Camilla, the chicken Sweetums, the monster Dr. Strangepork, the pig Link Hogthrob, the pig Zoot, the human Dr. Bunsen Honeydew, the human Beaker, the human Swedish Chef, the human Animal, the animal Beaker, the human Camilla, the chicken Dr. Bunsen Honeydew, the human Dr. Strangepork, the pig Fozzie, the bear Gonzo, the whatever Kermit, the frog Link Hogthrob, the pig Piggy, the pig Robin, the frog Sam, the eagle Swedish Chef, the human Sweetums, the monster Zoot, the human Kermit, the frog Gonzo, the whatever Couldn't find Janice.
Next: The tsearch
function., Previous: Searching and Sorting Example, Up: Searching and Sorting [Contents][Index]
hsearch
function.The functions mentioned so far in this chapter are for searching in a sorted or unsorted array. There are other methods to organize information which later should be searched. The costs of insert, delete and search differ. One possible implementation is using hashing tables. The following functions are declared in the header file search.h.
Preliminary: | MT-Unsafe race:hsearch | AS-Unsafe heap | AC-Unsafe corrupt mem | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The hcreate
function creates a hashing table which can contain at
least nel elements. There is no possibility to grow this table so
it is necessary to choose the value for nel wisely. The method
used to implement this function might make it necessary to make the
number of elements in the hashing table larger than the expected maximal
number of elements. Hashing tables usually work inefficiently if they are
filled 80% or more. The constant access time guaranteed by hashing can
only be achieved if few collisions exist. See Knuth’s “The Art of
Computer Programming, Part 3: Searching and Sorting” for more
information.
The weakest aspect of this function is that there can be at most one hashing table used through the whole program. The table is allocated in local memory out of control of the programmer. As an extension the GNU C Library provides an additional set of functions with a reentrant interface which provides a similar interface but which allows keeping arbitrarily many hashing tables.
It is possible to use more than one hashing table in the program run if
the former table is first destroyed by a call to hdestroy
.
The function returns a non-zero value if successful. If it returns zero, something went wrong. This could either mean there is already a hashing table in use or the program ran out of memory.
Preliminary: | MT-Unsafe race:hsearch | AS-Unsafe heap | AC-Unsafe corrupt mem | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The hdestroy
function can be used to free all the resources
allocated in a previous call of hcreate
. After a call to this
function it is again possible to call hcreate
and allocate a new
table with possibly different size.
It is important to remember that the elements contained in the hashing
table at the time hdestroy
is called are not freed by this
function. It is the responsibility of the program code to free those
strings (if necessary at all). Freeing all the element memory is not
possible without extra, separately kept information since there is no
function to iterate through all available elements in the hashing table.
If it is really necessary to free a table and all elements the
programmer has to keep a list of all table elements and before calling
hdestroy
s/he has to free all element’s data using this list.
This is a very unpleasant mechanism and it also shows that this kind of
hashing table is mainly meant for tables which are created once and
used until the end of the program run.
Entries of the hashing table and keys for the search are defined using this type:
char *key
Pointer to a zero-terminated string of characters describing the key for the search or the element in the hashing table.
This is a limiting restriction of the functionality of the
hsearch
functions: They can only be used for data sets which
use the NUL character always and solely to terminate keys. It is not
possible to handle general binary data for keys.
void *data
Generic pointer for use by the application. The hashing table implementation preserves this pointer in entries, but does not use it in any way otherwise.
The underlying type of ENTRY
.
Preliminary: | MT-Unsafe race:hsearch | AS-Unsafe | AC-Unsafe corrupt/action==ENTER | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
To search in a hashing table created using hcreate
the
hsearch
function must be used. This function can perform a simple
search for an element (if action has the value FIND
) or it can
alternatively insert the key element into the hashing table. Entries
are never replaced.
The key is denoted by a pointer to an object of type ENTRY
. For
locating the corresponding position in the hashing table only the
key
element of the structure is used.
If an entry with a matching key is found the action parameter is
irrelevant. The found entry is returned. If no matching entry is found
and the action parameter has the value FIND
the function
returns a NULL
pointer. If no entry is found and the
action parameter has the value ENTER
a new entry is added
to the hashing table which is initialized with the parameter item.
A pointer to the newly added entry is returned.
As mentioned before, the hashing table used by the functions described so
far is global and there can be at any time at most one hashing table in
the program. A solution is to use the following functions which are a
GNU extension. All have in common that they operate on a hashing table
which is described by the content of an object of the type struct
hsearch_data
. This type should be treated as opaque, none of its
members should be changed directly.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe race:htab | AS-Unsafe heap | AC-Unsafe corrupt mem | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The hcreate_r
function initializes the object pointed to by
htab to contain a hashing table with at least nel elements.
So this function is equivalent to the hcreate
function except
that the initialized data structure is controlled by the user.
This allows having more than one hashing table at one time. The memory
necessary for the struct hsearch_data
object can be allocated
dynamically. It must be initialized with zero before calling this
function.
The return value is non-zero if the operation was successful. If the return value is zero, something went wrong, which probably means the program ran out of memory.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe race:htab | AS-Unsafe heap | AC-Unsafe corrupt mem | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The hdestroy_r
function frees all resources allocated by the
hcreate_r
function for this very same object htab. As for
hdestroy
it is the program’s responsibility to free the strings
for the elements of the table.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe race:htab | AS-Safe | AC-Unsafe corrupt/action==ENTER | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The hsearch_r
function is equivalent to hsearch
. The
meaning of the first two arguments is identical. But instead of
operating on a single global hashing table the function works on the
table described by the object pointed to by htab (which is
initialized by a call to hcreate_r
).
Another difference to hcreate
is that the pointer to the found
entry in the table is not the return value of the function. It is
returned by storing it in a pointer variable pointed to by the
retval parameter. The return value of the function is an integer
value indicating success if it is non-zero and failure if it is zero.
In the latter case the global variable errno
signals the reason for
the failure.
ENOMEM
The table is filled and hsearch_r
was called with a so far
unknown key and action set to ENTER
.
ESRCH
The action parameter is FIND
and no corresponding element
is found in the table.
Previous: The hsearch
function., Up: Searching and Sorting [Contents][Index]
tsearch
function.Another common form to organize data for efficient search is to use
trees. The tsearch
function family provides a nice interface to
functions to organize possibly large amounts of data by providing a mean
access time proportional to the logarithm of the number of elements.
The GNU C Library implementation even guarantees that this bound is
never exceeded even for input data which cause problems for simple
binary tree implementations.
The functions described in the chapter are all described in the System V and X/Open specifications and are therefore quite portable.
In contrast to the hsearch
functions the tsearch
functions
can be used with arbitrary data and not only zero-terminated strings.
The tsearch
functions have the advantage that no function to
initialize data structures is necessary. A simple pointer of type
void *
initialized to NULL
is a valid tree and can be
extended or searched. The prototypes for these functions can be found
in the header file search.h.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe race:rootp | AS-Unsafe heap | AC-Unsafe corrupt mem | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The tsearch
function searches in the tree pointed to by
*rootp
for an element matching key. The function
pointed to by compar is used to determine whether two elements
match. See Defining the Comparison Function, for a specification of the functions
which can be used for the compar parameter.
If the tree does not contain a matching entry the key value will
be added to the tree. tsearch
does not make a copy of the object
pointed to by key (how could it since the size is unknown).
Instead it adds a reference to this object which means the object must
be available as long as the tree data structure is used.
The tree is represented by a pointer to a pointer since it is sometimes
necessary to change the root node of the tree. So it must not be
assumed that the variable pointed to by rootp has the same value
after the call. This also shows that it is not safe to call the
tsearch
function more than once at the same time using the same
tree. It is no problem to run it more than once at a time on different
trees.
The return value is a pointer to the matching element in the tree. If a
new element was created the pointer points to the new data (which is in
fact key). If an entry had to be created and the program ran out
of space NULL
is returned.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe race:rootp | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The tfind
function is similar to the tsearch
function. It
locates an element matching the one pointed to by key and returns
a pointer to this element. But if no matching element is available no
new element is entered (note that the rootp parameter points to a
constant pointer). Instead the function returns NULL
.
Another advantage of the tsearch
functions in contrast to the
hsearch
functions is that there is an easy way to remove
elements.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe race:rootp | AS-Unsafe heap | AC-Unsafe corrupt mem | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
To remove a specific element matching key from the tree
tdelete
can be used. It locates the matching element using the
same method as tfind
. The corresponding element is then removed
and a pointer to the parent of the deleted node is returned by the
function. If there is no matching entry in the tree nothing can be
deleted and the function returns NULL
. If the root of the tree
is deleted tdelete
returns some unspecified value not equal to
NULL
.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Unsafe heap | AC-Unsafe mem | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
If the complete search tree has to be removed one can use
tdestroy
. It frees all resources allocated by the tsearch
functions to generate the tree pointed to by vroot.
For the data in each tree node the function freefct is called. The pointer to the data is passed as the argument to the function. If no such work is necessary freefct must point to a function doing nothing. It is called in any case.
This function is a GNU extension and not covered by the System V or X/Open specifications.
In addition to the functions to create and destroy the tree data structure, there is another function which allows you to apply a function to all elements of the tree. The function must have this type:
void __action_fn_t (const void *nodep, VISIT value, int level);
The nodep is the data value of the current node (once given as the
key argument to tsearch
). level is a numeric value
which corresponds to the depth of the current node in the tree. The
root node has the depth 0 and its children have a depth of
1 and so on. The VISIT
type is an enumeration type.
The VISIT
value indicates the status of the current node in the
tree and how the function is called. The status of a node is either
‘leaf’ or ‘internal node’. For each leaf node the function is called
exactly once, for each internal node it is called three times: before
the first child is processed, after the first child is processed and
after both children are processed. This makes it possible to handle all
three methods of tree traversal (or even a combination of them).
preorder
¶The current node is an internal node and the function is called before the first child was processed.
postorder
¶The current node is an internal node and the function is called after the first child was processed.
endorder
¶The current node is an internal node and the function is called after the second child was processed.
leaf
¶The current node is a leaf.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe race:root | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
For each node in the tree with a node pointed to by root, the
twalk
function calls the function provided by the parameter
action. For leaf nodes the function is called exactly once with
value set to leaf
. For internal nodes the function is
called three times, setting the value parameter or action to
the appropriate value. The level argument for the action
function is computed while descending the tree by increasing the value
by one for each descent to a child, starting with the value 0 for
the root node.
Since the functions used for the action parameter to twalk
must not modify the tree data, it is safe to run twalk
in more
than one thread at the same time, working on the same tree. It is also
safe to call tfind
in parallel. Functions which modify the tree
must not be used, otherwise the behavior is undefined. However, it is
difficult to pass data external to the tree to the callback function
without resorting to global variables (and thread safety issues), so
see the twalk_r
function below.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe race:root | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
For each node in the tree with a node pointed to by root, the
twalk_r
function calls the function provided by the parameter
action. For leaf nodes the function is called exactly once with
which set to leaf
. For internal nodes the function is
called three times, setting the which parameter of action to
the appropriate value. The closure parameter is passed down to
each call of the action function, unmodified.
It is possible to implement the twalk
function on top of the
twalk_r
function, which is why there is no separate level
parameter.
#include <search.h>
struct twalk_with_twalk_r_closure
{
void (*action) (const void *, VISIT, int);
int depth;
};
static void
twalk_with_twalk_r_action (const void *nodep, VISIT which, void *closure0)
{
struct twalk_with_twalk_r_closure *closure = closure0;
switch (which)
{
case leaf:
closure->action (nodep, which, closure->depth);
break;
case preorder:
closure->action (nodep, which, closure->depth);
++closure->depth;
break;
case postorder:
/* The preorder action incremented the depth. */
closure->action (nodep, which, closure->depth - 1);
break;
case endorder:
--closure->depth;
closure->action (nodep, which, closure->depth);
break;
}
}
void
twalk (const void *root, void (*action) (const void *, VISIT, int))
{
struct twalk_with_twalk_r_closure closure = { action, 0 };
twalk_r (root, twalk_with_twalk_r_action, &closure);
}
Next: Input/Output Overview, Previous: Searching and Sorting, Up: Main Menu [Contents][Index]
The GNU C Library provides pattern matching facilities for two kinds of patterns: regular expressions and file-name wildcards. The library also provides a facility for expanding variable and command references and parsing text into words in the way the shell does.
Next: Globbing, Up: Pattern Matching [Contents][Index]
This section describes how to match a wildcard pattern against a particular string. The result is a yes or no answer: does the string fit the pattern or not. The symbols described here are all declared in fnmatch.h.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe env locale | AS-Unsafe heap | AC-Unsafe mem | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This function tests whether the string string matches the pattern
pattern. It returns 0
if they do match; otherwise, it
returns the nonzero value FNM_NOMATCH
. The arguments
pattern and string are both strings.
The argument flags is a combination of flag bits that alter the details of matching. See below for a list of the defined flags.
In the GNU C Library, fnmatch
might sometimes report “errors” by
returning nonzero values that are not equal to FNM_NOMATCH
.
These are the available flags for the flags argument:
FNM_FILE_NAME
¶Treat the ‘/’ character specially, for matching file names. If this flag is set, wildcard constructs in pattern cannot match ‘/’ in string. Thus, the only way to match ‘/’ is with an explicit ‘/’ in pattern.
FNM_PATHNAME
¶This is an alias for FNM_FILE_NAME
; it comes from POSIX.2. We
don’t recommend this name because we don’t use the term “pathname” for
file names.
FNM_PERIOD
¶Treat the ‘.’ character specially if it appears at the beginning of string. If this flag is set, wildcard constructs in pattern cannot match ‘.’ as the first character of string.
If you set both FNM_PERIOD
and FNM_FILE_NAME
, then the
special treatment applies to ‘.’ following ‘/’ as well as to
‘.’ at the beginning of string. (The shell uses the
FNM_PERIOD
and FNM_FILE_NAME
flags together for matching
file names.)
FNM_NOESCAPE
¶Don’t treat the ‘\’ character specially in patterns. Normally, ‘\’ quotes the following character, turning off its special meaning (if any) so that it matches only itself. When quoting is enabled, the pattern ‘\?’ matches only the string ‘?’, because the question mark in the pattern acts like an ordinary character.
If you use FNM_NOESCAPE
, then ‘\’ is an ordinary character.
FNM_LEADING_DIR
¶Ignore a trailing sequence of characters starting with a ‘/’ in string; that is to say, test whether string starts with a directory name that pattern matches.
If this flag is set, either ‘foo*’ or ‘foobar’ as a pattern would match the string ‘foobar/frobozz’.
FNM_CASEFOLD
¶Ignore case in comparing string to pattern.
FNM_EXTMATCH
¶Besides the normal patterns, also recognize the extended patterns
introduced in ksh. The patterns are written in the form
explained in the following table where pattern-list is a |
separated list of patterns.
?(pattern-list)
The pattern matches if zero or one occurrences of any of the patterns in the pattern-list allow matching the input string.
*(pattern-list)
The pattern matches if zero or more occurrences of any of the patterns in the pattern-list allow matching the input string.
+(pattern-list)
The pattern matches if one or more occurrences of any of the patterns in the pattern-list allow matching the input string.
@(pattern-list)
The pattern matches if exactly one occurrence of any of the patterns in the pattern-list allows matching the input string.
!(pattern-list)
The pattern matches if the input string cannot be matched with any of the patterns in the pattern-list.
Next: Regular Expression Matching, Previous: Wildcard Matching, Up: Pattern Matching [Contents][Index]
The archetypal use of wildcards is for matching against the files in a directory, and making a list of all the matches. This is called globbing.
You could do this using fnmatch
, by reading the directory entries
one by one and testing each one with fnmatch
. But that would be
slow (and complex, since you would have to handle subdirectories by
hand).
The library provides a function glob
to make this particular use
of wildcards convenient. glob
and the other symbols in this
section are declared in glob.h.
Next: Flags for Globbing, Up: Globbing [Contents][Index]
glob
The result of globbing is a vector of file names (strings). To return
this vector, glob
uses a special data type, glob_t
, which
is a structure. You pass glob
the address of the structure, and
it fills in the structure’s fields to tell you about the results.
This data type holds a pointer to a word vector. More precisely, it records both the address of the word vector and its size. The GNU implementation contains some more fields which are non-standard extensions.
gl_pathc
The number of elements in the vector, excluding the initial null entries if the GLOB_DOOFFS flag is used (see gl_offs below).
gl_pathv
The address of the vector. This field has type char **
.
gl_offs
The offset of the first real element of the vector, from its nominal
address in the gl_pathv
field. Unlike the other fields, this
is always an input to glob
, rather than an output from it.
If you use a nonzero offset, then that many elements at the beginning of
the vector are left empty. (The glob
function fills them with
null pointers.)
The gl_offs
field is meaningful only if you use the
GLOB_DOOFFS
flag. Otherwise, the offset is always zero
regardless of what is in this field, and the first real element comes at
the beginning of the vector.
gl_closedir
The address of an alternative implementation of the closedir
function. It is used if the GLOB_ALTDIRFUNC
bit is set in
the flag parameter. The type of this field is
void (*) (void *)
.
This is a GNU extension.
gl_readdir
The address of an alternative implementation of the readdir
function used to read the contents of a directory. It is used if the
GLOB_ALTDIRFUNC
bit is set in the flag parameter. The type of
this field is struct dirent *(*) (void *)
.
An implementation of gl_readdir
needs to initialize the following
members of the struct dirent
object:
d_type
This member should be set to the file type of the entry if it is known.
Otherwise, the value DT_UNKNOWN
can be used. The glob
function may use the specified file type to avoid callbacks in cases
where the file type indicates that the data is not required.
d_ino
This member needs to be non-zero, otherwise glob
may skip the
current entry and call the gl_readdir
callback function again to
retrieve another entry.
d_name
This member must be set to the name of the entry. It must be null-terminated.
The example below shows how to allocate a struct dirent
object
containing a given name.
#include <dirent.h>
#include <errno.h>
#include <stddef.h>
#include <stdlib.h>
#include <string.h>
struct dirent *
mkdirent (const char *name)
{
size_t dirent_size = offsetof (struct dirent, d_name) + 1;
size_t name_length = strlen (name);
size_t total_size = dirent_size + name_length;
if (total_size < dirent_size)
{
errno = ENOMEM;
return NULL;
}
struct dirent *result = malloc (total_size);
if (result == NULL)
return NULL;
result->d_type = DT_UNKNOWN;
result->d_ino = 1; /* Do not skip this entry. */
memcpy (result->d_name, name, name_length + 1);
return result;
}
The glob
function reads the struct dirent
members listed
above and makes a copy of the file name in the d_name
member
immediately after the gl_readdir
callback function returns.
Future invocations of any of the callback functions may deallocate or
reuse the buffer. It is the responsibility of the caller of the
glob
function to allocate and deallocate the buffer, around the
call to glob
or using the callback functions. For example, an
application could allocate the buffer in the gl_readdir
callback
function, and deallocate it in the gl_closedir
callback function.
The gl_readdir
member is a GNU extension.
gl_opendir
The address of an alternative implementation of the opendir
function. It is used if the GLOB_ALTDIRFUNC
bit is set in
the flag parameter. The type of this field is
void *(*) (const char *)
.
This is a GNU extension.
gl_stat
The address of an alternative implementation of the stat
function
to get information about an object in the filesystem. It is used if the
GLOB_ALTDIRFUNC
bit is set in the flag parameter. The type of
this field is int (*) (const char *, struct stat *)
.
This is a GNU extension.
gl_lstat
The address of an alternative implementation of the lstat
function to get information about an object in the filesystems, not
following symbolic links. It is used if the GLOB_ALTDIRFUNC
bit
is set in the flag parameter. The type of this field is int (*) (const char *, struct stat *)
.
This is a GNU extension.
gl_flags
The flags used when glob
was called. In addition, GLOB_MAGCHAR
might be set. See Flags for Globbing for more details.
This is a GNU extension.
For use in the glob64
function glob.h contains another
definition for a very similar type. glob64_t
differs from
glob_t
only in the types of the members gl_readdir
,
gl_stat
, and gl_lstat
.
This data type holds a pointer to a word vector. More precisely, it records both the address of the word vector and its size. The GNU implementation contains some more fields which are non-standard extensions.
gl_pathc
The number of elements in the vector, excluding the initial null entries if the GLOB_DOOFFS flag is used (see gl_offs below).
gl_pathv
The address of the vector. This field has type char **
.
gl_offs
The offset of the first real element of the vector, from its nominal
address in the gl_pathv
field. Unlike the other fields, this
is always an input to glob
, rather than an output from it.
If you use a nonzero offset, then that many elements at the beginning of
the vector are left empty. (The glob
function fills them with
null pointers.)
The gl_offs
field is meaningful only if you use the
GLOB_DOOFFS
flag. Otherwise, the offset is always zero
regardless of what is in this field, and the first real element comes at
the beginning of the vector.
gl_closedir
The address of an alternative implementation of the closedir
function. It is used if the GLOB_ALTDIRFUNC
bit is set in
the flag parameter. The type of this field is
void (*) (void *)
.
This is a GNU extension.
gl_readdir
The address of an alternative implementation of the readdir64
function used to read the contents of a directory. It is used if the
GLOB_ALTDIRFUNC
bit is set in the flag parameter. The type of
this field is struct dirent64 *(*) (void *)
.
This is a GNU extension.
gl_opendir
The address of an alternative implementation of the opendir
function. It is used if the GLOB_ALTDIRFUNC
bit is set in
the flag parameter. The type of this field is
void *(*) (const char *)
.
This is a GNU extension.
gl_stat
The address of an alternative implementation of the stat64
function
to get information about an object in the filesystem. It is used if the
GLOB_ALTDIRFUNC
bit is set in the flag parameter. The type of
this field is int (*) (const char *, struct stat64 *)
.
This is a GNU extension.
gl_lstat
The address of an alternative implementation of the lstat64
function to get information about an object in the filesystems, not
following symbolic links. It is used if the GLOB_ALTDIRFUNC
bit
is set in the flag parameter. The type of this field is int (*) (const char *, struct stat64 *)
.
This is a GNU extension.
gl_flags
The flags used when glob
was called. In addition, GLOB_MAGCHAR
might be set. See Flags for Globbing for more details.
This is a GNU extension.
Preliminary: | MT-Unsafe race:utent env sig:ALRM timer locale | AS-Unsafe dlopen plugin corrupt heap lock | AC-Unsafe corrupt lock fd mem | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The function glob
does globbing using the pattern pattern
in the current directory. It puts the result in a newly allocated
vector, and stores the size and address of this vector into
*vector-ptr
. The argument flags is a combination of
bit flags; see Flags for Globbing, for details of the flags.
The result of globbing is a sequence of file names. The function
glob
allocates a string for each resulting word, then
allocates a vector of type char **
to store the addresses of
these strings. The last element of the vector is a null pointer.
This vector is called the word vector.
To return this vector, glob
stores both its address and its
length (number of elements, not counting the terminating null pointer)
into *vector-ptr
.
Normally, glob
sorts the file names alphabetically before
returning them. You can turn this off with the flag GLOB_NOSORT
if you want to get the information as fast as possible. Usually it’s
a good idea to let glob
sort them—if you process the files in
alphabetical order, the users will have a feel for the rate of progress
that your application is making.
If glob
succeeds, it returns 0. Otherwise, it returns one
of these error codes:
GLOB_ABORTED
¶There was an error opening a directory, and you used the flag
GLOB_ERR
or your specified errfunc returned a nonzero
value.
for an explanation of the GLOB_ERR
flag and errfunc.
GLOB_NOMATCH
¶The pattern didn’t match any existing files. If you use the
GLOB_NOCHECK
flag, then you never get this error code, because
that flag tells glob
to pretend that the pattern matched
at least one file.
GLOB_NOSPACE
¶It was impossible to allocate memory to hold the result.
In the event of an error, glob
stores information in
*vector-ptr
about all the matches it has found so far.
It is important to notice that the glob
function will not fail if
it encounters directories or files which cannot be handled without the
LFS interfaces. The implementation of glob
is supposed to use
these functions internally. This at least is the assumption made by
the Unix standard. The GNU extension of allowing the user to provide their
own directory handling and stat
functions complicates things a
bit. If these callback functions are used and a large file or directory
is encountered glob
can fail.
Preliminary: | MT-Unsafe race:utent env sig:ALRM timer locale | AS-Unsafe dlopen corrupt heap lock | AC-Unsafe corrupt lock fd mem | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The glob64
function was added as part of the Large File Summit
extensions but is not part of the original LFS proposal. The reason for
this is simple: it is not necessary. The necessity for a glob64
function is added by the extensions of the GNU glob
implementation which allows the user to provide their own directory handling
and stat
functions. The readdir
and stat
functions
do depend on the choice of _FILE_OFFSET_BITS
since the definition
of the types struct dirent
and struct stat
will change
depending on the choice.
Besides this difference, glob64
works just like glob
in
all aspects.
This function is a GNU extension.
Next: More Flags for Globbing, Previous: Calling glob
, Up: Globbing [Contents][Index]
This section describes the standard flags that you can specify in the
flags argument to glob
. Choose the flags you want,
and combine them with the C bitwise OR operator |
.
Note that there are More Flags for Globbing available as GNU extensions.
GLOB_APPEND
¶Append the words from this expansion to the vector of words produced by
previous calls to glob
. This way you can effectively expand
several words as if they were concatenated with spaces between them.
In order for appending to work, you must not modify the contents of the
word vector structure between calls to glob
. And, if you set
GLOB_DOOFFS
in the first call to glob
, you must also
set it when you append to the results.
Note that the pointer stored in gl_pathv
may no longer be valid
after you call glob
the second time, because glob
might
have relocated the vector. So always fetch gl_pathv
from the
glob_t
structure after each glob
call; never save
the pointer across calls.
GLOB_DOOFFS
¶Leave blank slots at the beginning of the vector of words.
The gl_offs
field says how many slots to leave.
The blank slots contain null pointers.
GLOB_ERR
¶Give up right away and report an error if there is any difficulty
reading the directories that must be read in order to expand pattern
fully. Such difficulties might include a directory in which you don’t
have the requisite access. Normally, glob
tries its best to keep
on going despite any errors, reading whatever directories it can.
You can exercise even more control than this by specifying an
error-handler function errfunc when you call glob
. If
errfunc is not a null pointer, then glob
doesn’t give up
right away when it can’t read a directory; instead, it calls
errfunc with two arguments, like this:
(*errfunc) (filename, error-code)
The argument filename is the name of the directory that
glob
couldn’t open or couldn’t read, and error-code is the
errno
value that was reported to glob
.
If the error handler function returns nonzero, then glob
gives up
right away. Otherwise, it continues.
GLOB_MARK
¶If the pattern matches the name of a directory, append ‘/’ to the directory’s name when returning it.
GLOB_NOCHECK
¶If the pattern doesn’t match any file names, return the pattern itself
as if it were a file name that had been matched. (Normally, when the
pattern doesn’t match anything, glob
returns that there were no
matches.)
GLOB_NOESCAPE
¶Don’t treat the ‘\’ character specially in patterns. Normally, ‘\’ quotes the following character, turning off its special meaning (if any) so that it matches only itself. When quoting is enabled, the pattern ‘\?’ matches only the string ‘?’, because the question mark in the pattern acts like an ordinary character.
If you use GLOB_NOESCAPE
, then ‘\’ is an ordinary character.
glob
does its work by calling the function fnmatch
repeatedly. It handles the flag GLOB_NOESCAPE
by turning on the
FNM_NOESCAPE
flag in calls to fnmatch
.
GLOB_NOSORT
¶Don’t sort the file names; return them in no particular order. (In practice, the order will depend on the order of the entries in the directory.) The only reason not to sort is to save time.
Previous: Flags for Globbing, Up: Globbing [Contents][Index]
Beside the flags described in the last section, the GNU implementation of
glob
allows a few more flags which are also defined in the
glob.h file. Some of the extensions implement functionality
which is available in modern shell implementations.
GLOB_PERIOD
¶The .
character (period) is treated special. It cannot be
matched by wildcards. See Wildcard Matching, FNM_PERIOD
.
GLOB_MAGCHAR
¶The GLOB_MAGCHAR
value is not to be given to glob
in the
flags parameter. Instead, glob
sets this bit in the
gl_flags element of the glob_t structure provided as the
result if the pattern used for matching contains any wildcard character.
GLOB_ALTDIRFUNC
¶Instead of using the normal functions for accessing the
filesystem the glob
implementation uses the user-supplied
functions specified in the structure pointed to by pglob
parameter. For more information about the functions refer to the
sections about directory handling see Accessing Directories, and
Reading the Attributes of a File.
GLOB_BRACE
¶If this flag is given, the handling of braces in the pattern is changed. It is now required that braces appear correctly grouped. I.e., for each opening brace there must be a closing one. Braces can be used recursively. So it is possible to define one brace expression in another one. It is important to note that the range of each brace expression is completely contained in the outer brace expression (if there is one).
The string between the matching braces is separated into single
expressions by splitting at ,
(comma) characters. The commas
themselves are discarded. Please note what we said above about recursive
brace expressions. The commas used to separate the subexpressions must
be at the same level. Commas in brace subexpressions are not matched.
They are used during expansion of the brace expression of the deeper
level. The example below shows this
glob ("{foo/{,bar,biz},baz}", GLOB_BRACE, NULL, &result)
is equivalent to the sequence
glob ("foo/", GLOB_BRACE, NULL, &result) glob ("foo/bar", GLOB_BRACE|GLOB_APPEND, NULL, &result) glob ("foo/biz", GLOB_BRACE|GLOB_APPEND, NULL, &result) glob ("baz", GLOB_BRACE|GLOB_APPEND, NULL, &result)
if we leave aside error handling.
GLOB_NOMAGIC
¶If the pattern contains no wildcard constructs (it is a literal file name), return it as the sole “matching” word, even if no file exists by that name.
GLOB_TILDE
¶If this flag is used the character ~
(tilde) is handled specially
if it appears at the beginning of the pattern. Instead of being taken
verbatim it is used to represent the home directory of a known user.
If ~
is the only character in pattern or it is followed by a
/
(slash), the home directory of the process owner is
substituted. Using getlogin
and getpwnam
the information
is read from the system databases. As an example take user bart
with his home directory at /home/bart. For him a call like
glob ("~/bin/*", GLOB_TILDE, NULL, &result)
would return the contents of the directory /home/bart/bin.
Instead of referring to the own home directory it is also possible to
name the home directory of other users. To do so one has to append the
user name after the tilde character. So the contents of user
homer
’s bin directory can be retrieved by
glob ("~homer/bin/*", GLOB_TILDE, NULL, &result)
If the user name is not valid or the home directory cannot be determined
for some reason the pattern is left untouched and itself used as the
result. I.e., if in the last example home
is not available the
tilde expansion yields to "~homer/bin/*"
and glob
is not
looking for a directory named ~homer
.
This functionality is equivalent to what is available in C-shells if the
nonomatch
flag is set.
GLOB_TILDE_CHECK
¶If this flag is used glob
behaves as if GLOB_TILDE
is
given. The only difference is that if the user name is not available or
the home directory cannot be determined for other reasons this leads to
an error. glob
will return GLOB_NOMATCH
instead of using
the pattern itself as the name.
This functionality is equivalent to what is available in C-shells if
the nonomatch
flag is not set.
GLOB_ONLYDIR
¶If this flag is used the globbing function takes this as a hint that the caller is only interested in directories matching the pattern. If the information about the type of the file is easily available non-directories will be rejected but no extra work will be done to determine the information for each file. I.e., the caller must still be able to filter directories out.
This functionality is only available with the GNU glob
implementation. It is mainly used internally to increase the
performance but might be useful for a user as well and therefore is
documented here.
Calling glob
will in most cases allocate resources which are used
to represent the result of the function call. If the same object of
type glob_t
is used in multiple call to glob
the resources
are freed or reused so that no leaks appear. But this does not include
the time when all glob
calls are done.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Unsafe corrupt heap | AC-Unsafe corrupt mem | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The globfree
function frees all resources allocated by previous
calls to glob
associated with the object pointed to by
pglob. This function should be called whenever the currently used
glob_t
typed object isn’t used anymore.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Unsafe corrupt lock | AC-Unsafe corrupt lock fd mem | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This function is equivalent to globfree
but it frees records of
type glob64_t
which were allocated by glob64
.
Next: Shell-Style Word Expansion, Previous: Globbing, Up: Pattern Matching [Contents][Index]
The GNU C Library supports two interfaces for matching regular expressions. One is the standard POSIX.2 interface, and the other is what the GNU C Library has had for many years.
Both interfaces are declared in the header file regex.h.
If you define _POSIX_C_SOURCE
, then only the POSIX.2
functions, structures, and constants are declared.
Before you can actually match a regular expression, you must compile it. This is not true compilation—it produces a special data structure, not machine instructions. But it is like ordinary compilation in that its purpose is to enable you to “execute” the pattern fast. (See Matching a Compiled POSIX Regular Expression, for how to use the compiled regular expression for matching.)
There is a special data type for compiled regular expressions:
This type of object holds a compiled regular expression. It is actually a structure. It has just one field that your programs should look at:
re_nsub
This field holds the number of parenthetical subexpressions in the regular expression that was compiled.
There are several other fields, but we don’t describe them here, because only the functions in the library should use them.
After you create a regex_t
object, you can compile a regular
expression into it by calling regcomp
.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe locale | AS-Unsafe corrupt heap lock dlopen | AC-Unsafe corrupt lock mem fd | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The function regcomp
“compiles” a regular expression into a
data structure that you can use with regexec
to match against a
string. The compiled regular expression format is designed for
efficient matching. regcomp
stores it into *compiled
.
It’s up to you to allocate an object of type regex_t
and pass its
address to regcomp
.
The argument cflags lets you specify various options that control the syntax and semantics of regular expressions. See Flags for POSIX Regular Expressions.
If you use the flag REG_NOSUB
, then regcomp
omits from
the compiled regular expression the information necessary to record
how subexpressions actually match. In this case, you might as well
pass 0
for the matchptr and nmatch arguments when
you call regexec
.
If you don’t use REG_NOSUB
, then the compiled regular expression
does have the capacity to record how subexpressions match. Also,
regcomp
tells you how many subexpressions pattern has, by
storing the number in compiled->re_nsub
. You can use that
value to decide how long an array to allocate to hold information about
subexpression matches.
regcomp
returns 0
if it succeeds in compiling the regular
expression; otherwise, it returns a nonzero error code (see the table
below). You can use regerror
to produce an error message string
describing the reason for a nonzero value; see POSIX Regexp Matching Cleanup.
Here are the possible nonzero values that regcomp
can return:
REG_BADBR
¶There was an invalid ‘\{…\}’ construct in the regular expression. A valid ‘\{…\}’ construct must contain either a single number, or two numbers in increasing order separated by a comma.
REG_BADPAT
¶There was a syntax error in the regular expression.
REG_BADRPT
¶A repetition operator such as ‘?’ or ‘*’ appeared in a bad position (with no preceding subexpression to act on).
REG_ECOLLATE
¶The regular expression referred to an invalid collating element (one not defined in the current locale for string collation). See Locale Categories.
REG_ECTYPE
¶The regular expression referred to an invalid character class name.
REG_EESCAPE
¶The regular expression ended with ‘\’.
REG_ESUBREG
¶There was an invalid number in the ‘\digit’ construct.
REG_EBRACK
¶There were unbalanced square brackets in the regular expression.
REG_EPAREN
¶An extended regular expression had unbalanced parentheses, or a basic regular expression had unbalanced ‘\(’ and ‘\)’.
REG_EBRACE
¶The regular expression had unbalanced ‘\{’ and ‘\}’.
REG_ERANGE
¶One of the endpoints in a range expression was invalid.
REG_ESPACE
¶regcomp
ran out of memory.
Next: Matching a Compiled POSIX Regular Expression, Previous: POSIX Regular Expression Compilation, Up: Regular Expression Matching [Contents][Index]
These are the bit flags that you can use in the cflags operand when
compiling a regular expression with regcomp
.
REG_EXTENDED
¶Treat the pattern as an extended regular expression, rather than as a basic regular expression.
REG_ICASE
¶Ignore case when matching letters.
REG_NOSUB
¶Don’t bother storing the contents of the matchptr array.
REG_NEWLINE
¶Treat a newline in string as dividing string into multiple lines, so that ‘$’ can match before the newline and ‘^’ can match after. Also, don’t permit ‘.’ to match a newline, and don’t permit ‘[^…]’ to match a newline.
Otherwise, newline acts like any other ordinary character.
Next: Match Results with Subexpressions, Previous: Flags for POSIX Regular Expressions, Up: Regular Expression Matching [Contents][Index]
Once you have compiled a regular expression, as described in POSIX Regular Expression Compilation, you can match it against strings using
regexec
. A match anywhere inside the string counts as success,
unless the regular expression contains anchor characters (‘^’ or
‘$’).
Preliminary: | MT-Safe locale | AS-Unsafe corrupt heap lock dlopen | AC-Unsafe corrupt lock mem fd | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This function tries to match the compiled regular expression
*compiled
against string.
regexec
returns 0
if the regular expression matches;
otherwise, it returns a nonzero value. See the table below for
what nonzero values mean. You can use regerror
to produce an
error message string describing the reason for a nonzero value;
see POSIX Regexp Matching Cleanup.
The argument eflags is a word of bit flags that enable various options.
If you want to get information about what part of string actually
matched the regular expression or its subexpressions, use the arguments
matchptr and nmatch. Otherwise, pass 0
for
nmatch, and NULL
for matchptr. See Match Results with Subexpressions.
You must match the regular expression with the same set of current locales that were in effect when you compiled the regular expression.
The function regexec
accepts the following flags in the
eflags argument:
REG_NOTBOL
¶Do not regard the beginning of the specified string as the beginning of a line; more generally, don’t make any assumptions about what text might precede it.
REG_NOTEOL
¶Do not regard the end of the specified string as the end of a line; more generally, don’t make any assumptions about what text might follow it.
Here are the possible nonzero values that regexec
can return:
REG_NOMATCH
¶The pattern didn’t match the string. This isn’t really an error.
REG_ESPACE
¶regexec
ran out of memory.
Next: Complications in Subexpression Matching, Previous: Matching a Compiled POSIX Regular Expression, Up: Regular Expression Matching [Contents][Index]
When regexec
matches parenthetical subexpressions of
pattern, it records which parts of string they match. It
returns that information by storing the offsets into an array whose
elements are structures of type regmatch_t
. The first element of
the array (index 0
) records the part of the string that matched
the entire regular expression. Each other element of the array records
the beginning and end of the part that matched a single parenthetical
subexpression.
This is the data type of the matchptr array that you pass to
regexec
. It contains two structure fields, as follows:
rm_so
The offset in string of the beginning of a substring. Add this value to string to get the address of that part.
rm_eo
The offset in string of the end of the substring.
regoff_t
is an alias for another signed integer type.
The fields of regmatch_t
have type regoff_t
.
The regmatch_t
elements correspond to subexpressions
positionally; the first element (index 1
) records where the first
subexpression matched, the second element records the second
subexpression, and so on. The order of the subexpressions is the order
in which they begin.
When you call regexec
, you specify how long the matchptr
array is, with the nmatch argument. This tells regexec
how
many elements to store. If the actual regular expression has more than
nmatch subexpressions, then you won’t get offset information about
the rest of them. But this doesn’t alter whether the pattern matches a
particular string or not.
If you don’t want regexec
to return any information about where
the subexpressions matched, you can either supply 0
for
nmatch, or use the flag REG_NOSUB
when you compile the
pattern with regcomp
.
Next: POSIX Regexp Matching Cleanup, Previous: Match Results with Subexpressions, Up: Regular Expression Matching [Contents][Index]
Sometimes a subexpression matches a substring of no characters. This
happens when ‘f\(o*\)’ matches the string ‘fum’. (It really
matches just the ‘f’.) In this case, both of the offsets identify
the point in the string where the null substring was found. In this
example, the offsets are both 1
.
Sometimes the entire regular expression can match without using some of
its subexpressions at all—for example, when ‘ba\(na\)*’ matches the
string ‘ba’, the parenthetical subexpression is not used. When
this happens, regexec
stores -1
in both fields of the
element for that subexpression.
Sometimes matching the entire regular expression can match a particular
subexpression more than once—for example, when ‘ba\(na\)*’
matches the string ‘bananana’, the parenthetical subexpression
matches three times. When this happens, regexec
usually stores
the offsets of the last part of the string that matched the
subexpression. In the case of ‘bananana’, these offsets are
6
and 8
.
But the last match is not always the one that is chosen. It’s more
accurate to say that the last opportunity to match is the one
that takes precedence. What this means is that when one subexpression
appears within another, then the results reported for the inner
subexpression reflect whatever happened on the last match of the outer
subexpression. For an example, consider ‘\(ba\(na\)*s \)*’ matching
the string ‘bananas bas ’. The last time the inner expression
actually matches is near the end of the first word. But it is
considered again in the second word, and fails to match there.
regexec
reports nonuse of the “na” subexpression.
Another place where this rule applies is when the regular expression
\(ba\(na\)*s \|nefer\(ti\)* \)*
matches ‘bananas nefertiti’. The “na” subexpression does match
in the first word, but it doesn’t match in the second word because the
other alternative is used there. Once again, the second repetition of
the outer subexpression overrides the first, and within that second
repetition, the “na” subexpression is not used. So regexec
reports nonuse of the “na” subexpression.
Previous: Complications in Subexpression Matching, Up: Regular Expression Matching [Contents][Index]
When you are finished using a compiled regular expression, you can
free the storage it uses by calling regfree
.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Unsafe heap | AC-Unsafe mem | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
Calling regfree
frees all the storage that *compiled
points to. This includes various internal fields of the regex_t
structure that aren’t documented in this manual.
regfree
does not free the object *compiled
itself.
You should always free the space in a regex_t
structure with
regfree
before using the structure to compile another regular
expression.
When regcomp
or regexec
reports an error, you can use
the function regerror
to turn it into an error message string.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe env | AS-Unsafe corrupt heap lock dlopen | AC-Unsafe corrupt lock fd mem | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This function produces an error message string for the error code
errcode, and stores the string in length bytes of memory
starting at buffer. For the compiled argument, supply the
same compiled regular expression structure that regcomp
or
regexec
was working with when it got the error. Alternatively,
you can supply NULL
for compiled; you will still get a
meaningful error message, but it might not be as detailed.
If the error message can’t fit in length bytes (including a
terminating null character), then regerror
truncates it.
The string that regerror
stores is always null-terminated
even if it has been truncated.
The return value of regerror
is the minimum length needed to
store the entire error message. If this is less than length, then
the error message was not truncated, and you can use it. Otherwise, you
should call regerror
again with a larger buffer.
Here is a function which uses regerror
, but always dynamically
allocates a buffer for the error message:
char *get_regerror (int errcode, regex_t *compiled) { size_t length = regerror (errcode, compiled, NULL, 0); char *buffer = xmalloc (length); (void) regerror (errcode, compiled, buffer, length); return buffer; }
Previous: Regular Expression Matching, Up: Pattern Matching [Contents][Index]
Word expansion means the process of splitting a string into words and substituting for variables, commands, and wildcards just as the shell does.
For example, when you write ‘ls -l foo.c’, this string is split into three separate words—‘ls’, ‘-l’ and ‘foo.c’. This is the most basic function of word expansion.
When you write ‘ls *.c’, this can become many words, because the word ‘*.c’ can be replaced with any number of file names. This is called wildcard expansion, and it is also a part of word expansion.
When you use ‘echo $PATH’ to print your path, you are taking advantage of variable substitution, which is also part of word expansion.
Ordinary programs can perform word expansion just like the shell by
calling the library function wordexp
.
wordexp
wordexp
Example
Next: Calling wordexp
, Up: Shell-Style Word Expansion [Contents][Index]
When word expansion is applied to a sequence of words, it performs the following transformations in the order shown here:
For the details of these transformations, and how to write the constructs that use them, see The BASH Manual (to appear).
Next: Flags for Word Expansion, Previous: The Stages of Word Expansion, Up: Shell-Style Word Expansion [Contents][Index]
wordexp
All the functions, constants and data types for word expansion are declared in the header file wordexp.h.
Word expansion produces a vector of words (strings). To return this
vector, wordexp
uses a special data type, wordexp_t
, which
is a structure. You pass wordexp
the address of the structure,
and it fills in the structure’s fields to tell you about the results.
This data type holds a pointer to a word vector. More precisely, it records both the address of the word vector and its size.
we_wordc
The number of elements in the vector.
we_wordv
The address of the vector. This field has type char **
.
we_offs
The offset of the first real element of the vector, from its nominal
address in the we_wordv
field. Unlike the other fields, this
is always an input to wordexp
, rather than an output from it.
If you use a nonzero offset, then that many elements at the beginning of
the vector are left empty. (The wordexp
function fills them with
null pointers.)
The we_offs
field is meaningful only if you use the
WRDE_DOOFFS
flag. Otherwise, the offset is always zero
regardless of what is in this field, and the first real element comes at
the beginning of the vector.
Preliminary: | MT-Unsafe race:utent const:env env sig:ALRM timer locale | AS-Unsafe dlopen plugin i18n heap corrupt lock | AC-Unsafe corrupt lock fd mem | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
Perform word expansion on the string words, putting the result in
a newly allocated vector, and store the size and address of this vector
into *word-vector-ptr
. The argument flags is a
combination of bit flags; see Flags for Word Expansion, for details of
the flags.
You shouldn’t use any of the characters ‘|&;<>’ in the string
words unless they are quoted; likewise for newline. If you use
these characters unquoted, you will get the WRDE_BADCHAR
error
code. Don’t use parentheses or braces unless they are quoted or part of
a word expansion construct. If you use quotation characters ‘'"`’,
they should come in pairs that balance.
The results of word expansion are a sequence of words. The function
wordexp
allocates a string for each resulting word, then
allocates a vector of type char **
to store the addresses of
these strings. The last element of the vector is a null pointer.
This vector is called the word vector.
To return this vector, wordexp
stores both its address and its
length (number of elements, not counting the terminating null pointer)
into *word-vector-ptr
.
If wordexp
succeeds, it returns 0. Otherwise, it returns one
of these error codes:
WRDE_BADCHAR
¶The input string words contains an unquoted invalid character such as ‘|’.
WRDE_BADVAL
¶The input string refers to an undefined shell variable, and you used the flag
WRDE_UNDEF
to forbid such references.
WRDE_CMDSUB
¶The input string uses command substitution, and you used the flag
WRDE_NOCMD
to forbid command substitution.
WRDE_NOSPACE
¶It was impossible to allocate memory to hold the result. In this case,
wordexp
can store part of the results—as much as it could
allocate room for.
WRDE_SYNTAX
¶There was a syntax error in the input string. For example, an unmatched quoting character is a syntax error. This error code is also used to signal division by zero and overflow in arithmetic expansion.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Unsafe corrupt heap | AC-Unsafe corrupt mem | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
Free the storage used for the word-strings and vector that
*word-vector-ptr
points to. This does not free the
structure *word-vector-ptr
itself—only the other
data it points to.
Next: wordexp
Example, Previous: Calling wordexp
, Up: Shell-Style Word Expansion [Contents][Index]
This section describes the flags that you can specify in the
flags argument to wordexp
. Choose the flags you want,
and combine them with the C operator |
.
WRDE_APPEND
¶Append the words from this expansion to the vector of words produced by
previous calls to wordexp
. This way you can effectively expand
several words as if they were concatenated with spaces between them.
In order for appending to work, you must not modify the contents of the
word vector structure between calls to wordexp
. And, if you set
WRDE_DOOFFS
in the first call to wordexp
, you must also
set it when you append to the results.
WRDE_DOOFFS
¶Leave blank slots at the beginning of the vector of words.
The we_offs
field says how many slots to leave.
The blank slots contain null pointers.
WRDE_NOCMD
¶Don’t do command substitution; if the input requests command substitution, report an error.
WRDE_REUSE
¶Reuse a word vector made by a previous call to wordexp
.
Instead of allocating a new vector of words, this call to wordexp
will use the vector that already exists (making it larger if necessary).
Note that the vector may move, so it is not safe to save an old pointer
and use it again after calling wordexp
. You must fetch
we_pathv
anew after each call.
WRDE_SHOWERR
¶Do show any error messages printed by commands run by command substitution.
More precisely, allow these commands to inherit the standard error output
stream of the current process. By default, wordexp
gives these
commands a standard error stream that discards all output.
WRDE_UNDEF
¶If the input refers to a shell variable that is not defined, report an error.
Next: Details of Tilde Expansion, Previous: Flags for Word Expansion, Up: Shell-Style Word Expansion [Contents][Index]
wordexp
ExampleHere is an example of using wordexp
to expand several strings
and use the results to run a shell command. It also shows the use of
WRDE_APPEND
to concatenate the expansions and of wordfree
to free the space allocated by wordexp
.
int
expand_and_execute (const char *program, const char **options)
{
wordexp_t result;
pid_t pid
int status, i;
/* Expand the string for the program to run. */
switch (wordexp (program, &result, 0))
{
case 0: /* Successful. */
break;
case WRDE_NOSPACE:
/* If the error was WRDE_NOSPACE
,
then perhaps part of the result was allocated. */
wordfree (&result);
default: /* Some other error. */
return -1;
}
/* Expand the strings specified for the arguments. */
for (i = 0; options[i] != NULL; i++)
{
if (wordexp (options[i], &result, WRDE_APPEND))
{
wordfree (&result);
return -1;
}
}
pid = fork ();
if (pid == 0)
{
/* This is the child process. Execute the command. */
execv (result.we_wordv[0], result.we_wordv);
exit (EXIT_FAILURE);
}
else if (pid < 0)
/* The fork failed. Report failure. */
status = -1;
else
/* This is the parent process. Wait for the child to complete. */
if (waitpid (pid, &status, 0) != pid)
status = -1;
wordfree (&result);
return status;
}
Next: Details of Variable Substitution, Previous: wordexp
Example, Up: Shell-Style Word Expansion [Contents][Index]
It’s a standard part of shell syntax that you can use ‘~’ at the beginning of a file name to stand for your own home directory. You can use ‘~user’ to stand for user’s home directory.
Tilde expansion is the process of converting these abbreviations to the directory names that they stand for.
Tilde expansion applies to the ‘~’ plus all following characters up to whitespace or a slash. It takes place only at the beginning of a word, and only if none of the characters to be transformed is quoted in any way.
Plain ‘~’ uses the value of the environment variable HOME
as the proper home directory name. ‘~’ followed by a user name
uses getpwname
to look up that user in the user database, and
uses whatever directory is recorded there. Thus, ‘~’ followed
by your own name can give different results from plain ‘~’, if
the value of HOME
is not really your home directory.
Previous: Details of Tilde Expansion, Up: Shell-Style Word Expansion [Contents][Index]
Part of ordinary shell syntax is the use of ‘$variable’ to substitute the value of a shell variable into a command. This is called variable substitution, and it is one part of doing word expansion.
There are two basic ways you can write a variable reference for substitution:
${variable}
If you write braces around the variable name, then it is completely unambiguous where the variable name ends. You can concatenate additional letters onto the end of the variable value by writing them immediately after the close brace. For example, ‘${foo}s’ expands into ‘tractors’.
$variable
If you do not put braces around the variable name, then the variable
name consists of all the alphanumeric characters and underscores that
follow the ‘$’. The next punctuation character ends the variable
name. Thus, ‘$foo-bar’ refers to the variable foo
and expands
into ‘tractor-bar’.
When you use braces, you can also use various constructs to modify the value that is substituted, or test it in various ways.
${variable:-default}
Substitute the value of variable, but if that is empty or undefined, use default instead.
${variable:=default}
Substitute the value of variable, but if that is empty or undefined, use default instead and set the variable to default.
${variable:?message}
If variable is defined and not empty, substitute its value.
Otherwise, print message as an error message on the standard error stream, and consider word expansion a failure.
${variable:+replacement}
Substitute replacement, but only if variable is defined and nonempty. Otherwise, substitute nothing for this construct.
${#variable}
Substitute a numeral which expresses in base ten the number of characters in the value of variable. ‘${#foo}’ stands for ‘7’, because ‘tractor’ is seven characters.
These variants of variable substitution let you remove part of the variable’s value before substituting it. The prefix and suffix are not mere strings; they are wildcard patterns, just like the patterns that you use to match multiple file names. But in this context, they match against parts of the variable value rather than against file names.
${variable%%suffix}
Substitute the value of variable, but first discard from that variable any portion at the end that matches the pattern suffix.
If there is more than one alternative for how to match against suffix, this construct uses the longest possible match.
Thus, ‘${foo%%r*}’ substitutes ‘t’, because the largest match for ‘r*’ at the end of ‘tractor’ is ‘ractor’.
${variable%suffix}
Substitute the value of variable, but first discard from that variable any portion at the end that matches the pattern suffix.
If there is more than one alternative for how to match against suffix, this construct uses the shortest possible alternative.
Thus, ‘${foo%r*}’ substitutes ‘tracto’, because the shortest match for ‘r*’ at the end of ‘tractor’ is just ‘r’.
${variable##prefix}
Substitute the value of variable, but first discard from that variable any portion at the beginning that matches the pattern prefix.
If there is more than one alternative for how to match against prefix, this construct uses the longest possible match.
Thus, ‘${foo##*t}’ substitutes ‘or’, because the largest match for ‘*t’ at the beginning of ‘tractor’ is ‘tract’.
${variable#prefix}
Substitute the value of variable, but first discard from that variable any portion at the beginning that matches the pattern prefix.
If there is more than one alternative for how to match against prefix, this construct uses the shortest possible alternative.
Thus, ‘${foo#*t}’ substitutes ‘ractor’, because the shortest match for ‘*t’ at the beginning of ‘tractor’ is just ‘t’.
Next: Input/Output on Streams, Previous: Pattern Matching, Up: Main Menu [Contents][Index]
Most programs need to do either input (reading data) or output (writing data), or most frequently both, in order to do anything useful. The GNU C Library provides such a large selection of input and output functions that the hardest part is often deciding which function is most appropriate!
This chapter introduces concepts and terminology relating to input and output. Other chapters relating to the GNU I/O facilities are:
Next: File Names, Up: Input/Output Overview [Contents][Index]
Before you can read or write the contents of a file, you must establish a connection or communications channel to the file. This process is called opening the file. You can open a file for reading, writing, or both.
The connection to an open file is represented either as a stream or as a file descriptor. You pass this as an argument to the functions that do the actual read or write operations, to tell them which file to operate on. Certain functions expect streams, and others are designed to operate on file descriptors.
When you have finished reading to or writing from the file, you can terminate the connection by closing the file. Once you have closed a stream or file descriptor, you cannot do any more input or output operations on it.
Next: File Position, Up: Input/Output Concepts [Contents][Index]
When you want to do input or output to a file, you have a choice of two
basic mechanisms for representing the connection between your program
and the file: file descriptors and streams. File descriptors are
represented as objects of type int
, while streams are represented
as FILE *
objects.
File descriptors provide a primitive, low-level interface to input and output operations. Both file descriptors and streams can represent a connection to a device (such as a terminal), or a pipe or socket for communicating with another process, as well as a normal file. But, if you want to do control operations that are specific to a particular kind of device, you must use a file descriptor; there are no facilities to use streams in this way. You must also use file descriptors if your program needs to do input or output in special modes, such as nonblocking (or polled) input (see File Status Flags).
Streams provide a higher-level interface, layered on top of the primitive file descriptor facilities. The stream interface treats all kinds of files pretty much alike—the sole exception being the three styles of buffering that you can choose (see Stream Buffering).
The main advantage of using the stream interface is that the set of
functions for performing actual input and output operations (as opposed
to control operations) on streams is much richer and more powerful than
the corresponding facilities for file descriptors. The file descriptor
interface provides only simple functions for transferring blocks of
characters, but the stream interface also provides powerful formatted
input and output functions (printf
and scanf
) as well as
functions for character- and line-oriented input and output.
Since streams are implemented in terms of file descriptors, you can extract the file descriptor from a stream and perform low-level operations directly on the file descriptor. You can also initially open a connection as a file descriptor and then make a stream associated with that file descriptor.
In general, you should stick with using streams rather than file descriptors, unless there is some specific operation you want to do that can only be done on a file descriptor. If you are a beginning programmer and aren’t sure what functions to use, we suggest that you concentrate on the formatted input functions (see Formatted Input) and formatted output functions (see Formatted Output).
If you are concerned about portability of your programs to systems other than GNU, you should also be aware that file descriptors are not as portable as streams. You can expect any system running ISO C to support streams, but non-GNU systems may not support file descriptors at all, or may only implement a subset of the GNU functions that operate on file descriptors. Most of the file descriptor functions in the GNU C Library are included in the POSIX.1 standard, however.
Previous: Streams and File Descriptors, Up: Input/Output Concepts [Contents][Index]
One of the attributes of an open file is its file position that keeps track of where in the file the next character is to be read or written. On GNU systems, and all POSIX.1 systems, the file position is simply an integer representing the number of bytes from the beginning of the file.
The file position is normally set to the beginning of the file when it is opened, and each time a character is read or written, the file position is incremented. In other words, access to the file is normally sequential.
Ordinary files permit read or write operations at any position within
the file. Some other kinds of files may also permit this. Files which
do permit this are sometimes referred to as random-access files.
You can change the file position using the fseek
function on a
stream (see File Positioning) or the lseek
function on a file
descriptor (see Input and Output Primitives). If you try to change the file
position on a file that doesn’t support random access, you get the
ESPIPE
error.
Streams and descriptors that are opened for append access are treated specially for output: output to such files is always appended sequentially to the end of the file, regardless of the file position. However, the file position is still used to control where in the file reading is done.
If you think about it, you’ll realize that several programs can read a given file at the same time. In order for each program to be able to read the file at its own pace, each program must have its own file pointer, which is not affected by anything the other programs do.
In fact, each opening of a file creates a separate file position. Thus, if you open a file twice even in the same program, you get two streams or descriptors with independent file positions.
By contrast, if you open a descriptor and then duplicate it to get another descriptor, these two descriptors share the same file position: changing the file position of one descriptor will affect the other.
Previous: Input/Output Concepts, Up: Input/Output Overview [Contents][Index]
In order to open a connection to a file, or to perform other operations such as deleting a file, you need some way to refer to the file. Nearly all files have names that are strings—even files which are actually devices such as tape drives or terminals. These strings are called file names. You specify the file name to say which file you want to open or operate on.
This section describes the conventions for file names and how the operating system works with them.
Next: File Name Resolution, Up: File Names [Contents][Index]
In order to understand the syntax of file names, you need to understand how the file system is organized into a hierarchy of directories.
A directory is a file that contains information to associate other files with names; these associations are called links or directory entries. Sometimes, people speak of “files in a directory”, but in reality, a directory only contains pointers to files, not the files themselves.
The name of a file contained in a directory entry is called a file name component. In general, a file name consists of a sequence of one or more such components, separated by the slash character (‘/’). A file name which is just one component names a file with respect to its directory. A file name with multiple components names a directory, and then a file in that directory, and so on.
Some other documents, such as the POSIX standard, use the term
pathname for what we call a file name, and either filename
or pathname component for what this manual calls a file name
component. We don’t use this terminology because a “path” is
something completely different (a list of directories to search), and we
think that “pathname” used for something else will confuse users. We
always use “file name” and “file name component” (or sometimes just
“component”, where the context is obvious) in GNU documentation. Some
macros use the POSIX terminology in their names, such as
PATH_MAX
. These macros are defined by the POSIX standard, so we
cannot change their names.
You can find more detailed information about operations on directories in File System Interface.
Next: File Name Errors, Previous: Directories, Up: File Names [Contents][Index]
A file name consists of file name components separated by slash (‘/’) characters. On the systems that the GNU C Library supports, multiple successive ‘/’ characters are equivalent to a single ‘/’ character.
The process of determining what file a file name refers to is called file name resolution. This is performed by examining the components that make up a file name in left-to-right order, and locating each successive component in the directory named by the previous component. Of course, each of the files that are referenced as directories must actually exist, be directories instead of regular files, and have the appropriate permissions to be accessible by the process; otherwise the file name resolution fails.
If a file name begins with a ‘/’, the first component in the file name is located in the root directory of the process (usually all processes on the system have the same root directory). Such a file name is called an absolute file name.
Otherwise, the first component in the file name is located in the current working directory (see Working Directory). This kind of file name is called a relative file name.
The file name components . (“dot”) and .. (“dot-dot”) have special meanings. Every directory has entries for these file name components. The file name component . refers to the directory itself, while the file name component .. refers to its parent directory (the directory that contains the link for the directory in question). As a special case, .. in the root directory refers to the root directory itself, since it has no parent; thus /.. is the same as /.
Here are some examples of file names:
The file named a, in the root directory.
The file named b, in the directory named a in the root directory.
The file named a, in the current working directory.
This is the same as /a/b.
The file named a, in the current working directory.
The file named a, in the parent directory of the current working directory.
A file name that names a directory may optionally end in a ‘/’. You can specify a file name of / to refer to the root directory, but the empty string is not a meaningful file name. If you want to refer to the current working directory, use a file name of . or ./.
Unlike some other operating systems, GNU systems don’t have any built-in support for file types (or extensions) or file versions as part of its file name syntax. Many programs and utilities use conventions for file names—for example, files containing C source code usually have names suffixed with ‘.c’—but there is nothing in the file system itself that enforces this kind of convention.
Next: Portability of File Names, Previous: File Name Resolution, Up: File Names [Contents][Index]
Functions that accept file name arguments usually detect these
errno
error conditions relating to the file name syntax or
trouble finding the named file. These errors are referred to throughout
this manual as the usual file name errors.
EACCES
The process does not have search permission for a directory component of the file name.
ENAMETOOLONG
This error is used when either the total length of a file name is
greater than PATH_MAX
, or when an individual file name component
has a length greater than NAME_MAX
. See Limits on File System Capacity.
On GNU/Hurd systems, there is no imposed limit on overall file name length, but some file systems may place limits on the length of a component.
ENOENT
This error is reported when a file referenced as a directory component in the file name doesn’t exist, or when a component is a symbolic link whose target file does not exist. See Symbolic Links.
ENOTDIR
A file that is referenced as a directory component in the file name exists, but it isn’t a directory.
ELOOP
Too many symbolic links were resolved while trying to look up the file name. The system has an arbitrary limit on the number of symbolic links that may be resolved in looking up a single file name, as a primitive way to detect loops. See Symbolic Links.
Previous: File Name Errors, Up: File Names [Contents][Index]
The rules for the syntax of file names discussed in File Names, are the rules normally used by GNU systems and by other POSIX systems. However, other operating systems may use other conventions.
There are two reasons why it can be important for you to be aware of file name portability issues:
The ISO C standard says very little about file name syntax, only that file names are strings. In addition to varying restrictions on the length of file names and what characters can validly appear in a file name, different operating systems use different conventions and syntax for concepts such as structured directories and file types or extensions. Some concepts such as file versions might be supported in some operating systems and not by others.
The POSIX.1 standard allows implementations to put additional restrictions on file name syntax, concerning what characters are permitted in file names and on the length of file name and file name component strings. However, on GNU systems, any character except the null character is permitted in a file name string, and on GNU/Hurd systems there are no limits on the length of file name strings.
Next: Low-Level Input/Output, Previous: Input/Output Overview, Up: Main Menu [Contents][Index]
This chapter describes the functions for creating streams and performing input and output operations on them. As discussed in Input/Output Overview, a stream is a fairly abstract, high-level concept representing a communications channel to a file, device, or process.
printf
Next: Standard Streams, Up: Input/Output on Streams [Contents][Index]
For historical reasons, the type of the C data structure that represents
a stream is called FILE
rather than “stream”. Since most of
the library functions deal with objects of type FILE *
, sometimes
the term file pointer is also used to mean “stream”. This leads
to unfortunate confusion over terminology in many books on C. This
manual, however, is careful to use the terms “file” and “stream”
only in the technical sense.
The FILE
type is declared in the header file stdio.h.
This is the data type used to represent stream objects. A FILE
object holds all of the internal state information about the connection
to the associated file, including such things as the file position
indicator and buffering information. Each stream also has error and
end-of-file status indicators that can be tested with the ferror
and feof
functions; see End-Of-File and Errors.
FILE
objects are allocated and managed internally by the
input/output library functions. Don’t try to create your own objects of
type FILE
; let the library do it. Your programs should
deal only with pointers to these objects (that is, FILE *
values)
rather than the objects themselves.
Next: Opening Streams, Previous: Streams, Up: Input/Output on Streams [Contents][Index]
When the main
function of your program is invoked, it already has
three predefined streams open and available for use. These represent
the “standard” input and output channels that have been established
for the process.
These streams are declared in the header file stdio.h.
The standard input stream, which is the normal source of input for the program.
The standard output stream, which is used for normal output from the program.
The standard error stream, which is used for error messages and diagnostics issued by the program.
On GNU systems, you can specify what files or processes correspond to these streams using the pipe and redirection facilities provided by the shell. (The primitives shells use to implement these facilities are described in File System Interface.) Most other operating systems provide similar mechanisms, but the details of how to use them can vary.
In the GNU C Library, stdin
, stdout
, and stderr
are
normal variables which you can set just like any others. For example,
to redirect the standard output to a file, you could do:
fclose (stdout); stdout = fopen ("standard-output-file", "w");
Note however, that in other systems stdin
, stdout
, and
stderr
are macros that you cannot assign to in the normal way.
But you can use freopen
to get the effect of closing one and
reopening it. See Opening Streams.
The three streams stdin
, stdout
, and stderr
are not
unoriented at program start (see Streams in Internationalized Applications).
Next: Closing Streams, Previous: Standard Streams, Up: Input/Output on Streams [Contents][Index]
Opening a file with the fopen
function creates a new stream and
establishes a connection between the stream and a file. This may
involve creating a new file.
Everything described in this section is declared in the header file stdio.h.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Unsafe heap lock | AC-Unsafe mem fd lock | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The fopen
function opens a stream for I/O to the file
filename, and returns a pointer to the stream.
The opentype argument is a string that controls how the file is opened and specifies attributes of the resulting stream. It must begin with one of the following sequences of characters:
Open an existing file for reading only.
Open the file for writing only. If the file already exists, it is truncated to zero length. Otherwise a new file is created.
Open a file for append access; that is, writing at the end of file only. If the file already exists, its initial contents are unchanged and output to the stream is appended to the end of the file. Otherwise, a new, empty file is created.
Open an existing file for both reading and writing. The initial contents of the file are unchanged and the initial file position is at the beginning of the file.
Open a file for both reading and writing. If the file already exists, it is truncated to zero length. Otherwise, a new file is created.
Open or create file for both reading and appending. If the file exists, its initial contents are unchanged. Otherwise, a new file is created. The initial file position for reading is at the beginning of the file, but output is always appended to the end of the file.
As you can see, ‘+’ requests a stream that can do both input and
output. When using such a stream, you must call fflush
(see Stream Buffering) or a file positioning function such as
fseek
(see File Positioning) when switching from reading
to writing or vice versa. Otherwise, internal buffers might not be
emptied properly.
Additional characters may appear after these to specify flags for the call. Always put the mode (‘r’, ‘w+’, etc.) first; that is the only part you are guaranteed will be understood by all systems.
The GNU C Library defines additional characters for use in opentype:
The file is opened with cancellation in the I/O functions disabled.
The underlying file descriptor will be closed if you use any of the
exec…
functions (see Executing a File). (This is
equivalent to having set FD_CLOEXEC
on that descriptor.
See File Descriptor Flags.)
The file is opened and accessed using mmap
. This is only
supported with files opened for reading.
Insist on creating a new file—if a file filename already
exists, fopen
fails rather than opening it. If you use
‘x’ you are guaranteed that you will not clobber an existing
file. This is equivalent to the O_EXCL
option to the
open
function (see Opening and Closing Files).
The ‘x’ modifier is part of ISO C11, which says the file is
created with exclusive access; in the GNU C Library this means the
equivalent of O_EXCL
.
The character ‘b’ in opentype has a standard meaning; it requests a binary stream rather than a text stream. But this makes no difference in POSIX systems (including GNU systems). If both ‘+’ and ‘b’ are specified, they can appear in either order. See Text and Binary Streams.
If the opentype string contains the sequence
,ccs=STRING
then STRING is taken as the name of a
coded character set and fopen
will mark the stream as
wide-oriented with appropriate conversion functions in place to convert
from and to the character set STRING. Any other stream
is opened initially unoriented and the orientation is decided with the
first file operation. If the first operation is a wide character
operation, the stream is not only marked as wide-oriented, also the
conversion functions to convert to the coded character set used for the
current locale are loaded. This will not change anymore from this point
on even if the locale selected for the LC_CTYPE
category is
changed.
Any other characters in opentype are simply ignored. They may be meaningful in other systems.
If the open fails, fopen
returns a null pointer.
When the sources are compiled with _FILE_OFFSET_BITS == 64
on a
32 bit machine this function is in fact fopen64
since the LFS
interface replaces transparently the old interface.
You can have multiple streams (or file descriptors) pointing to the same file open at the same time. If you do only input, this works straightforwardly, but you must be careful if any output streams are included. See Dangers of Mixing Streams and Descriptors. This is equally true whether the streams are in one program (not usual) or in several programs (which can easily happen). It may be advantageous to use the file locking facilities to avoid simultaneous access. See File Locks.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Unsafe heap lock | AC-Unsafe mem fd lock | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This function is similar to fopen
but the stream it returns a
pointer for is opened using open64
. Therefore this stream can be
used even on files larger than 2^31 bytes on 32 bit machines.
Please note that the return type is still FILE *
. There is no
special FILE
type for the LFS interface.
If the sources are compiled with _FILE_OFFSET_BITS == 64
on a 32
bits machine this function is available under the name fopen
and so transparently replaces the old interface.
The value of this macro is an integer constant expression that
represents the minimum number of streams that the implementation
guarantees can be open simultaneously. You might be able to open more
than this many streams, but that is not guaranteed. The value of this
constant is at least eight, which includes the three standard streams
stdin
, stdout
, and stderr
. In POSIX.1 systems this
value is determined by the OPEN_MAX
parameter; see General Capacity Limits. In BSD and GNU, it is controlled by the RLIMIT_NOFILE
resource limit; see Limiting Resource Usage.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Unsafe corrupt | AC-Unsafe corrupt fd | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This function is like a combination of fclose
and fopen
.
It first closes the stream referred to by stream, ignoring any
errors that are detected in the process. (Because errors are ignored,
you should not use freopen
on an output stream if you have
actually done any output using the stream.) Then the file named by
filename is opened with mode opentype as for fopen
,
and associated with the same stream object stream.
If the operation fails, a null pointer is returned; otherwise,
freopen
returns stream. On Linux, freopen
may also
fail and set errno
to EBUSY
when the kernel structure for
the old file descriptor was not initialized completely before freopen
was called. This can only happen in multi-threaded programs, when two
threads race to allocate the same file descriptor number. To avoid the
possibility of this race, do not use close
to close the underlying
file descriptor for a FILE
; either use freopen
while the
file is still open, or use open
and then dup2
to install
the new file descriptor.
freopen
has traditionally been used to connect a standard stream
such as stdin
with a file of your own choice. This is useful in
programs in which use of a standard stream for certain purposes is
hard-coded. In the GNU C Library, you can simply close the standard
streams and open new ones with fopen
. But other systems lack
this ability, so using freopen
is more portable.
When the sources are compiled with _FILE_OFFSET_BITS == 64
on a
32 bit machine this function is in fact freopen64
since the LFS
interface replaces transparently the old interface.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Unsafe corrupt | AC-Unsafe corrupt fd | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This function is similar to freopen
. The only difference is that
on 32 bit machine the stream returned is able to read beyond the
2^31 bytes limits imposed by the normal interface. It should be
noted that the stream pointed to by stream need not be opened
using fopen64
or freopen64
since its mode is not important
for this function.
If the sources are compiled with _FILE_OFFSET_BITS == 64
on a 32
bits machine this function is available under the name freopen
and so transparently replaces the old interface.
In some situations it is useful to know whether a given stream is available for reading or writing. This information is normally not available and would have to be remembered separately. Solaris introduced a few functions to get this information from the stream descriptor and these functions are also available in the GNU C Library.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The __freadable
function determines whether the stream
stream was opened to allow reading. In this case the return value
is nonzero. For write-only streams the function returns zero.
This function is declared in stdio_ext.h.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The __fwritable
function determines whether the stream
stream was opened to allow writing. In this case the return value
is nonzero. For read-only streams the function returns zero.
This function is declared in stdio_ext.h.
For slightly different kinds of problems there are two more functions. They provide even finer-grained information.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The __freading
function determines whether the stream
stream was last read from or whether it is opened read-only. In
this case the return value is nonzero, otherwise it is zero.
Determining whether a stream opened for reading and writing was last
used for writing allows to draw conclusions about the content about the
buffer, among other things.
This function is declared in stdio_ext.h.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The __fwriting
function determines whether the stream
stream was last written to or whether it is opened write-only. In
this case the return value is nonzero, otherwise it is zero.
This function is declared in stdio_ext.h.
Next: Streams and Threads, Previous: Opening Streams, Up: Input/Output on Streams [Contents][Index]
When a stream is closed with fclose
, the connection between the
stream and the file is canceled. After you have closed a stream, you
cannot perform any additional operations on it.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Unsafe heap lock | AC-Unsafe lock mem fd | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This function causes stream to be closed and the connection to
the corresponding file to be broken. Any buffered output is written
and any buffered input is discarded. The fclose
function returns
a value of 0
if the file was closed successfully, and EOF
if an error was detected.
It is important to check for errors when you call fclose
to close
an output stream, because real, everyday errors can be detected at this
time. For example, when fclose
writes the remaining buffered
output, it might get an error because the disk is full. Even if you
know the buffer is empty, errors can still occur when closing a file if
you are using NFS.
The function fclose
is declared in stdio.h.
To close all streams currently available the GNU C Library provides another function.
Preliminary: | MT-Unsafe race:streams | AS-Unsafe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This function causes all open streams of the process to be closed and
the connections to corresponding files to be broken. All buffered data
is written and any buffered input is discarded. The fcloseall
function returns a value of 0
if all the files were closed
successfully, and EOF
if an error was detected.
This function should be used only in special situations, e.g., when an error occurred and the program must be aborted. Normally each single stream should be closed separately so that problems with individual streams can be identified. It is also problematic since the standard streams (see Standard Streams) will also be closed.
The function fcloseall
is declared in stdio.h.
If the main
function to your program returns, or if you call the
exit
function (see Normal Termination), all open streams are
automatically closed properly. If your program terminates in any other
manner, such as by calling the abort
function (see Aborting a Program) or from a fatal signal (see Signal Handling), open streams
might not be closed properly. Buffered output might not be flushed and
files may be incomplete. For more information on buffering of streams,
see Stream Buffering.
Next: Streams in Internationalized Applications, Previous: Closing Streams, Up: Input/Output on Streams [Contents][Index]
Streams can be used in multi-threaded applications in the same way they are used in single-threaded applications. But the programmer must be aware of the possible complications. It is important to know about these also if the program one writes never use threads since the design and implementation of many stream functions are heavily influenced by the requirements added by multi-threaded programming.
The POSIX standard requires that by default the stream operations are atomic. I.e., issuing two stream operations for the same stream in two threads at the same time will cause the operations to be executed as if they were issued sequentially. The buffer operations performed while reading or writing are protected from other uses of the same stream. To do this each stream has an internal lock object which has to be (implicitly) acquired before any work can be done.
But there are situations where this is not enough and there are also situations where this is not wanted. The implicit locking is not enough if the program requires more than one stream function call to happen atomically. One example would be if an output line a program wants to generate is created by several function calls. The functions by themselves would ensure only atomicity of their own operation, but not atomicity over all the function calls. For this it is necessary to perform the stream locking in the application code.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Unsafe lock | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The flockfile
function acquires the internal locking object
associated with the stream stream. This ensures that no other
thread can explicitly through flockfile
/ftrylockfile
or
implicitly through the call of a stream function lock the stream. The
thread will block until the lock is acquired. An explicit call to
funlockfile
has to be used to release the lock.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Unsafe lock | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The ftrylockfile
function tries to acquire the internal locking
object associated with the stream stream just like
flockfile
. But unlike flockfile
this function does not
block if the lock is not available. ftrylockfile
returns zero if
the lock was successfully acquired. Otherwise the stream is locked by
another thread.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Unsafe lock | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The funlockfile
function releases the internal locking object of
the stream stream. The stream must have been locked before by a
call to flockfile
or a successful call of ftrylockfile
.
The implicit locking performed by the stream operations do not count.
The funlockfile
function does not return an error status and the
behavior of a call for a stream which is not locked by the current
thread is undefined.
The following example shows how the functions above can be used to
generate an output line atomically even in multi-threaded applications
(yes, the same job could be done with one fprintf
call but it is
sometimes not possible):
FILE *fp; { … flockfile (fp); fputs ("This is test number ", fp); fprintf (fp, "%d\n", test); funlockfile (fp) }
Without the explicit locking it would be possible for another thread to
use the stream fp after the fputs
call returns and before
fprintf
was called with the result that the number does not
follow the word ‘number’.
From this description it might already be clear that the locking objects
in streams are no simple mutexes. Since locking the same stream twice
in the same thread is allowed the locking objects must be equivalent to
recursive mutexes. These mutexes keep track of the owner and the number
of times the lock is acquired. The same number of funlockfile
calls by the same threads is necessary to unlock the stream completely.
For instance:
void
foo (FILE *fp)
{
ftrylockfile (fp);
fputs ("in foo\n", fp);
/* This is very wrong!!! */
funlockfile (fp);
}
It is important here that the funlockfile
function is only called
if the ftrylockfile
function succeeded in locking the stream. It
is therefore always wrong to ignore the result of ftrylockfile
.
And it makes no sense since otherwise one would use flockfile
.
The result of code like that above is that either funlockfile
tries to free a stream that hasn’t been locked by the current thread or it
frees the stream prematurely. The code should look like this:
void foo (FILE *fp) { if (ftrylockfile (fp) == 0) { fputs ("in foo\n", fp); funlockfile (fp); } }
Now that we covered why it is necessary to have locking it is necessary to talk about situations when locking is unwanted and what can be done. The locking operations (explicit or implicit) don’t come for free. Even if a lock is not taken the cost is not zero. The operations which have to be performed require memory operations that are safe in multi-processor environments. With the many local caches involved in such systems this is quite costly. So it is best to avoid the locking completely if it is not needed – because the code in question is never used in a context where two or more threads may use a stream at a time. This can be determined most of the time for application code; for library code which can be used in many contexts one should default to be conservative and use locking.
There are two basic mechanisms to avoid locking. The first is to use
the _unlocked
variants of the stream operations. The POSIX
standard defines quite a few of those and the GNU C Library adds a few
more. These variants of the functions behave just like the functions
with the name without the suffix except that they do not lock the
stream. Using these functions is very desirable since they are
potentially much faster. This is not only because the locking
operation itself is avoided. More importantly, functions like
putc
and getc
are very simple and traditionally (before the
introduction of threads) were implemented as macros which are very fast
if the buffer is not empty. With the addition of locking requirements
these functions are no longer implemented as macros since they would
expand to too much code.
But these macros are still available with the same functionality under the new
names putc_unlocked
and getc_unlocked
. This possibly huge
difference of speed also suggests the use of the _unlocked
functions even if locking is required. The difference is that the
locking then has to be performed in the program:
void foo (FILE *fp, char *buf) { flockfile (fp); while (*buf != '/') putc_unlocked (*buf++, fp); funlockfile (fp); }
If in this example the putc
function would be used and the
explicit locking would be missing the putc
function would have to
acquire the lock in every call, potentially many times depending on when
the loop terminates. Writing it the way illustrated above allows the
putc_unlocked
macro to be used which means no locking and direct
manipulation of the buffer of the stream.
A second way to avoid locking is by using a non-standard function which was introduced in Solaris and is available in the GNU C Library as well.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe race:stream | AS-Unsafe lock | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The __fsetlocking
function can be used to select whether the
stream operations will implicitly acquire the locking object of the
stream stream. By default this is done but it can be disabled and
reinstated using this function. There are three values defined for the
type parameter.
FSETLOCKING_INTERNAL
¶The stream stream
will from now on use the default internal
locking. Every stream operation with exception of the _unlocked
variants will implicitly lock the stream.
FSETLOCKING_BYCALLER
¶After the __fsetlocking
function returns, the user is responsible
for locking the stream. None of the stream operations will implicitly
do this anymore until the state is set back to
FSETLOCKING_INTERNAL
.
FSETLOCKING_QUERY
¶__fsetlocking
only queries the current locking state of the
stream. The return value will be FSETLOCKING_INTERNAL
or
FSETLOCKING_BYCALLER
depending on the state.
The return value of __fsetlocking
is either
FSETLOCKING_INTERNAL
or FSETLOCKING_BYCALLER
depending on
the state of the stream before the call.
This function and the values for the type parameter are declared in stdio_ext.h.
This function is especially useful when program code has to be used
which is written without knowledge about the _unlocked
functions
(or if the programmer was too lazy to use them).
Next: Simple Output by Characters or Lines, Previous: Streams and Threads, Up: Input/Output on Streams [Contents][Index]
ISO C90 introduced the new type wchar_t
to allow handling
larger character sets. What was missing was a possibility to output
strings of wchar_t
directly. One had to convert them into
multibyte strings using mbstowcs
(there was no mbsrtowcs
yet) and then use the normal stream functions. While this is doable it
is very cumbersome since performing the conversions is not trivial and
greatly increases program complexity and size.
The Unix standard early on (I think in XPG4.2) introduced two additional
format specifiers for the printf
and scanf
families of
functions. Printing and reading of single wide characters was made
possible using the %C
specifier and wide character strings can be
handled with %S
. These modifiers behave just like %c
and
%s
only that they expect the corresponding argument to have the
wide character type and that the wide character and string are
transformed into/from multibyte strings before being used.
This was a beginning but it is still not good enough. Not always is it
desirable to use printf
and scanf
. The other, smaller and
faster functions cannot handle wide characters. Second, it is not
possible to have a format string for printf
and scanf
consisting of wide characters. The result is that format strings would
have to be generated if they have to contain non-basic characters.
In the Amendment 1 to ISO C90 a whole new set of functions was
added to solve the problem. Most of the stream functions got a
counterpart which take a wide character or wide character string instead
of a character or string respectively. The new functions operate on the
same streams (like stdout
). This is different from the model of
the C++ runtime library where separate streams for wide and normal I/O
are used.
Being able to use the same stream for wide and normal operations comes
with a restriction: a stream can be used either for wide operations or
for normal operations. Once it is decided there is no way back. Only a
call to freopen
or freopen64
can reset the
orientation. The orientation can be decided in three ways:
fread
and fwrite
functions) the stream is marked as not
wide oriented.
fwide
function can be used to set the orientation either way.
It is important to never mix the use of wide and not wide operations on
a stream. There are no diagnostics issued. The application behavior
will simply be strange or the application will simply crash. The
fwide
function can help avoid this.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Unsafe corrupt | AC-Unsafe lock | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The fwide
function can be used to set and query the state of the
orientation of the stream stream. If the mode parameter has
a positive value the streams get wide oriented, for negative values
narrow oriented. It is not possible to overwrite previous orientations
with fwide
. I.e., if the stream stream was already
oriented before the call nothing is done.
If mode is zero the current orientation state is queried and nothing is changed.
The fwide
function returns a negative value, zero, or a positive
value if the stream is narrow, not at all, or wide oriented
respectively.
This function was introduced in Amendment 1 to ISO C90 and is declared in wchar.h.
It is generally a good idea to orient a stream as early as possible.
This can prevent surprise especially for the standard streams
stdin
, stdout
, and stderr
. If some library
function in some situations uses one of these streams and this use
orients the stream in a different way the rest of the application
expects it one might end up with hard to reproduce errors. Remember
that no errors are signal if the streams are used incorrectly. Leaving
a stream unoriented after creation is normally only necessary for
library functions which create streams which can be used in different
contexts.
When writing code which uses streams and which can be used in different contexts it is important to query the orientation of the stream before using it (unless the rules of the library interface demand a specific orientation). The following little, silly function illustrates this.
void
print_f (FILE *fp)
{
if (fwide (fp, 0) > 0)
/* Positive return value means wide orientation. */
fputwc (L'f', fp);
else
fputc ('f', fp);
}
Note that in this case the function print_f
decides about the
orientation of the stream if it was unoriented before (will not happen
if the advice above is followed).
The encoding used for the wchar_t
values is unspecified and the
user must not make any assumptions about it. For I/O of wchar_t
values this means that it is impossible to write these values directly
to the stream. This is not what follows from the ISO C locale model
either. What happens instead is that the bytes read from or written to
the underlying media are first converted into the internal encoding
chosen by the implementation for wchar_t
. The external encoding
is determined by the LC_CTYPE
category of the current locale or
by the ‘ccs’ part of the mode specification given to fopen
,
fopen64
, freopen
, or freopen64
. How and when the
conversion happens is unspecified and it happens invisibly to the user.
Since a stream is created in the unoriented state it has at that point
no conversion associated with it. The conversion which will be used is
determined by the LC_CTYPE
category selected at the time the
stream is oriented. If the locales are changed at the runtime this
might produce surprising results unless one pays attention. This is
just another good reason to orient the stream explicitly as soon as
possible, perhaps with a call to fwide
.
Next: Character Input, Previous: Streams in Internationalized Applications, Up: Input/Output on Streams [Contents][Index]
This section describes functions for performing character- and line-oriented output.
These narrow stream functions are declared in the header file stdio.h and the wide stream functions in wchar.h.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Unsafe corrupt | AC-Unsafe corrupt lock | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The fputc
function converts the character c to type
unsigned char
, and writes it to the stream stream.
EOF
is returned if a write error occurs; otherwise the
character c is returned.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Unsafe corrupt | AC-Unsafe corrupt lock | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The fputwc
function writes the wide character wc to the
stream stream. WEOF
is returned if a write error occurs;
otherwise the character wc is returned.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe race:stream | AS-Unsafe corrupt | AC-Unsafe corrupt | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The fputc_unlocked
function is equivalent to the fputc
function except that it does not implicitly lock the stream.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe race:stream | AS-Unsafe corrupt | AC-Unsafe corrupt | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The fputwc_unlocked
function is equivalent to the fputwc
function except that it does not implicitly lock the stream.
This function is a GNU extension.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Unsafe corrupt | AC-Unsafe corrupt lock | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This is just like fputc
, except that most systems implement it as
a macro, making it faster. One consequence is that it may evaluate the
stream argument more than once, which is an exception to the
general rule for macros. putc
is usually the best function to
use for writing a single character.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Unsafe corrupt | AC-Unsafe corrupt lock | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This is just like fputwc
, except that it can be implement as
a macro, making it faster. One consequence is that it may evaluate the
stream argument more than once, which is an exception to the
general rule for macros. putwc
is usually the best function to
use for writing a single wide character.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe race:stream | AS-Unsafe corrupt | AC-Unsafe corrupt | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The putc_unlocked
function is equivalent to the putc
function except that it does not implicitly lock the stream.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe race:stream | AS-Unsafe corrupt | AC-Unsafe corrupt | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The putwc_unlocked
function is equivalent to the putwc
function except that it does not implicitly lock the stream.
This function is a GNU extension.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Unsafe corrupt | AC-Unsafe corrupt lock | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The putchar
function is equivalent to putc
with
stdout
as the value of the stream argument.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Unsafe corrupt | AC-Unsafe corrupt lock | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The putwchar
function is equivalent to putwc
with
stdout
as the value of the stream argument.
Preliminary: | MT-Unsafe race:stdout | AS-Unsafe corrupt | AC-Unsafe corrupt | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The putchar_unlocked
function is equivalent to the putchar
function except that it does not implicitly lock the stream.
Preliminary: | MT-Unsafe race:stdout | AS-Unsafe corrupt | AC-Unsafe corrupt | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The putwchar_unlocked
function is equivalent to the putwchar
function except that it does not implicitly lock the stream.
This function is a GNU extension.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Unsafe corrupt | AC-Unsafe corrupt lock | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The function fputs
writes the string s to the stream
stream. The terminating null character is not written.
This function does not add a newline character, either.
It outputs only the characters in the string.
This function returns EOF
if a write error occurs, and otherwise
a non-negative value.
For example:
fputs ("Are ", stdout); fputs ("you ", stdout); fputs ("hungry?\n", stdout);
outputs the text ‘Are you hungry?’ followed by a newline.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Unsafe corrupt | AC-Unsafe corrupt lock | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The function fputws
writes the wide character string ws to
the stream stream. The terminating null character is not written.
This function does not add a newline character, either. It
outputs only the characters in the string.
This function returns WEOF
if a write error occurs, and otherwise
a non-negative value.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe race:stream | AS-Unsafe corrupt | AC-Unsafe corrupt | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The fputs_unlocked
function is equivalent to the fputs
function except that it does not implicitly lock the stream.
This function is a GNU extension.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe race:stream | AS-Unsafe corrupt | AC-Unsafe corrupt | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The fputws_unlocked
function is equivalent to the fputws
function except that it does not implicitly lock the stream.
This function is a GNU extension.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Unsafe corrupt | AC-Unsafe lock corrupt | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The puts
function writes the string s to the stream
stdout
followed by a newline. The terminating null character of
the string is not written. (Note that fputs
does not
write a newline as this function does.)
puts
is the most convenient function for printing simple
messages. For example:
puts ("This is a message.");
outputs the text ‘This is a message.’ followed by a newline.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Unsafe corrupt | AC-Unsafe lock corrupt | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This function writes the word w (that is, an int
) to
stream. It is provided for compatibility with SVID, but we
recommend you use fwrite
instead (see Block Input/Output).
Next: Line-Oriented Input, Previous: Simple Output by Characters or Lines, Up: Input/Output on Streams [Contents][Index]
This section describes functions for performing character-oriented input. These narrow stream functions are declared in the header file stdio.h and the wide character functions are declared in wchar.h.
These functions return an int
or wint_t
value (for narrow
and wide stream functions respectively) that is either a character of
input, or the special value EOF
/WEOF
(usually -1). For
the narrow stream functions it is important to store the result of these
functions in a variable of type int
instead of char
, even
when you plan to use it only as a character. Storing EOF
in a
char
variable truncates its value to the size of a character, so
that it is no longer distinguishable from the valid character
‘(char) -1’. So always use an int
for the result of
getc
and friends, and check for EOF
after the call; once
you’ve verified that the result is not EOF
, you can be sure that
it will fit in a ‘char’ variable without loss of information.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Unsafe corrupt | AC-Unsafe lock corrupt | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This function reads the next character as an unsigned char
from
the stream stream and returns its value, converted to an
int
. If an end-of-file condition or read error occurs,
EOF
is returned instead.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Unsafe corrupt | AC-Unsafe lock corrupt | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This function reads the next wide character from the stream stream
and returns its value. If an end-of-file condition or read error
occurs, WEOF
is returned instead.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe race:stream | AS-Unsafe corrupt | AC-Unsafe corrupt | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The fgetc_unlocked
function is equivalent to the fgetc
function except that it does not implicitly lock the stream.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe race:stream | AS-Unsafe corrupt | AC-Unsafe corrupt | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The fgetwc_unlocked
function is equivalent to the fgetwc
function except that it does not implicitly lock the stream.
This function is a GNU extension.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Unsafe corrupt | AC-Unsafe lock corrupt | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This is just like fgetc
, except that it is permissible (and
typical) for it to be implemented as a macro that evaluates the
stream argument more than once. getc
is often highly
optimized, so it is usually the best function to use to read a single
character.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Unsafe corrupt | AC-Unsafe lock corrupt | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This is just like fgetwc
, except that it is permissible for it to
be implemented as a macro that evaluates the stream argument more
than once. getwc
can be highly optimized, so it is usually the
best function to use to read a single wide character.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe race:stream | AS-Unsafe corrupt | AC-Unsafe corrupt | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The getc_unlocked
function is equivalent to the getc
function except that it does not implicitly lock the stream.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe race:stream | AS-Unsafe corrupt | AC-Unsafe corrupt | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The getwc_unlocked
function is equivalent to the getwc
function except that it does not implicitly lock the stream.
This function is a GNU extension.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Unsafe corrupt | AC-Unsafe lock corrupt | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The getchar
function is equivalent to getc
with stdin
as the value of the stream argument.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Unsafe corrupt | AC-Unsafe lock corrupt | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The getwchar
function is equivalent to getwc
with stdin
as the value of the stream argument.
Preliminary: | MT-Unsafe race:stdin | AS-Unsafe corrupt | AC-Unsafe corrupt | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The getchar_unlocked
function is equivalent to the getchar
function except that it does not implicitly lock the stream.
Preliminary: | MT-Unsafe race:stdin | AS-Unsafe corrupt | AC-Unsafe corrupt | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The getwchar_unlocked
function is equivalent to the getwchar
function except that it does not implicitly lock the stream.
This function is a GNU extension.
Here is an example of a function that does input using fgetc
. It
would work just as well using getc
instead, or using
getchar ()
instead of fgetc (stdin)
. The code would
also work the same for the wide character stream functions.
int y_or_n_p (const char *question) { fputs (question, stdout); while (1) { int c, answer; /* Write a space to separate answer from question. */ fputc (' ', stdout); /* Read the first character of the line. This should be the answer character, but might not be. */ c = tolower (fgetc (stdin)); answer = c; /* Discard rest of input line. */ while (c != '\n' && c != EOF) c = fgetc (stdin); /* Obey the answer if it was valid. */ if (answer == 'y') return 1; if (answer == 'n') return 0; /* Answer was invalid: ask for valid answer. */ fputs ("Please answer y or n:", stdout); } }
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Unsafe corrupt | AC-Unsafe lock corrupt | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This function reads a word (that is, an int
) from stream.
It’s provided for compatibility with SVID. We recommend you use
fread
instead (see Block Input/Output). Unlike getc
,
any int
value could be a valid result. getw
returns
EOF
when it encounters end-of-file or an error, but there is no
way to distinguish this from an input word with value -1.
Next: Unreading, Previous: Character Input, Up: Input/Output on Streams [Contents][Index]
Since many programs interpret input on the basis of lines, it is convenient to have functions to read a line of text from a stream.
Standard C has functions to do this, but they aren’t very safe: null
characters and even (for gets
) long lines can confuse them. So
the GNU C Library provides the nonstandard getline
function that
makes it easy to read lines reliably.
Another GNU extension, getdelim
, generalizes getline
. It
reads a delimited record, defined as everything through the next
occurrence of a specified delimiter character.
All these functions are declared in stdio.h.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Unsafe corrupt heap | AC-Unsafe lock corrupt mem | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This function reads an entire line from stream, storing the text
(including the newline and a terminating null character) in a buffer
and storing the buffer address in *lineptr
.
Before calling getline
, you should place in *lineptr
the address of a buffer *n
bytes long, allocated with
malloc
. If this buffer is long enough to hold the line,
getline
stores the line in this buffer. Otherwise,
getline
makes the buffer bigger using realloc
, storing the
new buffer address back in *lineptr
and the increased size
back in *n
.
See Unconstrained Allocation.
If you set *lineptr
to a null pointer, and *n
to zero, before the call, then getline
allocates the initial
buffer for you by calling malloc
. This buffer remains allocated
even if getline
encounters errors and is unable to read any bytes.
In either case, when getline
returns, *lineptr
is
a char *
which points to the text of the line.
When getline
is successful, it returns the number of characters
read (including the newline, but not including the terminating null).
This value enables you to distinguish null characters that are part of
the line from the null character inserted as a terminator.
This function is a GNU extension, but it is the recommended way to read lines from a stream. The alternative standard functions are unreliable.
If an error occurs or end of file is reached without any bytes read,
getline
returns -1
.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Unsafe corrupt heap | AC-Unsafe lock corrupt mem | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This function is like getline
except that the character which
tells it to stop reading is not necessarily newline. The argument
delimiter specifies the delimiter character; getdelim
keeps
reading until it sees that character (or end of file).
The text is stored in lineptr, including the delimiter character
and a terminating null. Like getline
, getdelim
makes
lineptr bigger if it isn’t big enough.
getline
is in fact implemented in terms of getdelim
, just
like this:
ssize_t getline (char **lineptr, size_t *n, FILE *stream) { return getdelim (lineptr, n, '\n', stream); }
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Unsafe corrupt | AC-Unsafe lock corrupt | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The fgets
function reads characters from the stream stream
up to and including a newline character and stores them in the string
s, adding a null character to mark the end of the string. You
must supply count characters worth of space in s, but the
number of characters read is at most count - 1. The extra
character space is used to hold the null character at the end of the
string.
If the system is already at end of file when you call fgets
, then
the contents of the array s are unchanged and a null pointer is
returned. A null pointer is also returned if a read error occurs.
Otherwise, the return value is the pointer s.
Warning: If the input data has a null character, you can’t tell.
So don’t use fgets
unless you know the data cannot contain a null.
Don’t use it to read files edited by the user because, if the user inserts
a null character, you should either handle it properly or print a clear
error message. We recommend using getline
instead of fgets
.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Unsafe corrupt | AC-Unsafe lock corrupt | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The fgetws
function reads wide characters from the stream
stream up to and including a newline character and stores them in
the string ws, adding a null wide character to mark the end of the
string. You must supply count wide characters worth of space in
ws, but the number of characters read is at most count
- 1. The extra character space is used to hold the null wide
character at the end of the string.
If the system is already at end of file when you call fgetws
, then
the contents of the array ws are unchanged and a null pointer is
returned. A null pointer is also returned if a read error occurs.
Otherwise, the return value is the pointer ws.
Warning: If the input data has a null wide character (which are
null bytes in the input stream), you can’t tell. So don’t use
fgetws
unless you know the data cannot contain a null. Don’t use
it to read files edited by the user because, if the user inserts a null
character, you should either handle it properly or print a clear error
message.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe race:stream | AS-Unsafe corrupt | AC-Unsafe corrupt | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The fgets_unlocked
function is equivalent to the fgets
function except that it does not implicitly lock the stream.
This function is a GNU extension.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe race:stream | AS-Unsafe corrupt | AC-Unsafe corrupt | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The fgetws_unlocked
function is equivalent to the fgetws
function except that it does not implicitly lock the stream.
This function is a GNU extension.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Unsafe corrupt | AC-Unsafe lock corrupt | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The function gets
reads characters from the stream stdin
up to the next newline character, and stores them in the string s.
The newline character is discarded (note that this differs from the
behavior of fgets
, which copies the newline character into the
string). If gets
encounters a read error or end-of-file, it
returns a null pointer; otherwise it returns s.
Warning: The gets
function is very dangerous
because it provides no protection against overflowing the string
s. The GNU C Library includes it for compatibility only. You
should always use fgets
or getline
instead. To
remind you of this, the linker (if using GNU ld
) will issue a
warning whenever you use gets
.
Next: Block Input/Output, Previous: Line-Oriented Input, Up: Input/Output on Streams [Contents][Index]
In parser programs it is often useful to examine the next character in the input stream without removing it from the stream. This is called “peeking ahead” at the input because your program gets a glimpse of the input it will read next.
Using stream I/O, you can peek ahead at input by first reading it and
then unreading it (also called pushing it back on the stream).
Unreading a character makes it available to be input again from the stream,
by the next call to fgetc
or other input function on that stream.
Next: Using ungetc
To Do Unreading, Up: Unreading [Contents][Index]
Here is a pictorial explanation of unreading. Suppose you have a stream reading a file that contains just six characters, the letters ‘foobar’. Suppose you have read three characters so far. The situation looks like this:
f o o b a r ^
so the next input character will be ‘b’.
If instead of reading ‘b’ you unread the letter ‘o’, you get a situation like this:
f o o b a r | o-- ^
so that the next input characters will be ‘o’ and ‘b’.
If you unread ‘9’ instead of ‘o’, you get this situation:
f o o b a r | 9-- ^
so that the next input characters will be ‘9’ and ‘b’.
Previous: What Unreading Means, Up: Unreading [Contents][Index]
ungetc
To Do UnreadingThe function to unread a character is called ungetc
, because it
reverses the action of getc
.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Unsafe corrupt | AC-Unsafe lock corrupt | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The ungetc
function pushes back the character c onto the
input stream stream. So the next input from stream will
read c before anything else.
If c is EOF
, ungetc
does nothing and just returns
EOF
. This lets you call ungetc
with the return value of
getc
without needing to check for an error from getc
.
The character that you push back doesn’t have to be the same as the last
character that was actually read from the stream. In fact, it isn’t
necessary to actually read any characters from the stream before
unreading them with ungetc
! But that is a strange way to write a
program; usually ungetc
is used only to unread a character that
was just read from the same stream. The GNU C Library supports this
even on files opened in binary mode, but other systems might not.
The GNU C Library only supports one character of pushback—in other
words, it does not work to call ungetc
twice without doing input
in between. Other systems might let you push back multiple characters;
then reading from the stream retrieves the characters in the reverse
order that they were pushed.
Pushing back characters doesn’t alter the file; only the internal
buffering for the stream is affected. If a file positioning function
(such as fseek
, fseeko
or rewind
; see File Positioning) is called, any pending pushed-back characters are
discarded.
Unreading a character on a stream that is at end of file clears the end-of-file indicator for the stream, because it makes the character of input available. After you read that character, trying to read again will encounter end of file.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Unsafe corrupt | AC-Unsafe lock corrupt | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The ungetwc
function behaves just like ungetc
just that it
pushes back a wide character.
Here is an example showing the use of getc
and ungetc
to
skip over whitespace characters. When this function reaches a
non-whitespace character, it unreads that character to be seen again on
the next read operation on the stream.
#include <stdio.h> #include <ctype.h> void skip_whitespace (FILE *stream) { int c; do /* No need to check forEOF
because it is notisspace
, andungetc
ignoresEOF
. */ c = getc (stream); while (isspace (c)); ungetc (c, stream); }
Next: Formatted Output, Previous: Unreading, Up: Input/Output on Streams [Contents][Index]
This section describes how to do input and output operations on blocks of data. You can use these functions to read and write binary data, as well as to read and write text in fixed-size blocks instead of by characters or lines.
Binary files are typically used to read and write blocks of data in the same format as is used to represent the data in a running program. In other words, arbitrary blocks of memory—not just character or string objects—can be written to a binary file, and meaningfully read in again by the same program.
Storing data in binary form is often considerably more efficient than using the formatted I/O functions. Also, for floating-point numbers, the binary form avoids possible loss of precision in the conversion process. On the other hand, binary files can’t be examined or modified easily using many standard file utilities (such as text editors), and are not portable between different implementations of the language, or different kinds of computers.
These functions are declared in stdio.h.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Unsafe corrupt | AC-Unsafe lock corrupt | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This function reads up to count objects of size size into the array data, from the stream stream. It returns the number of objects actually read, which might be less than count if a read error occurs or the end of the file is reached. This function returns a value of zero (and doesn’t read anything) if either size or count is zero.
If fread
encounters end of file in the middle of an object, it
returns the number of complete objects read, and discards the partial
object. Therefore, the stream remains at the actual end of the file.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe race:stream | AS-Unsafe corrupt | AC-Unsafe corrupt | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The fread_unlocked
function is equivalent to the fread
function except that it does not implicitly lock the stream.
This function is a GNU extension.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Unsafe corrupt | AC-Unsafe lock corrupt | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This function writes up to count objects of size size from the array data, to the stream stream. The return value is normally count, if the call succeeds. Any other value indicates some sort of error, such as running out of space.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe race:stream | AS-Unsafe corrupt | AC-Unsafe corrupt | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The fwrite_unlocked
function is equivalent to the fwrite
function except that it does not implicitly lock the stream.
This function is a GNU extension.
Next: Customizing printf
, Previous: Block Input/Output, Up: Input/Output on Streams [Contents][Index]
The functions described in this section (printf
and related
functions) provide a convenient way to perform formatted output. You
call printf
with a format string or template string
that specifies how to format the values of the remaining arguments.
Unless your program is a filter that specifically performs line- or
character-oriented processing, using printf
or one of the other
related functions described in this section is usually the easiest and
most concise way to perform output. These functions are especially
useful for printing error messages, tables of data, and the like.
Next: Output Conversion Syntax, Up: Formatted Output [Contents][Index]
The printf
function can be used to print any number of arguments.
The template string argument you supply in a call provides
information not only about the number of additional arguments, but also
about their types and what style should be used for printing them.
Ordinary characters in the template string are simply written to the output stream as-is, while conversion specifications introduced by a ‘%’ character in the template cause subsequent arguments to be formatted and written to the output stream. For example,
int pct = 37; char filename[] = "foo.txt"; printf ("Processing of `%s' is %d%% finished.\nPlease be patient.\n", filename, pct);
produces output like
Processing of `foo.txt' is 37% finished. Please be patient.
This example shows the use of the ‘%d’ conversion to specify that
an int
argument should be printed in decimal notation, the
‘%s’ conversion to specify printing of a string argument, and
the ‘%%’ conversion to print a literal ‘%’ character.
There are also conversions for printing an integer argument as an unsigned value in binary, octal, decimal, or hexadecimal radix (‘%b’, ‘%o’, ‘%u’, or ‘%x’, respectively); or as a character value (‘%c’).
Floating-point numbers can be printed in normal, fixed-point notation using the ‘%f’ conversion or in exponential notation using the ‘%e’ conversion. The ‘%g’ conversion uses either ‘%e’ or ‘%f’ format, depending on what is more appropriate for the magnitude of the particular number.
You can control formatting more precisely by writing modifiers between the ‘%’ and the character that indicates which conversion to apply. These slightly alter the ordinary behavior of the conversion. For example, most conversion specifications permit you to specify a minimum field width and a flag indicating whether you want the result left- or right-justified within the field.
The specific flags and modifiers that are permitted and their interpretation vary depending on the particular conversion. They’re all described in more detail in the following sections. Don’t worry if this all seems excessively complicated at first; you can almost always get reasonable free-format output without using any of the modifiers at all. The modifiers are mostly used to make the output look “prettier” in tables.
Next: Table of Output Conversions, Previous: Formatted Output Basics, Up: Formatted Output [Contents][Index]
This section provides details about the precise syntax of conversion
specifications that can appear in a printf
template
string.
Characters in the template string that are not part of a conversion specification are printed as-is to the output stream. Multibyte character sequences (see Character Set Handling) are permitted in a template string.
The conversion specifications in a printf
template string have
the general form:
% [ param-no $] flags width [ . precision ] type conversion
or
% [ param-no $] flags width . * [ param-no $] type conversion
For example, in the conversion specifier ‘%-10.8ld’, the ‘-’
is a flag, ‘10’ specifies the field width, the precision is
‘8’, the letter ‘l’ is a type modifier, and ‘d’ specifies
the conversion style. (This particular type specifier says to
print a long int
argument in decimal notation, with a minimum of
8 digits left-justified in a field at least 10 characters wide.)
In more detail, output conversion specifications consist of an initial ‘%’ character followed in sequence by:
printf
function are assigned to the
formats in the order of appearance in the format string. But in some
situations (such as message translation) this is not desirable and this
extension allows an explicit parameter to be specified.
The param-no parts of the format must be integers in the range of 1 to the maximum number of arguments present to the function call. Some implementations limit this number to a certain upper bound. The exact limit can be retrieved by the following constant.
The value of NL_ARGMAX
is the maximum value allowed for the
specification of a positional parameter in a printf
call. The
actual value in effect at runtime can be retrieved by using
sysconf
using the _SC_NL_ARGMAX
parameter see Definition of sysconf
.
Some systems have a quite low limit such as 9 for System V systems. The GNU C Library has no real limit.
If any of the formats has a specification for the parameter position all of them in the format string shall have one. Otherwise the behavior is undefined.
You can also specify a field width of ‘*’. This means that the
next argument in the argument list (before the actual value to be
printed) is used as the field width. The value must be an int
.
If the value is negative, this means to set the ‘-’ flag (see
below) and to use the absolute value as the field width.
You can also specify a precision of ‘*’. This means that the next
argument in the argument list (before the actual value to be printed) is
used as the precision. The value must be an int
, and is ignored
if it is negative. If you specify ‘*’ for both the field width and
precision, the field width argument precedes the precision argument.
Other C library versions may not recognize this syntax.
int
,
but you can specify ‘h’, ‘l’, or ‘L’ for other integer
types.)
The exact options that are permitted and how they are interpreted vary between the different conversion specifiers. See the descriptions of the individual conversions for information about the particular options that they use.
With the ‘-Wformat’ option, the GNU C compiler checks calls to
printf
and related functions. It examines the format string and
verifies that the correct number and types of arguments are supplied.
There is also a GNU C syntax to tell the compiler that a function you
write uses a printf
-style format string.
See Declaring Attributes of Functions in Using GNU CC, for more information.
Next: Integer Conversions, Previous: Output Conversion Syntax, Up: Formatted Output [Contents][Index]
Here is a table summarizing what all the different conversions do:
Print an integer as a signed decimal number. See Integer Conversions, for details. ‘%d’ and ‘%i’ are synonymous for
output, but are different when used with scanf
for input
(see Table of Input Conversions).
Print an integer as an unsigned binary number. ‘%b’ uses lower-case ‘b’ with the ‘#’ flag and ‘%B’ uses upper-case. ‘%b’ is an ISO C2X feature; ‘%B’ is an optional ISO C2X feature. See Integer Conversions, for details.
Print an integer as an unsigned octal number. See Integer Conversions, for details.
Print an integer as an unsigned decimal number. See Integer Conversions, for details.
Print an integer as an unsigned hexadecimal number. ‘%x’ uses lower-case letters and ‘%X’ uses upper-case. See Integer Conversions, for details.
Print a floating-point number in normal (fixed-point) notation. ‘%f’ uses lower-case letters and ‘%F’ uses upper-case. See Floating-Point Conversions, for details.
Print a floating-point number in exponential notation. ‘%e’ uses lower-case letters and ‘%E’ uses upper-case. See Floating-Point Conversions, for details.
Print a floating-point number in either normal or exponential notation, whichever is more appropriate for its magnitude. ‘%g’ uses lower-case letters and ‘%G’ uses upper-case. See Floating-Point Conversions, for details.
Print a floating-point number in a hexadecimal fractional notation with the exponent to base 2 represented in decimal digits. ‘%a’ uses lower-case letters and ‘%A’ uses upper-case. See Floating-Point Conversions, for details.
Print a single character. See Other Output Conversions.
This is an alias for ‘%lc’ which is supported for compatibility with the Unix standard.
Print a string. See Other Output Conversions.
This is an alias for ‘%ls’ which is supported for compatibility with the Unix standard.
Print the value of a pointer. See Other Output Conversions.
Get the number of characters printed so far. See Other Output Conversions. Note that this conversion specification never produces any output.
Print the string corresponding to the value of errno
.
(This is a GNU extension.)
See Other Output Conversions.
Print a literal ‘%’ character. See Other Output Conversions.
If the syntax of a conversion specification is invalid, unpredictable things will happen, so don’t do this. If there aren’t enough function arguments provided to supply values for all the conversion specifications in the template string, or if the arguments are not of the correct types, the results are unpredictable. If you supply more arguments than conversion specifications, the extra argument values are simply ignored; this is sometimes useful.
Next: Floating-Point Conversions, Previous: Table of Output Conversions, Up: Formatted Output [Contents][Index]
This section describes the options for the ‘%d’, ‘%i’, ‘%b’, ‘%B’, ‘%o’, ‘%u’, ‘%x’, and ‘%X’ conversion specifications. These conversions print integers in various formats.
The ‘%d’ and ‘%i’ conversion specifications both print an
int
argument as a signed decimal number; while ‘%b’, ‘%o’,
‘%u’, and ‘%x’ print the argument as an unsigned binary, octal,
decimal, or hexadecimal number (respectively). The ‘%X’ conversion
specification is just like ‘%x’ except that it uses the characters
‘ABCDEF’ as digits instead of ‘abcdef’. The ‘%B’
conversion specification is just like ‘%b’ except that, with the
‘#’ flag, the output starts with ‘0B’ instead of ‘0b’.
The following flags are meaningful:
Left-justify the result in the field (instead of the normal right-justification).
For the signed ‘%d’ and ‘%i’ conversions, print a plus sign if the value is positive.
For the signed ‘%d’ and ‘%i’ conversions, if the result doesn’t start with a plus or minus sign, prefix it with a space character instead. Since the ‘+’ flag ensures that the result includes a sign, this flag is ignored if you supply both of them.
For the ‘%o’ conversion, this forces the leading digit to be
‘0’, as if by increasing the precision. For ‘%x’ or
‘%X’, this prefixes a leading ‘0x’ or ‘0X’
(respectively) to the result. For ‘%b’ or ‘%B’, this
prefixes a leading ‘0b’ or ‘0B’ (respectively)
to the result. This doesn’t do anything useful for the ‘%d’,
‘%i’, or ‘%u’ conversions. Using this flag produces output
which can be parsed by the strtoul
function (see Parsing of Integers) and scanf
with the ‘%i’ conversion
(see Numeric Input Conversions).
For the ‘%m’ conversion, print an error constant or decimal error number, instead of a (possibly translated) error message.
Separate the digits into groups as specified by the locale specified for
the LC_NUMERIC
category; see Generic Numeric Formatting Parameters. This flag is a
GNU extension.
Pad the field with zeros instead of spaces. The zeros are placed after any indication of sign or base. This flag is ignored if the ‘-’ flag is also specified, or if a precision is specified.
If a precision is supplied, it specifies the minimum number of digits to appear; leading zeros are produced if necessary. If you don’t specify a precision, the number is printed with as many digits as it needs. If you convert a value of zero with an explicit precision of zero, then no characters at all are produced.
Without a type modifier, the corresponding argument is treated as an
int
(for the signed conversions ‘%i’ and ‘%d’) or
unsigned int
(for the unsigned conversions ‘%b’,
‘%B’, ‘%o’, ‘%u’,
‘%x’, and ‘%X’). Recall that since printf
and friends
are variadic, any char
and short
arguments are
automatically converted to int
by the default argument
promotions. For arguments of other integer types, you can use these
modifiers:
Specifies that the argument is a signed char
or unsigned
char
, as appropriate. A char
argument is converted to an
int
or unsigned int
by the default argument promotions
anyway, but the ‘hh’ modifier says to convert it back to a
char
again.
This modifier was introduced in ISO C99.
Specifies that the argument is a short int
or unsigned
short int
, as appropriate. A short
argument is converted to an
int
or unsigned int
by the default argument promotions
anyway, but the ‘h’ modifier says to convert it back to a
short
again.
Specifies that the argument is a intmax_t
or uintmax_t
, as
appropriate.
This modifier was introduced in ISO C99.
Specifies that the argument is a long int
or unsigned long
int
, as appropriate. Two ‘l’ characters are like the ‘L’
modifier, below.
If used with ‘%c’ or ‘%s’ the corresponding parameter is considered as a wide character or wide character string respectively. This use of ‘l’ was introduced in Amendment 1 to ISO C90.
Specifies that the argument is a long long int
. (This type is
an extension supported by the GNU C compiler. On systems that don’t
support extra-long integers, this is the same as long int
.)
The ‘q’ modifier is another name for the same thing, which comes
from 4.4 BSD; a long long int
is sometimes called a “quad”
int
.
Specifies that the argument is a ptrdiff_t
.
This modifier was introduced in ISO C99.
Specifies that the argument is a intn_t
or
int_leastn_t
(which are the same type), for conversions
taking signed integers, or uintn_t
or
uint_leastn_t
(which are the same type), for conversions
taking unsigned integers. If the type is narrower than int
,
the promoted argument is converted back to the specified type.
This modifier was introduced in ISO C2X.
Specifies that the argument is a int_fastn_t
or
uint_fastn_t
, as appropriate. If the type is narrower
than int
, the promoted argument is converted back to the
specified type.
This modifier was introduced in ISO C2X.
Specifies that the argument is a size_t
.
‘z’ was introduced in ISO C99. ‘Z’ is a GNU extension predating this addition and should not be used in new code.
Here is an example. Using the template string:
"|%5d|%-5d|%+5d|%+-5d|% 5d|%05d|%5.0d|%5.2d|%d|\n"
to print numbers using the different options for the ‘%d’ conversion gives results like:
| 0|0 | +0|+0 | 0|00000| | 00|0| | 1|1 | +1|+1 | 1|00001| 1| 01|1| | -1|-1 | -1|-1 | -1|-0001| -1| -01|-1| |100000|100000|+100000|+100000| 100000|100000|100000|100000|100000|
In particular, notice what happens in the last case where the number is too large to fit in the minimum field width specified.
Here are some more examples showing how unsigned integers print under various format options, using the template string:
"|%5u|%5o|%5x|%5X|%#5o|%#5x|%#5X|%#10.8x|\n"
| 0| 0| 0| 0| 0| 0| 0| 00000000| | 1| 1| 1| 1| 01| 0x1| 0X1|0x00000001| |100000|303240|186a0|186A0|0303240|0x186a0|0X186A0|0x000186a0|
Next: Other Output Conversions, Previous: Integer Conversions, Up: Formatted Output [Contents][Index]
This section discusses the conversion specifications for floating-point numbers: the ‘%f’, ‘%F’, ‘%e’, ‘%E’, ‘%g’, and ‘%G’ conversions.
The ‘%f’ and ‘%F’ conversions print their argument in fixed-point
notation, producing output of the form
[-
]ddd.
ddd,
where the number of digits following the decimal point is controlled
by the precision you specify.
The ‘%e’ conversion prints its argument in exponential notation,
producing output of the form
[-
]d.
ddde
[+
|-
]dd.
Again, the number of digits following the decimal point is controlled by
the precision. The exponent always contains at least two digits. The
‘%E’ conversion is similar but the exponent is marked with the letter
‘E’ instead of ‘e’.
The ‘%g’ and ‘%G’ conversions print the argument in the style
of ‘%e’ or ‘%E’ (respectively) if the exponent would be less
than -4 or greater than or equal to the precision; otherwise they use
the ‘%f’ or ‘%F’ style. A precision of 0
, is taken as 1.
Trailing zeros are removed from the fractional portion of the result and
a decimal-point character appears only if it is followed by a digit.
The ‘%a’ and ‘%A’ conversions are meant for representing
floating-point numbers exactly in textual form so that they can be
exchanged as texts between different programs and/or machines. The
numbers are represented in the form
[-
]0x
h.
hhhp
[+
|-
]dd.
At the left of the decimal-point character exactly one digit is print.
This character is only 0
if the number is denormalized.
Otherwise the value is unspecified; it is implementation dependent how many
bits are used. The number of hexadecimal digits on the right side of
the decimal-point character is equal to the precision. If the precision
is zero it is determined to be large enough to provide an exact
representation of the number (or it is large enough to distinguish two
adjacent values if the FLT_RADIX
is not a power of 2,
see Floating Point Parameters). For the ‘%a’ conversion
lower-case characters are used to represent the hexadecimal number and
the prefix and exponent sign are printed as 0x
and p
respectively. Otherwise upper-case characters are used and 0X
and P
are used for the representation of prefix and exponent
string. The exponent to the base of two is printed as a decimal number
using at least one digit but at most as many digits as necessary to
represent the value exactly.
If the value to be printed represents infinity or a NaN, the output is
[-
]inf
or nan
respectively if the conversion
specifier is ‘%a’, ‘%e’, ‘%f’, or ‘%g’ and it is
[-
]INF
or NAN
respectively if the conversion is
‘%A’, ‘%E’, ‘%F’ or ‘%G’. On some implementations, a NaN
may result in longer output with information about the payload of the
NaN; ISO C2X defines a macro _PRINTF_NAN_LEN_MAX
giving the
maximum length of such output.
The following flags can be used to modify the behavior:
Left-justify the result in the field. Normally the result is right-justified.
Always include a plus or minus sign in the result.
If the result doesn’t start with a plus or minus sign, prefix it with a space instead. Since the ‘+’ flag ensures that the result includes a sign, this flag is ignored if you supply both of them.
Specifies that the result should always include a decimal point, even if no digits follow it. For the ‘%g’ and ‘%G’ conversions, this also forces trailing zeros after the decimal point to be left in place where they would otherwise be removed.
Separate the digits of the integer part of the result into groups as
specified by the locale specified for the LC_NUMERIC
category;
see Generic Numeric Formatting Parameters. This flag is a GNU extension.
Pad the field with zeros instead of spaces; the zeros are placed after any sign. This flag is ignored if the ‘-’ flag is also specified.
The precision specifies how many digits follow the decimal-point
character for the ‘%f’, ‘%F’, ‘%e’, and ‘%E’ conversions.
For these conversions, the default precision is 6
. If the precision
is explicitly 0
, this suppresses the decimal point character
entirely. For the ‘%g’ and ‘%G’ conversions, the precision
specifies how many significant digits to print. Significant digits are
the first digit before the decimal point, and all the digits after it.
If the precision is 0
or not specified for ‘%g’ or ‘%G’,
it is treated like a value of 1
. If the value being printed
cannot be expressed accurately in the specified number of digits, the
value is rounded to the nearest number that fits.
Without a type modifier, the floating-point conversions use an argument
of type double
. (By the default argument promotions, any
float
arguments are automatically converted to double
.)
The following type modifier is supported:
An uppercase ‘L’ specifies that the argument is a long
double
.
Here are some examples showing how numbers print using the various floating-point conversions. All of the numbers were printed using this template string:
"|%13.4a|%13.4f|%13.4e|%13.4g|\n"
Here is the output:
| 0x0.0000p+0| 0.0000| 0.0000e+00| 0| | 0x1.0000p-1| 0.5000| 5.0000e-01| 0.5| | 0x1.0000p+0| 1.0000| 1.0000e+00| 1| | -0x1.0000p+0| -1.0000| -1.0000e+00| -1| | 0x1.9000p+6| 100.0000| 1.0000e+02| 100| | 0x1.f400p+9| 1000.0000| 1.0000e+03| 1000| | 0x1.3880p+13| 10000.0000| 1.0000e+04| 1e+04| | 0x1.81c8p+13| 12345.0000| 1.2345e+04| 1.234e+04| | 0x1.86a0p+16| 100000.0000| 1.0000e+05| 1e+05| | 0x1.e240p+16| 123456.0000| 1.2346e+05| 1.235e+05|
Notice how the ‘%g’ conversion drops trailing zeros.
Next: Formatted Output Functions, Previous: Floating-Point Conversions, Up: Formatted Output [Contents][Index]
This section describes miscellaneous conversions for printf
.
The ‘%c’ conversion prints a single character. In case there is no
‘l’ modifier the int
argument is first converted to an
unsigned char
. Then, if used in a wide stream function, the
character is converted into the corresponding wide character. The
‘-’ flag can be used to specify left-justification in the field,
but no other flags are defined, and no precision or type modifier can be
given. For example:
printf ("%c%c%c%c%c", 'h', 'e', 'l', 'l', 'o');
prints ‘hello’.
If there is an ‘l’ modifier present the argument is expected to be
of type wint_t
. If used in a multibyte function the wide
character is converted into a multibyte character before being added to
the output. In this case more than one output byte can be produced.
The ‘%s’ conversion prints a string. If no ‘l’ modifier is
present the corresponding argument must be of type char *
(or
const char *
). If used in a wide stream function the string is
first converted to a wide character string. A precision can be
specified to indicate the maximum number of characters to write;
otherwise characters in the string up to but not including the
terminating null character are written to the output stream. The
‘-’ flag can be used to specify left-justification in the field,
but no other flags or type modifiers are defined for this conversion.
For example:
printf ("%3s%-6s", "no", "where");
prints ‘ nowhere ’.
If there is an ‘l’ modifier present, the argument is expected to
be of type wchar_t
(or const wchar_t *
).
If you accidentally pass a null pointer as the argument for a ‘%s’ conversion, the GNU C Library prints it as ‘(null)’. We think this is more useful than crashing. But it’s not good practice to pass a null argument intentionally.
The ‘%m’ conversion prints the string corresponding to the error
code in errno
. See Error Messages. Thus:
fprintf (stderr, "can't open `%s': %m\n", filename);
is equivalent to:
fprintf (stderr, "can't open `%s': %s\n", filename, strerror (errno));
The ‘%m’ conversion can be used with the ‘#’ flag to print an
error constant, as provided by strerrorname_np
. Both ‘%m’
and ‘%#m’ are GNU C Library extensions.
The ‘%p’ conversion prints a pointer value. The corresponding
argument must be of type void *
. In practice, you can use any
type of pointer.
In the GNU C Library, non-null pointers are printed as unsigned integers, as if a ‘%#x’ conversion were used. Null pointers print as ‘(nil)’. (Pointers might print differently in other systems.)
For example:
printf ("%p", "testing");
prints ‘0x’ followed by a hexadecimal number—the address of the
string constant "testing"
. It does not print the word
‘testing’.
You can supply the ‘-’ flag with the ‘%p’ conversion to specify left-justification, but no other flags, precision, or type modifiers are defined.
The ‘%n’ conversion is unlike any of the other output conversions.
It uses an argument which must be a pointer to an int
, but
instead of printing anything it stores the number of characters printed
so far by this call at that location. The ‘h’ and ‘l’ type
modifiers are permitted to specify that the argument is of type
short int *
or long int *
instead of int *
, but no
flags, field width, or precision are permitted.
For example,
int nchar; printf ("%d %s%n\n", 3, "bears", &nchar);
prints:
3 bears
and sets nchar
to 7
, because ‘3 bears’ is seven
characters.
The ‘%%’ conversion prints a literal ‘%’ character. This conversion doesn’t use an argument, and no flags, field width, precision, or type modifiers are permitted.
Next: Dynamically Allocating Formatted Output, Previous: Other Output Conversions, Up: Formatted Output [Contents][Index]
This section describes how to call printf
and related functions.
Prototypes for these functions are in the header file stdio.h.
Because these functions take a variable number of arguments, you
must declare prototypes for them before using them. Of course,
the easiest way to make sure you have all the right prototypes is to
just include stdio.h.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe locale | AS-Unsafe corrupt heap | AC-Unsafe mem lock corrupt | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The printf
function prints the optional arguments under the
control of the template string template to the stream
stdout
. It returns the number of characters printed, or a
negative value if there was an output error.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe locale | AS-Unsafe corrupt heap | AC-Unsafe mem lock corrupt | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The wprintf
function prints the optional arguments under the
control of the wide template string template to the stream
stdout
. It returns the number of wide characters printed, or a
negative value if there was an output error.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe locale | AS-Unsafe corrupt heap | AC-Unsafe mem lock corrupt | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This function is just like printf
, except that the output is
written to the stream stream instead of stdout
.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe locale | AS-Unsafe corrupt heap | AC-Unsafe mem lock corrupt | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This function is just like wprintf
, except that the output is
written to the stream stream instead of stdout
.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe locale | AS-Unsafe heap | AC-Unsafe mem | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This is like printf
, except that the output is stored in the character
array s instead of written to a stream. A null character is written
to mark the end of the string.
The sprintf
function returns the number of characters stored in
the array s, not including the terminating null character.
The behavior of this function is undefined if copying takes place between objects that overlap—for example, if s is also given as an argument to be printed under control of the ‘%s’ conversion. See Copying Strings and Arrays.
Warning: The sprintf
function can be dangerous
because it can potentially output more characters than can fit in the
allocation size of the string s. Remember that the field width
given in a conversion specification is only a minimum value.
To avoid this problem, you can use snprintf
or asprintf
,
described below.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe locale | AS-Unsafe heap | AC-Unsafe mem | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This is like wprintf
, except that the output is stored in the
wide character array ws instead of written to a stream. A null
wide character is written to mark the end of the string. The size
argument specifies the maximum number of characters to produce. The
trailing null character is counted towards this limit, so you should
allocate at least size wide characters for the string ws.
The return value is the number of characters generated for the given
input, excluding the trailing null. If not all output fits into the
provided buffer a negative value is returned, and errno
is set to
E2BIG
. (The setting of errno
is a GNU extension.) You
should try again with a bigger output string. Note: this is
different from how snprintf
handles this situation.
Note that the corresponding narrow stream function takes fewer
parameters. swprintf
in fact corresponds to the snprintf
function. Since the sprintf
function can be dangerous and should
be avoided the ISO C committee refused to make the same mistake
again and decided to not define a function exactly corresponding to
sprintf
.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe locale | AS-Unsafe heap | AC-Unsafe mem | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The snprintf
function is similar to sprintf
, except that
the size argument specifies the maximum number of characters to
produce. The trailing null character is counted towards this limit, so
you should allocate at least size characters for the string s.
If size is zero, nothing, not even the null byte, shall be written and
s may be a null pointer.
The return value is the number of characters which would be generated for the given input, excluding the trailing null. If this value is greater than or equal to size, not all characters from the result have been stored in s. If this happens, you should be wary of using the truncated result as that could lead to security, encoding, or other bugs in your program (see Truncating Strings while Copying). Instead, you should try again with a bigger output string. Here is an example of doing this:
/* Construct a message describing the value of a variable whose name is name and whose value is value. */ char * make_message (char *name, char *value) { /* Guess we need no more than 100 bytes of space. */ size_t size = 100; char *buffer = xmalloc (size);
/* Try to print in the allocated space. */
int buflen = snprintf (buffer, size, "value of %s is %s",
name, value);
if (! (0 <= buflen && buflen < SIZE_MAX))
fatal ("integer overflow");
if (buflen >= size) { /* Reallocate buffer now that we know how much space is needed. */ size = buflen; size++; buffer = xrealloc (buffer, size); /* Try again. */ snprintf (buffer, size, "value of %s is %s", name, value); } /* The last call worked, return the string. */ return buffer; }
In practice, it is often easier just to use asprintf
, below.
Attention: In versions of the GNU C Library prior to 2.1 the
return value is the number of characters stored, not including the
terminating null; unless there was not enough space in s to
store the result in which case -1
is returned. This was
changed in order to comply with the ISO C99 standard.
Next: Variable Arguments Output Functions, Previous: Formatted Output Functions, Up: Formatted Output [Contents][Index]
The functions in this section do formatted output and place the results in dynamically allocated memory.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe locale | AS-Unsafe heap | AC-Unsafe mem | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This function is similar to sprintf
, except that it dynamically
allocates a string (as with malloc
; see Unconstrained Allocation) to hold the output, instead of putting the output in a
buffer you allocate in advance. The ptr argument should be the
address of a char *
object, and a successful call to
asprintf
stores a pointer to the newly allocated string at that
location.
The return value is the number of characters allocated for the buffer, or less than zero if an error occurred. Usually this means that the buffer could not be allocated.
Here is how to use asprintf
to get the same result as the
snprintf
example, but more easily:
/* Construct a message describing the value of a variable whose name is name and whose value is value. */ char * make_message (char *name, char *value) { char *result; if (asprintf (&result, "value of %s is %s", name, value) < 0) return NULL; return result; }
Preliminary: | MT-Safe race:obstack locale | AS-Unsafe corrupt heap | AC-Unsafe corrupt mem | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This function is similar to asprintf
, except that it uses the
obstack obstack to allocate the space. See Obstacks.
The characters are written onto the end of the current object.
To get at them, you must finish the object with obstack_finish
(see Growing Objects).
Next: Parsing a Template String, Previous: Dynamically Allocating Formatted Output, Up: Formatted Output [Contents][Index]
The functions vprintf
and friends are provided so that you can
define your own variadic printf
-like functions that make use of
the same internals as the built-in formatted output functions.
The most natural way to define such functions would be to use a language
construct to say, “Call printf
and pass this template plus all
of my arguments after the first five.” But there is no way to do this
in C, and it would be hard to provide a way, since at the C language
level there is no way to tell how many arguments your function received.
Since that method is impossible, we provide alternative functions, the
vprintf
series, which lets you pass a va_list
to describe
“all of my arguments after the first five.”
When it is sufficient to define a macro rather than a real function, the GNU C compiler provides a way to do this much more easily with macros. For example:
#define myprintf(a, b, c, d, e, rest...) \ printf (mytemplate , ## rest)
See Variadic Macros in The C preprocessor, for details. But this is limited to macros, and does not apply to real functions at all.
Before calling vprintf
or the other functions listed in this
section, you must call va_start
(see Variadic Functions) to initialize a pointer to the variable arguments. Then you
can call va_arg
to fetch the arguments that you want to handle
yourself. This advances the pointer past those arguments.
Once your va_list
pointer is pointing at the argument of your
choice, you are ready to call vprintf
. That argument and all
subsequent arguments that were passed to your function are used by
vprintf
along with the template that you specified separately.
Portability Note: The value of the va_list
pointer is
undetermined after the call to vprintf
, so you must not use
va_arg
after you call vprintf
. Instead, you should call
va_end
to retire the pointer from service. You can call
va_start
again and begin fetching the arguments from the start of
the variable argument list. (Alternatively, you can use va_copy
to make a copy of the va_list
pointer before calling
vfprintf
.) Calling vprintf
does not destroy the argument
list of your function, merely the particular pointer that you passed to
it.
Prototypes for these functions are declared in stdio.h.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe locale | AS-Unsafe corrupt heap | AC-Unsafe mem lock corrupt | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This function is similar to printf
except that, instead of taking
a variable number of arguments directly, it takes an argument list
pointer ap.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe locale | AS-Unsafe corrupt heap | AC-Unsafe mem lock corrupt | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This function is similar to wprintf
except that, instead of taking
a variable number of arguments directly, it takes an argument list
pointer ap.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe locale | AS-Unsafe corrupt heap | AC-Unsafe mem lock corrupt | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This is the equivalent of fprintf
with the variable argument list
specified directly as for vprintf
.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe locale | AS-Unsafe corrupt heap | AC-Unsafe mem lock corrupt | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This is the equivalent of fwprintf
with the variable argument list
specified directly as for vwprintf
.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe locale | AS-Unsafe heap | AC-Unsafe mem | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This is the equivalent of sprintf
with the variable argument list
specified directly as for vprintf
.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe locale | AS-Unsafe heap | AC-Unsafe mem | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This is the equivalent of swprintf
with the variable argument list
specified directly as for vwprintf
.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe locale | AS-Unsafe heap | AC-Unsafe mem | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This is the equivalent of snprintf
with the variable argument list
specified directly as for vprintf
.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe locale | AS-Unsafe heap | AC-Unsafe mem | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The vasprintf
function is the equivalent of asprintf
with the
variable argument list specified directly as for vprintf
.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe race:obstack locale | AS-Unsafe corrupt heap | AC-Unsafe corrupt mem | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The obstack_vprintf
function is the equivalent of
obstack_printf
with the variable argument list specified directly
as for vprintf
.
Here’s an example showing how you might use vfprintf
. This is a
function that prints error messages to the stream stderr
, along
with a prefix indicating the name of the program
(see Error Messages, for a description of
program_invocation_short_name
).
#include <stdio.h> #include <stdarg.h> void eprintf (const char *template, ...) { va_list ap; extern char *program_invocation_short_name; fprintf (stderr, "%s: ", program_invocation_short_name); va_start (ap, template); vfprintf (stderr, template, ap); va_end (ap); }
You could call eprintf
like this:
eprintf ("file `%s' does not exist\n", filename);
In GNU C, there is a special construct you can use to let the compiler
know that a function uses a printf
-style format string. Then it
can check the number and types of arguments in each call to the
function, and warn you when they do not match the format string.
For example, take this declaration of eprintf
:
void eprintf (const char *template, ...) __attribute__ ((format (printf, 1, 2)));
This tells the compiler that eprintf
uses a format string like
printf
(as opposed to scanf
; see Formatted Input);
the format string appears as the first argument;
and the arguments to satisfy the format begin with the second.
See Declaring Attributes of Functions in Using GNU CC, for more information.
Next: Example of Parsing a Template String, Previous: Variable Arguments Output Functions, Up: Formatted Output [Contents][Index]
You can use the function parse_printf_format
to obtain
information about the number and types of arguments that are expected by
a given template string. This function permits interpreters that
provide interfaces to printf
to avoid passing along invalid
arguments from the user’s program, which could cause a crash.
All the symbols described in this section are declared in the header file printf.h.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe locale | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This function returns information about the number and types of
arguments expected by the printf
template string template.
The information is stored in the array argtypes; each element of
this array describes one argument. This information is encoded using
the various ‘PA_’ macros, listed below.
The argument n specifies the number of elements in the array
argtypes. This is the maximum number of elements that
parse_printf_format
will try to write.
parse_printf_format
returns the total number of arguments required
by template. If this number is greater than n, then the
information returned describes only the first n arguments. If you
want information about additional arguments, allocate a bigger
array and call parse_printf_format
again.
The argument types are encoded as a combination of a basic type and modifier flag bits.
This macro is a bitmask for the type modifier flag bits. You can write
the expression (argtypes[i] & PA_FLAG_MASK)
to extract just the
flag bits for an argument, or (argtypes[i] & ~PA_FLAG_MASK)
to
extract just the basic type code.
Here are symbolic constants that represent the basic types; they stand for integer values.
PA_INT
¶This specifies that the base type is int
.
PA_CHAR
¶This specifies that the base type is int
, cast to char
.
PA_STRING
¶This specifies that the base type is char *
, a null-terminated string.
PA_POINTER
¶This specifies that the base type is void *
, an arbitrary pointer.
PA_FLOAT
¶This specifies that the base type is float
.
PA_DOUBLE
¶This specifies that the base type is double
.
PA_LAST
¶You can define additional base types for your own programs as offsets
from PA_LAST
. For example, if you have data types ‘foo’
and ‘bar’ with their own specialized printf
conversions,
you could define encodings for these types as:
#define PA_FOO PA_LAST #define PA_BAR (PA_LAST + 1)
Here are the flag bits that modify a basic type. They are combined with the code for the basic type using inclusive-or.
PA_FLAG_PTR
¶If this bit is set, it indicates that the encoded type is a pointer to the base type, rather than an immediate value. For example, ‘PA_INT|PA_FLAG_PTR’ represents the type ‘int *’.
PA_FLAG_SHORT
¶If this bit is set, it indicates that the base type is modified with
short
. (This corresponds to the ‘h’ type modifier.)
PA_FLAG_LONG
¶If this bit is set, it indicates that the base type is modified with
long
. (This corresponds to the ‘l’ type modifier.)
PA_FLAG_LONG_LONG
¶If this bit is set, it indicates that the base type is modified with
long long
. (This corresponds to the ‘L’ type modifier.)
PA_FLAG_LONG_DOUBLE
¶This is a synonym for PA_FLAG_LONG_LONG
, used by convention with
a base type of PA_DOUBLE
to indicate a type of long double
.
Previous: Parsing a Template String, Up: Formatted Output [Contents][Index]
Here is an example of decoding argument types for a format string. We
assume this is part of an interpreter which contains arguments of type
NUMBER
, CHAR
, STRING
and STRUCTURE
(and
perhaps others which are not valid here).
/* Test whether the nargs specified objects in the vector args are valid for the format string format: if so, return 1. If not, return 0 after printing an error message. */ int validate_args (char *format, int nargs, OBJECT *args) { int *argtypes; int nwanted; /* Get the information about the arguments. Each conversion specification must be at least two characters long, so there cannot be more specifications than half the length of the string. */ argtypes = (int *) alloca (strlen (format) / 2 * sizeof (int)); nwanted = parse_printf_format (format, nargs, argtypes); /* Check the number of arguments. */ if (nwanted > nargs) { error ("too few arguments (at least %d required)", nwanted); return 0; } /* Check the C type wanted for each argument and see if the object given is suitable. */ for (i = 0; i < nwanted; i++) { int wanted; if (argtypes[i] & PA_FLAG_PTR) wanted = STRUCTURE; else switch (argtypes[i] & ~PA_FLAG_MASK) { case PA_INT: case PA_FLOAT: case PA_DOUBLE: wanted = NUMBER; break; case PA_CHAR: wanted = CHAR; break; case PA_STRING: wanted = STRING; break; case PA_POINTER: wanted = STRUCTURE; break; } if (TYPE (args[i]) != wanted) { error ("type mismatch for arg number %d", i); return 0; } } return 1; }
Next: Formatted Input, Previous: Formatted Output, Up: Input/Output on Streams [Contents][Index]
printf
The GNU C Library lets you define your own custom conversion specifiers
for printf
template strings, to teach printf
clever ways
to print the important data structures of your program.
The way you do this is by registering the conversion with the function
register_printf_function
; see Registering New Conversions.
One of the arguments you pass to this function is a pointer to a handler
function that produces the actual output; see Defining the Output Handler, for information on how to write this function.
You can also install a function that just returns information about the number and type of arguments expected by the conversion specifier. See Parsing a Template String, for information about this.
The facilities of this section are declared in the header file printf.h.
Portability Note: The ability to extend the syntax of
printf
template strings is a GNU extension. ISO standard C has
nothing similar. When using the GNU C compiler or any other compiler
that interprets calls to standard I/O functions according to the rules
of the language standard it is necessary to disable such handling by
the appropriate compiler option. Otherwise the behavior of a program
that relies on the extension is undefined.
printf
Extension Exampleprintf
Handlers
Next: Conversion Specifier Options, Up: Customizing printf
[Contents][Index]
The function to register a new output conversion is
register_printf_function
, declared in printf.h.
Preliminary: | MT-Unsafe const:printfext | AS-Unsafe heap lock | AC-Unsafe mem lock | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This function defines the conversion specifier character spec.
Thus, if spec is 'Y'
, it defines the conversion ‘%Y’.
You can redefine the built-in conversions like ‘%s’, but flag
characters like ‘#’ and type modifiers like ‘l’ can never be
used as conversions; calling register_printf_function
for those
characters has no effect. It is advisable not to use lowercase letters,
since the ISO C standard warns that additional lowercase letters may be
standardized in future editions of the standard.
The handler-function is the function called by printf
and
friends when this conversion appears in a template string.
See Defining the Output Handler, for information about how to define
a function to pass as this argument. If you specify a null pointer, any
existing handler function for spec is removed.
The arginfo-function is the function called by
parse_printf_format
when this conversion appears in a
template string. See Parsing a Template String, for information
about this.
Attention: In the GNU C Library versions before 2.0 the
arginfo-function function did not need to be installed unless
the user used the parse_printf_format
function. This has changed.
Now a call to any of the printf
functions will call this
function when this format specifier appears in the format string.
The return value is 0
on success, and -1
on failure
(which occurs if spec is out of range).
Portability Note: It is possible to redefine the standard output conversions but doing so is strongly discouraged because it may interfere with the behavior of programs and compiler implementations that assume the effects of the conversions conform to the relevant language standards. In addition, conforming compilers need not guarantee that the function registered for a standard conversion will be called for each such conversion in every format string in a program.
Next: Defining the Output Handler, Previous: Registering New Conversions, Up: Customizing printf
[Contents][Index]
If you define a meaning for ‘%A’, what if the template contains ‘%+23A’ or ‘%-#A’? To implement a sensible meaning for these, the handler when called needs to be able to get the options specified in the template.
Both the handler-function and arginfo-function accept an
argument that points to a struct printf_info
, which contains
information about the options appearing in an instance of the conversion
specifier. This data type is declared in the header file
printf.h.
This structure is used to pass information about the options appearing
in an instance of a conversion specifier in a printf
template
string to the handler and arginfo functions for that specifier. It
contains the following members:
int prec
This is the precision specified. The value is -1
if no precision
was specified. If the precision was given as ‘*’, the
printf_info
structure passed to the handler function contains the
actual value retrieved from the argument list. But the structure passed
to the arginfo function contains a value of INT_MIN
, since the
actual value is not known.
int width
This is the minimum field width specified. The value is 0
if no
width was specified. If the field width was given as ‘*’, the
printf_info
structure passed to the handler function contains the
actual value retrieved from the argument list. But the structure passed
to the arginfo function contains a value of INT_MIN
, since the
actual value is not known.
wchar_t spec
This is the conversion specifier character specified. It’s stored in the structure so that you can register the same handler function for multiple characters, but still have a way to tell them apart when the handler function is called.
unsigned int is_long_double
This is a boolean that is true if the ‘L’, ‘ll’, or ‘q’
type modifier was specified. For integer conversions, this indicates
long long int
, as opposed to long double
for floating
point conversions.
unsigned int is_char
This is a boolean that is true if the ‘hh’ type modifier was specified.
unsigned int is_short
This is a boolean that is true if the ‘h’ type modifier was specified.
unsigned int is_long
This is a boolean that is true if the ‘l’ type modifier was specified.
unsigned int alt
This is a boolean that is true if the ‘#’ flag was specified.
unsigned int space
This is a boolean that is true if the ‘ ’ flag was specified.
unsigned int left
This is a boolean that is true if the ‘-’ flag was specified.
unsigned int showsign
This is a boolean that is true if the ‘+’ flag was specified.
unsigned int group
This is a boolean that is true if the ‘'’ flag was specified.
unsigned int extra
This flag has a special meaning depending on the context. It could
be used freely by the user-defined handlers but when called from
the printf
function this variable always contains the value
0
.
unsigned int wide
This flag is set if the stream is wide oriented.
wchar_t pad
This is the character to use for padding the output to the minimum field
width. The value is '0'
if the ‘0’ flag was specified, and
' '
otherwise.
Next: printf
Extension Example, Previous: Conversion Specifier Options, Up: Customizing printf
[Contents][Index]
Now let’s look at how to define the handler and arginfo functions
which are passed as arguments to register_printf_function
.
Compatibility Note: The interface changed in the GNU C Library
version 2.0. Previously the third argument was of type
va_list *
.
You should define your handler functions with a prototype like:
int function (FILE *stream, const struct printf_info *info, const void *const *args)
The stream argument passed to the handler function is the stream to which it should write output.
The info argument is a pointer to a structure that contains information about the various options that were included with the conversion in the template string. You should not modify this structure inside your handler function. See Conversion Specifier Options, for a description of this data structure.
The args is a vector of pointers to the arguments data. The number of arguments was determined by calling the argument information function provided by the user.
Your handler function should return a value just like printf
does: it should return the number of characters it has written, or a
negative value to indicate an error.
This is the data type that a handler function should have.
If you are going to use parse_printf_format
in your
application, you must also define a function to pass as the
arginfo-function argument for each new conversion you install with
register_printf_function
.
You have to define these functions with a prototype like:
int function (const struct printf_info *info, size_t n, int *argtypes)
The return value from the function should be the number of arguments the
conversion expects. The function should also fill in no more than
n elements of the argtypes array with information about the
types of each of these arguments. This information is encoded using the
various ‘PA_’ macros. (You will notice that this is the same
calling convention parse_printf_format
itself uses.)
This type is used to describe functions that return information about the number and type of arguments used by a conversion specifier.
Next: Predefined printf
Handlers, Previous: Defining the Output Handler, Up: Customizing printf
[Contents][Index]
printf
Extension ExampleHere is an example showing how to define a printf
handler function.
This program defines a data structure called a Widget
and
defines the ‘%W’ conversion to print information about Widget *
arguments, including the pointer value and the name stored in the data
structure. The ‘%W’ conversion supports the minimum field width and
left-justification options, but ignores everything else.
#include <stdio.h> #include <stdlib.h> #include <printf.h>
typedef struct { char *name; } Widget;
int print_widget (FILE *stream, const struct printf_info *info, const void *const *args) { const Widget *w; char *buffer; int len; /* Format the output into a string. */ w = *((const Widget **) (args[0])); len = asprintf (&buffer, "<Widget %p: %s>", w, w->name); if (len == -1) return -1; /* Pad to the minimum field width and print to the stream. */ len = fprintf (stream, "%*s", (info->left ? -info->width : info->width), buffer); /* Clean up and return. */ free (buffer); return len; } int print_widget_arginfo (const struct printf_info *info, size_t n, int *argtypes) { /* We always take exactly one argument and this is a pointer to the structure.. */ if (n > 0) argtypes[0] = PA_POINTER; return 1; } int main (void) { /* Make a widget to print. */ Widget mywidget; mywidget.name = "mywidget"; /* Register the print function for widgets. */ register_printf_function ('W', print_widget, print_widget_arginfo); /* Now print the widget. */ printf ("|%W|\n", &mywidget); printf ("|%35W|\n", &mywidget); printf ("|%-35W|\n", &mywidget); return 0; }
The output produced by this program looks like:
|<Widget 0xffeffb7c: mywidget>| | <Widget 0xffeffb7c: mywidget>| |<Widget 0xffeffb7c: mywidget> |
Previous: printf
Extension Example, Up: Customizing printf
[Contents][Index]
printf
HandlersThe GNU C Library also contains a concrete and useful application of the
printf
handler extension. There are two functions available
which implement a special way to print floating-point numbers.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe race:fp locale | AS-Unsafe corrupt heap | AC-Unsafe mem corrupt | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
Print a given floating point number as for the format %f
except
that there is a postfix character indicating the divisor for the
number to make this less than 1000. There are two possible divisors:
powers of 1024 or powers of 1000. Which one is used depends on the
format character specified while registered this handler. If the
character is of lower case, 1024 is used. For upper case characters,
1000 is used.
The postfix tag corresponds to bytes, kilobytes, megabytes, gigabytes, etc. The full table is:
The default precision is 3, i.e., 1024 is printed with a lower-case
format character as if it were %.3fk
and will yield 1.000k
.
Due to the requirements of register_printf_function
we must also
provide the function which returns information about the arguments.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This function will return in argtypes the information about the
used parameters in the way the vfprintf
implementation expects
it. The format always takes one argument.
To use these functions both functions must be registered with a call like
register_printf_function ('B', printf_size, printf_size_info);
Here we register the functions to print numbers as powers of 1000 since
the format character 'B'
is an upper-case character. If we
would additionally use 'b'
in a line like
register_printf_function ('b', printf_size, printf_size_info);
we could also print using a power of 1024. Please note that all that is
different in these two lines is the format specifier. The
printf_size
function knows about the difference between lower and upper
case format specifiers.
The use of 'B'
and 'b'
is no coincidence. Rather it is
the preferred way to use this functionality since it is available on
some other systems which also use format specifiers.
Next: End-Of-File and Errors, Previous: Customizing printf
, Up: Input/Output on Streams [Contents][Index]
The functions described in this section (scanf
and related
functions) provide facilities for formatted input analogous to the
formatted output facilities. These functions provide a mechanism for
reading arbitrary values under the control of a format string or
template string.
Next: Input Conversion Syntax, Up: Formatted Input [Contents][Index]
Calls to scanf
are superficially similar to calls to
printf
in that arbitrary arguments are read under the control of
a template string. While the syntax of the conversion specifications in
the template is very similar to that for printf
, the
interpretation of the template is oriented more towards free-format
input and simple pattern matching, rather than fixed-field formatting.
For example, most scanf
conversions skip over any amount of
“white space” (including spaces, tabs, and newlines) in the input
file, and there is no concept of precision for the numeric input
conversions as there is for the corresponding output conversions.
Ordinarily, non-whitespace characters in the template are expected to
match characters in the input stream exactly, but a matching failure is
distinct from an input error on the stream.
Another area of difference between scanf
and printf
is
that you must remember to supply pointers rather than immediate values
as the optional arguments to scanf
; the values that are read are
stored in the objects that the pointers point to. Even experienced
programmers tend to forget this occasionally, so if your program is
getting strange errors that seem to be related to scanf
, you
might want to double-check this.
When a matching failure occurs, scanf
returns immediately,
leaving the first non-matching character as the next character to be
read from the stream. The normal return value from scanf
is the
number of values that were assigned, so you can use this to determine if
a matching error happened before all the expected values were read.
The scanf
function is typically used for things like reading in
the contents of tables. For example, here is a function that uses
scanf
to initialize an array of double
:
void readarray (double *array, int n) { int i; for (i=0; i<n; i++) if (scanf (" %lf", &(array[i])) != 1) invalid_input_error (); }
The formatted input functions are not used as frequently as the formatted output functions. Partly, this is because it takes some care to use them properly. Another reason is that it is difficult to recover from a matching error.
If you are trying to read input that doesn’t match a single, fixed
pattern, you may be better off using a tool such as Flex to generate a
lexical scanner, or Bison to generate a parser, rather than using
scanf
. For more information about these tools, see Flex: The Lexical Scanner Generator, and The Bison Reference Manual.
Next: Table of Input Conversions, Previous: Formatted Input Basics, Up: Formatted Input [Contents][Index]
A scanf
template string is a string that contains ordinary
multibyte characters interspersed with conversion specifications that
start with ‘%’.
Any whitespace character (as defined by the isspace
function;
see Classification of Characters) in the template causes any number
of whitespace characters in the input stream to be read and discarded.
The whitespace characters that are matched need not be exactly the same
whitespace characters that appear in the template string. For example,
write ‘ , ’ in the template to recognize a comma with optional
whitespace before and after.
Other characters in the template string that are not part of conversion specifications must match characters in the input stream exactly; if this is not the case, a matching failure occurs.
The conversion specifications in a scanf
template string
have the general form:
% flags width type conversion
In more detail, an input conversion specification consists of an initial ‘%’ character followed in sequence by:
scanf
finds a conversion
specification that uses this flag, it reads input as directed by the
rest of the conversion specification, but it discards this input, does
not use a pointer argument, and does not increment the count of
successful assignments.
long int
rather than a pointer to an int
.
The exact options that are permitted and how they are interpreted vary between the different conversion specifiers. See the descriptions of the individual conversions for information about the particular options that they allow.
With the ‘-Wformat’ option, the GNU C compiler checks calls to
scanf
and related functions. It examines the format string and
verifies that the correct number and types of arguments are supplied.
There is also a GNU C syntax to tell the compiler that a function you
write uses a scanf
-style format string.
See Declaring Attributes of Functions in Using GNU CC, for more information.
Next: Numeric Input Conversions, Previous: Input Conversion Syntax, Up: Formatted Input [Contents][Index]
Here is a table that summarizes the various conversion specifications:
Matches an optionally signed integer written in decimal. See Numeric Input Conversions.
Matches an optionally signed integer in any of the formats that the C language defines for specifying an integer constant. See Numeric Input Conversions.
Matches an unsigned integer written in binary radix. This is an ISO C2X feature. See Numeric Input Conversions.
Matches an unsigned integer written in octal radix. See Numeric Input Conversions.
Matches an unsigned integer written in decimal radix. See Numeric Input Conversions.
Matches an unsigned integer written in hexadecimal radix. See Numeric Input Conversions.
Matches an optionally signed floating-point number. See Numeric Input Conversions.
Matches a string containing only non-whitespace characters.
See String Input Conversions. The presence of the ‘l’ modifier
determines whether the output is stored as a wide character string or a
multibyte string. If ‘%s’ is used in a wide character function the
string is converted as with multiple calls to wcrtomb
into a
multibyte string. This means that the buffer must provide room for
MB_CUR_MAX
bytes for each wide character read. In case
‘%ls’ is used in a multibyte function the result is converted into
wide characters as with multiple calls of mbrtowc
before being
stored in the user provided buffer.
This is an alias for ‘%ls’ which is supported for compatibility with the Unix standard.
Matches a string of characters that belong to a specified set.
See String Input Conversions. The presence of the ‘l’ modifier
determines whether the output is stored as a wide character string or a
multibyte string. If ‘%[’ is used in a wide character function the
string is converted as with multiple calls to wcrtomb
into a
multibyte string. This means that the buffer must provide room for
MB_CUR_MAX
bytes for each wide character read. In case
‘%l[’ is used in a multibyte function the result is converted into
wide characters as with multiple calls of mbrtowc
before being
stored in the user provided buffer.
Matches a string of one or more characters; the number of characters read is controlled by the maximum field width given for the conversion. See String Input Conversions.
If ‘%c’ is used in a wide stream function the read value is
converted from a wide character to the corresponding multibyte character
before storing it. Note that this conversion can produce more than one
byte of output and therefore the provided buffer must be large enough for up
to MB_CUR_MAX
bytes for each character. If ‘%lc’ is used in
a multibyte function the input is treated as a multibyte sequence (and
not bytes) and the result is converted as with calls to mbrtowc
.
This is an alias for ‘%lc’ which is supported for compatibility with the Unix standard.
Matches a pointer value in the same implementation-defined format used
by the ‘%p’ output conversion for printf
. See Other Input Conversions.
This conversion doesn’t read any characters; it records the number of characters read so far by this call. See Other Input Conversions.
This matches a literal ‘%’ character in the input stream. No corresponding argument is used. See Other Input Conversions.
If the syntax of a conversion specification is invalid, the behavior is undefined. If there aren’t enough function arguments provided to supply addresses for all the conversion specifications in the template strings that perform assignments, or if the arguments are not of the correct types, the behavior is also undefined. On the other hand, extra arguments are simply ignored.
Next: String Input Conversions, Previous: Table of Input Conversions, Up: Formatted Input [Contents][Index]
This section describes the scanf
conversions for reading numeric
values.
The ‘%d’ conversion matches an optionally signed integer in decimal
radix. The syntax that is recognized is the same as that for the
strtol
function (see Parsing of Integers) with the value
10
for the base argument.
The ‘%i’ conversion matches an optionally signed integer in any of
the formats that the C language defines for specifying an integer
constant. The syntax that is recognized is the same as that for the
strtol
function (see Parsing of Integers) with the value
0
for the base argument. (You can print integers in this
syntax with printf
by using the ‘#’ flag character with the
‘%x’, ‘%o’, ‘%b’, or ‘%d’ conversion.
See Integer Conversions.)
For example, any of the strings ‘10’, ‘0xa’, or ‘012’
could be read in as integers under the ‘%i’ conversion. Each of
these specifies a number with decimal value 10
.
The ‘%b’, ‘%o’, ‘%u’, and ‘%x’ conversions match unsigned
integers in binary, octal, decimal, and hexadecimal radices, respectively. The
syntax that is recognized is the same as that for the strtoul
function (see Parsing of Integers) with the appropriate value
(2
, 8
, 10
, or 16
) for the base
argument. The ‘%b’ conversion accepts an optional leading
‘0b’ or ‘0B’ in all standards modes.
The ‘%X’ conversion is identical to the ‘%x’ conversion. They both permit either uppercase or lowercase letters to be used as digits.
The default type of the corresponding argument for the %d
,
%i
, and %n
conversions is int *
, and
unsigned int *
for the other integer conversions. You can use
the following type modifiers to specify other sizes of integer:
Specifies that the argument is a signed char *
or unsigned
char *
.
This modifier was introduced in ISO C99.
Specifies that the argument is a short int *
or unsigned
short int *
.
Specifies that the argument is a intmax_t *
or uintmax_t *
.
This modifier was introduced in ISO C99.
Specifies that the argument is a long int *
or unsigned
long int *
. Two ‘l’ characters is like the ‘L’ modifier, below.
If used with ‘%c’ or ‘%s’ the corresponding parameter is considered as a pointer to a wide character or wide character string respectively. This use of ‘l’ was introduced in Amendment 1 to ISO C90.
Specifies that the argument is a long long int *
or unsigned long long int *
. (The long long
type is an extension supported by the
GNU C compiler. For systems that don’t provide extra-long integers, this
is the same as long int
.)
The ‘q’ modifier is another name for the same thing, which comes
from 4.4 BSD; a long long int
is sometimes called a “quad”
int
.
Specifies that the argument is a ptrdiff_t *
.
This modifier was introduced in ISO C99.
Specifies that the argument is a size_t *
.
This modifier was introduced in ISO C99.
All of the ‘%e’, ‘%f’, ‘%g’, ‘%E’, ‘%F’ and ‘%G’
input conversions are interchangeable. They all match an optionally
signed floating point number, in the same syntax as for the
strtod
function (see Parsing of Floats).
For the floating-point input conversions, the default argument type is
float *
. (This is different from the corresponding output
conversions, where the default type is double
; remember that
float
arguments to printf
are converted to double
by the default argument promotions, but float *
arguments are
not promoted to double *
.) You can specify other sizes of float
using these type modifiers:
Specifies that the argument is of type double *
.
Specifies that the argument is of type long double *
.
For all the above number parsing formats there is an additional optional
flag ‘'’. When this flag is given the scanf
function
expects the number represented in the input string to be formatted
according to the grouping rules of the currently selected locale
(see Generic Numeric Formatting Parameters).
If the "C"
or "POSIX"
locale is selected there is no
difference. But for a locale which specifies values for the appropriate
fields in the locale the input must have the correct form in the input.
Otherwise the longest prefix with a correct form is processed.
Next: Dynamically Allocating String Conversions, Previous: Numeric Input Conversions, Up: Formatted Input [Contents][Index]
This section describes the scanf
input conversions for reading
string and character values: ‘%s’, ‘%S’, ‘%[’, ‘%c’,
and ‘%C’.
You have two options for how to receive the input from these conversions:
char *
or wchar_t *
(the
latter if the ‘l’ modifier is present).
Warning: To make a robust program, you must make sure that the input (plus its terminating null) cannot possibly exceed the size of the buffer you provide. In general, the only way to do this is to specify a maximum field width one less than the buffer size. If you provide the buffer, always specify a maximum field width to prevent overflow.
scanf
to allocate a big enough buffer, by specifying the
‘a’ flag character. This is a GNU extension. You should provide
an argument of type char **
for the buffer address to be stored
in. See Dynamically Allocating String Conversions.
The ‘%c’ conversion is the simplest: it matches a fixed number of characters, always. The maximum field width says how many characters to read; if you don’t specify the maximum, the default is 1. This conversion doesn’t append a null character to the end of the text it reads. It also does not skip over initial whitespace characters. It reads precisely the next n characters, and fails if it cannot get that many. Since there is always a maximum field width with ‘%c’ (whether specified, or 1 by default), you can always prevent overflow by making the buffer long enough.
If the format is ‘%lc’ or ‘%C’ the function stores wide
characters which are converted using the conversion determined at the
time the stream was opened from the external byte stream. The number of
bytes read from the medium is limited by MB_CUR_LEN * n
but
at most n wide characters get stored in the output string.
The ‘%s’ conversion matches a string of non-whitespace characters. It skips and discards initial whitespace, but stops when it encounters more whitespace after having read something. It stores a null character at the end of the text that it reads.
For example, reading the input:
hello, world
with the conversion ‘%10c’ produces " hello, wo"
, but
reading the same input with the conversion ‘%10s’ produces
"hello,"
.
Warning: If you do not specify a field width for ‘%s’, then the number of characters read is limited only by where the next whitespace character appears. This almost certainly means that invalid input can make your program crash—which is a bug.
The ‘%ls’ and ‘%S’ format are handled just like ‘%s’
except that the external byte sequence is converted using the conversion
associated with the stream to wide characters with their own encoding.
A width or precision specified with the format do not directly determine
how many bytes are read from the stream since they measure wide
characters. But an upper limit can be computed by multiplying the value
of the width or precision by MB_CUR_MAX
.
To read in characters that belong to an arbitrary set of your choice, use the ‘%[’ conversion. You specify the set between the ‘[’ character and a following ‘]’ character, using the same syntax used in regular expressions for explicit sets of characters. As special cases:
The ‘%[’ conversion does not skip over initial whitespace characters.
Note that the character class syntax available in character sets that appear inside regular expressions (such as ‘[:alpha:]’) is not available in the ‘%[’ conversion.
Here are some examples of ‘%[’ conversions and what they mean:
Matches a string of up to 25 digits.
Matches a string of up to 25 square brackets.
Matches a string up to 25 characters long that doesn’t contain any of the standard whitespace characters. This is slightly different from ‘%s’, because if the input begins with a whitespace character, ‘%[’ reports a matching failure while ‘%s’ simply discards the initial whitespace.
Matches up to 25 lowercase characters.
As for ‘%c’ and ‘%s’ the ‘%[’ format is also modified to produce wide characters if the ‘l’ modifier is present. All what is said about ‘%ls’ above is true for ‘%l[’.
One more reminder: the ‘%s’ and ‘%[’ conversions are dangerous if you don’t specify a maximum width or use the ‘a’ flag, because input too long would overflow whatever buffer you have provided for it. No matter how long your buffer is, a user could supply input that is longer. A well-written program reports invalid input with a comprehensible error message, not with a crash.
Next: Other Input Conversions, Previous: String Input Conversions, Up: Formatted Input [Contents][Index]
A GNU extension to formatted input lets you safely read a string with no
maximum size. Using this feature, you don’t supply a buffer; instead,
scanf
allocates a buffer big enough to hold the data and gives
you its address. To use this feature, write ‘a’ as a flag
character, as in ‘%as’ or ‘%a[0-9a-z]’.
The pointer argument you supply for where to store the input should have
type char **
. The scanf
function allocates a buffer and
stores its address in the word that the argument points to. You should
free the buffer with free
when you no longer need it.
Here is an example of using the ‘a’ flag with the ‘%[…]’ conversion specification to read a “variable assignment” of the form ‘variable = value’.
{ char *variable, *value; if (2 > scanf ("%a[a-zA-Z0-9] = %a[^\n]\n", &variable, &value)) { invalid_input_error (); return 0; } … }
Next: Formatted Input Functions, Previous: Dynamically Allocating String Conversions, Up: Formatted Input [Contents][Index]
This section describes the miscellaneous input conversions.
The ‘%p’ conversion is used to read a pointer value. It recognizes
the same syntax used by the ‘%p’ output conversion for
printf
(see Other Output Conversions); that is, a hexadecimal
number just as the ‘%x’ conversion accepts. The corresponding
argument should be of type void **
; that is, the address of a
place to store a pointer.
The resulting pointer value is not guaranteed to be valid if it was not originally written during the same program execution that reads it in.
The ‘%n’ conversion produces the number of characters read so far
by this call. The corresponding argument should be of type int *
,
unless a type modifier is in effect (see Numeric Input Conversions).
This conversion works in the same way as the ‘%n’ conversion for
printf
; see Other Output Conversions, for an example.
The ‘%n’ conversion is the only mechanism for determining the
success of literal matches or conversions with suppressed assignments.
If the ‘%n’ follows the locus of a matching failure, then no value
is stored for it since scanf
returns before processing the
‘%n’. If you store -1
in that argument slot before calling
scanf
, the presence of -1
after scanf
indicates an
error occurred before the ‘%n’ was reached.
Finally, the ‘%%’ conversion matches a literal ‘%’ character in the input stream, without using an argument. This conversion does not permit any flags, field width, or type modifier to be specified.
Next: Variable Arguments Input Functions, Previous: Other Input Conversions, Up: Formatted Input [Contents][Index]
Here are the descriptions of the functions for performing formatted input. Prototypes for these functions are in the header file stdio.h.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe locale | AS-Unsafe corrupt heap | AC-Unsafe mem lock corrupt | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The scanf
function reads formatted input from the stream
stdin
under the control of the template string template.
The optional arguments are pointers to the places which receive the
resulting values.
The return value is normally the number of successful assignments. If
an end-of-file condition is detected before any matches are performed,
including matches against whitespace and literal characters in the
template, then EOF
is returned.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe locale | AS-Unsafe corrupt heap | AC-Unsafe mem lock corrupt | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The wscanf
function reads formatted input from the stream
stdin
under the control of the template string template.
The optional arguments are pointers to the places which receive the
resulting values.
The return value is normally the number of successful assignments. If
an end-of-file condition is detected before any matches are performed,
including matches against whitespace and literal characters in the
template, then WEOF
is returned.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe locale | AS-Unsafe corrupt heap | AC-Unsafe mem lock corrupt | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This function is just like scanf
, except that the input is read
from the stream stream instead of stdin
.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe locale | AS-Unsafe corrupt heap | AC-Unsafe mem lock corrupt | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This function is just like wscanf
, except that the input is read
from the stream stream instead of stdin
.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe locale | AS-Unsafe heap | AC-Unsafe mem | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This is like scanf
, except that the characters are taken from the
null-terminated string s instead of from a stream. Reaching the
end of the string is treated as an end-of-file condition.
The behavior of this function is undefined if copying takes place between objects that overlap—for example, if s is also given as an argument to receive a string read under control of the ‘%s’, ‘%S’, or ‘%[’ conversion.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe locale | AS-Unsafe heap | AC-Unsafe mem | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This is like wscanf
, except that the characters are taken from the
null-terminated string ws instead of from a stream. Reaching the
end of the string is treated as an end-of-file condition.
The behavior of this function is undefined if copying takes place between objects that overlap—for example, if ws is also given as an argument to receive a string read under control of the ‘%s’, ‘%S’, or ‘%[’ conversion.
Previous: Formatted Input Functions, Up: Formatted Input [Contents][Index]
The functions vscanf
and friends are provided so that you can
define your own variadic scanf
-like functions that make use of
the same internals as the built-in formatted output functions.
These functions are analogous to the vprintf
series of output
functions. See Variable Arguments Output Functions, for important
information on how to use them.
Portability Note: The functions listed in this section were introduced in ISO C99 and were before available as GNU extensions.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe locale | AS-Unsafe corrupt heap | AC-Unsafe mem lock corrupt | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This function is similar to scanf
, but instead of taking
a variable number of arguments directly, it takes an argument list
pointer ap of type va_list
(see Variadic Functions).
Preliminary: | MT-Safe locale | AS-Unsafe corrupt heap | AC-Unsafe mem lock corrupt | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This function is similar to wscanf
, but instead of taking
a variable number of arguments directly, it takes an argument list
pointer ap of type va_list
(see Variadic Functions).
Preliminary: | MT-Safe locale | AS-Unsafe corrupt heap | AC-Unsafe mem lock corrupt | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This is the equivalent of fscanf
with the variable argument list
specified directly as for vscanf
.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe locale | AS-Unsafe corrupt heap | AC-Unsafe mem lock corrupt | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This is the equivalent of fwscanf
with the variable argument list
specified directly as for vwscanf
.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe locale | AS-Unsafe heap | AC-Unsafe mem | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This is the equivalent of sscanf
with the variable argument list
specified directly as for vscanf
.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe locale | AS-Unsafe heap | AC-Unsafe mem | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This is the equivalent of swscanf
with the variable argument list
specified directly as for vwscanf
.
In GNU C, there is a special construct you can use to let the compiler
know that a function uses a scanf
-style format string. Then it
can check the number and types of arguments in each call to the
function, and warn you when they do not match the format string.
For details, see Declaring Attributes of Functions in Using GNU CC.
Next: Recovering from errors, Previous: Formatted Input, Up: Input/Output on Streams [Contents][Index]
Many of the functions described in this chapter return the value of the
macro EOF
to indicate unsuccessful completion of the operation.
Since EOF
is used to report both end of file and random errors,
it’s often better to use the feof
function to check explicitly
for end of file and ferror
to check for errors. These functions
check indicators that are part of the internal state of the stream
object, indicators set if the appropriate condition was detected by a
previous I/O operation on that stream.
This macro is an integer value that is returned by a number of narrow
stream functions to indicate an end-of-file condition, or some other
error situation. With the GNU C Library, EOF
is -1
. In
other libraries, its value may be some other negative number.
This symbol is declared in stdio.h.
This macro is an integer value that is returned by a number of wide
stream functions to indicate an end-of-file condition, or some other
error situation. With the GNU C Library, WEOF
is -1
. In
other libraries, its value may be some other negative number.
This symbol is declared in wchar.h.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Unsafe lock | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The feof
function returns nonzero if and only if the end-of-file
indicator for the stream stream is set.
This symbol is declared in stdio.h.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The feof_unlocked
function is equivalent to the feof
function except that it does not implicitly lock the stream.
This function is a GNU extension.
This symbol is declared in stdio.h.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Unsafe lock | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The ferror
function returns nonzero if and only if the error
indicator for the stream stream is set, indicating that an error
has occurred on a previous operation on the stream.
This symbol is declared in stdio.h.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The ferror_unlocked
function is equivalent to the ferror
function except that it does not implicitly lock the stream.
This function is a GNU extension.
This symbol is declared in stdio.h.
In addition to setting the error indicator associated with the stream,
the functions that operate on streams also set errno
in the same
way as the corresponding low-level functions that operate on file
descriptors. For example, all of the functions that perform output to a
stream—such as fputc
, printf
, and fflush
—are
implemented in terms of write
, and all of the errno
error
conditions defined for write
are meaningful for these functions.
For more information about the descriptor-level I/O functions, see
Low-Level Input/Output.
Next: Text and Binary Streams, Previous: End-Of-File and Errors, Up: Input/Output on Streams [Contents][Index]
You may explicitly clear the error and EOF flags with the clearerr
function.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Unsafe lock | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This function clears the end-of-file and error indicators for the stream stream.
The file positioning functions (see File Positioning) also clear the end-of-file indicator for the stream.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe race:stream | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The clearerr_unlocked
function is equivalent to the clearerr
function except that it does not implicitly lock the stream.
This function is a GNU extension.
Note that it is not correct to just clear the error flag and retry a failed stream operation. After a failed write, any number of characters since the last buffer flush may have been committed to the file, while some buffered data may have been discarded. Merely retrying can thus cause lost or repeated data.
A failed read may leave the file pointer in an inappropriate position for a second try. In both cases, you should seek to a known position before retrying.
Most errors that can happen are not recoverable — a second try will always fail again in the same way. So usually it is best to give up and report the error to the user, rather than install complicated recovery logic.
One important exception is EINTR
(see Primitives Interrupted by Signals).
Many stream I/O implementations will treat it as an ordinary error, which
can be quite inconvenient. You can avoid this hassle by installing all
signals with the SA_RESTART
flag.
For similar reasons, setting nonblocking I/O on a stream’s file descriptor is not usually advisable.
Next: File Positioning, Previous: Recovering from errors, Up: Input/Output on Streams [Contents][Index]
GNU systems and other POSIX-compatible operating systems organize all files as uniform sequences of characters. However, some other systems make a distinction between files containing text and files containing binary data, and the input and output facilities of ISO C provide for this distinction. This section tells you how to write programs portable to such systems.
When you open a stream, you can specify either a text stream or a
binary stream. You indicate that you want a binary stream by
specifying the ‘b’ modifier in the opentype argument to
fopen
; see Opening Streams. Without this
option, fopen
opens the file as a text stream.
Text and binary streams differ in several ways:
'\n'
) characters, while a binary stream is
simply a long series of characters. A text stream might on some systems
fail to handle lines more than 254 characters long (including the
terminating newline character).
Since a binary stream is always more capable and more predictable than a text stream, you might wonder what purpose text streams serve. Why not simply always use binary streams? The answer is that on these operating systems, text and binary streams use different file formats, and the only way to read or write “an ordinary file of text” that can work with other text-oriented programs is through a text stream.
In the GNU C Library, and on all POSIX systems, there is no difference between text streams and binary streams. When you open a stream, you get the same kind of stream regardless of whether you ask for binary. This stream can handle any file content, and has none of the restrictions that text streams sometimes have.
Next: Portable File-Position Functions, Previous: Text and Binary Streams, Up: Input/Output on Streams [Contents][Index]
The file position of a stream describes where in the file the stream is currently reading or writing. I/O on the stream advances the file position through the file. On GNU systems, the file position is represented as an integer, which counts the number of bytes from the beginning of the file. See File Position.
During I/O to an ordinary disk file, you can change the file position whenever you wish, so as to read or write any portion of the file. Some other kinds of files may also permit this. Files which support changing the file position are sometimes referred to as random-access files.
You can use the functions in this section to examine or modify the file position indicator associated with a stream. The symbols listed below are declared in the header file stdio.h.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Unsafe corrupt | AC-Unsafe lock corrupt | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This function returns the current file position of the stream stream.
This function can fail if the stream doesn’t support file positioning,
or if the file position can’t be represented in a long int
, and
possibly for other reasons as well. If a failure occurs, a value of
-1
is returned.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Unsafe corrupt | AC-Unsafe lock corrupt | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The ftello
function is similar to ftell
, except that it
returns a value of type off_t
. Systems which support this type
use it to describe all file positions, unlike the POSIX specification
which uses a long int. The two are not necessarily the same size.
Therefore, using ftell can lead to problems if the implementation is
written on top of a POSIX compliant low-level I/O implementation, and using
ftello
is preferable whenever it is available.
If this function fails it returns (off_t) -1
. This can happen due
to missing support for file positioning or internal errors. Otherwise
the return value is the current file position.
The function is an extension defined in the Unix Single Specification version 2.
When the sources are compiled with _FILE_OFFSET_BITS == 64
on a
32 bit system this function is in fact ftello64
. I.e., the
LFS interface transparently replaces the old interface.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Unsafe corrupt | AC-Unsafe lock corrupt | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This function is similar to ftello
with the only difference that
the return value is of type off64_t
. This also requires that the
stream stream was opened using either fopen64
,
freopen64
, or tmpfile64
since otherwise the underlying
file operations to position the file pointer beyond the 2^31
bytes limit might fail.
If the sources are compiled with _FILE_OFFSET_BITS == 64
on a 32
bits machine this function is available under the name ftello
and so transparently replaces the old interface.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Unsafe corrupt | AC-Unsafe lock corrupt | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The fseek
function is used to change the file position of the
stream stream. The value of whence must be one of the
constants SEEK_SET
, SEEK_CUR
, or SEEK_END
, to
indicate whether the offset is relative to the beginning of the
file, the current file position, or the end of the file, respectively.
This function returns a value of zero if the operation was successful,
and a nonzero value to indicate failure. A successful call also clears
the end-of-file indicator of stream and discards any characters
that were “pushed back” by the use of ungetc
.
fseek
either flushes any buffered output before setting the file
position or else remembers it so it will be written later in its proper
place in the file.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Unsafe corrupt | AC-Unsafe lock corrupt | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This function is similar to fseek
but it corrects a problem with
fseek
in a system with POSIX types. Using a value of type
long int
for the offset is not compatible with POSIX.
fseeko
uses the correct type off_t
for the offset
parameter.
For this reason it is a good idea to prefer ftello
whenever it is
available since its functionality is (if different at all) closer the
underlying definition.
The functionality and return value are the same as for fseek
.
The function is an extension defined in the Unix Single Specification version 2.
When the sources are compiled with _FILE_OFFSET_BITS == 64
on a
32 bit system this function is in fact fseeko64
. I.e., the
LFS interface transparently replaces the old interface.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Unsafe corrupt | AC-Unsafe lock corrupt | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This function is similar to fseeko
with the only difference that
the offset parameter is of type off64_t
. This also
requires that the stream stream was opened using either
fopen64
, freopen64
, or tmpfile64
since otherwise
the underlying file operations to position the file pointer beyond the
2^31 bytes limit might fail.
If the sources are compiled with _FILE_OFFSET_BITS == 64
on a 32
bits machine this function is available under the name fseeko
and so transparently replaces the old interface.
Portability Note: In non-POSIX systems, ftell
,
ftello
, fseek
and fseeko
might work reliably only
on binary streams. See Text and Binary Streams.
The following symbolic constants are defined for use as the whence
argument to fseek
. They are also used with the lseek
function (see Input and Output Primitives) and to specify offsets for file locks
(see Control Operations on Files).
This is an integer constant which, when used as the whence
argument to the fseek
or fseeko
functions, specifies that
the offset provided is relative to the beginning of the file.
This is an integer constant which, when used as the whence
argument to the fseek
or fseeko
functions, specifies that
the offset provided is relative to the current file position.
This is an integer constant which, when used as the whence
argument to the fseek
or fseeko
functions, specifies that
the offset provided is relative to the end of the file.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Unsafe corrupt | AC-Unsafe lock corrupt | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The rewind
function positions the stream stream at the
beginning of the file. It is equivalent to calling fseek
or
fseeko
on the stream with an offset argument of
0L
and a whence argument of SEEK_SET
, except that
the return value is discarded and the error indicator for the stream is
reset.
These three aliases for the ‘SEEK_…’ constants exist for the sake of compatibility with older BSD systems. They are defined in two different header files: fcntl.h and sys/file.h.
Next: Stream Buffering, Previous: File Positioning, Up: Input/Output on Streams [Contents][Index]
On GNU systems, the file position is truly a character count. You
can specify any character count value as an argument to fseek
or
fseeko
and get reliable results for any random access file.
However, some ISO C systems do not represent file positions in this
way.
On some systems where text streams truly differ from binary streams, it is impossible to represent the file position of a text stream as a count of characters from the beginning of the file. For example, the file position on some systems must encode both a record offset within the file, and a character offset within the record.
As a consequence, if you want your programs to be portable to these systems, you must observe certain rules:
ftell
on a text stream has no predictable
relationship to the number of characters you have read so far. The only
thing you can rely on is that you can use it subsequently as the
offset argument to fseek
or fseeko
to move back to
the same file position.
fseek
or fseeko
on a text stream, either the
offset must be zero, or whence must be SEEK_SET
and
the offset must be the result of an earlier call to ftell
on the same stream.
ungetc
that haven’t been read or discarded. See Unreading.
But even if you observe these rules, you may still have trouble for long
files, because ftell
and fseek
use a long int
value
to represent the file position. This type may not have room to encode
all the file positions in a large file. Using the ftello
and
fseeko
functions might help here since the off_t
type is
expected to be able to hold all file position values but this still does
not help to handle additional information which must be associated with
a file position.
So if you do want to support systems with peculiar encodings for the
file positions, it is better to use the functions fgetpos
and
fsetpos
instead. These functions represent the file position
using the data type fpos_t
, whose internal representation varies
from system to system.
These symbols are declared in the header file stdio.h.
This is the type of an object that can encode information about the
file position of a stream, for use by the functions fgetpos
and
fsetpos
.
In the GNU C Library, fpos_t
is an opaque data structure that
contains internal data to represent file offset and conversion state
information. In other systems, it might have a different internal
representation.
When compiling with _FILE_OFFSET_BITS == 64
on a 32 bit machine
this type is in fact equivalent to fpos64_t
since the LFS
interface transparently replaces the old interface.
This is the type of an object that can encode information about the
file position of a stream, for use by the functions fgetpos64
and
fsetpos64
.
In the GNU C Library, fpos64_t
is an opaque data structure that
contains internal data to represent file offset and conversion state
information. In other systems, it might have a different internal
representation.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Unsafe corrupt | AC-Unsafe lock corrupt | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This function stores the value of the file position indicator for the
stream stream in the fpos_t
object pointed to by
position. If successful, fgetpos
returns zero; otherwise
it returns a nonzero value and stores an implementation-defined positive
value in errno
.
When the sources are compiled with _FILE_OFFSET_BITS == 64
on a
32 bit system the function is in fact fgetpos64
. I.e., the LFS
interface transparently replaces the old interface.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Unsafe corrupt | AC-Unsafe lock corrupt | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This function is similar to fgetpos
but the file position is
returned in a variable of type fpos64_t
to which position
points.
If the sources are compiled with _FILE_OFFSET_BITS == 64
on a 32
bits machine this function is available under the name fgetpos
and so transparently replaces the old interface.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Unsafe corrupt | AC-Unsafe lock corrupt | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This function sets the file position indicator for the stream stream
to the position position, which must have been set by a previous
call to fgetpos
on the same stream. If successful, fsetpos
clears the end-of-file indicator on the stream, discards any characters
that were “pushed back” by the use of ungetc
, and returns a value
of zero. Otherwise, fsetpos
returns a nonzero value and stores
an implementation-defined positive value in errno
.
When the sources are compiled with _FILE_OFFSET_BITS == 64
on a
32 bit system the function is in fact fsetpos64
. I.e., the LFS
interface transparently replaces the old interface.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Unsafe corrupt | AC-Unsafe lock corrupt | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This function is similar to fsetpos
but the file position used
for positioning is provided in a variable of type fpos64_t
to
which position points.
If the sources are compiled with _FILE_OFFSET_BITS == 64
on a 32
bits machine this function is available under the name fsetpos
and so transparently replaces the old interface.
Next: Other Kinds of Streams, Previous: Portable File-Position Functions, Up: Input/Output on Streams [Contents][Index]
Characters that are written to a stream are normally accumulated and transmitted asynchronously to the file in a block, instead of appearing as soon as they are output by the application program. Similarly, streams often retrieve input from the host environment in blocks rather than on a character-by-character basis. This is called buffering.
If you are writing programs that do interactive input and output using streams, you need to understand how buffering works when you design the user interface to your program. Otherwise, you might find that output (such as progress or prompt messages) doesn’t appear when you intended it to, or displays some other unexpected behavior.
This section deals only with controlling when characters are transmitted between the stream and the file or device, and not with how things like echoing, flow control, and the like are handled on specific classes of devices. For information on common control operations on terminal devices, see Low-Level Terminal Interface.
You can bypass the stream buffering facilities altogether by using the low-level input and output functions that operate on file descriptors instead. See Low-Level Input/Output.
Next: Flushing Buffers, Up: Stream Buffering [Contents][Index]
There are three different kinds of buffering strategies:
Newly opened streams are normally fully buffered, with one exception: a stream connected to an interactive device such as a terminal is initially line buffered. See Controlling Which Kind of Buffering, for information on how to select a different kind of buffering. Usually the automatic selection gives you the most convenient kind of buffering for the file or device you open.
The use of line buffering for interactive devices implies that output
messages ending in a newline will appear immediately—which is usually
what you want. Output that doesn’t end in a newline might or might not
show up immediately, so if you want them to appear immediately, you
should flush buffered output explicitly with fflush
, as described
in Flushing Buffers.
Next: Controlling Which Kind of Buffering, Previous: Buffering Concepts, Up: Stream Buffering [Contents][Index]
Flushing output on a buffered stream means transmitting all accumulated characters to the file. There are many circumstances when buffered output on a stream is flushed automatically:
exit
.
See Normal Termination.
If you want to flush the buffered output at another time, call
fflush
, which is declared in the header file stdio.h.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Unsafe corrupt | AC-Unsafe lock corrupt | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This function causes any buffered output on stream to be delivered
to the file. If stream is a null pointer, then
fflush
causes buffered output on all open output streams
to be flushed.
This function returns EOF
if a write error occurs, or zero
otherwise.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe race:stream | AS-Unsafe corrupt | AC-Unsafe corrupt | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The fflush_unlocked
function is equivalent to the fflush
function except that it does not implicitly lock the stream.
The fflush
function can be used to flush all streams currently
opened. While this is useful in some situations it does often more than
necessary since it might be done in situations when terminal input is
required and the program wants to be sure that all output is visible on
the terminal. But this means that only line buffered streams have to be
flushed. Solaris introduced a function especially for this. It was
always available in the GNU C Library in some form but never officially
exported.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Unsafe corrupt | AC-Unsafe lock corrupt | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The _flushlbf
function flushes all line buffered streams
currently opened.
This function is declared in the stdio_ext.h header.
Compatibility Note: Some brain-damaged operating systems have been known to be so thoroughly fixated on line-oriented input and output that flushing a line buffered stream causes a newline to be written! Fortunately, this “feature” seems to be becoming less common. You do not need to worry about this with the GNU C Library.
In some situations it might be useful to not flush the output pending for a stream but instead simply forget it. If transmission is costly and the output is not needed anymore this is valid reasoning. In this situation a non-standard function introduced in Solaris and available in the GNU C Library can be used.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe race:stream | AS-Unsafe corrupt | AC-Unsafe corrupt | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The __fpurge
function causes the buffer of the stream
stream to be emptied. If the stream is currently in read mode all
input in the buffer is lost. If the stream is in output mode the
buffered output is not written to the device (or whatever other
underlying storage) and the buffer is cleared.
This function is declared in stdio_ext.h.
Previous: Flushing Buffers, Up: Stream Buffering [Contents][Index]
After opening a stream (but before any other operations have been
performed on it), you can explicitly specify what kind of buffering you
want it to have using the setvbuf
function.
The facilities listed in this section are declared in the header file stdio.h.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Unsafe corrupt | AC-Unsafe lock corrupt | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This function is used to specify that the stream stream should
have the buffering mode mode, which can be either _IOFBF
(for full buffering), _IOLBF
(for line buffering), or
_IONBF
(for unbuffered input/output).
If you specify a null pointer as the buf argument, then setvbuf
allocates a buffer itself using malloc
. This buffer will be freed
when you close the stream.
Otherwise, buf should be a character array that can hold at least
size characters. You should not free the space for this array as
long as the stream remains open and this array remains its buffer. You
should usually either allocate it statically, or malloc
(see Unconstrained Allocation) the buffer. Using an automatic array
is not a good idea unless you close the file before exiting the block
that declares the array.
While the array remains a stream buffer, the stream I/O functions will use the buffer for their internal purposes. You shouldn’t try to access the values in the array directly while the stream is using it for buffering.
The setvbuf
function returns zero on success, or a nonzero value
if the value of mode is not valid or if the request could not
be honored.
The value of this macro is an integer constant expression that can be
used as the mode argument to the setvbuf
function to
specify that the stream should be fully buffered.
The value of this macro is an integer constant expression that can be
used as the mode argument to the setvbuf
function to
specify that the stream should be line buffered.
The value of this macro is an integer constant expression that can be
used as the mode argument to the setvbuf
function to
specify that the stream should be unbuffered.
The value of this macro is an integer constant expression that is good
to use for the size argument to setvbuf
. This value is
guaranteed to be at least 256
.
The value of BUFSIZ
is chosen on each system so as to make stream
I/O efficient. So it is a good idea to use BUFSIZ
as the size
for the buffer when you call setvbuf
.
Actually, you can get an even better value to use for the buffer size
by means of the fstat
system call: it is found in the
st_blksize
field of the file attributes. See The meaning of the File Attributes.
Sometimes people also use BUFSIZ
as the allocation size of
buffers used for related purposes, such as strings used to receive a
line of input with fgets
(see Character Input). There is no
particular reason to use BUFSIZ
for this instead of any other
integer, except that it might lead to doing I/O in chunks of an
efficient size.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Unsafe corrupt | AC-Unsafe lock corrupt | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
If buf is a null pointer, the effect of this function is
equivalent to calling setvbuf
with a mode argument of
_IONBF
. Otherwise, it is equivalent to calling setvbuf
with buf, and a mode of _IOFBF
and a size
argument of BUFSIZ
.
The setbuf
function is provided for compatibility with old code;
use setvbuf
in all new programs.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Unsafe corrupt | AC-Unsafe lock corrupt | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
If buf is a null pointer, this function makes stream unbuffered. Otherwise, it makes stream fully buffered using buf as the buffer. The size argument specifies the length of buf.
This function is provided for compatibility with old BSD code. Use
setvbuf
instead.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Unsafe corrupt | AC-Unsafe lock corrupt | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This function makes stream be line buffered, and allocates the buffer for you.
This function is provided for compatibility with old BSD code. Use
setvbuf
instead.
It is possible to query whether a given stream is line buffered or not using a non-standard function introduced in Solaris and available in the GNU C Library.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The __flbf
function will return a nonzero value in case the
stream stream is line buffered. Otherwise the return value is
zero.
This function is declared in the stdio_ext.h header.
Two more extensions allow to determine the size of the buffer and how much of it is used. These functions were also introduced in Solaris.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe race:stream | AS-Unsafe corrupt | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The __fbufsize
function return the size of the buffer in the
stream stream. This value can be used to optimize the use of the
stream.
This function is declared in the stdio_ext.h header.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe race:stream | AS-Unsafe corrupt | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The __fpending
function returns the number of bytes currently in the output buffer.
For wide-oriented streams the measuring unit is wide characters. This
function should not be used on buffers in read mode or opened read-only.
This function is declared in the stdio_ext.h header.
Next: Formatted Messages, Previous: Stream Buffering, Up: Input/Output on Streams [Contents][Index]
The GNU C Library provides ways for you to define additional kinds of streams that do not necessarily correspond to an open file.
One such type of stream takes input from or writes output to a string.
These kinds of streams are used internally to implement the
sprintf
and sscanf
functions. You can also create such a
stream explicitly, using the functions described in String Streams.
More generally, you can define streams that do input/output to arbitrary objects using functions supplied by your program. This protocol is discussed in Programming Your Own Custom Streams.
Portability Note: The facilities described in this section are specific to GNU. Other systems or C implementations might or might not provide equivalent functionality.
The fmemopen
and open_memstream
functions allow you to do
I/O to a string or memory buffer. These facilities are declared in
stdio.h.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Unsafe heap lock | AC-Unsafe mem lock | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This function opens a stream that allows the access specified by the opentype argument, that reads from or writes to the buffer specified by the argument buf. This array must be at least size bytes long.
If you specify a null pointer as the buf argument, fmemopen
dynamically allocates an array size bytes long (as with malloc
;
see Unconstrained Allocation). This is really only useful
if you are going to write things to the buffer and then read them back
in again, because you have no way of actually getting a pointer to the
buffer (for this, try open_memstream
, below). The buffer is
freed when the stream is closed.
The argument opentype is the same as in fopen
(see Opening Streams). If the opentype specifies
append mode, then the initial file position is set to the first null
character in the buffer. Otherwise the initial file position is at the
beginning of the buffer.
When a stream open for writing is flushed or closed, a null character (zero byte) is written at the end of the buffer if it fits. You should add an extra byte to the size argument to account for this. Attempts to write more than size bytes to the buffer result in an error.
For a stream open for reading, null characters (zero bytes) in the buffer do not count as “end of file”. Read operations indicate end of file only when the file position advances past size bytes. So, if you want to read characters from a null-terminated string, you should supply the length of the string as the size argument.
Here is an example of using fmemopen
to create a stream for
reading from a string:
#include <stdio.h> static char buffer[] = "foobar"; int main (void) { int ch; FILE *stream; stream = fmemopen (buffer, strlen (buffer), "r"); while ((ch = fgetc (stream)) != EOF) printf ("Got %c\n", ch); fclose (stream); return 0; }
This program produces the following output:
Got f Got o Got o Got b Got a Got r
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Unsafe heap | AC-Unsafe mem | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This function opens a stream for writing to a buffer. The buffer is
allocated dynamically and grown as necessary, using malloc
.
After you’ve closed the stream, this buffer is your responsibility to
clean up using free
or realloc
. See Unconstrained Allocation.
When the stream is closed with fclose
or flushed with
fflush
, the locations ptr and sizeloc are updated to
contain the pointer to the buffer and its size. The values thus stored
remain valid only as long as no further output on the stream takes
place. If you do more output, you must flush the stream again to store
new values before you use them again.
A null character is written at the end of the buffer. This null character is not included in the size value stored at sizeloc.
You can move the stream’s file position with fseek
or
fseeko
(see File Positioning). Moving the file position past
the end of the data already written fills the intervening space with
zeroes.
Here is an example of using open_memstream
:
#include <stdio.h> int main (void) { char *bp; size_t size; FILE *stream; stream = open_memstream (&bp, &size); fprintf (stream, "hello"); fflush (stream); printf ("buf = `%s', size = %zu\n", bp, size); fprintf (stream, ", world"); fclose (stream); printf ("buf = `%s', size = %zu\n", bp, size); return 0; }
This program produces the following output:
buf = `hello', size = 5 buf = `hello, world', size = 12
Previous: String Streams, Up: Other Kinds of Streams [Contents][Index]
This section describes how you can make a stream that gets input from an arbitrary data source or writes output to an arbitrary data sink programmed by you. We call these custom streams. The functions and types described here are all GNU extensions.
Inside every custom stream is a special object called the cookie.
This is an object supplied by you which records where to fetch or store
the data read or written. It is up to you to define a data type to use
for the cookie. The stream functions in the library never refer
directly to its contents, and they don’t even know what the type is;
they record its address with type void *
.
To implement a custom stream, you must specify how to fetch or store the data in the specified place. You do this by defining hook functions to read, write, change “file position”, and close the stream. All four of these functions will be passed the stream’s cookie so they can tell where to fetch or store the data. The library functions don’t know what’s inside the cookie, but your functions will know.
When you create a custom stream, you must specify the cookie pointer,
and also the four hook functions stored in a structure of type
cookie_io_functions_t
.
These facilities are declared in stdio.h.
This is a structure type that holds the functions that define the communications protocol between the stream and its cookie. It has the following members:
cookie_read_function_t *read
This is the function that reads data from the cookie. If the value is a
null pointer instead of a function, then read operations on this stream
always return EOF
.
cookie_write_function_t *write
This is the function that writes data to the cookie. If the value is a null pointer instead of a function, then data written to the stream is discarded.
cookie_seek_function_t *seek
This is the function that performs the equivalent of file positioning on
the cookie. If the value is a null pointer instead of a function, calls
to fseek
or fseeko
on this stream can only seek to
locations within the buffer; any attempt to seek outside the buffer will
return an ESPIPE
error.
cookie_close_function_t *close
This function performs any appropriate cleanup on the cookie when closing the stream. If the value is a null pointer instead of a function, nothing special is done to close the cookie when the stream is closed.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Unsafe heap lock | AC-Unsafe mem lock | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This function actually creates the stream for communicating with the
cookie using the functions in the io-functions argument.
The opentype argument is interpreted as for fopen
;
see Opening Streams. (But note that the “truncate on
open” option is ignored.) The new stream is fully buffered.
The fopencookie
function returns the newly created stream, or a null
pointer in case of an error.
Previous: Custom Streams and Cookies, Up: Programming Your Own Custom Streams [Contents][Index]
Here are more details on how you should define the four hook functions that a custom stream needs.
You should define the function to read data from the cookie as:
ssize_t reader (void *cookie, char *buffer, size_t size)
This is very similar to the read
function; see Input and Output Primitives. Your function should transfer up to size bytes into
the buffer, and return the number of bytes read, or zero to
indicate end-of-file. You can return a value of -1
to indicate
an error.
You should define the function to write data to the cookie as:
ssize_t writer (void *cookie, const char *buffer, size_t size)
This is very similar to the write
function; see Input and Output Primitives. Your function should transfer up to size bytes from
the buffer, and return the number of bytes written. You can return a
value of 0
to indicate an error. You must not return any
negative value.
You should define the function to perform seek operations on the cookie as:
int seeker (void *cookie, off64_t *position, int whence)
For this function, the position and whence arguments are
interpreted as for fgetpos
; see Portable File-Position Functions.
After doing the seek operation, your function should store the resulting
file position relative to the beginning of the file in position.
Your function should return a value of 0
on success and -1
to indicate an error.
You should define the function to do cleanup operations on the cookie appropriate for closing the stream as:
int cleaner (void *cookie)
Your function should return -1
to indicate an error, and 0
otherwise.
This is the data type that the read function for a custom stream should have. If you declare the function as shown above, this is the type it will have.
The data type of the write function for a custom stream.
The data type of the seek function for a custom stream.
The data type of the close function for a custom stream.
Previous: Other Kinds of Streams, Up: Input/Output on Streams [Contents][Index]
On systems which are based on System V messages of programs (especially
the system tools) are printed in a strict form using the fmtmsg
function. The uniformity sometimes helps the user to interpret messages
and the strictness tests of the fmtmsg
function ensure that the
programmer follows some minimal requirements.
Next: Adding Severity Classes, Up: Formatted Messages [Contents][Index]
Messages can be printed to standard error and/or to the console. To
select the destination the programmer can use the following two values,
bitwise OR combined if wanted, for the classification parameter of
fmtmsg
:
MM_PRINT
¶Display the message in standard error.
MM_CONSOLE
¶Display the message on the system console.
The erroneous piece of the system can be signalled by exactly one of the
following values which also is bitwise ORed with the
classification parameter to fmtmsg
:
MM_HARD
¶The source of the condition is some hardware.
MM_SOFT
¶The source of the condition is some software.
MM_FIRM
¶The source of the condition is some firmware.
A third component of the classification parameter to fmtmsg
can describe the part of the system which detects the problem. This is
done by using exactly one of the following values:
MM_APPL
¶The erroneous condition is detected by the application.
MM_UTIL
¶The erroneous condition is detected by a utility.
MM_OPSYS
¶The erroneous condition is detected by the operating system.
A last component of classification can signal the results of this message. Exactly one of the following values can be used:
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Unsafe lock | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
Display a message described by its parameters on the device(s) specified in the classification parameter. The label parameter identifies the source of the message. The string should consist of two colon separated parts where the first part has not more than 10 and the second part not more than 14 characters. The text parameter describes the condition of the error, the action parameter possible steps to recover from the error and the tag parameter is a reference to the online documentation where more information can be found. It should contain the label value and a unique identification number.
Each of the parameters can be a special value which means this value is to be omitted. The symbolic names for these values are:
MM_NULLLBL
¶Ignore label parameter.
MM_NULLSEV
¶Ignore severity parameter.
MM_NULLMC
¶Ignore classification parameter. This implies that nothing is actually printed.
MM_NULLTXT
¶Ignore text parameter.
MM_NULLACT
¶Ignore action parameter.
MM_NULLTAG
¶Ignore tag parameter.
There is another way certain fields can be omitted from the output to standard error. This is described below in the description of environment variables influencing the behavior.
The severity parameter can have one of the values in the following table:
MM_NOSEV
¶Nothing is printed, this value is the same as MM_NULLSEV
.
MM_HALT
¶This value is printed as HALT
.
MM_ERROR
¶This value is printed as ERROR
.
MM_WARNING
¶This value is printed as WARNING
.
MM_INFO
¶This value is printed as INFO
.
The numeric value of these five macros are between 0
and
4
. Using the environment variable SEV_LEVEL
or using the
addseverity
function one can add more severity levels with their
corresponding string to print. This is described below
(see Adding Severity Classes).
If no parameter is ignored the output looks like this:
label: severity-string: text TO FIX: action tag
The colons, new line characters and the TO FIX
string are
inserted if necessary, i.e., if the corresponding parameter is not
ignored.
This function is specified in the X/Open Portability Guide. It is also available on all systems derived from System V.
The function returns the value MM_OK
if no error occurred. If
only the printing to standard error failed, it returns MM_NOMSG
.
If printing to the console fails, it returns MM_NOCON
. If
nothing is printed MM_NOTOK
is returned. Among situations where
all outputs fail this last value is also returned if a parameter value
is incorrect.
There are two environment variables which influence the behavior of
fmtmsg
. The first is MSGVERB
. It is used to control the
output actually happening on standard error (not the console
output). Each of the five fields can explicitly be enabled. To do
this the user has to put the MSGVERB
variable with a format like
the following in the environment before calling the fmtmsg
function
the first time:
MSGVERB=keyword[:keyword[:…]]
Valid keywords are label
, severity
, text
,
action
, and tag
. If the environment variable is not given
or is the empty string, a not supported keyword is given or the value is
somehow else invalid, no part of the message is masked out.
The second environment variable which influences the behavior of
fmtmsg
is SEV_LEVEL
. This variable and the change in the
behavior of fmtmsg
is not specified in the X/Open Portability
Guide. It is available in System V systems, though. It can be used to
introduce new severity levels. By default, only the five severity levels
described above are available. Any other numeric value would make
fmtmsg
print nothing.
If the user puts SEV_LEVEL
with a format like
SEV_LEVEL=[description[:description[:…]]]
in the environment of the process before the first call to
fmtmsg
, where description has a value of the form
severity-keyword,level,printstring
The severity-keyword part is not used by fmtmsg
but it has
to be present. The level part is a string representation of a
number. The numeric value must be a number greater than 4. This value
must be used in the severity parameter of fmtmsg
to select
this class. It is not possible to overwrite any of the predefined
classes. The printstring is the string printed when a message of
this class is processed by fmtmsg
(see above, fmtsmg
does
not print the numeric value but instead the string representation).
Next: How to use fmtmsg
and addseverity
, Previous: Printing Formatted Messages, Up: Formatted Messages [Contents][Index]
There is another possibility to introduce severity classes besides using
the environment variable SEV_LEVEL
. This simplifies the task of
introducing new classes in a running program. One could use the
setenv
or putenv
function to set the environment variable,
but this is toilsome.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Unsafe heap lock | AC-Unsafe lock mem | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This function allows the introduction of new severity classes which can be
addressed by the severity parameter of the fmtmsg
function.
The severity parameter of addseverity
must match the value
for the parameter with the same name of fmtmsg
, and string
is the string printed in the actual messages instead of the numeric
value.
If string is NULL
the severity class with the numeric value
according to severity is removed.
It is not possible to overwrite or remove one of the default severity
classes. All calls to addseverity
with severity set to one
of the values for the default classes will fail.
The return value is MM_OK
if the task was successfully performed.
If the return value is MM_NOTOK
something went wrong. This could
mean that no more memory is available or a class is not available when
it has to be removed.
This function is not specified in the X/Open Portability Guide although
the fmtsmg
function is. It is available on System V systems.
Previous: Adding Severity Classes, Up: Formatted Messages [Contents][Index]
fmtmsg
and addseverity
Here is a simple example program to illustrate the use of both functions described in this section.
#include <fmtmsg.h> int main (void) { addseverity (5, "NOTE2"); fmtmsg (MM_PRINT, "only1field", MM_INFO, "text2", "action2", "tag2"); fmtmsg (MM_PRINT, "UX:cat", 5, "invalid syntax", "refer to manual", "UX:cat:001"); fmtmsg (MM_PRINT, "label:foo", 6, "text", "action", "tag"); return 0; }
The second call to fmtmsg
illustrates a use of this function as
it usually occurs on System V systems, which heavily use this function.
It seems worthwhile to give a short explanation here of how this system
works on System V. The value of the
label field (UX:cat
) says that the error occurred in the
Unix program cat
. The explanation of the error follows and the
value for the action parameter is "refer to manual"
. One
could be more specific here, if necessary. The tag field contains,
as proposed above, the value of the string given for the label
parameter, and additionally a unique ID (001
in this case). For
a GNU environment this string could contain a reference to the
corresponding node in the Info page for the program.
Running this program without specifying the MSGVERB
and
SEV_LEVEL
function produces the following output:
UX:cat: NOTE2: invalid syntax TO FIX: refer to manual UX:cat:001
We see the different fields of the message and how the extra glue (the
colons and the TO FIX
string) is printed. But only one of the
three calls to fmtmsg
produced output. The first call does not
print anything because the label parameter is not in the correct
form. The string must contain two fields, separated by a colon
(see Printing Formatted Messages). The third fmtmsg
call
produced no output since the class with the numeric value 6
is
not defined. Although a class with numeric value 5
is also not
defined by default, the call to addseverity
introduces it and
the second call to fmtmsg
produces the above output.
When we change the environment of the program to contain
SEV_LEVEL=XXX,6,NOTE
when running it we get a different result:
UX:cat: NOTE2: invalid syntax TO FIX: refer to manual UX:cat:001 label:foo: NOTE: text TO FIX: action tag
Now the third call to fmtmsg
produced some output and we see how
the string NOTE
from the environment variable appears in the
message.
Now we can reduce the output by specifying which fields we are
interested in. If we additionally set the environment variable
MSGVERB
to the value severity:label:action
we get the
following output:
UX:cat: NOTE2 TO FIX: refer to manual label:foo: NOTE TO FIX: action
I.e., the output produced by the text and the tag parameters
to fmtmsg
vanished. Please also note that now there is no colon
after the NOTE
and NOTE2
strings in the output. This is
not necessary since there is no more output on this line because the text
is missing.
Next: File System Interface, Previous: Input/Output on Streams, Up: Main Menu [Contents][Index]
This chapter describes functions for performing low-level input/output operations on file descriptors. These functions include the primitives for the higher-level I/O functions described in Input/Output on Streams, as well as functions for performing low-level control operations for which there are no equivalents on streams.
Stream-level I/O is more flexible and usually more convenient; therefore, programmers generally use the descriptor-level functions only when necessary. These are some of the usual reasons:
fileno
to get the descriptor
corresponding to a stream.)
Next: Input and Output Primitives, Up: Low-Level Input/Output [Contents][Index]
This section describes the primitives for opening and closing files
using file descriptors. The open
and creat
functions are
declared in the header file fcntl.h, while close
is
declared in unistd.h.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe fd | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The open
function creates and returns a new file descriptor for
the file named by filename. Initially, the file position
indicator for the file is at the beginning of the file. The argument
mode (see The Mode Bits for Access Permission) is used only when a file is
created, but it doesn’t hurt to supply the argument in any case.
The flags argument controls how the file is to be opened. This is a bit mask; you create the value by the bitwise OR of the appropriate parameters (using the ‘|’ operator in C). See File Status Flags, for the parameters available.
The normal return value from open
is a non-negative integer file
descriptor. In the case of an error, a value of -1 is returned
instead. In addition to the usual file name errors (see File Name Errors), the following errno
error conditions are defined
for this function:
EACCES
The file exists but is not readable/writable as requested by the flags argument, or the file does not exist and the directory is unwritable so it cannot be created.
EEXIST
Both O_CREAT
and O_EXCL
are set, and the named file already
exists.
EINTR
The open
operation was interrupted by a signal.
See Primitives Interrupted by Signals.
EISDIR
The flags argument specified write access, and the file is a directory.
EMFILE
The process has too many files open.
The maximum number of file descriptors is controlled by the
RLIMIT_NOFILE
resource limit; see Limiting Resource Usage.
ENFILE
The entire system, or perhaps the file system which contains the directory, cannot support any additional open files at the moment. (This problem cannot happen on GNU/Hurd systems.)
ENOENT
The named file does not exist, and O_CREAT
is not specified.
ENOSPC
The directory or file system that would contain the new file cannot be extended, because there is no disk space left.
ENXIO
O_NONBLOCK
and O_WRONLY
are both set in the flags
argument, the file named by filename is a FIFO (see Pipes and FIFOs), and no process has the file open for reading.
EROFS
The file resides on a read-only file system and any of O_WRONLY
,
O_RDWR
, and O_TRUNC
are set in the flags argument,
or O_CREAT
is set and the file does not already exist.
If on a 32 bit machine the sources are translated with
_FILE_OFFSET_BITS == 64
the function open
returns a file
descriptor opened in the large file mode which enables the file handling
functions to use files up to 2^63 bytes in size and offset from
-2^63 to 2^63. This happens transparently for the user
since all of the low-level file handling functions are equally replaced.
This function is a cancellation point in multi-threaded programs. This
is a problem if the thread allocates some resources (like memory, file
descriptors, semaphores or whatever) at the time open
is
called. If the thread gets canceled these resources stay allocated
until the program ends. To avoid this calls to open
should be
protected using cancellation handlers.
The open
function is the underlying primitive for the fopen
and freopen
functions, that create streams.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe fd | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This function is similar to open
. It returns a file descriptor
which can be used to access the file named by filename. The only
difference is that on 32 bit systems the file is opened in the
large file mode. I.e., file length and file offsets can exceed 31 bits.
When the sources are translated with _FILE_OFFSET_BITS == 64
this
function is actually available under the name open
. I.e., the
new, extended API using 64 bit file sizes and offsets transparently
replaces the old API.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe fd | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This function is obsolete. The call:
creat (filename, mode)
is equivalent to:
open (filename, O_WRONLY | O_CREAT | O_TRUNC, mode)
If on a 32 bit machine the sources are translated with
_FILE_OFFSET_BITS == 64
the function creat
returns a file
descriptor opened in the large file mode which enables the file handling
functions to use files up to 2^63 in size and offset from
-2^63 to 2^63. This happens transparently for the user
since all of the low-level file handling functions are equally replaced.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe fd | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This function is similar to creat
. It returns a file descriptor
which can be used to access the file named by filename. The only
difference is that on 32 bit systems the file is opened in the
large file mode. I.e., file length and file offsets can exceed 31 bits.
To use this file descriptor one must not use the normal operations but
instead the counterparts named *64
, e.g., read64
.
When the sources are translated with _FILE_OFFSET_BITS == 64
this
function is actually available under the name open
. I.e., the
new, extended API using 64 bit file sizes and offsets transparently
replaces the old API.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe fd | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The function close
closes the file descriptor filedes.
Closing a file has the following consequences:
This function is a cancellation point in multi-threaded programs. This
is a problem if the thread allocates some resources (like memory, file
descriptors, semaphores or whatever) at the time close
is
called. If the thread gets canceled these resources stay allocated
until the program ends. To avoid this, calls to close
should be
protected using cancellation handlers.
The normal return value from close
is 0; a value of -1
is returned in case of failure. The following errno
error
conditions are defined for this function:
EBADF
The filedes argument is not a valid file descriptor.
EINTR
The close
call was interrupted by a signal.
See Primitives Interrupted by Signals.
Here is an example of how to handle EINTR
properly:
TEMP_FAILURE_RETRY (close (desc));
ENOSPC
EIO
EDQUOT
When the file is accessed by NFS, these errors from write
can sometimes
not be detected until close
. See Input and Output Primitives, for details
on their meaning.
Please note that there is no separate close64
function.
This is not necessary since this function does not determine nor depend
on the mode of the file. The kernel which performs the close
operation knows which mode the descriptor is used for and can handle
this situation.
To close a stream, call fclose
(see Closing Streams) instead
of trying to close its underlying file descriptor with close
.
This flushes any buffered output and updates the stream object to
indicate that it is closed.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe fd | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The function close_range
closes the file descriptor from lowfd
to maxfd (inclusive). This function is similar to call close
in
specified file descriptor range depending on the flags.
This is function is only supported on recent Linux versions and the GNU C Library
does not provide any fallback (the application will need to handle possible
ENOSYS
).
The flags add options on how the files are closes. Linux currently supports:
CLOSE_RANGE_UNSHARE
¶Unshare the file descriptor table before closing file descriptors.
CLOSE_RANGE_CLOEXEC
¶Set the FD_CLOEXEC
bit instead of closing the file descriptor.
The normal return value from close_range
is 0; a value
of -1 is returned in case of failure. The following errno
error
conditions are defined for this function:
EINVAL
The lowfd value is larger than maxfd or an unsupported flags is used.
ENOMEM
Either there is not enough memory for the operation, or the process is
out of address space. It can only happen when CLOSE_RANGE_UNSHARED
flag is used.
EMFILE
The process has too many files open and it can only happens when
CLOSE_RANGE_UNSHARED
flag is used.
The maximum number of file descriptors is controlled by the
RLIMIT_NOFILE
resource limit; see Limiting Resource Usage.
ENOSYS
The kernel does not implement the required functionality.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe fd | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The function closefrom
closes all file descriptors greater than or equal
to lowfd. This function is similar to calling
close
for all open file descriptors not less than lowfd.
Already closed file descriptors are ignored.
Next: Setting the File Position of a Descriptor, Previous: Opening and Closing Files, Up: Low-Level Input/Output [Contents][Index]
This section describes the functions for performing primitive input and
output operations on file descriptors: read
, write
, and
lseek
. These functions are declared in the header file
unistd.h.
This data type is used to represent the sizes of blocks that can be
read or written in a single operation. It is similar to size_t
,
but must be a signed type.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The read
function reads up to size bytes from the file
with descriptor filedes, storing the results in the buffer.
(This is not necessarily a character string, and no terminating null
character is added.)
The return value is the number of bytes actually read. This might be less than size; for example, if there aren’t that many bytes left in the file or if there aren’t that many bytes immediately available. The exact behavior depends on what kind of file it is. Note that reading less than size bytes is not an error.
A value of zero indicates end-of-file (except if the value of the
size argument is also zero). This is not considered an error.
If you keep calling read
while at end-of-file, it will keep
returning zero and doing nothing else.
If read
returns at least one character, there is no way you can
tell whether end-of-file was reached. But if you did reach the end, the
next read will return zero.
In case of an error, read
returns -1. The following
errno
error conditions are defined for this function:
EAGAIN
Normally, when no input is immediately available, read
waits for
some input. But if the O_NONBLOCK
flag is set for the file
(see File Status Flags), read
returns immediately without
reading any data, and reports this error.
Compatibility Note: Most versions of BSD Unix use a different
error code for this: EWOULDBLOCK
. In the GNU C Library,
EWOULDBLOCK
is an alias for EAGAIN
, so it doesn’t matter
which name you use.
On some systems, reading a large amount of data from a character special
file can also fail with EAGAIN
if the kernel cannot find enough
physical memory to lock down the user’s pages. This is limited to
devices that transfer with direct memory access into the user’s memory,
which means it does not include terminals, since they always use
separate buffers inside the kernel. This problem never happens on
GNU/Hurd systems.
Any condition that could result in EAGAIN
can instead result in a
successful read
which returns fewer bytes than requested.
Calling read
again immediately would result in EAGAIN
.
EBADF
The filedes argument is not a valid file descriptor, or is not open for reading.
EINTR
read
was interrupted by a signal while it was waiting for input.
See Primitives Interrupted by Signals. A signal will not necessarily cause
read
to return EINTR
; it may instead result in a
successful read
which returns fewer bytes than requested.
EIO
For many devices, and for disk files, this error code indicates a hardware error.
EIO
also occurs when a background process tries to read from the
controlling terminal, and the normal action of stopping the process by
sending it a SIGTTIN
signal isn’t working. This might happen if
the signal is being blocked or ignored, or because the process group is
orphaned. See Job Control, for more information about job control,
and Signal Handling, for information about signals.
EINVAL
In some systems, when reading from a character or block device, position and size offsets must be aligned to a particular block size. This error indicates that the offsets were not properly aligned.
Please note that there is no function named read64
. This is not
necessary since this function does not directly modify or handle the
possibly wide file offset. Since the kernel handles this state
internally, the read
function can be used for all cases.
This function is a cancellation point in multi-threaded programs. This
is a problem if the thread allocates some resources (like memory, file
descriptors, semaphores or whatever) at the time read
is
called. If the thread gets canceled these resources stay allocated
until the program ends. To avoid this, calls to read
should be
protected using cancellation handlers.
The read
function is the underlying primitive for all of the
functions that read from streams, such as fgetc
.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The pread
function is similar to the read
function. The
first three arguments are identical, and the return values and error
codes also correspond.
The difference is the fourth argument and its handling. The data block
is not read from the current position of the file descriptor
filedes
. Instead the data is read from the file starting at
position offset. The position of the file descriptor itself is
not affected by the operation. The value is the same as before the call.
When the source file is compiled with _FILE_OFFSET_BITS == 64
the
pread
function is in fact pread64
and the type
off_t
has 64 bits, which makes it possible to handle files up to
2^63 bytes in length.
The return value of pread
describes the number of bytes read.
In the error case it returns -1 like read
does and the
error codes are also the same, with these additions:
EINVAL
The value given for offset is negative and therefore illegal.
ESPIPE
The file descriptor filedes is associated with a pipe or a FIFO and this device does not allow positioning of the file pointer.
The function is an extension defined in the Unix Single Specification version 2.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This function is similar to the pread
function. The difference
is that the offset parameter is of type off64_t
instead of
off_t
which makes it possible on 32 bit machines to address
files larger than 2^31 bytes and up to 2^63 bytes. The
file descriptor filedes
must be opened using open64
since
otherwise the large offsets possible with off64_t
will lead to
errors with a descriptor in small file mode.
When the source file is compiled with _FILE_OFFSET_BITS == 64
on a
32 bit machine this function is actually available under the name
pread
and so transparently replaces the 32 bit interface.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The write
function writes up to size bytes from
buffer to the file with descriptor filedes. The data in
buffer is not necessarily a character string and a null character is
output like any other character.
The return value is the number of bytes actually written. This may be
size, but can always be smaller. Your program should always call
write
in a loop, iterating until all the data is written.
Once write
returns, the data is enqueued to be written and can be
read back right away, but it is not necessarily written out to permanent
storage immediately. You can use fsync
when you need to be sure
your data has been permanently stored before continuing. (It is more
efficient for the system to batch up consecutive writes and do them all
at once when convenient. Normally they will always be written to disk
within a minute or less.) Modern systems provide another function
fdatasync
which guarantees integrity only for the file data and
is therefore faster.
You can use the O_FSYNC
open mode to make write
always
store the data to disk before returning; see I/O Operating Modes.
In the case of an error, write
returns -1. The following
errno
error conditions are defined for this function:
EAGAIN
Normally, write
blocks until the write operation is complete.
But if the O_NONBLOCK
flag is set for the file (see Control Operations on Files), it returns immediately without writing any data and
reports this error. An example of a situation that might cause the
process to block on output is writing to a terminal device that supports
flow control, where output has been suspended by receipt of a STOP
character.
Compatibility Note: Most versions of BSD Unix use a different
error code for this: EWOULDBLOCK
. In the GNU C Library,
EWOULDBLOCK
is an alias for EAGAIN
, so it doesn’t matter
which name you use.
On some systems, writing a large amount of data from a character special
file can also fail with EAGAIN
if the kernel cannot find enough
physical memory to lock down the user’s pages. This is limited to
devices that transfer with direct memory access into the user’s memory,
which means it does not include terminals, since they always use
separate buffers inside the kernel. This problem does not arise on
GNU/Hurd systems.
EBADF
The filedes argument is not a valid file descriptor, or is not open for writing.
EFBIG
The size of the file would become larger than the implementation can support.
EINTR
The write
operation was interrupted by a signal while it was
blocked waiting for completion. A signal will not necessarily cause
write
to return EINTR
; it may instead result in a
successful write
which writes fewer bytes than requested.
See Primitives Interrupted by Signals.
EIO
For many devices, and for disk files, this error code indicates a hardware error.
ENOSPC
The device containing the file is full.
EPIPE
This error is returned when you try to write to a pipe or FIFO that
isn’t open for reading by any process. When this happens, a SIGPIPE
signal is also sent to the process; see Signal Handling.
EINVAL
In some systems, when writing to a character or block device, position and size offsets must be aligned to a particular block size. This error indicates that the offsets were not properly aligned.
Unless you have arranged to prevent EINTR
failures, you should
check errno
after each failing call to write
, and if the
error was EINTR
, you should simply repeat the call.
See Primitives Interrupted by Signals. The easy way to do this is with the
macro TEMP_FAILURE_RETRY
, as follows:
nbytes = TEMP_FAILURE_RETRY (write (desc, buffer, count));
Please note that there is no function named write64
. This is not
necessary since this function does not directly modify or handle the
possibly wide file offset. Since the kernel handles this state
internally the write
function can be used for all cases.
This function is a cancellation point in multi-threaded programs. This
is a problem if the thread allocates some resources (like memory, file
descriptors, semaphores or whatever) at the time write
is
called. If the thread gets canceled these resources stay allocated
until the program ends. To avoid this, calls to write
should be
protected using cancellation handlers.
The write
function is the underlying primitive for all of the
functions that write to streams, such as fputc
.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The pwrite
function is similar to the write
function. The
first three arguments are identical, and the return values and error codes
also correspond.
The difference is the fourth argument and its handling. The data block
is not written to the current position of the file descriptor
filedes
. Instead the data is written to the file starting at
position offset. The position of the file descriptor itself is
not affected by the operation. The value is the same as before the call.
However, on Linux, if a file is opened with O_APPEND
, pwrite
appends data to the end of the file, regardless of the value of
offset
.
When the source file is compiled with _FILE_OFFSET_BITS == 64
the
pwrite
function is in fact pwrite64
and the type
off_t
has 64 bits, which makes it possible to handle files up to
2^63 bytes in length.
The return value of pwrite
describes the number of written bytes.
In the error case it returns -1 like write
does and the
error codes are also the same, with these additions:
EINVAL
The value given for offset is negative and therefore illegal.
ESPIPE
The file descriptor filedes is associated with a pipe or a FIFO and this device does not allow positioning of the file pointer.
The function is an extension defined in the Unix Single Specification version 2.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This function is similar to the pwrite
function. The difference
is that the offset parameter is of type off64_t
instead of
off_t
which makes it possible on 32 bit machines to address
files larger than 2^31 bytes and up to 2^63 bytes. The
file descriptor filedes
must be opened using open64
since
otherwise the large offsets possible with off64_t
will lead to
errors with a descriptor in small file mode.
When the source file is compiled using _FILE_OFFSET_BITS == 64
on a
32 bit machine this function is actually available under the name
pwrite
and so transparently replaces the 32 bit interface.
Next: Descriptors and Streams, Previous: Input and Output Primitives, Up: Low-Level Input/Output [Contents][Index]
Just as you can set the file position of a stream with fseek
, you
can set the file position of a descriptor with lseek
. This
specifies the position in the file for the next read
or
write
operation. See File Positioning, for more information
on the file position and what it means.
To read the current file position value from a descriptor, use
lseek (desc, 0, SEEK_CUR)
.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The lseek
function is used to change the file position of the
file with descriptor filedes.
The whence argument specifies how the offset should be
interpreted, in the same way as for the fseek
function, and it must
be one of the symbolic constants SEEK_SET
, SEEK_CUR
, or
SEEK_END
.
SEEK_SET
¶Specifies that offset is a count of characters from the beginning of the file.
SEEK_CUR
¶Specifies that offset is a count of characters from the current file position. This count may be positive or negative.
SEEK_END
¶Specifies that offset is a count of characters from the end of the file. A negative count specifies a position within the current extent of the file; a positive count specifies a position past the current end. If you set the position past the current end, and actually write data, you will extend the file with zeros up to that position.
The return value from lseek
is normally the resulting file
position, measured in bytes from the beginning of the file.
You can use this feature together with SEEK_CUR
to read the
current file position.
If you want to append to the file, setting the file position to the
current end of file with SEEK_END
is not sufficient. Another
process may write more data after you seek but before you write,
extending the file so the position you write onto clobbers their data.
Instead, use the O_APPEND
operating mode; see I/O Operating Modes.
You can set the file position past the current end of the file. This
does not by itself make the file longer; lseek
never changes the
file. But subsequent output at that position will extend the file.
Characters between the previous end of file and the new position are
filled with zeros. Extending the file in this way can create a
“hole”: the blocks of zeros are not actually allocated on disk, so the
file takes up less space than it appears to; it is then called a
“sparse file”.
If the file position cannot be changed, or the operation is in some way
invalid, lseek
returns a value of -1. The following
errno
error conditions are defined for this function:
EBADF
The filedes is not a valid file descriptor.
EINVAL
The whence argument value is not valid, or the resulting file offset is not valid. A file offset is invalid.
ESPIPE
The filedes corresponds to an object that cannot be positioned,
such as a pipe, FIFO or terminal device. (POSIX.1 specifies this error
only for pipes and FIFOs, but on GNU systems, you always get
ESPIPE
if the object is not seekable.)
When the source file is compiled with _FILE_OFFSET_BITS == 64
the
lseek
function is in fact lseek64
and the type
off_t
has 64 bits which makes it possible to handle files up to
2^63 bytes in length.
This function is a cancellation point in multi-threaded programs. This
is a problem if the thread allocates some resources (like memory, file
descriptors, semaphores or whatever) at the time lseek
is
called. If the thread gets canceled these resources stay allocated
until the program ends. To avoid this calls to lseek
should be
protected using cancellation handlers.
The lseek
function is the underlying primitive for the
fseek
, fseeko
, ftell
, ftello
and
rewind
functions, which operate on streams instead of file
descriptors.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This function is similar to the lseek
function. The difference
is that the offset parameter is of type off64_t
instead of
off_t
which makes it possible on 32 bit machines to address
files larger than 2^31 bytes and up to 2^63 bytes. The
file descriptor filedes
must be opened using open64
since
otherwise the large offsets possible with off64_t
will lead to
errors with a descriptor in small file mode.
When the source file is compiled with _FILE_OFFSET_BITS == 64
on a
32 bits machine this function is actually available under the name
lseek
and so transparently replaces the 32 bit interface.
You can have multiple descriptors for the same file if you open the file
more than once, or if you duplicate a descriptor with dup
.
Descriptors that come from separate calls to open
have independent
file positions; using lseek
on one descriptor has no effect on the
other. For example,
{ int d1, d2; char buf[4]; d1 = open ("foo", O_RDONLY); d2 = open ("foo", O_RDONLY); lseek (d1, 1024, SEEK_SET); read (d2, buf, 4); }
will read the first four characters of the file foo. (The error-checking code necessary for a real program has been omitted here for brevity.)
By contrast, descriptors made by duplication share a common file position with the original descriptor that was duplicated. Anything which alters the file position of one of the duplicates, including reading or writing data, affects all of them alike. Thus, for example,
{ int d1, d2, d3; char buf1[4], buf2[4]; d1 = open ("foo", O_RDONLY); d2 = dup (d1); d3 = dup (d2); lseek (d3, 1024, SEEK_SET); read (d1, buf1, 4); read (d2, buf2, 4); }
will read four characters starting with the 1024’th character of foo, and then four more characters starting with the 1028’th character.
This is a signed integer type used to represent file sizes. In
the GNU C Library, this type is no narrower than int
.
If the source is compiled with _FILE_OFFSET_BITS == 64
this type
is transparently replaced by off64_t
.
This type is used similar to off_t
. The difference is that even
on 32 bit machines, where the off_t
type would have 32 bits,
off64_t
has 64 bits and so is able to address files up to
2^63 bytes in length.
When compiling with _FILE_OFFSET_BITS == 64
this type is
available under the name off_t
.
These aliases for the ‘SEEK_…’ constants exist for the sake of compatibility with older BSD systems. They are defined in two different header files: fcntl.h and sys/file.h.
Next: Dangers of Mixing Streams and Descriptors, Previous: Setting the File Position of a Descriptor, Up: Low-Level Input/Output [Contents][Index]
Given an open file descriptor, you can create a stream for it with the
fdopen
function. You can get the underlying file descriptor for
an existing stream with the fileno
function. These functions are
declared in the header file stdio.h.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Unsafe heap lock | AC-Unsafe mem lock | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The fdopen
function returns a new stream for the file descriptor
filedes.
The opentype argument is interpreted in the same way as for the
fopen
function (see Opening Streams), except that
the ‘b’ option is not permitted; this is because GNU systems make no
distinction between text and binary files. Also, "w"
and
"w+"
do not cause truncation of the file; these have an effect only
when opening a file, and in this case the file has already been opened.
You must make sure that the opentype argument matches the actual
mode of the open file descriptor.
The return value is the new stream. If the stream cannot be created (for example, if the modes for the file indicated by the file descriptor do not permit the access specified by the opentype argument), a null pointer is returned instead.
In some other systems, fdopen
may fail to detect that the modes
for file descriptors do not permit the access specified by
opentype
. The GNU C Library always checks for this.
For an example showing the use of the fdopen
function,
see Creating a Pipe.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This function returns the file descriptor associated with the stream
stream. If an error is detected (for example, if the stream
is not valid) or if stream does not do I/O to a file,
fileno
returns -1.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The fileno_unlocked
function is equivalent to the fileno
function except that it does not implicitly lock the stream if the state
is FSETLOCKING_INTERNAL
.
This function is a GNU extension.
There are also symbolic constants defined in unistd.h for the
file descriptors belonging to the standard streams stdin
,
stdout
, and stderr
; see Standard Streams.
STDIN_FILENO
¶This macro has value 0
, which is the file descriptor for
standard input.
STDOUT_FILENO
¶This macro has value 1
, which is the file descriptor for
standard output.
STDERR_FILENO
¶This macro has value 2
, which is the file descriptor for
standard error output.
Next: Fast Scatter-Gather I/O, Previous: Descriptors and Streams, Up: Low-Level Input/Output [Contents][Index]
You can have multiple file descriptors and streams (let’s call both streams and descriptors “channels” for short) connected to the same file, but you must take care to avoid confusion between channels. There are two cases to consider: linked channels that share a single file position value, and independent channels that have their own file positions.
It’s best to use just one channel in your program for actual data
transfer to any given file, except when all the access is for input.
For example, if you open a pipe (something you can only do at the file
descriptor level), either do all I/O with the descriptor, or construct a
stream from the descriptor with fdopen
and then do all I/O with
the stream.
Channels that come from a single opening share the same file position;
we call them linked channels. Linked channels result when you
make a stream from a descriptor using fdopen
, when you get a
descriptor from a stream with fileno
, when you copy a descriptor
with dup
or dup2
, and when descriptors are inherited
during fork
. For files that don’t support random access, such as
terminals and pipes, all channels are effectively linked. On
random-access files, all append-type output streams are effectively
linked to each other.
If you have been using a stream for I/O (or have just opened the stream), and you want to do I/O using another channel (either a stream or a descriptor) that is linked to it, you must first clean up the stream that you have been using. See Cleaning Streams.
Terminating a process, or executing a new program in the process, destroys all the streams in the process. If descriptors linked to these streams persist in other processes, their file positions become undefined as a result. To prevent this, you must clean up the streams before destroying them.
Next: Cleaning Streams, Previous: Linked Channels, Up: Dangers of Mixing Streams and Descriptors [Contents][Index]
When you open channels (streams or descriptors) separately on a seekable file, each channel has its own file position. These are called independent channels.
The system handles each channel independently. Most of the time, this is quite predictable and natural (especially for input): each channel can read or write sequentially at its own place in the file. However, if some of the channels are streams, you must take these precautions:
If you do output to one channel at the end of the file, this will certainly leave the other independent channels positioned somewhere before the new end. You cannot reliably set their file positions to the new end of file before writing, because the file can always be extended by another process between when you set the file position and when you write the data. Instead, use an append-type descriptor or stream; they always output at the current end of the file. In order to make the end-of-file position accurate, you must clean the output channel you were using, if it is a stream.
It’s impossible for two channels to have separate file pointers for a file that doesn’t support random access. Thus, channels for reading or writing such files are always linked, never independent. Append-type channels are also always linked. For these channels, follow the rules for linked channels; see Linked Channels.
Previous: Independent Channels, Up: Dangers of Mixing Streams and Descriptors [Contents][Index]
You can use fflush
to clean a stream in most
cases.
You can skip the fflush
if you know the stream
is already clean. A stream is clean whenever its buffer is empty. For
example, an unbuffered stream is always clean. An input stream that is
at end-of-file is clean. A line-buffered stream is clean when the last
character output was a newline. However, a just-opened input stream
might not be clean, as its input buffer might not be empty.
There is one case in which cleaning a stream is impossible on most
systems. This is when the stream is doing input from a file that is not
random-access. Such streams typically read ahead, and when the file is
not random access, there is no way to give back the excess data already
read. When an input stream reads from a random-access file,
fflush
does clean the stream, but leaves the file pointer at an
unpredictable place; you must set the file pointer before doing any
further I/O.
Closing an output-only stream also does fflush
, so this is a
valid way of cleaning an output stream.
You need not clean a stream before using its descriptor for control operations such as setting terminal modes; these operations don’t affect the file position and are not affected by it. You can use any descriptor for these operations, and all channels are affected simultaneously. However, text already “output” to a stream but still buffered by the stream will be subject to the new terminal modes when subsequently flushed. To make sure “past” output is covered by the terminal settings that were in effect at the time, flush the output streams for that terminal before setting the modes. See Terminal Modes.
Next: Copying data between two files, Previous: Dangers of Mixing Streams and Descriptors, Up: Low-Level Input/Output [Contents][Index]
Some applications may need to read or write data to multiple buffers,
which are separated in memory. Although this can be done easily enough
with multiple calls to read
and write
, it is inefficient
because there is overhead associated with each kernel call.
Instead, many platforms provide special high-speed primitives to perform
these scatter-gather operations in a single kernel call. The GNU C Library
will provide an emulation on any system that lacks these
primitives, so they are not a portability threat. They are defined in
sys/uio.h
.
These functions are controlled with arrays of iovec
structures,
which describe the location and size of each buffer.
The iovec
structure describes a buffer. It contains two fields:
void *iov_base
Contains the address of a buffer.
size_t iov_len
Contains the length of the buffer.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Unsafe heap | AC-Unsafe mem | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The readv
function reads data from filedes and scatters it
into the buffers described in vector, which is taken to be
count structures long. As each buffer is filled, data is sent to the
next.
Note that readv
is not guaranteed to fill all the buffers.
It may stop at any point, for the same reasons read
would.
The return value is a count of bytes (not buffers) read, 0
indicating end-of-file, or -1 indicating an error. The possible
errors are the same as in read
.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Unsafe heap | AC-Unsafe mem | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The writev
function gathers data from the buffers described in
vector, which is taken to be count structures long, and writes
them to filedes
. As each buffer is written, it moves on to the
next.
Like readv
, writev
may stop midstream under the same
conditions write
would.
The return value is a count of bytes written, or -1 indicating an
error. The possible errors are the same as in write
.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This function is similar to the readv
function, with the difference
it adds an extra offset parameter of type off_t
similar to
pread
. The data is read from the file starting at position
offset. The position of the file descriptor itself is not affected
by the operation. The value is the same as before the call.
When the source file is compiled with _FILE_OFFSET_BITS == 64
the
preadv
function is in fact preadv64
and the type
off_t
has 64 bits, which makes it possible to handle files up to
2^63 bytes in length.
The return value is a count of bytes (not buffers) read, 0
indicating end-of-file, or -1 indicating an error. The possible
errors are the same as in readv
and pread
.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This function is similar to the preadv
function with the difference
is that the offset parameter is of type off64_t
instead of
off_t
. It makes it possible on 32 bit machines to address
files larger than 2^31 bytes and up to 2^63 bytes. The
file descriptor filedes
must be opened using open64
since
otherwise the large offsets possible with off64_t
will lead to
errors with a descriptor in small file mode.
When the source file is compiled using _FILE_OFFSET_BITS == 64
on a
32 bit machine this function is actually available under the name
preadv
and so transparently replaces the 32 bit interface.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This function is similar to the writev
function, with the difference
it adds an extra offset parameter of type off_t
similar to
pwrite
. The data is written to the file starting at position
offset. The position of the file descriptor itself is not affected
by the operation. The value is the same as before the call.
However, on Linux, if a file is opened with O_APPEND
, pwrite
appends data to the end of the file, regardless of the value of
offset
.
When the source file is compiled with _FILE_OFFSET_BITS == 64
the
pwritev
function is in fact pwritev64
and the type
off_t
has 64 bits, which makes it possible to handle files up to
2^63 bytes in length.
The return value is a count of bytes (not buffers) written, 0
indicating end-of-file, or -1 indicating an error. The possible
errors are the same as in writev
and pwrite
.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This function is similar to the pwritev
function with the difference
is that the offset parameter is of type off64_t
instead of
off_t
. It makes it possible on 32 bit machines to address
files larger than 2^31 bytes and up to 2^63 bytes. The
file descriptor filedes
must be opened using open64
since
otherwise the large offsets possible with off64_t
will lead to
errors with a descriptor in small file mode.
When the source file is compiled using _FILE_OFFSET_BITS == 64
on a
32 bit machine this function is actually available under the name
pwritev
and so transparently replaces the 32 bit interface.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This function is similar to the preadv
function, with the
difference it adds an extra flags parameter of type int
.
Additionally, if offset is -1, the current file position
is used and updated (like the readv
function).
The supported flags are dependent of the underlying system. For Linux it supports:
RWF_HIPRI
¶High priority request. This adds a flag that tells the file system that
this is a high priority request for which it is worth to poll the hardware.
The flag is purely advisory and can be ignored if not supported. The
fd must be opened using O_DIRECT
.
RWF_DSYNC
¶Per-IO synchronization as if the file was opened with O_DSYNC
flag.
RWF_SYNC
¶Per-IO synchronization as if the file was opened with O_SYNC
flag.
RWF_NOWAIT
¶Use nonblocking mode for this operation; that is, this call to preadv2
will fail and set errno
to EAGAIN
if the operation would block.
RWF_APPEND
¶Per-IO synchronization as if the file was opened with O_APPEND
flag.
When the source file is compiled with _FILE_OFFSET_BITS == 64
the
preadv2
function is in fact preadv64v2
and the type
off_t
has 64 bits, which makes it possible to handle files up to
2^63 bytes in length.
The return value is a count of bytes (not buffers) read, 0
indicating end-of-file, or -1 indicating an error. The possible
errors are the same as in preadv
with the addition of:
EOPNOTSUPP
An unsupported flags was used.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This function is similar to the preadv2
function with the difference
is that the offset parameter is of type off64_t
instead of
off_t
. It makes it possible on 32 bit machines to address
files larger than 2^31 bytes and up to 2^63 bytes. The
file descriptor filedes
must be opened using open64
since
otherwise the large offsets possible with off64_t
will lead to
errors with a descriptor in small file mode.
When the source file is compiled using _FILE_OFFSET_BITS == 64
on a
32 bit machine this function is actually available under the name
preadv2
and so transparently replaces the 32 bit interface.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This function is similar to the pwritev
function, with the
difference it adds an extra flags parameter of type int
.
Additionally, if offset is -1, the current file position
should is used and updated (like the writev
function).
The supported flags are dependent of the underlying system. For
Linux, the supported flags are the same as those for preadv2
.
When the source file is compiled with _FILE_OFFSET_BITS == 64
the
pwritev2
function is in fact pwritev64v2
and the type
off_t
has 64 bits, which makes it possible to handle files up to
2^63 bytes in length.
The return value is a count of bytes (not buffers) write, 0
indicating end-of-file, or -1 indicating an error. The possible
errors are the same as in preadv2
.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This function is similar to the pwritev2
function with the difference
is that the offset parameter is of type off64_t
instead of
off_t
. It makes it possible on 32 bit machines to address
files larger than 2^31 bytes and up to 2^63 bytes. The
file descriptor filedes
must be opened using open64
since
otherwise the large offsets possible with off64_t
will lead to
errors with a descriptor in small file mode.
When the source file is compiled using _FILE_OFFSET_BITS == 64
on a
32 bit machine this function is actually available under the name
pwritev2
and so transparently replaces the 32 bit interface.
Next: Memory-mapped I/O, Previous: Fast Scatter-Gather I/O, Up: Low-Level Input/Output [Contents][Index]
A special function is provided to copy data between two files on the same file system. The system can optimize such copy operations. This is particularly important on network file systems, where the data would otherwise have to be transferred twice over the network.
Note that this function only copies file data, but not metadata such as file permissions or extended attributes.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This function copies up to length bytes from the file descriptor inputfd to the file descriptor outputfd.
The function can operate on both the current file position (like
read
and write
) and an explicit offset (like pread
and pwrite
). If the inputpos pointer is null, the file
position of inputfd is used as the starting point of the copy
operation, and the file position is advanced during it. If
inputpos is not null, then *inputpos
is used as the
starting point of the copy operation, and *inputpos
is
incremented by the number of copied bytes, but the file position remains
unchanged. Similar rules apply to outputfd and outputpos
for the output file position.
The flags argument is currently reserved and must be zero.
The copy_file_range
function returns the number of bytes copied.
This can be less than the specified length in case the input file
contains fewer remaining bytes than length, or if a read or write
failure occurs. The return value is zero if the end of the input file
is encountered immediately.
If no bytes can be copied, to report an error, copy_file_range
returns the value -1 and sets errno
. The table below
lists some of the error conditions for this function.
ENOSYS
The kernel does not implement the required functionality.
EISDIR
At least one of the descriptors inputfd or outputfd refers to a directory.
EINVAL
At least one of the descriptors inputfd or outputfd refers to a non-regular, non-directory file (such as a socket or a FIFO).
The input or output positions before are after the copy operations are outside of an implementation-defined limit.
The flags argument is not zero.
EFBIG
The new file size would exceed the process file size limit. See Limiting Resource Usage.
The input or output positions before are after the copy operations are
outside of an implementation-defined limit. This can happen if the file
was not opened with large file support (LFS) on 32-bit machines, and the
copy operation would create a file which is larger than what
off_t
could represent.
EBADF
The argument inputfd is not a valid file descriptor open for reading.
The argument outputfd is not a valid file descriptor open for
writing, or outputfd has been opened with O_APPEND
.
In addition, copy_file_range
can fail with the error codes
which are used by read
, pread
, write
, and
pwrite
.
The copy_file_range
function is a cancellation point. In case of
cancellation, the input location (the file position or the value at
*inputpos
) is indeterminate.
Next: Waiting for Input or Output, Previous: Copying data between two files, Up: Low-Level Input/Output [Contents][Index]
On modern operating systems, it is possible to mmap (pronounced “em-map”) a file to a region of memory. When this is done, the file can be accessed just like an array in the program.
This is more efficient than read
or write
, as only the regions
of the file that a program actually accesses are loaded. Accesses to
not-yet-loaded parts of the mmapped region are handled in the same way as
swapped out pages.
Since mmapped pages can be stored back to their file when physical memory is low, it is possible to mmap files orders of magnitude larger than both the physical memory and swap space. The only limit is address space. The theoretical limit is 4GB on a 32-bit machine - however, the actual limit will be smaller since some areas will be reserved for other purposes. If the LFS interface is used the file size on 32-bit systems is not limited to 2GB (offsets are signed which reduces the addressable area of 4GB by half); the full 64-bit are available.
Memory mapping only works on entire pages of memory. Thus, addresses for mapping must be page-aligned, and length values will be rounded up. To determine the default size of a page the machine uses one should use:
size_t page_size = (size_t) sysconf (_SC_PAGESIZE);
On some systems, mappings can use larger page sizes
for certain files, and applications can request larger page sizes for
anonymous mappings as well (see the MAP_HUGETLB
flag below).
The following functions are declared in sys/mman.h:
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The mmap
function creates a new mapping, connected to bytes
(offset) to (offset + length - 1) in the file open on
filedes. A new reference for the file specified by filedes
is created, which is not removed by closing the file.
address gives a preferred starting address for the mapping.
NULL
expresses no preference. Any previous mapping at that
address is automatically removed. The address you give may still be
changed, unless you use the MAP_FIXED
flag.
protect contains flags that control what kind of access is
permitted. They include PROT_READ
, PROT_WRITE
, and
PROT_EXEC
. The special flag PROT_NONE
reserves a region
of address space for future use. The mprotect
function can be
used to change the protection flags. See Memory Protection.
flags contains flags that control the nature of the map.
One of MAP_SHARED
or MAP_PRIVATE
must be specified.
They include:
MAP_PRIVATE
¶This specifies that writes to the region should never be written back to the attached file. Instead, a copy is made for the process, and the region will be swapped normally if memory runs low. No other process will see the changes.
Since private mappings effectively revert to ordinary memory
when written to, you must have enough virtual memory for a copy of
the entire mmapped region if you use this mode with PROT_WRITE
.
MAP_SHARED
¶This specifies that writes to the region will be written back to the file. Changes made will be shared immediately with other processes mmaping the same file.
Note that actual writing may take place at any time. You need to use
msync
, described below, if it is important that other processes
using conventional I/O get a consistent view of the file.
MAP_FIXED
¶This forces the system to use the exact mapping address specified in address and fail if it can’t.
MAP_ANONYMOUS
¶MAP_ANON
¶This flag tells the system to create an anonymous mapping, not connected to a file. filedes and offset are ignored, and the region is initialized with zeros.
Anonymous maps are used as the basic primitive to extend the heap on some systems. They are also useful to share data between multiple tasks without creating a file.
On some systems using private anonymous mmaps is more efficient than using
malloc
for large blocks. This is not an issue with the GNU C Library,
as the included malloc
automatically uses mmap
where appropriate.
MAP_HUGETLB
¶This requests that the system uses an alternative page size which is larger than the default page size for the mapping. For some workloads, increasing the page size for large mappings improves performance because the system needs to handle far fewer pages. For other workloads which require frequent transfer of pages between storage or different nodes, the decreased page granularity may cause performance problems due to the increased page size and larger transfers.
In order to create the mapping, the system needs physically contiguous
memory of the size of the increased page size. As a result,
MAP_HUGETLB
mappings are affected by memory fragmentation, and
their creation can fail even if plenty of memory is available in the
system.
Not all file systems support mappings with an increased page size.
The MAP_HUGETLB
flag is specific to Linux.
mmap
returns the address of the new mapping, or
MAP_FAILED
for an error.
Possible errors include:
EINVAL
Either address was unusable (because it is not a multiple of the applicable page size), or inconsistent flags were given.
If MAP_HUGETLB
was specified, the file or system does not support
large page sizes.
EACCES
filedes was not open for the type of access specified in protect.
ENOMEM
Either there is not enough memory for the operation, or the process is out of address space.
ENODEV
This file is of a type that doesn’t support mapping.
ENOEXEC
The file is on a filesystem that doesn’t support mapping.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The mmap64
function is equivalent to the mmap
function but
the offset parameter is of type off64_t
. On 32-bit systems
this allows the file associated with the filedes descriptor to be
larger than 2GB. filedes must be a descriptor returned from a
call to open64
or fopen64
and freopen64
where the
descriptor is retrieved with fileno
.
When the sources are translated with _FILE_OFFSET_BITS == 64
this
function is actually available under the name mmap
. I.e., the
new, extended API using 64 bit file sizes and offsets transparently
replaces the old API.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
munmap
removes any memory maps from (addr) to (addr +
length). length should be the length of the mapping.
It is safe to unmap multiple mappings in one command, or include unmapped space in the range. It is also possible to unmap only part of an existing mapping. However, only entire pages can be removed. If length is not an even number of pages, it will be rounded up.
It returns 0 for success and -1 for an error.
One error is possible:
EINVAL
The memory range given was outside the user mmap range or wasn’t page aligned.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
When using shared mappings, the kernel can write the file at any time before the mapping is removed. To be certain data has actually been written to the file and will be accessible to non-memory-mapped I/O, it is necessary to use this function.
It operates on the region address to (address + length). It may be used on part of a mapping or multiple mappings, however the region given should not contain any unmapped space.
flags can contain some options:
MS_SYNC
¶This flag makes sure the data is actually written to disk.
Normally msync
only makes sure that accesses to a file with
conventional I/O reflect the recent changes.
MS_ASYNC
¶This tells msync
to begin the synchronization, but not to wait for
it to complete.
msync
returns 0 for success and -1 for
error. Errors include:
EINVAL
An invalid region was given, or the flags were invalid.
EFAULT
There is no existing mapping in at least part of the given region.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This function can be used to change the size of an existing memory
area. address and length must cover a region entirely mapped
in the same mmap
statement. A new mapping with the same
characteristics will be returned with the length new_length.
One option is possible, MREMAP_MAYMOVE
. If it is given in
flags, the system may remove the existing mapping and create a new
one of the desired length in another location.
The address of the resulting mapping is returned, or -1. Possible error codes include:
EFAULT
There is no existing mapping in at least part of the original region, or the region covers two or more distinct mappings.
EINVAL
The address given is misaligned or inappropriate.
EAGAIN
The region has pages locked, and if extended it would exceed the process’s resource limit for locked pages. See Limiting Resource Usage.
ENOMEM
The region is private writable, and insufficient virtual memory is
available to extend it. Also, this error will occur if
MREMAP_MAYMOVE
is not given and the extension would collide with
another mapped region.
This function is only available on a few systems. Except for performing optional optimizations one should not rely on this function.
Not all file descriptors may be mapped. Sockets, pipes, and most devices
only allow sequential access and do not fit into the mapping abstraction.
In addition, some regular files may not be mmapable, and older kernels may
not support mapping at all. Thus, programs using mmap
should
have a fallback method to use should it fail. See Mmap in GNU
Coding Standards.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This function can be used to provide the system with advice about the intended usage patterns of the memory region starting at addr and extending length bytes.
The valid BSD values for advice are:
MADV_NORMAL
¶The region should receive no further special treatment.
MADV_RANDOM
¶The region will be accessed via random page references. The kernel should page-in the minimal number of pages for each page fault.
MADV_SEQUENTIAL
¶The region will be accessed via sequential page references. This may cause the kernel to aggressively read-ahead, expecting further sequential references after any page fault within this region.
MADV_WILLNEED
¶The region will be needed. The pages within this region may be pre-faulted in by the kernel.
MADV_DONTNEED
¶The region is no longer needed. The kernel may free these pages, causing any changes to the pages to be lost, as well as swapped out pages to be discarded.
MADV_HUGEPAGE
¶Indicate that it is beneficial to increase the page size for this mapping. This can improve performance for larger mappings because the system needs to handle far fewer pages. However, if parts of the mapping are frequently transferred between storage or different nodes, performance may suffer because individual transfers can become substantially larger due to the increased page size.
This flag is specific to Linux.
MADV_NOHUGEPAGE
¶Undo the effect of a previous MADV_HUGEPAGE
advice. This flag
is specific to Linux.
The POSIX names are slightly different, but with the same meanings:
POSIX_MADV_NORMAL
¶This corresponds with BSD’s MADV_NORMAL
.
POSIX_MADV_RANDOM
¶This corresponds with BSD’s MADV_RANDOM
.
POSIX_MADV_SEQUENTIAL
¶This corresponds with BSD’s MADV_SEQUENTIAL
.
POSIX_MADV_WILLNEED
¶This corresponds with BSD’s MADV_WILLNEED
.
POSIX_MADV_DONTNEED
¶This corresponds with BSD’s MADV_DONTNEED
.
madvise
returns 0 for success and -1 for
error. Errors include:
EINVAL
An invalid region was given, or the advice was invalid.
EFAULT
There is no existing mapping in at least part of the given region.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe locale | AS-Unsafe init heap lock | AC-Unsafe lock mem fd | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This function returns a file descriptor that can be used to allocate shared memory via mmap. Unrelated processes can use same name to create or open existing shared memory objects.
A name argument specifies the shared memory object to be opened.
In the GNU C Library it must be a string smaller than NAME_MAX
bytes starting
with an optional slash but containing no other slashes.
The semantics of oflag and mode arguments is same as in open
.
shm_open
returns the file descriptor on success or -1 on error.
On failure errno
is set.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe locale | AS-Unsafe init heap lock | AC-Unsafe lock mem fd | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This function is the inverse of shm_open
and removes the object with
the given name previously created by shm_open
.
shm_unlink
returns 0 on success or -1 on error.
On failure errno
is set.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe fd | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The memfd_create
function returns a file descriptor which can be
used to create memory mappings using the mmap
function. It is
similar to the shm_open
function in the sense that these mappings
are not backed by actual files. However, the descriptor returned by
memfd_create
does not correspond to a named object; the
name argument is used for debugging purposes only (e.g., will
appear in /proc), and separate invocations of memfd_create
with the same name will not return descriptors for the same region
of memory. The descriptor can also be used to create alias mappings
within the same process.
The descriptor initially refers to a zero-length file. Before mappings
can be created which are backed by memory, the file size needs to be
increased with the ftruncate
function. See File Size.
The flags argument can be a combination of the following flags:
MFD_CLOEXEC
¶The descriptor is created with the O_CLOEXEC
flag.
MFD_ALLOW_SEALING
¶The descriptor supports the addition of seals using the fcntl
function.
MFD_HUGETLB
¶This requests that mappings created using the returned file descriptor
use a larger page size. See MAP_HUGETLB
above for details.
This flag is incompatible with MFD_ALLOW_SEALING
.
memfd_create
returns a file descriptor on success, and -1
on failure.
The following errno
error conditions are defined for this
function:
EINVAL
An invalid combination is specified in flags, or name is too long.
EFAULT
The name argument does not point to a string.
EMFILE
The operation would exceed the file descriptor limit for this process.
ENFILE
The operation would exceed the system-wide file descriptor limit.
ENOMEM
There is not enough memory for the operation.
Next: Synchronizing I/O operations, Previous: Memory-mapped I/O, Up: Low-Level Input/Output [Contents][Index]
Sometimes a program needs to accept input on multiple input channels whenever input arrives. For example, some workstations may have devices such as a digitizing tablet, function button box, or dial box that are connected via normal asynchronous serial interfaces; good user interface style requires responding immediately to input on any device. Another example is a program that acts as a server to several other processes via pipes or sockets.
You cannot normally use read
for this purpose, because this
blocks the program until input is available on one particular file
descriptor; input on other channels won’t wake it up. You could set
nonblocking mode and poll each file descriptor in turn, but this is very
inefficient.
A better solution is to use the select
function. This blocks the
program until input or output is ready on a specified set of file
descriptors, or until a timer expires, whichever comes first. This
facility is declared in the header file sys/types.h.
In the case of a server socket (see Listening for Connections), we say that
“input” is available when there are pending connections that could be
accepted (see Accepting Connections). accept
for server
sockets blocks and interacts with select
just as read
does
for normal input.
The file descriptor sets for the select
function are specified
as fd_set
objects. Here is the description of the data type
and some macros for manipulating these objects.
The fd_set
data type represents file descriptor sets for the
select
function. It is actually a bit array.
The value of this macro is the maximum number of file descriptors that a
fd_set
object can hold information about. On systems with a
fixed maximum number, FD_SETSIZE
is at least that number. On
some systems, including GNU, there is no absolute limit on the number of
descriptors open, but this macro still has a constant value which
controls the number of bits in an fd_set
; if you get a file
descriptor with a value as high as FD_SETSIZE
, you cannot put
that descriptor into an fd_set
.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe race:set | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This macro initializes the file descriptor set set to be the empty set.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe race:set | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This macro adds filedes to the file descriptor set set.
The filedes parameter must not have side effects since it is evaluated more than once.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe race:set | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This macro removes filedes from the file descriptor set set.
The filedes parameter must not have side effects since it is evaluated more than once.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe race:set | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This macro returns a nonzero value (true) if filedes is a member of the file descriptor set set, and zero (false) otherwise.
The filedes parameter must not have side effects since it is evaluated more than once.
Next, here is the description of the select
function itself.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe race:read-fds race:write-fds race:except-fds | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The select
function blocks the calling process until there is
activity on any of the specified sets of file descriptors, or until the
timeout period has expired.
The file descriptors specified by the read-fds argument are checked to see if they are ready for reading; the write-fds file descriptors are checked to see if they are ready for writing; and the except-fds file descriptors are checked for exceptional conditions. You can pass a null pointer for any of these arguments if you are not interested in checking for that kind of condition.
A file descriptor is considered ready for reading if a read
call will not block. This usually includes the read offset being at
the end of the file or there is an error to report. A server socket
is considered ready for reading if there is a pending connection which
can be accepted with accept
; see Accepting Connections. A
client socket is ready for writing when its connection is fully
established; see Making a Connection.
“Exceptional conditions” does not mean errors—errors are reported immediately when an erroneous system call is executed, and do not constitute a state of the descriptor. Rather, they include conditions such as the presence of an urgent message on a socket. (See Sockets, for information on urgent messages.)
The select
function checks only the first nfds file
descriptors. The usual thing is to pass FD_SETSIZE
as the value
of this argument.
The timeout specifies the maximum time to wait. If you pass a
null pointer for this argument, it means to block indefinitely until
one of the file descriptors is ready. Otherwise, you should provide
the time in struct timeval
format; see Time Types.
Specify zero as the time (a struct timeval
containing all
zeros) if you want to find out which descriptors are ready without
waiting if none are ready.
The normal return value from select
is the total number of ready file
descriptors in all of the sets. Each of the argument sets is overwritten
with information about the descriptors that are ready for the corresponding
operation. Thus, to see if a particular descriptor desc has input,
use FD_ISSET (desc, read-fds)
after select
returns.
If select
returns because the timeout period expires, it returns
a value of zero.
Any signal will cause select
to return immediately. So if your
program uses signals, you can’t rely on select
to keep waiting
for the full time specified. If you want to be sure of waiting for a
particular amount of time, you must check for EINTR
and repeat
the select
with a newly calculated timeout based on the current
time. See the example below. See also Primitives Interrupted by Signals.
If an error occurs, select
returns -1
and does not modify
the argument file descriptor sets. The following errno
error
conditions are defined for this function:
EBADF
One of the file descriptor sets specified an invalid file descriptor.
EINTR
The operation was interrupted by a signal. See Primitives Interrupted by Signals.
EINVAL
The timeout argument is invalid; one of the components is negative or too large.
Portability Note: The select
function is a BSD Unix
feature.
Here is an example showing how you can use select
to establish a
timeout period for reading from a file descriptor. The input_timeout
function blocks the calling process until input is available on the
file descriptor, or until the timeout period expires.
#include <errno.h> #include <stdio.h> #include <unistd.h> #include <sys/types.h> #include <sys/time.h>
int input_timeout (int filedes, unsigned int seconds) { fd_set set; struct timeval timeout;
/* Initialize the file descriptor set. */ FD_ZERO (&set); FD_SET (filedes, &set); /* Initialize the timeout data structure. */ timeout.tv_sec = seconds; timeout.tv_usec = 0;
/* select
returns 0 if timeout, 1 if input available, -1 if error. */
return TEMP_FAILURE_RETRY (select (FD_SETSIZE,
&set, NULL, NULL,
&timeout));
}
int main (void) { fprintf (stderr, "select returned %d.\n", input_timeout (STDIN_FILENO, 5)); return 0; }
There is another example showing the use of select
to multiplex
input from multiple sockets in Byte Stream Connection Server Example.
Next: Perform I/O Operations in Parallel, Previous: Waiting for Input or Output, Up: Low-Level Input/Output [Contents][Index]
In most modern operating systems, the normal I/O operations are not
executed synchronously. I.e., even if a write
system call
returns, this does not mean the data is actually written to the media,
e.g., the disk.
In situations where synchronization points are necessary, you can use special functions which ensure that all operations finish before they return.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
A call to this function will not return as long as there is data which has not been written to the device. All dirty buffers in the kernel will be written and so an overall consistent system can be achieved (if no other process in parallel writes data).
A prototype for sync
can be found in unistd.h.
Programs more often want to ensure that data written to a given file is
committed, rather than all data in the system. For this, sync
is overkill.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The fsync
function can be used to make sure all data associated with
the open file fildes is written to the device associated with the
descriptor. The function call does not return unless all actions have
finished.
A prototype for fsync
can be found in unistd.h.
This function is a cancellation point in multi-threaded programs. This
is a problem if the thread allocates some resources (like memory, file
descriptors, semaphores or whatever) at the time fsync
is
called. If the thread gets canceled these resources stay allocated
until the program ends. To avoid this, calls to fsync
should be
protected using cancellation handlers.
The return value of the function is zero if no error occurred. Otherwise
it is -1 and the global variable errno
is set to the
following values:
EBADF
The descriptor fildes is not valid.
EINVAL
No synchronization is possible since the system does not implement this.
Sometimes it is not even necessary to write all data associated with a file descriptor. E.g., in database files which do not change in size it is enough to write all the file content data to the device. Meta-information, like the modification time etc., are not that important and leaving such information uncommitted does not prevent a successful recovery of the file in case of a problem.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
When a call to the fdatasync
function returns, it is ensured
that all of the file data is written to the device. For all pending I/O
operations, the parts guaranteeing data integrity finished.
Not all systems implement the fdatasync
operation. On systems
missing this functionality fdatasync
is emulated by a call to
fsync
since the performed actions are a superset of those
required by fdatasync
.
The prototype for fdatasync
is in unistd.h.
The return value of the function is zero if no error occurred. Otherwise
it is -1 and the global variable errno
is set to the
following values:
EBADF
The descriptor fildes is not valid.
EINVAL
No synchronization is possible since the system does not implement this.
Next: Control Operations on Files, Previous: Synchronizing I/O operations, Up: Low-Level Input/Output [Contents][Index]
The POSIX.1b standard defines a new set of I/O operations which can
significantly reduce the time an application spends waiting for I/O. The
new functions allow a program to initiate one or more I/O operations and
then immediately resume normal work while the I/O operations are
executed in parallel. This functionality is available if the
unistd.h file defines the symbol _POSIX_ASYNCHRONOUS_IO
.
These functions are part of the library with realtime functions named librt. They are not actually part of the libc binary. The implementation of these functions can be done using support in the kernel (if available) or using an implementation based on threads at userlevel. In the latter case it might be necessary to link applications with the thread library libpthread in addition to librt.
All AIO operations operate on files which were opened previously. There
might be arbitrarily many operations running for one file. The
asynchronous I/O operations are controlled using a data structure named
struct aiocb
(AIO control block). It is defined in
aio.h as follows.
The POSIX.1b standard mandates that the struct aiocb
structure
contains at least the members described in the following table. There
might be more elements which are used by the implementation, but
depending upon these elements is not portable and is highly deprecated.
int aio_fildes
This element specifies the file descriptor to be used for the operation. It must be a legal descriptor, otherwise the operation will fail.
The device on which the file is opened must allow the seek operation.
I.e., it is not possible to use any of the AIO operations on devices
like terminals where an lseek
call would lead to an error.
off_t aio_offset
This element specifies the offset in the file at which the operation (input or output) is performed. Since the operations are carried out in arbitrary order and more than one operation for one file descriptor can be started, one cannot expect a current read/write position of the file descriptor.
volatile void *aio_buf
This is a pointer to the buffer with the data to be written or the place where the read data is stored.
size_t aio_nbytes
This element specifies the length of the buffer pointed to by aio_buf
.
int aio_reqprio
If the platform has defined _POSIX_PRIORITIZED_IO
and
_POSIX_PRIORITY_SCHEDULING
, the AIO requests are
processed based on the current scheduling priority. The
aio_reqprio
element can then be used to lower the priority of the
AIO operation.
struct sigevent aio_sigevent
This element specifies how the calling process is notified once the
operation terminates. If the sigev_notify
element is
SIGEV_NONE
, no notification is sent. If it is SIGEV_SIGNAL
,
the signal determined by sigev_signo
is sent. Otherwise,
sigev_notify
must be SIGEV_THREAD
. In this case, a thread
is created which starts executing the function pointed to by
sigev_notify_function
.
int aio_lio_opcode
This element is only used by the lio_listio
and
lio_listio64
functions. Since these functions allow an
arbitrary number of operations to start at once, and each operation can be
input or output (or nothing), the information must be stored in the
control block. The possible values are:
LIO_READ
¶Start a read operation. Read from the file at position
aio_offset
and store the next aio_nbytes
bytes in the
buffer pointed to by aio_buf
.
LIO_WRITE
¶Start a write operation. Write aio_nbytes
bytes starting at
aio_buf
into the file starting at position aio_offset
.
LIO_NOP
¶Do nothing for this control block. This value is useful sometimes when
an array of struct aiocb
values contains holes, i.e., some of the
values must not be handled although the whole array is presented to the
lio_listio
function.
When the sources are compiled using _FILE_OFFSET_BITS == 64
on a
32 bit machine, this type is in fact struct aiocb64
, since the LFS
interface transparently replaces the struct aiocb
definition.
For use with the AIO functions defined in the LFS, there is a similar type
defined which replaces the types of the appropriate members with larger
types but otherwise is equivalent to struct aiocb
. Particularly,
all member names are the same.
int aio_fildes
This element specifies the file descriptor which is used for the operation. It must be a legal descriptor since otherwise the operation fails for obvious reasons.
The device on which the file is opened must allow the seek operation.
I.e., it is not possible to use any of the AIO operations on devices
like terminals where an lseek
call would lead to an error.
off64_t aio_offset
This element specifies at which offset in the file the operation (input or output) is performed. Since the operation are carried in arbitrary order and more than one operation for one file descriptor can be started, one cannot expect a current read/write position of the file descriptor.
volatile void *aio_buf
This is a pointer to the buffer with the data to be written or the place where the read data is stored.
size_t aio_nbytes
This element specifies the length of the buffer pointed to by aio_buf
.
int aio_reqprio
If for the platform _POSIX_PRIORITIZED_IO
and
_POSIX_PRIORITY_SCHEDULING
are defined the AIO requests are
processed based on the current scheduling priority. The
aio_reqprio
element can then be used to lower the priority of the
AIO operation.
struct sigevent aio_sigevent
This element specifies how the calling process is notified once the
operation terminates. If the sigev_notify
element is
SIGEV_NONE
no notification is sent. If it is SIGEV_SIGNAL
,
the signal determined by sigev_signo
is sent. Otherwise,
sigev_notify
must be SIGEV_THREAD
in which case a thread
is created which starts executing the function pointed to by
sigev_notify_function
.
int aio_lio_opcode
This element is only used by the lio_listio
and
lio_listio64
functions. Since these functions allow an
arbitrary number of operations to start at once, and since each operation can be
input or output (or nothing), the information must be stored in the
control block. See the description of struct aiocb
for a description
of the possible values.
When the sources are compiled using _FILE_OFFSET_BITS == 64
on a
32 bit machine, this type is available under the name struct
aiocb64
, since the LFS transparently replaces the old interface.
Next: Getting the Status of AIO Operations, Up: Perform I/O Operations in Parallel [Contents][Index]
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Unsafe lock heap | AC-Unsafe lock mem | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This function initiates an asynchronous read operation. It immediately returns after the operation was enqueued or when an error was encountered.
The first aiocbp->aio_nbytes
bytes of the file for which
aiocbp->aio_fildes
is a descriptor are written to the buffer
starting at aiocbp->aio_buf
. Reading starts at the absolute
position aiocbp->aio_offset
in the file.
If prioritized I/O is supported by the platform the
aiocbp->aio_reqprio
value is used to adjust the priority before
the request is actually enqueued.
The calling process is notified about the termination of the read
request according to the aiocbp->aio_sigevent
value.
When aio_read
returns, the return value is zero if no error
occurred that can be found before the process is enqueued. If such an
early error is found, the function returns -1 and sets
errno
to one of the following values:
EAGAIN
The request was not enqueued due to (temporarily) exceeded resource limitations.
ENOSYS
The aio_read
function is not implemented.
EBADF
The aiocbp->aio_fildes
descriptor is not valid. This condition
need not be recognized before enqueueing the request and so this error
might also be signaled asynchronously.
EINVAL
The aiocbp->aio_offset
or aiocbp->aio_reqpiro
value is
invalid. This condition need not be recognized before enqueueing the
request and so this error might also be signaled asynchronously.
If aio_read
returns zero, the current status of the request
can be queried using aio_error
and aio_return
functions.
As long as the value returned by aio_error
is EINPROGRESS
the operation has not yet completed. If aio_error
returns zero,
the operation successfully terminated, otherwise the value is to be
interpreted as an error code. If the function terminated, the result of
the operation can be obtained using a call to aio_return
. The
returned value is the same as an equivalent call to read
would
have returned. Possible error codes returned by aio_error
are:
EBADF
The aiocbp->aio_fildes
descriptor is not valid.
ECANCELED
The operation was canceled before the operation was finished (see Cancellation of AIO Operations)
EINVAL
The aiocbp->aio_offset
value is invalid.
When the sources are compiled with _FILE_OFFSET_BITS == 64
this
function is in fact aio_read64
since the LFS interface transparently
replaces the normal implementation.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Unsafe lock heap | AC-Unsafe lock mem | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This function is similar to the aio_read
function. The only
difference is that on 32 bit machines, the file descriptor should
be opened in the large file mode. Internally, aio_read64
uses
functionality equivalent to lseek64
(see Setting the File Position of a Descriptor) to position the file descriptor correctly for the reading,
as opposed to the lseek
functionality used in aio_read
.
When the sources are compiled with _FILE_OFFSET_BITS == 64
, this
function is available under the name aio_read
and so transparently
replaces the interface for small files on 32 bit machines.
To write data asynchronously to a file, there exists an equivalent pair of functions with a very similar interface.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Unsafe lock heap | AC-Unsafe lock mem | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This function initiates an asynchronous write operation. The function call immediately returns after the operation was enqueued or if before this happens an error was encountered.
The first aiocbp->aio_nbytes
bytes from the buffer starting at
aiocbp->aio_buf
are written to the file for which
aiocbp->aio_fildes
is a descriptor, starting at the absolute
position aiocbp->aio_offset
in the file.
If prioritized I/O is supported by the platform, the
aiocbp->aio_reqprio
value is used to adjust the priority before
the request is actually enqueued.
The calling process is notified about the termination of the read
request according to the aiocbp->aio_sigevent
value.
When aio_write
returns, the return value is zero if no error
occurred that can be found before the process is enqueued. If such an
early error is found the function returns -1 and sets
errno
to one of the following values.
EAGAIN
The request was not enqueued due to (temporarily) exceeded resource limitations.
ENOSYS
The aio_write
function is not implemented.
EBADF
The aiocbp->aio_fildes
descriptor is not valid. This condition
may not be recognized before enqueueing the request, and so this error
might also be signaled asynchronously.
EINVAL
The aiocbp->aio_offset
or aiocbp->aio_reqprio
value is
invalid. This condition may not be recognized before enqueueing the
request and so this error might also be signaled asynchronously.
In the case aio_write
returns zero, the current status of the
request can be queried using the aio_error
and aio_return
functions. As long as the value returned by aio_error
is
EINPROGRESS
the operation has not yet completed. If
aio_error
returns zero, the operation successfully terminated,
otherwise the value is to be interpreted as an error code. If the
function terminated, the result of the operation can be obtained using a call
to aio_return
. The returned value is the same as an equivalent
call to read
would have returned. Possible error codes returned
by aio_error
are:
EBADF
The aiocbp->aio_fildes
descriptor is not valid.
ECANCELED
The operation was canceled before the operation was finished. (see Cancellation of AIO Operations)
EINVAL
The aiocbp->aio_offset
value is invalid.
When the sources are compiled with _FILE_OFFSET_BITS == 64
, this
function is in fact aio_write64
since the LFS interface transparently
replaces the normal implementation.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Unsafe lock heap | AC-Unsafe lock mem | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This function is similar to the aio_write
function. The only
difference is that on 32 bit machines the file descriptor should
be opened in the large file mode. Internally aio_write64
uses
functionality equivalent to lseek64
(see Setting the File Position of a Descriptor) to position the file descriptor correctly for the writing,
as opposed to the lseek
functionality used in aio_write
.
When the sources are compiled with _FILE_OFFSET_BITS == 64
, this
function is available under the name aio_write
and so transparently
replaces the interface for small files on 32 bit machines.
Besides these functions with the more or less traditional interface,
POSIX.1b also defines a function which can initiate more than one
operation at a time, and which can handle freely mixed read and write
operations. It is therefore similar to a combination of readv
and
writev
.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Unsafe lock heap | AC-Unsafe lock mem | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The lio_listio
function can be used to enqueue an arbitrary
number of read and write requests at one time. The requests can all be
meant for the same file, all for different files or every solution in
between.
lio_listio
gets the nent requests from the array pointed to
by list. The operation to be performed is determined by the
aio_lio_opcode
member in each element of list. If this
field is LIO_READ
a read operation is enqueued, similar to a call
of aio_read
for this element of the array (except that the way
the termination is signalled is different, as we will see below). If
the aio_lio_opcode
member is LIO_WRITE
a write operation
is enqueued. Otherwise the aio_lio_opcode
must be LIO_NOP
in which case this element of list is simply ignored. This
“operation” is useful in situations where one has a fixed array of
struct aiocb
elements from which only a few need to be handled at
a time. Another situation is where the lio_listio
call was
canceled before all requests are processed (see Cancellation of AIO Operations) and the remaining requests have to be reissued.
The other members of each element of the array pointed to by
list
must have values suitable for the operation as described in
the documentation for aio_read
and aio_write
above.
The mode argument determines how lio_listio
behaves after
having enqueued all the requests. If mode is LIO_WAIT
it
waits until all requests terminated. Otherwise mode must be
LIO_NOWAIT
and in this case the function returns immediately after
having enqueued all the requests. In this case the caller gets a
notification of the termination of all requests according to the
sig parameter. If sig is NULL
no notification is
sent. Otherwise a signal is sent or a thread is started, just as
described in the description for aio_read
or aio_write
.
If mode is LIO_WAIT
, the return value of lio_listio
is 0 when all requests completed successfully. Otherwise the
function returns -1 and errno
is set accordingly. To find
out which request or requests failed one has to use the aio_error
function on all the elements of the array list.
In case mode is LIO_NOWAIT
, the function returns 0 if
all requests were enqueued correctly. The current state of the requests
can be found using aio_error
and aio_return
as described
above. If lio_listio
returns -1 in this mode, the
global variable errno
is set accordingly. If a request did not
yet terminate, a call to aio_error
returns EINPROGRESS
. If
the value is different, the request is finished and the error value (or
0) is returned and the result of the operation can be retrieved
using aio_return
.
Possible values for errno
are:
EAGAIN
The resources necessary to queue all the requests are not available at the moment. The error status for each element of list must be checked to determine which request failed.
Another reason could be that the system wide limit of AIO requests is exceeded. This cannot be the case for the implementation on GNU systems since no arbitrary limits exist.
EINVAL
The mode parameter is invalid or nent is larger than
AIO_LISTIO_MAX
.
EIO
One or more of the request’s I/O operations failed. The error status of each request should be checked to determine which one failed.
ENOSYS
The lio_listio
function is not supported.
If the mode parameter is LIO_NOWAIT
and the caller cancels
a request, the error status for this request returned by
aio_error
is ECANCELED
.
When the sources are compiled with _FILE_OFFSET_BITS == 64
, this
function is in fact lio_listio64
since the LFS interface
transparently replaces the normal implementation.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Unsafe lock heap | AC-Unsafe lock mem | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This function is similar to the lio_listio
function. The only
difference is that on 32 bit machines, the file descriptor should
be opened in the large file mode. Internally, lio_listio64
uses
functionality equivalent to lseek64
(see Setting the File Position of a Descriptor) to position the file descriptor correctly for the reading or
writing, as opposed to the lseek
functionality used in
lio_listio
.
When the sources are compiled with _FILE_OFFSET_BITS == 64
, this
function is available under the name lio_listio
and so
transparently replaces the interface for small files on 32 bit
machines.
Next: Getting into a Consistent State, Previous: Asynchronous Read and Write Operations, Up: Perform I/O Operations in Parallel [Contents][Index]
As already described in the documentation of the functions in the last
section, it must be possible to get information about the status of an I/O
request. When the operation is performed truly asynchronously (as with
aio_read
and aio_write
and with lio_listio
when the
mode is LIO_NOWAIT
), one sometimes needs to know whether a
specific request already terminated and if so, what the result was.
The following two functions allow you to get this kind of information.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This function determines the error state of the request described by the
struct aiocb
variable pointed to by aiocbp. If the
request has not yet terminated the value returned is always
EINPROGRESS
. Once the request has terminated the value
aio_error
returns is either 0 if the request completed
successfully or it returns the value which would be stored in the
errno
variable if the request would have been done using
read
, write
, or fsync
.
The function can return ENOSYS
if it is not implemented. It
could also return EINVAL
if the aiocbp parameter does not
refer to an asynchronous operation whose return status is not yet known.
When the sources are compiled with _FILE_OFFSET_BITS == 64
this
function is in fact aio_error64
since the LFS interface
transparently replaces the normal implementation.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This function is similar to aio_error
with the only difference
that the argument is a reference to a variable of type struct
aiocb64
.
When the sources are compiled with _FILE_OFFSET_BITS == 64
this
function is available under the name aio_error
and so
transparently replaces the interface for small files on 32 bit
machines.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This function can be used to retrieve the return status of the operation
carried out by the request described in the variable pointed to by
aiocbp. As long as the error status of this request as returned
by aio_error
is EINPROGRESS
the return value of this function is
undefined.
Once the request is finished this function can be used exactly once to
retrieve the return value. Following calls might lead to undefined
behavior. The return value itself is the value which would have been
returned by the read
, write
, or fsync
call.
The function can return ENOSYS
if it is not implemented. It
could also return EINVAL
if the aiocbp parameter does not
refer to an asynchronous operation whose return status is not yet known.
When the sources are compiled with _FILE_OFFSET_BITS == 64
this
function is in fact aio_return64
since the LFS interface
transparently replaces the normal implementation.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This function is similar to aio_return
with the only difference
that the argument is a reference to a variable of type struct
aiocb64
.
When the sources are compiled with _FILE_OFFSET_BITS == 64
this
function is available under the name aio_return
and so
transparently replaces the interface for small files on 32 bit
machines.
Next: Cancellation of AIO Operations, Previous: Getting the Status of AIO Operations, Up: Perform I/O Operations in Parallel [Contents][Index]
When dealing with asynchronous operations it is sometimes necessary to get into a consistent state. This would mean for AIO that one wants to know whether a certain request or a group of requests were processed. This could be done by waiting for the notification sent by the system after the operation terminated, but this sometimes would mean wasting resources (mainly computation time). Instead POSIX.1b defines two functions which will help with most kinds of consistency.
The aio_fsync
and aio_fsync64
functions are only available
if the symbol _POSIX_SYNCHRONIZED_IO
is defined in unistd.h.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Unsafe lock heap | AC-Unsafe lock mem | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
Calling this function forces all I/O operations queued at the
time of the function call operating on the file descriptor
aiocbp->aio_fildes
into the synchronized I/O completion state
(see Synchronizing I/O operations). The aio_fsync
function returns
immediately but the notification through the method described in
aiocbp->aio_sigevent
will happen only after all requests for this
file descriptor have terminated and the file is synchronized. This also
means that requests for this very same file descriptor which are queued
after the synchronization request are not affected.
If op is O_DSYNC
the synchronization happens as with a call
to fdatasync
. Otherwise op should be O_SYNC
and
the synchronization happens as with fsync
.
As long as the synchronization has not happened, a call to
aio_error
with the reference to the object pointed to by
aiocbp returns EINPROGRESS
. Once the synchronization is
done aio_error
return 0 if the synchronization was not
successful. Otherwise the value returned is the value to which the
fsync
or fdatasync
function would have set the
errno
variable. In this case nothing can be assumed about the
consistency of the data written to this file descriptor.
The return value of this function is 0 if the request was
successfully enqueued. Otherwise the return value is -1 and
errno
is set to one of the following values:
EAGAIN
The request could not be enqueued due to temporary lack of resources.
EBADF
The file descriptor aiocbp->aio_fildes
is not valid.
EINVAL
The implementation does not support I/O synchronization or the op
parameter is other than O_DSYNC
and O_SYNC
.
ENOSYS
This function is not implemented.
When the sources are compiled with _FILE_OFFSET_BITS == 64
this
function is in fact aio_fsync64
since the LFS interface
transparently replaces the normal implementation.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Unsafe lock heap | AC-Unsafe lock mem | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This function is similar to aio_fsync
with the only difference
that the argument is a reference to a variable of type struct
aiocb64
.
When the sources are compiled with _FILE_OFFSET_BITS == 64
this
function is available under the name aio_fsync
and so
transparently replaces the interface for small files on 32 bit
machines.
Another method of synchronization is to wait until one or more requests of a
specific set terminated. This could be achieved by the aio_*
functions to notify the initiating process about the termination but in
some situations this is not the ideal solution. In a program which
constantly updates clients somehow connected to the server it is not
always the best solution to go round robin since some connections might
be slow. On the other hand letting the aio_*
functions notify the
caller might also be not the best solution since whenever the process
works on preparing data for a client it makes no sense to be
interrupted by a notification since the new client will not be handled
before the current client is served. For situations like this
aio_suspend
should be used.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Unsafe lock | AC-Unsafe lock | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
When calling this function, the calling thread is suspended until at
least one of the requests pointed to by the nent elements of the
array list has completed. If any of the requests has already
completed at the time aio_suspend
is called, the function returns
immediately. Whether a request has terminated or not is determined by
comparing the error status of the request with EINPROGRESS
. If
an element of list is NULL
, the entry is simply ignored.
If no request has finished, the calling process is suspended. If
timeout is NULL
, the process is not woken until a request
has finished. If timeout is not NULL
, the process remains
suspended at least as long as specified in timeout. In this case,
aio_suspend
returns with an error.
The return value of the function is 0 if one or more requests
from the list have terminated. Otherwise the function returns
-1 and errno
is set to one of the following values:
EAGAIN
None of the requests from the list completed in the time specified by timeout.
EINTR
A signal interrupted the aio_suspend
function. This signal might
also be sent by the AIO implementation while signalling the termination
of one of the requests.
ENOSYS
The aio_suspend
function is not implemented.
When the sources are compiled with _FILE_OFFSET_BITS == 64
this
function is in fact aio_suspend64
since the LFS interface
transparently replaces the normal implementation.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Unsafe lock | AC-Unsafe lock | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This function is similar to aio_suspend
with the only difference
that the argument is a reference to a variable of type struct
aiocb64
.
When the sources are compiled with _FILE_OFFSET_BITS == 64
this
function is available under the name aio_suspend
and so
transparently replaces the interface for small files on 32 bit
machines.
Next: How to optimize the AIO implementation, Previous: Getting into a Consistent State, Up: Perform I/O Operations in Parallel [Contents][Index]
When one or more requests are asynchronously processed, it might be useful in some situations to cancel a selected operation, e.g., if it becomes obvious that the written data is no longer accurate and would have to be overwritten soon. As an example, assume an application, which writes data in files in a situation where new incoming data would have to be written in a file which will be updated by an enqueued request. The POSIX AIO implementation provides such a function, but this function is not capable of forcing the cancellation of the request. It is up to the implementation to decide whether it is possible to cancel the operation or not. Therefore using this function is merely a hint.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Unsafe lock heap | AC-Unsafe lock mem | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The aio_cancel
function can be used to cancel one or more
outstanding requests. If the aiocbp parameter is NULL
, the
function tries to cancel all of the outstanding requests which would process
the file descriptor fildes (i.e., whose aio_fildes
member
is fildes). If aiocbp is not NULL
, aio_cancel
attempts to cancel the specific request pointed to by aiocbp.
For requests which were successfully canceled, the normal notification
about the termination of the request should take place. I.e., depending
on the struct sigevent
object which controls this, nothing
happens, a signal is sent or a thread is started. If the request cannot
be canceled, it terminates the usual way after performing the operation.
After a request is successfully canceled, a call to aio_error
with
a reference to this request as the parameter will return
ECANCELED
and a call to aio_return
will return -1.
If the request wasn’t canceled and is still running the error status is
still EINPROGRESS
.
The return value of the function is AIO_CANCELED
if there were
requests which haven’t terminated and which were successfully canceled.
If there is one or more requests left which couldn’t be canceled, the
return value is AIO_NOTCANCELED
. In this case aio_error
must be used to find out which of the, perhaps multiple, requests (if
aiocbp is NULL
) weren’t successfully canceled. If all
requests already terminated at the time aio_cancel
is called the
return value is AIO_ALLDONE
.
If an error occurred during the execution of aio_cancel
the
function returns -1 and sets errno
to one of the following
values.
EBADF
The file descriptor fildes is not valid.
ENOSYS
aio_cancel
is not implemented.
When the sources are compiled with _FILE_OFFSET_BITS == 64
, this
function is in fact aio_cancel64
since the LFS interface
transparently replaces the normal implementation.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Unsafe lock heap | AC-Unsafe lock mem | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This function is similar to aio_cancel
with the only difference
that the argument is a reference to a variable of type struct
aiocb64
.
When the sources are compiled with _FILE_OFFSET_BITS == 64
, this
function is available under the name aio_cancel
and so
transparently replaces the interface for small files on 32 bit
machines.
Previous: Cancellation of AIO Operations, Up: Perform I/O Operations in Parallel [Contents][Index]
The POSIX standard does not specify how the AIO functions are implemented. They could be system calls, but it is also possible to emulate them at userlevel.
At the time of writing, the available implementation is a user-level implementation which uses threads for handling the enqueued requests. While this implementation requires making some decisions about limitations, hard limitations are something best avoided in the GNU C Library. Therefore, the GNU C Library provides a means for tuning the AIO implementation according to the individual use.
This data type is used to pass the configuration or tunable parameters
to the implementation. The program has to initialize the members of
this struct and pass it to the implementation using the aio_init
function.
int aio_threads
This member specifies the maximal number of threads which may be used at any one time.
int aio_num
This number provides an estimate on the maximal number of simultaneously enqueued requests.
int aio_locks
Unused.
int aio_usedba
Unused.
int aio_debug
Unused.
int aio_numusers
Unused.
int aio_reserved[2]
Unused.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Unsafe lock | AC-Unsafe lock | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This function must be called before any other AIO function. Calling it is completely voluntary, as it is only meant to help the AIO implementation perform better.
Before calling aio_init
, the members of a variable of
type struct aioinit
must be initialized. Then a reference to
this variable is passed as the parameter to aio_init
which itself
may or may not pay attention to the hints.
The function has no return value and no error cases are defined. It is an extension which follows a proposal from the SGI implementation in Irix 6. It is not covered by POSIX.1b or Unix98.
Next: Duplicating Descriptors, Previous: Perform I/O Operations in Parallel, Up: Low-Level Input/Output [Contents][Index]
This section describes how you can perform various other operations on
file descriptors, such as inquiring about or setting flags describing
the status of the file descriptor, manipulating record locks, and the
like. All of these operations are performed by the function fcntl
.
The second argument to the fcntl
function is a command that
specifies which operation to perform. The function and macros that name
various flags that are used with it are declared in the header file
fcntl.h. Many of these flags are also used by the open
function; see Opening and Closing Files.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The fcntl
function performs the operation specified by
command on the file descriptor filedes. Some commands
require additional arguments to be supplied. These additional arguments
and the return value and error conditions are given in the detailed
descriptions of the individual commands.
Briefly, here is a list of what the various commands are.
F_DUPFD
¶Duplicate the file descriptor (return another file descriptor pointing to the same open file). See Duplicating Descriptors.
F_GETFD
¶Get flags associated with the file descriptor. See File Descriptor Flags.
F_SETFD
¶Set flags associated with the file descriptor. See File Descriptor Flags.
F_GETFL
¶Get flags associated with the open file. See File Status Flags.
F_SETFL
¶Set flags associated with the open file. See File Status Flags.
F_GETLK
¶Test a file lock. See File Locks.
F_SETLK
¶Set or clear a file lock. See File Locks.
F_SETLKW
¶Like F_SETLK
, but wait for completion. See File Locks.
F_OFD_GETLK
¶Test an open file description lock. See Open File Description Locks. Specific to Linux.
F_OFD_SETLK
¶Set or clear an open file description lock. See Open File Description Locks. Specific to Linux.
F_OFD_SETLKW
¶Like F_OFD_SETLK
, but block until lock is acquired.
See Open File Description Locks. Specific to Linux.
F_GETOWN
¶Get process or process group ID to receive SIGIO
signals.
See Interrupt-Driven Input.
F_SETOWN
¶Set process or process group ID to receive SIGIO
signals.
See Interrupt-Driven Input.
This function is a cancellation point in multi-threaded programs for the
commands F_SETLKW
(and the LFS analogous F_SETLKW64
) and
F_OFD_SETLKW
. This is a problem if the thread allocates some
resources (like memory, file descriptors, semaphores or whatever) at the time
fcntl
is called. If the thread gets canceled these resources stay
allocated until the program ends. To avoid this calls to fcntl
should
be protected using cancellation handlers.
Next: File Descriptor Flags, Previous: Control Operations on Files, Up: Low-Level Input/Output [Contents][Index]
You can duplicate a file descriptor, or allocate another file descriptor that refers to the same open file as the original. Duplicate descriptors share one file position and one set of file status flags (see File Status Flags), but each has its own set of file descriptor flags (see File Descriptor Flags).
The major use of duplicating a file descriptor is to implement redirection of input or output: that is, to change the file or pipe that a particular file descriptor corresponds to.
You can perform this operation using the fcntl
function with the
F_DUPFD
command, but there are also convenient functions
dup
and dup2
for duplicating descriptors.
The fcntl
function and flags are declared in fcntl.h,
while prototypes for dup
and dup2
are in the header file
unistd.h.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This function copies descriptor old to the first available
descriptor number (the first number not currently open). It is
equivalent to fcntl (old, F_DUPFD, 0)
.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This function copies the descriptor old to descriptor number new.
If old is an invalid descriptor, then dup2
does nothing; it
does not close new. Otherwise, the new duplicate of old
replaces any previous meaning of descriptor new, as if new
were closed first.
If old and new are different numbers, and old is a
valid descriptor number, then dup2
is equivalent to:
close (new); fcntl (old, F_DUPFD, new)
However, dup2
does this atomically; there is no instant in the
middle of calling dup2
at which new is closed and not yet a
duplicate of old.
This macro is used as the command argument to fcntl
, to
copy the file descriptor given as the first argument.
The form of the call in this case is:
fcntl (old, F_DUPFD, next-filedes)
The next-filedes argument is of type int
and specifies that
the file descriptor returned should be the next available one greater
than or equal to this value.
The return value from fcntl
with this command is normally the value
of the new file descriptor. A return value of -1 indicates an
error. The following errno
error conditions are defined for
this command:
EBADF
The old argument is invalid.
EINVAL
The next-filedes argument is invalid.
EMFILE
There are no more file descriptors available—your program is already
using the maximum. In BSD and GNU, the maximum is controlled by a
resource limit that can be changed; see Limiting Resource Usage, for
more information about the RLIMIT_NOFILE
limit.
ENFILE
is not a possible error code for dup2
because
dup2
does not create a new opening of a file; duplicate
descriptors do not count toward the limit which ENFILE
indicates. EMFILE
is possible because it refers to the limit on
distinct descriptor numbers in use in one process.
Here is an example showing how to use dup2
to do redirection.
Typically, redirection of the standard streams (like stdin
) is
done by a shell or shell-like program before calling one of the
exec
functions (see Executing a File) to execute a new
program in a child process. When the new program is executed, it
creates and initializes the standard streams to point to the
corresponding file descriptors, before its main
function is
invoked.
So, to redirect standard input to a file, the shell could do something like:
pid = fork (); if (pid == 0) { char *filename; char *program; int file; … file = TEMP_FAILURE_RETRY (open (filename, O_RDONLY)); dup2 (file, STDIN_FILENO); TEMP_FAILURE_RETRY (close (file)); execv (program, NULL); }
There is also a more detailed example showing how to implement redirection in the context of a pipeline of processes in Launching Jobs.
Next: File Status Flags, Previous: Duplicating Descriptors, Up: Low-Level Input/Output [Contents][Index]
File descriptor flags are miscellaneous attributes of a file descriptor. These flags are associated with particular file descriptors, so that if you have created duplicate file descriptors from a single opening of a file, each descriptor has its own set of flags.
Currently there is just one file descriptor flag: FD_CLOEXEC
,
which causes the descriptor to be closed if you use any of the
exec…
functions (see Executing a File).
The symbols in this section are defined in the header file fcntl.h.
This macro is used as the command argument to fcntl
, to
specify that it should return the file descriptor flags associated
with the filedes argument.
The normal return value from fcntl
with this command is a
nonnegative number which can be interpreted as the bitwise OR of the
individual flags (except that currently there is only one flag to use).
In case of an error, fcntl
returns -1. The following
errno
error conditions are defined for this command:
EBADF
The filedes argument is invalid.
This macro is used as the command argument to fcntl
, to
specify that it should set the file descriptor flags associated with the
filedes argument. This requires a third int
argument to
specify the new flags, so the form of the call is:
fcntl (filedes, F_SETFD, new-flags)
The normal return value from fcntl
with this command is an
unspecified value other than -1, which indicates an error.
The flags and error conditions are the same as for the F_GETFD
command.
The following macro is defined for use as a file descriptor flag with
the fcntl
function. The value is an integer constant usable
as a bit mask value.
This flag specifies that the file descriptor should be closed when
an exec
function is invoked; see Executing a File. When
a file descriptor is allocated (as with open
or dup
),
this bit is initially cleared on the new file descriptor, meaning that
descriptor will survive into the new program after exec
.
If you want to modify the file descriptor flags, you should get the
current flags with F_GETFD
and modify the value. Don’t assume
that the flags listed here are the only ones that are implemented; your
program may be run years from now and more flags may exist then. For
example, here is a function to set or clear the flag FD_CLOEXEC
without altering any other flags:
/* Set theFD_CLOEXEC
flag of desc if value is nonzero, or clear the flag if value is 0. Return 0 on success, or -1 on error witherrno
set. */ int set_cloexec_flag (int desc, int value) { int oldflags = fcntl (desc, F_GETFD, 0); /* If reading the flags failed, return error indication now. */ if (oldflags < 0) return oldflags; /* Set just the flag we want to set. */ if (value != 0) oldflags |= FD_CLOEXEC; else oldflags &= ~FD_CLOEXEC; /* Store modified flag word in the descriptor. */ return fcntl (desc, F_SETFD, oldflags); }
Next: File Locks, Previous: File Descriptor Flags, Up: Low-Level Input/Output [Contents][Index]
File status flags are used to specify attributes of the opening of a
file. Unlike the file descriptor flags discussed in File Descriptor Flags, the file status flags are shared by duplicated file descriptors
resulting from a single opening of the file. The file status flags are
specified with the flags argument to open
;
see Opening and Closing Files.
File status flags fall into three categories, which are described in the following sections.
open
and are
returned by fcntl
, but cannot be changed.
open
will do.
These flags are not preserved after the open
call.
read
and
write
are done. They are set by open
, and can be fetched or
changed with fcntl
.
The symbols in this section are defined in the header file fcntl.h.
Next: Open-time Flags, Up: File Status Flags [Contents][Index]
The file access mode allows a file descriptor to be used for reading, writing, both, or neither. The access mode is determined when the file is opened, and never change.
Open the file for read access.
Open the file for write access.
Open the file for both reading and writing.
Obtain a file descriptor for the file, but do not open the file for reading or writing. Permission checks for the file itself are skipped when the file is opened (but permission to access the directory that contains it is still needed), and permissions are checked when the descriptor is used later on.
For example, such descriptors can be used with the fexecve
function (see Executing a File).
This access mode is specific to Linux. On GNU/Hurd systems, it is
possible to use O_EXEC
explicitly, or specify no access modes
at all (see below).
The portable file access modes O_RDONLY
, O_WRONLY
, and
O_RDWR
may not correspond to individual bits. To determine the
file access mode with fcntl
, you must extract the access mode
bits from the retrieved file status flags, using the O_ACCMODE
mask.
This macro is a mask that can be bitwise-ANDed with the file status flag value to recover the file access mode, assuming that a standard file access mode is in use.
If a non-standard file access mode is used (such as O_PATH
or
O_EXEC
), masking with O_ACCMODE
may give incorrect
results. These non-standard access modes are identified by individual
bits and have to be checked directly (without masking with
O_ACCMODE
first).
On GNU/Hurd systems (but not on other systems), O_RDONLY
and
O_WRONLY
are independent bits that can be bitwise-ORed together,
and it is valid for either bit to be set or clear. This means that
O_RDWR
is the same as O_RDONLY|O_WRONLY
. A file access
mode of zero is permissible; it allows no operations that do input or
output to the file, but does allow other operations such as
fchmod
. On GNU/Hurd systems, since “read-only” or “write-only”
is a misnomer, fcntl.h defines additional names for the file
access modes.
Open the file for reading. Same as O_RDONLY
; only defined on GNU/Hurd.
Open the file for writing. Same as O_WRONLY
; only defined on GNU/Hurd.
Open the file for executing. Only defined on GNU/Hurd.
Next: I/O Operating Modes, Previous: File Access Modes, Up: File Status Flags [Contents][Index]
The open-time flags specify options affecting how open
will behave.
These options are not preserved once the file is open. The exception to
this is O_NONBLOCK
, which is also an I/O operating mode and so it
is saved. See Opening and Closing Files, for how to call
open
.
There are two sorts of options specified by open-time flags.
open
looks up the
file name to locate the file, and whether the file can be created.
open
will
perform on the file once it is open.
Here are the file name translation flags.
If set, the file will be created if it doesn’t already exist.
If both O_CREAT
and O_EXCL
are set, then open
fails
if the specified file already exists. This is guaranteed to never
clobber an existing file.
The O_EXCL
flag has a special meaning in combination with
O_TMPFILE
; see below.
If set, the open operation fails if the given name is not the name of
a directory. The errno
variable is set to ENOTDIR
for
this error condition.
If set, the open operation fails if the final component of the file name
refers to a symbolic link. The errno
variable is set to
ELOOP
for this error condition.
If this flag is specified, functions in the open
family create an
unnamed temporary file. In this case, the pathname argument to the
open
family of functions (see Opening and Closing Files) is
interpreted as the directory in which the temporary file is created
(thus determining the file system which provides the storage for the
file). The O_TMPFILE
flag must be combined with O_WRONLY
or O_RDWR
, and the mode argument is required.
The temporary file can later be given a name using linkat
,
turning it into a regular file. This allows the atomic creation of a
file with the specific file attributes (mode and extended attributes)
and file contents. If, for security reasons, it is not desirable that a
name can be given to the file, the O_EXCL
flag can be specified
along with O_TMPFILE
.
Not all kernels support this open flag. If this flag is unsupported, an
attempt to create an unnamed temporary file fails with an error of
EINVAL
. If the underlying file system does not support the
O_TMPFILE
flag, an EOPNOTSUPP
error is the result.
The O_TMPFILE
flag is a GNU extension.
This prevents open
from blocking for a “long time” to open the
file. This is only meaningful for some kinds of files, usually devices
such as serial ports; when it is not meaningful, it is harmless and
ignored. Often, opening a port to a modem blocks until the modem reports
carrier detection; if O_NONBLOCK
is specified, open
will
return immediately without a carrier.
Note that the O_NONBLOCK
flag is overloaded as both an I/O operating
mode and a file name translation flag. This means that specifying
O_NONBLOCK
in open
also sets nonblocking I/O mode;
see I/O Operating Modes. To open the file without blocking but do normal
I/O that blocks, you must call open
with O_NONBLOCK
set and
then call fcntl
to turn the bit off.
If the named file is a terminal device, don’t make it the controlling terminal for the process. See Job Control, for information about what it means to be the controlling terminal.
On GNU/Hurd systems and 4.4 BSD, opening a file never makes it the
controlling terminal and O_NOCTTY
is zero. However, GNU/Linux systems
and some other systems use a nonzero value for O_NOCTTY
and set the
controlling terminal when you open a file that is a terminal device; so
to be portable, use O_NOCTTY
when it is important to avoid this.
The following three file name translation flags exist only on GNU/Hurd systems.
Do not recognize the named file as the controlling terminal, even if it refers to the process’s existing controlling terminal device. Operations on the new file descriptor will never induce job control signals. See Job Control.
If the named file is a symbolic link, open the link itself instead of
the file it refers to. (fstat
on the new file descriptor will
return the information returned by lstat
on the link’s name.)
If the named file is specially translated, do not invoke the translator. Open the bare file the translator itself sees.
The open-time action flags tell open
to do additional operations
which are not really related to opening the file. The reason to do them
as part of open
instead of in separate calls is that open
can do them atomically.
Truncate the file to zero length. This option is only useful for
regular files, not special files such as directories or FIFOs. POSIX.1
requires that you open the file for writing to use O_TRUNC
. In
BSD and GNU you must have permission to write the file to truncate it,
but you need not open for write access.
This is the only open-time action flag specified by POSIX.1. There is
no good reason for truncation to be done by open
, instead of by
calling ftruncate
afterwards. The O_TRUNC
flag existed in
Unix before ftruncate
was invented, and is retained for backward
compatibility.
The remaining operating modes are BSD extensions. They exist only on some systems. On other systems, these macros are not defined.
Acquire a shared lock on the file, as with flock
.
See File Locks.
If O_CREAT
is specified, the locking is done atomically when
creating the file. You are guaranteed that no other process will get
the lock on the new file first.
Acquire an exclusive lock on the file, as with flock
.
See File Locks. This is atomic like O_SHLOCK
.
Next: Getting and Setting File Status Flags, Previous: Open-time Flags, Up: File Status Flags [Contents][Index]
The operating modes affect how input and output operations using a file
descriptor work. These flags are set by open
and can be fetched
and changed with fcntl
.
The bit that enables append mode for the file. If set, then all
write
operations write the data at the end of the file, extending
it, regardless of the current file position. This is the only reliable
way to append to a file. In append mode, you are guaranteed that the
data you write will always go to the current end of the file, regardless
of other processes writing to the file. Conversely, if you simply set
the file position to the end of file and write, then another process can
extend the file after you set the file position but before you write,
resulting in your data appearing someplace before the real end of file.
The bit that enables nonblocking mode for the file. If this bit is set,
read
requests on the file can return immediately with a failure
status if there is no input immediately available, instead of blocking.
Likewise, write
requests can also return immediately with a
failure status if the output can’t be written immediately.
Note that the O_NONBLOCK
flag is overloaded as both an I/O
operating mode and a file name translation flag; see Open-time Flags.
This is an obsolete name for O_NONBLOCK
, provided for
compatibility with BSD. It is not defined by the POSIX.1 standard.
The remaining operating modes are BSD and GNU extensions. They exist only on some systems. On other systems, these macros are not defined.
The bit that enables asynchronous input mode. If set, then SIGIO
signals will be generated when input is available. See Interrupt-Driven Input.
Asynchronous input mode is a BSD feature.
The bit that enables synchronous writing for the file. If set, each
write
call will make sure the data is reliably stored on disk before
returning.
Synchronous writing is a BSD feature.
This is another name for O_FSYNC
. They have the same value.
If this bit is set, read
will not update the access time of the
file. See File Times. This is used by programs that do backups, so
that backing a file up does not count as reading it.
Only the owner of the file or the superuser may use this bit.
This is a GNU extension.
Previous: I/O Operating Modes, Up: File Status Flags [Contents][Index]
The fcntl
function can fetch or change file status flags.
This macro is used as the command argument to fcntl
, to
read the file status flags for the open file with descriptor
filedes.
The normal return value from fcntl
with this command is a
nonnegative number which can be interpreted as the bitwise OR of the
individual flags. Since the file access modes are not single-bit values,
you can mask off other bits in the returned flags with O_ACCMODE
to compare them.
In case of an error, fcntl
returns -1. The following
errno
error conditions are defined for this command:
EBADF
The filedes argument is invalid.
This macro is used as the command argument to fcntl
, to set
the file status flags for the open file corresponding to the
filedes argument. This command requires a third int
argument to specify the new flags, so the call looks like this:
fcntl (filedes, F_SETFL, new-flags)
You can’t change the access mode for the file in this way; that is, whether the file descriptor was opened for reading or writing.
The normal return value from fcntl
with this command is an
unspecified value other than -1, which indicates an error. The
error conditions are the same as for the F_GETFL
command.
If you want to modify the file status flags, you should get the current
flags with F_GETFL
and modify the value. Don’t assume that the
flags listed here are the only ones that are implemented; your program
may be run years from now and more flags may exist then. For example,
here is a function to set or clear the flag O_NONBLOCK
without
altering any other flags:
/* Set theO_NONBLOCK
flag of desc if value is nonzero, or clear the flag if value is 0. Return 0 on success, or -1 on error witherrno
set. */ int set_nonblock_flag (int desc, int value) { int oldflags = fcntl (desc, F_GETFL, 0); /* If reading the flags failed, return error indication now. */ if (oldflags == -1) return -1; /* Set just the flag we want to set. */ if (value != 0) oldflags |= O_NONBLOCK; else oldflags &= ~O_NONBLOCK; /* Store modified flag word in the descriptor. */ return fcntl (desc, F_SETFL, oldflags); }
Next: Open File Description Locks, Previous: File Status Flags, Up: Low-Level Input/Output [Contents][Index]
This section describes record locks that are associated with the process. There is also a different type of record lock that is associated with the open file description instead of the process. See Open File Description Locks.
The remaining fcntl
commands are used to support record
locking, which permits multiple cooperating programs to prevent each
other from simultaneously accessing parts of a file in error-prone
ways.
An exclusive or write lock gives a process exclusive access for writing to the specified part of the file. While a write lock is in place, no other process can lock that part of the file.
A shared or read lock prohibits any other process from requesting a write lock on the specified part of the file. However, other processes can request read locks.
The read
and write
functions do not actually check to see
whether there are any locks in place. If you want to implement a
locking protocol for a file shared by multiple processes, your application
must do explicit fcntl
calls to request and clear locks at the
appropriate points.
Locks are associated with processes. A process can only have one kind
of lock set for each byte of a given file. When any file descriptor for
that file is closed by the process, all of the locks that process holds
on that file are released, even if the locks were made using other
descriptors that remain open. Likewise, locks are released when a
process exits, and are not inherited by child processes created using
fork
(see Creating a Process).
When making a lock, use a struct flock
to specify what kind of
lock and where. This data type and the associated macros for the
fcntl
function are declared in the header file fcntl.h.
This structure is used with the fcntl
function to describe a file
lock. It has these members:
short int l_type
Specifies the type of the lock; one of F_RDLCK
, F_WRLCK
, or
F_UNLCK
.
short int l_whence
This corresponds to the whence argument to fseek
or
lseek
, and specifies what the offset is relative to. Its value
can be one of SEEK_SET
, SEEK_CUR
, or SEEK_END
.
off_t l_start
This specifies the offset of the start of the region to which the lock
applies, and is given in bytes relative to the point specified by the
l_whence
member.
off_t l_len
This specifies the length of the region to be locked. A value of
0
is treated specially; it means the region extends to the end of
the file.
pid_t l_pid
This field is the process ID (see Process Creation Concepts) of the
process holding the lock. It is filled in by calling fcntl
with
the F_GETLK
command, but is ignored when making a lock. If the
conflicting lock is an open file description lock
(see Open File Description Locks), then this field will be set to
-1.
This macro is used as the command argument to fcntl
, to
specify that it should get information about a lock. This command
requires a third argument of type struct flock *
to be passed
to fcntl
, so that the form of the call is:
fcntl (filedes, F_GETLK, lockp)
If there is a lock already in place that would block the lock described
by the lockp argument, information about that lock overwrites
*lockp
. Existing locks are not reported if they are
compatible with making a new lock as specified. Thus, you should
specify a lock type of F_WRLCK
if you want to find out about both
read and write locks, or F_RDLCK
if you want to find out about
write locks only.
There might be more than one lock affecting the region specified by the
lockp argument, but fcntl
only returns information about
one of them. The l_whence
member of the lockp structure is
set to SEEK_SET
and the l_start
and l_len
fields
set to identify the locked region.
If no lock applies, the only change to the lockp structure is to
update the l_type
to a value of F_UNLCK
.
The normal return value from fcntl
with this command is an
unspecified value other than -1, which is reserved to indicate an
error. The following errno
error conditions are defined for
this command:
EBADF
The filedes argument is invalid.
EINVAL
Either the lockp argument doesn’t specify valid lock information, or the file associated with filedes doesn’t support locks.
This macro is used as the command argument to fcntl
, to
specify that it should set or clear a lock. This command requires a
third argument of type struct flock *
to be passed to
fcntl
, so that the form of the call is:
fcntl (filedes, F_SETLK, lockp)
If the process already has a lock on any part of the region, the old lock
on that part is replaced with the new lock. You can remove a lock
by specifying a lock type of F_UNLCK
.
If the lock cannot be set, fcntl
returns immediately with a value
of -1. This function does not block while waiting for other processes
to release locks. If fcntl
succeeds, it returns a value other
than -1.
The following errno
error conditions are defined for this
function:
EAGAIN
EACCES
The lock cannot be set because it is blocked by an existing lock on the
file. Some systems use EAGAIN
in this case, and other systems
use EACCES
; your program should treat them alike, after
F_SETLK
. (GNU/Linux and GNU/Hurd systems always use EAGAIN
.)
EBADF
Either: the filedes argument is invalid; you requested a read lock but the filedes is not open for read access; or, you requested a write lock but the filedes is not open for write access.
EINVAL
Either the lockp argument doesn’t specify valid lock information, or the file associated with filedes doesn’t support locks.
ENOLCK
The system has run out of file lock resources; there are already too many file locks in place.
Well-designed file systems never report this error, because they have no limitation on the number of locks. However, you must still take account of the possibility of this error, as it could result from network access to a file system on another machine.
This macro is used as the command argument to fcntl
, to
specify that it should set or clear a lock. It is just like the
F_SETLK
command, but causes the process to block (or wait)
until the request can be specified.
This command requires a third argument of type struct flock *
, as
for the F_SETLK
command.
The fcntl
return values and errors are the same as for the
F_SETLK
command, but these additional errno
error conditions
are defined for this command:
EINTR
The function was interrupted by a signal while it was waiting. See Primitives Interrupted by Signals.
EDEADLK
The specified region is being locked by another process. But that process is waiting to lock a region which the current process has locked, so waiting for the lock would result in deadlock. The system does not guarantee that it will detect all such conditions, but it lets you know if it notices one.
The following macros are defined for use as values for the l_type
member of the flock
structure. The values are integer constants.
F_RDLCK
¶This macro is used to specify a read (or shared) lock.
F_WRLCK
¶This macro is used to specify a write (or exclusive) lock.
F_UNLCK
¶This macro is used to specify that the region is unlocked.
As an example of a situation where file locking is useful, consider a program that can be run simultaneously by several different users, that logs status information to a common file. One example of such a program might be a game that uses a file to keep track of high scores. Another example might be a program that records usage or accounting information for billing purposes.
Having multiple copies of the program simultaneously writing to the file could cause the contents of the file to become mixed up. But you can prevent this kind of problem by setting a write lock on the file before actually writing to the file.
If the program also needs to read the file and wants to make sure that the contents of the file are in a consistent state, then it can also use a read lock. While the read lock is set, no other process can lock that part of the file for writing.
Remember that file locks are only an advisory protocol for controlling access to a file. There is still potential for access to the file by programs that don’t use the lock protocol.
Next: Open File Description Locks Example, Previous: File Locks, Up: Low-Level Input/Output [Contents][Index]
In contrast to process-associated record locks (see File Locks), open file description record locks are associated with an open file description rather than a process.
Using fcntl
to apply an open file description lock on a region that
already has an existing open file description lock that was created via the
same file descriptor will never cause a lock conflict.
Open file description locks are also inherited by child processes across
fork
, or clone
with CLONE_FILES
set
(see Creating a Process), along with the file descriptor.
It is important to distinguish between the open file description (an
instance of an open file, usually created by a call to open
) and
an open file descriptor, which is a numeric value that refers to the
open file description. The locks described here are associated with the
open file description and not the open file descriptor.
Using dup
(see Duplicating Descriptors) to copy a file
descriptor does not give you a new open file description, but rather copies a
reference to an existing open file description and assigns it to a new
file descriptor. Thus, open file description locks set on a file
descriptor cloned by dup
will never conflict with open file
description locks set on the original descriptor since they refer to the
same open file description. Depending on the range and type of lock
involved, the original lock may be modified by a F_OFD_SETLK
or
F_OFD_SETLKW
command in this situation however.
Open file description locks always conflict with process-associated locks, even if acquired by the same process or on the same open file descriptor.
Open file description locks use the same struct flock
as
process-associated locks as an argument (see File Locks) and the
macros for the command
values are also declared in the header file
fcntl.h. To use them, the macro _GNU_SOURCE
must be
defined prior to including any header file.
In contrast to process-associated locks, any struct flock
used as
an argument to open file description lock commands must have the l_pid
value set to 0. Also, when returning information about an
open file description lock in a F_GETLK
or F_OFD_GETLK
request,
the l_pid
field in struct flock
will be set to -1
to indicate that the lock is not associated with a process.
When the same struct flock
is reused as an argument to a
F_OFD_SETLK
or F_OFD_SETLKW
request after being used for an
F_OFD_GETLK
request, it is necessary to inspect and reset the
l_pid
field to 0.
This macro is used as the command argument to fcntl
, to
specify that it should get information about a lock. This command
requires a third argument of type struct flock *
to be passed
to fcntl
, so that the form of the call is:
fcntl (filedes, F_OFD_GETLK, lockp)
If there is a lock already in place that would block the lock described
by the lockp argument, information about that lock is written to
*lockp
. Existing locks are not reported if they are
compatible with making a new lock as specified. Thus, you should
specify a lock type of F_WRLCK
if you want to find out about both
read and write locks, or F_RDLCK
if you want to find out about
write locks only.
There might be more than one lock affecting the region specified by the
lockp argument, but fcntl
only returns information about
one of them. Which lock is returned in this situation is undefined.
The l_whence
member of the lockp structure are set to
SEEK_SET
and the l_start
and l_len
fields are set
to identify the locked region.
If no conflicting lock exists, the only change to the lockp structure
is to update the l_type
field to the value F_UNLCK
.
The normal return value from fcntl
with this command is either 0
on success or -1, which indicates an error. The following errno
error conditions are defined for this command:
EBADF
The filedes argument is invalid.
EINVAL
Either the lockp argument doesn’t specify valid lock information, the operating system kernel doesn’t support open file description locks, or the file associated with filedes doesn’t support locks.
This macro is used as the command argument to fcntl
, to
specify that it should set or clear a lock. This command requires a
third argument of type struct flock *
to be passed to
fcntl
, so that the form of the call is:
fcntl (filedes, F_OFD_SETLK, lockp)
If the open file already has a lock on any part of the
region, the old lock on that part is replaced with the new lock. You
can remove a lock by specifying a lock type of F_UNLCK
.
If the lock cannot be set, fcntl
returns immediately with a value
of -1. This command does not wait for other tasks
to release locks. If fcntl
succeeds, it returns 0.
The following errno
error conditions are defined for this
command:
EAGAIN
The lock cannot be set because it is blocked by an existing lock on the file.
EBADF
Either: the filedes argument is invalid; you requested a read lock but the filedes is not open for read access; or, you requested a write lock but the filedes is not open for write access.
EINVAL
Either the lockp argument doesn’t specify valid lock information, the operating system kernel doesn’t support open file description locks, or the file associated with filedes doesn’t support locks.
ENOLCK
The system has run out of file lock resources; there are already too many file locks in place.
Well-designed file systems never report this error, because they have no limitation on the number of locks. However, you must still take account of the possibility of this error, as it could result from network access to a file system on another machine.
This macro is used as the command argument to fcntl
, to
specify that it should set or clear a lock. It is just like the
F_OFD_SETLK
command, but causes the process to wait until the request
can be completed.
This command requires a third argument of type struct flock *
, as
for the F_OFD_SETLK
command.
The fcntl
return values and errors are the same as for the
F_OFD_SETLK
command, but these additional errno
error conditions
are defined for this command:
EINTR
The function was interrupted by a signal while it was waiting. See Primitives Interrupted by Signals.
Open file description locks are useful in the same sorts of situations as
process-associated locks. They can also be used to synchronize file
access between threads within the same process by having each thread perform
its own open
of the file, to obtain its own open file description.
Because open file description locks are automatically freed only upon closing the last file descriptor that refers to the open file description, this locking mechanism avoids the possibility that locks are inadvertently released due to a library routine opening and closing a file without the application being aware.
As with process-associated locks, open file description locks are advisory.
Next: Interrupt-Driven Input, Previous: Open File Description Locks, Up: Low-Level Input/Output [Contents][Index]
Here is an example of using open file description locks in a threaded program. If this program used process-associated locks, then it would be subject to data corruption because process-associated locks are shared by the threads inside a process, and thus cannot be used by one thread to lock out another thread in the same process.
Proper error handling has been omitted in the following program for brevity.
#define _GNU_SOURCE
#include <stdio.h>
#include <sys/types.h>
#include <sys/stat.h>
#include <unistd.h>
#include <fcntl.h>
#include <pthread.h>
#define FILENAME "/tmp/foo"
#define NUM_THREADS 3
#define ITERATIONS 5
void *
thread_start (void *arg)
{
int i, fd, len;
long tid = (long) arg;
char buf[256];
struct flock lck = {
.l_whence = SEEK_SET,
.l_start = 0,
.l_len = 1,
};
fd = open ("/tmp/foo", O_RDWR | O_CREAT, 0666);
for (i = 0; i < ITERATIONS; i++)
{
lck.l_type = F_WRLCK;
fcntl (fd, F_OFD_SETLKW, &lck);
len = sprintf (buf, "%d: tid=%ld fd=%d\n", i, tid, fd);
lseek (fd, 0, SEEK_END);
write (fd, buf, len);
fsync (fd);
lck.l_type = F_UNLCK;
fcntl (fd, F_OFD_SETLK, &lck);
/* sleep to ensure lock is yielded to another thread */
usleep (1);
}
pthread_exit (NULL);
}
int
main (int argc, char **argv)
{
long i;
pthread_t threads[NUM_THREADS];
truncate (FILENAME, 0);
for (i = 0; i < NUM_THREADS; i++)
pthread_create (&threads[i], NULL, thread_start, (void *) i);
pthread_exit (NULL);
return 0;
}
This example creates three threads each of which loops five times, appending to the file. Access to the file is serialized via open file description locks. If we compile and run the above program, we’ll end up with /tmp/foo that has 15 lines in it.
If we, however, were to replace the F_OFD_SETLK
and
F_OFD_SETLKW
commands with their process-associated lock
equivalents, the locking essentially becomes a noop since it is all done
within the context of the same process. That leads to data corruption
(typically manifested as missing lines) as some threads race in and
overwrite the data written by others.
Next: Generic I/O Control operations, Previous: Open File Description Locks Example, Up: Low-Level Input/Output [Contents][Index]
If you set the O_ASYNC
status flag on a file descriptor
(see File Status Flags), a SIGIO
signal is sent whenever
input or output becomes possible on that file descriptor. The process
or process group to receive the signal can be selected by using the
F_SETOWN
command to the fcntl
function. If the file
descriptor is a socket, this also selects the recipient of SIGURG
signals that are delivered when out-of-band data arrives on that socket;
see Out-of-Band Data. (SIGURG
is sent in any situation
where select
would report the socket as having an “exceptional
condition”. See Waiting for Input or Output.)
If the file descriptor corresponds to a terminal device, then SIGIO
signals are sent to the foreground process group of the terminal.
See Job Control.
The symbols in this section are defined in the header file fcntl.h.
This macro is used as the command argument to fcntl
, to
specify that it should get information about the process or process
group to which SIGIO
signals are sent. (For a terminal, this is
actually the foreground process group ID, which you can get using
tcgetpgrp
; see Functions for Controlling Terminal Access.)
The return value is interpreted as a process ID; if negative, its absolute value is the process group ID.
The following errno
error condition is defined for this command:
EBADF
The filedes argument is invalid.
This macro is used as the command argument to fcntl
, to
specify that it should set the process or process group to which
SIGIO
signals are sent. This command requires a third argument
of type pid_t
to be passed to fcntl
, so that the form of
the call is:
fcntl (filedes, F_SETOWN, pid)
The pid argument should be a process ID. You can also pass a negative number whose absolute value is a process group ID.
The return value from fcntl
with this command is -1
in case of error and some other value if successful. The following
errno
error conditions are defined for this command:
EBADF
The filedes argument is invalid.
ESRCH
There is no process or process group corresponding to pid.
Previous: Interrupt-Driven Input, Up: Low-Level Input/Output [Contents][Index]
GNU systems can handle most input/output operations on many different
devices and objects in terms of a few file primitives - read
,
write
and lseek
. However, most devices also have a few
peculiar operations which do not fit into this model. Such as:
lseek
is inapplicable).
Although some such objects such as sockets and terminals 3 have special functions of their own, it would not be practical to create functions for all these cases.
Instead these minor operations, known as IOCTLs, are assigned code
numbers and multiplexed through the ioctl
function, defined in
sys/ioctl.h
. The code numbers themselves are defined in many
different headers.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The ioctl
function performs the generic I/O operation
command on filedes.
A third argument is usually present, either a single number or a pointer to a structure. The meaning of this argument, the returned value, and any error codes depends upon the command used. Often -1 is returned for a failure.
On some systems, IOCTLs used by different devices share the same numbers. Thus, although use of an inappropriate IOCTL usually only produces an error, you should not attempt to use device-specific IOCTLs on an unknown device.
Most IOCTLs are OS-specific and/or only used in special system utilities, and are thus beyond the scope of this document. For an example of the use of an IOCTL, see Out-of-Band Data.
Next: Pipes and FIFOs, Previous: Low-Level Input/Output, Up: Main Menu [Contents][Index]
This chapter describes the GNU C Library’s functions for manipulating files. Unlike the input and output functions (see Input/Output on Streams; see Low-Level Input/Output), these functions are concerned with operating on the files themselves rather than on their contents.
Among the facilities described in this chapter are functions for examining or modifying directories, functions for renaming and deleting files, and functions for examining and setting file attributes such as access permissions and modification times.
Next: Accessing Directories, Up: File System Interface [Contents][Index]
Each process has associated with it a directory, called its current working directory or simply working directory, that is used in the resolution of relative file names (see File Name Resolution).
When you log in and begin a new session, your working directory is
initially set to the home directory associated with your login account
in the system user database. You can find any user’s home directory
using the getpwuid
or getpwnam
functions; see User Database.
Users can change the working directory using shell commands like
cd
. The functions described in this section are the primitives
used by those commands and by other programs for examining and changing
the working directory.
Prototypes for these functions are declared in the header file unistd.h.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Unsafe heap | AC-Unsafe mem fd | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The getcwd
function returns an absolute file name representing
the current working directory, storing it in the character array
buffer that you provide. The size argument is how you tell
the system the allocation size of buffer.
The GNU C Library version of this function also permits you to specify a
null pointer for the buffer argument. Then getcwd
allocates a buffer automatically, as with malloc
(see Unconstrained Allocation). If the size is greater than
zero, then the buffer is that large; otherwise, the buffer is as large
as necessary to hold the result.
The return value is buffer on success and a null pointer on failure.
The following errno
error conditions are defined for this function:
EINVAL
The size argument is zero and buffer is not a null pointer.
ERANGE
The size argument is less than the length of the working directory name. You need to allocate a bigger array and try again.
EACCES
Permission to read or search a component of the file name was denied.
You could implement the behavior of GNU’s getcwd (NULL, 0)
using only the standard behavior of getcwd
:
char * gnu_getcwd () { size_t size = 100; while (1) { char *buffer = (char *) xmalloc (size); if (getcwd (buffer, size) == buffer) return buffer; free (buffer); if (errno != ERANGE) return 0; size *= 2; } }
See Examples of malloc
, for information about xmalloc
, which is
not a library function but is a customary name used in most GNU
software.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Unsafe heap i18n | AC-Unsafe mem fd | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This is similar to getcwd
, but has no way to specify the size of
the buffer. The GNU C Library provides getwd
only
for backwards compatibility with BSD.
The buffer argument should be a pointer to an array at least
PATH_MAX
bytes long (see Limits on File System Capacity). On GNU/Hurd systems
there is no limit to the size of a file name, so this is not
necessarily enough space to contain the directory name. That is why
this function is deprecated.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe env | AS-Unsafe heap | AC-Unsafe mem fd | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The get_current_dir_name
function is basically equivalent to
getcwd (NULL, 0)
, except the value of the PWD
environment variable is first examined, and if it does in fact
correspond to the current directory, that value is returned. This is
a subtle difference which is visible if the path described by the
value in PWD
is using one or more symbolic links, in which case
the value returned by getcwd
would resolve the symbolic links
and therefore yield a different result.
This function is a GNU extension.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This function is used to set the process’s working directory to filename.
The normal, successful return value from chdir
is 0
. A
value of -1
is returned to indicate an error. The errno
error conditions defined for this function are the usual file name
syntax errors (see File Name Errors), plus ENOTDIR
if the
file filename is not a directory.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This function is used to set the process’s working directory to directory associated with the file descriptor filedes.
The normal, successful return value from fchdir
is 0
. A
value of -1
is returned to indicate an error. The following
errno
error conditions are defined for this function:
EACCES
Read permission is denied for the directory named by dirname
.
EBADF
The filedes argument is not a valid file descriptor.
ENOTDIR
The file descriptor filedes is not associated with a directory.
EINTR
The function call was interrupt by a signal.
EIO
An I/O error occurred.
Next: Working with Directory Trees, Previous: Working Directory, Up: File System Interface [Contents][Index]
The facilities described in this section let you read the contents of a directory file. This is useful if you want your program to list all the files in a directory, perhaps as part of a menu.
The opendir
function opens a directory stream whose
elements are directory entries. Alternatively fdopendir
can be
used which can have advantages if the program needs to have more
control over the way the directory is opened for reading. This
allows, for instance, to pass the O_NOATIME
flag to
open
.
You use the readdir
function on the directory stream to
retrieve these entries, represented as struct dirent
objects. The name of the file for each entry is stored in the
d_name
member of this structure. There are obvious parallels
here to the stream facilities for ordinary files, described in
Input/Output on Streams.
Next: Opening a Directory Stream, Up: Accessing Directories [Contents][Index]
This section describes what you find in a single directory entry, as you might obtain it from a directory stream. All the symbols are declared in the header file dirent.h.
This is a structure type used to return information about directory entries. It contains the following fields:
char d_name[]
This is the null-terminated file name component. This is the only field you can count on in all POSIX systems.
ino_t d_fileno
This is the file serial number. For BSD compatibility, you can also
refer to this member as d_ino
. On GNU/Linux and GNU/Hurd systems and most POSIX
systems, for most files this the same as the st_ino
member that
stat
will return for the file. See File Attributes.
unsigned char d_namlen
This is the length of the file name, not including the terminating
null character. Its type is unsigned char
because that is the
integer type of the appropriate size. This member is a BSD extension.
The symbol _DIRENT_HAVE_D_NAMLEN
is defined if this member is
available.
unsigned char d_type
This is the type of the file, possibly unknown. The following constants are defined for its value:
DT_UNKNOWN
¶The type is unknown. Only some filesystems have full support to return the type of the file, others might always return this value.
DT_REG
¶A regular file.
DT_DIR
¶A directory.
DT_FIFO
¶A named pipe, or FIFO. See FIFO Special Files.
DT_SOCK
¶A local-domain socket.
DT_CHR
¶A character device.
DT_BLK
¶A block device.
DT_LNK
¶A symbolic link.
This member is a BSD extension. The symbol _DIRENT_HAVE_D_TYPE
is defined if this member is available. On systems where it is used, it
corresponds to the file type bits in the st_mode
member of
struct stat
. If the value cannot be determined the member
value is DT_UNKNOWN. These two macros convert between d_type
values and st_mode
values:
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This returns the d_type
value corresponding to mode.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This returns the st_mode
value corresponding to dtype.
This structure may contain additional members in the future. Their
availability is always announced in the compilation environment by a
macro named _DIRENT_HAVE_D_xxx
where xxx is replaced
by the name of the new member. For instance, the member d_reclen
available on some systems is announced through the macro
_DIRENT_HAVE_D_RECLEN
.
When a file has multiple names, each name has its own directory entry.
The only way you can tell that the directory entries belong to a
single file is that they have the same value for the d_fileno
field.
File attributes such as size, modification times etc., are part of the file itself, not of any particular directory entry. See File Attributes.
Next: Reading and Closing a Directory Stream, Previous: Format of a Directory Entry, Up: Accessing Directories [Contents][Index]
This section describes how to open a directory stream. All the symbols are declared in the header file dirent.h.
The DIR
data type represents a directory stream.
You shouldn’t ever allocate objects of the struct dirent
or
DIR
data types, since the directory access functions do that for
you. Instead, you refer to these objects using the pointers returned by
the following functions.
Directory streams are a high-level interface. On Linux, alternative interfaces for accessing directories using file descriptors are available. See Low-level Directory Access.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Unsafe heap | AC-Unsafe mem fd | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The opendir
function opens and returns a directory stream for
reading the directory whose file name is dirname. The stream has
type DIR *
.
If unsuccessful, opendir
returns a null pointer. In addition to
the usual file name errors (see File Name Errors), the
following errno
error conditions are defined for this function:
EACCES
Read permission is denied for the directory named by dirname
.
EMFILE
The process has too many files open.
ENFILE
The entire system, or perhaps the file system which contains the directory, cannot support any additional open files at the moment. (This problem cannot happen on GNU/Hurd systems.)
ENOMEM
Not enough memory available.
The DIR
type is typically implemented using a file descriptor,
and the opendir
function in terms of the open
function.
See Low-Level Input/Output. Directory streams and the underlying
file descriptors are closed on exec
(see Executing a File).
The directory which is opened for reading by opendir
is
identified by the name. In some situations this is not sufficient.
Or the way opendir
implicitly creates a file descriptor for the
directory is not the way a program might want it. In these cases an
alternative interface can be used.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Unsafe heap | AC-Unsafe mem fd | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The fdopendir
function works just like opendir
but
instead of taking a file name and opening a file descriptor for the
directory the caller is required to provide a file descriptor. This
file descriptor is then used in subsequent uses of the returned
directory stream object.
The caller must make sure the file descriptor is associated with a directory and it allows reading.
If the fdopendir
call returns successfully the file descriptor
is now under the control of the system. It can be used in the same
way the descriptor implicitly created by opendir
can be used
but the program must not close the descriptor.
In case the function is unsuccessful it returns a null pointer and the
file descriptor remains to be usable by the program. The following
errno
error conditions are defined for this function:
EBADF
The file descriptor is not valid.
ENOTDIR
The file descriptor is not associated with a directory.
EINVAL
The descriptor does not allow reading the directory content.
ENOMEM
Not enough memory available.
In some situations it can be desirable to get hold of the file
descriptor which is created by the opendir
call. For instance,
to switch the current working directory to the directory just read the
fchdir
function could be used. Historically the DIR
type
was exposed and programs could access the fields. This does not happen
in the GNU C Library. Instead a separate function is provided to allow
access.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The function dirfd
returns the file descriptor associated with
the directory stream dirstream. This descriptor can be used until
the directory is closed with closedir
. If the directory stream
implementation is not using file descriptors the return value is
-1
.
Next: Simple Program to List a Directory, Previous: Opening a Directory Stream, Up: Accessing Directories [Contents][Index]
This section describes how to read directory entries from a directory stream, and how to close the stream when you are done with it. All the symbols are declared in the header file dirent.h.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Unsafe lock | AC-Unsafe lock | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This function reads the next entry from the directory. It normally returns a pointer to a structure containing information about the file. This structure is associated with the dirstream handle and can be rewritten by a subsequent call.
Portability Note: On some systems readdir
may not
return entries for . and .., even though these are always
valid file names in any directory. See File Name Resolution.
If there are no more entries in the directory or an error is detected,
readdir
returns a null pointer. The following errno
error
conditions are defined for this function:
EBADF
The dirstream argument is not valid.
To distinguish between an end-of-directory condition or an error, you
must set errno
to zero before calling readdir
. To avoid
entering an infinite loop, you should stop reading from the directory
after the first error.
Caution: The pointer returned by readdir
points to
a buffer within the DIR
object. The data in that buffer will
be overwritten by the next call to readdir
. You must take care,
for instance, to copy the d_name
string if you need it later.
Because of this, it is not safe to share a DIR
object among
multiple threads, unless you use your own locking to ensure that
no thread calls readdir
while another thread is still using the
data from the previous call. In the GNU C Library, it is safe to call
readdir
from multiple threads as long as each thread uses
its own DIR
object. POSIX.1-2008 does not require this to
be safe, but we are not aware of any operating systems where it
does not work.
readdir_r
allows you to provide your own buffer for the
struct dirent
, but it is less portable than readdir
, and
has problems with very long filenames (see below). We recommend
you use readdir
, but do not share DIR
objects.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Unsafe lock | AC-Unsafe lock | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This function is a version of readdir
which performs internal
locking. Like readdir
it returns the next entry from the
directory. To prevent conflicts between simultaneously running
threads the result is stored inside the entry object.
Portability Note: readdir_r
is deprecated. It is
recommended to use readdir
instead of readdir_r
for the
following reasons:
NAME_MAX
, it may not be possible
to use readdir_r
safely because the caller does not specify the
length of the buffer for the directory entry.
readdir_r
cannot read directory entries with
very long names. If such a name is encountered, the GNU C Library
implementation of readdir_r
returns with an error code of
ENAMETOOLONG
after the final directory entry has been read. On
other systems, readdir_r
may return successfully, but the
d_name
member may not be NUL-terminated or may be truncated.
readdir
is thread-safe,
even when access to the same dirstream is serialized. But in
current implementations (including the GNU C Library), it is safe to call
readdir
concurrently on different dirstreams, so there is
no need to use readdir_r
in most multi-threaded programs. In
the rare case that multiple threads need to read from the same
dirstream, it is still better to use readdir
and external
synchronization.
readdir_r
and mandate the level of thread safety for
readdir
which is provided by the GNU C Library and other
implementations today.
Normally readdir_r
returns zero and sets *result
to entry. If there are no more entries in the directory or an
error is detected, readdir_r
sets *result
to a
null pointer and returns a nonzero error code, also stored in
errno
, as described for readdir
.
It is also important to look at the definition of the struct
dirent
type. Simply passing a pointer to an object of this type for
the second parameter of readdir_r
might not be enough. Some
systems don’t define the d_name
element sufficiently long. In
this case the user has to provide additional space. There must be room
for at least NAME_MAX + 1
characters in the d_name
array.
Code to call readdir_r
could look like this:
union { struct dirent d; char b[offsetof (struct dirent, d_name) + NAME_MAX + 1]; } u; if (readdir_r (dir, &u.d, &res) == 0) …
To support large filesystems on 32-bit machines there are LFS variants of the last two functions.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Unsafe lock | AC-Unsafe lock | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The readdir64
function is just like the readdir
function
except that it returns a pointer to a record of type struct
dirent64
. Some of the members of this data type (notably d_ino
)
might have a different size to allow large filesystems.
In all other aspects this function is equivalent to readdir
.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Unsafe lock | AC-Unsafe lock | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The deprecated readdir64_r
function is equivalent to the
readdir_r
function except that it takes parameters of base type
struct dirent64
instead of struct dirent
in the second and
third position. The same precautions mentioned in the documentation of
readdir_r
also apply here.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Unsafe heap lock/hurd | AC-Unsafe mem fd lock/hurd | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This function closes the directory stream dirstream. It returns
0
on success and -1
on failure.
The following errno
error conditions are defined for this
function:
EBADF
The dirstream argument is not valid.
Next: Random Access in a Directory Stream, Previous: Reading and Closing a Directory Stream, Up: Accessing Directories [Contents][Index]
Here’s a simple program that prints the names of the files in the current working directory:
#include <stdio.h> #include <sys/types.h> #include <dirent.h>
int main (void) { DIR *dp; struct dirent *ep; dp = opendir ("./"); if (dp != NULL) { while (ep = readdir (dp)) puts (ep->d_name); (void) closedir (dp); } else perror ("Couldn't open the directory"); return 0; }
The order in which files appear in a directory tends to be fairly random. A more useful program would sort the entries (perhaps by alphabetizing them) before printing them; see Scanning the Content of a Directory, and Array Sort Function.
Next: Scanning the Content of a Directory, Previous: Simple Program to List a Directory, Up: Accessing Directories [Contents][Index]
This section describes how to reread parts of a directory that you have already read from an open directory stream. All the symbols are declared in the header file dirent.h.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Unsafe lock | AC-Unsafe lock | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The rewinddir
function is used to reinitialize the directory
stream dirstream, so that if you call readdir
it
returns information about the first entry in the directory again. This
function also notices if files have been added or removed to the
directory since it was opened with opendir
. (Entries for these
files might or might not be returned by readdir
if they were
added or removed since you last called opendir
or
rewinddir
.)
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Unsafe heap/bsd lock/bsd | AC-Unsafe mem/bsd lock/bsd | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The telldir
function returns the file position of the directory
stream dirstream. You can use this value with seekdir
to
restore the directory stream to that position.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Unsafe heap/bsd lock/bsd | AC-Unsafe mem/bsd lock/bsd | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The seekdir
function sets the file position of the directory
stream dirstream to pos. The value pos must be the
result of a previous call to telldir
on this particular stream;
closing and reopening the directory can invalidate values returned by
telldir
.
Next: Simple Program to List a Directory, Mark II, Previous: Random Access in a Directory Stream, Up: Accessing Directories [Contents][Index]
A higher-level interface to the directory handling functions is the
scandir
function. With its help one can select a subset of the
entries in a directory, possibly sort them and get a list of names as
the result.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Unsafe heap | AC-Unsafe mem fd | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The scandir
function scans the contents of the directory selected
by dir. The result in *namelist is an array of pointers to
structures of type struct dirent
which describe all selected
directory entries and which is allocated using malloc
. Instead
of always getting all directory entries returned, the user supplied
function selector can be used to decide which entries are in the
result. Only the entries for which selector returns a non-zero
value are selected.
Finally the entries in *namelist are sorted using the
user-supplied function cmp. The arguments passed to the cmp
function are of type struct dirent **
, therefore one cannot
directly use the strcmp
or strcoll
functions; instead see
the functions alphasort
and versionsort
below.
The return value of the function is the number of entries placed in
*namelist. If it is -1
an error occurred (either the
directory could not be opened for reading or memory allocation failed) and
the global variable errno
contains more information on the error.
As described above, the fourth argument to the scandir
function
must be a pointer to a sorting function. For the convenience of the
programmer the GNU C Library contains implementations of functions which
are very helpful for this purpose.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe locale | AS-Unsafe heap | AC-Unsafe mem | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The alphasort
function behaves like the strcoll
function
(see String/Array Comparison). The difference is that the arguments
are not string pointers but instead they are of type
struct dirent **
.
The return value of alphasort
is less than, equal to, or greater
than zero depending on the order of the two entries a and b.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe locale | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The versionsort
function is like alphasort
except that it
uses the strverscmp
function internally.
If the filesystem supports large files we cannot use the scandir
anymore since the dirent
structure might not able to contain all
the information. The LFS provides the new type struct dirent64
. To use this we need a new function.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Unsafe heap | AC-Unsafe mem fd | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The scandir64
function works like the scandir
function
except that the directory entries it returns are described by elements
of type struct dirent64
. The function pointed to by
selector is again used to select the desired entries, except that
selector now must point to a function which takes a
struct dirent64 *
parameter.
Similarly the cmp function should expect its two arguments to be
of type struct dirent64 **
.
As cmp is now a function of a different type, the functions
alphasort
and versionsort
cannot be supplied for that
argument. Instead we provide the two replacement functions below.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe locale | AS-Unsafe heap | AC-Unsafe mem | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The alphasort64
function behaves like the strcoll
function
(see String/Array Comparison). The difference is that the arguments
are not string pointers but instead they are of type
struct dirent64 **
.
Return value of alphasort64
is less than, equal to, or greater
than zero depending on the order of the two entries a and b.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe locale | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The versionsort64
function is like alphasort64
, excepted that it
uses the strverscmp
function internally.
It is important not to mix the use of scandir
and the 64-bit
comparison functions or vice versa. There are systems on which this
works but on others it will fail miserably.
Next: Low-level Directory Access, Previous: Scanning the Content of a Directory, Up: Accessing Directories [Contents][Index]
Here is a revised version of the directory lister found above
(see Simple Program to List a Directory). Using the scandir
function we
can avoid the functions which work directly with the directory contents.
After the call the returned entries are available for direct use.
#include <stdio.h> #include <dirent.h>
static int one (const struct dirent *unused) { return 1; } int main (void) { struct dirent **eps; int n; n = scandir ("./", &eps, one, alphasort); if (n >= 0) { int cnt; for (cnt = 0; cnt < n; ++cnt) puts (eps[cnt]->d_name); } else perror ("Couldn't open the directory"); return 0; }
Note the simple selector function in this example. Since we want to see
all directory entries we always return 1
.
Previous: Simple Program to List a Directory, Mark II, Up: Accessing Directories [Contents][Index]
The stream-based directory functions are not AS-Safe and cannot be
used after vfork
. See POSIX Safety Concepts. The functions
below provide an alternative that can be used in these contexts.
Directory data is obtained from a file descriptor, as created by the
open
function, with or without the O_DIRECTORY
flag.
See Opening and Closing Files.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The getdents64
function reads at most length bytes of
directory entry data from the file descriptor fd and stores it
into the byte array starting at buffer.
On success, the function returns the number of bytes written to the
buffer. This number is zero if fd is already at the end of the
directory stream. On error, the function returns -1
and sets
errno
to the appropriate error code.
The data is stored as a sequence of struct dirent64
records,
which can be traversed using the d_reclen
member. The buffer
should be large enough to hold the largest possible directory entry.
Note that some file systems support file names longer than
NAME_MAX
bytes (e.g., because they support up to 255 Unicode
characters), so a buffer size of at least 1024 is recommended.
This function is specific to Linux.
Next: Hard Links, Previous: Accessing Directories, Up: File System Interface [Contents][Index]
The functions described so far for handling the files in a directory
have allowed you to either retrieve the information bit by bit, or to
process all the files as a group (see scandir
). Sometimes it is
useful to process whole hierarchies of directories and their contained
files. The X/Open specification defines two functions to do this. The
simpler form is derived from an early definition in System V systems
and therefore this function is available on SVID-derived systems. The
prototypes and required definitions can be found in the ftw.h
header.
There are four functions in this family: ftw
, nftw
and
their 64-bit counterparts ftw64
and nftw64
. These
functions take as one of their arguments a pointer to a callback
function of the appropriate type.
int (*) (const char *, const struct stat *, int)
The type of callback functions given to the ftw
function. The
first parameter points to the file name, the second parameter to an
object of type struct stat
which is filled in for the file named
in the first parameter.
The last parameter is a flag giving more information about the current file. It can have the following values:
FTW_F
¶The item is either a normal file or a file which does not fit into one of the following categories. This could be special files, sockets etc.
FTW_D
¶The item is a directory.
FTW_NS
¶The stat
call failed and so the information pointed to by the
second parameter is invalid.
FTW_DNR
¶The item is a directory which cannot be read.
FTW_SL
¶The item is a symbolic link. Since symbolic links are normally followed
seeing this value in a ftw
callback function means the referenced
file does not exist. The situation for nftw
is different.
This value is only available if the program is compiled with
_XOPEN_EXTENDED
defined before including
the first header. The original SVID systems do not have symbolic links.
If the sources are compiled with _FILE_OFFSET_BITS == 64
this
type is in fact __ftw64_func_t
since this mode changes
struct stat
to be struct stat64
.
For the LFS interface and for use in the function ftw64
, the
header ftw.h defines another function type.
int (*) (const char *, const struct stat64 *, int)
This type is used just like __ftw_func_t
for the callback
function, but this time is called from ftw64
. The second
parameter to the function is a pointer to a variable of type
struct stat64
which is able to represent the larger values.
int (*) (const char *, const struct stat *, int, struct FTW *)
The first three arguments are the same as for the __ftw_func_t
type. However for the third argument some additional values are defined
to allow finer differentiation:
FTW_DP
¶The current item is a directory and all subdirectories have already been
visited and reported. This flag is returned instead of FTW_D
if
the FTW_DEPTH
flag is passed to nftw
(see below).
FTW_SLN
¶The current item is a stale symbolic link. The file it points to does not exist.
The last parameter of the callback function is a pointer to a structure with some extra information as described below.
If the sources are compiled with _FILE_OFFSET_BITS == 64
this
type is in fact __nftw64_func_t
since this mode changes
struct stat
to be struct stat64
.
For the LFS interface there is also a variant of this data type
available which has to be used with the nftw64
function.
int (*) (const char *, const struct stat64 *, int, struct FTW *)
This type is used just like __nftw_func_t
for the callback
function, but this time is called from nftw64
. The second
parameter to the function is this time a pointer to a variable of type
struct stat64
which is able to represent the larger values.
The information contained in this structure helps in interpreting the name parameter and gives some information about the current state of the traversal of the directory hierarchy.
int base
The value is the offset into the string passed in the first parameter to
the callback function of the beginning of the file name. The rest of
the string is the path of the file. This information is especially
important if the FTW_CHDIR
flag was set in calling nftw
since then the current directory is the one the current item is found
in.
int level
Whilst processing, the code tracks how many directories down it has gone to find the current file. This nesting level starts at 0 for files in the initial directory (or is zero for the initial file if a file was passed).
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Unsafe heap | AC-Unsafe mem fd | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The ftw
function calls the callback function given in the
parameter func for every item which is found in the directory
specified by filename and all directories below. The function
follows symbolic links if necessary but does not process an item twice.
If filename is not a directory then it itself is the only object
returned to the callback function.
The file name passed to the callback function is constructed by taking
the filename parameter and appending the names of all passed
directories and then the local file name. So the callback function can
use this parameter to access the file. ftw
also calls
stat
for the file and passes that information on to the callback
function. If this stat
call is not successful the failure is
indicated by setting the third argument of the callback function to
FTW_NS
. Otherwise it is set according to the description given
in the account of __ftw_func_t
above.
The callback function is expected to return 0 to indicate that no
error occurred and that processing should continue. If an error
occurred in the callback function or it wants ftw
to return
immediately, the callback function can return a value other than
0. This is the only correct way to stop the function. The
program must not use setjmp
or similar techniques to continue
from another place. This would leave resources allocated by the
ftw
function unfreed.
The descriptors parameter to ftw
specifies how many file
descriptors it is allowed to consume. The function runs faster the more
descriptors it can use. For each level in the directory hierarchy at
most one descriptor is used, but for very deep ones any limit on open
file descriptors for the process or the system may be exceeded.
Moreover, file descriptor limits in a multi-threaded program apply to
all the threads as a group, and therefore it is a good idea to supply a
reasonable limit to the number of open descriptors.
The return value of the ftw
function is 0 if all callback
function calls returned 0 and all actions performed by the
ftw
succeeded. If a function call failed (other than calling
stat
on an item) the function returns -1. If a callback
function returns a value other than 0 this value is returned as
the return value of ftw
.
When the sources are compiled with _FILE_OFFSET_BITS == 64
on a
32-bit system this function is in fact ftw64
, i.e., the LFS
interface transparently replaces the old interface.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Unsafe heap | AC-Unsafe mem fd | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This function is similar to ftw
but it can work on filesystems
with large files. File information is reported using a variable of type
struct stat64
which is passed by reference to the callback
function.
When the sources are compiled with _FILE_OFFSET_BITS == 64
on a
32-bit system this function is available under the name ftw
and
transparently replaces the old implementation.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe cwd | AS-Unsafe heap | AC-Unsafe mem fd cwd | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The nftw
function works like the ftw
functions. They call
the callback function func for all items found in the directory
filename and below. At most descriptors file descriptors
are consumed during the nftw
call.
One difference is that the callback function is of a different type. It
is of type struct FTW *
and provides the callback function
with the extra information described above.
A second difference is that nftw
takes a fourth argument, which
is 0 or a bitwise-OR combination of any of the following values.
FTW_PHYS
¶While traversing the directory symbolic links are not followed. Instead
symbolic links are reported using the FTW_SL
value for the type
parameter to the callback function. If the file referenced by a
symbolic link does not exist FTW_SLN
is returned instead.
FTW_MOUNT
¶The callback function is only called for items which are on the same
mounted filesystem as the directory given by the filename
parameter to nftw
.
FTW_CHDIR
¶If this flag is given the current working directory is changed to the
directory of the reported object before the callback function is called.
When ntfw
finally returns the current directory is restored to
its original value.
FTW_DEPTH
¶If this option is specified then all subdirectories and files within
them are processed before processing the top directory itself
(depth-first processing). This also means the type flag given to the
callback function is FTW_DP
and not FTW_D
.
FTW_ACTIONRETVAL
¶If this option is specified then return values from callbacks
are handled differently. If the callback returns FTW_CONTINUE
,
walking continues normally. FTW_STOP
means walking stops
and FTW_STOP
is returned to the caller. If FTW_SKIP_SUBTREE
is returned by the callback with FTW_D
argument, the subtree
is skipped and walking continues with next sibling of the directory.
If FTW_SKIP_SIBLINGS
is returned by the callback, all siblings
of the current entry are skipped and walking continues in its parent.
No other return values should be returned from the callbacks if
this option is set. This option is a GNU extension.
The return value is computed in the same way as for ftw
.
nftw
returns 0 if no failures occurred and all callback
functions returned 0. In case of internal errors, such as memory
problems, the return value is -1 and errno
is set
accordingly. If the return value of a callback invocation was non-zero
then that value is returned.
When the sources are compiled with _FILE_OFFSET_BITS == 64
on a
32-bit system this function is in fact nftw64
, i.e., the LFS
interface transparently replaces the old interface.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe cwd | AS-Unsafe heap | AC-Unsafe mem fd cwd | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This function is similar to nftw
but it can work on filesystems
with large files. File information is reported using a variable of type
struct stat64
which is passed by reference to the callback
function.
When the sources are compiled with _FILE_OFFSET_BITS == 64
on a
32-bit system this function is available under the name nftw
and
transparently replaces the old implementation.
Next: Symbolic Links, Previous: Working with Directory Trees, Up: File System Interface [Contents][Index]
In POSIX systems, one file can have many names at the same time. All of the names are equally real, and no one of them is preferred to the others.
To add a name to a file, use the link
function. (The new name is
also called a hard link to the file.) Creating a new link to a
file does not copy the contents of the file; it simply makes a new name
by which the file can be known, in addition to the file’s existing name
or names.
One file can have names in several directories, so the organization of the file system is not a strict hierarchy or tree.
In most implementations, it is not possible to have hard links to the
same file in multiple file systems. link
reports an error if you
try to make a hard link to the file from another file system when this
cannot be done.
The prototype for the link
function is declared in the header
file unistd.h.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The link
function makes a new link to the existing file named by
oldname, under the new name newname.
This function returns a value of 0
if it is successful and
-1
on failure. In addition to the usual file name errors
(see File Name Errors) for both oldname and newname, the
following errno
error conditions are defined for this function:
EACCES
You are not allowed to write to the directory in which the new link is to be written.
EEXIST
There is already a file named newname. If you want to replace this link with a new link, you must remove the old link explicitly first.
EMLINK
There are already too many links to the file named by oldname.
(The maximum number of links to a file is LINK_MAX
; see
Limits on File System Capacity.)
ENOENT
The file named by oldname doesn’t exist. You can’t make a link to a file that doesn’t exist.
ENOSPC
The directory or file system that would contain the new link is full and cannot be extended.
EPERM
On GNU/Linux and GNU/Hurd systems and some others, you cannot make links to directories. Many systems allow only privileged users to do so. This error is used to report the problem.
EROFS
The directory containing the new link can’t be modified because it’s on a read-only file system.
EXDEV
The directory specified in newname is on a different file system than the existing file.
EIO
A hardware error occurred while trying to read or write the to filesystem.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The linkat
function is analogous to the link
function,
except that it identifies its source and target using a combination of a
file descriptor (referring to a directory) and a pathname. If a
pathnames is not absolute, it is resolved relative to the corresponding
file descriptor. The special file descriptor AT_FDCWD
denotes
the current directory.
The flags argument is a combination of the following flags:
AT_SYMLINK_FOLLOW
If the source path identified by oldfd and oldname is a
symbolic link, linkat
follows the symbolic link and creates a
link to its target. If the flag is not set, a link for the symbolic
link itself is created; this is not supported by all file systems and
linkat
can fail in this case.
AT_EMPTY_PATH
If this flag is specified, oldname can be an empty string. In
this case, a new link to the file denoted by the descriptor oldfd
is created, which may have been opened with O_PATH
or
O_TMPFILE
. This flag is a GNU extension.
Next: Deleting Files, Previous: Hard Links, Up: File System Interface [Contents][Index]
GNU systems support soft links or symbolic links. This is a kind of “file” that is essentially a pointer to another file name. Unlike hard links, symbolic links can be made to directories or across file systems with no restrictions. You can also make a symbolic link to a name which is not the name of any file. (Opening this link will fail until a file by that name is created.) Likewise, if the symbolic link points to an existing file which is later deleted, the symbolic link continues to point to the same file name even though the name no longer names any file.
The reason symbolic links work the way they do is that special things
happen when you try to open the link. The open
function realizes
you have specified the name of a link, reads the file name contained in
the link, and opens that file name instead. The stat
function
likewise operates on the file that the symbolic link points to, instead
of on the link itself.
By contrast, other operations such as deleting or renaming the file
operate on the link itself. The functions readlink
and
lstat
also refrain from following symbolic links, because their
purpose is to obtain information about the link. link
, the
function that makes a hard link, does too. It makes a hard link to the
symbolic link, which one rarely wants.
Some systems have, for some functions operating on files, a limit on how many symbolic links are followed when resolving a path name. The limit if it exists is published in the sys/param.h header file.
The macro MAXSYMLINKS
specifies how many symlinks some function
will follow before returning ELOOP
. Not all functions behave the
same and this value is not the same as that returned for
_SC_SYMLOOP
by sysconf
. In fact, the sysconf
result can indicate that there is no fixed limit although
MAXSYMLINKS
exists and has a finite value.
Prototypes for most of the functions listed in this section are in unistd.h.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The symlink
function makes a symbolic link to oldname named
newname.
The normal return value from symlink
is 0
. A return value
of -1
indicates an error. In addition to the usual file name
syntax errors (see File Name Errors), the following errno
error conditions are defined for this function:
EEXIST
There is already an existing file named newname.
EROFS
The file newname would exist on a read-only file system.
ENOSPC
The directory or file system cannot be extended to make the new link.
EIO
A hardware error occurred while reading or writing data on the disk.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The readlink
function gets the value of the symbolic link
filename. The file name that the link points to is copied into
buffer. This file name string is not null-terminated;
readlink
normally returns the number of characters copied. The
size argument specifies the maximum number of characters to copy,
usually the allocation size of buffer.
If the return value equals size, you cannot tell whether or not
there was room to return the entire name. So make a bigger buffer and
call readlink
again. Here is an example:
char * readlink_malloc (const char *filename) { size_t size = 50; char *buffer = NULL; while (1) { buffer = xreallocarray (buffer, size, 2); size *= 2; ssize_t nchars = readlink (filename, buffer, size); if (nchars < 0) { free (buffer); return NULL; } if (nchars < size) return buffer; } }
A value of -1
is returned in case of error. In addition to the
usual file name errors (see File Name Errors), the following
errno
error conditions are defined for this function:
EINVAL
The named file is not a symbolic link.
EIO
A hardware error occurred while reading or writing data on the disk.
In some situations it is desirable to resolve all the
symbolic links to get the real
name of a file where no prefix names a symbolic link which is followed
and no filename in the path is .
or ..
. This is for
instance desirable if files have to be compared in which case different
names can refer to the same inode.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Unsafe heap | AC-Unsafe mem fd | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The canonicalize_file_name
function returns the absolute name of
the file named by name which contains no .
, ..
components nor any repeated path separators (/
) or symlinks. The
result is passed back as the return value of the function in a block of
memory allocated with malloc
. If the result is not used anymore
the memory should be freed with a call to free
.
If any of the path components are missing the function returns a NULL
pointer. This is also what is returned if the length of the path
reaches or exceeds PATH_MAX
characters. In any case
errno
is set accordingly.
ENAMETOOLONG
The resulting path is too long. This error only occurs on systems which have a limit on the file name length.
EACCES
At least one of the path components is not readable.
ENOENT
The input file name is empty.
ENOENT
At least one of the path components does not exist.
ELOOP
More than MAXSYMLINKS
many symlinks have been followed.
This function is a GNU extension and is declared in stdlib.h.
The Unix standard includes a similar function which differs from
canonicalize_file_name
in that the user has to provide the buffer
where the result is placed in.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Unsafe heap | AC-Unsafe mem fd | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
A call to realpath
where the resolved parameter is
NULL
behaves exactly like canonicalize_file_name
. The
function allocates a buffer for the file name and returns a pointer to
it. If resolved is not NULL
it points to a buffer into
which the result is copied. It is the callers responsibility to
allocate a buffer which is large enough. On systems which define
PATH_MAX
this means the buffer must be large enough for a
pathname of this size. For systems without limitations on the pathname
length the requirement cannot be met and programs should not call
realpath
with anything but NULL
for the second parameter.
One other difference is that the buffer resolved (if nonzero) will
contain the part of the path component which does not exist or is not
readable if the function returns NULL
and errno
is set to
EACCES
or ENOENT
.
This function is declared in stdlib.h.
The advantage of using this function is that it is more widely available. The drawback is that it reports failures for long paths on systems which have no limits on the file name length.
Next: Renaming Files, Previous: Symbolic Links, Up: File System Interface [Contents][Index]
You can delete a file with unlink
or remove
.
Deletion actually deletes a file name. If this is the file’s only name, then the file is deleted as well. If the file has other remaining names (see Hard Links), it remains accessible under those names.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The unlink
function deletes the file name filename. If
this is a file’s sole name, the file itself is also deleted. (Actually,
if any process has the file open when this happens, deletion is
postponed until all processes have closed the file.)
The function unlink
is declared in the header file unistd.h.
This function returns 0
on successful completion, and -1
on error. In addition to the usual file name errors
(see File Name Errors), the following errno
error conditions are
defined for this function:
EACCES
Write permission is denied for the directory from which the file is to be removed, or the directory has the sticky bit set and you do not own the file.
EBUSY
This error indicates that the file is being used by the system in such a way that it can’t be unlinked. For example, you might see this error if the file name specifies the root directory or a mount point for a file system.
ENOENT
The file name to be deleted doesn’t exist.
EPERM
On some systems unlink
cannot be used to delete the name of a
directory, or at least can only be used this way by a privileged user.
To avoid such problems, use rmdir
to delete directories. (On
GNU/Linux and GNU/Hurd systems unlink
can never delete the name of a directory.)
EROFS
The directory containing the file name to be deleted is on a read-only file system and can’t be modified.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The rmdir
function deletes a directory. The directory must be
empty before it can be removed; in other words, it can only contain
entries for . and ...
In most other respects, rmdir
behaves like unlink
. There
are two additional errno
error conditions defined for
rmdir
:
ENOTEMPTY
EEXIST
The directory to be deleted is not empty.
These two error codes are synonymous; some systems use one, and some use
the other. GNU/Linux and GNU/Hurd systems always use ENOTEMPTY
.
The prototype for this function is declared in the header file unistd.h.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This is the ISO C function to remove a file. It works like
unlink
for files and like rmdir
for directories.
remove
is declared in stdio.h.
Next: Creating Directories, Previous: Deleting Files, Up: File System Interface [Contents][Index]
The rename
function is used to change a file’s name.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The rename
function renames the file oldname to
newname. The file formerly accessible under the name
oldname is afterwards accessible as newname instead. (If
the file had any other names aside from oldname, it continues to
have those names.)
The directory containing the name newname must be on the same file system as the directory containing the name oldname.
One special case for rename
is when oldname and
newname are two names for the same file. The consistent way to
handle this case is to delete oldname. However, in this case
POSIX requires that rename
do nothing and report success—which
is inconsistent. We don’t know what your operating system will do.
If oldname is not a directory, then any existing file named
newname is removed during the renaming operation. However, if
newname is the name of a directory, rename
fails in this
case.
If oldname is a directory, then either newname must not
exist or it must name a directory that is empty. In the latter case,
the existing directory named newname is deleted first. The name
newname must not specify a subdirectory of the directory
oldname
which is being renamed.
One useful feature of rename
is that the meaning of newname
changes “atomically” from any previously existing file by that name to
its new meaning (i.e., the file that was called oldname). There is
no instant at which newname is non-existent “in between” the old
meaning and the new meaning. If there is a system crash during the
operation, it is possible for both names to still exist; but
newname will always be intact if it exists at all.
If rename
fails, it returns -1
. In addition to the usual
file name errors (see File Name Errors), the following
errno
error conditions are defined for this function:
EACCES
One of the directories containing newname or oldname refuses write permission; or newname and oldname are directories and write permission is refused for one of them.
EBUSY
A directory named by oldname or newname is being used by the system in a way that prevents the renaming from working. This includes directories that are mount points for filesystems, and directories that are the current working directories of processes.
ENOTEMPTY
EEXIST
The directory newname isn’t empty. GNU/Linux and GNU/Hurd systems always return
ENOTEMPTY
for this, but some other systems return EEXIST
.
EINVAL
oldname is a directory that contains newname.
EISDIR
newname is a directory but the oldname isn’t.
EMLINK
The parent directory of newname would have too many links (entries).
ENOENT
The file oldname doesn’t exist.
ENOSPC
The directory that would contain newname has no room for another entry, and there is no space left in the file system to expand it.
EROFS
The operation would involve writing to a directory on a read-only file system.
EXDEV
The two file names newname and oldname are on different file systems.
Next: File Attributes, Previous: Renaming Files, Up: File System Interface [Contents][Index]
Directories are created with the mkdir
function. (There is also
a shell command mkdir
which does the same thing.)
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The mkdir
function creates a new, empty directory with name
filename.
The argument mode specifies the file permissions for the new directory file. See The Mode Bits for Access Permission, for more information about this.
A return value of 0
indicates successful completion, and
-1
indicates failure. In addition to the usual file name syntax
errors (see File Name Errors), the following errno
error
conditions are defined for this function:
EACCES
Write permission is denied for the parent directory in which the new directory is to be added.
EEXIST
A file named filename already exists.
EMLINK
The parent directory has too many links (entries).
Well-designed file systems never report this error, because they permit more links than your disk could possibly hold. However, you must still take account of the possibility of this error, as it could result from network access to a file system on another machine.
ENOSPC
The file system doesn’t have enough room to create the new directory.
EROFS
The parent directory of the directory being created is on a read-only file system and cannot be modified.
To use this function, your program should include the header file sys/stat.h.
Next: Making Special Files, Previous: Creating Directories, Up: File System Interface [Contents][Index]
When you issue an ‘ls -l’ shell command on a file, it gives you information about the size of the file, who owns it, when it was last modified, etc. These are called the file attributes, and are associated with the file itself and not a particular one of its names.
This section contains information about how you can inquire about and modify the attributes of a file.
Next: Reading the Attributes of a File, Up: File Attributes [Contents][Index]
When you read the attributes of a file, they come back in a structure
called struct stat
. This section describes the names of the
attributes, their data types, and what they mean. For the functions
to read the attributes of a file, see Reading the Attributes of a File.
The header file sys/stat.h declares all the symbols defined in this section.
The stat
structure type is used to return information about the
attributes of a file. It contains at least the following members:
mode_t st_mode
Specifies the mode of the file. This includes file type information (see Testing the Type of a File) and the file permission bits (see The Mode Bits for Access Permission).
ino_t st_ino
The file serial number, which distinguishes this file from all other files on the same device.
dev_t st_dev
Identifies the device containing the file. The st_ino
and
st_dev
, taken together, uniquely identify the file. The
st_dev
value is not necessarily consistent across reboots or
system crashes, however.
nlink_t st_nlink
The number of hard links to the file. This count keeps track of how many directories have entries for this file. If the count is ever decremented to zero, then the file itself is discarded as soon as no process still holds it open. Symbolic links are not counted in the total.
uid_t st_uid
The user ID of the file’s owner. See File Owner.
gid_t st_gid
The group ID of the file. See File Owner.
off_t st_size
This specifies the size of a regular file in bytes. For files that are really devices this field isn’t usually meaningful. For symbolic links this specifies the length of the file name the link refers to.
time_t st_atime
This is the last access time for the file. See File Times.
unsigned long int st_atime_usec
This is the fractional part of the last access time for the file. See File Times.
time_t st_mtime
This is the time of the last modification to the contents of the file. See File Times.
unsigned long int st_mtime_usec
This is the fractional part of the time of the last modification to the contents of the file. See File Times.
time_t st_ctime
This is the time of the last modification to the attributes of the file. See File Times.
unsigned long int st_ctime_usec
This is the fractional part of the time of the last modification to the attributes of the file. See File Times.
blkcnt_t st_blocks
This is the amount of disk space that the file occupies, measured in units of 512-byte blocks.
The number of disk blocks is not strictly proportional to the size of the file, for two reasons: the file system may use some blocks for internal record keeping; and the file may be sparse—it may have “holes” which contain zeros but do not actually take up space on the disk.
You can tell (approximately) whether a file is sparse by comparing this
value with st_size
, like this:
(st.st_blocks * 512 < st.st_size)
This test is not perfect because a file that is just slightly sparse might not be detected as sparse at all. For practical applications, this is not a problem.
unsigned int st_blksize
The optimal block size for reading or writing this file, in bytes. You
might use this size for allocating the buffer space for reading or
writing the file. (This is unrelated to st_blocks
.)
The extensions for the Large File Support (LFS) require, even on 32-bit
machines, types which can handle file sizes up to 2^63.
Therefore a new definition of struct stat
is necessary.
The members of this type are the same and have the same names as those
in struct stat
. The only difference is that the members
st_ino
, st_size
, and st_blocks
have a different
type to support larger values.
mode_t st_mode
Specifies the mode of the file. This includes file type information (see Testing the Type of a File) and the file permission bits (see The Mode Bits for Access Permission).
ino64_t st_ino
The file serial number, which distinguishes this file from all other files on the same device.
dev_t st_dev
Identifies the device containing the file. The st_ino
and
st_dev
, taken together, uniquely identify the file. The
st_dev
value is not necessarily consistent across reboots or
system crashes, however.
nlink_t st_nlink
The number of hard links to the file. This count keeps track of how many directories have entries for this file. If the count is ever decremented to zero, then the file itself is discarded as soon as no process still holds it open. Symbolic links are not counted in the total.
uid_t st_uid
The user ID of the file’s owner. See File Owner.
gid_t st_gid
The group ID of the file. See File Owner.
off64_t st_size
This specifies the size of a regular file in bytes. For files that are really devices this field isn’t usually meaningful. For symbolic links this specifies the length of the file name the link refers to.
time_t st_atime
This is the last access time for the file. See File Times.
unsigned long int st_atime_usec
This is the fractional part of the last access time for the file. See File Times.
time_t st_mtime
This is the time of the last modification to the contents of the file. See File Times.
unsigned long int st_mtime_usec
This is the fractional part of the time of the last modification to the contents of the file. See File Times.
time_t st_ctime
This is the time of the last modification to the attributes of the file. See File Times.
unsigned long int st_ctime_usec
This is the fractional part of the time of the last modification to the attributes of the file. See File Times.
blkcnt64_t st_blocks
This is the amount of disk space that the file occupies, measured in units of 512-byte blocks.
unsigned int st_blksize
The optimal block size for reading of writing this file, in bytes. You
might use this size for allocating the buffer space for reading of
writing the file. (This is unrelated to st_blocks
.)
Some of the file attributes have special data type names which exist specifically for those attributes. (They are all aliases for well-known integer types that you know and love.) These typedef names are defined in the header file sys/types.h as well as in sys/stat.h. Here is a list of them.
This is an integer data type used to represent file modes. In
the GNU C Library, this is an unsigned type no narrower than unsigned
int
.
This is an unsigned integer type used to represent file serial numbers.
(In Unix jargon, these are sometimes called inode numbers.)
In the GNU C Library, this type is no narrower than unsigned int
.
If the source is compiled with _FILE_OFFSET_BITS == 64
this type
is transparently replaced by ino64_t
.
This is an unsigned integer type used to represent file serial numbers
for the use in LFS. In the GNU C Library, this type is no narrower than
unsigned int
.
When compiling with _FILE_OFFSET_BITS == 64
this type is
available under the name ino_t
.
This is an arithmetic data type used to represent file device numbers.
In the GNU C Library, this is an integer type no narrower than int
.
This is an integer type used to represent file link counts.
This is a signed integer type used to represent block counts.
In the GNU C Library, this type is no narrower than int
.
If the source is compiled with _FILE_OFFSET_BITS == 64
this type
is transparently replaced by blkcnt64_t
.
This is a signed integer type used to represent block counts for the
use in LFS. In the GNU C Library, this type is no narrower than int
.
When compiling with _FILE_OFFSET_BITS == 64
this type is
available under the name blkcnt_t
.
Next: Testing the Type of a File, Previous: The meaning of the File Attributes, Up: File Attributes [Contents][Index]
To examine the attributes of files, use the functions stat
,
fstat
and lstat
. They return the attribute information in
a struct stat
object. All three functions are declared in the
header file sys/stat.h.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The stat
function returns information about the attributes of the
file named by filename in the structure pointed to by buf.
If filename is the name of a symbolic link, the attributes you get
describe the file that the link points to. If the link points to a
nonexistent file name, then stat
fails reporting a nonexistent
file.
The return value is 0
if the operation is successful, or
-1
on failure. In addition to the usual file name errors
(see File Name Errors, the following errno
error conditions
are defined for this function:
ENOENT
The file named by filename doesn’t exist.
When the sources are compiled with _FILE_OFFSET_BITS == 64
this
function is in fact stat64
since the LFS interface transparently
replaces the normal implementation.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This function is similar to stat
but it is also able to work on
files larger than 2^31 bytes on 32-bit systems. To be able to do
this the result is stored in a variable of type struct stat64
to
which buf must point.
When the sources are compiled with _FILE_OFFSET_BITS == 64
this
function is available under the name stat
and so transparently
replaces the interface for small files on 32-bit machines.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The fstat
function is like stat
, except that it takes an
open file descriptor as an argument instead of a file name.
See Low-Level Input/Output.
Like stat
, fstat
returns 0
on success and -1
on failure. The following errno
error conditions are defined for
fstat
:
EBADF
The filedes argument is not a valid file descriptor.
When the sources are compiled with _FILE_OFFSET_BITS == 64
this
function is in fact fstat64
since the LFS interface transparently
replaces the normal implementation.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This function is similar to fstat
but is able to work on large
files on 32-bit platforms. For large files the file descriptor
filedes should be obtained by open64
or creat64
.
The buf pointer points to a variable of type struct stat64
which is able to represent the larger values.
When the sources are compiled with _FILE_OFFSET_BITS == 64
this
function is available under the name fstat
and so transparently
replaces the interface for small files on 32-bit machines.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The lstat
function is like stat
, except that it does not
follow symbolic links. If filename is the name of a symbolic
link, lstat
returns information about the link itself; otherwise
lstat
works like stat
. See Symbolic Links.
When the sources are compiled with _FILE_OFFSET_BITS == 64
this
function is in fact lstat64
since the LFS interface transparently
replaces the normal implementation.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This function is similar to lstat
but it is also able to work on
files larger than 2^31 bytes on 32-bit systems. To be able to do
this the result is stored in a variable of type struct stat64
to
which buf must point.
When the sources are compiled with _FILE_OFFSET_BITS == 64
this
function is available under the name lstat
and so transparently
replaces the interface for small files on 32-bit machines.
Next: File Owner, Previous: Reading the Attributes of a File, Up: File Attributes [Contents][Index]
The file mode, stored in the st_mode
field of the file
attributes, contains two kinds of information: the file type code, and
the access permission bits. This section discusses only the type code,
which you can use to tell whether the file is a directory, socket,
symbolic link, and so on. For details about access permissions see
The Mode Bits for Access Permission.
There are two ways you can access the file type information in a file mode. Firstly, for each file type there is a predicate macro which examines a given file mode and returns whether it is of that type or not. Secondly, you can mask out the rest of the file mode to leave just the file type code, and compare this against constants for each of the supported file types.
All of the symbols listed in this section are defined in the header file sys/stat.h.
The following predicate macros test the type of a file, given the value
m which is the st_mode
field returned by stat
on
that file:
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This macro returns non-zero if the file is a directory.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This macro returns non-zero if the file is a character special file (a device like a terminal).
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This macro returns non-zero if the file is a block special file (a device like a disk).
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This macro returns non-zero if the file is a regular file.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This macro returns non-zero if the file is a FIFO special file, or a pipe. See Pipes and FIFOs.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This macro returns non-zero if the file is a symbolic link. See Symbolic Links.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This macro returns non-zero if the file is a socket. See Sockets.
An alternate non-POSIX method of testing the file type is supported for
compatibility with BSD. The mode can be bitwise AND-ed with
S_IFMT
to extract the file type code, and compared to the
appropriate constant. For example,
S_ISCHR (mode)
is equivalent to:
((mode & S_IFMT) == S_IFCHR)
This is a bit mask used to extract the file type code from a mode value.
These are the symbolic names for the different file type codes:
S_IFDIR
¶This is the file type constant of a directory file.
S_IFCHR
¶This is the file type constant of a character-oriented device file.
S_IFBLK
¶This is the file type constant of a block-oriented device file.
S_IFREG
¶This is the file type constant of a regular file.
S_IFLNK
¶This is the file type constant of a symbolic link.
S_IFSOCK
¶This is the file type constant of a socket.
S_IFIFO
¶This is the file type constant of a FIFO or pipe.
The POSIX.1b standard introduced a few more objects which possibly can
be implemented as objects in the filesystem. These are message queues,
semaphores, and shared memory objects. To allow differentiating these
objects from other files the POSIX standard introduced three new test
macros. But unlike the other macros they do not take the value of the
st_mode
field as the parameter. Instead they expect a pointer to
the whole struct stat
structure.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
If the system implements POSIX message queues as distinct objects and the file is a message queue object, this macro returns a non-zero value. In all other cases the result is zero.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
If the system implements POSIX semaphores as distinct objects and the file is a semaphore object, this macro returns a non-zero value. In all other cases the result is zero.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
If the system implements POSIX shared memory objects as distinct objects and the file is a shared memory object, this macro returns a non-zero value. In all other cases the result is zero.
Next: The Mode Bits for Access Permission, Previous: Testing the Type of a File, Up: File Attributes [Contents][Index]
Every file has an owner which is one of the registered user names defined on the system. Each file also has a group which is one of the defined groups. The file owner can often be useful for showing you who edited the file (especially when you edit with GNU Emacs), but its main purpose is for access control.
The file owner and group play a role in determining access because the file has one set of access permission bits for the owner, another set that applies to users who belong to the file’s group, and a third set of bits that applies to everyone else. See How Your Access to a File is Decided, for the details of how access is decided based on this data.
When a file is created, its owner is set to the effective user ID of the process that creates it (see The Persona of a Process). The file’s group ID may be set to either the effective group ID of the process, or the group ID of the directory that contains the file, depending on the system where the file is stored. When you access a remote file system, it behaves according to its own rules, not according to the system your program is running on. Thus, your program must be prepared to encounter either kind of behavior no matter what kind of system you run it on.
You can change the owner and/or group owner of an existing file using
the chown
function. This is the primitive for the chown
and chgrp
shell commands.
The prototype for this function is declared in unistd.h.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The chown
function changes the owner of the file filename to
owner, and its group owner to group.
Changing the owner of the file on certain systems clears the set-user-ID and set-group-ID permission bits. (This is because those bits may not be appropriate for the new owner.) Other file permission bits are not changed.
The return value is 0
on success and -1
on failure.
In addition to the usual file name errors (see File Name Errors),
the following errno
error conditions are defined for this function:
EPERM
This process lacks permission to make the requested change.
Only privileged users or the file’s owner can change the file’s group. On most file systems, only privileged users can change the file owner; some file systems allow you to change the owner if you are currently the owner. When you access a remote file system, the behavior you encounter is determined by the system that actually holds the file, not by the system your program is running on.
See Optional Features in File Support, for information about the
_POSIX_CHOWN_RESTRICTED
macro.
EROFS
The file is on a read-only file system.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This is like chown
, except that it changes the owner of the open
file with descriptor filedes.
The return value from fchown
is 0
on success and -1
on failure. The following errno
error codes are defined for this
function:
EBADF
The filedes argument is not a valid file descriptor.
EINVAL
The filedes argument corresponds to a pipe or socket, not an ordinary file.
EPERM
This process lacks permission to make the requested change. For details
see chmod
above.
EROFS
The file resides on a read-only file system.
Next: How Your Access to a File is Decided, Previous: File Owner, Up: File Attributes [Contents][Index]
The file mode, stored in the st_mode
field of the file
attributes, contains two kinds of information: the file type code, and
the access permission bits. This section discusses only the access
permission bits, which control who can read or write the file.
See Testing the Type of a File, for information about the file type code.
All of the symbols listed in this section are defined in the header file sys/stat.h.
These symbolic constants are defined for the file mode bits that control access permission for the file:
S_IRUSR
¶S_IREAD
¶Read permission bit for the owner of the file. On many systems this bit
is 0400. S_IREAD
is an obsolete synonym provided for BSD
compatibility.
S_IWUSR
¶S_IWRITE
¶Write permission bit for the owner of the file. Usually 0200.
S_IWRITE
is an obsolete synonym provided for BSD compatibility.
S_IXUSR
¶S_IEXEC
¶Execute (for ordinary files) or search (for directories) permission bit
for the owner of the file. Usually 0100. S_IEXEC
is an obsolete
synonym provided for BSD compatibility.
S_IRWXU
¶This is equivalent to ‘(S_IRUSR | S_IWUSR | S_IXUSR)’.
S_IRGRP
¶Read permission bit for the group owner of the file. Usually 040.
S_IWGRP
¶Write permission bit for the group owner of the file. Usually 020.
S_IXGRP
¶Execute or search permission bit for the group owner of the file. Usually 010.
S_IRWXG
¶This is equivalent to ‘(S_IRGRP | S_IWGRP | S_IXGRP)’.
S_IROTH
¶Read permission bit for other users. Usually 04.
S_IWOTH
¶Write permission bit for other users. Usually 02.
S_IXOTH
¶Execute or search permission bit for other users. Usually 01.
S_IRWXO
¶This is equivalent to ‘(S_IROTH | S_IWOTH | S_IXOTH)’.
S_ISUID
¶This is the set-user-ID on execute bit, usually 04000. See How an Application Can Change Persona.
S_ISGID
¶This is the set-group-ID on execute bit, usually 02000. See How an Application Can Change Persona.
S_ISVTX
¶This is the sticky bit, usually 01000.
For a directory it gives permission to delete a file in that directory only if you own that file. Ordinarily, a user can either delete all the files in a directory or cannot delete any of them (based on whether the user has write permission for the directory). The same restriction applies—you must have both write permission for the directory and own the file you want to delete. The one exception is that the owner of the directory can delete any file in the directory, no matter who owns it (provided the owner has given himself write permission for the directory). This is commonly used for the /tmp directory, where anyone may create files but not delete files created by other users.
Originally the sticky bit on an executable file modified the swapping policies of the system. Normally, when a program terminated, its pages in core were immediately freed and reused. If the sticky bit was set on the executable file, the system kept the pages in core for a while as if the program were still running. This was advantageous for a program likely to be run many times in succession. This usage is obsolete in modern systems. When a program terminates, its pages always remain in core as long as there is no shortage of memory in the system. When the program is next run, its pages will still be in core if no shortage arose since the last run.
On some modern systems where the sticky bit has no useful meaning for an
executable file, you cannot set the bit at all for a non-directory.
If you try, chmod
fails with EFTYPE
;
see Assigning File Permissions.
Some systems (particularly SunOS) have yet another use for the sticky bit. If the sticky bit is set on a file that is not executable, it means the opposite: never cache the pages of this file at all. The main use of this is for the files on an NFS server machine which are used as the swap area of diskless client machines. The idea is that the pages of the file will be cached in the client’s memory, so it is a waste of the server’s memory to cache them a second time. With this usage the sticky bit also implies that the filesystem may fail to record the file’s modification time onto disk reliably (the idea being that no-one cares for a swap file).
This bit is only available on BSD systems (and those derived from
them). Therefore one has to use the _GNU_SOURCE
feature select
macro, or not define any feature test macros, to get the definition
(see Feature Test Macros).
The actual bit values of the symbols are listed in the table above so you can decode file mode values when debugging your programs. These bit values are correct for most systems, but they are not guaranteed.
Warning: Writing explicit numbers for file permissions is bad practice. Not only is it not portable, it also requires everyone who reads your program to remember what the bits mean. To make your program clean use the symbolic names.
Next: Assigning File Permissions, Previous: The Mode Bits for Access Permission, Up: File Attributes [Contents][Index]
Recall that the operating system normally decides access permission for a file based on the effective user and group IDs of the process and its supplementary group IDs, together with the file’s owner, group and permission bits. These concepts are discussed in detail in The Persona of a Process.
If the effective user ID of the process matches the owner user ID of the file, then permissions for read, write, and execute/search are controlled by the corresponding “user” (or “owner”) bits. Likewise, if any of the effective group ID or supplementary group IDs of the process matches the group owner ID of the file, then permissions are controlled by the “group” bits. Otherwise, permissions are controlled by the “other” bits.
Privileged users, like ‘root’, can access any file regardless of its permission bits. As a special case, for a file to be executable even by a privileged user, at least one of its execute bits must be set.
Next: Testing Permission to Access a File, Previous: How Your Access to a File is Decided, Up: File Attributes [Contents][Index]
The primitive functions for creating files (for example, open
or
mkdir
) take a mode argument, which specifies the file
permissions to give the newly created file. This mode is modified by
the process’s file creation mask, or umask, before it is
used.
The bits that are set in the file creation mask identify permissions that are always to be disabled for newly created files. For example, if you set all the “other” access bits in the mask, then newly created files are not accessible at all to processes in the “other” category, even if the mode argument passed to the create function would permit such access. In other words, the file creation mask is the complement of the ordinary access permissions you want to grant.
Programs that create files typically specify a mode argument that includes all the permissions that make sense for the particular file. For an ordinary file, this is typically read and write permission for all classes of users. These permissions are then restricted as specified by the individual user’s own file creation mask.
To change the permission of an existing file given its name, call
chmod
. This function uses the specified permission bits and
ignores the file creation mask.
In normal use, the file creation mask is initialized by the user’s login
shell (using the umask
shell command), and inherited by all
subprocesses. Application programs normally don’t need to worry about
the file creation mask. It will automatically do what it is supposed to
do.
When your program needs to create a file and bypass the umask for its
access permissions, the easiest way to do this is to use fchmod
after opening the file, rather than changing the umask. In fact,
changing the umask is usually done only by shells. They use the
umask
function.
The functions in this section are declared in sys/stat.h.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The umask
function sets the file creation mask of the current
process to mask, and returns the previous value of the file
creation mask.
Here is an example showing how to read the mask with umask
without changing it permanently:
mode_t read_umask (void) { mode_t mask = umask (0); umask (mask); return mask; }
However, on GNU/Hurd systems it is better to use getumask
if
you just want to read the mask value, because it is reentrant.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
Return the current value of the file creation mask for the current process. This function is a GNU extension and is only available on GNU/Hurd systems.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The chmod
function sets the access permission bits for the file
named by filename to mode.
If filename is a symbolic link, chmod
changes the
permissions of the file pointed to by the link, not those of the link
itself.
This function returns 0
if successful and -1
if not. In
addition to the usual file name errors (see File Name Errors), the following errno
error conditions are defined for
this function:
ENOENT
The named file doesn’t exist.
EPERM
This process does not have permission to change the access permissions of this file. Only the file’s owner (as judged by the effective user ID of the process) or a privileged user can change them.
EROFS
The file resides on a read-only file system.
EFTYPE
mode has the S_ISVTX
bit (the “sticky bit”) set,
and the named file is not a directory. Some systems do not allow setting the
sticky bit on non-directory files, and some do (and only some of those
assign a useful meaning to the bit for non-directory files).
You only get EFTYPE
on systems where the sticky bit has no useful
meaning for non-directory files, so it is always safe to just clear the
bit in mode and call chmod
again. See The Mode Bits for Access Permission,
for full details on the sticky bit.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This is like chmod
, except that it changes the permissions of the
currently open file given by filedes.
The return value from fchmod
is 0
on success and -1
on failure. The following errno
error codes are defined for this
function:
EBADF
The filedes argument is not a valid file descriptor.
EINVAL
The filedes argument corresponds to a pipe or socket, or something else that doesn’t really have access permissions.
EPERM
This process does not have permission to change the access permissions of this file. Only the file’s owner (as judged by the effective user ID of the process) or a privileged user can change them.
EROFS
The file resides on a read-only file system.
Next: File Times, Previous: Assigning File Permissions, Up: File Attributes [Contents][Index]
In some situations it is desirable to allow programs to access files or
devices even if this is not possible with the permissions granted to the
user. One possible solution is to set the setuid-bit of the program
file. If such a program is started the effective user ID of the
process is changed to that of the owner of the program file. So to
allow write access to files like /etc/passwd, which normally can
be written only by the super-user, the modifying program will have to be
owned by root
and the setuid-bit must be set.
But besides the files the program is intended to change the user should not be allowed to access any file to which s/he would not have access anyway. The program therefore must explicitly check whether the user would have the necessary access to a file, before it reads or writes the file.
To do this, use the function access
, which checks for access
permission based on the process’s real user ID rather than the
effective user ID. (The setuid feature does not alter the real user ID,
so it reflects the user who actually ran the program.)
There is another way you could check this access, which is easy to
describe, but very hard to use. This is to examine the file mode bits
and mimic the system’s own access computation. This method is
undesirable because many systems have additional access control
features; your program cannot portably mimic them, and you would not
want to try to keep track of the diverse features that different systems
have. Using access
is simple and automatically does whatever is
appropriate for the system you are using.
access
is only appropriate to use in setuid programs.
A non-setuid program will always use the effective ID rather than the
real ID.
The symbols in this section are declared in unistd.h.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The access
function checks to see whether the file named by
filename can be accessed in the way specified by the how
argument. The how argument either can be the bitwise OR of the
flags R_OK
, W_OK
, X_OK
, or the existence test
F_OK
.
This function uses the real user and group IDs of the calling
process, rather than the effective IDs, to check for access
permission. As a result, if you use the function from a setuid
or setgid
program (see How an Application Can Change Persona), it gives
information relative to the user who actually ran the program.
The return value is 0
if the access is permitted, and -1
otherwise. (In other words, treated as a predicate function,
access
returns true if the requested access is denied.)
In addition to the usual file name errors (see File Name Errors), the following errno
error conditions are defined for
this function:
EACCES
The access specified by how is denied.
ENOENT
The file doesn’t exist.
EROFS
Write permission was requested for a file on a read-only file system.
These macros are defined in the header file unistd.h for use
as the how argument to the access
function. The values
are integer constants.
Flag meaning test for read permission.
Flag meaning test for write permission.
Flag meaning test for execute/search permission.
Flag meaning test for existence of the file.
Next: File Size, Previous: Testing Permission to Access a File, Up: File Attributes [Contents][Index]
Each file has three time stamps associated with it: its access time,
its modification time, and its attribute modification time. These
correspond to the st_atime
, st_mtime
, and st_ctime
members of the stat
structure; see File Attributes.
All of these times are represented in calendar time format, as
time_t
objects. This data type is defined in time.h.
For more information about representation and manipulation of time
values, see Calendar Time.
Reading from a file updates its access time attribute, and writing updates its modification time. When a file is created, all three time stamps for that file are set to the current time. In addition, the attribute change time and modification time fields of the directory that contains the new entry are updated.
Adding a new name for a file with the link
function updates the
attribute change time field of the file being linked, and both the
attribute change time and modification time fields of the directory
containing the new name. These same fields are affected if a file name
is deleted with unlink
, remove
or rmdir
. Renaming
a file with rename
affects only the attribute change time and
modification time fields of the two parent directories involved, and not
the times for the file being renamed.
Changing the attributes of a file (for example, with chmod
)
updates its attribute change time field.
You can also change some of the time stamps of a file explicitly using
the utime
function—all except the attribute change time. You
need to include the header file utime.h to use this facility.
The utimbuf
structure is used with the utime
function to
specify new access and modification times for a file. It contains the
following members:
time_t actime
This is the access time for the file.
time_t modtime
This is the modification time for the file.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This function is used to modify the file times associated with the file named filename.
If times is a null pointer, then the access and modification times
of the file are set to the current time. Otherwise, they are set to the
values from the actime
and modtime
members (respectively)
of the utimbuf
structure pointed to by times.
The attribute modification time for the file is set to the current time in either case (since changing the time stamps is itself a modification of the file attributes).
The utime
function returns 0
if successful and -1
on failure. In addition to the usual file name errors
(see File Name Errors), the following errno
error conditions
are defined for this function:
EACCES
There is a permission problem in the case where a null pointer was passed as the times argument. In order to update the time stamp on the file, you must either be the owner of the file, have write permission for the file, or be a privileged user.
ENOENT
The file doesn’t exist.
EPERM
If the times argument is not a null pointer, you must either be the owner of the file or be a privileged user.
EROFS
The file lives on a read-only file system.
Each of the three time stamps has a corresponding microsecond part,
which extends its resolution. These fields are called
st_atime_usec
, st_mtime_usec
, and st_ctime_usec
;
each has a value between 0 and 999,999, which indicates the time in
microseconds. They correspond to the tv_usec
field of a
timeval
structure; see Time Types.
The utimes
function is like utime
, but also lets you specify
the fractional part of the file times. The prototype for this function is
in the header file sys/time.h.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This function sets the file access and modification times of the file
filename. The new file access time is specified by
tvp[0]
, and the new modification time by
tvp[1]
. Similar to utime
, if tvp is a null
pointer then the access and modification times of the file are set to
the current time. This function comes from BSD.
The return values and error conditions are the same as for the utime
function.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This function is like utimes
, except that it does not follow
symbolic links. If filename is the name of a symbolic link,
lutimes
sets the file access and modification times of the
symbolic link special file itself (as seen by lstat
;
see Symbolic Links) while utimes
sets the file access and
modification times of the file the symbolic link refers to. This
function comes from FreeBSD, and is not available on all platforms (if
not available, it will fail with ENOSYS
).
The return values and error conditions are the same as for the utime
function.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This function is like utimes
, except that it takes an open file
descriptor as an argument instead of a file name. See Low-Level Input/Output. This function comes from FreeBSD, and is not available on all
platforms (if not available, it will fail with ENOSYS
).
Like utimes
, futimes
returns 0
on success and -1
on failure. The following errno
error conditions are defined for
futimes
:
EACCES
There is a permission problem in the case where a null pointer was passed as the times argument. In order to update the time stamp on the file, you must either be the owner of the file, have write permission for the file, or be a privileged user.
EBADF
The filedes argument is not a valid file descriptor.
EPERM
If the times argument is not a null pointer, you must either be the owner of the file or be a privileged user.
EROFS
The file lives on a read-only file system.
Next: Storage Allocation, Previous: File Times, Up: File Attributes [Contents][Index]
Normally file sizes are maintained automatically. A file begins with a
size of 0 and is automatically extended when data is written past
its end. It is also possible to empty a file completely by an
open
or fopen
call.
However, sometimes it is necessary to reduce the size of a file.
This can be done with the truncate
and ftruncate
functions.
They were introduced in BSD Unix. ftruncate
was later added to
POSIX.1.
Some systems allow you to extend a file (creating holes) with these
functions. This is useful when using memory-mapped I/O
(see Memory-mapped I/O), where files are not automatically extended.
However, it is not portable but must be implemented if mmap
allows mapping of files (i.e., _POSIX_MAPPED_FILES
is defined).
Using these functions on anything other than a regular file gives undefined results. On many systems, such a call will appear to succeed, without actually accomplishing anything.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The truncate
function changes the size of filename to
length. If length is shorter than the previous length, data
at the end will be lost. The file must be writable by the user to
perform this operation.
If length is longer, holes will be added to the end. However, some systems do not support this feature and will leave the file unchanged.
When the source file is compiled with _FILE_OFFSET_BITS == 64
the
truncate
function is in fact truncate64
and the type
off_t
has 64 bits which makes it possible to handle files up to
2^63 bytes in length.
The return value is 0 for success, or -1 for an error. In addition to the usual file name errors, the following errors may occur:
EACCES
The file is a directory or not writable.
EINVAL
length is negative.
EFBIG
The operation would extend the file beyond the limits of the operating system.
EIO
A hardware I/O error occurred.
EPERM
The file is "append-only" or "immutable".
EINTR
The operation was interrupted by a signal.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This function is similar to the truncate
function. The
difference is that the length argument is 64 bits wide even on 32
bits machines, which allows the handling of files with sizes up to
2^63 bytes.
When the source file is compiled with _FILE_OFFSET_BITS == 64
on a
32 bits machine this function is actually available under the name
truncate
and so transparently replaces the 32 bits interface.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This is like truncate
, but it works on a file descriptor fd
for an opened file instead of a file name to identify the object. The
file must be opened for writing to successfully carry out the operation.
The POSIX standard leaves it implementation defined what happens if the
specified new length of the file is bigger than the original size.
The ftruncate
function might simply leave the file alone and do
nothing or it can increase the size to the desired size. In this later
case the extended area should be zero-filled. So using ftruncate
is no reliable way to increase the file size but if it is possible it is
probably the fastest way. The function also operates on POSIX shared
memory segments if these are implemented by the system.
ftruncate
is especially useful in combination with mmap
.
Since the mapped region must have a fixed size one cannot enlarge the
file by writing something beyond the last mapped page. Instead one has
to enlarge the file itself and then remap the file with the new size.
The example below shows how this works.
When the source file is compiled with _FILE_OFFSET_BITS == 64
the
ftruncate
function is in fact ftruncate64
and the type
off_t
has 64 bits which makes it possible to handle files up to
2^63 bytes in length.
The return value is 0 for success, or -1 for an error. The following errors may occur:
EBADF
fd does not correspond to an open file.
EACCES
fd is a directory or not open for writing.
EINVAL
length is negative.
EFBIG
The operation would extend the file beyond the limits of the operating system.
EIO
A hardware I/O error occurred.
EPERM
The file is "append-only" or "immutable".
EINTR
The operation was interrupted by a signal.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This function is similar to the ftruncate
function. The
difference is that the length argument is 64 bits wide even on 32
bits machines which allows the handling of files with sizes up to
2^63 bytes.
When the source file is compiled with _FILE_OFFSET_BITS == 64
on a
32 bits machine this function is actually available under the name
ftruncate
and so transparently replaces the 32 bits interface.
As announced here is a little example of how to use ftruncate
in
combination with mmap
:
int fd; void *start; size_t len; int add (off_t at, void *block, size_t size) { if (at + size > len) { /* Resize the file and remap. */ size_t ps = sysconf (_SC_PAGESIZE); size_t ns = (at + size + ps - 1) & ~(ps - 1); void *np; if (ftruncate (fd, ns) < 0) return -1; np = mmap (NULL, ns, PROT_READ|PROT_WRITE, MAP_SHARED, fd, 0); if (np == MAP_FAILED) return -1; start = np; len = ns; } memcpy ((char *) start + at, block, size); return 0; }
The function add
writes a block of memory at an arbitrary
position in the file. If the current size of the file is too small it
is extended. Note that it is extended by a whole number of pages. This
is a requirement of mmap
. The program has to keep track of the
real size, and when it has finished a final ftruncate
call should
set the real size of the file.
Previous: File Size, Up: File Attributes [Contents][Index]
Most file systems support allocating large files in a non-contiguous fashion: the file is split into fragments which are allocated sequentially, but the fragments themselves can be scattered across the disk. File systems generally try to avoid such fragmentation because it decreases performance, but if a file gradually increases in size, there might be no other option than to fragment it. In addition, many file systems support sparse files with holes: regions of null bytes for which no backing storage has been allocated by the file system. When the holes are finally overwritten with data, fragmentation can occur as well.
Explicit allocation of storage for yet-unwritten parts of the file can
help the system to avoid fragmentation. Additionally, if storage
pre-allocation fails, it is possible to report the out-of-disk error
early, often without filling up the entire disk. However, due to
deduplication, copy-on-write semantics, and file compression, such
pre-allocation may not reliably prevent the out-of-disk-space error from
occurring later. Checking for write errors is still required, and
writes to memory-mapped regions created with mmap
can still
result in SIGBUS
.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
Allocate backing store for the region of length bytes starting at byte offset in the file for the descriptor fd. The file length is increased to ‘length + offset’ if necessary.
fd must be a regular file opened for writing, or EBADF
is
returned. If there is insufficient disk space to fulfill the allocation
request, ENOSPC
is returned.
Note: If fallocate
is not available (because the file
system does not support it), posix_fallocate
is emulated, which
has the following drawbacks:
fallocate
support (see below), the file system can examine the internal file
allocation data structures and eliminate holes directly, maybe even
using unwritten extents (which are pre-allocated but uninitialized on
disk).
O_WRONLY
flag, the function
will fail with an errno
value of EBADF
.
O_APPEND
flag, the function
will fail with an errno
value of EBADF
.
ftruncate
is used to increase the file
size as requested, without allocating file system blocks. There is a
race condition which means that ftruncate
can accidentally
truncate the file if it has been extended concurrently.
On Linux, if an application does not benefit from emulation or if the
emulation is harmful due to its inherent race conditions, the
application can use the Linux-specific fallocate
function, with a
zero flag argument. For the fallocate
function, the GNU C Library does
not perform allocation emulation if the file system does not support
allocation. Instead, an EOPNOTSUPP
is returned to the caller.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This function is a variant of posix_fallocate64
which accepts
64-bit file offsets on all platforms.
Next: Temporary Files, Previous: File Attributes, Up: File System Interface [Contents][Index]
The mknod
function is the primitive for making special files,
such as files that correspond to devices. The GNU C Library includes
this function for compatibility with BSD.
The prototype for mknod
is declared in sys/stat.h.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The mknod
function makes a special file with name filename.
The mode specifies the mode of the file, and may include the various
special file bits, such as S_IFCHR
(for a character special file)
or S_IFBLK
(for a block special file). See Testing the Type of a File.
The dev argument specifies which device the special file refers to. Its exact interpretation depends on the kind of special file being created.
The return value is 0
on success and -1
on error. In addition
to the usual file name errors (see File Name Errors), the
following errno
error conditions are defined for this function:
EPERM
The calling process is not privileged. Only the superuser can create special files.
ENOSPC
The directory or file system that would contain the new file is full and cannot be extended.
EROFS
The directory containing the new file can’t be modified because it’s on a read-only file system.
EEXIST
There is already a file named filename. If you want to replace this file, you must remove the old file explicitly first.
Previous: Making Special Files, Up: File System Interface [Contents][Index]
If you need to use a temporary file in your program, you can use the
tmpfile
function to open it. Or you can use the tmpnam
(better: tmpnam_r
) function to provide a name for a temporary
file and then you can open it in the usual way with fopen
.
The tempnam
function is like tmpnam
but lets you choose
what directory temporary files will go in, and something about what
their file names will look like. Important for multi-threaded programs
is that tempnam
is reentrant, while tmpnam
is not since it
returns a pointer to a static buffer.
These facilities are declared in the header file stdio.h.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Unsafe heap lock | AC-Unsafe mem fd lock | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This function creates a temporary binary file for update mode, as if by
calling fopen
with mode "wb+"
. The file is deleted
automatically when it is closed or when the program terminates. (On
some other ISO C systems the file may fail to be deleted if the program
terminates abnormally).
This function is reentrant.
When the sources are compiled with _FILE_OFFSET_BITS == 64
on a
32-bit system this function is in fact tmpfile64
, i.e., the LFS
interface transparently replaces the old interface.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Unsafe heap lock | AC-Unsafe mem fd lock | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This function is similar to tmpfile
, but the stream it returns a
pointer to was opened using tmpfile64
. Therefore this stream can
be used for files larger than 2^31 bytes on 32-bit machines.
Please note that the return type is still FILE *
. There is no
special FILE
type for the LFS interface.
If the sources are compiled with _FILE_OFFSET_BITS == 64
on a 32
bits machine this function is available under the name tmpfile
and so transparently replaces the old interface.
Preliminary: | MT-Unsafe race:tmpnam/!result | AS-Unsafe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This function constructs and returns a valid file name that does not
refer to any existing file. If the result argument is a null
pointer, the return value is a pointer to an internal static string,
which might be modified by subsequent calls and therefore makes this
function non-reentrant. Otherwise, the result argument should be
a pointer to an array of at least L_tmpnam
characters, and the
result is written into that array.
It is possible for tmpnam
to fail if you call it too many times
without removing previously-created files. This is because the limited
length of the temporary file names gives room for only a finite number
of different names. If tmpnam
fails it returns a null pointer.
Warning: Between the time the pathname is constructed and the
file is created another process might have created a file with the same
name using tmpnam
, leading to a possible security hole. The
implementation generates names which can hardly be predicted, but when
opening the file you should use the O_EXCL
flag. Using
tmpfile
or mkstemp
is a safe way to avoid this problem.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This function is nearly identical to the tmpnam
function, except
that if result is a null pointer it returns a null pointer.
This guarantees reentrancy because the non-reentrant situation of
tmpnam
cannot happen here.
Warning: This function has the same security problems as
tmpnam
.
The value of this macro is an integer constant expression that
represents the minimum size of a string large enough to hold a file name
generated by the tmpnam
function.
The macro TMP_MAX
is a lower bound for how many temporary names
you can create with tmpnam
. You can rely on being able to call
tmpnam
at least this many times before it might fail saying you
have made too many temporary file names.
With the GNU C Library, you can create a very large number of temporary
file names. If you actually created the files, you would probably run
out of disk space before you ran out of names. Some other systems have
a fixed, small limit on the number of temporary files. The limit is
never less than 25
.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe env | AS-Unsafe heap | AC-Unsafe mem | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This function generates a unique temporary file name. If prefix
is not a null pointer, up to five characters of this string are used as
a prefix for the file name. The return value is a string newly
allocated with malloc
, so you should release its storage with
free
when it is no longer needed.
Because the string is dynamically allocated this function is reentrant.
The directory prefix for the temporary file name is determined by testing each of the following in sequence. The directory must exist and be writable.
TMPDIR
, if it is defined. For security
reasons this only happens if the program is not SUID or SGID enabled.
P_tmpdir
macro.
This function is defined for SVID compatibility.
Warning: Between the time the pathname is constructed and the
file is created another process might have created a file with the same
name using tempnam
, leading to a possible security hole. The
implementation generates names which can hardly be predicted, but when
opening the file you should use the O_EXCL
flag. Using
tmpfile
or mkstemp
is a safe way to avoid this problem.
This macro is the name of the default directory for temporary files.
Older Unix systems did not have the functions just described. Instead
they used mktemp
and mkstemp
. Both of these functions
work by modifying a file name template string you pass. The last six
characters of this string must be ‘XXXXXX’. These six ‘X’s
are replaced with six characters which make the whole string a unique
file name. Usually the template string is something like
‘/tmp/prefixXXXXXX’, and each program uses a unique prefix.
NB: Because mktemp
and mkstemp
modify the
template string, you must not pass string constants to them.
String constants are normally in read-only storage, so your program
would crash when mktemp
or mkstemp
tried to modify the
string. These functions are declared in the header file stdlib.h.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The mktemp
function generates a unique file name by modifying
template as described above. If successful, it returns
template as modified. If mktemp
cannot find a unique file
name, it makes template an empty string and returns that. If
template does not end with ‘XXXXXX’, mktemp
returns a
null pointer.
Warning: Between the time the pathname is constructed and the
file is created another process might have created a file with the same
name using mktemp
, leading to a possible security hole. The
implementation generates names which can hardly be predicted, but when
opening the file you should use the O_EXCL
flag. Using
mkstemp
is a safe way to avoid this problem.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe fd | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The mkstemp
function generates a unique file name just as
mktemp
does, but it also opens the file for you with open
(see Opening and Closing Files). If successful, it modifies
template in place and returns a file descriptor for that file open
for reading and writing. If mkstemp
cannot create a
uniquely-named file, it returns -1
. If template does not
end with ‘XXXXXX’, mkstemp
returns -1
and does not
modify template.
The file is opened using mode 0600
. If the file is meant to be
used by other users this mode must be changed explicitly.
Unlike mktemp
, mkstemp
is actually guaranteed to create a
unique file that cannot possibly clash with any other program trying to
create a temporary file. This is because it works by calling
open
with the O_EXCL
flag, which says you want to create a
new file and get an error if the file already exists.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The mkdtemp
function creates a directory with a unique name. If
it succeeds, it overwrites template with the name of the
directory, and returns template. As with mktemp
and
mkstemp
, template should be a string ending with
‘XXXXXX’.
If mkdtemp
cannot create an uniquely named directory, it returns
NULL
and sets errno
appropriately. If template does
not end with ‘XXXXXX’, mkdtemp
returns NULL
and does
not modify template. errno
will be set to EINVAL
in
this case.
The directory is created using mode 0700
.
The directory created by mkdtemp
cannot clash with temporary
files or directories created by other users. This is because directory
creation always works like open
with O_EXCL
.
See Creating Directories.
The mkdtemp
function comes from OpenBSD.
Next: Sockets, Previous: File System Interface, Up: Main Menu [Contents][Index]
A pipe is a mechanism for interprocess communication; data written to the pipe by one process can be read by another process. The data is handled in a first-in, first-out (FIFO) order. The pipe has no name; it is created for one use and both ends must be inherited from the single process which created the pipe.
A FIFO special file is similar to a pipe, but instead of being an anonymous, temporary connection, a FIFO has a name or names like any other file. Processes open the FIFO by name in order to communicate through it.
A pipe or FIFO has to be open at both ends simultaneously. If you read
from a pipe or FIFO file that doesn’t have any processes writing to it
(perhaps because they have all closed the file, or exited), the read
returns end-of-file. Writing to a pipe or FIFO that doesn’t have a
reading process is treated as an error condition; it generates a
SIGPIPE
signal, and fails with error code EPIPE
if the
signal is handled or blocked.
Neither pipes nor FIFO special files allow file positioning. Both reading and writing operations happen sequentially; reading from the beginning of the file and writing at the end.
Next: Pipe to a Subprocess, Up: Pipes and FIFOs [Contents][Index]
The primitive for creating a pipe is the pipe
function. This
creates both the reading and writing ends of the pipe. It is not very
useful for a single process to use a pipe to talk to itself. In typical
use, a process creates a pipe just before it forks one or more child
processes (see Creating a Process). The pipe is then used for
communication either between the parent or child processes, or between
two sibling processes.
The pipe
function is declared in the header file
unistd.h.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe fd | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The pipe
function creates a pipe and puts the file descriptors
for the reading and writing ends of the pipe (respectively) into
filedes[0]
and filedes[1]
.
An easy way to remember that the input end comes first is that file
descriptor 0
is standard input, and file descriptor 1
is
standard output.
If successful, pipe
returns a value of 0
. On failure,
-1
is returned. The following errno
error conditions are
defined for this function:
EMFILE
The process has too many files open.
ENFILE
There are too many open files in the entire system. See Error Codes,
for more information about ENFILE
. This error never occurs on
GNU/Hurd systems.
Here is an example of a simple program that creates a pipe. This program
uses the fork
function (see Creating a Process) to create
a child process. The parent process writes data to the pipe, which is
read by the child process.
#include <sys/types.h>
#include <unistd.h>
#include <stdio.h>
#include <stdlib.h>
/* Read characters from the pipe and echo them to stdout
. */
void
read_from_pipe (int file)
{
FILE *stream;
int c;
stream = fdopen (file, "r");
while ((c = fgetc (stream)) != EOF)
putchar (c);
fclose (stream);
}
/* Write some random text to the pipe. */
void
write_to_pipe (int file)
{
FILE *stream;
stream = fdopen (file, "w");
fprintf (stream, "hello, world!\n");
fprintf (stream, "goodbye, world!\n");
fclose (stream);
}
int
main (void)
{
pid_t pid;
int mypipe[2];
/* Create the pipe. */
if (pipe (mypipe))
{
fprintf (stderr, "Pipe failed.\n");
return EXIT_FAILURE;
}
/* Create the child process. */ pid = fork (); if (pid == (pid_t) 0) { /* This is the child process. Close other end first. */ close (mypipe[1]); read_from_pipe (mypipe[0]); return EXIT_SUCCESS; } else if (pid < (pid_t) 0) { /* The fork failed. */ fprintf (stderr, "Fork failed.\n"); return EXIT_FAILURE; } else { /* This is the parent process. Close other end first. */ close (mypipe[0]); write_to_pipe (mypipe[1]); return EXIT_SUCCESS; } }
Next: FIFO Special Files, Previous: Creating a Pipe, Up: Pipes and FIFOs [Contents][Index]
A common use of pipes is to send data to or receive data from a program
being run as a subprocess. One way of doing this is by using a combination of
pipe
(to create the pipe), fork
(to create the subprocess),
dup2
(to force the subprocess to use the pipe as its standard input
or output channel), and exec
(to execute the new program). Or,
you can use popen
and pclose
.
The advantage of using popen
and pclose
is that the
interface is much simpler and easier to use. But it doesn’t offer as
much flexibility as using the low-level functions directly.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Unsafe heap corrupt | AC-Unsafe corrupt lock fd mem | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The popen
function is closely related to the system
function; see Running a Command. It executes the shell command
command as a subprocess. However, instead of waiting for the
command to complete, it creates a pipe to the subprocess and returns a
stream that corresponds to that pipe.
If you specify a mode argument of "r"
, you can read from the
stream to retrieve data from the standard output channel of the subprocess.
The subprocess inherits its standard input channel from the parent process.
Similarly, if you specify a mode argument of "w"
, you can
write to the stream to send data to the standard input channel of the
subprocess. The subprocess inherits its standard output channel from
the parent process.
In the event of an error popen
returns a null pointer. This
might happen if the pipe or stream cannot be created, if the subprocess
cannot be forked, or if the program cannot be executed.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Unsafe heap plugin corrupt lock | AC-Unsafe corrupt lock fd mem | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The pclose
function is used to close a stream created by popen
.
It waits for the child process to terminate and returns its status value,
as for the system
function.
Here is an example showing how to use popen
and pclose
to
filter output through another program, in this case the paging program
more
.
#include <stdio.h> #include <stdlib.h> void write_data (FILE * stream) { int i; for (i = 0; i < 100; i++) fprintf (stream, "%d\n", i); if (ferror (stream)) { fprintf (stderr, "Output to stream failed.\n"); exit (EXIT_FAILURE); } }
int main (void) { FILE *output; output = popen ("more", "w"); if (!output) { fprintf (stderr, "incorrect parameters or too many files.\n"); return EXIT_FAILURE; } write_data (output); if (pclose (output) != 0) { fprintf (stderr, "Could not run more or other error.\n"); } return EXIT_SUCCESS; }
Next: Atomicity of Pipe I/O, Previous: Pipe to a Subprocess, Up: Pipes and FIFOs [Contents][Index]
A FIFO special file is similar to a pipe, except that it is created in a
different way. Instead of being an anonymous communications channel, a
FIFO special file is entered into the file system by calling
mkfifo
.
Once you have created a FIFO special file in this way, any process can open it for reading or writing, in the same way as an ordinary file. However, it has to be open at both ends simultaneously before you can proceed to do any input or output operations on it. Opening a FIFO for reading normally blocks until some other process opens the same FIFO for writing, and vice versa.
The mkfifo
function is declared in the header file
sys/stat.h.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The mkfifo
function makes a FIFO special file with name
filename. The mode argument is used to set the file’s
permissions; see Assigning File Permissions.
The normal, successful return value from mkfifo
is 0
. In
the case of an error, -1
is returned. In addition to the usual
file name errors (see File Name Errors), the following
errno
error conditions are defined for this function:
EEXIST
The named file already exists.
ENOSPC
The directory or file system cannot be extended.
EROFS
The directory that would contain the file resides on a read-only file system.
Previous: FIFO Special Files, Up: Pipes and FIFOs [Contents][Index]
Reading or writing pipe data is atomic if the size of data written
is not greater than PIPE_BUF
. This means that the data transfer
seems to be an instantaneous unit, in that nothing else in the system
can observe a state in which it is partially complete. Atomic I/O may
not begin right away (it may need to wait for buffer space or for data),
but once it does begin it finishes immediately.
Reading or writing a larger amount of data may not be atomic; for
example, output data from other processes sharing the descriptor may be
interspersed. Also, once PIPE_BUF
characters have been written,
further writes will block until some characters are read.
See Limits on File System Capacity, for information about the PIPE_BUF
parameter.
Next: Low-Level Terminal Interface, Previous: Pipes and FIFOs, Up: Main Menu [Contents][Index]
This chapter describes the GNU facilities for interprocess communication using sockets.
A socket is a generalized interprocess communication channel.
Like a pipe, a socket is represented as a file descriptor. Unlike pipes
sockets support communication between unrelated processes, and even
between processes running on different machines that communicate over a
network. Sockets are the primary means of communicating with other
machines; telnet
, rlogin
, ftp
, talk
and the
other familiar network programs use sockets.
Not all operating systems support sockets. In the GNU C Library, the header file sys/socket.h exists regardless of the operating system, and the socket functions always exist, but if the system does not really support sockets these functions always fail.
Incomplete: We do not currently document the facilities for broadcast messages or for configuring Internet interfaces. The reentrant functions and some newer functions that are related to IPv6 aren’t documented either so far.
inetd
DaemonNext: Communication Styles, Up: Sockets [Contents][Index]
When you create a socket, you must specify the style of communication you want to use and the type of protocol that should implement it. The communication style of a socket defines the user-level semantics of sending and receiving data on the socket. Choosing a communication style specifies the answers to questions such as these:
Designing a program to use unreliable communication styles usually involves taking precautions to detect lost or misordered packets and to retransmit data as needed.
You must also choose a namespace for naming the socket. A socket name (“address”) is meaningful only in the context of a particular namespace. In fact, even the data type to use for a socket name may depend on the namespace. Namespaces are also called “domains”, but we avoid that word as it can be confused with other usage of the same term. Each namespace has a symbolic name that starts with ‘PF_’. A corresponding symbolic name starting with ‘AF_’ designates the address format for that namespace.
Finally you must choose the protocol to carry out the communication. The protocol determines what low-level mechanism is used to transmit and receive data. Each protocol is valid for a particular namespace and communication style; a namespace is sometimes called a protocol family because of this, which is why the namespace names start with ‘PF_’.
The rules of a protocol apply to the data passing between two programs, perhaps on different computers; most of these rules are handled by the operating system and you need not know about them. What you do need to know about protocols is this:
Throughout the following description at various places
variables/parameters to denote sizes are required. And here the trouble
starts. In the first implementations the type of these variables was
simply int
. On most machines at that time an int
was 32
bits wide, which created a de facto standard requiring 32-bit
variables. This is important since references to variables of this type
are passed to the kernel.
Then the POSIX people came and unified the interface with the words "all
size values are of type size_t
". On 64-bit machines
size_t
is 64 bits wide, so pointers to variables were no longer
possible.
The Unix98 specification provides a solution by introducing a type
socklen_t
. This type is used in all of the cases that POSIX
changed to use size_t
. The only requirement of this type is that
it be an unsigned type of at least 32 bits. Therefore, implementations
which require that references to 32-bit variables be passed can be as
happy as implementations which use 64-bit values.
Next: Socket Addresses, Previous: Socket Concepts, Up: Sockets [Contents][Index]
The GNU C Library includes support for several different kinds of sockets, each with different characteristics. This section describes the supported socket types. The symbolic constants listed here are defined in sys/socket.h.
The SOCK_STREAM
style is like a pipe (see Pipes and FIFOs).
It operates over a connection with a particular remote socket and
transmits data reliably as a stream of bytes.
Use of this style is covered in detail in Using Sockets with Connections.
The SOCK_DGRAM
style is used for sending
individually-addressed packets unreliably.
It is the diametrical opposite of SOCK_STREAM
.
Each time you write data to a socket of this kind, that data becomes
one packet. Since SOCK_DGRAM
sockets do not have connections,
you must specify the recipient address with each packet.
The only guarantee that the system makes about your requests to transmit data is that it will try its best to deliver each packet you send. It may succeed with the sixth packet after failing with the fourth and fifth packets; the seventh packet may arrive before the sixth, and may arrive a second time after the sixth.
The typical use for SOCK_DGRAM
is in situations where it is
acceptable to simply re-send a packet if no response is seen in a
reasonable amount of time.
See Datagram Socket Operations, for detailed information about how to use datagram sockets.
This style provides access to low-level network protocols and interfaces. Ordinary user programs usually have no need to use this style.
Next: Interface Naming, Previous: Communication Styles, Up: Sockets [Contents][Index]
The name of a socket is normally called an address. The functions and symbols for dealing with socket addresses were named inconsistently, sometimes using the term “name” and sometimes using “address”. You can regard these terms as synonymous where sockets are concerned.
A socket newly created with the socket
function has no
address. Other processes can find it for communication only if you
give it an address. We call this binding the address to the
socket, and the way to do it is with the bind
function.
You need only be concerned with the address of a socket if other processes are to find it and start communicating with it. You can specify an address for other sockets, but this is usually pointless; the first time you send data from a socket, or use it to initiate a connection, the system assigns an address automatically if you have not specified one.
Occasionally a client needs to specify an address because the server
discriminates based on address; for example, the rsh and rlogin
protocols look at the client’s socket address and only bypass passphrase
checking if it is less than IPPORT_RESERVED
(see Internet Ports).
The details of socket addresses vary depending on what namespace you are using. See The Local Namespace, or The Internet Namespace, for specific information.
Regardless of the namespace, you use the same functions bind
and
getsockname
to set and examine a socket’s address. These
functions use a phony data type, struct sockaddr *
, to accept the
address. In practice, the address lives in a structure of some other
data type appropriate to the address format you are using, but you cast
its address to struct sockaddr *
when you pass it to
bind
.
Next: Setting the Address of a Socket, Up: Socket Addresses [Contents][Index]
The functions bind
and getsockname
use the generic data
type struct sockaddr *
to represent a pointer to a socket
address. You can’t use this data type effectively to interpret an
address or construct one; for that, you must use the proper data type
for the socket’s namespace.
Thus, the usual practice is to construct an address of the proper
namespace-specific type, then cast a pointer to struct sockaddr *
when you call bind
or getsockname
.
The one piece of information that you can get from the struct
sockaddr
data type is the address format designator. This tells
you which data type to use to understand the address fully.
The symbols in this section are defined in the header file sys/socket.h.
The struct sockaddr
type itself has the following members:
short int sa_family
This is the code for the address format of this address. It identifies the format of the data which follows.
char sa_data[14]
This is the actual socket address data, which is format-dependent. Its
length also depends on the format, and may well be more than 14. The
length 14 of sa_data
is essentially arbitrary.
Each address format has a symbolic name which starts with ‘AF_’. Each of them corresponds to a ‘PF_’ symbol which designates the corresponding namespace. Here is a list of address format names:
AF_LOCAL
¶This designates the address format that goes with the local namespace.
(PF_LOCAL
is the name of that namespace.) See Details of Local Namespace, for information about this address format.
AF_UNIX
¶This is a synonym for AF_LOCAL
. Although AF_LOCAL
is
mandated by POSIX.1g, AF_UNIX
is portable to more systems.
AF_UNIX
was the traditional name stemming from BSD, so even most
POSIX systems support it. It is also the name of choice in the Unix98
specification. (The same is true for PF_UNIX
vs. PF_LOCAL
).
AF_FILE
¶This is another synonym for AF_LOCAL
, for compatibility.
(PF_FILE
is likewise a synonym for PF_LOCAL
.)
AF_INET
¶This designates the address format that goes with the Internet
namespace. (PF_INET
is the name of that namespace.)
See Internet Socket Address Formats.
AF_INET6
¶This is similar to AF_INET
, but refers to the IPv6 protocol.
(PF_INET6
is the name of the corresponding namespace.)
AF_UNSPEC
¶This designates no particular address format. It is used only in rare cases, such as to clear out the default destination address of a “connected” datagram socket. See Sending Datagrams.
The corresponding namespace designator symbol PF_UNSPEC
exists
for completeness, but there is no reason to use it in a program.
sys/socket.h defines symbols starting with ‘AF_’ for many different kinds of networks, most or all of which are not actually implemented. We will document those that really work as we receive information about how to use them.
Next: Reading the Address of a Socket, Previous: Address Formats, Up: Socket Addresses [Contents][Index]
Use the bind
function to assign an address to a socket. The
prototype for bind
is in the header file sys/socket.h.
For examples of use, see Example of Local-Namespace Sockets, or see Internet Socket Example.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The bind
function assigns an address to the socket
socket. The addr and length arguments specify the
address; the detailed format of the address depends on the namespace.
The first part of the address is always the format designator, which
specifies a namespace, and says that the address is in the format of
that namespace.
The return value is 0
on success and -1
on failure. The
following errno
error conditions are defined for this function:
EBADF
The socket argument is not a valid file descriptor.
ENOTSOCK
The descriptor socket is not a socket.
EADDRNOTAVAIL
The specified address is not available on this machine.
EADDRINUSE
Some other socket is already using the specified address.
EINVAL
The socket socket already has an address.
EACCES
You do not have permission to access the requested address. (In the
Internet domain, only the super-user is allowed to specify a port number
in the range 0 through IPPORT_RESERVED
minus one; see
Internet Ports.)
Additional conditions may be possible depending on the particular namespace of the socket.
Previous: Setting the Address of a Socket, Up: Socket Addresses [Contents][Index]
Use the function getsockname
to examine the address of an
Internet socket. The prototype for this function is in the header file
sys/socket.h.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe mem/hurd | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The getsockname
function returns information about the
address of the socket socket in the locations specified by the
addr and length-ptr arguments. Note that the
length-ptr is a pointer; you should initialize it to be the
allocation size of addr, and on return it contains the actual
size of the address data.
The format of the address data depends on the socket namespace. The
length of the information is usually fixed for a given namespace, so
normally you can know exactly how much space is needed and can provide
that much. The usual practice is to allocate a place for the value
using the proper data type for the socket’s namespace, then cast its
address to struct sockaddr *
to pass it to getsockname
.
The return value is 0
on success and -1
on error. The
following errno
error conditions are defined for this function:
EBADF
The socket argument is not a valid file descriptor.
ENOTSOCK
The descriptor socket is not a socket.
ENOBUFS
There are not enough internal buffers available for the operation.
You can’t read the address of a socket in the file namespace. This is consistent with the rest of the system; in general, there’s no way to find a file’s name from a descriptor for that file.
Next: The Local Namespace, Previous: Socket Addresses, Up: Sockets [Contents][Index]
Each network interface has a name. This usually consists of a few
letters that relate to the type of interface, which may be followed by a
number if there is more than one interface of that type. Examples
might be lo
(the loopback interface) and eth0
(the first
Ethernet interface).
Although such names are convenient for humans, it would be clumsy to have to use them whenever a program needs to refer to an interface. In such situations an interface is referred to by its index, which is an arbitrarily-assigned small positive integer.
The following functions, constants and data types are declared in the header file net/if.h.
This constant defines the maximum buffer size needed to hold an interface name, including its terminating zero byte.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Unsafe lock | AC-Unsafe lock fd | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This function yields the interface index corresponding to a particular name. If no interface exists with the name given, it returns 0.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Unsafe lock | AC-Unsafe lock fd | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This function maps an interface index to its corresponding name. The
returned name is placed in the buffer pointed to by ifname
, which
must be at least IFNAMSIZ
bytes in length. If the index was
invalid, the function’s return value is a null pointer, otherwise it is
ifname
.
This data type is used to hold the information about a single interface. It has the following members:
unsigned int if_index;
This is the interface index.
char *if_name
This is the null-terminated index name.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Unsafe heap lock/hurd | AC-Unsafe lock/hurd fd mem | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This function returns an array of if_nameindex
structures, one
for every interface that is present. The end of the list is indicated
by a structure with an interface of 0 and a null name pointer. If an
error occurs, this function returns a null pointer.
The returned structure must be freed with if_freenameindex
after
use.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Unsafe heap | AC-Unsafe mem | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This function frees the structure returned by an earlier call to
if_nameindex
.
Next: The Internet Namespace, Previous: Interface Naming, Up: Sockets [Contents][Index]
This section describes the details of the local namespace, whose
symbolic name (required when you create a socket) is PF_LOCAL
.
The local namespace is also known as “Unix domain sockets”. Another
name is file namespace since socket addresses are normally implemented
as file names.
Next: Details of Local Namespace, Up: The Local Namespace [Contents][Index]
In the local namespace socket addresses are file names. You can specify any file name you want as the address of the socket, but you must have write permission on the directory containing it. It’s common to put these files in the /tmp directory.
One peculiarity of the local namespace is that the name is only used when opening the connection; once open the address is not meaningful and may not exist.
Another peculiarity is that you cannot connect to such a socket from another machine–not even if the other machine shares the file system which contains the name of the socket. You can see the socket in a directory listing, but connecting to it never succeeds. Some programs take advantage of this, such as by asking the client to send its own process ID, and using the process IDs to distinguish between clients. However, we recommend you not use this method in protocols you design, as we might someday permit connections from other machines that mount the same file systems. Instead, send each new client an identifying number if you want it to have one.
After you close a socket in the local namespace, you should delete the
file name from the file system. Use unlink
or remove
to
do this; see Deleting Files.
The local namespace supports just one protocol for any communication
style; it is protocol number 0
.
Next: Example of Local-Namespace Sockets, Previous: Local Namespace Concepts, Up: The Local Namespace [Contents][Index]
To create a socket in the local namespace, use the constant
PF_LOCAL
as the namespace argument to socket
or
socketpair
. This constant is defined in sys/socket.h.
This designates the local namespace, in which socket addresses are local
names, and its associated family of protocols. PF_LOCAL
is the
macro used by POSIX.1g.
This is a synonym for PF_LOCAL
, for compatibility’s sake.
This is a synonym for PF_LOCAL
, for compatibility’s sake.
The structure for specifying socket names in the local namespace is defined in the header file sys/un.h:
This structure is used to specify local namespace socket addresses. It has the following members:
short int sun_family
This identifies the address family or format of the socket address.
You should store the value AF_LOCAL
to designate the local
namespace. See Socket Addresses.
char sun_path[108]
This is the file name to use.
Incomplete: Why is 108 a magic number? RMS suggests making
this a zero-length array and tweaking the following example to use
alloca
to allocate an appropriate amount of storage based on
the length of the filename.
You should compute the length parameter for a socket address in
the local namespace as the sum of the size of the sun_family
component and the string length (not the allocation size!) of
the file name string. This can be done using the macro SUN_LEN
:
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This macro computes the length of the socket address in the local namespace.
Previous: Details of Local Namespace, Up: The Local Namespace [Contents][Index]
Here is an example showing how to create and name a socket in the local namespace.
#include <stddef.h> #include <stdio.h> #include <errno.h> #include <stdlib.h> #include <string.h> #include <sys/socket.h> #include <sys/un.h> int make_named_socket (const char *filename) { struct sockaddr_un name; int sock; size_t size; /* Create the socket. */ sock = socket (PF_LOCAL, SOCK_DGRAM, 0); if (sock < 0) { perror ("socket"); exit (EXIT_FAILURE); } /* Bind a name to the socket. */ name.sun_family = AF_LOCAL; strncpy (name.sun_path, filename, sizeof (name.sun_path)); name.sun_path[sizeof (name.sun_path) - 1] = '\0'; /* The size of the address is the offset of the start of the filename, plus its length (not including the terminating null byte). Alternatively you can just do: size = SUN_LEN (&name); */ size = (offsetof (struct sockaddr_un, sun_path) + strlen (name.sun_path)); if (bind (sock, (struct sockaddr *) &name, size) < 0) { perror ("bind"); exit (EXIT_FAILURE); } return sock; }
Next: Other Namespaces, Previous: The Local Namespace, Up: Sockets [Contents][Index]
This section describes the details of the protocols and socket naming conventions used in the Internet namespace.
Originally the Internet namespace used only IP version 4 (IPv4). With the growing number of hosts on the Internet, a new protocol with a larger address space was necessary: IP version 6 (IPv6). IPv6 introduces 128-bit addresses (IPv4 has 32-bit addresses) and other features, and will eventually replace IPv4.
To create a socket in the IPv4 Internet namespace, use the symbolic name
PF_INET
of this namespace as the namespace argument to
socket
or socketpair
. For IPv6 addresses you need the
macro PF_INET6
. These macros are defined in sys/socket.h.
This designates the IPv4 Internet namespace and associated family of protocols.
This designates the IPv6 Internet namespace and associated family of protocols.
A socket address for the Internet namespace includes the following components:
You must ensure that the address and port number are represented in a canonical format called network byte order. See Byte Order Conversion, for information about this.
Next: Host Addresses, Up: The Internet Namespace [Contents][Index]
In the Internet namespace, for both IPv4 (AF_INET
) and IPv6
(AF_INET6
), a socket address consists of a host address
and a port on that host. In addition, the protocol you choose serves
effectively as a part of the address because local port numbers are
meaningful only within a particular protocol.
The data types for representing socket addresses in the Internet namespace are defined in the header file netinet/in.h.
This is the data type used to represent socket addresses in the Internet namespace. It has the following members:
sa_family_t sin_family
This identifies the address family or format of the socket address.
You should store the value AF_INET
in this member. The address
family is stored in host byte order. See Socket Addresses.
struct in_addr sin_addr
This is the IPv4 address. See Host Addresses, and Host Names, for how to get a value to store here. The IPv4 address is stored in network byte order.
unsigned short int sin_port
This is the port number. See Internet Ports. The port number is stored in network byte order.
When you call bind
or getsockname
, you should specify
sizeof (struct sockaddr_in)
as the length parameter if
you are using an IPv4 Internet namespace socket address.
This is the data type used to represent socket addresses in the IPv6 namespace. It has the following members:
sa_family_t sin6_family
This identifies the address family or format of the socket address.
You should store the value of AF_INET6
in this member.
See Socket Addresses. The address family is stored in host byte
order.
struct in6_addr sin6_addr
This is the IPv6 address of the host machine. See Host Addresses, and Host Names, for how to get a value to store here. The address is stored in network byte order.
uint32_t sin6_flowinfo
¶This combines the IPv6 traffic class and flow label values, as found in the IPv6 header. This field is stored in network byte order. Only the 28 lower bits (of the number in network byte order) are used; the remaining bits must be zero. The lower 20 bits are the flow label, and bits 20 to 27 are the the traffic class. Typically, this field is zero.
uint32_t sin6_scope_id
¶For link-local addresses, this identifies the interface on which this address is valid. The scope ID is stored in host byte order. Typically, this field is zero.
uint16_t sin6_port
This is the port number. See Internet Ports. The port number is stored in network byte order.
Next: Internet Ports, Previous: Internet Socket Address Formats, Up: The Internet Namespace [Contents][Index]
Each computer on the Internet has one or more Internet addresses, numbers which identify that computer among all those on the Internet. Users typically write IPv4 numeric host addresses as sequences of four numbers, separated by periods, as in ‘128.52.46.32’, and IPv6 numeric host addresses as sequences of up to eight numbers separated by colons, as in ‘5f03:1200:836f:c100::1’.
Each computer also has one or more host names, which are strings of words separated by periods, as in ‘www.gnu.org’.
Programs that let the user specify a host typically accept both numeric addresses and host names. To open a connection a program needs a numeric address, and so must convert a host name to the numeric address it stands for.
Next: Host Address Data Type, Up: Host Addresses [Contents][Index]
An IPv4 Internet host address is a number containing four bytes of data. Historically these are divided into two parts, a network number and a local network address number within that network. In the mid-1990s classless addresses were introduced which changed this behavior. Since some functions implicitly expect the old definitions, we first describe the class-based network and will then describe classless addresses. IPv6 uses only classless addresses and therefore the following paragraphs don’t apply.
The class-based IPv4 network number consists of the first one, two or three bytes; the rest of the bytes are the local address.
IPv4 network numbers are registered with the Network Information Center (NIC), and are divided into three classes—A, B and C. The local network address numbers of individual machines are registered with the administrator of the particular network.
Class A networks have single-byte numbers in the range 0 to 127. There are only a small number of Class A networks, but they can each support a very large number of hosts. Medium-sized Class B networks have two-byte network numbers, with the first byte in the range 128 to 191. Class C networks are the smallest; they have three-byte network numbers, with the first byte in the range 192-255. Thus, the first 1, 2, or 3 bytes of an Internet address specify a network. The remaining bytes of the Internet address specify the address within that network.
The Class A network 0 is reserved for broadcast to all networks. In addition, the host number 0 within each network is reserved for broadcast to all hosts in that network. These uses are obsolete now but for compatibility reasons you shouldn’t use network 0 and host number 0.
The Class A network 127 is reserved for loopback; you can always use the Internet address ‘127.0.0.1’ to refer to the host machine.
Since a single machine can be a member of multiple networks, it can have multiple Internet host addresses. However, there is never supposed to be more than one machine with the same host address.
There are four forms of the standard numbers-and-dots notation for Internet addresses:
a.b.c.d
This specifies all four bytes of the address individually and is the commonly used representation.
a.b.c
The last part of the address, c, is interpreted as a 2-byte quantity.
This is useful for specifying host addresses in a Class B network with
network address number a.b
.
a.b
The last part of the address, b, is interpreted as a 3-byte quantity. This is useful for specifying host addresses in a Class A network with network address number a.
a
If only one part is given, this corresponds directly to the host address number.
Within each part of the address, the usual C conventions for specifying the radix apply. In other words, a leading ‘0x’ or ‘0X’ implies hexadecimal radix; a leading ‘0’ implies octal; and otherwise decimal radix is assumed.
IPv4 addresses (and IPv6 addresses also) are now considered classless; the distinction between classes A, B and C can be ignored. Instead an IPv4 host address consists of a 32-bit address and a 32-bit mask. The mask contains set bits for the network part and cleared bits for the host part. The network part is contiguous from the left, with the remaining bits representing the host. As a consequence, the netmask can simply be specified as the number of set bits. Classes A, B and C are just special cases of this general rule. For example, class A addresses have a netmask of ‘255.0.0.0’ or a prefix length of 8.
Classless IPv4 network addresses are written in numbers-and-dots notation with the prefix length appended and a slash as separator. For example the class A network 10 is written as ‘10.0.0.0/8’.
IPv6 addresses contain 128 bits (IPv4 has 32 bits) of data. A host address is usually written as eight 16-bit hexadecimal numbers that are separated by colons. Two colons are used to abbreviate strings of consecutive zeros. For example, the IPv6 loopback address ‘0:0:0:0:0:0:0:1’ can just be written as ‘::1’.
Next: Host Address Functions, Previous: Internet Host Addresses, Up: Host Addresses [Contents][Index]
IPv4 Internet host addresses are represented in some contexts as integers
(type uint32_t
). In other contexts, the integer is
packaged inside a structure of type struct in_addr
. It would
be better if the usage were made consistent, but it is not hard to extract
the integer from the structure or put the integer into a structure.
You will find older code that uses unsigned long int
for
IPv4 Internet host addresses instead of uint32_t
or struct
in_addr
. Historically unsigned long int
was a 32-bit number but
with 64-bit machines this has changed. Using unsigned long int
might break the code if it is used on machines where this type doesn’t
have 32 bits. uint32_t
is specified by Unix98 and guaranteed to have
32 bits.
IPv6 Internet host addresses have 128 bits and are packaged inside a
structure of type struct in6_addr
.
The following basic definitions for Internet addresses are declared in the header file netinet/in.h:
This data type is used in certain contexts to contain an IPv4 Internet
host address. It has just one field, named s_addr
, which records
the host address number as an uint32_t
.
You can use this constant to stand for “the address of this machine,”
instead of finding its actual address. It is the IPv4 Internet address
‘127.0.0.1’, which is usually called ‘localhost’. This
special constant saves you the trouble of looking up the address of your
own machine. Also, the system usually implements INADDR_LOOPBACK
specially, avoiding any network traffic for the case of one machine
talking to itself.
You can use this constant to stand for “any incoming address” when
binding to an address. See Setting the Address of a Socket. This is the usual
address to give in the sin_addr
member of struct sockaddr_in
when you want to accept Internet connections.
This constant is the address you use to send a broadcast message.
This constant is returned by some functions to indicate an error.
This data type is used to store an IPv6 address. It stores 128 bits of data, which can be accessed (via a union) in a variety of ways.
This constant is the IPv6 address ‘::1’, the loopback address. See
above for a description of what this means. The macro
IN6ADDR_LOOPBACK_INIT
is provided to allow you to initialize your
own variables to this value.
This constant is the IPv6 address ‘::’, the unspecified address. See
above for a description of what this means. The macro
IN6ADDR_ANY_INIT
is provided to allow you to initialize your
own variables to this value.
Next: Host Names, Previous: Host Address Data Type, Up: Host Addresses [Contents][Index]
These additional functions for manipulating Internet addresses are declared in the header file arpa/inet.h. They represent Internet addresses in network byte order, and network numbers and local-address-within-network numbers in host byte order. See Byte Order Conversion, for an explanation of network and host byte order.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe locale | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This function converts the IPv4 Internet host address name
from the standard numbers-and-dots notation into binary data and stores
it in the struct in_addr
that addr points to.
inet_aton
returns nonzero if the address is valid, zero if not.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe locale | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This function converts the IPv4 Internet host address name from the
standard numbers-and-dots notation into binary data. If the input is
not valid, inet_addr
returns INADDR_NONE
. This is an
obsolete interface to inet_aton
, described immediately above. It
is obsolete because INADDR_NONE
is a valid address
(255.255.255.255), and inet_aton
provides a cleaner way to
indicate error return.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe locale | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This function extracts the network number from the address name,
given in the standard numbers-and-dots notation. The returned address is
in host order. If the input is not valid, inet_network
returns
-1
.
The function works only with traditional IPv4 class A, B and C network types. It doesn’t work with classless addresses and shouldn’t be used anymore.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe locale | AS-Unsafe race | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This function converts the IPv4 Internet host address addr to a string in the standard numbers-and-dots notation. The return value is a pointer into a statically-allocated buffer. Subsequent calls will overwrite the same buffer, so you should copy the string if you need to save it.
In multi-threaded programs each thread has its own statically-allocated
buffer. But still subsequent calls of inet_ntoa
in the same
thread will overwrite the result of the last call.
Instead of inet_ntoa
the newer function inet_ntop
which is
described below should be used since it handles both IPv4 and IPv6
addresses.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This function makes an IPv4 Internet host address by combining the network number net with the local-address-within-network number local.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This function returns the local-address-within-network part of the Internet host address addr.
The function works only with traditional IPv4 class A, B and C network types. It doesn’t work with classless addresses and shouldn’t be used anymore.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This function returns the network number part of the Internet host address addr.
The function works only with traditional IPv4 class A, B and C network types. It doesn’t work with classless addresses and shouldn’t be used anymore.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe locale | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This function converts an Internet address (either IPv4 or IPv6) from
presentation (textual) to network (binary) format. af should be
either AF_INET
or AF_INET6
, as appropriate for the type of
address being converted. cp is a pointer to the input string, and
buf is a pointer to a buffer for the result. It is the caller’s
responsibility to make sure the buffer is large enough.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe locale | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This function converts an Internet address (either IPv4 or IPv6) from
network (binary) to presentation (textual) form. af should be
either AF_INET
or AF_INET6
, as appropriate. cp is a
pointer to the address to be converted. buf should be a pointer
to a buffer to hold the result, and len is the length of this
buffer. The return value from the function will be this buffer address.
Previous: Host Address Functions, Up: Host Addresses [Contents][Index]
Besides the standard numbers-and-dots notation for Internet addresses, you can also refer to a host by a symbolic name. The advantage of a symbolic name is that it is usually easier to remember. For example, the machine with Internet address ‘158.121.106.19’ is also known as ‘alpha.gnu.org’; and other machines in the ‘gnu.org’ domain can refer to it simply as ‘alpha’.
Internally, the system uses a database to keep track of the mapping between host names and host numbers. This database is usually either the file /etc/hosts or an equivalent provided by a name server. The functions and other symbols for accessing this database are declared in netdb.h. They are BSD features, defined unconditionally if you include netdb.h.
This data type is used to represent an entry in the hosts database. It has the following members:
char *h_name
This is the “official” name of the host.
char **h_aliases
These are alternative names for the host, represented as a null-terminated vector of strings.
int h_addrtype
This is the host address type; in practice, its value is always either
AF_INET
or AF_INET6
, with the latter being used for IPv6
hosts. In principle other kinds of addresses could be represented in
the database as well as Internet addresses; if this were done, you
might find a value in this field other than AF_INET
or
AF_INET6
. See Socket Addresses.
int h_length
This is the length, in bytes, of each address.
char **h_addr_list
This is the vector of addresses for the host. (Recall that the host might be connected to multiple networks and have different addresses on each one.) The vector is terminated by a null pointer.
char *h_addr
This is a synonym for h_addr_list[0]
; in other words, it is the
first host address.
As far as the host database is concerned, each address is just a block
of memory h_length
bytes long. But in other contexts there is an
implicit assumption that you can convert IPv4 addresses to a
struct in_addr
or an uint32_t
. Host addresses in
a struct hostent
structure are always given in network byte
order; see Byte Order Conversion.
You can use gethostbyname
, gethostbyname2
or
gethostbyaddr
to search the hosts database for information about
a particular host. The information is returned in a
statically-allocated structure; you must copy the information if you
need to save it across calls. You can also use getaddrinfo
and
getnameinfo
to obtain this information.
Preliminary: | MT-Unsafe race:hostbyname env locale | AS-Unsafe dlopen plugin corrupt heap lock | AC-Unsafe lock corrupt mem fd | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The gethostbyname
function returns information about the host
named name. If the lookup fails, it returns a null pointer.
Preliminary: | MT-Unsafe race:hostbyname2 env locale | AS-Unsafe dlopen plugin corrupt heap lock | AC-Unsafe lock corrupt mem fd | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The gethostbyname2
function is like gethostbyname
, but
allows the caller to specify the desired address family (e.g.
AF_INET
or AF_INET6
) of the result.
Preliminary: | MT-Unsafe race:hostbyaddr env locale | AS-Unsafe dlopen plugin corrupt heap lock | AC-Unsafe lock corrupt mem fd | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The gethostbyaddr
function returns information about the host
with Internet address addr. The parameter addr is not
really a pointer to char - it can be a pointer to an IPv4 or an IPv6
address. The length argument is the size (in bytes) of the address
at addr. format specifies the address format; for an IPv4
Internet address, specify a value of AF_INET
; for an IPv6
Internet address, use AF_INET6
.
If the lookup fails, gethostbyaddr
returns a null pointer.
If the name lookup by gethostbyname
or gethostbyaddr
fails, you can find out the reason by looking at the value of the
variable h_errno
. (It would be cleaner design for these
functions to set errno
, but use of h_errno
is compatible
with other systems.)
Here are the error codes that you may find in h_errno
:
HOST_NOT_FOUND
¶No such host is known in the database.
TRY_AGAIN
¶This condition happens when the name server could not be contacted. If you try again later, you may succeed then.
NO_RECOVERY
¶A non-recoverable error occurred.
NO_ADDRESS
¶The host database contains an entry for the name, but it doesn’t have an associated Internet address.
The lookup functions above all have one thing in common: they are not reentrant and therefore unusable in multi-threaded applications. Therefore provides the GNU C Library a new set of functions which can be used in this context.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe env locale | AS-Unsafe dlopen plugin corrupt heap lock | AC-Unsafe lock corrupt mem fd | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The gethostbyname_r
function returns information about the host
named name. The caller must pass a pointer to an object of type
struct hostent
in the result_buf parameter. In addition
the function may need extra buffer space and the caller must pass a
pointer and the size of the buffer in the buf and buflen
parameters.
A pointer to the buffer, in which the result is stored, is available in
*result
after the function call successfully returned. The
buffer passed as the buf parameter can be freed only once the caller
has finished with the result hostent struct, or has copied it including all
the other memory that it points to. If an error occurs or if no entry is
found, the pointer *result
is a null pointer. Success is
signalled by a zero return value. If the function failed the return value
is an error number. In addition to the errors defined for
gethostbyname
it can also be ERANGE
. In this case the call
should be repeated with a larger buffer. Additional error information is
not stored in the global variable h_errno
but instead in the object
pointed to by h_errnop.
Here’s a small example:
struct hostent * gethostname (char *host) { struct hostent *hostbuf, *hp; size_t hstbuflen; char *tmphstbuf; int res; int herr; hostbuf = malloc (sizeof (struct hostent)); hstbuflen = 1024; tmphstbuf = malloc (hstbuflen); while ((res = gethostbyname_r (host, hostbuf, tmphstbuf, hstbuflen, &hp, &herr)) == ERANGE) { /* Enlarge the buffer. */ tmphstbuf = reallocarray (tmphstbuf, hstbuflen, 2); hstbuflen *= 2; } free (tmphstbuf); /* Check for errors. */ if (res || hp == NULL) return NULL; return hp; }
Preliminary: | MT-Safe env locale | AS-Unsafe dlopen plugin corrupt heap lock | AC-Unsafe lock corrupt mem fd | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The gethostbyname2_r
function is like gethostbyname_r
, but
allows the caller to specify the desired address family (e.g.
AF_INET
or AF_INET6
) for the result.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe env locale | AS-Unsafe dlopen plugin corrupt heap lock | AC-Unsafe lock corrupt mem fd | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The gethostbyaddr_r
function returns information about the host
with Internet address addr. The parameter addr is not
really a pointer to char - it can be a pointer to an IPv4 or an IPv6
address. The length argument is the size (in bytes) of the address
at addr. format specifies the address format; for an IPv4
Internet address, specify a value of AF_INET
; for an IPv6
Internet address, use AF_INET6
.
Similar to the gethostbyname_r
function, the caller must provide
buffers for the result and memory used internally. In case of success
the function returns zero. Otherwise the value is an error number where
ERANGE
has the special meaning that the caller-provided buffer is
too small.
You can also scan the entire hosts database one entry at a time using
sethostent
, gethostent
and endhostent
. Be careful
when using these functions because they are not reentrant.
Preliminary: | MT-Unsafe race:hostent env locale | AS-Unsafe dlopen plugin heap lock | AC-Unsafe corrupt lock fd mem | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This function opens the hosts database to begin scanning it. You can
then call gethostent
to read the entries.
If the stayopen argument is nonzero, this sets a flag so that
subsequent calls to gethostbyname
or gethostbyaddr
will
not close the database (as they usually would). This makes for more
efficiency if you call those functions several times, by avoiding
reopening the database for each call.
Preliminary: | MT-Unsafe race:hostent race:hostentbuf env locale | AS-Unsafe dlopen plugin heap lock | AC-Unsafe corrupt lock fd mem | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This function returns the next entry in the hosts database. It returns a null pointer if there are no more entries.
Preliminary: | MT-Unsafe race:hostent env locale | AS-Unsafe dlopen plugin heap lock | AC-Unsafe corrupt lock fd mem | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This function closes the hosts database.
Next: The Services Database, Previous: Host Addresses, Up: The Internet Namespace [Contents][Index]
A socket address in the Internet namespace consists of a machine’s Internet address plus a port number which distinguishes the sockets on a given machine (for a given protocol). Port numbers range from 0 to 65,535.
Port numbers less than IPPORT_RESERVED
are reserved for standard
servers, such as finger
and telnet
. There is a database
that keeps track of these, and you can use the getservbyname
function to map a service name onto a port number; see The Services Database.
If you write a server that is not one of the standard ones defined in
the database, you must choose a port number for it. Use a number
greater than IPPORT_USERRESERVED
; such numbers are reserved for
servers and won’t ever be generated automatically by the system.
Avoiding conflicts with servers being run by other users is up to you.
When you use a socket without specifying its address, the system
generates a port number for it. This number is between
IPPORT_RESERVED
and IPPORT_USERRESERVED
.
On the Internet, it is actually legitimate to have two different
sockets with the same port number, as long as they never both try to
communicate with the same socket address (host address plus port
number). You shouldn’t duplicate a port number except in special
circumstances where a higher-level protocol requires it. Normally,
the system won’t let you do it; bind
normally insists on
distinct port numbers. To reuse a port number, you must set the
socket option SO_REUSEADDR
. See Socket-Level Options.
These macros are defined in the header file netinet/in.h.
Port numbers less than IPPORT_RESERVED
are reserved for
superuser use.
Port numbers greater than or equal to IPPORT_USERRESERVED
are
reserved for explicit use; they will never be allocated automatically.
Next: Byte Order Conversion, Previous: Internet Ports, Up: The Internet Namespace [Contents][Index]
The database that keeps track of “well-known” services is usually either the file /etc/services or an equivalent from a name server. You can use these utilities, declared in netdb.h, to access the services database.
This data type holds information about entries from the services database. It has the following members:
char *s_name
This is the “official” name of the service.
char **s_aliases
These are alternate names for the service, represented as an array of strings. A null pointer terminates the array.
int s_port
This is the port number for the service. Port numbers are given in network byte order; see Byte Order Conversion.
char *s_proto
This is the name of the protocol to use with this service. See Protocols Database.
To get information about a particular service, use the
getservbyname
or getservbyport
functions. The information
is returned in a statically-allocated structure; you must copy the
information if you need to save it across calls.
Preliminary: | MT-Unsafe race:servbyname locale | AS-Unsafe dlopen plugin heap lock | AC-Unsafe corrupt lock fd mem | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The getservbyname
function returns information about the
service named name using protocol proto. If it can’t find
such a service, it returns a null pointer.
This function is useful for servers as well as for clients; servers use it to determine which port they should listen on (see Listening for Connections).
Preliminary: | MT-Unsafe race:servbyport locale | AS-Unsafe dlopen plugin heap lock | AC-Unsafe corrupt lock fd mem | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The getservbyport
function returns information about the
service at port port using protocol proto. If it can’t
find such a service, it returns a null pointer.
You can also scan the services database using setservent
,
getservent
and endservent
. Be careful when using these
functions because they are not reentrant.
Preliminary: | MT-Unsafe race:servent locale | AS-Unsafe dlopen plugin heap lock | AC-Unsafe corrupt lock fd mem | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This function opens the services database to begin scanning it.
If the stayopen argument is nonzero, this sets a flag so that
subsequent calls to getservbyname
or getservbyport
will
not close the database (as they usually would). This makes for more
efficiency if you call those functions several times, by avoiding
reopening the database for each call.
Preliminary: | MT-Unsafe race:servent race:serventbuf locale | AS-Unsafe dlopen plugin heap lock | AC-Unsafe corrupt lock fd mem | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This function returns the next entry in the services database. If there are no more entries, it returns a null pointer.
Preliminary: | MT-Unsafe race:servent locale | AS-Unsafe dlopen plugin heap lock | AC-Unsafe corrupt lock fd mem | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This function closes the services database.
Next: Protocols Database, Previous: The Services Database, Up: The Internet Namespace [Contents][Index]
Different kinds of computers use different conventions for the ordering of bytes within a word. Some computers put the most significant byte within a word first (this is called “big-endian” order), and others put it last (“little-endian” order).
So that machines with different byte order conventions can communicate, the Internet protocols specify a canonical byte order convention for data transmitted over the network. This is known as network byte order.
When establishing an Internet socket connection, you must make sure that
the data in the sin_port
and sin_addr
members of the
sockaddr_in
structure are represented in network byte order.
If you are encoding integer data in the messages sent through the
socket, you should convert this to network byte order too. If you don’t
do this, your program may fail when running on or talking to other kinds
of machines.
If you use getservbyname
and gethostbyname
or
inet_addr
to get the port number and host address, the values are
already in network byte order, and you can copy them directly into
the sockaddr_in
structure.
Otherwise, you have to convert the values explicitly. Use htons
and ntohs
to convert values for the sin_port
member. Use
htonl
and ntohl
to convert IPv4 addresses for the
sin_addr
member. (Remember, struct in_addr
is equivalent
to uint32_t
.) These functions are declared in
netinet/in.h.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This function converts the uint16_t
integer hostshort from
host byte order to network byte order.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This function converts the uint16_t
integer netshort from
network byte order to host byte order.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This function converts the uint32_t
integer hostlong from
host byte order to network byte order.
This is used for IPv4 Internet addresses.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This function converts the uint32_t
integer netlong from
network byte order to host byte order.
This is used for IPv4 Internet addresses.
Next: Internet Socket Example, Previous: Byte Order Conversion, Up: The Internet Namespace [Contents][Index]
The communications protocol used with a socket controls low-level details of how data are exchanged. For example, the protocol implements things like checksums to detect errors in transmissions, and routing instructions for messages. Normal user programs have little reason to mess with these details directly.
The default communications protocol for the Internet namespace depends on the communication style. For stream communication, the default is TCP (“transmission control protocol”). For datagram communication, the default is UDP (“user datagram protocol”). For reliable datagram communication, the default is RDP (“reliable datagram protocol”). You should nearly always use the default.
Internet protocols are generally specified by a name instead of a
number. The network protocols that a host knows about are stored in a
database. This is usually either derived from the file
/etc/protocols, or it may be an equivalent provided by a name
server. You look up the protocol number associated with a named
protocol in the database using the getprotobyname
function.
Here are detailed descriptions of the utilities for accessing the protocols database. These are declared in netdb.h.
This data type is used to represent entries in the network protocols database. It has the following members:
char *p_name
This is the official name of the protocol.
char **p_aliases
These are alternate names for the protocol, specified as an array of strings. The last element of the array is a null pointer.
int p_proto
This is the protocol number (in host byte order); use this member as the
protocol argument to socket
.
You can use getprotobyname
and getprotobynumber
to search
the protocols database for a specific protocol. The information is
returned in a statically-allocated structure; you must copy the
information if you need to save it across calls.
Preliminary: | MT-Unsafe race:protobyname locale | AS-Unsafe dlopen plugin heap lock | AC-Unsafe corrupt lock fd mem | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The getprotobyname
function returns information about the
network protocol named name. If there is no such protocol, it
returns a null pointer.
Preliminary: | MT-Unsafe race:protobynumber locale | AS-Unsafe dlopen plugin heap lock | AC-Unsafe corrupt lock fd mem | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The getprotobynumber
function returns information about the
network protocol with number protocol. If there is no such
protocol, it returns a null pointer.
You can also scan the whole protocols database one protocol at a time by
using setprotoent
, getprotoent
and endprotoent
.
Be careful when using these functions because they are not reentrant.
Preliminary: | MT-Unsafe race:protoent locale | AS-Unsafe dlopen plugin heap lock | AC-Unsafe corrupt lock fd mem | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This function opens the protocols database to begin scanning it.
If the stayopen argument is nonzero, this sets a flag so that
subsequent calls to getprotobyname
or getprotobynumber
will
not close the database (as they usually would). This makes for more
efficiency if you call those functions several times, by avoiding
reopening the database for each call.
Preliminary: | MT-Unsafe race:protoent race:protoentbuf locale | AS-Unsafe dlopen plugin heap lock | AC-Unsafe corrupt lock fd mem | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This function returns the next entry in the protocols database. It returns a null pointer if there are no more entries.
Preliminary: | MT-Unsafe race:protoent locale | AS-Unsafe dlopen plugin heap lock | AC-Unsafe corrupt lock fd mem | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This function closes the protocols database.
Previous: Protocols Database, Up: The Internet Namespace [Contents][Index]
Here is an example showing how to create and name a socket in the
Internet namespace. The newly created socket exists on the machine that
the program is running on. Rather than finding and using the machine’s
Internet address, this example specifies INADDR_ANY
as the host
address; the system replaces that with the machine’s actual address.
#include <stdio.h> #include <stdlib.h> #include <sys/socket.h> #include <netinet/in.h> int make_socket (uint16_t port) { int sock; struct sockaddr_in name; /* Create the socket. */ sock = socket (PF_INET, SOCK_STREAM, 0); if (sock < 0) { perror ("socket"); exit (EXIT_FAILURE); } /* Give the socket a name. */ name.sin_family = AF_INET; name.sin_port = htons (port); name.sin_addr.s_addr = htonl (INADDR_ANY); if (bind (sock, (struct sockaddr *) &name, sizeof (name)) < 0) { perror ("bind"); exit (EXIT_FAILURE); } return sock; }
Here is another example, showing how you can fill in a sockaddr_in
structure, given a host name string and a port number:
#include <stdio.h> #include <stdlib.h> #include <sys/socket.h> #include <netinet/in.h> #include <netdb.h> void init_sockaddr (struct sockaddr_in *name, const char *hostname, uint16_t port) { struct hostent *hostinfo; name->sin_family = AF_INET; name->sin_port = htons (port); hostinfo = gethostbyname (hostname); if (hostinfo == NULL) { fprintf (stderr, "Unknown host %s.\n", hostname); exit (EXIT_FAILURE); } name->sin_addr = *(struct in_addr *) hostinfo->h_addr; }
Next: Opening and Closing Sockets, Previous: The Internet Namespace, Up: Sockets [Contents][Index]
Certain other namespaces and associated protocol families are supported
but not documented yet because they are not often used. PF_NS
refers to the Xerox Network Software protocols. PF_ISO
stands
for Open Systems Interconnect. PF_CCITT
refers to protocols from
CCITT. socket.h defines these symbols and others naming protocols
not actually implemented.
PF_IMPLINK
is used for communicating between hosts and Internet
Message Processors. For information on this and PF_ROUTE
, an
occasionally-used local area routing protocol, see the GNU Hurd Manual
(to appear in the future).
Next: Using Sockets with Connections, Previous: Other Namespaces, Up: Sockets [Contents][Index]
This section describes the actual library functions for opening and closing sockets. The same functions work for all namespaces and connection styles.
Next: Closing a Socket, Up: Opening and Closing Sockets [Contents][Index]
The primitive for creating a socket is the socket
function,
declared in sys/socket.h.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe fd | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This function creates a socket and specifies communication style
style, which should be one of the socket styles listed in
Communication Styles. The namespace argument specifies
the namespace; it must be PF_LOCAL
(see The Local Namespace) or
PF_INET
(see The Internet Namespace). protocol
designates the specific protocol (see Socket Concepts); zero is
usually right for protocol.
The return value from socket
is the file descriptor for the new
socket, or -1
in case of error. The following errno
error
conditions are defined for this function:
EPROTONOSUPPORT
The protocol or style is not supported by the namespace specified.
EMFILE
The process already has too many file descriptors open.
ENFILE
The system already has too many file descriptors open.
EACCES
The process does not have the privilege to create a socket of the specified style or protocol.
ENOBUFS
The system ran out of internal buffer space.
The file descriptor returned by the socket
function supports both
read and write operations. However, like pipes, sockets do not support file
positioning operations.
For examples of how to call the socket
function,
see Example of Local-Namespace Sockets, or Internet Socket Example.
Next: Socket Pairs, Previous: Creating a Socket, Up: Opening and Closing Sockets [Contents][Index]
When you have finished using a socket, you can simply close its
file descriptor with close
; see Opening and Closing Files.
If there is still data waiting to be transmitted over the connection,
normally close
tries to complete this transmission. You
can control this behavior using the SO_LINGER
socket option to
specify a timeout period; see Socket Options.
You can also shut down only reception or transmission on a
connection by calling shutdown
, which is declared in
sys/socket.h.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The shutdown
function shuts down the connection of socket
socket. The argument how specifies what action to
perform:
0
Stop receiving data for this socket. If further data arrives, reject it.
1
Stop trying to transmit data from this socket. Discard any data waiting to be sent. Stop looking for acknowledgement of data already sent; don’t retransmit it if it is lost.
2
Stop both reception and transmission.
The return value is 0
on success and -1
on failure. The
following errno
error conditions are defined for this function:
EBADF
socket is not a valid file descriptor.
ENOTSOCK
socket is not a socket.
ENOTCONN
socket is not connected.
Previous: Closing a Socket, Up: Opening and Closing Sockets [Contents][Index]
A socket pair consists of a pair of connected (but unnamed)
sockets. It is very similar to a pipe and is used in much the same
way. Socket pairs are created with the socketpair
function,
declared in sys/socket.h. A socket pair is much like a pipe; the
main difference is that the socket pair is bidirectional, whereas the
pipe has one input-only end and one output-only end (see Pipes and FIFOs).
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe fd | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This function creates a socket pair, returning the file descriptors in
filedes[0]
and filedes[1]
. The socket pair
is a full-duplex communications channel, so that both reading and writing
may be performed at either end.
The namespace, style and protocol arguments are
interpreted as for the socket
function. style should be
one of the communication styles listed in Communication Styles.
The namespace argument specifies the namespace, which must be
AF_LOCAL
(see The Local Namespace); protocol specifies the
communications protocol, but zero is the only meaningful value.
If style specifies a connectionless communication style, then the two sockets you get are not connected, strictly speaking, but each of them knows the other as the default destination address, so they can send packets to each other.
The socketpair
function returns 0
on success and -1
on failure. The following errno
error conditions are defined
for this function:
EMFILE
The process has too many file descriptors open.
EAFNOSUPPORT
The specified namespace is not supported.
EPROTONOSUPPORT
The specified protocol is not supported.
EOPNOTSUPP
The specified protocol does not support the creation of socket pairs.
Next: Datagram Socket Operations, Previous: Opening and Closing Sockets, Up: Sockets [Contents][Index]
The most common communication styles involve making a connection to a particular other socket, and then exchanging data with that socket over and over. Making a connection is asymmetric; one side (the client) acts to request a connection, while the other side (the server) makes a socket and waits for the connection request.
Next: Listening for Connections, Up: Using Sockets with Connections [Contents][Index]
In making a connection, the client makes a connection while the server
waits for and accepts the connection. Here we discuss what the client
program must do with the connect
function, which is declared in
sys/socket.h.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The connect
function initiates a connection from the socket
with file descriptor socket to the socket whose address is
specified by the addr and length arguments. (This socket
is typically on another machine, and it must be already set up as a
server.) See Socket Addresses, for information about how these
arguments are interpreted.
Normally, connect
waits until the server responds to the request
before it returns. You can set nonblocking mode on the socket
socket to make connect
return immediately without waiting
for the response. See File Status Flags, for information about
nonblocking mode.
The normal return value from connect
is 0
. If an error
occurs, connect
returns -1
. The following errno
error conditions are defined for this function:
EBADF
The socket socket is not a valid file descriptor.
ENOTSOCK
File descriptor socket is not a socket.
EADDRNOTAVAIL
The specified address is not available on the remote machine.
EAFNOSUPPORT
The namespace of the addr is not supported by this socket.
EISCONN
The socket socket is already connected.
ETIMEDOUT
The attempt to establish the connection timed out.
ECONNREFUSED
The server has actively refused to establish the connection.
ENETUNREACH
The network of the given addr isn’t reachable from this host.
EADDRINUSE
The socket address of the given addr is already in use.
EINPROGRESS
The socket socket is non-blocking and the connection could not be
established immediately. You can determine when the connection is
completely established with select
; see Waiting for Input or Output.
Another connect
call on the same socket, before the connection is
completely established, will fail with EALREADY
.
EALREADY
The socket socket is non-blocking and already has a pending
connection in progress (see EINPROGRESS
above).
This function is defined as a cancellation point in multi-threaded programs, so one has to be prepared for this and make sure that allocated resources (like memory, file descriptors, semaphores or whatever) are freed even if the thread is canceled.
Next: Accepting Connections, Previous: Making a Connection, Up: Using Sockets with Connections [Contents][Index]
Now let us consider what the server process must do to accept
connections on a socket. First it must use the listen
function
to enable connection requests on the socket, and then accept each
incoming connection with a call to accept
(see Accepting Connections). Once connection requests are enabled on a server socket,
the select
function reports when the socket has a connection
ready to be accepted (see Waiting for Input or Output).
The listen
function is not allowed for sockets using
connectionless communication styles.
You can write a network server that does not even start running until a
connection to it is requested. See inetd
Servers.
In the Internet namespace, there are no special protection mechanisms for controlling access to a port; any process on any machine can make a connection to your server. If you want to restrict access to your server, make it examine the addresses associated with connection requests or implement some other handshaking or identification protocol.
In the local namespace, the ordinary file protection bits control who has access to connect to the socket.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe fd | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The listen
function enables the socket socket to accept
connections, thus making it a server socket.
The argument n specifies the length of the queue for pending
connections. When the queue fills, new clients attempting to connect
fail with ECONNREFUSED
until the server calls accept
to
accept a connection from the queue.
The listen
function returns 0
on success and -1
on failure. The following errno
error conditions are defined
for this function:
EBADF
The argument socket is not a valid file descriptor.
ENOTSOCK
The argument socket is not a socket.
EOPNOTSUPP
The socket socket does not support this operation.
Next: Who is Connected to Me?, Previous: Listening for Connections, Up: Using Sockets with Connections [Contents][Index]
When a server receives a connection request, it can complete the
connection by accepting the request. Use the function accept
to do this.
A socket that has been established as a server can accept connection
requests from multiple clients. The server’s original socket
does not become part of the connection; instead, accept
makes a new socket which participates in the connection.
accept
returns the descriptor for this socket. The server’s
original socket remains available for listening for further connection
requests.
The number of pending connection requests on a server socket is finite.
If connection requests arrive from clients faster than the server can
act upon them, the queue can fill up and additional requests are refused
with an ECONNREFUSED
error. You can specify the maximum length of
this queue as an argument to the listen
function, although the
system may also impose its own internal limit on the length of this
queue.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe fd | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This function is used to accept a connection request on the server socket socket.
The accept
function waits if there are no connections pending,
unless the socket socket has nonblocking mode set. (You can use
select
to wait for a pending connection, with a nonblocking
socket.) See File Status Flags, for information about nonblocking
mode.
The addr and length-ptr arguments are used to return information about the name of the client socket that initiated the connection. See Socket Addresses, for information about the format of the information.
Accepting a connection does not make socket part of the
connection. Instead, it creates a new socket which becomes
connected. The normal return value of accept
is the file
descriptor for the new socket.
After accept
, the original socket socket remains open and
unconnected, and continues listening until you close it. You can
accept further connections with socket by calling accept
again.
If an error occurs, accept
returns -1
. The following
errno
error conditions are defined for this function:
EBADF
The socket argument is not a valid file descriptor.
ENOTSOCK
The descriptor socket argument is not a socket.
EOPNOTSUPP
The descriptor socket does not support this operation.
EWOULDBLOCK
socket has nonblocking mode set, and there are no pending connections immediately available.
This function is defined as a cancellation point in multi-threaded programs, so one has to be prepared for this and make sure that allocated resources (like memory, file descriptors, semaphores or whatever) are freed even if the thread is canceled.
The accept
function is not allowed for sockets using
connectionless communication styles.
Next: Transferring Data, Previous: Accepting Connections, Up: Using Sockets with Connections [Contents][Index]
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The getpeername
function returns the address of the socket that
socket is connected to; it stores the address in the memory space
specified by addr and length-ptr. It stores the length of
the address in *length-ptr
.
See Socket Addresses, for information about the format of the
address. In some operating systems, getpeername
works only for
sockets in the Internet domain.
The return value is 0
on success and -1
on error. The
following errno
error conditions are defined for this function:
EBADF
The argument socket is not a valid file descriptor.
ENOTSOCK
The descriptor socket is not a socket.
ENOTCONN
The socket socket is not connected.
ENOBUFS
There are not enough internal buffers available.
Next: Byte Stream Socket Example, Previous: Who is Connected to Me?, Up: Using Sockets with Connections [Contents][Index]
Once a socket has been connected to a peer, you can use the ordinary
read
and write
operations (see Input and Output Primitives) to
transfer data. A socket is a two-way communications channel, so read
and write operations can be performed at either end.
There are also some I/O modes that are specific to socket operations.
In order to specify these modes, you must use the recv
and
send
functions instead of the more generic read
and
write
functions. The recv
and send
functions take
an additional argument which you can use to specify various flags to
control special I/O modes. For example, you can specify the
MSG_OOB
flag to read or write out-of-band data, the
MSG_PEEK
flag to peek at input, or the MSG_DONTROUTE
flag
to control inclusion of routing information on output.
Next: Receiving Data, Up: Transferring Data [Contents][Index]
The send
function is declared in the header file
sys/socket.h. If your flags argument is zero, you can just
as well use write
instead of send
; see Input and Output Primitives. If the socket was connected but the connection has broken,
you get a SIGPIPE
signal for any use of send
or
write
(see Miscellaneous Signals).
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The send
function is like write
, but with the additional
flags flags. The possible values of flags are described
in Socket Data Options.
This function returns the number of bytes transmitted, or -1
on
failure. If the socket is nonblocking, then send
(like
write
) can return after sending just part of the data.
See File Status Flags, for information about nonblocking mode.
Note, however, that a successful return value merely indicates that the message has been sent without error, not necessarily that it has been received without error.
The following errno
error conditions are defined for this function:
EBADF
The socket argument is not a valid file descriptor.
EINTR
The operation was interrupted by a signal before any data was sent. See Primitives Interrupted by Signals.
ENOTSOCK
The descriptor socket is not a socket.
EMSGSIZE
The socket type requires that the message be sent atomically, but the message is too large for this to be possible.
EWOULDBLOCK
Nonblocking mode has been set on the socket, and the write operation
would block. (Normally send
blocks until the operation can be
completed.)
ENOBUFS
There is not enough internal buffer space available.
ENOTCONN
You never connected this socket.
EPIPE
This socket was connected but the connection is now broken. In this
case, send
generates a SIGPIPE
signal first; if that
signal is ignored or blocked, or if its handler returns, then
send
fails with EPIPE
.
This function is defined as a cancellation point in multi-threaded programs, so one has to be prepared for this and make sure that allocated resources (like memory, file descriptors, semaphores or whatever) are freed even if the thread is canceled.
Next: Socket Data Options, Previous: Sending Data, Up: Transferring Data [Contents][Index]
The recv
function is declared in the header file
sys/socket.h. If your flags argument is zero, you can
just as well use read
instead of recv
; see Input and Output Primitives.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The recv
function is like read
, but with the additional
flags flags. The possible values of flags are described
in Socket Data Options.
If nonblocking mode is set for socket, and no data are available to
be read, recv
fails immediately rather than waiting. See File Status Flags, for information about nonblocking mode.
This function returns the number of bytes received, or -1
on failure.
The following errno
error conditions are defined for this function:
EBADF
The socket argument is not a valid file descriptor.
ENOTSOCK
The descriptor socket is not a socket.
EWOULDBLOCK
Nonblocking mode has been set on the socket, and the read operation
would block. (Normally, recv
blocks until there is input
available to be read.)
EINTR
The operation was interrupted by a signal before any data was read. See Primitives Interrupted by Signals.
ENOTCONN
You never connected this socket.
This function is defined as a cancellation point in multi-threaded programs, so one has to be prepared for this and make sure that allocated resources (like memory, file descriptors, semaphores or whatever) are freed even if the thread is canceled.
Previous: Receiving Data, Up: Transferring Data [Contents][Index]
The flags argument to send
and recv
is a bit
mask. You can bitwise-OR the values of the following macros together
to obtain a value for this argument. All are defined in the header
file sys/socket.h.
Send or receive out-of-band data. See Out-of-Band Data.
Look at the data but don’t remove it from the input queue. This is
only meaningful with input functions such as recv
, not with
send
.
Don’t include routing information in the message. This is only meaningful with output operations, and is usually only of interest for diagnostic or routing programs. We don’t try to explain it here.
Next: Byte Stream Connection Server Example, Previous: Transferring Data, Up: Using Sockets with Connections [Contents][Index]
Here is an example client program that makes a connection for a byte stream socket in the Internet namespace. It doesn’t do anything particularly interesting once it has connected to the server; it just sends a text string to the server and exits.
This program uses init_sockaddr
to set up the socket address; see
Internet Socket Example.
#include <stdio.h> #include <errno.h> #include <stdlib.h> #include <unistd.h> #include <sys/types.h> #include <sys/socket.h> #include <netinet/in.h> #include <netdb.h> #define PORT 5555 #define MESSAGE "Yow!!! Are we having fun yet?!?" #define SERVERHOST "www.gnu.org" void write_to_server (int filedes) { int nbytes; nbytes = write (filedes, MESSAGE, strlen (MESSAGE) + 1); if (nbytes < 0) { perror ("write"); exit (EXIT_FAILURE); } } int main (void) { extern void init_sockaddr (struct sockaddr_in *name, const char *hostname, uint16_t port); int sock; struct sockaddr_in servername; /* Create the socket. */ sock = socket (PF_INET, SOCK_STREAM, 0); if (sock < 0) { perror ("socket (client)"); exit (EXIT_FAILURE); } /* Connect to the server. */ init_sockaddr (&servername, SERVERHOST, PORT); if (0 > connect (sock, (struct sockaddr *) &servername, sizeof (servername))) { perror ("connect (client)"); exit (EXIT_FAILURE); } /* Send data to the server. */ write_to_server (sock); close (sock); exit (EXIT_SUCCESS); }
Next: Out-of-Band Data, Previous: Byte Stream Socket Example, Up: Using Sockets with Connections [Contents][Index]
The server end is much more complicated. Since we want to allow
multiple clients to be connected to the server at the same time, it
would be incorrect to wait for input from a single client by simply
calling read
or recv
. Instead, the right thing to do is
to use select
(see Waiting for Input or Output) to wait for input on
all of the open sockets. This also allows the server to deal with
additional connection requests.
This particular server doesn’t do anything interesting once it has gotten a message from a client. It does close the socket for that client when it detects an end-of-file condition (resulting from the client shutting down its end of the connection).
This program uses make_socket
to set up the socket address; see
Internet Socket Example.
#include <stdio.h> #include <errno.h> #include <stdlib.h> #include <unistd.h> #include <sys/types.h> #include <sys/socket.h> #include <netinet/in.h> #include <netdb.h> #define PORT 5555 #define MAXMSG 512 int read_from_client (int filedes) { char buffer[MAXMSG]; int nbytes; nbytes = read (filedes, buffer, MAXMSG); if (nbytes < 0) { /* Read error. */ perror ("read"); exit (EXIT_FAILURE); } else if (nbytes == 0) /* End-of-file. */ return -1; else { /* Data read. */ fprintf (stderr, "Server: got message: `%s'\n", buffer); return 0; } } int main (void) { extern int make_socket (uint16_t port); int sock; fd_set active_fd_set, read_fd_set; int i; struct sockaddr_in clientname; size_t size; /* Create the socket and set it up to accept connections. */ sock = make_socket (PORT); if (listen (sock, 1) < 0) { perror ("listen"); exit (EXIT_FAILURE); } /* Initialize the set of active sockets. */ FD_ZERO (&active_fd_set); FD_SET (sock, &active_fd_set); while (1) { /* Block until input arrives on one or more active sockets. */ read_fd_set = active_fd_set; if (select (FD_SETSIZE, &read_fd_set, NULL, NULL, NULL) < 0) { perror ("select"); exit (EXIT_FAILURE); } /* Service all the sockets with input pending. */ for (i = 0; i < FD_SETSIZE; ++i) if (FD_ISSET (i, &read_fd_set)) { if (i == sock) { /* Connection request on original socket. */ int new; size = sizeof (clientname); new = accept (sock, (struct sockaddr *) &clientname, &size); if (new < 0) { perror ("accept"); exit (EXIT_FAILURE); } fprintf (stderr, "Server: connect from host %s, port %hd.\n", inet_ntoa (clientname.sin_addr), ntohs (clientname.sin_port)); FD_SET (new, &active_fd_set); } else { /* Data arriving on an already-connected socket. */ if (read_from_client (i) < 0) { close (i); FD_CLR (i, &active_fd_set); } } } } }
Previous: Byte Stream Connection Server Example, Up: Using Sockets with Connections [Contents][Index]
Streams with connections permit out-of-band data that is
delivered with higher priority than ordinary data. Typically the
reason for sending out-of-band data is to send notice of an
exceptional condition. To send out-of-band data use
send
, specifying the flag MSG_OOB
(see Sending Data).
Out-of-band data are received with higher priority because the
receiving process need not read it in sequence; to read the next
available out-of-band data, use recv
with the MSG_OOB
flag (see Receiving Data). Ordinary read operations do not read
out-of-band data; they read only ordinary data.
When a socket finds that out-of-band data are on their way, it sends a
SIGURG
signal to the owner process or process group of the
socket. You can specify the owner using the F_SETOWN
command
to the fcntl
function; see Interrupt-Driven Input. You must
also establish a handler for this signal, as described in Signal Handling, in order to take appropriate action such as reading the
out-of-band data.
Alternatively, you can test for pending out-of-band data, or wait
until there is out-of-band data, using the select
function; it
can wait for an exceptional condition on the socket. See Waiting for Input or Output, for more information about select
.
Notification of out-of-band data (whether with SIGURG
or with
select
) indicates that out-of-band data are on the way; the data
may not actually arrive until later. If you try to read the
out-of-band data before it arrives, recv
fails with an
EWOULDBLOCK
error.
Sending out-of-band data automatically places a “mark” in the stream of ordinary data, showing where in the sequence the out-of-band data “would have been”. This is useful when the meaning of out-of-band data is “cancel everything sent so far”. Here is how you can test, in the receiving process, whether any ordinary data was sent before the mark:
success = ioctl (socket, SIOCATMARK, &atmark);
The integer
variable atmark is set to a nonzero value if
the socket’s read pointer has reached the “mark”.
Here’s a function to discard any ordinary data preceding the out-of-band mark:
int discard_until_mark (int socket) { while (1) { /* This is not an arbitrary limit; any size will do. */ char buffer[1024]; int atmark, success; /* If we have reached the mark, return. */ success = ioctl (socket, SIOCATMARK, &atmark); if (success < 0) perror ("ioctl"); if (result) return; /* Otherwise, read a bunch of ordinary data and discard it. This is guaranteed not to read past the mark if it starts before the mark. */ success = read (socket, buffer, sizeof buffer); if (success < 0) perror ("read"); } }
If you don’t want to discard the ordinary data preceding the mark, you
may need to read some of it anyway, to make room in internal system
buffers for the out-of-band data. If you try to read out-of-band data
and get an EWOULDBLOCK
error, try reading some ordinary data
(saving it so that you can use it when you want it) and see if that
makes room. Here is an example:
struct buffer { char *buf; int size; struct buffer *next; }; /* Read the out-of-band data from SOCKET and return it as a ‘struct buffer’, which records the address of the data and its size. It may be necessary to read some ordinary data in order to make room for the out-of-band data. If so, the ordinary data are saved as a chain of buffers found in the ‘next’ field of the value. */ struct buffer * read_oob (int socket) { struct buffer *tail = 0; struct buffer *list = 0; while (1) { /* This is an arbitrary limit. Does anyone know how to do this without a limit? */ #define BUF_SZ 1024 char *buf = (char *) xmalloc (BUF_SZ); int success; int atmark; /* Try again to read the out-of-band data. */ success = recv (socket, buf, BUF_SZ, MSG_OOB); if (success >= 0) { /* We got it, so return it. */ struct buffer *link = (struct buffer *) xmalloc (sizeof (struct buffer)); link->buf = buf; link->size = success; link->next = list; return link; } /* If we fail, see if we are at the mark. */ success = ioctl (socket, SIOCATMARK, &atmark); if (success < 0) perror ("ioctl"); if (atmark) { /* At the mark; skipping past more ordinary data cannot help. So just wait a while. */ sleep (1); continue; } /* Otherwise, read a bunch of ordinary data and save it. This is guaranteed not to read past the mark if it starts before the mark. */ success = read (socket, buf, BUF_SZ); if (success < 0) perror ("read"); /* Save this data in the buffer list. */ { struct buffer *link = (struct buffer *) xmalloc (sizeof (struct buffer)); link->buf = buf; link->size = success; /* Add the new link to the end of the list. */ if (tail) tail->next = link; else list = link; tail = link; } } }
Next: The inetd
Daemon, Previous: Using Sockets with Connections, Up: Sockets [Contents][Index]
This section describes how to use communication styles that don’t use
connections (styles SOCK_DGRAM
and SOCK_RDM
). Using
these styles, you group data into packets and each packet is an
independent communication. You specify the destination for each
packet individually.
Datagram packets are like letters: you send each one independently with its own destination address, and they may arrive in the wrong order or not at all.
The listen
and accept
functions are not allowed for
sockets using connectionless communication styles.
Next: Receiving Datagrams, Up: Datagram Socket Operations [Contents][Index]
The normal way of sending data on a datagram socket is by using the
sendto
function, declared in sys/socket.h.
You can call connect
on a datagram socket, but this only
specifies a default destination for further data transmission on the
socket. When a socket has a default destination you can use
send
(see Sending Data) or even write
(see Input and Output Primitives) to send a packet there. You can cancel the default
destination by calling connect
using an address format of
AF_UNSPEC
in the addr argument. See Making a Connection, for
more information about the connect
function.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The sendto
function transmits the data in the buffer
through the socket socket to the destination address specified
by the addr and length arguments. The size argument
specifies the number of bytes to be transmitted.
The flags are interpreted the same way as for send
; see
Socket Data Options.
The return value and error conditions are also the same as for
send
, but you cannot rely on the system to detect errors and
report them; the most common error is that the packet is lost or there
is no-one at the specified address to receive it, and the operating
system on your machine usually does not know this.
It is also possible for one call to sendto
to report an error
owing to a problem related to a previous call.
This function is defined as a cancellation point in multi-threaded programs, so one has to be prepared for this and make sure that allocated resources (like memory, file descriptors, semaphores or whatever) are freed even if the thread is canceled.
Next: Datagram Socket Example, Previous: Sending Datagrams, Up: Datagram Socket Operations [Contents][Index]
The recvfrom
function reads a packet from a datagram socket and
also tells you where it was sent from. This function is declared in
sys/socket.h.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The recvfrom
function reads one packet from the socket
socket into the buffer buffer. The size argument
specifies the maximum number of bytes to be read.
If the packet is longer than size bytes, then you get the first size bytes of the packet and the rest of the packet is lost. There’s no way to read the rest of the packet. Thus, when you use a packet protocol, you must always know how long a packet to expect.
The addr and length-ptr arguments are used to return the address where the packet came from. See Socket Addresses. For a socket in the local domain the address information won’t be meaningful, since you can’t read the address of such a socket (see The Local Namespace). You can specify a null pointer as the addr argument if you are not interested in this information.
The flags are interpreted the same way as for recv
(see Socket Data Options). The return value and error conditions
are also the same as for recv
.
This function is defined as a cancellation point in multi-threaded programs, so one has to be prepared for this and make sure that allocated resources (like memory, file descriptors, semaphores or whatever) are freed even if the thread is canceled.
You can use plain recv
(see Receiving Data) instead of
recvfrom
if you don’t need to find out who sent the packet
(either because you know where it should come from or because you
treat all possible senders alike). Even read
can be used if
you don’t want to specify flags (see Input and Output Primitives).
Next: Example of Reading Datagrams, Previous: Receiving Datagrams, Up: Datagram Socket Operations [Contents][Index]
Here is a set of example programs that send messages over a datagram
stream in the local namespace. Both the client and server programs use
the make_named_socket
function that was presented in Example of Local-Namespace Sockets, to create and name their sockets.
First, here is the server program. It sits in a loop waiting for messages to arrive, bouncing each message back to the sender. Obviously this isn’t a particularly useful program, but it does show the general ideas involved.
#include <stdio.h> #include <errno.h> #include <stdlib.h> #include <sys/socket.h> #include <sys/un.h> #define SERVER "/tmp/serversocket" #define MAXMSG 512 int main (void) { int sock; char message[MAXMSG]; struct sockaddr_un name; size_t size; int nbytes; /* Remove the filename first, it’s ok if the call fails */ unlink (SERVER); /* Make the socket, then loop endlessly. */ sock = make_named_socket (SERVER); while (1) { /* Wait for a datagram. */ size = sizeof (name); nbytes = recvfrom (sock, message, MAXMSG, 0, (struct sockaddr *) & name, &size); if (nbytes < 0) { perror ("recfrom (server)"); exit (EXIT_FAILURE); } /* Give a diagnostic message. */ fprintf (stderr, "Server: got message: %s\n", message); /* Bounce the message back to the sender. */ nbytes = sendto (sock, message, nbytes, 0, (struct sockaddr *) & name, size); if (nbytes < 0) { perror ("sendto (server)"); exit (EXIT_FAILURE); } } }
Previous: Datagram Socket Example, Up: Datagram Socket Operations [Contents][Index]
Here is the client program corresponding to the server above.
It sends a datagram to the server and then waits for a reply. Notice that the socket for the client (as well as for the server) in this example has to be given a name. This is so that the server can direct a message back to the client. Since the socket has no associated connection state, the only way the server can do this is by referencing the name of the client.
#include <stdio.h> #include <errno.h> #include <unistd.h> #include <stdlib.h> #include <sys/socket.h> #include <sys/un.h> #define SERVER "/tmp/serversocket" #define CLIENT "/tmp/mysocket" #define MAXMSG 512 #define MESSAGE "Yow!!! Are we having fun yet?!?" int main (void) { extern int make_named_socket (const char *name); int sock; char message[MAXMSG]; struct sockaddr_un name; size_t size; int nbytes; /* Make the socket. */ sock = make_named_socket (CLIENT); /* Initialize the server socket address. */ name.sun_family = AF_LOCAL; strcpy (name.sun_path, SERVER); size = strlen (name.sun_path) + sizeof (name.sun_family); /* Send the datagram. */ nbytes = sendto (sock, MESSAGE, strlen (MESSAGE) + 1, 0, (struct sockaddr *) & name, size); if (nbytes < 0) { perror ("sendto (client)"); exit (EXIT_FAILURE); } /* Wait for a reply. */ nbytes = recvfrom (sock, message, MAXMSG, 0, NULL, 0); if (nbytes < 0) { perror ("recfrom (client)"); exit (EXIT_FAILURE); } /* Print a diagnostic message. */ fprintf (stderr, "Client: got message: %s\n", message); /* Clean up. */ remove (CLIENT); close (sock); }
Keep in mind that datagram socket communications are unreliable. In
this example, the client program waits indefinitely if the message
never reaches the server or if the server’s response never comes
back. It’s up to the user running the program to kill and restart
it if desired. A more automatic solution could be to use
select
(see Waiting for Input or Output) to establish a timeout period
for the reply, and in case of timeout either re-send the message or
shut down the socket and exit.
Next: Socket Options, Previous: Datagram Socket Operations, Up: Sockets [Contents][Index]
inetd
DaemonWe’ve explained above how to write a server program that does its own listening. Such a server must already be running in order for anyone to connect to it.
Another way to provide a service on an Internet port is to let the daemon
program inetd
do the listening. inetd
is a program that
runs all the time and waits (using select
) for messages on a
specified set of ports. When it receives a message, it accepts the
connection (if the socket style calls for connections) and then forks a
child process to run the corresponding server program. You specify the
ports and their programs in the file /etc/inetd.conf.
Next: Configuring inetd
, Up: The inetd
Daemon [Contents][Index]
inetd
ServersWriting a server program to be run by inetd
is very simple. Each time
someone requests a connection to the appropriate port, a new server
process starts. The connection already exists at this time; the
socket is available as the standard input descriptor and as the
standard output descriptor (descriptors 0 and 1) in the server
process. Thus the server program can begin reading and writing data
right away. Often the program needs only the ordinary I/O facilities;
in fact, a general-purpose filter program that knows nothing about
sockets can work as a byte stream server run by inetd
.
You can also use inetd
for servers that use connectionless
communication styles. For these servers, inetd
does not try to accept
a connection since no connection is possible. It just starts the
server program, which can read the incoming datagram packet from
descriptor 0. The server program can handle one request and then
exit, or you can choose to write it to keep reading more requests
until no more arrive, and then exit. You must specify which of these
two techniques the server uses when you configure inetd
.
Previous: inetd
Servers, Up: The inetd
Daemon [Contents][Index]
inetd
The file /etc/inetd.conf tells inetd
which ports to listen to
and what server programs to run for them. Normally each entry in the
file is one line, but you can split it onto multiple lines provided
all but the first line of the entry start with whitespace. Lines that
start with ‘#’ are comments.
Here are two standard entries in /etc/inetd.conf:
ftp stream tcp nowait root /libexec/ftpd ftpd talk dgram udp wait root /libexec/talkd talkd
An entry has this format:
service style protocol wait username program arguments
The service field says which service this program provides. It
should be the name of a service defined in /etc/services.
inetd
uses service to decide which port to listen on for
this entry.
The fields style and protocol specify the communication style and the protocol to use for the listening socket. The style should be the name of a communication style, converted to lower case and with ‘SOCK_’ deleted—for example, ‘stream’ or ‘dgram’. protocol should be one of the protocols listed in /etc/protocols. The typical protocol names are ‘tcp’ for byte stream connections and ‘udp’ for unreliable datagrams.
The wait field should be either ‘wait’ or ‘nowait’.
Use ‘wait’ if style is a connectionless style and the
server, once started, handles multiple requests as they come in.
Use ‘nowait’ if inetd
should start a new process for each message
or request that comes in. If style uses connections, then
wait must be ‘nowait’.
user is the user name that the server should run as. inetd
runs
as root, so it can set the user ID of its children arbitrarily. It’s
best to avoid using ‘root’ for user if you can; but some
servers, such as Telnet and FTP, read a username and passphrase
themselves. These servers need to be root initially so they can log
in as commanded by the data coming over the network.
program together with arguments specifies the command to run to start the server. program should be an absolute file name specifying the executable file to run. arguments consists of any number of whitespace-separated words, which become the command-line arguments of program. The first word in arguments is argument zero, which should by convention be the program name itself (sans directories).
If you edit /etc/inetd.conf, you can tell inetd
to reread the
file and obey its new contents by sending the inetd
process the
SIGHUP
signal. You’ll have to use ps
to determine the
process ID of the inetd
process as it is not fixed.
Next: Networks Database, Previous: The inetd
Daemon, Up: Sockets [Contents][Index]
This section describes how to read or set various options that modify the behavior of sockets and their underlying communications protocols.
When you are manipulating a socket option, you must specify which level the option pertains to. This describes whether the option applies to the socket interface, or to a lower-level communications protocol interface.
Next: Socket-Level Options, Up: Socket Options [Contents][Index]
Here are the functions for examining and modifying socket options. They are declared in sys/socket.h.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The getsockopt
function gets information about the value of
option optname at level level for socket socket.
The option value is stored in the buffer that optval points to.
Before the call, you should supply in *optlen-ptr
the
size of this buffer; on return, it contains the number of bytes of
information actually stored in the buffer.
Most options interpret the optval buffer as a single int
value.
The actual return value of getsockopt
is 0
on success
and -1
on failure. The following errno
error conditions
are defined:
EBADF
The socket argument is not a valid file descriptor.
ENOTSOCK
The descriptor socket is not a socket.
ENOPROTOOPT
The optname doesn’t make sense for the given level.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This function is used to set the socket option optname at level level for socket socket. The value of the option is passed in the buffer optval of size optlen.
Previous: Socket Option Functions, Up: Socket Options [Contents][Index]
Use this constant as the level argument to getsockopt
or
setsockopt
to manipulate the socket-level options described in
this section.
Here is a table of socket-level option names; all are defined in the header file sys/socket.h.
SO_DEBUG
¶This option toggles recording of debugging information in the underlying
protocol modules. The value has type int
; a nonzero value means
“yes”.
SO_REUSEADDR
¶This option controls whether bind
(see Setting the Address of a Socket)
should permit reuse of local addresses for this socket. If you enable
this option, you can actually have two sockets with the same Internet
port number; but the system won’t allow you to use the two
identically-named sockets in a way that would confuse the Internet. The
reason for this option is that some higher-level Internet protocols,
including FTP, require you to keep reusing the same port number.
The value has type int
; a nonzero value means “yes”.
SO_KEEPALIVE
¶This option controls whether the underlying protocol should
periodically transmit messages on a connected socket. If the peer
fails to respond to these messages, the connection is considered
broken. The value has type int
; a nonzero value means
“yes”.
SO_DONTROUTE
¶This option controls whether outgoing messages bypass the normal
message routing facilities. If set, messages are sent directly to the
network interface instead. The value has type int
; a nonzero
value means “yes”.
SO_LINGER
¶This option specifies what should happen when the socket of a type
that promises reliable delivery still has untransmitted messages when
it is closed; see Closing a Socket. The value has type
struct linger
.
This structure type has the following members:
int l_onoff
This field is interpreted as a boolean. If nonzero, close
blocks until the data are transmitted or the timeout period has expired.
int l_linger
This specifies the timeout period, in seconds.
SO_BROADCAST
¶This option controls whether datagrams may be broadcast from the socket.
The value has type int
; a nonzero value means “yes”.
SO_OOBINLINE
¶If this option is set, out-of-band data received on the socket is
placed in the normal input queue. This permits it to be read using
read
or recv
without specifying the MSG_OOB
flag. See Out-of-Band Data. The value has type int
; a
nonzero value means “yes”.
SO_SNDBUF
¶This option gets or sets the size of the output buffer. The value is a
size_t
, which is the size in bytes.
SO_RCVBUF
¶This option gets or sets the size of the input buffer. The value is a
size_t
, which is the size in bytes.
SO_STYLE
¶SO_TYPE
¶This option can be used with getsockopt
only. It is used to
get the socket’s communication style. SO_TYPE
is the
historical name, and SO_STYLE
is the preferred name in GNU.
The value has type int
and its value designates a communication
style; see Communication Styles.
SO_ERROR
¶This option can be used with getsockopt
only. It is used to reset
the error status of the socket. The value is an int
, which represents
the previous error status.
Previous: Socket Options, Up: Sockets [Contents][Index]
Many systems come with a database that records a list of networks known
to the system developer. This is usually kept either in the file
/etc/networks or in an equivalent from a name server. This data
base is useful for routing programs such as route
, but it is not
useful for programs that simply communicate over the network. We
provide functions to access this database, which are declared in
netdb.h.
This data type is used to represent information about entries in the networks database. It has the following members:
char *n_name
This is the “official” name of the network.
char **n_aliases
These are alternative names for the network, represented as a vector of strings. A null pointer terminates the array.
int n_addrtype
This is the type of the network number; this is always equal to
AF_INET
for Internet networks.
unsigned long int n_net
This is the network number. Network numbers are returned in host byte order; see Byte Order Conversion.
Use the getnetbyname
or getnetbyaddr
functions to search
the networks database for information about a specific network. The
information is returned in a statically-allocated structure; you must
copy the information if you need to save it.
Preliminary: | MT-Unsafe race:netbyname env locale | AS-Unsafe dlopen plugin heap lock | AC-Unsafe corrupt lock fd mem | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The getnetbyname
function returns information about the network
named name. It returns a null pointer if there is no such
network.
Preliminary: | MT-Unsafe race:netbyaddr locale | AS-Unsafe dlopen plugin heap lock | AC-Unsafe corrupt lock fd mem | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The getnetbyaddr
function returns information about the network
of type type with number net. You should specify a value of
AF_INET
for the type argument for Internet networks.
getnetbyaddr
returns a null pointer if there is no such
network.
You can also scan the networks database using setnetent
,
getnetent
and endnetent
. Be careful when using these
functions because they are not reentrant.
Preliminary: | MT-Unsafe race:netent env locale | AS-Unsafe dlopen plugin heap lock | AC-Unsafe corrupt lock fd mem | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This function opens and rewinds the networks database.
If the stayopen argument is nonzero, this sets a flag so that
subsequent calls to getnetbyname
or getnetbyaddr
will
not close the database (as they usually would). This makes for more
efficiency if you call those functions several times, by avoiding
reopening the database for each call.
Preliminary: | MT-Unsafe race:netent race:netentbuf env locale | AS-Unsafe dlopen plugin heap lock | AC-Unsafe corrupt lock fd mem | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This function returns the next entry in the networks database. It returns a null pointer if there are no more entries.
Preliminary: | MT-Unsafe race:netent env locale | AS-Unsafe dlopen plugin heap lock | AC-Unsafe corrupt lock fd mem | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This function closes the networks database.
This chapter describes functions that are specific to terminal devices. You can use these functions to do things like turn off input echoing; set serial line characteristics such as line speed and flow control; and change which characters are used for end-of-file, command-line editing, sending signals, and similar control functions.
Most of the functions in this chapter operate on file descriptors. See Low-Level Input/Output, for more information about what a file descriptor is and how to open a file descriptor for a terminal device.
Next: I/O Queues, Up: Low-Level Terminal Interface [Contents][Index]
The functions described in this chapter only work on files that
correspond to terminal devices. You can find out whether a file
descriptor is associated with a terminal by using the isatty
function.
Prototypes for the functions in this section are declared in the header file unistd.h.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This function returns 1
if filedes is a file descriptor
associated with an open terminal device, and 0 otherwise.
If a file descriptor is associated with a terminal, you can get its
associated file name using the ttyname
function. See also the
ctermid
function, described in Identifying the Controlling Terminal.
Preliminary: | MT-Unsafe race:ttyname | AS-Unsafe heap lock | AC-Unsafe lock fd mem | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
If the file descriptor filedes is associated with a terminal
device, the ttyname
function returns a pointer to a
statically-allocated, null-terminated string containing the file name of
the terminal file. The value is a null pointer if the file descriptor
isn’t associated with a terminal, or the file name cannot be determined.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Unsafe heap | AC-Unsafe mem fd | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The ttyname_r
function is similar to the ttyname
function
except that it places its result into the user-specified buffer starting
at buf with length len.
The normal return value from ttyname_r
is 0. Otherwise an
error number is returned to indicate the error. The following
errno
error conditions are defined for this function:
EBADF
The filedes argument is not a valid file descriptor.
ENOTTY
The filedes is not associated with a terminal.
ERANGE
The buffer length len is too small to store the string to be returned.
ENODEV
The filedes is associated with a terminal device that is a slave pseudo-terminal, but the file name associated with that device could not be determined. This is a GNU extension.
Next: Two Styles of Input: Canonical or Not, Previous: Identifying Terminals, Up: Low-Level Terminal Interface [Contents][Index]
Many of the remaining functions in this section refer to the input and output queues of a terminal device. These queues implement a form of buffering within the kernel independent of the buffering implemented by I/O streams (see Input/Output on Streams).
The terminal input queue is also sometimes referred to as its typeahead buffer. It holds the characters that have been received from the terminal but not yet read by any process.
The size of the input queue is described by the MAX_INPUT
and
_POSIX_MAX_INPUT
parameters; see Limits on File System Capacity. You
are guaranteed a queue size of at least MAX_INPUT
, but the queue
might be larger, and might even dynamically change size. If input flow
control is enabled by setting the IXOFF
input mode bit
(see Input Modes), the terminal driver transmits STOP and START
characters to the terminal when necessary to prevent the queue from
overflowing. Otherwise, input may be lost if it comes in too fast from
the terminal. In canonical mode, all input stays in the queue until a
newline character is received, so the terminal input queue can fill up
when you type a very long line. See Two Styles of Input: Canonical or Not.
The terminal output queue is like the input queue, but for output;
it contains characters that have been written by processes, but not yet
transmitted to the terminal. If output flow control is enabled by
setting the IXON
input mode bit (see Input Modes), the
terminal driver obeys START and STOP characters sent by the terminal to
stop and restart transmission of output.
Clearing the terminal input queue means discarding any characters that have been received but not yet read. Similarly, clearing the terminal output queue means discarding any characters that have been written but not yet transmitted.
Next: Terminal Modes, Previous: I/O Queues, Up: Low-Level Terminal Interface [Contents][Index]
POSIX systems support two basic modes of input: canonical and noncanonical.
In canonical input processing mode, terminal input is processed in
lines terminated by newline ('\n'
), EOF, or EOL characters. No
input can be read until an entire line has been typed by the user, and
the read
function (see Input and Output Primitives) returns at most a
single line of input, no matter how many bytes are requested.
In canonical input mode, the operating system provides input editing facilities: some characters are interpreted specially to perform editing operations within the current line of text, such as ERASE and KILL. See Characters for Input Editing.
The constants _POSIX_MAX_CANON
and MAX_CANON
parameterize
the maximum number of bytes which may appear in a single line of
canonical input. See Limits on File System Capacity. You are guaranteed a maximum
line length of at least MAX_CANON
bytes, but the maximum might be
larger, and might even dynamically change size.
In noncanonical input processing mode, characters are not grouped into lines, and ERASE and KILL processing is not performed. The granularity with which bytes are read in noncanonical input mode is controlled by the MIN and TIME settings. See Noncanonical Input.
Most programs use canonical input mode, because this gives the user a way to edit input line by line. The usual reason to use noncanonical mode is when the program accepts single-character commands or provides its own editing facilities.
The choice of canonical or noncanonical input is controlled by the
ICANON
flag in the c_lflag
member of struct termios
.
See Local Modes.
Next: BSD Terminal Modes, Previous: Two Styles of Input: Canonical or Not, Up: Low-Level Terminal Interface [Contents][Index]
This section describes the various terminal attributes that control how input and output are done. The functions, data structures, and symbolic constants are all declared in the header file termios.h.
Don’t confuse terminal attributes with file attributes. A device special file which is associated with a terminal has file attributes as described in File Attributes. These are unrelated to the attributes of the terminal device itself, which are discussed in this section.
Next: Terminal Mode Functions, Up: Terminal Modes [Contents][Index]
The entire collection of attributes of a terminal is stored in a
structure of type struct termios
. This structure is used
with the functions tcgetattr
and tcsetattr
to read
and set the attributes.
A struct termios
records all the I/O attributes of a terminal. The
structure includes at least the following members:
tcflag_t c_iflag
A bit mask specifying flags for input modes; see Input Modes.
tcflag_t c_oflag
A bit mask specifying flags for output modes; see Output Modes.
tcflag_t c_cflag
A bit mask specifying flags for control modes; see Control Modes.
tcflag_t c_lflag
A bit mask specifying flags for local modes; see Local Modes.
cc_t c_cc[NCCS]
An array specifying which characters are associated with various control functions; see Special Characters.
The struct termios
structure also contains members which
encode input and output transmission speeds, but the representation is
not specified. See Line Speed, for how to examine and store the
speed values.
The following sections describe the details of the members of the
struct termios
structure.
This is an unsigned integer type used to represent the various bit masks for terminal flags.
This is an unsigned integer type used to represent characters associated with various terminal control functions.
The value of this macro is the number of elements in the c_cc
array.
Next: Setting Terminal Modes Properly, Previous: Terminal Mode Data Types, Up: Terminal Modes [Contents][Index]
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This function is used to examine the attributes of the terminal device with file descriptor filedes. The attributes are returned in the structure that termios-p points to.
If successful, tcgetattr
returns 0. A return value of -1
indicates an error. The following errno
error conditions are
defined for this function:
EBADF
The filedes argument is not a valid file descriptor.
ENOTTY
The filedes is not associated with a terminal.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This function sets the attributes of the terminal device with file descriptor filedes. The new attributes are taken from the structure that termios-p points to.
The when argument specifies how to deal with input and output already queued. It can be one of the following values:
TCSANOW
¶Make the change immediately.
TCSADRAIN
¶Make the change after waiting until all queued output has been written. You should usually use this option when changing parameters that affect output.
TCSAFLUSH
¶This is like TCSADRAIN
, but also discards any queued input.
TCSASOFT
¶This is a flag bit that you can add to any of the above alternatives. Its meaning is to inhibit alteration of the state of the terminal hardware. It is a BSD extension; it is only supported on BSD systems and GNU/Hurd systems.
Using TCSASOFT
is exactly the same as setting the CIGNORE
bit in the c_cflag
member of the structure termios-p points
to. See Control Modes, for a description of CIGNORE
.
If this function is called from a background process on its controlling
terminal, normally all processes in the process group are sent a
SIGTTOU
signal, in the same way as if the process were trying to
write to the terminal. The exception is if the calling process itself
is ignoring or blocking SIGTTOU
signals, in which case the
operation is performed and no signal is sent. See Job Control.
If successful, tcsetattr
returns 0. A return value of
-1 indicates an error. The following errno
error
conditions are defined for this function:
EBADF
The filedes argument is not a valid file descriptor.
ENOTTY
The filedes is not associated with a terminal.
EINVAL
Either the value of the when
argument is not valid, or there is
something wrong with the data in the termios-p argument.
Although tcgetattr
and tcsetattr
specify the terminal
device with a file descriptor, the attributes are those of the terminal
device itself and not of the file descriptor. This means that the
effects of changing terminal attributes are persistent; if another
process opens the terminal file later on, it will see the changed
attributes even though it doesn’t have anything to do with the open file
descriptor you originally specified in changing the attributes.
Similarly, if a single process has multiple or duplicated file descriptors for the same terminal device, changing the terminal attributes affects input and output to all of these file descriptors. This means, for example, that you can’t open one file descriptor or stream to read from a terminal in the normal line-buffered, echoed mode; and simultaneously have another file descriptor for the same terminal that you use to read from it in single-character, non-echoed mode. Instead, you have to explicitly switch the terminal back and forth between the two modes.
Next: Input Modes, Previous: Terminal Mode Functions, Up: Terminal Modes [Contents][Index]
When you set terminal modes, you should call tcgetattr
first to
get the current modes of the particular terminal device, modify only
those modes that you are really interested in, and store the result with
tcsetattr
.
It’s a bad idea to simply initialize a struct termios
structure
to a chosen set of attributes and pass it directly to tcsetattr
.
Your program may be run years from now, on systems that support members
not documented in this manual. The way to avoid setting these members
to unreasonable values is to avoid changing them.
What’s more, different terminal devices may require different mode settings in order to function properly. So you should avoid blindly copying attributes from one terminal device to another.
When a member contains a collection of independent flags, as the
c_iflag
, c_oflag
and c_cflag
members do, even
setting the entire member is a bad idea, because particular operating
systems have their own flags. Instead, you should start with the
current value of the member and alter only the flags whose values matter
in your program, leaving any other flags unchanged.
Here is an example of how to set one flag (ISTRIP
) in the
struct termios
structure while properly preserving all the other
data in the structure:
int set_istrip (int desc, int value) { struct termios settings; int result;
result = tcgetattr (desc, &settings); if (result < 0) { perror ("error in tcgetattr"); return 0; }
settings.c_iflag &= ~ISTRIP; if (value) settings.c_iflag |= ISTRIP;
result = tcsetattr (desc, TCSANOW, &settings); if (result < 0) { perror ("error in tcsetattr"); return 0; } return 1; }
Next: Output Modes, Previous: Setting Terminal Modes Properly, Up: Terminal Modes [Contents][Index]
This section describes the terminal attribute flags that control fairly low-level aspects of input processing: handling of parity errors, break signals, flow control, and RET and LFD characters.
All of these flags are bits in the c_iflag
member of the
struct termios
structure. The member is an integer, and you
change flags using the operators &
, |
and ^
. Don’t
try to specify the entire value for c_iflag
—instead, change
only specific flags and leave the rest untouched (see Setting Terminal Modes Properly).
If this bit is set, input parity checking is enabled. If it is not set, no checking at all is done for parity errors on input; the characters are simply passed through to the application.
Parity checking on input processing is independent of whether parity
detection and generation on the underlying terminal hardware is enabled;
see Control Modes. For example, you could clear the INPCK
input mode flag and set the PARENB
control mode flag to ignore
parity errors on input, but still generate parity on output.
If this bit is set, what happens when a parity error is detected depends
on whether the IGNPAR
or PARMRK
bits are set. If neither
of these bits are set, a byte with a parity error is passed to the
application as a '\0'
character.
If this bit is set, any byte with a framing or parity error is ignored.
This is only useful if INPCK
is also set.
If this bit is set, input bytes with parity or framing errors are marked
when passed to the program. This bit is meaningful only when
INPCK
is set and IGNPAR
is not set.
The way erroneous bytes are marked is with two preceding bytes,
377
and 0
. Thus, the program actually reads three bytes
for one erroneous byte received from the terminal.
If a valid byte has the value 0377
, and ISTRIP
(see below)
is not set, the program might confuse it with the prefix that marks a
parity error. So a valid byte 0377
is passed to the program as
two bytes, 0377
0377
, in this case.
If this bit is set, valid input bytes are stripped to seven bits; otherwise, all eight bits are available for programs to read.
If this bit is set, break conditions are ignored.
A break condition is defined in the context of asynchronous serial data transmission as a series of zero-value bits longer than a single byte.
If this bit is set and IGNBRK
is not set, a break condition
clears the terminal input and output queues and raises a SIGINT
signal for the foreground process group associated with the terminal.
If neither BRKINT
nor IGNBRK
are set, a break condition is
passed to the application as a single '\0'
character if
PARMRK
is not set, or otherwise as a three-character sequence
'\377'
, '\0'
, '\0'
.
If this bit is set, carriage return characters ('\r'
) are
discarded on input. Discarding carriage return may be useful on
terminals that send both carriage return and linefeed when you type the
RET key.
If this bit is set and IGNCR
is not set, carriage return characters
('\r'
) received as input are passed to the application as newline
characters ('\n'
).
If this bit is set, newline characters ('\n'
) received as input
are passed to the application as carriage return characters ('\r'
).
If this bit is set, start/stop control on input is enabled. In other words, the computer sends STOP and START characters as necessary to prevent input from coming in faster than programs are reading it. The idea is that the actual terminal hardware that is generating the input data responds to a STOP character by suspending transmission, and to a START character by resuming transmission. See Special Characters for Flow Control.
If this bit is set, start/stop control on output is enabled. In other words, if the computer receives a STOP character, it suspends output until a START character is received. In this case, the STOP and START characters are never passed to the application program. If this bit is not set, then START and STOP can be read as ordinary characters. See Special Characters for Flow Control.
If this bit is set, any input character restarts output when output has been suspended with the STOP character. Otherwise, only the START character restarts output.
This is a BSD extension; it exists only on BSD systems and GNU/Linux and GNU/Hurd systems.
If this bit is set, then filling up the terminal input buffer sends a
BEL character (code 007
) to the terminal to ring the bell.
This is a BSD extension.
Next: Control Modes, Previous: Input Modes, Up: Terminal Modes [Contents][Index]
This section describes the terminal flags and fields that control how
output characters are translated and padded for display. All of these
are contained in the c_oflag
member of the struct termios
structure.
The c_oflag
member itself is an integer, and you change the flags
and fields using the operators &
, |
, and ^
. Don’t
try to specify the entire value for c_oflag
—instead, change
only specific flags and leave the rest untouched (see Setting Terminal Modes Properly).
If this bit is set, output data is processed in some unspecified way so
that it is displayed appropriately on the terminal device. This
typically includes mapping newline characters ('\n'
) onto
carriage return and linefeed pairs.
If this bit isn’t set, the characters are transmitted as-is.
The following three bits are effective only if OPOST
is set.
If this bit is set, convert the newline character on output into a pair of characters, carriage return followed by linefeed.
If this bit is set, convert tab characters on output into the appropriate
number of spaces to emulate a tab stop every eight columns. This bit
exists only on BSD systems and GNU/Hurd systems; on
GNU/Linux systems it is available as XTABS
.
If this bit is set, discard C-d characters (code 004
) on
output. These characters cause many dial-up terminals to disconnect.
This bit exists only on BSD systems and GNU/Hurd systems.
Next: Local Modes, Previous: Output Modes, Up: Terminal Modes [Contents][Index]
This section describes the terminal flags and fields that control
parameters usually associated with asynchronous serial data
transmission. These flags may not make sense for other kinds of
terminal ports (such as a network connection pseudo-terminal). All of
these are contained in the c_cflag
member of the struct
termios
structure.
The c_cflag
member itself is an integer, and you change the flags
and fields using the operators &
, |
, and ^
. Don’t
try to specify the entire value for c_cflag
—instead, change
only specific flags and leave the rest untouched (see Setting Terminal Modes Properly).
If this bit is set, it indicates that the terminal is connected “locally” and that the modem status lines (such as carrier detect) should be ignored.
On many systems if this bit is not set and you call open
without
the O_NONBLOCK
flag set, open
blocks until a modem
connection is established.
If this bit is not set and a modem disconnect is detected, a
SIGHUP
signal is sent to the controlling process group for the
terminal (if it has one). Normally, this causes the process to exit;
see Signal Handling. Reading from the terminal after a disconnect
causes an end-of-file condition, and writing causes an EIO
error
to be returned. The terminal device must be closed and reopened to
clear the condition.
If this bit is set, a modem disconnect is generated when all processes that have the terminal device open have either closed the file or exited.
If this bit is set, input can be read from the terminal. Otherwise, input is discarded when it arrives.
If this bit is set, two stop bits are used. Otherwise, only one stop bit is used.
If this bit is set, generation and detection of a parity bit are enabled. See Input Modes, for information on how input parity errors are handled.
If this bit is not set, no parity bit is added to output characters, and input characters are not checked for correct parity.
This bit is only useful if PARENB
is set. If PARODD
is set,
odd parity is used, otherwise even parity is used.
The control mode flags also includes a field for the number of bits per
character. You can use the CSIZE
macro as a mask to extract the
value, like this: settings.c_cflag & CSIZE
.
This is a mask for the number of bits per character.
This specifies five bits per byte.
This specifies six bits per byte.
This specifies seven bits per byte.
This specifies eight bits per byte.
The following four bits are BSD extensions; these exist only on BSD systems and GNU/Hurd systems.
If this bit is set, enable flow control of output based on the CTS wire (RS232 protocol).
If this bit is set, enable flow control of input based on the RTS wire (RS232 protocol).
If this bit is set, enable carrier-based flow control of output.
If this bit is set, it says to ignore the control modes and line speed
values entirely. This is only meaningful in a call to tcsetattr
.
The c_cflag
member and the line speed values returned by
cfgetispeed
and cfgetospeed
will be unaffected by the
call. CIGNORE
is useful if you want to set all the software
modes in the other members, but leave the hardware details in
c_cflag
unchanged. (This is how the TCSASOFT
flag to
tcsettattr
works.)
This bit is never set in the structure filled in by tcgetattr
.
Next: Line Speed, Previous: Control Modes, Up: Terminal Modes [Contents][Index]
This section describes the flags for the c_lflag
member of the
struct termios
structure. These flags generally control
higher-level aspects of input processing than the input modes flags
described in Input Modes, such as echoing, signals, and the choice
of canonical or noncanonical input.
The c_lflag
member itself is an integer, and you change the flags
and fields using the operators &
, |
, and ^
. Don’t
try to specify the entire value for c_lflag
—instead, change
only specific flags and leave the rest untouched (see Setting Terminal Modes Properly).
This bit, if set, enables canonical input processing mode. Otherwise, input is processed in noncanonical mode. See Two Styles of Input: Canonical or Not.
If this bit is set, echoing of input characters back to the terminal is enabled.
If this bit is set, echoing indicates erasure of input with the ERASE character by erasing the last character in the current line from the screen. Otherwise, the character erased is re-echoed to show what has happened (suitable for a printing terminal).
This bit only controls the display behavior; the ICANON
bit by
itself controls actual recognition of the ERASE character and erasure of
input, without which ECHOE
is simply irrelevant.
This bit, like ECHOE
, enables display of the ERASE character in
a way that is geared to a hardcopy terminal. When you type the ERASE
character, a ‘\’ character is printed followed by the first
character erased. Typing the ERASE character again just prints the next
character erased. Then, the next time you type a normal character, a
‘/’ character is printed before the character echoes.
This is a BSD extension, and exists only in BSD systems and GNU/Linux and GNU/Hurd systems.
This bit enables special display of the KILL character by moving to a
new line after echoing the KILL character normally. The behavior of
ECHOKE
(below) is nicer to look at.
If this bit is not set, the KILL character echoes just as it would if it were not the KILL character. Then it is up to the user to remember that the KILL character has erased the preceding input; there is no indication of this on the screen.
This bit only controls the display behavior; the ICANON
bit by
itself controls actual recognition of the KILL character and erasure of
input, without which ECHOK
is simply irrelevant.
This bit is similar to ECHOK
. It enables special display of the
KILL character by erasing on the screen the entire line that has been
killed. This is a BSD extension, and exists only in BSD systems and
GNU/Linux and GNU/Hurd systems.
If this bit is set and the ICANON
bit is also set, then the
newline ('\n'
) character is echoed even if the ECHO
bit
is not set.
If this bit is set and the ECHO
bit is also set, echo control
characters with ‘^’ followed by the corresponding text character.
Thus, control-A echoes as ‘^A’. This is usually the preferred mode
for interactive input, because echoing a control character back to the
terminal could have some undesired effect on the terminal.
This is a BSD extension, and exists only in BSD systems and GNU/Linux and GNU/Hurd systems.
This bit controls whether the INTR, QUIT, and SUSP characters are recognized. The functions associated with these characters are performed if and only if this bit is set. Being in canonical or noncanonical input mode has no effect on the interpretation of these characters.
You should use caution when disabling recognition of these characters. Programs that cannot be interrupted interactively are very user-unfriendly. If you clear this bit, your program should provide some alternate interface that allows the user to interactively send the signals associated with these characters, or to escape from the program.
POSIX.1 gives IEXTEN
implementation-defined meaning,
so you cannot rely on this interpretation on all systems.
On BSD systems and GNU/Linux and GNU/Hurd systems, it enables the LNEXT and DISCARD characters. See Other Special Characters.
Normally, the INTR, QUIT, and SUSP characters cause input and output queues for the terminal to be cleared. If this bit is set, the queues are not cleared.
If this bit is set and the system supports job control, then
SIGTTOU
signals are generated by background processes that
attempt to write to the terminal. See Access to the Controlling Terminal.
The following bits are BSD extensions; they exist only on BSD systems and GNU/Hurd systems.
This bit determines how far the WERASE character should erase. The WERASE character erases back to the beginning of a word; the question is, where do words begin?
If this bit is clear, then the beginning of a word is a nonwhitespace character following a whitespace character. If the bit is set, then the beginning of a word is an alphanumeric character or underscore following a character which is none of those.
See Characters for Input Editing, for more information about the WERASE character.
This is the bit that toggles when the user types the DISCARD character. While this bit is set, all output is discarded. See Other Special Characters.
Setting this bit disables handling of the STATUS character. See Other Special Characters.
If this bit is set, it indicates that there is a line of input that needs to be reprinted. Typing the REPRINT character sets this bit; the bit remains set until reprinting is finished. See Characters for Input Editing.
Next: Special Characters, Previous: Local Modes, Up: Terminal Modes [Contents][Index]
The terminal line speed tells the computer how fast to read and write data on the terminal.
If the terminal is connected to a real serial line, the terminal speed you specify actually controls the line—if it doesn’t match the terminal’s own idea of the speed, communication does not work. Real serial ports accept only certain standard speeds. Also, particular hardware may not support even all the standard speeds. Specifying a speed of zero hangs up a dialup connection and turns off modem control signals.
If the terminal is not a real serial line (for example, if it is a network connection), then the line speed won’t really affect data transmission speed, but some programs will use it to determine the amount of padding needed. It’s best to specify a line speed value that matches the actual speed of the actual terminal, but you can safely experiment with different values to vary the amount of padding.
There are actually two line speeds for each terminal, one for input and one for output. You can set them independently, but most often terminals use the same speed for both directions.
The speed values are stored in the struct termios
structure, but
don’t try to access them in the struct termios
structure
directly. Instead, you should use the following functions to read and
store them:
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This function returns the output line speed stored in the structure
*termios-p
.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This function returns the input line speed stored in the structure
*termios-p
.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This function stores speed in *termios-p
as the output
speed. The normal return value is 0; a value of -1
indicates an error. If speed is not a speed, cfsetospeed
returns -1.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This function stores speed in *termios-p
as the input
speed. The normal return value is 0; a value of -1
indicates an error. If speed is not a speed, cfsetospeed
returns -1.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This function stores speed in *termios-p
as both the
input and output speeds. The normal return value is 0; a value
of -1 indicates an error. If speed is not a speed,
cfsetspeed
returns -1. This function is an extension in
4.4 BSD.
The speed_t
type is an unsigned integer data type used to
represent line speeds.
The functions cfsetospeed
and cfsetispeed
report errors
only for speed values that the system simply cannot handle. If you
specify a speed value that is basically acceptable, then those functions
will succeed. But they do not check that a particular hardware device
can actually support the specified speeds—in fact, they don’t know
which device you plan to set the speed for. If you use tcsetattr
to set the speed of a particular device to a value that it cannot
handle, tcsetattr
returns -1.
Portability note: In the GNU C Library, the functions above
accept speeds measured in bits per second as input, and return speed
values measured in bits per second. Other libraries require speeds to
be indicated by special codes. For POSIX.1 portability, you must use
one of the following symbols to represent the speed; their precise
numeric values are system-dependent, but each name has a fixed meaning:
B110
stands for 110 bps, B300
for 300 bps, and so on.
There is no portable way to represent any speed but these, but these are
the only speeds that typical serial lines can support.
B0 B50 B75 B110 B134 B150 B200 B300 B600 B1200 B1800 B2400 B4800 B9600 B19200 B38400 B57600 B115200 B230400 B460800
BSD defines two additional speed symbols as aliases: EXTA
is an
alias for B19200
and EXTB
is an alias for B38400
.
These aliases are obsolete.
Next: Noncanonical Input, Previous: Line Speed, Up: Terminal Modes [Contents][Index]
In canonical input, the terminal driver recognizes a number of special
characters which perform various control functions. These include the
ERASE character (usually DEL) for editing input, and other editing
characters. The INTR character (normally C-c) for sending a
SIGINT
signal, and other signal-raising characters, may be
available in either canonical or noncanonical input mode. All these
characters are described in this section.
The particular characters used are specified in the c_cc
member
of the struct termios
structure. This member is an array; each
element specifies the character for a particular role. Each element has
a symbolic constant that stands for the index of that element—for
example, VINTR
is the index of the element that specifies the INTR
character, so storing '='
in termios.c_cc[VINTR]
specifies ‘=’ as the INTR character.
On some systems, you can disable a particular special character function
by specifying the value _POSIX_VDISABLE
for that role. This
value is unequal to any possible character code. See Optional Features in File Support, for more information about how to tell whether the operating
system you are using supports _POSIX_VDISABLE
.
Next: Characters that Cause Signals, Up: Special Characters [Contents][Index]
These special characters are active only in canonical input mode. See Two Styles of Input: Canonical or Not.
This is the subscript for the EOF character in the special control
character array. termios.c_cc[VEOF]
holds the character
itself.
The EOF character is recognized only in canonical input mode. It acts
as a line terminator in the same way as a newline character, but if the
EOF character is typed at the beginning of a line it causes read
to return a byte count of zero, indicating end-of-file. The EOF
character itself is discarded.
Usually, the EOF character is C-d.
This is the subscript for the EOL character in the special control
character array. termios.c_cc[VEOL]
holds the character
itself.
The EOL character is recognized only in canonical input mode. It acts as a line terminator, just like a newline character. The EOL character is not discarded; it is read as the last character in the input line.
You don’t need to use the EOL character to make RET end a line. Just set the ICRNL flag. In fact, this is the default state of affairs.
This is the subscript for the EOL2 character in the special control
character array. termios.c_cc[VEOL2]
holds the character
itself.
The EOL2 character works just like the EOL character (see above), but it can be a different character. Thus, you can specify two characters to terminate an input line, by setting EOL to one of them and EOL2 to the other.
The EOL2 character is a BSD extension; it exists only on BSD systems and GNU/Linux and GNU/Hurd systems.
This is the subscript for the ERASE character in the special control
character array. termios.c_cc[VERASE]
holds the
character itself.
The ERASE character is recognized only in canonical input mode. When the user types the erase character, the previous character typed is discarded. (If the terminal generates multibyte character sequences, this may cause more than one byte of input to be discarded.) This cannot be used to erase past the beginning of the current line of text. The ERASE character itself is discarded.
Usually, the ERASE character is DEL.
This is the subscript for the WERASE character in the special control
character array. termios.c_cc[VWERASE]
holds the character
itself.
The WERASE character is recognized only in canonical mode. It erases an entire word of prior input, and any whitespace after it; whitespace characters before the word are not erased.
The definition of a “word” depends on the setting of the
ALTWERASE
mode; see Local Modes.
If the ALTWERASE
mode is not set, a word is defined as a sequence
of any characters except space or tab.
If the ALTWERASE
mode is set, a word is defined as a sequence of
characters containing only letters, numbers, and underscores, optionally
followed by one character that is not a letter, number, or underscore.
The WERASE character is usually C-w.
This is a BSD extension.
This is the subscript for the KILL character in the special control
character array. termios.c_cc[VKILL]
holds the character
itself.
The KILL character is recognized only in canonical input mode. When the user types the kill character, the entire contents of the current line of input are discarded. The kill character itself is discarded too.
The KILL character is usually C-u.
This is the subscript for the REPRINT character in the special control
character array. termios.c_cc[VREPRINT]
holds the character
itself.
The REPRINT character is recognized only in canonical mode. It reprints the current input line. If some asynchronous output has come while you are typing, this lets you see the line you are typing clearly again.
The REPRINT character is usually C-r.
This is a BSD extension.
Next: Special Characters for Flow Control, Previous: Characters for Input Editing, Up: Special Characters [Contents][Index]
These special characters may be active in either canonical or noncanonical
input mode, but only when the ISIG
flag is set (see Local Modes).
This is the subscript for the INTR character in the special control
character array. termios.c_cc[VINTR]
holds the character
itself.
The INTR (interrupt) character raises a SIGINT
signal for all
processes in the foreground job associated with the terminal. The INTR
character itself is then discarded. See Signal Handling, for more
information about signals.
Typically, the INTR character is C-c.
This is the subscript for the QUIT character in the special control
character array. termios.c_cc[VQUIT]
holds the character
itself.
The QUIT character raises a SIGQUIT
signal for all processes in
the foreground job associated with the terminal. The QUIT character
itself is then discarded. See Signal Handling, for more information
about signals.
Typically, the QUIT character is C-\.
This is the subscript for the SUSP character in the special control
character array. termios.c_cc[VSUSP]
holds the character
itself.
The SUSP (suspend) character is recognized only if the implementation
supports job control (see Job Control). It causes a SIGTSTP
signal to be sent to all processes in the foreground job associated with
the terminal. The SUSP character itself is then discarded.
See Signal Handling, for more information about signals.
Typically, the SUSP character is C-z.
Few applications disable the normal interpretation of the SUSP
character. If your program does this, it should provide some other
mechanism for the user to stop the job. When the user invokes this
mechanism, the program should send a SIGTSTP
signal to the
process group of the process, not just to the process itself.
See Signaling Another Process.
This is the subscript for the DSUSP character in the special control
character array. termios.c_cc[VDSUSP]
holds the character
itself.
The DSUSP (suspend) character is recognized only if the implementation
supports job control (see Job Control). It sends a SIGTSTP
signal, like the SUSP character, but not right away—only when the
program tries to read it as input. Not all systems with job control
support DSUSP; only BSD-compatible systems do (including GNU/Hurd systems).
See Signal Handling, for more information about signals.
Typically, the DSUSP character is C-y.
Next: Other Special Characters, Previous: Characters that Cause Signals, Up: Special Characters [Contents][Index]
These special characters may be active in either canonical or noncanonical
input mode, but their use is controlled by the flags IXON
and
IXOFF
(see Input Modes).
This is the subscript for the START character in the special control
character array. termios.c_cc[VSTART]
holds the
character itself.
The START character is used to support the IXON
and IXOFF
input modes. If IXON
is set, receiving a START character resumes
suspended output; the START character itself is discarded. If
IXANY
is set, receiving any character at all resumes suspended
output; the resuming character is not discarded unless it is the START
character. If IXOFF
is set, the system may also transmit START
characters to the terminal.
The usual value for the START character is C-q. You may not be able to change this value—the hardware may insist on using C-q regardless of what you specify.
This is the subscript for the STOP character in the special control
character array. termios.c_cc[VSTOP]
holds the character
itself.
The STOP character is used to support the IXON
and IXOFF
input modes. If IXON
is set, receiving a STOP character causes
output to be suspended; the STOP character itself is discarded. If
IXOFF
is set, the system may also transmit STOP characters to the
terminal, to prevent the input queue from overflowing.
The usual value for the STOP character is C-s. You may not be able to change this value—the hardware may insist on using C-s regardless of what you specify.
Previous: Special Characters for Flow Control, Up: Special Characters [Contents][Index]
This is the subscript for the LNEXT character in the special control
character array. termios.c_cc[VLNEXT]
holds the character
itself.
The LNEXT character is recognized only when IEXTEN
is set, but in
both canonical and noncanonical mode. It disables any special
significance of the next character the user types. Even if the
character would normally perform some editing function or generate a
signal, it is read as a plain character. This is the analogue of the
C-q command in Emacs. “LNEXT” stands for “literal next.”
The LNEXT character is usually C-v.
This character is available on BSD systems and GNU/Linux and GNU/Hurd systems.
This is the subscript for the DISCARD character in the special control
character array. termios.c_cc[VDISCARD]
holds the character
itself.
The DISCARD character is recognized only when IEXTEN
is set, but
in both canonical and noncanonical mode. Its effect is to toggle the
discard-output flag. When this flag is set, all program output is
discarded. Setting the flag also discards all output currently in the
output buffer. Typing any other character resets the flag.
This character is available on BSD systems and GNU/Linux and GNU/Hurd systems.
This is the subscript for the STATUS character in the special control
character array. termios.c_cc[VSTATUS]
holds the character
itself.
The STATUS character’s effect is to print out a status message about how the current process is running.
The STATUS character is recognized only in canonical mode, and only if
NOKERNINFO
is not set.
This character is available only on BSD systems and GNU/Hurd systems.
Previous: Special Characters, Up: Terminal Modes [Contents][Index]
In noncanonical input mode, the special editing characters such as ERASE and KILL are ignored. The system facilities for the user to edit input are disabled in noncanonical mode, so that all input characters (unless they are special for signal or flow-control purposes) are passed to the application program exactly as typed. It is up to the application program to give the user ways to edit the input, if appropriate.
Noncanonical mode offers special parameters called MIN and TIME for controlling whether and how long to wait for input to be available. You can even use them to avoid ever waiting—to return immediately with whatever input is available, or with no input.
The MIN and TIME are stored in elements of the c_cc
array, which
is a member of the struct termios
structure. Each element of
this array has a particular role, and each element has a symbolic
constant that stands for the index of that element. VMIN
and
VTIME
are the names for the indices in the array of the MIN and
TIME slots.
This is the subscript for the MIN slot in the c_cc
array. Thus,
termios.c_cc[VMIN]
is the value itself.
The MIN slot is only meaningful in noncanonical input mode; it
specifies the minimum number of bytes that must be available in the
input queue in order for read
to return.
This is the subscript for the TIME slot in the c_cc
array. Thus,
termios.c_cc[VTIME]
is the value itself.
The TIME slot is only meaningful in noncanonical input mode; it specifies how long to wait for input before returning, in units of 0.1 seconds.
The MIN and TIME values interact to determine the criterion for when
read
should return; their precise meanings depend on which of
them are nonzero. There are four possible cases:
In this case, TIME specifies how long to wait after each input character
to see if more input arrives. After the first character received,
read
keeps waiting until either MIN bytes have arrived in all, or
TIME elapses with no further input.
read
always blocks until the first character arrives, even if
TIME elapses first. read
can return more than MIN characters if
more than MIN happen to be in the queue.
In this case, read
always returns immediately with as many
characters as are available in the queue, up to the number requested.
If no input is immediately available, read
returns a value of
zero.
In this case, read
waits for time TIME for input to become
available; the availability of a single byte is enough to satisfy the
read request and cause read
to return. When it returns, it
returns as many characters as are available, up to the number requested.
If no input is available before the timer expires, read
returns a
value of zero.
In this case, read
waits until at least MIN bytes are available
in the queue. At that time, read
returns as many characters as
are available, up to the number requested. read
can return more
than MIN characters if more than MIN happen to be in the queue.
What happens if MIN is 50 and you ask to read just 10 bytes?
Normally, read
waits until there are 50 bytes in the buffer (or,
more generally, the wait condition described above is satisfied), and
then reads 10 of them, leaving the other 40 buffered in the operating
system for a subsequent call to read
.
Portability note: On some systems, the MIN and TIME slots are actually the same as the EOF and EOL slots. This causes no serious problem because the MIN and TIME slots are used only in noncanonical input and the EOF and EOL slots are used only in canonical input, but it isn’t very clean. The GNU C Library allocates separate slots for these uses.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This function provides an easy way to set up *termios-p
for
what has traditionally been called “raw mode” in BSD. This uses
noncanonical input, and turns off most processing to give an unmodified
channel to the terminal.
It does exactly this:
termios-p->c_iflag &= ~(IGNBRK|BRKINT|PARMRK|ISTRIP |INLCR|IGNCR|ICRNL|IXON); termios-p->c_oflag &= ~OPOST; termios-p->c_lflag &= ~(ECHO|ECHONL|ICANON|ISIG|IEXTEN); termios-p->c_cflag &= ~(CSIZE|PARENB); termios-p->c_cflag |= CS8;
Next: Line Control Functions, Previous: Terminal Modes, Up: Low-Level Terminal Interface [Contents][Index]
The usual way to get and set terminal modes is with the functions described
in Terminal Modes. However, on some systems you can use the
BSD-derived functions in this section to do some of the same things. On
many systems, these functions do not exist. Even with the GNU C Library,
the functions simply fail with errno
= ENOSYS
with many
kernels, including Linux.
The symbols used in this section are declared in sgtty.h.
This structure is an input or output parameter list for gtty
and
stty
.
char sg_ispeed
Line speed for input
char sg_ospeed
Line speed for output
char sg_erase
Erase character
char sg_kill
Kill character
int sg_flags
Various flags
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This function gets the attributes of a terminal.
gtty
sets *attributes to describe the terminal attributes
of the terminal which is open with file descriptor filedes.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This function sets the attributes of a terminal.
stty
sets the terminal attributes of the terminal which is open with
file descriptor filedes to those described by *attributes.
Next: Noncanonical Mode Example, Previous: BSD Terminal Modes, Up: Low-Level Terminal Interface [Contents][Index]
These functions perform miscellaneous control actions on terminal
devices. As regards terminal access, they are treated like doing
output: if any of these functions is used by a background process on its
controlling terminal, normally all processes in the process group are
sent a SIGTTOU
signal. The exception is if the calling process
itself is ignoring or blocking SIGTTOU
signals, in which case the
operation is performed and no signal is sent. See Job Control.
Preliminary: | MT-Unsafe race:tcattr(filedes)/bsd | AS-Unsafe | AC-Unsafe corrupt/bsd | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This function generates a break condition by transmitting a stream of zero bits on the terminal associated with the file descriptor filedes. The duration of the break is controlled by the duration argument. If zero, the duration is between 0.25 and 0.5 seconds. The meaning of a nonzero value depends on the operating system.
This function does nothing if the terminal is not an asynchronous serial data port.
The return value is normally zero. In the event of an error, a value
of -1 is returned. The following errno
error conditions
are defined for this function:
EBADF
The filedes is not a valid file descriptor.
ENOTTY
The filedes is not associated with a terminal device.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The tcdrain
function waits until all queued
output to the terminal filedes has been transmitted.
This function is a cancellation point in multi-threaded programs. This
is a problem if the thread allocates some resources (like memory, file
descriptors, semaphores or whatever) at the time tcdrain
is
called. If the thread gets canceled these resources stay allocated
until the program ends. To avoid this calls to tcdrain
should be
protected using cancellation handlers.
The return value is normally zero. In the event of an error, a value
of -1 is returned. The following errno
error conditions
are defined for this function:
EBADF
The filedes is not a valid file descriptor.
ENOTTY
The filedes is not associated with a terminal device.
EINTR
The operation was interrupted by delivery of a signal. See Primitives Interrupted by Signals.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The tcflush
function is used to clear the input and/or output
queues associated with the terminal file filedes. The queue
argument specifies which queue(s) to clear, and can be one of the
following values:
TCIFLUSH
¶Clear any input data received, but not yet read.
TCOFLUSH
¶Clear any output data written, but not yet transmitted.
TCIOFLUSH
¶Clear both queued input and output.
The return value is normally zero. In the event of an error, a value
of -1 is returned. The following errno
error conditions
are defined for this function:
EBADF
The filedes is not a valid file descriptor.
ENOTTY
The filedes is not associated with a terminal device.
EINVAL
A bad value was supplied as the queue argument.
It is unfortunate that this function is named tcflush
, because
the term “flush” is normally used for quite another operation—waiting
until all output is transmitted—and using it for discarding input or
output would be confusing. Unfortunately, the name tcflush
comes
from POSIX and we cannot change it.
Preliminary: | MT-Unsafe race:tcattr(filedes)/bsd | AS-Unsafe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The tcflow
function is used to perform operations relating to
XON/XOFF flow control on the terminal file specified by filedes.
The action argument specifies what operation to perform, and can be one of the following values:
TCOOFF
¶Suspend transmission of output.
TCOON
¶Restart transmission of output.
TCIOFF
¶Transmit a STOP character.
TCION
¶Transmit a START character.
For more information about the STOP and START characters, see Special Characters.
The return value is normally zero. In the event of an error, a value
of -1 is returned. The following errno
error conditions
are defined for this function:
EBADF
The filedes is not a valid file descriptor.
ENOTTY
The filedes is not associated with a terminal device.
EINVAL
A bad value was supplied as the action argument.
Next: Reading Passphrases, Previous: Line Control Functions, Up: Low-Level Terminal Interface [Contents][Index]
Here is an example program that shows how you can set up a terminal device to read single characters in noncanonical input mode, without echo.
#include <unistd.h> #include <stdio.h> #include <stdlib.h> #include <termios.h> /* Use this variable to remember original terminal attributes. */ struct termios saved_attributes; void reset_input_mode (void) { tcsetattr (STDIN_FILENO, TCSANOW, &saved_attributes); } void set_input_mode (void) { struct termios tattr; char *name; /* Make sure stdin is a terminal. */ if (!isatty (STDIN_FILENO)) { fprintf (stderr, "Not a terminal.\n"); exit (EXIT_FAILURE); } /* Save the terminal attributes so we can restore them later. */ tcgetattr (STDIN_FILENO, &saved_attributes); atexit (reset_input_mode);
/* Set the funny terminal modes. */ tcgetattr (STDIN_FILENO, &tattr); tattr.c_lflag &= ~(ICANON|ECHO); /* Clear ICANON and ECHO. */ tattr.c_cc[VMIN] = 1; tattr.c_cc[VTIME] = 0; tcsetattr (STDIN_FILENO, TCSAFLUSH, &tattr); }
int
main (void)
{
char c;
set_input_mode ();
while (1)
{
read (STDIN_FILENO, &c, 1);
if (c == '\004') /* C-d */
break;
else
putchar (c);
}
return EXIT_SUCCESS;
}
This program is careful to restore the original terminal modes before
exiting or terminating with a signal. It uses the atexit
function (see Cleanups on Exit) to make sure this is done
by exit
.
The shell is supposed to take care of resetting the terminal modes when a process is stopped or continued; see Job Control. But some existing shells do not actually do this, so you may wish to establish handlers for job control signals that reset terminal modes. The above example does so.
Next: Pseudo-Terminals, Previous: Noncanonical Mode Example, Up: Low-Level Terminal Interface [Contents][Index]
When reading in a passphrase, it is desirable to avoid displaying it on the screen, to help keep it secret. The following function handles this in a convenient way.
Preliminary: | MT-Unsafe term | AS-Unsafe heap lock corrupt | AC-Unsafe term lock corrupt | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
getpass
outputs prompt, then reads a string in from the
terminal without echoing it. It tries to connect to the real terminal,
/dev/tty, if possible, to encourage users not to put plaintext
passphrases in files; otherwise, it uses stdin
and stderr
.
getpass
also disables the INTR, QUIT, and SUSP characters on the
terminal using the ISIG
terminal attribute (see Local Modes).
The terminal is flushed before and after getpass
, so that
characters of a mistyped passphrase are not accidentally visible.
In other C libraries, getpass
may only return the first
PASS_MAX
bytes of a passphrase. The GNU C Library has no limit, so
PASS_MAX
is undefined.
The prototype for this function is in unistd.h. PASS_MAX
would be defined in limits.h.
This precise set of operations may not suit all possible situations. In
this case, it is recommended that users write their own getpass
substitute. For instance, a very simple substitute is as follows:
#include <termios.h> #include <stdio.h> ssize_t my_getpass (char **lineptr, size_t *n, FILE *stream) { struct termios old, new; int nread; /* Turn echoing off and fail if we can’t. */ if (tcgetattr (fileno (stream), &old) != 0) return -1; new = old; new.c_lflag &= ~ECHO; if (tcsetattr (fileno (stream), TCSAFLUSH, &new) != 0) return -1; /* Read the passphrase */ nread = getline (lineptr, n, stream); /* Restore terminal. */ (void) tcsetattr (fileno (stream), TCSAFLUSH, &old); return nread; }
The substitute takes the same parameters as getline
(see Line-Oriented Input); the user must print any prompt desired.
Previous: Reading Passphrases, Up: Low-Level Terminal Interface [Contents][Index]
A pseudo-terminal is a special interprocess communication channel that acts like a terminal. One end of the channel is called the master side or master pseudo-terminal device, the other side is called the slave side. Data written to the master side is received by the slave side as if it was the result of a user typing at an ordinary terminal, and data written to the slave side is sent to the master side as if it was written on an ordinary terminal.
Pseudo terminals are the way programs like xterm
and emacs
implement their terminal emulation functionality.
Next: Opening a Pseudo-Terminal Pair, Up: Pseudo-Terminals [Contents][Index]
This subsection describes functions for allocating a pseudo-terminal, and for making this pseudo-terminal available for actual use. These functions are declared in the header file stdlib.h.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe fd | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
posix_openpt
returns a new file descriptor for the next
available master pseudo-terminal. In the case of an error, it returns
a value of -1 instead, and sets errno
to indicate
the error. See Opening and Closing Files for possible values
of errno
.
flags is a bit mask created from a bitwise OR of zero or more of the following flags:
O_RDWR
Open the device for both reading and writing. It is usual to specify this flag.
O_NOCTTY
Do not make the device the controlling terminal for the process.
These flags are defined in fcntl.h. See File Access Modes.
For this function to be available, _XOPEN_SOURCE
must be defined
to a value greater than ‘600’. See Feature Test Macros.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe fd | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
getpt
is similar to posix_openpt
. This function is a
GNU extension and should not be used in portable programs.
The getpt
function returns a new file descriptor for the next
available master pseudo-terminal. The normal return value from
getpt
is a non-negative integer file descriptor. In the case of
an error, a value of -1 is returned instead. The following
errno
conditions are defined for this function:
ENOENT
There are no free master pseudo-terminals available.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe locale | AS-Unsafe dlopen plugin heap lock | AC-Unsafe corrupt lock fd mem | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The grantpt
function changes the ownership and access permission
of the slave pseudo-terminal device corresponding to the master
pseudo-terminal device associated with the file descriptor
filedes. The owner is set from the real user ID of the calling
process (see The Persona of a Process), and the group is set to a special
group (typically tty) or from the real group ID of the calling
process. The access permission is set such that the file is both
readable and writable by the owner and only writable by the group.
On some systems this function is implemented by invoking a special
setuid
root program (see How an Application Can Change Persona). As a
consequence, installing a signal handler for the SIGCHLD
signal
(see Job Control Signals) may interfere with a call to
grantpt
.
The normal return value from grantpt
is 0; a value of
-1 is returned in case of failure. The following errno
error conditions are defined for this function:
EBADF
The filedes argument is not a valid file descriptor.
EINVAL
The filedes argument is not associated with a master pseudo-terminal device.
EACCES
The slave pseudo-terminal device corresponding to the master associated with filedes could not be accessed.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Unsafe heap/bsd | AC-Unsafe mem fd | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The unlockpt
function unlocks the slave pseudo-terminal device
corresponding to the master pseudo-terminal device associated with the
file descriptor filedes. On many systems, the slave can only be
opened after unlocking, so portable applications should always call
unlockpt
before trying to open the slave.
The normal return value from unlockpt
is 0; a value of
-1 is returned in case of failure. The following errno
error conditions are defined for this function:
EBADF
The filedes argument is not a valid file descriptor.
EINVAL
The filedes argument is not associated with a master pseudo-terminal device.
Preliminary: | MT-Unsafe race:ptsname | AS-Unsafe heap/bsd | AC-Unsafe mem fd | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
If the file descriptor filedes is associated with a
master pseudo-terminal device, the ptsname
function returns a
pointer to a statically-allocated, null-terminated string containing the
file name of the associated slave pseudo-terminal file. This string
might be overwritten by subsequent calls to ptsname
.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Unsafe heap/bsd | AC-Unsafe mem fd | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The ptsname_r
function is similar to the ptsname
function
except that it places its result into the user-specified buffer starting
at buf with length len.
This function is a GNU extension.
Typical usage of these functions is illustrated by the following example:
int open_pty_pair (int *amaster, int *aslave) { int master, slave; char *name; master = posix_openpt (O_RDWR | O_NOCTTY); if (master < 0) return 0; if (grantpt (master) < 0 || unlockpt (master) < 0) goto close_master; name = ptsname (master); if (name == NULL) goto close_master; slave = open (name, O_RDWR); if (slave == -1) goto close_master; *amaster = master; *aslave = slave; return 1; close_slave: close (slave); close_master: close (master); return 0; }
Previous: Allocating Pseudo-Terminals, Up: Pseudo-Terminals [Contents][Index]
These functions, derived from BSD, are available in the separate libutil library, and declared in pty.h.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe locale | AS-Unsafe dlopen plugin heap lock | AC-Unsafe corrupt lock fd mem | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This function allocates and opens a pseudo-terminal pair, returning the
file descriptor for the master in *amaster, and the file
descriptor for the slave in *aslave. If the argument name
is not a null pointer, the file name of the slave pseudo-terminal
device is stored in *name
. If termp is not a null pointer,
the terminal attributes of the slave are set to the ones specified in
the structure that termp points to (see Terminal Modes).
Likewise, if winp is not a null pointer, the screen size of
the slave is set to the values specified in the structure that
winp points to.
The normal return value from openpty
is 0; a value of
-1 is returned in case of failure. The following errno
conditions are defined for this function:
ENOENT
There are no free pseudo-terminal pairs available.
Warning: Using the openpty
function with name not
set to NULL
is very dangerous because it provides no
protection against overflowing the string name. You should use
the ttyname
function on the file descriptor returned in
*slave to find out the file name of the slave pseudo-terminal
device instead.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe locale | AS-Unsafe dlopen plugin heap lock | AC-Unsafe corrupt lock fd mem | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This function is similar to the openpty
function, but in
addition, forks a new process (see Creating a Process) and makes the
newly opened slave pseudo-terminal device the controlling terminal
(see Controlling Terminal of a Process) for the child process.
If the operation is successful, there are then both parent and child
processes and both see forkpty
return, but with different values:
it returns a value of 0 in the child process and returns the child’s
process ID in the parent process.
If the allocation of a pseudo-terminal pair or the process creation
failed, forkpty
returns a value of -1 in the parent
process.
Warning: The forkpty
function has the same problems with
respect to the name argument as openpty
.
Next: Mathematics, Previous: Low-Level Terminal Interface, Up: Main Menu [Contents][Index]
This chapter describes facilities for issuing and logging messages of system administration interest. This chapter has nothing to do with programs issuing messages to their own users or keeping private logs (One would typically do that with the facilities described in Input/Output on Streams).
Most systems have a facility called “Syslog” that allows programs to submit messages of interest to system administrators and can be configured to pass these messages on in various ways, such as printing on the console, mailing to a particular person, or recording in a log file for future reference.
A program uses the facilities in this chapter to submit such messages.
Next: Submitting Syslog Messages, Up: Syslog [Contents][Index]
System administrators have to deal with lots of different kinds of messages from a plethora of subsystems within each system, and usually lots of systems as well. For example, an FTP server might report every connection it gets. The kernel might report hardware failures on a disk drive. A DNS server might report usage statistics at regular intervals.
Some of these messages need to be brought to a system administrator’s attention immediately. And it may not be just any system administrator – there may be a particular system administrator who deals with a particular kind of message. Other messages just need to be recorded for future reference if there is a problem. Still others may need to have information extracted from them by an automated process that generates monthly reports.
To deal with these messages, most Unix systems have a facility called "Syslog." It is generally based on a daemon called “Syslogd” Syslogd listens for messages on a Unix domain socket named /dev/log. Based on classification information in the messages and its configuration file (usually /etc/syslog.conf), Syslogd routes them in various ways. Some of the popular routings are:
Syslogd can also handle messages from other systems. It listens on the
syslog
UDP port as well as the local socket for messages.
Syslog can handle messages from the kernel itself. But the kernel doesn’t write to /dev/log; rather, another daemon (sometimes called “Klogd”) extracts messages from the kernel and passes them on to Syslog as any other process would (and it properly identifies them as messages from the kernel).
Syslog can even handle messages that the kernel issued before Syslogd or Klogd was running. A Linux kernel, for example, stores startup messages in a kernel message ring and they are normally still there when Klogd later starts up. Assuming Syslogd is running by the time Klogd starts, Klogd then passes everything in the message ring to it.
In order to classify messages for disposition, Syslog requires any process that submits a message to it to provide two pieces of classification information with it:
This identifies who submitted the message. There are a small number of facilities defined. The kernel, the mail subsystem, and an FTP server are examples of recognized facilities. For the complete list, See syslog, vsyslog. Keep in mind that these are essentially arbitrary classifications. "Mail subsystem" doesn’t have any more meaning than the system administrator gives to it.
This tells how important the content of the message is. Examples of defined priority values are: debug, informational, warning and critical. For the complete list, see syslog, vsyslog. Except for the fact that the priorities have a defined order, the meaning of each of these priorities is entirely determined by the system administrator.
A “facility/priority” is a number that indicates both the facility and the priority.
Warning: This terminology is not universal. Some people use “level” to refer to the priority and “priority” to refer to the combination of facility and priority. A Linux kernel has a concept of a message “level,” which corresponds both to a Syslog priority and to a Syslog facility/priority (It can be both because the facility code for the kernel is zero, and that makes priority and facility/priority the same value).
The GNU C Library provides functions to submit messages to Syslog. They do it by writing to the /dev/log socket. See Submitting Syslog Messages.
The GNU C Library functions only work to submit messages to the Syslog
facility on the same system. To submit a message to the Syslog facility
on another system, use the socket I/O functions to write a UDP datagram
to the syslog
UDP port on that system. See Sockets.
Previous: Overview of Syslog, Up: Syslog [Contents][Index]
The GNU C Library provides functions to submit messages to the Syslog facility:
These functions only work to submit messages to the Syslog facility on
the same system. To submit a message to the Syslog facility on another
system, use the socket I/O functions to write a UDP datagram to the
syslog
UDP port on that system. See Sockets.
Next: syslog, vsyslog, Up: Submitting Syslog Messages [Contents][Index]
The symbols referred to in this section are declared in the file syslog.h.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Unsafe lock | AC-Unsafe lock fd | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
openlog
opens or reopens a connection to Syslog in preparation
for submitting messages.
ident is an arbitrary identification string which future
syslog
invocations will prefix to each message. This is intended
to identify the source of the message, and people conventionally set it
to the name of the program that will submit the messages.
If ident is NULL, or if openlog
is not called, the default
identification string used in Syslog messages will be the program name,
taken from argv[0].
Please note that the string pointer ident will be retained
internally by the Syslog routines. You must not free the memory that
ident points to. It is also dangerous to pass a reference to an
automatic variable since leaving the scope would mean ending the
lifetime of the variable. If you want to change the ident string,
you must call openlog
again; overwriting the string pointed to by
ident is not thread-safe.
You can cause the Syslog routines to drop the reference to ident and
go back to the default string (the program name taken from argv[0]), by
calling closelog
: See closelog.
In particular, if you are writing code for a shared library that might get
loaded and then unloaded (e.g. a PAM module), and you use openlog
,
you must call closelog
before any point where your library might
get unloaded, as in this example:
#include <syslog.h> void shared_library_function (void) { openlog ("mylibrary", option, priority); syslog (LOG_INFO, "shared library has been invoked"); closelog (); }
Without the call to closelog
, future invocations of syslog
by the program using the shared library may crash, if the library gets
unloaded and the memory containing the string "mylibrary"
becomes
unmapped. This is a limitation of the BSD syslog interface.
openlog
may or may not open the /dev/log socket, depending
on option. If it does, it tries to open it and connect it as a
stream socket. If that doesn’t work, it tries to open it and connect it
as a datagram socket. The socket has the “Close on Exec” attribute,
so the kernel will close it if the process performs an exec.
You don’t have to use openlog
. If you call syslog
without
having called openlog
, syslog
just opens the connection
implicitly and uses defaults for the information in ident and
options.
options is a bit string, with the bits as defined by the following single bit masks:
LOG_PERROR
¶If on, openlog
sets up the connection so that any syslog
on this connection writes its message to the calling process’ Standard
Error stream in addition to submitting it to Syslog. If off, syslog
does not write the message to Standard Error.
LOG_CONS
¶If on, openlog
sets up the connection so that a syslog
on
this connection that fails to submit a message to Syslog writes the
message instead to system console. If off, syslog
does not write
to the system console (but of course Syslog may write messages it
receives to the console).
LOG_PID
¶When on, openlog
sets up the connection so that a syslog
on this connection inserts the calling process’ Process ID (PID) into
the message. When off, openlog
does not insert the PID.
LOG_NDELAY
¶When on, openlog
opens and connects the /dev/log socket.
When off, a future syslog
call must open and connect the socket.
Portability note: In early systems, the sense of this bit was exactly the opposite.
LOG_ODELAY
¶This bit does nothing. It exists for backward compatibility.
If any other bit in options is on, the result is undefined.
facility is the default facility code for this connection. A
syslog
on this connection that specifies default facility causes
this facility to be associated with the message. See syslog
for
possible values. A value of zero means the default, which is
LOG_USER
.
If a Syslog connection is already open when you call openlog
,
openlog
“reopens” the connection. Reopening is like opening
except that if you specify zero for the default facility code, the
default facility code simply remains unchanged and if you specify
LOG_NDELAY and the socket is already open and connected, openlog
just leaves it that way.
Next: closelog, Previous: openlog, Up: Submitting Syslog Messages [Contents][Index]
The symbols referred to in this section are declared in the file syslog.h.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe env locale | AS-Unsafe corrupt heap lock dlopen | AC-Unsafe corrupt lock mem fd | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
syslog
submits a message to the Syslog facility. It does this by
writing to the Unix domain socket /dev/log
.
syslog
submits the message with the facility and priority indicated
by facility_priority. The macro LOG_MAKEPRI
generates a
facility/priority from a facility and a priority, as in the following
example:
LOG_MAKEPRI(LOG_USER, LOG_WARNING)
The possible values for the facility code are (macros):
LOG_USER
¶A miscellaneous user process
LOG_MAIL
¶LOG_DAEMON
¶A miscellaneous system daemon
LOG_AUTH
¶Security (authorization)
LOG_SYSLOG
¶Syslog
LOG_LPR
¶Central printer
LOG_NEWS
¶Network news (e.g. Usenet)
LOG_UUCP
¶UUCP
LOG_CRON
¶Cron and At
LOG_AUTHPRIV
¶Private security (authorization)
LOG_FTP
¶Ftp server
LOG_LOCAL0
¶Locally defined
LOG_LOCAL1
¶Locally defined
LOG_LOCAL2
¶Locally defined
LOG_LOCAL3
¶Locally defined
LOG_LOCAL4
¶Locally defined
LOG_LOCAL5
¶Locally defined
LOG_LOCAL6
¶Locally defined
LOG_LOCAL7
¶Locally defined
Results are undefined if the facility code is anything else.
NB: syslog
recognizes one other facility code: that of
the kernel. But you can’t specify that facility code with these
functions. If you try, it looks the same to syslog
as if you are
requesting the default facility. But you wouldn’t want to anyway,
because any program that uses the GNU C Library is not the kernel.
You can use just a priority code as facility_priority. In that
case, syslog
assumes the default facility established when the
Syslog connection was opened. See Syslog Example.
The possible values for the priority code are (macros):
LOG_EMERG
¶The message says the system is unusable.
LOG_ALERT
¶Action on the message must be taken immediately.
LOG_CRIT
¶The message states a critical condition.
LOG_ERR
¶The message describes an error.
LOG_WARNING
¶The message is a warning.
LOG_NOTICE
¶The message describes a normal but important event.
LOG_INFO
¶The message is purely informational.
LOG_DEBUG
¶The message is only for debugging purposes.
Results are undefined if the priority code is anything else.
If the process does not presently have a Syslog connection open (i.e.,
it did not call openlog
), syslog
implicitly opens the
connection the same as openlog
would, with the following defaults
for information that would otherwise be included in an openlog
call: The default identification string is the program name. The
default default facility is LOG_USER
. The default for all the
connection options in options is as if those bits were off.
syslog
leaves the Syslog connection open.
If the /dev/log socket is not open and connected, syslog
opens and connects it, the same as openlog
with the
LOG_NDELAY
option would.
syslog
leaves /dev/log open and connected unless its attempt
to send the message failed, in which case syslog
closes it (with the
hope that a future implicit open will restore the Syslog connection to a
usable state).
Example:
#include <syslog.h> syslog (LOG_MAKEPRI(LOG_LOCAL1, LOG_ERROR), "Unable to make network connection to %s. Error=%m", host);
Preliminary: | MT-Safe env locale | AS-Unsafe corrupt heap lock dlopen | AC-Unsafe corrupt lock mem fd | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This is functionally identical to syslog
, with the BSD style variable
length argument.
Next: setlogmask, Previous: syslog, vsyslog, Up: Submitting Syslog Messages [Contents][Index]
The symbols referred to in this section are declared in the file syslog.h.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Unsafe lock | AC-Unsafe lock fd | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
closelog
closes the current Syslog connection, if there is one.
This includes closing the /dev/log socket, if it is open.
closelog
also sets the identification string for Syslog messages
back to the default, if openlog
was called with a non-NULL argument
to ident. The default identification string is the program name
taken from argv[0].
If you are writing shared library code that uses openlog
to
generate custom syslog output, you should use closelog
to drop
the GNU C Library’s internal reference to the ident pointer when you are
done. Please read the section on openlog
for more information:
See openlog.
closelog
does not flush any buffers. You do not have to call
closelog
before re-opening a Syslog connection with openlog
.
Syslog connections are automatically closed on exec or exit.
Next: Syslog Example, Previous: closelog, Up: Submitting Syslog Messages [Contents][Index]
The symbols referred to in this section are declared in the file syslog.h.
Preliminary: | MT-Unsafe race:LogMask | AS-Unsafe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
setlogmask
sets a mask (the “logmask”) that determines which
future syslog
calls shall be ignored. If a program has not
called setlogmask
, syslog
doesn’t ignore any calls. You
can use setlogmask
to specify that messages of particular
priorities shall be ignored in the future.
A setlogmask
call overrides any previous setlogmask
call.
Note that the logmask exists entirely independently of opening and closing of Syslog connections.
Setting the logmask has a similar effect to, but is not the same as, configuring Syslog. The Syslog configuration may cause Syslog to discard certain messages it receives, but the logmask causes certain messages never to get submitted to Syslog in the first place.
mask is a bit string with one bit corresponding to each of the
possible message priorities. If the bit is on, syslog
handles
messages of that priority normally. If it is off, syslog
discards messages of that priority. Use the message priority macros
described in syslog, vsyslog and the LOG_MASK
to construct
an appropriate mask value, as in this example:
LOG_MASK(LOG_EMERG) | LOG_MASK(LOG_ERROR)
or
~(LOG_MASK(LOG_INFO))
There is also a LOG_UPTO
macro, which generates a mask with the bits
on for a certain priority and all priorities above it:
LOG_UPTO(LOG_ERROR)
The unfortunate naming of the macro is due to the fact that internally, higher numbers are used for lower message priorities.
Previous: setlogmask, Up: Submitting Syslog Messages [Contents][Index]
Here is an example of openlog
, syslog
, and closelog
:
This example sets the logmask so that debug and informational messages
get discarded without ever reaching Syslog. So the second syslog
in the example does nothing.
#include <syslog.h> setlogmask (LOG_UPTO (LOG_NOTICE)); openlog ("exampleprog", LOG_CONS | LOG_PID | LOG_NDELAY, LOG_LOCAL1); syslog (LOG_NOTICE, "Program started by User %d", getuid ()); syslog (LOG_INFO, "A tree falls in a forest"); closelog ();
Next: Arithmetic Functions, Previous: Syslog, Up: Main Menu [Contents][Index]
This chapter contains information about functions for performing mathematical computations, such as trigonometric functions. Most of these functions have prototypes declared in the header file math.h. The complex-valued functions are defined in complex.h.
All mathematical functions which take a floating-point argument
have three variants, one each for double
, float
, and
long double
arguments. The double
versions are mostly
defined in ISO C89. The float
and long double
versions are from the numeric extensions to C included in ISO C99.
Which of the three versions of a function should be used depends on the
situation. For most calculations, the float
functions are the
fastest. On the other hand, the long double
functions have the
highest precision. double
is somewhere in between. It is
usually wise to pick the narrowest type that can accommodate your data.
Not all machines have a distinct long double
type; it may be the
same as double
.
The GNU C Library also provides _FloatN
and
_FloatNx
types. These types are defined in ISO/IEC TS 18661-3, which extends ISO C and defines floating-point types that
are not machine-dependent. When such a type, such as _Float128
,
is supported by the GNU C Library, extra variants for most of the mathematical
functions provided for double
, float
, and long
double
are also provided for the supported type. Throughout this
manual, the _FloatN
and _FloatNx
variants of
these functions are described along with the double
,
float
, and long double
variants and they come from
ISO/IEC TS 18661-3, unless explicitly stated otherwise.
Support for _FloatN
or _FloatNx
types is
provided for _Float32
, _Float64
and _Float32x
on
all platforms.
It is also provided for _Float128
and _Float64x
on
powerpc64le (PowerPC 64-bits little-endian), x86_64, x86, ia64,
aarch64, alpha, loongarch, mips64, riscv, s390 and sparc.
Next: Trigonometric Functions, Up: Mathematics [Contents][Index]
The header math.h defines several useful mathematical constants.
All values are defined as preprocessor macros starting with M_
.
The values provided are:
M_E
¶The base of natural logarithms.
M_LOG2E
¶The logarithm to base 2
of M_E
.
M_LOG10E
¶The logarithm to base 10
of M_E
.
M_LN2
¶The natural logarithm of 2
.
M_LN10
¶The natural logarithm of 10
.
M_PI
¶Pi, the ratio of a circle’s circumference to its diameter.
M_PI_2
¶Pi divided by two.
M_PI_4
¶Pi divided by four.
M_1_PI
¶The reciprocal of pi (1/pi)
M_2_PI
¶Two times the reciprocal of pi.
M_2_SQRTPI
¶Two times the reciprocal of the square root of pi.
M_SQRT2
¶The square root of two.
M_SQRT1_2
¶The reciprocal of the square root of two (also the square root of 1/2).
These constants come from the Unix98 standard and were also available in
4.4BSD; therefore they are only defined if
_XOPEN_SOURCE=500
, or a more general feature select macro, is
defined. The default set of features includes these constants.
See Feature Test Macros.
All values are of type double
. As an extension, the GNU C Library
also defines these constants with type long double
and
float
. The long double
macros have a lowercase ‘l’
while the float
macros have a lowercase ‘f’ appended to
their names: M_El
, M_PIl
, and so forth. These are only
available if _GNU_SOURCE
is defined.
Likewise, the GNU C Library also defines these constants with the types
_FloatN
and _FloatNx
for the machines that
have support for such types enabled (see Mathematics) and if
_GNU_SOURCE
is defined. When available, the macros names are
appended with ‘fN’ or ‘fNx’, such as ‘f128’
for the type _Float128
.
Note: Some programs use a constant named PI
which has the
same value as M_PI
. This constant is not standard; it may have
appeared in some old AT&T headers, and is mentioned in Stroustrup’s book
on C++. It infringes on the user’s name space, so the GNU C Library
does not define it. Fixing programs written to expect it is simple:
replace PI
with M_PI
throughout, or put ‘-DPI=M_PI’
on the compiler command line.
Next: Inverse Trigonometric Functions, Previous: Predefined Mathematical Constants, Up: Mathematics [Contents][Index]
These are the familiar sin
, cos
, and tan
functions.
The arguments to all of these functions are in units of radians; recall
that pi radians equals 180 degrees.
The math library normally defines M_PI
to a double
approximation of pi. If strict ISO and/or POSIX compliance
are requested this constant is not defined, but you can easily define it
yourself:
#define M_PI 3.14159265358979323846264338327
You can also compute the value of pi with the expression acos
(-1.0)
.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
These functions return the sine of x, where x is given in
radians. The return value is in the range -1
to 1
.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
These functions return the cosine of x, where x is given in
radians. The return value is in the range -1
to 1
.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
These functions return the tangent of x, where x is given in radians.
Mathematically, the tangent function has singularities at odd multiples
of pi/2. If the argument x is too close to one of these
singularities, tan
will signal overflow.
In many applications where sin
and cos
are used, the sine
and cosine of the same angle are needed at the same time. It is more
efficient to compute them simultaneously, so the library provides a
function to do that.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
These functions return the sine of x in *sinx
and the
cosine of x in *cosx
, where x is given in
radians. Both values, *sinx
and *cosx
, are in
the range of -1
to 1
.
All these functions, including the _FloatN
and
_FloatNx
variants, are GNU extensions. Portable programs
should be prepared to cope with their absence.
ISO C99 defines variants of the trig functions which work on complex numbers. The GNU C Library provides these functions, but they are only useful if your compiler supports the new complex types defined by the standard. (As of this writing GCC supports complex numbers, but there are bugs in the implementation.)
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
These functions return the complex sine of z. The mathematical definition of the complex sine is
sin (z) = 1/(2*i) * (exp (z*i) - exp (-z*i)).
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
These functions return the complex cosine of z. The mathematical definition of the complex cosine is
cos (z) = 1/2 * (exp (z*i) + exp (-z*i))
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
These functions return the complex tangent of z. The mathematical definition of the complex tangent is
tan (z) = -i * (exp (z*i) - exp (-z*i)) / (exp (z*i) + exp (-z*i))
The complex tangent has poles at pi/2 + 2n, where n is an
integer. ctan
may signal overflow if z is too close to a
pole.
Next: Exponentiation and Logarithms, Previous: Trigonometric Functions, Up: Mathematics [Contents][Index]
These are the usual arcsine, arccosine and arctangent functions, which are the inverses of the sine, cosine and tangent functions respectively.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
These functions compute the arcsine of x—that is, the value whose
sine is x. The value is in units of radians. Mathematically,
there are infinitely many such values; the one actually returned is the
one between -pi/2
and pi/2
(inclusive).
The arcsine function is defined mathematically only
over the domain -1
to 1
. If x is outside the
domain, asin
signals a domain error.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
These functions compute the arccosine of x—that is, the value
whose cosine is x. The value is in units of radians.
Mathematically, there are infinitely many such values; the one actually
returned is the one between 0
and pi
(inclusive).
The arccosine function is defined mathematically only
over the domain -1
to 1
. If x is outside the
domain, acos
signals a domain error.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
These functions compute the arctangent of x—that is, the value
whose tangent is x. The value is in units of radians.
Mathematically, there are infinitely many such values; the one actually
returned is the one between -pi/2
and pi/2
(inclusive).
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This function computes the arctangent of y/x, but the signs
of both arguments are used to determine the quadrant of the result, and
x is permitted to be zero. The return value is given in radians
and is in the range -pi
to pi
, inclusive.
If x and y are coordinates of a point in the plane,
atan2
returns the signed angle between the line from the origin
to that point and the x-axis. Thus, atan2
is useful for
converting Cartesian coordinates to polar coordinates. (To compute the
radial coordinate, use hypot
; see Exponentiation and Logarithms.)
If both x and y are zero, atan2
returns zero.
ISO C99 defines complex versions of the inverse trig functions.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
These functions compute the complex arcsine of z—that is, the value whose sine is z. The value returned is in radians.
Unlike the real-valued functions, casin
is defined for all
values of z.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
These functions compute the complex arccosine of z—that is, the value whose cosine is z. The value returned is in radians.
Unlike the real-valued functions, cacos
is defined for all
values of z.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
These functions compute the complex arctangent of z—that is, the value whose tangent is z. The value is in units of radians.
Next: Hyperbolic Functions, Previous: Inverse Trigonometric Functions, Up: Mathematics [Contents][Index]
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
These functions compute e
(the base of natural logarithms) raised
to the power x.
If the magnitude of the result is too large to be representable,
exp
signals overflow.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
These functions compute 2
raised to the power x.
Mathematically, exp2 (x)
is the same as exp (x * log (2))
.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
These functions compute 10
raised to the power x.
Mathematically, exp10 (x)
is the same as exp (x * log (10))
.
The exp10
functions are from TS 18661-4:2015.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
These functions compute the natural logarithm of x. exp (log
(x))
equals x, exactly in mathematics and approximately in
C.
If x is negative, log
signals a domain error. If x
is zero, it returns negative infinity; if x is too close to zero,
it may signal overflow.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
These functions return the base-10 logarithm of x.
log10 (x)
equals log (x) / log (10)
.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
These functions return the base-2 logarithm of x.
log2 (x)
equals log (x) / log (2)
.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
These functions extract the exponent of x and return it as a
floating-point value. If FLT_RADIX
is two, logb
is equal
to floor (log2 (x))
, except it’s probably faster.
If x is de-normalized, logb
returns the exponent x
would have if it were normalized. If x is infinity (positive or
negative), logb
returns ∞. If x is zero,
logb
returns ∞. It does not signal.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
These functions are equivalent to the corresponding logb
functions except that they return signed integer values. The
ilogb
, ilogbf
, and ilogbl
functions are from ISO
C99; the llogb
, llogbf
, llogbl
functions are from
TS 18661-1:2014; the ilogbfN
, ilogbfNx
, llogbfN
,
and llogbfNx
functions are from TS 18661-3:2015.
Since integers cannot represent infinity and NaN, ilogb
instead
returns an integer that can’t be the exponent of a normal floating-point
number. math.h defines constants so you can check for this.
ilogb
returns this value if its argument is 0
. The
numeric value is either INT_MIN
or -INT_MAX
.
This macro is defined in ISO C99.
llogb
returns this value if its argument is 0
. The
numeric value is either LONG_MIN
or -LONG_MAX
.
This macro is defined in TS 18661-1:2014.
ilogb
returns this value if its argument is NaN
. The
numeric value is either INT_MIN
or INT_MAX
.
This macro is defined in ISO C99.
llogb
returns this value if its argument is NaN
. The
numeric value is either LONG_MIN
or LONG_MAX
.
This macro is defined in TS 18661-1:2014.
These values are system specific. They might even be the same. The
proper way to test the result of ilogb
is as follows:
i = ilogb (f); if (i == FP_ILOGB0 || i == FP_ILOGBNAN) { if (isnan (f)) { /* Handle NaN. */ } else if (f == 0.0) { /* Handle 0.0. */ } else { /* Some other value with large exponent, perhaps +Inf. */ } }
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
These are general exponentiation functions, returning base raised to power.
Mathematically, pow
would return a complex number when base
is negative and power is not an integral value. pow
can’t
do that, so instead it signals a domain error. pow
may also
underflow or overflow the destination type.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
These functions return the nonnegative square root of x.
If x is negative, sqrt
signals a domain error.
Mathematically, it should return a complex number.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
These functions return the cube root of x. They cannot fail; every representable real value has a representable real cube root.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
These functions return sqrt (x*x +
y*y)
. This is the length of the hypotenuse of a right
triangle with sides of length x and y, or the distance
of the point (x, y) from the origin. Using this function
instead of the direct formula is wise, since the error is
much smaller. See also the function cabs
in Absolute Value.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
These functions return a value equivalent to exp (x) - 1
.
They are computed in a way that is accurate even if x is
near zero—a case where exp (x) - 1
would be inaccurate owing
to subtraction of two numbers that are nearly equal.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
These functions return a value equivalent to log (1 + x)
.
They are computed in a way that is accurate even if x is
near zero.
ISO C99 defines complex variants of some of the exponentiation and logarithm functions.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
These functions return e
(the base of natural
logarithms) raised to the power of z.
Mathematically, this corresponds to the value
exp (z) = exp (creal (z)) * (cos (cimag (z)) + I * sin (cimag (z)))
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
These functions return the natural logarithm of z. Mathematically, this corresponds to the value
log (z) = log (cabs (z)) + I * carg (z)
clog
has a pole at 0, and will signal overflow if z equals
or is very close to 0. It is well-defined for all other values of
z.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
These functions return the base 10 logarithm of the complex value z. Mathematically, this corresponds to the value
log10 (z) = log10 (cabs (z)) + I * carg (z) / log (10)
All these functions, including the _FloatN
and
_FloatNx
variants, are GNU extensions.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
These functions return the complex square root of the argument z. Unlike the real-valued functions, they are defined for all values of z.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
These functions return base raised to the power of
power. This is equivalent to cexp (y * clog (x))
Next: Special Functions, Previous: Exponentiation and Logarithms, Up: Mathematics [Contents][Index]
The functions in this section are related to the exponential functions; see Exponentiation and Logarithms.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
These functions return the hyperbolic sine of x, defined
mathematically as (exp (x) - exp (-x)) / 2
. They
may signal overflow if x is too large.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
These functions return the hyperbolic cosine of x,
defined mathematically as (exp (x) + exp (-x)) / 2
.
They may signal overflow if x is too large.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
These functions return the hyperbolic tangent of x,
defined mathematically as sinh (x) / cosh (x)
.
They may signal overflow if x is too large.
There are counterparts for the hyperbolic functions which take complex arguments.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
These functions return the complex hyperbolic sine of z, defined
mathematically as (exp (z) - exp (-z)) / 2
.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
These functions return the complex hyperbolic cosine of z, defined
mathematically as (exp (z) + exp (-z)) / 2
.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
These functions return the complex hyperbolic tangent of z,
defined mathematically as csinh (z) / ccosh (z)
.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
These functions return the inverse hyperbolic sine of x—the value whose hyperbolic sine is x.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
These functions return the inverse hyperbolic cosine of x—the
value whose hyperbolic cosine is x. If x is less than
1
, acosh
signals a domain error.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
These functions return the inverse hyperbolic tangent of x—the
value whose hyperbolic tangent is x. If the absolute value of
x is greater than 1
, atanh
signals a domain error;
if it is equal to 1, atanh
returns infinity.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
These functions return the inverse complex hyperbolic sine of z—the value whose complex hyperbolic sine is z.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
These functions return the inverse complex hyperbolic cosine of z—the value whose complex hyperbolic cosine is z. Unlike the real-valued functions, there are no restrictions on the value of z.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
These functions return the inverse complex hyperbolic tangent of z—the value whose complex hyperbolic tangent is z. Unlike the real-valued functions, there are no restrictions on the value of z.
Next: Known Maximum Errors in Math Functions, Previous: Hyperbolic Functions, Up: Mathematics [Contents][Index]
These are some more exotic mathematical functions which are sometimes useful. Currently they only have real-valued versions.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
erf
returns the error function of x. The error
function is defined as
erf (x) = 2/sqrt(pi) * integral from 0 to x of exp(-t^2) dt
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
erfc
returns 1.0 - erf(x)
, but computed in a
fashion that avoids round-off error when x is large.
Preliminary: | MT-Unsafe race:signgam | AS-Unsafe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
lgamma
returns the natural logarithm of the absolute value of
the gamma function of x. The gamma function is defined as
gamma (x) = integral from 0 to ∞ of t^(x-1) e^-t dt
The sign of the gamma function is stored in the global variable
signgam, which is declared in math.h. It is 1
if
the intermediate result was positive or zero, or -1
if it was
negative.
To compute the real gamma function you can use the tgamma
function or you can compute the values as follows:
lgam = lgamma(x); gam = signgam*exp(lgam);
The gamma function has singularities at the non-positive integers.
lgamma
will raise the zero divide exception if evaluated at a
singularity.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
lgamma_r
is just like lgamma
, but it stores the sign of
the intermediate result in the variable pointed to by signp
instead of in the signgam global. This means it is reentrant.
The lgammafN_r
and lgammafNx_r
functions are
GNU extensions.
Preliminary: | MT-Unsafe race:signgam | AS-Unsafe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
These functions exist for compatibility reasons. They are equivalent to
lgamma
etc. It is better to use lgamma
since for one the
name reflects better the actual computation, and moreover lgamma
is
standardized in ISO C99 while gamma
is not.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
tgamma
applies the gamma function to x. The gamma
function is defined as
gamma (x) = integral from 0 to ∞ of t^(x-1) e^-t dt
This function was introduced in ISO C99. The _FloatN
and _FloatNx
variants were introduced in ISO/IEC TS 18661-3.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
j0
returns the Bessel function of the first kind of order 0 of
x. It may signal underflow if x is too large.
The _FloatN
and _FloatNx
variants are GNU
extensions.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
j1
returns the Bessel function of the first kind of order 1 of
x. It may signal underflow if x is too large.
The _FloatN
and _FloatNx
variants are GNU
extensions.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
jn
returns the Bessel function of the first kind of order
n of x. It may signal underflow if x is too large.
The _FloatN
and _FloatNx
variants are GNU
extensions.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
y0
returns the Bessel function of the second kind of order 0 of
x. It may signal underflow if x is too large. If x
is negative, y0
signals a domain error; if it is zero,
y0
signals overflow and returns -∞.
The _FloatN
and _FloatNx
variants are GNU
extensions.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
y1
returns the Bessel function of the second kind of order 1 of
x. It may signal underflow if x is too large. If x
is negative, y1
signals a domain error; if it is zero,
y1
signals overflow and returns -∞.
The _FloatN
and _FloatNx
variants are GNU
extensions.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
yn
returns the Bessel function of the second kind of order n of
x. It may signal underflow if x is too large. If x
is negative, yn
signals a domain error; if it is zero,
yn
signals overflow and returns -∞.
The _FloatN
and _FloatNx
variants are GNU
extensions.
Next: Pseudo-Random Numbers, Previous: Special Functions, Up: Mathematics [Contents][Index]
This section lists the known errors of the functions in the math library. Errors are measured in “units of the last place”. This is a measure for the relative error. For a number z with the representation d.d…d·2^e (we assume IEEE floating-point numbers with base 2) the ULP is represented by
|d.d...d - (z / 2^e)| / 2^(p - 1)
where p is the number of bits in the mantissa of the
floating-point number representation. Ideally the error for all
functions is always less than 0.5ulps in round-to-nearest mode. Using
rounding bits this is also
possible and normally implemented for the basic operations. Except
for certain functions such as sqrt
, fma
and rint
whose results are fully specified by reference to corresponding IEEE
754 floating-point operations, and conversions between strings and
floating point, the GNU C Library does not aim for correctly rounded results
for functions in the math library, and does not aim for correctness in
whether “inexact” exceptions are raised. Instead, the goals for
accuracy of functions without fully specified results are as follows;
some functions have bugs meaning they do not meet these goals in all
cases. In the future, the GNU C Library may provide some other correctly
rounding functions under the names such as crsin
proposed for
an extension to ISO C.
errno
may also be set (see Error Reporting by Mathematical Functions). (The “inexact”
exception may be raised, or not raised, even if this is inconsistent
with the infinite-precision value.)
long double
format, as used on PowerPC GNU/Linux,
the accuracy goal is weaker for input values not exactly representable
in 106 bits of precision; it is as if the input value is some value
within 0.5ulp of the value actually passed, where “ulp” is
interpreted in terms of a fixed-precision 106-bit mantissa, but not
necessarily the exact value actually passed with discontiguous
mantissa bits.
long double
format, functions whose results are
fully specified by reference to corresponding IEEE 754 floating-point
operations have the same accuracy goals as other functions, but with
the error bound being the same as that for division (3ulp).
Furthermore, “inexact” and “underflow” exceptions may be raised
for all functions for any inputs, even where such exceptions are
inconsistent with the returned value, since the underlying
floating-point arithmetic has that property.
Therefore many of the functions in the math library have errors. The table lists the maximum error for each function which is exposed by one of the existing tests in the test suite. The table tries to cover as much as possible and list the actual maximum error (or at least a ballpark figure) but this is often not achieved due to the large search space.
The table lists the ULP values for different architectures. Different architectures have different results since their hardware support for floating-point operations varies and also the existing hardware support is different. Only the round-to-nearest rounding mode is covered by this table. Functions not listed do not have known errors. Vector versions of functions in the x86_64 libmvec library have a maximum error of 4 ulps.
Function | AArch64 | ARC | ARC soft-float | ARM | Alpha |
acosf | 1 | 1 | 1 | 1 | 1 |
acos | 1 | 1 | 1 | 1 | 1 |
acosl | 1 | - | - | - | 1 |
acosf128 | - | - | - | - | - |
acoshf | 2 | 2 | 2 | 2 | 2 |
acosh | 2 | 3 | 2 | 2 | 2 |
acoshl | 4 | - | - | - | 4 |
acoshf128 | - | - | - | - | - |
add_ldoublef | - | - | - | - | - |
add_ldouble | - | - | - | - | - |
add_ldoublel | - | - | - | - | - |
add_ldoublef128 | - | - | - | - | - |
asinf | 1 | 1 | 1 | 1 | 1 |
asin | 1 | 1 | 1 | 1 | 1 |
asinl | 1 | - | - | - | 1 |
asinf128 | - | - | - | - | - |
asinhf | 2 | 2 | 2 | 2 | 2 |
asinh | 2 | 3 | 2 | 2 | 2 |
asinhl | 4 | - | - | - | 4 |
asinhf128 | - | - | - | - | - |
atanf | 1 | 1 | 1 | 1 | 1 |
atan | 1 | 1 | 1 | 1 | 1 |
atanl | 1 | - | - | - | 1 |
atanf128 | - | - | - | - | - |
atan2f | 1 | 2 | 2 | 2 | 2 |
atan2 | - | 7 | - | - | - |
atan2l | 2 | - | - | - | 2 |
atan2f128 | - | - | - | - | - |
atanhf | 2 | 2 | 2 | 2 | 2 |
atanh | 2 | 2 | 2 | 2 | 2 |
atanhl | 4 | - | - | - | 4 |
atanhf128 | - | - | - | - | - |
cabsf | - | 1 | - | - | - |
cabs | 1 | 1 | 1 | 1 | 1 |
cabsl | 1 | - | - | - | 1 |
cabsf128 | - | - | - | - | - |
cacosf | 2 + i 2 | 2 + i 3 | 2 + i 2 | 2 + i 2 | 2 + i 2 |
cacos | 1 + i 2 | 2 + i 5 | 1 + i 2 | 1 + i 2 | 1 + i 2 |
cacosl | 2 + i 2 | - | - | - | 2 + i 2 |
cacosf128 | - | - | - | - | - |
cacoshf | 2 + i 2 | 4 + i 2 | 2 + i 2 | 2 + i 2 | 2 + i 2 |
cacosh | 2 + i 1 | 5 + i 2 | 2 + i 1 | 2 + i 1 | 2 + i 1 |
cacoshl | 2 + i 2 | - | - | - | 2 + i 2 |
cacoshf128 | - | - | - | - | - |
cargf | 1 | 2 | 1 | 1 | 1 |
carg | 1 | 7 | - | - | - |
cargl | 2 | - | - | - | 2 |
cargf128 | - | - | - | - | - |
casinf | 1 + i 2 | 1 + i 4 | 1 + i 2 | 1 + i 2 | 1 + i 2 |
casin | 1 + i 2 | 3 + i 5 | 1 + i 2 | 1 + i 2 | 1 + i 2 |
casinl | 2 + i 2 | - | - | - | 2 + i 2 |
casinf128 | - | - | - | - | - |
casinhf | 2 + i 1 | 4 + i 2 | 2 + i 1 | 2 + i 1 | 2 + i 1 |
casinh | 2 + i 1 | 5 + i 3 | 2 + i 1 | 2 + i 1 | 2 + i 1 |
casinhl | 2 + i 2 | - | - | - | 2 + i 2 |
casinhf128 | - | - | - | - | - |
catanf | 1 + i 1 | 1 + i 3 | 1 + i 1 | 1 + i 1 | 1 + i 1 |
catan | 1 + i 1 | 1 + i 3 | 1 + i 1 | 1 + i 1 | 1 + i 1 |
catanl | 1 + i 1 | - | - | - | 1 + i 1 |
catanf128 | - | - | - | - | - |
catanhf | 1 + i 1 | 4 + i 2 | 1 + i 1 | 1 + i 1 | 1 + i 1 |
catanh | 1 + i 1 | 4 + i 1 | 1 + i 1 | 1 + i 1 | 1 + i 1 |
catanhl | 1 + i 1 | - | - | - | 1 + i 1 |
catanhf128 | - | - | - | - | - |
cbrtf | 1 | 1 | 1 | 1 | 1 |
cbrt | 4 | 4 | 4 | 4 | 4 |
cbrtl | 1 | - | - | - | 1 |
cbrtf128 | - | - | - | - | - |
ccosf | 1 + i 1 | 3 + i 3 | 1 + i 1 | 1 + i 1 | 1 + i 1 |
ccos | 1 + i 1 | 3 + i 3 | 1 + i 1 | 1 + i 1 | 1 + i 1 |
ccosl | 1 + i 1 | - | - | - | 1 + i 1 |
ccosf128 | - | - | - | - | - |
ccoshf | 1 + i 1 | 3 + i 3 | 1 + i 1 | 1 + i 1 | 1 + i 1 |
ccosh | 1 + i 1 | 3 + i 3 | 1 + i 1 | 1 + i 1 | 1 + i 1 |
ccoshl | 1 + i 1 | - | - | - | 1 + i 1 |
ccoshf128 | - | - | - | - | - |
cexpf | 1 + i 2 | 3 + i 3 | 1 + i 2 | 1 + i 2 | 1 + i 2 |
cexp | 2 + i 1 | 4 + i 4 | 2 + i 1 | 2 + i 1 | 2 + i 1 |
cexpl | 1 + i 1 | - | - | - | 1 + i 1 |
cexpf128 | - | - | - | - | - |
clogf | 3 + i 1 | 4 + i 2 | 3 + i 1 | 3 + i 1 | 3 + i 1 |
clog | 3 + i 1 | 5 + i 7 | 3 + i 1 | 3 + i 1 | 3 + i 1 |
clogl | 2 + i 1 | - | - | - | 2 + i 1 |
clogf128 | - | - | - | - | - |
clog10f | 4 + i 2 | 5 + i 4 | 4 + i 2 | 4 + i 2 | 4 + i 2 |
clog10 | 3 + i 2 | 6 + i 8 | 3 + i 2 | 3 + i 2 | 3 + i 2 |
clog10l | 2 + i 2 | - | - | - | 2 + i 2 |
clog10f128 | - | - | - | - | - |
cosf | 1 | 1 | 1 | 1 | 1 |
cos | 1 | 4 | 1 | 1 | 1 |
cosl | 2 | - | - | - | 2 |
cosf128 | - | - | - | - | - |
cos_advsimdf | 1 | - | - | - | - |
cos_advsimd | 2 | - | - | - | - |
cos_advsimdl | - | - | - | - | - |
cos_advsimdf128 | - | - | - | - | - |
cos_svef | 1 | - | - | - | - |
cos_sve | 1 | - | - | - | - |
cos_svel | - | - | - | - | - |
cos_svef128 | - | - | - | - | - |
coshf | 2 | 3 | 2 | 2 | 2 |
cosh | 2 | 3 | 2 | 2 | 2 |
coshl | 2 | - | - | - | 2 |
coshf128 | - | - | - | - | - |
cpowf | 5 + i 2 | 8 + i 6 | 5 + i 2 | 5 + i 2 | 5 + i 2 |
cpow | 2 + i 0 | 9 + i 8 | 2 + i 0 | 2 + i 0 | 2 + i 0 |
cpowl | 4 + i 1 | - | - | - | 4 + i 1 |
cpowf128 | - | - | - | - | - |
csinf | 1 + i 0 | 3 + i 3 | 1 + i 0 | 1 + i 0 | 1 + i 0 |
csin | 1 + i 0 | 3 + i 3 | 1 + i 0 | 1 + i 0 | 1 + i 0 |
csinl | 1 + i 1 | - | - | - | 1 + i 1 |
csinf128 | - | - | - | - | - |
csinhf | 1 + i 1 | 3 + i 3 | 1 + i 1 | 1 + i 1 | 1 + i 1 |
csinh | 0 + i 1 | 3 + i 3 | 0 + i 1 | 0 + i 1 | 0 + i 1 |
csinhl | 1 + i 1 | - | - | - | 1 + i 1 |
csinhf128 | - | - | - | - | - |
csqrtf | 2 + i 2 | 3 + i 3 | 2 + i 2 | 2 + i 2 | 2 + i 2 |
csqrt | 2 + i 2 | 4 + i 4 | 2 + i 2 | 2 + i 2 | 2 + i 2 |
csqrtl | 2 + i 2 | - | - | - | 2 + i 2 |
csqrtf128 | - | - | - | - | - |
ctanf | 1 + i 2 | 6 + i 2 | 1 + i 2 | 1 + i 2 | 1 + i 2 |
ctan | 1 + i 2 | 4 + i 3 | 1 + i 2 | 1 + i 2 | 1 + i 2 |
ctanl | 3 + i 3 | - | - | - | 3 + i 3 |
ctanf128 | - | - | - | - | - |
ctanhf | 2 + i 1 | 2 + i 6 | 2 + i 2 | 2 + i 2 | 2 + i 2 |
ctanh | 2 + i 2 | 3 + i 4 | 2 + i 2 | 2 + i 2 | 2 + i 2 |
ctanhl | 3 + i 3 | - | - | - | 3 + i 3 |
ctanhf128 | - | - | - | - | - |
div_ldoublef | - | - | - | - | - |
div_ldouble | - | - | - | - | - |
div_ldoublel | - | - | - | - | - |
div_ldoublef128 | - | - | - | - | - |
erff | 1 | 1 | 1 | 1 | 1 |
erf | 1 | 1 | 1 | 1 | 1 |
erfl | 1 | - | - | - | 1 |
erff128 | - | - | - | - | - |
erfcf | 2 | 5 | 3 | 3 | 3 |
erfc | 2 | 5 | 5 | 5 | 5 |
erfcl | 4 | - | - | - | 4 |
erfcf128 | - | - | - | - | - |
expf | 1 | 1 | 1 | 1 | 1 |
exp | 1 | 1 | 1 | 1 | 1 |
expl | 1 | - | - | - | 1 |
expf128 | - | - | - | - | - |
exp10f | 1 | 1 | 1 | 1 | 1 |
exp10 | 2 | 4 | 2 | 2 | 2 |
exp10l | 2 | - | - | - | 2 |
exp10f128 | - | - | - | - | - |
exp2f | 1 | 1 | - | 1 | 1 |
exp2 | 1 | 1 | 1 | 1 | 1 |
exp2l | 1 | - | - | - | 1 |
exp2f128 | - | - | - | - | - |
exp_advsimdf | 1 | - | - | - | - |
exp_advsimd | 1 | - | - | - | - |
exp_advsimdl | - | - | - | - | - |
exp_advsimdf128 | - | - | - | - | - |
exp_svef | 1 | - | - | - | - |
exp_sve | 1 | - | - | - | - |
exp_svel | - | - | - | - | - |
exp_svef128 | - | - | - | - | - |
expm1f | 1 | 2 | 1 | 1 | 1 |
expm1 | 1 | 2 | 1 | 1 | 1 |
expm1l | 2 | - | - | - | 2 |
expm1f128 | - | - | - | - | - |
fmaf | - | - | - | - | - |
fma | - | - | - | - | - |
fmal | - | - | - | - | - |
fmaf128 | - | - | - | - | - |
fma_ldoublef | - | - | - | - | - |
fma_ldouble | - | - | - | - | - |
fma_ldoublel | - | - | - | - | - |
fma_ldoublef128 | - | - | - | - | - |
fmodf | - | - | - | - | - |
fmod | - | - | - | - | - |
fmodl | - | - | - | - | - |
fmodf128 | - | - | - | - | - |
gammaf | 4 | 6 | 7 | 7 | 7 |
gamma | 3 | 7 | 4 | 4 | 4 |
gammal | 5 | - | - | - | 5 |
gammaf128 | - | - | - | - | - |
hypotf | 1 | 1 | - | 1 | - |
hypot | 1 | 2 | 1 | 1 | 1 |
hypotl | 1 | - | - | - | 1 |
hypotf128 | - | - | - | - | - |
j0f | 9 | 9 | 9 | 9 | 9 |
j0 | 3 | 4 | 2 | 2 | 2 |
j0l | 2 | - | - | - | 2 |
j0f128 | - | - | - | - | - |
j1f | 9 | 9 | 9 | 9 | 9 |
j1 | 4 | 5 | 4 | 4 | 4 |
j1l | 4 | - | - | - | 4 |
j1f128 | - | - | - | - | - |
jnf | 4 | 8 | 4 | 4 | 4 |
jn | 4 | 9 | 4 | 4 | 4 |
jnl | 7 | - | - | - | 7 |
jnf128 | - | - | - | - | - |
lgammaf | 4 | 6 | 7 | 7 | 7 |
lgamma | 3 | 7 | 4 | 4 | 4 |
lgammal | 5 | - | - | - | 5 |
lgammaf128 | - | - | - | - | - |
logf | 1 | 1 | - | 1 | 1 |
log | 1 | 1 | - | - | - |
logl | 1 | - | - | - | 1 |
logf128 | - | - | - | - | - |
log10f | 2 | 3 | 2 | 2 | 2 |
log10 | 2 | 2 | 2 | 2 | 2 |
log10l | 2 | - | - | - | 2 |
log10f128 | - | - | - | - | - |
log1pf | 1 | 1 | 1 | 1 | 1 |
log1p | 1 | 1 | 1 | 1 | 1 |
log1pl | 3 | - | - | - | 3 |
log1pf128 | - | - | - | - | - |
log2f | 1 | 1 | 1 | 1 | 1 |
log2 | 1 | 2 | 2 | 2 | 2 |
log2l | 3 | - | - | - | 3 |
log2f128 | - | - | - | - | - |
log_advsimdf | 3 | - | - | - | - |
log_advsimd | 1 | - | - | - | - |
log_advsimdl | - | - | - | - | - |
log_advsimdf128 | - | - | - | - | - |
log_svef | 3 | - | - | - | - |
log_sve | 1 | - | - | - | - |
log_svel | - | - | - | - | - |
log_svef128 | - | - | - | - | - |
mul_ldoublef | - | - | - | - | - |
mul_ldouble | - | - | - | - | - |
mul_ldoublel | - | - | - | - | - |
mul_ldoublef128 | - | - | - | - | - |
powf | 1 | 1 | - | 1 | 1 |
pow | 1 | 1 | 1 | 1 | 1 |
powl | 2 | - | - | - | 2 |
powf128 | - | - | - | - | - |
pow10f | - | - | - | - | - |
pow10 | - | - | - | - | - |
pow10l | - | - | - | - | - |
pow10f128 | - | - | - | - | - |
sinf | 1 | 1 | 1 | 1 | 1 |
sin | 1 | 7 | 1 | 1 | 1 |
sinl | 2 | - | - | - | 2 |
sinf128 | - | - | - | - | - |
sin_advsimdf | 1 | - | - | - | - |
sin_advsimd | 2 | - | - | - | - |
sin_advsimdl | - | - | - | - | - |
sin_advsimdf128 | - | - | - | - | - |
sin_svef | 1 | - | - | - | - |
sin_sve | 2 | - | - | - | - |
sin_svel | - | - | - | - | - |
sin_svef128 | - | - | - | - | - |
sincosf | 1 | 1 | 1 | 1 | 1 |
sincos | 1 | 1 | 1 | 1 | 1 |
sincosl | 1 | - | - | - | 1 |
sincosf128 | - | - | - | - | - |
sinhf | 2 | 3 | 2 | 2 | 2 |
sinh | 2 | 3 | 2 | 2 | 2 |
sinhl | 2 | - | - | - | 2 |
sinhf128 | - | - | - | - | - |
sqrtf | - | - | - | - | - |
sqrt | - | - | - | - | - |
sqrtl | - | - | - | - | - |
sqrtf128 | - | - | - | - | - |
sqrt_ldoublef | - | - | - | - | - |
sqrt_ldouble | - | - | - | - | - |
sqrt_ldoublel | - | - | - | - | - |
sqrt_ldoublef128 | - | - | - | - | - |
sub_ldoublef | - | - | - | - | - |
sub_ldouble | - | - | - | - | - |
sub_ldoublel | - | - | - | - | - |
sub_ldoublef128 | - | - | - | - | - |
tanf | 1 | 1 | 1 | 1 | 1 |
tan | - | 1 | - | - | - |
tanl | 1 | - | - | - | 1 |
tanf128 | - | - | - | - | - |
tanhf | 2 | 2 | 2 | 2 | 2 |
tanh | 2 | 3 | 2 | 2 | 2 |
tanhl | 2 | - | - | - | 2 |
tanhf128 | - | - | - | - | - |
tgammaf | 8 | 9 | 8 | 8 | 8 |
tgamma | 9 | 9 | 9 | 9 | 9 |
tgammal | 4 | - | - | - | 4 |
tgammaf128 | - | - | - | - | - |
y0f | 8 | 8 | 9 | 9 | 9 |
y0 | 2 | 3 | 3 | 3 | 3 |
y0l | 3 | - | - | - | 3 |
y0f128 | - | - | - | - | - |
y1f | 9 | 9 | 9 | 9 | 9 |
y1 | 3 | 7 | 3 | 3 | 3 |
y1l | 5 | - | - | - | 5 |
y1f128 | - | - | - | - | - |
ynf | 3 | 9 | 3 | 3 | 3 |
yn | 3 | 9 | 3 | 3 | 3 |
ynl | 5 | - | - | - | 5 |
ynf128 | - | - | - | - | - |
Function | CSKY | CSKY soft-float | ColdFire | Generic | HPPA |
acosf | 1 | 1 | - | - | 1 |
acos | - | - | - | - | 1 |
acosl | - | - | - | - | - |
acosf128 | - | - | - | - | - |
acoshf | 2 | 2 | - | - | 2 |
acosh | 2 | 2 | - | - | 2 |
acoshl | - | - | - | - | - |
acoshf128 | - | - | - | - | - |
add_ldoublef | - | - | - | - | - |
add_ldouble | - | - | - | - | - |
add_ldoublel | - | - | - | - | - |
add_ldoublef128 | - | - | - | - | - |
asinf | 1 | 1 | - | - | 1 |
asin | - | - | - | - | 1 |
asinl | - | - | - | - | - |
asinf128 | - | - | - | - | - |
asinhf | 2 | 2 | - | - | 2 |
asinh | 2 | 2 | - | - | 2 |
asinhl | - | - | - | - | - |
asinhf128 | - | - | - | - | - |
atanf | 1 | 1 | - | - | 1 |
atan | - | - | - | - | 1 |
atanl | - | - | - | - | - |
atanf128 | - | - | - | - | - |
atan2f | 1 | 1 | 1 | - | 2 |
atan2 | - | - | - | - | - |
atan2l | - | - | - | - | - |
atan2f128 | - | - | - | - | - |
atanhf | 2 | 2 | 1 | - | 2 |
atanh | 2 | 2 | - | - | 2 |
atanhl | - | - | - | - | - |
atanhf128 | - | - | - | - | - |
cabsf | - | - | - | - | - |
cabs | 1 | 1 | - | - | 1 |
cabsl | - | - | - | - | - |
cabsf128 | - | - | - | - | - |
cacosf | 2 + i 2 | 2 + i 2 | - | - | 2 + i 2 |
cacos | 1 + i 2 | 1 + i 2 | - | - | 1 + i 2 |
cacosl | - | - | - | - | - |
cacosf128 | - | - | - | - | - |
cacoshf | 2 + i 2 | 2 + i 2 | 0 + i 1 | - | 2 + i 2 |
cacosh | 2 + i 1 | 2 + i 1 | - | - | 2 + i 1 |
cacoshl | - | - | - | - | - |
cacoshf128 | - | - | - | - | - |
cargf | 1 | 1 | - | - | 1 |
carg | - | - | - | - | - |
cargl | - | - | - | - | - |
cargf128 | - | - | - | - | - |
casinf | 1 + i 2 | 1 + i 2 | 1 + i 0 | - | 1 + i 2 |
casin | 1 + i 2 | 1 + i 2 | 1 + i 0 | - | 1 + i 2 |
casinl | - | - | - | - | 1 + i 0 |
casinf128 | - | - | - | - | - |
casinhf | 2 + i 1 | 2 + i 1 | 1 + i 6 | - | 2 + i 1 |
casinh | 2 + i 1 | 2 + i 1 | 5 + i 3 | - | 5 + i 3 |
casinhl | - | - | - | - | 5 + i 3 |
casinhf128 | - | - | - | - | - |
catanf | 1 + i 1 | 1 + i 1 | 0 + i 1 | - | 1 + i 1 |
catan | 1 + i 1 | 1 + i 1 | 0 + i 1 | - | 1 + i 1 |
catanl | - | - | - | - | 0 + i 1 |
catanf128 | - | - | - | - | - |
catanhf | 1 + i 1 | 1 + i 1 | - | - | 1 + i 1 |
catanh | 1 + i 1 | 1 + i 1 | 4 + i 0 | - | 4 + i 1 |
catanhl | - | - | - | - | 4 + i 0 |
catanhf128 | - | - | - | - | - |
cbrtf | 1 | 1 | - | - | 1 |
cbrt | 4 | 4 | 1 | - | 4 |
cbrtl | - | - | - | - | 1 |
cbrtf128 | - | - | - | - | - |
ccosf | 1 + i 1 | 1 + i 1 | 1 + i 1 | - | 1 + i 1 |
ccos | 1 + i 1 | 1 + i 1 | 1 + i 0 | - | 1 + i 1 |
ccosl | - | - | - | - | 1 + i 0 |
ccosf128 | - | - | - | - | - |
ccoshf | 1 + i 1 | 1 + i 1 | 1 + i 1 | - | 1 + i 1 |
ccosh | 1 + i 1 | 1 + i 1 | 1 + i 0 | - | 1 + i 1 |
ccoshl | - | - | - | - | 1 + i 0 |
ccoshf128 | - | - | - | - | - |
cexpf | 1 + i 2 | 1 + i 2 | 1 + i 1 | - | 1 + i 2 |
cexp | 2 + i 1 | 2 + i 1 | - | - | 2 + i 1 |
cexpl | - | - | - | - | - |
cexpf128 | - | - | - | - | - |
clogf | 3 + i 1 | 3 + i 1 | 1 + i 0 | - | 3 + i 1 |
clog | 3 + i 0 | 3 + i 0 | - | - | 3 + i 1 |
clogl | - | - | - | - | - |
clogf128 | - | - | - | - | - |
clog10f | 4 + i 2 | 4 + i 2 | 1 + i 1 | - | 4 + i 2 |
clog10 | 3 + i 2 | 3 + i 2 | 0 + i 1 | - | 3 + i 2 |
clog10l | - | - | - | - | 0 + i 1 |
clog10f128 | - | - | - | - | - |
cosf | 1 | 1 | 1 | - | 1 |
cos | 1 | 1 | 2 | - | 2 |
cosl | - | - | - | - | 2 |
cosf128 | - | - | - | - | - |
cos_advsimdf | - | - | - | - | - |
cos_advsimd | - | - | - | - | - |
cos_advsimdl | - | - | - | - | - |
cos_advsimdf128 | - | - | - | - | - |
cos_svef | - | - | - | - | - |
cos_sve | - | - | - | - | - |
cos_svel | - | - | - | - | - |
cos_svef128 | - | - | - | - | - |
coshf | 2 | 2 | - | - | 2 |
cosh | 2 | 2 | - | - | 2 |
coshl | - | - | - | - | - |
coshf128 | - | - | - | - | - |
cpowf | 5 + i 2 | 5 + i 2 | 4 + i 2 | - | 5 + i 2 |
cpow | 2 + i 0 | 2 + i 0 | 2 + i 2 | - | 2 + i 2 |
cpowl | - | - | - | - | 2 + i 2 |
cpowf128 | - | - | - | - | - |
csinf | 1 + i 0 | 1 + i 0 | - | - | 1 + i 0 |
csin | 1 + i 0 | 1 + i 0 | - | - | 1 + i 0 |
csinl | - | - | - | - | - |
csinf128 | - | - | - | - | - |
csinhf | 1 + i 1 | 1 + i 1 | 1 + i 1 | - | 1 + i 1 |
csinh | 0 + i 1 | 0 + i 1 | 0 + i 1 | - | 0 + i 1 |
csinhl | - | - | - | - | 0 + i 1 |
csinhf128 | - | - | - | - | - |
csqrtf | 2 + i 2 | 2 + i 2 | 1 + i 0 | - | 2 + i 2 |
csqrt | 2 + i 2 | 2 + i 2 | - | - | 2 + i 2 |
csqrtl | - | - | - | - | - |
csqrtf128 | - | - | - | - | - |
ctanf | 1 + i 2 | 1 + i 2 | - | - | 1 + i 2 |
ctan | 1 + i 2 | 1 + i 2 | 0 + i 1 | - | 1 + i 2 |
ctanl | - | - | - | - | 0 + i 1 |
ctanf128 | - | - | - | - | - |
ctanhf | 2 + i 2 | 2 + i 2 | 2 + i 1 | - | 2 + i 2 |
ctanh | 2 + i 2 | 2 + i 2 | 1 + i 0 | - | 2 + i 2 |
ctanhl | - | - | - | - | 1 + i 0 |
ctanhf128 | - | - | - | - | - |
div_ldoublef | - | - | - | - | - |
div_ldouble | - | - | - | - | - |
div_ldoublel | - | - | - | - | - |
div_ldoublef128 | - | - | - | - | - |
erff | 1 | 1 | - | - | 1 |
erf | 1 | 1 | 1 | - | 1 |
erfl | - | - | - | - | 1 |
erff128 | - | - | - | - | - |
erfcf | 3 | 3 | - | - | 3 |
erfc | 5 | 5 | 1 | - | 5 |
erfcl | - | - | - | - | 1 |
erfcf128 | - | - | - | - | - |
expf | 1 | 1 | - | - | 1 |
exp | 1 | 1 | - | - | 1 |
expl | - | - | - | - | - |
expf128 | - | - | - | - | - |
exp10f | - | - | 2 | - | 2 |
exp10 | 2 | 2 | 6 | - | 6 |
exp10l | - | - | - | - | 6 |
exp10f128 | - | - | - | - | - |
exp2f | - | 1 | - | - | 1 |
exp2 | 1 | 1 | - | - | 1 |
exp2l | - | - | - | - | - |
exp2f128 | - | - | - | - | - |
exp_advsimdf | - | - | - | - | - |
exp_advsimd | - | - | - | - | - |
exp_advsimdl | - | - | - | - | - |
exp_advsimdf128 | - | - | - | - | - |
exp_svef | - | - | - | - | - |
exp_sve | - | - | - | - | - |
exp_svel | - | - | - | - | - |
exp_svef128 | - | - | - | - | - |
expm1f | 1 | 1 | 1 | - | 1 |
expm1 | 1 | 1 | 1 | - | 1 |
expm1l | - | - | - | - | 1 |
expm1f128 | - | - | - | - | - |
fmaf | - | - | - | - | - |
fma | - | - | - | - | - |
fmal | - | - | - | - | - |
fmaf128 | - | - | - | - | - |
fma_ldoublef | - | - | - | - | - |
fma_ldouble | - | - | - | - | - |
fma_ldoublel | - | - | - | - | - |
fma_ldoublef128 | - | - | - | - | - |
fmodf | - | - | - | - | - |
fmod | - | - | - | - | - |
fmodl | - | - | - | - | - |
fmodf128 | - | - | - | - | - |
gammaf | 7 | 7 | - | - | 7 |
gamma | 4 | 4 | - | - | 4 |
gammal | - | - | - | - | - |
gammaf128 | - | - | - | - | - |
hypotf | - | - | 1 | - | 1 |
hypot | 1 | 1 | - | - | 1 |
hypotl | - | - | - | - | - |
hypotf128 | - | - | - | - | - |
j0f | 8 | 8 | 2 | - | 9 |
j0 | 2 | 2 | 2 | - | 2 |
j0l | - | - | - | - | 2 |
j0f128 | - | - | - | - | - |
j1f | 9 | 9 | 2 | - | 9 |
j1 | 2 | 2 | 1 | - | 4 |
j1l | - | - | - | - | 1 |
j1f128 | - | - | - | - | - |
jnf | 4 | 4 | 4 | - | 5 |
jn | 4 | 4 | 4 | - | 4 |
jnl | - | - | - | - | 4 |
jnf128 | - | - | - | - | - |
lgammaf | 7 | 7 | 2 | - | 7 |
lgamma | 4 | 4 | 1 | - | 4 |
lgammal | - | - | - | - | 1 |
lgammaf128 | - | - | - | - | - |
logf | - | 1 | - | - | 1 |
log | - | - | - | - | - |
logl | - | - | - | - | - |
logf128 | - | - | - | - | - |
log10f | 2 | 2 | 2 | - | 2 |
log10 | 2 | 2 | 1 | - | 2 |
log10l | - | - | - | - | 1 |
log10f128 | - | - | - | - | - |
log1pf | 1 | 1 | 1 | - | 1 |
log1p | 1 | 1 | - | - | 1 |
log1pl | - | - | - | - | - |
log1pf128 | - | - | - | - | - |
log2f | 1 | 1 | - | - | 1 |
log2 | 2 | 2 | - | - | 2 |
log2l | - | - | - | - | - |
log2f128 | - | - | - | - | - |
log_advsimdf | - | - | - | - | - |
log_advsimd | - | - | - | - | - |
log_advsimdl | - | - | - | - | - |
log_advsimdf128 | - | - | - | - | - |
log_svef | - | - | - | - | - |
log_sve | - | - | - | - | - |
log_svel | - | - | - | - | - |
log_svef128 | - | - | - | - | - |
mul_ldoublef | - | - | - | - | - |
mul_ldouble | - | - | - | - | - |
mul_ldoublel | - | - | - | - | - |
mul_ldoublef128 | - | - | - | - | - |
powf | - | 1 | - | - | 1 |
pow | 1 | 1 | - | - | 1 |
powl | - | - | - | - | - |
powf128 | - | - | - | - | - |
pow10f | - | - | - | - | - |
pow10 | - | 2 | - | - | - |
pow10l | - | - | - | - | - |
pow10f128 | - | - | - | - | - |
sinf | 1 | 1 | - | - | 1 |
sin | 1 | 1 | - | - | 1 |
sinl | - | - | - | - | - |
sinf128 | - | - | - | - | - |
sin_advsimdf | - | - | - | - | - |
sin_advsimd | - | - | - | - | - |
sin_advsimdl | - | - | - | - | - |
sin_advsimdf128 | - | - | - | - | - |
sin_svef | - | - | - | - | - |
sin_sve | - | - | - | - | - |
sin_svel | - | - | - | - | - |
sin_svef128 | - | - | - | - | - |
sincosf | - | 1 | 1 | - | 1 |
sincos | 1 | 1 | 1 | - | 1 |
sincosl | - | - | - | - | 1 |
sincosf128 | - | - | - | - | - |
sinhf | 2 | 2 | - | - | 2 |
sinh | 2 | 2 | - | - | 2 |
sinhl | - | - | - | - | - |
sinhf128 | - | - | - | - | - |
sqrtf | - | - | - | - | - |
sqrt | - | - | - | - | - |
sqrtl | - | - | - | - | - |
sqrtf128 | - | - | - | - | - |
sqrt_ldoublef | - | - | - | - | - |
sqrt_ldouble | - | - | - | - | - |
sqrt_ldoublel | - | - | - | - | - |
sqrt_ldoublef128 | - | - | - | - | - |
sub_ldoublef | - | - | - | - | - |
sub_ldouble | - | - | - | - | - |
sub_ldoublel | - | - | - | - | - |
sub_ldoublef128 | - | - | - | - | - |
tanf | 1 | 1 | - | - | 1 |
tan | - | - | 1 | - | 1 |
tanl | - | - | - | - | 1 |
tanf128 | - | - | - | - | - |
tanhf | 2 | 2 | - | - | 2 |
tanh | 2 | 2 | - | - | 2 |
tanhl | - | - | - | - | - |
tanhf128 | - | - | - | - | - |
tgammaf | 8 | 8 | 1 | - | 8 |
tgamma | 9 | 9 | 1 | - | 9 |
tgammal | - | - | - | - | 1 |
tgammaf128 | - | - | - | - | - |
y0f | 8 | 8 | 1 | - | 9 |
y0 | 3 | 3 | 2 | - | 3 |
y0l | - | - | - | - | 2 |
y0f128 | - | - | - | - | - |
y1f | 2 | 2 | 2 | - | 9 |
y1 | 3 | 3 | 3 | - | 3 |
y1l | - | - | - | - | 3 |
y1f128 | - | - | - | - | - |
ynf | 3 | 3 | 2 | - | 3 |
yn | 3 | 3 | 3 | - | 3 |
ynl | - | - | - | - | 3 |
ynf128 | - | - | - | - | - |
Function | IA64 | LoongArch 64-bit | M68k | MIPS 32-bit | MIPS 64-bit |
acosf | - | 1 | - | 1 | 1 |
acos | 1 | 1 | - | 1 | 1 |
acosl | - | 1 | - | - | 1 |
acosf128 | 1 | - | - | - | - |
acoshf | - | 2 | 1 | 2 | 2 |
acosh | 1 | 2 | 1 | 2 | 2 |
acoshl | 1 | 4 | 1 | - | 4 |
acoshf128 | 4 | - | - | - | - |
add_ldoublef | - | - | - | - | - |
add_ldouble | - | - | - | - | - |
add_ldoublel | - | - | - | - | - |
add_ldoublef128 | - | - | - | - | - |
asinf | - | 1 | - | 1 | 1 |
asin | - | 1 | - | 1 | 1 |
asinl | - | 1 | - | - | 1 |
asinf128 | 1 | - | - | - | - |
asinhf | - | 2 | 1 | 2 | 2 |
asinh | 1 | 2 | 1 | 2 | 2 |
asinhl | - | 4 | 1 | - | 4 |
asinhf128 | 4 | - | - | - | - |
atanf | - | 1 | - | 1 | 1 |
atan | - | 1 | - | 1 | 1 |
atanl | - | 1 | - | - | 1 |
atanf128 | 1 | - | - | - | - |
atan2f | - | 2 | 1 | 2 | 2 |
atan2 | - | - | - | - | - |
atan2l | - | 2 | 1 | - | 2 |
atan2f128 | 2 | - | - | - | - |
atanhf | - | 2 | - | 2 | 2 |
atanh | - | 2 | - | 2 | 2 |
atanhl | - | 4 | - | - | 4 |
atanhf128 | 4 | - | - | - | - |
cabsf | - | - | - | - | - |
cabs | - | 1 | 1 | 1 | 1 |
cabsl | - | 1 | 1 | - | 1 |
cabsf128 | 1 | - | - | - | - |
cacosf | 2 + i 2 | 2 + i 2 | 2 + i 1 | 2 + i 2 | 2 + i 2 |
cacos | 1 + i 2 | 1 + i 2 | 1 + i 1 | 1 + i 2 | 1 + i 2 |
cacosl | 1 + i 2 | 2 + i 2 | 1 + i 2 | - | 2 + i 2 |
cacosf128 | 2 + i 2 | - | - | - | - |
cacoshf | 2 + i 2 | 2 + i 2 | 1 + i 2 | 2 + i 2 | 2 + i 2 |
cacosh | 2 + i 1 | 2 + i 1 | 1 + i 1 | 2 + i 1 | 2 + i 1 |
cacoshl | 2 + i 1 | 2 + i 2 | 2 + i 1 | - | 2 + i 2 |
cacoshf128 | 2 + i 2 | - | - | - | - |
cargf | - | 1 | 1 | 1 | 1 |
carg | - | - | - | - | - |
cargl | - | 2 | 1 | - | 2 |
cargf128 | 2 | - | - | - | - |
casinf | 1 + i 2 | 1 + i 2 | 1 + i 1 | 1 + i 2 | 1 + i 2 |
casin | 1 + i 2 | 1 + i 2 | 1 + i 1 | 1 + i 2 | 1 + i 2 |
casinl | 1 + i 2 | 2 + i 2 | 1 + i 2 | - | 2 + i 2 |
casinf128 | 2 + i 2 | - | - | - | - |
casinhf | 2 + i 1 | 2 + i 1 | 1 + i 1 | 2 + i 1 | 2 + i 1 |
casinh | 2 + i 1 | 2 + i 1 | 1 + i 1 | 2 + i 1 | 2 + i 1 |
casinhl | 2 + i 1 | 2 + i 2 | 2 + i 1 | - | 2 + i 2 |
casinhf128 | 2 + i 2 | - | - | - | - |
catanf | 0 + i 1 | 1 + i 1 | 0 + i 1 | 1 + i 1 | 1 + i 1 |
catan | 1 + i 1 | 1 + i 1 | 0 + i 1 | 1 + i 1 | 1 + i 1 |
catanl | 0 + i 1 | 1 + i 1 | 1 + i 1 | - | 1 + i 1 |
catanf128 | 1 + i 1 | - | - | - | - |
catanhf | 1 + i 0 | 1 + i 1 | 1 + i 0 | 1 + i 1 | 1 + i 1 |
catanh | 1 + i 1 | 1 + i 1 | 1 + i 0 | 1 + i 1 | 1 + i 1 |
catanhl | 1 + i 0 | 1 + i 1 | 1 + i 1 | - | 1 + i 1 |
catanhf128 | 1 + i 1 | - | - | - | - |
cbrtf | - | 1 | 1 | 1 | 1 |
cbrt | - | 4 | 1 | 4 | 4 |
cbrtl | - | 1 | 1 | - | 1 |
cbrtf128 | 1 | - | - | - | - |
ccosf | 0 + i 1 | 1 + i 1 | - | 1 + i 1 | 1 + i 1 |
ccos | 1 + i 1 | 1 + i 1 | - | 1 + i 1 | 1 + i 1 |
ccosl | 1 + i 1 | 1 + i 1 | 1 + i 1 | - | 1 + i 1 |
ccosf128 | 1 + i 1 | - | - | - | - |
ccoshf | 1 + i 1 | 1 + i 1 | - | 1 + i 1 | 1 + i 1 |
ccosh | 1 + i 1 | 1 + i 1 | - | 1 + i 1 | 1 + i 1 |
ccoshl | 0 + i 1 | 1 + i 1 | 0 + i 1 | - | 1 + i 1 |
ccoshf128 | 1 + i 1 | - | - | - | - |
cexpf | 1 + i 2 | 1 + i 2 | - | 1 + i 2 | 1 + i 2 |
cexp | 2 + i 1 | 2 + i 1 | - | 2 + i 1 | 2 + i 1 |
cexpl | 1 + i 1 | 1 + i 1 | 1 + i 1 | - | 1 + i 1 |
cexpf128 | 1 + i 1 | - | - | - | - |
clogf | 3 + i 0 | 3 + i 1 | 2 + i 1 | 3 + i 1 | 3 + i 1 |
clog | 2 + i 1 | 3 + i 1 | 3 + i 1 | 3 + i 1 | 3 + i 1 |
clogl | 2 + i 1 | 2 + i 1 | 3 + i 1 | - | 2 + i 1 |
clogf128 | 2 + i 1 | - | - | - | - |
clog10f | 4 + i 2 | 4 + i 2 | 2 + i 1 | 4 + i 2 | 4 + i 2 |
clog10 | 3 + i 2 | 3 + i 2 | 2 + i 1 | 3 + i 2 | 3 + i 2 |
clog10l | 2 + i 1 | 2 + i 2 | 3 + i 2 | - | 2 + i 2 |
clog10f128 | 2 + i 2 | - | - | - | - |
cosf | 1 | 1 | - | 1 | 1 |
cos | 1 | 1 | 1 | 1 | 1 |
cosl | - | 2 | - | - | 2 |
cosf128 | 2 | - | - | - | - |
cos_advsimdf | - | - | - | - | - |
cos_advsimd | - | - | - | - | - |
cos_advsimdl | - | - | - | - | - |
cos_advsimdf128 | - | - | - | - | - |
cos_svef | - | - | - | - | - |
cos_sve | - | - | - | - | - |
cos_svel | - | - | - | - | - |
cos_svef128 | - | - | - | - | - |
coshf | - | 2 | - | 2 | 2 |
cosh | - | 2 | - | 2 | 2 |
coshl | - | 2 | - | - | 2 |
coshf128 | 2 | - | - | - | - |
cpowf | 5 + i 2 | 5 + i 2 | 3 + i 5 | 5 + i 2 | 5 + i 2 |
cpow | 2 + i 0 | 2 + i 0 | 1 + i 0 | 2 + i 0 | 2 + i 0 |
cpowl | 3 + i 4 | 4 + i 1 | 3 + i 1 | - | 4 + i 1 |
cpowf128 | 4 + i 1 | - | - | - | - |
csinf | 1 + i 1 | 1 + i 0 | - | 1 + i 0 | 1 + i 0 |
csin | 1 + i 0 | 1 + i 0 | - | 1 + i 0 | 1 + i 0 |
csinl | 1 + i 0 | 1 + i 1 | 1 + i 0 | - | 1 + i 1 |
csinf128 | 1 + i 1 | - | - | - | - |
csinhf | 1 + i 1 | 1 + i 1 | - | 1 + i 1 | 1 + i 1 |
csinh | 1 + i 1 | 0 + i 1 | - | 0 + i 1 | 0 + i 1 |
csinhl | 1 + i 1 | 1 + i 1 | 1 + i 0 | - | 1 + i 1 |
csinhf128 | 1 + i 1 | - | - | - | - |
csqrtf | 2 + i 2 | 2 + i 2 | 1 + i 1 | 2 + i 2 | 2 + i 2 |
csqrt | 2 + i 2 | 2 + i 2 | 1 + i 1 | 2 + i 2 | 2 + i 2 |
csqrtl | 2 + i 2 | 2 + i 2 | 2 + i 2 | - | 2 + i 2 |
csqrtf128 | 2 + i 2 | - | - | - | - |
ctanf | 1 + i 1 | 1 + i 2 | 1 + i 1 | 1 + i 2 | 1 + i 2 |
ctan | 1 + i 2 | 2 + i 2 | 1 + i 1 | 1 + i 2 | 1 + i 2 |
ctanl | 2 + i 2 | 3 + i 3 | 2 + i 2 | - | 3 + i 3 |
ctanf128 | 3 + i 3 | - | - | - | - |
ctanhf | 1 + i 1 | 2 + i 2 | 1 + i 2 | 2 + i 2 | 2 + i 2 |
ctanh | 2 + i 2 | 2 + i 2 | 1 + i 1 | 2 + i 2 | 2 + i 2 |
ctanhl | 1 + i 2 | 3 + i 3 | 2 + i 2 | - | 3 + i 3 |
ctanhf128 | 3 + i 3 | - | - | - | - |
div_ldoublef | - | - | - | - | - |
div_ldouble | - | - | - | - | - |
div_ldoublel | - | - | - | - | - |
div_ldoublef128 | - | - | - | - | - |
erff | - | 1 | 1 | 1 | 1 |
erf | - | 1 | - | 1 | 1 |
erfl | - | 1 | 1 | - | 1 |
erff128 | 1 | - | - | - | - |
erfcf | - | 3 | 1 | 3 | 3 |
erfc | - | 5 | - | 5 | 5 |
erfcl | - | 4 | 2 | - | 4 |
erfcf128 | 4 | - | - | - | - |
expf | 1 | 1 | - | 1 | 1 |
exp | - | 1 | - | 1 | 1 |
expl | - | 1 | - | - | 1 |
expf128 | 1 | - | - | - | - |
exp10f | 1 | - | - | 1 | 1 |
exp10 | - | 2 | - | 2 | 2 |
exp10l | - | 2 | - | - | 2 |
exp10f128 | 2 | - | - | - | - |
exp2f | - | - | - | 1 | 1 |
exp2 | 1 | 1 | 1 | 1 | 1 |
exp2l | 1 | 1 | - | - | 1 |
exp2f128 | 1 | - | - | - | - |
exp_advsimdf | - | - | - | - | - |
exp_advsimd | - | - | - | - | - |
exp_advsimdl | - | - | - | - | - |
exp_advsimdf128 | - | - | - | - | - |
exp_svef | - | - | - | - | - |
exp_sve | - | - | - | - | - |
exp_svel | - | - | - | - | - |
exp_svef128 | - | - | - | - | - |
expm1f | - | 1 | - | 1 | 1 |
expm1 | 1 | 1 | - | 1 | 1 |
expm1l | 1 | 2 | - | - | 2 |
expm1f128 | 2 | - | - | - | - |
fmaf | - | - | - | - | - |
fma | - | - | - | - | - |
fmal | - | - | - | - | - |
fmaf128 | - | - | - | - | - |
fma_ldoublef | - | - | - | - | - |
fma_ldouble | - | - | - | - | - |
fma_ldoublel | - | - | - | - | - |
fma_ldoublef128 | - | - | - | - | - |
fmodf | - | - | - | - | - |
fmod | - | - | - | - | - |
fmodl | - | - | - | - | - |
fmodf128 | - | - | - | - | - |
gammaf | 1 | 7 | 1 | 7 | 7 |
gamma | - | 4 | - | 4 | 4 |
gammal | - | 5 | 2 | - | 5 |
gammaf128 | - | - | - | - | - |
hypotf | - | 1 | - | 1 | 1 |
hypot | - | 1 | 1 | 1 | 1 |
hypotl | - | 1 | 1 | - | 1 |
hypotf128 | 1 | - | - | - | - |
j0f | 9 | 9 | 2 | 9 | 9 |
j0 | 3 | 3 | 1 | 2 | 2 |
j0l | 8 | 2 | 2 | - | 2 |
j0f128 | 2 | - | - | - | - |
j1f | 9 | 9 | 2 | 9 | 9 |
j1 | 4 | 4 | - | 4 | 4 |
j1l | 6 | 4 | 1 | - | 4 |
j1f128 | 4 | - | - | - | - |
jnf | 4 | 4 | 2 | 4 | 4 |
jn | 4 | 4 | 2 | 4 | 4 |
jnl | 4 | 7 | 4 | - | 7 |
jnf128 | 7 | - | - | - | - |
lgammaf | 1 | 7 | 1 | 7 | 7 |
lgamma | - | 4 | - | 4 | 4 |
lgammal | - | 5 | 2 | - | 5 |
lgammaf128 | 5 | - | - | - | - |
logf | - | - | - | 1 | 1 |
log | - | 1 | - | - | - |
logl | - | 1 | - | - | 1 |
logf128 | 1 | - | - | - | - |
log10f | - | 2 | - | 2 | 2 |
log10 | - | 2 | - | 2 | 2 |
log10l | - | 2 | - | - | 2 |
log10f128 | 2 | - | - | - | - |
log1pf | - | 1 | - | 1 | 1 |
log1p | - | 1 | - | 1 | 1 |
log1pl | - | 3 | - | - | 3 |
log1pf128 | 3 | - | - | - | - |
log2f | - | 1 | - | 1 | 1 |
log2 | - | 1 | - | 2 | 2 |
log2l | - | 3 | - | - | 3 |
log2f128 | 3 | - | - | - | - |
log_advsimdf | - | - | - | - | - |
log_advsimd | - | - | - | - | - |
log_advsimdl | - | - | - | - | - |
log_advsimdf128 | - | - | - | - | - |
log_svef | - | - | - | - | - |
log_sve | - | - | - | - | - |
log_svel | - | - | - | - | - |
log_svef128 | - | - | - | - | - |
mul_ldoublef | - | - | - | - | - |
mul_ldouble | - | - | - | - | - |
mul_ldoublel | - | - | - | - | - |
mul_ldoublef128 | - | - | - | - | - |
powf | - | - | 7 | 1 | 1 |
pow | - | 1 | 1 | 1 | 1 |
powl | - | 2 | 9 | - | 2 |
powf128 | 2 | - | - | - | - |
pow10f | - | - | - | - | - |
pow10 | - | - | - | - | - |
pow10l | - | - | - | - | - |
pow10f128 | - | - | - | - | - |
sinf | - | 1 | - | 1 | 1 |
sin | 1 | 1 | 1 | 1 | 1 |
sinl | - | 2 | - | - | 2 |
sinf128 | 2 | - | - | - | - |
sin_advsimdf | - | - | - | - | - |
sin_advsimd | - | - | - | - | - |
sin_advsimdl | - | - | - | - | - |
sin_advsimdf128 | - | - | - | - | - |
sin_svef | - | - | - | - | - |
sin_sve | - | - | - | - | - |
sin_svel | - | - | - | - | - |
sin_svef128 | - | - | - | - | - |
sincosf | - | - | - | 1 | 1 |
sincos | 1 | 1 | - | 1 | 1 |
sincosl | - | 1 | - | - | 1 |
sincosf128 | 1 | - | - | - | - |
sinhf | - | 2 | - | 2 | 2 |
sinh | - | 2 | - | 2 | 2 |
sinhl | - | 2 | - | - | 2 |
sinhf128 | 2 | - | - | - | - |
sqrtf | - | - | - | - | - |
sqrt | - | - | - | - | - |
sqrtl | - | - | - | - | - |
sqrtf128 | - | - | - | - | - |
sqrt_ldoublef | - | - | - | - | - |
sqrt_ldouble | - | - | - | - | - |
sqrt_ldoublel | - | - | - | - | - |
sqrt_ldoublef128 | - | - | - | - | - |
sub_ldoublef | - | - | - | - | - |
sub_ldouble | - | - | - | - | - |
sub_ldoublel | - | - | - | - | - |
sub_ldoublef128 | - | - | - | - | - |
tanf | - | 1 | - | 1 | 1 |
tan | - | 1 | - | - | - |
tanl | 1 | 1 | - | - | 1 |
tanf128 | 1 | - | - | - | - |
tanhf | - | 2 | - | 2 | 2 |
tanh | - | 2 | - | 2 | 2 |
tanhl | - | 2 | - | - | 2 |
tanhf128 | 2 | - | - | - | - |
tgammaf | - | 8 | 4 | 8 | 8 |
tgamma | - | 9 | 1 | 9 | 9 |
tgammal | 1 | 4 | 9 | - | 4 |
tgammaf128 | 4 | - | - | - | - |
y0f | 8 | 9 | 1 | 9 | 9 |
y0 | 2 | 3 | 1 | 3 | 3 |
y0l | 1 | 3 | 1 | - | 3 |
y0f128 | 3 | - | - | - | - |
y1f | 9 | 9 | 3 | 9 | 9 |
y1 | 3 | 3 | 1 | 3 | 3 |
y1l | 5 | 5 | 2 | - | 5 |
y1f128 | 5 | - | - | - | - |
ynf | 3 | 3 | 3 | 3 | 3 |
yn | 3 | 3 | 2 | 3 | 3 |
ynl | 3 | 5 | 4 | - | 5 |
ynf128 | 5 | - | - | - | - |
Function | MicroBlaze | Nios II | OpenRISC | PowerPC | PowerPC soft-float |
acosf | 1 | 1 | 1 | 1 | 1 |
acos | - | 1 | 1 | 1 | 1 |
acosl | - | - | - | 1 | 1 |
acosf128 | - | - | - | 1 | - |
acoshf | 2 | 2 | 2 | 2 | 2 |
acosh | 2 | 2 | 2 | 2 | 2 |
acoshl | - | - | - | 2 | 1 |
acoshf128 | - | - | - | 4 | - |
add_ldoublef | - | - | - | 1 | 1 |
add_ldouble | - | - | - | 1 | 1 |
add_ldoublel | - | - | - | - | - |
add_ldoublef128 | - | - | - | - | - |
asinf | 1 | 1 | 1 | 1 | 1 |
asin | - | 1 | 1 | 1 | 1 |
asinl | - | - | - | 2 | 2 |
asinf128 | - | - | - | 1 | - |
asinhf | 1 | 2 | 2 | 2 | 2 |
asinh | 1 | 2 | 2 | 2 | 2 |
asinhl | - | - | - | 2 | 2 |
asinhf128 | - | - | - | 4 | - |
atanf | 1 | 1 | 1 | 1 | 1 |
atan | - | 1 | 1 | 1 | 1 |
atanl | - | - | - | 1 | 1 |
atanf128 | - | - | - | 1 | - |
atan2f | 1 | 2 | 2 | 1 | 2 |
atan2 | - | - | - | - | - |
atan2l | - | - | - | 2 | 2 |
atan2f128 | - | - | - | 2 | - |
atanhf | 2 | 2 | 2 | 2 | 2 |
atanh | 2 | 2 | 2 | 2 | 2 |
atanhl | - | - | - | 2 | 2 |
atanhf128 | - | - | - | 4 | - |
cabsf | - | - | - | - | - |
cabs | 1 | 1 | 1 | 1 | 1 |
cabsl | - | - | - | 1 | 1 |
cabsf128 | - | - | - | 1 | - |
cacosf | 2 + i 2 | 2 + i 2 | 2 + i 2 | 2 + i 2 | 2 + i 2 |
cacos | 1 + i 2 | 1 + i 2 | 1 + i 2 | 1 + i 2 | 1 + i 2 |
cacosl | - | - | - | 1 + i 2 | 2 + i 1 |
cacosf128 | - | - | - | 2 + i 2 | - |
cacoshf | 2 + i 2 | 2 + i 2 | 2 + i 2 | 2 + i 2 | 2 + i 2 |
cacosh | 2 + i 1 | 2 + i 1 | 2 + i 1 | 2 + i 1 | 2 + i 1 |
cacoshl | - | - | - | 2 + i 1 | 1 + i 2 |
cacoshf128 | - | - | - | 2 + i 2 | - |
cargf | 1 | 1 | 1 | 1 | 1 |
carg | - | - | - | 1 | - |
cargl | - | - | - | 2 | 2 |
cargf128 | - | - | - | 2 | - |
casinf | 1 + i 2 | 1 + i 2 | 1 + i 2 | 1 + i 2 | 1 + i 2 |
casin | 1 + i 2 | 1 + i 2 | 1 + i 2 | 1 + i 2 | 1 + i 2 |
casinl | - | - | - | 1 + i 2 | 2 + i 1 |
casinf128 | - | - | - | 2 + i 2 | - |
casinhf | 2 + i 1 | 2 + i 1 | 2 + i 1 | 2 + i 1 | 2 + i 1 |
casinh | 2 + i 1 | 2 + i 1 | 2 + i 1 | 2 + i 1 | 2 + i 1 |
casinhl | - | - | - | 2 + i 1 | 1 + i 2 |
casinhf128 | - | - | - | 2 + i 2 | - |
catanf | 1 + i 1 | 1 + i 1 | 1 + i 1 | 1 + i 1 | 1 + i 1 |
catan | 1 + i 1 | 1 + i 1 | 1 + i 1 | 1 + i 1 | 1 + i 1 |
catanl | - | - | - | 3 + i 2 | 3 + i 2 |
catanf128 | - | - | - | 1 + i 1 | - |
catanhf | 1 + i 1 | 1 + i 1 | 1 + i 1 | 1 + i 1 | 1 + i 1 |
catanh | 1 + i 1 | 1 + i 1 | 1 + i 1 | 1 + i 1 | 1 + i 1 |
catanhl | - | - | - | 2 + i 3 | 2 + i 3 |
catanhf128 | - | - | - | 1 + i 1 | - |
cbrtf | 1 | 1 | 1 | 1 | 1 |
cbrt | 3 | 4 | 4 | 4 | 4 |
cbrtl | - | - | - | 1 | 1 |
cbrtf128 | - | - | - | 1 | - |
ccosf | 1 + i 1 | 1 + i 1 | 1 + i 1 | 1 + i 1 | 1 + i 1 |
ccos | 1 + i 1 | 1 + i 1 | 1 + i 1 | 1 + i 1 | 1 + i 1 |
ccosl | - | - | - | 1 + i 2 | 1 + i 2 |
ccosf128 | - | - | - | 1 + i 1 | - |
ccoshf | 1 + i 1 | 1 + i 1 | 1 + i 1 | 1 + i 1 | 1 + i 1 |
ccosh | 1 + i 1 | 1 + i 1 | 2 + i 1 | 1 + i 1 | 1 + i 1 |
ccoshl | - | - | - | 1 + i 2 | 1 + i 2 |
ccoshf128 | - | - | - | 1 + i 1 | - |
cexpf | 1 + i 2 | 1 + i 2 | 1 + i 2 | 1 + i 2 | 1 + i 2 |
cexp | 2 + i 1 | 2 + i 1 | 2 + i 1 | 2 + i 1 | 2 + i 1 |
cexpl | - | - | - | 2 + i 2 | 1 + i 1 |
cexpf128 | - | - | - | 1 + i 1 | - |
clogf | 3 + i 1 | 3 + i 1 | 3 + i 1 | 3 + i 1 | 3 + i 1 |
clog | 3 + i 0 | 3 + i 1 | 3 + i 1 | 3 + i 1 | 3 + i 1 |
clogl | - | - | - | 5 + i 2 | 2 + i 2 |
clogf128 | - | - | - | 2 + i 1 | - |
clog10f | 4 + i 2 | 4 + i 2 | 4 + i 2 | 4 + i 2 | 4 + i 2 |
clog10 | 3 + i 2 | 3 + i 2 | 3 + i 2 | 3 + i 2 | 3 + i 2 |
clog10l | - | - | - | 3 + i 2 | 3 + i 2 |
clog10f128 | - | - | - | 2 + i 2 | - |
cosf | 1 | 1 | 1 | 3 | 1 |
cos | - | 1 | 1 | 1 | 1 |
cosl | - | - | - | 4 | 4 |
cosf128 | - | - | - | 2 | - |
cos_advsimdf | - | - | - | - | - |
cos_advsimd | - | - | - | - | - |
cos_advsimdl | - | - | - | - | - |
cos_advsimdf128 | - | - | - | - | - |
cos_svef | - | - | - | - | - |
cos_sve | - | - | - | - | - |
cos_svel | - | - | - | - | - |
cos_svef128 | - | - | - | - | - |
coshf | 1 | 2 | 2 | 2 | 2 |
cosh | 1 | 2 | 2 | 2 | 2 |
coshl | - | - | - | 3 | 3 |
coshf128 | - | - | - | 2 | - |
cpowf | 4 + i 2 | 5 + i 2 | 5 + i 2 | 5 + i 2 | 5 + i 2 |
cpow | 2 + i 0 | 2 + i 0 | 2 + i 0 | 2 + i 0 | 2 + i 0 |
cpowl | - | - | - | 4 + i 2 | 4 + i 1 |
cpowf128 | - | - | - | 4 + i 1 | - |
csinf | 1 + i 0 | 1 + i 0 | 1 + i 0 | 1 + i 0 | 1 + i 0 |
csin | 1 + i 0 | 1 + i 0 | 1 + i 0 | 1 + i 0 | 1 + i 0 |
csinl | - | - | - | 2 + i 1 | 2 + i 1 |
csinf128 | - | - | - | 1 + i 1 | - |
csinhf | 1 + i 1 | 1 + i 1 | 1 + i 1 | 1 + i 1 | 1 + i 1 |
csinh | 0 + i 1 | 0 + i 1 | 0 + i 1 | 0 + i 1 | 0 + i 1 |
csinhl | - | - | - | 1 + i 2 | 1 + i 2 |
csinhf128 | - | - | - | 1 + i 1 | - |
csqrtf | 2 + i 2 | 2 + i 2 | 2 + i 2 | 2 + i 2 | 2 + i 2 |
csqrt | 2 + i 2 | 2 + i 2 | 2 + i 2 | 2 + i 2 | 2 + i 2 |
csqrtl | - | - | - | 1 + i 1 | 1 + i 1 |
csqrtf128 | - | - | - | 2 + i 2 | - |
ctanf | 1 + i 1 | 1 + i 2 | 1 + i 2 | 1 + i 2 | 1 + i 2 |
ctan | 1 + i 2 | 1 + i 2 | 1 + i 2 | 1 + i 2 | 1 + i 2 |
ctanl | - | - | - | 3 + i 2 | 3 + i 2 |
ctanf128 | - | - | - | 3 + i 3 | - |
ctanhf | 1 + i 2 | 2 + i 2 | 2 + i 2 | 2 + i 1 | 2 + i 2 |
ctanh | 2 + i 2 | 2 + i 2 | 2 + i 2 | 2 + i 2 | 2 + i 2 |
ctanhl | - | - | - | 3 + i 3 | 2 + i 3 |
ctanhf128 | - | - | - | 3 + i 3 | - |
div_ldoublef | - | - | - | 1 | 1 |
div_ldouble | - | - | - | - | - |
div_ldoublel | - | - | - | - | - |
div_ldoublef128 | - | - | - | - | - |
erff | 1 | 1 | 1 | 1 | 1 |
erf | 1 | 1 | 1 | 1 | 1 |
erfl | - | - | - | 1 | 1 |
erff128 | - | - | - | 1 | - |
erfcf | 2 | 3 | 3 | 2 | 3 |
erfc | 3 | 5 | 5 | 2 | 5 |
erfcl | - | - | - | 3 | 3 |
erfcf128 | - | - | - | 4 | - |
expf | 1 | 1 | 1 | 1 | 1 |
exp | - | 1 | 1 | 1 | 1 |
expl | - | - | - | 1 | 1 |
expf128 | - | - | - | 1 | - |
exp10f | - | - | 1 | 1 | - |
exp10 | 2 | 2 | 2 | 2 | 2 |
exp10l | - | - | - | 1 | 1 |
exp10f128 | - | - | - | 2 | - |
exp2f | 1 | 1 | - | - | 1 |
exp2 | 1 | 1 | 1 | 1 | 1 |
exp2l | - | - | - | 2 | 1 |
exp2f128 | - | - | - | 1 | - |
exp_advsimdf | - | - | - | - | - |
exp_advsimd | - | - | - | - | - |
exp_advsimdl | - | - | - | - | - |
exp_advsimdf128 | - | - | - | - | - |
exp_svef | - | - | - | - | - |
exp_sve | - | - | - | - | - |
exp_svel | - | - | - | - | - |
exp_svef128 | - | - | - | - | - |
expm1f | 1 | 1 | 1 | 1 | 1 |
expm1 | 1 | 1 | 1 | 1 | 1 |
expm1l | - | - | - | 1 | 1 |
expm1f128 | - | - | - | 2 | - |
fmaf | - | - | - | - | - |
fma | - | - | - | - | - |
fmal | - | - | - | 1 | 1 |
fmaf128 | - | - | - | - | - |
fma_ldoublef | - | - | - | 1 | - |
fma_ldouble | - | - | - | 1 | - |
fma_ldoublel | - | - | - | - | - |
fma_ldoublef128 | - | - | - | - | - |
fmodf | - | - | - | - | - |
fmod | - | - | - | - | - |
fmodl | - | - | - | 1 | 1 |
fmodf128 | - | - | - | - | - |
gammaf | 4 | 7 | 7 | 4 | 7 |
gamma | 4 | 4 | 4 | 3 | 4 |
gammal | - | - | - | 3 | 3 |
gammaf128 | - | - | - | 5 | - |
hypotf | - | - | - | 1 | - |
hypot | 1 | 1 | 1 | 1 | 1 |
hypotl | - | - | - | 1 | 1 |
hypotf128 | - | - | - | 1 | - |
j0f | 2 | 8 | 9 | 9 | 9 |
j0 | 2 | 2 | 2 | 3 | 2 |
j0l | - | - | - | 5 | 4 |
j0f128 | - | - | - | 7 | - |
j1f | 2 | 9 | 9 | 9 | 9 |
j1 | 1 | 2 | 4 | 4 | 4 |
j1l | - | - | - | 6 | 10 |
j1f128 | - | - | - | 4 | - |
jnf | 4 | 4 | 4 | 4 | 4 |
jn | 4 | 4 | 4 | 4 | 4 |
jnl | - | - | - | 4 | 4 |
jnf128 | - | - | - | 7 | - |
lgammaf | 4 | 7 | 7 | 4 | 7 |
lgamma | 4 | 4 | 4 | 3 | 4 |
lgammal | - | - | - | 3 | 3 |
lgammaf128 | - | - | - | 5 | - |
logf | 1 | 1 | - | 1 | 1 |
log | - | - | - | 1 | - |
logl | - | - | - | 1 | 1 |
logf128 | - | - | - | 1 | - |
log10f | 2 | 2 | 2 | 2 | 2 |
log10 | 2 | 2 | 2 | 2 | 2 |
log10l | - | - | - | 1 | 1 |
log10f128 | - | - | - | 2 | - |
log1pf | 1 | 1 | 1 | 1 | 1 |
log1p | 1 | 1 | 1 | 1 | 1 |
log1pl | - | - | - | 2 | 2 |
log1pf128 | - | - | - | 3 | - |
log2f | 1 | 1 | 1 | 1 | 1 |
log2 | 2 | 2 | - | 1 | 2 |
log2l | - | - | - | 1 | 1 |
log2f128 | - | - | - | 3 | - |
log_advsimdf | - | - | - | - | - |
log_advsimd | - | - | - | - | - |
log_advsimdl | - | - | - | - | - |
log_advsimdf128 | - | - | - | - | - |
log_svef | - | - | - | - | - |
log_sve | - | - | - | - | - |
log_svel | - | - | - | - | - |
log_svef128 | - | - | - | - | - |
mul_ldoublef | - | - | - | 1 | 1 |
mul_ldouble | - | - | - | 1 | 1 |
mul_ldoublel | - | - | - | - | - |
mul_ldoublef128 | - | - | - | - | - |
powf | 1 | 3 | - | 1 | 1 |
pow | - | 1 | 1 | 1 | 1 |
powl | - | - | - | 1 | 1 |
powf128 | - | - | - | 2 | - |
pow10f | - | - | - | - | - |
pow10 | - | - | - | - | - |
pow10l | - | - | - | - | - |
pow10f128 | - | - | - | - | - |
sinf | 1 | 1 | 1 | 1 | 1 |
sin | - | 1 | 1 | 1 | 1 |
sinl | - | - | - | 1 | 1 |
sinf128 | - | - | - | 2 | - |
sin_advsimdf | - | - | - | - | - |
sin_advsimd | - | - | - | - | - |
sin_advsimdl | - | - | - | - | - |
sin_advsimdf128 | - | - | - | - | - |
sin_svef | - | - | - | - | - |
sin_sve | - | - | - | - | - |
sin_svel | - | - | - | - | - |
sin_svef128 | - | - | - | - | - |
sincosf | 1 | 1 | - | 1 | 1 |
sincos | - | 1 | 1 | 1 | 1 |
sincosl | - | - | - | 1 | 1 |
sincosf128 | - | - | - | 1 | - |
sinhf | 2 | 2 | 2 | 2 | 2 |
sinh | 2 | 2 | 2 | 2 | 2 |
sinhl | - | - | - | 3 | 3 |
sinhf128 | - | - | - | 2 | - |
sqrtf | - | - | - | - | - |
sqrt | - | - | - | - | - |
sqrtl | - | - | - | 1 | 1 |
sqrtf128 | - | - | - | - | - |
sqrt_ldoublef | - | - | - | - | - |
sqrt_ldouble | - | - | - | 1 | - |
sqrt_ldoublel | - | - | - | - | - |
sqrt_ldoublef128 | - | - | - | - | - |
sub_ldoublef | - | - | - | 1 | 1 |
sub_ldouble | - | - | - | 1 | 1 |
sub_ldoublel | - | - | - | - | - |
sub_ldoublef128 | - | - | - | - | - |
tanf | 1 | 1 | 1 | 3 | 1 |
tan | - | - | - | - | - |
tanl | - | - | - | 2 | 2 |
tanf128 | - | - | - | 1 | - |
tanhf | 2 | 2 | 2 | 2 | 2 |
tanh | 2 | 2 | 2 | 2 | 2 |
tanhl | - | - | - | 1 | 1 |
tanhf128 | - | - | - | 2 | - |
tgammaf | 4 | 8 | 8 | 8 | 8 |
tgamma | 5 | 9 | 9 | 9 | 9 |
tgammal | - | - | - | 5 | 5 |
tgammaf128 | - | - | - | 4 | - |
y0f | 1 | 8 | 9 | 8 | 9 |
y0 | 2 | 3 | 3 | 2 | 3 |
y0l | - | - | - | 10 | 10 |
y0f128 | - | - | - | 3 | - |
y1f | 2 | 2 | 9 | 9 | 9 |
y1 | 3 | 3 | 3 | 3 | 3 |
y1l | - | - | - | 2 | 2 |
y1f128 | - | - | - | 5 | - |
ynf | 2 | 3 | 3 | 3 | 3 |
yn | 3 | 3 | 3 | 3 | 3 |
ynl | - | - | - | 2 | 2 |
ynf128 | - | - | - | 5 | - |
Function | RISC-V 64-bit | RISC-V soft-float | S/390 | SH | Sparc |
acosf | 1 | 1 | 1 | 1 | 1 |
acos | 1 | 1 | 1 | - | 1 |
acosl | 1 | 1 | 1 | - | 1 |
acosf128 | - | - | - | - | - |
acoshf | 2 | 2 | 2 | 2 | 2 |
acosh | 2 | 2 | 2 | 2 | 2 |
acoshl | 4 | 4 | 4 | - | 4 |
acoshf128 | - | - | - | - | - |
add_ldoublef | - | - | - | - | - |
add_ldouble | - | - | - | - | - |
add_ldoublel | - | - | - | - | - |
add_ldoublef128 | - | - | - | - | - |
asinf | 1 | 1 | 1 | 1 | 1 |
asin | 1 | 1 | 1 | - | 1 |
asinl | 1 | 1 | 1 | - | 1 |
asinf128 | - | - | - | - | - |
asinhf | 2 | 2 | 2 | 2 | 2 |
asinh | 2 | 2 | 2 | 2 | 2 |
asinhl | 4 | 4 | 4 | - | 4 |
asinhf128 | - | - | - | - | - |
atanf | 1 | 1 | 1 | 1 | 1 |
atan | 1 | 1 | 1 | - | 1 |
atanl | 1 | 1 | 1 | - | 1 |
atanf128 | - | - | - | - | - |
atan2f | 1 | 2 | 1 | 1 | 2 |
atan2 | - | - | - | - | - |
atan2l | 2 | 2 | 2 | - | 2 |
atan2f128 | - | - | - | - | - |
atanhf | 2 | 2 | 2 | 2 | 2 |
atanh | 2 | 2 | 2 | 2 | 2 |
atanhl | 4 | 4 | 4 | - | 4 |
atanhf128 | - | - | - | - | - |
cabsf | - | - | - | - | - |
cabs | 1 | 1 | 1 | 1 | 1 |
cabsl | 1 | 1 | 1 | - | 1 |
cabsf128 | - | - | - | - | - |
cacosf | 2 + i 2 | 2 + i 2 | 2 + i 2 | 2 + i 2 | 2 + i 2 |
cacos | 1 + i 2 | 1 + i 2 | 1 + i 2 | 1 + i 2 | 1 + i 2 |
cacosl | 2 + i 2 | 2 + i 2 | 2 + i 2 | - | 2 + i 2 |
cacosf128 | - | - | - | - | - |
cacoshf | 2 + i 2 | 2 + i 2 | 2 + i 2 | 2 + i 2 | 2 + i 2 |
cacosh | 2 + i 1 | 2 + i 1 | 2 + i 1 | 2 + i 1 | 2 + i 1 |
cacoshl | 2 + i 2 | 2 + i 2 | 2 + i 2 | - | 2 + i 2 |
cacoshf128 | - | - | - | - | - |
cargf | 1 | 1 | 1 | 1 | 1 |
carg | - | - | - | - | - |
cargl | 2 | 2 | 2 | - | 2 |
cargf128 | - | - | - | - | - |
casinf | 1 + i 2 | 1 + i 2 | 1 + i 2 | 1 + i 2 | 1 + i 2 |
casin | 1 + i 2 | 1 + i 2 | 1 + i 2 | 1 + i 2 | 1 + i 2 |
casinl | 2 + i 2 | 2 + i 2 | 2 + i 2 | - | 2 + i 2 |
casinf128 | - | - | - | - | - |
casinhf | 2 + i 1 | 2 + i 1 | 2 + i 1 | 2 + i 1 | 2 + i 1 |
casinh | 2 + i 1 | 2 + i 1 | 2 + i 1 | 2 + i 1 | 2 + i 1 |
casinhl | 2 + i 2 | 2 + i 2 | 2 + i 2 | - | 2 + i 2 |
casinhf128 | - | - | - | - | - |
catanf | 1 + i 1 | 1 + i 1 | 1 + i 1 | 1 + i 1 | 1 + i 1 |
catan | 1 + i 1 | 1 + i 1 | 1 + i 1 | 1 + i 1 | 1 + i 1 |
catanl | 1 + i 1 | 1 + i 1 | 1 + i 1 | - | 1 + i 1 |
catanf128 | - | - | - | - | - |
catanhf | 1 + i 1 | 1 + i 1 | 1 + i 1 | 1 + i 1 | 1 + i 1 |
catanh | 1 + i 1 | 1 + i 1 | 1 + i 1 | 1 + i 1 | 1 + i 1 |
catanhl | 1 + i 1 | 1 + i 1 | 1 + i 1 | - | 1 + i 1 |
catanhf128 | - | - | - | - | - |
cbrtf | 1 | 1 | 1 | 1 | 1 |
cbrt | 4 | 4 | 4 | 4 | 4 |
cbrtl | 1 | 1 | 1 | - | 1 |
cbrtf128 | - | - | - | - | - |
ccosf | 1 + i 1 | 1 + i 1 | 1 + i 1 | 1 + i 1 | 1 + i 1 |
ccos | 1 + i 1 | 1 + i 1 | 1 + i 1 | 1 + i 1 | 1 + i 1 |
ccosl | 1 + i 1 | 1 + i 1 | 1 + i 1 | - | 1 + i 1 |
ccosf128 | - | - | - | - | - |
ccoshf | 1 + i 1 | 1 + i 1 | 1 + i 1 | 1 + i 1 | 1 + i 1 |
ccosh | 1 + i 1 | 1 + i 1 | 1 + i 1 | 1 + i 1 | 1 + i 1 |
ccoshl | 1 + i 1 | 1 + i 1 | 1 + i 1 | - | 1 + i 1 |
ccoshf128 | - | - | - | - | - |
cexpf | 1 + i 2 | 1 + i 2 | 1 + i 2 | 1 + i 2 | 1 + i 2 |
cexp | 2 + i 1 | 2 + i 1 | 2 + i 1 | 2 + i 1 | 2 + i 1 |
cexpl | 1 + i 1 | 1 + i 1 | 1 + i 1 | - | 1 + i 1 |
cexpf128 | - | - | - | - | - |
clogf | 3 + i 1 | 3 + i 1 | 3 + i 1 | 3 + i 1 | 3 + i 1 |
clog | 3 + i 1 | 3 + i 1 | 3 + i 1 | 3 + i 0 | 3 + i 1 |
clogl | 2 + i 1 | 2 + i 1 | 2 + i 1 | - | 4 + i 1 |
clogf128 | - | - | - | - | - |
clog10f | 4 + i 2 | 4 + i 2 | 4 + i 2 | 4 + i 2 | 4 + i 2 |
clog10 | 3 + i 2 | 3 + i 2 | 3 + i 2 | 3 + i 2 | 3 + i 2 |
clog10l | 2 + i 2 | 2 + i 2 | 2 + i 2 | - | 4 + i 2 |
clog10f128 | - | - | - | - | - |
cosf | 1 | 1 | 1 | 1 | 1 |
cos | 1 | 1 | 1 | 1 | 1 |
cosl | 2 | 2 | 2 | - | 2 |
cosf128 | - | - | - | - | - |
cos_advsimdf | - | - | - | - | - |
cos_advsimd | - | - | - | - | - |
cos_advsimdl | - | - | - | - | - |
cos_advsimdf128 | - | - | - | - | - |
cos_svef | - | - | - | - | - |
cos_sve | - | - | - | - | - |
cos_svel | - | - | - | - | - |
cos_svef128 | - | - | - | - | - |
coshf | 2 | 2 | 2 | 2 | 2 |
cosh | 2 | 2 | 2 | 2 | 2 |
coshl | 2 | 2 | 2 | - | 2 |
coshf128 | - | - | - | - | - |
cpowf | 5 + i 2 | 5 + i 2 | 5 + i 2 | 5 + i 2 | 5 + i 2 |
cpow | 2 + i 0 | 2 + i 0 | 2 + i 0 | 2 + i 0 | 2 + i 0 |
cpowl | 4 + i 1 | 4 + i 1 | 4 + i 1 | - | 4 + i 1 |
cpowf128 | - | - | - | - | - |
csinf | 1 + i 0 | 1 + i 0 | 1 + i 0 | 1 + i 0 | 1 + i 0 |
csin | 1 + i 0 | 1 + i 0 | 1 + i 0 | 1 + i 0 | 1 + i 0 |
csinl | 1 + i 1 | 1 + i 1 | 1 + i 1 | - | 1 + i 1 |
csinf128 | - | - | - | - | - |
csinhf | 1 + i 1 | 1 + i 1 | 1 + i 1 | 1 + i 1 | 1 + i 1 |
csinh | 0 + i 1 | 0 + i 1 | 0 + i 1 | 0 + i 1 | 0 + i 1 |
csinhl | 1 + i 1 | 1 + i 1 | 1 + i 1 | - | 1 + i 1 |
csinhf128 | - | - | - | - | - |
csqrtf | 2 + i 2 | 2 + i 2 | 2 + i 2 | 2 + i 2 | 2 + i 2 |
csqrt | 2 + i 2 | 2 + i 2 | 2 + i 2 | 2 + i 2 | 2 + i 2 |
csqrtl | 2 + i 2 | 2 + i 2 | 2 + i 2 | - | 2 + i 2 |
csqrtf128 | - | - | - | - | - |
ctanf | 1 + i 2 | 1 + i 2 | 1 + i 2 | 1 + i 2 | 1 + i 2 |
ctan | 1 + i 2 | 1 + i 2 | 1 + i 2 | 1 + i 2 | 1 + i 2 |
ctanl | 3 + i 3 | 3 + i 3 | 3 + i 3 | - | 3 + i 3 |
ctanf128 | - | - | - | - | - |
ctanhf | 2 + i 1 | 2 + i 2 | 2 + i 1 | 2 + i 2 | 2 + i 2 |
ctanh | 2 + i 2 | 2 + i 2 | 2 + i 2 | 2 + i 2 | 2 + i 2 |
ctanhl | 3 + i 3 | 3 + i 3 | 3 + i 3 | - | 3 + i 3 |
ctanhf128 | - | - | - | - | - |
div_ldoublef | - | - | - | - | - |
div_ldouble | - | - | - | - | - |
div_ldoublel | - | - | - | - | - |
div_ldoublef128 | - | - | - | - | - |
erff | 1 | 1 | 1 | 1 | 1 |
erf | 1 | 1 | 1 | 1 | 1 |
erfl | 1 | 1 | 1 | - | 1 |
erff128 | - | - | - | - | - |
erfcf | 2 | 3 | 2 | 2 | 3 |
erfc | 2 | 5 | 2 | 5 | 5 |
erfcl | 4 | 4 | 4 | - | 4 |
erfcf128 | - | - | - | - | - |
expf | 1 | 1 | 1 | 1 | 1 |
exp | 1 | 1 | 1 | 1 | 1 |
expl | 1 | 1 | 1 | - | 1 |
expf128 | - | - | - | - | - |
exp10f | - | - | 1 | - | 1 |
exp10 | 2 | 2 | 2 | 2 | 2 |
exp10l | 2 | 2 | 2 | - | 2 |
exp10f128 | - | - | - | - | - |
exp2f | - | - | - | - | 1 |
exp2 | 1 | 1 | 1 | 1 | 1 |
exp2l | 1 | 1 | 1 | - | 1 |
exp2f128 | - | - | - | - | - |
exp_advsimdf | - | - | - | - | - |
exp_advsimd | - | - | - | - | - |
exp_advsimdl | - | - | - | - | - |
exp_advsimdf128 | - | - | - | - | - |
exp_svef | - | - | - | - | - |
exp_sve | - | - | - | - | - |
exp_svel | - | - | - | - | - |
exp_svef128 | - | - | - | - | - |
expm1f | 1 | 1 | 1 | 1 | 1 |
expm1 | 1 | 1 | 1 | 1 | 1 |
expm1l | 2 | 2 | 2 | - | 2 |
expm1f128 | - | - | - | - | - |
fmaf | - | - | - | - | - |
fma | - | - | - | - | - |
fmal | - | - | - | - | - |
fmaf128 | - | - | - | - | - |
fma_ldoublef | - | - | - | - | - |
fma_ldouble | - | - | - | - | - |
fma_ldoublel | - | - | - | - | - |
fma_ldoublef128 | - | - | - | - | - |
fmodf | - | - | - | - | - |
fmod | - | - | - | - | - |
fmodl | - | - | - | - | - |
fmodf128 | - | - | - | - | - |
gammaf | 3 | 7 | 3 | 3 | 7 |
gamma | 3 | 4 | 3 | 4 | 4 |
gammal | 5 | 5 | 5 | - | 5 |
gammaf128 | - | - | - | - | - |
hypotf | 1 | - | 1 | - | 1 |
hypot | 1 | 1 | 1 | 1 | 1 |
hypotl | 1 | 1 | 1 | - | 1 |
hypotf128 | - | - | - | - | - |
j0f | 9 | 9 | 9 | 8 | 9 |
j0 | 3 | 2 | 4 | 2 | 3 |
j0l | 2 | 2 | 2 | - | 2 |
j0f128 | - | - | - | - | - |
j1f | 9 | 9 | 9 | 8 | 9 |
j1 | 4 | 4 | 4 | 2 | 4 |
j1l | 4 | 4 | 4 | - | 4 |
j1f128 | - | - | - | - | - |
jnf | 4 | 4 | 4 | 4 | 4 |
jn | 4 | 4 | 4 | 4 | 4 |
jnl | 7 | 7 | 7 | - | 7 |
jnf128 | - | - | - | - | - |
lgammaf | 3 | 7 | 3 | 3 | 7 |
lgamma | 3 | 4 | 3 | 4 | 4 |
lgammal | 5 | 5 | 5 | - | 5 |
lgammaf128 | - | - | - | - | - |
logf | - | - | - | 1 | 1 |
log | 1 | - | 1 | - | 1 |
logl | 1 | 1 | 1 | - | 1 |
logf128 | - | - | - | - | - |
log10f | 2 | 2 | 2 | 2 | 2 |
log10 | 2 | 2 | 2 | 2 | 2 |
log10l | 2 | 2 | 2 | - | 2 |
log10f128 | - | - | - | - | - |
log1pf | 1 | 1 | 1 | 1 | 1 |
log1p | 1 | 1 | 1 | 1 | 1 |
log1pl | 3 | 3 | 3 | - | 3 |
log1pf128 | - | - | - | - | - |
log2f | 1 | 1 | 1 | 1 | 1 |
log2 | 1 | 2 | - | 2 | 2 |
log2l | 3 | 3 | 3 | - | 3 |
log2f128 | - | - | - | - | - |
log_advsimdf | - | - | - | - | - |
log_advsimd | - | - | - | - | - |
log_advsimdl | - | - | - | - | - |
log_advsimdf128 | - | - | - | - | - |
log_svef | - | - | - | - | - |
log_sve | - | - | - | - | - |
log_svel | - | - | - | - | - |
log_svef128 | - | - | - | - | - |
mul_ldoublef | - | - | - | - | - |
mul_ldouble | - | - | - | - | - |
mul_ldoublel | - | - | - | - | - |
mul_ldoublef128 | - | - | - | - | - |
powf | - | - | - | 1 | 3 |
pow | 1 | 1 | 1 | 1 | 1 |
powl | 2 | 2 | 2 | - | 2 |
powf128 | - | - | - | - | - |
pow10f | - | - | - | - | - |
pow10 | - | - | - | - | - |
pow10l | - | - | - | - | - |
pow10f128 | - | - | - | - | - |
sinf | 1 | 1 | 1 | 1 | 1 |
sin | 1 | 1 | 1 | 1 | 1 |
sinl | 2 | 2 | 2 | - | 2 |
sinf128 | - | - | - | - | - |
sin_advsimdf | - | - | - | - | - |
sin_advsimd | - | - | - | - | - |
sin_advsimdl | - | - | - | - | - |
sin_advsimdf128 | - | - | - | - | - |
sin_svef | - | - | - | - | - |
sin_sve | - | - | - | - | - |
sin_svel | - | - | - | - | - |
sin_svef128 | - | - | - | - | - |
sincosf | - | - | - | 1 | 1 |
sincos | 1 | 1 | 1 | 1 | 1 |
sincosl | 1 | 1 | 1 | - | 1 |
sincosf128 | - | - | - | - | - |
sinhf | 2 | 2 | 2 | 2 | 2 |
sinh | 2 | 2 | 2 | 2 | 2 |
sinhl | 2 | 2 | 2 | - | 2 |
sinhf128 | - | - | - | - | - |
sqrtf | - | - | - | - | - |
sqrt | - | - | - | - | - |
sqrtl | - | - | - | - | - |
sqrtf128 | - | - | - | - | - |
sqrt_ldoublef | - | - | - | - | - |
sqrt_ldouble | - | - | - | - | - |
sqrt_ldoublel | - | - | - | - | - |
sqrt_ldoublef128 | - | - | - | - | - |
sub_ldoublef | - | - | - | - | - |
sub_ldouble | - | - | - | - | - |
sub_ldoublel | - | - | - | - | - |
sub_ldoublef128 | - | - | - | - | - |
tanf | 1 | 1 | 1 | 1 | 1 |
tan | - | - | - | - | - |
tanl | 1 | 1 | 1 | - | 1 |
tanf128 | - | - | - | - | - |
tanhf | 2 | 2 | 2 | 2 | 2 |
tanh | 2 | 2 | 2 | 2 | 2 |
tanhl | 2 | 2 | 2 | - | 2 |
tanhf128 | - | - | - | - | - |
tgammaf | 8 | 8 | 8 | 8 | 8 |
tgamma | 9 | 9 | 9 | 9 | 9 |
tgammal | 4 | 4 | 4 | - | 4 |
tgammaf128 | - | - | - | - | - |
y0f | 8 | 9 | 8 | 6 | 9 |
y0 | 2 | 3 | 2 | 3 | 3 |
y0l | 3 | 3 | 3 | - | 3 |
y0f128 | - | - | - | - | - |
y1f | 9 | 9 | 9 | 2 | 9 |
y1 | 3 | 3 | 3 | 3 | 3 |
y1l | 5 | 5 | 5 | - | 5 |
y1f128 | - | - | - | - | - |
ynf | 3 | 3 | 3 | 3 | 3 |
yn | 3 | 3 | 3 | 3 | 3 |
ynl | 5 | 5 | 5 | - | 5 |
ynf128 | - | - | - | - | - |
Function | i686 | ix86 | x86_64 |
acosf | - | - | 1 |
acos | 1 | 1 | 1 |
acosl | 2 | 2 | 2 |
acosf128 | 1 | 1 | 1 |
acoshf | - | - | 2 |
acosh | 1 | 1 | 2 |
acoshl | 3 | 3 | 3 |
acoshf128 | 4 | 4 | 4 |
add_ldoublef | - | - | - |
add_ldouble | - | - | - |
add_ldoublel | - | - | - |
add_ldoublef128 | - | - | - |
asinf | - | - | 1 |
asin | 1 | 1 | 1 |
asinl | 1 | 1 | 1 |
asinf128 | 1 | 1 | 1 |
asinhf | - | - | 2 |
asinh | 1 | 1 | 2 |
asinhl | 3 | 3 | 3 |
asinhf128 | 4 | 4 | 4 |
atanf | - | - | 1 |
atan | 1 | 1 | 1 |
atanl | 1 | 1 | 1 |
atanf128 | 1 | 1 | 1 |
atan2f | - | - | 2 |
atan2 | 1 | 1 | - |
atan2l | 1 | 1 | 1 |
atan2f128 | 2 | 2 | 2 |
atanhf | - | - | 2 |
atanh | 1 | 1 | 2 |
atanhl | 3 | 3 | 3 |
atanhf128 | 4 | 4 | 4 |
cabsf | - | - | - |
cabs | 1 | 1 | 1 |
cabsl | 1 | 1 | 1 |
cabsf128 | 1 | 1 | 1 |
cacosf | 2 + i 2 | 2 + i 2 | 2 + i 2 |
cacos | 1 + i 2 | 1 + i 2 | 1 + i 2 |
cacosl | 1 + i 2 | 1 + i 2 | 1 + i 2 |
cacosf128 | 2 + i 2 | 2 + i 2 | 2 + i 2 |
cacoshf | 2 + i 2 | 2 + i 2 | 2 + i 2 |
cacosh | 2 + i 1 | 2 + i 1 | 2 + i 1 |
cacoshl | 2 + i 1 | 2 + i 1 | 2 + i 1 |
cacoshf128 | 2 + i 2 | 2 + i 2 | 2 + i 2 |
cargf | - | - | 1 |
carg | 1 | 1 | - |
cargl | 1 | 1 | 1 |
cargf128 | 2 | 2 | 2 |
casinf | 1 + i 2 | 1 + i 2 | 1 + i 2 |
casin | 1 + i 2 | 1 + i 2 | 1 + i 2 |
casinl | 1 + i 2 | 1 + i 2 | 1 + i 2 |
casinf128 | 2 + i 2 | 2 + i 2 | 2 + i 2 |
casinhf | 2 + i 1 | 2 + i 1 | 2 + i 1 |
casinh | 2 + i 1 | 2 + i 1 | 2 + i 1 |
casinhl | 2 + i 1 | 2 + i 1 | 2 + i 1 |
casinhf128 | 2 + i 2 | 2 + i 2 | 2 + i 2 |
catanf | 0 + i 1 | 0 + i 1 | 1 + i 1 |
catan | 1 + i 1 | 1 + i 1 | 1 + i 1 |
catanl | 1 + i 1 | 1 + i 1 | 1 + i 1 |
catanf128 | 1 + i 1 | 1 + i 1 | 1 + i 1 |
catanhf | 1 + i 0 | 1 + i 0 | 1 + i 1 |
catanh | 1 + i 1 | 1 + i 1 | 1 + i 1 |
catanhl | 1 + i 1 | 1 + i 1 | 1 + i 1 |
catanhf128 | 1 + i 1 | 1 + i 1 | 1 + i 1 |
cbrtf | 1 | 1 | 1 |
cbrt | 1 | 1 | 4 |
cbrtl | 3 | 3 | 1 |
cbrtf128 | 1 | 1 | 1 |
ccosf | 1 + i 1 | 1 + i 1 | 1 + i 1 |
ccos | 1 + i 1 | 1 + i 1 | 1 + i 1 |
ccosl | 1 + i 1 | 1 + i 1 | 1 + i 1 |
ccosf128 | 1 + i 1 | 1 + i 1 | 1 + i 1 |
ccoshf | 1 + i 1 | 1 + i 1 | 1 + i 1 |
ccosh | 1 + i 1 | 1 + i 1 | 1 + i 1 |
ccoshl | 1 + i 1 | 1 + i 1 | 1 + i 1 |
ccoshf128 | 1 + i 1 | 1 + i 1 | 1 + i 1 |
cexpf | 1 + i 2 | 1 + i 2 | 1 + i 2 |
cexp | 2 + i 1 | 2 + i 1 | 2 + i 1 |
cexpl | 1 + i 1 | 1 + i 1 | 1 + i 1 |
cexpf128 | 1 + i 1 | 1 + i 1 | 1 + i 1 |
clogf | 3 + i 0 | 3 + i 0 | 3 + i 1 |
clog | 2 + i 1 | 2 + i 1 | 3 + i 1 |
clogl | 3 + i 1 | 3 + i 1 | 3 + i 1 |
clogf128 | 2 + i 1 | 2 + i 1 | 2 + i 1 |
clog10f | 4 + i 2 | 4 + i 2 | 4 + i 2 |
clog10 | 3 + i 2 | 3 + i 2 | 3 + i 2 |
clog10l | 4 + i 2 | 4 + i 2 | 4 + i 2 |
clog10f128 | 2 + i 2 | 2 + i 2 | 2 + i 2 |
cosf | 1 | 1 | 1 |
cos | 1 | 1 | 1 |
cosl | 1 | 1 | 1 |
cosf128 | 2 | 2 | 2 |
cos_advsimdf | - | - | - |
cos_advsimd | - | - | - |
cos_advsimdl | - | - | - |
cos_advsimdf128 | - | - | - |
cos_svef | - | - | - |
cos_sve | - | - | - |
cos_svel | - | - | - |
cos_svef128 | - | - | - |
coshf | 2 | 2 | 2 |
cosh | 1 | 1 | 2 |
coshl | 3 | 3 | 3 |
coshf128 | 2 | 2 | 2 |
cpowf | 5 + i 2 | 5 + i 2 | 5 + i 2 |
cpow | 2 + i 1 | 2 + i 0 | 2 + i 0 |
cpowl | 3 + i 4 | 3 + i 4 | 3 + i 4 |
cpowf128 | 4 + i 1 | 4 + i 1 | 4 + i 1 |
csinf | 1 + i 1 | 1 + i 1 | 1 + i 0 |
csin | 1 + i 1 | 1 + i 0 | 1 + i 0 |
csinl | 1 + i 0 | 1 + i 0 | 1 + i 0 |
csinf128 | 1 + i 1 | 1 + i 1 | 1 + i 1 |
csinhf | 1 + i 1 | 1 + i 1 | 1 + i 1 |
csinh | 1 + i 1 | 0 + i 1 | 0 + i 1 |
csinhl | 1 + i 1 | 1 + i 1 | 1 + i 1 |
csinhf128 | 1 + i 1 | 1 + i 1 | 1 + i 1 |
csqrtf | 2 + i 2 | 2 + i 2 | 2 + i 2 |
csqrt | 2 + i 2 | 2 + i 2 | 2 + i 2 |
csqrtl | 2 + i 2 | 2 + i 2 | 2 + i 2 |
csqrtf128 | 2 + i 2 | 2 + i 2 | 2 + i 2 |
ctanf | 1 + i 2 | 1 + i 2 | 1 + i 2 |
ctan | 1 + i 2 | 1 + i 2 | 1 + i 2 |
ctanl | 2 + i 1 | 2 + i 1 | 2 + i 1 |
ctanf128 | 3 + i 3 | 3 + i 3 | 3 + i 3 |
ctanhf | 2 + i 2 | 2 + i 2 | 2 + i 2 |
ctanh | 2 + i 2 | 2 + i 2 | 2 + i 2 |
ctanhl | 1 + i 2 | 1 + i 2 | 1 + i 2 |
ctanhf128 | 3 + i 3 | 3 + i 3 | 3 + i 3 |
div_ldoublef | - | - | - |
div_ldouble | - | - | - |
div_ldoublel | - | - | - |
div_ldoublef128 | - | - | - |
erff | 1 | 1 | 1 |
erf | 1 | 1 | 1 |
erfl | 1 | 1 | 1 |
erff128 | 1 | 1 | 1 |
erfcf | 3 | 3 | 3 |
erfc | 5 | 5 | 5 |
erfcl | 5 | 5 | 5 |
erfcf128 | 4 | 4 | 4 |
expf | 1 | 1 | 1 |
exp | 1 | 1 | 1 |
expl | 1 | 1 | 1 |
expf128 | 1 | 1 | 1 |
exp10f | - | - | 1 |
exp10 | 1 | 1 | 2 |
exp10l | 1 | 1 | 1 |
exp10f128 | 2 | 2 | 2 |
exp2f | - | - | 1 |
exp2 | 1 | 1 | 1 |
exp2l | 1 | 1 | 1 |
exp2f128 | 1 | 1 | 1 |
exp_advsimdf | - | - | - |
exp_advsimd | - | - | - |
exp_advsimdl | - | - | - |
exp_advsimdf128 | - | - | - |
exp_svef | - | - | - |
exp_sve | - | - | - |
exp_svel | - | - | - |
exp_svef128 | - | - | - |
expm1f | - | - | 1 |
expm1 | 1 | 1 | 1 |
expm1l | 3 | 3 | 3 |
expm1f128 | 2 | 2 | 2 |
fmaf | - | - | - |
fma | - | - | - |
fmal | - | - | - |
fmaf128 | - | - | - |
fma_ldoublef | - | - | - |
fma_ldouble | - | - | - |
fma_ldoublel | - | - | - |
fma_ldoublef128 | - | - | - |
fmodf | - | - | - |
fmod | - | - | - |
fmodl | - | - | - |
fmodf128 | - | - | - |
gammaf | 5 | 5 | 7 |
gamma | 4 | 4 | 4 |
gammal | 4 | 4 | 4 |
gammaf128 | - | - | - |
hypotf | 1 | - | 1 |
hypot | 1 | 1 | 1 |
hypotl | 1 | 1 | 1 |
hypotf128 | 1 | 1 | 1 |
j0f | 9 | 9 | 9 |
j0 | 5 | 5 | 3 |
j0l | 8 | 8 | 8 |
j0f128 | 2 | 2 | 2 |
j1f | 9 | 9 | 9 |
j1 | 4 | 4 | 4 |
j1l | 9 | 9 | 9 |
j1f128 | 4 | 4 | 4 |
jnf | 4 | 4 | 4 |
jn | 4 | 4 | 4 |
jnl | 4 | 4 | 4 |
jnf128 | 7 | 7 | 7 |
lgammaf | 5 | 5 | 7 |
lgamma | 4 | 4 | 4 |
lgammal | 4 | 4 | 4 |
lgammaf128 | 5 | 5 | 5 |
logf | - | - | 1 |
log | 1 | 1 | 1 |
logl | 1 | 1 | 1 |
logf128 | 1 | 1 | 1 |
log10f | - | - | 2 |
log10 | 1 | 1 | 2 |
log10l | 1 | 1 | 1 |
log10f128 | 2 | 2 | 2 |
log1pf | - | - | 1 |
log1p | 1 | 1 | 1 |
log1pl | 2 | 2 | 2 |
log1pf128 | 3 | 3 | 3 |
log2f | 1 | 1 | 1 |
log2 | 1 | 1 | 2 |
log2l | 1 | 1 | 1 |
log2f128 | 3 | 3 | 3 |
log_advsimdf | - | - | - |
log_advsimd | - | - | - |
log_advsimdl | - | - | - |
log_advsimdf128 | - | - | - |
log_svef | - | - | - |
log_sve | - | - | - |
log_svel | - | - | - |
log_svef128 | - | - | - |
mul_ldoublef | - | - | - |
mul_ldouble | - | - | - |
mul_ldoublel | - | - | - |
mul_ldoublef128 | - | - | - |
powf | - | - | 1 |
pow | 1 | 1 | 1 |
powl | 1 | 1 | 1 |
powf128 | 2 | 2 | 2 |
pow10f | - | - | - |
pow10 | - | - | - |
pow10l | - | - | - |
pow10f128 | - | - | - |
sinf | 1 | 1 | 1 |
sin | 1 | 1 | 1 |
sinl | 2 | 2 | 2 |
sinf128 | 2 | 2 | 2 |
sin_advsimdf | - | - | - |
sin_advsimd | - | - | - |
sin_advsimdl | - | - | - |
sin_advsimdf128 | - | - | - |
sin_svef | - | - | - |
sin_sve | - | - | - |
sin_svel | - | - | - |
sin_svef128 | - | - | - |
sincosf | - | 1 | - |
sincos | 1 | 1 | 1 |
sincosl | 1 | 1 | 1 |
sincosf128 | 1 | 1 | 1 |
sinhf | 2 | 2 | 2 |
sinh | 2 | 2 | 2 |
sinhl | 3 | 3 | 3 |
sinhf128 | 2 | 2 | 2 |
sqrtf | - | - | - |
sqrt | - | - | - |
sqrtl | - | - | - |
sqrtf128 | - | - | - |
sqrt_ldoublef | - | - | - |
sqrt_ldouble | - | - | - |
sqrt_ldoublel | - | - | - |
sqrt_ldoublef128 | - | - | - |
sub_ldoublef | - | - | - |
sub_ldouble | - | - | - |
sub_ldoublel | - | - | - |
sub_ldoublef128 | - | - | - |
tanf | 1 | 1 | 1 |
tan | - | - | - |
tanl | 2 | 2 | 2 |
tanf128 | 1 | 1 | 1 |
tanhf | 2 | 2 | 2 |
tanh | 2 | 2 | 2 |
tanhl | 3 | 3 | 3 |
tanhf128 | 2 | 2 | 2 |
tgammaf | 8 | 8 | 8 |
tgamma | 9 | 9 | 9 |
tgammal | 5 | 5 | 5 |
tgammaf128 | 4 | 4 | 4 |
y0f | 9 | 9 | 9 |
y0 | 3 | 3 | 3 |
y0l | 2 | 2 | 2 |
y0f128 | 3 | 3 | 3 |
y1f | 9 | 9 | 9 |
y1 | 3 | 3 | 6 |
y1l | 3 | 3 | 3 |
y1f128 | 5 | 5 | 5 |
ynf | 3 | 3 | 3 |
yn | 3 | 3 | 3 |
ynl | 4 | 4 | 4 |
ynf128 | 5 | 5 | 5 |
Next: Is Fast Code or Small Code preferred?, Previous: Known Maximum Errors in Math Functions, Up: Mathematics [Contents][Index]
This section describes the GNU facilities for generating a series of pseudo-random numbers. The numbers generated are not truly random; typically, they form a sequence that repeats periodically, with a period so large that you can ignore it for ordinary purposes. The random number generator works by remembering a seed value which it uses to compute the next random number and also to compute a new seed.
Although the generated numbers look unpredictable within one run of a program, the sequence of numbers is exactly the same from one run to the next. This is because the initial seed is always the same. This is convenient when you are debugging a program, but it is unhelpful if you want the program to behave unpredictably. If you want a different pseudo-random series each time your program runs, you must specify a different seed each time. For ordinary purposes, basing the seed on the current time works well. For random numbers in cryptography, see Generating Unpredictable Bytes.
You can obtain repeatable sequences of numbers on a particular machine type by specifying the same initial seed value for the random number generator. There is no standard meaning for a particular seed value; the same seed, used in different C libraries or on different CPU types, will give you different random numbers.
The GNU C Library supports the standard ISO C random number functions
plus two other sets derived from BSD and SVID. The BSD and ISO C
functions provide identical, somewhat limited functionality. If only a
small number of random bits are required, we recommend you use the
ISO C interface, rand
and srand
. The SVID functions
provide a more flexible interface, which allows better random number
generator algorithms, provides more random bits (up to 48) per call, and
can provide random floating-point numbers. These functions are required
by the XPG standard and therefore will be present in all modern Unix
systems.
Next: BSD Random Number Functions, Up: Pseudo-Random Numbers [Contents][Index]
This section describes the random number functions that are part of the ISO C standard.
To use these facilities, you should include the header file stdlib.h in your program.
The value of this macro is an integer constant representing the largest
value the rand
function can return. In the GNU C Library, it is
2147483647
, which is the largest signed integer representable in
32 bits. In other libraries, it may be as low as 32767
.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Unsafe lock | AC-Unsafe lock | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The rand
function returns the next pseudo-random number in the
series. The value ranges from 0
to RAND_MAX
.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Unsafe lock | AC-Unsafe lock | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This function establishes seed as the seed for a new series of
pseudo-random numbers. If you call rand
before a seed has been
established with srand
, it uses the value 1
as a default
seed.
To produce a different pseudo-random series each time your program is
run, do srand (time (0))
.
POSIX.1 extended the C standard functions to support reproducible random numbers in multi-threaded programs. However, the extension is badly designed and unsuitable for serious work.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This function returns a random number in the range 0 to RAND_MAX
just as rand
does. However, all its state is stored in the
seed argument. This means the RNG’s state can only have as many
bits as the type unsigned int
has. This is far too few to
provide a good RNG.
If your program requires a reentrant RNG, we recommend you use the reentrant GNU extensions to the SVID random number generator. The POSIX.1 interface should only be used when the GNU extensions are not available.
Next: SVID Random Number Function, Previous: ISO C Random Number Functions, Up: Pseudo-Random Numbers [Contents][Index]
This section describes a set of random number generation functions that are derived from BSD. There is no advantage to using these functions with the GNU C Library; we support them for BSD compatibility only.
The prototypes for these functions are in stdlib.h.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Unsafe lock | AC-Unsafe lock | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This function returns the next pseudo-random number in the sequence.
The value returned ranges from 0
to 2147483647
.
NB: Temporarily this function was defined to return a
int32_t
value to indicate that the return value always contains
32 bits even if long int
is wider. The standard demands it
differently. Users must always be aware of the 32-bit limitation,
though.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Unsafe lock | AC-Unsafe lock | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The srandom
function sets the state of the random number
generator based on the integer seed. If you supply a seed value
of 1
, this will cause random
to reproduce the default set
of random numbers.
To produce a different set of pseudo-random numbers each time your
program runs, do srandom (time (0))
.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Unsafe lock | AC-Unsafe lock | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The initstate
function is used to initialize the random number
generator state. The argument state is an array of size
bytes, used to hold the state information. It is initialized based on
seed. The size must be between 8 and 256 bytes, and should be a
power of two. The bigger the state array, the better.
The return value is the previous value of the state information array.
You can use this value later as an argument to setstate
to
restore that state.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Unsafe lock | AC-Unsafe lock | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The setstate
function restores the random number state
information state. The argument must have been the result of
a previous call to initstate or setstate.
The return value is the previous value of the state information array.
You can use this value later as an argument to setstate
to
restore that state.
If the function fails the return value is NULL
.
The four functions described so far in this section all work on a state which is shared by all threads. The state is not directly accessible to the user and can only be modified by these functions. This makes it hard to deal with situations where each thread should have its own pseudo-random number generator.
The GNU C Library contains four additional functions which contain the state as an explicit parameter and therefore make it possible to handle thread-local PRNGs. Besides this there is no difference. In fact, the four functions already discussed are implemented internally using the following interfaces.
The stdlib.h header contains a definition of the following type:
Objects of type struct random_data
contain the information
necessary to represent the state of the PRNG. Although a complete
definition of the type is present the type should be treated as opaque.
The functions modifying the state follow exactly the already described functions.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe race:buf | AS-Safe | AC-Unsafe corrupt | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The random_r
function behaves exactly like the random
function except that it uses and modifies the state in the object
pointed to by the first parameter instead of the global state.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe race:buf | AS-Safe | AC-Unsafe corrupt | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The srandom_r
function behaves exactly like the srandom
function except that it uses and modifies the state in the object
pointed to by the second parameter instead of the global state.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe race:buf | AS-Safe | AC-Unsafe corrupt | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The initstate_r
function behaves exactly like the initstate
function except that it uses and modifies the state in the object
pointed to by the fourth parameter instead of the global state.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe race:buf | AS-Safe | AC-Unsafe corrupt | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The setstate_r
function behaves exactly like the setstate
function except that it uses and modifies the state in the object
pointed to by the first parameter instead of the global state.
Next: High Quality Random Number Functions, Previous: BSD Random Number Functions, Up: Pseudo-Random Numbers [Contents][Index]
The C library on SVID systems contains yet another kind of random number generator functions. They use a state of 48 bits of data. The user can choose among a collection of functions which return the random bits in different forms.
Generally there are two kinds of function. The first uses a state of the random number generator which is shared among several functions and by all threads of the process. The second requires the user to handle the state.
All functions have in common that they use the same congruential formula with the same constants. The formula is
Y = (a * X + c) mod m
where X is the state of the generator at the beginning and
Y the state at the end. a
and c
are constants
determining the way the generator works. By default they are
a = 0x5DEECE66D = 25214903917 c = 0xb = 11
but they can also be changed by the user. m
is of course 2^48
since the state consists of a 48-bit array.
The prototypes for these functions are in stdlib.h.
Preliminary: | MT-Unsafe race:drand48 | AS-Unsafe | AC-Unsafe corrupt | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This function returns a double
value in the range of 0.0
to 1.0
(exclusive). The random bits are determined by the global
state of the random number generator in the C library.
Since the double
type according to IEEE 754 has a 52-bit
mantissa this means 4 bits are not initialized by the random number
generator. These are (of course) chosen to be the least significant
bits and they are initialized to 0
.
Preliminary: | MT-Unsafe race:drand48 | AS-Unsafe | AC-Unsafe corrupt | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This function returns a double
value in the range of 0.0
to 1.0
(exclusive), similarly to drand48
. The argument is
an array describing the state of the random number generator.
This function can be called subsequently since it updates the array to guarantee random numbers. The array should have been initialized before initial use to obtain reproducible results.
Preliminary: | MT-Unsafe race:drand48 | AS-Unsafe | AC-Unsafe corrupt | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The lrand48
function returns an integer value in the range of
0
to 2^31
(exclusive). Even if the size of the long
int
type can take more than 32 bits, no higher numbers are returned.
The random bits are determined by the global state of the random number
generator in the C library.
Preliminary: | MT-Unsafe race:drand48 | AS-Unsafe | AC-Unsafe corrupt | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This function is similar to the lrand48
function in that it
returns a number in the range of 0
to 2^31
(exclusive) but
the state of the random number generator used to produce the random bits
is determined by the array provided as the parameter to the function.
The numbers in the array are updated afterwards so that subsequent calls to this function yield different results (as is expected of a random number generator). The array should have been initialized before the first call to obtain reproducible results.
Preliminary: | MT-Unsafe race:drand48 | AS-Unsafe | AC-Unsafe corrupt | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The mrand48
function is similar to lrand48
. The only
difference is that the numbers returned are in the range -2^31
to
2^31
(exclusive).
Preliminary: | MT-Unsafe race:drand48 | AS-Unsafe | AC-Unsafe corrupt | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The jrand48
function is similar to nrand48
. The only
difference is that the numbers returned are in the range -2^31
to
2^31
(exclusive). For the xsubi
parameter the same
requirements are necessary.
The internal state of the random number generator can be initialized in several ways. The methods differ in the completeness of the information provided.
Preliminary: | MT-Unsafe race:drand48 | AS-Unsafe | AC-Unsafe corrupt | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The srand48
function sets the most significant 32 bits of the
internal state of the random number generator to the least
significant 32 bits of the seedval parameter. The lower 16 bits
are initialized to the value 0x330E
. Even if the long
int
type contains more than 32 bits only the lower 32 bits are used.
Owing to this limitation, initialization of the state of this
function is not very useful. But it makes it easy to use a construct
like srand48 (time (0))
.
A side-effect of this function is that the values a
and c
from the internal state, which are used in the congruential formula,
are reset to the default values given above. This is of importance once
the user has called the lcong48
function (see below).
Preliminary: | MT-Unsafe race:drand48 | AS-Unsafe | AC-Unsafe corrupt | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The seed48
function initializes all 48 bits of the state of the
internal random number generator from the contents of the parameter
seed16v. Here the lower 16 bits of the first element of
seed16v initialize the least significant 16 bits of the internal
state, the lower 16 bits of seed16v[1]
initialize the mid-order
16 bits of the state and the 16 lower bits of seed16v[2]
initialize the most significant 16 bits of the state.
Unlike srand48
this function lets the user initialize all 48 bits
of the state.
The value returned by seed48
is a pointer to an array containing
the values of the internal state before the change. This might be
useful to restart the random number generator at a certain state.
Otherwise the value can simply be ignored.
As for srand48
, the values a
and c
from the
congruential formula are reset to the default values.
There is one more function to initialize the random number generator which enables you to specify even more information by allowing you to change the parameters in the congruential formula.
Preliminary: | MT-Unsafe race:drand48 | AS-Unsafe | AC-Unsafe corrupt | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The lcong48
function allows the user to change the complete state
of the random number generator. Unlike srand48
and
seed48
, this function also changes the constants in the
congruential formula.
From the seven elements in the array param the least significant
16 bits of the entries param[0]
to param[2]
determine the initial state, the least significant 16 bits of
param[3]
to param[5]
determine the 48 bit
constant a
and param[6]
determines the 16-bit value
c
.
All the above functions have in common that they use the global parameters for the congruential formula. In multi-threaded programs it might sometimes be useful to have different parameters in different threads. For this reason all the above functions have a counterpart which works on a description of the random number generator in the user-supplied buffer instead of the global state.
Please note that it is no problem if several threads use the global state if all threads use the functions which take a pointer to an array containing the state. The random numbers are computed following the same loop but if the state in the array is different all threads will obtain an individual random number generator.
The user-supplied buffer must be of type struct drand48_data
.
This type should be regarded as opaque and not manipulated directly.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe race:buffer | AS-Safe | AC-Unsafe corrupt | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This function is equivalent to the drand48
function with the
difference that it does not modify the global random number generator
parameters but instead the parameters in the buffer supplied through the
pointer buffer. The random number is returned in the variable
pointed to by result.
The return value of the function indicates whether the call succeeded.
If the value is less than 0
an error occurred and errno
is
set to indicate the problem.
This function is a GNU extension and should not be used in portable programs.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe race:buffer | AS-Safe | AC-Unsafe corrupt | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The erand48_r
function works like erand48
, but in addition
it takes an argument buffer which describes the random number
generator. The state of the random number generator is taken from the
xsubi
array, the parameters for the congruential formula from the
global random number generator data. The random number is returned in
the variable pointed to by result.
The return value is non-negative if the call succeeded.
This function is a GNU extension and should not be used in portable programs.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe race:buffer | AS-Safe | AC-Unsafe corrupt | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This function is similar to lrand48
, but in addition it takes a
pointer to a buffer describing the state of the random number generator
just like drand48
.
If the return value of the function is non-negative the variable pointed to by result contains the result. Otherwise an error occurred.
This function is a GNU extension and should not be used in portable programs.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe race:buffer | AS-Safe | AC-Unsafe corrupt | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The nrand48_r
function works like nrand48
in that it
produces a random number in the range 0
to 2^31
. But instead
of using the global parameters for the congruential formula it uses the
information from the buffer pointed to by buffer. The state is
described by the values in xsubi.
If the return value is non-negative the variable pointed to by result contains the result.
This function is a GNU extension and should not be used in portable programs.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe race:buffer | AS-Safe | AC-Unsafe corrupt | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This function is similar to mrand48
but like the other reentrant
functions it uses the random number generator described by the value in
the buffer pointed to by buffer.
If the return value is non-negative the variable pointed to by result contains the result.
This function is a GNU extension and should not be used in portable programs.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe race:buffer | AS-Safe | AC-Unsafe corrupt | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The jrand48_r
function is similar to jrand48
. Like the
other reentrant functions of this function family it uses the
congruential formula parameters from the buffer pointed to by
buffer.
If the return value is non-negative the variable pointed to by result contains the result.
This function is a GNU extension and should not be used in portable programs.
Before any of the above functions are used the buffer of type
struct drand48_data
should be initialized. The easiest way to do
this is to fill the whole buffer with null bytes, e.g. by
memset (buffer, '\0', sizeof (struct drand48_data));
Using any of the reentrant functions of this family now will automatically initialize the random number generator to the default values for the state and the parameters of the congruential formula.
The other possibility is to use any of the functions which explicitly initialize the buffer. Though it might be obvious how to initialize the buffer from looking at the parameter to the function, it is highly recommended to use these functions since the result might not always be what you expect.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe race:buffer | AS-Safe | AC-Unsafe corrupt | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The description of the random number generator represented by the
information in buffer is initialized similarly to what the function
srand48
does. The state is initialized from the parameter
seedval and the parameters for the congruential formula are
initialized to their default values.
If the return value is non-negative the function call succeeded.
This function is a GNU extension and should not be used in portable programs.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe race:buffer | AS-Safe | AC-Unsafe corrupt | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This function is similar to srand48_r
but like seed48
it
initializes all 48 bits of the state from the parameter seed16v.
If the return value is non-negative the function call succeeded. It
does not return a pointer to the previous state of the random number
generator like the seed48
function does. If the user wants to
preserve the state for a later re-run s/he can copy the whole buffer
pointed to by buffer.
This function is a GNU extension and should not be used in portable programs.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe race:buffer | AS-Safe | AC-Unsafe corrupt | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This function initializes all aspects of the random number generator described in buffer with the data in param. Here it is especially true that the function does more than just copying the contents of param and buffer. More work is required and therefore it is important to use this function rather than initializing the random number generator directly.
If the return value is non-negative the function call succeeded.
This function is a GNU extension and should not be used in portable programs.
Previous: SVID Random Number Function, Up: Pseudo-Random Numbers [Contents][Index]
This section describes the random number functions provided as a GNU extension, based on OpenBSD interfaces.
The GNU C Library uses kernel entropy obtained either through getrandom
or by reading /dev/urandom to seed.
These functions provide higher random quality than ISO, BSD, and SVID functions, and may be used in cryptographic contexts.
The prototypes for these functions are in stdlib.h.
| MT-Safe | AS-Unsafe corrupt | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This function returns a single 32-bit value in the range of 0
to
2^32−1
(inclusive), which is twice the range of rand
and
random
.
| MT-Safe | AS-Unsafe corrupt | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This function fills the region buffer of length length bytes with random data.
| MT-Safe | AS-Unsafe corrupt | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This function returns a single 32-bit value, uniformly distributed but less than the upper_bound. It avoids the modulo bias when the upper bound is not a power of two.
Previous: Pseudo-Random Numbers, Up: Mathematics [Contents][Index]
If an application uses many floating point functions it is often the case that the cost of the function calls themselves is not negligible. Modern processors can often execute the operations themselves very fast, but the function call disrupts the instruction pipeline.
For this reason the GNU C Library provides optimizations for many of the frequently-used math functions. When GNU CC is used and the user activates the optimizer, several new inline functions and macros are defined. These new functions and macros have the same names as the library functions and so are used instead of the latter. In the case of inline functions the compiler will decide whether it is reasonable to use them, and this decision is usually correct.
This means that no calls to the library functions may be necessary, and can increase the speed of generated code significantly. The drawback is that code size will increase, and the increase is not always negligible.
There are two kinds of inline functions: those that give the same result
as the library functions and others that might not set errno
and
might have a reduced precision and/or argument range in comparison with
the library functions. The latter inline functions are only available
if the flag -ffast-math
is given to GNU CC.
Not all hardware implements the entire IEEE 754 standard, and even if it does there may be a substantial performance penalty for using some of its features. For example, enabling traps on some processors forces the FPU to run un-pipelined, which can more than double calculation time.
Next: Date and Time, Previous: Mathematics, Up: Main Menu [Contents][Index]
This chapter contains information about functions for doing basic arithmetic operations, such as splitting a float into its integer and fractional parts or retrieving the imaginary part of a complex value. These functions are declared in the header files math.h and complex.h.
Next: Integer Division, Up: Arithmetic Functions [Contents][Index]
The C language defines several integer data types: integer, short integer, long integer, and character, all in both signed and unsigned varieties. The GNU C compiler extends the language to contain long long integers as well.
The C integer types were intended to allow code to be portable among machines with different inherent data sizes (word sizes), so each type may have different ranges on different machines. The problem with this is that a program often needs to be written for a particular range of integers, and sometimes must be written for a particular size of storage, regardless of what machine the program runs on.
To address this problem, the GNU C Library contains C type definitions you can use to declare integers that meet your exact needs. Because the GNU C Library header files are customized to a specific machine, your program source code doesn’t have to be.
These typedef
s are in stdint.h.
If you require that an integer be represented in exactly N bits, use one of the following types, with the obvious mapping to bit size and signedness:
If your C compiler and target machine do not allow integers of a certain size, the corresponding above type does not exist.
If you don’t need a specific storage size, but want the smallest data structure with at least N bits, use one of these:
If you don’t need a specific storage size, but want the data structure that allows the fastest access while having at least N bits (and among data structures with the same access speed, the smallest one), use one of these:
If you want an integer with the widest range possible on the platform on which it is being used, use one of the following. If you use these, you should write code that takes into account the variable size and range of the integer.
The GNU C Library also provides macros that tell you the maximum and
minimum possible values for each integer data type. The macro names
follow these examples: INT32_MAX
, UINT8_MAX
,
INT_FAST32_MIN
, INT_LEAST64_MIN
, UINTMAX_MAX
,
INTMAX_MAX
, INTMAX_MIN
. Note that there are no macros for
unsigned integer minima. These are always zero. Similarly, there
are macros such as INTMAX_WIDTH
for the width of these types.
Those macros for integer type widths come from TS 18661-1:2014.
There are similar macros for use with C’s built in integer types which should come with your C compiler. These are described in Data Type Measurements.
Don’t forget you can use the C sizeof
function with any of these
data types to get the number of bytes of storage each uses.
Next: Floating Point Numbers, Previous: Integers, Up: Arithmetic Functions [Contents][Index]
This section describes functions for performing integer division. These
functions are redundant when GNU CC is used, because in GNU C the
‘/’ operator always rounds towards zero. But in other C
implementations, ‘/’ may round differently with negative arguments.
div
and ldiv
are useful because they specify how to round
the quotient: towards zero. The remainder has the same sign as the
numerator.
These functions are specified to return a result r such that the value
r.quot*denominator + r.rem
equals
numerator.
To use these facilities, you should include the header file stdlib.h in your program.
This is a structure type used to hold the result returned by the div
function. It has the following members:
int quot
The quotient from the division.
int rem
The remainder from the division.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The function div
computes the quotient and remainder from
the division of numerator by denominator, returning the
result in a structure of type div_t
.
If the result cannot be represented (as in a division by zero), the behavior is undefined.
Here is an example, albeit not a very useful one.
div_t result; result = div (20, -6);
Now result.quot
is -3
and result.rem
is 2
.
This is a structure type used to hold the result returned by the ldiv
function. It has the following members:
long int quot
The quotient from the division.
long int rem
The remainder from the division.
(This is identical to div_t
except that the components are of
type long int
rather than int
.)
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The ldiv
function is similar to div
, except that the
arguments are of type long int
and the result is returned as a
structure of type ldiv_t
.
This is a structure type used to hold the result returned by the lldiv
function. It has the following members:
long long int quot
The quotient from the division.
long long int rem
The remainder from the division.
(This is identical to div_t
except that the components are of
type long long int
rather than int
.)
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The lldiv
function is like the div
function, but the
arguments are of type long long int
and the result is returned as
a structure of type lldiv_t
.
The lldiv
function was added in ISO C99.
This is a structure type used to hold the result returned by the imaxdiv
function. It has the following members:
intmax_t quot
The quotient from the division.
intmax_t rem
The remainder from the division.
(This is identical to div_t
except that the components are of
type intmax_t
rather than int
.)
See Integers for a description of the intmax_t
type.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The imaxdiv
function is like the div
function, but the
arguments are of type intmax_t
and the result is returned as
a structure of type imaxdiv_t
.
See Integers for a description of the intmax_t
type.
The imaxdiv
function was added in ISO C99.
Next: Floating-Point Number Classification Functions, Previous: Integer Division, Up: Arithmetic Functions [Contents][Index]
Most computer hardware has support for two different kinds of numbers: integers (…-3, -2, -1, 0, 1, 2, 3…) and floating-point numbers. Floating-point numbers have three parts: the mantissa, the exponent, and the sign bit. The real number represented by a floating-point value is given by (s ? -1 : 1) · 2^e · M where s is the sign bit, e the exponent, and M the mantissa. See Floating Point Representation Concepts, for details. (It is possible to have a different base for the exponent, but all modern hardware uses 2.)
Floating-point numbers can represent a finite subset of the real numbers. While this subset is large enough for most purposes, it is important to remember that the only reals that can be represented exactly are rational numbers that have a terminating binary expansion shorter than the width of the mantissa. Even simple fractions such as 1/5 can only be approximated by floating point.
Mathematical operations and functions frequently need to produce values that are not representable. Often these values can be approximated closely enough for practical purposes, but sometimes they can’t. Historically there was no way to tell when the results of a calculation were inaccurate. Modern computers implement the IEEE 754 standard for numerical computations, which defines a framework for indicating to the program when the results of calculation are not trustworthy. This framework consists of a set of exceptions that indicate why a result could not be represented, and the special values infinity and not a number (NaN).
Next: Errors in Floating-Point Calculations, Previous: Floating Point Numbers, Up: Arithmetic Functions [Contents][Index]
ISO C99 defines macros that let you determine what sort of floating-point number a variable holds.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This is a generic macro which works on all floating-point types and
which returns a value of type int
. The possible values are:
FP_NAN
¶The floating-point number x is “Not a Number” (see Infinity and NaN)
FP_INFINITE
¶The value of x is either plus or minus infinity (see Infinity and NaN)
FP_ZERO
¶The value of x is zero. In floating-point formats like IEEE 754, where zero can be signed, this value is also returned if x is negative zero.
FP_SUBNORMAL
¶Numbers whose absolute value is too small to be represented in the
normal format are represented in an alternate, denormalized format
(see Floating Point Representation Concepts). This format is less precise but can
represent values closer to zero. fpclassify
returns this value
for values of x in this alternate format.
FP_NORMAL
¶This value is returned for all other values of x. It indicates that there is nothing special about the number.
fpclassify
is most useful if more than one property of a number
must be tested. There are more specific macros which only test one
property at a time. Generally these macros execute faster than
fpclassify
, since there is special hardware support for them.
You should therefore use the specific macros whenever possible.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
In some floating-point formats, some values have canonical (preferred) and noncanonical encodings (for IEEE interchange binary formats, all encodings are canonical). This macro returns a nonzero value if x has a canonical encoding. It is from TS 18661-1:2014.
Note that some formats have multiple encodings of a value which are
all equally canonical; iscanonical
returns a nonzero value for
all such encodings. Also, formats may have encodings that do not
correspond to any valid value of the type. In ISO C terms these are
trap representations; in the GNU C Library, iscanonical
returns
zero for such encodings.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This macro returns a nonzero value if x is finite: not plus or minus infinity, and not NaN. It is equivalent to
(fpclassify (x) != FP_NAN && fpclassify (x) != FP_INFINITE)
isfinite
is implemented as a macro which accepts any
floating-point type.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This macro returns a nonzero value if x is finite and normalized. It is equivalent to
(fpclassify (x) == FP_NORMAL)
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This macro returns a nonzero value if x is NaN. It is equivalent to
(fpclassify (x) == FP_NAN)
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This macro returns a nonzero value if x is a signaling NaN (sNaN). It is from TS 18661-1:2014.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This macro returns a nonzero value if x is subnormal. It is from TS 18661-1:2014.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This macro returns a nonzero value if x is zero. It is from TS 18661-1:2014.
Another set of floating-point classification functions was provided by BSD. The GNU C Library also supports these functions; however, we recommend that you use the ISO C99 macros in new code. Those are standard and will be available more widely. Also, since they are macros, you do not have to worry about the type of their argument.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This function returns -1
if x represents negative infinity,
1
if x represents positive infinity, and 0
otherwise.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This function returns a nonzero value if x is a “not a number” value, and zero otherwise.
NB: The isnan
macro defined by ISO C99 overrides
the BSD function. This is normally not a problem, because the two
routines behave identically. However, if you really need to get the BSD
function for some reason, you can write
(isnan) (x)
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This function returns a nonzero value if x is neither infinite nor a “not a number” value, and zero otherwise.
Portability Note: The functions listed in this section are BSD extensions.
Next: Rounding Modes, Previous: Floating-Point Number Classification Functions, Up: Arithmetic Functions [Contents][Index]
Next: Infinity and NaN, Up: Errors in Floating-Point Calculations [Contents][Index]
The IEEE 754 standard defines five exceptions that can occur during a calculation. Each corresponds to a particular sort of error, such as overflow.
When exceptions occur (when exceptions are raised, in the language of the standard), one of two things can happen. By default the exception is simply noted in the floating-point status word, and the program continues as if nothing had happened. The operation produces a default value, which depends on the exception (see the table below). Your program can check the status word to find out which exceptions happened.
Alternatively, you can enable traps for exceptions. In that case,
when an exception is raised, your program will receive the SIGFPE
signal. The default action for this signal is to terminate the
program. See Signal Handling, for how you can change the effect of
the signal.
The exceptions defined in IEEE 754 are:
This exception is raised if the given operands are invalid for the operation to be performed. Examples are (see IEEE 754, section 7):
If the exception does not trap, the result of the operation is NaN.
This exception is raised when a finite nonzero number is divided by zero. If no trap occurs the result is either +∞ or -∞, depending on the signs of the operands.
This exception is raised whenever the result cannot be represented as a finite value in the precision format of the destination. If no trap occurs the result depends on the sign of the intermediate result and the current rounding mode (IEEE 754, section 7.3):
Whenever the overflow exception is raised, the inexact exception is also raised.
The underflow exception is raised when an intermediate result is too small to be calculated accurately, or if the operation’s result rounded to the destination precision is too small to be normalized.
When no trap is installed for the underflow exception, underflow is signaled (via the underflow flag) only when both tininess and loss of accuracy have been detected. If no trap handler is installed the operation continues with an imprecise small value, or zero if the destination precision cannot hold the small exact result.
This exception is signalled if a rounded result is not exact (such as when calculating the square root of two) or a result overflows without an overflow trap.
Next: Examining the FPU status word, Previous: FP Exceptions, Up: Errors in Floating-Point Calculations [Contents][Index]
IEEE 754 floating point numbers can represent positive or negative infinity, and NaN (not a number). These three values arise from calculations whose result is undefined or cannot be represented accurately. You can also deliberately set a floating-point variable to any of them, which is sometimes useful. Some examples of calculations that produce infinity or NaN:
1/0 = ∞ log (0) = -∞ sqrt (-1) = NaN
When a calculation produces any of these values, an exception also occurs; see FP Exceptions.
The basic operations and math functions all accept infinity and NaN and produce sensible output. Infinities propagate through calculations as one would expect: for example, 2 + ∞ = ∞, 4/∞ = 0, atan (∞) = π/2. NaN, on the other hand, infects any calculation that involves it. Unless the calculation would produce the same result no matter what real value replaced NaN, the result is NaN.
In comparison operations, positive infinity is larger than all values
except itself and NaN, and negative infinity is smaller than all values
except itself and NaN. NaN is unordered: it is not equal to,
greater than, or less than anything, including itself. x ==
x
is false if the value of x
is NaN. You can use this to test
whether a value is NaN or not, but the recommended way to test for NaN
is with the isnan
function (see Floating-Point Number Classification Functions). In
addition, <
, >
, <=
, and >=
will raise an
exception when applied to NaNs.
math.h defines macros that allow you to explicitly set a variable to infinity or NaN.
An expression representing positive infinity. It is equal to the value
produced by mathematical operations like 1.0 / 0.0
.
-INFINITY
represents negative infinity.
You can test whether a floating-point value is infinite by comparing it
to this macro. However, this is not recommended; you should use the
isfinite
macro instead. See Floating-Point Number Classification Functions.
This macro was introduced in the ISO C99 standard.
An expression representing a value which is “not a number”. This macro is a GNU extension, available only on machines that support the “not a number” value—that is to say, on all machines that support IEEE floating point.
You can use ‘#ifdef NAN’ to test whether the machine supports
NaN. (Of course, you must arrange for GNU extensions to be visible,
such as by defining _GNU_SOURCE
, and then you must include
math.h.)
These macros, defined by TS 18661-1:2014 and TS 18661-3:2015, are constant expressions for signaling NaNs.
This macro, defined by TS 18661-1:2014, is defined to 1
in
fenv.h to indicate that functions and operations with signaling
NaN inputs and floating-point results always raise the invalid
exception and return a quiet NaN, even in cases (such as fmax
,
hypot
and pow
) where a quiet NaN input can produce a
non-NaN result. Because some compiler optimizations may not handle
signaling NaNs correctly, this macro is only defined if compiler
support for signaling NaNs is enabled. That support can be enabled
with the GCC option -fsignaling-nans.
IEEE 754 also allows for another unusual value: negative zero. This value is produced when you divide a positive number by negative infinity, or when a negative result is smaller than the limits of representation.
Next: Error Reporting by Mathematical Functions, Previous: Infinity and NaN, Up: Errors in Floating-Point Calculations [Contents][Index]
ISO C99 defines functions to query and manipulate the floating-point status word. You can use these functions to check for untrapped exceptions when it’s convenient, rather than worrying about them in the middle of a calculation.
These constants represent the various IEEE 754 exceptions. Not all FPUs report all the different exceptions. Each constant is defined if and only if the FPU you are compiling for supports that exception, so you can test for FPU support with ‘#ifdef’. They are defined in fenv.h.
FE_INEXACT
¶The inexact exception.
FE_DIVBYZERO
¶The divide by zero exception.
FE_UNDERFLOW
¶The underflow exception.
FE_OVERFLOW
¶The overflow exception.
FE_INVALID
¶The invalid exception.
The macro FE_ALL_EXCEPT
is the bitwise OR of all exception macros
which are supported by the FP implementation.
These functions allow you to clear exception flags, test for exceptions, and save and restore the set of exceptions flagged.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe !posix | AC-Safe !posix | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This function clears all of the supported exception flags indicated by excepts.
The function returns zero in case the operation was successful, a non-zero value otherwise.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This function raises the supported exceptions indicated by
excepts. If more than one exception bit in excepts is set
the order in which the exceptions are raised is undefined except that
overflow (FE_OVERFLOW
) or underflow (FE_UNDERFLOW
) are
raised before inexact (FE_INEXACT
). Whether for overflow or
underflow the inexact exception is also raised is also implementation
dependent.
The function returns zero in case the operation was successful, a non-zero value otherwise.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This function sets the supported exception flags indicated by
excepts, like feraiseexcept
, but without causing enabled
traps to be taken. fesetexcept
is from TS 18661-1:2014.
The function returns zero in case the operation was successful, a non-zero value otherwise.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
Test whether the exception flags indicated by the parameter except are currently set. If any of them are, a nonzero value is returned which specifies which exceptions are set. Otherwise the result is zero.
To understand these functions, imagine that the status word is an
integer variable named status. feclearexcept
is then
equivalent to ‘status &= ~excepts’ and fetestexcept
is
equivalent to ‘(status & excepts)’. The actual implementation may
be very different, of course.
Exception flags are only cleared when the program explicitly requests it,
by calling feclearexcept
. If you want to check for exceptions
from a set of calculations, you should clear all the flags first. Here
is a simple example of the way to use fetestexcept
:
{ double f; int raised; feclearexcept (FE_ALL_EXCEPT); f = compute (); raised = fetestexcept (FE_OVERFLOW | FE_INVALID); if (raised & FE_OVERFLOW) { /* … */ } if (raised & FE_INVALID) { /* … */ } /* … */ }
You cannot explicitly set bits in the status word. You can, however, save the entire status word and restore it later. This is done with the following functions:
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This function stores in the variable pointed to by flagp an implementation-defined value representing the current setting of the exception flags indicated by excepts.
The function returns zero in case the operation was successful, a non-zero value otherwise.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This function restores the flags for the exceptions indicated by excepts to the values stored in the variable pointed to by flagp.
The function returns zero in case the operation was successful, a non-zero value otherwise.
Note that the value stored in fexcept_t
bears no resemblance to
the bit mask returned by fetestexcept
. The type may not even be
an integer. Do not attempt to modify an fexcept_t
variable.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
Test whether the exception flags indicated by the parameter
excepts are set in the variable pointed to by flagp. If
any of them are, a nonzero value is returned which specifies which
exceptions are set. Otherwise the result is zero.
fetestexceptflag
is from TS 18661-1:2014.
Previous: Examining the FPU status word, Up: Errors in Floating-Point Calculations [Contents][Index]
Many of the math functions are defined only over a subset of the real or complex numbers. Even if they are mathematically defined, their result may be larger or smaller than the range representable by their return type without loss of accuracy. These are known as domain errors, overflows, and underflows, respectively. Math functions do several things when one of these errors occurs. In this manual we will refer to the complete response as signalling a domain error, overflow, or underflow.
When a math function suffers a domain error, it raises the invalid
exception and returns NaN. It also sets errno
to EDOM
;
this is for compatibility with old systems that do not support IEEE 754 exception handling. Likewise, when overflow occurs, math
functions raise the overflow exception and, in the default rounding
mode, return ∞ or -∞ as appropriate
(in other rounding modes, the largest finite value of the appropriate
sign is returned when appropriate for that rounding mode). They also
set errno
to ERANGE
if returning ∞ or
-∞; errno
may or may not be set to
ERANGE
when a finite value is returned on overflow. When
underflow occurs, the underflow exception is raised, and zero
(appropriately signed) or a subnormal value, as appropriate for the
mathematical result of the function and the rounding mode, is
returned. errno
may be set to ERANGE
, but this is not
guaranteed; it is intended that the GNU C Library should set it when the
underflow is to an appropriately signed zero, but not necessarily for
other underflows.
When a math function has an argument that is a signaling NaN,
the GNU C Library does not consider this a domain error, so errno
is
unchanged, but the invalid exception is still raised (except for a few
functions that are specified to handle signaling NaNs differently).
Some of the math functions are defined mathematically to result in a
complex value over parts of their domains. The most familiar example of
this is taking the square root of a negative number. The complex math
functions, such as csqrt
, will return the appropriate complex value
in this case. The real-valued functions, such as sqrt
, will
signal a domain error.
Some older hardware does not support infinities. On that hardware, overflows instead return a particular very large number (usually the largest representable number). math.h defines macros you can use to test for overflow on both old and new hardware.
An expression representing a particular very large number. On machines
that use IEEE 754 floating point format, HUGE_VAL
is infinity.
On other machines, it’s typically the largest positive number that can
be represented.
Mathematical functions return the appropriately typed version of
HUGE_VAL
or -HUGE_VAL
when the result is too large
to be represented.
Next: Floating-Point Control Functions, Previous: Errors in Floating-Point Calculations, Up: Arithmetic Functions [Contents][Index]
Floating-point calculations are carried out internally with extra precision, and then rounded to fit into the destination type. This ensures that results are as precise as the input data. IEEE 754 defines four possible rounding modes:
This is the default mode. It should be used unless there is a specific
need for one of the others. In this mode results are rounded to the
nearest representable value. If the result is midway between two
representable values, the even representable is chosen. Even here
means the lowest-order bit is zero. This rounding mode prevents
statistical bias and guarantees numeric stability: round-off errors in a
lengthy calculation will remain smaller than half of FLT_EPSILON
.
All results are rounded to the smallest representable value which is greater than the result.
All results are rounded to the largest representable value which is less than the result.
All results are rounded to the largest representable value whose magnitude is less than that of the result. In other words, if the result is negative it is rounded up; if it is positive, it is rounded down.
fenv.h defines constants which you can use to refer to the various rounding modes. Each one will be defined if and only if the FPU supports the corresponding rounding mode.
FE_TONEAREST
¶Round to nearest.
FE_UPWARD
¶Round toward +∞.
FE_DOWNWARD
¶Round toward -∞.
FE_TOWARDZERO
¶Round toward zero.
Underflow is an unusual case. Normally, IEEE 754 floating point
numbers are always normalized (see Floating Point Representation Concepts).
Numbers smaller than 2^r (where r is the minimum exponent,
FLT_MIN_RADIX-1
for float) cannot be represented as
normalized numbers. Rounding all such numbers to zero or 2^r
would cause some algorithms to fail at 0. Therefore, they are left in
denormalized form. That produces loss of precision, since some bits of
the mantissa are stolen to indicate the decimal point.
If a result is too small to be represented as a denormalized number, it is rounded to zero. However, the sign of the result is preserved; if the calculation was negative, the result is negative zero. Negative zero can also result from some operations on infinity, such as 4/-∞.
At any time, one of the above four rounding modes is selected. You can find out which one with this function:
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
Returns the currently selected rounding mode, represented by one of the values of the defined rounding mode macros.
To change the rounding mode, use this function:
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
Changes the currently selected rounding mode to round. If
round does not correspond to one of the supported rounding modes
nothing is changed. fesetround
returns zero if it changed the
rounding mode, or a nonzero value if the mode is not supported.
You should avoid changing the rounding mode if possible. It can be an expensive operation; also, some hardware requires you to compile your program differently for it to work. The resulting code may run slower. See your compiler documentation for details.
Next: Arithmetic Functions, Previous: Rounding Modes, Up: Arithmetic Functions [Contents][Index]
IEEE 754 floating-point implementations allow the programmer to
decide whether traps will occur for each of the exceptions, by setting
bits in the control word. In C, traps result in the program
receiving the SIGFPE
signal; see Signal Handling.
NB: IEEE 754 says that trap handlers are given details of the exceptional situation, and can set the result value. C signals do not provide any mechanism to pass this information back and forth. Trapping exceptions in C is therefore not very useful.
It is sometimes necessary to save the state of the floating-point unit while you perform some calculation. The library provides functions which save and restore the exception flags, the set of exceptions that generate traps, and the rounding mode. This information is known as the floating-point environment.
The functions to save and restore the floating-point environment all use
a variable of type fenv_t
to store information. This type is
defined in fenv.h. Its size and contents are
implementation-defined. You should not attempt to manipulate a variable
of this type directly.
To save the state of the FPU, use one of these functions:
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
Store the floating-point environment in the variable pointed to by envp.
The function returns zero in case the operation was successful, a non-zero value otherwise.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
Store the current floating-point environment in the object pointed to by
envp. Then clear all exception flags, and set the FPU to trap no
exceptions. Not all FPUs support trapping no exceptions; if
feholdexcept
cannot set this mode, it returns nonzero value. If it
succeeds, it returns zero.
The functions which restore the floating-point environment can take these kinds of arguments:
fenv_t
objects, which were initialized previously by a
call to fegetenv
or feholdexcept
.
FE_DFL_ENV
which represents the floating-point
environment as it was available at program start.
FE_
and
having type fenv_t *
.
If possible, the GNU C Library defines a macro FE_NOMASK_ENV
which represents an environment where every exception raised causes a
trap to occur. You can test for this macro using #ifdef
. It is
only defined if _GNU_SOURCE
is defined.
Some platforms might define other predefined environments.
To set the floating-point environment, you can use either of these functions:
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
Set the floating-point environment to that described by envp.
The function returns zero in case the operation was successful, a non-zero value otherwise.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
Like fesetenv
, this function sets the floating-point environment
to that described by envp. However, if any exceptions were
flagged in the status word before feupdateenv
was called, they
remain flagged after the call. In other words, after feupdateenv
is called, the status word is the bitwise OR of the previous status word
and the one saved in envp.
The function returns zero in case the operation was successful, a non-zero value otherwise.
TS 18661-1:2014 defines additional functions to save and restore floating-point control modes (such as the rounding mode and whether traps are enabled) while leaving other status (such as raised flags) unchanged.
The special macro FE_DFL_MODE
may be passed to
fesetmode
. It represents the floating-point control modes at
program start.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
Store the floating-point control modes in the variable pointed to by modep.
The function returns zero in case the operation was successful, a non-zero value otherwise.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
Set the floating-point control modes to those described by modep.
The function returns zero in case the operation was successful, a non-zero value otherwise.
To control for individual exceptions if raising them causes a trap to occur, you can use the following two functions.
Portability Note: These functions are all GNU extensions.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This function enables traps for each of the exceptions as indicated by the parameter excepts. The individual exceptions are described in Examining the FPU status word. Only the specified exceptions are enabled, the status of the other exceptions is not changed.
The function returns the previous enabled exceptions in case the
operation was successful, -1
otherwise.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This function disables traps for each of the exceptions as indicated by the parameter excepts. The individual exceptions are described in Examining the FPU status word. Only the specified exceptions are disabled, the status of the other exceptions is not changed.
The function returns the previous enabled exceptions in case the
operation was successful, -1
otherwise.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The function returns a bitmask of all currently enabled exceptions. It
returns -1
in case of failure.
Next: Complex Numbers, Previous: Floating-Point Control Functions, Up: Arithmetic Functions [Contents][Index]
The C library provides functions to do basic operations on floating-point numbers. These include absolute value, maximum and minimum, normalization, bit twiddling, rounding, and a few others.
Next: Normalization Functions, Up: Arithmetic Functions [Contents][Index]
These functions are provided for obtaining the absolute value (or
magnitude) of a number. The absolute value of a real number
x is x if x is positive, -x if x is
negative. For a complex number z, whose real part is x and
whose imaginary part is y, the absolute value is sqrt (x*x + y*y)
.
Prototypes for abs
, labs
and llabs
are in stdlib.h;
imaxabs
is declared in inttypes.h;
the fabs
functions are declared in math.h;
the cabs
functions are declared in complex.h.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
These functions return the absolute value of number.
Most computers use a two’s complement integer representation, in which
the absolute value of INT_MIN
(the smallest possible int
)
cannot be represented; thus, abs (INT_MIN)
is not defined.
llabs
and imaxdiv
are new to ISO C99.
See Integers for a description of the intmax_t
type.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This function returns the absolute value of the floating-point number number.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
These functions return the absolute value of the complex number z (see Complex Numbers). The absolute value of a complex number is:
sqrt (creal (z) * creal (z) + cimag (z) * cimag (z))
This function should always be used instead of the direct formula
because it takes special care to avoid losing precision. It may also
take advantage of hardware support for this operation. See hypot
in Exponentiation and Logarithms.
Next: Rounding Functions, Previous: Absolute Value, Up: Arithmetic Functions [Contents][Index]
The functions described in this section are primarily provided as a way to efficiently perform certain low-level manipulations on floating point numbers that are represented internally using a binary radix; see Floating Point Representation Concepts. These functions are required to have equivalent behavior even if the representation does not use a radix of 2, but of course they are unlikely to be particularly efficient in those cases.
All these functions are declared in math.h.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
These functions are used to split the number value into a normalized fraction and an exponent.
If the argument value is not zero, the return value is value
times a power of two, and its magnitude is always in the range 1/2
(inclusive) to 1 (exclusive). The corresponding exponent is stored in
*exponent
; the return value multiplied by 2 raised to this
exponent equals the original number value.
For example, frexp (12.8, &exponent)
returns 0.8
and
stores 4
in exponent
.
If value is zero, then the return value is zero and
zero is stored in *exponent
.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
These functions return the result of multiplying the floating-point
number value by 2 raised to the power exponent. (It can
be used to reassemble floating-point numbers that were taken apart
by frexp
.)
For example, ldexp (0.8, 4)
returns 12.8
.
The following functions, which come from BSD, provide facilities
equivalent to those of ldexp
and frexp
. See also the
ISO C function logb
which originally also appeared in BSD.
The _FloatN
and _FloatN
variants of the
following functions come from TS 18661-3:2015.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The scalb
function is the BSD name for ldexp
.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
scalbn
is identical to scalb
, except that the exponent
n is an int
instead of a floating-point number.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
scalbln
is identical to scalb
, except that the exponent
n is a long int
instead of a floating-point number.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
significand
returns the mantissa of x scaled to the range
[1, 2).
It is equivalent to scalb (x, (double) -ilogb (x))
.
This function exists mainly for use in certain standardized tests of IEEE 754 conformance.
Next: Remainder Functions, Previous: Normalization Functions, Up: Arithmetic Functions [Contents][Index]
The functions listed here perform operations such as rounding and truncation of floating-point values. Some of these functions convert floating point numbers to integer values. They are all declared in math.h.
You can also convert floating-point numbers to integers simply by
casting them to int
. This discards the fractional part,
effectively rounding towards zero. However, this only works if the
result can actually be represented as an int
—for very large
numbers, this is impossible. The functions listed here return the
result as a double
instead to get around this problem.
The fromfp
functions use the following macros, from TS
18661-1:2014, to specify the direction of rounding. These correspond
to the rounding directions defined in IEEE 754-2008.
FP_INT_UPWARD
¶Round toward +∞.
FP_INT_DOWNWARD
¶Round toward -∞.
FP_INT_TOWARDZERO
¶Round toward zero.
FP_INT_TONEARESTFROMZERO
¶Round to nearest, ties round away from zero.
FP_INT_TONEAREST
¶Round to nearest, ties round to even.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
These functions round x upwards to the nearest integer,
returning that value as a double
. Thus, ceil (1.5)
is 2.0
.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
These functions round x downwards to the nearest
integer, returning that value as a double
. Thus, floor
(1.5)
is 1.0
and floor (-1.5)
is -2.0
.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The trunc
functions round x towards zero to the nearest
integer (returned in floating-point format). Thus, trunc (1.5)
is 1.0
and trunc (-1.5)
is -1.0
.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
These functions round x to an integer value according to the current rounding mode. See Floating Point Parameters, for information about the various rounding modes. The default rounding mode is to round to the nearest integer; some machines support other modes, but round-to-nearest is always used unless you explicitly select another.
If x was not initially an integer, these functions raise the inexact exception.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
These functions return the same value as the rint
functions, but
do not raise the inexact exception if x is not an integer.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
These functions are similar to rint
, but they round halfway
cases away from zero instead of to the nearest integer (or other
current rounding mode).
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
These functions, from TS 18661-1:2014 and TS 18661-3:2015, are similar
to round
, but they round halfway cases to even instead of away
from zero.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
These functions are just like rint
, but they return a
long int
instead of a floating-point number.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
These functions are just like rint
, but they return a
long long int
instead of a floating-point number.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
These functions are just like round
, but they return a
long int
instead of a floating-point number.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
These functions are just like round
, but they return a
long long int
instead of a floating-point number.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
These functions, from TS 18661-1:2014 and TS 18661-3:2015, convert a
floating-point number to an integer according to the rounding direction
round (one of the FP_INT_*
macros). If the integer is
outside the range of a signed or unsigned (depending on the return type
of the function) type of width width bits (or outside the range of
the return type, if width is larger), or if x is infinite or
NaN, or if width is zero, a domain error occurs and an unspecified
value is returned. The functions with an ‘x’ in their names raise
the inexact exception when a domain error does not occur and the
argument is not an integer; the other functions do not raise the inexact
exception.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
These functions break the argument value into an integer part and a
fractional part (between -1
and 1
, exclusive). Their sum
equals value. Each of the parts has the same sign as value,
and the integer part is always rounded toward zero.
modf
stores the integer part in *integer-part
, and
returns the fractional part. For example, modf (2.5, &intpart)
returns 0.5
and stores 2.0
into intpart
.
Next: Setting and modifying single bits of FP values, Previous: Rounding Functions, Up: Arithmetic Functions [Contents][Index]
The functions in this section compute the remainder on division of two floating-point numbers. Each is a little different; pick the one that suits your problem.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
These functions compute the remainder from the division of
numerator by denominator. Specifically, the return value is
numerator - n * denominator
, where n
is the quotient of numerator divided by denominator, rounded
towards zero to an integer. Thus, fmod (6.5, 2.3)
returns
1.9
, which is 6.5
minus 4.6
.
The result has the same sign as the numerator and has magnitude less than the magnitude of the denominator.
If denominator is zero, fmod
signals a domain error.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
These functions are like fmod
except that they round the
internal quotient n to the nearest integer instead of towards zero
to an integer. For example, remainder (6.5, 2.3)
returns
-0.4
, which is 6.5
minus 6.9
.
The absolute value of the result is less than or equal to half the
absolute value of the denominator. The difference between
fmod (numerator, denominator)
and remainder
(numerator, denominator)
is always either
denominator, minus denominator, or zero.
If denominator is zero, remainder
signals a domain error.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This function is another name for remainder
.
Next: Floating-Point Comparison Functions, Previous: Remainder Functions, Up: Arithmetic Functions [Contents][Index]
There are some operations that are too complicated or expensive to perform by hand on floating-point numbers. ISO C99 defines functions to do these operations, which mostly involve changing single bits.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
These functions return x but with the sign of y. They work even if x or y are NaN or zero. Both of these can carry a sign (although not all implementations support it) and this is one of the few operations that can tell the difference.
copysign
never raises an exception.
This function is defined in IEC 559 (and the appendix with recommended functions in IEEE 754/IEEE 854).
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
signbit
is a generic macro which can work on all floating-point
types. It returns a nonzero value if the value of x has its sign
bit set.
This is not the same as x < 0.0
, because IEEE 754 floating
point allows zero to be signed. The comparison -0.0 < 0.0
is
false, but signbit (-0.0)
will return a nonzero value.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The nextafter
function returns the next representable neighbor of
x in the direction towards y. The size of the step between
x and the result depends on the type of the result. If
x = y the function simply returns y. If either
value is NaN
, NaN
is returned. Otherwise
a value corresponding to the value of the least significant bit in the
mantissa is added or subtracted, depending on the direction.
nextafter
will signal overflow or underflow if the result goes
outside of the range of normalized numbers.
This function is defined in IEC 559 (and the appendix with recommended functions in IEEE 754/IEEE 854).
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
These functions are identical to the corresponding versions of
nextafter
except that their second argument is a long
double
.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The nextup
function returns the next representable neighbor of x
in the direction of positive infinity. If x is the smallest negative
subnormal number in the type of x the function returns -0
. If
x = 0
the function returns the smallest positive subnormal
number in the type of x. If x is NaN, NaN is returned.
If x is +∞, +∞ is returned.
nextup
is from TS 18661-1:2014 and TS 18661-3:2015.
nextup
never raises an exception except for signaling NaNs.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The nextdown
function returns the next representable neighbor of x
in the direction of negative infinity. If x is the smallest positive
subnormal number in the type of x the function returns +0
. If
x = 0
the function returns the smallest negative subnormal
number in the type of x. If x is NaN, NaN is returned.
If x is -∞, -∞ is returned.
nextdown
is from TS 18661-1:2014 and TS 18661-3:2015.
nextdown
never raises an exception except for signaling NaNs.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe locale | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The nan
function returns a representation of NaN, provided that
NaN is supported by the target platform.
nan ("n-char-sequence")
is equivalent to
strtod ("NAN(n-char-sequence)")
.
The argument tagp is used in an unspecified manner. On IEEE 754 systems, there are many representations of NaN, and tagp selects one. On other systems it may do nothing.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
In some floating-point formats, some values have canonical (preferred) and noncanonical encodings (for IEEE interchange binary formats, all encodings are canonical). These functions, defined by TS 18661-1:2014 and TS 18661-3:2015, attempt to produce a canonical version of the floating-point value pointed to by x; if that value is a signaling NaN, they raise the invalid exception and produce a quiet NaN. If a canonical value is produced, it is stored in the object pointed to by cx, and these functions return zero. Otherwise (if a canonical value could not be produced because the object pointed to by x is not a valid representation of any floating-point value), the object pointed to by cx is unchanged and a nonzero value is returned.
Note that some formats have multiple encodings of a value which are all equally canonical; when such an encoding is used as an input to this function, any such encoding of the same value (or of the corresponding quiet NaN, if that value is a signaling NaN) may be produced as output.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
IEEE 754 defines the payload of a NaN to be an integer value encoded in the representation of the NaN. Payloads are typically propagated from NaN inputs to the result of a floating-point operation. These functions, defined by TS 18661-1:2014 and TS 18661-3:2015, return the payload of the NaN pointed to by x (returned as a positive integer, or positive zero, represented as a floating-point number); if x is not a NaN, they return -1. They raise no floating-point exceptions even for signaling NaNs. (The return value of -1 for an argument that is not a NaN is specified in C2x; the value was unspecified in TS 18661.)
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
These functions, defined by TS 18661-1:2014 and TS 18661-3:2015, set the object pointed to by x to a quiet NaN with payload payload and a zero sign bit and return zero. If payload is not a positive-signed integer that is a valid payload for a quiet NaN of the given type, the object pointed to by x is set to positive zero and a nonzero value is returned. They raise no floating-point exceptions.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
These functions, defined by TS 18661-1:2014 and TS 18661-3:2015, set the object pointed to by x to a signaling NaN with payload payload and a zero sign bit and return zero. If payload is not a positive-signed integer that is a valid payload for a signaling NaN of the given type, the object pointed to by x is set to positive zero and a nonzero value is returned. They raise no floating-point exceptions.
Next: Miscellaneous FP arithmetic functions, Previous: Setting and modifying single bits of FP values, Up: Arithmetic Functions [Contents][Index]
The standard C comparison operators provoke exceptions when one or other of the operands is NaN. For example,
int v = a < 1.0;
will raise an exception if a is NaN. (This does not
happen with ==
and !=
; those merely return false and true,
respectively, when NaN is examined.) Frequently this exception is
undesirable. ISO C99 therefore defines comparison functions that
do not raise exceptions when NaN is examined. All of the functions are
implemented as macros which allow their arguments to be of any
floating-point type. The macros are guaranteed to evaluate their
arguments only once. TS 18661-1:2014 adds such a macro for an
equality comparison that does raise an exception for a NaN
argument; it also adds functions that provide a total ordering on all
floating-point values, including NaNs, without raising any exceptions
even for signaling NaNs.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This macro determines whether the argument x is greater than
y. It is equivalent to (x) > (y)
, but no
exception is raised if x or y are NaN.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This macro determines whether the argument x is greater than or
equal to y. It is equivalent to (x) >= (y)
, but no
exception is raised if x or y are NaN.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This macro determines whether the argument x is less than y.
It is equivalent to (x) < (y)
, but no exception is
raised if x or y are NaN.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This macro determines whether the argument x is less than or equal
to y. It is equivalent to (x) <= (y)
, but no
exception is raised if x or y are NaN.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This macro determines whether the argument x is less or greater
than y. It is equivalent to (x) < (y) ||
(x) > (y)
(although it only evaluates x and y
once), but no exception is raised if x or y are NaN.
This macro is not equivalent to x != y
, because that
expression is true if x or y are NaN.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This macro determines whether its arguments are unordered. In other words, it is true if x or y are NaN, and false otherwise.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This macro determines whether its arguments are equal. It is
equivalent to (x) == (y)
, but it raises the invalid
exception and sets errno
to EDOM
if either argument is a
NaN.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
These functions determine whether the total order relationship,
defined in IEEE 754-2008, is true for *x
and
*y
, returning
nonzero if it is true and zero if it is false. No exceptions are
raised even for signaling NaNs. The relationship is true if they are
the same floating-point value (including sign for zero and NaNs, and
payload for NaNs), or if *x
comes before *y
in the following
order: negative quiet NaNs, in order of decreasing payload; negative
signaling NaNs, in order of decreasing payload; negative infinity;
finite numbers, in ascending order, with negative zero before positive
zero; positive infinity; positive signaling NaNs, in order of
increasing payload; positive quiet NaNs, in order of increasing
payload.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
These functions determine whether the total order relationship,
defined in IEEE 754-2008, is true for the absolute values of *x
and *y
, returning nonzero if it is true and zero if it is false.
No exceptions are raised even for signaling NaNs.
Not all machines provide hardware support for these operations. On machines that don’t, the macros can be very slow. Therefore, you should not use these functions when NaN is not a concern.
NB: There are no macros isequal
or isunequal
.
They are unnecessary, because the ==
and !=
operators do
not throw an exception if one or both of the operands are NaN.
Previous: Floating-Point Comparison Functions, Up: Arithmetic Functions [Contents][Index]
The functions in this section perform miscellaneous but common operations that are awkward to express with C operators. On some processors these functions can use special machine instructions to perform these operations faster than the equivalent C code.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The fmin
function returns the lesser of the two values x
and y. It is similar to the expression
((x) < (y) ? (x) : (y))
except that x and y are only evaluated once.
If an argument is a quiet NaN, the other argument is returned. If both arguments are NaN, or either is a signaling NaN, NaN is returned.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The fmax
function returns the greater of the two values x
and y.
If an argument is a quiet NaN, the other argument is returned. If both arguments are NaN, or either is a signaling NaN, NaN is returned.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The fminimum
function returns the lesser of the two values x
and y. Unlike fmin
, if either argument is a NaN, NaN is returned.
Positive zero is treated as greater than negative zero.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The fmaximum
function returns the greater of the two values x
and y. Unlike fmax
, if either argument is a NaN, NaN is returned.
Positive zero is treated as greater than negative zero.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The fminimum_num
function returns the lesser of the two values
x and y. If one argument is a number and the other is a
NaN, even a signaling NaN, the number is returned. Positive zero is
treated as greater than negative zero.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The fmaximum_num
function returns the greater of the two values
x and y. If one argument is a number and the other is a
NaN, even a signaling NaN, the number is returned. Positive zero is
treated as greater than negative zero.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
These functions, from TS 18661-1:2014 and TS 18661-3:2015, return
whichever of the two values x and y has the smaller absolute
value. If both have the same absolute value, or either is NaN, they
behave the same as the fmin
functions.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
These functions, from TS 18661-1:2014, return whichever of the two
values x and y has the greater absolute value. If both
have the same absolute value, or either is NaN, they behave the same
as the fmax
functions.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
These functions return whichever of the two values x and y
has the smaller absolute value. If both have the same absolute value,
or either is NaN, they behave the same as the fminimum
functions.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
These functions return whichever of the two values x and y
has the greater absolute value. If both have the same absolute value,
or either is NaN, they behave the same as the fmaximum
functions.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
These functions return whichever of the two values x and y
has the smaller absolute value. If both have the same absolute value,
or either is NaN, they behave the same as the fminimum_num
functions.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
These functions return whichever of the two values x and y
has the greater absolute value. If both have the same absolute value,
or either is NaN, they behave the same as the fmaximum_num
functions.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The fdim
function returns the positive difference between
x and y. The positive difference is x -
y if x is greater than y, and 0 otherwise.
If x, y, or both are NaN, NaN is returned.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The fma
function performs floating-point multiply-add. This is
the operation (x · y) + z, but the
intermediate result is not rounded to the destination type. This can
sometimes improve the precision of a calculation.
This function was introduced because some processors have a special
instruction to perform multiply-add. The C compiler cannot use it
directly, because the expression ‘x*y + z’ is defined to round the
intermediate result. fma
lets you choose when you want to round
only once.
On processors which do not implement multiply-add in hardware,
fma
can be very slow since it must avoid intermediate rounding.
math.h defines the symbols FP_FAST_FMA
,
FP_FAST_FMAF
, and FP_FAST_FMAL
when the corresponding
version of fma
is no slower than the expression ‘x*y + z’.
In the GNU C Library, this always means the operation is implemented in
hardware.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
These functions, from TS 18661-1:2014 and TS 18661-3:2015, return x + y, rounded once to the return type of the function without any intermediate rounding to the type of the arguments.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
These functions, from TS 18661-1:2014 and TS 18661-3:2015, return x - y, rounded once to the return type of the function without any intermediate rounding to the type of the arguments.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
These functions, from TS 18661-1:2014 and TS 18661-3:2015, return x * y, rounded once to the return type of the function without any intermediate rounding to the type of the arguments.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
These functions, from TS 18661-1:2014 and TS 18661-3:2015, return x / y, rounded once to the return type of the function without any intermediate rounding to the type of the arguments.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
These functions, from TS 18661-1:2014 and TS 18661-3:2015, return the square root of x, rounded once to the return type of the function without any intermediate rounding to the type of the arguments.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
These functions, from TS 18661-1:2014 and TS 18661-3:2015, return (x · y) + z, rounded once to the return type of the function without any intermediate rounding to the type of the arguments and without any intermediate rounding of result of the multiplication.
Next: Projections, Conjugates, and Decomposing of Complex Numbers, Previous: Arithmetic Functions, Up: Arithmetic Functions [Contents][Index]
ISO C99 introduces support for complex numbers in C. This is done
with a new type qualifier, complex
. It is a keyword if and only
if complex.h has been included. There are three complex types,
corresponding to the three real types: float complex
,
double complex
, and long double complex
.
Likewise, on machines that have support for _FloatN
or
_FloatNx
enabled, the complex types _FloatN
complex
and _FloatNx complex
are also available if
complex.h has been included; see Mathematics.
To construct complex numbers you need a way to indicate the imaginary part of a number. There is no standard notation for an imaginary floating point constant. Instead, complex.h defines two macros that can be used to create complex numbers.
This macro is a representation of the complex number “0+1i”.
Multiplying a real floating-point value by _Complex_I
gives a
complex number whose value is purely imaginary. You can use this to
construct complex constants:
3.0 + 4.0i = 3.0 + 4.0 * _Complex_I
Note that _Complex_I * _Complex_I
has the value -1
, but
the type of that value is complex
.
_Complex_I
is a bit of a mouthful. complex.h also defines
a shorter name for the same constant.
This macro has exactly the same value as _Complex_I
. Most of the
time it is preferable. However, it causes problems if you want to use
the identifier I
for something else. You can safely write
#include <complex.h> #undef I
if you need I
for your own purposes. (In that case we recommend
you also define some other short name for _Complex_I
, such as
J
.)
Next: Parsing of Numbers, Previous: Complex Numbers, Up: Arithmetic Functions [Contents][Index]
ISO C99 also defines functions that perform basic operations on complex numbers, such as decomposition and conjugation. The prototypes for all these functions are in complex.h. All functions are available in three variants, one for each of the three complex types.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
These functions return the real part of the complex number z.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
These functions return the imaginary part of the complex number z.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
These functions return the conjugate value of the complex number z. The conjugate of a complex number has the same real part and a negated imaginary part. In other words, ‘conj(a + bi) = a + -bi’.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
These functions return the argument of the complex number z. The argument of a complex number is the angle in the complex plane between the positive real axis and a line passing through zero and the number. This angle is measured in the usual fashion and ranges from -π to π.
carg
has a branch cut along the negative real axis.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
These functions return the projection of the complex value z onto the Riemann sphere. Values with an infinite imaginary part are projected to positive infinity on the real axis, even if the real part is NaN. If the real part is infinite, the result is equivalent to
INFINITY + I * copysign (0.0, cimag (z))
Next: Printing of Floats, Previous: Projections, Conjugates, and Decomposing of Complex Numbers, Up: Arithmetic Functions [Contents][Index]
This section describes functions for “reading” integer and
floating-point numbers from a string. It may be more convenient in some
cases to use sscanf
or one of the related functions; see
Formatted Input. But often you can make a program more robust by
finding the tokens in the string by hand, then converting the numbers
one by one.
Next: Parsing of Floats, Up: Parsing of Numbers [Contents][Index]
The ‘str’ functions are declared in stdlib.h and those
beginning with ‘wcs’ are declared in wchar.h. One might
wonder about the use of restrict
in the prototypes of the
functions in this section. It is seemingly useless but the ISO C
standard uses it (for the functions defined there) so we have to do it
as well.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe locale | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The strtol
(“string-to-long”) function converts the initial
part of string to a signed integer, which is returned as a value
of type long int
.
This function attempts to decompose string as follows:
isspace
function
(see Classification of Characters). These are discarded.
If base is zero, decimal radix is assumed unless the series of digits begins with ‘0’ (specifying octal radix), or ‘0x’ or ‘0X’ (specifying hexadecimal radix), or ‘0b’ or ‘0B’ (specifying binary radix; only supported when C2X features are enabled); in other words, the same syntax used for integer constants in C.
Otherwise base must have a value between 2
and 36
.
If base is 16
, the digits may optionally be preceded by
‘0x’ or ‘0X’. If base is 2
, and C2X features
are enabled, the digits may optionally be preceded by
‘0b’ or ‘0B’. If base has no legal value the value returned
is 0l
and the global variable errno
is set to EINVAL
.
strtol
stores a pointer to this tail in
*tailptr
.
If the string is empty, contains only whitespace, or does not contain an
initial substring that has the expected syntax for an integer in the
specified base, no conversion is performed. In this case,
strtol
returns a value of zero and the value stored in
*tailptr
is the value of string.
In a locale other than the standard "C"
locale, this function
may recognize additional implementation-dependent syntax.
If the string has valid syntax for an integer but the value is not
representable because of overflow, strtol
returns either
LONG_MAX
or LONG_MIN
(see Range of an Integer Type), as
appropriate for the sign of the value. It also sets errno
to ERANGE
to indicate there was overflow.
You should not check for errors by examining the return value of
strtol
, because the string might be a valid representation of
0l
, LONG_MAX
, or LONG_MIN
. Instead, check whether
tailptr points to what you expect after the number
(e.g. '\0'
if the string should end after the number). You also
need to clear errno
before the call and check it afterward, in
case there was overflow.
There is an example at the end of this section.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe locale | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The wcstol
function is equivalent to the strtol
function
in nearly all aspects but handles wide character strings.
The wcstol
function was introduced in Amendment 1 of ISO C90.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe locale | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The strtoul
(“string-to-unsigned-long”) function is like
strtol
except it converts to an unsigned long int
value.
The syntax is the same as described above for strtol
. The value
returned on overflow is ULONG_MAX
(see Range of an Integer Type).
If string depicts a negative number, strtoul
acts the same
as strtol but casts the result to an unsigned integer. That means
for example that strtoul
on "-1"
returns ULONG_MAX
and an input more negative than LONG_MIN
returns
(ULONG_MAX
+ 1) / 2.
strtoul
sets errno
to EINVAL
if base is out of
range, or ERANGE
on overflow.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe locale | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The wcstoul
function is equivalent to the strtoul
function
in nearly all aspects but handles wide character strings.
The wcstoul
function was introduced in Amendment 1 of ISO C90.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe locale | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The strtoll
function is like strtol
except that it returns
a long long int
value, and accepts numbers with a correspondingly
larger range.
If the string has valid syntax for an integer but the value is not
representable because of overflow, strtoll
returns either
LLONG_MAX
or LLONG_MIN
(see Range of an Integer Type), as
appropriate for the sign of the value. It also sets errno
to
ERANGE
to indicate there was overflow.
The strtoll
function was introduced in ISO C99.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe locale | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The wcstoll
function is equivalent to the strtoll
function
in nearly all aspects but handles wide character strings.
The wcstoll
function was introduced in Amendment 1 of ISO C90.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe locale | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
strtoq
(“string-to-quad-word”) is the BSD name for strtoll
.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe locale | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The wcstoq
function is equivalent to the strtoq
function
in nearly all aspects but handles wide character strings.
The wcstoq
function is a GNU extension.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe locale | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The strtoull
function is related to strtoll
the same way
strtoul
is related to strtol
.
The strtoull
function was introduced in ISO C99.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe locale | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The wcstoull
function is equivalent to the strtoull
function
in nearly all aspects but handles wide character strings.
The wcstoull
function was introduced in Amendment 1 of ISO C90.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe locale | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
strtouq
is the BSD name for strtoull
.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe locale | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The wcstouq
function is equivalent to the strtouq
function
in nearly all aspects but handles wide character strings.
The wcstouq
function is a GNU extension.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe locale | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The strtoimax
function is like strtol
except that it returns
a intmax_t
value, and accepts numbers of a corresponding range.
If the string has valid syntax for an integer but the value is not
representable because of overflow, strtoimax
returns either
INTMAX_MAX
or INTMAX_MIN
(see Integers), as
appropriate for the sign of the value. It also sets errno
to
ERANGE
to indicate there was overflow.
See Integers for a description of the intmax_t
type. The
strtoimax
function was introduced in ISO C99.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe locale | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The wcstoimax
function is equivalent to the strtoimax
function
in nearly all aspects but handles wide character strings.
The wcstoimax
function was introduced in ISO C99.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe locale | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The strtoumax
function is related to strtoimax
the same way that strtoul
is related to strtol
.
See Integers for a description of the intmax_t
type. The
strtoumax
function was introduced in ISO C99.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe locale | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The wcstoumax
function is equivalent to the strtoumax
function
in nearly all aspects but handles wide character strings.
The wcstoumax
function was introduced in ISO C99.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe locale | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This function is similar to the strtol
function with a base
argument of 10
, except that it need not detect overflow errors.
The atol
function is provided mostly for compatibility with
existing code; using strtol
is more robust.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe locale | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This function is like atol
, except that it returns an int
.
The atoi
function is also considered obsolete; use strtol
instead.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe locale | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This function is similar to atol
, except it returns a long
long int
.
The atoll
function was introduced in ISO C99. It too is
obsolete (despite having just been added); use strtoll
instead.
All the functions mentioned in this section so far do not handle
alternative representations of characters as described in the locale
data. Some locales specify thousands separator and the way they have to
be used which can help to make large numbers more readable. To read
such numbers one has to use the scanf
functions with the ‘'’
flag.
Here is a function which parses a string as a sequence of integers and returns the sum of them:
int sum_ints_from_string (char *string) { int sum = 0; while (1) { char *tail; int next; /* Skip whitespace by hand, to detect the end. */ while (isspace (*string)) string++; if (*string == 0) break; /* There is more nonwhitespace, */ /* so it ought to be another number. */ errno = 0; /* Parse it. */ next = strtol (string, &tail, 0); /* Add it in, if not overflow. */ if (errno) printf ("Overflow\n"); else sum += next; /* Advance past it. */ string = tail; } return sum; }
Previous: Parsing of Integers, Up: Parsing of Numbers [Contents][Index]
The ‘str’ functions are declared in stdlib.h and those
beginning with ‘wcs’ are declared in wchar.h. One might
wonder about the use of restrict
in the prototypes of the
functions in this section. It is seemingly useless but the ISO C
standard uses it (for the functions defined there) so we have to do it
as well.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe locale | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The strtod
(“string-to-double”) function converts the initial
part of string to a floating-point number, which is returned as a
value of type double
.
This function attempts to decompose string as follows:
isspace
function
(see Classification of Characters). These are discarded.
The hexadecimal format is as follows:
*tailptr
.
If the string is empty, contains only whitespace, or does not contain an
initial substring that has the expected syntax for a floating-point
number, no conversion is performed. In this case, strtod
returns
a value of zero and the value returned in *tailptr
is the
value of string.
In a locale other than the standard "C"
or "POSIX"
locales,
this function may recognize additional locale-dependent syntax.
If the string has valid syntax for a floating-point number but the value
is outside the range of a double
, strtod
will signal
overflow or underflow as described in Error Reporting by Mathematical Functions.
strtod
recognizes four special input strings. The strings
"inf"
and "infinity"
are converted to ∞,
or to the largest representable value if the floating-point format
doesn’t support infinities. You can prepend a "+"
or "-"
to specify the sign. Case is ignored when scanning these strings.
The strings "nan"
and "nan(chars…)"
are converted
to NaN. Again, case is ignored. If chars… are provided, they
are used in some unspecified fashion to select a particular
representation of NaN (there can be several).
Since zero is a valid result as well as the value returned on error, you
should check for errors in the same way as for strtol
, by
examining errno
and tailptr.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe locale | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
These functions are analogous to strtod
, but return float
and long double
values respectively. They report errors in the
same way as strtod
. strtof
can be substantially faster
than strtod
, but has less precision; conversely, strtold
can be much slower but has more precision (on systems where long
double
is a separate type).
These functions have been GNU extensions and are new to ISO C99.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe locale | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
These functions are like strtod
, except for the return type.
They were introduced in ISO/IEC TS 18661-3 and are available on machines that support the related types; see Mathematics.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe locale | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The wcstod
, wcstof
, wcstol
, wcstofN
,
and wcstofNx
functions are equivalent in nearly all aspects
to the strtod
, strtof
, strtold
,
strtofN
, and strtofNx
functions, but they
handle wide character strings.
The wcstod
function was introduced in Amendment 1 of ISO C90. The wcstof
and wcstold
functions were introduced in
ISO C99.
The wcstofN
and wcstofNx
functions are not in
any standard, but are added to provide completeness for the
non-deprecated interface of wide character string to floating-point
conversion functions. They are only available on machines that support
the related types; see Mathematics.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe locale | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This function is similar to the strtod
function, except that it
need not detect overflow and underflow errors. The atof
function
is provided mostly for compatibility with existing code; using
strtod
is more robust.
The GNU C Library also provides ‘_l’ versions of these functions, which take an additional argument, the locale to use in conversion.
See also Parsing of Integers.
Next: Old-fashioned System V number-to-string functions, Previous: Parsing of Numbers, Up: Arithmetic Functions [Contents][Index]
The ‘strfrom’ functions are declared in stdlib.h.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe locale | AS-Unsafe heap | AC-Unsafe mem | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The functions strfromd
(“string-from-double”), strfromf
(“string-from-float”), and strfroml
(“string-from-long-double”)
convert the floating-point number value to a string of characters and
stores them into the area pointed to by string. The conversion
writes at most size characters and respects the format specified by
format.
The format string must start with the character ‘%’. An optional precision follows, which starts with a period, ‘.’, and may be followed by a decimal integer, representing the precision. If a decimal integer is not specified after the period, the precision is taken to be zero. The character ‘*’ is not allowed. Finally, the format string ends with one of the following conversion specifiers: ‘a’, ‘A’, ‘e’, ‘E’, ‘f’, ‘F’, ‘g’ or ‘G’ (see Table of Output Conversions). Invalid format strings result in undefined behavior.
These functions return the number of characters that would have been written to string had size been sufficiently large, not counting the terminating null character. Thus, the null-terminated output has been completely written if and only if the returned value is less than size.
These functions were introduced by ISO/IEC TS 18661-1.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe locale | AS-Unsafe heap | AC-Unsafe mem | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
These functions are like strfromd
, except for the type of
value
.
They were introduced in ISO/IEC TS 18661-3 and are available on machines that support the related types; see Mathematics.
Previous: Printing of Floats, Up: Arithmetic Functions [Contents][Index]
The old System V C library provided three functions to convert numbers to strings, with unusual and hard-to-use semantics. The GNU C Library also provides these functions and some natural extensions.
These functions are only available in the GNU C Library and on systems descended
from AT&T Unix. Therefore, unless these functions do precisely what you
need, it is better to use sprintf
, which is standard.
All these functions are defined in stdlib.h.
Preliminary: | MT-Unsafe race:ecvt | AS-Unsafe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The function ecvt
converts the floating-point number value
to a string with at most ndigit decimal digits. The
returned string contains no decimal point or sign. The first digit of
the string is non-zero (unless value is actually zero) and the
last digit is rounded to nearest. *decpt
is set to the
index in the string of the first digit after the decimal point.
*neg
is set to a nonzero value if value is negative,
zero otherwise.
If ndigit decimal digits would exceed the precision of a
double
it is reduced to a system-specific value.
The returned string is statically allocated and overwritten by each call
to ecvt
.
If value is zero, it is implementation defined whether
*decpt
is 0
or 1
.
For example: ecvt (12.3, 5, &d, &n)
returns "12300"
and sets d to 2
and n to 0
.
Preliminary: | MT-Unsafe race:fcvt | AS-Unsafe heap | AC-Unsafe mem | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The function fcvt
is like ecvt
, but ndigit specifies
the number of digits after the decimal point. If ndigit is less
than zero, value is rounded to the ndigit+1’th place to the
left of the decimal point. For example, if ndigit is -1
,
value will be rounded to the nearest 10. If ndigit is
negative and larger than the number of digits to the left of the decimal
point in value, value will be rounded to one significant digit.
If ndigit decimal digits would exceed the precision of a
double
it is reduced to a system-specific value.
The returned string is statically allocated and overwritten by each call
to fcvt
.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
gcvt
is functionally equivalent to ‘sprintf(buf, "%*g",
ndigit, value)’. It is provided only for compatibility’s sake. It
returns buf.
If ndigit decimal digits would exceed the precision of a
double
it is reduced to a system-specific value.
As extensions, the GNU C Library provides versions of these three
functions that take long double
arguments.
Preliminary: | MT-Unsafe race:qecvt | AS-Unsafe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This function is equivalent to ecvt
except that it takes a
long double
for the first parameter and that ndigit is
restricted by the precision of a long double
.
Preliminary: | MT-Unsafe race:qfcvt | AS-Unsafe heap | AC-Unsafe mem | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This function is equivalent to fcvt
except that it
takes a long double
for the first parameter and that ndigit is
restricted by the precision of a long double
.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This function is equivalent to gcvt
except that it takes a
long double
for the first parameter and that ndigit is
restricted by the precision of a long double
.
The ecvt
and fcvt
functions, and their long double
equivalents, all return a string located in a static buffer which is
overwritten by the next call to the function. The GNU C Library
provides another set of extended functions which write the converted
string into a user-supplied buffer. These have the conventional
_r
suffix.
gcvt_r
is not necessary, because gcvt
already uses a
user-supplied buffer.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The ecvt_r
function is the same as ecvt
, except
that it places its result into the user-specified buffer pointed to by
buf, with length len. The return value is -1
in
case of an error and zero otherwise.
This function is a GNU extension.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The fcvt_r
function is the same as fcvt
, except that it
places its result into the user-specified buffer pointed to by
buf, with length len. The return value is -1
in
case of an error and zero otherwise.
This function is a GNU extension.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The qecvt_r
function is the same as qecvt
, except
that it places its result into the user-specified buffer pointed to by
buf, with length len. The return value is -1
in
case of an error and zero otherwise.
This function is a GNU extension.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The qfcvt_r
function is the same as qfcvt
, except
that it places its result into the user-specified buffer pointed to by
buf, with length len. The return value is -1
in
case of an error and zero otherwise.
This function is a GNU extension.
Next: Resource Usage And Limitation, Previous: Arithmetic Functions, Up: Main Menu [Contents][Index]
This chapter describes functions for manipulating dates and times, including functions for determining what time it is and conversion between different time representations.
Next: Time Types, Up: Date and Time [Contents][Index]
Discussing time in a technical manual can be difficult because the word “time” in English refers to lots of different things. In this manual, we use a rigorous terminology to avoid confusion, and the only thing we use the simple word “time” for is to talk about the abstract concept.
A calendar time is a point in the time continuum, for example November 4, 1990, at 18:02.5 UTC. Sometimes this is called “absolute time”.
We don’t speak of a “date”, because that is inherent in a calendar time.
An interval is a contiguous part of the time continuum between two calendar times, for example the hour between 9:00 and 10:00 on July 4, 1980.
An elapsed time is the length of an interval, for example, 35 minutes. People sometimes sloppily use the word “interval” to refer to the elapsed time of some interval.
An amount of time is a sum of elapsed times, which need not be of any specific intervals. For example, the amount of time it takes to read a book might be 9 hours, independently of when and in how many sittings it is read.
A period is the elapsed time of an interval between two events, especially when they are part of a sequence of regularly repeating events.
A simple calendar time is a calendar time represented as an elapsed time since a fixed, implementation-specific calendar time called the epoch. This representation is convenient for doing calculations on calendar times, such as finding the elapsed time between two calendar times. Simple calendar times are independent of time zone; they represent the same instant in time regardless of where on the globe the computer is.
POSIX says that simple calendar times do not include leap seconds, but some (otherwise POSIX-conformant) systems can be configured to include leap seconds in simple calendar times.
A broken-down time is a calendar time represented by its components in the Gregorian calendar: year, month, day, hour, minute, and second. A broken-down time value is relative to a specific time zone, and so it is also sometimes called a local time. Broken-down times are most useful for input and output, as they are easier for people to understand, but more difficult to calculate with.
CPU time measures the amount of time that a single process has actively used a CPU to perform computations. It does not include the time that process has spent waiting for external events. The system tracks the CPU time used by each process separately.
Processor time measures the amount of time any CPU has been in use by any process. It is a basic system resource, since there’s a limit to how much can exist in any given interval (the elapsed time of the interval times the number of CPUs in the computer)
People often call this CPU time, but we reserve the latter term in this manual for the definition above.
Next: Calculating Elapsed Time, Previous: Time Basics, Up: Date and Time [Contents][Index]
ISO C and POSIX define several data types for representing elapsed times, simple calendar times, and broken-down times.
clock_t
is used to measure processor and CPU time.
It may be an integer or a floating-point type.
Its values are counts of clock ticks since some arbitrary event
in the past.
The number of clock ticks per second is system-specific.
See Processor And CPU Time, for further detail.
time_t
is the simplest data type used to represent simple
calendar time.
In ISO C, time_t
can be either an integer or a floating-point
type, and the meaning of time_t
values is not specified. The
only things a strictly conforming program can do with time_t
values are: pass them to difftime
to get the elapsed time
between two simple calendar times (see Calculating Elapsed Time),
and pass them to the functions that convert them to broken-down time
(see Broken-down Time).
On POSIX-conformant systems, time_t
is an integer type and its
values represent the number of seconds elapsed since the epoch,
which is 00:00:00 on January 1, 1970, Coordinated Universal Time.
The GNU C Library additionally guarantees that time_t
is a signed
type, and that all of its functions operate correctly on negative
time_t
values, which are interpreted as times before the epoch.
struct timespec
represents a simple calendar time, or an
elapsed time, with sub-second resolution. It is declared in
time.h and has the following members:
time_t tv_sec
The number of whole seconds elapsed since the epoch (for a simple calendar time) or since some other starting point (for an elapsed time).
long int tv_nsec
The number of nanoseconds elapsed since the time given by the
tv_sec
member.
When struct timespec
values are produced by GNU C Library
functions, the value in this field will always be greater than or
equal to zero, and less than 1,000,000,000.
When struct timespec
values are supplied to GNU C Library
functions, the value in this field must be in the same range.
struct timeval
is an older type for representing a simple
calendar time, or an elapsed time, with sub-second resolution. It is
almost the same as struct timespec
, but provides only
microsecond resolution. It is declared in sys/time.h and has
the following members:
time_t tv_sec
The number of whole seconds elapsed since the epoch (for a simple calendar time) or since some other starting point (for an elapsed time).
long int tv_usec
The number of microseconds elapsed since the time given by the
tv_sec
member.
When struct timeval
values are produced by GNU C Library
functions, the value in this field will always be greater than or
equal to zero, and less than 1,000,000.
When struct timeval
values are supplied to GNU C Library
functions, the value in this field must be in the same range.
This is the data type used to represent a broken-down time. It has separate fields for year, month, day, and so on. See Broken-down Time, for further details.
Next: Processor And CPU Time, Previous: Time Types, Up: Date and Time [Contents][Index]
Often, one wishes to calculate an elapsed time as the difference between two simple calendar times. The GNU C Library provides only one function for this purpose.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The difftime
function returns the number of seconds of elapsed
time from calendar time begin to calendar time end, as
a value of type double
.
On POSIX-conformant systems, the advantage of using
‘difftime (end, begin)’ over ‘end - begin’
is that it will produce the mathematically correct result even if
end and begin are so far apart that a simple subtraction
would overflow. However, if they are so far apart that a double
cannot exactly represent the difference, the result will be inexact.
On other systems, time_t
values might be encoded in a way that
prevents subtraction from working directly, and then difftime
would be the only way to compute their difference.
The GNU C Library does not provide any functions for computing the
difference between two values of type struct timeval
or
struct timespec
. Here is the recommended way to do this
calculation by hand. It works even on some peculiar operating systems
where the tv_sec
member has an unsigned type.
/* Subtract the ‘struct timeval’ values X and Y,
storing the result in RESULT.
Return 1 if the difference is negative, otherwise 0. */
int
timeval_subtract (struct timeval *result, struct timeval *x, struct timeval *y)
{
/* Perform the carry for the later subtraction by updating y. */
if (x->tv_usec < y->tv_usec) {
int nsec = (y->tv_usec - x->tv_usec) / 1000000 + 1;
y->tv_usec -= 1000000 * nsec;
y->tv_sec += nsec;
}
if (x->tv_usec - y->tv_usec > 1000000) {
int nsec = (x->tv_usec - y->tv_usec) / 1000000;
y->tv_usec += 1000000 * nsec;
y->tv_sec -= nsec;
}
/* Compute the time remaining to wait.
tv_usec
is certainly positive. */
result->tv_sec = x->tv_sec - y->tv_sec;
result->tv_usec = x->tv_usec - y->tv_usec;
/* Return 1 if result is negative. */
return x->tv_sec < y->tv_sec;
}
Next: Calendar Time, Previous: Calculating Elapsed Time, Up: Date and Time [Contents][Index]
If you’re trying to optimize your program or measure its efficiency, it’s very useful to know how much processor time it uses. For that, calendar time and elapsed times are useless because a process may spend time waiting for I/O or for other processes to use the CPU. However, you can get the information with the functions in this section.
CPU time (see Time Basics) is represented by the data type
clock_t
, which is a number of clock ticks. It gives the
total amount of time a process has actively used a CPU since some
arbitrary event. On GNU systems, that event is the creation of the
process. While arbitrary in general, the event is always the same event
for any particular process, so you can always measure how much time on
the CPU a particular computation takes by examining the process’ CPU
time before and after the computation.
On GNU/Linux and GNU/Hurd systems, clock_t
is equivalent to long int
and
CLOCKS_PER_SEC
is an integer value. But in other systems, both
clock_t
and the macro CLOCKS_PER_SEC
can be either integer
or floating-point types. Casting CPU time values to double
, as
in the example above, makes sure that operations such as arithmetic and
printing work properly and consistently no matter what the underlying
representation is.
Note that the clock can wrap around. On a 32bit system with
CLOCKS_PER_SEC
set to one million this function will return the
same value approximately every 72 minutes.
For additional functions to examine a process’ use of processor time, and to control it, see Resource Usage And Limitation.
Next: Processor Time Inquiry, Up: Processor And CPU Time [Contents][Index]
To get a process’ CPU time, you can use the clock
function. This
facility is declared in the header file time.h.
In typical usage, you call the clock
function at the beginning
and end of the interval you want to time, subtract the values, and then
divide by CLOCKS_PER_SEC
(the number of clock ticks per second)
to get processor time, like this:
#include <time.h>
clock_t start, end;
double cpu_time_used;
start = clock();
… /* Do the work. */
end = clock();
cpu_time_used = ((double) (end - start)) / CLOCKS_PER_SEC;
Do not use a single CPU time as an amount of time; it doesn’t work that way. Either do a subtraction as shown above or query processor time directly. See Processor Time Inquiry.
Different computers and operating systems vary wildly in how they keep track of CPU time. It’s common for the internal processor clock to have a resolution somewhere between a hundredth and millionth of a second.
The value of this macro is the number of clock ticks per second measured
by the clock
function. POSIX requires that this value be one
million independent of the actual resolution.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This function returns the calling process’ current CPU time. If the CPU
time is not available or cannot be represented, clock
returns the
value (clock_t)(-1)
.
Previous: CPU Time Inquiry, Up: Processor And CPU Time [Contents][Index]
The times
function returns information about a process’
consumption of processor time in a struct tms
object, in
addition to the process’ CPU time. See Time Basics. You should
include the header file sys/times.h to use this facility.
The tms
structure is used to return information about process
times. It contains at least the following members:
clock_t tms_utime
This is the total processor time the calling process has used in executing the instructions of its program.
clock_t tms_stime
This is the processor time the system has used on behalf of the calling process.
clock_t tms_cutime
This is the sum of the tms_utime
values and the tms_cutime
values of all terminated child processes of the calling process, whose
status has been reported to the parent process by wait
or
waitpid
; see Process Completion. In other words, it
represents the total processor time used in executing the instructions
of all the terminated child processes of the calling process, excluding
child processes which have not yet been reported by wait
or
waitpid
.
clock_t tms_cstime
This is similar to tms_cutime
, but represents the total processor
time the system has used on behalf of all the terminated child processes
of the calling process.
All of the times are given in numbers of clock ticks. Unlike CPU time, these are the actual amounts of time; not relative to any event. See Creating a Process.
This is an obsolete name for the number of clock ticks per second. Use
sysconf (_SC_CLK_TCK)
instead.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The times
function stores the processor time information for
the calling process in buffer.
The return value is the number of clock ticks since an arbitrary point
in the past, e.g. since system start-up. times
returns
(clock_t)(-1)
to indicate failure.
Portability Note: The clock
function described in
CPU Time Inquiry is specified by the ISO C standard. The
times
function is a feature of POSIX.1. On GNU systems, the
CPU time is defined to be equivalent to the sum of the tms_utime
and tms_stime
fields returned by times
.
Next: Setting an Alarm, Previous: Processor And CPU Time, Up: Date and Time [Contents][Index]
This section describes the functions for getting, setting, and manipulating calendar times.
TZ
Next: Setting and Adjusting the Time, Up: Calendar Time [Contents][Index]
The GNU C Library provides several functions for getting the current calendar time, with different levels of resolution.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This is the simplest function for getting the current calendar time.
It returns the calendar time as a value of type time_t
; on
POSIX systems, that means it has a resolution of one second. It
uses the same clock as ‘clock_gettime (CLOCK_REALTIME_COARSE)’,
when the clock is available or ‘clock_gettime (CLOCK_REALTIME)’
otherwise.
If the argument result is not a null pointer, the calendar time
value is also stored in *result
.
This function cannot fail.
Some applications need more precise timekeeping than is possible with
a time_t
alone. Some applications also need more control over
what is meant by “the current time.” For these applications, POSIX
provides a function clock_gettime
that can retrieve the time
with up to nanosecond precision, from a variety of different clocks.
Clocks can be system-wide, measuring time the same for all processes;
or they can be per-process or per-thread, measuring CPU time consumed
by a particular process, or some other similar resource. Each clock
has its own resolution and epoch. You can find the resolution of a
clock with the function clock_getres
. There is no function to
get the epoch for a clock; either it is fixed and documented, or the
clock is not meant to be used to measure absolute times.
The type clockid_t
is used for constants that indicate which of
several system clocks one wishes to use.
All systems that support this family of functions will define at least this clock constant:
This clock uses the POSIX epoch, 00:00:00 on January 1, 1970, Coordinated
Universal Time. It is close to, but not necessarily in lock-step with, the
clocks of time
(above) and of gettimeofday
(below).
A second clock constant which is not universal, but still very common, is for a clock measuring monotonic time. Monotonic time is useful for measuring elapsed times, because it guarantees that those measurements are not affected by changes to the system clock.
System-wide clock that continuously measures the advancement of calendar time, ignoring discontinuous changes to the system’s setting for absolute calendar time.
The epoch for this clock is an unspecified point in the past.
The epoch may change if the system is rebooted or suspended.
Therefore, CLOCK_MONOTONIC
cannot be used to measure
absolute time, only elapsed time.
Systems may support more than just these two clocks.
Get the current time according to the clock identified by clock,
storing it as seconds and nanoseconds in *ts
.
See Time Types, for a description of struct timespec
.
The return value is 0
on success and -1
on failure. The
following errno
error condition is defined for this function:
EINVAL
The clock identified by clock is not supported.
clock_gettime
reports the time scaled to seconds and
nanoseconds, but the actual resolution of each clock may not be as
fine as one nanosecond, and may not be the same for all clocks. POSIX
also provides a function for finding out the actual resolution of a
clock:
Get the actual resolution of the clock identified by clock,
storing it in *ts
.
For instance, if the clock hardware for CLOCK_REALTIME
uses a quartz crystal that oscillates at 32.768 kHz,
then its resolution would be 30.518 microseconds,
and ‘clock_getres (CLOCK_REALTIME, &r)’ would set
r.tv_sec
to 0 and r.tv_nsec
to 30518.
The return value is 0
on success and -1
on failure. The
following errno
error condition is defined for this function:
EINVAL
The clock identified by clock is not supported.
These functions, and the constants that identify particular clocks, are declared in time.h.
Portability Note: On some systems, including systems that use
older versions of the GNU C Library, programs that use clock_gettime
or clock_setres
must be linked with the -lrt
library.
This has not been necessary with the GNU C Library since version 2.17.
The GNU C Library also provides an older, but still widely used, function for getting the current time with a resolution of microseconds. This function is declared in sys/time.h.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
Get the current calendar time, storing it as seconds and microseconds
in *tp
. See Time Types, for a description of
struct timeval
. The clock of gettimeofday
is close to,
but not necessarily in lock-step with, the clocks of time
and of
‘clock_gettime (CLOCK_REALTIME)’ (see above).
On some historic systems, if tzp was not a null pointer,
information about a system-wide time zone would be written to
*tzp
. This feature is obsolete and not supported on
GNU systems. You should always supply a null pointer for this
argument. Instead, use the facilities described in Functions and Variables for Time Zones and in Broken-down Time for working with time zones.
This function cannot fail, and its return value is always 0
.
Portability Note: As of the 2008 revision of POSIX, this
function is considered obsolete. The GNU C Library will continue to provide
this function indefinitely, but new programs should use
clock_gettime
instead.
Next: Broken-down Time, Previous: Getting the Time, Up: Calendar Time [Contents][Index]
The clock hardware inside a modern computer is quite reliable, but it can still be wrong. The functions in this section allow one to set the system’s idea of the current calendar time, and to adjust the rate at which the system counts seconds, so that the calendar time will both be accurate, and remain accurate.
The functions in this section require special privileges to use. See Users and Groups.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
Change the current calendar time, according to the clock identified by
clock, to be the simple calendar time in *ts
.
Not all of the system’s clocks can be changed. For instance, the
CLOCK_REALTIME
clock can be changed (with the appropriate
privileges), but the CLOCK_MONOTONIC
clock cannot.
Because simple calendar times are independent of time zone, this function should not be used when the time zone changes (e.g. if the computer is physically moved from one zone to another). Instead, use the facilities described in Functions and Variables for Time Zones.
clock_settime
causes the clock to jump forwards or backwards,
which can cause a variety of problems. Changing the
CLOCK_REALTIME
clock with clock_settime
does not affect
when timers expire (see Setting an Alarm) or when sleeping
processes wake up (see Sleeping), which avoids some of the
problems. Still, for small changes made while the system is running,
it is better to use ntp_adjtime
(below) to make a smooth
transition from one time to another.
The return value is 0
on success and -1
on failure. The
following errno
error conditions are defined for this function:
EINVAL
The clock identified by clock is not supported or cannot be set
at all, or the simple calendar time in *ts
is invalid
(for instance, ts->tv_nsec
is negative or greater than 999,999,999).
EPERM
This process does not have the privileges required to set the clock identified by clock.
Portability Note: On some systems, including systems that use
older versions of the GNU C Library, programs that use clock_settime
must be linked with the -lrt
library. This has not been
necessary with the GNU C Library since version 2.17.
For systems that remain up and running for long periods, it is not enough to set the time once; one should also discipline the clock so that it does not drift away from the true calendar time.
The ntp_gettime
and ntp_adjtime
functions provide an
interface to monitor and discipline the system clock. For example,
you can fine-tune the rate at which the clock “ticks,” and make
small adjustments to the current reported calendar time smoothly, by
temporarily speeding up or slowing down the clock.
These functions’ names begin with ‘ntp_’ because they were designed for use by programs implementing the Network Time Protocol to synchronize a system’s clock with other systems’ clocks and/or with external high-precision clock hardware.
These functions, and the constants and structures they use, are declared in sys/timex.h.
This structure is used to report information about the system clock. It contains the following members:
struct timeval time
The current calendar time, as if retrieved by gettimeofday
.
The struct timeval
data type is described in
Time Types.
long int maxerror
This is the maximum error, measured in microseconds. Unless updated
via ntp_adjtime
periodically, this value will reach some
platform-specific maximum value.
long int esterror
This is the estimated error, measured in microseconds. This value can
be set by ntp_adjtime
to indicate the estimated offset of the
system clock from the true calendar time.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The ntp_gettime
function sets the structure pointed to by
tptr to current values. The elements of the structure afterwards
contain the values the timer implementation in the kernel assumes. They
might or might not be correct. If they are not, an ntp_adjtime
call is necessary.
The return value is 0
on success and other values on failure. The
following errno
error conditions are defined for this function:
TIME_ERROR
¶The precision clock model is not properly set up at the moment, thus the clock must be considered unsynchronized, and the values should be treated with care.
This structure is used to control and monitor the system clock. It contains the following members:
unsigned int modes
This variable controls whether and which values are set. Several
symbolic constants have to be combined with binary or to specify
the effective mode. These constants start with MOD_
.
long int offset
This value indicates the current offset of the system clock from the true
calendar time. The value is given in microseconds. If bit
MOD_OFFSET
is set in modes
, the offset (and possibly other
dependent values) can be set. The offset’s absolute value must not
exceed MAXPHASE
.
long int frequency
This value indicates the difference in frequency between the true
calendar time and the system clock. The value is expressed as scaled
PPM (parts per million, 0.0001%). The scaling is 1 <<
SHIFT_USEC
. The value can be set with bit MOD_FREQUENCY
, but
the absolute value must not exceed MAXFREQ
.
long int maxerror
This is the maximum error, measured in microseconds. A new value can be
set using bit MOD_MAXERROR
. Unless updated via
ntp_adjtime
periodically, this value will increase steadily
and reach some platform-specific maximum value.
long int esterror
This is the estimated error, measured in microseconds. This value can
be set using bit MOD_ESTERROR
.
int status
This variable reflects the various states of the clock machinery. There
are symbolic constants for the significant bits, starting with
STA_
. Some of these flags can be updated using the
MOD_STATUS
bit.
long int constant
This value represents the bandwidth or stiffness of the PLL (phase
locked loop) implemented in the kernel. The value can be changed using
bit MOD_TIMECONST
.
long int precision
This value represents the accuracy or the maximum error when reading the system clock. The value is expressed in microseconds.
long int tolerance
This value represents the maximum frequency error of the system clock in
scaled PPM. This value is used to increase the maxerror
every
second.
struct timeval time
The current calendar time.
long int tick
The elapsed time between clock ticks in microseconds. A clock tick is a periodic timer interrupt on which the system clock is based.
long int ppsfreq
This is the first of a few optional variables that are present only if the system clock can use a PPS (pulse per second) signal to discipline the system clock. The value is expressed in scaled PPM and it denotes the difference in frequency between the system clock and the PPS signal.
long int jitter
This value expresses a median filtered average of the PPS signal’s dispersion in microseconds.
int shift
This value is a binary exponent for the duration of the PPS calibration
interval, ranging from PPS_SHIFT
to PPS_SHIFTMAX
.
long int stabil
This value represents the median filtered dispersion of the PPS frequency in scaled PPM.
long int jitcnt
This counter represents the number of pulses where the jitter exceeded
the allowed maximum MAXTIME
.
long int calcnt
This counter reflects the number of successful calibration intervals.
long int errcnt
This counter represents the number of calibration errors (caused by large offsets or jitter).
long int stbcnt
This counter denotes the number of calibrations where the stability exceeded the threshold.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The ntp_adjtime
function sets the structure specified by
tptr to current values.
In addition, ntp_adjtime
updates some settings to match what
you pass to it in *tptr
. Use the modes
element of
*tptr
to select what settings to update. You can set
offset
, freq
, maxerror
, esterror
,
status
, constant
, and tick
.
modes
= zero means set nothing.
Only the superuser can update settings.
The return value is 0
on success and other values on failure. The
following errno
error conditions are defined for this function:
TIME_ERROR
The high accuracy clock model is not properly set up at the moment, thus the clock must be considered unsynchronized, and the values should be treated with care. Another reason could be that the specified new values are not allowed.
EPERM
The process specified a settings update, but is not superuser.
For more details see RFC1305 (Network Time Protocol, Version 3) and related documents.
Portability note: Early versions of the GNU C Library did not
have this function, but did have the synonymous adjtimex
.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This simpler version of ntp_adjtime
speeds up or slows down the
system clock for a short time, in order to correct it by a small
amount. This avoids a discontinuous change in the calendar time
reported by the CLOCK_REALTIME
clock, at the price of having to
wait longer for the time to become correct.
The delta argument specifies a relative adjustment to be made to the clock time. If negative, the system clock is slowed down for a while until it has lost this much elapsed time. If positive, the system clock is speeded up for a while.
If the olddelta argument is not a null pointer, the adjtime
function returns information about any previous time adjustment that
has not yet completed.
The return value is 0
on success and -1
on failure. The
following errno
error condition is defined for this function:
EPERM
This process does not have the privileges required to adjust the
CLOCK_REALTIME
clock.
For compatibility, the GNU C Library also provides several older functions for controlling the system time. New programs should prefer to use the functions above.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
Change the CLOCK_REALTIME
calendar time to be the simple
calendar time in *newtime
. Calling this function is
exactly the same as calling ‘clock_settime (CLOCK_REALTIME)’,
except that the new time can only be set to a precision of one second.
This function is no longer available on GNU systems, but it may be the only way to set the time on very old Unix systems, so we continue to document it. If it is available, it is declared in time.h.
The return value is 0
on success and -1
on failure. The
following errno
error condition is defined for this function:
EPERM
This process does not have the privileges required to adjust the
CLOCK_REALTIME
clock.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
adjtimex
is an older name for ntp_adjtime
.
This function is only available on GNU/Linux systems.
It is declared in sys/timex.h.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
Change the CLOCK_REALTIME
calendar time to be the simple
calendar time in *newtime
. This function is declared in
sys/time.h.
When tzp is a null pointer, calling this function is exactly the same as calling ‘clock_settime (CLOCK_REALTIME)’, except that the new time can only be set to a precision of one microsecond.
When tzp is not a null pointer, the data it points to may be used to set a system-wide idea of the current timezone. This feature is obsolete and not supported on GNU systems. Instead, use the facilities described in Functions and Variables for Time Zones and in Broken-down Time for working with time zones.
The return value is 0
on success and -1
on failure. The
following errno
error conditions are defined for this function:
EPERM
This process does not have the privileges required to set the
CLOCK_REALTIME
clock.
EINVAL
Neither tp nor tzp is a null pointer. (For historical reasons, it is not possible to set the current time and the current time zone in the same call.)
ENOSYS
The operating system does not support setting time zone information, and tzp is not a null pointer.
Next: Formatting Calendar Time, Previous: Setting and Adjusting the Time, Up: Calendar Time [Contents][Index]
Simple calendar times represent absolute times as elapsed times since an epoch. This is convenient for computation, but has no relation to the way people normally think of calendar time. By contrast, broken-down time is a binary representation of calendar time separated into year, month, day, and so on. Broken-down time values are not useful for calculations, but they are useful for printing human readable time information.
A broken-down time value is always relative to a choice of time zone, and it also indicates which time zone that is.
The symbols in this section are declared in the header file time.h.
This is the data type used to represent a broken-down time. The structure contains at least the following members, which can appear in any order.
int tm_sec
This is the number of full seconds since the top of the minute (normally
in the range 0
through 59
, but the actual upper limit is
60
, to allow for leap seconds if leap second support is
available).
int tm_min
This is the number of full minutes since the top of the hour (in the
range 0
through 59
).
int tm_hour
This is the number of full hours past midnight (in the range 0
through
23
).
int tm_mday
This is the ordinal day of the month (in the range 1
through 31
).
Watch out for this one! As the only ordinal number in the structure, it is
inconsistent with the rest of the structure.
int tm_mon
This is the number of full calendar months since the beginning of the
year (in the range 0
through 11
). Watch out for this one!
People usually use ordinal numbers for month-of-year (where January = 1).
int tm_year
This is the number of full calendar years since 1900.
int tm_wday
This is the number of full days since Sunday (in the range 0
through
6
).
int tm_yday
This is the number of full days since the beginning of the year (in the
range 0
through 365
).
int tm_isdst
¶This is a flag that indicates whether Daylight Saving Time is (or was, or will be) in effect at the time described. The value is positive if Daylight Saving Time is in effect, zero if it is not, and negative if the information is not available.
long int tm_gmtoff
This field describes the time zone that was used to compute this
broken-down time value, including any adjustment for daylight saving; it
is the number of seconds that you must add to UTC to get local time.
You can also think of this as the number of seconds east of UTC. For
example, for U.S. Eastern Standard Time, the value is -5*60*60
.
The tm_gmtoff
field is derived from BSD and is a GNU library
extension; it is not visible in a strict ISO C environment.
const char *tm_zone
This field is the abbreviation for the time zone that was used to compute this
broken-down time value. Like tm_gmtoff
, this field is a BSD and
GNU extension, and is not visible in a strict ISO C environment.
Preliminary: | MT-Unsafe race:tmbuf env locale | AS-Unsafe heap lock | AC-Unsafe lock mem fd | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The localtime
function converts the simple time pointed to by
time to broken-down time representation, expressed relative to the
user’s specified time zone.
The return value is a pointer to a static broken-down time structure, which
might be overwritten by subsequent calls to ctime
, gmtime
,
or localtime
. (But no other library function overwrites the contents
of this object.)
The return value is the null pointer if time cannot be represented
as a broken-down time; typically this is because the year cannot fit into
an int
.
Calling localtime
also sets the current time zone as if
tzset
were called. See Functions and Variables for Time Zones.
Using the localtime
function is a big problem in multi-threaded
programs. The result is returned in a static buffer and this is used in
all threads. POSIX.1c introduced a variant of this function.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe env locale | AS-Unsafe heap lock | AC-Unsafe lock mem fd | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The localtime_r
function works just like the localtime
function. It takes a pointer to a variable containing a simple time
and converts it to the broken-down time format.
But the result is not placed in a static buffer. Instead it is placed
in the object of type struct tm
to which the parameter
resultp points.
If the conversion is successful the function returns a pointer to the object the result was written into, i.e., it returns resultp.
Preliminary: | MT-Unsafe race:tmbuf env locale | AS-Unsafe heap lock | AC-Unsafe lock mem fd | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This function is similar to localtime
, except that the broken-down
time is expressed as Coordinated Universal Time (UTC) (formerly called
Greenwich Mean Time (GMT)) rather than relative to a local time zone.
As for the localtime
function we have the problem that the result
is placed in a static variable. POSIX.1c also provides a replacement for
gmtime
.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe env locale | AS-Unsafe heap lock | AC-Unsafe lock mem fd | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This function is similar to localtime_r
, except that it converts
just like gmtime
the given time as Coordinated Universal Time.
If the conversion is successful the function returns a pointer to the object the result was written into, i.e., it returns resultp.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe env locale | AS-Unsafe heap lock | AC-Unsafe lock mem fd | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The mktime
function converts a broken-down time structure to a
simple time representation. It also normalizes the contents of the
broken-down time structure, and fills in some components based on the
values of the others.
The mktime
function ignores the specified contents of the
tm_wday
, tm_yday
, tm_gmtoff
, and tm_zone
members of the broken-down time
structure. It uses the values of the other components to determine the
calendar time; it’s permissible for these components to have
unnormalized values outside their normal ranges. The last thing that
mktime
does is adjust the components of the brokentime
structure, including the members that were initially ignored.
If the specified broken-down time cannot be represented as a simple time,
mktime
returns a value of (time_t)(-1)
and does not modify
the contents of brokentime.
Calling mktime
also sets the current time zone as if
tzset
were called; mktime
uses this information instead
of brokentime’s initial tm_gmtoff
and tm_zone
members. See Functions and Variables for Time Zones.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe env locale | AS-Unsafe heap lock | AC-Unsafe lock mem fd | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
timelocal
is functionally identical to mktime
, but more
mnemonically named. Note that it is the inverse of the localtime
function.
Portability note: mktime
is essentially universally
available. timelocal
is rather rare.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe env locale | AS-Unsafe heap lock | AC-Unsafe lock mem fd | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
timegm
is functionally identical to mktime
except it
always takes the input values to be Coordinated Universal Time (UTC)
regardless of any local time zone setting.
Note that timegm
is the inverse of gmtime
.
Portability note: mktime
is essentially universally
available. timegm
is rather rare. For the most portable
conversion from a UTC broken-down time to a simple time, set
the TZ
environment variable to UTC, call mktime
, then set
TZ
back.
Next: Convert textual time and date information back, Previous: Broken-down Time, Up: Calendar Time [Contents][Index]
The functions described in this section format calendar time values as strings. These functions are declared in the header file time.h.
Preliminary: | MT-Unsafe race:asctime locale | AS-Unsafe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The asctime
function converts the broken-down time value that
brokentime points to into a string in a standard format:
"Tue May 21 13:46:22 1991\n"
The abbreviations for the days of week are: ‘Sun’, ‘Mon’, ‘Tue’, ‘Wed’, ‘Thu’, ‘Fri’, and ‘Sat’.
The abbreviations for the months are: ‘Jan’, ‘Feb’, ‘Mar’, ‘Apr’, ‘May’, ‘Jun’, ‘Jul’, ‘Aug’, ‘Sep’, ‘Oct’, ‘Nov’, and ‘Dec’.
The return value points to a statically allocated string, which might be
overwritten by subsequent calls to asctime
or ctime
.
(But no other library function overwrites the contents of this
string.)
Preliminary: | MT-Safe locale | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This function is similar to asctime
but instead of placing the
result in a static buffer it writes the string in the buffer pointed to
by the parameter buffer. This buffer should have room
for at least 26 bytes, including the terminating null.
If no error occurred the function returns a pointer to the string the
result was written into, i.e., it returns buffer. Otherwise
it returns NULL
.
Preliminary: | MT-Unsafe race:tmbuf race:asctime env locale | AS-Unsafe heap lock | AC-Unsafe lock mem fd | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The ctime
function is similar to asctime
, except that you
specify the calendar time argument as a time_t
simple time value
rather than in broken-down local time format. It is equivalent to
asctime (localtime (time))
Calling ctime
also sets the current time zone as if
tzset
were called. See Functions and Variables for Time Zones.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe env locale | AS-Unsafe heap lock | AC-Unsafe lock mem fd | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This function is similar to ctime
, but places the result in the
string pointed to by buffer. It is equivalent to (written using
gcc extensions, see Statement Exprs in Porting and Using gcc):
({ struct tm tm; asctime_r (localtime_r (time, &tm), buf); })
If no error occurred the function returns a pointer to the string the
result was written into, i.e., it returns buffer. Otherwise
it returns NULL
.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe env locale | AS-Unsafe corrupt heap lock dlopen | AC-Unsafe corrupt lock mem fd | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This function is similar to the sprintf
function (see Formatted Input), but the conversion specifications that can appear in the format
template template are specialized for printing components of the date
and time brokentime according to the locale currently specified for
time conversion (see Locales and Internationalization) and the current time zone
(see Functions and Variables for Time Zones).
Ordinary characters appearing in the template are copied to the output string s; this can include multibyte character sequences. Conversion specifiers are introduced by a ‘%’ character, followed by an optional flag which can be one of the following. These flags are all GNU extensions. The first three affect only the output of numbers:
_
The number is padded with spaces.
-
The number is not padded at all.
0
The number is padded with zeros even if the format specifies padding with spaces.
^
The output uses uppercase characters, but only if this is possible (see Case Conversion).
The default action is to pad the number with zeros to keep it a constant width. Numbers that do not have a range indicated below are never padded, since there is no natural width for them.
Following the flag an optional specification of the width is possible. This is specified in decimal notation. If the natural size of the output of the field has less than the specified number of characters, the result is written right adjusted and space padded to the given size.
An optional modifier can follow the optional flag and width specification. The modifiers, which were first standardized by POSIX.2-1992 and by ISO C99, are:
E
Use the locale’s alternative representation for date and time. This
modifier applies to the %c
, %C
, %x
, %X
,
%y
and %Y
format specifiers. In a Japanese locale, for
example, %Ex
might yield a date format based on the Japanese
Emperors’ reigns.
O
With all format specifiers that produce numbers: use the locale’s alternative numeric symbols.
With %B
, %b
, and %h
: use the grammatical form for
month names that is appropriate when the month is named by itself,
rather than the form that is appropriate when the month is used as
part of a complete date. The %OB
and %Ob
formats are a
C2X feature, specified in C2X to use the locale’s ‘alternative’ month
name; the GNU C Library extends this specification to say that the form used
in a complete date is the default and the form naming the month by
itself is the alternative.
If the format supports the modifier but no alternative representation is available, it is ignored.
The conversion specifier ends with a format specifier taken from the following list. The whole ‘%’ sequence is replaced in the output string as follows:
%a
The abbreviated weekday name according to the current locale.
%A
The full weekday name according to the current locale.
%b
The abbreviated month name according to the current locale, in the
grammatical form used when the month is part of a complete date.
As a C2X feature (with a more detailed specification in the GNU C Library),
the O
modifier can be used (%Ob
) to get the grammatical
form used when the month is named by itself.
%B
The full month name according to the current locale, in the
grammatical form used when the month is part of a complete date.
As a C2X feature (with a more detailed specification in the GNU C Library),
the O
modifier can be used (%OB
) to get the grammatical
form used when the month is named by itself.
Note that not all languages need two different forms of the month
names, so the text produced by %B
and %OB
, and by
%b
and %Ob
, may or may not be the same, depending on
the locale.
%c
The preferred calendar time representation for the current locale.
%C
The century of the year. This is equivalent to the greatest integer not greater than the year divided by 100.
If the E
modifier is specified (%EC
), instead produces
the name of the period for the year (e.g. an era name) in the
locale’s alternative calendar.
This format was first standardized by POSIX.2-1992 and by ISO C99.
%d
The day of the month as a decimal number (range 01
through 31
).
%D
The date using the format %m/%d/%y
.
This format was first standardized by POSIX.2-1992 and by ISO C99.
%e
The day of the month like with %d
, but padded with spaces (range
1
through 31
).
This format was first standardized by POSIX.2-1992 and by ISO C99.
%F
The date using the format %Y-%m-%d
. This is the form specified
in the ISO 8601 standard and is the preferred form for all uses.
This format was first standardized by ISO C99 and by POSIX.1-2001.
%g
The year corresponding to the ISO week number, but without the century
(range 00
through 99
). This has the same format and value
as %y
, except that if the ISO week number (see %V
) belongs
to the previous or next year, that year is used instead.
This format was first standardized by ISO C99 and by POSIX.1-2001.
%G
The year corresponding to the ISO week number. This has the same format
and value as %Y
, except that if the ISO week number (see
%V
) belongs to the previous or next year, that year is used
instead.
This format was first standardized by ISO C99 and by POSIX.1-2001 but was previously available as a GNU extension.
%h
The abbreviated month name according to the current locale. The action
is the same as for %b
.
This format was first standardized by POSIX.2-1992 and by ISO C99.
%H
The hour as a decimal number, using a 24-hour clock (range 00
through
23
).
%I
The hour as a decimal number, using a 12-hour clock (range 01
through
12
).
%j
The day of the year as a decimal number (range 001
through 366
).
%k
The hour as a decimal number, using a 24-hour clock like %H
, but
padded with spaces (range 0
through 23
).
This format is a GNU extension.
%l
The hour as a decimal number, using a 12-hour clock like %I
, but
padded with spaces (range 1
through 12
).
This format is a GNU extension.
%m
The month as a decimal number (range 01
through 12
).
%M
The minute as a decimal number (range 00
through 59
).
%n
A single ‘\n’ (newline) character.
This format was first standardized by POSIX.2-1992 and by ISO C99.
%p
Either ‘AM’ or ‘PM’, according to the given time value; or the
corresponding strings for the current locale. Noon is treated as
‘PM’ and midnight as ‘AM’. In most locales
‘AM’/‘PM’ format is not supported, in such cases "%p"
yields an empty string.
%P
Either ‘am’ or ‘pm’, according to the given time value; or the
corresponding strings for the current locale, printed in lowercase
characters. Noon is treated as ‘pm’ and midnight as ‘am’. In
most locales ‘AM’/‘PM’ format is not supported, in such cases
"%P"
yields an empty string.
This format is a GNU extension.
%r
The complete calendar time using the AM/PM format of the current locale.
This format was first standardized by POSIX.2-1992 and by ISO C99.
In the POSIX locale, this format is equivalent to %I:%M:%S %p
.
%R
The hour and minute in decimal numbers using the format %H:%M
.
This format was first standardized by ISO C99 and by POSIX.1-2001 but was previously available as a GNU extension.
%s
The number of seconds since the epoch, i.e., since 1970-01-01 00:00:00 UTC. Leap seconds are not counted unless leap second support is available.
This format is a GNU extension.
%S
The seconds as a decimal number (range 00
through 60
).
%t
A single ‘\t’ (tabulator) character.
This format was first standardized by POSIX.2-1992 and by ISO C99.
%T
The time of day using decimal numbers using the format %H:%M:%S
.
This format was first standardized by POSIX.2-1992 and by ISO C99.
%u
The day of the week as a decimal number (range 1
through
7
), Monday being 1
.
This format was first standardized by POSIX.2-1992 and by ISO C99.
%U
The week number of the current year as a decimal number (range 00
through 53
), starting with the first Sunday as the first day of
the first week. Days preceding the first Sunday in the year are
considered to be in week 00
.
%V
The ISO 8601:1988 week number as a decimal number (range 01
through 53
). ISO weeks start with Monday and end with Sunday.
Week 01
of a year is the first week which has the majority of its
days in that year; this is equivalent to the week containing the year’s
first Thursday, and it is also equivalent to the week containing January
4. Week 01
of a year can contain days from the previous year.
The week before week 01
of a year is the last week (52
or
53
) of the previous year even if it contains days from the new
year.
This format was first standardized by POSIX.2-1992 and by ISO C99.
%w
The day of the week as a decimal number (range 0
through
6
), Sunday being 0
.
%W
The week number of the current year as a decimal number (range 00
through 53
), starting with the first Monday as the first day of
the first week. All days preceding the first Monday in the year are
considered to be in week 00
.
%x
The preferred date representation for the current locale.
%X
The preferred time of day representation for the current locale.
%y
The year without a century as a decimal number (range 00
through
99
). This is equivalent to the year modulo 100.
If the E
modifier is specified (%Ey
), instead produces
the year number according to a locale-specific alternative calendar.
Unlike %y
, the number is not reduced modulo 100.
However, by default it is zero-padded to a minimum of two digits (this
can be overridden by an explicit field width or by the _
and
-
flags).
%Y
The year as a decimal number, using the Gregorian calendar. Years
before the year 1
are numbered 0
, -1
, and so on.
If the E
modifier is specified (%EY
), instead produces a
complete representation of the year according to the locale’s
alternative calendar. Generally this will be some combination of the
information produced by %EC
and %Ey
. As a GNU
extension, the formatting flags _
or -
may be used with
this conversion specifier; they affect how the year number is printed.
%z
RFC 822/ISO 8601:1988 style numeric time zone (e.g.,
-0600
or +0100
), or nothing if no time zone is
determinable.
This format was first standardized by ISO C99 and by POSIX.1-2001 but was previously available as a GNU extension.
In the POSIX locale, a full RFC 822 timestamp is generated by the format ‘"%a, %d %b %Y %H:%M:%S %z"’ (or the equivalent ‘"%a, %d %b %Y %T %z"’).
%Z
The time zone abbreviation (empty if the time zone can’t be determined).
%%
A literal ‘%’ character.
The size parameter can be used to specify the maximum number of
characters to be stored in the array s, including the terminating
null character. If the formatted time requires more than size
characters, strftime
returns zero and the contents of the array
s are undefined. Otherwise the return value indicates the
number of characters placed in the array s, not including the
terminating null character.
Warning: This convention for the return value which is prescribed
in ISO C can lead to problems in some situations. For certain
format strings and certain locales the output really can be the empty
string and this cannot be discovered by testing the return value only.
E.g., in most locales the AM/PM time format is not supported (most of
the world uses the 24 hour time representation). In such locales
"%p"
will return the empty string, i.e., the return value is
zero. To detect situations like this something similar to the following
code should be used:
buf[0] = '\1'; len = strftime (buf, bufsize, format, tp); if (len == 0 && buf[0] != '\0') { /* Something went wrong in the strftime call. */ … }
If s is a null pointer, strftime
does not actually write
anything, but instead returns the number of characters it would have written.
Calling strftime
also sets the current time zone as if
tzset
were called; strftime
uses this information
instead of brokentime’s tm_gmtoff
and tm_zone
members. See Functions and Variables for Time Zones.
For an example of strftime
, see Time Functions Example.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe env locale | AS-Unsafe corrupt heap lock dlopen | AC-Unsafe corrupt lock mem fd | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The wcsftime
function is equivalent to the strftime
function with the difference that it operates on wide character
strings. The buffer where the result is stored, pointed to by s,
must be an array of wide characters. The parameter size which
specifies the size of the output buffer gives the number of wide
characters, not the number of bytes.
Also the format string template is a wide character string. Since
all characters needed to specify the format string are in the basic
character set it is portably possible to write format strings in the C
source code using the L"…"
notation. The parameter
brokentime has the same meaning as in the strftime
call.
The wcsftime
function supports the same flags, modifiers, and
format specifiers as the strftime
function.
The return value of wcsftime
is the number of wide characters
stored in s
. When more characters would have to be written than
can be placed in the buffer s the return value is zero, with the
same problems indicated in the strftime
documentation.
Next: Specifying the Time Zone with TZ
, Previous: Formatting Calendar Time, Up: Calendar Time [Contents][Index]
The ISO C standard does not specify any functions which can convert
the output of the strftime
function back into a binary format.
This led to a variety of more-or-less successful implementations with
different interfaces over the years. Then the Unix standard was
extended by the addition of two functions: strptime
and
getdate
. Both have strange interfaces but at least they are
widely available.
Next: A More User-friendly Way to Parse Times and Dates, Up: Convert textual time and date information back [Contents][Index]
The first function is rather low-level. It is nevertheless frequently
used in software since it is better known. Its interface and
implementation are heavily influenced by the getdate
function,
which is defined and implemented in terms of calls to strptime
.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe env locale | AS-Unsafe heap lock | AC-Unsafe lock mem fd | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The strptime
function parses the input string s according
to the format string fmt and stores its results in the
structure tp.
The input string could be generated by a strftime
call or
obtained any other way. It does not need to be in a human-recognizable
format; e.g. a date passed as "02:1999:9"
is acceptable, even
though it is ambiguous without context. As long as the format string
fmt matches the input string the function will succeed.
The user has to make sure, though, that the input can be parsed in a
unambiguous way. The string "1999112"
can be parsed using the
format "%Y%m%d"
as 1999-1-12, 1999-11-2, or even 19991-1-2. It
is necessary to add appropriate separators to reliably get results.
The format string consists of the same components as the format string
of the strftime
function. The only difference is that the flags
_
, -
, 0
, and ^
are not allowed.
Several of the distinct formats of strftime
do the same work in
strptime
since differences like case of the input do not matter.
For reasons of symmetry all formats are supported, though.
The modifiers E
and O
are also allowed everywhere the
strftime
function allows them.
The formats are:
%a
%A
The weekday name according to the current locale, in abbreviated form or the full name.
%b
%B
%h
A month name according to the current locale. All three specifiers will recognize both abbreviated and full month names. If the locale provides two different grammatical forms of month names, all three specifiers will recognize both forms.
As a GNU extension, the O
modifier can be used with these
specifiers; it has no effect, as both grammatical forms of month
names are recognized.
%c
The date and time representation for the current locale.
%Ec
Like %c
but the locale’s alternative date and time format is used.
%C
The century of the year.
It makes sense to use this format only if the format string also
contains the %y
format.
%EC
The locale’s representation of the period.
Unlike %C
it sometimes makes sense to use this format since some
cultures represent years relative to the beginning of eras instead of
using the Gregorian years.
%d
%e
The day of the month as a decimal number (range 1
through 31
).
Leading zeroes are permitted but not required.
%Od
%Oe
Same as %d
but using the locale’s alternative numeric symbols.
Leading zeroes are permitted but not required.
%D
Equivalent to %m/%d/%y
.
%F
Equivalent to %Y-%m-%d
, which is the ISO 8601 date
format.
This is a GNU extension following an ISO C99 extension to
strftime
.
%g
The year corresponding to the ISO week number, but without the century
(range 00
through 99
).
Note: Currently, this is not fully implemented. The format is recognized, input is consumed but no field in tm is set.
This format is a GNU extension following a GNU extension of strftime
.
%G
The year corresponding to the ISO week number.
Note: Currently, this is not fully implemented. The format is recognized, input is consumed but no field in tm is set.
This format is a GNU extension following a GNU extension of strftime
.
%H
%k
The hour as a decimal number, using a 24-hour clock (range 00
through
23
).
%k
is a GNU extension following a GNU extension of strftime
.
%OH
Same as %H
but using the locale’s alternative numeric symbols.
%I
%l
The hour as a decimal number, using a 12-hour clock (range 01
through
12
).
%l
is a GNU extension following a GNU extension of strftime
.
%OI
Same as %I
but using the locale’s alternative numeric symbols.
%j
The day of the year as a decimal number (range 1
through 366
).
Leading zeroes are permitted but not required.
%m
The month as a decimal number (range 1
through 12
).
Leading zeroes are permitted but not required.
%Om
Same as %m
but using the locale’s alternative numeric symbols.
%M
The minute as a decimal number (range 0
through 59
).
Leading zeroes are permitted but not required.
%OM
Same as %M
but using the locale’s alternative numeric symbols.
%n
%t
Matches any white space.
%p
%P
The locale-dependent equivalent to ‘AM’ or ‘PM’.
This format is not useful unless %I
or %l
is also used.
Another complication is that the locale might not define these values at
all and therefore the conversion fails.
%P
is a GNU extension following a GNU extension to strftime
.
%r
The complete time using the AM/PM format of the current locale.
A complication is that the locale might not define this format at all and therefore the conversion fails.
%R
The hour and minute in decimal numbers using the format %H:%M
.
%R
is a GNU extension following a GNU extension to strftime
.
%s
The number of seconds since the epoch, i.e., since 1970-01-01 00:00:00 UTC. Leap seconds are not counted unless leap second support is available.
%s
is a GNU extension following a GNU extension to strftime
.
%S
The seconds as a decimal number (range 0
through 60
).
Leading zeroes are permitted but not required.
NB: The Unix specification says the upper bound on this value
is 61
, a result of a decision to allow double leap seconds. You
will not see the value 61
because no minute has more than one
leap second, but the myth persists.
%OS
Same as %S
but using the locale’s alternative numeric symbols.
%T
Equivalent to the use of %H:%M:%S
in this place.
%u
The day of the week as a decimal number (range 1
through
7
), Monday being 1
.
Leading zeroes are permitted but not required.
Note: Currently, this is not fully implemented. The format is recognized, input is consumed but no field in tm is set.
%U
The week number of the current year as a decimal number (range 0
through 53
).
Leading zeroes are permitted but not required.
%OU
Same as %U
but using the locale’s alternative numeric symbols.
%V
The ISO 8601:1988 week number as a decimal number (range 1
through 53
).
Leading zeroes are permitted but not required.
Note: Currently, this is not fully implemented. The format is recognized, input is consumed but no field in tm is set.
%w
The day of the week as a decimal number (range 0
through
6
), Sunday being 0
.
Leading zeroes are permitted but not required.
Note: Currently, this is not fully implemented. The format is recognized, input is consumed but no field in tm is set.
%Ow
Same as %w
but using the locale’s alternative numeric symbols.
%W
The week number of the current year as a decimal number (range 0
through 53
).
Leading zeroes are permitted but not required.
Note: Currently, this is not fully implemented. The format is recognized, input is consumed but no field in tm is set.
%OW
Same as %W
but using the locale’s alternative numeric symbols.
%x
The date using the locale’s date format.
%Ex
Like %x
but the locale’s alternative data representation is used.
%X
The time using the locale’s time format.
%EX
Like %X
but the locale’s alternative time representation is used.
%y
The year without a century as a decimal number (range 0
through
99
).
Leading zeroes are permitted but not required.
Note that it is questionable to use this format without
the %C
format. The strptime
function does regard input
values in the range 68 to 99 as the years 1969 to
1999 and the values 0 to 68 as the years
2000 to 2068. But maybe this heuristic fails for some
input data.
Therefore it is best to avoid %y
completely and use %Y
instead.
%Ey
The offset from %EC
in the locale’s alternative representation.
%Oy
The offset of the year (from %C
) using the locale’s alternative
numeric symbols.
%Y
The year as a decimal number, using the Gregorian calendar.
%EY
The full alternative year representation.
%z
The offset from GMT in ISO 8601/RFC822 format.
%Z
The time zone abbreviation.
Note: Currently, this is not fully implemented. The format is recognized, input is consumed but no field in tm is set.
%%
A literal ‘%’ character.
All other characters in the format string must have a matching character in the input string. Exceptions are white spaces in the input string which can match zero or more whitespace characters in the format string.
Portability Note: The XPG standard advises applications to use
at least one whitespace character (as specified by isspace
) or
other non-alphanumeric characters between any two conversion
specifications. The GNU C Library does not have this limitation but
other libraries might have trouble parsing formats like
"%d%m%Y%H%M%S"
.
The strptime
function processes the input string from right to
left. Each of the three possible input elements (white space, literal,
or format) are handled one after the other. If the input cannot be
matched to the format string the function stops. The remainder of the
format and input strings are not processed.
The function returns a pointer to the first character it was unable to
process. If the input string contains more characters than required by
the format string the return value points right after the last consumed
input character. If the whole input string is consumed the return value
points to the NULL
byte at the end of the string. If an error
occurs, i.e., strptime
fails to match all of the format string,
the function returns NULL
.
The specification of the function in the XPG standard is rather vague, leaving out a few important pieces of information. Most importantly, it does not specify what happens to those elements of tm which are not directly initialized by the different formats. The implementations on different Unix systems vary here.
The GNU C Library implementation does not touch those fields which are not
directly initialized. Exceptions are the tm_wday
and
tm_yday
elements, which are recomputed if any of the year, month,
or date elements changed. This has two implications:
strptime
function for a new input string, you
should prepare the tm structure you pass. Normally this will mean
initializing all values to zero. Alternatively, you can set all
fields to values like INT_MAX
, allowing you to determine which
elements were set by the function call. Zero does not work here since
it is a valid value for many of the fields.
Careful initialization is necessary if you want to find out whether a certain field in tm was initialized by the function call.
struct tm
value with several consecutive
strptime
calls. A useful application of this is e.g. the parsing
of two separate strings, one containing date information and the other
time information. By parsing one after the other without clearing the
structure in-between, you can construct a complete broken-down time.
The following example shows a function which parses a string which contains the date information in either US style or ISO 8601 form:
const char * parse_date (const char *input, struct tm *tm) { const char *cp; /* First clear the result structure. */ memset (tm, '\0', sizeof (*tm)); /* Try the ISO format first. */ cp = strptime (input, "%F", tm); if (cp == NULL) { /* Does not match. Try the US form. */ cp = strptime (input, "%D", tm); } return cp; }
Previous: Interpret string according to given format, Up: Convert textual time and date information back [Contents][Index]
The Unix standard defines another function for parsing date strings. The interface is weird, but if the function happens to suit your application it is just fine. It is problematic to use this function in multi-threaded programs or libraries, since it returns a pointer to a static variable, and uses a global variable and global state (an environment variable).
This variable of type int
contains the error code of the last
unsuccessful call to getdate
. Defined values are:
The environment variable DATEMSK
is not defined or null.
The template file denoted by the DATEMSK
environment variable
cannot be opened.
Information about the template file cannot retrieved.
The template file is not a regular file.
An I/O error occurred while reading the template file.
Not enough memory available to execute the function.
The template file contains no matching template.
The input date is invalid, but would match a template otherwise. This
includes dates like February 31st, and dates which cannot be represented
in a time_t
variable.
Preliminary: | MT-Unsafe race:getdate env locale | AS-Unsafe heap lock | AC-Unsafe lock mem fd | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The interface to getdate
is the simplest possible for a function
to parse a string and return the value. string is the input
string and the result is returned in a statically-allocated variable.
The details about how the string is processed are hidden from the user.
In fact, they can be outside the control of the program. Which formats
are recognized is controlled by the file named by the environment
variable DATEMSK
. This file should contain
lines of valid format strings which could be passed to strptime
.
The getdate
function reads these format strings one after the
other and tries to match the input string. The first line which
completely matches the input string is used.
Elements not initialized through the format string retain the values
present at the time of the getdate
function call.
The formats recognized by getdate
are the same as for
strptime
. See above for an explanation. There are only a few
extensions to the strptime
behavior:
%Z
format is given the broken-down time is based on the
current time of the timezone matched, not of the current timezone of the
runtime environment.
Note: This is not implemented (currently). The problem is that
time zone abbreviations are not unique. If a fixed time zone is assumed for a
given string (say EST
meaning US East Coast time), then uses for
countries other than the USA will fail. So far we have found no good
solution to this.
tm_wday
value the current week’s day is chosen, otherwise the day next week is chosen.
It should be noted that the format in the template file need not only contain format elements. The following is a list of possible format strings (taken from the Unix standard):
%m %A %B %d, %Y %H:%M:%S %A %B %m/%d/%y %I %p %d,%m,%Y %H:%M at %A the %dst of %B in %Y run job at %I %p,%B %dnd %A den %d. %B %Y %H.%M Uhr
As you can see, the template list can contain very specific strings like
run job at %I %p,%B %dnd
. Using the above list of templates and
assuming the current time is Mon Sep 22 12:19:47 EDT 1986, we can obtain the
following results for the given input.
Input | Match | Result |
Mon | %a | Mon Sep 22 12:19:47 EDT 1986 |
Sun | %a | Sun Sep 28 12:19:47 EDT 1986 |
Fri | %a | Fri Sep 26 12:19:47 EDT 1986 |
September | %B | Mon Sep 1 12:19:47 EDT 1986 |
January | %B | Thu Jan 1 12:19:47 EST 1987 |
December | %B | Mon Dec 1 12:19:47 EST 1986 |
Sep Mon | %b %a | Mon Sep 1 12:19:47 EDT 1986 |
Jan Fri | %b %a | Fri Jan 2 12:19:47 EST 1987 |
Dec Mon | %b %a | Mon Dec 1 12:19:47 EST 1986 |
Jan Wed 1989 | %b %a %Y | Wed Jan 4 12:19:47 EST 1989 |
Fri 9 | %a %H | Fri Sep 26 09:00:00 EDT 1986 |
Feb 10:30 | %b %H:%S | Sun Feb 1 10:00:30 EST 1987 |
10:30 | %H:%M | Tue Sep 23 10:30:00 EDT 1986 |
13:30 | %H:%M | Mon Sep 22 13:30:00 EDT 1986 |
The return value of the function is a pointer to a static variable of
type struct tm
, or a null pointer if an error occurred. The
result is only valid until the next getdate
call, making this
function unusable in multi-threaded applications.
The errno
variable is not changed. Error conditions are
stored in the global variable getdate_err
. See the
description above for a list of the possible error values.
Warning: The getdate
function should never be
used in SUID-programs. The reason is obvious: using the
DATEMSK
environment variable you can get the function to open
any arbitrary file and chances are high that with some bogus input
(such as a binary file) the program will crash.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe env locale | AS-Unsafe heap lock | AC-Unsafe lock mem fd | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The getdate_r
function is the reentrant counterpart of
getdate
. It does not use the global variable getdate_err
to signal an error, but instead returns an error code. The same error
codes as described in the getdate_err
documentation above are
used, with 0 meaning success.
Moreover, getdate_r
stores the broken-down time in the variable
of type struct tm
pointed to by the second argument, rather than
in a static variable.
This function is not defined in the Unix standard. Nevertheless it is available on some other Unix systems as well.
The warning against using getdate
in SUID-programs applies to
getdate_r
as well.
Next: Functions and Variables for Time Zones, Previous: Convert textual time and date information back, Up: Calendar Time [Contents][Index]
TZ
In POSIX systems, a user can specify the time zone by means of the
TZ
environment variable. For information about how to set
environment variables, see Environment Variables. The functions
for accessing the time zone are declared in time.h.
You should not normally need to set TZ
. If the system is
configured properly, the default time zone will be correct. You might
set TZ
if you are using a computer over a network from a
different time zone, and would like times reported to you in the time
zone local to you, rather than what is local to the computer.
In POSIX.1 systems the value of the TZ
variable can be in one of
three formats. With the GNU C Library, the most common format is the
last one, which can specify a selection from a large database of time
zone information for many regions of the world. The first two formats
are used to describe the time zone information directly, which is both
more cumbersome and less precise. But the POSIX.1 standard only
specifies the details of the first two formats, so it is good to be
familiar with them in case you come across a POSIX.1 system that doesn’t
support a time zone information database.
The first format is used when there is no Daylight Saving Time (or summer time) in the local time zone:
std offset
The std string specifies the time zone abbreviation. It must be three or more characters long and must not contain a leading colon, embedded digits, commas, nor plus and minus signs. There is no space character separating the time zone abbreviation from the offset, so these restrictions are necessary to parse the specification correctly.
The offset specifies the time value you must add to the local time
to get a Coordinated Universal Time value. It has syntax like
[+
|-
]hh[:
mm[:
ss]]. This
is positive if the local time zone is west of the Prime Meridian and
negative if it is east. The hour must be between 0
and
24
, and the minute and seconds between 0
and 59
.
For example, here is how we would specify Eastern Standard Time, but without any Daylight Saving Time alternative:
EST+5
The second format is used when there is Daylight Saving Time:
std offset dst [offset],
start[/
time],
end[/
time]
The initial std and offset specify the standard time zone, as described above. The dst string and offset are the abbreviation and offset for the corresponding Daylight Saving Time zone; if the offset is omitted, it defaults to one hour ahead of standard time.
The remainder of the specification describes when Daylight Saving Time is in effect. The start field is when Daylight Saving Time goes into effect and the end field is when the change is made back to standard time. The following formats are recognized for these fields:
Jn
This specifies the Julian day, with n between 1
and 365
.
February 29 is never counted, even in leap years.
n
This specifies the Julian day, with n between 0
and 365
.
February 29 is counted in leap years.
Mm.w.d
This specifies day d of week w of month m. The day
d must be between 0
(Sunday) and 6
. The week
w must be between 1
and 5
; week 1
is the
first week in which day d occurs, and week 5
specifies the
last d day in the month. The month m should be
between 1
and 12
.
The time fields specify when, in the local time currently in
effect, the change to the other time occurs. If omitted, the default is
02:00:00
. The hours part of the time fields can range from
-167 through 167; this is an extension to POSIX.1, which allows
only the range 0 through 24.
Here are some example TZ
values, including the appropriate
Daylight Saving Time and its dates of applicability. In North
American Eastern Standard Time (EST) and Eastern Daylight Time (EDT),
the normal offset from UTC is 5 hours; since this is
west of the prime meridian, the sign is positive. Summer time begins on
March’s second Sunday at 2:00am, and ends on November’s first Sunday
at 2:00am.
EST+5EDT,M3.2.0/2,M11.1.0/2
Israel Standard Time (IST) and Israel Daylight Time (IDT) are 2 hours ahead of the prime meridian in winter, springing forward an hour on March’s fourth Thursday at 26:00 (i.e., 02:00 on the first Friday on or after March 23), and falling back on October’s last Sunday at 02:00.
IST-2IDT,M3.4.4/26,M10.5.0
Western Argentina Summer Time (WARST) is 3 hours behind the prime
meridian all year. There is a dummy fall-back transition on December
31 at 25:00 daylight saving time (i.e., 24:00 standard time,
equivalent to January 1 at 00:00 standard time), and a simultaneous
spring-forward transition on January 1 at 00:00 standard time, so
daylight saving time is in effect all year and the initial WART
is a placeholder.
WART4WARST,J1/0,J365/25
Western Greenland Time (WGT) and Western Greenland Summer Time (WGST) are 3 hours behind UTC in the winter. Its clocks follow the European Union rules of springing forward by one hour on March’s last Sunday at 01:00 UTC (-02:00 local time) and falling back on October’s last Sunday at 01:00 UTC (-01:00 local time).
WGT3WGST,M3.5.0/-2,M10.5.0/-1
The schedule of Daylight Saving Time in any particular jurisdiction has changed over the years. To be strictly correct, the conversion of dates and times in the past should be based on the schedule that was in effect then. However, this format has no facilities to let you specify how the schedule has changed from year to year. The most you can do is specify one particular schedule—usually the present day schedule—and this is used to convert any date, no matter when. For precise time zone specifications, it is best to use the time zone information database (see below).
The third format looks like this:
:characters
Each operating system interprets this format differently; in the GNU C Library, characters is the name of a file which describes the time zone.
If the TZ
environment variable does not have a value, the
operation chooses a time zone by default. In the GNU C Library, the
default time zone is like the specification ‘TZ=:/etc/localtime’
(or ‘TZ=:/usr/local/etc/localtime’, depending on how the GNU C Library
was configured; see Installing the GNU C Library). Other C libraries use their own
rule for choosing the default time zone, so there is little we can say
about them.
If characters begins with a slash, it is an absolute file name; otherwise the library looks for the file /usr/share/zoneinfo/characters. The zoneinfo directory contains data files describing local time zones in many different parts of the world. The names represent major cities, with subdirectories for geographical areas; for example, America/New_York, Europe/London, Asia/Hong_Kong. These data files are installed by the system administrator, who also sets /etc/localtime to point to the data file for the local time zone. The files typically come from the Time Zone Database of time zone and daylight saving time information for most regions of the world, which is maintained by a community of volunteers and put in the public domain.
Next: Time Functions Example, Previous: Specifying the Time Zone with TZ
, Up: Calendar Time [Contents][Index]
The array tzname
contains two strings, which are the standard
abbreviations of the pair of time zones (standard and Daylight
Saving) that the user has selected. tzname[0]
abbreviates
the standard time zone (for example, "EST"
), and tzname[1]
abbreviates the time zone when Daylight Saving Time is in use (for
example, "EDT"
). These correspond to the std and dst
strings (respectively) from the TZ
environment variable. If
Daylight Saving Time is never used, tzname[1]
is the empty string.
The tzname
array is initialized from the TZ
environment
variable whenever tzset
, ctime
, strftime
,
mktime
, or localtime
is called. If multiple abbreviations
have been used (e.g. "EWT"
and "EDT"
for U.S. Eastern War
Time and Eastern Daylight Time), the array contains the most recent
abbreviation.
The tzname
array is required for POSIX.1 compatibility, but in
GNU programs it is better to use the tm_zone
member of the
broken-down time structure, since tm_zone
reports the correct
abbreviation even when it is not the latest one.
Though the strings are declared as char *
the user must refrain
from modifying these strings. Modifying the strings will almost certainly
lead to trouble.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe env locale | AS-Unsafe heap lock | AC-Unsafe lock mem fd | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The tzset
function initializes the tzname
variable from
the value of the TZ
environment variable. It is not usually
necessary for your program to call this function, because it is called
automatically when you use the other time conversion functions that
depend on the time zone.
The following variables are defined for compatibility with System V
Unix. Like tzname
, these variables are set by calling
tzset
or the other time conversion functions.
This contains the difference between UTC and the latest local standard
time, in seconds west of UTC. For example, in the U.S. Eastern time
zone, the value is 5*60*60
. Unlike the tm_gmtoff
member
of the broken-down time structure, this value is not adjusted for
daylight saving, and its sign is reversed. In GNU programs it is better
to use tm_gmtoff
, since it contains the correct offset even when
it is not the latest one.
This variable has a nonzero value if Daylight Saving Time rules apply. A nonzero value does not necessarily mean that Daylight Saving Time is now in effect; it means only that Daylight Saving Time is sometimes in effect.
Previous: Functions and Variables for Time Zones, Up: Calendar Time [Contents][Index]
Here is an example program showing the use of some of the calendar time functions.
#include <time.h> #include <stdio.h> #define SIZE 256 int main (void) { char buffer[SIZE]; time_t curtime; struct tm *loctime; /* Get the current time. */ curtime = time (NULL); /* Convert it to local time representation. */ loctime = localtime (&curtime); /* Print out the date and time in the standard format. */ fputs (asctime (loctime), stdout);
/* Print it out in a nice format. */
strftime (buffer, SIZE, "Today is %A, %B %d.\n", loctime);
fputs (buffer, stdout);
strftime (buffer, SIZE, "The time is %I:%M %p.\n", loctime);
fputs (buffer, stdout);
return 0;
}
It produces output like this:
Wed Jul 31 13:02:36 1991 Today is Wednesday, July 31. The time is 01:02 PM.
Next: Sleeping, Previous: Calendar Time, Up: Date and Time [Contents][Index]
The alarm
and setitimer
functions provide a mechanism for a
process to interrupt itself in the future. They do this by setting a
timer; when the timer expires, the process receives a signal.
Each process has three independent interval timers available:
SIGALRM
signal to the process when it expires.
SIGVTALRM
signal to the process when it expires.
SIGPROF
signal to the process when it expires.
This timer is useful for profiling in interpreters. The interval timer mechanism does not have the fine granularity necessary for profiling native code.
You can only have one timer of each kind set at any given time. If you set a timer that has not yet expired, that timer is simply reset to the new value.
You should establish a handler for the appropriate alarm signal using
signal
or sigaction
before issuing a call to
setitimer
or alarm
. Otherwise, an unusual chain of events
could cause the timer to expire before your program establishes the
handler. In this case it would be terminated, since termination is the
default action for the alarm signals. See Signal Handling.
To be able to use the alarm function to interrupt a system call which
might block otherwise indefinitely it is important to not set the
SA_RESTART
flag when registering the signal handler using
sigaction
. When not using sigaction
things get even
uglier: the signal
function has fixed semantics with respect
to restarts. The BSD semantics for this function is to set the flag.
Therefore, if sigaction
for whatever reason cannot be used, it is
necessary to use sysv_signal
and not signal
.
The setitimer
function is the primary means for setting an alarm.
This facility is declared in the header file sys/time.h. The
alarm
function, declared in unistd.h, provides a somewhat
simpler interface for setting the real-time timer.
This structure is used to specify when a timer should expire. It contains the following members:
struct timeval it_interval
This is the period between successive timer interrupts. If zero, the alarm will only be sent once.
struct timeval it_value
This is the period between now and the first timer interrupt. If zero, the alarm is disabled.
The struct timeval
data type is described in Time Types.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe timer | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The setitimer
function sets the timer specified by which
according to new. The which argument can have a value of
ITIMER_REAL
, ITIMER_VIRTUAL
, or ITIMER_PROF
.
If old is not a null pointer, setitimer
returns information
about any previous unexpired timer of the same kind in the structure it
points to.
The return value is 0
on success and -1
on failure. The
following errno
error conditions are defined for this function:
EINVAL
The timer period is too large.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The getitimer
function stores information about the timer specified
by which in the structure pointed at by old.
The return value and error conditions are the same as for setitimer
.
ITIMER_REAL
¶This constant can be used as the which argument to the
setitimer
and getitimer
functions to specify the real-time
timer.
ITIMER_VIRTUAL
¶This constant can be used as the which argument to the
setitimer
and getitimer
functions to specify the virtual
timer.
ITIMER_PROF
¶This constant can be used as the which argument to the
setitimer
and getitimer
functions to specify the profiling
timer.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe timer | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The alarm
function sets the real-time timer to expire in
seconds seconds. If you want to cancel any existing alarm, you
can do this by calling alarm
with a seconds argument of
zero.
The return value indicates how many seconds remain before the previous
alarm would have been sent. If there was no previous alarm, alarm
returns zero.
The alarm
function could be defined in terms of setitimer
like this:
unsigned int alarm (unsigned int seconds) { struct itimerval old, new; new.it_interval.tv_usec = 0; new.it_interval.tv_sec = 0; new.it_value.tv_usec = 0; new.it_value.tv_sec = (long int) seconds; if (setitimer (ITIMER_REAL, &new, &old) < 0) return 0; else return old.it_value.tv_sec; }
There is an example showing the use of the alarm
function in
Signal Handlers that Return.
If you simply want your process to wait for a given number of seconds,
you should use the sleep
function. See Sleeping.
You shouldn’t count on the signal arriving precisely when the timer expires. In a multiprocessing environment there is typically some amount of delay involved.
Portability Note: The setitimer
and getitimer
functions are derived from BSD Unix, while the alarm
function is
specified by the POSIX.1 standard. setitimer
is more powerful than
alarm
, but alarm
is more widely used.
Previous: Setting an Alarm, Up: Date and Time [Contents][Index]
The function sleep
gives a simple way to make the program wait
for a short interval. If your program doesn’t use signals (except to
terminate), then you can expect sleep
to wait reliably throughout
the specified interval. Otherwise, sleep
can return sooner if a
signal arrives; if you want to wait for a given interval regardless of
signals, use select
(see Waiting for Input or Output) and don’t specify
any descriptors to wait for.
Preliminary: | MT-Unsafe sig:SIGCHLD/linux | AS-Unsafe | AC-Unsafe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The sleep
function waits for seconds seconds or until a signal
is delivered, whichever happens first.
If sleep
returns because the requested interval is over,
it returns a value of zero. If it returns because of delivery of a
signal, its return value is the remaining time in the sleep interval.
The sleep
function is declared in unistd.h.
Resist the temptation to implement a sleep for a fixed amount of time by
using the return value of sleep
, when nonzero, to call
sleep
again. This will work with a certain amount of accuracy as
long as signals arrive infrequently. But each signal can cause the
eventual wakeup time to be off by an additional second or so. Suppose a
few signals happen to arrive in rapid succession by bad luck—there is
no limit on how much this could shorten or lengthen the wait.
Instead, compute the calendar time at which the program should stop
waiting, and keep trying to wait until that calendar time. This won’t
be off by more than a second. With just a little more work, you can use
select
and make the waiting period quite accurate. (Of course,
heavy system load can cause additional unavoidable delays—unless the
machine is dedicated to one application, there is no way you can avoid
this.)
On some systems, sleep
can do strange things if your program uses
SIGALRM
explicitly. Even if SIGALRM
signals are being
ignored or blocked when sleep
is called, sleep
might
return prematurely on delivery of a SIGALRM
signal. If you have
established a handler for SIGALRM
signals and a SIGALRM
signal is delivered while the process is sleeping, the action taken
might be just to cause sleep
to return instead of invoking your
handler. And, if sleep
is interrupted by delivery of a signal
whose handler requests an alarm or alters the handling of SIGALRM
,
this handler and sleep
will interfere.
On GNU systems, it is safe to use sleep
and SIGALRM
in
the same program, because sleep
does not work by means of
SIGALRM
.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
If resolution to seconds is not enough the nanosleep
function can
be used. As the name suggests the sleep interval can be specified in
nanoseconds. The actual elapsed time of the sleep interval might be
longer since the system rounds the elapsed time you request up to the
next integer multiple of the actual resolution the system can deliver.
*requested_time
is the elapsed time of the interval you
want to sleep.
The function returns as *remaining
the elapsed time left
in the interval for which you requested to sleep. If the interval
completed without getting interrupted by a signal, this is zero.
struct timespec
is described in Time Types.
If the function returns because the interval is over the return value is
zero. If the function returns -1 the global variable errno
is set to the following values:
EINTR
The call was interrupted because a signal was delivered to the thread. If the remaining parameter is not the null pointer the structure pointed to by remaining is updated to contain the remaining elapsed time.
EINVAL
The nanosecond value in the requested_time parameter contains an illegal value. Either the value is negative or greater than or equal to 1000 million.
This function is a cancellation point in multi-threaded programs. This
is a problem if the thread allocates some resources (like memory, file
descriptors, semaphores or whatever) at the time nanosleep
is
called. If the thread gets canceled these resources stay allocated
until the program ends. To avoid this calls to nanosleep
should
be protected using cancellation handlers.
The nanosleep
function is declared in time.h.
Next: Non-Local Exits, Previous: Date and Time, Up: Main Menu [Contents][Index]
This chapter describes functions for examining how much of various kinds of resources (CPU time, memory, etc.) a process has used and getting and setting limits on future usage.
Next: Limiting Resource Usage, Up: Resource Usage And Limitation [Contents][Index]
The function getrusage
and the data type struct rusage
are used to examine the resource usage of a process. They are declared
in sys/resource.h.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This function reports resource usage totals for processes specified by
processes, storing the information in *rusage
.
In most systems, processes has only two valid values:
RUSAGE_SELF
¶Just the current process.
RUSAGE_CHILDREN
¶All child processes (direct and indirect) that have already terminated.
The return value of getrusage
is zero for success, and -1
for failure.
EINVAL
The argument processes is not valid.
One way of getting resource usage for a particular child process is with
the function wait4
, which returns totals for a child when it
terminates. See BSD Process Wait Function.
This data type stores various resource usage statistics. It has the following members, and possibly others:
struct timeval ru_utime
Time spent executing user instructions.
struct timeval ru_stime
Time spent in operating system code on behalf of processes.
long int ru_maxrss
The maximum resident set size used, in kilobytes. That is, the maximum number of kilobytes of physical memory that processes used simultaneously.
long int ru_ixrss
An integral value expressed in kilobytes times ticks of execution, which indicates the amount of memory used by text that was shared with other processes.
long int ru_idrss
An integral value expressed the same way, which is the amount of unshared memory used for data.
long int ru_isrss
An integral value expressed the same way, which is the amount of unshared memory used for stack space.
long int ru_minflt
The number of page faults which were serviced without requiring any I/O.
long int ru_majflt
The number of page faults which were serviced by doing I/O.
long int ru_nswap
The number of times processes was swapped entirely out of main memory.
long int ru_inblock
The number of times the file system had to read from the disk on behalf of processes.
long int ru_oublock
The number of times the file system had to write to the disk on behalf of processes.
long int ru_msgsnd
Number of IPC messages sent.
long int ru_msgrcv
Number of IPC messages received.
long int ru_nsignals
Number of signals received.
long int ru_nvcsw
The number of times processes voluntarily invoked a context switch (usually to wait for some service).
long int ru_nivcsw
The number of times an involuntary context switch took place (because a time slice expired, or another process of higher priority was scheduled).
Next: Process CPU Priority And Scheduling, Previous: Resource Usage, Up: Resource Usage And Limitation [Contents][Index]
You can specify limits for the resource usage of a process. When the process tries to exceed a limit, it may get a signal, or the system call by which it tried to do so may fail, depending on the resource. Each process initially inherits its limit values from its parent, but it can subsequently change them.
There are two per-process limits associated with a resource:
The current limit is the value the system will not allow usage to exceed. It is also called the “soft limit” because the process being limited can generally raise the current limit at will.
The maximum limit is the maximum value to which a process is allowed to set its current limit. It is also called the “hard limit” because there is no way for a process to get around it. A process may lower its own maximum limit, but only the superuser may increase a maximum limit.
The symbols for use with getrlimit
, setrlimit
,
getrlimit64
, and setrlimit64
are defined in
sys/resource.h.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
Read the current and maximum limits for the resource resource
and store them in *rlp
.
The return value is 0
on success and -1
on failure. The
only possible errno
error condition is EFAULT
.
When the sources are compiled with _FILE_OFFSET_BITS == 64
on a
32-bit system this function is in fact getrlimit64
. Thus, the
LFS interface transparently replaces the old interface.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This function is similar to getrlimit
but its second parameter is
a pointer to a variable of type struct rlimit64
, which allows it
to read values which wouldn’t fit in the member of a struct
rlimit
.
If the sources are compiled with _FILE_OFFSET_BITS == 64
on a
32-bit machine, this function is available under the name
getrlimit
and so transparently replaces the old interface.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
Store the current and maximum limits for the resource resource
in *rlp
.
The return value is 0
on success and -1
on failure. The
following errno
error condition is possible:
EPERM
When the sources are compiled with _FILE_OFFSET_BITS == 64
on a
32-bit system this function is in fact setrlimit64
. Thus, the
LFS interface transparently replaces the old interface.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This function is similar to setrlimit
but its second parameter is
a pointer to a variable of type struct rlimit64
which allows it
to set values which wouldn’t fit in the member of a struct
rlimit
.
If the sources are compiled with _FILE_OFFSET_BITS == 64
on a
32-bit machine this function is available under the name
setrlimit
and so transparently replaces the old interface.
This structure is used with getrlimit
to receive limit values,
and with setrlimit
to specify limit values for a particular process
and resource. It has two fields:
rlim_t rlim_cur
The current limit
rlim_t rlim_max
The maximum limit.
For getrlimit
, the structure is an output; it receives the current
values. For setrlimit
, it specifies the new values.
For the LFS functions a similar type is defined in sys/resource.h.
This structure is analogous to the rlimit
structure above, but
its components have wider ranges. It has two fields:
rlim64_t rlim_cur
This is analogous to rlimit.rlim_cur
, but with a different type.
rlim64_t rlim_max
This is analogous to rlimit.rlim_max
, but with a different type.
Here is a list of resources for which you can specify a limit. Memory and file sizes are measured in bytes.
RLIMIT_CPU
¶The maximum amount of CPU time the process can use. If it runs for
longer than this, it gets a signal: SIGXCPU
. The value is
measured in seconds. See Operation Error Signals.
RLIMIT_FSIZE
¶The maximum size of file the process can create. Trying to write a
larger file causes a signal: SIGXFSZ
. See Operation Error Signals.
RLIMIT_DATA
¶The maximum size of data memory for the process. If the process tries to allocate data memory beyond this amount, the allocation function fails.
RLIMIT_STACK
¶The maximum stack size for the process. If the process tries to extend
its stack past this size, it gets a SIGSEGV
signal.
See Program Error Signals.
RLIMIT_CORE
¶The maximum size core file that this process can create. If the process terminates and would dump a core file larger than this, then no core file is created. So setting this limit to zero prevents core files from ever being created.
RLIMIT_RSS
¶The maximum amount of physical memory that this process should get. This parameter is a guide for the system’s scheduler and memory allocator; the system may give the process more memory when there is a surplus.
RLIMIT_MEMLOCK
¶The maximum amount of memory that can be locked into physical memory (so it will never be paged out).
RLIMIT_NPROC
¶The maximum number of processes that can be created with the same user ID.
If you have reached the limit for your user ID, fork
will fail
with EAGAIN
. See Creating a Process.
RLIMIT_NOFILE
¶RLIMIT_OFILE
¶The maximum number of files that the process can open. If it tries to
open more files than this, its open attempt fails with errno
EMFILE
. See Error Codes. Not all systems support this limit;
GNU does, and 4.4 BSD does.
RLIMIT_AS
¶The maximum size of total memory that this process should get. If the
process tries to allocate more memory beyond this amount with, for
example, brk
, malloc
, mmap
or sbrk
, the
allocation function fails.
RLIM_NLIMITS
¶The number of different resource limits. Any valid resource
operand must be less than RLIM_NLIMITS
.
This constant stands for a value of “infinity” when supplied as
the limit value in setrlimit
.
The following are historical functions to do some of what the functions above do. The functions above are better choices.
ulimit
and the command symbols are declared in ulimit.h.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
ulimit
gets the current limit or sets the current and maximum
limit for a particular resource for the calling process according to the
command cmd.
If you are getting a limit, the command argument is the only argument.
If you are setting a limit, there is a second argument:
long int
limit which is the value to which you are setting
the limit.
The cmd values and the operations they specify are:
GETFSIZE
¶Get the current limit on the size of a file, in units of 512 bytes.
SETFSIZE
¶Set the current and maximum limit on the size of a file to limit * 512 bytes.
There are also some other cmd values that may do things on some systems, but they are not supported.
Only the superuser may increase a maximum limit.
When you successfully get a limit, the return value of ulimit
is
that limit, which is never negative. When you successfully set a limit,
the return value is zero. When the function fails, the return value is
-1
and errno
is set according to the reason:
EPERM
A process tried to increase a maximum limit, but is not superuser.
vlimit
and its resource symbols are declared in sys/vlimit.h.
Preliminary: | MT-Unsafe race:setrlimit | AS-Unsafe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
vlimit
sets the current limit for a resource for a process.
resource identifies the resource:
LIM_CPU
¶Maximum CPU time. Same as RLIMIT_CPU
for setrlimit
.
LIM_FSIZE
¶Maximum file size. Same as RLIMIT_FSIZE
for setrlimit
.
LIM_DATA
¶Maximum data memory. Same as RLIMIT_DATA
for setrlimit
.
LIM_STACK
¶Maximum stack size. Same as RLIMIT_STACK
for setrlimit
.
LIM_CORE
¶Maximum core file size. Same as RLIMIT_COR
for setrlimit
.
LIM_MAXRSS
¶Maximum physical memory. Same as RLIMIT_RSS
for setrlimit
.
The return value is zero for success, and -1
with errno
set
accordingly for failure:
EPERM
The process tried to set its current limit beyond its maximum limit.
Next: Querying memory available resources, Previous: Limiting Resource Usage, Up: Resource Usage And Limitation [Contents][Index]
When multiple processes simultaneously require CPU time, the system’s scheduling policy and process CPU priorities determine which processes get it. This section describes how that determination is made and GNU C Library functions to control it.
It is common to refer to CPU scheduling simply as scheduling and a process’ CPU priority simply as the process’ priority, with the CPU resource being implied. Bear in mind, though, that CPU time is not the only resource a process uses or that processes contend for. In some cases, it is not even particularly important. Giving a process a high “priority” may have very little effect on how fast a process runs with respect to other processes. The priorities discussed in this section apply only to CPU time.
CPU scheduling is a complex issue and different systems do it in wildly different ways. New ideas continually develop and find their way into the intricacies of the various systems’ scheduling algorithms. This section discusses the general concepts, some specifics of systems that commonly use the GNU C Library, and some standards.
For simplicity, we talk about CPU contention as if there is only one CPU in the system. But all the same principles apply when a processor has multiple CPUs, and knowing that the number of processes that can run at any one time is equal to the number of CPUs, you can easily extrapolate the information.
The functions described in this section are all defined by the POSIX.1
and POSIX.1b standards (the sched…
functions are POSIX.1b).
However, POSIX does not define any semantics for the values that these
functions get and set. In this chapter, the semantics are based on the
Linux kernel’s implementation of the POSIX standard. As you will see,
the Linux implementation is quite the inverse of what the authors of the
POSIX syntax had in mind.
Next: Realtime Scheduling, Up: Process CPU Priority And Scheduling [Contents][Index]
Every process has an absolute priority, and it is represented by a number. The higher the number, the higher the absolute priority.
On systems of the past, and most systems today, all processes have absolute priority 0 and this section is irrelevant. In that case, See Traditional Scheduling. Absolute priorities were invented to accommodate realtime systems, in which it is vital that certain processes be able to respond to external events happening in real time, which means they cannot wait around while some other process that wants to, but doesn’t need to run occupies the CPU.
When two processes are in contention to use the CPU at any instant, the one with the higher absolute priority always gets it. This is true even if the process with the lower priority is already using the CPU (i.e., the scheduling is preemptive). Of course, we’re only talking about processes that are running or “ready to run,” which means they are ready to execute instructions right now. When a process blocks to wait for something like I/O, its absolute priority is irrelevant.
NB: The term “runnable” is a synonym for “ready to run.”
When two processes are running or ready to run and both have the same absolute priority, it’s more interesting. In that case, who gets the CPU is determined by the scheduling policy. If the processes have absolute priority 0, the traditional scheduling policy described in Traditional Scheduling applies. Otherwise, the policies described in Realtime Scheduling apply.
You normally give an absolute priority above 0 only to a process that can be trusted not to hog the CPU. Such processes are designed to block (or terminate) after relatively short CPU runs.
A process begins life with the same absolute priority as its parent process. Functions described in Basic Scheduling Functions can change it.
Only a privileged process can change a process’ absolute priority to
something other than 0
. Only a privileged process or the
target process’ owner can change its absolute priority at all.
POSIX requires absolute priority values used with the realtime
scheduling policies to be consecutive with a range of at least 32. On
Linux, they are 1 through 99. The functions
sched_get_priority_max
and sched_set_priority_min
portably
tell you what the range is on a particular system.
One thing you must keep in mind when designing real time applications is that having higher absolute priority than any other process doesn’t guarantee the process can run continuously. Two things that can wreck a good CPU run are interrupts and page faults.
Interrupt handlers live in that limbo between processes. The CPU is executing instructions, but they aren’t part of any process. An interrupt will stop even the highest priority process. So you must allow for slight delays and make sure that no device in the system has an interrupt handler that could cause too long a delay between instructions for your process.
Similarly, a page fault causes what looks like a straightforward
sequence of instructions to take a long time. The fact that other
processes get to run while the page faults in is of no consequence,
because as soon as the I/O is complete, the higher priority process will
kick them out and run again, but the wait for the I/O itself could be a
problem. To neutralize this threat, use mlock
or
mlockall
.
There are a few ramifications of the absoluteness of this priority on a single-CPU system that you need to keep in mind when you choose to set a priority and also when you’re working on a program that runs with high absolute priority. Consider a process that has higher absolute priority than any other process in the system and due to a bug in its program, it gets into an infinite loop. It will never cede the CPU. You can’t run a command to kill it because your command would need to get the CPU in order to run. The errant program is in complete control. It controls the vertical, it controls the horizontal.
There are two ways to avoid this: 1) keep a shell running somewhere with a higher absolute priority or 2) keep a controlling terminal attached to the high priority process group. All the priority in the world won’t stop an interrupt handler from running and delivering a signal to the process if you hit Control-C.
Some systems use absolute priority as a means of allocating a fixed percentage of CPU time to a process. To do this, a super high priority privileged process constantly monitors the process’ CPU usage and raises its absolute priority when the process isn’t getting its entitled share and lowers it when the process is exceeding it.
NB: The absolute priority is sometimes called the “static priority.” We don’t use that term in this manual because it misses the most important feature of the absolute priority: its absoluteness.
Next: Basic Scheduling Functions, Previous: Absolute Priority, Up: Process CPU Priority And Scheduling [Contents][Index]
Whenever two processes with the same absolute priority are ready to run, the kernel has a decision to make, because only one can run at a time. If the processes have absolute priority 0, the kernel makes this decision as described in Traditional Scheduling. Otherwise, the decision is as described in this section.
If two processes are ready to run but have different absolute priorities, the decision is much simpler, and is described in Absolute Priority.
Each process has a scheduling policy. For processes with absolute priority other than zero, there are two available:
The most sensible case is where all the processes with a certain absolute priority have the same scheduling policy. We’ll discuss that first.
In Round Robin, processes share the CPU, each one running for a small quantum of time (“time slice”) and then yielding to another in a circular fashion. Of course, only processes that are ready to run and have the same absolute priority are in this circle.
In First Come First Served, the process that has been waiting the longest to run gets the CPU, and it keeps it until it voluntarily relinquishes the CPU, runs out of things to do (blocks), or gets preempted by a higher priority process.
First Come First Served, along with maximal absolute priority and careful control of interrupts and page faults, is the one to use when a process absolutely, positively has to run at full CPU speed or not at all.
Judicious use of sched_yield
function invocations by processes
with First Come First Served scheduling policy forms a good compromise
between Round Robin and First Come First Served.
To understand how scheduling works when processes of different scheduling policies occupy the same absolute priority, you have to know the nitty gritty details of how processes enter and exit the ready to run list.
In both cases, the ready to run list is organized as a true queue, where a process gets pushed onto the tail when it becomes ready to run and is popped off the head when the scheduler decides to run it. Note that ready to run and running are two mutually exclusive states. When the scheduler runs a process, that process is no longer ready to run and no longer in the ready to run list. When the process stops running, it may go back to being ready to run again.
The only difference between a process that is assigned the Round Robin scheduling policy and a process that is assigned First Come First Serve is that in the former case, the process is automatically booted off the CPU after a certain amount of time. When that happens, the process goes back to being ready to run, which means it enters the queue at the tail. The time quantum we’re talking about is small. Really small. This is not your father’s timesharing. For example, with the Linux kernel, the round robin time slice is a thousand times shorter than its typical time slice for traditional scheduling.
A process begins life with the same scheduling policy as its parent process. Functions described in Basic Scheduling Functions can change it.
Only a privileged process can set the scheduling policy of a process that has absolute priority higher than 0.
Next: Traditional Scheduling, Previous: Realtime Scheduling, Up: Process CPU Priority And Scheduling [Contents][Index]
This section describes functions in the GNU C Library for setting the absolute priority and scheduling policy of a process.
Portability Note: On systems that have the functions in this section, the macro _POSIX_PRIORITY_SCHEDULING is defined in <unistd.h>.
For the case that the scheduling policy is traditional scheduling, more functions to fine tune the scheduling are in Traditional Scheduling.
Don’t try to make too much out of the naming and structure of these functions. They don’t match the concepts described in this manual because the functions are as defined by POSIX.1b, but the implementation on systems that use the GNU C Library is the inverse of what the POSIX structure contemplates. The POSIX scheme assumes that the primary scheduling parameter is the scheduling policy and that the priority value, if any, is a parameter of the scheduling policy. In the implementation, though, the priority value is king and the scheduling policy, if anything, only fine tunes the effect of that priority.
The symbols in this section are declared by including file sched.h.
Portability Note: In POSIX, the pid_t
arguments of the
functions below refer to process IDs. On Linux, they are actually
thread IDs, and control how specific threads are scheduled with
regards to the entire system. The resulting behavior does not conform
to POSIX. This is why the following description refers to tasks and
tasks IDs, and not processes and process IDs.
This structure describes an absolute priority.
int sched_priority
absolute priority value
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This function sets both the absolute priority and the scheduling policy for a task.
It assigns the absolute priority value given by param and the
scheduling policy policy to the task with ID pid,
or the calling task if pid is zero. If policy is
negative, sched_setscheduler
keeps the existing scheduling policy.
The following macros represent the valid values for policy:
On success, the return value is 0
. Otherwise, it is -1
and ERRNO
is set accordingly. The errno
values specific
to this function are:
EPERM
CAP_SYS_NICE
permission and
policy is not SCHED_OTHER
(or it’s negative and the
existing policy is not SCHED_OTHER
.
CAP_SYS_NICE
permission and its
owner is not the target task’s owner. I.e., the effective uid of the
calling task is neither the effective nor the real uid of task
pid.
ESRCH
There is no task with pid pid and pid is not zero.
EINVAL
sched_get_priority_max
and sched_get_priority_min
tell you what the valid range is.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This function returns the scheduling policy assigned to the task with ID pid, or the calling task if pid is zero.
The return value is the scheduling policy. See
sched_setscheduler
for the possible values.
If the function fails, the return value is instead -1
and
errno
is set accordingly.
The errno
values specific to this function are:
ESRCH
There is no task with pid pid and it is not zero.
EINVAL
pid is negative.
Note that this function is not an exact mate to sched_setscheduler
because while that function sets the scheduling policy and the absolute
priority, this function gets only the scheduling policy. To get the
absolute priority, use sched_getparam
.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This function sets a task’s absolute priority.
It is functionally identical to sched_setscheduler
with
policy = -1
.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This function returns a task’s absolute priority.
pid is the task ID of the task whose absolute priority you want to know.
param is a pointer to a structure in which the function stores the absolute priority of the task.
On success, the return value is 0
. Otherwise, it is -1
and errno
is set accordingly. The errno
values specific
to this function are:
ESRCH
There is no task with ID pid and it is not zero.
EINVAL
pid is negative.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This function returns the lowest absolute priority value that is allowable for a task with scheduling policy policy.
On Linux, it is 0 for SCHED_OTHER and 1 for everything else.
On success, the return value is 0
. Otherwise, it is -1
and ERRNO
is set accordingly. The errno
values specific
to this function are:
EINVAL
policy does not identify an existing scheduling policy.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This function returns the highest absolute priority value that is allowable for a task that with scheduling policy policy.
On Linux, it is 0 for SCHED_OTHER and 99 for everything else.
On success, the return value is 0
. Otherwise, it is -1
and ERRNO
is set accordingly. The errno
values specific
to this function are:
EINVAL
policy does not identify an existing scheduling policy.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This function returns the length of the quantum (time slice) used with the Round Robin scheduling policy, if it is used, for the task with task ID pid.
It returns the length of time as interval.
With a Linux kernel, the round robin time slice is always 150 microseconds, and pid need not even be a real pid.
The return value is 0
on success and in the pathological case
that it fails, the return value is -1
and errno
is set
accordingly. There is nothing specific that can go wrong with this
function, so there are no specific errno
values.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This function voluntarily gives up the task’s claim on the CPU.
Technically, sched_yield
causes the calling task to be made
immediately ready to run (as opposed to running, which is what it was
before). This means that if it has absolute priority higher than 0, it
gets pushed onto the tail of the queue of tasks that share its
absolute priority and are ready to run, and it will run again when its
turn next arrives. If its absolute priority is 0, it is more
complicated, but still has the effect of yielding the CPU to other
tasks.
If there are no other tasks that share the calling task’s absolute priority, this function doesn’t have any effect.
To the extent that the containing program is oblivious to what other processes in the system are doing and how fast it executes, this function appears as a no-op.
The return value is 0
on success and in the pathological case
that it fails, the return value is -1
and errno
is set
accordingly. There is nothing specific that can go wrong with this
function, so there are no specific errno
values.
Next: Limiting execution to certain CPUs, Previous: Basic Scheduling Functions, Up: Process CPU Priority And Scheduling [Contents][Index]
This section is about the scheduling among processes whose absolute priority is 0. When the system hands out the scraps of CPU time that are left over after the processes with higher absolute priority have taken all they want, the scheduling described herein determines who among the great unwashed processes gets them.
Long before there was absolute priority (See Absolute Priority), Unix systems were scheduling the CPU using this system. When POSIX came in like the Romans and imposed absolute priorities to accommodate the needs of realtime processing, it left the indigenous Absolute Priority Zero processes to govern themselves by their own familiar scheduling policy.
Indeed, absolute priorities higher than zero are not available on many systems today and are not typically used when they are, being intended mainly for computers that do realtime processing. So this section describes the only scheduling many programmers need to be concerned about.
But just to be clear about the scope of this scheduling: Any time a process with an absolute priority of 0 and a process with an absolute priority higher than 0 are ready to run at the same time, the one with absolute priority 0 does not run. If it’s already running when the higher priority ready-to-run process comes into existence, it stops immediately.
In addition to its absolute priority of zero, every process has another priority, which we will refer to as "dynamic priority" because it changes over time. The dynamic priority is meaningless for processes with an absolute priority higher than zero.
The dynamic priority sometimes determines who gets the next turn on the CPU. Sometimes it determines how long turns last. Sometimes it determines whether a process can kick another off the CPU.
In Linux, the value is a combination of these things, but mostly it just determines the length of the time slice. The higher a process’ dynamic priority, the longer a shot it gets on the CPU when it gets one. If it doesn’t use up its time slice before giving up the CPU to do something like wait for I/O, it is favored for getting the CPU back when it’s ready for it, to finish out its time slice. Other than that, selection of processes for new time slices is basically round robin. But the scheduler does throw a bone to the low priority processes: A process’ dynamic priority rises every time it is snubbed in the scheduling process. In Linux, even the fat kid gets to play.
The fluctuation of a process’ dynamic priority is regulated by another value: The “nice” value. The nice value is an integer, usually in the range -20 to 20, and represents an upper limit on a process’ dynamic priority. The higher the nice number, the lower that limit.
On a typical Linux system, for example, a process with a nice value of 20 can get only 10 milliseconds on the CPU at a time, whereas a process with a nice value of -20 can achieve a high enough priority to get 400 milliseconds.
The idea of the nice value is deferential courtesy. In the beginning, in the Unix garden of Eden, all processes shared equally in the bounty of the computer system. But not all processes really need the same share of CPU time, so the nice value gave a courteous process the ability to refuse its equal share of CPU time that others might prosper. Hence, the higher a process’ nice value, the nicer the process is. (Then a snake came along and offered some process a negative nice value and the system became the crass resource allocation system we know today.)
Dynamic priorities tend upward and downward with an objective of smoothing out allocation of CPU time and giving quick response time to infrequent requests. But they never exceed their nice limits, so on a heavily loaded CPU, the nice value effectively determines how fast a process runs.
In keeping with the socialistic heritage of Unix process priority, a process begins life with the same nice value as its parent process and can raise it at will. A process can also raise the nice value of any other process owned by the same user (or effective user). But only a privileged process can lower its nice value. A privileged process can also raise or lower another process’ nice value.
GNU C Library functions for getting and setting nice values are described in See Functions For Traditional Scheduling.
Previous: Introduction To Traditional Scheduling, Up: Traditional Scheduling [Contents][Index]
This section describes how you can read and set the nice value of a process. All these symbols are declared in sys/resource.h.
The function and macro names are defined by POSIX, and refer to "priority," but the functions actually have to do with nice values, as the terms are used both in the manual and POSIX.
The range of valid nice values depends on the kernel, but typically it
runs from -20
to 20
. A lower nice value corresponds to
higher priority for the process. These constants describe the range of
priority values:
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
Return the nice value of a set of processes; class and id specify which ones (see below). If the processes specified do not all have the same nice value, this returns the lowest value that any of them has.
On success, the return value is 0
. Otherwise, it is -1
and errno
is set accordingly. The errno
values specific
to this function are:
ESRCH
The combination of class and id does not match any existing process.
EINVAL
The value of class is not valid.
If the return value is -1
, it could indicate failure, or it could
be the nice value. The only way to make certain is to set errno =
0
before calling getpriority
, then use errno != 0
afterward as the criterion for failure.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
Set the nice value of a set of processes to niceval; class and id specify which ones (see below).
The return value is 0
on success, and -1
on
failure. The following errno
error condition are possible for
this function:
ESRCH
The combination of class and id does not match any existing process.
EINVAL
The value of class is not valid.
EPERM
The call would set the nice value of a process which is owned by a different
user than the calling process (i.e., the target process’ real or effective
uid does not match the calling process’ effective uid) and the calling
process does not have CAP_SYS_NICE
permission.
EACCES
The call would lower the process’ nice value and the process does not have
CAP_SYS_NICE
permission.
The arguments class and id together specify a set of processes in which you are interested. These are the possible values of class:
PRIO_PROCESS
¶One particular process. The argument id is a process ID (pid).
PRIO_PGRP
¶All the processes in a particular process group. The argument id is a process group ID (pgid).
PRIO_USER
¶All the processes owned by a particular user (i.e., whose real uid indicates the user). The argument id is a user ID (uid).
If the argument id is 0, it stands for the calling process, its process group, or its owner (real uid), according to class.
Preliminary: | MT-Unsafe race:setpriority | AS-Unsafe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
Increment the nice value of the calling process by increment.
The return value is the new nice value on success, and -1
on
failure. In the case of failure, errno
will be set to the
same values as for setpriority
.
Here is an equivalent definition of nice
:
int nice (int increment) { int result, old = getpriority (PRIO_PROCESS, 0); result = setpriority (PRIO_PROCESS, 0, old + increment); if (result != -1) return old + increment; else return -1; }
Previous: Traditional Scheduling, Up: Process CPU Priority And Scheduling [Contents][Index]
On a multi-processor system the operating system usually distributes the different processes which are runnable on all available CPUs in a way which allows the system to work most efficiently. Which processes and threads run can be to some extend be control with the scheduling functionality described in the last sections. But which CPU finally executes which process or thread is not covered.
There are a number of reasons why a program might want to have control over this aspect of the system as well:
The POSIX standard up to this date is of not much help to solve this problem. The Linux kernel provides a set of interfaces to allow specifying affinity sets for a process. The scheduler will schedule the thread or process on CPUs specified by the affinity masks. The interfaces which the GNU C Library define follow to some extent the Linux kernel interface.
This data set is a bitset where each bit represents a CPU. How the system’s CPUs are mapped to bits in the bitset is system dependent. The data type has a fixed size; in the unlikely case that the number of bits are not sufficient to describe the CPUs of the system a different interface has to be used.
This type is a GNU extension and is defined in sched.h.
To manipulate the bitset, to set and reset bits, a number of macros are
defined. Some of the macros take a CPU number as a parameter. Here
it is important to never exceed the size of the bitset. The following
macro specifies the number of bits in the cpu_set_t
bitset.
The value of this macro is the maximum number of CPUs which can be
handled with a cpu_set_t
object.
The type cpu_set_t
should be considered opaque; all
manipulation should happen via the next four macros.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This macro initializes the CPU set set to be the empty set.
This macro is a GNU extension and is defined in sched.h.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This macro adds cpu to the CPU set set.
The cpu parameter must not have side effects since it is evaluated more than once.
This macro is a GNU extension and is defined in sched.h.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This macro removes cpu from the CPU set set.
The cpu parameter must not have side effects since it is evaluated more than once.
This macro is a GNU extension and is defined in sched.h.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This macro returns a nonzero value (true) if cpu is a member of the CPU set set, and zero (false) otherwise.
The cpu parameter must not have side effects since it is evaluated more than once.
This macro is a GNU extension and is defined in sched.h.
CPU bitsets can be constructed from scratch or the currently installed affinity mask can be retrieved from the system.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This function stores the CPU affinity mask for the process or thread
with the ID pid in the cpusetsize bytes long bitmap
pointed to by cpuset. If successful, the function always
initializes all bits in the cpu_set_t
object and returns zero.
If pid does not correspond to a process or thread on the system
the or the function fails for some other reason, it returns -1
and errno
is set to represent the error condition.
ESRCH
No process or thread with the given ID found.
EFAULT
The pointer cpuset does not point to a valid object.
This function is a GNU extension and is declared in sched.h.
Note that it is not portably possible to use this information to retrieve the information for different POSIX threads. A separate interface must be provided for that.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This function installs the cpusetsize bytes long affinity mask pointed to by cpuset for the process or thread with the ID pid. If successful the function returns zero and the scheduler will in the future take the affinity information into account.
If the function fails it will return -1
and errno
is set
to the error code:
ESRCH
No process or thread with the given ID found.
EFAULT
The pointer cpuset does not point to a valid object.
EINVAL
The bitset is not valid. This might mean that the affinity set might not leave a processor for the process or thread to run on.
This function is a GNU extension and is declared in sched.h.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The getcpu
function identifies the processor and node on which
the calling thread or process is currently running and writes them into
the integers pointed to by the cpu and node arguments. The
processor is a unique nonnegative integer identifying a CPU. The node
is a unique nonnegative integer identifying a NUMA node. When either
cpu or node is NULL
, nothing is written to the
respective pointer.
The return value is 0
on success and -1
on failure. The
following errno
error condition is defined for this function:
ENOSYS
The operating system does not support this function.
This function is Linux-specific and is declared in sched.h.
Next: Learn about the processors available, Previous: Process CPU Priority And Scheduling, Up: Resource Usage And Limitation [Contents][Index]
The amount of memory available in the system and the way it is organized
determines oftentimes the way programs can and have to work. For
functions like mmap
it is necessary to know about the size of
individual memory pages and knowing how much memory is available enables
a program to select appropriate sizes for, say, caches. Before we get
into these details a few words about memory subsystems in traditional
Unix systems will be given.
Next: How to get information about the memory subsystem?, Up: Querying memory available resources [Contents][Index]
Unix systems normally provide processes virtual address spaces. This means that the addresses of the memory regions do not have to correspond directly to the addresses of the actual physical memory which stores the data. An extra level of indirection is introduced which translates virtual addresses into physical addresses. This is normally done by the hardware of the processor.
Using a virtual address space has several advantages. The most important is process isolation. The different processes running on the system cannot interfere directly with each other. No process can write into the address space of another process (except when shared memory is used but then it is wanted and controlled).
Another advantage of virtual memory is that the address space the processes see can actually be larger than the physical memory available. The physical memory can be extended by storage on an external media where the content of currently unused memory regions is stored. The address translation can then intercept accesses to these memory regions and make memory content available again by loading the data back into memory. This concept makes it necessary that programs which have to use lots of memory know the difference between available virtual address space and available physical memory. If the working set of virtual memory of all the processes is larger than the available physical memory the system will slow down dramatically due to constant swapping of memory content from the memory to the storage media and back. This is called “thrashing”.
A final aspect of virtual memory which is important and follows from what is said in the last paragraph is the granularity of the virtual address space handling. When we said that the virtual address handling stores memory content externally it cannot do this on a byte-by-byte basis. The administrative overhead does not allow this (leaving alone the processor hardware). Instead several thousand bytes are handled together and form a page. The size of each page is always a power of two bytes. The smallest page size in use today is 4096, with 8192, 16384, and 65536 being other popular sizes.
Previous: Overview about traditional Unix memory handling, Up: Querying memory available resources [Contents][Index]
The page size of the virtual memory the process sees is essential to
know in several situations. Some programming interfaces (e.g.,
mmap
, see Memory-mapped I/O) require the user to provide
information adjusted to the page size. In the case of mmap
it is
necessary to provide a length argument which is a multiple of the page
size. Another place where the knowledge about the page size is useful
is in memory allocation. If one allocates pieces of memory in larger
chunks which are then subdivided by the application code it is useful to
adjust the size of the larger blocks to the page size. If the total
memory requirement for the block is close (but not larger) to a multiple
of the page size the kernel’s memory handling can work more effectively
since it only has to allocate memory pages which are fully used. (To do
this optimization it is necessary to know a bit about the memory
allocator which will require a bit of memory itself for each block and
this overhead must not push the total size over the page size multiple.)
The page size traditionally was a compile time constant. But recent development of processors changed this. Processors now support different page sizes and they can possibly even vary among different processes on the same system. Therefore the system should be queried at runtime about the current page size and no assumptions (except about it being a power of two) should be made.
The correct interface to query about the page size is sysconf
(see Definition of sysconf
) with the parameter _SC_PAGESIZE
.
There is a much older interface available, too.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The getpagesize
function returns the page size of the process.
This value is fixed for the runtime of the process but can vary in
different runs of the application.
The function is declared in unistd.h.
Widely available on System V derived systems is a method to get information about the physical memory the system has. The call
sysconf (_SC_PHYS_PAGES)
returns the total number of pages of physical memory the system has. This does not mean all this memory is available. This information can be found using
sysconf (_SC_AVPHYS_PAGES)
These two values help to optimize applications. The value returned for
_SC_AVPHYS_PAGES
is the amount of memory the application can use
without hindering any other process (given that no other process
increases its memory usage). The value returned for
_SC_PHYS_PAGES
is more or less a hard limit for the working set.
If all applications together constantly use more than that amount of
memory the system is in trouble.
The GNU C Library provides in addition to these already described way to
get this information two functions. They are declared in the file
sys/sysinfo.h. Programmers should prefer to use the
sysconf
method described above.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Unsafe heap lock | AC-Unsafe lock fd mem | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The get_phys_pages
function returns the total number of pages of
physical memory the system has. To get the amount of memory this number has to
be multiplied by the page size.
This function is a GNU extension.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Unsafe heap lock | AC-Unsafe lock fd mem | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The get_avphys_pages
function returns the number of available pages of
physical memory the system has. To get the amount of memory this number has to
be multiplied by the page size.
This function is a GNU extension.
Previous: Querying memory available resources, Up: Resource Usage And Limitation [Contents][Index]
The use of threads or processes with shared memory allows an application to take advantage of all the processing power a system can provide. If the task can be parallelized the optimal way to write an application is to have at any time as many processes running as there are processors. To determine the number of processors available to the system one can run
sysconf (_SC_NPROCESSORS_CONF)
which returns the number of processors the operating system configured. But it might be possible for the operating system to disable individual processors and so the call
sysconf (_SC_NPROCESSORS_ONLN)
returns the number of processors which are currently online (i.e., available).
For these two pieces of information the GNU C Library also provides functions to get the information directly. The functions are declared in sys/sysinfo.h.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Unsafe heap lock | AC-Unsafe lock fd mem | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The get_nprocs_conf
function returns the number of processors the
operating system configured.
This function is a GNU extension.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe fd | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The get_nprocs
function returns the number of available processors.
This function is a GNU extension.
Before starting more threads it should be checked whether the processors are not already overused. Unix systems calculate something called the load average. This is a number indicating how many processes were running. This number is an average over different periods of time (normally 1, 5, and 15 minutes).
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe fd | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This function gets the 1, 5 and 15 minute load averages of the
system. The values are placed in loadavg. getloadavg
will
place at most nelem elements into the array but never more than
three elements. The return value is the number of elements written to
loadavg, or -1 on error.
This function is declared in stdlib.h.
Next: Signal Handling, Previous: Resource Usage And Limitation, Up: Main Menu [Contents][Index]
Sometimes when your program detects an unusual situation inside a deeply
nested set of function calls, you would like to be able to immediately
return to an outer level of control. This section describes how you can
do such non-local exits using the setjmp
and longjmp
functions.
Next: Details of Non-Local Exits, Up: Non-Local Exits [Contents][Index]
As an example of a situation where a non-local exit can be useful, suppose you have an interactive program that has a “main loop” that prompts for and executes commands. Suppose the “read” command reads input from a file, doing some lexical analysis and parsing of the input while processing it. If a low-level input error is detected, it would be useful to be able to return immediately to the “main loop” instead of having to make each of the lexical analysis, parsing, and processing phases all have to explicitly deal with error situations initially detected by nested calls.
(On the other hand, if each of these phases has to do a substantial amount of cleanup when it exits—such as closing files, deallocating buffers or other data structures, and the like—then it can be more appropriate to do a normal return and have each phase do its own cleanup, because a non-local exit would bypass the intervening phases and their associated cleanup code entirely. Alternatively, you could use a non-local exit but do the cleanup explicitly either before or after returning to the “main loop”.)
In some ways, a non-local exit is similar to using the ‘return’ statement to return from a function. But while ‘return’ abandons only a single function call, transferring control back to the point at which it was called, a non-local exit can potentially abandon many levels of nested function calls.
You identify return points for non-local exits by calling the function
setjmp
. This function saves information about the execution
environment in which the call to setjmp
appears in an object of
type jmp_buf
. Execution of the program continues normally after
the call to setjmp
, but if an exit is later made to this return
point by calling longjmp
with the corresponding jmp_buf
object, control is transferred back to the point where setjmp
was
called. The return value from setjmp
is used to distinguish
between an ordinary return and a return made by a call to
longjmp
, so calls to setjmp
usually appear in an ‘if’
statement.
Here is how the example program described above might be set up:
#include <setjmp.h> #include <stdlib.h> #include <stdio.h> jmp_buf main_loop; void abort_to_main_loop (int status) { longjmp (main_loop, status); } int main (void) { while (1) if (setjmp (main_loop)) puts ("Back at main loop...."); else do_command (); } void do_command (void) { char buffer[128]; if (fgets (buffer, 128, stdin) == NULL) abort_to_main_loop (-1); else exit (EXIT_SUCCESS); }
The function abort_to_main_loop
causes an immediate transfer of
control back to the main loop of the program, no matter where it is
called from.
The flow of control inside the main
function may appear a little
mysterious at first, but it is actually a common idiom with
setjmp
. A normal call to setjmp
returns zero, so the
“else” clause of the conditional is executed. If
abort_to_main_loop
is called somewhere within the execution of
do_command
, then it actually appears as if the same call
to setjmp
in main
were returning a second time with a value
of -1
.
So, the general pattern for using setjmp
looks something like:
if (setjmp (buffer)) /* Code to clean up after premature return. */ … else /* Code to be executed normally after setting up the return point. */ …
Next: Non-Local Exits and Signals, Previous: Introduction to Non-Local Exits, Up: Non-Local Exits [Contents][Index]
Here are the details on the functions and data structures used for performing non-local exits. These facilities are declared in setjmp.h.
Objects of type jmp_buf
hold the state information to
be restored by a non-local exit. The contents of a jmp_buf
identify a specific place to return to.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
When called normally, setjmp
stores information about the
execution state of the program in state and returns zero. If
longjmp
is later used to perform a non-local exit to this
state, setjmp
returns a nonzero value.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Unsafe plugin corrupt lock/hurd | AC-Unsafe corrupt lock/hurd | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This function restores current execution to the state saved in
state, and continues execution from the call to setjmp
that
established that return point. Returning from setjmp
by means of
longjmp
returns the value argument that was passed to
longjmp
, rather than 0
. (But if value is given as
0
, setjmp
returns 1
).
There are a lot of obscure but important restrictions on the use of
setjmp
and longjmp
. Most of these restrictions are
present because non-local exits require a fair amount of magic on the
part of the C compiler and can interact with other parts of the language
in strange ways.
The setjmp
function is actually a macro without an actual
function definition, so you shouldn’t try to ‘#undef’ it or take
its address. In addition, calls to setjmp
are safe in only the
following contexts:
Return points are valid only during the dynamic extent of the function
that called setjmp
to establish them. If you longjmp
to
a return point that was established in a function that has already
returned, unpredictable and disastrous things are likely to happen.
You should use a nonzero value argument to longjmp
. While
longjmp
refuses to pass back a zero argument as the return value
from setjmp
, this is intended as a safety net against accidental
misuse and is not really good programming style.
When you perform a non-local exit, accessible objects generally retain
whatever values they had at the time longjmp
was called. The
exception is that the values of automatic variables local to the
function containing the setjmp
call that have been changed since
the call to setjmp
are indeterminate, unless you have declared
them volatile
.
Next: Complete Context Control, Previous: Details of Non-Local Exits, Up: Non-Local Exits [Contents][Index]
In BSD Unix systems, setjmp
and longjmp
also save and
restore the set of blocked signals; see Blocking Signals. However,
the POSIX.1 standard requires setjmp
and longjmp
not to
change the set of blocked signals, and provides an additional pair of
functions (sigsetjmp
and siglongjmp
) to get the BSD
behavior.
The behavior of setjmp
and longjmp
in the GNU C Library is
controlled by feature test macros; see Feature Test Macros. The
default in the GNU C Library is the POSIX.1 behavior rather than the BSD
behavior.
The facilities in this section are declared in the header file setjmp.h.
This is similar to jmp_buf
, except that it can also store state
information about the set of blocked signals.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Unsafe lock/hurd | AC-Unsafe lock/hurd | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This is similar to setjmp
. If savesigs is nonzero, the set
of blocked signals is saved in state and will be restored if a
siglongjmp
is later performed with this state.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Unsafe plugin corrupt lock/hurd | AC-Unsafe corrupt lock/hurd | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This is similar to longjmp
except for the type of its state
argument. If the sigsetjmp
call that set this state used a
nonzero savesigs flag, siglongjmp
also restores the set of
blocked signals.
Previous: Non-Local Exits and Signals, Up: Non-Local Exits [Contents][Index]
The Unix standard provides one more set of functions to control the execution path and these functions are more powerful than those discussed in this chapter so far. These functions were part of the original System V API and by this route were added to the Unix API. Besides on branded Unix implementations these interfaces are not widely available. Not all platforms and/or architectures the GNU C Library is available on provide this interface. Use configure to detect the availability.
Similar to the jmp_buf
and sigjmp_buf
types used for the
variables to contain the state of the longjmp
functions the
interfaces of interest here have an appropriate type as well. Objects
of this type are normally much larger since more information is
contained. The type is also used in a few more places as we will see.
The types and functions described in this section are all defined and
declared respectively in the ucontext.h header file.
The ucontext_t
type is defined as a structure with at least the
following elements:
ucontext_t *uc_link
This is a pointer to the next context structure which is used if the context described in the current structure returns.
sigset_t uc_sigmask
Set of signals which are blocked when this context is used.
stack_t uc_stack
Stack used for this context. The value need not be (and normally is not) the stack pointer. See Using a Separate Signal Stack.
mcontext_t uc_mcontext
This element contains the actual state of the process. The
mcontext_t
type is also defined in this header but the definition
should be treated as opaque. Any use of knowledge of the type makes
applications less portable.
Objects of this type have to be created by the user. The initialization and modification happens through one of the following functions:
Preliminary: | MT-Safe race:ucp | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The getcontext
function initializes the variable pointed to by
ucp with the context of the calling thread. The context contains
the content of the registers, the signal mask, and the current stack.
Executing the contents would start at the point where the
getcontext
call just returned.
Compatibility Note: Depending on the operating system,
information about the current context’s stack may be in the
uc_stack
field of ucp, or it may instead be in
architecture-specific subfields of the uc_mcontext
field.
The function returns 0
if successful. Otherwise it returns
-1
and sets errno
accordingly.
The getcontext
function is similar to setjmp
but it does
not provide an indication of whether getcontext
is returning for
the first time or whether an initialized context has just been restored.
If this is necessary the user has to determine this herself. This must
be done carefully since the context contains registers which might contain
register variables. This is a good situation to define variables with
volatile
.
Once the context variable is initialized it can be used as is or it can
be modified using the makecontext
function. The latter is normally
done when implementing co-routines or similar constructs.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe race:ucp | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The ucp parameter passed to makecontext
shall be
initialized by a call to getcontext
. The context will be
modified in a way such that if the context is resumed it will start by
calling the function func
which gets argc integer arguments
passed. The integer arguments which are to be passed should follow the
argc parameter in the call to makecontext
.
Before the call to this function the uc_stack
and uc_link
element of the ucp structure should be initialized. The
uc_stack
element describes the stack which is used for this
context. No two contexts which are used at the same time should use the
same memory region for a stack.
The uc_link
element of the object pointed to by ucp should
be a pointer to the context to be executed when the function func
returns or it should be a null pointer. See setcontext
for more
information about the exact use.
While allocating the memory for the stack one has to be careful. Most modern processors keep track of whether a certain memory region is allowed to contain code which is executed or not. Data segments and heap memory are normally not tagged to allow this. The result is that programs would fail. Examples for such code include the calling sequences the GNU C compiler generates for calls to nested functions. Safe ways to allocate stacks correctly include using memory on the original thread’s stack or explicitly allocating memory tagged for execution using (see Memory-mapped I/O).
Compatibility note: The current Unix standard is very imprecise
about the way the stack is allocated. All implementations seem to agree
that the uc_stack
element must be used but the values stored in
the elements of the stack_t
value are unclear. The GNU C Library
and most other Unix implementations require the ss_sp
value of
the uc_stack
element to point to the base of the memory region
allocated for the stack and the size of the memory region is stored in
ss_size
. There are implementations out there which require
ss_sp
to be set to the value the stack pointer will have (which
can, depending on the direction the stack grows, be different). This
difference makes the makecontext
function hard to use and it
requires detection of the platform at compile time.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe race:ucp | AS-Unsafe corrupt | AC-Unsafe corrupt | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The setcontext
function restores the context described by
ucp. The context is not modified and can be reused as often as
wanted.
If the context was created by getcontext
execution resumes with
the registers filled with the same values and the same stack as if the
getcontext
call just returned.
If the context was modified with a call to makecontext
execution
continues with the function passed to makecontext
which gets the
specified parameters passed. If this function returns execution is
resumed in the context which was referenced by the uc_link
element of the context structure passed to makecontext
at the
time of the call. If uc_link
was a null pointer the application
terminates normally with an exit status value of EXIT_SUCCESS
(see Program Termination).
If the context was created by a call to a signal handler or from any
other source then the behaviour of setcontext
is unspecified.
Since the context contains information about the stack no two threads should use the same context at the same time. The result in most cases would be disastrous.
The setcontext
function does not return unless an error occurred
in which case it returns -1
.
The setcontext
function simply replaces the current context with
the one described by the ucp parameter. This is often useful but
there are situations where the current context has to be preserved.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe race:oucp race:ucp | AS-Unsafe corrupt | AC-Unsafe corrupt | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The swapcontext
function is similar to setcontext
but
instead of just replacing the current context the latter is first saved
in the object pointed to by oucp as if this was a call to
getcontext
. The saved context would resume after the call to
swapcontext
.
Once the current context is saved the context described in ucp is installed and execution continues as described in this context.
If swapcontext
succeeds the function does not return unless the
context oucp is used without prior modification by
makecontext
. The return value in this case is 0
. If the
function fails it returns -1
and sets errno
accordingly.
The easiest way to use the context handling functions is as a
replacement for setjmp
and longjmp
. The context contains
on most platforms more information which may lead to fewer surprises
but this also means using these functions is more expensive (besides
being less portable).
int random_search (int n, int (*fp) (int, ucontext_t *)) { volatile int cnt = 0; ucontext_t uc; /* Safe current context. */ if (getcontext (&uc) < 0) return -1; /* If we have not tried n times try again. */ if (cnt++ < n) /* Call the function with a new random number and the context. */ if (fp (rand (), &uc) != 0) /* We found what we were looking for. */ return 1; /* Not found. */ return 0; }
Using contexts in such a way enables emulating exception handling. The search functions passed in the fp parameter could be very large, nested, and complex which would make it complicated (or at least would require a lot of code) to leave the function with an error value which has to be passed down to the caller. By using the context it is possible to leave the search function in one step and allow restarting the search which also has the nice side effect that it can be significantly faster.
Something which is harder to implement with setjmp
and
longjmp
is to switch temporarily to a different execution path
and then resume where execution was stopped.
#include <signal.h> #include <stdio.h> #include <stdlib.h> #include <ucontext.h> #include <sys/time.h> /* Set by the signal handler. */ static volatile int expired; /* The contexts. */ static ucontext_t uc[3]; /* We do only a certain number of switches. */ static int switches; /* This is the function doing the work. It is just a skeleton, real code has to be filled in. */ static void f (int n) { int m = 0; while (1) { /* This is where the work would be done. */ if (++m % 100 == 0) { putchar ('.'); fflush (stdout); } /* Regularly the expire variable must be checked. */ if (expired) { /* We do not want the program to run forever. */ if (++switches == 20) return; printf ("\nswitching from %d to %d\n", n, 3 - n); expired = 0; /* Switch to the other context, saving the current one. */ swapcontext (&uc[n], &uc[3 - n]); } } } /* This is the signal handler which simply set the variable. */ void handler (int signal) { expired = 1; } int main (void) { struct sigaction sa; struct itimerval it; char st1[8192]; char st2[8192]; /* Initialize the data structures for the interval timer. */ sa.sa_flags = SA_RESTART; sigfillset (&sa.sa_mask); sa.sa_handler = handler; it.it_interval.tv_sec = 0; it.it_interval.tv_usec = 1; it.it_value = it.it_interval; /* Install the timer and get the context we can manipulate. */ if (sigaction (SIGPROF, &sa, NULL) < 0 || setitimer (ITIMER_PROF, &it, NULL) < 0 || getcontext (&uc[1]) == -1 || getcontext (&uc[2]) == -1) abort (); /* Create a context with a separate stack which causes the functionf
to be call with the parameter1
. Note that theuc_link
points to the main context which will cause the program to terminate once the function return. */ uc[1].uc_link = &uc[0]; uc[1].uc_stack.ss_sp = st1; uc[1].uc_stack.ss_size = sizeof st1; makecontext (&uc[1], (void (*) (void)) f, 1, 1); /* Similarly, but2
is passed as the parameter tof
. */ uc[2].uc_link = &uc[0]; uc[2].uc_stack.ss_sp = st2; uc[2].uc_stack.ss_size = sizeof st2; makecontext (&uc[2], (void (*) (void)) f, 1, 2); /* Start running. */ swapcontext (&uc[0], &uc[1]); putchar ('\n'); return 0; }
This an example how the context functions can be used to implement
co-routines or cooperative multi-threading. All that has to be done is
to call every once in a while swapcontext
to continue running a
different context. It is not recommended to do the context switching from
the signal handler directly since leaving the signal handler via
setcontext
if the signal was delivered during code that was not
asynchronous signal safe could lead to problems. Setting a variable in
the signal handler and checking it in the body of the functions which
are executed is a safer approach. Since swapcontext
is saving the
current context it is possible to have multiple different scheduling points
in the code. Execution will always resume where it was left.
Next: The Basic Program/System Interface, Previous: Non-Local Exits, Up: Main Menu [Contents][Index]
A signal is a software interrupt delivered to a process. The operating system uses signals to report exceptional situations to an executing program. Some signals report errors such as references to invalid memory addresses; others report asynchronous events, such as disconnection of a phone line.
The GNU C Library defines a variety of signal types, each for a particular kind of event. Some kinds of events make it inadvisable or impossible for the program to proceed as usual, and the corresponding signals normally abort the program. Other kinds of signals that report harmless events are ignored by default.
If you anticipate an event that causes signals, you can define a handler function and tell the operating system to run it when that particular type of signal arrives.
Finally, one process can send a signal to another process; this allows a parent process to abort a child, or two related processes to communicate and synchronize.
Next: Standard Signals, Up: Signal Handling [Contents][Index]
This section explains basic concepts of how signals are generated, what happens after a signal is delivered, and how programs can handle signals.
Next: Concepts of Signal Generation, Up: Basic Concepts of Signals [Contents][Index]
A signal reports the occurrence of an exceptional event. These are some of the events that can cause (or generate, or raise) a signal:
kill
or raise
by the same process.
kill
from another process. Signals are a limited but
useful form of interprocess communication.
Each of these kinds of events (excepting explicit calls to kill
and raise
) generates its own particular kind of signal. The
various kinds of signals are listed and described in detail in
Standard Signals.
Next: How Signals Are Delivered, Previous: Some Kinds of Signals, Up: Basic Concepts of Signals [Contents][Index]
In general, the events that generate signals fall into three major categories: errors, external events, and explicit requests.
An error means that a program has done something invalid and cannot
continue execution. But not all kinds of errors generate signals—in
fact, most do not. For example, opening a nonexistent file is an error,
but it does not raise a signal; instead, open
returns -1
.
In general, errors that are necessarily associated with certain library
functions are reported by returning a value that indicates an error.
The errors which raise signals are those which can happen anywhere in
the program, not just in library calls. These include division by zero
and invalid memory addresses.
An external event generally has to do with I/O or other processes. These include the arrival of input, the expiration of a timer, and the termination of a child process.
An explicit request means the use of a library function such as
kill
whose purpose is specifically to generate a signal.
Signals may be generated synchronously or asynchronously. A synchronous signal pertains to a specific action in the program, and is delivered (unless blocked) during that action. Most errors generate signals synchronously, and so do explicit requests by a process to generate a signal for that same process. On some machines, certain kinds of hardware errors (usually floating-point exceptions) are not reported completely synchronously, but may arrive a few instructions later.
Asynchronous signals are generated by events outside the control of the process that receives them. These signals arrive at unpredictable times during execution. External events generate signals asynchronously, and so do explicit requests that apply to some other process.
A given type of signal is either typically synchronous or typically asynchronous. For example, signals for errors are typically synchronous because errors generate signals synchronously. But any type of signal can be generated synchronously or asynchronously with an explicit request.
Previous: Concepts of Signal Generation, Up: Basic Concepts of Signals [Contents][Index]
When a signal is generated, it becomes pending. Normally it remains pending for just a short period of time and then is delivered to the process that was signaled. However, if that kind of signal is currently blocked, it may remain pending indefinitely—until signals of that kind are unblocked. Once unblocked, it will be delivered immediately. See Blocking Signals.
When the signal is delivered, whether right away or after a long delay,
the specified action for that signal is taken. For certain
signals, such as SIGKILL
and SIGSTOP
, the action is fixed,
but for most signals, the program has a choice: ignore the signal,
specify a handler function, or accept the default action for
that kind of signal. The program specifies its choice using functions
such as signal
or sigaction
(see Specifying Signal Actions). We
sometimes say that a handler catches the signal. While the
handler is running, that particular signal is normally blocked.
If the specified action for a kind of signal is to ignore it, then any such signal which is generated is discarded immediately. This happens even if the signal is also blocked at the time. A signal discarded in this way will never be delivered, not even if the program subsequently specifies a different action for that kind of signal and then unblocks it.
If a signal arrives which the program has neither handled nor ignored, its default action takes place. Each kind of signal has its own default action, documented below (see Standard Signals). For most kinds of signals, the default action is to terminate the process. For certain kinds of signals that represent “harmless” events, the default action is to do nothing.
When a signal terminates a process, its parent process can determine the
cause of termination by examining the termination status code reported
by the wait
or waitpid
functions. (This is discussed in
more detail in Process Completion.) The information it can get
includes the fact that termination was due to a signal and the kind of
signal involved. If a program you run from a shell is terminated by a
signal, the shell typically prints some kind of error message.
The signals that normally represent program errors have a special property: when one of these signals terminates the process, it also writes a core dump file which records the state of the process at the time of termination. You can examine the core dump with a debugger to investigate what caused the error.
If you raise a “program error” signal by explicit request, and this terminates the process, it makes a core dump file just as if the signal had been due directly to an error.
Next: Specifying Signal Actions, Previous: Basic Concepts of Signals, Up: Signal Handling [Contents][Index]
This section lists the names for various standard kinds of signals and describes what kind of event they mean. Each signal name is a macro which stands for a positive integer—the signal number for that kind of signal. Your programs should never make assumptions about the numeric code for a particular kind of signal, but rather refer to them always by the names defined here. This is because the number for a given kind of signal can vary from system to system, but the meanings of the names are standardized and fairly uniform.
The signal names are defined in the header file signal.h.
The value of this symbolic constant is the total number of signals
defined. Since the signal numbers are allocated consecutively,
NSIG
is also one greater than the largest defined signal number.
Next: Termination Signals, Up: Standard Signals [Contents][Index]
The following signals are generated when a serious program error is detected by the operating system or the computer itself. In general, all of these signals are indications that your program is seriously broken in some way, and there’s usually no way to continue the computation which encountered the error.
Some programs handle program error signals in order to tidy up before terminating; for example, programs that turn off echoing of terminal input should handle program error signals in order to turn echoing back on. The handler should end by specifying the default action for the signal that happened and then reraising it; this will cause the program to terminate with that signal, as if it had not had a handler. (See Handlers That Terminate the Process.)
Termination is the sensible ultimate outcome from a program error in
most programs. However, programming systems such as Lisp that can load
compiled user programs might need to keep executing even if a user
program incurs an error. These programs have handlers which use
longjmp
to return control to the command level.
The default action for all of these signals is to cause the process to
terminate. If you block or ignore these signals or establish handlers
for them that return normally, your program will probably break horribly
when such signals happen, unless they are generated by raise
or
kill
instead of a real error.
When one of these program error signals terminates a process, it also
writes a core dump file which records the state of the process at
the time of termination. The core dump file is named core and is
written in whichever directory is current in the process at the time.
(On GNU/Hurd systems, you can specify the file name for core dumps with
the environment variable COREFILE
.) The purpose of core dump
files is so that you can examine them with a debugger to investigate
what caused the error.
The SIGFPE
signal reports a fatal arithmetic error. Although the
name is derived from “floating-point exception”, this signal actually
covers all arithmetic errors, including division by zero and overflow.
If a program stores integer data in a location which is then used in a
floating-point operation, this often causes an “invalid operation”
exception, because the processor cannot recognize the data as a
floating-point number.
Actual floating-point exceptions are a complicated subject because there
are many types of exceptions with subtly different meanings, and the
SIGFPE
signal doesn’t distinguish between them. The IEEE
Standard for Binary Floating-Point Arithmetic (ANSI/IEEE Std 754-1985
and ANSI/IEEE Std 854-1987)
defines various floating-point exceptions and requires conforming
computer systems to report their occurrences. However, this standard
does not specify how the exceptions are reported, or what kinds of
handling and control the operating system can offer to the programmer.
BSD systems provide the SIGFPE
handler with an extra argument
that distinguishes various causes of the exception. In order to access
this argument, you must define the handler to accept two arguments,
which means you must cast it to a one-argument function type in order to
establish the handler. The GNU C Library does provide this extra
argument, but the value is meaningful only on operating systems that
provide the information (BSD systems and GNU systems).
FPE_INTOVF_TRAP
¶Integer overflow (impossible in a C program unless you enable overflow trapping in a hardware-specific fashion).
FPE_INTDIV_TRAP
¶Integer division by zero.
FPE_SUBRNG_TRAP
¶Subscript-range (something that C programs never check for).
FPE_FLTOVF_TRAP
¶Floating overflow trap.
FPE_FLTDIV_TRAP
¶Floating/decimal division by zero.
FPE_FLTUND_TRAP
¶Floating underflow trap. (Trapping on floating underflow is not normally enabled.)
FPE_DECOVF_TRAP
¶Decimal overflow trap. (Only a few machines have decimal arithmetic and C never uses it.)
The name of this signal is derived from “illegal instruction”; it
usually means your program is trying to execute garbage or a privileged
instruction. Since the C compiler generates only valid instructions,
SIGILL
typically indicates that the executable file is corrupted,
or that you are trying to execute data. Some common ways of getting
into the latter situation are by passing an invalid object where a
pointer to a function was expected, or by writing past the end of an
automatic array (or similar problems with pointers to automatic
variables) and corrupting other data on the stack such as the return
address of a stack frame.
SIGILL
can also be generated when the stack overflows, or when
the system has trouble running the handler for a signal.
This signal is generated when a program tries to read or write outside the memory that is allocated for it, or to write memory that can only be read. (Actually, the signals only occur when the program goes far enough outside to be detected by the system’s memory protection mechanism.) The name is an abbreviation for “segmentation violation”.
Common ways of getting a SIGSEGV
condition include dereferencing
a null or uninitialized pointer, or when you use a pointer to step
through an array, but fail to check for the end of the array. It varies
among systems whether dereferencing a null pointer generates
SIGSEGV
or SIGBUS
.
This signal is generated when an invalid pointer is dereferenced. Like
SIGSEGV
, this signal is typically the result of dereferencing an
uninitialized pointer. The difference between the two is that
SIGSEGV
indicates an invalid access to valid memory, while
SIGBUS
indicates an access to an invalid address. In particular,
SIGBUS
signals often result from dereferencing a misaligned
pointer, such as referring to a four-word integer at an address not
divisible by four. (Each kind of computer has its own requirements for
address alignment.)
The name of this signal is an abbreviation for “bus error”.
This signal indicates an error detected by the program itself and
reported by calling abort
. See Aborting a Program.
Generated by the PDP-11 “iot” instruction. On most machines, this is
just another name for SIGABRT
.
Generated by the machine’s breakpoint instruction, and possibly other
trap instructions. This signal is used by debuggers. Your program will
probably only see SIGTRAP
if it is somehow executing bad
instructions.
Emulator trap; this results from certain unimplemented instructions which might be emulated in software, or the operating system’s failure to properly emulate them.
Bad system call; that is to say, the instruction to trap to the operating system was executed, but the code number for the system call to perform was invalid.
Next: Alarm Signals, Previous: Program Error Signals, Up: Standard Signals [Contents][Index]
These signals are all used to tell a process to terminate, in one way or another. They have different names because they’re used for slightly different purposes, and programs might want to handle them differently.
The reason for handling these signals is usually so your program can tidy up as appropriate before actually terminating. For example, you might want to save state information, delete temporary files, or restore the previous terminal modes. Such a handler should end by specifying the default action for the signal that happened and then reraising it; this will cause the program to terminate with that signal, as if it had not had a handler. (See Handlers That Terminate the Process.)
The (obvious) default action for all of these signals is to cause the process to terminate.
The SIGTERM
signal is a generic signal used to cause program
termination. Unlike SIGKILL
, this signal can be blocked,
handled, and ignored. It is the normal way to politely ask a program to
terminate.
The shell command kill
generates SIGTERM
by default.
The SIGINT
(“program interrupt”) signal is sent when the user
types the INTR character (normally C-c). See Special Characters, for information about terminal driver support for
C-c.
The SIGQUIT
signal is similar to SIGINT
, except that it’s
controlled by a different key—the QUIT character, usually
C-\—and produces a core dump when it terminates the process,
just like a program error signal. You can think of this as a
program error condition “detected” by the user.
See Program Error Signals, for information about core dumps. See Special Characters, for information about terminal driver support.
Certain kinds of cleanups are best omitted in handling SIGQUIT
.
For example, if the program creates temporary files, it should handle
the other termination requests by deleting the temporary files. But it
is better for SIGQUIT
not to delete them, so that the user can
examine them in conjunction with the core dump.
The SIGKILL
signal is used to cause immediate program termination.
It cannot be handled or ignored, and is therefore always fatal. It is
also not possible to block this signal.
This signal is usually generated only by explicit request. Since it
cannot be handled, you should generate it only as a last resort, after
first trying a less drastic method such as C-c or SIGTERM
.
If a process does not respond to any other termination signals, sending
it a SIGKILL
signal will almost always cause it to go away.
In fact, if SIGKILL
fails to terminate a process, that by itself
constitutes an operating system bug which you should report.
The system will generate SIGKILL
for a process itself under some
unusual conditions where the program cannot possibly continue to run
(even to run a signal handler).
The SIGHUP
(“hang-up”) signal is used to report that the user’s
terminal is disconnected, perhaps because a network or telephone
connection was broken. For more information about this, see Control Modes.
This signal is also used to report the termination of the controlling process on a terminal to jobs associated with that session; this termination effectively disconnects all processes in the session from the controlling terminal. For more information, see Termination Internals.
Next: Asynchronous I/O Signals, Previous: Termination Signals, Up: Standard Signals [Contents][Index]
These signals are used to indicate the expiration of timers. See Setting an Alarm, for information about functions that cause these signals to be sent.
The default behavior for these signals is to cause program termination. This default is rarely useful, but no other default would be useful; most of the ways of using these signals would require handler functions in any case.
This signal typically indicates expiration of a timer that measures real
or clock time. It is used by the alarm
function, for example.
This signal typically indicates expiration of a timer that measures CPU time used by the current process. The name is an abbreviation for “virtual time alarm”.
This signal typically indicates expiration of a timer that measures both CPU time used by the current process, and CPU time expended on behalf of the process by the system. Such a timer is used to implement code profiling facilities, hence the name of this signal.
Next: Job Control Signals, Previous: Alarm Signals, Up: Standard Signals [Contents][Index]
The signals listed in this section are used in conjunction with
asynchronous I/O facilities. You have to take explicit action by
calling fcntl
to enable a particular file descriptor to generate
these signals (see Interrupt-Driven Input). The default action for these
signals is to ignore them.
This signal is sent when a file descriptor is ready to perform input or output.
On most operating systems, terminals and sockets are the only kinds of
files that can generate SIGIO
; other kinds, including ordinary
files, never generate SIGIO
even if you ask them to.
On GNU systems SIGIO
will always be generated properly
if you successfully set asynchronous mode with fcntl
.
This signal is sent when “urgent” or out-of-band data arrives on a socket. See Out-of-Band Data.
This is a System V signal name, more or less similar to SIGIO
.
It is defined only for compatibility.
Next: Operation Error Signals, Previous: Asynchronous I/O Signals, Up: Standard Signals [Contents][Index]
These signals are used to support job control. If your system doesn’t support job control, then these macros are defined but the signals themselves can’t be raised or handled.
You should generally leave these signals alone unless you really understand how job control works. See Job Control.
This signal is sent to a parent process whenever one of its child processes terminates or stops.
The default action for this signal is to ignore it. If you establish a
handler for this signal while there are child processes that have
terminated but not reported their status via wait
or
waitpid
(see Process Completion), whether your new handler
applies to those processes or not depends on the particular operating
system.
This is an obsolete name for SIGCHLD
.
You can send a SIGCONT
signal to a process to make it continue.
This signal is special—it always makes the process continue if it is
stopped, before the signal is delivered. The default behavior is to do
nothing else. You cannot block this signal. You can set a handler, but
SIGCONT
always makes the process continue regardless.
Most programs have no reason to handle SIGCONT
; they simply
resume execution without realizing they were ever stopped. You can use
a handler for SIGCONT
to make a program do something special when
it is stopped and continued—for example, to reprint a prompt when it
is suspended while waiting for input.
The SIGSTOP
signal stops the process. It cannot be handled,
ignored, or blocked.
The SIGTSTP
signal is an interactive stop signal. Unlike
SIGSTOP
, this signal can be handled and ignored.
Your program should handle this signal if you have a special need to
leave files or system tables in a secure state when a process is
stopped. For example, programs that turn off echoing should handle
SIGTSTP
so they can turn echoing back on before stopping.
This signal is generated when the user types the SUSP character (normally C-z). For more information about terminal driver support, see Special Characters.
A process cannot read from the user’s terminal while it is running
as a background job. When any process in a background job tries to
read from the terminal, all of the processes in the job are sent a
SIGTTIN
signal. The default action for this signal is to
stop the process. For more information about how this interacts with
the terminal driver, see Access to the Controlling Terminal.
This is similar to SIGTTIN
, but is generated when a process in a
background job attempts to write to the terminal or set its modes.
Again, the default action is to stop the process. SIGTTOU
is
only generated for an attempt to write to the terminal if the
TOSTOP
output mode is set; see Output Modes.
While a process is stopped, no more signals can be delivered to it until
it is continued, except SIGKILL
signals and (obviously)
SIGCONT
signals. The signals are marked as pending, but not
delivered until the process is continued. The SIGKILL
signal
always causes termination of the process and can’t be blocked, handled
or ignored. You can ignore SIGCONT
, but it always causes the
process to be continued anyway if it is stopped. Sending a
SIGCONT
signal to a process causes any pending stop signals for
that process to be discarded. Likewise, any pending SIGCONT
signals for a process are discarded when it receives a stop signal.
When a process in an orphaned process group (see Orphaned Process Groups) receives a SIGTSTP
, SIGTTIN
, or SIGTTOU
signal and does not handle it, the process does not stop. Stopping the
process would probably not be very useful, since there is no shell
program that will notice it stop and allow the user to continue it.
What happens instead depends on the operating system you are using.
Some systems may do nothing; others may deliver another signal instead,
such as SIGKILL
or SIGHUP
. On GNU/Hurd systems, the process
dies with SIGKILL
; this avoids the problem of many stopped,
orphaned processes lying around the system.
Next: Miscellaneous Signals, Previous: Job Control Signals, Up: Standard Signals [Contents][Index]
These signals are used to report various errors generated by an operation done by the program. They do not necessarily indicate a programming error in the program, but an error that prevents an operating system call from completing. The default action for all of them is to cause the process to terminate.
Broken pipe. If you use pipes or FIFOs, you have to design your
application so that one process opens the pipe for reading before
another starts writing. If the reading process never starts, or
terminates unexpectedly, writing to the pipe or FIFO raises a
SIGPIPE
signal. If SIGPIPE
is blocked, handled or
ignored, the offending call fails with EPIPE
instead.
Pipes and FIFO special files are discussed in more detail in Pipes and FIFOs.
Another cause of SIGPIPE
is when you try to output to a socket
that isn’t connected. See Sending Data.
Resource lost. This signal is generated when you have an advisory lock on an NFS file, and the NFS server reboots and forgets about your lock.
On GNU/Hurd systems, SIGLOST
is generated when any server program
dies unexpectedly. It is usually fine to ignore the signal; whatever
call was made to the server that died just returns an error.
CPU time limit exceeded. This signal is generated when the process exceeds its soft resource limit on CPU time. See Limiting Resource Usage.
File size limit exceeded. This signal is generated when the process attempts to extend a file so it exceeds the process’s soft resource limit on file size. See Limiting Resource Usage.
Next: Signal Messages, Previous: Operation Error Signals, Up: Standard Signals [Contents][Index]
These signals are used for various other purposes. In general, they will not affect your program unless it explicitly uses them for something.
The SIGUSR1
and SIGUSR2
signals are set aside for you to
use any way you want. They’re useful for simple interprocess
communication, if you write a signal handler for them in the program
that receives the signal.
There is an example showing the use of SIGUSR1
and SIGUSR2
in Signaling Another Process.
The default action is to terminate the process.
Window size change. This is generated on some systems (including GNU) when the terminal driver’s record of the number of rows and columns on the screen is changed. The default action is to ignore it.
If a program does full-screen display, it should handle SIGWINCH
.
When the signal arrives, it should fetch the new screen size and
reformat its display accordingly.
Information request. On 4.4 BSD and GNU/Hurd systems, this signal is sent to all the processes in the foreground process group of the controlling terminal when the user types the STATUS character in canonical mode; see Characters that Cause Signals.
If the process is the leader of the process group, the default action is to print some status information about the system and what the process is doing. Otherwise the default is to do nothing.
Previous: Miscellaneous Signals, Up: Standard Signals [Contents][Index]
We mentioned above that the shell prints a message describing the signal
that terminated a child process. The clean way to print a message
describing a signal is to use the functions strsignal
and
psignal
. These functions use a signal number to specify which
kind of signal to describe. The signal number may come from the
termination status of a child process (see Process Completion) or it
may come from a signal handler in the same process.
Preliminary: | MT-Unsafe race:strsignal locale | AS-Unsafe init i18n corrupt heap | AC-Unsafe init corrupt mem | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This function returns a pointer to a statically-allocated string containing a message describing the signal signum. You should not modify the contents of this string; and, since it can be rewritten on subsequent calls, you should save a copy of it if you need to reference it later.
This function is a GNU extension, declared in the header file string.h.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe locale | AS-Unsafe corrupt i18n heap | AC-Unsafe lock corrupt mem | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This function prints a message describing the signal signum to the
standard error output stream stderr
; see Standard Streams.
If you call psignal
with a message that is either a null
pointer or an empty string, psignal
just prints the message
corresponding to signum, adding a trailing newline.
If you supply a non-null message argument, then psignal
prefixes its output with this string. It adds a colon and a space
character to separate the message from the string corresponding
to signum.
This function is a BSD feature, declared in the header file signal.h.
| MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This function returns the message describing the signal signum or
NULL
for invalid signal number (e.g "Hangup" for SIGHUP
).
Different than strsignal
the returned description is not translated.
The message points to a static storage whose lifetime is the whole lifetime
of the program.
This function is a GNU extension, declared in the header file string.h.
| MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This function returns the abbreviation describing the signal signum or
NULL
for invalid signal number. The message points to a static
storage whose lifetime is the whole lifetime of the program.
This function is a GNU extension, declared in the header file string.h.
Next: Defining Signal Handlers, Previous: Standard Signals, Up: Signal Handling [Contents][Index]
The simplest way to change the action for a signal is to use the
signal
function. You can specify a built-in action (such as to
ignore the signal), or you can establish a handler.
The GNU C Library also implements the more versatile sigaction
facility. This section describes both facilities and gives suggestions
on which to use when.
signal
and sigaction
sigaction
Function Examplesigaction
Next: Advanced Signal Handling, Up: Specifying Signal Actions [Contents][Index]
The signal
function provides a simple interface for establishing
an action for a particular signal. The function and associated macros
are declared in the header file signal.h.
This is the type of signal handler functions. Signal handlers take one
integer argument specifying the signal number, and have return type
void
. So, you should define handler functions like this:
void handler (int signum
) { … }
The name sighandler_t
for this data type is a GNU extension.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe sigintr | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The signal
function establishes action as the action for
the signal signum.
The first argument, signum, identifies the signal whose behavior you want to control, and should be a signal number. The proper way to specify a signal number is with one of the symbolic signal names (see Standard Signals)—don’t use an explicit number, because the numerical code for a given kind of signal may vary from operating system to operating system.
The second argument, action, specifies the action to use for the signal signum. This can be one of the following:
SIG_DFL
¶SIG_DFL
specifies the default action for the particular signal.
The default actions for various kinds of signals are stated in
Standard Signals.
SIG_IGN
¶SIG_IGN
specifies that the signal should be ignored.
Your program generally should not ignore signals that represent serious
events or that are normally used to request termination. You cannot
ignore the SIGKILL
or SIGSTOP
signals at all. You can
ignore program error signals like SIGSEGV
, but ignoring the error
won’t enable the program to continue executing meaningfully. Ignoring
user requests such as SIGINT
, SIGQUIT
, and SIGTSTP
is unfriendly.
When you do not wish signals to be delivered during a certain part of the program, the thing to do is to block them, not ignore them. See Blocking Signals.
handler
Supply the address of a handler function in your program, to specify running this handler as the way to deliver the signal.
For more information about defining signal handler functions, see Defining Signal Handlers.
If you set the action for a signal to SIG_IGN
, or if you set it
to SIG_DFL
and the default action is to ignore that signal, then
any pending signals of that type are discarded (even if they are
blocked). Discarding the pending signals means that they will never be
delivered, not even if you subsequently specify another action and
unblock this kind of signal.
The signal
function returns the action that was previously in
effect for the specified signum. You can save this value and
restore it later by calling signal
again.
If signal
can’t honor the request, it returns SIG_ERR
instead. The following errno
error conditions are defined for
this function:
EINVAL
You specified an invalid signum; or you tried to ignore or provide
a handler for SIGKILL
or SIGSTOP
.
Compatibility Note: A problem encountered when working with the
signal
function is that it has different semantics on BSD and
SVID systems. The difference is that on SVID systems the signal handler
is deinstalled after signal delivery. On BSD systems the
handler must be explicitly deinstalled. In the GNU C Library we use the
BSD version by default. To use the SVID version you can either use the
function sysv_signal
(see below) or use the _XOPEN_SOURCE
feature select macro (see Feature Test Macros). In general, use of these
functions should be avoided because of compatibility problems. It
is better to use sigaction
if it is available since the results
are much more reliable.
Here is a simple example of setting up a handler to delete temporary files when certain fatal signals happen:
#include <signal.h> void termination_handler (int signum) { struct temp_file *p; for (p = temp_file_list; p; p = p->next) unlink (p->name); } int main (void) { … if (signal (SIGINT, termination_handler) == SIG_IGN) signal (SIGINT, SIG_IGN); if (signal (SIGHUP, termination_handler) == SIG_IGN) signal (SIGHUP, SIG_IGN); if (signal (SIGTERM, termination_handler) == SIG_IGN) signal (SIGTERM, SIG_IGN); … }
Note that if a given signal was previously set to be ignored, this code avoids altering that setting. This is because non-job-control shells often ignore certain signals when starting children, and it is important for the children to respect this.
We do not handle SIGQUIT
or the program error signals in this
example because these are designed to provide information for debugging
(a core dump), and the temporary files may give useful information.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The sysv_signal
implements the behavior of the standard
signal
function as found on SVID systems. The difference to BSD
systems is that the handler is deinstalled after a delivery of a signal.
Compatibility Note: As said above for signal
, this
function should be avoided when possible. sigaction
is the
preferred method.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe sigintr | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The ssignal
function does the same thing as signal
; it is
provided only for compatibility with SVID.
The value of this macro is used as the return value from signal
to indicate an error.
Next: Interaction of signal
and sigaction
, Previous: Basic Signal Handling, Up: Specifying Signal Actions [Contents][Index]
The sigaction
function has the same basic effect as
signal
: to specify how a signal should be handled by the process.
However, sigaction
offers more control, at the expense of more
complexity. In particular, sigaction
allows you to specify
additional flags to control when the signal is generated and how the
handler is invoked.
The sigaction
function is declared in signal.h.
Structures of type struct sigaction
are used in the
sigaction
function to specify all the information about how to
handle a particular signal. This structure contains at least the
following members:
sighandler_t sa_handler
This is used in the same way as the action argument to the
signal
function. The value can be SIG_DFL
,
SIG_IGN
, or a function pointer. See Basic Signal Handling.
sigset_t sa_mask
This specifies a set of signals to be blocked while the handler runs.
Blocking is explained in Blocking Signals for a Handler. Note that the
signal that was delivered is automatically blocked by default before its
handler is started; this is true regardless of the value in
sa_mask
. If you want that signal not to be blocked within its
handler, you must write code in the handler to unblock it.
int sa_flags
This specifies various flags which can affect the behavior of
the signal. These are described in more detail in Flags for sigaction
.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The action argument is used to set up a new action for the signal
signum, while the old-action argument is used to return
information about the action previously associated with this signal.
(In other words, old-action has the same purpose as the
signal
function’s return value—you can check to see what the
old action in effect for the signal was, and restore it later if you
want.)
Either action or old-action can be a null pointer. If old-action is a null pointer, this simply suppresses the return of information about the old action. If action is a null pointer, the action associated with the signal signum is unchanged; this allows you to inquire about how a signal is being handled without changing that handling.
The return value from sigaction
is zero if it succeeds, and
-1
on failure. The following errno
error conditions are
defined for this function:
EINVAL
The signum argument is not valid, or you are trying to
trap or ignore SIGKILL
or SIGSTOP
.
Next: sigaction
Function Example, Previous: Advanced Signal Handling, Up: Specifying Signal Actions [Contents][Index]
signal
and sigaction
It’s possible to use both the signal
and sigaction
functions within a single program, but you have to be careful because
they can interact in slightly strange ways.
The sigaction
function specifies more information than the
signal
function, so the return value from signal
cannot
express the full range of sigaction
possibilities. Therefore, if
you use signal
to save and later reestablish an action, it may
not be able to reestablish properly a handler that was established with
sigaction
.
To avoid having problems as a result, always use sigaction
to
save and restore a handler if your program uses sigaction
at all.
Since sigaction
is more general, it can properly save and
reestablish any action, regardless of whether it was established
originally with signal
or sigaction
.
On some systems if you establish an action with signal
and then
examine it with sigaction
, the handler address that you get may
not be the same as what you specified with signal
. It may not
even be suitable for use as an action argument with signal
. But
you can rely on using it as an argument to sigaction
. This
problem never happens on GNU systems.
So, you’re better off using one or the other of the mechanisms consistently within a single program.
Portability Note: The basic signal
function is a feature
of ISO C, while sigaction
is part of the POSIX.1 standard. If
you are concerned about portability to non-POSIX systems, then you
should use the signal
function instead.
Next: Flags for sigaction
, Previous: Interaction of signal
and sigaction
, Up: Specifying Signal Actions [Contents][Index]
sigaction
Function ExampleIn Basic Signal Handling, we gave an example of establishing a
simple handler for termination signals using signal
. Here is an
equivalent example using sigaction
:
#include <signal.h>
void
termination_handler (int signum)
{
struct temp_file *p;
for (p = temp_file_list; p; p = p->next)
unlink (p->name);
}
int
main (void)
{
…
struct sigaction new_action, old_action;
/* Set up the structure to specify the new action. */
new_action.sa_handler = termination_handler;
sigemptyset (&new_action.sa_mask);
new_action.sa_flags = 0;
sigaction (SIGINT, NULL, &old_action);
if (old_action.sa_handler != SIG_IGN)
sigaction (SIGINT, &new_action, NULL);
sigaction (SIGHUP, NULL, &old_action);
if (old_action.sa_handler != SIG_IGN)
sigaction (SIGHUP, &new_action, NULL);
sigaction (SIGTERM, NULL, &old_action);
if (old_action.sa_handler != SIG_IGN)
sigaction (SIGTERM, &new_action, NULL);
…
}
The program just loads the new_action
structure with the desired
parameters and passes it in the sigaction
call. The usage of
sigemptyset
is described later; see Blocking Signals.
As in the example using signal
, we avoid handling signals
previously set to be ignored. Here we can avoid altering the signal
handler even momentarily, by using the feature of sigaction
that
lets us examine the current action without specifying a new one.
Here is another example. It retrieves information about the current
action for SIGINT
without changing that action.
struct sigaction query_action; if (sigaction (SIGINT, NULL, &query_action) < 0) /*sigaction
returns -1 in case of error. */ else if (query_action.sa_handler == SIG_DFL) /*SIGINT
is handled in the default, fatal manner. */ else if (query_action.sa_handler == SIG_IGN) /*SIGINT
is ignored. */ else /* A programmer-defined signal handler is in effect. */
Next: Initial Signal Actions, Previous: sigaction
Function Example, Up: Specifying Signal Actions [Contents][Index]
sigaction
The sa_flags
member of the sigaction
structure is a
catch-all for special features. Most of the time, SA_RESTART
is
a good value to use for this field.
The value of sa_flags
is interpreted as a bit mask. Thus, you
should choose the flags you want to set, OR those flags together,
and store the result in the sa_flags
member of your
sigaction
structure.
Each signal number has its own set of flags. Each call to
sigaction
affects one particular signal number, and the flags
that you specify apply only to that particular signal.
In the GNU C Library, establishing a handler with signal
sets all
the flags to zero except for SA_RESTART
, whose value depends on
the settings you have made with siginterrupt
. See Primitives Interrupted by Signals, to see what this is about.
These macros are defined in the header file signal.h.
This flag is meaningful only for the SIGCHLD
signal. When the
flag is set, the system delivers the signal for a terminated child
process but not for one that is stopped. By default, SIGCHLD
is
delivered for both terminated children and stopped children.
Setting this flag for a signal other than SIGCHLD
has no effect.
If this flag is set for a particular signal number, the system uses the signal stack when delivering that kind of signal. See Using a Separate Signal Stack. If a signal with this flag arrives and you have not set a signal stack, the normal user stack is used instead, as if the flag had not been set.
This flag controls what happens when a signal is delivered during
certain primitives (such as open
, read
or write
),
and the signal handler returns normally. There are two alternatives:
the library function can resume, or it can return failure with error
code EINTR
.
The choice is controlled by the SA_RESTART
flag for the
particular kind of signal that was delivered. If the flag is set,
returning from a handler resumes the library function. If the flag is
clear, returning from a handler makes the function fail.
See Primitives Interrupted by Signals.
Previous: Flags for sigaction
, Up: Specifying Signal Actions [Contents][Index]
When a new process is created (see Creating a Process), it inherits
handling of signals from its parent process. However, when you load a
new process image using the exec
function (see Executing a File), any signals that you’ve defined your own handlers for revert to
their SIG_DFL
handling. (If you think about it a little, this
makes sense; the handler functions from the old program are specific to
that program, and aren’t even present in the address space of the new
program image.) Of course, the new program can establish its own
handlers.
When a program is run by a shell, the shell normally sets the initial
actions for the child process to SIG_DFL
or SIG_IGN
, as
appropriate. It’s a good idea to check to make sure that the shell has
not set up an initial action of SIG_IGN
before you establish your
own signal handlers.
Here is an example of how to establish a handler for SIGHUP
, but
not if SIGHUP
is currently ignored:
… struct sigaction temp; sigaction (SIGHUP, NULL, &temp); if (temp.sa_handler != SIG_IGN) { temp.sa_handler = handle_sighup; sigemptyset (&temp.sa_mask); sigaction (SIGHUP, &temp, NULL); }
Next: Primitives Interrupted by Signals, Previous: Specifying Signal Actions, Up: Signal Handling [Contents][Index]
This section describes how to write a signal handler function that can
be established with the signal
or sigaction
functions.
A signal handler is just a function that you compile together with the
rest of the program. Instead of directly invoking the function, you use
signal
or sigaction
to tell the operating system to call
it when a signal arrives. This is known as establishing the
handler. See Specifying Signal Actions.
There are two basic strategies you can use in signal handler functions:
You need to take special care in writing handler functions because they can be called asynchronously. That is, a handler might be called at any point in the program, unpredictably. If two signals arrive during a very short interval, one handler can run within another. This section describes what your handler should do, and what you should avoid.
Handlers which return normally are usually used for signals such as
SIGALRM
and the I/O and interprocess communication signals. But
a handler for SIGINT
might also return normally after setting a
flag that tells the program to exit at a convenient time.
It is not safe to return normally from the handler for a program error signal, because the behavior of the program when the handler function returns is not defined after a program error. See Program Error Signals.
Handlers that return normally must modify some global variable in order
to have any effect. Typically, the variable is one that is examined
periodically by the program during normal operation. Its data type
should be sig_atomic_t
for reasons described in Atomic Data Access and Signal Handling.
Here is a simple example of such a program. It executes the body of
the loop until it has noticed that a SIGALRM
signal has arrived.
This technique is useful because it allows the iteration in progress
when the signal arrives to complete before the loop exits.
#include <signal.h> #include <stdio.h> #include <stdlib.h> /* This flag controls termination of the main loop. */ volatile sig_atomic_t keep_going = 1; /* The signal handler just clears the flag and re-enables itself. */ void catch_alarm (int sig) { keep_going = 0; signal (sig, catch_alarm); } void do_stuff (void) { puts ("Doing stuff while waiting for alarm...."); } int main (void) { /* Establish a handler for SIGALRM signals. */ signal (SIGALRM, catch_alarm); /* Set an alarm to go off in a little while. */ alarm (2); /* Check the flag once in a while to see when to quit. */ while (keep_going) do_stuff (); return EXIT_SUCCESS; }
Next: Nonlocal Control Transfer in Handlers, Previous: Signal Handlers that Return, Up: Defining Signal Handlers [Contents][Index]
Handler functions that terminate the program are typically used to cause orderly cleanup or recovery from program error signals and interactive interrupts.
The cleanest way for a handler to terminate the process is to raise the same signal that ran the handler in the first place. Here is how to do this:
volatile sig_atomic_t fatal_error_in_progress = 0; void fatal_error_signal (int sig) {
/* Since this handler is established for more than one kind of signal, it might still get invoked recursively by delivery of some other kind of signal. Use a static variable to keep track of that. */ if (fatal_error_in_progress) raise (sig); fatal_error_in_progress = 1;
/* Now do the clean up actions: - reset terminal modes - kill child processes - remove lock files */ …
/* Now reraise the signal. We reactivate the signal’s default handling, which is to terminate the process. We could just callexit
orabort
, but reraising the signal sets the return status from the process correctly. */ signal (sig, SIG_DFL); raise (sig); }
Next: Signals Arriving While a Handler Runs, Previous: Handlers That Terminate the Process, Up: Defining Signal Handlers [Contents][Index]
You can do a nonlocal transfer of control out of a signal handler using
the setjmp
and longjmp
facilities (see Non-Local Exits).
When the handler does a nonlocal control transfer, the part of the program that was running will not continue. If this part of the program was in the middle of updating an important data structure, the data structure will remain inconsistent. Since the program does not terminate, the inconsistency is likely to be noticed later on.
There are two ways to avoid this problem. One is to block the signal for the parts of the program that update important data structures. Blocking the signal delays its delivery until it is unblocked, once the critical updating is finished. See Blocking Signals.
The other way is to re-initialize the crucial data structures in the signal handler, or to make their values consistent.
Here is a rather schematic example showing the reinitialization of one global variable.
#include <signal.h> #include <setjmp.h> jmp_buf return_to_top_level; volatile sig_atomic_t waiting_for_input; void handle_sigint (int signum) { /* We may have been waiting for input when the signal arrived, but we are no longer waiting once we transfer control. */ waiting_for_input = 0; longjmp (return_to_top_level, 1); }
int main (void) { … signal (SIGINT, sigint_handler); … while (1) { prepare_for_command (); if (setjmp (return_to_top_level) == 0) read_and_execute_command (); } }
/* Imagine this is a subroutine used by various commands. */
char *
read_data ()
{
if (input_from_terminal) {
waiting_for_input = 1;
…
waiting_for_input = 0;
} else {
…
}
}
Next: Signals Close Together Merge into One, Previous: Nonlocal Control Transfer in Handlers, Up: Defining Signal Handlers [Contents][Index]
What happens if another signal arrives while your signal handler function is running?
When the handler for a particular signal is invoked, that signal is
automatically blocked until the handler returns. That means that if two
signals of the same kind arrive close together, the second one will be
held until the first has been handled. (The handler can explicitly
unblock the signal using sigprocmask
, if you want to allow more
signals of this type to arrive; see Process Signal Mask.)
However, your handler can still be interrupted by delivery of another
kind of signal. To avoid this, you can use the sa_mask
member of
the action structure passed to sigaction
to explicitly specify
which signals should be blocked while the signal handler runs. These
signals are in addition to the signal for which the handler was invoked,
and any other signals that are normally blocked by the process.
See Blocking Signals for a Handler.
When the handler returns, the set of blocked signals is restored to the
value it had before the handler ran. So using sigprocmask
inside
the handler only affects what signals can arrive during the execution of
the handler itself, not what signals can arrive once the handler returns.
Portability Note: Always use sigaction
to establish a
handler for a signal that you expect to receive asynchronously, if you
want your program to work properly on System V Unix. On this system,
the handling of a signal whose handler was established with
signal
automatically sets the signal’s action back to
SIG_DFL
, and the handler must re-establish itself each time it
runs. This practice, while inconvenient, does work when signals cannot
arrive in succession. However, if another signal can arrive right away,
it may arrive before the handler can re-establish itself. Then the
second signal would receive the default handling, which could terminate
the process.
Next: Signal Handling and Nonreentrant Functions, Previous: Signals Arriving While a Handler Runs, Up: Defining Signal Handlers [Contents][Index]
If multiple signals of the same type are delivered to your process before your signal handler has a chance to be invoked at all, the handler may only be invoked once, as if only a single signal had arrived. In effect, the signals merge into one. This situation can arise when the signal is blocked, or in a multiprocessing environment where the system is busy running some other processes while the signals are delivered. This means, for example, that you cannot reliably use a signal handler to count signals. The only distinction you can reliably make is whether at least one signal has arrived since a given time in the past.
Here is an example of a handler for SIGCHLD
that compensates for
the fact that the number of signals received may not equal the number of
child processes that generate them. It assumes that the program keeps track
of all the child processes with a chain of structures as follows:
struct process
{
struct process *next;
/* The process ID of this child. */
int pid;
/* The descriptor of the pipe or pseudo terminal
on which output comes from this child. */
int input_descriptor;
/* Nonzero if this process has stopped or terminated. */
sig_atomic_t have_status;
/* The status of this child; 0 if running,
otherwise a status value from waitpid
. */
int status;
};
struct process *process_list;
This example also uses a flag to indicate whether signals have arrived since some time in the past—whenever the program last cleared it to zero.
/* Nonzero means some child’s status has changed
so look at process_list
for the details. */
int process_status_change;
Here is the handler itself:
void sigchld_handler (int signo) { int old_errno = errno; while (1) { register int pid; int w; struct process *p; /* Keep asking for a status until we get a definitive result. */ do { errno = 0; pid = waitpid (WAIT_ANY, &w, WNOHANG | WUNTRACED); } while (pid <= 0 && errno == EINTR); if (pid <= 0) { /* A real failure means there are no more stopped or terminated child processes, so return. */ errno = old_errno; return; } /* Find the process that signaled us, and record its status. */ for (p = process_list; p; p = p->next) if (p->pid == pid) { p->status = w; /* Indicate that thestatus
field has data to look at. We do this only after storing it. */ p->have_status = 1; /* If process has terminated, stop waiting for its output. */ if (WIFSIGNALED (w) || WIFEXITED (w)) if (p->input_descriptor) FD_CLR (p->input_descriptor, &input_wait_mask); /* The program should check this flag from time to time to see if there is any news inprocess_list
. */ ++process_status_change; } /* Loop around to handle all the processes that have something to tell us. */ } }
Here is the proper way to check the flag process_status_change
:
if (process_status_change) {
struct process *p;
process_status_change = 0;
for (p = process_list; p; p = p->next)
if (p->have_status) {
… Examine p->status
…
}
}
It is vital to clear the flag before examining the list; otherwise, if a signal were delivered just before the clearing of the flag, and after the appropriate element of the process list had been checked, the status change would go unnoticed until the next signal arrived to set the flag again. You could, of course, avoid this problem by blocking the signal while scanning the list, but it is much more elegant to guarantee correctness by doing things in the right order.
The loop which checks process status avoids examining p->status
until it sees that status has been validly stored. This is to make sure
that the status cannot change in the middle of accessing it. Once
p->have_status
is set, it means that the child process is stopped
or terminated, and in either case, it cannot stop or terminate again
until the program has taken notice. See Atomic Usage Patterns, for more
information about coping with interruptions during accesses of a
variable.
Here is another way you can test whether the handler has run since the last time you checked. This technique uses a counter which is never changed outside the handler. Instead of clearing the count, the program remembers the previous value and sees whether it has changed since the previous check. The advantage of this method is that different parts of the program can check independently, each part checking whether there has been a signal since that part last checked.
sig_atomic_t process_status_change;
sig_atomic_t last_process_status_change;
…
{
sig_atomic_t prev = last_process_status_change;
last_process_status_change = process_status_change;
if (last_process_status_change != prev) {
struct process *p;
for (p = process_list; p; p = p->next)
if (p->have_status) {
… Examine p->status
…
}
}
}
Next: Atomic Data Access and Signal Handling, Previous: Signals Close Together Merge into One, Up: Defining Signal Handlers [Contents][Index]
Handler functions usually don’t do very much. The best practice is to
write a handler that does nothing but set an external variable that the
program checks regularly, and leave all serious work to the program.
This is best because the handler can be called asynchronously, at
unpredictable times—perhaps in the middle of a primitive function, or
even between the beginning and the end of a C operator that requires
multiple instructions. The data structures being manipulated might
therefore be in an inconsistent state when the handler function is
invoked. Even copying one int
variable into another can take two
instructions on most machines.
This means you have to be very careful about what you do in a signal handler.
volatile
. This tells the compiler that
the value of the variable might change asynchronously, and inhibits
certain optimizations that would be invalidated by such modifications.
A function can be non-reentrant if it uses memory that is not on the stack.
For example, suppose that the signal handler uses gethostbyname
.
This function returns its value in a static object, reusing the same
object each time. If the signal happens to arrive during a call to
gethostbyname
, or even after one (while the program is still
using the value), it will clobber the value that the program asked for.
However, if the program does not use gethostbyname
or any other
function that returns information in the same object, or if it always
blocks signals around each use, then you are safe.
There are a large number of library functions that return values in a fixed object, always reusing the same object in this fashion, and all of them cause the same problem. Function descriptions in this manual always mention this behavior.
This case arises when you do I/O using streams. Suppose that the
signal handler prints a message with fprintf
. Suppose that the
program was in the middle of an fprintf
call using the same
stream when the signal was delivered. Both the signal handler’s message
and the program’s data could be corrupted, because both calls operate on
the same data structure—the stream itself.
However, if you know that the stream that the handler uses cannot possibly be used by the program at a time when signals can arrive, then you are safe. It is no problem if the program uses some other stream.
malloc
and free
are not reentrant,
because they use a static data structure which records what memory
blocks are free. As a result, no library functions that allocate or
free memory are reentrant. This includes functions that allocate space
to store a result.
The best way to avoid the need to allocate memory in a handler is to allocate in advance space for signal handlers to use.
The best way to avoid freeing memory in a handler is to flag or record the objects to be freed, and have the program check from time to time whether anything is waiting to be freed. But this must be done with care, because placing an object on a chain is not atomic, and if it is interrupted by another signal handler that does the same thing, you could “lose” one of the objects.
errno
is non-reentrant, but you can
correct for this: in the handler, save the original value of
errno
and restore it before returning normally. This prevents
errors that occur within the signal handler from being confused with
errors from system calls at the point the program is interrupted to run
the handler.
This technique is generally applicable; if you want to call in a handler a function that modifies a particular object in memory, you can make this safe by saving and restoring that object.
Previous: Signal Handling and Nonreentrant Functions, Up: Defining Signal Handlers [Contents][Index]
Whether the data in your application concerns atoms, or mere text, you have to be careful about the fact that access to a single datum is not necessarily atomic. This means that it can take more than one instruction to read or write a single object. In such cases, a signal handler might be invoked in the middle of reading or writing the object.
There are three ways you can cope with this problem. You can use data types that are always accessed atomically; you can carefully arrange that nothing untoward happens if an access is interrupted, or you can block all signals around any access that had better not be interrupted (see Blocking Signals).
Next: Atomic Types, Up: Atomic Data Access and Signal Handling [Contents][Index]
Here is an example which shows what can happen if a signal handler runs in the middle of modifying a variable. (Interrupting the reading of a variable can also lead to paradoxical results, but here we only show writing.)
#include <signal.h> #include <stdio.h> volatile struct two_words { int a, b; } memory; void handler(int signum) { printf ("%d,%d\n", memory.a, memory.b); alarm (1); }
int main (void) { static struct two_words zeros = { 0, 0 }, ones = { 1, 1 }; signal (SIGALRM, handler); memory = zeros; alarm (1); while (1) { memory = zeros; memory = ones; } }
This program fills memory
with zeros, ones, zeros, ones,
alternating forever; meanwhile, once per second, the alarm signal handler
prints the current contents. (Calling printf
in the handler is
safe in this program because it is certainly not being called outside
the handler when the signal happens.)
Clearly, this program can print a pair of zeros or a pair of ones. But
that’s not all it can do! On most machines, it takes several
instructions to store a new value in memory
, and the value is
stored one word at a time. If the signal is delivered in between these
instructions, the handler might find that memory.a
is zero and
memory.b
is one (or vice versa).
On some machines it may be possible to store a new value in
memory
with just one instruction that cannot be interrupted. On
these machines, the handler will always print two zeros or two ones.
Next: Atomic Usage Patterns, Previous: Problems with Non-Atomic Access, Up: Atomic Data Access and Signal Handling [Contents][Index]
To avoid uncertainty about interrupting access to a variable, you can
use a particular data type for which access is always atomic:
sig_atomic_t
. Reading and writing this data type is guaranteed
to happen in a single instruction, so there’s no way for a handler to
run “in the middle” of an access.
The type sig_atomic_t
is always an integer data type, but which
one it is, and how many bits it contains, may vary from machine to
machine.
This is an integer data type. Objects of this type are always accessed atomically.
In practice, you can assume that int
is atomic.
You can also assume that pointer
types are atomic; that is very convenient. Both of these assumptions
are true on all of the machines that the GNU C Library supports and on
all POSIX systems we know of.
Previous: Atomic Types, Up: Atomic Data Access and Signal Handling [Contents][Index]
Certain patterns of access avoid any problem even if an access is interrupted. For example, a flag which is set by the handler, and tested and cleared by the main program from time to time, is always safe even if access actually requires two instructions. To show that this is so, we must consider each access that could be interrupted, and show that there is no problem if it is interrupted.
An interrupt in the middle of testing the flag is safe because either it’s recognized to be nonzero, in which case the precise value doesn’t matter, or it will be seen to be nonzero the next time it’s tested.
An interrupt in the middle of clearing the flag is no problem because either the value ends up zero, which is what happens if a signal comes in just before the flag is cleared, or the value ends up nonzero, and subsequent events occur as if the signal had come in just after the flag was cleared. As long as the code handles both of these cases properly, it can also handle a signal in the middle of clearing the flag. (This is an example of the sort of reasoning you need to do to figure out whether non-atomic usage is safe.)
Sometimes you can ensure uninterrupted access to one object by protecting its use with another object, perhaps one whose type guarantees atomicity. See Signals Close Together Merge into One, for an example.
Next: Generating Signals, Previous: Defining Signal Handlers, Up: Signal Handling [Contents][Index]
A signal can arrive and be handled while an I/O primitive such as
open
or read
is waiting for an I/O device. If the signal
handler returns, the system faces the question: what should happen next?
POSIX specifies one approach: make the primitive fail right away. The
error code for this kind of failure is EINTR
. This is flexible,
but usually inconvenient. Typically, POSIX applications that use signal
handlers must check for EINTR
after each library function that
can return it, in order to try the call again. Often programmers forget
to check, which is a common source of error.
The GNU C Library provides a convenient way to retry a call after a
temporary failure, with the macro TEMP_FAILURE_RETRY
:
This macro evaluates expression once, and examines its value as
type long int
. If the value equals -1
, that indicates a
failure and errno
should be set to show what kind of failure.
If it fails and reports error code EINTR
,
TEMP_FAILURE_RETRY
evaluates it again, and over and over until
the result is not a temporary failure.
The value returned by TEMP_FAILURE_RETRY
is whatever value
expression produced.
BSD avoids EINTR
entirely and provides a more convenient
approach: to restart the interrupted primitive, instead of making it
fail. If you choose this approach, you need not be concerned with
EINTR
.
You can choose either approach with the GNU C Library. If you use
sigaction
to establish a signal handler, you can specify how that
handler should behave. If you specify the SA_RESTART
flag,
return from that handler will resume a primitive; otherwise, return from
that handler will cause EINTR
. See Flags for sigaction
.
Another way to specify the choice is with the siginterrupt
function. See BSD Signal Handling.
When you don’t specify with sigaction
or siginterrupt
what
a particular handler should do, it uses a default choice. The default
choice in the GNU C Library is to make primitives fail with EINTR
.
The description of each primitive affected by this issue
lists EINTR
among the error codes it can return.
There is one situation where resumption never happens no matter which
choice you make: when a data-transfer function such as read
or
write
is interrupted by a signal after transferring part of the
data. In this case, the function returns the number of bytes already
transferred, indicating partial success.
This might at first appear to cause unreliable behavior on
record-oriented devices (including datagram sockets; see Datagram Socket Operations),
where splitting one read
or write
into two would read or
write two records. Actually, there is no problem, because interruption
after a partial transfer cannot happen on such devices; they always
transfer an entire record in one burst, with no waiting once data
transfer has started.
Next: Blocking Signals, Previous: Primitives Interrupted by Signals, Up: Signal Handling [Contents][Index]
Besides signals that are generated as a result of a hardware trap or interrupt, your program can explicitly send signals to itself or to another process.
Next: Signaling Another Process, Up: Generating Signals [Contents][Index]
A process can send itself a signal with the raise
function. This
function is declared in signal.h.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The raise
function sends the signal signum to the calling
process. It returns zero if successful and a nonzero value if it fails.
About the only reason for failure would be if the value of signum
is invalid.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The gsignal
function does the same thing as raise
; it is
provided only for compatibility with SVID.
One convenient use for raise
is to reproduce the default behavior
of a signal that you have trapped. For instance, suppose a user of your
program types the SUSP character (usually C-z; see Special Characters) to send it an interactive stop signal
(SIGTSTP
), and you want to clean up some internal data buffers
before stopping. You might set this up like this:
#include <signal.h> /* When a stop signal arrives, set the action back to the default and then resend the signal after doing cleanup actions. */ void tstp_handler (int sig) { signal (SIGTSTP, SIG_DFL); /* Do cleanup actions here. */ … raise (SIGTSTP); } /* When the process is continued again, restore the signal handler. */ void cont_handler (int sig) { signal (SIGCONT, cont_handler); signal (SIGTSTP, tstp_handler); }
/* Enable both handlers during program initialization. */
int
main (void)
{
signal (SIGCONT, cont_handler);
signal (SIGTSTP, tstp_handler);
…
}
Portability note: raise
was invented by the ISO C
committee. Older systems may not support it, so using kill
may
be more portable. See Signaling Another Process.
Next: Permission for using kill
, Previous: Signaling Yourself, Up: Generating Signals [Contents][Index]
The kill
function can be used to send a signal to another process.
In spite of its name, it can be used for a lot of things other than
causing a process to terminate. Some examples of situations where you
might want to send signals between processes are:
This section assumes that you know a little bit about how processes work. For more information on this subject, see Processes.
The kill
function is declared in signal.h.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The kill
function sends the signal signum to the process
or process group specified by pid. Besides the signals listed in
Standard Signals, signum can also have a value of zero to
check the validity of the pid.
The pid specifies the process or process group to receive the signal:
pid > 0
The process whose identifier is pid. (On Linux, the signal is sent to the entire process even if pid is a thread ID distinct from the process ID.)
pid == 0
All processes in the same process group as the sender.
pid < -1
The process group whose identifier is -pid.
pid == -1
If the process is privileged, send the signal to all processes except for some special system processes. Otherwise, send the signal to all processes with the same effective user ID.
A process can send a signal to itself with a call like kill (getpid(), signum)
. If kill
is used by a process to send
a signal to itself, and the signal is not blocked, then kill
delivers at least one signal (which might be some other pending
unblocked signal instead of the signal signum) to that process
before it returns.
The return value from kill
is zero if the signal can be sent
successfully. Otherwise, no signal is sent, and a value of -1
is
returned. If pid specifies sending a signal to several processes,
kill
succeeds if it can send the signal to at least one of them.
There’s no way you can tell which of the processes got the signal
or whether all of them did.
The following errno
error conditions are defined for this function:
EINVAL
The signum argument is an invalid or unsupported number.
EPERM
You do not have the privilege to send a signal to the process or any of the processes in the process group named by pid.
ESRCH
The pid argument does not refer to an existing process or group.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The tgkill
function sends the signal signum to the thread
or process with ID tid, like the kill
function, but only
if the process ID of the thread tid is equal to pid. If
the target thread belongs to another process, the function fails with
ESRCH
.
The tgkill
function can be used to avoid sending a signal to a
thread in the wrong process if the caller ensures that the passed
pid value is not reused by the kernel (for example, if it is the
process ID of the current process, as returned by getpid
).
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This is similar to kill
, but sends signal signum to the
process group pgid. This function is provided for compatibility
with BSD; using kill
to do this is more portable.
As a simple example of kill
, the call kill (getpid (), sig)
has the same effect as raise (sig)
.
Next: Using kill
for Communication, Previous: Signaling Another Process, Up: Generating Signals [Contents][Index]
kill
There are restrictions that prevent you from using kill
to send
signals to any random process. These are intended to prevent antisocial
behavior such as arbitrarily killing off processes belonging to another
user. In typical use, kill
is used to pass signals between
parent, child, and sibling processes, and in these situations you
normally do have permission to send signals. The only common exception
is when you run a setuid program in a child process; if the program
changes its real UID as well as its effective UID, you may not have
permission to send a signal. The su
program does this.
Whether a process has permission to send a signal to another process is determined by the user IDs of the two processes. This concept is discussed in detail in The Persona of a Process.
Generally, for a process to be able to send a signal to another process, either the sending process must belong to a privileged user (like ‘root’), or the real or effective user ID of the sending process must match the real or effective user ID of the receiving process. If the receiving process has changed its effective user ID from the set-user-ID mode bit on its process image file, then the owner of the process image file is used in place of its current effective user ID. In some implementations, a parent process might be able to send signals to a child process even if the user ID’s don’t match, and other implementations might enforce other restrictions.
The SIGCONT
signal is a special case. It can be sent if the
sender is part of the same session as the receiver, regardless of
user IDs.
Previous: Permission for using kill
, Up: Generating Signals [Contents][Index]
kill
for CommunicationHere is a longer example showing how signals can be used for
interprocess communication. This is what the SIGUSR1
and
SIGUSR2
signals are provided for. Since these signals are fatal
by default, the process that is supposed to receive them must trap them
through signal
or sigaction
.
In this example, a parent process forks a child process and then waits
for the child to complete its initialization. The child process tells
the parent when it is ready by sending it a SIGUSR1
signal, using
the kill
function.
#include <signal.h> #include <stdio.h> #include <sys/types.h> #include <unistd.h>
/* When a SIGUSR1
signal arrives, set this variable. */
volatile sig_atomic_t usr_interrupt = 0;
void
synch_signal (int sig)
{
usr_interrupt = 1;
}
/* The child process executes this function. */
void
child_function (void)
{
/* Perform initialization. */
printf ("I'm here!!! My pid is %d.\n", (int) getpid ());
/* Let parent know you’re done. */
kill (getppid (), SIGUSR1);
/* Continue with execution. */
puts ("Bye, now....");
exit (0);
}
int
main (void)
{
struct sigaction usr_action;
sigset_t block_mask;
pid_t child_id;
/* Establish the signal handler. */
sigfillset (&block_mask);
usr_action.sa_handler = synch_signal;
usr_action.sa_mask = block_mask;
usr_action.sa_flags = 0;
sigaction (SIGUSR1, &usr_action, NULL);
/* Create the child process. */
child_id = fork ();
if (child_id == 0)
child_function (); /* Does not return. */
/* Busy wait for the child to send a signal. */
while (!usr_interrupt)
;
/* Now continue execution. */
puts ("That's all, folks!");
return 0;
}
This example uses a busy wait, which is bad, because it wastes CPU cycles that other programs could otherwise use. It is better to ask the system to wait until the signal arrives. See the example in Waiting for a Signal.
Next: Waiting for a Signal, Previous: Generating Signals, Up: Signal Handling [Contents][Index]
Blocking a signal means telling the operating system to hold it and
deliver it later. Generally, a program does not block signals
indefinitely—it might as well ignore them by setting their actions to
SIG_IGN
. But it is useful to block signals briefly, to prevent
them from interrupting sensitive operations. For instance:
sigprocmask
function to block signals while you
modify global variables that are also modified by the handlers for these
signals.
sa_mask
in your sigaction
call to block
certain signals while a particular signal handler runs. This way, the
signal handler can run without being interrupted itself by signals.
Next: Signal Sets, Up: Blocking Signals [Contents][Index]
Temporary blocking of signals with sigprocmask
gives you a way to
prevent interrupts during critical parts of your code. If signals
arrive in that part of the program, they are delivered later, after you
unblock them.
One example where this is useful is for sharing data between a signal
handler and the rest of the program. If the type of the data is not
sig_atomic_t
(see Atomic Data Access and Signal Handling), then the signal
handler could run when the rest of the program has only half finished
reading or writing the data. This would lead to confusing consequences.
To make the program reliable, you can prevent the signal handler from running while the rest of the program is examining or modifying that data—by blocking the appropriate signal around the parts of the program that touch the data.
Blocking signals is also necessary when you want to perform a certain
action only if a signal has not arrived. Suppose that the handler for
the signal sets a flag of type sig_atomic_t
; you would like to
test the flag and perform the action if the flag is not set. This is
unreliable. Suppose the signal is delivered immediately after you test
the flag, but before the consequent action: then the program will
perform the action even though the signal has arrived.
The only way to test reliably for whether a signal has yet arrived is to test while the signal is blocked.
Next: Process Signal Mask, Previous: Why Blocking Signals is Useful, Up: Blocking Signals [Contents][Index]
All of the signal blocking functions use a data structure called a signal set to specify what signals are affected. Thus, every activity involves two stages: creating the signal set, and then passing it as an argument to a library function.
These facilities are declared in the header file signal.h.
The sigset_t
data type is used to represent a signal set.
Internally, it may be implemented as either an integer or structure
type.
For portability, use only the functions described in this section to
initialize, change, and retrieve information from sigset_t
objects—don’t try to manipulate them directly.
There are two ways to initialize a signal set. You can initially
specify it to be empty with sigemptyset
and then add specified
signals individually. Or you can specify it to be full with
sigfillset
and then delete specified signals individually.
You must always initialize the signal set with one of these two
functions before using it in any other way. Don’t try to set all the
signals explicitly because the sigset_t
object might include some
other information (like a version field) that needs to be initialized as
well. (In addition, it’s not wise to put into your program an
assumption that the system has no signals aside from the ones you know
about.)
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This function initializes the signal set set to exclude all of the
defined signals. It always returns 0
.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This function initializes the signal set set to include
all of the defined signals. Again, the return value is 0
.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This function adds the signal signum to the signal set set.
All sigaddset
does is modify set; it does not block or
unblock any signals.
The return value is 0
on success and -1
on failure.
The following errno
error condition is defined for this function:
EINVAL
The signum argument doesn’t specify a valid signal.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This function removes the signal signum from the signal set
set. All sigdelset
does is modify set; it does not
block or unblock any signals. The return value and error conditions are
the same as for sigaddset
.
Finally, there is a function to test what signals are in a signal set:
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The sigismember
function tests whether the signal signum is
a member of the signal set set. It returns 1
if the signal
is in the set, 0
if not, and -1
if there is an error.
The following errno
error condition is defined for this function:
EINVAL
The signum argument doesn’t specify a valid signal.
Next: Blocking to Test for Delivery of a Signal, Previous: Signal Sets, Up: Blocking Signals [Contents][Index]
The collection of signals that are currently blocked is called the signal mask. Each process has its own signal mask. When you create a new process (see Creating a Process), it inherits its parent’s mask. You can block or unblock signals with total flexibility by modifying the signal mask.
The prototype for the sigprocmask
function is in signal.h.
Note that you must not use sigprocmask
in multi-threaded processes,
because each thread has its own signal mask and there is no single process
signal mask. According to POSIX, the behavior of sigprocmask
in a
multi-threaded process is “unspecified”.
Instead, use pthread_sigmask
.
Preliminary: | MT-Unsafe race:sigprocmask/bsd(SIG_UNBLOCK) | AS-Unsafe lock/hurd | AC-Unsafe lock/hurd | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The sigprocmask
function is used to examine or change the calling
process’s signal mask. The how argument determines how the signal
mask is changed, and must be one of the following values:
SIG_BLOCK
¶Block the signals in set
—add them to the existing mask. In
other words, the new mask is the union of the existing mask and
set.
SIG_UNBLOCK
¶Unblock the signals in set—remove them from the existing mask.
SIG_SETMASK
¶Use set for the mask; ignore the previous value of the mask.
The last argument, oldset, is used to return information about the
old process signal mask. If you just want to change the mask without
looking at it, pass a null pointer as the oldset argument.
Similarly, if you want to know what’s in the mask without changing it,
pass a null pointer for set (in this case the how argument
is not significant). The oldset argument is often used to
remember the previous signal mask in order to restore it later. (Since
the signal mask is inherited over fork
and exec
calls, you
can’t predict what its contents are when your program starts running.)
If invoking sigprocmask
causes any pending signals to be
unblocked, at least one of those signals is delivered to the process
before sigprocmask
returns. The order in which pending signals
are delivered is not specified, but you can control the order explicitly
by making multiple sigprocmask
calls to unblock various signals
one at a time.
The sigprocmask
function returns 0
if successful, and -1
to indicate an error. The following errno
error conditions are
defined for this function:
EINVAL
The how argument is invalid.
You can’t block the SIGKILL
and SIGSTOP
signals, but
if the signal set includes these, sigprocmask
just ignores
them instead of returning an error status.
Remember, too, that blocking program error signals such as SIGFPE
leads to undesirable results for signals generated by an actual program
error (as opposed to signals sent with raise
or kill
).
This is because your program may be too broken to be able to continue
executing to a point where the signal is unblocked again.
See Program Error Signals.
Next: Blocking Signals for a Handler, Previous: Process Signal Mask, Up: Blocking Signals [Contents][Index]
Now for a simple example. Suppose you establish a handler for
SIGALRM
signals that sets a flag whenever a signal arrives, and
your main program checks this flag from time to time and then resets it.
You can prevent additional SIGALRM
signals from arriving in the
meantime by wrapping the critical part of the code with calls to
sigprocmask
, like this:
/* This variable is set by the SIGALRM signal handler. */ volatile sig_atomic_t flag = 0; int main (void) { sigset_t block_alarm; … /* Initialize the signal mask. */ sigemptyset (&block_alarm); sigaddset (&block_alarm, SIGALRM);
while (1)
{
/* Check if a signal has arrived; if so, reset the flag. */
sigprocmask (SIG_BLOCK, &block_alarm, NULL);
if (flag)
{
actions-if-not-arrived
flag = 0;
}
sigprocmask (SIG_UNBLOCK, &block_alarm, NULL);
…
}
}
Next: Checking for Pending Signals, Previous: Blocking to Test for Delivery of a Signal, Up: Blocking Signals [Contents][Index]
When a signal handler is invoked, you usually want it to be able to finish without being interrupted by another signal. From the moment the handler starts until the moment it finishes, you must block signals that might confuse it or corrupt its data.
When a handler function is invoked on a signal, that signal is
automatically blocked (in addition to any other signals that are already
in the process’s signal mask) during the time the handler is running.
If you set up a handler for SIGTSTP
, for instance, then the
arrival of that signal forces further SIGTSTP
signals to wait
during the execution of the handler.
However, by default, other kinds of signals are not blocked; they can arrive during handler execution.
The reliable way to block other kinds of signals during the execution of
the handler is to use the sa_mask
member of the sigaction
structure.
Here is an example:
#include <signal.h>
#include <stddef.h>
void catch_stop ();
void
install_handler (void)
{
struct sigaction setup_action;
sigset_t block_mask;
sigemptyset (&block_mask);
/* Block other terminal-generated signals while handler runs. */
sigaddset (&block_mask, SIGINT);
sigaddset (&block_mask, SIGQUIT);
setup_action.sa_handler = catch_stop;
setup_action.sa_mask = block_mask;
setup_action.sa_flags = 0;
sigaction (SIGTSTP, &setup_action, NULL);
}
This is more reliable than blocking the other signals explicitly in the code for the handler. If you block signals explicitly in the handler, you can’t avoid at least a short interval at the beginning of the handler where they are not yet blocked.
You cannot remove signals from the process’s current mask using this
mechanism. However, you can make calls to sigprocmask
within
your handler to block or unblock signals as you wish.
In any case, when the handler returns, the system restores the mask that was in place before the handler was entered. If any signals that become unblocked by this restoration are pending, the process will receive those signals immediately, before returning to the code that was interrupted.
Next: Remembering a Signal to Act On Later, Previous: Blocking Signals for a Handler, Up: Blocking Signals [Contents][Index]
You can find out which signals are pending at any time by calling
sigpending
. This function is declared in signal.h.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Unsafe lock/hurd | AC-Unsafe lock/hurd | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The sigpending
function stores information about pending signals
in set. If there is a pending signal that is blocked from
delivery, then that signal is a member of the returned set. (You can
test whether a particular signal is a member of this set using
sigismember
; see Signal Sets.)
The return value is 0
if successful, and -1
on failure.
Testing whether a signal is pending is not often useful. Testing when that signal is not blocked is almost certainly bad design.
Here is an example.
#include <signal.h> #include <stddef.h> sigset_t base_mask, waiting_mask; sigemptyset (&base_mask); sigaddset (&base_mask, SIGINT); sigaddset (&base_mask, SIGTSTP); /* Block user interrupts while doing other processing. */ sigprocmask (SIG_SETMASK, &base_mask, NULL); … /* After a while, check to see whether any signals are pending. */ sigpending (&waiting_mask); if (sigismember (&waiting_mask, SIGINT)) { /* User has tried to kill the process. */ } else if (sigismember (&waiting_mask, SIGTSTP)) { /* User has tried to stop the process. */ }
Remember that if there is a particular signal pending for your process,
additional signals of that same type that arrive in the meantime might
be discarded. For example, if a SIGINT
signal is pending when
another SIGINT
signal arrives, your program will probably only
see one of them when you unblock this signal.
Portability Note: The sigpending
function is new in
POSIX.1. Older systems have no equivalent facility.
Previous: Checking for Pending Signals, Up: Blocking Signals [Contents][Index]
Instead of blocking a signal using the library facilities, you can get almost the same results by making the handler set a flag to be tested later, when you “unblock”. Here is an example:
/* If this flag is nonzero, don’t handle the signal right away. */ volatile sig_atomic_t signal_pending; /* This is nonzero if a signal arrived and was not handled. */ volatile sig_atomic_t defer_signal; void handler (int signum) { if (defer_signal) signal_pending = signum; else … /* “Really” handle the signal. */ } … void update_mumble (int frob) { /* Prevent signals from having immediate effect. */ defer_signal++; /* Now updatemumble
, without worrying about interruption. */ mumble.a = 1; mumble.b = hack (); mumble.c = frob; /* We have updatedmumble
. Handle any signal that came in. */ defer_signal--; if (defer_signal == 0 && signal_pending != 0) raise (signal_pending); }
Note how the particular signal that arrives is stored in
signal_pending
. That way, we can handle several types of
inconvenient signals with the same mechanism.
We increment and decrement defer_signal
so that nested critical
sections will work properly; thus, if update_mumble
were called
with signal_pending
already nonzero, signals would be deferred
not only within update_mumble
, but also within the caller. This
is also why we do not check signal_pending
if defer_signal
is still nonzero.
The incrementing and decrementing of defer_signal
each require more
than one instruction; it is possible for a signal to happen in the
middle. But that does not cause any problem. If the signal happens
early enough to see the value from before the increment or decrement,
that is equivalent to a signal which came before the beginning of the
increment or decrement, which is a case that works properly.
It is absolutely vital to decrement defer_signal
before testing
signal_pending
, because this avoids a subtle bug. If we did
these things in the other order, like this,
if (defer_signal == 1 && signal_pending != 0) raise (signal_pending); defer_signal--;
then a signal arriving in between the if
statement and the decrement
would be effectively “lost” for an indefinite amount of time. The
handler would merely set defer_signal
, but the program having
already tested this variable, it would not test the variable again.
Bugs like these are called timing errors. They are especially bad because they happen only rarely and are nearly impossible to reproduce. You can’t expect to find them with a debugger as you would find a reproducible bug. So it is worth being especially careful to avoid them.
(You would not be tempted to write the code in this order, given the use
of defer_signal
as a counter which must be tested along with
signal_pending
. After all, testing for zero is cleaner than
testing for one. But if you did not use defer_signal
as a
counter, and gave it values of zero and one only, then either order
might seem equally simple. This is a further advantage of using a
counter for defer_signal
: it will reduce the chance you will
write the code in the wrong order and create a subtle bug.)
Next: Using a Separate Signal Stack, Previous: Blocking Signals, Up: Signal Handling [Contents][Index]
If your program is driven by external events, or uses signals for synchronization, then when it has nothing to do it should probably wait until a signal arrives.
Next: Problems with pause
, Up: Waiting for a Signal [Contents][Index]
pause
The simple way to wait until a signal arrives is to call pause
.
Please read about its disadvantages, in the following section, before
you use it.
Preliminary: | MT-Unsafe race:sigprocmask/!bsd!linux | AS-Unsafe lock/hurd | AC-Unsafe lock/hurd | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The pause
function suspends program execution until a signal
arrives whose action is either to execute a handler function, or to
terminate the process.
If the signal causes a handler function to be executed, then
pause
returns. This is considered an unsuccessful return (since
“successful” behavior would be to suspend the program forever), so the
return value is -1
. Even if you specify that other primitives
should resume when a system handler returns (see Primitives Interrupted by Signals), this has no effect on pause
; it always fails when a
signal is handled.
The following errno
error conditions are defined for this function:
EINTR
The function was interrupted by delivery of a signal.
If the signal causes program termination, pause
doesn’t return
(obviously).
This function is a cancellation point in multithreaded programs. This
is a problem if the thread allocates some resources (like memory, file
descriptors, semaphores or whatever) at the time pause
is
called. If the thread gets cancelled these resources stay allocated
until the program ends. To avoid this calls to pause
should be
protected using cancellation handlers.
The pause
function is declared in unistd.h.
Next: Using sigsuspend
, Previous: Using pause
, Up: Waiting for a Signal [Contents][Index]
pause
The simplicity of pause
can conceal serious timing errors that
can make a program hang mysteriously.
It is safe to use pause
if the real work of your program is done
by the signal handlers themselves, and the “main program” does nothing
but call pause
. Each time a signal is delivered, the handler
will do the next batch of work that is to be done, and then return, so
that the main loop of the program can call pause
again.
You can’t safely use pause
to wait until one more signal arrives,
and then resume real work. Even if you arrange for the signal handler
to cooperate by setting a flag, you still can’t use pause
reliably. Here is an example of this problem:
/* usr_interrupt
is set by the signal handler. */
if (!usr_interrupt)
pause ();
/* Do work once the signal arrives. */
…
This has a bug: the signal could arrive after the variable
usr_interrupt
is checked, but before the call to pause
.
If no further signals arrive, the process would never wake up again.
You can put an upper limit on the excess waiting by using sleep
in a loop, instead of using pause
. (See Sleeping, for more
about sleep
.) Here is what this looks like:
/* usr_interrupt
is set by the signal handler.
while (!usr_interrupt)
sleep (1);
/* Do work once the signal arrives. */
…
For some purposes, that is good enough. But with a little more
complexity, you can wait reliably until a particular signal handler is
run, using sigsuspend
.
Previous: Problems with pause
, Up: Waiting for a Signal [Contents][Index]
sigsuspend
The clean and reliable way to wait for a signal to arrive is to block it
and then use sigsuspend
. By using sigsuspend
in a loop,
you can wait for certain kinds of signals, while letting other kinds of
signals be handled by their handlers.
Preliminary: | MT-Unsafe race:sigprocmask/!bsd!linux | AS-Unsafe lock/hurd | AC-Unsafe lock/hurd | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This function replaces the process’s signal mask with set and then suspends the process until a signal is delivered whose action is either to terminate the process or invoke a signal handling function. In other words, the program is effectively suspended until one of the signals that is not a member of set arrives.
If the process is woken up by delivery of a signal that invokes a handler
function, and the handler function returns, then sigsuspend
also
returns.
The mask remains set only as long as sigsuspend
is waiting.
The function sigsuspend
always restores the previous signal mask
when it returns.
The return value and error conditions are the same as for pause
.
With sigsuspend
, you can replace the pause
or sleep
loop in the previous section with something completely reliable:
sigset_t mask, oldmask; … /* Set up the mask of signals to temporarily block. */ sigemptyset (&mask); sigaddset (&mask, SIGUSR1); … /* Wait for a signal to arrive. */ sigprocmask (SIG_BLOCK, &mask, &oldmask); while (!usr_interrupt) sigsuspend (&oldmask); sigprocmask (SIG_UNBLOCK, &mask, NULL);
This last piece of code is a little tricky. The key point to remember
here is that when sigsuspend
returns, it resets the process’s
signal mask to the original value, the value from before the call to
sigsuspend
—in this case, the SIGUSR1
signal is once
again blocked. The second call to sigprocmask
is
necessary to explicitly unblock this signal.
One other point: you may be wondering why the while
loop is
necessary at all, since the program is apparently only waiting for one
SIGUSR1
signal. The answer is that the mask passed to
sigsuspend
permits the process to be woken up by the delivery of
other kinds of signals, as well—for example, job control signals. If
the process is woken up by a signal that doesn’t set
usr_interrupt
, it just suspends itself again until the “right”
kind of signal eventually arrives.
This technique takes a few more lines of preparation, but that is needed just once for each kind of wait criterion you want to use. The code that actually waits is just four lines.
Next: BSD Signal Handling, Previous: Waiting for a Signal, Up: Signal Handling [Contents][Index]
A signal stack is a special area of memory to be used as the execution
stack during signal handlers. It should be fairly large, to avoid any
danger that it will overflow in turn; the macro SIGSTKSZ
is
defined to a canonical size for signal stacks. You can use
malloc
to allocate the space for the stack. Then call
sigaltstack
or sigstack
to tell the system to use that
space for the signal stack.
You don’t need to write signal handlers differently in order to use a signal stack. Switching from one stack to the other happens automatically. (Some non-GNU debuggers on some machines may get confused if you examine a stack trace while a handler that uses the signal stack is running.)
There are two interfaces for telling the system to use a separate signal
stack. sigstack
is the older interface, which comes from 4.2
BSD. sigaltstack
is the newer interface, and comes from 4.4
BSD. The sigaltstack
interface has the advantage that it does
not require your program to know which direction the stack grows, which
depends on the specific machine and operating system.
This structure describes a signal stack. It contains the following members:
void *ss_sp
This points to the base of the signal stack.
size_t ss_size
This is the size (in bytes) of the signal stack which ‘ss_sp’ points to. You should set this to however much space you allocated for the stack.
There are two macros defined in signal.h that you should use in calculating this size:
SIGSTKSZ
¶This is the canonical size for a signal stack. It is judged to be sufficient for normal uses.
MINSIGSTKSZ
¶This is the amount of signal stack space the operating system needs just to implement signal delivery. The size of a signal stack must be greater than this.
For most cases, just using SIGSTKSZ
for ss_size
is
sufficient. But if you know how much stack space your program’s signal
handlers will need, you may want to use a different size. In this case,
you should allocate MINSIGSTKSZ
additional bytes for the signal
stack and increase ss_size
accordingly.
int ss_flags
This field contains the bitwise OR of these flags:
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Unsafe lock/hurd | AC-Unsafe lock/hurd | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The sigaltstack
function specifies an alternate stack for use
during signal handling. When a signal is received by the process and
its action indicates that the signal stack is used, the system arranges
a switch to the currently installed signal stack while the handler for
that signal is executed.
If oldstack is not a null pointer, information about the currently installed signal stack is returned in the location it points to. If stack is not a null pointer, then this is installed as the new stack for use by signal handlers.
The return value is 0
on success and -1
on failure. If
sigaltstack
fails, it sets errno
to one of these values:
EINVAL
You tried to disable a stack that was in fact currently in use.
ENOMEM
The size of the alternate stack was too small.
It must be greater than MINSIGSTKSZ
.
Here is the older sigstack
interface. You should use
sigaltstack
instead on systems that have it.
This structure describes a signal stack. It contains the following members:
void *ss_sp
This is the stack pointer. If the stack grows downwards on your machine, this should point to the top of the area you allocated. If the stack grows upwards, it should point to the bottom.
int ss_onstack
This field is true if the process is currently using this stack.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Unsafe lock/hurd | AC-Unsafe lock/hurd | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The sigstack
function specifies an alternate stack for use during
signal handling. When a signal is received by the process and its
action indicates that the signal stack is used, the system arranges a
switch to the currently installed signal stack while the handler for
that signal is executed.
If oldstack is not a null pointer, information about the currently installed signal stack is returned in the location it points to. If stack is not a null pointer, then this is installed as the new stack for use by signal handlers.
The return value is 0
on success and -1
on failure.
Previous: Using a Separate Signal Stack, Up: Signal Handling [Contents][Index]
This section describes alternative signal handling functions derived from BSD Unix. These facilities were an advance, in their time; today, they are mostly obsolete, and supported mainly for compatibility with BSD Unix.
There are many similarities between the BSD and POSIX signal handling
facilities, because the POSIX facilities were inspired by the BSD
facilities. Besides having different names for all the functions to
avoid conflicts, the main difference between the two is that BSD Unix
represents signal masks as an int
bit mask, rather than as a
sigset_t
object.
The BSD facilities are declared in signal.h.
Preliminary: | MT-Unsafe const:sigintr | AS-Unsafe | AC-Unsafe corrupt | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This function specifies which approach to use when certain primitives
are interrupted by handling signal signum. If failflag is
false, signal signum restarts primitives. If failflag is
true, handling signum causes these primitives to fail with error
code EINTR
. See Primitives Interrupted by Signals.
This function has been replaced by the SA_RESTART
flag of the
sigaction
function. See Advanced Signal Handling.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This macro returns a signal mask that has the bit for signal signum
set. You can bitwise-OR the results of several calls to sigmask
together to specify more than one signal. For example,
(sigmask (SIGTSTP) | sigmask (SIGSTOP) | sigmask (SIGTTIN) | sigmask (SIGTTOU))
specifies a mask that includes all the job-control stop signals.
This macro has been replaced by the sigset_t
type and the
associated signal set manipulation functions. See Signal Sets.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Unsafe lock/hurd | AC-Unsafe lock/hurd | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This function is equivalent to sigprocmask
(see Process Signal Mask) with a how argument of SIG_BLOCK
: it adds the
signals specified by mask to the calling process’s set of blocked
signals. The return value is the previous set of blocked signals.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Unsafe lock/hurd | AC-Unsafe lock/hurd | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This function is equivalent to sigprocmask
(see Process Signal Mask) with a how argument of SIG_SETMASK
: it sets
the calling process’s signal mask to mask. The return value is
the previous set of blocked signals.
Preliminary: | MT-Unsafe race:sigprocmask/!bsd!linux | AS-Unsafe lock/hurd | AC-Unsafe lock/hurd | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This function is the equivalent of sigsuspend
(see Waiting for a Signal): it sets the calling process’s signal mask to mask,
and waits for a signal to arrive. On return the previous set of blocked
signals is restored.
Next: Processes, Previous: Signal Handling, Up: Main Menu [Contents][Index]
Processes are the primitive units for allocation of system resources. Each process has its own address space and (usually) one thread of control. A process executes a program; you can have multiple processes executing the same program, but each process has its own copy of the program within its own address space and executes it independently of the other copies. Though it may have multiple threads of control within the same program and a program may be composed of multiple logically separate modules, a process always executes exactly one program.
Note that we are using a specific definition of “program” for the purposes of this manual, which corresponds to a common definition in the context of Unix systems. In popular usage, “program” enjoys a much broader definition; it can refer for example to a system’s kernel, an editor macro, a complex package of software, or a discrete section of code executing within a process.
Writing the program is what this manual is all about. This chapter explains the most basic interface between your program and the system that runs, or calls, it. This includes passing of parameters (arguments and environment) from the system, requesting basic services from the system, and telling the system the program is done.
A program starts another program with the exec
family of system calls.
This chapter looks at program startup from the execee’s point of view. To
see the event from the execor’s point of view, see Executing a File.
getopt
Next: Environment Variables, Up: The Basic Program/System Interface [Contents][Index]
The system starts a C program by calling the function main
. It
is up to you to write a function named main
—otherwise, you
won’t even be able to link your program without errors.
In ISO C you can define main
either to take no arguments, or to
take two arguments that represent the command line arguments to the
program, like this:
int main (int argc, char *argv[])
The command line arguments are the whitespace-separated tokens given in
the shell command used to invoke the program; thus, in ‘cat foo
bar’, the arguments are ‘foo’ and ‘bar’. The only way a
program can look at its command line arguments is via the arguments of
main
. If main
doesn’t take arguments, then you cannot get
at the command line.
The value of the argc argument is the number of command line
arguments. The argv argument is a vector of C strings; its
elements are the individual command line argument strings. The file
name of the program being run is also included in the vector as the
first element; the value of argc counts this element. A null
pointer always follows the last element: argv[argc]
is this null pointer.
For the command ‘cat foo bar’, argc is 3 and argv has
three elements, "cat"
, "foo"
and "bar"
.
In Unix systems you can define main
a third way, using three arguments:
int main (int argc, char *argv[], char *envp[])
The first two arguments are just the same. The third argument
envp gives the program’s environment; it is the same as the value
of environ
. See Environment Variables. POSIX.1 does not
allow this three-argument form, so to be portable it is best to write
main
to take two arguments, and use the value of environ
.
Next: Parsing Program Arguments, Up: Program Arguments [Contents][Index]
POSIX recommends these conventions for command line arguments.
getopt
(see Parsing program options using getopt
) and argp_parse
(see Parsing Program Options with Argp) make
it easy to implement them.
isalnum
;
see Classification of Characters).
ld
command requires an argument—an output file name.
The implementations of getopt
and argp_parse
in the GNU C Library
normally make it appear as if all the option arguments were
specified before all the non-option arguments for the purposes of
parsing, even if the user of your program intermixed option and
non-option arguments. They do this by reordering the elements of the
argv array. This behavior is nonstandard; if you want to suppress
it, define the _POSIX_OPTION_ORDER
environment variable.
See Standard Environment Variables.
GNU adds long options to these conventions. Long options consist of -- followed by a name made of alphanumeric characters and dashes. Option names are typically one to three words long, with hyphens to separate words. Users can abbreviate the option names as long as the abbreviations are unique.
To specify an argument for a long option, write --name=value. This syntax enables a long option to accept an argument that is itself optional.
Eventually, GNU systems will provide completion for long option names in the shell.
Previous: Program Argument Syntax Conventions, Up: Program Arguments [Contents][Index]
If the syntax for the command line arguments to your program is simple
enough, you can simply pick the arguments off from argv by hand.
But unless your program takes a fixed number of arguments, or all of the
arguments are interpreted in the same way (as file names, for example),
you are usually better off using getopt
(see Parsing program options using getopt
) or
argp_parse
(see Parsing Program Options with Argp) to do the parsing.
getopt
is more standard (the short-option only version of it is a
part of the POSIX standard), but using argp_parse
is often
easier, both for very simple and very complex option structures, because
it does more of the dirty work for you.
getopt
The getopt
and getopt_long
functions automate some of the
chore involved in parsing typical unix command line options.
getopt
functiongetopt
getopt_long
getopt_long
Next: Example of Parsing Arguments with getopt
, Up: Parsing program options using getopt
[Contents][Index]
getopt
functionHere are the details about how to call the getopt
function. To
use this facility, your program must include the header file
unistd.h.
If the value of this variable is nonzero, then getopt
prints an
error message to the standard error stream if it encounters an unknown
option character or an option with a missing required argument. This is
the default behavior. If you set this variable to zero, getopt
does not print any messages, but it still returns the character ?
to indicate an error.
When getopt
encounters an unknown option character or an option
with a missing required argument, it stores that option character in
this variable. You can use this for providing your own diagnostic
messages.
This variable is set by getopt
to the index of the next element
of the argv array to be processed. Once getopt
has found
all of the option arguments, you can use this variable to determine
where the remaining non-option arguments begin. The initial value of
this variable is 1
.
This variable is set by getopt
to point at the value of the
option argument, for those options that accept arguments.
Preliminary: | MT-Unsafe race:getopt env | AS-Unsafe heap i18n lock corrupt | AC-Unsafe mem lock corrupt | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The getopt
function gets the next option argument from the
argument list specified by the argv and argc arguments.
Normally these values come directly from the arguments received by
main
.
The options argument is a string that specifies the option characters that are valid for this program. An option character in this string can be followed by a colon (‘:’) to indicate that it takes a required argument. If an option character is followed by two colons (‘::’), its argument is optional; this is a GNU extension.
getopt
has three ways to deal with options that follow
non-options argv elements. The special argument ‘--’ forces
in all cases the end of option scanning.
POSIXLY_CORRECT
or beginning the options argument
string with a plus sign (‘+’).
The getopt
function returns the option character for the next
command line option. When no more option arguments are available, it
returns -1
. There may still be more non-option arguments; you
must compare the external variable optind
against the argc
parameter to check this.
If the option has an argument, getopt
returns the argument by
storing it in the variable optarg. You don’t ordinarily need to
copy the optarg
string, since it is a pointer into the original
argv array, not into a static area that might be overwritten.
If getopt
finds an option character in argv that was not
included in options, or a missing option argument, it returns
‘?’ and sets the external variable optopt
to the actual
option character. If the first character of options is a colon
(‘:’), then getopt
returns ‘:’ instead of ‘?’ to
indicate a missing option argument. In addition, if the external
variable opterr
is nonzero (which is the default), getopt
prints an error message.
Next: Parsing Long Options with getopt_long
, Previous: Using the getopt
function, Up: Parsing program options using getopt
[Contents][Index]
getopt
Here is an example showing how getopt
is typically used. The
key points to notice are:
getopt
is called in a loop. When getopt
returns
-1
, indicating no more options are present, the loop terminates.
switch
statement is used to dispatch on the return value from
getopt
. In typical use, each case just sets a variable that
is used later in the program.
#include <ctype.h> #include <stdio.h> #include <stdlib.h> #include <unistd.h> int main (int argc, char **argv) { int aflag = 0; int bflag = 0; char *cvalue = NULL; int index; int c; opterr = 0;
while ((c = getopt (argc, argv, "abc:")) != -1) switch (c) { case 'a': aflag = 1; break; case 'b': bflag = 1; break; case 'c': cvalue = optarg; break; case '?': if (optopt == 'c') fprintf (stderr, "Option -%c requires an argument.\n", optopt); else if (isprint (optopt)) fprintf (stderr, "Unknown option `-%c'.\n", optopt); else fprintf (stderr, "Unknown option character `\\x%x'.\n", optopt); return 1; default: abort (); }
printf ("aflag = %d, bflag = %d, cvalue = %s\n", aflag, bflag, cvalue); for (index = optind; index < argc; index++) printf ("Non-option argument %s\n", argv[index]); return 0; }
Here are some examples showing what this program prints with different combinations of arguments:
% testopt aflag = 0, bflag = 0, cvalue = (null) % testopt -a -b aflag = 1, bflag = 1, cvalue = (null) % testopt -ab aflag = 1, bflag = 1, cvalue = (null) % testopt -c foo aflag = 0, bflag = 0, cvalue = foo % testopt -cfoo aflag = 0, bflag = 0, cvalue = foo % testopt arg1 aflag = 0, bflag = 0, cvalue = (null) Non-option argument arg1 % testopt -a arg1 aflag = 1, bflag = 0, cvalue = (null) Non-option argument arg1 % testopt -c foo arg1 aflag = 0, bflag = 0, cvalue = foo Non-option argument arg1 % testopt -a -- -b aflag = 1, bflag = 0, cvalue = (null) Non-option argument -b % testopt -a - aflag = 1, bflag = 0, cvalue = (null) Non-option argument -
Next: Example of Parsing Long Options with getopt_long
, Previous: Example of Parsing Arguments with getopt
, Up: Parsing program options using getopt
[Contents][Index]
getopt_long
To accept GNU-style long options as well as single-character options,
use getopt_long
instead of getopt
. This function is
declared in getopt.h, not unistd.h. You should make every
program accept long options if it uses any options, for this takes
little extra work and helps beginners remember how to use the program.
This structure describes a single long option name for the sake of
getopt_long
. The argument longopts must be an array of
these structures, one for each long option. Terminate the array with an
element containing all zeros.
The struct option
structure has these fields:
const char *name
This field is the name of the option. It is a string.
int has_arg
This field says whether the option takes an argument. It is an integer,
and there are three legitimate values: no_argument
,
required_argument
and optional_argument
.
int *flag
int val
These fields control how to report or act on the option when it occurs.
If flag
is a null pointer, then the val
is a value which
identifies this option. Often these values are chosen to uniquely
identify particular long options.
If flag
is not a null pointer, it should be the address of an
int
variable which is the flag for this option. The value in
val
is the value to store in the flag to indicate that the option
was seen.
Preliminary: | MT-Unsafe race:getopt env | AS-Unsafe heap i18n lock corrupt | AC-Unsafe mem lock corrupt | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
Decode options from the vector argv (whose length is argc).
The argument shortopts describes the short options to accept, just as
it does in getopt
. The argument longopts describes the long
options to accept (see above).
When getopt_long
encounters a short option, it does the same
thing that getopt
would do: it returns the character code for the
option, and stores the option’s argument (if it has one) in optarg
.
When getopt_long
encounters a long option, it takes actions based
on the flag
and val
fields of the definition of that
option. The option name may be abbreviated as long as the abbreviation is
unique.
If flag
is a null pointer, then getopt_long
returns the
contents of val
to indicate which option it found. You should
arrange distinct values in the val
field for options with
different meanings, so you can decode these values after
getopt_long
returns. If the long option is equivalent to a short
option, you can use the short option’s character code in val
.
If flag
is not a null pointer, that means this option should just
set a flag in the program. The flag is a variable of type int
that you define. Put the address of the flag in the flag
field.
Put in the val
field the value you would like this option to
store in the flag. In this case, getopt_long
returns 0
.
For any long option, getopt_long
tells you the index in the array
longopts of the options definition, by storing it into
*indexptr
. You can get the name of the option with
longopts[*indexptr].name
. So you can distinguish among
long options either by the values in their val
fields or by their
indices. You can also distinguish in this way among long options that
set flags.
When a long option has an argument, getopt_long
puts the argument
value in the variable optarg
before returning. When the option
has no argument, the value in optarg
is a null pointer. This is
how you can tell whether an optional argument was supplied.
When getopt_long
has no more options to handle, it returns
-1
, and leaves in the variable optind
the index in
argv of the next remaining argument.
Since long option names were used before getopt_long
was invented there are program interfaces which require programs
to recognize options like ‘-option value’ instead of
‘--option value’. To enable these programs to use the GNU
getopt functionality there is one more function available.
Preliminary: | MT-Unsafe race:getopt env | AS-Unsafe heap i18n lock corrupt | AC-Unsafe mem lock corrupt | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The getopt_long_only
function is equivalent to the
getopt_long
function but it allows the user of the
application to pass long options with only ‘-’ instead of
‘--’. The ‘--’ prefix is still recognized but instead of
looking through the short options if a ‘-’ is seen it is first
tried whether this parameter names a long option. If not, it is parsed
as a short option.
Assuming getopt_long_only
is used starting an application with
app -foo
the getopt_long_only
will first look for a long option named
‘foo’. If this is not found, the short options ‘f’, ‘o’,
and again ‘o’ are recognized.
Previous: Parsing Long Options with getopt_long
, Up: Parsing program options using getopt
[Contents][Index]
getopt_long
#include <stdio.h> #include <stdlib.h> #include <getopt.h> /* Flag set by ‘--verbose’. */ static int verbose_flag; int main (int argc, char **argv) { int c; while (1) { static struct option long_options[] = { /* These options set a flag. */ {"verbose", no_argument, &verbose_flag, 1}, {"brief", no_argument, &verbose_flag, 0}, /* These options don’t set a flag. We distinguish them by their indices. */ {"add", no_argument, 0, 'a'}, {"append", no_argument, 0, 'b'}, {"delete", required_argument, 0, 'd'}, {"create", required_argument, 0, 'c'}, {"file", required_argument, 0, 'f'}, {0, 0, 0, 0} }; /*getopt_long
stores the option index here. */ int option_index = 0; c = getopt_long (argc, argv, "abc:d:f:", long_options, &option_index); /* Detect the end of the options. */ if (c == -1) break; switch (c) { case 0: /* If this option set a flag, do nothing else now. */ if (long_options[option_index].flag != 0) break; printf ("option %s", long_options[option_index].name); if (optarg) printf (" with arg %s", optarg); printf ("\n"); break; case 'a': puts ("option -a\n"); break; case 'b': puts ("option -b\n"); break; case 'c': printf ("option -c with value `%s'\n", optarg); break; case 'd': printf ("option -d with value `%s'\n", optarg); break; case 'f': printf ("option -f with value `%s'\n", optarg); break; case '?': /*getopt_long
already printed an error message. */ break; default: abort (); } } /* Instead of reporting ‘--verbose’ and ‘--brief’ as they are encountered, we report the final status resulting from them. */ if (verbose_flag) puts ("verbose flag is set"); /* Print any remaining command line arguments (not options). */ if (optind < argc) { printf ("non-option ARGV-elements: "); while (optind < argc) printf ("%s ", argv[optind++]); putchar ('\n'); } exit (0); }
Next: Parsing of Suboptions, Previous: Parsing program options using getopt
, Up: Parsing Program Arguments [Contents][Index]
Argp is an interface for parsing unix-style argument vectors. See Program Arguments.
Argp provides features unavailable in the more commonly used
getopt
interface. These features include automatically producing
output in response to the ‘--help’ and ‘--version’ options, as
described in the GNU coding standards. Using argp makes it less likely
that programmers will neglect to implement these additional options or
keep them up to date.
Argp also provides the ability to merge several independently defined option parsers into one, mediating conflicts between them and making the result appear seamless. A library can export an argp option parser that user programs might employ in conjunction with their own option parsers, resulting in less work for the user programs. Some programs may use only argument parsers exported by libraries, thereby achieving consistent and efficient option-parsing for abstractions implemented by the libraries.
The header file <argp.h> should be included to use argp.
argp_parse
Functionargp_parse
argp_help
Functionargp_help
Functionargp_parse
FunctionThe main interface to argp is the argp_parse
function. In many
cases, calling argp_parse
is the only argument-parsing code
needed in main
.
See Program Arguments.
Preliminary: | MT-Unsafe race:argpbuf locale env | AS-Unsafe heap i18n lock corrupt | AC-Unsafe mem lock corrupt | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The argp_parse
function parses the arguments in argv, of
length argc, using the argp parser argp. See Specifying Argp Parsers. Passing a null pointer for argp is the same as using
a struct argp
containing all zeros.
flags is a set of flag bits that modify the parsing behavior.
See Flags for argp_parse
. input is passed through to the argp parser
argp, and has meaning defined by argp. A typical usage is
to pass a pointer to a structure which is used for specifying
parameters to the parser and passing back the results.
Unless the ARGP_NO_EXIT
or ARGP_NO_HELP
flags are included
in flags, calling argp_parse
may result in the program
exiting. This behavior is true if an error is detected, or when an
unknown option is encountered. See Program Termination.
If arg_index is non-null, the index of the first unparsed option in argv is returned as a value.
The return value is zero for successful parsing, or an error code
(see Error Codes) if an error is detected. Different argp parsers
may return arbitrary error codes, but the standard error codes are:
ENOMEM
if a memory allocation error occurred, or EINVAL
if
an unknown option or option argument is encountered.
These variables make it easy for user programs to implement the ‘--version’ option and provide a bug-reporting address in the ‘--help’ output. These are implemented in argp by default.
If defined or set by the user program to a non-zero value, then a
‘--version’ option is added when parsing with argp_parse
,
which will print the ‘--version’ string followed by a newline and
exit. The exception to this is if the ARGP_NO_EXIT
flag is used.
If defined or set by the user program to a non-zero value,
argp_program_bug_address
should point to a string that will be
printed at the end of the standard output for the ‘--help’ option,
embedded in a sentence that says ‘Report bugs to address.’.
If defined or set by the user program to a non-zero value, a
‘--version’ option is added when parsing with arg_parse
,
which prints the program version and exits with a status of zero. This
is not the case if the ARGP_NO_HELP
flag is used. If the
ARGP_NO_EXIT
flag is set, the exit behavior of the program is
suppressed or modified, as when the argp parser is going to be used by
other programs.
It should point to a function with this type of signature:
void print-version (FILE *stream, struct argp_state *state)
See Argp Parsing State, for an explanation of state.
This variable takes precedence over argp_program_version
, and is
useful if a program has version information not easily expressed in a
simple string.
This is the exit status used when argp exits due to a parsing error. If
not defined or set by the user program, this defaults to:
EX_USAGE
from <sysexits.h>.
Next: Flags for argp_parse
, Previous: Argp Global Variables, Up: Parsing Program Options with Argp [Contents][Index]
The first argument to the argp_parse
function is a pointer to a
struct argp
, which is known as an argp parser:
This structure specifies how to parse a given set of options and arguments, perhaps in conjunction with other argp parsers. It has the following fields:
const struct argp_option *options
A pointer to a vector of argp_option
structures specifying which
options this argp parser understands; it may be zero if there are no
options at all. See Specifying Options in an Argp Parser.
argp_parser_t parser
A pointer to a function that defines actions for this parser; it is
called for each option parsed, and at other well-defined points in the
parsing process. A value of zero is the same as a pointer to a function
that always returns ARGP_ERR_UNKNOWN
. See Argp Parser Functions.
const char *args_doc
If non-zero, a string describing what non-option arguments are called by this parser. This is only used to print the ‘Usage:’ message. If it contains newlines, the strings separated by them are considered alternative usage patterns and printed on separate lines. Lines after the first are prefixed by ‘ or: ’ instead of ‘Usage:’.
const char *doc
If non-zero, a string containing extra text to be printed before and
after the options in a long help message, with the two sections
separated by a vertical tab ('\v'
, '\013'
) character. By
convention, the documentation before the options is just a short string
explaining what the program does. Documentation printed after the
options describe behavior in more detail.
const struct argp_child *children
A pointer to a vector of argp_child
structures. This pointer
specifies which additional argp parsers should be combined with this
one. See Combining Multiple Argp Parsers.
char *(*help_filter)(int key, const char *text, void *input)
If non-zero, a pointer to a function that filters the output of help messages. See Customizing Argp Help Output.
const char *argp_domain
If non-zero, the strings used in the argp library are translated using the domain described by this string. If zero, the current default domain is used.
Of the above group, options
, parser
, args_doc
, and
the doc
fields are usually all that are needed. If an argp
parser is defined as an initialized C variable, only the fields used
need be specified in the initializer. The rest will default to zero due
to the way C structure initialization works. This design is exploited in
most argp structures; the most-used fields are grouped near the
beginning, the unused fields left unspecified.
Next: Argp Parser Functions, Previous: Specifying Argp Parsers, Up: Specifying Argp Parsers [Contents][Index]
The options
field in a struct argp
points to a vector of
struct argp_option
structures, each of which specifies an option
that the argp parser supports. Multiple entries may be used for a single
option provided it has multiple names. This should be terminated by an
entry with zero in all fields. Note that when using an initialized C
array for options, writing { 0 }
is enough to achieve this.
This structure specifies a single option that an argp parser understands, as well as how to parse and document that option. It has the following fields:
const char *name
The long name for this option, corresponding to the long option
‘--name’; this field may be zero if this option only
has a short name. To specify multiple names for an option, additional
entries may follow this one, with the OPTION_ALIAS
flag
set. See Flags for Argp Options.
int key
The integer key provided by the current option to the option parser. If
key has a value that is a printable ASCII character (i.e.,
isascii (key)
is true), it also specifies a short
option ‘-char’, where char is the ASCII character
with the code key.
const char *arg
If non-zero, this is the name of an argument associated with this
option, which must be provided (e.g., with the
‘--name=value’ or ‘-char value’
syntaxes), unless the OPTION_ARG_OPTIONAL
flag (see Flags for Argp Options) is set, in which case it may be provided.
int flags
Flags associated with this option, some of which are referred to above. See Flags for Argp Options.
const char *doc
A documentation string for this option, for printing in help messages.
If both the name
and key
fields are zero, this string
will be printed tabbed left from the normal option column, making it
useful as a group header. This will be the first thing printed in its
group. In this usage, it’s conventional to end the string with a
‘:’ character.
int group
Group identity for this option.
In a long help message, options are sorted alphabetically within each group, and the groups presented in the order 0, 1, 2, …, n, -m, …, -2, -1.
Every entry in an options array with this field 0 will inherit the group
number of the previous entry, or zero if it’s the first one. If it’s a
group header with name
and key
fields both zero, the
previous entry + 1 is the default. Automagic options such as
‘--help’ are put into group -1.
Note that because of C structure initialization rules, this field often need not be specified, because 0 is the correct value.
The following flags may be or’d together in the flags
field of a
struct argp_option
. These flags control various aspects of how
that option is parsed or displayed in help messages:
OPTION_ARG_OPTIONAL
¶The argument associated with this option is optional.
OPTION_HIDDEN
¶This option isn’t displayed in any help messages.
OPTION_ALIAS
¶This option is an alias for the closest previous non-alias option. This
means that it will be displayed in the same help entry, and will inherit
fields other than name
and key
from the option being
aliased.
OPTION_DOC
¶This option isn’t actually an option and should be ignored by the actual option parser. It is an arbitrary section of documentation that should be displayed in much the same manner as the options. This is known as a documentation option.
If this flag is set, then the option name
field is displayed
unmodified (e.g., no ‘--’ prefix is added) at the left-margin where
a short option would normally be displayed, and this
documentation string is left in its usual place. For purposes of
sorting, any leading whitespace and punctuation is ignored, unless the
first non-whitespace character is ‘-’. This entry is displayed
after all options, after OPTION_DOC
entries with a leading
‘-’, in the same group.
OPTION_NO_USAGE
¶This option shouldn’t be included in ‘long’ usage messages, but should
still be included in other help messages. This is intended for options
that are completely documented in an argp’s args_doc
field. See Specifying Argp Parsers. Including this option in the generic usage
list would be redundant, and should be avoided.
For instance, if args_doc
is "FOO BAR\n-x BLAH"
, and the
‘-x’ option’s purpose is to distinguish these two cases, ‘-x’
should probably be marked OPTION_NO_USAGE
.
Next: Combining Multiple Argp Parsers, Previous: Specifying Options in an Argp Parser, Up: Specifying Argp Parsers [Contents][Index]
The function pointed to by the parser
field in a struct
argp
(see Specifying Argp Parsers) defines what actions take place in response
to each option or argument parsed. It is also used as a hook, allowing a
parser to perform tasks at certain other points during parsing.
Argp parser functions have the following type signature:
error_t parser (int key, char *arg, struct argp_state *state)
where the arguments are as follows:
For each option that is parsed, parser is called with a value of
key from that option’s key
field in the option
vector. See Specifying Options in an Argp Parser. parser is also called at
other times with special reserved keys, such as ARGP_KEY_ARG
for
non-option arguments. See Special Keys for Argp Parser Functions.
If key is an option, arg is its given value. This defaults
to zero if no value is specified. Only options that have a non-zero
arg
field can ever have a value. These must always have a
value unless the OPTION_ARG_OPTIONAL
flag is specified. If the
input being parsed specifies a value for an option that doesn’t allow
one, an error results before parser ever gets called.
If key is ARGP_KEY_ARG
, arg is a non-option
argument. Other special keys always have a zero arg.
state points to a struct argp_state
, containing useful
information about the current parsing state for use by
parser. See Argp Parsing State.
When parser is called, it should perform whatever action is
appropriate for key, and return 0
for success,
ARGP_ERR_UNKNOWN
if the value of key is not handled by this
parser function, or a unix error code if a real error
occurred. See Error Codes.
Argp parser functions should return ARGP_ERR_UNKNOWN
for any
key value they do not recognize, or for non-option arguments
(key == ARGP_KEY_ARG
) that they are not equipped to handle.
A typical parser function uses a switch statement on key:
error_t parse_opt (int key, char *arg, struct argp_state *state) { switch (key) { case option_key: action break; … default: return ARGP_ERR_UNKNOWN; } return 0; }
Next: Argp Parsing State, Up: Argp Parser Functions [Contents][Index]
In addition to key values corresponding to user options, the key argument to argp parser functions may have a number of other special values. In the following example arg and state refer to parser function arguments. See Argp Parser Functions.
ARGP_KEY_ARG
¶This is not an option at all, but rather a command line argument, whose value is pointed to by arg.
When there are multiple parser functions in play due to argp parsers
being combined, it’s impossible to know which one will handle a specific
argument. Each is called until one returns 0 or an error other than
ARGP_ERR_UNKNOWN
; if an argument is not handled,
argp_parse
immediately returns success, without parsing any more
arguments.
Once a parser function returns success for this key, that fact is
recorded, and the ARGP_KEY_NO_ARGS
case won’t be
used. However, if while processing the argument a parser function
decrements the next
field of its state argument, the option
won’t be considered processed; this is to allow you to actually modify
the argument, perhaps into an option, and have it processed again.
ARGP_KEY_ARGS
¶If a parser function returns ARGP_ERR_UNKNOWN
for
ARGP_KEY_ARG
, it is immediately called again with the key
ARGP_KEY_ARGS
, which has a similar meaning, but is slightly more
convenient for consuming all remaining arguments. arg is 0, and
the tail of the argument vector may be found at state->argv
+ state->next
. If success is returned for this key, and
state->next
is unchanged, all remaining arguments are
considered to have been consumed. Otherwise, the amount by which
state->next
has been adjusted indicates how many were used.
Here’s an example that uses both, for different args:
… case ARGP_KEY_ARG: if (state->arg_num == 0) /* First argument */ first_arg = arg; else /* Let the next case parse it. */ return ARGP_KEY_UNKNOWN; break; case ARGP_KEY_ARGS: remaining_args = state->argv + state->next; num_remaining_args = state->argc - state->next; break;
ARGP_KEY_END
¶This indicates that there are no more command line arguments. Parser functions are called in a different order, children first. This allows each parser to clean up its state for the parent.
ARGP_KEY_NO_ARGS
¶Because it’s common to do some special processing if there aren’t any
non-option args, parser functions are called with this key if they
didn’t successfully process any non-option arguments. This is called
just before ARGP_KEY_END
, where more general validity checks on
previously parsed arguments take place.
ARGP_KEY_INIT
¶This is passed in before any parsing is done. Afterwards, the values of
each element of the child_input
field of state, if any, are
copied to each child’s state to be the initial value of the input
when their parsers are called.
ARGP_KEY_SUCCESS
¶Passed in when parsing has successfully been completed, even if arguments remain.
ARGP_KEY_ERROR
¶Passed in if an error has occurred and parsing is terminated. In this
case a call with a key of ARGP_KEY_SUCCESS
is never made.
ARGP_KEY_FINI
¶The final key ever seen by any parser, even after
ARGP_KEY_SUCCESS
and ARGP_KEY_ERROR
. Any resources
allocated by ARGP_KEY_INIT
may be freed here. At times, certain
resources allocated are to be returned to the caller after a successful
parse. In that case, those particular resources can be freed in the
ARGP_KEY_ERROR
case.
In all cases, ARGP_KEY_INIT
is the first key seen by parser
functions, and ARGP_KEY_FINI
the last, unless an error was
returned by the parser for ARGP_KEY_INIT
. Other keys can occur
in one the following orders. opt refers to an arbitrary option
key:
ARGP_KEY_NO_ARGS
ARGP_KEY_END
ARGP_KEY_SUCCESS
The arguments being parsed did not contain any non-option arguments.
ARGP_KEY_ARG
)… ARGP_KEY_END
ARGP_KEY_SUCCESS
All non-option arguments were successfully handled by a parser function. There may be multiple parser functions if multiple argp parsers were combined.
ARGP_KEY_ARG
)… ARGP_KEY_SUCCESS
Some non-option argument went unrecognized.
This occurs when every parser function returns ARGP_KEY_UNKNOWN
for an argument, in which case parsing stops at that argument if
arg_index is a null pointer. Otherwise an error occurs.
In all cases, if a non-null value for arg_index gets passed to
argp_parse
, the index of the first unparsed command-line argument
is passed back in that value.
If an error occurs and is either detected by argp or because a parser
function returned an error value, each parser is called with
ARGP_KEY_ERROR
. No further calls are made, except the final call
with ARGP_KEY_FINI
.
Next: Functions For Use in Argp Parsers, Previous: Special Keys for Argp Parser Functions, Up: Argp Parser Functions [Contents][Index]
The third argument to argp parser functions (see Argp Parser Functions) is a pointer to a struct argp_state
, which contains
information about the state of the option parsing.
This structure has the following fields, which may be modified as noted:
const struct argp *const root_argp
The top level argp parser being parsed. Note that this is often
not the same struct argp
passed into argp_parse
by
the invoking program. See Parsing Program Options with Argp. It is an internal argp parser that
contains options implemented by argp_parse
itself, such as
‘--help’.
int argc
char **argv
The argument vector being parsed. This may be modified.
int next
The index in argv
of the next argument to be parsed. This may be
modified.
One way to consume all remaining arguments in the input is to set
state->next = state->argc
, perhaps after recording
the value of the next
field to find the consumed arguments. The
current option can be re-parsed immediately by decrementing this field,
then modifying state->argv[state->next]
to reflect
the option that should be reexamined.
unsigned flags
The flags supplied to argp_parse
. These may be modified, although
some flags may only take effect when argp_parse
is first
invoked. See Flags for argp_parse
.
unsigned arg_num
While calling a parsing function with the key argument
ARGP_KEY_ARG
, this represents the number of the current arg,
starting at 0. It is incremented after each ARGP_KEY_ARG
call
returns. At all other times, this is the number of ARGP_KEY_ARG
arguments that have been processed.
int quoted
If non-zero, the index in argv
of the first argument following a
special ‘--’ argument. This prevents anything that follows from
being interpreted as an option. It is only set after argument parsing
has proceeded past this point.
void *input
An arbitrary pointer passed in from the caller of argp_parse
, in
the input argument.
void **child_inputs
These are values that will be passed to child parsers. This vector will
be the same length as the number of children in the current parser. Each
child parser will be given the value of
state->child_inputs[i]
as its
state->input
field, where i is the index of the child
in the this parser’s children
field. See Combining Multiple Argp Parsers.
void *hook
For the parser function’s use. Initialized to 0, but otherwise ignored by argp.
char *name
The name used when printing messages. This is initialized to
argv[0]
, or program_invocation_name
if argv[0]
is
unavailable.
FILE *err_stream
FILE *out_stream
The stdio streams used when argp prints. Error messages are printed to
err_stream
, all other output, such as ‘--help’ output) to
out_stream
. These are initialized to stderr
and
stdout
respectively. See Standard Streams.
void *pstate
Private, for use by the argp implementation.
Previous: Argp Parsing State, Up: Argp Parser Functions [Contents][Index]
Argp provides a number of functions available to the user of argp (see Argp Parser Functions), mostly for producing error messages. These take as their first argument the state argument to the parser function. See Argp Parsing State.
Preliminary: | MT-Unsafe race:argpbuf env locale | AS-Unsafe heap i18n corrupt | AC-Unsafe mem corrupt lock | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
Outputs the standard usage message for the argp parser referred to by
state to state->err_stream
and terminates the program
with exit (argp_err_exit_status)
. See Argp Global Variables.
Preliminary: | MT-Unsafe race:argpbuf env locale | AS-Unsafe heap i18n corrupt | AC-Unsafe mem corrupt lock | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
Prints the printf format string fmt and following args, preceded
by the program name and ‘:’, and followed by a ‘Try … --help’ message, and terminates the program with an exit status of
argp_err_exit_status
. See Argp Global Variables.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Unsafe corrupt heap | AC-Unsafe lock corrupt mem | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
Similar to the standard GNU error-reporting function error
, this
prints the program name and ‘:’, the printf format string
fmt, and the appropriate following args. If it is non-zero, the
standard unix error text for errnum is printed. If status is
non-zero, it terminates the program with that value as its exit status.
The difference between argp_failure
and argp_error
is that
argp_error
is for parsing errors, whereas
argp_failure
is for other problems that occur during parsing but
don’t reflect a syntactic problem with the input, such as illegal values
for options, bad phase of the moon, etc.
Preliminary: | MT-Unsafe race:argpbuf env locale | AS-Unsafe heap i18n corrupt | AC-Unsafe mem corrupt lock | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
Outputs a help message for the argp parser referred to by state,
to stream. The flags argument determines what sort of help
message is produced. See Flags for the argp_help
Function.
Error output is sent to state->err_stream
, and the program
name printed is state->name
.
The output or program termination behavior of these functions may be
suppressed if the ARGP_NO_EXIT
or ARGP_NO_ERRS
flags are
passed to argp_parse
. See Flags for argp_parse
.
This behavior is useful if an argp parser is exported for use by other programs (e.g., by a library), and may be used in a context where it is not desirable to terminate the program in response to parsing errors. In argp parsers intended for such general use, and for the case where the program doesn’t terminate, calls to any of these functions should be followed by code that returns the appropriate error code:
if (bad argument syntax) { argp_usage (state); return EINVAL; }
If a parser function will only be used when ARGP_NO_EXIT
is not set, the return may be omitted.
Next: Customizing Argp Help Output, Previous: Argp Parser Functions, Up: Specifying Argp Parsers [Contents][Index]
The children
field in a struct argp
enables other argp
parsers to be combined with the referencing one for the parsing of a
single set of arguments. This field should point to a vector of
struct argp_child
, which is terminated by an entry having a value
of zero in the argp
field.
Where conflicts between combined parsers arise, as when two specify an option with the same name, the parser conflicts are resolved in favor of the parent argp parser(s), or the earlier of the argp parsers in the list of children.
An entry in the list of subsidiary argp parsers pointed to by the
children
field in a struct argp
. The fields are as
follows:
const struct argp *argp
The child argp parser, or zero to end of the list.
int flags
Flags for this child.
const char *header
If non-zero, this is an optional header to be printed within help output
before the child options. As a side-effect, a non-zero value forces the
child options to be grouped together. To achieve this effect without
actually printing a header string, use a value of ""
. As with
header strings specified in an option entry, the conventional value of
the last character is ‘:’. See Specifying Options in an Argp Parser.
int group
This is where the child options are grouped relative to the other
‘consolidated’ options in the parent argp parser. The values are the
same as the group
field in struct argp_option
. See Specifying Options in an Argp Parser. All child-groupings follow parent options at a
particular group level. If both this field and header
are zero,
then the child’s options aren’t grouped together, they are merged with
parent options at the parent option group level.
Next: The argp_help
Function, Previous: Specifying Argp Parsers, Up: Parsing Program Options with Argp [Contents][Index]
argp_parse
The default behavior of argp_parse
is designed to be convenient
for the most common case of parsing program command line argument. To
modify these defaults, the following flags may be or’d together in the
flags argument to argp_parse
:
ARGP_PARSE_ARGV0
¶Don’t ignore the first element of the argv argument to
argp_parse
. Unless ARGP_NO_ERRS
is set, the first element
of the argument vector is skipped for option parsing purposes, as it
corresponds to the program name in a command line.
ARGP_NO_ERRS
¶Don’t print error messages for unknown options to stderr
; unless
this flag is set, ARGP_PARSE_ARGV0
is ignored, as argv[0]
is used as the program name in the error messages. This flag implies
ARGP_NO_EXIT
. This is based on the assumption that silent exiting
upon errors is bad behavior.
ARGP_NO_ARGS
¶Don’t parse any non-option args. Normally these are parsed by calling
the parse functions with a key of ARGP_KEY_ARG
, the actual
argument being the value. This flag needn’t normally be set, as the
default behavior is to stop parsing as soon as an argument fails to be
parsed. See Argp Parser Functions.
ARGP_IN_ORDER
¶Parse options and arguments in the same order they occur on the command line. Normally they’re rearranged so that all options come first.
ARGP_NO_HELP
¶Don’t provide the standard long option ‘--help’, which ordinarily
causes usage and option help information to be output to stdout
and exit (0)
.
ARGP_NO_EXIT
¶Don’t exit on errors, although they may still result in error messages.
ARGP_LONG_ONLY
¶Use the GNU getopt ‘long-only’ rules for parsing arguments. This allows long-options to be recognized with only a single ‘-’ (i.e., ‘-help’). This results in a less useful interface, and its use is discouraged as it conflicts with the way most GNU programs work as well as the GNU coding standards.
ARGP_SILENT
¶Turns off any message-printing/exiting options, specifically
ARGP_NO_EXIT
, ARGP_NO_ERRS
, and ARGP_NO_HELP
.
Previous: Combining Multiple Argp Parsers, Up: Specifying Argp Parsers [Contents][Index]
The help_filter
field in a struct argp
is a pointer to a
function that filters the text of help messages before displaying
them. They have a function signature like:
char *help-filter (int key, const char *text, void *input)
Where key is either a key from an option, in which case text is that option’s help text. See Specifying Options in an Argp Parser. Alternately, one of the special keys with names beginning with ‘ARGP_KEY_HELP_’ might be used, describing which other help text text will contain. See Special Keys for Argp Help Filter Functions.
The function should return either text if it remains as-is, or a
replacement string allocated using malloc
. This will be either be
freed by argp or zero, which prints nothing. The value of text is
supplied after any translation has been done, so if any of the
replacement text needs translation, it will be done by the filter
function. input is either the input supplied to argp_parse
or it is zero, if argp_help
was called directly by the user.
The following special values may be passed to an argp help filter function as the first argument in addition to key values for user options. They specify which help text the text argument contains:
ARGP_KEY_HELP_PRE_DOC
¶The help text preceding options.
ARGP_KEY_HELP_POST_DOC
¶The help text following options.
ARGP_KEY_HELP_HEADER
¶The option header string.
ARGP_KEY_HELP_EXTRA
¶This is used after all other documentation; text is zero for this key.
ARGP_KEY_HELP_DUP_ARGS_NOTE
¶The explanatory note printed when duplicate option arguments have been suppressed.
ARGP_KEY_HELP_ARGS_DOC
¶The argument doc string; formally the args_doc
field from the argp parser. See Specifying Argp Parsers.
Next: Argp Examples, Previous: Flags for argp_parse
, Up: Parsing Program Options with Argp [Contents][Index]
argp_help
FunctionNormally programs using argp need not be written with particular
printing argument-usage-type help messages in mind as the standard
‘--help’ option is handled automatically by argp. Typical error
cases can be handled using argp_usage
and
argp_error
. See Functions For Use in Argp Parsers. However, if it’s
desirable to print a help message in some context other than parsing the
program options, argp offers the argp_help
interface.
Preliminary: | MT-Unsafe race:argpbuf env locale | AS-Unsafe heap i18n corrupt | AC-Unsafe mem corrupt lock | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This outputs a help message for the argp parser argp to stream. The type of messages printed will be determined by flags.
Any options such as ‘--help’ that are implemented automatically by
argp itself will not be present in the help output; for this
reason it is best to use argp_state_help
if calling from within
an argp parser function. See Functions For Use in Argp Parsers.
Up: The argp_help
Function [Contents][Index]
argp_help
FunctionWhen calling argp_help
(see The argp_help
Function) or
argp_state_help
(see Functions For Use in Argp Parsers) the exact output
is determined by the flags argument. This should consist of any of
the following flags, or’d together:
ARGP_HELP_USAGE
¶A unix ‘Usage:’ message that explicitly lists all options.
ARGP_HELP_SHORT_USAGE
¶A unix ‘Usage:’ message that displays an appropriate placeholder to indicate where the options go; useful for showing the non-option argument syntax.
ARGP_HELP_SEE
¶A ‘Try … for more help’ message; ‘…’ contains the program name and ‘--help’.
ARGP_HELP_LONG
¶A verbose option help message that gives each option available along with its documentation string.
ARGP_HELP_PRE_DOC
¶The part of the argp parser doc string preceding the verbose option help.
ARGP_HELP_POST_DOC
¶The part of the argp parser doc string that following the verbose option help.
ARGP_HELP_DOC
¶(ARGP_HELP_PRE_DOC | ARGP_HELP_POST_DOC)
ARGP_HELP_BUG_ADDR
¶A message that prints where to report bugs for this program, if the
argp_program_bug_address
variable contains this information.
ARGP_HELP_LONG_ONLY
¶This will modify any output to reflect the ARGP_LONG_ONLY
mode.
The following flags are only understood when used with
argp_state_help
. They control whether the function returns after
printing its output, or terminates the program:
ARGP_HELP_EXIT_ERR
¶This will terminate the program with exit (argp_err_exit_status)
.
ARGP_HELP_EXIT_OK
¶This will terminate the program with exit (0)
.
The following flags are combinations of the basic flags for printing standard messages:
ARGP_HELP_STD_ERR
¶Assuming that an error message for a parsing error has printed, this prints a message on how to get help, and terminates the program with an error.
ARGP_HELP_STD_USAGE
¶This prints a standard usage message and terminates the program with an error. This is used when no other specific error messages are appropriate or available.
ARGP_HELP_STD_HELP
¶This prints the standard response for a ‘--help’ option, and terminates the program successfully.
Next: Argp User Customization, Previous: The argp_help
Function, Up: Parsing Program Options with Argp [Contents][Index]
These example programs demonstrate the basic usage of argp.
This is perhaps the smallest program possible that uses argp. It won’t do much except give an error message and exit when there are any arguments, and prints a rather pointless message for ‘--help’.
/* This is (probably) the smallest possible program that
uses argp. It won’t do much except give an error
messages and exit when there are any arguments, and print
a (rather pointless) messages for –help. */
#include <stdlib.h>
#include <argp.h>
int
main (int argc, char **argv)
{
argp_parse (0, argc, argv, 0, 0, 0);
exit (0);
}
Next: A Program Using Argp with User Options, Previous: A Minimal Program Using Argp, Up: Argp Examples [Contents][Index]
This program doesn’t use any options or arguments, it uses argp to be compliant with the GNU standard command line format.
In addition to giving no arguments and implementing a ‘--help’ option, this example has a ‘--version’ option, which will put the given documentation string and bug address in the ‘--help’ output, as per GNU standards.
The variable argp
contains the argument parser
specification. Adding fields to this structure is the way most
parameters are passed to argp_parse
. The first three fields are
normally used, but they are not in this small program. There are also
two global variables that argp can use defined here,
argp_program_version
and argp_program_bug_address
. They
are considered global variables because they will almost always be
constant for a given program, even if they use different argument
parsers for various tasks.
/* This program doesn’t use any options or arguments, but uses argp to be compliant with the GNU standard command line format. In addition to making sure no arguments are given, and implementing a –help option, this example will have a –version option, and will put the given documentation string and bug address in the –help output, as per GNU standards. The variable ARGP contains the argument parser specification; adding fields to this structure is the way most parameters are passed to argp_parse (the first three fields are usually used, but not in this small program). There are also two global variables that argp knows about defined here, ARGP_PROGRAM_VERSION and ARGP_PROGRAM_BUG_ADDRESS (they are global variables because they will almost always be constant for a given program, even if it uses different argument parsers for various tasks). */ #include <stdlib.h> #include <argp.h> const char *argp_program_version = "argp-ex2 1.0"; const char *argp_program_bug_address = "<bug-gnu-utils@gnu.org>"; /* Program documentation. */ static char doc[] = "Argp example #2 -- a pretty minimal program using argp"; /* Our argument parser. Theoptions
,parser
, andargs_doc
fields are zero because we have neither options or arguments;doc
andargp_program_bug_address
will be used in the output for ‘--help’, and the ‘--version’ option will print outargp_program_version
. */ static struct argp argp = { 0, 0, 0, doc }; int main (int argc, char **argv) { argp_parse (&argp, argc, argv, 0, 0, 0); exit (0); }
Next: A Program Using Multiple Combined Argp Parsers, Previous: A Program Using Argp with Only Default Options, Up: Argp Examples [Contents][Index]
This program uses the same features as example 2, adding user options and arguments.
We now use the first four fields in argp
(see Specifying Argp Parsers)
and specify parse_opt
as the parser function. See Argp Parser Functions.
Note that in this example, main
uses a structure to communicate
with the parse_opt
function, a pointer to which it passes in the
input
argument to argp_parse
. See Parsing Program Options with Argp. It is retrieved
by parse_opt
through the input
field in its state
argument. See Argp Parsing State. Of course, it’s also possible to
use global variables instead, but using a structure like this is
somewhat more flexible and clean.
/* This program uses the same features as example 2, and uses options and arguments. We now use the first four fields in ARGP, so here’s a description of them: OPTIONS – A pointer to a vector of struct argp_option (see below) PARSER – A function to parse a single option, called by argp ARGS_DOC – A string describing how the non-option arguments should look DOC – A descriptive string about this program; if it contains a vertical tab character (\v), the part after it will be printed *following* the options The function PARSER takes the following arguments: KEY – An integer specifying which option this is (taken from the KEY field in each struct argp_option), or a special key specifying something else; the only special keys we use here are ARGP_KEY_ARG, meaning a non-option argument, and ARGP_KEY_END, meaning that all arguments have been parsed ARG – For an option KEY, the string value of its argument, or NULL if it has none STATE– A pointer to a struct argp_state, containing various useful information about the parsing state; used here are the INPUT field, which reflects the INPUT argument to argp_parse, and the ARG_NUM field, which is the number of the current non-option argument being parsed It should return either 0, meaning success, ARGP_ERR_UNKNOWN, meaning the given KEY wasn’t recognized, or an errno value indicating some other error. Note that in this example, main uses a structure to communicate with the parse_opt function, a pointer to which it passes in the INPUT argument to argp_parse. Of course, it’s also possible to use global variables instead, but this is somewhat more flexible. The OPTIONS field contains a pointer to a vector of struct argp_option’s; that structure has the following fields (if you assign your option structures using array initialization like this example, unspecified fields will be defaulted to 0, and need not be specified): NAME – The name of this option’s long option (may be zero) KEY – The KEY to pass to the PARSER function when parsing this option, *and* the name of this option’s short option, if it is a printable ascii character ARG – The name of this option’s argument, if any FLAGS – Flags describing this option; some of them are: OPTION_ARG_OPTIONAL – The argument to this option is optional OPTION_ALIAS – This option is an alias for the previous option OPTION_HIDDEN – Don’t show this option in –help output DOC – A documentation string for this option, shown in –help output An options vector should be terminated by an option with all fields zero. */ #include <stdlib.h> #include <argp.h> const char *argp_program_version = "argp-ex3 1.0"; const char *argp_program_bug_address = "<bug-gnu-utils@gnu.org>"; /* Program documentation. */ static char doc[] = "Argp example #3 -- a program with options and arguments using argp"; /* A description of the arguments we accept. */ static char args_doc[] = "ARG1 ARG2"; /* The options we understand. */ static struct argp_option options[] = { {"verbose", 'v', 0, 0, "Produce verbose output" }, {"quiet", 'q', 0, 0, "Don't produce any output" }, {"silent", 's', 0, OPTION_ALIAS }, {"output", 'o', "FILE", 0, "Output to FILE instead of standard output" }, { 0 } }; /* Used bymain
to communicate withparse_opt
. */ struct arguments { char *args[2]; /* arg1 & arg2 */ int silent, verbose; char *output_file; }; /* Parse a single option. */ static error_t parse_opt (int key, char *arg, struct argp_state *state) { /* Get the input argument fromargp_parse
, which we know is a pointer to our arguments structure. */ struct arguments *arguments = state->input; switch (key) { case 'q': case 's': arguments->silent = 1; break; case 'v': arguments->verbose = 1; break; case 'o': arguments->output_file = arg; break; case ARGP_KEY_ARG: if (state->arg_num >= 2) /* Too many arguments. */ argp_usage (state); arguments->args[state->arg_num] = arg; break; case ARGP_KEY_END: if (state->arg_num < 2) /* Not enough arguments. */ argp_usage (state); break; default: return ARGP_ERR_UNKNOWN; } return 0; } /* Our argp parser. */ static struct argp argp = { options, parse_opt, args_doc, doc }; int main (int argc, char **argv) { struct arguments arguments; /* Default values. */ arguments.silent = 0; arguments.verbose = 0; arguments.output_file = "-"; /* Parse our arguments; every option seen byparse_opt
will be reflected inarguments
. */ argp_parse (&argp, argc, argv, 0, 0, &arguments); printf ("ARG1 = %s\nARG2 = %s\nOUTPUT_FILE = %s\n" "VERBOSE = %s\nSILENT = %s\n", arguments.args[0], arguments.args[1], arguments.output_file, arguments.verbose ? "yes" : "no", arguments.silent ? "yes" : "no"); exit (0); }
Previous: A Program Using Argp with User Options, Up: Argp Examples [Contents][Index]
This program uses the same features as example 3, but has more options,
and presents more structure in the ‘--help’ output. It also
illustrates how you can ‘steal’ the remainder of the input arguments
past a certain point for programs that accept a list of items. It also
illustrates the key value ARGP_KEY_NO_ARGS
, which is only
given if no non-option arguments were supplied to the
program. See Special Keys for Argp Parser Functions.
For structuring help output, two features are used: headers and a
two part option string. The headers are entries in the options
vector. See Specifying Options in an Argp Parser. The first four fields are zero. The
two part documentation string are in the variable doc
, which
allows documentation both before and after the options. See Specifying Argp Parsers, the two parts of doc
are separated by a vertical-tab
character ('\v'
, or '\013'
). By convention, the
documentation before the options is a short string stating what the
program does, and after any options it is longer, describing the
behavior in more detail. All documentation strings are automatically
filled for output, although newlines may be included to force a line
break at a particular point. In addition, documentation strings are
passed to the gettext
function, for possible translation into the
current locale.
/* This program uses the same features as example 3, but has more options, and somewhat more structure in the -help output. It also shows how you can ‘steal’ the remainder of the input arguments past a certain point, for programs that accept a list of items. It also shows the special argp KEY value ARGP_KEY_NO_ARGS, which is only given if no non-option arguments were supplied to the program. For structuring the help output, two features are used, *headers* which are entries in the options vector with the first four fields being zero, and a two part documentation string (in the variable DOC), which allows documentation both before and after the options; the two parts of DOC are separated by a vertical-tab character (’\v’, or ’\013’). By convention, the documentation before the options is just a short string saying what the program does, and that afterwards is longer, describing the behavior in more detail. All documentation strings are automatically filled for output, although newlines may be included to force a line break at a particular point. All documentation strings are also passed to the ‘gettext’ function, for possible translation into the current locale. */ #include <stdlib.h> #include <error.h> #include <argp.h> const char *argp_program_version = "argp-ex4 1.0"; const char *argp_program_bug_address = "<bug-gnu-utils@prep.ai.mit.edu>"; /* Program documentation. */ static char doc[] = "Argp example #4 -- a program with somewhat more complicated\ options\ \vThis part of the documentation comes *after* the options;\ note that the text is automatically filled, but it's possible\ to force a line-break, e.g.\n<-- here."; /* A description of the arguments we accept. */ static char args_doc[] = "ARG1 [STRING...]"; /* Keys for options without short-options. */ #define OPT_ABORT 1 /* –abort */ /* The options we understand. */ static struct argp_option options[] = { {"verbose", 'v', 0, 0, "Produce verbose output" }, {"quiet", 'q', 0, 0, "Don't produce any output" }, {"silent", 's', 0, OPTION_ALIAS }, {"output", 'o', "FILE", 0, "Output to FILE instead of standard output" }, {0,0,0,0, "The following options should be grouped together:" }, {"repeat", 'r', "COUNT", OPTION_ARG_OPTIONAL, "Repeat the output COUNT (default 10) times"}, {"abort", OPT_ABORT, 0, 0, "Abort before showing any output"}, { 0 } }; /* Used bymain
to communicate withparse_opt
. */ struct arguments { char *arg1; /* arg1 */ char **strings; /* [string…] */ int silent, verbose, abort; /* ‘-s’, ‘-v’, ‘--abort’ */ char *output_file; /* file arg to ‘--output’ */ int repeat_count; /* count arg to ‘--repeat’ */ }; /* Parse a single option. */ static error_t parse_opt (int key, char *arg, struct argp_state *state) { /* Get theinput
argument fromargp_parse
, which we know is a pointer to our arguments structure. */ struct arguments *arguments = state->input; switch (key) { case 'q': case 's': arguments->silent = 1; break; case 'v': arguments->verbose = 1; break; case 'o': arguments->output_file = arg; break; case 'r': arguments->repeat_count = arg ? atoi (arg) : 10; break; case OPT_ABORT: arguments->abort = 1; break; case ARGP_KEY_NO_ARGS: argp_usage (state); case ARGP_KEY_ARG: /* Here we know thatstate->arg_num == 0
, since we force argument parsing to end before any more arguments can get here. */ arguments->arg1 = arg; /* Now we consume all the rest of the arguments.state->next
is the index instate->argv
of the next argument to be parsed, which is the first string we’re interested in, so we can just use&state->argv[state->next]
as the value for arguments->strings. In addition, by settingstate->next
to the end of the arguments, we can force argp to stop parsing here and return. */ arguments->strings = &state->argv[state->next]; state->next = state->argc; break; default: return ARGP_ERR_UNKNOWN; } return 0; } /* Our argp parser. */ static struct argp argp = { options, parse_opt, args_doc, doc }; int main (int argc, char **argv) { int i, j; struct arguments arguments; /* Default values. */ arguments.silent = 0; arguments.verbose = 0; arguments.output_file = "-"; arguments.repeat_count = 1; arguments.abort = 0; /* Parse our arguments; every option seen byparse_opt
will be reflected inarguments
. */ argp_parse (&argp, argc, argv, 0, 0, &arguments); if (arguments.abort) error (10, 0, "ABORTED"); for (i = 0; i < arguments.repeat_count; i++) { printf ("ARG1 = %s\n", arguments.arg1); printf ("STRINGS = "); for (j = 0; arguments.strings[j]; j++) printf (j == 0 ? "%s" : ", %s", arguments.strings[j]); printf ("\n"); printf ("OUTPUT_FILE = %s\nVERBOSE = %s\nSILENT = %s\n", arguments.output_file, arguments.verbose ? "yes" : "no", arguments.silent ? "yes" : "no"); } exit (0); }
Previous: Argp Examples, Up: Parsing Program Options with Argp [Contents][Index]
The formatting of argp ‘--help’ output may be controlled to some
extent by a program’s users, by setting the ARGP_HELP_FMT
environment variable to a comma-separated list of tokens. Whitespace is
ignored:
These turn duplicate-argument-mode on or off. In duplicate argument mode, if an option that accepts an argument has multiple names, the argument is shown for each name. Otherwise, it is only shown for the first long option. A note is subsequently printed so the user knows that it applies to other names as well. The default is ‘no-dup-args’, which is less consistent, but prettier.
These will enable or disable the note informing the user of suppressed option argument duplication. The default is ‘dup-args-note’.
This prints the first short option in column n. The default is 2.
This prints the first long option in column n. The default is 6.
This prints ‘documentation options’ (see Flags for Argp Options) in column n. The default is 2.
This prints the documentation for options starting in column n. The default is 29.
This will indent the group headers that document groups of options to column n. The default is 1.
This will indent continuation lines in ‘Usage:’ messages to column n. The default is 12.
This will word wrap help output at or before column n. The default is 79.
Next: Parsing of Suboptions Example, Previous: Parsing Program Options with Argp, Up: Parsing Program Arguments [Contents][Index]
Having a single level of options is sometimes not enough. There might be too many options which have to be available or a set of options is closely related.
For this case some programs use suboptions. One of the most prominent
programs is certainly mount
(8). The -o
option take one
argument which itself is a comma separated list of options. To ease the
programming of code like this the function getsubopt
is
available.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The optionp parameter must be a pointer to a variable containing the address of the string to process. When the function returns, the reference is updated to point to the next suboption or to the terminating ‘\0’ character if there are no more suboptions available.
The tokens parameter references an array of strings containing the
known suboptions. All strings must be ‘\0’ terminated and to mark
the end a null pointer must be stored. When getsubopt
finds a
possible legal suboption it compares it with all strings available in
the tokens array and returns the index in the string as the
indicator.
In case the suboption has an associated value introduced by a ‘=’ character, a pointer to the value is returned in valuep. The string is ‘\0’ terminated. If no argument is available valuep is set to the null pointer. By doing this the caller can check whether a necessary value is given or whether no unexpected value is present.
In case the next suboption in the string is not mentioned in the tokens array the starting address of the suboption including a possible value is returned in valuep and the return value of the function is ‘-1’.
Previous: Parsing of Suboptions, Up: Parsing Program Arguments [Contents][Index]
The code which might appear in the mount
(8) program is a perfect
example of the use of getsubopt
:
#include <stdio.h> #include <stdlib.h> #include <unistd.h> int do_all; const char *type; int read_size; int write_size; int read_only; enum { RO_OPTION = 0, RW_OPTION, READ_SIZE_OPTION, WRITE_SIZE_OPTION, THE_END }; const char *mount_opts[] = { [RO_OPTION] = "ro", [RW_OPTION] = "rw", [READ_SIZE_OPTION] = "rsize", [WRITE_SIZE_OPTION] = "wsize", [THE_END] = NULL }; int main (int argc, char **argv) { char *subopts, *value; int opt; while ((opt = getopt (argc, argv, "at:o:")) != -1) switch (opt) { case 'a': do_all = 1; break; case 't': type = optarg; break; case 'o': subopts = optarg; while (*subopts != '\0') switch (getsubopt (&subopts, mount_opts, &value)) { case RO_OPTION: read_only = 1; break; case RW_OPTION: read_only = 0; break; case READ_SIZE_OPTION: if (value == NULL) abort (); read_size = atoi (value); break; case WRITE_SIZE_OPTION: if (value == NULL) abort (); write_size = atoi (value); break; default: /* Unknown suboption. */ printf ("Unknown suboption `%s'\n", value); break; } break; default: abort (); } /* Do the real work. */ return 0; }
Next: Auxiliary Vector, Previous: Program Arguments, Up: The Basic Program/System Interface [Contents][Index]
When a program is executed, it receives information about the context in
which it was invoked in two ways. The first mechanism uses the
argv and argc arguments to its main
function, and is
discussed in Program Arguments. The second mechanism uses
environment variables and is discussed in this section.
The argv mechanism is typically used to pass command-line arguments specific to the particular program being invoked. The environment, on the other hand, keeps track of information that is shared by many programs, changes infrequently, and that is less frequently used.
The environment variables discussed in this section are the same
environment variables that you set using assignments and the
export
command in the shell. Programs executed from the shell
inherit all of the environment variables from the shell.
Standard environment variables are used for information about the user’s home directory, terminal type, current locale, and so on; you can define additional variables for other purposes. The set of all environment variables that have values is collectively known as the environment.
Names of environment variables are case-sensitive and must not contain the character ‘=’. System-defined environment variables are invariably uppercase.
The values of environment variables can be anything that can be represented as a string. A value must not contain an embedded null character, since this is assumed to terminate the string.
Next: Standard Environment Variables, Up: Environment Variables [Contents][Index]
The value of an environment variable can be accessed with the
getenv
function. This is declared in the header file
stdlib.h.
Libraries should use secure_getenv
instead of getenv
, so
that they do not accidentally use untrusted environment variables.
Modifications of environment variables are not allowed in
multi-threaded programs. The getenv
and secure_getenv
functions can be safely used in multi-threaded programs.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe env | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This function returns a string that is the value of the environment
variable name. You must not modify this string. In some non-Unix
systems not using the GNU C Library, it might be overwritten by subsequent
calls to getenv
(but not by any other library function). If the
environment variable name is not defined, the value is a null
pointer.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe env | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This function is similar to getenv
, but it returns a null
pointer if the environment is untrusted. This happens when the
program file has SUID or SGID bits set. General-purpose libraries
should always prefer this function over getenv
to avoid
vulnerabilities if the library is referenced from a SUID/SGID program.
This function is a GNU extension.
Preliminary: | MT-Unsafe const:env | AS-Unsafe heap lock | AC-Unsafe corrupt lock mem | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The putenv
function adds or removes definitions from the environment.
If the string is of the form ‘name=value’, the
definition is added to the environment. Otherwise, the string is
interpreted as the name of an environment variable, and any definition
for this variable in the environment is removed.
If the function is successful it returns 0
. Otherwise the return
value is nonzero and errno
is set to indicate the error.
The difference to the setenv
function is that the exact string
given as the parameter string is put into the environment. If the
user should change the string after the putenv
call this will
reflect automatically in the environment. This also requires that
string not be an automatic variable whose scope is left before the
variable is removed from the environment. The same applies of course to
dynamically allocated variables which are freed later.
This function is part of the extended Unix interface. You should define _XOPEN_SOURCE before including any header.
Preliminary: | MT-Unsafe const:env | AS-Unsafe heap lock | AC-Unsafe corrupt lock mem | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The setenv
function can be used to add a new definition to the
environment. The entry with the name name is replaced by the
value ‘name=value’. Please note that this is also true
if value is the empty string. To do this a new string is created
and the strings name and value are copied. A null pointer
for the value parameter is illegal. If the environment already
contains an entry with key name the replace parameter
controls the action. If replace is zero, nothing happens. Otherwise
the old entry is replaced by the new one.
Please note that you cannot remove an entry completely using this function.
If the function is successful it returns 0
. Otherwise the
environment is unchanged and the return value is -1
and
errno
is set.
This function was originally part of the BSD library but is now part of the Unix standard.
Preliminary: | MT-Unsafe const:env | AS-Unsafe lock | AC-Unsafe lock | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
Using this function one can remove an entry completely from the
environment. If the environment contains an entry with the key
name this whole entry is removed. A call to this function is
equivalent to a call to putenv
when the value part of the
string is empty.
The function returns -1
if name is a null pointer, points to
an empty string, or points to a string containing a =
character.
It returns 0
if the call succeeded.
This function was originally part of the BSD library but is now part of the Unix standard. The BSD version had no return value, though.
There is one more function to modify the whole environment. This function is said to be used in the POSIX.9 (POSIX bindings for Fortran 77) and so one should expect it did made it into POSIX.1. But this never happened. But we still provide this function as a GNU extension to enable writing standard compliant Fortran environments.
Preliminary: | MT-Unsafe const:env | AS-Unsafe heap lock | AC-Unsafe lock mem | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The clearenv
function removes all entries from the environment.
Using putenv
and setenv
new entries can be added again
later.
If the function is successful it returns 0
. Otherwise the return
value is nonzero.
You can deal directly with the underlying representation of environment objects to add more variables to the environment (for example, to communicate with another program you are about to execute; see Executing a File).
The environment is represented as an array of strings. Each string is of the format ‘name=value’. The order in which strings appear in the environment is not significant, but the same name must not appear more than once. The last element of the array is a null pointer.
This variable is declared in the header file unistd.h.
If you just want to get the value of an environment variable, use
getenv
.
Unix systems, and GNU systems, pass the initial value of
environ
as the third argument to main
.
See Program Arguments.
Previous: Environment Access, Up: Environment Variables [Contents][Index]
These environment variables have standard meanings. This doesn’t mean that they are always present in the environment; but if these variables are present, they have these meanings. You shouldn’t try to use these environment variable names for some other purpose.
HOME
¶This is a string representing the user’s home directory, or initial default working directory.
The user can set HOME
to any value.
If you need to make sure to obtain the proper home directory
for a particular user, you should not use HOME
; instead,
look up the user’s name in the user database (see User Database).
For most purposes, it is better to use HOME
, precisely because
this lets the user specify the value.
LOGNAME
¶This is the name that the user used to log in. Since the value in the
environment can be tweaked arbitrarily, this is not a reliable way to
identify the user who is running a program; a function like
getlogin
(see Identifying Who Logged In) is better for that purpose.
For most purposes, it is better to use LOGNAME
, precisely because
this lets the user specify the value.
PATH
¶A path is a sequence of directory names which is used for
searching for a file. The variable PATH
holds a path used
for searching for programs to be run.
The execlp
and execvp
functions (see Executing a File)
use this environment variable, as do many shells and other utilities
which are implemented in terms of those functions.
The syntax of a path is a sequence of directory names separated by colons. An empty string instead of a directory name stands for the current directory (see Working Directory).
A typical value for this environment variable might be a string like:
:/bin:/etc:/usr/bin:/usr/new/X11:/usr/new:/usr/local/bin
This means that if the user tries to execute a program named foo
,
the system will look for files named foo, /bin/foo,
/etc/foo, and so on. The first of these files that exists is
the one that is executed.
TERM
¶This specifies the kind of terminal that is receiving program output.
Some programs can make use of this information to take advantage of
special escape sequences or terminal modes supported by particular kinds
of terminals. Many programs which use the termcap library
(see Find in The Termcap Library
Manual) use the TERM
environment variable, for example.
TZ
¶This specifies the time zone. See Specifying the Time Zone with TZ
, for information about
the format of this string and how it is used.
LANG
¶This specifies the default locale to use for attribute categories where
neither LC_ALL
nor the specific environment variable for that
category is set. See Locales and Internationalization, for more information about
locales.
LC_ALL
¶If this environment variable is set it overrides the selection for all
the locales done using the other LC_*
environment variables. The
value of the other LC_*
environment variables is simply ignored
in this case.
LC_COLLATE
¶This specifies what locale to use for string sorting.
LC_CTYPE
¶This specifies what locale to use for character sets and character classification.
LC_MESSAGES
¶This specifies what locale to use for printing messages and to parse responses.
LC_MONETARY
¶This specifies what locale to use for formatting monetary values.
LC_NUMERIC
¶This specifies what locale to use for formatting numbers.
LC_TIME
¶This specifies what locale to use for formatting date/time values.
NLSPATH
¶This specifies the directories in which the catopen
function
looks for message translation catalogs.
_POSIX_OPTION_ORDER
¶If this environment variable is defined, it suppresses the usual
reordering of command line arguments by getopt
and
argp_parse
. See Program Argument Syntax Conventions.
Next: System Calls, Previous: Environment Variables, Up: The Basic Program/System Interface [Contents][Index]
When a program is executed, it receives information from the operating
system about the environment in which it is operating. The form of this
information is a table of key-value pairs, where the keys are from the
set of ‘AT_’ values in elf.h. Some of the data is provided
by the kernel for libc consumption, and may be obtained by ordinary
interfaces, such as sysconf
. However, on a platform-by-platform
basis there may be information that is not available any other way.
getauxval
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This function is used to inquire about the entries in the auxiliary
vector. The type argument should be one of the ‘AT_’ symbols
defined in elf.h. If a matching entry is found, the value is
returned; if the entry is not found, zero is returned and errno
is
set to ENOENT
.
For some platforms, the key AT_HWCAP
is the easiest way to inquire
about any instruction set extensions available at runtime. In this case,
there will (of necessity) be a platform-specific set of ‘HWCAP_’
values masked together that describe the capabilities of the cpu on which
the program is being executed.
Next: Program Termination, Previous: Auxiliary Vector, Up: The Basic Program/System Interface [Contents][Index]
A system call is a request for service that a program makes of the
kernel. The service is generally something that only the kernel has
the privilege to do, such as doing I/O. Programmers don’t normally
need to be concerned with system calls because there are functions in
the GNU C Library to do virtually everything that system calls do.
These functions work by making system calls themselves. For example,
there is a system call that changes the permissions of a file, but
you don’t need to know about it because you can just use the GNU C Library’s
chmod
function.
System calls are sometimes called kernel calls.
However, there are times when you want to make a system call explicitly,
and for that, the GNU C Library provides the syscall
function.
syscall
is harder to use and less portable than functions like
chmod
, but easier and more portable than coding the system call
in assembler instructions.
syscall
is most useful when you are working with a system call
which is special to your system or is newer than the GNU C Library you
are using. syscall
is implemented in an entirely generic way;
the function does not know anything about what a particular system
call does or even if it is valid.
The description of syscall
in this section assumes a certain
protocol for system calls on the various platforms on which the GNU C Library
runs. That protocol is not defined by any strong authority, but
we won’t describe it here either because anyone who is coding
syscall
probably won’t accept anything less than kernel and C
library source code as a specification of the interface between them
anyway.
syscall
is declared in unistd.h.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
syscall
performs a generic system call.
sysno is the system call number. Each kind of system call is identified by a number. Macros for all the possible system call numbers are defined in sys/syscall.h
The remaining arguments are the arguments for the system call, in order, and their meanings depend on the kind of system call. Each kind of system call has a definite number of arguments, from zero to five. If you code more arguments than the system call takes, the extra ones to the right are ignored.
The return value is the return value from the system call, unless the
system call failed. In that case, syscall
returns -1
and
sets errno
to an error code that the system call returned. Note
that system calls do not return -1
when they succeed.
If you specify an invalid sysno, syscall
returns -1
with errno
= ENOSYS
.
Example:
#include <unistd.h> #include <sys/syscall.h> #include <errno.h> … int rc; rc = syscall(SYS_chmod, "/etc/passwd", 0444); if (rc == -1) fprintf(stderr, "chmod failed, errno = %d\n", errno);
This, if all the compatibility stars are aligned, is equivalent to the following preferable code:
#include <sys/types.h> #include <sys/stat.h> #include <errno.h> … int rc; rc = chmod("/etc/passwd", 0444); if (rc == -1) fprintf(stderr, "chmod failed, errno = %d\n", errno);
Previous: System Calls, Up: The Basic Program/System Interface [Contents][Index]
The usual way for a program to terminate is simply for its main
function to return. The exit status value returned from the
main
function is used to report information back to the process’s
parent process or shell.
A program can also terminate normally by calling the exit
function.
In addition, programs can be terminated by signals; this is discussed in
more detail in Signal Handling. The abort
function causes
a signal that kills the program.
Next: Exit Status, Up: Program Termination [Contents][Index]
A process terminates normally when its program signals it is done by
calling exit
. Returning from main
is equivalent to
calling exit
, and the value that main
returns is used as
the argument to exit
.
Preliminary: | MT-Unsafe race:exit | AS-Unsafe corrupt | AC-Unsafe corrupt lock | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The exit
function tells the system that the program is done, which
causes it to terminate the process.
status is the program’s exit status, which becomes part of the process’ termination status. This function does not return.
Normal termination causes the following actions:
atexit
or on_exit
functions are called in the reverse order of their registration. This
mechanism allows your application to specify its own “cleanup” actions
to be performed at program termination. Typically, this is used to do
things like saving program state information in a file, or unlocking
locks in shared data bases.
tmpfile
function are removed; see Temporary Files.
_exit
is called, terminating the program. See Termination Internals.
Next: Cleanups on Exit, Previous: Normal Termination, Up: Program Termination [Contents][Index]
When a program exits, it can return to the parent process a small
amount of information about the cause of termination, using the
exit status. This is a value between 0 and 255 that the exiting
process passes as an argument to exit
.
Normally you should use the exit status to report very broad information about success or failure. You can’t provide a lot of detail about the reasons for the failure, and most parent processes would not want much detail anyway.
There are conventions for what sorts of status values certain programs should return. The most common convention is simply 0 for success and 1 for failure. Programs that perform comparison use a different convention: they use status 1 to indicate a mismatch, and status 2 to indicate an inability to compare. Your program should follow an existing convention if an existing convention makes sense for it.
A general convention reserves status values 128 and up for special purposes. In particular, the value 128 is used to indicate failure to execute another program in a subprocess. This convention is not universally obeyed, but it is a good idea to follow it in your programs.
Warning: Don’t try to use the number of errors as the exit status. This is actually not very useful; a parent process would generally not care how many errors occurred. Worse than that, it does not work, because the status value is truncated to eight bits. Thus, if the program tried to report 256 errors, the parent would receive a report of 0 errors—that is, success.
For the same reason, it does not work to use the value of errno
as the exit status—these can exceed 255.
Portability note: Some non-POSIX systems use different
conventions for exit status values. For greater portability, you can
use the macros EXIT_SUCCESS
and EXIT_FAILURE
for the
conventional status value for success and failure, respectively. They
are declared in the file stdlib.h.
This macro can be used with the exit
function to indicate
successful program completion.
On POSIX systems, the value of this macro is 0
. On other
systems, the value might be some other (possibly non-constant) integer
expression.
This macro can be used with the exit
function to indicate
unsuccessful program completion in a general sense.
On POSIX systems, the value of this macro is 1
. On other
systems, the value might be some other (possibly non-constant) integer
expression. Other nonzero status values also indicate failures. Certain
programs use different nonzero status values to indicate particular
kinds of "non-success". For example, diff
uses status value
1
to mean that the files are different, and 2
or more to
mean that there was difficulty in opening the files.
Don’t confuse a program’s exit status with a process’ termination status.
There are lots of ways a process can terminate besides having its program
finish. In the event that the process termination is caused by program
termination (i.e., exit
), though, the program’s exit status becomes
part of the process’ termination status.
Next: Aborting a Program, Previous: Exit Status, Up: Program Termination [Contents][Index]
Your program can arrange to run its own cleanup functions if normal
termination happens. If you are writing a library for use in various
application programs, then it is unreliable to insist that all
applications call the library’s cleanup functions explicitly before
exiting. It is much more robust to make the cleanup invisible to the
application, by setting up a cleanup function in the library itself
using atexit
or on_exit
.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Unsafe heap lock | AC-Unsafe lock mem | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The atexit
function registers the function function to be
called at normal program termination. The function is called with
no arguments.
The return value from atexit
is zero on success and nonzero if
the function cannot be registered.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Unsafe heap lock | AC-Unsafe lock mem | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This function is a somewhat more powerful variant of atexit
. It
accepts two arguments, a function function and an arbitrary
pointer arg. At normal program termination, the function is
called with two arguments: the status value passed to exit
,
and the arg.
This function is included in the GNU C Library only for compatibility for SunOS, and may not be supported by other implementations.
Here’s a trivial program that illustrates the use of exit
and
atexit
:
#include <stdio.h> #include <stdlib.h> void bye (void) { puts ("Goodbye, cruel world...."); } int main (void) { atexit (bye); exit (EXIT_SUCCESS); }
When this program is executed, it just prints the message and exits.
Next: Termination Internals, Previous: Cleanups on Exit, Up: Program Termination [Contents][Index]
You can abort your program using the abort
function. The prototype
for this function is in stdlib.h.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Unsafe corrupt | AC-Unsafe lock corrupt | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The abort
function causes abnormal program termination. This
does not execute cleanup functions registered with atexit
or
on_exit
.
This function actually terminates the process by raising a
SIGABRT
signal, and your program can include a handler to
intercept this signal; see Signal Handling.
Previous: Aborting a Program, Up: Program Termination [Contents][Index]
The _exit
function is the primitive used for process termination
by exit
. It is declared in the header file unistd.h.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The _exit
function is the primitive for causing a process to
terminate with status status. Calling this function does not
execute cleanup functions registered with atexit
or
on_exit
.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The _Exit
function is the ISO C equivalent to _exit
.
The ISO C committee members were not sure whether the definitions of
_exit
and _Exit
were compatible so they have not used the
POSIX name.
This function was introduced in ISO C99 and is declared in stdlib.h.
When a process terminates for any reason—either because the program terminates, or as a result of a signal—the following things happen:
wait
or waitpid
; see Process Completion. If the
program exited, this status includes as its low-order 8 bits the program
exit status.
init
process, with process ID 1.)
SIGCHLD
signal is sent to the parent process.
SIGHUP
signal is sent to each process in the foreground job,
and the controlling terminal is disassociated from that session.
See Job Control.
SIGHUP
signal and a SIGCONT
signal are sent to each process in the
group. See Job Control.
Next: Inter-Process Communication, Previous: The Basic Program/System Interface, Up: Main Menu [Contents][Index]
Processes are the primitive units for allocation of system resources. Each process has its own address space and (usually) one thread of control. A process executes a program; you can have multiple processes executing the same program, but each process has its own copy of the program within its own address space and executes it independently of the other copies.
Processes are organized hierarchically. Each process has a parent process which explicitly arranged to create it. The processes created by a given parent are called its child processes. A child inherits many of its attributes from the parent process.
This chapter describes how a program can create, terminate, and control child processes. Actually, there are three distinct operations involved: creating a new child process, causing the new process to execute a program, and coordinating the completion of the child process with the original program.
The system
function provides a simple, portable mechanism for
running another program; it does all three steps automatically. If you
need more control over the details of how this is done, you can use the
primitive functions to do each step individually instead.
Next: Process Creation Concepts, Up: Processes [Contents][Index]
The easy way to run another program is to use the system
function. This function does all the work of running a subprogram, but
it doesn’t give you much control over the details: you have to wait
until the subprogram terminates before you can do anything else.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Unsafe plugin heap lock | AC-Unsafe lock mem | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This function executes command as a shell command. In the GNU C Library,
it always uses the default shell sh
to run the command.
In particular, it searches the directories in PATH
to find
programs to execute. The return value is -1
if it wasn’t
possible to create the shell process, and otherwise is the status of the
shell process. See Process Completion, for details on how this
status code can be interpreted.
If the command argument is a null pointer, a return value of zero indicates that no command processor is available.
This function is a cancellation point in multi-threaded programs. This
is a problem if the thread allocates some resources (like memory, file
descriptors, semaphores or whatever) at the time system
is
called. If the thread gets canceled these resources stay allocated
until the program ends. To avoid this calls to system
should be
protected using cancellation handlers.
The system
function is declared in the header file
stdlib.h.
Portability Note: Some C implementations may not have any
notion of a command processor that can execute other programs. You can
determine whether a command processor exists by executing
system (NULL)
; if the return value is nonzero, a command
processor is available.
The popen
and pclose
functions (see Pipe to a Subprocess) are closely related to the system
function. They
allow the parent process to communicate with the standard input and
output channels of the command being executed.
Next: Process Identification, Previous: Running a Command, Up: Processes [Contents][Index]
This section gives an overview of processes and of the steps involved in creating a process and making it run another program.
A new processes is created when one of the functions
posix_spawn
, fork
, _Fork
or vfork
is called.
(The system
and popen
also create new processes internally.)
Due to the name of the fork
function, the act of creating a new
process is sometimes called forking a process. Each new process
(the child process or subprocess) is allocated a process
ID, distinct from the process ID of the parent process. See Process Identification.
After forking a child process, both the parent and child processes
continue to execute normally. If you want your program to wait for a
child process to finish executing before continuing, you must do this
explicitly after the fork operation, by calling wait
or
waitpid
(see Process Completion). These functions give you
limited information about why the child terminated—for example, its
exit status code.
A newly forked child process continues to execute the same program as
its parent process, at the point where the fork
or _Fork
call returns. You can use the return value from fork
or
_Fork
to tell whether the program is running in the parent process
or the child.
Having several processes run the same program is only occasionally
useful. But the child can execute another program using one of the
exec
functions; see Executing a File. The program that the
process is executing is called its process image. Starting
execution of a new program causes the process to forget all about its
previous process image; when the new program exits, the process exits
too, instead of returning to the previous process image.
Next: Creating a Process, Previous: Process Creation Concepts, Up: Processes [Contents][Index]
Each process is named by a process ID number, a value of type
pid_t
. A process ID is allocated to each process when it is
created. Process IDs are reused over time. The lifetime of a process
ends when the parent process of the corresponding process waits on the
process ID after the process has terminated. See Process Completion. (The parent process can arrange for such waiting to
happen implicitly.) A process ID uniquely identifies a process only
during the lifetime of the process. As a rule of thumb, this means
that the process must still be running.
Process IDs can also denote process groups and sessions. See Job Control.
On Linux, threads created by pthread_create
also receive a
thread ID. The thread ID of the initial (main) thread is the
same as the process ID of the entire process. Thread IDs for
subsequently created threads are distinct. They are allocated from
the same numbering space as process IDs. Process IDs and thread IDs
are sometimes also referred to collectively as task IDs. In
contrast to processes, threads are never waited for explicitly, so a
thread ID becomes eligible for reuse as soon as a thread exits or is
canceled. This is true even for joinable threads, not just detached
threads. Threads are assigned to a thread group. In
the GNU C Library implementation running on Linux, the process ID is the
thread group ID of all threads in the process.
You can get the process ID of a process by calling getpid
. The
function getppid
returns the process ID of the parent of the
current process (this is also known as the parent process ID).
Your program should include the header files unistd.h and
sys/types.h to use these functions.
The pid_t
data type is a signed integer type which is capable
of representing a process ID. In the GNU C Library, this is an int
.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The getpid
function returns the process ID of the current process.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The getppid
function returns the process ID of the parent of the
current process.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The gettid
function returns the thread ID of the current
thread. The returned value is obtained from the Linux kernel and is
not subject to caching. See the discussion of thread IDs above,
especially regarding reuse of the IDs of threads which have exited.
This function is specific to Linux.
Next: Executing a File, Previous: Process Identification, Up: Processes [Contents][Index]
The fork
function is the primitive for creating a process.
It is declared in the header file unistd.h.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Unsafe plugin | AC-Unsafe lock | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The fork
function creates a new process.
If the operation is successful, there are then both parent and child
processes and both see fork
return, but with different values: it
returns a value of 0
in the child process and returns the child’s
process ID in the parent process.
If process creation failed, fork
returns a value of -1
in
the parent process. The following errno
error conditions are
defined for fork
:
EAGAIN
There aren’t enough system resources to create another process, or the
user already has too many processes running. This means exceeding the
RLIMIT_NPROC
resource limit, which can usually be increased;
see Limiting Resource Usage.
ENOMEM
The process requires more space than the system can supply.
The specific attributes of the child process that differ from the parent process are:
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The _Fork
function is similar to fork
, but it does not invoke
any callbacks registered with pthread_atfork
, nor does it reset
any internal state or locks (such as the malloc
locks). In the
new subprocess, only async-signal-safe functions may be called, such as
dup2
or execve
.
The _Fork
function is an async-signal-safe replacement of fork
.
It is a GNU extension.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Unsafe plugin | AC-Unsafe lock | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The vfork
function is similar to fork
but on some systems
it is more efficient; however, there are restrictions you must follow to
use it safely.
While fork
makes a complete copy of the calling process’s address
space and allows both the parent and child to execute independently,
vfork
does not make this copy. Instead, the child process
created with vfork
shares its parent’s address space until it
calls _exit
or one of the exec
functions. In the
meantime, the parent process suspends execution.
You must be very careful not to allow the child process created with
vfork
to modify any global data or even local variables shared
with the parent. Furthermore, the child process cannot return from (or
do a long jump out of) the function that called vfork
! This
would leave the parent process’s control information very confused. If
in doubt, use fork
instead.
Some operating systems don’t really implement vfork
. The GNU C Library
permits you to use vfork
on all systems, but actually
executes fork
if vfork
isn’t available. If you follow
the proper precautions for using vfork
, your program will still
work even if the system uses fork
instead.
Next: Process Completion, Previous: Creating a Process, Up: Processes [Contents][Index]
This section describes the exec
family of functions, for executing
a file as a process image. You can use these functions to make a child
process execute a new program after it has been forked.
To see the effects of exec
from the point of view of the called
program, see The Basic Program/System Interface.
The functions in this family differ in how you specify the arguments, but otherwise they all do the same thing. They are declared in the header file unistd.h.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The execv
function executes the file named by filename as a
new process image.
The argv argument is an array of null-terminated strings that is
used to provide a value for the argv
argument to the main
function of the program to be executed. The last element of this array
must be a null pointer. By convention, the first element of this array
is the file name of the program sans directory names. See Program Arguments, for full details on how programs can access these arguments.
The environment for the new process image is taken from the
environ
variable of the current process image; see
Environment Variables, for information about environments.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Unsafe heap | AC-Unsafe mem | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This is similar to execv
, but the argv strings are
specified individually instead of as an array. A null pointer must be
passed as the last such argument.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This is similar to execv
, but permits you to specify the environment
for the new program explicitly as the env argument. This should
be an array of strings in the same format as for the environ
variable; see Environment Access.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This is similar to execve
, but instead of identifying the program
executable by its pathname, the file descriptor fd is used. The
descriptor must have been opened with the O_RDONLY
flag or (on
Linux) the O_PATH
flag.
On Linux, fexecve
can fail with an error of ENOSYS
if
/proc has not been mounted and the kernel lacks support for the
underlying execveat
system call.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Unsafe heap | AC-Unsafe mem | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This is similar to execl
, but permits you to specify the
environment for the new program explicitly. The environment argument is
passed following the null pointer that marks the last argv
argument, and should be an array of strings in the same format as for
the environ
variable.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe env | AS-Unsafe heap | AC-Unsafe mem | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The execvp
function is similar to execv
, except that it
searches the directories listed in the PATH
environment variable
(see Standard Environment Variables) to find the full file name of a
file from filename if filename does not contain a slash.
This function is useful for executing system utility programs, because it looks for them in the places that the user has chosen. Shells use it to run the commands that users type.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe env | AS-Unsafe heap | AC-Unsafe mem | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This function is like execl
, except that it performs the same
file name searching as the execvp
function.
The size of the argument list and environment list taken together must
not be greater than ARG_MAX
bytes. See General Capacity Limits. On
GNU/Hurd systems, the size (which compares against ARG_MAX
)
includes, for each string, the number of characters in the string, plus
the size of a char *
, plus one, rounded up to a multiple of the
size of a char *
. Other systems may have somewhat different
rules for counting.
These functions normally don’t return, since execution of a new program
causes the currently executing program to go away completely. A value
of -1
is returned in the event of a failure. In addition to the
usual file name errors (see File Name Errors), the following
errno
error conditions are defined for these functions:
E2BIG
The combined size of the new program’s argument list and environment
list is larger than ARG_MAX
bytes. GNU/Hurd systems have no
specific limit on the argument list size, so this error code cannot
result, but you may get ENOMEM
instead if the arguments are too
big for available memory.
ENOEXEC
The specified file can’t be executed because it isn’t in the right format.
ENOMEM
Executing the specified file requires more storage than is available.
If execution of the new file succeeds, it updates the access time field of the file as if the file had been read. See File Times, for more details about access times of files.
The point at which the file is closed again is not specified, but is at some point before the process exits or before another process image is executed.
Executing a new process image completely changes the contents of memory, copying only the argument and environment strings to new locations. But many other attributes of the process are unchanged:
If the set-user-ID and set-group-ID mode bits of the process image file are set, this affects the effective user ID and effective group ID (respectively) of the process. These concepts are discussed in detail in The Persona of a Process.
Signals that are set to be ignored in the existing process image are also set to be ignored in the new process image. All other signals are set to the default action in the new process image. For more information about signals, see Signal Handling.
File descriptors open in the existing process image remain open in the
new process image, unless they have the FD_CLOEXEC
(close-on-exec) flag set. The files that remain open inherit all
attributes of the open file descriptors from the existing process image,
including file locks. File descriptors are discussed in Low-Level Input/Output.
Streams, by contrast, cannot survive through exec
functions,
because they are located in the memory of the process itself. The new
process image has no streams except those it creates afresh. Each of
the streams in the pre-exec
process image has a descriptor inside
it, and these descriptors do survive through exec
(provided that
they do not have FD_CLOEXEC
set). The new process image can
reconnect these to new streams using fdopen
(see Descriptors and Streams).
Next: Process Completion Status, Previous: Executing a File, Up: Processes [Contents][Index]
The functions described in this section are used to wait for a child process to terminate or stop, and determine its status. These functions are declared in the header file sys/wait.h.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The waitpid
function is used to request status information from a
child process whose process ID is pid. Normally, the calling
process is suspended until the child process makes status information
available by terminating.
Other values for the pid argument have special interpretations. A
value of -1
or WAIT_ANY
requests status information for
any child process; a value of 0
or WAIT_MYPGRP
requests
information for any child process in the same process group as the
calling process; and any other negative value - pgid
requests information for any child process whose process group ID is
pgid.
If status information for a child process is available immediately, this
function returns immediately without waiting. If more than one eligible
child process has status information available, one of them is chosen
randomly, and its status is returned immediately. To get the status
from the other eligible child processes, you need to call waitpid
again.
The options argument is a bit mask. Its value should be the
bitwise OR (that is, the ‘|’ operator) of zero or more of the
WNOHANG
and WUNTRACED
flags. You can use the
WNOHANG
flag to indicate that the parent process shouldn’t wait;
and the WUNTRACED
flag to request status information from stopped
processes as well as processes that have terminated.
The status information from the child process is stored in the object that status-ptr points to, unless status-ptr is a null pointer.
This function is a cancellation point in multi-threaded programs. This
is a problem if the thread allocates some resources (like memory, file
descriptors, semaphores or whatever) at the time waitpid
is
called. If the thread gets canceled these resources stay allocated
until the program ends. To avoid this calls to waitpid
should be
protected using cancellation handlers.
The return value is normally the process ID of the child process whose
status is reported. If there are child processes but none of them is
waiting to be noticed, waitpid
will block until one is. However,
if the WNOHANG
option was specified, waitpid
will return
zero instead of blocking.
If a specific PID to wait for was given to waitpid
, it will
ignore all other children (if any). Therefore if there are children
waiting to be noticed but the child whose PID was specified is not one
of them, waitpid
will block or return zero as described above.
A value of -1
is returned in case of error. The following
errno
error conditions are defined for this function:
EINTR
The function was interrupted by delivery of a signal to the calling process. See Primitives Interrupted by Signals.
ECHILD
There are no child processes to wait for, or the specified pid is not a child of the calling process.
EINVAL
An invalid value was provided for the options argument.
These symbolic constants are defined as values for the pid argument
to the waitpid
function.
WAIT_ANY
¶This constant macro (whose value is -1
) specifies that
waitpid
should return status information about any child process.
WAIT_MYPGRP
¶This constant (with value 0
) specifies that waitpid
should
return status information about any child process in the same process
group as the calling process.
These symbolic constants are defined as flags for the options
argument to the waitpid
function. You can bitwise-OR the flags
together to obtain a value to use as the argument.
WNOHANG
¶This flag specifies that waitpid
should return immediately
instead of waiting, if there is no child process ready to be noticed.
WUNTRACED
¶This flag specifies that waitpid
should report the status of any
child processes that have been stopped as well as those that have
terminated.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This is a simplified version of waitpid
, and is used to wait
until any one child process terminates. The call:
wait (&status)
is exactly equivalent to:
waitpid (-1, &status, 0)
This function is a cancellation point in multi-threaded programs. This
is a problem if the thread allocates some resources (like memory, file
descriptors, semaphores or whatever) at the time wait
is
called. If the thread gets canceled these resources stay allocated
until the program ends. To avoid this calls to wait
should be
protected using cancellation handlers.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
If usage is a null pointer, wait4
is equivalent to
waitpid (pid, status-ptr, options)
.
If usage is not null, wait4
stores usage figures for the
child process in *rusage
(but only if the child has
terminated, not if it has stopped). See Resource Usage.
This function is a BSD extension.
Here’s an example of how to use waitpid
to get the status from
all child processes that have terminated, without ever waiting. This
function is designed to be a handler for SIGCHLD
, the signal that
indicates that at least one child process has terminated.
void sigchld_handler (int signum) { int pid, status, serrno; serrno = errno; while (1) { pid = waitpid (WAIT_ANY, &status, WNOHANG); if (pid < 0) { perror ("waitpid"); break; } if (pid == 0) break; notice_termination (pid, status); } errno = serrno; }
Next: BSD Process Wait Function, Previous: Process Completion, Up: Processes [Contents][Index]
If the exit status value (see Program Termination) of the child
process is zero, then the status value reported by waitpid
or
wait
is also zero. You can test for other kinds of information
encoded in the returned status value using the following macros.
These macros are defined in the header file sys/wait.h.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This macro returns a nonzero value if the child process terminated
normally with exit
or _exit
.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
If WIFEXITED
is true of status, this macro returns the
low-order 8 bits of the exit status value from the child process.
See Exit Status.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This macro returns a nonzero value if the child process terminated because it received a signal that was not handled. See Signal Handling.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
If WIFSIGNALED
is true of status, this macro returns the
signal number of the signal that terminated the child process.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This macro returns a nonzero value if the child process terminated and produced a core dump.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This macro returns a nonzero value if the child process is stopped.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
If WIFSTOPPED
is true of status, this macro returns the
signal number of the signal that caused the child process to stop.
Next: Process Creation Example, Previous: Process Completion Status, Up: Processes [Contents][Index]
The GNU C Library also provides the wait3
function for compatibility
with BSD. This function is declared in sys/wait.h. It is the
predecessor to wait4
, which is more flexible. wait3
is
now obsolete.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
If usage is a null pointer, wait3
is equivalent to
waitpid (-1, status-ptr, options)
.
If usage is not null, wait3
stores usage figures for the
child process in *rusage
(but only if the child has
terminated, not if it has stopped). See Resource Usage.
Previous: BSD Process Wait Function, Up: Processes [Contents][Index]
Here is an example program showing how you might write a function
similar to the built-in system
. It executes its command
argument using the equivalent of ‘sh -c command’.
#include <stddef.h>
#include <stdlib.h>
#include <unistd.h>
#include <sys/types.h>
#include <sys/wait.h>
/* Execute the command using this shell program. */
#define SHELL "/bin/sh"
int my_system (const char *command) { int status; pid_t pid;
pid = fork (); if (pid == 0) { /* This is the child process. Execute the shell command. */ execl (SHELL, SHELL, "-c", command, NULL); _exit (EXIT_FAILURE); } else if (pid < 0) /* The fork failed. Report failure. */ status = -1; else /* This is the parent process. Wait for the child to complete. */ if (waitpid (pid, &status, 0) != pid) status = -1; return status; }
There are a couple of things you should pay attention to in this example.
Remember that the first argv
argument supplied to the program
represents the name of the program being executed. That is why, in the
call to execl
, SHELL
is supplied once to name the program
to execute and a second time to supply a value for argv[0]
.
The execl
call in the child process doesn’t return if it is
successful. If it fails, you must do something to make the child
process terminate. Just returning a bad status code with return
would leave two processes running the original program. Instead, the
right behavior is for the child process to report failure to its parent
process.
Call _exit
to accomplish this. The reason for using _exit
instead of exit
is to avoid flushing fully buffered streams such
as stdout
. The buffers of these streams probably contain data
that was copied from the parent process by the fork
, data that
will be output eventually by the parent process. Calling exit
in
the child would output the data twice. See Termination Internals.
Next: Job Control, Previous: Processes, Up: Main Menu [Contents][Index]
This chapter describes the GNU C Library inter-process communication primitives.
The GNU C Library implements the semaphore APIs as defined in POSIX and System V. Semaphores can be used by multiple processes to coordinate shared resources. The following is a complete list of the semaphore functions provided by the GNU C Library.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Unsafe corrupt/linux | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Unsafe corrupt | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Unsafe init | AC-Unsafe init | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Unsafe lock | AC-Unsafe lock | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Unsafe init | AC-Unsafe corrupt | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Unsafe corrupt | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Unsafe corrupt | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
Next: System Databases and Name Service Switch, Previous: Inter-Process Communication, Up: Main Menu [Contents][Index]
Job control refers to the protocol for allowing a user to move between multiple process groups (or jobs) within a single login session. The job control facilities are set up so that appropriate behavior for most programs happens automatically and they need not do anything special about job control. So you can probably ignore the material in this chapter unless you are writing a shell or login program.
You need to be familiar with concepts relating to process creation (see Process Creation Concepts) and signal handling (see Signal Handling) in order to understand this material presented in this chapter.
Some old systems do not support job control, but GNU systems always
have, and it is a required feature in the 2001 revision of POSIX.1
(see POSIX (The Portable Operating System Interface)). If you need to be portable to old systems, you can
use the _POSIX_JOB_CONTROL
macro to test at compile-time
whether the system supports job control. See Overall System Options.
Next: Controlling Terminal of a Process, Up: Job Control [Contents][Index]
The fundamental purpose of an interactive shell is to read
commands from the user’s terminal and create processes to execute the
programs specified by those commands. It can do this using the
fork
(see Creating a Process) and exec
(see Executing a File) functions.
A single command may run just one process—but often one command uses
several processes. If you use the ‘|’ operator in a shell command,
you explicitly request several programs in their own processes. But
even if you run just one program, it can use multiple processes
internally. For example, a single compilation command such as ‘cc
-c foo.c’ typically uses four processes (though normally only two at any
given time). If you run make
, its job is to run other programs
in separate processes.
The processes belonging to a single command are called a process
group or job. This is so that you can operate on all of them at
once. For example, typing C-c sends the signal SIGINT
to
terminate all the processes in the foreground process group.
A session is a larger group of processes. Normally all the processes that stem from a single login belong to the same session.
Every process belongs to a process group. When a process is created, it
becomes a member of the same process group and session as its parent
process. You can put it in another process group using the
setpgid
function, provided the process group belongs to the same
session.
The only way to put a process in a different session is to make it the
initial process of a new session, or a session leader, using the
setsid
function. This also puts the session leader into a new
process group, and you can’t move it out of that process group again.
Usually, new sessions are created by the system login program, and the session leader is the process running the user’s login shell.
A shell that supports job control must arrange to control which job can use the terminal at any time. Otherwise there might be multiple jobs trying to read from the terminal at once, and confusion about which process should receive the input typed by the user. To prevent this, the shell must cooperate with the terminal driver using the protocol described in this chapter.
The shell can give unlimited access to the controlling terminal to only one process group at a time. This is called the foreground job on that controlling terminal. Other process groups managed by the shell that are executing without such access to the terminal are called background jobs.
If a background job needs to read from its controlling
terminal, it is stopped by the terminal driver; if the
TOSTOP
mode is set, likewise for writing. The user can stop
a foreground job by typing the SUSP character (see Special Characters) and a program can stop any job by sending it a
SIGSTOP
signal. It’s the responsibility of the shell to notice
when jobs stop, to notify the user about them, and to provide mechanisms
for allowing the user to interactively continue stopped jobs and switch
jobs between foreground and background.
See Access to the Controlling Terminal, for more information about I/O to the controlling terminal.
Next: Access to the Controlling Terminal, Previous: Concepts of Job Control, Up: Job Control [Contents][Index]
One of the attributes of a process is its controlling terminal. Child
processes created with fork
inherit the controlling terminal from
their parent process. In this way, all the processes in a session
inherit the controlling terminal from the session leader. A session
leader that has control of a terminal is called the controlling
process of that terminal.
You generally do not need to worry about the exact mechanism used to allocate a controlling terminal to a session, since it is done for you by the system when you log in.
An individual process disconnects from its controlling terminal when it
calls setsid
to become the leader of a new session.
See Process Group Functions.
Next: Orphaned Process Groups, Previous: Controlling Terminal of a Process, Up: Job Control [Contents][Index]
Processes in the foreground job of a controlling terminal have unrestricted access to that terminal; background processes do not. This section describes in more detail what happens when a process in a background job tries to access its controlling terminal.
When a process in a background job tries to read from its controlling
terminal, the process group is usually sent a SIGTTIN
signal.
This normally causes all of the processes in that group to stop (unless
they handle the signal and don’t stop themselves). However, if the
reading process is ignoring or blocking this signal, then read
fails with an EIO
error instead.
Similarly, when a process in a background job tries to write to its
controlling terminal, the default behavior is to send a SIGTTOU
signal to the process group. However, the behavior is modified by the
TOSTOP
bit of the local modes flags (see Local Modes). If
this bit is not set (which is the default), then writing to the
controlling terminal is always permitted without sending a signal.
Writing is also permitted if the SIGTTOU
signal is being ignored
or blocked by the writing process.
Most other terminal operations that a program can do are treated as reading or as writing. (The description of each operation should say which.)
For more information about the primitive read
and write
functions, see Input and Output Primitives.
Next: Implementing a Job Control Shell, Previous: Access to the Controlling Terminal, Up: Job Control [Contents][Index]
When a controlling process terminates, its terminal becomes free and a new session can be established on it. (In fact, another user could log in on the terminal.) This could cause a problem if any processes from the old session are still trying to use that terminal.
To prevent problems, process groups that continue running even after the session leader has terminated are marked as orphaned process groups.
When a process group becomes an orphan, its processes are sent a
SIGHUP
signal. Ordinarily, this causes the processes to
terminate. However, if a program ignores this signal or establishes a
handler for it (see Signal Handling), it can continue running as in
the orphan process group even after its controlling process terminates;
but it still cannot access the terminal any more.
Next: Functions for Job Control, Previous: Orphaned Process Groups, Up: Job Control [Contents][Index]
This section describes what a shell must do to implement job control, by presenting an extensive sample program to illustrate the concepts involved.
Next: Initializing the Shell, Up: Implementing a Job Control Shell [Contents][Index]
All of the program examples included in this chapter are part of a simple shell program. This section presents data structures and utility functions which are used throughout the example.
The sample shell deals mainly with two data structures. The
job
type contains information about a job, which is a
set of subprocesses linked together with pipes. The process
type
holds information about a single subprocess. Here are the relevant
data structure declarations:
/* A process is a single process. */ typedef struct process { struct process *next; /* next process in pipeline */ char **argv; /* for exec */ pid_t pid; /* process ID */ char completed; /* true if process has completed */ char stopped; /* true if process has stopped */ int status; /* reported status value */ } process;
/* A job is a pipeline of processes. */ typedef struct job { struct job *next; /* next active job */ char *command; /* command line, used for messages */ process *first_process; /* list of processes in this job */ pid_t pgid; /* process group ID */ char notified; /* true if user told about stopped job */ struct termios tmodes; /* saved terminal modes */ int stdin, stdout, stderr; /* standard i/o channels */ } job; /* The active jobs are linked into a list. This is its head. */ job *first_job = NULL;
Here are some utility functions that are used for operating on job
objects.
/* Find the active job with the indicated pgid. */
job *
find_job (pid_t pgid)
{
job *j;
for (j = first_job; j; j = j->next)
if (j->pgid == pgid)
return j;
return NULL;
}
/* Return true if all processes in the job have stopped or completed. */
int
job_is_stopped (job *j)
{
process *p;
for (p = j->first_process; p; p = p->next)
if (!p->completed && !p->stopped)
return 0;
return 1;
}
/* Return true if all processes in the job have completed. */
int
job_is_completed (job *j)
{
process *p;
for (p = j->first_process; p; p = p->next)
if (!p->completed)
return 0;
return 1;
}
Next: Launching Jobs, Previous: Data Structures for the Shell, Up: Implementing a Job Control Shell [Contents][Index]
When a shell program that normally performs job control is started, it has to be careful in case it has been invoked from another shell that is already doing its own job control.
A subshell that runs interactively has to ensure that it has been placed
in the foreground by its parent shell before it can enable job control
itself. It does this by getting its initial process group ID with the
getpgrp
function, and comparing it to the process group ID of the
current foreground job associated with its controlling terminal (which
can be retrieved using the tcgetpgrp
function).
If the subshell is not running as a foreground job, it must stop itself
by sending a SIGTTIN
signal to its own process group. It may not
arbitrarily put itself into the foreground; it must wait for the user to
tell the parent shell to do this. If the subshell is continued again,
it should repeat the check and stop itself again if it is still not in
the foreground.
Once the subshell has been placed into the foreground by its parent
shell, it can enable its own job control. It does this by calling
setpgid
to put itself into its own process group, and then
calling tcsetpgrp
to place this process group into the
foreground.
When a shell enables job control, it should set itself to ignore all the
job control stop signals so that it doesn’t accidentally stop itself.
You can do this by setting the action for all the stop signals to
SIG_IGN
.
A subshell that runs non-interactively cannot and should not support job control. It must leave all processes it creates in the same process group as the shell itself; this allows the non-interactive shell and its child processes to be treated as a single job by the parent shell. This is easy to do—just don’t use any of the job control primitives—but you must remember to make the shell do it.
Here is the initialization code for the sample shell that shows how to do all of this.
/* Keep track of attributes of the shell. */ #include <sys/types.h> #include <termios.h> #include <unistd.h> pid_t shell_pgid; struct termios shell_tmodes; int shell_terminal; int shell_is_interactive; /* Make sure the shell is running interactively as the foreground job before proceeding. */ void init_shell () { /* See if we are running interactively. */ shell_terminal = STDIN_FILENO; shell_is_interactive = isatty (shell_terminal); if (shell_is_interactive) { /* Loop until we are in the foreground. */ while (tcgetpgrp (shell_terminal) != (shell_pgid = getpgrp ())) kill (- shell_pgid, SIGTTIN); /* Ignore interactive and job-control signals. */ signal (SIGINT, SIG_IGN); signal (SIGQUIT, SIG_IGN); signal (SIGTSTP, SIG_IGN); signal (SIGTTIN, SIG_IGN); signal (SIGTTOU, SIG_IGN); signal (SIGCHLD, SIG_IGN); /* Put ourselves in our own process group. */ shell_pgid = getpid (); if (setpgid (shell_pgid, shell_pgid) < 0) { perror ("Couldn't put the shell in its own process group"); exit (1); } /* Grab control of the terminal. */ tcsetpgrp (shell_terminal, shell_pgid); /* Save default terminal attributes for shell. */ tcgetattr (shell_terminal, &shell_tmodes); } }
Next: Foreground and Background, Previous: Initializing the Shell, Up: Implementing a Job Control Shell [Contents][Index]
Once the shell has taken responsibility for performing job control on its controlling terminal, it can launch jobs in response to commands typed by the user.
To create the processes in a process group, you use the same fork
and exec
functions described in Process Creation Concepts.
Since there are multiple child processes involved, though, things are a
little more complicated and you must be careful to do things in the
right order. Otherwise, nasty race conditions can result.
You have two choices for how to structure the tree of parent-child relationships among the processes. You can either make all the processes in the process group be children of the shell process, or you can make one process in group be the ancestor of all the other processes in that group. The sample shell program presented in this chapter uses the first approach because it makes bookkeeping somewhat simpler.
As each process is forked, it should put itself in the new process group
by calling setpgid
; see Process Group Functions. The first
process in the new group becomes its process group leader, and its
process ID becomes the process group ID for the group.
The shell should also call setpgid
to put each of its child
processes into the new process group. This is because there is a
potential timing problem: each child process must be put in the process
group before it begins executing a new program, and the shell depends on
having all the child processes in the group before it continues
executing. If both the child processes and the shell call
setpgid
, this ensures that the right things happen no matter which
process gets to it first.
If the job is being launched as a foreground job, the new process group
also needs to be put into the foreground on the controlling terminal
using tcsetpgrp
. Again, this should be done by the shell as well
as by each of its child processes, to avoid race conditions.
The next thing each child process should do is to reset its signal actions.
During initialization, the shell process set itself to ignore job
control signals; see Initializing the Shell. As a result, any child
processes it creates also ignore these signals by inheritance. This is
definitely undesirable, so each child process should explicitly set the
actions for these signals back to SIG_DFL
just after it is forked.
Since shells follow this convention, applications can assume that they
inherit the correct handling of these signals from the parent process.
But every application has a responsibility not to mess up the handling
of stop signals. Applications that disable the normal interpretation of
the SUSP character should provide some other mechanism for the user to
stop the job. When the user invokes this mechanism, the program should
send a SIGTSTP
signal to the process group of the process, not
just to the process itself. See Signaling Another Process.
Finally, each child process should call exec
in the normal way.
This is also the point at which redirection of the standard input and
output channels should be handled. See Duplicating Descriptors,
for an explanation of how to do this.
Here is the function from the sample shell program that is responsible for launching a program. The function is executed by each child process immediately after it has been forked by the shell, and never returns.
void launch_process (process *p, pid_t pgid, int infile, int outfile, int errfile, int foreground) { pid_t pid; if (shell_is_interactive) { /* Put the process into the process group and give the process group the terminal, if appropriate. This has to be done both by the shell and in the individual child processes because of potential race conditions. */ pid = getpid (); if (pgid == 0) pgid = pid; setpgid (pid, pgid); if (foreground) tcsetpgrp (shell_terminal, pgid); /* Set the handling for job control signals back to the default. */ signal (SIGINT, SIG_DFL); signal (SIGQUIT, SIG_DFL); signal (SIGTSTP, SIG_DFL); signal (SIGTTIN, SIG_DFL); signal (SIGTTOU, SIG_DFL); signal (SIGCHLD, SIG_DFL); } /* Set the standard input/output channels of the new process. */ if (infile != STDIN_FILENO) { dup2 (infile, STDIN_FILENO); close (infile); } if (outfile != STDOUT_FILENO) { dup2 (outfile, STDOUT_FILENO); close (outfile); } if (errfile != STDERR_FILENO) { dup2 (errfile, STDERR_FILENO); close (errfile); } /* Exec the new process. Make sure we exit. */ execvp (p->argv[0], p->argv); perror ("execvp"); exit (1); }
If the shell is not running interactively, this function does not do anything with process groups or signals. Remember that a shell not performing job control must keep all of its subprocesses in the same process group as the shell itself.
Next, here is the function that actually launches a complete job. After creating the child processes, this function calls some other functions to put the newly created job into the foreground or background; these are discussed in Foreground and Background.
void launch_job (job *j, int foreground) { process *p; pid_t pid; int mypipe[2], infile, outfile; infile = j->stdin; for (p = j->first_process; p; p = p->next) { /* Set up pipes, if necessary. */ if (p->next) { if (pipe (mypipe) < 0) { perror ("pipe"); exit (1); } outfile = mypipe[1]; } else outfile = j->stdout; /* Fork the child processes. */ pid = fork (); if (pid == 0) /* This is the child process. */ launch_process (p, j->pgid, infile, outfile, j->stderr, foreground); else if (pid < 0) { /* The fork failed. */ perror ("fork"); exit (1); } else { /* This is the parent process. */ p->pid = pid; if (shell_is_interactive) { if (!j->pgid) j->pgid = pid; setpgid (pid, j->pgid); } } /* Clean up after pipes. */ if (infile != j->stdin) close (infile); if (outfile != j->stdout) close (outfile); infile = mypipe[0]; } format_job_info (j, "launched"); if (!shell_is_interactive) wait_for_job (j); else if (foreground) put_job_in_foreground (j, 0); else put_job_in_background (j, 0); }
Next: Stopped and Terminated Jobs, Previous: Launching Jobs, Up: Implementing a Job Control Shell [Contents][Index]
Now let’s consider what actions must be taken by the shell when it launches a job into the foreground, and how this differs from what must be done when a background job is launched.
When a foreground job is launched, the shell must first give it access
to the controlling terminal by calling tcsetpgrp
. Then, the
shell should wait for processes in that process group to terminate or
stop. This is discussed in more detail in Stopped and Terminated Jobs.
When all of the processes in the group have either completed or stopped,
the shell should regain control of the terminal for its own process
group by calling tcsetpgrp
again. Since stop signals caused by
I/O from a background process or a SUSP character typed by the user
are sent to the process group, normally all the processes in the job
stop together.
The foreground job may have left the terminal in a strange state, so the
shell should restore its own saved terminal modes before continuing. In
case the job is merely stopped, the shell should first save the current
terminal modes so that it can restore them later if the job is
continued. The functions for dealing with terminal modes are
tcgetattr
and tcsetattr
; these are described in
Terminal Modes.
Here is the sample shell’s function for doing all of this.
/* Put job j in the foreground. If cont is nonzero,
restore the saved terminal modes and send the process group a
SIGCONT
signal to wake it up before we block. */
void
put_job_in_foreground (job *j, int cont)
{
/* Put the job into the foreground. */
tcsetpgrp (shell_terminal, j->pgid);
/* Send the job a continue signal, if necessary. */
if (cont)
{
tcsetattr (shell_terminal, TCSADRAIN, &j->tmodes);
if (kill (- j->pgid, SIGCONT) < 0)
perror ("kill (SIGCONT)");
}
/* Wait for it to report. */ wait_for_job (j); /* Put the shell back in the foreground. */ tcsetpgrp (shell_terminal, shell_pgid);
/* Restore the shell’s terminal modes. */
tcgetattr (shell_terminal, &j->tmodes);
tcsetattr (shell_terminal, TCSADRAIN, &shell_tmodes);
}
If the process group is launched as a background job, the shell should remain in the foreground itself and continue to read commands from the terminal.
In the sample shell, there is not much that needs to be done to put a job into the background. Here is the function it uses:
/* Put a job in the background. If the cont argument is true, send
the process group a SIGCONT
signal to wake it up. */
void
put_job_in_background (job *j, int cont)
{
/* Send the job a continue signal, if necessary. */
if (cont)
if (kill (-j->pgid, SIGCONT) < 0)
perror ("kill (SIGCONT)");
}
Next: Continuing Stopped Jobs, Previous: Foreground and Background, Up: Implementing a Job Control Shell [Contents][Index]
When a foreground process is launched, the shell must block until all of
the processes in that job have either terminated or stopped. It can do
this by calling the waitpid
function; see Process Completion. Use the WUNTRACED
option so that status is reported
for processes that stop as well as processes that terminate.
The shell must also check on the status of background jobs so that it
can report terminated and stopped jobs to the user; this can be done by
calling waitpid
with the WNOHANG
option. A good place to
put a such a check for terminated and stopped jobs is just before
prompting for a new command.
The shell can also receive asynchronous notification that there is
status information available for a child process by establishing a
handler for SIGCHLD
signals. See Signal Handling.
In the sample shell program, the SIGCHLD
signal is normally
ignored. This is to avoid reentrancy problems involving the global data
structures the shell manipulates. But at specific times when the shell
is not using these data structures—such as when it is waiting for
input on the terminal—it makes sense to enable a handler for
SIGCHLD
. The same function that is used to do the synchronous
status checks (do_job_notification
, in this case) can also be
called from within this handler.
Here are the parts of the sample shell program that deal with checking the status of jobs and reporting the information to the user.
/* Store the status of the process pid that was returned by waitpid. Return 0 if all went well, nonzero otherwise. */ int mark_process_status (pid_t pid, int status) { job *j; process *p;
if (pid > 0)
{
/* Update the record for the process. */
for (j = first_job; j; j = j->next)
for (p = j->first_process; p; p = p->next)
if (p->pid == pid)
{
p->status = status;
if (WIFSTOPPED (status))
p->stopped = 1;
else
{
p->completed = 1;
if (WIFSIGNALED (status))
fprintf (stderr, "%d: Terminated by signal %d.\n",
(int) pid, WTERMSIG (p->status));
}
return 0;
}
fprintf (stderr, "No child process %d.\n", pid);
return -1;
}
else if (pid == 0 || errno == ECHILD) /* No processes ready to report. */ return -1; else { /* Other weird errors. */ perror ("waitpid"); return -1; } }
/* Check for processes that have status information available, without blocking. */ void update_status (void) { int status; pid_t pid; do pid = waitpid (WAIT_ANY, &status, WUNTRACED|WNOHANG); while (!mark_process_status (pid, status)); }
/* Check for processes that have status information available, blocking until all processes in the given job have reported. */ void wait_for_job (job *j) { int status; pid_t pid; do pid = waitpid (WAIT_ANY, &status, WUNTRACED); while (!mark_process_status (pid, status) && !job_is_stopped (j) && !job_is_completed (j)); }
/* Format information about job status for the user to look at. */
void
format_job_info (job *j, const char *status)
{
fprintf (stderr, "%ld (%s): %s\n", (long)j->pgid, status, j->command);
}
/* Notify the user about stopped or terminated jobs. Delete terminated jobs from the active job list. */ void do_job_notification (void) { job *j, *jlast, *jnext; /* Update status information for child processes. */ update_status (); jlast = NULL; for (j = first_job; j; j = jnext) { jnext = j->next; /* If all processes have completed, tell the user the job has completed and delete it from the list of active jobs. */ if (job_is_completed (j)) { format_job_info (j, "completed"); if (jlast) jlast->next = jnext; else first_job = jnext; free_job (j); } /* Notify the user about stopped jobs, marking them so that we won’t do this more than once. */ else if (job_is_stopped (j) && !j->notified) { format_job_info (j, "stopped"); j->notified = 1; jlast = j; } /* Don’t say anything about jobs that are still running. */ else jlast = j; } }
Next: The Missing Pieces, Previous: Stopped and Terminated Jobs, Up: Implementing a Job Control Shell [Contents][Index]
The shell can continue a stopped job by sending a SIGCONT
signal
to its process group. If the job is being continued in the foreground,
the shell should first invoke tcsetpgrp
to give the job access to
the terminal, and restore the saved terminal settings. After continuing
a job in the foreground, the shell should wait for the job to stop or
complete, as if the job had just been launched in the foreground.
The sample shell program handles both newly created and continued jobs
with the same pair of functions, put_job_in_foreground
and
put_job_in_background
. The definitions of these functions
were given in Foreground and Background. When continuing a
stopped job, a nonzero value is passed as the cont argument to
ensure that the SIGCONT
signal is sent and the terminal modes
reset, as appropriate.
This leaves only a function for updating the shell’s internal bookkeeping about the job being continued:
/* Mark a stopped job J as being running again. */
void
mark_job_as_running (job *j)
{
Process *p;
for (p = j->first_process; p; p = p->next)
p->stopped = 0;
j->notified = 0;
}
/* Continue the job J. */
void
continue_job (job *j, int foreground)
{
mark_job_as_running (j);
if (foreground)
put_job_in_foreground (j, 1);
else
put_job_in_background (j, 1);
}
Previous: Continuing Stopped Jobs, Up: Implementing a Job Control Shell [Contents][Index]
The code extracts for the sample shell included in this chapter are only
a part of the entire shell program. In particular, nothing at all has
been said about how job
and program
data structures are
allocated and initialized.
Most real shells provide a complex user interface that has support for a command language; variables; abbreviations, substitutions, and pattern matching on file names; and the like. All of this is far too complicated to explain here! Instead, we have concentrated on showing how to implement the core process creation and job control functions that can be called from such a shell.
Here is a table summarizing the major entry points we have presented:
void init_shell (void)
Initialize the shell’s internal state. See Initializing the Shell.
void launch_job (job *j, int foreground)
Launch the job j as either a foreground or background job. See Launching Jobs.
void do_job_notification (void)
Check for and report any jobs that have terminated or stopped. Can be
called synchronously or within a handler for SIGCHLD
signals.
See Stopped and Terminated Jobs.
void continue_job (job *j, int foreground)
Continue the job j. See Continuing Stopped Jobs.
Of course, a real shell would also want to provide other functions for
managing jobs. For example, it would be useful to have commands to list
all active jobs or to send a signal (such as SIGKILL
) to a job.
Previous: Implementing a Job Control Shell, Up: Job Control [Contents][Index]
This section contains detailed descriptions of the functions relating to job control.
Next: Process Group Functions, Up: Functions for Job Control [Contents][Index]
You can use the ctermid
function to get a file name that you can
use to open the controlling terminal. In the GNU C Library, it returns
the same string all the time: "/dev/tty"
. That is a special
“magic” file name that refers to the controlling terminal of the
current process (if it has one). To find the name of the specific
terminal device, use ttyname
; see Identifying Terminals.
The function ctermid
is declared in the header file
stdio.h.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe !posix/!string | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The ctermid
function returns a string containing the file name of
the controlling terminal for the current process. If string is
not a null pointer, it should be an array that can hold at least
L_ctermid
characters; the string is returned in this array.
Otherwise, a pointer to a string in a static area is returned, which
might get overwritten on subsequent calls to this function.
An empty string is returned if the file name cannot be determined for any reason. Even if a file name is returned, access to the file it represents is not guaranteed.
The value of this macro is an integer constant expression that
represents the size of a string large enough to hold the file name
returned by ctermid
.
See also the isatty
and ttyname
functions, in
Identifying Terminals.
Next: Functions for Controlling Terminal Access, Previous: Identifying the Controlling Terminal, Up: Functions for Job Control [Contents][Index]
Here are descriptions of the functions for manipulating process groups. Your program should include the header files sys/types.h and unistd.h to use these functions.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The setsid
function creates a new session. The calling process
becomes the session leader, and is put in a new process group whose
process group ID is the same as the process ID of that process. There
are initially no other processes in the new process group, and no other
process groups in the new session.
This function also makes the calling process have no controlling terminal.
The setsid
function returns the new process group ID of the
calling process if successful. A return value of -1
indicates an
error. The following errno
error conditions are defined for this
function:
EPERM
The calling process is already a process group leader, or there is already another process group around that has the same process group ID.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The getsid
function returns the process group ID of the session
leader of the specified process. If a pid is 0
, the
process group ID of the session leader of the current process is
returned.
In case of error -1
is returned and errno
is set. The
following errno
error conditions are defined for this function:
ESRCH
There is no process with the given process ID pid.
EPERM
The calling process and the process specified by pid are in different sessions, and the implementation doesn’t allow to access the process group ID of the session leader of the process with ID pid from the calling process.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The getpgrp
function returns the process group ID of
the calling process.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The getpgid
function
returns the process group ID of the process pid. You can supply a
value of 0
for the pid argument to get information about
the calling process.
In case of error -1
is returned and errno
is set. The
following errno
error conditions are defined for this function:
ESRCH
There is no process with the given process ID pid. The calling process and the process specified by pid are in different sessions, and the implementation doesn’t allow to access the process group ID of the process with ID pid from the calling process.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The setpgid
function puts the process pid into the process
group pgid. As a special case, either pid or pgid can
be zero to indicate the process ID of the calling process.
If the operation is successful, setpgid
returns zero. Otherwise
it returns -1
. The following errno
error conditions are
defined for this function:
EACCES
The child process named by pid has executed an exec
function since it was forked.
EINVAL
The value of the pgid is not valid.
ENOSYS
The system doesn’t support job control.
EPERM
The process indicated by the pid argument is a session leader, or is not in the same session as the calling process, or the value of the pgid argument doesn’t match a process group ID in the same session as the calling process.
ESRCH
The process indicated by the pid argument is not the calling process or a child of the calling process.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This is the BSD Unix name for setpgid
. Both functions do exactly
the same thing.
Previous: Process Group Functions, Up: Functions for Job Control [Contents][Index]
These are the functions for reading or setting the foreground process group of a terminal. You should include the header files sys/types.h and unistd.h in your application to use these functions.
Although these functions take a file descriptor argument to specify the terminal device, the foreground job is associated with the terminal file itself and not a particular open file descriptor.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This function returns the process group ID of the foreground process group associated with the terminal open on descriptor filedes.
If there is no foreground process group, the return value is a number
greater than 1
that does not match the process group ID of any
existing process group. This can happen if all of the processes in the
job that was formerly the foreground job have terminated, and no other
job has yet been moved into the foreground.
In case of an error, a value of -1
is returned. The
following errno
error conditions are defined for this function:
EBADF
The filedes argument is not a valid file descriptor.
ENOSYS
The system doesn’t support job control.
ENOTTY
The terminal file associated with the filedes argument isn’t the controlling terminal of the calling process.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This function is used to set a terminal’s foreground process group ID. The argument filedes is a descriptor which specifies the terminal; pgid specifies the process group. The calling process must be a member of the same session as pgid and must have the same controlling terminal.
For terminal access purposes, this function is treated as output. If it
is called from a background process on its controlling terminal,
normally all processes in the process group are sent a SIGTTOU
signal. The exception is if the calling process itself is ignoring or
blocking SIGTTOU
signals, in which case the operation is
performed and no signal is sent.
If successful, tcsetpgrp
returns 0
. A return value of
-1
indicates an error. The following errno
error
conditions are defined for this function:
EBADF
The filedes argument is not a valid file descriptor.
EINVAL
The pgid argument is not valid.
ENOSYS
The system doesn’t support job control.
ENOTTY
The filedes isn’t the controlling terminal of the calling process.
EPERM
The pgid isn’t a process group in the same session as the calling process.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This function is used to obtain the process group ID of the session
for which the terminal specified by fildes is the controlling terminal.
If the call is successful the group ID is returned. Otherwise the
return value is (pid_t) -1
and the global variable errno
is set to the following value:
EBADF
The filedes argument is not a valid file descriptor.
ENOTTY
The calling process does not have a controlling terminal, or the file is not the controlling terminal.
Next: Users and Groups, Previous: Job Control, Up: Main Menu [Contents][Index]
Various functions in the C Library need to be configured to work correctly in the local environment. Traditionally, this was done by using files (e.g., /etc/passwd), but other nameservices (like the Network Information Service (NIS) and the Domain Name Service (DNS)) became popular, and were hacked into the C library, usually with a fixed search order.
The GNU C Library contains a cleaner solution to this problem. It is designed after a method used by Sun Microsystems in the C library of Solaris 2. The GNU C Library follows their name and calls this scheme Name Service Switch (NSS).
Though the interface might be similar to Sun’s version there is no common code. We never saw any source code of Sun’s implementation and so the internal interface is incompatible. This also manifests in the file names we use as we will see later.
Next: The NSS Configuration File, Previous: System Databases and Name Service Switch, Up: System Databases and Name Service Switch [Contents][Index]
The basic idea is to put the implementation of the different services offered to access the databases in separate modules. This has some advantages:
To fulfill the first goal above, the ABI of the modules will be described below. For getting the implementation of a new service right it is important to understand how the functions in the modules get called. They are in no way designed to be used by the programmer directly. Instead the programmer should only use the documented and standardized functions to access the databases.
The databases available in the NSS are
aliases
Mail aliases
ethers
Ethernet numbers,
group
Groups of users, see Group Database.
gshadow
Group passphrase hashes and related information.
hosts
Host names and numbers, see Host Names.
initgroups
Supplementary group access list.
netgroup
Network wide list of host and users, see Netgroup Database.
networks
Network names and numbers, see Networks Database.
passwd
User identities, see User Database.
protocols
Network protocols, see Protocols Database.
publickey
Public keys for Secure RPC.
rpc
Remote procedure call names and numbers.
services
Network services, see The Services Database.
shadow
User passphrase hashes and related information.
More databases may be added later.
Next: NSS Module Internals, Previous: NSS Basics, Up: System Databases and Name Service Switch [Contents][Index]
Somehow the NSS code must be told about the wishes of the user. For this reason there is the file /etc/nsswitch.conf. For each database, this file contains a specification of how the lookup process should work. The file could look like this:
# /etc/nsswitch.conf # # Name Service Switch configuration file. # passwd: db files shadow: files group: db files hosts: files dns networks: files ethers: db files protocols: db files rpc: db files services: db files
The first column is the database as you can guess from the table above. The rest of the line specifies how the lookup process works. Please note that you specify the way it works for each database individually. This cannot be done with the old way of a monolithic implementation.
The configuration specification for each database can contain two different items:
files
, db
, or nis
.
[NOTFOUND=return]
.
Next: Actions in the NSS configuration, Previous: The NSS Configuration File, Up: The NSS Configuration File [Contents][Index]
The above example file mentions five different services: files
,
db
, dns
, nis
, and nisplus
. This does not
mean these
services are available on all sites and neither does it mean these are
all the services which will ever be available.
In fact, these names are simply strings which the NSS code uses to find the implicitly addressed functions. The internal interface will be described later. Visible to the user are the modules which implement an individual service.
Assume the service name shall be used for a lookup. The code for this service is implemented in a module called libnss_name. On a system supporting shared libraries this is in fact a shared library with the name (for example) libnss_name.so.2. The number at the end is the currently used version of the interface which will not change frequently. Normally the user should not have to be cognizant of these files since they should be placed in a directory where they are found automatically. Only the names of all available services are important.
Lastly, some system software may make use of the NSS configuration file
to store their own configuration for similar purposes. Examples of this
include the automount
service which is used by autofs
.
Next: Notes on the NSS Configuration File, Previous: Services in the NSS configuration File, Up: The NSS Configuration File [Contents][Index]
The second item in the specification gives the user much finer control on the lookup process. Action items are placed between two service names and are written within brackets. The general form is
[
(!
? status=
action )+]
where
status ⇒ success | notfound | unavail | tryagain action ⇒ return | continue
The case of the keywords is insignificant. The status values are the results of a call to a lookup function of a specific service. They mean:
No error occurred and the wanted entry is returned. The default action
for this is return
.
The lookup process works ok but the needed value was not found. The
default action is continue
.
The service is permanently unavailable. This can either mean the needed
file is not available, or, for DNS, the server is not available or does
not allow queries. The default action is continue
.
The service is temporarily unavailable. This could mean a file is
locked or a server currently cannot accept more connections. The
default action is continue
.
The action values mean:
If the status matches, stop the lookup process at this service specification. If an entry is available, provide it to the application. If an error occurred, report it to the application. In case of a prior ‘merge’ action, the data is combined with previous lookup results, as explained below.
If the status matches, proceed with the lookup process at the next
entry, discarding the result of the current lookup (and any merged
data). An exception is the ‘initgroups’ database and the
‘success’ status, where ‘continue’ acts like merge
below.
Proceed with the lookup process, retaining the current lookup result. This action is useful only with the ‘success’ status. If a subsequent service lookup succeeds and has a matching ‘return’ specification, the results are merged, the lookup process ends, and the merged results are returned to the application. If the following service has a matching ‘merge’ action, the lookup process continues, retaining the combined data from this and any previous lookups.
After a merge
action, errors from subsequent lookups are ignored,
and the data gathered so far will be returned.
The ‘merge’ only applies to the ‘success’ status. It is currently implemented for the ‘group’ database and its group members field, ‘gr_mem’. If specified for other databases, it causes the lookup to fail (if the status matches).
When processing ‘merge’ for ‘group’ membership, the group GID and name must be identical for both entries. If only one or the other is a match, the behavior is undefined.
If we have a line like
ethers: nisplus [NOTFOUND=return] db files
this is equivalent to
ethers: nisplus [SUCCESS=return NOTFOUND=return UNAVAIL=continue TRYAGAIN=continue] db [SUCCESS=return NOTFOUND=continue UNAVAIL=continue TRYAGAIN=continue] files
(except that it would have to be written on one line). The default value for the actions are normally what you want, and only need to be changed in exceptional cases.
If the optional !
is placed before the status this means
the following action is used for all statuses but status itself.
I.e., !
is negation as in the C language (and others).
Before we explain the exception which makes this action item necessary
one more remark: obviously it makes no sense to add another action
item after the files
service. Since there is no other service
following the action always is return
.
Now, why is this [NOTFOUND=return]
action useful? To understand
this we should know that the nisplus
service is often
complete; i.e., if an entry is not available in the NIS+ tables it is
not available anywhere else. This is what is expressed by this action
item: it is useless to examine further services since they will not give
us a result.
The situation would be different if the NIS+ service is not available
because the machine is booting. In this case the return value of the
lookup function is not notfound
but instead unavail
. And
as you can see in the complete form above: in this situation the
db
and files
services are used. Neat, isn’t it? The
system administrator need not pay special care for the time the system
is not completely ready to work (while booting or shutdown or
network problems).
Previous: Actions in the NSS configuration, Up: The NSS Configuration File [Contents][Index]
Finally a few more hints. The NSS implementation is not completely helpless if /etc/nsswitch.conf does not exist. For all supported databases there is a default value so it should normally be possible to get the system running even if the file is corrupted or missing.
For the hosts
and networks
databases the default value is
files dns
. I.e., local configuration will override the contents
of the domain name system (DNS).
The passwd
, group
, and shadow
databases was
traditionally handled in a special way. The appropriate files in the
/etc directory were read but if an entry with a name starting
with a +
character was found NIS was used. This kind of lookup
was removed and now the default value for the services is files
.
libnss_compat no longer depends on libnsl and can be used without NIS.
For all other databases the default value is files
.
A second point is that the user should try to optimize the lookup
process. The different service have different response times.
A simple file look up on a local file could be fast, but if the file
is long and the needed entry is near the end of the file this may take
quite some time. In this case it might be better to use the db
service which allows fast local access to large data sets.
Often the situation is that some global information like NIS must be
used. So it is unavoidable to use service entries like nis
etc.
But one should avoid slow services like this if possible.
Next: Extending NSS, Previous: The NSS Configuration File, Up: System Databases and Name Service Switch [Contents][Index]
Now it is time to describe what the modules look like. The functions contained in a module are identified by their names. I.e., there is no jump table or the like. How this is done is of no interest here; those interested in this topic should read about Dynamic Linking.
Next: The Interface of the Function in NSS Modules, Previous: NSS Module Internals, Up: NSS Module Internals [Contents][Index]
The name of each function consists of various parts:
_nss_service_function
service of course corresponds to the name of the module this
function is found in.4 The function part is derived
from the interface function in the C library itself. If the user calls
the function gethostbyname
and the service used is files
the function
_nss_files_gethostbyname_r
in the module
libnss_files.so.2
is used. You see, what is explained above in not the whole truth. In
fact the NSS modules only contain reentrant versions of the lookup
functions. I.e., if the user would call the gethostbyname_r
function this also would end in the above function. For all user
interface functions the C library maps this call to a call to the
reentrant function. For reentrant functions this is trivial since the
interface is (nearly) the same. For the non-reentrant version the
library keeps internal buffers which are used to replace the user
supplied buffer.
I.e., the reentrant functions can have counterparts. No service
module is forced to have functions for all databases and all kinds to
access them. If a function is not available it is simply treated as if
the function would return unavail
(see Actions in the NSS configuration).
The file name libnss_files.so.2 would be on a Solaris 2 system nss_files.so.2. This is the difference mentioned above. Sun’s NSS modules are usable as modules which get indirectly loaded only.
The NSS modules in the GNU C Library are prepared to be used as normal libraries themselves. This is not true at the moment, though. However, the organization of the name space in the modules does not make it impossible like it is for Solaris. Now you can see why the modules are still libraries.5
Previous: The Naming Scheme of the NSS Modules, Up: NSS Module Internals [Contents][Index]
Now we know about the functions contained in the modules. It is now time to describe the types. When we mentioned the reentrant versions of the functions above, this means there are some additional arguments (compared with the standard, non-reentrant versions). The prototypes for the non-reentrant and reentrant versions of our function above are:
struct hostent *gethostbyname (const char *name) int gethostbyname_r (const char *name, struct hostent *result_buf, char *buf, size_t buflen, struct hostent **result, int *h_errnop)
The actual prototype of the function in the NSS modules in this case is
enum nss_status _nss_files_gethostbyname_r (const char *name, struct hostent *result_buf, char *buf, size_t buflen, int *errnop, int *h_errnop)
I.e., the interface function is in fact the reentrant function with the
change of the return value, the omission of the result parameter,
and the addition of the errnop parameter. While the user-level
function returns a pointer to the result the reentrant function return
an enum nss_status
value:
NSS_STATUS_TRYAGAIN
¶numeric value -2
NSS_STATUS_UNAVAIL
¶numeric value -1
NSS_STATUS_NOTFOUND
¶numeric value 0
NSS_STATUS_SUCCESS
¶numeric value 1
Now you see where the action items of the /etc/nsswitch.conf file are used.
If you study the source code you will find there is a fifth value:
NSS_STATUS_RETURN
. This is an internal use only value, used by a
few functions in places where none of the above value can be used. If
necessary the source code should be examined to learn about the details.
In case the interface function has to return an error it is important
that the correct error code is stored in *errnop
. Some
return status values have only one associated error code, others have
more.
NSS_STATUS_TRYAGAIN | EAGAIN | One of the functions used ran temporarily out of resources or a service is currently not available. |
ERANGE | The provided buffer is not large enough. The function should be called again with a larger buffer. | |
NSS_STATUS_UNAVAIL | ENOENT | A necessary input file cannot be found. |
NSS_STATUS_NOTFOUND | ENOENT | The requested entry is not available. |
NSS_STATUS_NOTFOUND | SUCCESS | There are no entries. Use this to avoid returning errors for inactive services which may be enabled at a later time. This is not the same as the service being temporarily unavailable. |
These are proposed values. There can be other error codes and the
described error codes can have different meaning. With one
exception: when returning NSS_STATUS_TRYAGAIN
the error code
ERANGE
must mean that the user provided buffer is too
small. Everything else is non-critical.
In statically linked programs, the main application and NSS modules do
not share the same thread-local variable errno
, which is the
reason why there is an explicit errnop function argument.
The above function has something special which is missing for almost all
the other module functions. There is an argument h_errnop. This
points to a variable which will be filled with the error code in case
the execution of the function fails for some reason. (In statically
linked programs, the thread-local variable h_errno
is not shared
with the main application.)
The getXXXbyYYY
functions are the most important
functions in the NSS modules. But there are others which implement
the other ways to access system databases (say for the
user database, there are setpwent
, getpwent
, and
endpwent
). These will be described in more detail later.
Here we give a general way to determine the
signature of the module function:
enum nss_status
;
STRUCT_TYPE *result_buf
pointer to buffer where the result is stored. STRUCT_TYPE
is
normally a struct which corresponds to the database.
char *buffer
pointer to a buffer where the function can store additional data for the result etc.
size_t buflen
length of the buffer pointed to by buffer.
int *errnop
the low-level error code to return to the application. If the return
value is not NSS_STATUS_SUCCESS
, *errnop
needs to be
set to a non-zero value. An NSS module should never set
*errnop
to zero. The value ERANGE
is special, as
described above.
NSS_STATUS_SUCCESS
, *h_errnop
needs to be set to a
non-zero value. A generic error code is NETDB_INTERNAL
, which
instructs the caller to examine *errnop
for further
details. (This includes the ERANGE
special case.)
This table is correct for all functions but the set…ent
and end…ent
functions.
Previous: NSS Module Internals, Up: System Databases and Name Service Switch [Contents][Index]
One of the advantages of NSS mentioned above is that it can be extended quite easily. There are two ways in which the extension can happen: adding another database or adding another service. The former is normally done only by the C library developers. It is here only important to remember that adding another database is independent from adding another service because a service need not support all databases or lookup functions.
A designer/implementer of a new service is therefore free to choose the databases s/he is interested in and leave the rest for later (or completely aside).
Next: Internals of the NSS Module Functions, Previous: Extending NSS, Up: Extending NSS [Contents][Index]
The sources for a new service need not (and should not) be part of the GNU C Library itself. The developer retains complete control over the sources and its development. The links between the C library and the new service module consists solely of the interface functions.
Each module is designed following a specific interface specification.
For now the version is 2 (the interface in version 1 was not adequate)
and this manifests in the version number of the shared library object of
the NSS modules: they have the extension .2
. If the interface
changes again in an incompatible way, this number will be increased.
Modules using the old interface will still be usable.
Developers of a new service will have to make sure that their module is created using the correct interface number. This means the file itself must have the correct name and on ELF systems the soname (Shared Object Name) must also have this number. Building a module from a bunch of object files on an ELF system using GNU CC could be done like this:
gcc -shared -o libnss_NAME.so.2 -Wl,-soname,libnss_NAME.so.2 OBJECTS
Options for Linking in GNU CC, to learn more about this command line.
To use the new module the library must be able to find it. This can be
achieved by using options for the dynamic linker so that it will search
the directory where the binary is placed. For an ELF system this could be
done by adding the wanted directory to the value of
LD_LIBRARY_PATH
.
But this is not always possible since some programs (those which run
under IDs which do not belong to the user) ignore this variable.
Therefore the stable version of the module should be placed into a
directory which is searched by the dynamic linker. Normally this should
be the directory $prefix/lib, where $prefix corresponds to
the value given to configure using the --prefix
option. But be
careful: this should only be done if it is clear the module does not
cause any harm. System administrators should be careful.
Previous: Adding another Service to NSS, Up: Extending NSS [Contents][Index]
Until now we only provided the syntactic interface for the functions in the NSS module. In fact there is not much more we can say since the implementation obviously is different for each function. But a few general rules must be followed by all functions.
In fact there are four kinds of different functions which may appear in
the interface. All derive from the traditional ones for system databases.
db in the following table is normally an abbreviation for the
database (e.g., it is pw
for the user database).
enum nss_status _nss_database_setdbent (void)
This function prepares the service for following operations. For a simple file based lookup this means files could be opened, for other services this function simply is a noop.
One special case for this function is that it takes an additional
argument for some databases (i.e., the interface is
int setdbent (int)
). Host Names, which describes the
sethostent
function.
The return value should be NSS_STATUS_SUCCESS or according to the table above in case of an error (see The Interface of the Function in NSS Modules).
enum nss_status _nss_database_enddbent (void)
This function simply closes all files which are still open or removes buffer caches. If there are no files or buffers to remove this is again a simple noop.
There normally is no return value other than NSS_STATUS_SUCCESS.
enum nss_status _nss_database_getdbent_r (STRUCTURE *result, char *buffer, size_t buflen, int *errnop)
Since this function will be called several times in a row to retrieve one entry after the other it must keep some kind of state. But this also means the functions are not really reentrant. They are reentrant only in that simultaneous calls to this function will not try to write the retrieved data in the same place (as it would be the case for the non-reentrant functions); instead, it writes to the structure pointed to by the result parameter. But the calls share a common state and in the case of a file access this means they return neighboring entries in the file.
The buffer of length buflen pointed to by buffer can be used for storing some additional data for the result. It is not guaranteed that the same buffer will be passed for the next call of this function. Therefore one must not misuse this buffer to save some state information from one call to another.
Before the function returns with a failure code, the implementation
should store the value of the local errno
variable in the variable
pointed to be errnop. This is important to guarantee the module
working in statically linked programs. The stored value must not be
zero.
As explained above this function could also have an additional last
argument. This depends on the database used; it happens only for
host
and networks
.
The function shall return NSS_STATUS_SUCCESS
as long as there are
more entries. When the last entry was read it should return
NSS_STATUS_NOTFOUND
. When the buffer given as an argument is too
small for the data to be returned NSS_STATUS_TRYAGAIN
should be
returned. When the service was not formerly initialized by a call to
_nss_DATABASE_setdbent
all return values allowed for
this function can also be returned here.
enum nss_status _nss_DATABASE_getdbbyXX_r (PARAMS, STRUCTURE *result, char *buffer, size_t buflen, int *errnop)
This function shall return the entry from the database which is addressed by the PARAMS. The type and number of these arguments vary. It must be individually determined by looking to the user-level interface functions. All arguments given to the non-reentrant version are here described by PARAMS.
The result must be stored in the structure pointed to by result. If there are additional data to return (say strings, where the result structure only contains pointers) the function must use the buffer of length buflen. There must not be any references to non-constant global data.
The implementation of this function should honor the stayopen
flag set by the setDBent
function whenever this makes sense.
Before the function returns, the implementation should store the value of
the local errno
variable in the variable pointed to by
errnop. This is important to guarantee the module works in
statically linked programs.
Again, this function takes an additional last argument for the
host
and networks
database.
The return value should as always follow the rules given above (see The Interface of the Function in NSS Modules).
Next: System Management, Previous: System Databases and Name Service Switch, Up: Main Menu [Contents][Index]
Every user who can log in on the system is identified by a unique number called the user ID. Each process has an effective user ID which says which user’s access permissions it has.
Users are classified into groups for access control purposes. Each process has one or more group ID values which say which groups the process can use for access to files.
The effective user and group IDs of a process collectively form its persona. This determines which files the process can access. Normally, a process inherits its persona from the parent process, but under special circumstances a process can change its persona and thus change its access permissions.
Each file in the system also has a user ID and a group ID. Access control works by comparing the user and group IDs of the file with those of the running process.
The system keeps a database of all the registered users, and another database of all the defined groups. There are library functions you can use to examine these databases.
Next: The Persona of a Process, Up: Users and Groups [Contents][Index]
Each user account on a computer system is identified by a user name (or login name) and user ID. Normally, each user name has a unique user ID, but it is possible for several login names to have the same user ID. The user names and corresponding user IDs are stored in a data base which you can access as described in User Database.
Users are classified in groups. Each user name belongs to one default group and may also belong to any number of supplementary groups. Users who are members of the same group can share resources (such as files) that are not accessible to users who are not a member of that group. Each group has a group name and group ID. See Group Database, for how to find information about a group ID or group name.
Next: Why Change the Persona of a Process?, Previous: User and Group IDs, Up: Users and Groups [Contents][Index]
At any time, each process has an effective user ID, a effective group ID, and a set of supplementary group IDs. These IDs determine the privileges of the process. They are collectively called the persona of the process, because they determine “who it is” for purposes of access control.
Your login shell starts out with a persona which consists of your user ID, your default group ID, and your supplementary group IDs (if you are in more than one group). In normal circumstances, all your other processes inherit these values.
A process also has a real user ID which identifies the user who created the process, and a real group ID which identifies that user’s default group. These values do not play a role in access control, so we do not consider them part of the persona. But they are also important.
Both the real and effective user ID can be changed during the lifetime of a process. See Why Change the Persona of a Process?.
For details on how a process’s effective user ID and group IDs affect its permission to access files, see How Your Access to a File is Decided.
The effective user ID of a process also controls permissions for sending
signals using the kill
function. See Signaling Another Process.
Finally, there are many operations which can only be performed by a
process whose effective user ID is zero. A process with this user ID is
a privileged process. Commonly the user name root
is
associated with user ID 0, but there may be other user names with this
ID.
Next: How an Application Can Change Persona, Previous: The Persona of a Process, Up: Users and Groups [Contents][Index]
The most obvious situation where it is necessary for a process to change
its user and/or group IDs is the login
program. When
login
starts running, its user ID is root
. Its job is to
start a shell whose user and group IDs are those of the user who is
logging in. (To accomplish this fully, login
must set the real
user and group IDs as well as its persona. But this is a special case.)
The more common case of changing persona is when an ordinary user program needs access to a resource that wouldn’t ordinarily be accessible to the user actually running it.
For example, you may have a file that is controlled by your program but that shouldn’t be read or modified directly by other users, either because it implements some kind of locking protocol, or because you want to preserve the integrity or privacy of the information it contains. This kind of restricted access can be implemented by having the program change its effective user or group ID to match that of the resource.
Thus, imagine a game program that saves scores in a file. The game
program itself needs to be able to update this file no matter who is
running it, but if users can write the file without going through the
game, they can give themselves any scores they like. Some people
consider this undesirable, or even reprehensible. It can be prevented
by creating a new user ID and login name (say, games
) to own the
scores file, and make the file writable only by this user. Then, when
the game program wants to update this file, it can change its effective
user ID to be that for games
. In effect, the program must
adopt the persona of games
so it can write to the scores file.
Next: Reading the Persona of a Process, Previous: Why Change the Persona of a Process?, Up: Users and Groups [Contents][Index]
The ability to change the persona of a process can be a source of unintentional privacy violations, or even intentional abuse. Because of the potential for problems, changing persona is restricted to special circumstances.
You can’t arbitrarily set your user ID or group ID to anything you want; only privileged processes can do that. Instead, the normal way for a program to change its persona is that it has been set up in advance to change to a particular user or group. This is the function of the setuid and setgid bits of a file’s access mode. See The Mode Bits for Access Permission.
When the setuid bit of an executable file is on, executing that file gives the process a third user ID: the file user ID. This ID is set to the owner ID of the file. The system then changes the effective user ID to the file user ID. The real user ID remains as it was. Likewise, if the setgid bit is on, the process is given a file group ID equal to the group ID of the file, and its effective group ID is changed to the file group ID.
If a process has a file ID (user or group), then it can at any time change its effective ID to its real ID and back to its file ID. Programs use this feature to relinquish their special privileges except when they actually need them. This makes it less likely that they can be tricked into doing something inappropriate with their privileges.
Portability Note: Older systems do not have file IDs.
To determine if a system has this feature, you can test the compiler
define _POSIX_SAVED_IDS
. (In the POSIX standard, file IDs are
known as saved IDs.)
See File Attributes, for a more general discussion of file modes and accessibility.
Next: Setting the User ID, Previous: How an Application Can Change Persona, Up: Users and Groups [Contents][Index]
Here are detailed descriptions of the functions for reading the user and group IDs of a process, both real and effective. To use these facilities, you must include the header files sys/types.h and unistd.h.
This is an integer data type used to represent user IDs. In
the GNU C Library, this is an alias for unsigned int
.
This is an integer data type used to represent group IDs. In
the GNU C Library, this is an alias for unsigned int
.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The getuid
function returns the real user ID of the process.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The getgid
function returns the real group ID of the process.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The geteuid
function returns the effective user ID of the process.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The getegid
function returns the effective group ID of the process.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The getgroups
function is used to inquire about the supplementary
group IDs of the process. Up to count of these group IDs are
stored in the array groups; the return value from the function is
the number of group IDs actually stored. If count is smaller than
the total number of supplementary group IDs, then getgroups
returns a value of -1
and errno
is set to EINVAL
.
If count is zero, then getgroups
just returns the total
number of supplementary group IDs. On systems that do not support
supplementary groups, this will always be zero.
Here’s how to use getgroups
to read all the supplementary group
IDs:
gid_t * read_all_groups (void) { int ngroups = getgroups (0, NULL); gid_t *groups = (gid_t *) xmalloc (ngroups * sizeof (gid_t)); int val = getgroups (ngroups, groups); if (val < 0) { free (groups); return NULL; } return groups; }
Next: Setting the Group IDs, Previous: Reading the Persona of a Process, Up: Users and Groups [Contents][Index]
This section describes the functions for altering the user ID (real and/or effective) of a process. To use these facilities, you must include the header files sys/types.h and unistd.h.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Unsafe lock | AC-Unsafe lock | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This function sets the effective user ID of a process to neweuid, provided that the process is allowed to change its effective user ID. A privileged process (effective user ID zero) can change its effective user ID to any legal value. An unprivileged process with a file user ID can change its effective user ID to its real user ID or to its file user ID. Otherwise, a process may not change its effective user ID at all.
The seteuid
function returns a value of 0
to indicate
successful completion, and a value of -1
to indicate an error.
The following errno
error conditions are defined for this
function:
EINVAL
The value of the neweuid argument is invalid.
EPERM
The process may not change to the specified ID.
Older systems (those without the _POSIX_SAVED_IDS
feature) do not
have this function.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Unsafe lock | AC-Unsafe lock | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
If the calling process is privileged, this function sets both the real and effective user IDs of the process to newuid. It also deletes the file user ID of the process, if any. newuid may be any legal value. (Once this has been done, there is no way to recover the old effective user ID.)
If the process is not privileged, and the system supports the
_POSIX_SAVED_IDS
feature, then this function behaves like
seteuid
.
The return values and error conditions are the same as for seteuid
.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Unsafe lock | AC-Unsafe lock | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This function sets the real user ID of the process to ruid and the
effective user ID to euid. If ruid is -1
, it means
not to change the real user ID; likewise if euid is -1
, it
means not to change the effective user ID.
The setreuid
function exists for compatibility with 4.3 BSD Unix,
which does not support file IDs. You can use this function to swap the
effective and real user IDs of the process. (Privileged processes are
not limited to this particular usage.) If file IDs are supported, you
should use that feature instead of this function. See Enabling and Disabling Setuid Access.
The return value is 0
on success and -1
on failure.
The following errno
error conditions are defined for this
function:
EPERM
The process does not have the appropriate privileges; you do not have permission to change to the specified ID.
Next: Enabling and Disabling Setuid Access, Previous: Setting the User ID, Up: Users and Groups [Contents][Index]
This section describes the functions for altering the group IDs (real and effective) of a process. To use these facilities, you must include the header files sys/types.h and unistd.h.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Unsafe lock | AC-Unsafe lock | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This function sets the effective group ID of the process to
newgid, provided that the process is allowed to change its group
ID. Just as with seteuid
, if the process is privileged it may
change its effective group ID to any value; if it isn’t, but it has a
file group ID, then it may change to its real group ID or file group ID;
otherwise it may not change its effective group ID.
Note that a process is only privileged if its effective user ID is zero. The effective group ID only affects access permissions.
The return values and error conditions for setegid
are the same
as those for seteuid
.
This function is only present if _POSIX_SAVED_IDS
is defined.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Unsafe lock | AC-Unsafe lock | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This function sets both the real and effective group ID of the process to newgid, provided that the process is privileged. It also deletes the file group ID, if any.
If the process is not privileged, then setgid
behaves like
setegid
.
The return values and error conditions for setgid
are the same
as those for seteuid
.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Unsafe lock | AC-Unsafe lock | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This function sets the real group ID of the process to rgid and
the effective group ID to egid. If rgid is -1
, it
means not to change the real group ID; likewise if egid is
-1
, it means not to change the effective group ID.
The setregid
function is provided for compatibility with 4.3 BSD
Unix, which does not support file IDs. You can use this function to
swap the effective and real group IDs of the process. (Privileged
processes are not limited to this usage.) If file IDs are supported,
you should use that feature instead of using this function.
See Enabling and Disabling Setuid Access.
The return values and error conditions for setregid
are the same
as those for setreuid
.
setuid
and setgid
behave differently depending on whether
the effective user ID at the time is zero. If it is not zero, they
behave like seteuid
and setegid
. If it is, they change
both effective and real IDs and delete the file ID. To avoid confusion,
we recommend you always use seteuid
and setegid
except
when you know the effective user ID is zero and your intent is to change
the persona permanently. This case is rare—most of the programs that
need it, such as login
and su
, have already been written.
Note that if your program is setuid to some user other than root
,
there is no way to drop privileges permanently.
The system also lets privileged processes change their supplementary
group IDs. To use setgroups
or initgroups
, your programs
should include the header file grp.h.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Unsafe lock | AC-Unsafe lock | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This function sets the process’s supplementary group IDs. It can only be called from privileged processes. The count argument specifies the number of group IDs in the array groups.
This function returns 0
if successful and -1
on error.
The following errno
error conditions are defined for this
function:
EPERM
The calling process is not privileged.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe locale | AS-Unsafe dlopen plugin heap lock | AC-Unsafe corrupt mem fd lock | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The initgroups
function sets the process’s supplementary group
IDs to be the normal default for the user name user. The group
group is automatically included.
This function works by scanning the group database for all the groups
user belongs to. It then calls setgroups
with the list it
has constructed.
The return values and error conditions are the same as for
setgroups
.
If you are interested in the groups a particular user belongs to, but do
not want to change the process’s supplementary group IDs, you can use
getgrouplist
. To use getgrouplist
, your programs should
include the header file grp.h.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe locale | AS-Unsafe dlopen plugin heap lock | AC-Unsafe corrupt mem fd lock | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The getgrouplist
function scans the group database for all the
groups user belongs to. Up to *ngroups group IDs
corresponding to these groups are stored in the array groups; the
return value from the function is the number of group IDs actually
stored. If *ngroups is smaller than the total number of groups
found, then getgrouplist
returns a value of -1
and stores
the actual number of groups in *ngroups. The group group is
automatically included in the list of groups returned by
getgrouplist
.
Here’s how to use getgrouplist
to read all supplementary groups
for user:
gid_t * supplementary_groups (char *user) { int ngroups = 16; gid_t *groups = (gid_t *) xmalloc (ngroups * sizeof (gid_t)); struct passwd *pw = getpwnam (user); if (pw == NULL) return NULL; if (getgrouplist (pw->pw_name, pw->pw_gid, groups, &ngroups) < 0) { groups = xreallocarray (ngroups, sizeof *groups); getgrouplist (pw->pw_name, pw->pw_gid, groups, &ngroups); } return groups; }
Next: Setuid Program Example, Previous: Setting the Group IDs, Up: Users and Groups [Contents][Index]
A typical setuid program does not need its special access all of the time. It’s a good idea to turn off this access when it isn’t needed, so it can’t possibly give unintended access.
If the system supports the _POSIX_SAVED_IDS
feature, you can
accomplish this with seteuid
. When the game program starts, its
real user ID is jdoe
, its effective user ID is games
, and
its saved user ID is also games
. The program should record both
user ID values once at the beginning, like this:
user_user_id = getuid (); game_user_id = geteuid ();
Then it can turn off game file access with
seteuid (user_user_id);
and turn it on with
seteuid (game_user_id);
Throughout this process, the real user ID remains jdoe
and the
file user ID remains games
, so the program can always set its
effective user ID to either one.
On other systems that don’t support file user IDs, you can
turn setuid access on and off by using setreuid
to swap the real
and effective user IDs of the process, as follows:
setreuid (geteuid (), getuid ());
This special case is always allowed—it cannot fail.
Why does this have the effect of toggling the setuid access? Suppose a
game program has just started, and its real user ID is jdoe
while
its effective user ID is games
. In this state, the game can
write the scores file. If it swaps the two uids, the real becomes
games
and the effective becomes jdoe
; now the program has
only jdoe
access. Another swap brings games
back to
the effective user ID and restores access to the scores file.
In order to handle both kinds of systems, test for the saved user ID feature with a preprocessor conditional, like this:
#ifdef _POSIX_SAVED_IDS seteuid (user_user_id); #else setreuid (geteuid (), getuid ()); #endif
Next: Tips for Writing Setuid Programs, Previous: Enabling and Disabling Setuid Access, Up: Users and Groups [Contents][Index]
Here’s an example showing how to set up a program that changes its effective user ID.
This is part of a game program called caber-toss
that manipulates
a file scores that should be writable only by the game program
itself. The program assumes that its executable file will be installed
with the setuid bit set and owned by the same user as the scores
file. Typically, a system administrator will set up an account like
games
for this purpose.
The executable file is given mode 4755
, so that doing an
‘ls -l’ on it produces output like:
-rwsr-xr-x 1 games 184422 Jul 30 15:17 caber-toss
The setuid bit shows up in the file modes as the ‘s’.
The scores file is given mode 644
, and doing an ‘ls -l’ on
it shows:
-rw-r--r-- 1 games 0 Jul 31 15:33 scores
Here are the parts of the program that show how to set up the changed
user ID. This program is conditionalized so that it makes use of the
file IDs feature if it is supported, and otherwise uses setreuid
to swap the effective and real user IDs.
#include <stdio.h> #include <sys/types.h> #include <unistd.h> #include <stdlib.h> /* Remember the effective and real UIDs. */ static uid_t euid, ruid; /* Restore the effective UID to its original value. */ void do_setuid (void) { int status; #ifdef _POSIX_SAVED_IDS status = seteuid (euid); #else status = setreuid (ruid, euid); #endif if (status < 0) { fprintf (stderr, "Couldn't set uid.\n"); exit (status); } }
/* Set the effective UID to the real UID. */
void
undo_setuid (void)
{
int status;
#ifdef _POSIX_SAVED_IDS
status = seteuid (ruid);
#else
status = setreuid (euid, ruid);
#endif
if (status < 0) {
fprintf (stderr, "Couldn't set uid.\n");
exit (status);
}
}
/* Main program. */ int main (void) { /* Remember the real and effective user IDs. */ ruid = getuid (); euid = geteuid (); undo_setuid (); /* Do the game and record the score. */ … }
Notice how the first thing the main
function does is to set the
effective user ID back to the real user ID. This is so that any other
file accesses that are performed while the user is playing the game use
the real user ID for determining permissions. Only when the program
needs to open the scores file does it switch back to the file user ID,
like this:
/* Record the score. */ int record_score (int score) { FILE *stream; char *myname; /* Open the scores file. */ do_setuid (); stream = fopen (SCORES_FILE, "a"); undo_setuid ();
/* Write the score to the file. */
if (stream)
{
myname = cuserid (NULL);
if (score < 0)
fprintf (stream, "%10s: Couldn't lift the caber.\n", myname);
else
fprintf (stream, "%10s: %d feet.\n", myname, score);
fclose (stream);
return 0;
}
else
return -1;
}
Next: Identifying Who Logged In, Previous: Setuid Program Example, Up: Users and Groups [Contents][Index]
It is easy for setuid programs to give the user access that isn’t intended—in fact, if you want to avoid this, you need to be careful. Here are some guidelines for preventing unintended access and minimizing its consequences when it does occur:
setuid
programs with privileged user IDs such as
root
unless it is absolutely necessary. If the resource is
specific to your particular program, it’s better to define a new,
nonprivileged user ID or group ID just to manage that resource.
It’s better if you can write your program to use a special group than a
special user.
exec
functions in combination with
changing the effective user ID. Don’t let users of your program execute
arbitrary programs under a changed user ID. Executing a shell is
especially bad news. Less obviously, the execlp
and execvp
functions are a potential risk (since the program they execute depends
on the user’s PATH
environment variable).
If you must exec
another program under a changed ID, specify an
absolute file name (see File Name Resolution) for the executable,
and make sure that the protections on that executable and all
containing directories are such that ordinary users cannot replace it
with some other program.
You should also check the arguments passed to the program to make sure they do not have unexpected effects. Likewise, you should examine the environment variables. Decide which arguments and variables are safe, and reject all others.
You should never use system
in a privileged program, because it
invokes a shell.
setuid
part of your program needs to access other files
besides the controlled resource, it should verify that the real user
would ordinarily have permission to access those files. You can use the
access
function (see How Your Access to a File is Decided) to check this; it
uses the real user and group IDs, rather than the effective IDs.
Next: The User Accounting Database, Previous: Tips for Writing Setuid Programs, Up: Users and Groups [Contents][Index]
You can use the functions listed in this section to determine the login
name of the user who is running a process, and the name of the user who
logged in the current session. See also the function getuid
and
friends (see Reading the Persona of a Process). How this information is collected by
the system and how to control/add/remove information from the background
storage is described in The User Accounting Database.
The getlogin
function is declared in unistd.h, while
cuserid
and L_cuserid
are declared in stdio.h.
Preliminary: | MT-Unsafe race:getlogin race:utent sig:ALRM timer locale | AS-Unsafe dlopen plugin heap lock | AC-Unsafe corrupt lock fd mem | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The getlogin
function returns a pointer to a string containing the
name of the user logged in on the controlling terminal of the process,
or a null pointer if this information cannot be determined. The string
is statically allocated and might be overwritten on subsequent calls to
this function or to cuserid
.
Preliminary: | MT-Unsafe race:cuserid/!string locale | AS-Unsafe dlopen plugin heap lock | AC-Unsafe corrupt lock fd mem | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The cuserid
function returns a pointer to a string containing a
user name associated with the effective ID of the process. If
string is not a null pointer, it should be an array that can hold
at least L_cuserid
characters; the string is returned in this
array. Otherwise, a pointer to a string in a static area is returned.
This string is statically allocated and might be overwritten on
subsequent calls to this function or to getlogin
.
The use of this function is deprecated since it is marked to be withdrawn in XPG4.2 and has already been removed from newer revisions of POSIX.1.
An integer constant that indicates how long an array you might need to store a user name.
These functions let your program identify positively the user who is running or the user who logged in this session. (These can differ when setuid programs are involved; see The Persona of a Process.) The user cannot do anything to fool these functions.
For most purposes, it is more useful to use the environment variable
LOGNAME
to find out who the user is. This is more flexible
precisely because the user can set LOGNAME
arbitrarily.
See Standard Environment Variables.
Next: User Database, Previous: Identifying Who Logged In, Up: Users and Groups [Contents][Index]
Most Unix-like operating systems keep track of logged in users by maintaining a user accounting database. This user accounting database stores for each terminal, who has logged on, at what time, the process ID of the user’s login shell, etc., etc., but also stores information about the run level of the system, the time of the last system reboot, and possibly more.
The user accounting database typically lives in /etc/utmp, /var/adm/utmp or /var/run/utmp. However, these files should never be accessed directly. For reading information from and writing information to the user accounting database, the functions described in this section should be used.
These functions and the corresponding data structures are declared in the header file utmp.h.
The exit_status
data structure is used to hold information about
the exit status of processes marked as DEAD_PROCESS
in the user
accounting database.
short int e_termination
The exit status of the process.
short int e_exit
The exit status of the process.
The utmp
data structure is used to hold information about entries
in the user accounting database. On GNU systems it has the following
members:
short int ut_type
Specifies the type of login; one of EMPTY
, RUN_LVL
,
BOOT_TIME
, OLD_TIME
, NEW_TIME
, INIT_PROCESS
,
LOGIN_PROCESS
, USER_PROCESS
, DEAD_PROCESS
or
ACCOUNTING
.
pid_t ut_pid
The process ID number of the login process.
char ut_line[]
The device name of the tty (without /dev/).
char ut_id[]
The inittab ID of the process.
char ut_user[]
The user’s login name.
char ut_host[]
The name of the host from which the user logged in.
struct exit_status ut_exit
The exit status of a process marked as DEAD_PROCESS
.
long ut_session
The Session ID, used for windowing.
struct timeval ut_tv
Time the entry was made. For entries of type OLD_TIME
this is
the time when the system clock changed, and for entries of type
NEW_TIME
this is the time the system clock was set to.
int32_t ut_addr_v6[4]
The Internet address of a remote host.
The ut_type
, ut_pid
, ut_id
, ut_tv
, and
ut_host
fields are not available on all systems. Portable
applications therefore should be prepared for these situations. To help
do this the utmp.h header provides macros
_HAVE_UT_TYPE
, _HAVE_UT_PID
, _HAVE_UT_ID
,
_HAVE_UT_TV
, and _HAVE_UT_HOST
if the respective field is
available. The programmer can handle the situations by using
#ifdef
in the program code.
The following macros are defined for use as values for the
ut_type
member of the utmp
structure. The values are
integer constants.
EMPTY
¶This macro is used to indicate that the entry contains no valid user accounting information.
RUN_LVL
¶This macro is used to identify the system’s runlevel.
BOOT_TIME
¶This macro is used to identify the time of system boot.
OLD_TIME
¶This macro is used to identify the time when the system clock changed.
NEW_TIME
¶This macro is used to identify the time after the system clock changed.
INIT_PROCESS
¶This macro is used to identify a process spawned by the init process.
LOGIN_PROCESS
¶This macro is used to identify the session leader of a logged in user.
USER_PROCESS
¶This macro is used to identify a user process.
DEAD_PROCESS
¶This macro is used to identify a terminated process.
ACCOUNTING
¶???
The size of the ut_line
, ut_id
, ut_user
and
ut_host
arrays can be found using the sizeof
operator.
Many older systems have, instead of an ut_tv
member, an
ut_time
member, usually of type time_t
, for representing
the time associated with the entry. Therefore, for backwards
compatibility only, utmp.h defines ut_time
as an alias for
ut_tv.tv_sec
.
Preliminary: | MT-Unsafe race:utent | AS-Unsafe lock | AC-Unsafe lock fd | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This function opens the user accounting database to begin scanning it.
You can then call getutent
, getutid
or getutline
to
read entries and pututline
to write entries.
If the database is already open, it resets the input to the beginning of the database.
Preliminary: | MT-Unsafe init race:utent race:utentbuf sig:ALRM timer | AS-Unsafe heap lock | AC-Unsafe lock fd mem | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The getutent
function reads the next entry from the user
accounting database. It returns a pointer to the entry, which is
statically allocated and may be overwritten by subsequent calls to
getutent
. You must copy the contents of the structure if you
wish to save the information or you can use the getutent_r
function which stores the data in a user-provided buffer.
A null pointer is returned in case no further entry is available.
Preliminary: | MT-Unsafe race:utent | AS-Unsafe lock | AC-Unsafe lock fd | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This function closes the user accounting database.
Preliminary: | MT-Unsafe init race:utent sig:ALRM timer | AS-Unsafe lock heap | AC-Unsafe lock mem fd | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This function searches forward from the current point in the database
for an entry that matches id. If the ut_type
member of the
id structure is one of RUN_LVL
, BOOT_TIME
,
OLD_TIME
or NEW_TIME
the entries match if the
ut_type
members are identical. If the ut_type
member of
the id structure is INIT_PROCESS
, LOGIN_PROCESS
,
USER_PROCESS
or DEAD_PROCESS
, the entries match if the
ut_type
member of the entry read from the database is one of
these four, and the ut_id
members match. However if the
ut_id
member of either the id structure or the entry read
from the database is empty it checks if the ut_line
members match
instead. If a matching entry is found, getutid
returns a pointer
to the entry, which is statically allocated, and may be overwritten by a
subsequent call to getutent
, getutid
or getutline
.
You must copy the contents of the structure if you wish to save the
information.
A null pointer is returned in case the end of the database is reached without a match.
The getutid
function may cache the last read entry. Therefore,
if you are using getutid
to search for multiple occurrences, it
is necessary to zero out the static data after each call. Otherwise
getutid
could just return a pointer to the same entry over and
over again.
Preliminary: | MT-Unsafe init race:utent sig:ALRM timer | AS-Unsafe heap lock | AC-Unsafe lock fd mem | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This function searches forward from the current point in the database
until it finds an entry whose ut_type
value is
LOGIN_PROCESS
or USER_PROCESS
, and whose ut_line
member matches the ut_line
member of the line structure.
If it finds such an entry, it returns a pointer to the entry which is
statically allocated, and may be overwritten by a subsequent call to
getutent
, getutid
or getutline
. You must copy the
contents of the structure if you wish to save the information.
A null pointer is returned in case the end of the database is reached without a match.
The getutline
function may cache the last read entry. Therefore
if you are using getutline
to search for multiple occurrences, it
is necessary to zero out the static data after each call. Otherwise
getutline
could just return a pointer to the same entry over and
over again.
Preliminary: | MT-Unsafe race:utent sig:ALRM timer | AS-Unsafe lock | AC-Unsafe lock fd | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The pututline
function inserts the entry *utmp
at
the appropriate place in the user accounting database. If it finds that
it is not already at the correct place in the database, it uses
getutid
to search for the position to insert the entry, however
this will not modify the static structure returned by getutent
,
getutid
and getutline
. If this search fails, the entry
is appended to the database.
The pututline
function returns a pointer to a copy of the entry
inserted in the user accounting database, or a null pointer if the entry
could not be added. The following errno
error conditions are
defined for this function:
EPERM
The process does not have the appropriate privileges; you cannot modify the user accounting database.
All the get*
functions mentioned before store the information
they return in a static buffer. This can be a problem in multi-threaded
programs since the data returned for the request is overwritten by the
return value data in another thread. Therefore the GNU C Library
provides as extensions three more functions which return the data in a
user-provided buffer.
Preliminary: | MT-Unsafe race:utent sig:ALRM timer | AS-Unsafe lock | AC-Unsafe lock fd | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The getutent_r
is equivalent to the getutent
function. It
returns the next entry from the database. But instead of storing the
information in a static buffer it stores it in the buffer pointed to by
the parameter buffer.
If the call was successful, the function returns 0
and the
pointer variable pointed to by the parameter result contains a
pointer to the buffer which contains the result (this is most probably
the same value as buffer). If something went wrong during the
execution of getutent_r
the function returns -1
.
This function is a GNU extension.
Preliminary: | MT-Unsafe race:utent sig:ALRM timer | AS-Unsafe lock | AC-Unsafe lock fd | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This function retrieves just like getutid
the next entry matching
the information stored in id. But the result is stored in the
buffer pointed to by the parameter buffer.
If successful the function returns 0
and the pointer variable
pointed to by the parameter result contains a pointer to the
buffer with the result (probably the same as result. If not
successful the function return -1
.
This function is a GNU extension.
Preliminary: | MT-Unsafe race:utent sig:ALRM timer | AS-Unsafe lock | AC-Unsafe lock fd | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This function retrieves just like getutline
the next entry
matching the information stored in line. But the result is stored
in the buffer pointed to by the parameter buffer.
If successful the function returns 0
and the pointer variable
pointed to by the parameter result contains a pointer to the
buffer with the result (probably the same as result. If not
successful the function return -1
.
This function is a GNU extension.
In addition to the user accounting database, most systems keep a number of similar databases. For example most systems keep a log file with all previous logins (usually in /etc/wtmp or /var/log/wtmp).
For specifying which database to examine, the following function should be used.
Preliminary: | MT-Unsafe race:utent | AS-Unsafe lock heap | AC-Unsafe lock mem | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The utmpname
function changes the name of the database to be
examined to file, and closes any previously opened database. By
default getutent
, getutid
, getutline
and
pututline
read from and write to the user accounting database.
The following macros are defined for use as the file argument:
This macro is used to specify the user accounting database.
This macro is used to specify the user accounting log file.
The utmpname
function returns a value of 0
if the new name
was successfully stored, and a value of -1
to indicate an error.
Note that utmpname
does not try to open the database, and that
therefore the return value does not say anything about whether the
database can be successfully opened.
Specially for maintaining log-like databases the GNU C Library provides the following function:
Preliminary: | MT-Unsafe sig:ALRM timer | AS-Unsafe | AC-Unsafe fd | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The updwtmp
function appends the entry *utmp to the
database specified by wtmp_file. For possible values for the
wtmp_file argument see the utmpname
function.
Portability Note: Although many operating systems provide a
subset of these functions, they are not standardized. There are often
subtle differences in the return types, and there are considerable
differences between the various definitions of struct utmp
. When
programming for the GNU C Library, it is probably best to stick
with the functions described in this section. If however, you want your
program to be portable, consider using the XPG functions described in
XPG User Accounting Database Functions, or take a look at the BSD compatible functions in
Logging In and Out.
Next: Logging In and Out, Previous: Manipulating the User Accounting Database, Up: The User Accounting Database [Contents][Index]
These functions, described in the X/Open Portability Guide, are declared in the header file utmpx.h.
The utmpx
data structure contains at least the following members:
short int ut_type
Specifies the type of login; one of EMPTY
, RUN_LVL
,
BOOT_TIME
, OLD_TIME
, NEW_TIME
, INIT_PROCESS
,
LOGIN_PROCESS
, USER_PROCESS
or DEAD_PROCESS
.
pid_t ut_pid
The process ID number of the login process.
char ut_line[]
The device name of the tty (without /dev/).
char ut_id[]
The inittab ID of the process.
char ut_user[]
The user’s login name.
struct timeval ut_tv
Time the entry was made. For entries of type OLD_TIME
this is
the time when the system clock changed, and for entries of type
NEW_TIME
this is the time the system clock was set to.
In the GNU C Library, struct utmpx
is identical to struct
utmp
except for the fact that including utmpx.h does not make
visible the declaration of struct exit_status
.
The following macros are defined for use as values for the
ut_type
member of the utmpx
structure. The values are
integer constants and are, in the GNU C Library, identical to the
definitions in utmp.h.
EMPTY
¶This macro is used to indicate that the entry contains no valid user accounting information.
RUN_LVL
¶This macro is used to identify the system’s runlevel.
BOOT_TIME
¶This macro is used to identify the time of system boot.
OLD_TIME
¶This macro is used to identify the time when the system clock changed.
NEW_TIME
¶This macro is used to identify the time after the system clock changed.
INIT_PROCESS
¶This macro is used to identify a process spawned by the init process.
LOGIN_PROCESS
¶This macro is used to identify the session leader of a logged in user.
USER_PROCESS
¶This macro is used to identify a user process.
DEAD_PROCESS
¶This macro is used to identify a terminated process.
The size of the ut_line
, ut_id
and ut_user
arrays
can be found using the sizeof
operator.
Preliminary: | MT-Unsafe race:utent | AS-Unsafe lock | AC-Unsafe lock fd | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This function is similar to setutent
. In the GNU C Library it is
simply an alias for setutent
.
Preliminary: | MT-Unsafe init race:utent sig:ALRM timer | AS-Unsafe heap lock | AC-Unsafe lock fd mem | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The getutxent
function is similar to getutent
, but returns
a pointer to a struct utmpx
instead of struct utmp
. In
the GNU C Library it simply is an alias for getutent
.
Preliminary: | MT-Unsafe race:utent | AS-Unsafe lock | AC-Unsafe lock | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This function is similar to endutent
. In the GNU C Library it is
simply an alias for endutent
.
Preliminary: | MT-Unsafe init race:utent sig:ALRM timer | AS-Unsafe lock heap | AC-Unsafe lock mem fd | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This function is similar to getutid
, but uses struct utmpx
instead of struct utmp
. In the GNU C Library it is simply an alias
for getutid
.
Preliminary: | MT-Unsafe init race:utent sig:ALRM timer | AS-Unsafe heap lock | AC-Unsafe lock fd mem | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This function is similar to getutid
, but uses struct utmpx
instead of struct utmp
. In the GNU C Library it is simply an alias
for getutline
.
Preliminary: | MT-Unsafe race:utent sig:ALRM timer | AS-Unsafe lock | AC-Unsafe lock fd | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The pututxline
function is functionally identical to
pututline
, but uses struct utmpx
instead of struct
utmp
. In the GNU C Library, pututxline
is simply an alias for
pututline
.
Preliminary: | MT-Unsafe race:utent | AS-Unsafe lock heap | AC-Unsafe lock mem | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The utmpxname
function is functionally identical to
utmpname
. In the GNU C Library, utmpxname
is simply an
alias for utmpname
.
You can translate between a traditional struct utmp
and an XPG
struct utmpx
with the following functions. In the GNU C Library,
these functions are merely copies, since the two structures are
identical.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
getutmp
copies the information, insofar as the structures are
compatible, from utmpx to utmp.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
getutmpx
copies the information, insofar as the structures are
compatible, from utmp to utmpx.
Previous: XPG User Accounting Database Functions, Up: The User Accounting Database [Contents][Index]
These functions, derived from BSD, are available in the separate libutil library, and declared in utmp.h.
Note that the ut_user
member of struct utmp
is called
ut_name
in BSD. Therefore, ut_name
is defined as an alias
for ut_user
in utmp.h.
Preliminary: | MT-Unsafe race:ttyname | AS-Unsafe heap lock | AC-Unsafe lock fd mem | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This function makes filedes the controlling terminal of the current process, redirects standard input, standard output and standard error output to this terminal, and closes filedes.
This function returns 0
on successful completion, and -1
on error.
Preliminary: | MT-Unsafe race:utent sig:ALRM timer | AS-Unsafe lock heap | AC-Unsafe lock corrupt fd mem | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The login
functions inserts an entry into the user accounting
database. The ut_line
member is set to the name of the terminal
on standard input. If standard input is not a terminal login
uses standard output or standard error output to determine the name of
the terminal. If struct utmp
has a ut_type
member,
login
sets it to USER_PROCESS
, and if there is an
ut_pid
member, it will be set to the process ID of the current
process. The remaining entries are copied from entry.
A copy of the entry is written to the user accounting log file.
Preliminary: | MT-Unsafe race:utent sig:ALRM timer | AS-Unsafe lock heap | AC-Unsafe lock fd mem | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This function modifies the user accounting database to indicate that the user on ut_line has logged out.
The logout
function returns 1
if the entry was successfully
written to the database, or 0
on error.
Preliminary: | MT-Unsafe sig:ALRM timer | AS-Unsafe | AC-Unsafe fd | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The logwtmp
function appends an entry to the user accounting log
file, for the current time and the information provided in the
ut_line, ut_name and ut_host arguments.
Portability Note: The BSD struct utmp
only has the
ut_line
, ut_name
, ut_host
and ut_time
members. Older systems do not even have the ut_host
member.
Next: Group Database, Previous: The User Accounting Database, Up: Users and Groups [Contents][Index]
This section describes how to search and scan the database of registered users. The database itself is kept in the file /etc/passwd on most systems, but on some systems a special network server gives access to it.
Historically, this database included one-way hashes of user passphrases (see Passphrase Storage) as well as public information about each user (such as their user ID and full name). Many of the functions and data structures associated with this database, and the filename /etc/passwd itself, reflect this history. However, the information in this database is available to all users, and it is no longer considered safe to make passphrase hashes available to all users, so they have been moved to a “shadow” database that can only be accessed with special privileges.
Next: Looking Up One User, Up: User Database [Contents][Index]
The functions and data structures for accessing the system user database are declared in the header file pwd.h.
The passwd
data structure is used to hold information about
entries in the system user data base. It has at least the following members:
char *pw_name
The user’s login name.
char *pw_passwd
Historically, this field would hold the one-way hash of the user’s passphrase. Nowadays, it will almost always be the single character ‘x’, indicating that the hash is in the shadow database.
uid_t pw_uid
The user ID number.
gid_t pw_gid
The user’s default group ID number.
char *pw_gecos
A string typically containing the user’s real name, and possibly other information such as a phone number.
char *pw_dir
The user’s home directory, or initial working directory. This might be a null pointer, in which case the interpretation is system-dependent.
char *pw_shell
The user’s default shell, or the initial program run when the user logs in. This might be a null pointer, indicating that the system default should be used.
Next: Scanning the List of All Users, Previous: The Data Structure that Describes a User, Up: User Database [Contents][Index]
You can search the system user database for information about a
specific user using getpwuid
or getpwnam
. These
functions are declared in pwd.h.
Preliminary: | MT-Unsafe race:pwuid locale | AS-Unsafe dlopen plugin heap lock | AC-Unsafe corrupt lock fd mem | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This function returns a pointer to a statically-allocated structure
containing information about the user whose user ID is uid. This
structure may be overwritten on subsequent calls to getpwuid
.
A null pointer value indicates there is no user in the data base with user ID uid.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe locale | AS-Unsafe dlopen plugin heap lock | AC-Unsafe corrupt lock fd mem | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This function is similar to getpwuid
in that it returns
information about the user whose user ID is uid. However, it
fills the user supplied structure pointed to by result_buf with
the information instead of using a static buffer. The first
buflen bytes of the additional buffer pointed to by buffer
are used to contain additional information, normally strings which are
pointed to by the elements of the result structure.
If a user with ID uid is found, the pointer returned in
result points to the record which contains the wanted data (i.e.,
result contains the value result_buf). If no user is found
or if an error occurred, the pointer returned in result is a null
pointer. The function returns zero or an error code. If the buffer
buffer is too small to contain all the needed information, the
error code ERANGE
is returned and errno
is set to
ERANGE
.
Preliminary: | MT-Unsafe race:pwnam locale | AS-Unsafe dlopen plugin heap lock | AC-Unsafe corrupt lock fd mem | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This function returns a pointer to a statically-allocated structure
containing information about the user whose user name is name.
This structure may be overwritten on subsequent calls to
getpwnam
.
A null pointer return indicates there is no user named name.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe locale | AS-Unsafe dlopen plugin heap lock | AC-Unsafe corrupt lock fd mem | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This function is similar to getpwnam
in that it returns
information about the user whose user name is name. However, like
getpwuid_r
, it fills the user supplied buffers in
result_buf and buffer with the information instead of using
a static buffer.
The return values are the same as for getpwuid_r
.
Next: Writing a User Entry, Previous: Looking Up One User, Up: User Database [Contents][Index]
This section explains how a program can read the list of all users in the system, one user at a time. The functions described here are declared in pwd.h.
You can use the fgetpwent
function to read user entries from a
particular file.
Preliminary: | MT-Unsafe race:fpwent | AS-Unsafe corrupt lock | AC-Unsafe corrupt lock | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This function reads the next user entry from stream and returns a
pointer to the entry. The structure is statically allocated and is
rewritten on subsequent calls to fgetpwent
. You must copy the
contents of the structure if you wish to save the information.
The stream must correspond to a file in the same format as the standard user database file.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Unsafe corrupt | AC-Unsafe corrupt lock | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This function is similar to fgetpwent
in that it reads the next
user entry from stream. But the result is returned in the
structure pointed to by result_buf. The
first buflen bytes of the additional buffer pointed to by
buffer are used to contain additional information, normally
strings which are pointed to by the elements of the result structure.
The stream must correspond to a file in the same format as the standard user database file.
If the function returns zero result points to the structure with the wanted data (normally this is in result_buf). If errors occurred the return value is nonzero and result contains a null pointer.
The way to scan all the entries in the user database is with
setpwent
, getpwent
, and endpwent
.
Preliminary: | MT-Unsafe race:pwent locale | AS-Unsafe dlopen plugin heap lock | AC-Unsafe corrupt lock fd mem | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This function initializes a stream which getpwent
and
getpwent_r
use to read the user database.
Preliminary: | MT-Unsafe race:pwent race:pwentbuf locale | AS-Unsafe dlopen plugin heap lock | AC-Unsafe corrupt lock fd mem | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The getpwent
function reads the next entry from the stream
initialized by setpwent
. It returns a pointer to the entry. The
structure is statically allocated and is rewritten on subsequent calls
to getpwent
. You must copy the contents of the structure if you
wish to save the information.
A null pointer is returned when no more entries are available.
Preliminary: | MT-Unsafe race:pwent locale | AS-Unsafe dlopen plugin heap lock | AC-Unsafe corrupt lock fd mem | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This function is similar to getpwent
in that it returns the next
entry from the stream initialized by setpwent
. Like
fgetpwent_r
, it uses the user-supplied buffers in
result_buf and buffer to return the information requested.
The return values are the same as for fgetpwent_r
.
Preliminary: | MT-Unsafe race:pwent locale | AS-Unsafe dlopen plugin heap lock | AC-Unsafe corrupt lock fd mem | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This function closes the internal stream used by getpwent
or
getpwent_r
.
Previous: Scanning the List of All Users, Up: User Database [Contents][Index]
Preliminary: | MT-Safe locale | AS-Unsafe corrupt | AC-Unsafe lock corrupt | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This function writes the user entry *p
to the stream
stream, in the format used for the standard user database
file. The return value is zero on success and nonzero on failure.
This function exists for compatibility with SVID. We recommend that you
avoid using it, because it makes sense only on the assumption that the
struct passwd
structure has no members except the standard ones;
on a system which merges the traditional Unix data base with other
extended information about users, adding an entry using this function
would inevitably leave out much of the important information.
The group and user ID fields are left empty if the group or user name starts with a - or +.
The function putpwent
is declared in pwd.h.
Next: User and Group Database Example, Previous: User Database, Up: Users and Groups [Contents][Index]
This section describes how to search and scan the database of registered groups. The database itself is kept in the file /etc/group on most systems, but on some systems a special network service provides access to it.
Next: Looking Up One Group, Up: Group Database [Contents][Index]
The functions and data structures for accessing the system group database are declared in the header file grp.h.
The group
structure is used to hold information about an entry in
the system group database. It has at least the following members:
char *gr_name
The name of the group.
gid_t gr_gid
The group ID of the group.
char **gr_mem
A vector of pointers to the names of users in the group. Each user name is a null-terminated string, and the vector itself is terminated by a null pointer.
Next: Scanning the List of All Groups, Previous: The Data Structure for a Group, Up: Group Database [Contents][Index]
You can search the group database for information about a specific
group using getgrgid
or getgrnam
. These functions are
declared in grp.h.
Preliminary: | MT-Unsafe race:grgid locale | AS-Unsafe dlopen plugin heap lock | AC-Unsafe corrupt lock fd mem | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This function returns a pointer to a statically-allocated structure
containing information about the group whose group ID is gid.
This structure may be overwritten by subsequent calls to
getgrgid
.
A null pointer indicates there is no group with ID gid.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe locale | AS-Unsafe dlopen plugin heap lock | AC-Unsafe corrupt lock fd mem | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This function is similar to getgrgid
in that it returns
information about the group whose group ID is gid. However, it
fills the user supplied structure pointed to by result_buf with
the information instead of using a static buffer. The first
buflen bytes of the additional buffer pointed to by buffer
are used to contain additional information, normally strings which are
pointed to by the elements of the result structure.
If a group with ID gid is found, the pointer returned in
result points to the record which contains the wanted data (i.e.,
result contains the value result_buf). If no group is found
or if an error occurred, the pointer returned in result is a null
pointer. The function returns zero or an error code. If the buffer
buffer is too small to contain all the needed information, the
error code ERANGE
is returned and errno
is set to
ERANGE
.
Preliminary: | MT-Unsafe race:grnam locale | AS-Unsafe dlopen plugin heap lock | AC-Unsafe corrupt lock fd mem | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This function returns a pointer to a statically-allocated structure
containing information about the group whose group name is name.
This structure may be overwritten by subsequent calls to
getgrnam
.
A null pointer indicates there is no group named name.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe locale | AS-Unsafe dlopen plugin heap lock | AC-Unsafe corrupt lock fd mem | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This function is similar to getgrnam
in that it returns
information about the group whose group name is name. Like
getgrgid_r
, it uses the user supplied buffers in
result_buf and buffer, not a static buffer.
The return values are the same as for getgrgid_r
.
Previous: Looking Up One Group, Up: Group Database [Contents][Index]
This section explains how a program can read the list of all groups in the system, one group at a time. The functions described here are declared in grp.h.
You can use the fgetgrent
function to read group entries from a
particular file.
Preliminary: | MT-Unsafe race:fgrent | AS-Unsafe corrupt lock | AC-Unsafe corrupt lock | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The fgetgrent
function reads the next entry from stream.
It returns a pointer to the entry. The structure is statically
allocated and is overwritten on subsequent calls to fgetgrent
. You
must copy the contents of the structure if you wish to save the
information.
The stream must correspond to a file in the same format as the standard group database file.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Unsafe corrupt | AC-Unsafe corrupt lock | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This function is similar to fgetgrent
in that it reads the next
user entry from stream. But the result is returned in the
structure pointed to by result_buf. The first buflen bytes
of the additional buffer pointed to by buffer are used to contain
additional information, normally strings which are pointed to by the
elements of the result structure.
This stream must correspond to a file in the same format as the standard group database file.
If the function returns zero result points to the structure with the wanted data (normally this is in result_buf). If errors occurred the return value is non-zero and result contains a null pointer.
The way to scan all the entries in the group database is with
setgrent
, getgrent
, and endgrent
.
Preliminary: | MT-Unsafe race:grent locale | AS-Unsafe dlopen plugin heap lock | AC-Unsafe corrupt lock fd mem | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This function initializes a stream for reading from the group data base.
You use this stream by calling getgrent
or getgrent_r
.
Preliminary: | MT-Unsafe race:grent race:grentbuf locale | AS-Unsafe dlopen plugin heap lock | AC-Unsafe corrupt lock fd mem | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The getgrent
function reads the next entry from the stream
initialized by setgrent
. It returns a pointer to the entry. The
structure is statically allocated and is overwritten on subsequent calls
to getgrent
. You must copy the contents of the structure if you
wish to save the information.
Preliminary: | MT-Unsafe race:grent locale | AS-Unsafe dlopen plugin heap lock | AC-Unsafe corrupt lock fd mem | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This function is similar to getgrent
in that it returns the next
entry from the stream initialized by setgrent
. Like
fgetgrent_r
, it places the result in user-supplied buffers
pointed to by result_buf and buffer.
If the function returns zero result contains a pointer to the data (normally equal to result_buf). If errors occurred the return value is non-zero and result contains a null pointer.
Preliminary: | MT-Unsafe race:grent locale | AS-Unsafe dlopen plugin heap lock | AC-Unsafe corrupt lock fd mem | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This function closes the internal stream used by getgrent
or
getgrent_r
.
Next: Netgroup Database, Previous: Group Database, Up: Users and Groups [Contents][Index]
Here is an example program showing the use of the system database inquiry functions. The program prints some information about the user running the program.
#include <grp.h> #include <pwd.h> #include <sys/types.h> #include <unistd.h> #include <stdlib.h> int main (void) { uid_t me; struct passwd *my_passwd; struct group *my_group; char **members; /* Get information about the user ID. */ me = getuid (); my_passwd = getpwuid (me); if (!my_passwd) { printf ("Couldn't find out about user %d.\n", (int) me); exit (EXIT_FAILURE); } /* Print the information. */ printf ("I am %s.\n", my_passwd->pw_gecos); printf ("My login name is %s.\n", my_passwd->pw_name); printf ("My uid is %d.\n", (int) (my_passwd->pw_uid)); printf ("My home directory is %s.\n", my_passwd->pw_dir); printf ("My default shell is %s.\n", my_passwd->pw_shell); /* Get information about the default group ID. */ my_group = getgrgid (my_passwd->pw_gid); if (!my_group) { printf ("Couldn't find out about group %d.\n", (int) my_passwd->pw_gid); exit (EXIT_FAILURE); } /* Print the information. */ printf ("My default group is %s (%d).\n", my_group->gr_name, (int) (my_passwd->pw_gid)); printf ("The members of this group are:\n"); members = my_group->gr_mem; while (*members) { printf (" %s\n", *(members)); members++; } return EXIT_SUCCESS; }
Here is some output from this program:
I am Throckmorton Snurd. My login name is snurd. My uid is 31093. My home directory is /home/fsg/snurd. My default shell is /bin/sh. My default group is guest (12). The members of this group are: friedman tami
Previous: User and Group Database Example, Up: Users and Groups [Contents][Index]
Next: Looking up one Netgroup, Up: Netgroup Database [Contents][Index]
Sometimes it is useful to group users according to other criteria (see Group Database). E.g., it is useful to associate a certain group of users with a certain machine. On the other hand grouping of host names is not supported so far.
In Sun Microsystems’ SunOS appeared a new kind of database, the netgroup database. It allows grouping hosts, users, and domains freely, giving them individual names. To be more concrete, a netgroup is a list of triples consisting of a host name, a user name, and a domain name where any of the entries can be a wildcard entry matching all inputs. A last possibility is that names of other netgroups can also be given in the list specifying a netgroup. So one can construct arbitrary hierarchies without loops.
Sun’s implementation allows netgroups only for the nis
or
nisplus
service, see Services in the NSS configuration File. The
implementation in the GNU C Library has no such restriction. An entry
in either of the input services must have the following form:
groupname ( groupname |(
hostname,
username,
domainname
)
)+
Any of the fields in the triple can be empty which means anything
matches. While describing the functions we will see that the opposite
case is useful as well. I.e., there may be entries which will not
match any input. For entries like this, a name consisting of the single
character -
shall be used.
Next: Testing for Netgroup Membership, Previous: Netgroup Data, Up: Netgroup Database [Contents][Index]
The lookup functions for netgroups are a bit different than all other system database handling functions. Since a single netgroup can contain many entries a two-step process is needed. First a single netgroup is selected and then one can iterate over all entries in this netgroup. These functions are declared in netdb.h.
Preliminary: | MT-Unsafe race:netgrent locale | AS-Unsafe dlopen plugin heap lock | AC-Unsafe corrupt lock fd mem | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
A call to this function initializes the internal state of the library to
allow following calls of getnetgrent
to iterate over all entries
in the netgroup with name netgroup.
When the call is successful (i.e., when a netgroup with this name exists)
the return value is 1
. When the return value is 0
no
netgroup of this name is known or some other error occurred.
It is important to remember that there is only one single state for
iterating the netgroups. Even if the programmer uses the
getnetgrent_r
function the result is not really reentrant since
always only one single netgroup at a time can be processed. If the
program needs to process more than one netgroup simultaneously she
must protect this by using external locking. This problem was
introduced in the original netgroups implementation in SunOS and since
we must stay compatible it is not possible to change this.
Some other functions also use the netgroups state. Currently these are
the innetgr
function and parts of the implementation of the
compat
service part of the NSS implementation.
Preliminary: | MT-Unsafe race:netgrent race:netgrentbuf locale | AS-Unsafe dlopen plugin heap lock | AC-Unsafe corrupt lock fd mem | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This function returns the next unprocessed entry of the currently
selected netgroup. The string pointers, in which addresses are passed in
the arguments hostp, userp, and domainp, will contain
after a successful call pointers to appropriate strings. If the string
in the next entry is empty the pointer has the value NULL
.
The returned string pointers are only valid if none of the netgroup
related functions are called.
The return value is 1
if the next entry was successfully read. A
value of 0
means no further entries exist or internal errors occurred.
Preliminary: | MT-Unsafe race:netgrent locale | AS-Unsafe dlopen plugin heap lock | AC-Unsafe corrupt lock fd mem | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This function is similar to getnetgrent
with only one exception:
the strings the three string pointers hostp, userp, and
domainp point to, are placed in the buffer of buflen bytes
starting at buffer. This means the returned values are valid
even after other netgroup related functions are called.
The return value is 1
if the next entry was successfully read and
the buffer contains enough room to place the strings in it. 0
is
returned in case no more entries are found, the buffer is too small, or
internal errors occurred.
This function is a GNU extension. The original implementation in the SunOS libc does not provide this function.
Preliminary: | MT-Unsafe race:netgrent | AS-Unsafe dlopen plugin heap lock | AC-Unsafe corrupt lock fd mem | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This function frees all buffers which were allocated to process the last
selected netgroup. As a result all string pointers returned by calls
to getnetgrent
are invalid afterwards.
Previous: Looking up one Netgroup, Up: Netgroup Database [Contents][Index]
It is often not necessary to scan the whole netgroup since often the only interesting question is whether a given entry is part of the selected netgroup.
Preliminary: | MT-Unsafe race:netgrent locale | AS-Unsafe dlopen plugin heap lock | AC-Unsafe corrupt lock fd mem | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This function tests whether the triple specified by the parameters host, user, and domain is part of the netgroup netgroup. Using this function has the advantage that
set
/get
/endnetgrent
functions.
Any of the pointers host, user, or domain can be
NULL
which means any value is accepted in this position. This is
also true for the name -
which should not match any other string
otherwise.
The return value is 1
if an entry matching the given triple is
found in the netgroup. The return value is 0
if the netgroup
itself is not found, the netgroup does not contain the triple or
internal errors occurred.
Next: System Configuration Parameters, Previous: Users and Groups, Up: Main Menu [Contents][Index]
This chapter describes facilities for controlling the system that underlies a process (including the operating system and hardware) and for getting information about it. Anyone can generally use the informational facilities, but usually only a properly privileged process can make changes.
To get information on parameters of the system that are built into the system, such as the maximum length of a filename, System Configuration Parameters.
Next: Platform Type Identification, Up: System Management [Contents][Index]
This section explains how to identify the particular system on which your program is running. First, let’s review the various ways computer systems are named, which is a little complicated because of the history of the development of the Internet.
Every Unix system (also known as a host) has a host name, whether it’s connected to a network or not. In its simplest form, as used before computer networks were an issue, it’s just a word like ‘chicken’.
But any system attached to the Internet or any network like it conforms to a more rigorous naming convention as part of the Domain Name System (DNS). In the DNS, every host name is composed of two parts:
You will note that “hostname” looks a lot like “host name”, but is not the same thing, and that people often incorrectly refer to entire host names as “domain names.”
In the DNS, the full host name is properly called the FQDN (Fully Qualified Domain Name) and consists of the hostname, then a period, then the domain name. The domain name itself usually has multiple components separated by periods. So for example, a system’s hostname may be ‘chicken’ and its domain name might be ‘ai.mit.edu’, so its FQDN (which is its host name) is ‘chicken.ai.mit.edu’.
Adding to the confusion, though, is that the DNS is not the only name space in which a computer needs to be known. Another name space is the NIS (aka YP) name space. For NIS purposes, there is another domain name, which is called the NIS domain name or the YP domain name. It need not have anything to do with the DNS domain name.
Confusing things even more is the fact that in the DNS, it is possible for multiple FQDNs to refer to the same system. However, there is always exactly one of them that is the true host name, and it is called the canonical FQDN.
In some contexts, the host name is called a “node name.”
For more information on DNS host naming, see Host Names.
Prototypes for these functions appear in unistd.h.
The programs hostname
, hostid
, and domainname
work
by calling these functions.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This function returns the host name of the system on which it is called, in the array name. The size argument specifies the size of this array, in bytes. Note that this is not the DNS hostname. If the system participates in the DNS, this is the FQDN (see above).
The return value is 0
on success and -1
on failure. In
the GNU C Library, gethostname
fails if size is not large
enough; then you can try again with a larger array. The following
errno
error condition is defined for this function:
ENAMETOOLONG
The size argument is less than the size of the host name plus one.
On some systems, there is a symbol for the maximum possible host name
length: MAXHOSTNAMELEN
. It is defined in sys/param.h.
But you can’t count on this to exist, so it is cleaner to handle
failure and try again.
gethostname
stores the beginning of the host name in name
even if the host name won’t entirely fit. For some purposes, a
truncated host name is good enough. If it is, you can ignore the
error code.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The sethostname
function sets the host name of the system that
calls it to name, a string with length length. Only
privileged processes are permitted to do this.
Usually sethostname
gets called just once, at system boot time.
Often, the program that calls it sets it to the value it finds in the
file /etc/hostname
.
Be sure to set the host name to the full host name, not just the DNS hostname (see above).
The return value is 0
on success and -1
on failure.
The following errno
error condition is defined for this function:
EPERM
This process cannot set the host name because it is not privileged.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
getdomainname
returns the NIS (aka YP) domain name of the system
on which it is called. Note that this is not the more popular DNS
domain name. Get that with gethostname
.
The specifics of this function are analogous to gethostname
, above.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
setdomainname
sets the NIS (aka YP) domain name of the system
on which it is called. Note that this is not the more popular DNS
domain name. Set that with sethostname
.
The specifics of this function are analogous to sethostname
, above.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe hostid env locale | AS-Unsafe dlopen plugin corrupt heap lock | AC-Unsafe lock corrupt mem fd | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This function returns the “host ID” of the machine the program is
running on. By convention, this is usually the primary Internet IP address
of that machine, converted to a long int
. However, on some
systems it is a meaningless but unique number which is hard-coded for
each machine.
This is not widely used. It arose in BSD 4.2, but was dropped in BSD 4.4. It is not required by POSIX.
The proper way to query the IP address is to use gethostbyname
on the results of gethostname
. For more information on IP addresses,
See Host Addresses.
Preliminary: | MT-Unsafe const:hostid | AS-Unsafe | AC-Unsafe corrupt fd | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The sethostid
function sets the “host ID” of the host machine
to id. Only privileged processes are permitted to do this. Usually
it happens just once, at system boot time.
The proper way to establish the primary IP address of a system
is to configure the IP address resolver to associate that IP address with
the system’s host name as returned by gethostname
. For example,
put a record for the system in /etc/hosts.
See gethostid
above for more information on host ids.
The return value is 0
on success and -1
on failure.
The following errno
error conditions are defined for this function:
EPERM
This process cannot set the host name because it is not privileged.
ENOSYS
The operating system does not support setting the host ID. On some systems, the host ID is a meaningless but unique number hard-coded for each machine.
Next: Controlling and Querying Mounts, Previous: Host Identification, Up: System Management [Contents][Index]
You can use the uname
function to find out some information about
the type of computer your program is running on. This function and the
associated data type are declared in the header file
sys/utsname.h.
As a bonus, uname
also gives some information identifying the
particular system your program is running on. This is the same information
which you can get with functions targeted to this purpose described in
Host Identification.
The utsname
structure is used to hold information returned
by the uname
function. It has the following members:
char sysname[]
This is the name of the operating system in use.
char release[]
This is the current release level of the operating system implementation.
char version[]
This is the current version level within the release of the operating system.
char machine[]
This is a description of the type of hardware that is in use.
Some systems provide a mechanism to interrogate the kernel directly for this information. On systems without such a mechanism, the GNU C Library fills in this field based on the configuration name that was specified when building and installing the library.
GNU uses a three-part name to describe a system configuration; the three parts are cpu, manufacturer and system-type, and they are separated with dashes. Any possible combination of three names is potentially meaningful, but most such combinations are meaningless in practice and even the meaningful ones are not necessarily supported by any particular GNU program.
Since the value in machine
is supposed to describe just the
hardware, it consists of the first two parts of the configuration name:
‘cpu-manufacturer’. For example, it might be one of these:
"sparc-sun"
,"i386-anything"
,"m68k-hp"
,"m68k-sony"
,"m68k-sun"
,"mips-dec"
char nodename[]
This is the host name of this particular computer. In the GNU C Library,
the value is the same as that returned by gethostname
;
see Host Identification.
gethostname
is implemented with a call to uname
.
char domainname[]
This is the NIS or YP domain name. It is the same value returned by
getdomainname
; see Host Identification. This element
is a relatively recent invention and use of it is not as portable as
use of the rest of the structure.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The uname
function fills in the structure pointed to by
info with information about the operating system and host machine.
A non-negative return value indicates that the data was successfully stored.
-1
as the return value indicates an error. The only error possible is
EFAULT
, which we normally don’t mention as it is always a
possibility.
Previous: Platform Type Identification, Up: System Management [Contents][Index]
All files are in filesystems, and before you can access any file, its filesystem must be mounted. Because of Unix’s concept of Everything is a file, mounting of filesystems is central to doing almost anything. This section explains how to find out what filesystems are currently mounted and what filesystems are available for mounting, and how to change what is mounted.
The classic filesystem is the contents of a disk drive. The concept is considerably more abstract, though, and lots of things other than disk drives can be mounted.
Some block devices don’t correspond to traditional devices like disk drives. For example, a loop device is a block device whose driver uses a regular file in another filesystem as its medium. So if that regular file contains appropriate data for a filesystem, you can by mounting the loop device essentially mount a regular file.
Some filesystems aren’t based on a device of any kind. The “proc” filesystem, for example, contains files whose data is made up by the filesystem driver on the fly whenever you ask for it. And when you write to it, the data you write causes changes in the system. No data gets stored.
Next: Mount, Unmount, Remount, Up: Controlling and Querying Mounts [Contents][Index]
For some programs it is desirable and necessary to access information about whether a certain filesystem is mounted and, if it is, where, or simply to get lists of all the available filesystems. The GNU C Library provides some functions to retrieve this information portably.
Traditionally Unix systems have a file named /etc/fstab which
describes all possibly mounted filesystems. The mount
program
uses this file to mount at startup time of the system all the
necessary filesystems. The information about all the filesystems
actually mounted is normally kept in a file named either
/var/run/mtab or /etc/mtab. Both files share the same
syntax and it is crucial that this syntax is followed all the time.
Therefore it is best to never directly write to the files. The functions
described in this section can do this and they also provide the
functionality to convert the external textual representation to the
internal representation.
Note that the fstab and mtab files are maintained on a system by convention. It is possible for the files not to exist or not to be consistent with what is really mounted or available to mount, if the system’s administration policy allows it. But programs that mount and unmount filesystems typically maintain and use these files as described herein.
The filenames given above should never be used directly. The portable
way to handle these files is to use the macros _PATH_FSTAB
,
defined in fstab.h, or _PATH_MNTTAB
, defined in
mntent.h and paths.h, for fstab; and the macro
_PATH_MOUNTED
, also defined in mntent.h and
paths.h, for mtab. There are also two alternate macro
names FSTAB
, MNTTAB
, and MOUNTED
defined but
these names are deprecated and kept only for backward compatibility.
The names _PATH_MNTTAB
and _PATH_MOUNTED
should always be used.
Next: The mtab file, Up: Mount Information [Contents][Index]
The internal representation for entries of the file is struct fstab
, defined in fstab.h.
This structure is used with the getfsent
, getfsspec
, and
getfsfile
functions.
char *fs_spec
This element describes the device from which the filesystem is mounted. Normally this is the name of a special device, such as a hard disk partition, but it could also be a more or less generic string. For NFS it would be a hostname and directory name combination.
Even though the element is not declared const
it shouldn’t be
modified. The missing const
has historic reasons, since this
function predates ISO C. The same is true for the other string
elements of this structure.
char *fs_file
This describes the mount point on the local system. I.e., accessing any file in this filesystem has implicitly or explicitly this string as a prefix.
char *fs_vfstype
This is the type of the filesystem. Depending on what the underlying kernel understands it can be any string.
char *fs_mntops
This is a string containing options passed to the kernel with the
mount
call. Again, this can be almost anything. There can be
more than one option, separated from the others by a comma. Each option
consists of a name and an optional value part, introduced by an =
character.
If the value of this element must be processed it should ideally be done
using the getsubopt
function; see Parsing of Suboptions.
const char *fs_type
This name is poorly chosen. This element points to a string (possibly
in the fs_mntops
string) which describes the modes with which the
filesystem is mounted. fstab defines five macros to describe the
possible values:
FSTAB_RW
¶The filesystem gets mounted with read and write enabled.
FSTAB_RQ
¶The filesystem gets mounted with read and write enabled. Write access is restricted by quotas.
FSTAB_RO
¶The filesystem gets mounted read-only.
FSTAB_SW
¶This is not a real filesystem, it is a swap device.
FSTAB_XX
¶This entry from the fstab file is totally ignored.
Testing for equality with these values must happen using strcmp
since these are all strings. Comparing the pointer will probably always
fail.
int fs_freq
This element describes the dump frequency in days.
int fs_passno
This element describes the pass number on parallel dumps. It is closely
related to the dump
utility used on Unix systems.
To read the entire content of the of the fstab file the GNU C Library contains a set of three functions which are designed in the usual way.
Preliminary: | MT-Unsafe race:fsent | AS-Unsafe heap corrupt lock | AC-Unsafe corrupt lock mem fd | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This function makes sure that the internal read pointer for the fstab file is at the beginning of the file. This is done by either opening the file or resetting the read pointer.
Since the file handle is internal to the libc this function is not thread-safe.
This function returns a non-zero value if the operation was successful
and the getfs*
functions can be used to read the entries of the
file.
Preliminary: | MT-Unsafe race:fsent | AS-Unsafe heap corrupt lock | AC-Unsafe corrupt lock mem fd | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This function makes sure that all resources acquired by a prior call to
setfsent
(explicitly or implicitly by calling getfsent
) are
freed.
Preliminary: | MT-Unsafe race:fsent locale | AS-Unsafe corrupt heap lock | AC-Unsafe corrupt lock mem | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This function returns the next entry of the fstab file. If this
is the first call to any of the functions handling fstab since
program start or the last call of endfsent
, the file will be
opened.
The function returns a pointer to a variable of type struct
fstab
. This variable is shared by all threads and therefore this
function is not thread-safe. If an error occurred getfsent
returns a NULL
pointer.
Preliminary: | MT-Unsafe race:fsent locale | AS-Unsafe corrupt heap lock | AC-Unsafe corrupt lock mem | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This function returns the next entry of the fstab file which has
a string equal to name pointed to by the fs_spec
element.
Since there is normally exactly one entry for each special device it
makes no sense to call this function more than once for the same
argument. If this is the first call to any of the functions handling
fstab since program start or the last call of endfsent
,
the file will be opened.
The function returns a pointer to a variable of type struct
fstab
. This variable is shared by all threads and therefore this
function is not thread-safe. If an error occurred getfsent
returns a NULL
pointer.
Preliminary: | MT-Unsafe race:fsent locale | AS-Unsafe corrupt heap lock | AC-Unsafe corrupt lock mem | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This function returns the next entry of the fstab file which has
a string equal to name pointed to by the fs_file
element.
Since there is normally exactly one entry for each mount point it
makes no sense to call this function more than once for the same
argument. If this is the first call to any of the functions handling
fstab since program start or the last call of endfsent
,
the file will be opened.
The function returns a pointer to a variable of type struct
fstab
. This variable is shared by all threads and therefore this
function is not thread-safe. If an error occurred getfsent
returns a NULL
pointer.
Next: Other (Non-libc) Sources of Mount Information, Previous: The fstab file, Up: Mount Information [Contents][Index]
The following functions and data structure access the mtab file.
This structure is used with the getmntent
, getmntent_r
,
addmntent
, and hasmntopt
functions.
char *mnt_fsname
This element contains a pointer to a string describing the name of the
special device from which the filesystem is mounted. It corresponds to
the fs_spec
element in struct fstab
.
char *mnt_dir
This element points to a string describing the mount point of the
filesystem. It corresponds to the fs_file
element in
struct fstab
.
char *mnt_type
mnt_type
describes the filesystem type and is therefore
equivalent to fs_vfstype
in struct fstab
. mntent.h
defines a few symbolic names for some of the values this string can have.
But since the kernel can support arbitrary filesystems it does not
make much sense to give them symbolic names. If one knows the symbol
name one also knows the filesystem name. Nevertheless here follows the
list of the symbols provided in mntent.h.
MNTTYPE_IGNORE
¶This symbol expands to "ignore"
. The value is sometimes used in
fstab files to make sure entries are not used without removing them.
MNTTYPE_NFS
¶Expands to "nfs"
. Using this macro sometimes could make sense
since it names the default NFS implementation, in case both version 2
and 3 are supported.
MNTTYPE_SWAP
¶This symbol expands to "swap"
. It names the special fstab
entry which names one of the possibly multiple swap partitions.
char *mnt_opts
The element contains a string describing the options used while mounting
the filesystem. As for the equivalent element fs_mntops
of
struct fstab
it is best to use the function getsubopt
(see Parsing of Suboptions) to access the parts of this string.
The mntent.h file defines a number of macros with string values which correspond to some of the options understood by the kernel. There might be many more options which are possible so it doesn’t make much sense to rely on these macros but to be consistent here is the list:
MNTOPT_DEFAULTS
¶Expands to "defaults"
. This option should be used alone since it
indicates all values for the customizable values are chosen to be the
default.
MNTOPT_RO
¶Expands to "ro"
. See the FSTAB_RO
value, it means the
filesystem is mounted read-only.
MNTOPT_RW
¶Expands to "rw"
. See the FSTAB_RW
value, it means the
filesystem is mounted with read and write permissions.
MNTOPT_SUID
¶Expands to "suid"
. This means that the SUID bit (see How an Application Can Change Persona) is respected when a program from the filesystem is
started.
MNTOPT_NOSUID
¶Expands to "nosuid"
. This is the opposite of MNTOPT_SUID
,
the SUID bit for all files from the filesystem is ignored.
MNTOPT_NOAUTO
¶Expands to "noauto"
. At startup time the mount
program
will ignore this entry if it is started with the -a
option to
mount all filesystems mentioned in the fstab file.
As for the FSTAB_*
entries introduced above it is important to
use strcmp
to check for equality.
mnt_freq
This elements corresponds to fs_freq
and also specifies the
frequency in days in which dumps are made.
mnt_passno
This element is equivalent to fs_passno
with the same meaning
which is uninteresting for all programs beside dump
.
For accessing the mtab file there is again a set of three functions to access all entries in a row. Unlike the functions to handle fstab these functions do not access a fixed file and there is even a thread safe variant of the get function. Besides this the GNU C Library contains functions to alter the file and test for specific options.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Unsafe heap lock | AC-Unsafe mem fd lock | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The setmntent
function prepares the file named FILE which
must be in the format of a fstab and mtab file for the
upcoming processing through the other functions of the family. The
mode parameter can be chosen in the way the opentype
parameter for fopen
(see Opening Streams) can be chosen. If
the file is opened for writing the file is also allowed to be empty.
If the file was successfully opened setmntent
returns a file
handle for future use. Otherwise the return value is NULL
and errno
is set accordingly.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Unsafe heap lock | AC-Unsafe lock mem fd | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This function takes for the stream parameter a file handle which
previously was returned from the setmntent
call.
endmntent
closes the stream and frees all resources.
The return value is 1 unless an error occurred in which case it is 0.
Preliminary: | MT-Unsafe race:mntentbuf locale | AS-Unsafe corrupt heap init | AC-Unsafe init corrupt lock mem | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The getmntent
function takes as the parameter a file handle
previously returned by a successful call to setmntent
. It returns
a pointer to a static variable of type struct mntent
which is
filled with the information from the next entry from the file currently
read.
The file format used prescribes the use of spaces or tab characters to
separate the fields. This makes it harder to use names containing one
of these characters (e.g., mount points using spaces). Therefore
these characters are encoded in the files and the getmntent
function takes care of the decoding while reading the entries back in.
'\040'
is used to encode a space character, '\011'
to
encode a tab character, '\012'
to encode a newline character,
and '\\'
to encode a backslash.
If there was an error or the end of the file is reached the return value
is NULL
.
This function is not thread-safe since all calls to this function return
a pointer to the same static variable. getmntent_r
should be
used in situations where multiple threads access the file.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe locale | AS-Unsafe corrupt heap | AC-Unsafe corrupt lock mem | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The getmntent_r
function is the reentrant variant of
getmntent
. It also returns the next entry from the file and
returns a pointer. The actual variable the values are stored in is not
static, though. Instead the function stores the values in the variable
pointed to by the result parameter. Additional information (e.g.,
the strings pointed to by the elements of the result) are kept in the
buffer of size bufsize pointed to by buffer.
Escaped characters (space, tab, backslash) are converted back in the
same way as it happens for getmentent
.
The function returns a NULL
pointer in error cases. Errors could be:
Preliminary: | MT-Safe race:stream locale | AS-Unsafe corrupt | AC-Unsafe corrupt | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The addmntent
function allows adding a new entry to the file
previously opened with setmntent
. The new entries are always
appended. I.e., even if the position of the file descriptor is not at
the end of the file this function does not overwrite an existing entry
following the current position.
The implication of this is that to remove an entry from a file one has to create a new file while leaving out the entry to be removed and after closing the file remove the old one and rename the new file to the chosen name.
This function takes care of spaces and tab characters in the names to be
written to the file. It converts them and the backslash character into
the format described in the getmntent
description above.
This function returns 0 in case the operation was successful.
Otherwise the return value is 1 and errno
is set
appropriately.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This function can be used to check whether the string pointed to by the
mnt_opts
element of the variable pointed to by mnt contains
the option opt. If this is true a pointer to the beginning of the
option in the mnt_opts
element is returned. If no such option
exists the function returns NULL
.
This function is useful to test whether a specific option is present but
when all options have to be processed one is better off with using the
getsubopt
function to iterate over all options in the string.
Previous: The mtab file, Up: Mount Information [Contents][Index]
On a system with a Linux kernel and the proc
filesystem, you can
get information on currently mounted filesystems from the file
mounts in the proc
filesystem. Its format is similar to
that of the mtab file, but represents what is truly mounted
without relying on facilities outside the kernel to keep mtab up
to date.
Previous: Mount Information, Up: Controlling and Querying Mounts [Contents][Index]
This section describes the functions for mounting, unmounting, and remounting filesystems.
Only the superuser can mount, unmount, or remount a filesystem.
These functions do not access the fstab and mtab files. You should maintain and use these separately. See Mount Information.
The symbols in this section are declared in sys/mount.h.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
mount
mounts or remounts a filesystem. The two operations are
quite different and are merged rather unnaturally into this one function.
The MS_REMOUNT
option, explained below, determines whether
mount
mounts or remounts.
For a mount, the filesystem on the block device represented by the device special file named special_file gets mounted over the mount point dir. This means that the directory dir (along with any files in it) is no longer visible; in its place (and still with the name dir) is the root directory of the filesystem on the device.
As an exception, if the filesystem type (see below) is one which is not
based on a device (e.g. “proc”), mount
instantiates a
filesystem and mounts it over dir and ignores special_file.
For a remount, dir specifies the mount point where the filesystem to be remounted is (and remains) mounted and special_file is ignored. Remounting a filesystem means changing the options that control operations on the filesystem while it is mounted. It does not mean unmounting and mounting again.
For a mount, you must identify the type of the filesystem with
fstype. This type tells the kernel how to access the filesystem
and can be thought of as the name of a filesystem driver. The
acceptable values are system dependent. On a system with a Linux kernel
and the proc
filesystem, the list of possible values is in the
file filesystems in the proc
filesystem (e.g. type
cat /proc/filesystems to see the list). With a Linux kernel, the
types of filesystems that mount
can mount, and their type names,
depends on what filesystem drivers are configured into the kernel or
loaded as loadable kernel modules. An example of a common value for
fstype is ext2
.
For a remount, mount
ignores fstype.
options specifies a variety of options that apply until the
filesystem is unmounted or remounted. The precise meaning of an option
depends on the filesystem and with some filesystems, an option may have
no effect at all. Furthermore, for some filesystems, some of these
options (but never MS_RDONLY
) can be overridden for individual
file accesses via ioctl
.
options is a bit string with bit fields defined using the following mask and masked value macros:
MS_MGC_MASK
¶This multibit field contains a magic number. If it does not have the value
MS_MGC_VAL
, mount
assumes all the following bits are zero and
the data argument is a null string, regardless of their actual values.
MS_REMOUNT
¶This bit on means to remount the filesystem. Off means to mount it.
MS_RDONLY
¶This bit on specifies that no writing to the filesystem shall be allowed
while it is mounted. This cannot be overridden by ioctl
. This
option is available on nearly all filesystems.
MS_NOSUID
¶This bit on specifies that Setuid and Setgid permissions on files in the filesystem shall be ignored while it is mounted.
MS_NOEXEC
¶This bit on specifies that no files in the filesystem shall be executed while the filesystem is mounted.
MS_NODEV
¶This bit on specifies that no device special files in the filesystem shall be accessible while the filesystem is mounted.
MS_SYNCHRONOUS
¶This bit on specifies that all writes to the filesystem while it is mounted shall be synchronous; i.e., data shall be synced before each write completes rather than held in the buffer cache.
MS_MANDLOCK
¶This bit on specifies that mandatory locks on files shall be permitted while the filesystem is mounted.
MS_NOATIME
¶This bit on specifies that access times of files shall not be updated when the files are accessed while the filesystem is mounted.
MS_NODIRATIME
¶This bit on specifies that access times of directories shall not be updated when the directories are accessed while the filesystem in mounted.
Any bits not covered by the above masks should be set off; otherwise, results are undefined.
The meaning of data depends on the filesystem type and is controlled entirely by the filesystem driver in the kernel.
Example:
#include <sys/mount.h> mount("/dev/hdb", "/cdrom", "iso9660", MS_MGC_VAL | MS_RDONLY | MS_NOSUID, ""); mount("/dev/hda2", "/mnt", "", MS_MGC_VAL | MS_REMOUNT, "");
Appropriate arguments for mount
are conventionally recorded in
the fstab table. See Mount Information.
The return value is zero if the mount or remount is successful. Otherwise,
it is -1
and errno
is set appropriately. The values of
errno
are filesystem dependent, but here is a general list:
EPERM
The process is not superuser.
ENODEV
The file system type fstype is not known to the kernel.
ENOTBLK
The file dev is not a block device special file.
EBUSY
EINVAL
EACCES
MS_RDONLY
bit off).
MS_NODEV
option.
EM_FILE
The table of dummy devices is full. mount
needs to create a
dummy device (aka “unnamed” device) if the filesystem being mounted is
not one that uses a device.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
umount2
unmounts a filesystem.
You can identify the filesystem to unmount either by the device special file that contains the filesystem or by the mount point. The effect is the same. Specify either as the string file.
flags contains the one-bit field identified by the following mask macro:
MNT_FORCE
¶This bit on means to force the unmounting even if the filesystem is
busy, by making it unbusy first. If the bit is off and the filesystem is
busy, umount2
fails with errno
= EBUSY
. Depending
on the filesystem, this may override all, some, or no busy conditions.
All other bits in flags should be set to zero; otherwise, the result is undefined.
Example:
#include <sys/mount.h> umount2("/mnt", MNT_FORCE); umount2("/dev/hdd1", 0);
After the filesystem is unmounted, the directory that was the mount point is visible, as are any files in it.
As part of unmounting, umount2
syncs the filesystem.
If the unmounting is successful, the return value is zero. Otherwise, it
is -1
and errno
is set accordingly:
EPERM
The process is not superuser.
EBUSY
The filesystem cannot be unmounted because it is busy. E.g. it contains
a directory that is some process’s working directory or a file that some
process has open. With some filesystems in some cases, you can avoid
this failure with the MNT_FORCE
option.
EINVAL
file validly refers to a file, but that file is neither a mount point nor a device special file of a currently mounted filesystem.
This function is not available on all systems.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
umount
does the same thing as umount2
with flags set
to zeroes. It is more widely available than umount2
but since it
lacks the possibility to forcefully unmount a filesystem is deprecated
when umount2
is also available.
Next: Cryptographic Functions, Previous: System Management, Up: Main Menu [Contents][Index]
The functions and macros listed in this chapter give information about configuration parameters of the operating system—for example, capacity limits, presence of optional POSIX features, and the default path for executable files (see String-Valued Parameters).
sysconf
pathconf
Next: Overall System Options, Up: System Configuration Parameters [Contents][Index]
The POSIX.1 and POSIX.2 standards specify a number of parameters that describe capacity limitations of the system. These limits can be fixed constants for a given operating system, or they can vary from machine to machine. For example, some limit values may be configurable by the system administrator, either at run time or by rebuilding the kernel, and this should not require recompiling application programs.
Each of the following limit parameters has a macro that is defined in
limits.h only if the system has a fixed, uniform limit for the
parameter in question. If the system allows different file systems or
files to have different limits, then the macro is undefined; use
sysconf
to find out the limit that applies at a particular time
on a particular machine. See Using sysconf
.
Each of these parameters also has another macro, with a name starting with ‘_POSIX’, which gives the lowest value that the limit is allowed to have on any POSIX system. See Minimum Values for General Capacity Limits.
If defined, the unvarying maximum combined length of the argv and
environ arguments that can be passed to the exec
functions.
If defined, the unvarying maximum number of processes that can exist
with the same real user ID at any one time. In BSD and GNU, this is
controlled by the RLIMIT_NPROC
resource limit; see Limiting Resource Usage.
If defined, the unvarying maximum number of files that a single process
can have open simultaneously. In BSD and GNU, this is controlled
by the RLIMIT_NOFILE
resource limit; see Limiting Resource Usage.
If defined, the unvarying maximum number of streams that a single process can have open simultaneously. See Opening Streams.
If defined, the unvarying maximum length of a time zone abbreviation. See Functions and Variables for Time Zones.
These limit macros are always defined in limits.h.
The maximum number of supplementary group IDs that one process can have.
The value of this macro is actually a lower bound for the maximum. That
is, you can count on being able to have that many supplementary group
IDs, but a particular machine might let you have even more. You can use
sysconf
to see whether a particular machine will let you have
more (see Using sysconf
).
The largest value that can fit in an object of type ssize_t
.
Effectively, this is the limit on the number of bytes that can be read
or written in a single operation.
This macro is defined in all POSIX systems because this limit is never configurable.
The largest number of repetitions you are guaranteed is allowed in the construct ‘\{min,max\}’ in a regular expression.
The value of this macro is actually a lower bound for the maximum. That
is, you can count on being able to have that many repetitions, but a
particular machine might let you have even more. You can use
sysconf
to see whether a particular machine will let you have
more (see Using sysconf
). And even the value that sysconf
tells
you is just a lower bound—larger values might work.
This macro is defined in all POSIX.2 systems, because POSIX.2 says it should always be defined even if there is no specific imposed limit.
Next: Which Version of POSIX is Supported, Previous: General Capacity Limits, Up: System Configuration Parameters [Contents][Index]
POSIX defines certain system-specific options that not all POSIX systems support. Since these options are provided in the kernel, not in the library, simply using the GNU C Library does not guarantee any of these features are supported; it depends on the system you are using.
You can test for the availability of a given option using the macros in
this section, together with the function sysconf
. The macros are
defined only if you include unistd.h.
For the following macros, if the macro is defined in unistd.h,
then the option is supported. Otherwise, the option may or may not be
supported; use sysconf
to find out. See Using sysconf
.
If this symbol is defined, it indicates that the system supports job control. Otherwise, the implementation behaves as if all processes within a session belong to a single process group. See Job Control. Systems conforming to the 2001 revision of POSIX, or newer, will always define this symbol.
If this symbol is defined, it indicates that the system remembers the effective user and group IDs of a process before it executes an executable file with the set-user-ID or set-group-ID bits set, and that explicitly changing the effective user or group IDs back to these values is permitted. If this option is not defined, then if a nonprivileged process changes its effective user or group ID to the real user or group ID of the process, it can’t change it back again. See Enabling and Disabling Setuid Access.
For the following macros, if the macro is defined in unistd.h,
then its value indicates whether the option is supported. A value of
-1
means no, and any other value means yes. If the macro is not
defined, then the option may or may not be supported; use sysconf
to find out. See Using sysconf
.
If this symbol is defined, it indicates that the system has the POSIX.2
C compiler command, c89
. The GNU C Library always defines this
as 1
, on the assumption that you would not have installed it if
you didn’t have a C compiler.
If this symbol is defined, it indicates that the system has the POSIX.2
Fortran compiler command, fort77
. The GNU C Library never
defines this, because we don’t know what the system has.
If this symbol is defined, it indicates that the system has the POSIX.2
asa
command to interpret Fortran carriage control. The GNU C Library
never defines this, because we don’t know what the system has.
If this symbol is defined, it indicates that the system has the POSIX.2
localedef
command. The GNU C Library never defines this, because
we don’t know what the system has.
If this symbol is defined, it indicates that the system has the POSIX.2
commands ar
, make
, and strip
. The GNU C Library
always defines this as 1
, on the assumption that you had to have
ar
and make
to install the library, and it’s unlikely that
strip
would be absent when those are present.
Next: Using sysconf
, Previous: Overall System Options, Up: System Configuration Parameters [Contents][Index]
This constant represents the version of the POSIX.1 standard to which
the implementation conforms. For an implementation conforming to the
1995 POSIX.1 standard, the value is the integer 199506L
.
_POSIX_VERSION
is always defined (in unistd.h) in any
POSIX system.
Usage Note: Don’t try to test whether the system supports POSIX
by including unistd.h and then checking whether
_POSIX_VERSION
is defined. On a non-POSIX system, this will
probably fail because there is no unistd.h. We do not know of
any way you can reliably test at compilation time whether your
target system supports POSIX or whether unistd.h exists.
This constant represents the version of the POSIX.2 standard which the library and system kernel support. We don’t know what value this will be for the first version of the POSIX.2 standard, because the value is based on the year and month in which the standard is officially adopted.
The value of this symbol says nothing about the utilities installed on the system.
Usage Note: You can use this macro to tell whether a POSIX.1
system library supports POSIX.2 as well. Any POSIX.1 system contains
unistd.h, so include that file and then test defined
(_POSIX2_C_VERSION)
.
Next: Minimum Values for General Capacity Limits, Previous: Which Version of POSIX is Supported, Up: System Configuration Parameters [Contents][Index]
sysconf
When your system has configurable system limits, you can use the
sysconf
function to find out the value that applies to any
particular machine. The function and the associated parameter
constants are declared in the header file unistd.h.
Next: Constants for sysconf
Parameters, Up: Using sysconf
[Contents][Index]
sysconf
Preliminary: | MT-Safe env | AS-Unsafe lock heap | AC-Unsafe lock mem fd | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This function is used to inquire about runtime system parameters. The parameter argument should be one of the ‘_SC_’ symbols listed below.
The normal return value from sysconf
is the value you requested.
A value of -1
is returned both if the implementation does not
impose a limit, and in case of an error.
The following errno
error conditions are defined for this function:
EINVAL
The value of the parameter is invalid.
Next: Examples of sysconf
, Previous: Definition of sysconf
, Up: Using sysconf
[Contents][Index]
sysconf
ParametersHere are the symbolic constants for use as the parameter argument
to sysconf
. The values are all integer constants (more
specifically, enumeration type values).
_SC_ARG_MAX
¶Inquire about the parameter corresponding to ARG_MAX
.
_SC_CHILD_MAX
¶Inquire about the parameter corresponding to CHILD_MAX
.
_SC_OPEN_MAX
¶Inquire about the parameter corresponding to OPEN_MAX
.
_SC_STREAM_MAX
¶Inquire about the parameter corresponding to STREAM_MAX
.
_SC_TZNAME_MAX
¶Inquire about the parameter corresponding to TZNAME_MAX
.
_SC_NGROUPS_MAX
¶Inquire about the parameter corresponding to NGROUPS_MAX
.
_SC_JOB_CONTROL
¶Inquire about the parameter corresponding to _POSIX_JOB_CONTROL
.
_SC_SAVED_IDS
¶Inquire about the parameter corresponding to _POSIX_SAVED_IDS
.
_SC_VERSION
¶Inquire about the parameter corresponding to _POSIX_VERSION
.
_SC_CLK_TCK
¶Inquire about the number of clock ticks per second; see CPU Time Inquiry.
The corresponding parameter CLK_TCK
is obsolete.
_SC_CHARCLASS_NAME_MAX
¶Inquire about the parameter corresponding to maximal length allowed for a character class name in an extended locale specification. These extensions are not yet standardized and so this option is not standardized as well.
_SC_REALTIME_SIGNALS
¶Inquire about the parameter corresponding to _POSIX_REALTIME_SIGNALS
.
_SC_PRIORITY_SCHEDULING
¶Inquire about the parameter corresponding to _POSIX_PRIORITY_SCHEDULING
.
_SC_TIMERS
¶Inquire about the parameter corresponding to _POSIX_TIMERS
.
_SC_ASYNCHRONOUS_IO
¶Inquire about the parameter corresponding to _POSIX_ASYNCHRONOUS_IO
.
_SC_PRIORITIZED_IO
¶Inquire about the parameter corresponding to _POSIX_PRIORITIZED_IO
.
_SC_SYNCHRONIZED_IO
¶Inquire about the parameter corresponding to _POSIX_SYNCHRONIZED_IO
.
_SC_FSYNC
¶Inquire about the parameter corresponding to _POSIX_FSYNC
.
_SC_MAPPED_FILES
¶Inquire about the parameter corresponding to _POSIX_MAPPED_FILES
.
_SC_MEMLOCK
¶Inquire about the parameter corresponding to _POSIX_MEMLOCK
.
_SC_MEMLOCK_RANGE
¶Inquire about the parameter corresponding to _POSIX_MEMLOCK_RANGE
.
_SC_MEMORY_PROTECTION
¶Inquire about the parameter corresponding to _POSIX_MEMORY_PROTECTION
.
_SC_MESSAGE_PASSING
¶Inquire about the parameter corresponding to _POSIX_MESSAGE_PASSING
.
_SC_SEMAPHORES
¶Inquire about the parameter corresponding to _POSIX_SEMAPHORES
.
_SC_SHARED_MEMORY_OBJECTS
¶Inquire about the parameter corresponding to
_POSIX_SHARED_MEMORY_OBJECTS
.
_SC_AIO_LISTIO_MAX
¶Inquire about the parameter corresponding to _POSIX_AIO_LISTIO_MAX
.
_SC_AIO_MAX
¶Inquire about the parameter corresponding to _POSIX_AIO_MAX
.
_SC_AIO_PRIO_DELTA_MAX
¶Inquire about the value by which a process can decrease its asynchronous I/O
priority level from its own scheduling priority. This corresponds to the
run-time invariant value AIO_PRIO_DELTA_MAX
.
_SC_DELAYTIMER_MAX
¶Inquire about the parameter corresponding to _POSIX_DELAYTIMER_MAX
.
_SC_MQ_OPEN_MAX
¶Inquire about the parameter corresponding to _POSIX_MQ_OPEN_MAX
.
_SC_MQ_PRIO_MAX
¶Inquire about the parameter corresponding to _POSIX_MQ_PRIO_MAX
.
_SC_RTSIG_MAX
¶Inquire about the parameter corresponding to _POSIX_RTSIG_MAX
.
_SC_SEM_NSEMS_MAX
¶Inquire about the parameter corresponding to _POSIX_SEM_NSEMS_MAX
.
_SC_SEM_VALUE_MAX
¶Inquire about the parameter corresponding to _POSIX_SEM_VALUE_MAX
.
_SC_SIGQUEUE_MAX
¶Inquire about the parameter corresponding to _POSIX_SIGQUEUE_MAX
.
_SC_TIMER_MAX
¶Inquire about the parameter corresponding to _POSIX_TIMER_MAX
.
_SC_PII
¶Inquire about the parameter corresponding to _POSIX_PII
.
_SC_PII_XTI
¶Inquire about the parameter corresponding to _POSIX_PII_XTI
.
_SC_PII_SOCKET
¶Inquire about the parameter corresponding to _POSIX_PII_SOCKET
.
_SC_PII_INTERNET
¶Inquire about the parameter corresponding to _POSIX_PII_INTERNET
.
_SC_PII_OSI
¶Inquire about the parameter corresponding to _POSIX_PII_OSI
.
_SC_SELECT
¶Inquire about the parameter corresponding to _POSIX_SELECT
.
_SC_UIO_MAXIOV
¶Inquire about the parameter corresponding to _POSIX_UIO_MAXIOV
.
_SC_PII_INTERNET_STREAM
¶Inquire about the parameter corresponding to _POSIX_PII_INTERNET_STREAM
.
_SC_PII_INTERNET_DGRAM
¶Inquire about the parameter corresponding to _POSIX_PII_INTERNET_DGRAM
.
_SC_PII_OSI_COTS
¶Inquire about the parameter corresponding to _POSIX_PII_OSI_COTS
.
_SC_PII_OSI_CLTS
¶Inquire about the parameter corresponding to _POSIX_PII_OSI_CLTS
.
_SC_PII_OSI_M
¶Inquire about the parameter corresponding to _POSIX_PII_OSI_M
.
_SC_T_IOV_MAX
¶Inquire about the value associated with the T_IOV_MAX
variable.
_SC_THREADS
¶Inquire about the parameter corresponding to _POSIX_THREADS
.
_SC_THREAD_SAFE_FUNCTIONS
¶Inquire about the parameter corresponding to
_POSIX_THREAD_SAFE_FUNCTIONS
.
_SC_GETGR_R_SIZE_MAX
¶Inquire about the parameter corresponding to _POSIX_GETGR_R_SIZE_MAX
.
_SC_GETPW_R_SIZE_MAX
¶Inquire about the parameter corresponding to _POSIX_GETPW_R_SIZE_MAX
.
_SC_LOGIN_NAME_MAX
¶Inquire about the parameter corresponding to _POSIX_LOGIN_NAME_MAX
.
_SC_TTY_NAME_MAX
¶Inquire about the parameter corresponding to _POSIX_TTY_NAME_MAX
.
_SC_THREAD_DESTRUCTOR_ITERATIONS
¶Inquire about the parameter corresponding to
_POSIX_THREAD_DESTRUCTOR_ITERATIONS
.
_SC_THREAD_KEYS_MAX
¶Inquire about the parameter corresponding to _POSIX_THREAD_KEYS_MAX
.
_SC_THREAD_STACK_MIN
¶Inquire about the parameter corresponding to _POSIX_THREAD_STACK_MIN
.
_SC_THREAD_THREADS_MAX
¶Inquire about the parameter corresponding to _POSIX_THREAD_THREADS_MAX
.
_SC_THREAD_ATTR_STACKADDR
¶Inquire about the parameter corresponding to
a
_POSIX_THREAD_ATTR_STACKADDR
.
_SC_THREAD_ATTR_STACKSIZE
¶Inquire about the parameter corresponding to
_POSIX_THREAD_ATTR_STACKSIZE
.
_SC_THREAD_PRIORITY_SCHEDULING
¶Inquire about the parameter corresponding to
_POSIX_THREAD_PRIORITY_SCHEDULING
.
_SC_THREAD_PRIO_INHERIT
¶Inquire about the parameter corresponding to _POSIX_THREAD_PRIO_INHERIT
.
_SC_THREAD_PRIO_PROTECT
¶Inquire about the parameter corresponding to _POSIX_THREAD_PRIO_PROTECT
.
_SC_THREAD_PROCESS_SHARED
¶Inquire about the parameter corresponding to
_POSIX_THREAD_PROCESS_SHARED
.
_SC_2_C_DEV
¶Inquire about whether the system has the POSIX.2 C compiler command,
c89
.
_SC_2_FORT_DEV
¶Inquire about whether the system has the POSIX.2 Fortran compiler
command, fort77
.
_SC_2_FORT_RUN
¶Inquire about whether the system has the POSIX.2 asa
command to
interpret Fortran carriage control.
_SC_2_LOCALEDEF
¶Inquire about whether the system has the POSIX.2 localedef
command.
_SC_2_SW_DEV
¶Inquire about whether the system has the POSIX.2 commands ar
,
make
, and strip
.
_SC_BC_BASE_MAX
¶Inquire about the maximum value of obase
in the bc
utility.
_SC_BC_DIM_MAX
¶Inquire about the maximum size of an array in the bc
utility.
_SC_BC_SCALE_MAX
¶Inquire about the maximum value of scale
in the bc
utility.
_SC_BC_STRING_MAX
¶Inquire about the maximum size of a string constant in the
bc
utility.
_SC_COLL_WEIGHTS_MAX
¶Inquire about the maximum number of weights that can necessarily be used in defining the collating sequence for a locale.
_SC_EXPR_NEST_MAX
¶Inquire about the maximum number of expressions nested within
parentheses when using the expr
utility.
_SC_LINE_MAX
¶Inquire about the maximum size of a text line that the POSIX.2 text utilities can handle.
_SC_EQUIV_CLASS_MAX
¶Inquire about the maximum number of weights that can be assigned to an
entry of the LC_COLLATE
category ‘order’ keyword in a locale
definition. The GNU C Library does not presently support locale
definitions.
_SC_VERSION
¶Inquire about the version number of POSIX.1 that the library and kernel support.
_SC_2_VERSION
¶Inquire about the version number of POSIX.2 that the system utilities support.
_SC_PAGESIZE
¶Inquire about the virtual memory page size of the machine.
getpagesize
returns the same value (see How to get information about the memory subsystem?).
_SC_NPROCESSORS_CONF
¶Inquire about the number of configured processors.
_SC_NPROCESSORS_ONLN
¶Inquire about the number of processors online.
_SC_PHYS_PAGES
¶Inquire about the number of physical pages in the system.
_SC_AVPHYS_PAGES
¶Inquire about the number of available physical pages in the system.
_SC_ATEXIT_MAX
¶Inquire about the number of functions which can be registered as termination
functions for atexit
; see Cleanups on Exit.
_SC_LEVEL1_ICACHE_SIZE
¶Inquire about the size of the Level 1 instruction cache.
_SC_LEVEL1_ICACHE_ASSOC
¶Inquire about the associativity of the Level 1 instruction cache.
_SC_LEVEL1_ICACHE_LINESIZE
¶Inquire about the line length of the Level 1 instruction cache.
On aarch64, the cache line size returned is the minimum instruction cache line size observable by userspace. This is typically the same as the L1 icache size but on some cores it may not be so. However, it is specified in the architecture that operations such as cache line invalidation are consistent with the size reported with this variable.
_SC_LEVEL1_DCACHE_SIZE
¶Inquire about the size of the Level 1 data cache.
_SC_LEVEL1_DCACHE_ASSOC
¶Inquire about the associativity of the Level 1 data cache.
_SC_LEVEL1_DCACHE_LINESIZE
¶Inquire about the line length of the Level 1 data cache.
On aarch64, the cache line size returned is the minimum data cache line size observable by userspace. This is typically the same as the L1 dcache size but on some cores it may not be so. However, it is specified in the architecture that operations such as cache line invalidation are consistent with the size reported with this variable.
_SC_LEVEL2_CACHE_SIZE
¶Inquire about the size of the Level 2 cache.
_SC_LEVEL2_CACHE_ASSOC
¶Inquire about the associativity of the Level 2 cache.
_SC_LEVEL2_CACHE_LINESIZE
¶Inquire about the line length of the Level 2 cache.
_SC_LEVEL3_CACHE_SIZE
¶Inquire about the size of the Level 3 cache.
_SC_LEVEL3_CACHE_ASSOC
¶Inquire about the associativity of the Level 3 cache.
_SC_LEVEL3_CACHE_LINESIZE
¶Inquire about the line length of the Level 3 cache.
_SC_LEVEL4_CACHE_SIZE
¶Inquire about the size of the Level 4 cache.
_SC_LEVEL4_CACHE_ASSOC
¶Inquire about the associativity of the Level 4 cache.
_SC_LEVEL4_CACHE_LINESIZE
¶Inquire about the line length of the Level 4 cache.
_SC_XOPEN_VERSION
¶Inquire about the parameter corresponding to _XOPEN_VERSION
.
_SC_XOPEN_XCU_VERSION
¶Inquire about the parameter corresponding to _XOPEN_XCU_VERSION
.
_SC_XOPEN_UNIX
¶Inquire about the parameter corresponding to _XOPEN_UNIX
.
_SC_XOPEN_REALTIME
¶Inquire about the parameter corresponding to _XOPEN_REALTIME
.
_SC_XOPEN_REALTIME_THREADS
¶Inquire about the parameter corresponding to _XOPEN_REALTIME_THREADS
.
_SC_XOPEN_LEGACY
¶Inquire about the parameter corresponding to _XOPEN_LEGACY
.
_SC_XOPEN_CRYPT
¶Inquire about the parameter corresponding to _XOPEN_CRYPT
.
The GNU C Library no longer implements the _XOPEN_CRYPT
extensions,
so ‘sysconf (_SC_XOPEN_CRYPT)’ always returns -1
.
_SC_XOPEN_ENH_I18N
¶Inquire about the parameter corresponding to _XOPEN_ENH_I18N
.
_SC_XOPEN_SHM
¶Inquire about the parameter corresponding to _XOPEN_SHM
.
_SC_XOPEN_XPG2
¶Inquire about the parameter corresponding to _XOPEN_XPG2
.
_SC_XOPEN_XPG3
¶Inquire about the parameter corresponding to _XOPEN_XPG3
.
_SC_XOPEN_XPG4
¶Inquire about the parameter corresponding to _XOPEN_XPG4
.
_SC_CHAR_BIT
¶Inquire about the number of bits in a variable of type char
.
_SC_CHAR_MAX
¶Inquire about the maximum value which can be stored in a variable of type
char
.
_SC_CHAR_MIN
¶Inquire about the minimum value which can be stored in a variable of type
char
.
_SC_INT_MAX
¶Inquire about the maximum value which can be stored in a variable of type
int
.
_SC_INT_MIN
¶Inquire about the minimum value which can be stored in a variable of type
int
.
_SC_LONG_BIT
¶Inquire about the number of bits in a variable of type long int
.
_SC_WORD_BIT
¶Inquire about the number of bits in a variable of a register word.
_SC_MB_LEN_MAX
¶Inquire about the maximum length of a multi-byte representation of a wide character value.
_SC_NZERO
¶Inquire about the value used to internally represent the zero priority level for the process execution.
_SC_SSIZE_MAX
¶Inquire about the maximum value which can be stored in a variable of type
ssize_t
.
_SC_SCHAR_MAX
¶Inquire about the maximum value which can be stored in a variable of type
signed char
.
_SC_SCHAR_MIN
¶Inquire about the minimum value which can be stored in a variable of type
signed char
.
_SC_SHRT_MAX
¶Inquire about the maximum value which can be stored in a variable of type
short int
.
_SC_SHRT_MIN
¶Inquire about the minimum value which can be stored in a variable of type
short int
.
_SC_UCHAR_MAX
¶Inquire about the maximum value which can be stored in a variable of type
unsigned char
.
_SC_UINT_MAX
¶Inquire about the maximum value which can be stored in a variable of type
unsigned int
.
_SC_ULONG_MAX
¶Inquire about the maximum value which can be stored in a variable of type
unsigned long int
.
_SC_USHRT_MAX
¶Inquire about the maximum value which can be stored in a variable of type
unsigned short int
.
_SC_NL_ARGMAX
¶Inquire about the parameter corresponding to NL_ARGMAX
.
_SC_NL_LANGMAX
¶Inquire about the parameter corresponding to NL_LANGMAX
.
_SC_NL_MSGMAX
¶Inquire about the parameter corresponding to NL_MSGMAX
.
_SC_NL_NMAX
¶Inquire about the parameter corresponding to NL_NMAX
.
_SC_NL_SETMAX
¶Inquire about the parameter corresponding to NL_SETMAX
.
_SC_NL_TEXTMAX
¶Inquire about the parameter corresponding to NL_TEXTMAX
.
_SC_MINSIGSTKSZ
¶Inquire about the minimum number of bytes of free stack space required in order to guarantee successful, non-nested handling of a single signal whose handler is an empty function.
_SC_SIGSTKSZ
¶Inquire about the suggested minimum number of bytes of stack space required for a signal stack.
This is not guaranteed to be enough for any specific purpose other than the invocation of a single, non-nested, empty handler, but nonetheless should be enough for basic scenarios involving simple signal handlers and very low levels of signal nesting (say, 2 or 3 levels at the very most).
This value is provided for developer convenience and to ease migration
from the legacy SIGSTKSZ
constant. Programs requiring stronger
guarantees should avoid using it if at all possible.
Previous: Constants for sysconf
Parameters, Up: Using sysconf
[Contents][Index]
sysconf
We recommend that you first test for a macro definition for the
parameter you are interested in, and call sysconf
only if the
macro is not defined. For example, here is how to test whether job
control is supported:
int have_job_control (void) { #ifdef _POSIX_JOB_CONTROL return 1; #else int value = sysconf (_SC_JOB_CONTROL); if (value < 0) /* If the system is that badly wedged, there’s no use trying to go on. */ fatal (strerror (errno)); return value; #endif }
Here is how to get the value of a numeric limit:
int get_child_max () { #ifdef CHILD_MAX return CHILD_MAX; #else int value = sysconf (_SC_CHILD_MAX); if (value < 0) fatal (strerror (errno)); return value; #endif }
Next: Limits on File System Capacity, Previous: Using sysconf
, Up: System Configuration Parameters [Contents][Index]
Here are the names for the POSIX minimum upper bounds for the system limit parameters. The significance of these values is that you can safely push to these limits without checking whether the particular system you are using can go that far.
_POSIX_AIO_LISTIO_MAX
¶The most restrictive limit permitted by POSIX for the maximum number of
I/O operations that can be specified in a list I/O call. The value of
this constant is 2
; thus you can add up to two new entries
of the list of outstanding operations.
_POSIX_AIO_MAX
¶The most restrictive limit permitted by POSIX for the maximum number of
outstanding asynchronous I/O operations. The value of this constant is
1
. So you cannot expect that you can issue more than one
operation and immediately continue with the normal work, receiving the
notifications asynchronously.
_POSIX_ARG_MAX
¶The value of this macro is the most restrictive limit permitted by POSIX
for the maximum combined length of the argv and environ
arguments that can be passed to the exec
functions.
Its value is 4096
.
_POSIX_CHILD_MAX
¶The value of this macro is the most restrictive limit permitted by POSIX
for the maximum number of simultaneous processes per real user ID. Its
value is 6
.
_POSIX_NGROUPS_MAX
¶The value of this macro is the most restrictive limit permitted by POSIX
for the maximum number of supplementary group IDs per process. Its
value is 0
.
_POSIX_OPEN_MAX
¶The value of this macro is the most restrictive limit permitted by POSIX
for the maximum number of files that a single process can have open
simultaneously. Its value is 16
.
_POSIX_SSIZE_MAX
¶The value of this macro is the most restrictive limit permitted by POSIX
for the maximum value that can be stored in an object of type
ssize_t
. Its value is 32767
.
_POSIX_STREAM_MAX
¶The value of this macro is the most restrictive limit permitted by POSIX
for the maximum number of streams that a single process can have open
simultaneously. Its value is 8
.
_POSIX_TZNAME_MAX
¶The value of this macro is the most restrictive limit permitted by POSIX
for the maximum length of a time zone abbreviation. Its value is 3
.
_POSIX2_RE_DUP_MAX
¶The value of this macro is the most restrictive limit permitted by POSIX
for the numbers used in the ‘\{min,max\}’ construct
in a regular expression. Its value is 255
.
Next: Optional Features in File Support, Previous: Minimum Values for General Capacity Limits, Up: System Configuration Parameters [Contents][Index]
The POSIX.1 standard specifies a number of parameters that describe the limitations of the file system. It’s possible for the system to have a fixed, uniform limit for a parameter, but this isn’t the usual case. On most systems, it’s possible for different file systems (and, for some parameters, even different files) to have different maximum limits. For example, this is very likely if you use NFS to mount some of the file systems from other machines.
Each of the following macros is defined in limits.h only if the
system has a fixed, uniform limit for the parameter in question. If the
system allows different file systems or files to have different limits,
then the macro is undefined; use pathconf
or fpathconf
to
find out the limit that applies to a particular file. See Using pathconf
.
Each parameter also has another macro, with a name starting with ‘_POSIX’, which gives the lowest value that the limit is allowed to have on any POSIX system. See Minimum Values for File System Limits.
The uniform system limit (if any) for the number of names for a given file. See Hard Links.
The uniform system limit (if any) for the amount of text in a line of input when input editing is enabled. See Two Styles of Input: Canonical or Not.
The uniform system limit (if any) for the total number of characters typed ahead as input. See I/O Queues.
The uniform system limit (if any) for the length of a file name component, not including the terminating null character.
Portability Note: On some systems, the GNU C Library defines
NAME_MAX
, but does not actually enforce this limit.
The uniform system limit (if any) for the length of an entire file name (that
is, the argument given to system calls such as open
), including the
terminating null character.
Portability Note: The GNU C Library does not enforce this limit
even if PATH_MAX
is defined.
The uniform system limit (if any) for the number of bytes that can be written atomically to a pipe. If multiple processes are writing to the same pipe simultaneously, output from different processes might be interleaved in chunks of this size. See Pipes and FIFOs.
These are alternative macro names for some of the same information.
This is the BSD name for NAME_MAX
. It is defined in
dirent.h.
The value of this macro is an integer constant expression that represents the maximum length of a file name string. It is defined in stdio.h.
Unlike PATH_MAX
, this macro is defined even if there is no actual
limit imposed. In such a case, its value is typically a very large
number. This is always the case on GNU/Hurd systems.
Usage Note: Don’t use FILENAME_MAX
as the size of an
array in which to store a file name! You can’t possibly make an array
that big! Use dynamic allocation (see Allocating Storage For Program Data) instead.
Next: Minimum Values for File System Limits, Previous: Limits on File System Capacity, Up: System Configuration Parameters [Contents][Index]
POSIX defines certain system-specific options in the system calls for operating on files. Some systems support these options and others do not. Since these options are provided in the kernel, not in the library, simply using the GNU C Library does not guarantee that any of these features is supported; it depends on the system you are using. They can also vary between file systems on a single machine.
This section describes the macros you can test to determine whether a
particular option is supported on your machine. If a given macro is
defined in unistd.h, then its value says whether the
corresponding feature is supported. (A value of -1
indicates no;
any other value indicates yes.) If the macro is undefined, it means
particular files may or may not support the feature.
Since all the machines that support the GNU C Library also support NFS,
one can never make a general statement about whether all file systems
support the _POSIX_CHOWN_RESTRICTED
and _POSIX_NO_TRUNC
features. So these names are never defined as macros in the GNU C Library.
If this option is in effect, the chown
function is restricted so
that the only changes permitted to nonprivileged processes is to change
the group owner of a file to either be the effective group ID of the
process, or one of its supplementary group IDs. See File Owner.
If this option is in effect, file name components longer than
NAME_MAX
generate an ENAMETOOLONG
error. Otherwise, file
name components that are too long are silently truncated.
This option is only meaningful for files that are terminal devices. If it is enabled, then handling for special control characters can be disabled individually. See Special Characters.
If one of these macros is undefined, that means that the option might be
in effect for some files and not for others. To inquire about a
particular file, call pathconf
or fpathconf
.
See Using pathconf
.
Next: Using pathconf
, Previous: Optional Features in File Support, Up: System Configuration Parameters [Contents][Index]
Here are the names for the POSIX minimum upper bounds for some of the above parameters. The significance of these values is that you can safely push to these limits without checking whether the particular system you are using can go that far. In most cases GNU systems do not have these strict limitations. The actual limit should be requested if necessary.
_POSIX_LINK_MAX
¶The most restrictive limit permitted by POSIX for the maximum value of a
file’s link count. The value of this constant is 8
; thus, you
can always make up to eight names for a file without running into a
system limit.
_POSIX_MAX_CANON
¶The most restrictive limit permitted by POSIX for the maximum number of
bytes in a canonical input line from a terminal device. The value of
this constant is 255
.
_POSIX_MAX_INPUT
¶The most restrictive limit permitted by POSIX for the maximum number of
bytes in a terminal device input queue (or typeahead buffer).
See Input Modes. The value of this constant is 255
.
_POSIX_NAME_MAX
¶The most restrictive limit permitted by POSIX for the maximum number of
bytes in a file name component. The value of this constant is
14
.
_POSIX_PATH_MAX
¶The most restrictive limit permitted by POSIX for the maximum number of
bytes in a file name. The value of this constant is 256
.
_POSIX_PIPE_BUF
¶The most restrictive limit permitted by POSIX for the maximum number of
bytes that can be written atomically to a pipe. The value of this
constant is 512
.
SYMLINK_MAX
¶Maximum number of bytes in a symbolic link.
POSIX_REC_INCR_XFER_SIZE
¶Recommended increment for file transfer sizes between the
POSIX_REC_MIN_XFER_SIZE
and POSIX_REC_MAX_XFER_SIZE
values.
POSIX_REC_MAX_XFER_SIZE
¶Maximum recommended file transfer size.
POSIX_REC_MIN_XFER_SIZE
¶Minimum recommended file transfer size.
POSIX_REC_XFER_ALIGN
¶Recommended file transfer buffer alignment.
Next: Utility Program Capacity Limits, Previous: Minimum Values for File System Limits, Up: System Configuration Parameters [Contents][Index]
pathconf
When your machine allows different files to have different values for a file system parameter, you can use the functions in this section to find out the value that applies to any particular file.
These functions and the associated constants for the parameter argument are declared in the header file unistd.h.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Unsafe lock heap | AC-Unsafe lock fd mem | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This function is used to inquire about the limits that apply to the file named filename.
The parameter argument should be one of the ‘_PC_’ constants listed below.
The normal return value from pathconf
is the value you requested.
A value of -1
is returned both if the implementation does not
impose a limit, and in case of an error. In the former case,
errno
is not set, while in the latter case, errno
is set
to indicate the cause of the problem. So the only way to use this
function robustly is to store 0
into errno
just before
calling it.
Besides the usual file name errors (see File Name Errors), the following error condition is defined for this function:
EINVAL
The value of parameter is invalid, or the implementation doesn’t support the parameter for the specific file.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Unsafe lock heap | AC-Unsafe lock fd mem | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This is just like pathconf
except that an open file descriptor
is used to specify the file for which information is requested, instead
of a file name.
The following errno
error conditions are defined for this function:
EBADF
The filedes argument is not a valid file descriptor.
EINVAL
The value of parameter is invalid, or the implementation doesn’t support the parameter for the specific file.
Here are the symbolic constants that you can use as the parameter
argument to pathconf
and fpathconf
. The values are all
integer constants.
_PC_LINK_MAX
¶Inquire about the value of LINK_MAX
.
_PC_MAX_CANON
¶Inquire about the value of MAX_CANON
.
_PC_MAX_INPUT
¶Inquire about the value of MAX_INPUT
.
_PC_NAME_MAX
¶Inquire about the value of NAME_MAX
.
_PC_PATH_MAX
¶Inquire about the value of PATH_MAX
.
_PC_PIPE_BUF
¶Inquire about the value of PIPE_BUF
.
_PC_CHOWN_RESTRICTED
¶Inquire about the value of _POSIX_CHOWN_RESTRICTED
.
_PC_NO_TRUNC
¶Inquire about the value of _POSIX_NO_TRUNC
.
_PC_VDISABLE
¶Inquire about the value of _POSIX_VDISABLE
.
_PC_SYNC_IO
¶Inquire about the value of _POSIX_SYNC_IO
.
_PC_ASYNC_IO
¶Inquire about the value of _POSIX_ASYNC_IO
.
_PC_PRIO_IO
¶Inquire about the value of _POSIX_PRIO_IO
.
_PC_FILESIZEBITS
¶Inquire about the availability of large files on the filesystem.
_PC_REC_INCR_XFER_SIZE
¶Inquire about the value of POSIX_REC_INCR_XFER_SIZE
.
_PC_REC_MAX_XFER_SIZE
¶Inquire about the value of POSIX_REC_MAX_XFER_SIZE
.
_PC_REC_MIN_XFER_SIZE
¶Inquire about the value of POSIX_REC_MIN_XFER_SIZE
.
_PC_REC_XFER_ALIGN
¶Inquire about the value of POSIX_REC_XFER_ALIGN
.
Portability Note: On some systems, the GNU C Library does not
enforce _PC_NAME_MAX
or _PC_PATH_MAX
limits.
Next: Minimum Values for Utility Limits, Previous: Using pathconf
, Up: System Configuration Parameters [Contents][Index]
The POSIX.2 standard specifies certain system limits that you can access
through sysconf
that apply to utility behavior rather than the
behavior of the library or the operating system.
The GNU C Library defines macros for these limits, and sysconf
returns values for them if you ask; but these values convey no
meaningful information. They are simply the smallest values that
POSIX.2 permits.
The largest value of obase
that the bc
utility is
guaranteed to support.
The largest number of elements in one array that the bc
utility
is guaranteed to support.
The largest value of scale
that the bc
utility is
guaranteed to support.
The largest number of characters in one string constant that the
bc
utility is guaranteed to support.
The largest number of weights that can necessarily be used in defining the collating sequence for a locale.
The maximum number of expressions that can be nested within parentheses
by the expr
utility.
The largest text line that the text-oriented POSIX.2 utilities can support. (If you are using the GNU versions of these utilities, then there is no actual limit except that imposed by the available virtual memory, but there is no way that the library can tell you this.)
The maximum number of weights that can be assigned to an entry of the
LC_COLLATE
category ‘order’ keyword in a locale definition.
The GNU C Library does not presently support locale definitions.
Next: String-Valued Parameters, Previous: Utility Program Capacity Limits, Up: System Configuration Parameters [Contents][Index]
_POSIX2_BC_BASE_MAX
¶The most restrictive limit permitted by POSIX.2 for the maximum value of
obase
in the bc
utility. Its value is 99
.
_POSIX2_BC_DIM_MAX
¶The most restrictive limit permitted by POSIX.2 for the maximum size of
an array in the bc
utility. Its value is 2048
.
_POSIX2_BC_SCALE_MAX
¶The most restrictive limit permitted by POSIX.2 for the maximum value of
scale
in the bc
utility. Its value is 99
.
_POSIX2_BC_STRING_MAX
¶The most restrictive limit permitted by POSIX.2 for the maximum size of
a string constant in the bc
utility. Its value is 1000
.
_POSIX2_COLL_WEIGHTS_MAX
¶The most restrictive limit permitted by POSIX.2 for the maximum number
of weights that can necessarily be used in defining the collating
sequence for a locale. Its value is 2
.
_POSIX2_EXPR_NEST_MAX
¶The most restrictive limit permitted by POSIX.2 for the maximum number
of expressions nested within parenthesis when using the expr
utility.
Its value is 32
.
_POSIX2_LINE_MAX
¶The most restrictive limit permitted by POSIX.2 for the maximum size of
a text line that the text utilities can handle. Its value is
2048
.
_POSIX2_EQUIV_CLASS_MAX
¶The most restrictive limit permitted by POSIX.2 for the maximum number
of weights that can be assigned to an entry of the LC_COLLATE
category ‘order’ keyword in a locale definition. Its value is
2
. The GNU C Library does not presently support locale
definitions.
Previous: Minimum Values for Utility Limits, Up: System Configuration Parameters [Contents][Index]
POSIX.2 defines a way to get string-valued parameters from the operating
system with the function confstr
:
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This function reads the value of a string-valued system parameter, storing the string into len bytes of memory space starting at buf. The parameter argument should be one of the ‘_CS_’ symbols listed below.
The normal return value from confstr
is the length of the string
value that you asked for. If you supply a null pointer for buf,
then confstr
does not try to store the string; it just returns
its length. A value of 0
indicates an error.
If the string you asked for is too long for the buffer (that is, longer
than len - 1
), then confstr
stores just that much
(leaving room for the terminating null character). You can tell that
this has happened because confstr
returns a value greater than or
equal to len.
The following errno
error conditions are defined for this function:
EINVAL
The value of the parameter is invalid.
Currently there is just one parameter you can read with confstr
:
_CS_PATH
¶This parameter’s value is the recommended default path for searching for executable files. This is the path that a user has by default just after logging in.
_CS_LFS_CFLAGS
¶The returned string specifies which additional flags must be given to
the C compiler if a source is compiled using the
_LARGEFILE_SOURCE
feature select macro; see Feature Test Macros.
_CS_LFS_LDFLAGS
¶The returned string specifies which additional flags must be given to
the linker if a source is compiled using the
_LARGEFILE_SOURCE
feature select macro; see Feature Test Macros.
_CS_LFS_LIBS
¶The returned string specifies which additional libraries must be linked
to the application if a source is compiled using the
_LARGEFILE_SOURCE
feature select macro; see Feature Test Macros.
_CS_LFS_LINTFLAGS
¶The returned string specifies which additional flags must be given to
the lint tool if a source is compiled using the
_LARGEFILE_SOURCE
feature select macro; see Feature Test Macros.
_CS_LFS64_CFLAGS
¶The returned string specifies which additional flags must be given to
the C compiler if a source is compiled using the
_LARGEFILE64_SOURCE
feature select macro; see Feature Test Macros.
_CS_LFS64_LDFLAGS
¶The returned string specifies which additional flags must be given to
the linker if a source is compiled using the
_LARGEFILE64_SOURCE
feature select macro; see Feature Test Macros.
_CS_LFS64_LIBS
¶The returned string specifies which additional libraries must be linked
to the application if a source is compiled using the
_LARGEFILE64_SOURCE
feature select macro; see Feature Test Macros.
_CS_LFS64_LINTFLAGS
¶The returned string specifies which additional flags must be given to
the lint tool if a source is compiled using the
_LARGEFILE64_SOURCE
feature select macro; see Feature Test Macros.
The way to use confstr
without any arbitrary limit on string size
is to call it twice: first call it to get the length, allocate the
buffer accordingly, and then call confstr
again to fill the
buffer, like this:
char * get_default_path (void) { size_t len = confstr (_CS_PATH, NULL, 0); char *buffer = (char *) xmalloc (len); if (confstr (_CS_PATH, buf, len + 1) == 0) { free (buffer); return NULL; } return buffer; }
Next: Debugging support, Previous: System Configuration Parameters, Up: Main Menu [Contents][Index]
The GNU C Library includes only a few special-purpose cryptographic functions: one-way hash functions for passphrase storage, and access to a cryptographic randomness source, if one is provided by the operating system. Programs that need general-purpose cryptography should use a dedicated cryptography library, such as libgcrypt.
Many countries place legal restrictions on the import, export, possession, or use of cryptographic software. We deplore these restrictions, but we must still warn you that the GNU C Library may be subject to them, even if you do not use the functions in this chapter yourself. The restrictions vary from place to place and are changed often, so we cannot give any more specific advice than this warning.
Next: Generating Unpredictable Bytes, Up: Cryptographic Functions [Contents][Index]
Sometimes it is necessary to be sure that a user is authorized to use some service a machine provides—for instance, to log in as a particular user id (see Users and Groups). One traditional way of doing this is for each user to choose a secret passphrase; then, the system can ask someone claiming to be a user what the user’s passphrase is, and if the person gives the correct passphrase then the system can grant the appropriate privileges. (Traditionally, these were called “passwords,” but nowadays a single word is too easy to guess.)
Programs that handle passphrases must take special care not to reveal them to anyone, no matter what. It is not enough to keep them in a file that is only accessible with special privileges. The file might be “leaked” via a bug or misconfiguration, and system administrators shouldn’t learn everyone’s passphrase even if they have to edit that file for some reason. To avoid this, passphrases should also be converted into one-way hashes, using a one-way function, before they are stored.
A one-way function is easy to compute, but there is no known way to compute its inverse. This means the system can easily check passphrases, by hashing them and comparing the result with the stored hash. But an attacker who discovers someone’s passphrase hash can only discover the passphrase it corresponds to by guessing and checking. The one-way functions are designed to make this process impractically slow, for all but the most obvious guesses. (Do not use a word from the dictionary as your passphrase.)
The GNU C Library provides an interface to four one-way functions, based on the SHA-2-512, SHA-2-256, MD5, and DES cryptographic primitives. New passphrases should be hashed with either of the SHA-based functions. The others are too weak for newly set passphrases, but we continue to support them for verifying old passphrases. The DES-based hash is especially weak, because it ignores all but the first eight characters of its input.
Preliminary: | MT-Unsafe race:crypt | AS-Unsafe corrupt lock heap dlopen | AC-Unsafe lock mem | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The function crypt
converts a passphrase string, phrase,
into a one-way hash suitable for storage in the user database. The
string that it returns will consist entirely of printable ASCII
characters. It will not contain whitespace, nor any of the characters
‘:’, ‘;’, ‘*’, ‘!’, or ‘\’.
The salt parameter controls which one-way function is used, and
it also ensures that the output of the one-way function is different
for every user, even if they have the same passphrase. This makes it
harder to guess passphrases from a large user database. Without salt,
the attacker could make a guess, run crypt
on it once, and
compare the result with all the hashes. Salt forces the attacker to
make separate calls to crypt
for each user.
To verify a passphrase, pass the previously hashed passphrase as the salt. To hash a new passphrase for storage, set salt to a string consisting of a prefix plus a sequence of randomly chosen characters, according to this table:
One-way function | Prefix | Random sequence |
---|---|---|
SHA-2-512 | ‘$6$’ | 16 characters |
SHA-2-256 | ‘$5$’ | 16 characters |
MD5 | ‘$1$’ | 8 characters |
DES | ‘’ | 2 characters |
In all cases, the random characters should be chosen from the alphabet
./0-9A-Za-z
.
With all of the hash functions except DES, phrase can be arbitrarily long, and all eight bits of each byte are significant. With DES, only the first eight characters of phrase affect the output, and the eighth bit of each byte is also ignored.
crypt
can fail. Some implementations return NULL
on
failure, and others return an invalid hashed passphrase, which
will begin with a ‘*’ and will not be the same as salt. In
either case, errno
will be set to indicate the problem. Some
of the possible error codes are:
EINVAL
salt is invalid; neither a previously hashed passphrase, nor a well-formed new salt for any of the supported hash functions.
EPERM
The system configuration forbids use of the hash function selected by salt.
ENOMEM
Failed to allocate internal scratch storage.
ENOSYS
EOPNOTSUPP
Hashing passphrases is not supported at all, or the hash function selected by salt is not supported. The GNU C Library does not use these error codes, but they may be encountered on other operating systems.
crypt
uses static storage for both internal scratchwork and the
string it returns. It is not safe to call crypt
from multiple
threads simultaneously, and the string it returns will be overwritten
by any subsequent call to crypt
.
crypt
is specified in the X/Open Portability Guide and is
present on nearly all historical Unix systems. However, the XPG does
not specify any one-way functions.
crypt
is declared in unistd.h. The GNU C Library also
declares this function in crypt.h.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Unsafe corrupt lock heap dlopen | AC-Unsafe lock mem | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The function crypt_r
is a thread-safe version of crypt
.
Instead of static storage, it uses the memory pointed to by its
data argument for both scratchwork and the string it returns.
It can safely be used from multiple threads, as long as different
data objects are used in each thread. The string it returns
will still be overwritten by another call with the same data.
data must point to a struct crypt_data
object allocated
by the caller. All of the fields of struct crypt_data
are
private, but before one of these objects is used for the first time,
it must be initialized to all zeroes, using memset
or similar.
After that, it can be reused for many calls to crypt_r
without
erasing it again. struct crypt_data
is very large, so it is
best to allocate it with malloc
rather than as a local
variable. See Allocating Storage For Program Data.
crypt_r
is a GNU extension. It is declared in crypt.h,
as is struct crypt_data
.
The following program shows how to use crypt
the first time a
passphrase is entered. It uses getentropy
to make the salt as
unpredictable as possible; see Generating Unpredictable Bytes.
#include <stdio.h> #include <unistd.h> #include <crypt.h> int main(void) { unsigned char ubytes[16]; char salt[20]; const char *const saltchars = "./0123456789ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRST" "UVWXYZabcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz"; char *hash; int i; /* Retrieve 16 unpredictable bytes from the operating system. */ if (getentropy (ubytes, sizeof ubytes)) { perror ("getentropy"); return 1; } /* Use them to fill in the salt string. */ salt[0] = '$'; salt[1] = '5'; /* SHA-256 */ salt[2] = '$'; for (i = 0; i < 16; i++) salt[3+i] = saltchars[ubytes[i] & 0x3f]; salt[3+i] = '\0'; /* Read in the user’s passphrase and hash it. */ hash = crypt (getpass ("Enter new passphrase: "), salt); if (!hash || hash[0] == '*') { perror ("crypt"); return 1; } /* Print the results. */ puts (hash); return 0; }
The next program demonstrates how to verify a passphrase. It checks a hash hardcoded into the program, because looking up real users’ hashed passphrases may require special privileges (see User Database). It also shows that different one-way functions produce different hashes for the same passphrase.
#include <stdio.h> #include <string.h> #include <unistd.h> #include <crypt.h> /* ‘GNU's Not Unix’ hashed using SHA-256, MD5, and DES. */ static const char hash_sha[] = "$5$DQ2z5NHf1jNJnChB$kV3ZTR0aUaosujPhLzR84Llo3BsspNSe4/tsp7VoEn6"; static const char hash_md5[] = "$1$A3TxDv41$rtXVTUXl2LkeSV0UU5xxs1"; static const char hash_des[] = "FgkTuF98w5DaI"; int main(void) { char *phrase; int status = 0; /* Prompt for a passphrase. */ phrase = getpass ("Enter passphrase: "); /* Compare against the stored hashes. Any input that begins with ‘GNU's No’ will match the DES hash, but the other two will only match ‘GNU's Not Unix’. */ if (strcmp (crypt (phrase, hash_sha), hash_sha)) { puts ("SHA: not ok"); status = 1; } else puts ("SHA: ok"); if (strcmp (crypt (phrase, hash_md5), hash_md5)) { puts ("MD5: not ok"); status = 1; } else puts ("MD5: ok"); if (strcmp (crypt (phrase, hash_des), hash_des)) { puts ("DES: not ok"); status = 1; } else puts ("DES: ok"); return status; }
Previous: Passphrase Storage, Up: Cryptographic Functions [Contents][Index]
Cryptographic applications often need some random data that will be as
difficult as possible for a hostile eavesdropper to guess. For
instance, encryption keys should be chosen at random, and the “salt”
strings used by crypt
(see Passphrase Storage) should also
be chosen at random.
Some pseudo-random number generators do not provide unpredictable-enough output for cryptographic applications; see Pseudo-Random Numbers. Such applications need to use a cryptographic random number generator (CRNG), also sometimes called a cryptographically strong pseudo-random number generator (CSPRNG) or deterministic random bit generator (DRBG).
Currently, the GNU C Library does not provide a cryptographic random number generator, but it does provide functions that read random data from a randomness source supplied by the operating system. The randomness source is a CRNG at heart, but it also continually “re-seeds” itself from physical sources of randomness, such as electronic noise and clock jitter. This means applications do not need to do anything to ensure that the random numbers it produces are different on each run.
The catch, however, is that these functions will only produce relatively short random strings in any one call. Often this is not a problem, but applications that need more than a few kilobytes of cryptographically strong random data should call these functions once and use their output to seed a CRNG.
Most applications should use getentropy
. The getrandom
function is intended for low-level applications which need additional
control over blocking behavior.
| MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This function writes exactly length bytes of random data to the
array starting at buffer. length can be no more than 256.
On success, it returns zero. On failure, it returns -1, and
errno
is set to indicate the problem. Some of the possible
errors are listed below.
ENOSYS
The operating system does not implement a randomness source, or does not support this way of accessing it. (For instance, the system call used by this function was added to the Linux kernel in version 3.17.)
EFAULT
The combination of buffer and length arguments specifies an invalid memory range.
EIO
length is larger than 256, or the kernel entropy pool has suffered a catastrophic failure.
A call to getentropy
can only block when the system has just
booted and the randomness source has not yet been initialized.
However, if it does block, it cannot be interrupted by signals or
thread cancellation. Programs intended to run in very early stages of
the boot process may need to use getrandom
in non-blocking mode
instead, and be prepared to cope with random data not being available
at all.
The getentropy
function is declared in the header file
sys/random.h. It is derived from OpenBSD.
| MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This function writes up to length bytes of random data to the array starting at buffer. The flags argument should be either zero, or the bitwise OR of some of the following flags:
GRND_RANDOM
Use the /dev/random (blocking) source instead of the /dev/urandom (non-blocking) source to obtain randomness.
If this flag is specified, the call may block, potentially for quite some time, even after the randomness source has been initialized. If it is not specified, the call can only block when the system has just booted and the randomness source has not yet been initialized.
GRND_NONBLOCK
Instead of blocking, return to the caller immediately if no data is available.
GRND_INSECURE
Write random data that may not be cryptographically secure.
Unlike getentropy
, the getrandom
function is a
cancellation point, and if it blocks, it can be interrupted by
signals.
On success, getrandom
returns the number of bytes which have
been written to the buffer, which may be less than length. On
error, it returns -1, and errno
is set to indicate the
problem. Some of the possible errors are:
ENOSYS
The operating system does not implement a randomness source, or does not support this way of accessing it. (For instance, the system call used by this function was added to the Linux kernel in version 3.17.)
EAGAIN
No random data was available and GRND_NONBLOCK
was specified in
flags.
EFAULT
The combination of buffer and length arguments specifies an invalid memory range.
EINTR
The system call was interrupted. During the system boot process, before the kernel randomness pool is initialized, this can happen even if flags is zero.
EINVAL
The flags argument contains an invalid combination of flags.
The getrandom
function is declared in the header file
sys/random.h. It is a GNU extension.
Next: Threads, Previous: Cryptographic Functions, Up: Main Menu [Contents][Index]
Applications are usually debugged using dedicated debugger programs. But sometimes this is not possible and, in any case, it is useful to provide the developer with as much information as possible at the time the problems are experienced. For this reason a few functions are provided which a program can use to help the developer more easily locate the problem.
Up: Debugging support [Contents][Index]
A backtrace is a list of the function calls that are currently active in a thread. The usual way to inspect a backtrace of a program is to use an external debugger such as gdb. However, sometimes it is useful to obtain a backtrace programmatically from within a program, e.g., for the purposes of logging or diagnostics.
The header file execinfo.h declares three functions that obtain and manipulate backtraces of the current thread.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Unsafe init heap dlopen plugin lock | AC-Unsafe init mem lock fd | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The backtrace
function obtains a backtrace for the current
thread, as a list of pointers, and places the information into
buffer. The argument size should be the number of
void *
elements that will fit into buffer. The return
value is the actual number of entries of buffer that are obtained,
and is at most size.
The pointers placed in buffer are actually return addresses obtained by inspecting the stack, one return address per stack frame.
Note that certain compiler optimizations may interfere with obtaining a
valid backtrace. Function inlining causes the inlined function to not
have a stack frame; tail call optimization replaces one stack frame with
another; frame pointer elimination will stop backtrace
from
interpreting the stack contents correctly.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Unsafe heap | AC-Unsafe mem lock | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The backtrace_symbols
function translates the information
obtained from the backtrace
function into an array of strings.
The argument buffer should be a pointer to an array of addresses
obtained via the backtrace
function, and size is the number
of entries in that array (the return value of backtrace
).
The return value is a pointer to an array of strings, which has size entries just like the array buffer. Each string contains a printable representation of the corresponding element of buffer. It includes the function name (if this can be determined), an offset into the function, and the actual return address (in hexadecimal).
Currently, the function name and offset can only be obtained on systems that
use the ELF binary format for programs and libraries. On other systems,
only the hexadecimal return address will be present. Also, you may need
to pass additional flags to the linker to make the function names
available to the program. (For example, on systems using GNU ld, you
must pass -rdynamic
.)
The return value of backtrace_symbols
is a pointer obtained via
the malloc
function, and it is the responsibility of the caller
to free
that pointer. Note that only the return value need be
freed, not the individual strings.
The return value is NULL
if sufficient memory for the strings
cannot be obtained.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Unsafe lock | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The backtrace_symbols_fd
function performs the same translation
as the function backtrace_symbols
function. Instead of returning
the strings to the caller, it writes the strings to the file descriptor
fd, one per line. It does not use the malloc
function, and
can therefore be used in situations where that function might fail.
The following program illustrates the use of these functions. Note that
the array to contain the return addresses returned by backtrace
is allocated on the stack. Therefore code like this can be used in
situations where the memory handling via malloc
does not work
anymore (in which case the backtrace_symbols
has to be replaced
by a backtrace_symbols_fd
call as well). The number of return
addresses is normally not very large. Even complicated programs rather
seldom have a nesting level of more than, say, 50 and with 200 possible
entries probably all programs should be covered.
#include <execinfo.h>
#include <stdio.h>
#include <stdlib.h>
/* Obtain a backtrace and print it to stdout
. */
void
print_trace (void)
{
void *array[10];
char **strings;
int size, i;
size = backtrace (array, 10);
strings = backtrace_symbols (array, size);
if (strings != NULL)
{
printf ("Obtained %d stack frames.\n", size);
for (i = 0; i < size; i++)
printf ("%s\n", strings[i]);
}
free (strings);
}
/* A dummy function to make the backtrace more interesting. */
void
dummy_function (void)
{
print_trace ();
}
int
main (void)
{
dummy_function ();
return 0;
}
Next: Dynamic Linker, Previous: Debugging support, Up: Main Menu [Contents][Index]
This chapter describes functions used for managing threads. The GNU C Library provides two threading implementations: ISO C threads and POSIX threads.
Next: POSIX Threads, Up: Threads [Contents][Index]
This section describes the GNU C Library ISO C threads implementation. To have a deeper understanding of this API, it is strongly recommended to read ISO/IEC 9899:2011, section 7.26, in which ISO C threads were originally specified. All types and function prototypes are declared in the header file threads.h.
Next: Creation and Control, Up: ISO C Threads [Contents][Index]
The ISO C thread specification provides the following enumeration constants for return values from functions in the API:
thrd_timedout
¶A specified time was reached without acquiring the requested resource, usually a mutex or condition variable.
thrd_success
¶The requested operation succeeded.
thrd_busy
¶The requested operation failed because a requested resource is already in use.
thrd_error
¶The requested operation failed.
thrd_nomem
¶The requested operation failed because it was unable to allocate enough memory.
Next: Call Once, Previous: Return Values, Up: ISO C Threads [Contents][Index]
The GNU C Library implements a set of functions that allow the user to easily create and use threads. Additional functionality is provided to control the behavior of threads.
The following data types are defined for managing threads:
A unique object that identifies a thread.
This data type is an int (*) (void *)
typedef that is passed to
thrd_create
when creating a new thread. It should point to the
first function that thread will run.
The following functions are used for working with threads:
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
thrd_create
creates a new thread that will execute the function
func. The object pointed to by arg will be used as the
argument to func. If successful, thr is set to the new
thread identifier.
This function may return thrd_success
, thrd_nomem
, or
thrd_error
.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This function returns the identifier of the calling thread.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
thrd_equal
checks whether lhs and rhs refer to the
same thread. If lhs and rhs are different threads, this
function returns 0; otherwise, the return value is non-zero.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
thrd_sleep
blocks the execution of the current thread for at
least until the elapsed time pointed to by time_point has been
reached. This function does not take an absolute time, but a duration
that the thread is required to be blocked. See Time Basics, and
Time Types.
The thread may wake early if a signal that is not ignored is received.
In such a case, if remaining
is not NULL, the remaining time
duration is stored in the object pointed to by
remaining.
thrd_sleep
returns 0 if it blocked for at least the
amount of time in time_point
, -1 if it was interrupted
by a signal, or a negative number on failure.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
thrd_yield
provides a hint to the implementation to reschedule
the execution of the current thread, allowing other threads to run.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
thrd_exit
terminates execution of the calling thread and sets
its result code to res.
If this function is called from a single-threaded process, the call is
equivalent to calling exit
with EXIT_SUCCESS
(see Normal Termination). Also note that returning from a
function that started a thread is equivalent to calling
thrd_exit
.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
thrd_detach
detaches the thread identified by thr
from
the current control thread. The resources held by the detached thread
will be freed automatically once the thread exits. The parent thread
will never be notified by any thr signal.
Calling thrd_detach
on a thread that was previously detached or
joined by another thread results in undefined behavior.
This function returns either thrd_success
or thrd_error
.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
thrd_join
blocks the current thread until the thread identified
by thr
finishes execution. If res
is not NULL, the
result code of the thread is put into the location pointed to by
res. The termination of the thread synchronizes-with the
completion of this function, meaning both threads have arrived at a
common point in their execution.
Calling thrd_join
on a thread that was previously detached or
joined by another thread results in undefined behavior.
This function returns either thrd_success
or thrd_error
.
Next: Mutexes, Previous: Creation and Control, Up: ISO C Threads [Contents][Index]
In order to guarantee single access to a function, the GNU C Library implements a call once function to ensure a function is only called once in the presence of multiple, potentially calling threads.
A complete object type capable of holding a flag used by call_once
.
This value is used to initialize an object of type once_flag
.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
call_once
calls function func exactly once, even if
invoked from several threads. The completion of the function
func synchronizes-with all previous or subsequent calls to
call_once
with the same flag
variable.
Next: Condition Variables, Previous: Call Once, Up: ISO C Threads [Contents][Index]
To have better control of resources and how threads access them, the GNU C Library implements a mutex object, which can help avoid race conditions and other concurrency issues. The term “mutex” refers to mutual exclusion.
The fundamental data type for a mutex is the mtx_t
:
The mtx_t
data type uniquely identifies a mutex object.
The ISO C standard defines several types of mutexes. They are represented by the following symbolic constants:
mtx_plain
¶A mutex that does not support timeout, or test and return.
mtx_recursive
¶A mutex that supports recursive locking, which means that the owning thread can lock it more than once without causing deadlock.
mtx_timed
¶A mutex that supports timeout.
The following functions are used for working with mutexes:
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
mtx_init
creates a new mutex object with type type. The
object pointed to by mutex is set to the identifier of the newly
created mutex.
Not all combinations of mutex types are valid for the type
argument. Valid uses of mutex types for the type
argument are:
mtx_plain
A non-recursive mutex that does not support timeout.
mtx_timed
A non-recursive mutex that does support timeout.
mtx_plain | mtx_recursive
A recursive mutex that does not support timeout.
mtx_timed | mtx_recursive
A recursive mutex that does support timeout.
This function returns either thrd_success
or thrd_error
.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Unsafe lock | AC-Unsafe lock | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
mtx_lock
blocks the current thread until the mutex pointed to
by mutex is locked. The behavior is undefined if the current
thread has already locked the mutex and the mutex is not recursive.
Prior calls to mtx_unlock
on the same mutex synchronize-with
this operation (if this operation succeeds), and all lock/unlock
operations on any given mutex form a single total order (similar to
the modification order of an atomic).
This function returns either thrd_success
or thrd_error
.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Unsafe lock | AC-Unsafe lock | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
mtx_timedlock
blocks the current thread until the mutex pointed
to by mutex is locked or until the calendar time pointed to by
time_point has been reached. Since this function takes an
absolute time, if a duration is required, the calendar time must be
calculated manually. See Time Basics, and Calendar Time.
If the current thread has already locked the mutex and the mutex is not recursive, or if the mutex does not support timeout, the behavior of this function is undefined.
Prior calls to mtx_unlock
on the same mutex synchronize-with
this operation (if this operation succeeds), and all lock/unlock
operations on any given mutex form a single total order (similar to
the modification order of an atomic).
This function returns either thrd_success
or thrd_error
.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Unsafe lock | AC-Unsafe lock | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
mtx_trylock
tries to lock the mutex pointed to by mutex
without blocking. It returns immediately if the mutex is already
locked.
Prior calls to mtx_unlock
on the same mutex synchronize-with
this operation (if this operation succeeds), and all lock/unlock
operations on any given mutex form a single total order (similar to
the modification order of an atomic).
This function returns thrd_success
if the lock was obtained,
thrd_busy
if the mutex is already locked, and thrd_error
on failure.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
mtx_unlock
unlocks the mutex pointed to by mutex. The
behavior is undefined if the mutex is not locked by the calling
thread.
This function synchronizes-with subsequent mtx_lock
,
mtx_trylock
, and mtx_timedlock
calls on the same mutex.
All lock/unlock operations on any given mutex form a single total
order (similar to the modification order of an atomic).
This function returns either thrd_success
or thrd_error
.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
mtx_destroy
destroys the mutex pointed to by mutex. If
there are any threads waiting on the mutex, the behavior is
undefined.
Next: Thread-local Storage, Previous: Mutexes, Up: ISO C Threads [Contents][Index]
Mutexes are not the only synchronization mechanisms available. For some more complex tasks, the GNU C Library also implements condition variables, which allow the programmer to think at a higher level when solving complex synchronization problems. They are used to synchronize threads waiting on a certain condition to happen.
The fundamental data type for condition variables is the cnd_t
:
The cnd_t
uniquely identifies a condition variable object.
The following functions are used for working with condition variables:
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
cnd_init
initializes a new condition variable, identified by
cond.
This function may return thrd_success
, thrd_nomem
, or
thrd_error
.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
cnd_signal
unblocks one thread that is currently waiting on the
condition variable pointed to by cond. If a thread is
successfully unblocked, this function returns thrd_success
. If
no threads are blocked, this function does nothing and returns
thrd_success
. Otherwise, this function returns
thrd_error
.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
cnd_broadcast
unblocks all the threads that are currently
waiting on the condition variable pointed to by cond. This
function returns thrd_success
on success. If no threads are
blocked, this function does nothing and returns
thrd_success
. Otherwise, this function returns
thrd_error
.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Unsafe lock | AC-Unsafe lock | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
cnd_wait
atomically unlocks the mutex pointed to by mutex
and blocks on the condition variable pointed to by cond until
the thread is signaled by cnd_signal
or cnd_broadcast
.
The mutex is locked again before the function returns.
This function returns either thrd_success
or thrd_error
.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Unsafe lock | AC-Unsafe lock | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
cnd_timedwait
atomically unlocks the mutex pointed to by
mutex and blocks on the condition variable pointed to by
cond until the thread is signaled by cnd_signal
or
cnd_broadcast
, or until the calendar time pointed to by
time_point has been reached. The mutex is locked again before
the function returns.
As for mtx_timedlock
, since this function takes an absolute
time, if a duration is required, the calendar time must be calculated
manually. See Time Basics, and Calendar Time.
This function may return thrd_success
, thrd_nomem
, or
thrd_error
.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
cnd_destroy
destroys the condition variable pointed to by
cond. If there are threads waiting on cond, the behavior
is undefined.
Previous: Condition Variables, Up: ISO C Threads [Contents][Index]
The GNU C Library implements functions to provide thread-local storage, a mechanism by which variables can be defined to have unique per-thread storage, lifetimes that match the thread lifetime, and destructors that cleanup the unique per-thread storage.
Several data types and macros exist for working with thread-local storage:
The tss_t
data type identifies a thread-specific storage
object. Even if shared, every thread will have its own instance of
the variable, with different values.
The tss_dtor_t
is a function pointer of type void (*)
(void *)
, to be used as a thread-specific storage destructor. The
function will be called when the current thread calls thrd_exit
(but never when calling tss_delete
or exit
).
thread_local
is used to mark a variable with thread storage
duration, which means it is created when the thread starts and cleaned
up when the thread ends.
Note: For C++, C++11 or later is required to use the
thread_local
keyword.
TSS_DTOR_ITERATIONS
is an integer constant expression
representing the maximum number of iterations over all thread-local
destructors at the time of thread termination. This value provides a
bounded limit to the destruction of thread-local storage; e.g.,
consider a destructor that creates more thread-local storage.
The following functions are used to manage thread-local storage:
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
tss_create
creates a new thread-specific storage key and stores
it in the object pointed to by tss_key. Although the same key
value may be used by different threads, the values bound to the key by
tss_set
are maintained on a per-thread basis and persist for
the life of the calling thread.
If destructor
is not NULL, a destructor function will be set,
and called when the thread finishes its execution by calling
thrd_exit
.
This function returns thrd_success
if tss_key
is
successfully set to a unique value for the thread; otherwise,
thrd_error
is returned and the value of tss_key
is
undefined.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
tss_set
sets the value of the thread-specific storage
identified by tss_key for the current thread to val.
Different threads may set different values to the same key.
This function returns either thrd_success
or thrd_error
.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
tss_get
returns the value identified by tss_key held in
thread-specific storage for the current thread. Different threads may
get different values identified by the same key. On failure,
tss_get
returns zero.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
tss_delete
destroys the thread-specific storage identified by
tss_key.
Previous: ISO C Threads, Up: Threads [Contents][Index]
This section describes the GNU C Library POSIX Threads implementation.
Next: Non-POSIX Extensions, Up: POSIX Threads [Contents][Index]
The GNU C Library implements functions to allow users to create and manage data specific to a thread. Such data may be destroyed at thread exit, if a destructor is provided. The following functions are defined:
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
Create a thread-specific data key for the calling thread, referenced by key.
Objects declared with the C++11 thread_local
keyword are destroyed
before thread-specific data, so they should not be used in thread-specific
data destructors or even as members of the thread-specific data, since the
latter is passed as an argument to the destructor function.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
Destroy the thread-specific data key in the calling thread. The destructor for the thread-specific data is not called during destruction, nor is it called during thread exit.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
Return the thread-specific data associated with key in the calling thread.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Unsafe corrupt heap | AC-Unsafe corrupt mem | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
Associate the thread-specific value with key in the calling thread.
Previous: Thread-specific Data, Up: POSIX Threads [Contents][Index]
In addition to implementing the POSIX API for threads, the GNU C Library provides additional functions and interfaces to provide functionality not specified in the standard.
Next: Controlling the Initial Signal Mask of a New Thread, Up: Non-POSIX Extensions [Contents][Index]
The GNU C Library provides non-standard API functions to set and get the default attributes used in the creation of threads in a process.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Unsafe lock | AC-Unsafe lock | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
Get the default attribute values and set attr to match. This function returns 0 on success and a non-zero error code on failure.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Unsafe heap lock | AC-Unsafe lock mem | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
Set the default attribute values to match the values in attr. The function returns 0 on success and a non-zero error code on failure. The following error codes are defined for this function:
EINVAL
At least one of the values in attr does not qualify as valid for the attributes or the stack address is set in the attribute.
ENOMEM
The system does not have sufficient memory.
Next: Functions for Waiting According to a Specific Clock, Previous: Setting Process-wide defaults for thread attributes, Up: Non-POSIX Extensions [Contents][Index]
The GNU C Library provides a way to specify the initial signal mask of a
thread created using pthread_create
, passing a thread attribute
object configured for this purpose.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Unsafe heap | AC-Unsafe mem | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
Change the initial signal mask specified by attr. If
sigmask is not NULL
, the initial signal mask for new
threads created with attr is set to *sigmask
. If
sigmask is NULL
, attr will no longer specify an
explicit signal mask, so that the initial signal mask of the new
thread is inherited from the thread that calls pthread_create
.
This function returns zero on success, and ENOMEM
on memory
allocation failure.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Unsafe heap | AC-Unsafe mem | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
Retrieve the signal mask stored in attr and copy it to
*sigmask
. If the signal mask has not been set, return
the special constant PTHREAD_ATTR_NO_SIGMASK_NP
, otherwise
return zero.
Obtaining the signal mask only works if it has been previously stored
by pthread_attr_setsigmask_np
. For example, the
pthread_getattr_np
function does not obtain the current signal
mask of the specified thread, and pthread_attr_getsigmask_np
will subsequently report the signal mask as unset.
The special value returned by pthread_attr_setsigmask_np
to
indicate that no signal mask has been set for the attribute.
It is possible to create a new thread with a specific signal mask
without using these functions. On the thread that calls
pthread_create
, the required steps for the general case are:
pthread_sigmask
. This ensures that the new thread will be
created with all signals masked, so that no signals can be delivered
to the thread until the desired signal mask is set.
pthread_create
to create the new thread, passing the
desired signal mask to the thread start routine (which could be a
wrapper function for the actual thread start routine). It may be
necessary to make a copy of the desired signal mask on the heap, so
that the life-time of the copy extends to the point when the start
routine needs to access the signal mask.
The start routine for the created thread needs to locate the desired
signal mask and use pthread_sigmask
to apply it to the thread.
If the signal mask was copied to a heap allocation, the copy should be
freed.
Next: Detecting Single-Threaded Execution, Previous: Controlling the Initial Signal Mask of a New Thread, Up: Non-POSIX Extensions [Contents][Index]
The GNU C Library provides several waiting functions that expect an explicit
clockid_t
argument.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Unsafe lock | AC-Unsafe lock | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
Behaves like sem_timedwait
except the time abstime is measured
against the clock specified by clockid rather than
CLOCK_REALTIME
. Currently, clockid must be either
CLOCK_MONOTONIC
or CLOCK_REALTIME
.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Unsafe lock | AC-Unsafe lock | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
Behaves like pthread_cond_timedwait
except the time abstime is
measured against the clock specified by clockid rather than the clock
specified or defaulted when pthread_cond_init
was called. Currently,
clockid must be either CLOCK_MONOTONIC
or
CLOCK_REALTIME
.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Unsafe lock | AC-Unsafe lock | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
Behaves like pthread_rwlock_timedrdlock
except the time
abstime is measured against the clock specified by clockid
rather than CLOCK_REALTIME
. Currently, clockid must be either
CLOCK_MONOTONIC
or CLOCK_REALTIME
, otherwise EINVAL
is
returned.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Unsafe lock | AC-Unsafe lock | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
Behaves like pthread_rwlock_timedwrlock
except the time
abstime is measured against the clock specified by clockid
rather than CLOCK_REALTIME
. Currently, clockid must be either
CLOCK_MONOTONIC
or CLOCK_REALTIME
, otherwise EINVAL
is
returned.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Unsafe lock | AC-Unsafe lock | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
Behaves like pthread_join
except that it will return EBUSY
immediately if the thread specified by thread has not yet terminated.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Unsafe lock | AC-Unsafe lock | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
Behaves like pthread_tryjoin_np
except that it will block until the
absolute time abstime measured against CLOCK_REALTIME
is
reached if the thread has not terminated by that time and return
EBUSY
. If abstime is equal to NULL
then the function
will wait forever in the same way as pthread_join
.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Unsafe lock | AC-Unsafe lock | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
Behaves like pthread_timedjoin_np
except that the absolute time in
abstime is measured against the clock specified by clockid.
Currently, clockid must be either CLOCK_MONOTONIC
or
CLOCK_REALTIME
.
Next: Restartable Sequences, Previous: Functions for Waiting According to a Specific Clock, Up: Non-POSIX Extensions [Contents][Index]
Multi-threaded programs require synchronization among threads. This synchronization can be costly even if there is just a single thread and no data is shared between multiple processors. The GNU C Library offers an interface to detect whether the process is in single-threaded mode. Applications can use this information to avoid synchronization, for example by using regular instructions to load and store memory instead of atomic instructions, or using relaxed memory ordering instead of stronger memory ordering.
This variable is non-zero if the current process is definitely single-threaded. If it is zero, the process may be multi-threaded, or the GNU C Library cannot determine at this point of the program execution whether the process is single-threaded or not.
Applications must never write to this variable.
Most applications should perform the same actions whether or not
__libc_single_threaded
is true, except with less
synchronization. If this rule is followed, a process that
subsequently becomes multi-threaded is already in a consistent state.
For example, in order to increment a reference count, the following
code can be used:
if (__libc_single_threaded) atomic_fetch_add (&reference_count, 1, memory_order_relaxed); else atomic_fetch_add (&reference_count, 1, memory_order_acq_rel);
This still requires some form of synchronization on the
single-threaded branch, so it can be beneficial not to declare the
reference count as _Atomic
, and use the GCC __atomic
built-ins. See Built-in Functions for Memory
Model Aware Atomic Operations in Using the GNU Compiler Collection
(GCC). Then the code to increment a reference count looks like this:
if (__libc_single_threaded) ++reference_count; else __atomic_fetch_add (&reference_count, 1, __ATOMIC_ACQ_REL);
(Depending on the data associated with the reference count, it may be
possible to use the weaker __ATOMIC_RELAXED
memory ordering on
the multi-threaded branch.)
Several functions in the GNU C Library can change the value of the
__libc_single_threaded
variable. For example, creating new
threads using the pthread_create
or thrd_create
function
sets the variable to false. This can also happen indirectly, say via
a call to dlopen
. Therefore, applications need to make a copy
of the value of __libc_single_threaded
if after such a function
call, behavior must match the value as it was before the call, like
this:
bool single_threaded = __libc_single_threaded; if (single_threaded) prepare_single_threaded (); else prepare_multi_thread (); void *handle = dlopen (shared_library_name, RTLD_NOW); lookup_symbols (handle); if (single_threaded) cleanup_single_threaded (); else cleanup_multi_thread ();
Since the value of __libc_single_threaded
can change from true
to false during the execution of the program, it is not useful for
selecting optimized function implementations in IFUNC resolvers.
Atomic operations can also be used on mappings shared among
single-threaded processes. This means that a compiler must not use
__libc_single_threaded
to optimize atomic operations, unless it
is able to prove that the memory is not shared.
Implementation Note: The __libc_single_threaded
variable is not declared as volatile
because it is expected
that compilers optimize a sequence of single-threaded checks into one
check, for example if several reference counts are updated. The
current implementation in the GNU C Library does not set the
__libc_single_threaded
variable to a true value if a process
turns single-threaded again. Future versions of the GNU C Library may do
this, but only as the result of function calls which imply an acquire
(compiler) barrier. (Some compilers assume that well-known functions
such as malloc
do not write to global variables, and setting
__libc_single_threaded
would introduce a data race and
undefined behavior.) In any case, an application must not write to
__libc_single_threaded
even if it has joined the last
application-created thread because future versions of the GNU C Library may
create background threads after the first thread has been created, and
the application has no way of knowing that these threads are present.
Previous: Detecting Single-Threaded Execution, Up: Non-POSIX Extensions [Contents][Index]
This section describes restartable sequences integration for the GNU C Library. This functionality is only available on Linux.
The type of the restartable sequences area. Future versions of Linux may add additional fields to the end of this structure.
Users need to obtain the address of the restartable sequences area using
the thread pointer and the __rseq_offset
variable, described
below.
One use of the restartable sequences area is to read the current CPU
number from its cpu_id
field, as an inline version of
sched_getcpu
. The GNU C Library sets the cpu_id
field to
RSEQ_CPU_ID_REGISTRATION_FAILED
if registration failed or was
explicitly disabled.
Furthermore, users can store the address of a struct rseq_cs
object into the rseq_cs
field of struct rseq
, thus
informing the kernel that the thread enters a restartable sequence
critical section. This pointer and the code areas it itself points to
must not be left pointing to memory areas which are freed or re-used.
Several approaches can guarantee this. If the application or library
can guarantee that the memory used to hold the struct rseq_cs
and
the code areas it refers to are never freed or re-used, no special
action must be taken. Else, before that memory is re-used of freed, the
application is responsible for setting the rseq_cs
field to
NULL
in each thread’s restartable sequence area to guarantee that
it does not leak dangling references. Because the application does not
typically have knowledge of libraries’ use of restartable sequences, it
is recommended that libraries using restartable sequences which may end
up freeing or re-using their memory set the rseq_cs
field to
NULL
before returning from library functions which use
restartable sequences.
The manual for the rseq
system call can be found
at https://git.kernel.org/pub/scm/libs/librseq/librseq.git/tree/doc/man/rseq.2.
This variable contains the offset between the thread pointer (as defined
by __builtin_thread_pointer
or the thread pointer register for
the architecture) and the restartable sequences area. This value is the
same for all threads in the process. If the restartable sequences area
is located at a lower address than the location to which the thread
pointer points, the value is negative.
This variable is either zero (if restartable sequence registration
failed or has been disabled) or the size of the restartable sequence
registration. This can be different from the size of struct rseq
if the kernel has extended the size of the registration. If
registration is successful, __rseq_size
is at least 32 (the
initial size of struct rseq
).
The flags used during restartable sequence registration with the kernel. Currently zero.
Each supported architecture provides a RSEQ_SIG
macro in
sys/rseq.h which contains a signature. That signature is
expected to be present in the code before each restartable sequences
abort handler. Failure to provide the expected signature may terminate
the process with a segmentation fault.
Next: Internal probes, Previous: Threads, Up: Main Menu [Contents][Index]
The dynamic linker is responsible for loading dynamically linked programs and their dependencies (in the form of shared objects). The dynamic linker in the GNU C Library also supports loading shared objects (such as plugins) later at run time.
Dynamic linkers are sometimes called dynamic loaders.
Up: Dynamic Linker [Contents][Index]
The GNU C Library provides various functions for querying information from the dynamic linker.
| MT-Safe | AS-Unsafe corrupt | AC-Unsafe corrupt | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This function returns information about handle in the memory
location arg, based on request. The handle argument
must be a pointer returned by dlopen
or dlmopen
; it must
not have been closed by dlclose
.
On success, dlinfo
returns 0 for most request types; exceptions
are noted below. If there is an error, the function returns -1,
and dlerror
can be used to obtain a corresponding error message.
The following operations are defined for use with request:
RTLD_DI_LINKMAP
¶The corresponding struct link_map
pointer for handle is
written to *arg
. The arg argument must be the
address of an object of type struct link_map *
.
RTLD_DI_LMID
¶The namespace identifier of handle is written to
*arg
. The arg argument must be the address of an
object of type Lmid_t
.
RTLD_DI_ORIGIN
¶The value of the $ORIGIN
dynamic string token for handle is
written to the character array starting at arg as a
null-terminated string.
This request type should not be used because it is prone to buffer overflows.
RTLD_DI_SERINFO
¶RTLD_DI_SERINFOSIZE
¶These requests can be used to obtain search path information for
handle. For both requests, arg must point to a
Dl_serinfo
object. The RTLD_DI_SERINFOSIZE
request must
be made first; it updates the dls_size
and dls_cnt
members
of the Dl_serinfo
object. The caller should then allocate memory
to store at least dls_size
bytes and pass that buffer to a
RTLD_DI_SERINFO
request. This second request fills the
dls_serpath
array. The number of array elements was returned in
the dls_cnt
member in the initial RTLD_DI_SERINFOSIZE
request. The caller is responsible for freeing the allocated buffer.
This interface is prone to buffer overflows in multi-threaded processes
because the required size can change between the
RTLD_DI_SERINFOSIZE
and RTLD_DI_SERINFO
requests.
RTLD_DI_TLS_DATA
¶This request writes the address of the TLS block (in the current thread)
for the shared object identified by handle to *arg
.
The argument arg must be the address of an object of type
void *
. A null pointer is written if the object does not have
any associated TLS block.
RTLD_DI_TLS_MODID
¶This request writes the TLS module ID for the shared object handle
to *arg
. The argument arg must be the address of an
object of type size_t
. The module ID is zero if the object
does not have an associated TLS block.
RTLD_DI_PHDR
¶This request writes the address of the program header array to
*arg
. The argument arg must be the address of an
object of type const ElfW(Phdr) *
(that is,
const Elf32_Phdr *
or const Elf64_Phdr *
, as appropriate
for the current architecture). For this request, the value returned by
dlinfo
is the number of program headers in the program header
array.
The dlinfo
function is a GNU extension.
The remainder of this section documents the _dl_find_object
function and supporting types and constants.
This structure contains information about a main program or loaded
object. The _dl_find_object
function uses it to return
result data to the caller.
unsigned long long int dlfo_flags
Currently unused and always 0.
void *dlfo_map_start
The start address of the inspected mapping. This information comes from the program header, so it follows its convention, and the address is not necessarily page-aligned.
void *dlfo_map_end
The end address of the mapping.
struct link_map *dlfo_link_map
This member contains a pointer to the link map of the object.
void *dlfo_eh_frame
This member contains a pointer to the exception handling data of the
object. See DLFO_EH_SEGMENT_TYPE
below.
This structure is a GNU extension.
On most targets, this macro is defined as 0
. If it is defined to
1
, struct dl_find_object
contains an additional member
dlfo_eh_dbase
of type void *
. It is the base address for
DW_EH_PE_datarel
DWARF encodings to this location.
This macro is a GNU extension.
On most targets, this macro is defined as 0
. If it is defined to
1
, struct dl_find_object
contains an additional member
dlfo_eh_count
of type int
. It is the number of exception
handling entries in the EH frame segment identified by the
dlfo_eh_frame
member.
This macro is a GNU extension.
On targets using DWARF-based exception unwinding, this macro expands to
PT_GNU_EH_FRAME
. This indicates that dlfo_eh_frame
in
struct dl_find_object
points to the PT_GNU_EH_FRAME
segment of the object. On targets that use other unwinding formats, the
macro expands to the program header type for the unwinding data.
This macro is a GNU extension.
| MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
On success, this function returns 0 and writes about the object
surrounding the address to *result
. On failure, -1 is
returned.
The address can be a code address or data address. On
architectures using function descriptors, no attempt is made to decode
the function descriptor. Depending on how these descriptors are
implemented, _dl_find_object
may return the object that defines
the function descriptor (and not the object that contains the code
implementing the function), or fail to find any object at all.
On success address is greater than or equal to
result->dlfo_map_start
and less than
result->dlfo_map_end
, that is, the supplied code address is
located within the reported mapping.
This function returns a pointer to the unwinding information for the
object that contains the program code address in
result->dlfo_eh_frame
. If the platform uses DWARF
unwinding information, this is the in-memory address of the
PT_GNU_EH_FRAME
segment. See DLFO_EH_SEGMENT_TYPE
above.
In case address resides in an object that lacks unwinding information,
the function still returns 0, but sets result->dlfo_eh_frame
to a null pointer.
_dl_find_object
itself is thread-safe. However, if the
application invokes dlclose
for the object that contains
address concurrently with _dl_find_object
or after the call
returns, accessing the unwinding data for that object or the link map
(through result->dlfo_link_map
) is not safe. Therefore, the
application needs to ensure by other means (e.g., by convention) that
address remains a valid code address while the unwinding
information is processed.
This function is a GNU extension.
Next: Tunables, Previous: Dynamic Linker, Up: Main Menu [Contents][Index]
In order to aid in debugging and monitoring internal behavior,
the GNU C Library exposes nearly-zero-overhead SystemTap probes marked with
the libc
provider.
These probes are not part of the GNU C Library stable ABI, and they are subject to change or removal across releases. Our only promise with regard to them is that, if we find a need to remove or modify the arguments of a probe, the modified probe will have a different name, so that program monitors relying on the old probe will not get unexpected arguments.
Next: Non-local Goto Probes, Up: Internal probes [Contents][Index]
These probes are designed to signal relatively unusual situations within the virtual memory subsystem of the GNU C Library.
This probe is triggered after the main arena is extended by calling
sbrk
. Argument $arg1 is the additional size requested to
sbrk
, and $arg2 is the pointer that marks the end of the
sbrk
area, returned in response to the request.
This probe is triggered after the size of the main arena is decreased by
calling sbrk
. Argument $arg1 is the size released by
sbrk
(the positive value, rather than the negative value passed
to sbrk
), and $arg2 is the pointer that marks the end of
the sbrk
area, returned in response to the request.
This probe is triggered after a new heap is mmap
ed. Argument
$arg1 is a pointer to the base of the memory area, where the
heap_info
data structure is held, and $arg2 is the size of
the heap.
This probe is triggered before (unlike the other sbrk and heap
probes) a heap is completely removed via munmap
. Argument
$arg1 is a pointer to the heap, and $arg2 is the size of the
heap.
This probe is triggered after a trailing portion of an mmap
ed
heap is extended. Argument $arg1 is a pointer to the heap, and
$arg2 is the new size of the heap.
This probe is triggered after a trailing portion of an mmap
ed
heap is released. Argument $arg1 is a pointer to the heap, and
$arg2 is the new size of the heap.
These probes are triggered when the corresponding functions fail to
obtain the requested amount of memory from the arena in use, before they
call arena_get_retry
to select an alternate arena in which to
retry the allocation. Argument $arg1 is the amount of memory
requested by the user; in the calloc
case, that is the total size
computed from both function arguments. In the realloc
case,
$arg2 is the pointer to the memory area being resized. In the
memalign
case, $arg2 is the alignment to be used for the
request, which may be stricter than the value passed to the
memalign
function. A memalign
probe is also used by functions
posix_memalign, valloc
and pvalloc
.
Note that the argument order does not match that of the corresponding two-argument functions, so that in all of these probes the user-requested allocation size is in $arg1.
This probe is triggered within arena_get_retry
(the function
called to select the alternate arena in which to retry an allocation
that failed on the first attempt), before the selection of an alternate
arena. This probe is redundant, but much easier to use when it’s not
important to determine which of the various memory allocation functions
is failing to allocate on the first try. Argument $arg1 is the
same as in the function-specific probes, except for extra room for
padding introduced by functions that have to ensure stricter alignment.
Argument $arg2 is the arena in which allocation failed.
This probe is triggered when malloc
allocates and initializes an
additional arena (not the main arena), but before the arena is assigned
to the running thread or inserted into the internal linked list of
arenas. The arena’s malloc_state
internal data structure is
located at $arg1, within a newly-allocated heap big enough to hold
at least $arg2 bytes.
This probe is triggered when malloc
has just selected an existing
arena to reuse, and (temporarily) reserved it for exclusive use.
Argument $arg1 is a pointer to the newly-selected arena, and
$arg2 is a pointer to the arena previously used by that thread.
This occurs within
reused_arena
, right after the mutex mentioned in probe
memory_arena_reuse_wait
is acquired; argument $arg1 will
point to the same arena. In this configuration, this will usually only
occur once per thread. The exception is when a thread first selected
the main arena, but a subsequent allocation from it fails: then, and
only then, may we switch to another arena to retry that allocation, and
for further allocations within that thread.
This probe is triggered when malloc
is about to wait for an arena
to become available for reuse. Argument $arg1 holds a pointer to
the mutex the thread is going to wait on, $arg2 is a pointer to a
newly-chosen arena to be reused, and $arg3 is a pointer to the
arena previously used by that thread.
This occurs within
reused_arena
, when a thread first tries to allocate memory or
needs a retry after a failure to allocate from the main arena, there
isn’t any free arena, the maximum number of arenas has been reached, and
an existing arena was chosen for reuse, but its mutex could not be
immediately acquired. The mutex in $arg1 is the mutex of the
selected arena.
This probe is triggered when malloc
has chosen an arena that is
in the free list for use by a thread, within the get_free_list
function. The argument $arg1 holds a pointer to the selected arena.
This probe is triggered when function mallopt
is called to change
malloc
internal configuration parameters, before any change to
the parameters is made. The arguments $arg1 and $arg2 are
the ones passed to the mallopt
function.
This probe is triggered shortly after the memory_mallopt
probe,
when the parameter to be changed is M_MXFAST
, and the requested
value is in an acceptable range. Argument $arg1 is the requested
value, and $arg2 is the previous value of this malloc
parameter.
This probe is triggered shortly after the memory_mallopt
probe,
when the parameter to be changed is M_TRIM_THRESHOLD
. Argument
$arg1 is the requested value, $arg2 is the previous value of
this malloc
parameter, and $arg3 is nonzero if dynamic
threshold adjustment was already disabled.
This probe is triggered shortly after the memory_mallopt
probe,
when the parameter to be changed is M_TOP_PAD
. Argument
$arg1 is the requested value, $arg2 is the previous value of
this malloc
parameter, and $arg3 is nonzero if dynamic
threshold adjustment was already disabled.
This probe is triggered shortly after the memory_mallopt
probe,
when the parameter to be changed is M_MMAP_THRESHOLD
, and the
requested value is in an acceptable range. Argument $arg1 is the
requested value, $arg2 is the previous value of this malloc
parameter, and $arg3 is nonzero if dynamic threshold adjustment
was already disabled.
This probe is triggered shortly after the memory_mallopt
probe,
when the parameter to be changed is M_MMAP_MAX
. Argument
$arg1 is the requested value, $arg2 is the previous value of
this malloc
parameter, and $arg3 is nonzero if dynamic
threshold adjustment was already disabled.
This probe is triggered shortly after the memory_mallopt
probe,
when the parameter to be changed is M_PERTURB
. Argument
$arg1 is the requested value, and $arg2 is the previous
value of this malloc
parameter.
This probe is triggered shortly after the memory_mallopt
probe,
when the parameter to be changed is M_ARENA_TEST
, and the
requested value is in an acceptable range. Argument $arg1 is the
requested value, and $arg2 is the previous value of this
malloc
parameter.
This probe is triggered shortly after the memory_mallopt
probe,
when the parameter to be changed is M_ARENA_MAX
, and the
requested value is in an acceptable range. Argument $arg1 is the
requested value, and $arg2 is the previous value of this
malloc
parameter.
This probe is triggered when function free
decides to adjust the
dynamic brk/mmap thresholds. Argument $arg1 and $arg2 are
the adjusted mmap and trim thresholds, respectively.
This probe is triggered when the glibc.malloc.tcache_max
tunable is set. Argument $arg1 is the requested value, and
$arg2 is the previous value of this tunable.
This probe is triggered when the glibc.malloc.tcache_count
tunable is set. Argument $arg1 is the requested value, and
$arg2 is the previous value of this tunable.
This probe is triggered when the
glibc.malloc.tcache_unsorted_limit
tunable is set. Argument
$arg1 is the requested value, and $arg2 is the previous
value of this tunable.
This probe is triggered when free
determines that the memory
being freed has probably already been freed, and resides in the
per-thread cache. Note that there is an extremely unlikely chance
that this probe will trigger due to random payload data remaining in
the allocated memory matching the key used to detect double frees.
This probe actually indicates that an expensive linear search of the
tcache, looking for a double free, has happened. Argument $arg1
is the memory location as passed to free
, Argument $arg2
is the tcache bin it resides in.
Previous: Memory Allocation Probes, Up: Internal probes [Contents][Index]
These probes are used to signal calls to setjmp
, sigsetjmp
,
longjmp
or siglongjmp
.
This probe is triggered whenever setjmp
or sigsetjmp
is
called. Argument $arg1 is a pointer to the jmp_buf
passed as the first argument of setjmp
or sigsetjmp
,
$arg2 is the second argument of sigsetjmp
or zero if this
is a call to setjmp
and $arg3 is a pointer to the return
address that will be stored in the jmp_buf
.
This probe is triggered whenever longjmp
or siglongjmp
is called. Argument $arg1 is a pointer to the jmp_buf
passed as the first argument of longjmp
or siglongjmp
,
$arg2 is the return value passed as the second argument of
longjmp
or siglongjmp
and $arg3 is a pointer to
the return address longjmp
or siglongjmp
will return to.
The longjmp
probe is triggered at a point where the registers
have not yet been restored to the values in the jmp_buf
and
unwinding will show a call stack including the caller of
longjmp
or siglongjmp
.
This probe is triggered under the same conditions and with the same
arguments as the longjmp
probe.
The longjmp_target
probe is triggered at a point where the
registers have been restored to the values in the jmp_buf
and
unwinding will show a call stack including the caller of setjmp
or sigsetjmp
.
Next: C Language Facilities in the Library, Previous: Internal probes, Up: Main Menu [Contents][Index]
Tunables are a feature in the GNU C Library that allows application authors and
distribution maintainers to alter the runtime library behavior to match
their workload. These are implemented as a set of switches that may be
modified in different ways. The current default method to do this is via
the GLIBC_TUNABLES
environment variable by setting it to a string
of colon-separated name=value pairs. For example, the following
example enables malloc
checking and sets the malloc
trim threshold to 128
bytes:
GLIBC_TUNABLES=glibc.malloc.trim_threshold=128:glibc.malloc.check=3 export GLIBC_TUNABLES
Tunables are not part of the GNU C Library stable ABI, and they are subject to change or removal across releases. Additionally, the method to modify tunable values may change between releases and across distributions. It is possible to implement multiple ‘frontends’ for the tunables allowing distributions to choose their preferred method at build time.
Finally, the set of tunables available may vary between distributions as the tunables feature allows distributions to add their own tunables under their own namespace.
Passing --list-tunables to the dynamic loader to print all tunables with minimum and maximum values:
$ /lib64/ld-linux-x86-64.so.2 --list-tunables glibc.rtld.nns: 0x4 (min: 0x1, max: 0x10) glibc.elision.skip_lock_after_retries: 3 (min: 0, max: 2147483647) glibc.malloc.trim_threshold: 0x0 (min: 0x0, max: 0xffffffffffffffff) glibc.malloc.perturb: 0 (min: 0, max: 255) glibc.cpu.x86_shared_cache_size: 0x100000 (min: 0x0, max: 0xffffffffffffffff) glibc.pthread.rseq: 1 (min: 0, max: 1) glibc.cpu.prefer_map_32bit_exec: 0 (min: 0, max: 1) glibc.mem.tagging: 0 (min: 0, max: 255) glibc.elision.tries: 3 (min: 0, max: 2147483647) glibc.elision.enable: 0 (min: 0, max: 1) glibc.malloc.hugetlb: 0x0 (min: 0x0, max: 0xffffffffffffffff) glibc.cpu.x86_rep_movsb_threshold: 0x2000 (min: 0x100, max: 0xffffffffffffffff) glibc.malloc.mxfast: 0x0 (min: 0x0, max: 0xffffffffffffffff) glibc.rtld.dynamic_sort: 2 (min: 1, max: 2) glibc.elision.skip_lock_busy: 3 (min: 0, max: 2147483647) glibc.malloc.top_pad: 0x20000 (min: 0x0, max: 0xffffffffffffffff) glibc.cpu.x86_rep_stosb_threshold: 0x800 (min: 0x1, max: 0xffffffffffffffff) glibc.cpu.x86_non_temporal_threshold: 0xc0000 (min: 0x4040, max: 0xfffffffffffffff) glibc.cpu.x86_shstk: glibc.pthread.stack_cache_size: 0x2800000 (min: 0x0, max: 0xffffffffffffffff) glibc.cpu.hwcap_mask: 0x6 (min: 0x0, max: 0xffffffffffffffff) glibc.malloc.mmap_max: 0 (min: 0, max: 2147483647) glibc.elision.skip_trylock_internal_abort: 3 (min: 0, max: 2147483647) glibc.malloc.tcache_unsorted_limit: 0x0 (min: 0x0, max: 0xffffffffffffffff) glibc.cpu.x86_ibt: glibc.cpu.hwcaps: glibc.elision.skip_lock_internal_abort: 3 (min: 0, max: 2147483647) glibc.malloc.arena_max: 0x0 (min: 0x1, max: 0xffffffffffffffff) glibc.malloc.mmap_threshold: 0x0 (min: 0x0, max: 0xffffffffffffffff) glibc.cpu.x86_data_cache_size: 0x8000 (min: 0x0, max: 0xffffffffffffffff) glibc.malloc.tcache_count: 0x0 (min: 0x0, max: 0xffffffffffffffff) glibc.malloc.arena_test: 0x0 (min: 0x1, max: 0xffffffffffffffff) glibc.pthread.mutex_spin_count: 100 (min: 0, max: 32767) glibc.rtld.optional_static_tls: 0x200 (min: 0x0, max: 0xffffffffffffffff) glibc.malloc.tcache_max: 0x0 (min: 0x0, max: 0xffffffffffffffff) glibc.malloc.check: 0 (min: 0, max: 3)
Next: Memory Allocation Tunables, Up: Tunables [Contents][Index]
A tunable name is split into three components, a top namespace, a tunable
namespace and the tunable name. The top namespace for tunables implemented in
the GNU C Library is glibc
. Distributions that choose to add custom tunables
in their maintained versions of the GNU C Library may choose to do so under their own
top namespace.
The tunable namespace is a logical grouping of tunables in a single module. This currently holds no special significance, although that may change in the future.
The tunable name is the actual name of the tunable. It is possible that different tunable namespaces may have tunables within them that have the same name, likewise for top namespaces. Hence, we only support identification of tunables by their full name, i.e. with the top namespace, tunable namespace and tunable name, separated by periods.
Next: Dynamic Linking Tunables, Previous: Tunable names, Up: Tunables [Contents][Index]
Memory allocation behavior can be modified by setting any of the
following tunables in the malloc
namespace:
This tunable supersedes the MALLOC_CHECK_
environment variable and is
identical in features. This tunable has no effect by default and needs the
debug library libc_malloc_debug to be preloaded using the
LD_PRELOAD
environment variable.
Setting this tunable to a non-zero value less than 4 enables a special (less
efficient) memory allocator for the malloc
family of functions that is
designed to be tolerant against simple errors such as double calls of
free with the same argument, or overruns of a single byte (off-by-one
bugs). Not all such errors can be protected against, however, and memory
leaks can result. Any detected heap corruption results in immediate
termination of the process.
Like MALLOC_CHECK_
, glibc.malloc.check
has a problem in that it
diverges from normal program behavior by writing to stderr
, which could
by exploited in SUID and SGID binaries. Therefore, glibc.malloc.check
is disabled by default for SUID and SGID binaries. This can be enabled again
by the system administrator by adding a file /etc/suid-debug; the
content of the file could be anything or even empty.
This tunable supersedes the MALLOC_TOP_PAD_
environment variable and is
identical in features.
This tunable determines the amount of extra memory in bytes to obtain from the system when any of the arenas need to be extended. It also specifies the number of bytes to retain when shrinking any of the arenas. This provides the necessary hysteresis in heap size such that excessive amounts of system calls can be avoided.
The default value of this tunable is ‘131072’ (128 KB).
This tunable supersedes the MALLOC_PERTURB_
environment variable and is
identical in features.
If set to a non-zero value, memory blocks are initialized with values depending
on some low order bits of this tunable when they are allocated (except when
allocated by calloc
) and freed. This can be used to debug the use of
uninitialized or freed heap memory. Note that this option does not guarantee
that the freed block will have any specific values. It only guarantees that the
content the block had before it was freed will be overwritten.
The default value of this tunable is ‘0’.
This tunable supersedes the MALLOC_MMAP_THRESHOLD_
environment variable
and is identical in features.
When this tunable is set, all chunks larger than this value in bytes are
allocated outside the normal heap, using the mmap
system call. This way
it is guaranteed that the memory for these chunks can be returned to the system
on free
. Note that requests smaller than this threshold might still be
allocated via mmap
.
If this tunable is not set, the default value is set to ‘131072’ bytes and the threshold is adjusted dynamically to suit the allocation patterns of the program. If the tunable is set, the dynamic adjustment is disabled and the value is set as static.
This tunable supersedes the MALLOC_TRIM_THRESHOLD_
environment variable
and is identical in features.
The value of this tunable is the minimum size (in bytes) of the top-most, releasable chunk in an arena that will trigger a system call in order to return memory to the system from that arena.
If this tunable is not set, the default value is set as 128 KB and the threshold is adjusted dynamically to suit the allocation patterns of the program. If the tunable is set, the dynamic adjustment is disabled and the value is set as static.
This tunable supersedes the MALLOC_MMAP_MAX_
environment variable and is
identical in features.
The value of this tunable is maximum number of chunks to allocate with
mmap
. Setting this to zero disables all use of mmap
.
The default value of this tunable is ‘65536’.
This tunable supersedes the MALLOC_ARENA_TEST
environment variable and is
identical in features.
The glibc.malloc.arena_test
tunable specifies the number of arenas that
can be created before the test on the limit to the number of arenas is
conducted. The value is ignored if glibc.malloc.arena_max
is set.
The default value of this tunable is 2 for 32-bit systems and 8 for 64-bit systems.
This tunable supersedes the MALLOC_ARENA_MAX
environment variable and is
identical in features.
This tunable sets the number of arenas to use in a process regardless of the number of cores in the system.
The default value of this tunable is 0
, meaning that the limit on the
number of arenas is determined by the number of CPU cores online. For 32-bit
systems the limit is twice the number of cores online and on 64-bit systems, it
is 8 times the number of cores online.
The maximum size of a request (in bytes) which may be met via the per-thread cache. The default (and maximum) value is 1032 bytes on 64-bit systems and 516 bytes on 32-bit systems.
The maximum number of chunks of each size to cache. The default is 7. The upper limit is 65535. If set to zero, the per-thread cache is effectively disabled.
The approximate maximum overhead of the per-thread cache is thus equal to the number of bins times the chunk count in each bin times the size of each chunk. With defaults, the approximate maximum overhead of the per-thread cache is approximately 236 KB on 64-bit systems and 118 KB on 32-bit systems.
When the user requests memory and the request cannot be met via the per-thread cache, the arenas are used to meet the request. At this time, additional chunks will be moved from existing arena lists to pre-fill the corresponding cache. While copies from the fastbins, smallbins, and regular bins are bounded and predictable due to the bin sizes, copies from the unsorted bin are not bounded, and incur additional time penalties as they need to be sorted as they’re scanned. To make scanning the unsorted list more predictable and bounded, the user may set this tunable to limit the number of chunks that are scanned from the unsorted list while searching for chunks to pre-fill the per-thread cache with. The default, or when set to zero, is no limit.
One of the optimizations malloc
uses is to maintain a series of “fast
bins” that hold chunks up to a specific size. The default and
maximum size which may be held this way is 80 bytes on 32-bit systems
or 160 bytes on 64-bit systems. Applications which value size over
speed may choose to reduce the size of requests which are serviced
from fast bins with this tunable. Note that the value specified
includes malloc
’s internal overhead, which is normally the size of one
pointer, so add 4 on 32-bit systems or 8 on 64-bit systems to the size
passed to malloc
for the largest bin size to enable.
This tunable controls the usage of Huge Pages on malloc
calls. The
default value is 0
, which disables any additional support on
malloc
.
Setting its value to 1
enables the use of madvise
with
MADV_HUGEPAGE
after memory allocation with mmap
. It is enabled
only if the system supports Transparent Huge Page (currently only on Linux).
Setting its value to 2
enables the use of Huge Page directly with
mmap
with the use of MAP_HUGETLB
flag. The huge page size
to use will be the default one provided by the system. A value larger than
2
specifies huge page size, which will be matched against the system
supported ones. If provided value is invalid, MAP_HUGETLB
will not
be used.
Next: Elision Tunables, Previous: Memory Allocation Tunables, Up: Tunables [Contents][Index]
Dynamic linker behavior can be modified by setting the
following tunables in the rtld
namespace:
Sets the number of supported dynamic link namespaces (see dlmopen
).
Currently this limit can be set between 1 and 16 inclusive, the default is 4.
Each link namespace consumes some memory in all thread, and thus raising the
limit will increase the amount of memory each thread uses. Raising the limit
is useful when your application uses more than 4 dynamic link namespaces as
created by dlmopen
with an lmid argument of LM_ID_NEWLM
.
Dynamic linker audit modules are loaded in their own dynamic link namespaces,
but they are not accounted for in glibc.rtld.nns
. They implicitly
increase the per-thread memory usage as necessary, so this tunable does
not need to be changed to allow many audit modules e.g. via LD_AUDIT
.
Sets the amount of surplus static TLS in bytes to allocate at program
startup. Every thread created allocates this amount of specified surplus
static TLS. This is a minimum value and additional space may be allocated
for internal purposes including alignment. Optional static TLS is used for
optimizing dynamic TLS access for platforms that support such optimizations
e.g. TLS descriptors or optimized TLS access for POWER (DT_PPC64_OPT
and DT_PPC_OPT
). In order to make the best use of such optimizations
the value should be as many bytes as would be required to hold all TLS
variables in all dynamic loaded shared libraries. The value cannot be known
by the dynamic loader because it doesn’t know the expected set of shared
libraries which will be loaded. The existing static TLS space cannot be
changed once allocated at process startup. The default allocation of
optional static TLS is 512 bytes and is allocated in every thread.
Sets the algorithm to use for DSO sorting, valid values are ‘1’ and ‘2’. For value of ‘1’, an older O(n^3) algorithm is used, which is long time tested, but may have performance issues when dependencies between shared objects contain cycles due to circular dependencies. When set to the value of ‘2’, a different algorithm is used, which implements a topological sort through depth-first search, and does not exhibit the performance issues of ‘1’.
The default value of this tunable is ‘2’.
Next: POSIX Thread Tunables, Previous: Dynamic Linking Tunables, Up: Tunables [Contents][Index]
Contended locks are usually slow and can lead to performance and scalability
issues in multithread code. Lock elision will use memory transactions to under
certain conditions, to elide locks and improve performance.
Elision behavior can be modified by setting the following tunables in
the elision
namespace:
The glibc.elision.enable
tunable enables lock elision if the feature is
supported by the hardware. If elision is not supported by the hardware this
tunable has no effect.
Elision tunables are supported for 64-bit Intel, IBM POWER, and z System architectures.
The glibc.elision.skip_lock_busy
tunable sets how many times to use a
non-transactional lock after a transactional failure has occurred because the
lock is already acquired. Expressed in number of lock acquisition attempts.
The default value of this tunable is ‘3’.
The glibc.elision.skip_lock_internal_abort
tunable sets how many times
the thread should avoid using elision if a transaction aborted for any reason
other than a different thread’s memory accesses. Expressed in number of lock
acquisition attempts.
The default value of this tunable is ‘3’.
The glibc.elision.skip_lock_after_retries
tunable sets how many times
to try to elide a lock with transactions, that only failed due to a different
thread’s memory accesses, before falling back to regular lock.
Expressed in number of lock elision attempts.
This tunable is supported only on IBM POWER, and z System architectures.
The default value of this tunable is ‘3’.
The glibc.elision.tries
sets how many times to retry elision if there is
chance for the transaction to finish execution e.g., it wasn’t
aborted due to the lock being already acquired. If elision is not supported
by the hardware this tunable is set to ‘0’ to avoid retries.
The default value of this tunable is ‘3’.
The glibc.elision.skip_trylock_internal_abort
tunable sets how many
times the thread should avoid trying the lock if a transaction aborted due to
reasons other than a different thread’s memory accesses. Expressed in number
of try lock attempts.
The default value of this tunable is ‘3’.
Next: Hardware Capability Tunables, Previous: Elision Tunables, Up: Tunables [Contents][Index]
The behavior of POSIX threads can be tuned to gain performance improvements
according to specific hardware capabilities and workload characteristics by
setting the following tunables in the pthread
namespace:
The glibc.pthread.mutex_spin_count
tunable sets the maximum number of times
a thread should spin on the lock before calling into the kernel to block.
Adaptive spin is used for mutexes initialized with the
PTHREAD_MUTEX_ADAPTIVE_NP
GNU extension. It affects both
pthread_mutex_lock
and pthread_mutex_timedlock
.
The thread spins until either the maximum spin count is reached or the lock is acquired.
The default value of this tunable is ‘100’.
This tunable configures the maximum size of the stack cache. Once the stack cache exceeds this size, unused thread stacks are returned to the kernel, to bring the cache size below this limit.
The value is measured in bytes. The default is ‘41943040’ (forty mibibytes).
The glibc.pthread.rseq
tunable can be set to ‘0’, to disable
restartable sequences support in the GNU C Library. This enables applications
to perform direct restartable sequence registration with the kernel.
The default is ‘1’, which means that the GNU C Library performs
registration on behalf of the application.
Restartable sequences are a Linux-specific extension.
This tunable controls whether to use Huge Pages in the stacks created by
pthread_create
. This tunable only affects the stacks created by
the GNU C Library, it has no effect on stack assigned with
pthread_attr_setstack
.
The default is ‘1’ where the system default value is used. Setting
its value to 0
enables the use of madvise
with
MADV_NOHUGEPAGE
after stack creation with mmap
.
This is a memory utilization optimization, since internal glibc setup of either the thread descriptor and the guard page might force the kernel to move the thread stack originally backup by Huge Pages to default pages.
Next: Memory Related Tunables, Previous: POSIX Thread Tunables, Up: Tunables [Contents][Index]
Behavior of the GNU C Library can be tuned to assume specific hardware capabilities
by setting the following tunables in the cpu
namespace:
This tunable supersedes the LD_HWCAP_MASK
environment variable and is
identical in features.
The AT_HWCAP
key in the Auxiliary Vector specifies instruction set
extensions available in the processor at runtime for some architectures. The
glibc.cpu.hwcap_mask
tunable allows the user to mask out those
capabilities at runtime, thus disabling use of those extensions.
The glibc.cpu.hwcaps=-xxx,yyy,-zzz...
tunable allows the user to
enable CPU/ARCH feature yyy
, disable CPU/ARCH feature xxx
and zzz
where the feature name is case-sensitive and has to match
the ones in sysdeps/x86/include/cpu-features.h
.
On s390x, the supported HWCAP and STFLE features can be found in
sysdeps/s390/cpu-features.c
. In addition the user can also set
a CPU arch-level like z13
instead of single HWCAP and STFLE features.
This tunable is specific to i386, x86-64 and s390x.
The glibc.cpu.cached_memopt=[0|1]
tunable allows the user to
enable optimizations recommended for cacheable memory. If set to
1
, the GNU C Library assumes that the process memory image consists
of cacheable (non-device) memory only. The default, 0
,
indicates that the process may use device memory.
This tunable is specific to powerpc, powerpc64 and powerpc64le.
The glibc.cpu.name=xxx
tunable allows the user to tell the GNU C Library to
assume that the CPU is xxx
where xxx may have one of these values:
generic
, falkor
, thunderxt88
, thunderx2t99
,
thunderx2t99p1
, ares
, emag
, kunpeng
,
a64fx
.
This tunable is specific to aarch64.
The glibc.cpu.x86_data_cache_size
tunable allows the user to set
data cache size in bytes for use in memory and string routines.
This tunable is specific to i386 and x86-64.
The glibc.cpu.x86_shared_cache_size
tunable allows the user to
set shared cache size in bytes for use in memory and string routines.
The glibc.cpu.x86_non_temporal_threshold
tunable allows the user
to set threshold in bytes for non temporal store. Non temporal stores
give a hint to the hardware to move data directly to memory without
displacing other data from the cache. This tunable is used by some
platforms to determine when to use non temporal stores in operations
like memmove and memcpy.
This tunable is specific to i386 and x86-64.
The glibc.cpu.x86_rep_movsb_threshold
tunable allows the user to
set threshold in bytes to start using "rep movsb". The value must be
greater than zero, and currently defaults to 2048 bytes.
This tunable is specific to i386 and x86-64.
The glibc.cpu.x86_rep_stosb_threshold
tunable allows the user to
set threshold in bytes to start using "rep stosb". The value must be
greater than zero, and currently defaults to 2048 bytes.
This tunable is specific to i386 and x86-64.
The glibc.cpu.x86_ibt
tunable allows the user to control how
indirect branch tracking (IBT) should be enabled. Accepted values are
on
, off
, and permissive
. on
always turns
on IBT regardless of whether IBT is enabled in the executable and its
dependent shared libraries. off
always turns off IBT regardless
of whether IBT is enabled in the executable and its dependent shared
libraries. permissive
is the same as the default which disables
IBT on non-CET executables and shared libraries.
This tunable is specific to i386 and x86-64.
The glibc.cpu.x86_shstk
tunable allows the user to control how
the shadow stack (SHSTK) should be enabled. Accepted values are
on
, off
, and permissive
. on
always turns on
SHSTK regardless of whether SHSTK is enabled in the executable and its
dependent shared libraries. off
always turns off SHSTK regardless
of whether SHSTK is enabled in the executable and its dependent shared
libraries. permissive
changes how dlopen works on non-CET shared
libraries. By default, when SHSTK is enabled, dlopening a non-CET shared
library returns an error. With permissive
, it turns off SHSTK
instead.
This tunable is specific to i386 and x86-64.
When this tunable is set to 1
, shared libraries of non-setuid
programs will be loaded below 2GB with MAP_32BIT.
Note that the LD_PREFER_MAP_32BIT_EXEC
environment is an alias of
this tunable.
This tunable is specific to 64-bit x86-64.
Next: gmon Tunables, Previous: Hardware Capability Tunables, Up: Tunables [Contents][Index]
This tunable namespace supports operations that affect the way the GNU C Library and the process manage memory.
If the hardware supports memory tagging, this tunable can be used to control the way the GNU C Library uses this feature. At present this is only supported on AArch64 systems with the MTE extension; it is ignored for all other systems.
This tunable takes a value between 0 and 255 and acts as a bitmask that enables various capabilities.
Bit 0 (the least significant bit) causes the malloc
subsystem to allocate
tagged memory, with each allocation being assigned a random tag.
Bit 1 enables precise faulting mode for tag violations on systems that support deferred tag violation reporting. This may cause programs to run more slowly.
Bit 2 enables either precise or deferred faulting mode for tag violations whichever is preferred by the system.
Other bits are currently reserved.
The GNU C Library startup code will automatically enable memory tagging support in the kernel if this tunable has any non-zero value.
The default value is ‘0’, which disables all memory tagging.
Previous: Memory Related Tunables, Up: Tunables [Contents][Index]
This tunable namespace affects the behaviour of the gmon profiler. gmon is a component of the GNU C Library which is normally used in conjunction with gprof.
When GCC compiles a program with the -pg
option, it instruments
the program with calls to the mcount
function, to record the
program’s call graph. At program startup, a memory buffer is allocated
to store this call graph; the size of the buffer is calculated using a
heuristic based on code size. If during execution, the buffer is found
to be too small, profiling will be aborted and no gmon.out file
will be produced. In that case, you will see the following message
printed to standard error:
mcount: call graph buffer size limit exceeded, gmon.out will not be generated
Most of the symbols discussed in this section are defined in the header
sys/gmon.h
. However, some symbols (for example mcount
)
are not defined in any header file, since they are only intended to be
called from code generated by the compiler.
The heuristic for sizing the call graph buffer is known to be
insufficient for small programs; hence, the calculated value is clamped
to be at least a minimum size. The default minimum (in units of
call graph entries, struct tostruct
), is given by the macro
MINARCS
. If you have some program with an unusually complex
call graph, for which the heuristic fails to allocate enough space,
you can use this tunable to increase the minimum to a larger value.
To prevent excessive memory consumption when profiling very large
programs, the call graph buffer is allowed to have a maximum of
MAXARCS
entries. For some very large programs, the default
value of MAXARCS
defined in sys/gmon.h is too small; in
that case, you can use this tunable to increase it.
Note the value of the maxarcs
tunable must be greater or equal
to that of the minarcs
tunable; if this constraint is violated,
a warning will printed to standard error at program startup, and
the minarcs
value will be used as the maximum as well.
Setting either tunable too high may result in a call graph buffer whose size exceeds the available memory; in that case, an out of memory error will be printed at program startup, the profiler will be disabled, and no gmon.out file will be generated.
Next: Summary of Library Facilities, Previous: Tunables, Up: Main Menu [Contents][Index]
Some of the facilities implemented by the C library really should be thought of as parts of the C language itself. These facilities ought to be documented in the C Language Manual, not in the library manual; but since we don’t have the language manual yet, and documentation for these features has been written, we are publishing it here.
Next: Variadic Functions, Up: C Language Facilities in the Library [Contents][Index]
When you’re writing a program, it’s often a good idea to put in checks at strategic places for “impossible” errors or violations of basic assumptions. These kinds of checks are helpful in debugging problems with the interfaces between different parts of the program, for example.
The assert
macro, defined in the header file assert.h,
provides a convenient way to abort the program while printing a message
about where in the program the error was detected.
Once you think your program is debugged, you can disable the error
checks performed by the assert
macro by recompiling with the
macro NDEBUG
defined. This means you don’t actually have to
change the program source code to disable these checks.
But disabling these consistency checks is undesirable unless they make the program significantly slower. All else being equal, more error checking is good no matter who is running the program. A wise user would rather have a program crash, visibly, than have it return nonsense without indicating anything might be wrong.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Unsafe heap corrupt | AC-Unsafe mem lock corrupt | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
Verify the programmer’s belief that expression is nonzero at this point in the program.
If NDEBUG
is not defined, assert
tests the value of
expression. If it is false (zero), assert
aborts the
program (see Aborting a Program) after printing a message of the
form:
file:linenum: function: Assertion `expression' failed.
on the standard error stream stderr
(see Standard Streams).
The filename and line number are taken from the C preprocessor macros
__FILE__
and __LINE__
and specify where the call to
assert
was made. When using the GNU C compiler, the name of
the function which calls assert
is taken from the built-in
variable __PRETTY_FUNCTION__
; with older compilers, the function
name and following colon are omitted.
If the preprocessor macro NDEBUG
is defined before
assert.h is included, the assert
macro is defined to do
absolutely nothing.
Warning: Even the argument expression expression is not
evaluated if NDEBUG
is in effect. So never use assert
with arguments that involve side effects. For example, assert
(++i > 0);
is a bad idea, because i
will not be incremented if
NDEBUG
is defined.
Sometimes the “impossible” condition you want to check for is an error
return from an operating system function. Then it is useful to display
not only where the program crashes, but also what error was returned.
The assert_perror
macro makes this easy.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Unsafe heap corrupt | AC-Unsafe mem lock corrupt | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
Similar to assert
, but verifies that errnum is zero.
If NDEBUG
is not defined, assert_perror
tests the value of
errnum. If it is nonzero, assert_perror
aborts the program
after printing a message of the form:
file:linenum: function: error text
on the standard error stream. The file name, line number, and function
name are as for assert
. The error text is the result of
strerror (errnum)
. See Error Messages.
Like assert
, if NDEBUG
is defined before assert.h
is included, the assert_perror
macro does absolutely nothing. It
does not evaluate the argument, so errnum should not have any side
effects. It is best for errnum to be just a simple variable
reference; often it will be errno
.
This macro is a GNU extension.
Usage note: The assert
facility is designed for
detecting internal inconsistency; it is not suitable for
reporting invalid input or improper usage by the user of the
program.
The information in the diagnostic messages printed by the assert
and assert_perror
macro is intended to help you, the programmer,
track down the cause of a bug, but is not really useful for telling a user
of your program why his or her input was invalid or why a command could not
be carried out. What’s more, your program should not abort when given
invalid input, as assert
would do—it should exit with nonzero
status (see Exit Status) after printing its error messages, or perhaps
read another command or move on to the next input file.
See Error Messages, for information on printing error messages for problems that do not represent bugs in the program.
Next: Null Pointer Constant, Previous: Explicitly Checking Internal Consistency, Up: C Language Facilities in the Library [Contents][Index]
ISO C defines a syntax for declaring a function to take a variable number or type of arguments. (Such functions are referred to as varargs functions or variadic functions.) However, the language itself provides no mechanism for such functions to access their non-required arguments; instead, you use the variable arguments macros defined in stdarg.h.
This section describes how to declare variadic functions, how to write them, and how to call them properly.
Compatibility Note: Many older C dialects provide a similar, but incompatible, mechanism for defining functions with variable numbers of arguments, using varargs.h.
Ordinary C functions take a fixed number of arguments. When you define
a function, you specify the data type for each argument. Every call to
the function should supply the expected number of arguments, with types
that can be converted to the specified ones. Thus, if the function
‘foo’ is declared with int foo (int, char *);
then you must
call it with two arguments, a number (any kind will do) and a string
pointer.
But some functions perform operations that can meaningfully accept an unlimited number of arguments.
In some cases a function can handle any number of values by operating on
all of them as a block. For example, consider a function that allocates
a one-dimensional array with malloc
to hold a specified set of
values. This operation makes sense for any number of values, as long as
the length of the array corresponds to that number. Without facilities
for variable arguments, you would have to define a separate function for
each possible array size.
The library function printf
(see Formatted Output) is an
example of another class of function where variable arguments are
useful. This function prints its arguments (which can vary in type as
well as number) under the control of a format template string.
These are good reasons to define a variadic function which can handle as many arguments as the caller chooses to pass.
Some functions such as open
take a fixed set of arguments, but
occasionally ignore the last few. Strict adherence to ISO C requires
these functions to be defined as variadic; in practice, however, the GNU
C compiler and most other C compilers let you define such a function to
take a fixed set of arguments—the most it can ever use—and then only
declare the function as variadic (or not declare its arguments
at all!).
Next: Example of a Variadic Function, Previous: Why Variadic Functions are Used, Up: Variadic Functions [Contents][Index]
Defining and using a variadic function involves three steps:
Next: Receiving the Argument Values, Up: How Variadic Functions are Defined and Used [Contents][Index]
A function that accepts a variable number of arguments must be declared with a prototype that says so. You write the fixed arguments as usual, and then tack on ‘…’ to indicate the possibility of additional arguments. The syntax of ISO C requires at least one fixed argument before the ‘…’. For example,
int func (const char *a, int b, …) { … }
defines a function func
which returns an int
and takes two
required arguments, a const char *
and an int
. These are
followed by any number of anonymous arguments.
Portability note: For some C compilers, the last required
argument must not be declared register
in the function
definition. Furthermore, this argument’s type must be
self-promoting: that is, the default promotions must not change
its type. This rules out array and function types, as well as
float
, char
(whether signed or not) and short int
(whether signed or not). This is actually an ISO C requirement.
Next: How Many Arguments Were Supplied, Previous: Syntax for Variable Arguments, Up: How Variadic Functions are Defined and Used [Contents][Index]
Ordinary fixed arguments have individual names, and you can use these names to access their values. But optional arguments have no names—nothing but ‘…’. How can you access them?
The only way to access them is sequentially, in the order they were written, and you must use special macros from stdarg.h in the following three step process:
va_list
using
va_start
. The argument pointer when initialized points to the
first optional argument.
va_arg
.
The first call to va_arg
gives you the first optional argument,
the next call gives you the second, and so on.
You can stop at any time if you wish to ignore any remaining optional arguments. It is perfectly all right for a function to access fewer arguments than were supplied in the call, but you will get garbage values if you try to access too many arguments.
va_end
.
(In practice, with most C compilers, calling va_end
does nothing.
This is always true in the GNU C compiler. But you might as well call
va_end
just in case your program is someday compiled with a peculiar
compiler.)
See Argument Access Macros, for the full definitions of va_start
,
va_arg
and va_end
.
Steps 1 and 3 must be performed in the function that accepts the
optional arguments. However, you can pass the va_list
variable
as an argument to another function and perform all or part of step 2
there.
You can perform the entire sequence of three steps multiple times within a single function invocation. If you want to ignore the optional arguments, you can do these steps zero times.
You can have more than one argument pointer variable if you like. You
can initialize each variable with va_start
when you wish, and
then you can fetch arguments with each argument pointer as you wish.
Each argument pointer variable will sequence through the same set of
argument values, but at its own pace.
Portability note: With some compilers, once you pass an
argument pointer value to a subroutine, you must not keep using the same
argument pointer value after that subroutine returns. For full
portability, you should just pass it to va_end
. This is actually
an ISO C requirement, but most ANSI C compilers work happily
regardless.
Next: Calling Variadic Functions, Previous: Receiving the Argument Values, Up: How Variadic Functions are Defined and Used [Contents][Index]
There is no general way for a function to determine the number and type of the optional arguments it was called with. So whoever designs the function typically designs a convention for the caller to specify the number and type of arguments. It is up to you to define an appropriate calling convention for each variadic function, and write all calls accordingly.
One kind of calling convention is to pass the number of optional arguments as one of the fixed arguments. This convention works provided all of the optional arguments are of the same type.
A similar alternative is to have one of the required arguments be a bit mask, with a bit for each possible purpose for which an optional argument might be supplied. You would test the bits in a predefined sequence; if the bit is set, fetch the value of the next argument, otherwise use a default value.
A required argument can be used as a pattern to specify both the number
and types of the optional arguments. The format string argument to
printf
is one example of this (see Formatted Output Functions).
Another possibility is to pass an “end marker” value as the last
optional argument. For example, for a function that manipulates an
arbitrary number of pointer arguments, a null pointer might indicate the
end of the argument list. (This assumes that a null pointer isn’t
otherwise meaningful to the function.) The execl
function works
in just this way; see Executing a File.
Next: Argument Access Macros, Previous: How Many Arguments Were Supplied, Up: How Variadic Functions are Defined and Used [Contents][Index]
You don’t have to do anything special to call a variadic function. Just put the arguments (required arguments, followed by optional ones) inside parentheses, separated by commas, as usual. But you must declare the function with a prototype and know how the argument values are converted.
In principle, functions that are defined to be variadic must also be declared to be variadic using a function prototype whenever you call them. (See Syntax for Variable Arguments, for how.) This is because some C compilers use a different calling convention to pass the same set of argument values to a function depending on whether that function takes variable arguments or fixed arguments.
In practice, the GNU C compiler always passes a given set of argument
types in the same way regardless of whether they are optional or
required. So, as long as the argument types are self-promoting, you can
safely omit declaring them. Usually it is a good idea to declare the
argument types for variadic functions, and indeed for all functions.
But there are a few functions which it is extremely convenient not to
have to declare as variadic—for example, open
and
printf
.
Since the prototype doesn’t specify types for optional arguments, in a
call to a variadic function the default argument promotions are
performed on the optional argument values. This means the objects of
type char
or short int
(whether signed or not) are
promoted to either int
or unsigned int
, as
appropriate; and that objects of type float
are promoted to type
double
. So, if the caller passes a char
as an optional
argument, it is promoted to an int
, and the function can access
it with va_arg (ap, int)
.
Conversion of the required arguments is controlled by the function prototype in the usual way: the argument expression is converted to the declared argument type as if it were being assigned to a variable of that type.
Previous: Calling Variadic Functions, Up: How Variadic Functions are Defined and Used [Contents][Index]
Here are descriptions of the macros used to retrieve variable arguments. These macros are defined in the header file stdarg.h.
The type va_list
is used for argument pointer variables.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This macro initializes the argument pointer variable ap to point to the first of the optional arguments of the current function; last-required must be the last required argument to the function.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe race:ap | AS-Safe | AC-Unsafe corrupt | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The va_arg
macro returns the value of the next optional argument,
and modifies the value of ap to point to the subsequent argument.
Thus, successive uses of va_arg
return successive optional
arguments.
The type of the value returned by va_arg
is type as
specified in the call. type must be a self-promoting type (not
char
or short int
or float
) that matches the type
of the actual argument.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This ends the use of ap. After a va_end
call, further
va_arg
calls with the same ap may not work. You should invoke
va_end
before returning from the function in which va_start
was invoked with the same ap argument.
In the GNU C Library, va_end
does nothing, and you need not ever
use it except for reasons of portability.
Sometimes it is necessary to parse the list of parameters more than once
or one wants to remember a certain position in the parameter list. To
do this, one will have to make a copy of the current value of the
argument. But va_list
is an opaque type and one cannot necessarily
assign the value of one variable of type va_list
to another variable
of the same type.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
The va_copy
macro allows copying of objects of type
va_list
even if this is not an integral type. The argument pointer
in dest is initialized to point to the same argument as the
pointer in src.
va_copy
was added in ISO C99. When building for strict
conformance to ISO C90 (‘gcc -std=c90’), it is not available.
GCC provides __va_copy
, as an extension, in any standards mode;
before GCC 3.0, it was the only macro for this functionality.
These macros are no longer provided by the GNU C Library, but rather by the compiler.
If you want to use va_copy
and be portable to pre-C99 systems,
you should always be prepared for the
possibility that this macro will not be available. On architectures where a
simple assignment is invalid, hopefully va_copy
will be available,
so one should always write something like this if concerned about
pre-C99 portability:
{ va_list ap, save; … #ifdef va_copy va_copy (save, ap); #else save = ap; #endif … }
Previous: How Variadic Functions are Defined and Used, Up: Variadic Functions [Contents][Index]
Here is a complete sample function that accepts a variable number of arguments. The first argument to the function is the count of remaining arguments, which are added up and the result returned. While trivial, this function is sufficient to illustrate how to use the variable arguments facility.
#include <stdarg.h> #include <stdio.h> int add_em_up (int count,...) { va_list ap; int i, sum; va_start (ap, count); /* Initialize the argument list. */ sum = 0; for (i = 0; i < count; i++) sum += va_arg (ap, int); /* Get the next argument value. */ va_end (ap); /* Clean up. */ return sum; } int main (void) { /* This call prints 16. */ printf ("%d\n", add_em_up (3, 5, 5, 6)); /* This call prints 55. */ printf ("%d\n", add_em_up (10, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10)); return 0; }
Next: Important Data Types, Previous: Variadic Functions, Up: C Language Facilities in the Library [Contents][Index]
The null pointer constant is guaranteed not to point to any real object.
You can assign it to any pointer variable since it has type void
*
. The preferred way to write a null pointer constant is with
NULL
.
This is a null pointer constant.
You can also use 0
or (void *)0
as a null pointer
constant, but using NULL
is cleaner because it makes the purpose
of the constant more evident.
If you use the null pointer constant as a function argument, then for complete portability you should make sure that the function has a prototype declaration. Otherwise, if the target machine has two different pointer representations, the compiler won’t know which representation to use for that argument. You can avoid the problem by explicitly casting the constant to the proper pointer type, but we recommend instead adding a prototype for the function you are calling.
Next: Data Type Measurements, Previous: Null Pointer Constant, Up: C Language Facilities in the Library [Contents][Index]
The result of subtracting two pointers in C is always an integer, but the
precise data type varies from C compiler to C compiler. Likewise, the
data type of the result of sizeof
also varies between compilers.
ISO C defines standard aliases for these two types, so you can refer to
them in a portable fashion. They are defined in the header file
stddef.h.
This is the signed integer type of the result of subtracting two
pointers. For example, with the declaration char *p1, *p2;
, the
expression p2 - p1
is of type ptrdiff_t
. This will
probably be one of the standard signed integer types (short int
, int
or long int
), but might be a nonstandard
type that exists only for this purpose.
This is an unsigned integer type used to represent the sizes of objects.
The result of the sizeof
operator is of this type, and functions
such as malloc
(see Unconstrained Allocation) and
memcpy
(see Copying Strings and Arrays) accept arguments of
this type to specify object sizes. On systems using the GNU C Library, this
will be unsigned int
or unsigned long int
.
Usage Note: size_t
is the preferred way to declare any
arguments or variables that hold the size of an object.
Compatibility Note: Implementations of C before the advent of
ISO C generally used unsigned int
for representing object sizes
and int
for pointer subtraction results. They did not
necessarily define either size_t
or ptrdiff_t
. Unix
systems did define size_t
, in sys/types.h, but the
definition was usually a signed type.
Previous: Important Data Types, Up: C Language Facilities in the Library [Contents][Index]
Most of the time, if you choose the proper C data type for each object in your program, you need not be concerned with just how it is represented or how many bits it uses. When you do need such information, the C language itself does not provide a way to get it. The header files limits.h and float.h contain macros which give you this information in full detail.
Next: Range of an Integer Type, Up: Data Type Measurements [Contents][Index]
TS 18661-1:2014 defines macros for the width of integer types (the
number of value and sign bits). One benefit of these macros is they
can be used in #if
preprocessor directives, whereas
sizeof
cannot. The following macros are defined in
limits.h.
CHAR_WIDTH
¶SCHAR_WIDTH
¶UCHAR_WIDTH
¶SHRT_WIDTH
¶USHRT_WIDTH
¶INT_WIDTH
¶UINT_WIDTH
¶LONG_WIDTH
¶ULONG_WIDTH
¶LLONG_WIDTH
¶ULLONG_WIDTH
¶These are the widths of the types char
, signed char
,
unsigned char
, short int
, unsigned short int
,
int
, unsigned int
, long int
, unsigned long
int
, long long int
and unsigned long long int
,
respectively.
Further such macros are defined in stdint.h. Apart from those for types specified by width (see Integers), the following are defined:
INTPTR_WIDTH
¶UINTPTR_WIDTH
¶PTRDIFF_WIDTH
¶SIG_ATOMIC_WIDTH
¶SIZE_WIDTH
¶WCHAR_WIDTH
¶WINT_WIDTH
¶These are the widths of the types intptr_t
, uintptr_t
,
ptrdiff_t
, sig_atomic_t
, size_t
, wchar_t
and wint_t
, respectively.
A common reason that a program needs to know how many bits are in an
integer type is for using an array of unsigned long int
as a
bit vector. You can access the bit at index n with:
vector[n / ULONG_WIDTH] & (1UL << (n % ULONG_WIDTH))
Before ULONG_WIDTH
was a part of the C language,
CHAR_BIT
was used to compute the number of bits in an integer
data type.
This is the number of bits in a char
. POSIX.1-2001 requires
this to be 8.
The number of bits in any data type type can be computed like this:
sizeof (type) * CHAR_BIT
That expression includes padding bits as well as value and sign bits.
On all systems supported by the GNU C Library, standard integer types other
than _Bool
do not have any padding bits.
Portability Note: One cannot actually easily compute the number of usable bits in a portable manner.
Next: Floating Type Macros, Previous: Width of an Integer Type, Up: Data Type Measurements [Contents][Index]
Suppose you need to store an integer value which can range from zero to one million. Which is the smallest type you can use? There is no general rule; it depends on the C compiler and target machine. You can use the ‘MIN’ and ‘MAX’ macros in limits.h to determine which type will work.
Each signed integer type has a pair of macros which give the smallest and largest values that it can hold. Each unsigned integer type has one such macro, for the maximum value; the minimum value is, of course, zero.
The values of these macros are all integer constant expressions. The
‘MAX’ and ‘MIN’ macros for char
and short int
types have values of type int
. The ‘MAX’ and
‘MIN’ macros for the other types have values of the same type
described by the macro—thus, ULONG_MAX
has type
unsigned long int
.
SCHAR_MIN
¶This is the minimum value that can be represented by a signed char
.
SCHAR_MAX
¶UCHAR_MAX
¶These are the maximum values that can be represented by a
signed char
and unsigned char
, respectively.
CHAR_MIN
¶This is the minimum value that can be represented by a char
.
It’s equal to SCHAR_MIN
if char
is signed, or zero
otherwise.
CHAR_MAX
¶This is the maximum value that can be represented by a char
.
It’s equal to SCHAR_MAX
if char
is signed, or
UCHAR_MAX
otherwise.
SHRT_MIN
¶This is the minimum value that can be represented by a signed short int
. On most machines that the GNU C Library runs on,
short
integers are 16-bit quantities.
SHRT_MAX
¶USHRT_MAX
¶These are the maximum values that can be represented by a
signed short int
and unsigned short int
,
respectively.
INT_MIN
¶This is the minimum value that can be represented by a signed int
. On most machines that the GNU C Library runs on, an int
is
a 32-bit quantity.
INT_MAX
¶UINT_MAX
¶These are the maximum values that can be represented by, respectively,
the type signed int
and the type unsigned int
.
LONG_MIN
¶This is the minimum value that can be represented by a signed long int
. On most machines that the GNU C Library runs on, long
integers are 32-bit quantities, the same size as int
.
LONG_MAX
¶ULONG_MAX
¶These are the maximum values that can be represented by a
signed long int
and unsigned long int
, respectively.
LLONG_MIN
¶This is the minimum value that can be represented by a signed long long int
. On most machines that the GNU C Library runs on,
long long
integers are 64-bit quantities.
LLONG_MAX
¶ULLONG_MAX
¶These are the maximum values that can be represented by a signed
long long int
and unsigned long long int
, respectively.
LONG_LONG_MIN
¶LONG_LONG_MAX
¶ULONG_LONG_MAX
¶These are obsolete names for LLONG_MIN
, LLONG_MAX
, and
ULLONG_MAX
. They are only available if _GNU_SOURCE
is
defined (see Feature Test Macros). In GCC versions prior to 3.0,
these were the only names available.
WCHAR_MAX
¶This is the maximum value that can be represented by a wchar_t
.
See Introduction to Extended Characters.
The header file limits.h also defines some additional constants that parameterize various operating system and file system limits. These constants are described in System Configuration Parameters.
Next: Structure Field Offset Measurement, Previous: Range of an Integer Type, Up: Data Type Measurements [Contents][Index]
The specific representation of floating point numbers varies from machine to machine. Because floating point numbers are represented internally as approximate quantities, algorithms for manipulating floating point data often need to take account of the precise details of the machine’s floating point representation.
Some of the functions in the C library itself need this information; for example, the algorithms for printing and reading floating point numbers (see Input/Output on Streams) and for calculating trigonometric and irrational functions (see Mathematics) use it to avoid round-off error and loss of accuracy. User programs that implement numerical analysis techniques also often need this information in order to minimize or compute error bounds.
The header file float.h describes the format used by your machine.
Next: Floating Point Parameters, Up: Floating Type Macros [Contents][Index]
This section introduces the terminology for describing floating point representations.
You are probably already familiar with most of these concepts in terms
of scientific or exponential notation for floating point numbers. For
example, the number 123456.0
could be expressed in exponential
notation as 1.23456e+05
, a shorthand notation indicating that the
mantissa 1.23456
is multiplied by the base 10
raised to
power 5
.
More formally, the internal representation of a floating point number can be characterized in terms of the following parameters:
-1
or 1
.
1
. This is a constant for a particular representation.
Sometimes, in the actual bits representing the floating point number, the exponent is biased by adding a constant to it, to make it always be represented as an unsigned quantity. This is only important if you have some reason to pick apart the bit fields making up the floating point number by hand, which is something for which the GNU C Library provides no support. So this is ignored in the discussion that follows.
Many floating point representations have an implicit hidden bit in the mantissa. This is a bit which is present virtually in the mantissa, but not stored in memory because its value is always 1 in a normalized number. The precision figure (see above) includes any hidden bits.
Again, the GNU C Library provides no facilities for dealing with such low-level aspects of the representation.
The mantissa of a floating point number represents an implicit fraction
whose denominator is the base raised to the power of the precision. Since
the largest representable mantissa is one less than this denominator, the
value of the fraction is always strictly less than 1
. The
mathematical value of a floating point number is then the product of this
fraction, the sign, and the base raised to the exponent.
We say that the floating point number is normalized if the
fraction is at least 1/b
, where b is the base. In
other words, the mantissa would be too large to fit if it were
multiplied by the base. Non-normalized numbers are sometimes called
denormal; they contain less precision than the representation
normally can hold.
If the number is not normalized, then you can subtract 1
from the
exponent while multiplying the mantissa by the base, and get another
floating point number with the same value. Normalization consists
of doing this repeatedly until the number is normalized. Two distinct
normalized floating point numbers cannot be equal in value.
(There is an exception to this rule: if the mantissa is zero, it is
considered normalized. Another exception happens on certain machines
where the exponent is as small as the representation can hold. Then
it is impossible to subtract 1
from the exponent, so a number
may be normalized even if its fraction is less than 1/b
.)
Next: IEEE Floating Point, Previous: Floating Point Representation Concepts, Up: Floating Type Macros [Contents][Index]
These macro definitions can be accessed by including the header file float.h in your program.
Macro names starting with ‘FLT_’ refer to the float
type,
while names beginning with ‘DBL_’ refer to the double
type
and names beginning with ‘LDBL_’ refer to the long double
type. (If GCC does not support long double
as a distinct data
type on a target machine then the values for the ‘LDBL_’ constants
are equal to the corresponding constants for the double
type.)
Of these macros, only FLT_RADIX
is guaranteed to be a constant
expression. The other macros listed here cannot be reliably used in
places that require constant expressions, such as ‘#if’
preprocessing directives or in the dimensions of static arrays.
Although the ISO C standard specifies minimum and maximum values for most of these parameters, the GNU C implementation uses whatever values describe the floating point representation of the target machine. So in principle GNU C actually satisfies the ISO C requirements only if the target machine is suitable. In practice, all the machines currently supported are suitable.
FLT_ROUNDS
¶This value characterizes the rounding mode for floating point addition. The following values indicate standard rounding modes:
-1
The mode is indeterminable.
0
Rounding is towards zero.
1
Rounding is to the nearest number.
2
Rounding is towards positive infinity.
3
Rounding is towards negative infinity.
Any other value represents a machine-dependent nonstandard rounding mode.
On most machines, the value is 1
, in accordance with the IEEE
standard for floating point.
Here is a table showing how certain values round for each possible value
of FLT_ROUNDS
, if the other aspects of the representation match
the IEEE single-precision standard.
0 1 2 3 1.00000003 1.0 1.0 1.00000012 1.0 1.00000007 1.0 1.00000012 1.00000012 1.0 -1.00000003 -1.0 -1.0 -1.0 -1.00000012 -1.00000007 -1.0 -1.00000012 -1.0 -1.00000012
FLT_RADIX
¶This is the value of the base, or radix, of the exponent representation. This is guaranteed to be a constant expression, unlike the other macros described in this section. The value is 2 on all machines we know of except the IBM 360 and derivatives.
FLT_MANT_DIG
¶This is the number of base-FLT_RADIX
digits in the floating point
mantissa for the float
data type. The following expression
yields 1.0
(even though mathematically it should not) due to the
limited number of mantissa digits:
float radix = FLT_RADIX; 1.0f + 1.0f / radix / radix / … / radix
where radix
appears FLT_MANT_DIG
times.
DBL_MANT_DIG
¶LDBL_MANT_DIG
¶This is the number of base-FLT_RADIX
digits in the floating point
mantissa for the data types double
and long double
,
respectively.
FLT_DIG
¶This is the number of decimal digits of precision for the float
data type. Technically, if p and b are the precision and
base (respectively) for the representation, then the decimal precision
q is the maximum number of decimal digits such that any floating
point number with q base 10 digits can be rounded to a floating
point number with p base b digits and back again, without
change to the q decimal digits.
The value of this macro is supposed to be at least 6
, to satisfy
ISO C.
DBL_DIG
¶LDBL_DIG
¶These are similar to FLT_DIG
, but for the data types
double
and long double
, respectively. The values of these
macros are supposed to be at least 10
.
FLT_MIN_EXP
¶This is the smallest possible exponent value for type float
.
More precisely, it is the minimum negative integer such that the value
FLT_RADIX
raised to this power minus 1 can be represented as a
normalized floating point number of type float
.
DBL_MIN_EXP
¶LDBL_MIN_EXP
¶These are similar to FLT_MIN_EXP
, but for the data types
double
and long double
, respectively.
FLT_MIN_10_EXP
¶This is the minimum negative integer such that 10
raised to this
power minus 1 can be represented as a normalized floating point number
of type float
. This is supposed to be -37
or even less.
DBL_MIN_10_EXP
¶LDBL_MIN_10_EXP
¶These are similar to FLT_MIN_10_EXP
, but for the data types
double
and long double
, respectively.
FLT_MAX_EXP
¶This is the largest possible exponent value for type float
. More
precisely, this is the maximum positive integer such that value
FLT_RADIX
raised to this power minus 1 can be represented as a
floating point number of type float
.
DBL_MAX_EXP
¶LDBL_MAX_EXP
¶These are similar to FLT_MAX_EXP
, but for the data types
double
and long double
, respectively.
FLT_MAX_10_EXP
¶This is the maximum positive integer such that 10
raised to this
power minus 1 can be represented as a normalized floating point number
of type float
. This is supposed to be at least 37
.
DBL_MAX_10_EXP
¶LDBL_MAX_10_EXP
¶These are similar to FLT_MAX_10_EXP
, but for the data types
double
and long double
, respectively.
FLT_MAX
¶The value of this macro is the maximum number representable in type
float
. It is supposed to be at least 1E+37
. The value
has type float
.
The smallest representable number is - FLT_MAX
.
DBL_MAX
¶LDBL_MAX
¶These are similar to FLT_MAX
, but for the data types
double
and long double
, respectively. The type of the
macro’s value is the same as the type it describes.
FLT_MIN
¶The value of this macro is the minimum normalized positive floating
point number that is representable in type float
. It is supposed
to be no more than 1E-37
.
DBL_MIN
¶LDBL_MIN
¶These are similar to FLT_MIN
, but for the data types
double
and long double
, respectively. The type of the
macro’s value is the same as the type it describes.
FLT_EPSILON
¶This is the difference between 1 and the smallest floating point
number of type float
that is greater than 1. It’s supposed to
be no greater than 1E-5
.
DBL_EPSILON
¶LDBL_EPSILON
¶These are similar to FLT_EPSILON
, but for the data types
double
and long double
, respectively. The type of the
macro’s value is the same as the type it describes. The values are not
supposed to be greater than 1E-9
.
Previous: Floating Point Parameters, Up: Floating Type Macros [Contents][Index]
Here is an example showing how the floating type measurements come out for the most common floating point representation, specified by the IEEE Standard for Binary Floating Point Arithmetic (ANSI/IEEE Std 754-1985). Nearly all computers designed since the 1980s use this format.
The IEEE single-precision float representation uses a base of 2. There is a sign bit, a mantissa with 23 bits plus one hidden bit (so the total precision is 24 base-2 digits), and an 8-bit exponent that can represent values in the range -125 to 128, inclusive.
So, for an implementation that uses this representation for the
float
data type, appropriate values for the corresponding
parameters are:
FLT_RADIX 2 FLT_MANT_DIG 24 FLT_DIG 6 FLT_MIN_EXP -125 FLT_MIN_10_EXP -37 FLT_MAX_EXP 128 FLT_MAX_10_EXP +38 FLT_MIN 1.17549435E-38F FLT_MAX 3.40282347E+38F FLT_EPSILON 1.19209290E-07F
Here are the values for the double
data type:
DBL_MANT_DIG 53 DBL_DIG 15 DBL_MIN_EXP -1021 DBL_MIN_10_EXP -307 DBL_MAX_EXP 1024 DBL_MAX_10_EXP 308 DBL_MAX 1.7976931348623157E+308 DBL_MIN 2.2250738585072014E-308 DBL_EPSILON 2.2204460492503131E-016
Previous: Floating Type Macros, Up: Data Type Measurements [Contents][Index]
You can use offsetof
to measure the location within a structure
type of a particular structure member.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
This expands to an integer constant expression that is the offset of the
structure member named member in the structure type type.
For example, offsetof (struct s, elem)
is the offset, in bytes,
of the member elem
in a struct s
.
This macro won’t work if member is a bit field; you get an error from the C compiler in that case.
Next: Installing the GNU C Library, Previous: C Language Facilities in the Library, Up: Main Menu [Contents][Index]
This appendix is a complete list of the facilities declared within the header files supplied with the GNU C Library. Each entry also lists the standard or other source from which each facility is derived, and tells you where in the manual you can find more information about how to use it.
ACCOUNTING
utmp.h (SVID): Manipulating the User Accounting Database.
AF_FILE
sys/socket.h (GNU): Address Formats.
AF_INET
sys/socket.h (BSD): Address Formats.
AF_INET6
sys/socket.h (IPv6 Basic API): Address Formats.
AF_LOCAL
sys/socket.h (POSIX): Address Formats.
AF_UNIX
sys/socket.h (BSD): Address Formats.
sys/socket.h (Unix98): Address Formats.
AF_UNSPEC
sys/socket.h (BSD): Address Formats.
tcflag_t ALTWERASE
termios.h (BSD): Local Modes.
int ARGP_ERR_UNKNOWN
argp.h (GNU): Argp Parser Functions.
ARGP_HELP_BUG_ADDR
argp.h (GNU): Flags for the argp_help
Function.
ARGP_HELP_DOC
argp.h (GNU): Flags for the argp_help
Function.
ARGP_HELP_EXIT_ERR
argp.h (GNU): Flags for the argp_help
Function.
ARGP_HELP_EXIT_OK
argp.h (GNU): Flags for the argp_help
Function.
ARGP_HELP_LONG
argp.h (GNU): Flags for the argp_help
Function.
ARGP_HELP_LONG_ONLY
argp.h (GNU): Flags for the argp_help
Function.
ARGP_HELP_POST_DOC
argp.h (GNU): Flags for the argp_help
Function.
ARGP_HELP_PRE_DOC
argp.h (GNU): Flags for the argp_help
Function.
ARGP_HELP_SEE
argp.h (GNU): Flags for the argp_help
Function.
ARGP_HELP_SHORT_USAGE
argp.h (GNU): Flags for the argp_help
Function.
ARGP_HELP_STD_ERR
argp.h (GNU): Flags for the argp_help
Function.
ARGP_HELP_STD_HELP
argp.h (GNU): Flags for the argp_help
Function.
ARGP_HELP_STD_USAGE
argp.h (GNU): Flags for the argp_help
Function.
ARGP_HELP_USAGE
argp.h (GNU): Flags for the argp_help
Function.
ARGP_IN_ORDER
argp.h (GNU): Flags for argp_parse
.
ARGP_KEY_ARG
argp.h (GNU): Special Keys for Argp Parser Functions.
ARGP_KEY_ARGS
argp.h (GNU): Special Keys for Argp Parser Functions.
ARGP_KEY_END
argp.h (GNU): Special Keys for Argp Parser Functions.
ARGP_KEY_ERROR
argp.h (GNU): Special Keys for Argp Parser Functions.
ARGP_KEY_FINI
argp.h (GNU): Special Keys for Argp Parser Functions.
ARGP_KEY_HELP_ARGS_DOC
argp.h (GNU): Special Keys for Argp Help Filter Functions.
ARGP_KEY_HELP_DUP_ARGS_NOTE
argp.h (GNU): Special Keys for Argp Help Filter Functions.
ARGP_KEY_HELP_EXTRA
argp.h (GNU): Special Keys for Argp Help Filter Functions.
ARGP_KEY_HELP_HEADER
argp.h (GNU): Special Keys for Argp Help Filter Functions.
ARGP_KEY_HELP_POST_DOC
argp.h (GNU): Special Keys for Argp Help Filter Functions.
ARGP_KEY_HELP_PRE_DOC
argp.h (GNU): Special Keys for Argp Help Filter Functions.
ARGP_KEY_INIT
argp.h (GNU): Special Keys for Argp Parser Functions.
ARGP_KEY_NO_ARGS
argp.h (GNU): Special Keys for Argp Parser Functions.
ARGP_KEY_SUCCESS
argp.h (GNU): Special Keys for Argp Parser Functions.
ARGP_LONG_ONLY
argp.h (GNU): Flags for argp_parse
.
ARGP_NO_ARGS
argp.h (GNU): Flags for argp_parse
.
ARGP_NO_ERRS
argp.h (GNU): Flags for argp_parse
.
ARGP_NO_EXIT
argp.h (GNU): Flags for argp_parse
.
ARGP_NO_HELP
argp.h (GNU): Flags for argp_parse
.
ARGP_PARSE_ARGV0
argp.h (GNU): Flags for argp_parse
.
ARGP_SILENT
argp.h (GNU): Flags for argp_parse
.
int ARG_MAX
limits.h (POSIX.1): General Capacity Limits.
int BC_BASE_MAX
limits.h (POSIX.2): Utility Program Capacity Limits.
int BC_DIM_MAX
limits.h (POSIX.2): Utility Program Capacity Limits.
int BC_SCALE_MAX
limits.h (POSIX.2): Utility Program Capacity Limits.
int BC_STRING_MAX
limits.h (POSIX.2): Utility Program Capacity Limits.
BOOT_TIME
utmp.h (SVID): Manipulating the User Accounting Database.
utmpx.h (XPG4.2): XPG User Accounting Database Functions.
tcflag_t BRKINT
termios.h (POSIX.1): Input Modes.
int BUFSIZ
stdio.h (ISO): Controlling Which Kind of Buffering.
tcflag_t CCTS_OFLOW
termios.h (BSD): Control Modes.
int CHAR_BIT
limits.h (C90): Width of an Integer Type.
CHAR_MAX
limits.h (ISO): Range of an Integer Type.
CHAR_MIN
limits.h (ISO): Range of an Integer Type.
CHAR_WIDTH
limits.h (ISO): Width of an Integer Type.
int CHILD_MAX
limits.h (POSIX.1): General Capacity Limits.
tcflag_t CIGNORE
termios.h (BSD): Control Modes.
int CLK_TCK
time.h (POSIX.1): Processor Time Inquiry.
tcflag_t CLOCAL
termios.h (POSIX.1): Control Modes.
int CLOCKS_PER_SEC
time.h (ISO): CPU Time Inquiry.
clockid_t CLOCK_MONOTONIC
time.h (POSIX.1): Getting the Time.
clockid_t CLOCK_REALTIME
time.h (POSIX.1): Getting the Time.
int COLL_WEIGHTS_MAX
limits.h (POSIX.2): Utility Program Capacity Limits.
void CPU_CLR (int cpu, cpu_set_t *set)
sched.h (GNU): Limiting execution to certain CPUs.
int CPU_ISSET (int cpu, const cpu_set_t *set)
sched.h (GNU): Limiting execution to certain CPUs.
void CPU_SET (int cpu, cpu_set_t *set)
sched.h (GNU): Limiting execution to certain CPUs.
int CPU_SETSIZE
sched.h (GNU): Limiting execution to certain CPUs.
void CPU_ZERO (cpu_set_t *set)
sched.h (GNU): Limiting execution to certain CPUs.
tcflag_t CREAD
termios.h (POSIX.1): Control Modes.
tcflag_t CRTS_IFLOW
termios.h (BSD): Control Modes.
tcflag_t CS5
termios.h (POSIX.1): Control Modes.
tcflag_t CS6
termios.h (POSIX.1): Control Modes.
tcflag_t CS7
termios.h (POSIX.1): Control Modes.
tcflag_t CS8
termios.h (POSIX.1): Control Modes.
tcflag_t CSIZE
termios.h (POSIX.1): Control Modes.
tcflag_t CSTOPB
termios.h (POSIX.1): Control Modes.
DBL_DIG
float.h (C90): Floating Point Parameters.
DBL_EPSILON
float.h (C90): Floating Point Parameters.
DBL_MANT_DIG
float.h (C90): Floating Point Parameters.
DBL_MAX
float.h (C90): Floating Point Parameters.
DBL_MAX_10_EXP
float.h (C90): Floating Point Parameters.
DBL_MAX_EXP
float.h (C90): Floating Point Parameters.
DBL_MIN
float.h (C90): Floating Point Parameters.
DBL_MIN_10_EXP
float.h (C90): Floating Point Parameters.
DBL_MIN_EXP
float.h (C90): Floating Point Parameters.
DEAD_PROCESS
utmp.h (SVID): Manipulating the User Accounting Database.
utmpx.h (XPG4.2): XPG User Accounting Database Functions.
DIR
dirent.h (POSIX.1): Opening a Directory Stream.
int DLFO_EH_SEGMENT_TYPE
dlfcn.h (GNU): Dynamic Linker Introspection.
int DLFO_STRUCT_HAS_EH_COUNT
dlfcn.h (GNU): Dynamic Linker Introspection.
int DLFO_STRUCT_HAS_EH_DBASE
dlfcn.h (GNU): Dynamic Linker Introspection.
mode_t DTTOIF (int dtype)
dirent.h (BSD): Format of a Directory Entry.
int E2BIG
errno.h (POSIX.1): Error Codes.
int EACCES
errno.h (POSIX.1): Error Codes.
int EADDRINUSE
errno.h (BSD): Error Codes.
int EADDRNOTAVAIL
errno.h (BSD): Error Codes.
int EADV
errno.h (Linux???): Error Codes.
int EAFNOSUPPORT
errno.h (BSD): Error Codes.
int EAGAIN
errno.h (POSIX.1): Error Codes.
int EALREADY
errno.h (BSD): Error Codes.
int EAUTH
errno.h (BSD): Error Codes.
int EBACKGROUND
errno.h (GNU): Error Codes.
int EBADE
errno.h (Linux???): Error Codes.
int EBADF
errno.h (POSIX.1): Error Codes.
int EBADFD
errno.h (Linux???): Error Codes.
int EBADMSG
errno.h (XOPEN): Error Codes.
int EBADR
errno.h (Linux???): Error Codes.
int EBADRPC
errno.h (BSD): Error Codes.
int EBADRQC
errno.h (Linux???): Error Codes.
int EBADSLT
errno.h (Linux???): Error Codes.
int EBFONT
errno.h (Linux???): Error Codes.
int EBUSY
errno.h (POSIX.1): Error Codes.
int ECANCELED
errno.h (POSIX.1): Error Codes.
int ECHILD
errno.h (POSIX.1): Error Codes.
tcflag_t ECHO
termios.h (POSIX.1): Local Modes.
tcflag_t ECHOCTL
termios.h (BSD): Local Modes.
tcflag_t ECHOE
termios.h (POSIX.1): Local Modes.
tcflag_t ECHOK
termios.h (POSIX.1): Local Modes.
tcflag_t ECHOKE
termios.h (BSD): Local Modes.
tcflag_t ECHONL
termios.h (POSIX.1): Local Modes.
tcflag_t ECHOPRT
termios.h (BSD): Local Modes.
int ECHRNG
errno.h (Linux???): Error Codes.
int ECOMM
errno.h (Linux???): Error Codes.
int ECONNABORTED
errno.h (BSD): Error Codes.
int ECONNREFUSED
errno.h (BSD): Error Codes.
int ECONNRESET
errno.h (BSD): Error Codes.
int ED
errno.h (GNU): Error Codes.
int EDEADLK
errno.h (POSIX.1): Error Codes.
int EDEADLOCK
errno.h (Linux???): Error Codes.
int EDESTADDRREQ
errno.h (BSD): Error Codes.
int EDIED
errno.h (GNU): Error Codes.
int EDOM
errno.h (ISO): Error Codes.
int EDOTDOT
errno.h (Linux???): Error Codes.
int EDQUOT
errno.h (BSD): Error Codes.
int EEXIST
errno.h (POSIX.1): Error Codes.
int EFAULT
errno.h (POSIX.1): Error Codes.
int EFBIG
errno.h (POSIX.1): Error Codes.
int EFTYPE
errno.h (BSD): Error Codes.
int EGRATUITOUS
errno.h (GNU): Error Codes.
int EGREGIOUS
errno.h (GNU): Error Codes.
int EHOSTDOWN
errno.h (BSD): Error Codes.
int EHOSTUNREACH
errno.h (BSD): Error Codes.
int EHWPOISON
errno.h (Linux): Error Codes.
int EIDRM
errno.h (XOPEN): Error Codes.
int EIEIO
errno.h (GNU): Error Codes.
int EILSEQ
errno.h (ISO): Error Codes.
int EINPROGRESS
errno.h (BSD): Error Codes.
int EINTR
errno.h (POSIX.1): Error Codes.
int EINVAL
errno.h (POSIX.1): Error Codes.
int EIO
errno.h (POSIX.1): Error Codes.
int EISCONN
errno.h (BSD): Error Codes.
int EISDIR
errno.h (POSIX.1): Error Codes.
int EISNAM
errno.h (Linux???): Error Codes.
int EKEYEXPIRED
errno.h (Linux): Error Codes.
int EKEYREJECTED
errno.h (Linux): Error Codes.
int EKEYREVOKED
errno.h (Linux): Error Codes.
int EL2HLT
errno.h (Obsolete): Error Codes.
int EL2NSYNC
errno.h (Obsolete): Error Codes.
int EL3HLT
errno.h (Obsolete): Error Codes.
int EL3RST
errno.h (Obsolete): Error Codes.
int ELIBACC
errno.h (Linux???): Error Codes.
int ELIBBAD
errno.h (Linux???): Error Codes.
int ELIBEXEC
errno.h (GNU): Error Codes.
int ELIBMAX
errno.h (Linux???): Error Codes.
int ELIBSCN
errno.h (Linux???): Error Codes.
int ELNRNG
errno.h (Linux???): Error Codes.
int ELOOP
errno.h (BSD): Error Codes.
int EMEDIUMTYPE
errno.h (Linux???): Error Codes.
int EMFILE
errno.h (POSIX.1): Error Codes.
int EMLINK
errno.h (POSIX.1): Error Codes.
EMPTY
utmp.h (SVID): Manipulating the User Accounting Database.
utmpx.h (XPG4.2): XPG User Accounting Database Functions.
int EMSGSIZE
errno.h (BSD): Error Codes.
int EMULTIHOP
errno.h (XOPEN): Error Codes.
int ENAMETOOLONG
errno.h (POSIX.1): Error Codes.
int ENAVAIL
errno.h (Linux???): Error Codes.
int ENEEDAUTH
errno.h (BSD): Error Codes.
int ENETDOWN
errno.h (BSD): Error Codes.
int ENETRESET
errno.h (BSD): Error Codes.
int ENETUNREACH
errno.h (BSD): Error Codes.
int ENFILE
errno.h (POSIX.1): Error Codes.
int ENOANO
errno.h (Linux???): Error Codes.
int ENOBUFS
errno.h (BSD): Error Codes.
int ENOCSI
errno.h (Linux???): Error Codes.
int ENODATA
errno.h (XOPEN): Error Codes.
int ENODEV
errno.h (POSIX.1): Error Codes.
int ENOENT
errno.h (POSIX.1): Error Codes.
int ENOEXEC
errno.h (POSIX.1): Error Codes.
int ENOKEY
errno.h (Linux): Error Codes.
int ENOLCK
errno.h (POSIX.1): Error Codes.
int ENOLINK
errno.h (XOPEN): Error Codes.
int ENOMEDIUM
errno.h (Linux???): Error Codes.
int ENOMEM
errno.h (POSIX.1): Error Codes.
int ENOMSG
errno.h (XOPEN): Error Codes.
int ENONET
errno.h (Linux???): Error Codes.
int ENOPKG
errno.h (Linux???): Error Codes.
int ENOPROTOOPT
errno.h (BSD): Error Codes.
int ENOSPC
errno.h (POSIX.1): Error Codes.
int ENOSR
errno.h (XOPEN): Error Codes.
int ENOSTR
errno.h (XOPEN): Error Codes.
int ENOSYS
errno.h (POSIX.1): Error Codes.
int ENOTBLK
errno.h (BSD): Error Codes.
int ENOTCONN
errno.h (BSD): Error Codes.
int ENOTDIR
errno.h (POSIX.1): Error Codes.
int ENOTEMPTY
errno.h (POSIX.1): Error Codes.
int ENOTNAM
errno.h (Linux???): Error Codes.
int ENOTRECOVERABLE
errno.h (GNU): Error Codes.
int ENOTSOCK
errno.h (BSD): Error Codes.
int ENOTSUP
errno.h (POSIX.1): Error Codes.
int ENOTTY
errno.h (POSIX.1): Error Codes.
int ENOTUNIQ
errno.h (Linux???): Error Codes.
int ENXIO
errno.h (POSIX.1): Error Codes.
int EOF
stdio.h (ISO): End-Of-File and Errors.
int EOPNOTSUPP
errno.h (BSD): Error Codes.
int EOVERFLOW
errno.h (XOPEN): Error Codes.
int EOWNERDEAD
errno.h (GNU): Error Codes.
int EPERM
errno.h (POSIX.1): Error Codes.
int EPFNOSUPPORT
errno.h (BSD): Error Codes.
int EPIPE
errno.h (POSIX.1): Error Codes.
int EPROCLIM
errno.h (BSD): Error Codes.
int EPROCUNAVAIL
errno.h (BSD): Error Codes.
int EPROGMISMATCH
errno.h (BSD): Error Codes.
int EPROGUNAVAIL
errno.h (BSD): Error Codes.
int EPROTO
errno.h (XOPEN): Error Codes.
int EPROTONOSUPPORT
errno.h (BSD): Error Codes.
int EPROTOTYPE
errno.h (BSD): Error Codes.
int EQUIV_CLASS_MAX
limits.h (POSIX.2): Utility Program Capacity Limits.
int ERANGE
errno.h (ISO): Error Codes.
int EREMCHG
errno.h (Linux???): Error Codes.
int EREMOTE
errno.h (BSD): Error Codes.
int EREMOTEIO
errno.h (Linux???): Error Codes.
int ERESTART
errno.h (Linux???): Error Codes.
int ERFKILL
errno.h (Linux): Error Codes.
int EROFS
errno.h (POSIX.1): Error Codes.
int ERPCMISMATCH
errno.h (BSD): Error Codes.
int ESHUTDOWN
errno.h (BSD): Error Codes.
int ESOCKTNOSUPPORT
errno.h (BSD): Error Codes.
int ESPIPE
errno.h (POSIX.1): Error Codes.
int ESRCH
errno.h (POSIX.1): Error Codes.
int ESRMNT
errno.h (Linux???): Error Codes.
int ESTALE
errno.h (BSD): Error Codes.
int ESTRPIPE
errno.h (Linux???): Error Codes.
int ETIME
errno.h (XOPEN): Error Codes.
int ETIMEDOUT
errno.h (BSD): Error Codes.
int ETOOMANYREFS
errno.h (BSD): Error Codes.
int ETXTBSY
errno.h (BSD): Error Codes.
int EUCLEAN
errno.h (Linux???): Error Codes.
int EUNATCH
errno.h (Linux???): Error Codes.
int EUSERS
errno.h (BSD): Error Codes.
int EWOULDBLOCK
errno.h (BSD): Error Codes.
int EXDEV
errno.h (POSIX.1): Error Codes.
int EXFULL
errno.h (Linux???): Error Codes.
int EXIT_FAILURE
stdlib.h (ISO): Exit Status.
int EXIT_SUCCESS
stdlib.h (ISO): Exit Status.
int EXPR_NEST_MAX
limits.h (POSIX.2): Utility Program Capacity Limits.
int FD_CLOEXEC
fcntl.h (POSIX.1): File Descriptor Flags.
void FD_CLR (int filedes, fd_set *set)
sys/types.h (BSD): Waiting for Input or Output.
int FD_ISSET (int filedes, const fd_set *set)
sys/types.h (BSD): Waiting for Input or Output.
void FD_SET (int filedes, fd_set *set)
sys/types.h (BSD): Waiting for Input or Output.
int FD_SETSIZE
sys/types.h (BSD): Waiting for Input or Output.
void FD_ZERO (fd_set *set)
sys/types.h (BSD): Waiting for Input or Output.
FE_DIVBYZERO
fenv.h (ISO): Examining the FPU status word.
FE_DOWNWARD
fenv.h (ISO): Rounding Modes.
FE_INEXACT
fenv.h (ISO): Examining the FPU status word.
FE_INVALID
fenv.h (ISO): Examining the FPU status word.
FE_OVERFLOW
fenv.h (ISO): Examining the FPU status word.
int FE_SNANS_ALWAYS_SIGNAL
fenv.h (ISO): Infinity and NaN.
FE_TONEAREST
fenv.h (ISO): Rounding Modes.
FE_TOWARDZERO
fenv.h (ISO): Rounding Modes.
FE_UNDERFLOW
fenv.h (ISO): Examining the FPU status word.
FE_UPWARD
fenv.h (ISO): Rounding Modes.
FILE
stdio.h (ISO): Streams.
int FILENAME_MAX
stdio.h (ISO): Limits on File System Capacity.
FLT_DIG
float.h (C90): Floating Point Parameters.
FLT_EPSILON
float.h (C90): Floating Point Parameters.
FLT_MANT_DIG
float.h (C90): Floating Point Parameters.
FLT_MAX
float.h (C90): Floating Point Parameters.
FLT_MAX_10_EXP
float.h (C90): Floating Point Parameters.
FLT_MAX_EXP
float.h (C90): Floating Point Parameters.
FLT_MIN
float.h (C90): Floating Point Parameters.
FLT_MIN_10_EXP
float.h (C90): Floating Point Parameters.
FLT_MIN_EXP
float.h (C90): Floating Point Parameters.
FLT_RADIX
float.h (C90): Floating Point Parameters.
FLT_ROUNDS
float.h (C90): Floating Point Parameters.
tcflag_t FLUSHO
termios.h (BSD): Local Modes.
FNM_CASEFOLD
fnmatch.h (GNU): Wildcard Matching.
FNM_EXTMATCH
fnmatch.h (GNU): Wildcard Matching.
FNM_FILE_NAME
fnmatch.h (GNU): Wildcard Matching.
FNM_LEADING_DIR
fnmatch.h (GNU): Wildcard Matching.
FNM_NOESCAPE
fnmatch.h (POSIX.2): Wildcard Matching.
FNM_PATHNAME
fnmatch.h (POSIX.2): Wildcard Matching.
FNM_PERIOD
fnmatch.h (POSIX.2): Wildcard Matching.
int FOPEN_MAX
stdio.h (ISO): Opening Streams.
FPE_DECOVF_TRAP
signal.h (BSD): Program Error Signals.
FPE_FLTDIV_FAULT
signal.h (BSD): Program Error Signals.
FPE_FLTDIV_TRAP
signal.h (BSD): Program Error Signals.
FPE_FLTOVF_FAULT
signal.h (BSD): Program Error Signals.
FPE_FLTOVF_TRAP
signal.h (BSD): Program Error Signals.
FPE_FLTUND_FAULT
signal.h (BSD): Program Error Signals.
FPE_FLTUND_TRAP
signal.h (BSD): Program Error Signals.
FPE_INTDIV_TRAP
signal.h (BSD): Program Error Signals.
FPE_INTOVF_TRAP
signal.h (BSD): Program Error Signals.
FPE_SUBRNG_TRAP
signal.h (BSD): Program Error Signals.
int FP_ILOGB0
math.h (ISO): Exponentiation and Logarithms.
int FP_ILOGBNAN
math.h (ISO): Exponentiation and Logarithms.
FP_INFINITE
math.h (C99): Floating-Point Number Classification Functions.
FP_INT_DOWNWARD
math.h (ISO): Rounding Functions.
FP_INT_TONEAREST
math.h (ISO): Rounding Functions.
FP_INT_TONEARESTFROMZERO
math.h (ISO): Rounding Functions.
FP_INT_TOWARDZERO
math.h (ISO): Rounding Functions.
FP_INT_UPWARD
math.h (ISO): Rounding Functions.
long int FP_LLOGB0
math.h (ISO): Exponentiation and Logarithms.
long int FP_LLOGBNAN
math.h (ISO): Exponentiation and Logarithms.
FP_NAN
math.h (C99): Floating-Point Number Classification Functions.
FP_NORMAL
math.h (C99): Floating-Point Number Classification Functions.
FP_SUBNORMAL
math.h (C99): Floating-Point Number Classification Functions.
FP_ZERO
math.h (C99): Floating-Point Number Classification Functions.
struct FTW
ftw.h (XPG4.2): Working with Directory Trees.
int F_DUPFD
fcntl.h (POSIX.1): Duplicating Descriptors.
int F_GETFD
fcntl.h (POSIX.1): File Descriptor Flags.
int F_GETFL
fcntl.h (POSIX.1): Getting and Setting File Status Flags.
int F_GETLK
fcntl.h (POSIX.1): File Locks.
int F_GETOWN
fcntl.h (BSD): Interrupt-Driven Input.
int F_OFD_SETLK
fcntl.h (POSIX.1): Open File Description Locks.
int F_OFD_SETLKW
fcntl.h (POSIX.1): Open File Description Locks.
int F_OK
unistd.h (POSIX.1): Testing Permission to Access a File.
F_RDLCK
fcntl.h (POSIX.1): File Locks.
int F_SETFD
fcntl.h (POSIX.1): File Descriptor Flags.
int F_SETFL
fcntl.h (POSIX.1): Getting and Setting File Status Flags.
int F_SETLK
fcntl.h (POSIX.1): File Locks.
int F_SETLKW
fcntl.h (POSIX.1): File Locks.
int F_SETOWN
fcntl.h (BSD): Interrupt-Driven Input.
F_UNLCK
fcntl.h (POSIX.1): File Locks.
F_WRLCK
fcntl.h (POSIX.1): File Locks.
GLOB_ABORTED
glob.h (POSIX.2): Calling glob
.
GLOB_ALTDIRFUNC
glob.h (GNU): More Flags for Globbing.
GLOB_APPEND
glob.h (POSIX.2): Flags for Globbing.
GLOB_BRACE
glob.h (GNU): More Flags for Globbing.
GLOB_DOOFFS
glob.h (POSIX.2): Flags for Globbing.
GLOB_ERR
glob.h (POSIX.2): Flags for Globbing.
GLOB_MAGCHAR
glob.h (GNU): More Flags for Globbing.
GLOB_MARK
glob.h (POSIX.2): Flags for Globbing.
GLOB_NOCHECK
glob.h (POSIX.2): Flags for Globbing.
GLOB_NOESCAPE
glob.h (POSIX.2): Flags for Globbing.
GLOB_NOMAGIC
glob.h (GNU): More Flags for Globbing.
GLOB_NOMATCH
glob.h (POSIX.2): Calling glob
.
GLOB_NOSORT
glob.h (POSIX.2): Flags for Globbing.
GLOB_NOSPACE
glob.h (POSIX.2): Calling glob
.
GLOB_ONLYDIR
glob.h (GNU): More Flags for Globbing.
GLOB_PERIOD
glob.h (GNU): More Flags for Globbing.
GLOB_TILDE
glob.h (GNU): More Flags for Globbing.
GLOB_TILDE_CHECK
glob.h (GNU): More Flags for Globbing.
HOST_NOT_FOUND
netdb.h (BSD): Host Names.
double HUGE_VAL
math.h (ISO): Error Reporting by Mathematical Functions.
float HUGE_VALF
math.h (ISO): Error Reporting by Mathematical Functions.
long double HUGE_VALL
math.h (ISO): Error Reporting by Mathematical Functions.
_FloatN HUGE_VAL_FN
math.h (TS 18661-3:2015): Error Reporting by Mathematical Functions.
_FloatNx HUGE_VAL_FNx
math.h (TS 18661-3:2015): Error Reporting by Mathematical Functions.
tcflag_t HUPCL
termios.h (POSIX.1): Control Modes.
const float complex I
complex.h (C99): Complex Numbers.
tcflag_t ICANON
termios.h (POSIX.1): Local Modes.
tcflag_t ICRNL
termios.h (POSIX.1): Input Modes.
tcflag_t IEXTEN
termios.h (POSIX.1): Local Modes.
size_t IFNAMSIZ
net/if.h (???): Interface Naming.
int IFTODT (mode_t mode)
dirent.h (BSD): Format of a Directory Entry.
tcflag_t IGNBRK
termios.h (POSIX.1): Input Modes.
tcflag_t IGNCR
termios.h (POSIX.1): Input Modes.
tcflag_t IGNPAR
termios.h (POSIX.1): Input Modes.
tcflag_t IMAXBEL
termios.h (BSD): Input Modes.
uint32_t INADDR_ANY
netinet/in.h (BSD): Host Address Data Type.
uint32_t INADDR_BROADCAST
netinet/in.h (BSD): Host Address Data Type.
uint32_t INADDR_LOOPBACK
netinet/in.h (BSD): Host Address Data Type.
uint32_t INADDR_NONE
netinet/in.h (BSD): Host Address Data Type.
float INFINITY
math.h (ISO): Infinity and NaN.
INIT_PROCESS
utmp.h (SVID): Manipulating the User Accounting Database.
utmpx.h (XPG4.2): XPG User Accounting Database Functions.
tcflag_t INLCR
termios.h (POSIX.1): Input Modes.
tcflag_t INPCK
termios.h (POSIX.1): Input Modes.
INTPTR_WIDTH
stdint.h (ISO): Width of an Integer Type.
INT_MAX
limits.h (ISO): Range of an Integer Type.
INT_MIN
limits.h (ISO): Range of an Integer Type.
INT_WIDTH
limits.h (ISO): Width of an Integer Type.
int IPPORT_RESERVED
netinet/in.h (BSD): Internet Ports.
int IPPORT_USERRESERVED
netinet/in.h (BSD): Internet Ports.
tcflag_t ISIG
termios.h (POSIX.1): Local Modes.
tcflag_t ISTRIP
termios.h (POSIX.1): Input Modes.
ITIMER_PROF
sys/time.h (BSD): Setting an Alarm.
ITIMER_REAL
sys/time.h (BSD): Setting an Alarm.
ITIMER_VIRTUAL
sys/time.h (BSD): Setting an Alarm.
tcflag_t IXANY
termios.h (BSD): Input Modes.
tcflag_t IXOFF
termios.h (POSIX.1): Input Modes.
tcflag_t IXON
termios.h (POSIX.1): Input Modes.
LANG
locale.h (ISO): Locale Categories.
LC_ALL
locale.h (ISO): Locale Categories.
LC_COLLATE
locale.h (ISO): Locale Categories.
LC_CTYPE
locale.h (ISO): Locale Categories.
LC_MESSAGES
locale.h (XOPEN): Locale Categories.
LC_MONETARY
locale.h (ISO): Locale Categories.
LC_NUMERIC
locale.h (ISO): Locale Categories.
LC_TIME
locale.h (ISO): Locale Categories.
LDBL_DIG
float.h (C90): Floating Point Parameters.
LDBL_EPSILON
float.h (C90): Floating Point Parameters.
LDBL_MANT_DIG
float.h (C90): Floating Point Parameters.
LDBL_MAX
float.h (C90): Floating Point Parameters.
LDBL_MAX_10_EXP
float.h (C90): Floating Point Parameters.
LDBL_MAX_EXP
float.h (C90): Floating Point Parameters.
LDBL_MIN
float.h (C90): Floating Point Parameters.
LDBL_MIN_10_EXP
float.h (C90): Floating Point Parameters.
LDBL_MIN_EXP
float.h (C90): Floating Point Parameters.
int LINE_MAX
limits.h (POSIX.2): Utility Program Capacity Limits.
int LINK_MAX
limits.h optional (POSIX.1): Limits on File System Capacity.
LLONG_MAX
limits.h (ISO): Range of an Integer Type.
LLONG_MIN
limits.h (ISO): Range of an Integer Type.
LLONG_WIDTH
limits.h (ISO): Width of an Integer Type.
LOGIN_PROCESS
utmp.h (SVID): Manipulating the User Accounting Database.
utmpx.h (XPG4.2): XPG User Accounting Database Functions.
LONG_LONG_MAX
limits.h (GNU): Range of an Integer Type.
LONG_LONG_MIN
limits.h (GNU): Range of an Integer Type.
LONG_MAX
limits.h (ISO): Range of an Integer Type.
LONG_MIN
limits.h (ISO): Range of an Integer Type.
LONG_WIDTH
limits.h (ISO): Width of an Integer Type.
L_INCR
sys/file.h (BSD): File Positioning.
L_SET
sys/file.h (BSD): File Positioning.
L_XTND
sys/file.h (BSD): File Positioning.
int L_ctermid
stdio.h (POSIX.1): Identifying the Controlling Terminal.
int L_cuserid
stdio.h (POSIX.1): Identifying Who Logged In.
int L_tmpnam
stdio.h (ISO): Temporary Files.
MADV_HUGEPAGE
sys/mman.h (Linux): Memory-mapped I/O.
MAP_HUGETLB
sys/mman.h (Linux): Memory-mapped I/O.
int MAXNAMLEN
dirent.h (BSD): Limits on File System Capacity.
int MAXSYMLINKS
sys/param.h (BSD): Symbolic Links.
int MAX_CANON
limits.h (POSIX.1): Limits on File System Capacity.
int MAX_INPUT
limits.h (POSIX.1): Limits on File System Capacity.
int MB_CUR_MAX
stdlib.h (ISO): Selecting the conversion and its properties.
int MB_LEN_MAX
limits.h (ISO): Selecting the conversion and its properties.
tcflag_t MDMBUF
termios.h (BSD): Control Modes.
MFD_ALLOW_SEALING
sys/mman.h (Linux): Memory-mapped I/O.
MFD_CLOEXEC
sys/mman.h (Linux): Memory-mapped I/O.
MFD_HUGETLB
sys/mman.h (Linux): Memory-mapped I/O.
MLOCK_ONFAULT
sys/mman.h (Linux): Functions To Lock And Unlock Pages.
int MSG_DONTROUTE
sys/socket.h (BSD): Socket Data Options.
int MSG_OOB
sys/socket.h (BSD): Socket Data Options.
int MSG_PEEK
sys/socket.h (BSD): Socket Data Options.
int NAME_MAX
limits.h (POSIX.1): Limits on File System Capacity.
float NAN
math.h (GNU): Infinity and NaN.
int NCCS
termios.h (POSIX.1): Terminal Mode Data Types.
NEW_TIME
utmp.h (SVID): Manipulating the User Accounting Database.
utmpx.h (XPG4.2): XPG User Accounting Database Functions.
int NGROUPS_MAX
limits.h (POSIX.1): General Capacity Limits.
tcflag_t NOFLSH
termios.h (POSIX.1): Local Modes.
tcflag_t NOKERNINFO
termios.h optional (BSD): Local Modes.
NO_ADDRESS
netdb.h (BSD): Host Names.
NO_RECOVERY
netdb.h (BSD): Host Names.
int NSIG
signal.h (BSD): Standard Signals.
void * NULL
stddef.h (ISO): Null Pointer Constant.
OLD_TIME
utmp.h (SVID): Manipulating the User Accounting Database.
utmpx.h (XPG4.2): XPG User Accounting Database Functions.
ONCE_FLAG_INIT
threads.h (C11): Call Once.
tcflag_t ONLCR
termios.h (POSIX.1): Output Modes.
tcflag_t ONOEOT
termios.h optional (BSD): Output Modes.
int OPEN_MAX
limits.h (POSIX.1): General Capacity Limits.
tcflag_t OPOST
termios.h (POSIX.1): Output Modes.
OPTION_ALIAS
argp.h (GNU): Flags for Argp Options.
OPTION_ARG_OPTIONAL
argp.h (GNU): Flags for Argp Options.
OPTION_DOC
argp.h (GNU): Flags for Argp Options.
OPTION_HIDDEN
argp.h (GNU): Flags for Argp Options.
OPTION_NO_USAGE
argp.h (GNU): Flags for Argp Options.
tcflag_t OXTABS
termios.h optional (BSD): Output Modes.
int O_ACCMODE
fcntl.h (POSIX.1): File Access Modes.
int O_APPEND
fcntl.h (POSIX.1): I/O Operating Modes.
int O_ASYNC
fcntl.h (BSD): I/O Operating Modes.
int O_CREAT
fcntl.h (POSIX.1): Open-time Flags.
int O_DIRECTORY
fcntl.h (POSIX.1): Open-time Flags.
int O_EXCL
fcntl.h (POSIX.1): Open-time Flags.
int O_EXEC
fcntl.h optional (GNU): File Access Modes.
int O_EXLOCK
fcntl.h optional (BSD): Open-time Flags.
int O_FSYNC
fcntl.h (BSD): I/O Operating Modes.
int O_IGNORE_CTTY
fcntl.h optional (GNU): Open-time Flags.
int O_NDELAY
fcntl.h (BSD): I/O Operating Modes.
int O_NOATIME
fcntl.h (GNU): I/O Operating Modes.
int O_NOCTTY
fcntl.h (POSIX.1): Open-time Flags.
int O_NOFOLLOW
fcntl.h (POSIX.1): Open-time Flags.
int O_NOLINK
fcntl.h optional (GNU): Open-time Flags.
int O_NONBLOCK
fcntl.h (POSIX.1): Open-time Flags.
fcntl.h (POSIX.1): I/O Operating Modes.
int O_NOTRANS
fcntl.h optional (GNU): Open-time Flags.
int O_PATH
fcntl.h (Linux): File Access Modes.
int O_RDONLY
fcntl.h (POSIX.1): File Access Modes.
int O_RDWR
fcntl.h (POSIX.1): File Access Modes.
int O_READ
fcntl.h optional (GNU): File Access Modes.
int O_SHLOCK
fcntl.h optional (BSD): Open-time Flags.
int O_SYNC
fcntl.h (BSD): I/O Operating Modes.
int O_TMPFILE
fcntl.h (GNU): Open-time Flags.
int O_TRUNC
fcntl.h (POSIX.1): Open-time Flags.
int O_WRITE
fcntl.h optional (GNU): File Access Modes.
int O_WRONLY
fcntl.h (POSIX.1): File Access Modes.
tcflag_t PARENB
termios.h (POSIX.1): Control Modes.
tcflag_t PARMRK
termios.h (POSIX.1): Input Modes.
tcflag_t PARODD
termios.h (POSIX.1): Control Modes.
int PATH_MAX
limits.h (POSIX.1): Limits on File System Capacity.
PA_CHAR
printf.h (GNU): Parsing a Template String.
PA_DOUBLE
printf.h (GNU): Parsing a Template String.
PA_FLAG_LONG
printf.h (GNU): Parsing a Template String.
PA_FLAG_LONG_DOUBLE
printf.h (GNU): Parsing a Template String.
PA_FLAG_LONG_LONG
printf.h (GNU): Parsing a Template String.
int PA_FLAG_MASK
printf.h (GNU): Parsing a Template String.
PA_FLAG_PTR
printf.h (GNU): Parsing a Template String.
PA_FLAG_SHORT
printf.h (GNU): Parsing a Template String.
PA_FLOAT
printf.h (GNU): Parsing a Template String.
PA_INT
printf.h (GNU): Parsing a Template String.
PA_LAST
printf.h (GNU): Parsing a Template String.
PA_POINTER
printf.h (GNU): Parsing a Template String.
PA_STRING
printf.h (GNU): Parsing a Template String.
tcflag_t PENDIN
termios.h (BSD): Local Modes.
int PF_FILE
sys/socket.h (GNU): Details of Local Namespace.
int PF_INET
sys/socket.h (BSD): The Internet Namespace.
int PF_INET6
sys/socket.h (X/Open): The Internet Namespace.
int PF_LOCAL
sys/socket.h (POSIX): Details of Local Namespace.
int PF_UNIX
sys/socket.h (BSD): Details of Local Namespace.
int PIPE_BUF
limits.h (POSIX.1): Limits on File System Capacity.
PKEY_DISABLE_ACCESS
sys/mman.h (Linux): Memory Protection.
PKEY_DISABLE_WRITE
sys/mman.h (Linux): Memory Protection.
POSIX_REC_INCR_XFER_SIZE
limits.h (POSIX.1): Minimum Values for File System Limits.
POSIX_REC_MAX_XFER_SIZE
limits.h (POSIX.1): Minimum Values for File System Limits.
POSIX_REC_MIN_XFER_SIZE
limits.h (POSIX.1): Minimum Values for File System Limits.
POSIX_REC_XFER_ALIGN
limits.h (POSIX.1): Minimum Values for File System Limits.
PRIO_MAX
sys/resource.h (BSD): Functions For Traditional Scheduling.
PRIO_MIN
sys/resource.h (BSD): Functions For Traditional Scheduling.
PRIO_PGRP
sys/resource.h (BSD): Functions For Traditional Scheduling.
PRIO_PROCESS
sys/resource.h (BSD): Functions For Traditional Scheduling.
PRIO_USER
sys/resource.h (BSD): Functions For Traditional Scheduling.
PROT_EXEC
sys/mman.h (POSIX): Memory Protection.
PROT_NONE
sys/mman.h (POSIX): Memory Protection.
PROT_READ
sys/mman.h (POSIX): Memory Protection.
PROT_WRITE
sys/mman.h (POSIX): Memory Protection.
PTRDIFF_WIDTH
stdint.h (ISO): Width of an Integer Type.
char * P_tmpdir
stdio.h (SVID): Temporary Files.
int RAND_MAX
stdlib.h (ISO): ISO C Random Number Functions.
REG_BADBR
regex.h (POSIX.2): POSIX Regular Expression Compilation.
REG_BADPAT
regex.h (POSIX.2): POSIX Regular Expression Compilation.
REG_BADRPT
regex.h (POSIX.2): POSIX Regular Expression Compilation.
REG_EBRACE
regex.h (POSIX.2): POSIX Regular Expression Compilation.
REG_EBRACK
regex.h (POSIX.2): POSIX Regular Expression Compilation.
REG_ECOLLATE
regex.h (POSIX.2): POSIX Regular Expression Compilation.
REG_ECTYPE
regex.h (POSIX.2): POSIX Regular Expression Compilation.
REG_EESCAPE
regex.h (POSIX.2): POSIX Regular Expression Compilation.
REG_EPAREN
regex.h (POSIX.2): POSIX Regular Expression Compilation.
REG_ERANGE
regex.h (POSIX.2): POSIX Regular Expression Compilation.
REG_ESPACE
regex.h (POSIX.2): POSIX Regular Expression Compilation.
regex.h (POSIX.2): Matching a Compiled POSIX Regular Expression.
REG_ESUBREG
regex.h (POSIX.2): POSIX Regular Expression Compilation.
REG_EXTENDED
regex.h (POSIX.2): Flags for POSIX Regular Expressions.
REG_ICASE
regex.h (POSIX.2): Flags for POSIX Regular Expressions.
REG_NEWLINE
regex.h (POSIX.2): Flags for POSIX Regular Expressions.
REG_NOMATCH
regex.h (POSIX.2): Matching a Compiled POSIX Regular Expression.
REG_NOSUB
regex.h (POSIX.2): Flags for POSIX Regular Expressions.
REG_NOTBOL
regex.h (POSIX.2): Matching a Compiled POSIX Regular Expression.
REG_NOTEOL
regex.h (POSIX.2): Matching a Compiled POSIX Regular Expression.
int RE_DUP_MAX
limits.h (POSIX.2): General Capacity Limits.
RLIMIT_AS
sys/resource.h (Unix98): Limiting Resource Usage.
RLIMIT_CORE
sys/resource.h (BSD): Limiting Resource Usage.
RLIMIT_CPU
sys/resource.h (BSD): Limiting Resource Usage.
RLIMIT_DATA
sys/resource.h (BSD): Limiting Resource Usage.
RLIMIT_FSIZE
sys/resource.h (BSD): Limiting Resource Usage.
RLIMIT_MEMLOCK
sys/resource.h (BSD): Limiting Resource Usage.
RLIMIT_NOFILE
sys/resource.h (BSD): Limiting Resource Usage.
RLIMIT_NPROC
sys/resource.h (BSD): Limiting Resource Usage.
RLIMIT_RSS
sys/resource.h (BSD): Limiting Resource Usage.
RLIMIT_STACK
sys/resource.h (BSD): Limiting Resource Usage.
rlim_t RLIM_INFINITY
sys/resource.h (BSD): Limiting Resource Usage.
RLIM_NLIMITS
sys/resource.h (BSD): Limiting Resource Usage.
int RSEQ_SIG
sys/rseq.h (Linux): Restartable Sequences.
RUN_LVL
utmp.h (SVID): Manipulating the User Accounting Database.
utmpx.h (XPG4.2): XPG User Accounting Database Functions.
RUSAGE_CHILDREN
sys/resource.h (BSD): Resource Usage.
RUSAGE_SELF
sys/resource.h (BSD): Resource Usage.
int R_OK
unistd.h (POSIX.1): Testing Permission to Access a File.
int SA_NOCLDSTOP
signal.h (POSIX.1): Flags for sigaction
.
int SA_ONSTACK
signal.h (BSD): Flags for sigaction
.
int SA_RESTART
signal.h (BSD): Flags for sigaction
.
SCHAR_MAX
limits.h (ISO): Range of an Integer Type.
SCHAR_MIN
limits.h (ISO): Range of an Integer Type.
SCHAR_WIDTH
limits.h (ISO): Width of an Integer Type.
int SEEK_CUR
stdio.h (ISO): File Positioning.
int SEEK_END
stdio.h (ISO): File Positioning.
int SEEK_SET
stdio.h (ISO): File Positioning.
SHRT_MAX
limits.h (ISO): Range of an Integer Type.
SHRT_MIN
limits.h (ISO): Range of an Integer Type.
SHRT_WIDTH
limits.h (ISO): Width of an Integer Type.
int SIGABRT
signal.h (ISO): Program Error Signals.
int SIGALRM
signal.h (POSIX.1): Alarm Signals.
int SIGBUS
signal.h (BSD): Program Error Signals.
int SIGCHLD
signal.h (POSIX.1): Job Control Signals.
int SIGCLD
signal.h (SVID): Job Control Signals.
int SIGCONT
signal.h (POSIX.1): Job Control Signals.
int SIGEMT
signal.h (BSD): Program Error Signals.
int SIGFPE
signal.h (ISO): Program Error Signals.
int SIGHUP
signal.h (POSIX.1): Termination Signals.
int SIGILL
signal.h (ISO): Program Error Signals.
int SIGINFO
signal.h (BSD): Miscellaneous Signals.
int SIGINT
signal.h (ISO): Termination Signals.
int SIGIO
signal.h (BSD): Asynchronous I/O Signals.
int SIGIOT
signal.h (Unix): Program Error Signals.
int SIGKILL
signal.h (POSIX.1): Termination Signals.
int SIGLOST
signal.h (GNU): Operation Error Signals.
int SIGPIPE
signal.h (POSIX.1): Operation Error Signals.
int SIGPOLL
signal.h (SVID): Asynchronous I/O Signals.
int SIGPROF
signal.h (BSD): Alarm Signals.
int SIGQUIT
signal.h (POSIX.1): Termination Signals.
int SIGSEGV
signal.h (ISO): Program Error Signals.
int SIGSTOP
signal.h (POSIX.1): Job Control Signals.
int SIGSYS
signal.h (Unix): Program Error Signals.
int SIGTERM
signal.h (ISO): Termination Signals.
int SIGTRAP
signal.h (BSD): Program Error Signals.
int SIGTSTP
signal.h (POSIX.1): Job Control Signals.
int SIGTTIN
signal.h (POSIX.1): Job Control Signals.
int SIGTTOU
signal.h (POSIX.1): Job Control Signals.
int SIGURG
signal.h (BSD): Asynchronous I/O Signals.
int SIGUSR1
signal.h (POSIX.1): Miscellaneous Signals.
int SIGUSR2
signal.h (POSIX.1): Miscellaneous Signals.
int SIGVTALRM
signal.h (BSD): Alarm Signals.
int SIGWINCH
signal.h (BSD): Miscellaneous Signals.
int SIGXCPU
signal.h (BSD): Operation Error Signals.
int SIGXFSZ
signal.h (BSD): Operation Error Signals.
SIG_ATOMIC_WIDTH
stdint.h (ISO): Width of an Integer Type.
SIG_BLOCK
signal.h (POSIX.1): Process Signal Mask.
sighandler_t SIG_ERR
signal.h (ISO): Basic Signal Handling.
SIG_SETMASK
signal.h (POSIX.1): Process Signal Mask.
SIG_UNBLOCK
signal.h (POSIX.1): Process Signal Mask.
SIZE_WIDTH
stdint.h (ISO): Width of an Integer Type.
double SNAN
math.h (TS 18661-1:2014): Infinity and NaN.
float SNANF
math.h (TS 18661-1:2014): Infinity and NaN.
_FloatN SNANFN
math.h (TS 18661-3:2015): Infinity and NaN.
_FloatNx SNANFNx
math.h (TS 18661-3:2015): Infinity and NaN.
long double SNANL
math.h (TS 18661-1:2014): Infinity and NaN.
int SOCK_DGRAM
sys/socket.h (BSD): Communication Styles.
int SOCK_RAW
sys/socket.h (BSD): Communication Styles.
int SOCK_STREAM
sys/socket.h (BSD): Communication Styles.
int SOL_SOCKET
sys/socket.h (BSD): Socket-Level Options.
SO_BROADCAST
sys/socket.h (BSD): Socket-Level Options.
SO_DEBUG
sys/socket.h (BSD): Socket-Level Options.
SO_DONTROUTE
sys/socket.h (BSD): Socket-Level Options.
SO_ERROR
sys/socket.h (BSD): Socket-Level Options.
SO_KEEPALIVE
sys/socket.h (BSD): Socket-Level Options.
SO_LINGER
sys/socket.h (BSD): Socket-Level Options.
SO_OOBINLINE
sys/socket.h (BSD): Socket-Level Options.
SO_RCVBUF
sys/socket.h (BSD): Socket-Level Options.
SO_REUSEADDR
sys/socket.h (BSD): Socket-Level Options.
SO_SNDBUF
sys/socket.h (BSD): Socket-Level Options.
SO_STYLE
sys/socket.h (GNU): Socket-Level Options.
SO_TYPE
sys/socket.h (BSD): Socket-Level Options.
ssize_t SSIZE_MAX
limits.h (POSIX.1): General Capacity Limits.
STDERR_FILENO
unistd.h (POSIX.1): Descriptors and Streams.
STDIN_FILENO
unistd.h (POSIX.1): Descriptors and Streams.
STDOUT_FILENO
unistd.h (POSIX.1): Descriptors and Streams.
int STREAM_MAX
limits.h (POSIX.1): General Capacity Limits.
int SUN_LEN (struct sockaddr_un * ptr)
sys/un.h (BSD): Details of Local Namespace.
SYMLINK_MAX
limits.h (POSIX.1): Minimum Values for File System Limits.
S_IEXEC
sys/stat.h (BSD): The Mode Bits for Access Permission.
S_IFBLK
sys/stat.h (BSD): Testing the Type of a File.
S_IFCHR
sys/stat.h (BSD): Testing the Type of a File.
S_IFDIR
sys/stat.h (BSD): Testing the Type of a File.
S_IFIFO
sys/stat.h (BSD): Testing the Type of a File.
S_IFLNK
sys/stat.h (BSD): Testing the Type of a File.
int S_IFMT
sys/stat.h (BSD): Testing the Type of a File.
S_IFREG
sys/stat.h (BSD): Testing the Type of a File.
S_IFSOCK
sys/stat.h (BSD): Testing the Type of a File.
S_IREAD
sys/stat.h (BSD): The Mode Bits for Access Permission.
S_IRGRP
sys/stat.h (POSIX.1): The Mode Bits for Access Permission.
S_IROTH
sys/stat.h (POSIX.1): The Mode Bits for Access Permission.
S_IRUSR
sys/stat.h (POSIX.1): The Mode Bits for Access Permission.
S_IRWXG
sys/stat.h (POSIX.1): The Mode Bits for Access Permission.
S_IRWXO
sys/stat.h (POSIX.1): The Mode Bits for Access Permission.
S_IRWXU
sys/stat.h (POSIX.1): The Mode Bits for Access Permission.
int S_ISBLK (mode_t m)
sys/stat.h (POSIX): Testing the Type of a File.
int S_ISCHR (mode_t m)
sys/stat.h (POSIX): Testing the Type of a File.
int S_ISDIR (mode_t m)
sys/stat.h (POSIX): Testing the Type of a File.
int S_ISFIFO (mode_t m)
sys/stat.h (POSIX): Testing the Type of a File.
S_ISGID
sys/stat.h (POSIX): The Mode Bits for Access Permission.
int S_ISLNK (mode_t m)
sys/stat.h (GNU): Testing the Type of a File.
int S_ISREG (mode_t m)
sys/stat.h (POSIX): Testing the Type of a File.
int S_ISSOCK (mode_t m)
sys/stat.h (GNU): Testing the Type of a File.
S_ISUID
sys/stat.h (POSIX): The Mode Bits for Access Permission.
S_ISVTX
sys/stat.h (BSD): The Mode Bits for Access Permission.
S_IWGRP
sys/stat.h (POSIX.1): The Mode Bits for Access Permission.
S_IWOTH
sys/stat.h (POSIX.1): The Mode Bits for Access Permission.
S_IWRITE
sys/stat.h (BSD): The Mode Bits for Access Permission.
S_IWUSR
sys/stat.h (POSIX.1): The Mode Bits for Access Permission.
S_IXGRP
sys/stat.h (POSIX.1): The Mode Bits for Access Permission.
S_IXOTH
sys/stat.h (POSIX.1): The Mode Bits for Access Permission.
S_IXUSR
sys/stat.h (POSIX.1): The Mode Bits for Access Permission.
int S_TYPEISMQ (struct stat *s)
sys/stat.h (POSIX): Testing the Type of a File.
int S_TYPEISSEM (struct stat *s)
sys/stat.h (POSIX): Testing the Type of a File.
int S_TYPEISSHM (struct stat *s)
sys/stat.h (POSIX): Testing the Type of a File.
TCSADRAIN
termios.h (POSIX.1): Terminal Mode Functions.
TCSAFLUSH
termios.h (POSIX.1): Terminal Mode Functions.
TCSANOW
termios.h (POSIX.1): Terminal Mode Functions.
TCSASOFT
termios.h (BSD): Terminal Mode Functions.
TEMP_FAILURE_RETRY (expression)
unistd.h (GNU): Primitives Interrupted by Signals.
int TMP_MAX
stdio.h (ISO): Temporary Files.
tcflag_t TOSTOP
termios.h (POSIX.1): Local Modes.
TRY_AGAIN
netdb.h (BSD): Host Names.
TSS_DTOR_ITERATIONS
threads.h (C11): Thread-local Storage.
int TZNAME_MAX
limits.h (POSIX.1): General Capacity Limits.
UCHAR_MAX
limits.h (ISO): Range of an Integer Type.
UCHAR_WIDTH
limits.h (ISO): Width of an Integer Type.
UINTPTR_WIDTH
stdint.h (ISO): Width of an Integer Type.
UINT_MAX
limits.h (ISO): Range of an Integer Type.
UINT_WIDTH
limits.h (ISO): Width of an Integer Type.
ULLONG_MAX
limits.h (ISO): Range of an Integer Type.
ULLONG_WIDTH
limits.h (ISO): Width of an Integer Type.
ULONG_LONG_MAX
limits.h (GNU): Range of an Integer Type.
ULONG_MAX
limits.h (ISO): Range of an Integer Type.
ULONG_WIDTH
limits.h (ISO): Width of an Integer Type.
USER_PROCESS
utmp.h (SVID): Manipulating the User Accounting Database.
utmpx.h (XPG4.2): XPG User Accounting Database Functions.
USHRT_MAX
limits.h (ISO): Range of an Integer Type.
USHRT_WIDTH
limits.h (ISO): Width of an Integer Type.
int VDISCARD
termios.h (BSD): Other Special Characters.
int VDSUSP
termios.h (BSD): Characters that Cause Signals.
int VEOF
termios.h (POSIX.1): Characters for Input Editing.
int VEOL
termios.h (POSIX.1): Characters for Input Editing.
int VEOL2
termios.h (BSD): Characters for Input Editing.
int VERASE
termios.h (POSIX.1): Characters for Input Editing.
int VINTR
termios.h (POSIX.1): Characters that Cause Signals.
int VKILL
termios.h (POSIX.1): Characters for Input Editing.
int VLNEXT
termios.h (BSD): Other Special Characters.
int VMIN
termios.h (POSIX.1): Noncanonical Input.
int VQUIT
termios.h (POSIX.1): Characters that Cause Signals.
int VREPRINT
termios.h (BSD): Characters for Input Editing.
int VSTART
termios.h (POSIX.1): Special Characters for Flow Control.
int VSTATUS
termios.h (BSD): Other Special Characters.
int VSTOP
termios.h (POSIX.1): Special Characters for Flow Control.
int VSUSP
termios.h (POSIX.1): Characters that Cause Signals.
int VTIME
termios.h (POSIX.1): Noncanonical Input.
int VWERASE
termios.h (BSD): Characters for Input Editing.
WCHAR_MAX
limits.h (GNU): Range of an Integer Type.
wint_t WCHAR_MAX
wchar.h (ISO): Introduction to Extended Characters.
wint_t WCHAR_MIN
wchar.h (ISO): Introduction to Extended Characters.
WCHAR_WIDTH
stdint.h (ISO): Width of an Integer Type.
int WCOREDUMP (int status)
sys/wait.h (BSD): Process Completion Status.
int WEOF
wchar.h (ISO): End-Of-File and Errors.
wint_t WEOF
wchar.h (ISO): Introduction to Extended Characters.
int WEXITSTATUS (int status)
sys/wait.h (POSIX.1): Process Completion Status.
int WIFEXITED (int status)
sys/wait.h (POSIX.1): Process Completion Status.
int WIFSIGNALED (int status)
sys/wait.h (POSIX.1): Process Completion Status.
int WIFSTOPPED (int status)
sys/wait.h (POSIX.1): Process Completion Status.
WINT_WIDTH
stdint.h (ISO): Width of an Integer Type.
WRDE_APPEND
wordexp.h (POSIX.2): Flags for Word Expansion.
WRDE_BADCHAR
wordexp.h (POSIX.2): Calling wordexp
.
WRDE_BADVAL
wordexp.h (POSIX.2): Calling wordexp
.
WRDE_CMDSUB
wordexp.h (POSIX.2): Calling wordexp
.
WRDE_DOOFFS
wordexp.h (POSIX.2): Flags for Word Expansion.
WRDE_NOCMD
wordexp.h (POSIX.2): Flags for Word Expansion.
WRDE_NOSPACE
wordexp.h (POSIX.2): Calling wordexp
.
WRDE_REUSE
wordexp.h (POSIX.2): Flags for Word Expansion.
WRDE_SHOWERR
wordexp.h (POSIX.2): Flags for Word Expansion.
WRDE_SYNTAX
wordexp.h (POSIX.2): Calling wordexp
.
WRDE_UNDEF
wordexp.h (POSIX.2): Flags for Word Expansion.
int WSTOPSIG (int status)
sys/wait.h (POSIX.1): Process Completion Status.
int WTERMSIG (int status)
sys/wait.h (POSIX.1): Process Completion Status.
int W_OK
unistd.h (POSIX.1): Testing Permission to Access a File.
int X_OK
unistd.h (POSIX.1): Testing Permission to Access a File.
_ATFILE_SOURCE
no header (GNU): Feature Test Macros.
_CS_LFS64_CFLAGS
unistd.h (Unix98): String-Valued Parameters.
_CS_LFS64_LDFLAGS
unistd.h (Unix98): String-Valued Parameters.
_CS_LFS64_LIBS
unistd.h (Unix98): String-Valued Parameters.
_CS_LFS64_LINTFLAGS
unistd.h (Unix98): String-Valued Parameters.
_CS_LFS_CFLAGS
unistd.h (Unix98): String-Valued Parameters.
_CS_LFS_LDFLAGS
unistd.h (Unix98): String-Valued Parameters.
_CS_LFS_LIBS
unistd.h (Unix98): String-Valued Parameters.
_CS_LFS_LINTFLAGS
unistd.h (Unix98): String-Valued Parameters.
_CS_PATH
unistd.h (POSIX.2): String-Valued Parameters.
const float complex _Complex_I
complex.h (C99): Complex Numbers.
_DEFAULT_SOURCE
no header (GNU): Feature Test Macros.
_DYNAMIC_STACK_SIZE_SOURCE
no header (GNU): Feature Test Macros.
void _Exit (int status)
stdlib.h (ISO): Termination Internals.
_FILE_OFFSET_BITS
no header (X/Open): Feature Test Macros.
_FORTIFY_SOURCE
no header (GNU): Feature Test Macros.
pid_t _Fork (void)
unistd.h (GNU): Creating a Process.
_GNU_SOURCE
no header (GNU): Feature Test Macros.
int _IOFBF
stdio.h (ISO): Controlling Which Kind of Buffering.
int _IOLBF
stdio.h (ISO): Controlling Which Kind of Buffering.
int _IONBF
stdio.h (ISO): Controlling Which Kind of Buffering.
_ISOC11_SOURCE
no header (C11): Feature Test Macros.
_ISOC2X_SOURCE
no header (C2X): Feature Test Macros.
_ISOC99_SOURCE
no header (GNU): Feature Test Macros.
_LARGEFILE64_SOURCE
no header (X/Open): Feature Test Macros.
_LARGEFILE_SOURCE
no header (X/Open): Feature Test Macros.
_PC_ASYNC_IO
unistd.h (POSIX.1): Using pathconf
.
_PC_CHOWN_RESTRICTED
unistd.h (POSIX.1): Using pathconf
.
_PC_FILESIZEBITS
unistd.h (LFS): Using pathconf
.
_PC_LINK_MAX
unistd.h (POSIX.1): Using pathconf
.
_PC_MAX_CANON
unistd.h (POSIX.1): Using pathconf
.
_PC_MAX_INPUT
unistd.h (POSIX.1): Using pathconf
.
_PC_NAME_MAX
unistd.h (POSIX.1): Using pathconf
.
_PC_NO_TRUNC
unistd.h (POSIX.1): Using pathconf
.
_PC_PATH_MAX
unistd.h (POSIX.1): Using pathconf
.
_PC_PIPE_BUF
unistd.h (POSIX.1): Using pathconf
.
_PC_PRIO_IO
unistd.h (POSIX.1): Using pathconf
.
_PC_REC_INCR_XFER_SIZE
unistd.h (POSIX.1): Using pathconf
.
_PC_REC_MAX_XFER_SIZE
unistd.h (POSIX.1): Using pathconf
.
_PC_REC_MIN_XFER_SIZE
unistd.h (POSIX.1): Using pathconf
.
_PC_REC_XFER_ALIGN
unistd.h (POSIX.1): Using pathconf
.
_PC_SYNC_IO
unistd.h (POSIX.1): Using pathconf
.
_PC_VDISABLE
unistd.h (POSIX.1): Using pathconf
.
_POSIX2_BC_BASE_MAX
limits.h (POSIX.2): Minimum Values for Utility Limits.
_POSIX2_BC_DIM_MAX
limits.h (POSIX.2): Minimum Values for Utility Limits.
_POSIX2_BC_SCALE_MAX
limits.h (POSIX.2): Minimum Values for Utility Limits.
_POSIX2_BC_STRING_MAX
limits.h (POSIX.2): Minimum Values for Utility Limits.
_POSIX2_COLL_WEIGHTS_MAX
limits.h (POSIX.2): Minimum Values for Utility Limits.
int _POSIX2_C_DEV
unistd.h (POSIX.2): Overall System Options.
long int _POSIX2_C_VERSION
unistd.h (POSIX.2): Which Version of POSIX is Supported.
_POSIX2_EQUIV_CLASS_MAX
limits.h (POSIX.2): Minimum Values for Utility Limits.
_POSIX2_EXPR_NEST_MAX
limits.h (POSIX.2): Minimum Values for Utility Limits.
int _POSIX2_FORT_DEV
unistd.h (POSIX.2): Overall System Options.
int _POSIX2_FORT_RUN
unistd.h (POSIX.2): Overall System Options.
_POSIX2_LINE_MAX
limits.h (POSIX.2): Minimum Values for Utility Limits.
int _POSIX2_LOCALEDEF
unistd.h (POSIX.2): Overall System Options.
_POSIX2_RE_DUP_MAX
limits.h (POSIX.2): Minimum Values for General Capacity Limits.
int _POSIX2_SW_DEV
unistd.h (POSIX.2): Overall System Options.
_POSIX_AIO_LISTIO_MAX
limits.h (POSIX.1): Minimum Values for General Capacity Limits.
_POSIX_AIO_MAX
limits.h (POSIX.1): Minimum Values for General Capacity Limits.
_POSIX_ARG_MAX
limits.h (POSIX.1): Minimum Values for General Capacity Limits.
_POSIX_CHILD_MAX
limits.h (POSIX.1): Minimum Values for General Capacity Limits.
int _POSIX_CHOWN_RESTRICTED
unistd.h (POSIX.1): Optional Features in File Support.
_POSIX_C_SOURCE
no header (POSIX.2): Feature Test Macros.
int _POSIX_JOB_CONTROL
unistd.h (POSIX.1): Overall System Options.
_POSIX_LINK_MAX
limits.h (POSIX.1): Minimum Values for File System Limits.
_POSIX_MAX_CANON
limits.h (POSIX.1): Minimum Values for File System Limits.
_POSIX_MAX_INPUT
limits.h (POSIX.1): Minimum Values for File System Limits.
_POSIX_NAME_MAX
limits.h (POSIX.1): Minimum Values for File System Limits.
_POSIX_NGROUPS_MAX
limits.h (POSIX.1): Minimum Values for General Capacity Limits.
int _POSIX_NO_TRUNC
unistd.h (POSIX.1): Optional Features in File Support.
_POSIX_OPEN_MAX
limits.h (POSIX.1): Minimum Values for General Capacity Limits.
_POSIX_PATH_MAX
limits.h (POSIX.1): Minimum Values for File System Limits.
_POSIX_PIPE_BUF
limits.h (POSIX.1): Minimum Values for File System Limits.
int _POSIX_SAVED_IDS
unistd.h (POSIX.1): Overall System Options.
_POSIX_SOURCE
no header (POSIX.1): Feature Test Macros.
_POSIX_SSIZE_MAX
limits.h (POSIX.1): Minimum Values for General Capacity Limits.
_POSIX_STREAM_MAX
limits.h (POSIX.1): Minimum Values for General Capacity Limits.
_POSIX_TZNAME_MAX
limits.h (POSIX.1): Minimum Values for General Capacity Limits.
unsigned char _POSIX_VDISABLE
unistd.h (POSIX.1): Optional Features in File Support.
long int _POSIX_VERSION
unistd.h (POSIX.1): Which Version of POSIX is Supported.
_REENTRANT
no header (Obsolete): Feature Test Macros.
_SC_2_C_DEV
unistd.h (POSIX.2): Constants for sysconf
Parameters.
_SC_2_FORT_DEV
unistd.h (POSIX.2): Constants for sysconf
Parameters.
_SC_2_FORT_RUN
unistd.h (POSIX.2): Constants for sysconf
Parameters.
_SC_2_LOCALEDEF
unistd.h (POSIX.2): Constants for sysconf
Parameters.
_SC_2_SW_DEV
unistd.h (POSIX.2): Constants for sysconf
Parameters.
_SC_2_VERSION
unistd.h (POSIX.2): Constants for sysconf
Parameters.
_SC_AIO_LISTIO_MAX
unistd.h (POSIX.1): Constants for sysconf
Parameters.
_SC_AIO_MAX
unistd.h (POSIX.1): Constants for sysconf
Parameters.
_SC_AIO_PRIO_DELTA_MAX
unistd.h (POSIX.1): Constants for sysconf
Parameters.
_SC_ARG_MAX
unistd.h (POSIX.1): Constants for sysconf
Parameters.
_SC_ASYNCHRONOUS_IO
unistd.h (POSIX.1): Constants for sysconf
Parameters.
_SC_ATEXIT_MAX
unistd.h (GNU): Constants for sysconf
Parameters.
_SC_AVPHYS_PAGES
unistd.h (GNU): Constants for sysconf
Parameters.
_SC_BC_BASE_MAX
unistd.h (POSIX.2): Constants for sysconf
Parameters.
_SC_BC_DIM_MAX
unistd.h (POSIX.2): Constants for sysconf
Parameters.
_SC_BC_SCALE_MAX
unistd.h (POSIX.2): Constants for sysconf
Parameters.
_SC_BC_STRING_MAX
unistd.h (POSIX.2): Constants for sysconf
Parameters.
_SC_CHARCLASS_NAME_MAX
unistd.h (GNU): Constants for sysconf
Parameters.
_SC_CHAR_BIT
unistd.h (X/Open): Constants for sysconf
Parameters.
_SC_CHAR_MAX
unistd.h (X/Open): Constants for sysconf
Parameters.
_SC_CHAR_MIN
unistd.h (X/Open): Constants for sysconf
Parameters.
_SC_CHILD_MAX
unistd.h (POSIX.1): Constants for sysconf
Parameters.
_SC_CLK_TCK
unistd.h (POSIX.1): Constants for sysconf
Parameters.
_SC_COLL_WEIGHTS_MAX
unistd.h (POSIX.2): Constants for sysconf
Parameters.
_SC_DELAYTIMER_MAX
unistd.h (POSIX.1): Constants for sysconf
Parameters.
_SC_EQUIV_CLASS_MAX
unistd.h (POSIX.2): Constants for sysconf
Parameters.
_SC_EXPR_NEST_MAX
unistd.h (POSIX.2): Constants for sysconf
Parameters.
_SC_FSYNC
unistd.h (POSIX.1): Constants for sysconf
Parameters.
_SC_GETGR_R_SIZE_MAX
unistd.h (POSIX.1): Constants for sysconf
Parameters.
_SC_GETPW_R_SIZE_MAX
unistd.h (POSIX.1): Constants for sysconf
Parameters.
_SC_INT_MAX
unistd.h (X/Open): Constants for sysconf
Parameters.
_SC_INT_MIN
unistd.h (X/Open): Constants for sysconf
Parameters.
_SC_JOB_CONTROL
unistd.h (POSIX.1): Constants for sysconf
Parameters.
_SC_LEVEL1_DCACHE_ASSOC
unistd.h (GNU): Constants for sysconf
Parameters.
_SC_LEVEL1_DCACHE_LINESIZE
unistd.h (GNU): Constants for sysconf
Parameters.
_SC_LEVEL1_DCACHE_SIZE
unistd.h (GNU): Constants for sysconf
Parameters.
_SC_LEVEL1_ICACHE_ASSOC
unistd.h (GNU): Constants for sysconf
Parameters.
_SC_LEVEL1_ICACHE_LINESIZE
unistd.h (GNU): Constants for sysconf
Parameters.
_SC_LEVEL1_ICACHE_SIZE
unistd.h (GNU): Constants for sysconf
Parameters.
_SC_LEVEL2_CACHE_ASSOC
unistd.h (GNU): Constants for sysconf
Parameters.
_SC_LEVEL2_CACHE_LINESIZE
unistd.h (GNU): Constants for sysconf
Parameters.
_SC_LEVEL2_CACHE_SIZE
unistd.h (GNU): Constants for sysconf
Parameters.
_SC_LEVEL3_CACHE_ASSOC
unistd.h (GNU): Constants for sysconf
Parameters.
_SC_LEVEL3_CACHE_LINESIZE
unistd.h (GNU): Constants for sysconf
Parameters.
_SC_LEVEL3_CACHE_SIZE
unistd.h (GNU): Constants for sysconf
Parameters.
_SC_LEVEL4_CACHE_ASSOC
unistd.h (GNU): Constants for sysconf
Parameters.
_SC_LEVEL4_CACHE_LINESIZE
unistd.h (GNU): Constants for sysconf
Parameters.
_SC_LEVEL4_CACHE_SIZE
unistd.h (GNU): Constants for sysconf
Parameters.
_SC_LINE_MAX
unistd.h (POSIX.2): Constants for sysconf
Parameters.
_SC_LOGIN_NAME_MAX
unistd.h (POSIX.1): Constants for sysconf
Parameters.
_SC_LONG_BIT
unistd.h (X/Open): Constants for sysconf
Parameters.
_SC_MAPPED_FILES
unistd.h (POSIX.1): Constants for sysconf
Parameters.
_SC_MB_LEN_MAX
unistd.h (X/Open): Constants for sysconf
Parameters.
_SC_MEMLOCK
unistd.h (POSIX.1): Constants for sysconf
Parameters.
_SC_MEMLOCK_RANGE
unistd.h (POSIX.1): Constants for sysconf
Parameters.
_SC_MEMORY_PROTECTION
unistd.h (POSIX.1): Constants for sysconf
Parameters.
_SC_MESSAGE_PASSING
unistd.h (POSIX.1): Constants for sysconf
Parameters.
_SC_MINSIGSTKSZ
unistd.h (GNU): Constants for sysconf
Parameters.
_SC_MQ_OPEN_MAX
unistd.h (POSIX.1): Constants for sysconf
Parameters.
_SC_MQ_PRIO_MAX
unistd.h (POSIX.1): Constants for sysconf
Parameters.
_SC_NGROUPS_MAX
unistd.h (POSIX.1): Constants for sysconf
Parameters.
_SC_NL_ARGMAX
unistd.h (X/Open): Constants for sysconf
Parameters.
_SC_NL_LANGMAX
unistd.h (X/Open): Constants for sysconf
Parameters.
_SC_NL_MSGMAX
unistd.h (X/Open): Constants for sysconf
Parameters.
_SC_NL_NMAX
unistd.h (X/Open): Constants for sysconf
Parameters.
_SC_NL_SETMAX
unistd.h (X/Open): Constants for sysconf
Parameters.
_SC_NL_TEXTMAX
unistd.h (X/Open): Constants for sysconf
Parameters.
_SC_NPROCESSORS_CONF
unistd.h (GNU): Constants for sysconf
Parameters.
_SC_NPROCESSORS_ONLN
unistd.h (GNU): Constants for sysconf
Parameters.
_SC_NZERO
unistd.h (X/Open): Constants for sysconf
Parameters.
_SC_OPEN_MAX
unistd.h (POSIX.1): Constants for sysconf
Parameters.
_SC_PAGESIZE
unistd.h (GNU): Constants for sysconf
Parameters.
_SC_PHYS_PAGES
unistd.h (GNU): Constants for sysconf
Parameters.
_SC_PII
unistd.h (POSIX.1g): Constants for sysconf
Parameters.
_SC_PII_INTERNET
unistd.h (POSIX.1g): Constants for sysconf
Parameters.
_SC_PII_INTERNET_DGRAM
unistd.h (POSIX.1g): Constants for sysconf
Parameters.
_SC_PII_INTERNET_STREAM
unistd.h (POSIX.1g): Constants for sysconf
Parameters.
_SC_PII_OSI
unistd.h (POSIX.1g): Constants for sysconf
Parameters.
_SC_PII_OSI_CLTS
unistd.h (POSIX.1g): Constants for sysconf
Parameters.
_SC_PII_OSI_COTS
unistd.h (POSIX.1g): Constants for sysconf
Parameters.
_SC_PII_OSI_M
unistd.h (POSIX.1g): Constants for sysconf
Parameters.
_SC_PII_SOCKET
unistd.h (POSIX.1g): Constants for sysconf
Parameters.
_SC_PII_XTI
unistd.h (POSIX.1g): Constants for sysconf
Parameters.
_SC_PRIORITIZED_IO
unistd.h (POSIX.1): Constants for sysconf
Parameters.
_SC_PRIORITY_SCHEDULING
unistd.h (POSIX.1): Constants for sysconf
Parameters.
_SC_REALTIME_SIGNALS
unistdh.h (POSIX.1): Constants for sysconf
Parameters.
_SC_RTSIG_MAX
unistd.h (POSIX.1): Constants for sysconf
Parameters.
_SC_SAVED_IDS
unistd.h (POSIX.1): Constants for sysconf
Parameters.
_SC_SCHAR_MAX
unistd.h (X/Open): Constants for sysconf
Parameters.
_SC_SCHAR_MIN
unistd.h (X/Open): Constants for sysconf
Parameters.
_SC_SELECT
unistd.h (POSIX.1g): Constants for sysconf
Parameters.
_SC_SEMAPHORES
unistd.h (POSIX.1): Constants for sysconf
Parameters.
_SC_SEM_NSEMS_MAX
unistd.h (POSIX.1): Constants for sysconf
Parameters.
_SC_SEM_VALUE_MAX
unistd.h (POSIX.1): Constants for sysconf
Parameters.
_SC_SHARED_MEMORY_OBJECTS
unistd.h (POSIX.1): Constants for sysconf
Parameters.
_SC_SHRT_MAX
unistd.h (X/Open): Constants for sysconf
Parameters.
_SC_SHRT_MIN
unistd.h (X/Open): Constants for sysconf
Parameters.
_SC_SIGQUEUE_MAX
unistd.h (POSIX.1): Constants for sysconf
Parameters.
_SC_SIGSTKSZ
unistd.h (GNU): Constants for sysconf
Parameters.
_SC_SSIZE_MAX
unistd.h (X/Open): Constants for sysconf
Parameters.
_SC_STREAM_MAX
unistd.h (POSIX.1): Constants for sysconf
Parameters.
_SC_SYNCHRONIZED_IO
unistd.h (POSIX.1): Constants for sysconf
Parameters.
_SC_THREADS
unistd.h (POSIX.1): Constants for sysconf
Parameters.
_SC_THREAD_ATTR_STACKADDR
unistd.h (POSIX.1): Constants for sysconf
Parameters.
_SC_THREAD_ATTR_STACKSIZE
unistd.h (POSIX.1): Constants for sysconf
Parameters.
_SC_THREAD_DESTRUCTOR_ITERATIONS
unistd.h (POSIX.1): Constants for sysconf
Parameters.
_SC_THREAD_KEYS_MAX
unistd.h (POSIX.1): Constants for sysconf
Parameters.
_SC_THREAD_PRIORITY_SCHEDULING
unistd.h (POSIX.1): Constants for sysconf
Parameters.
_SC_THREAD_PRIO_INHERIT
unistd.h (POSIX.1): Constants for sysconf
Parameters.
_SC_THREAD_PRIO_PROTECT
unistd.h (POSIX.1): Constants for sysconf
Parameters.
_SC_THREAD_PROCESS_SHARED
unistd.h (POSIX.1): Constants for sysconf
Parameters.
_SC_THREAD_SAFE_FUNCTIONS
unistd.h (POSIX.1): Constants for sysconf
Parameters.
_SC_THREAD_STACK_MIN
unistd.h (POSIX.1): Constants for sysconf
Parameters.
_SC_THREAD_THREADS_MAX
unistd.h (POSIX.1): Constants for sysconf
Parameters.
_SC_TIMERS
unistd.h (POSIX.1): Constants for sysconf
Parameters.
_SC_TIMER_MAX
unistd.h (POSIX.1): Constants for sysconf
Parameters.
_SC_TTY_NAME_MAX
unistd.h (POSIX.1): Constants for sysconf
Parameters.
_SC_TZNAME_MAX
unistd.h (POSIX.1): Constants for sysconf
Parameters.
_SC_T_IOV_MAX
unistd.h (POSIX.1g): Constants for sysconf
Parameters.
_SC_UCHAR_MAX
unistd.h (X/Open): Constants for sysconf
Parameters.
_SC_UINT_MAX
unistd.h (X/Open): Constants for sysconf
Parameters.
_SC_UIO_MAXIOV
unistd.h (POSIX.1g): Constants for sysconf
Parameters.
_SC_ULONG_MAX
unistd.h (X/Open): Constants for sysconf
Parameters.
_SC_USHRT_MAX
unistd.h (X/Open): Constants for sysconf
Parameters.
_SC_VERSION
unistd.h (POSIX.1): Constants for sysconf
Parameters.
unistd.h (POSIX.2): Constants for sysconf
Parameters.
_SC_WORD_BIT
unistd.h (X/Open): Constants for sysconf
Parameters.
_SC_XOPEN_CRYPT
unistd.h (X/Open): Constants for sysconf
Parameters.
_SC_XOPEN_ENH_I18N
unistd.h (X/Open): Constants for sysconf
Parameters.
_SC_XOPEN_LEGACY
unistd.h (X/Open): Constants for sysconf
Parameters.
_SC_XOPEN_REALTIME
unistd.h (X/Open): Constants for sysconf
Parameters.
_SC_XOPEN_REALTIME_THREADS
unistd.h (X/Open): Constants for sysconf
Parameters.
_SC_XOPEN_SHM
unistd.h (X/Open): Constants for sysconf
Parameters.
_SC_XOPEN_UNIX
unistd.h (X/Open): Constants for sysconf
Parameters.
_SC_XOPEN_VERSION
unistd.h (X/Open): Constants for sysconf
Parameters.
_SC_XOPEN_XCU_VERSION
unistd.h (X/Open): Constants for sysconf
Parameters.
_SC_XOPEN_XPG2
unistd.h (X/Open): Constants for sysconf
Parameters.
_SC_XOPEN_XPG3
unistd.h (X/Open): Constants for sysconf
Parameters.
_SC_XOPEN_XPG4
unistd.h (X/Open): Constants for sysconf
Parameters.
_THREAD_SAFE
no header (Obsolete): Feature Test Macros.
_XOPEN_SOURCE
no header (X/Open): Feature Test Macros.
_XOPEN_SOURCE_EXTENDED
no header (X/Open): Feature Test Macros.
__STDC_WANT_IEC_60559_BFP_EXT__
no header (ISO): Feature Test Macros.
__STDC_WANT_IEC_60559_EXT__
no header (ISO): Feature Test Macros.
__STDC_WANT_IEC_60559_FUNCS_EXT__
no header (ISO): Feature Test Macros.
__STDC_WANT_IEC_60559_TYPES_EXT__
no header (ISO): Feature Test Macros.
__STDC_WANT_LIB_EXT2__
no header (ISO): Feature Test Macros.
size_t __fbufsize (FILE *stream)
stdio_ext.h (GNU): Controlling Which Kind of Buffering.
int __flbf (FILE *stream)
stdio_ext.h (GNU): Controlling Which Kind of Buffering.
size_t __fpending (FILE *stream)
stdio_ext.h (GNU): Controlling Which Kind of Buffering.
void __fpurge (FILE *stream)
stdio_ext.h (GNU): Flushing Buffers.
int __freadable (FILE *stream)
stdio_ext.h (GNU): Opening Streams.
int __freading (FILE *stream)
stdio_ext.h (GNU): Opening Streams.
int __fsetlocking (FILE *stream, int type)
stdio_ext.h (GNU): Streams and Threads.
__ftw64_func_t
ftw.h (GNU): Working with Directory Trees.
__ftw_func_t
ftw.h (GNU): Working with Directory Trees.
int __fwritable (FILE *stream)
stdio_ext.h (GNU): Opening Streams.
int __fwriting (FILE *stream)
stdio_ext.h (GNU): Opening Streams.
void (*__gconv_end_fct) (struct gconv_step *)
gconv.h (GNU): The iconv
Implementation in the GNU C Library.
int (*__gconv_fct) (struct __gconv_step *, struct __gconv_step_data *, const char **, const char *, size_t *, int)
gconv.h (GNU): The iconv
Implementation in the GNU C Library.
int (*__gconv_init_fct) (struct __gconv_step *)
gconv.h (GNU): The iconv
Implementation in the GNU C Library.
struct __gconv_step
gconv.h (GNU): The iconv
Implementation in the GNU C Library.
struct __gconv_step_data
gconv.h (GNU): The iconv
Implementation in the GNU C Library.
char __libc_single_threaded
sys/single_threaded.h (GNU): Detecting Single-Threaded Execution.
__nftw64_func_t
ftw.h (GNU): Working with Directory Trees.
__nftw_func_t
ftw.h (GNU): Working with Directory Trees.
unsigned int __rseq_flags
sys/rseq.h (Linux): Restartable Sequences.
ptrdiff_t __rseq_offset
sys/rseq.h (Linux): Restartable Sequences.
unsigned int __rseq_size
sys/rseq.h (Linux): Restartable Sequences.
void __va_copy (va_list dest, va_list src)
stdarg.h (GNU): Argument Access Macros.
int _dl_find_object (void *address, struct dl_find_object *result)
dlfcn.h (GNU): Dynamic Linker Introspection.
void _exit (int status)
unistd.h (POSIX.1): Termination Internals.
void _flushlbf (void)
stdio_ext.h (GNU): Flushing Buffers.
int _tolower (int c)
ctype.h (SVID): Case Conversion.
int _toupper (int c)
ctype.h (SVID): Case Conversion.
long int a64l (const char *string)
stdlib.h (XPG): Encode Binary Data.
void abort (void)
stdlib.h (ISO): Aborting a Program.
int abs (int number)
stdlib.h (ISO): Absolute Value.
int accept (int socket, struct sockaddr *addr, socklen_t *length_ptr)
sys/socket.h (BSD): Accepting Connections.
int access (const char *filename, int how)
unistd.h (POSIX.1): Testing Permission to Access a File.
double acos (double x)
math.h (ISO): Inverse Trigonometric Functions.
float acosf (float x)
math.h (ISO): Inverse Trigonometric Functions.
_FloatN acosfN (_FloatN x)
math.h (TS 18661-3:2015): Inverse Trigonometric Functions.
_FloatNx acosfNx (_FloatNx x)
math.h (TS 18661-3:2015): Inverse Trigonometric Functions.
double acosh (double x)
math.h (ISO): Hyperbolic Functions.
float acoshf (float x)
math.h (ISO): Hyperbolic Functions.
_FloatN acoshfN (_FloatN x)
math.h (TS 18661-3:2015): Hyperbolic Functions.
_FloatNx acoshfNx (_FloatNx x)
math.h (TS 18661-3:2015): Hyperbolic Functions.
long double acoshl (long double x)
math.h (ISO): Hyperbolic Functions.
long double acosl (long double x)
math.h (ISO): Inverse Trigonometric Functions.
int addmntent (FILE *stream, const struct mntent *mnt)
mntent.h (BSD): The mtab file.
int adjtime (const struct timeval *delta, struct timeval *olddelta)
sys/time.h (BSD): Setting and Adjusting the Time.
int adjtimex (struct timex *timex)
sys/timex.h (GNU): Setting and Adjusting the Time.
int aio_cancel (int fildes, struct aiocb *aiocbp)
aio.h (POSIX.1b): Cancellation of AIO Operations.
int aio_cancel64 (int fildes, struct aiocb64 *aiocbp)
aio.h (Unix98): Cancellation of AIO Operations.
int aio_error (const struct aiocb *aiocbp)
aio.h (POSIX.1b): Getting the Status of AIO Operations.
int aio_error64 (const struct aiocb64 *aiocbp)
aio.h (Unix98): Getting the Status of AIO Operations.
int aio_fsync (int op, struct aiocb *aiocbp)
aio.h (POSIX.1b): Getting into a Consistent State.
int aio_fsync64 (int op, struct aiocb64 *aiocbp)
aio.h (Unix98): Getting into a Consistent State.
void aio_init (const struct aioinit *init)
aio.h (GNU): How to optimize the AIO implementation.
int aio_read (struct aiocb *aiocbp)
aio.h (POSIX.1b): Asynchronous Read and Write Operations.
int aio_read64 (struct aiocb64 *aiocbp)
aio.h (Unix98): Asynchronous Read and Write Operations.
ssize_t aio_return (struct aiocb *aiocbp)
aio.h (POSIX.1b): Getting the Status of AIO Operations.
ssize_t aio_return64 (struct aiocb64 *aiocbp)
aio.h (Unix98): Getting the Status of AIO Operations.
int aio_suspend (const struct aiocb *const list[], int nent, const struct timespec *timeout)
aio.h (POSIX.1b): Getting into a Consistent State.
int aio_suspend64 (const struct aiocb64 *const list[], int nent, const struct timespec *timeout)
aio.h (Unix98): Getting into a Consistent State.
int aio_write (struct aiocb *aiocbp)
aio.h (POSIX.1b): Asynchronous Read and Write Operations.
int aio_write64 (struct aiocb64 *aiocbp)
aio.h (Unix98): Asynchronous Read and Write Operations.
struct aiocb
aio.h (POSIX.1b): Perform I/O Operations in Parallel.
struct aiocb64
aio.h (POSIX.1b): Perform I/O Operations in Parallel.
struct aioinit
aio.h (GNU): How to optimize the AIO implementation.
unsigned int alarm (unsigned int seconds)
unistd.h (POSIX.1): Setting an Alarm.
void * aligned_alloc (size_t alignment, size_t size)
stdlib.h (???): Allocating Aligned Memory Blocks.
void * alloca (size_t size)
stdlib.h (GNU): Automatic Storage with Variable Size.
stdlib.h (BSD): Automatic Storage with Variable Size.
int alphasort (const struct dirent **a, const struct dirent **b)
dirent.h (BSD): Scanning the Content of a Directory.
dirent.h (SVID): Scanning the Content of a Directory.
int alphasort64 (const struct dirent64 **a, const struct dirent **b)
dirent.h (GNU): Scanning the Content of a Directory.
uint32_t arc4random (void)
stdlib.h (BSD): High Quality Random Number Functions.
void arc4random_buf (void *buffer, size_t length)
stdlib.h (BSD): High Quality Random Number Functions.
uint32_t arc4random_uniform (uint32_t upper_bound)
stdlib.h (BSD): High Quality Random Number Functions.
struct argp
argp.h (GNU): Specifying Argp Parsers.
struct argp_child
argp.h (GNU): Combining Multiple Argp Parsers.
error_t argp_err_exit_status
argp.h (GNU): Argp Global Variables.
void argp_error (const struct argp_state *state, const char *fmt, …)
argp.h (GNU): Functions For Use in Argp Parsers.
void argp_failure (const struct argp_state *state, int status, int errnum, const char *fmt, …)
argp.h (GNU): Functions For Use in Argp Parsers.
void argp_help (const struct argp *argp, FILE *stream, unsigned flags, char *name)
argp.h (GNU): The argp_help
Function.
struct argp_option
argp.h (GNU): Specifying Options in an Argp Parser.
error_t argp_parse (const struct argp *argp, int argc, char **argv, unsigned flags, int *arg_index, void *input)
argp.h (GNU): Parsing Program Options with Argp.
const char * argp_program_bug_address
argp.h (GNU): Argp Global Variables.
const char * argp_program_version
argp.h (GNU): Argp Global Variables.
argp_program_version_hook
argp.h (GNU): Argp Global Variables.
struct argp_state
argp.h (GNU): Argp Parsing State.
void argp_state_help (const struct argp_state *state, FILE *stream, unsigned flags)
argp.h (GNU): Functions For Use in Argp Parsers.
void argp_usage (const struct argp_state *state)
argp.h (GNU): Functions For Use in Argp Parsers.
error_t argz_add (char **argz, size_t *argz_len, const char *str)
argz.h (GNU): Argz Functions.
error_t argz_add_sep (char **argz, size_t *argz_len, const char *str, int delim)
argz.h (GNU): Argz Functions.
error_t argz_append (char **argz, size_t *argz_len, const char *buf, size_t buf_len)
argz.h (GNU): Argz Functions.
size_t argz_count (const char *argz, size_t argz_len)
argz.h (GNU): Argz Functions.
error_t argz_create (char *const argv[], char **argz, size_t *argz_len)
argz.h (GNU): Argz Functions.
error_t argz_create_sep (const char *string, int sep, char **argz, size_t *argz_len)
argz.h (GNU): Argz Functions.
void argz_delete (char **argz, size_t *argz_len, char *entry)
argz.h (GNU): Argz Functions.
void argz_extract (const char *argz, size_t argz_len, char **argv)
argz.h (GNU): Argz Functions.
error_t argz_insert (char **argz, size_t *argz_len, char *before, const char *entry)
argz.h (GNU): Argz Functions.
char * argz_next (const char *argz, size_t argz_len, const char *entry)
argz.h (GNU): Argz Functions.
error_t argz_replace (char **argz, size_t *argz_len, const char *str, const char *with, unsigned *replace_count)
argz.h (GNU): Argz Functions.
void argz_stringify (char *argz, size_t len, int sep)
argz.h (GNU): Argz Functions.
char * asctime (const struct tm *brokentime)
time.h (ISO): Formatting Calendar Time.
char * asctime_r (const struct tm *brokentime, char *buffer)
time.h (POSIX.1c): Formatting Calendar Time.
double asin (double x)
math.h (ISO): Inverse Trigonometric Functions.
float asinf (float x)
math.h (ISO): Inverse Trigonometric Functions.
_FloatN asinfN (_FloatN x)
math.h (TS 18661-3:2015): Inverse Trigonometric Functions.
_FloatNx asinfNx (_FloatNx x)
math.h (TS 18661-3:2015): Inverse Trigonometric Functions.
double asinh (double x)
math.h (ISO): Hyperbolic Functions.
float asinhf (float x)
math.h (ISO): Hyperbolic Functions.
_FloatN asinhfN (_FloatN x)
math.h (TS 18661-3:2015): Hyperbolic Functions.
_FloatNx asinhfNx (_FloatNx x)
math.h (TS 18661-3:2015): Hyperbolic Functions.
long double asinhl (long double x)
math.h (ISO): Hyperbolic Functions.
long double asinl (long double x)
math.h (ISO): Inverse Trigonometric Functions.
int asprintf (char **ptr, const char *template, …)
stdio.h (GNU): Dynamically Allocating Formatted Output.
void assert (int expression)
assert.h (ISO): Explicitly Checking Internal Consistency.
void assert_perror (int errnum)
assert.h (GNU): Explicitly Checking Internal Consistency.
double atan (double x)
math.h (ISO): Inverse Trigonometric Functions.
double atan2 (double y, double x)
math.h (ISO): Inverse Trigonometric Functions.
float atan2f (float y, float x)
math.h (ISO): Inverse Trigonometric Functions.
_FloatN atan2fN (_FloatN y, _FloatN x)
math.h (TS 18661-3:2015): Inverse Trigonometric Functions.
_FloatNx atan2fNx (_FloatNx y, _FloatNx x)
math.h (TS 18661-3:2015): Inverse Trigonometric Functions.
long double atan2l (long double y, long double x)
math.h (ISO): Inverse Trigonometric Functions.
float atanf (float x)
math.h (ISO): Inverse Trigonometric Functions.
_FloatN atanfN (_FloatN x)
math.h (TS 18661-3:2015): Inverse Trigonometric Functions.
_FloatNx atanfNx (_FloatNx x)
math.h (TS 18661-3:2015): Inverse Trigonometric Functions.
double atanh (double x)
math.h (ISO): Hyperbolic Functions.
float atanhf (float x)
math.h (ISO): Hyperbolic Functions.
_FloatN atanhfN (_FloatN x)
math.h (TS 18661-3:2015): Hyperbolic Functions.
_FloatNx atanhfNx (_FloatNx x)
math.h (TS 18661-3:2015): Hyperbolic Functions.
long double atanhl (long double x)
math.h (ISO): Hyperbolic Functions.
long double atanl (long double x)
math.h (ISO): Inverse Trigonometric Functions.
int atexit (void (*function) (void))
stdlib.h (ISO): Cleanups on Exit.
double atof (const char *string)
stdlib.h (ISO): Parsing of Floats.
int atoi (const char *string)
stdlib.h (ISO): Parsing of Integers.
long int atol (const char *string)
stdlib.h (ISO): Parsing of Integers.
long long int atoll (const char *string)
stdlib.h (ISO): Parsing of Integers.
int backtrace (void **buffer, int size)
execinfo.h (GNU): Backtraces.
char ** backtrace_symbols (void *const *buffer, int size)
execinfo.h (GNU): Backtraces.
void backtrace_symbols_fd (void *const *buffer, int size, int fd)
execinfo.h (GNU): Backtraces.
char * basename (char *path)
libgen.h (XPG): Finding Tokens in a String.
char * basename (const char *filename)
string.h (GNU): Finding Tokens in a String.
int bcmp (const void *a1, const void *a2, size_t size)
string.h (BSD): String/Array Comparison.
void bcopy (const void *from, void *to, size_t size)
string.h (BSD): Copying Strings and Arrays.
int bind (int socket, struct sockaddr *addr, socklen_t length)
sys/socket.h (BSD): Setting the Address of a Socket.
char * bind_textdomain_codeset (const char *domainname, const char *codeset)
libintl.h (GNU): How to specify the output character set gettext
uses.
char * bindtextdomain (const char *domainname, const char *dirname)
libintl.h (GNU): How to determine which catalog to be used.
blkcnt64_t
sys/types.h (Unix98): The meaning of the File Attributes.
blkcnt_t
sys/types.h (Unix98): The meaning of the File Attributes.
int brk (void *addr)
unistd.h (BSD): Resizing the Data Segment.
void * bsearch (const void *key, const void *array, size_t count, size_t size, comparison_fn_t compare)
stdlib.h (ISO): Array Search Function.
wint_t btowc (int c)
wchar.h (ISO): Converting Single Characters.
void bzero (void *block, size_t size)
string.h (BSD): Copying Strings and Arrays.
double cabs (complex double z)
complex.h (ISO): Absolute Value.
float cabsf (complex float z)
complex.h (ISO): Absolute Value.
_FloatN cabsfN (complex _FloatN z)
complex.h (TS 18661-3:2015): Absolute Value.
_FloatNx cabsfNx (complex _FloatNx z)
complex.h (TS 18661-3:2015): Absolute Value.
long double cabsl (complex long double z)
complex.h (ISO): Absolute Value.
complex double cacos (complex double z)
complex.h (ISO): Inverse Trigonometric Functions.
complex float cacosf (complex float z)
complex.h (ISO): Inverse Trigonometric Functions.
complex _FloatN cacosfN (complex _FloatN z)
complex.h (TS 18661-3:2015): Inverse Trigonometric Functions.
complex _FloatNx cacosfNx (complex _FloatNx z)
complex.h (TS 18661-3:2015): Inverse Trigonometric Functions.
complex double cacosh (complex double z)
complex.h (ISO): Hyperbolic Functions.
complex float cacoshf (complex float z)
complex.h (ISO): Hyperbolic Functions.
complex _FloatN cacoshfN (complex _FloatN z)
complex.h (TS 18661-3:2015): Hyperbolic Functions.
complex _FloatNx cacoshfNx (complex _FloatNx z)
complex.h (TS 18661-3:2015): Hyperbolic Functions.
complex long double cacoshl (complex long double z)
complex.h (ISO): Hyperbolic Functions.
complex long double cacosl (complex long double z)
complex.h (ISO): Inverse Trigonometric Functions.
void call_once (once_flag *flag, void (*func) (void))
threads.h (C11): Call Once.
void * calloc (size_t count, size_t eltsize)
malloc.h (ISO): Allocating Cleared Space.
stdlib.h (ISO): Allocating Cleared Space.
int canonicalize (double *cx, const double *x)
math.h (ISO): Setting and modifying single bits of FP values.
char * canonicalize_file_name (const char *name)
stdlib.h (GNU): Symbolic Links.
int canonicalizef (float *cx, const float *x)
math.h (ISO): Setting and modifying single bits of FP values.
int canonicalizefN (_FloatN *cx, const _FloatN *x)
math.h (TS 18661-3:2015): Setting and modifying single bits of FP values.
int canonicalizefNx (_FloatNx *cx, const _FloatNx *x)
math.h (TS 18661-3:2015): Setting and modifying single bits of FP values.
int canonicalizel (long double *cx, const long double *x)
math.h (ISO): Setting and modifying single bits of FP values.
double carg (complex double z)
complex.h (ISO): Projections, Conjugates, and Decomposing of Complex Numbers.
float cargf (complex float z)
complex.h (ISO): Projections, Conjugates, and Decomposing of Complex Numbers.
_FloatN cargfN (complex _FloatN z)
complex.h (TS 18661-3:2015): Projections, Conjugates, and Decomposing of Complex Numbers.
_FloatNx cargfNx (complex _FloatNx z)
complex.h (TS 18661-3:2015): Projections, Conjugates, and Decomposing of Complex Numbers.
long double cargl (complex long double z)
complex.h (ISO): Projections, Conjugates, and Decomposing of Complex Numbers.
complex double casin (complex double z)
complex.h (ISO): Inverse Trigonometric Functions.
complex float casinf (complex float z)
complex.h (ISO): Inverse Trigonometric Functions.
complex _FloatN casinfN (complex _FloatN z)
complex.h (TS 18661-3:2015): Inverse Trigonometric Functions.
complex _FloatNx casinfNx (complex _FloatNx z)
complex.h (TS 18661-3:2015): Inverse Trigonometric Functions.
complex double casinh (complex double z)
complex.h (ISO): Hyperbolic Functions.
complex float casinhf (complex float z)
complex.h (ISO): Hyperbolic Functions.
complex _FloatN casinhfN (complex _FloatN z)
complex.h (TS 18661-3:2015): Hyperbolic Functions.
complex _FloatNx casinhfNx (complex _FloatNx z)
complex.h (TS 18661-3:2015): Hyperbolic Functions.
complex long double casinhl (complex long double z)
complex.h (ISO): Hyperbolic Functions.
complex long double casinl (complex long double z)
complex.h (ISO): Inverse Trigonometric Functions.
complex double catan (complex double z)
complex.h (ISO): Inverse Trigonometric Functions.
complex float catanf (complex float z)
complex.h (ISO): Inverse Trigonometric Functions.
complex _FloatN catanfN (complex _FloatN z)
complex.h (TS 18661-3:2015): Inverse Trigonometric Functions.
complex _FloatNx catanfNx (complex _FloatNx z)
complex.h (TS 18661-3:2015): Inverse Trigonometric Functions.
complex double catanh (complex double z)
complex.h (ISO): Hyperbolic Functions.
complex float catanhf (complex float z)
complex.h (ISO): Hyperbolic Functions.
complex _FloatN catanhfN (complex _FloatN z)
complex.h (TS 18661-3:2015): Hyperbolic Functions.
complex _FloatNx catanhfNx (complex _FloatNx z)
complex.h (TS 18661-3:2015): Hyperbolic Functions.
complex long double catanhl (complex long double z)
complex.h (ISO): Hyperbolic Functions.
complex long double catanl (complex long double z)
complex.h (ISO): Inverse Trigonometric Functions.
nl_catd catopen (const char *cat_name, int flag)
nl_types.h (X/Open): The catgets
function family.
double cbrt (double x)
math.h (BSD): Exponentiation and Logarithms.
float cbrtf (float x)
math.h (BSD): Exponentiation and Logarithms.
_FloatN cbrtfN (_FloatN x)
math.h (TS 18661-3:2015): Exponentiation and Logarithms.
_FloatNx cbrtfNx (_FloatNx x)
math.h (TS 18661-3:2015): Exponentiation and Logarithms.
long double cbrtl (long double x)
math.h (BSD): Exponentiation and Logarithms.
cc_t
termios.h (POSIX.1): Terminal Mode Data Types.
complex double ccos (complex double z)
complex.h (ISO): Trigonometric Functions.
complex float ccosf (complex float z)
complex.h (ISO): Trigonometric Functions.
complex _FloatN ccosfN (complex _FloatN z)
complex.h (TS 18661-3:2015): Trigonometric Functions.
complex _FloatNx ccosfNx (complex _FloatNx z)
complex.h (TS 18661-3:2015): Trigonometric Functions.
complex double ccosh (complex double z)
complex.h (ISO): Hyperbolic Functions.
complex float ccoshf (complex float z)
complex.h (ISO): Hyperbolic Functions.
complex _FloatN ccoshfN (complex _FloatN z)
complex.h (TS 18661-3:2015): Hyperbolic Functions.
complex _FloatNx ccoshfNx (complex _FloatNx z)
complex.h (TS 18661-3:2015): Hyperbolic Functions.
complex long double ccoshl (complex long double z)
complex.h (ISO): Hyperbolic Functions.
complex long double ccosl (complex long double z)
complex.h (ISO): Trigonometric Functions.
double ceil (double x)
math.h (ISO): Rounding Functions.
float ceilf (float x)
math.h (ISO): Rounding Functions.
_FloatN ceilfN (_FloatN x)
math.h (TS 18661-3:2015): Rounding Functions.
_FloatNx ceilfNx (_FloatNx x)
math.h (TS 18661-3:2015): Rounding Functions.
long double ceill (long double x)
math.h (ISO): Rounding Functions.
complex double cexp (complex double z)
complex.h (ISO): Exponentiation and Logarithms.
complex float cexpf (complex float z)
complex.h (ISO): Exponentiation and Logarithms.
complex _FloatN cexpfN (complex _FloatN z)
complex.h (TS 18661-3:2015): Exponentiation and Logarithms.
complex _FloatNx cexpfNx (complex _FloatNx z)
complex.h (TS 18661-3:2015): Exponentiation and Logarithms.
complex long double cexpl (complex long double z)
complex.h (ISO): Exponentiation and Logarithms.
speed_t cfgetispeed (const struct termios *termios-p)
termios.h (POSIX.1): Line Speed.
speed_t cfgetospeed (const struct termios *termios-p)
termios.h (POSIX.1): Line Speed.
void cfmakeraw (struct termios *termios-p)
termios.h (BSD): Noncanonical Input.
int cfsetispeed (struct termios *termios-p, speed_t speed)
termios.h (POSIX.1): Line Speed.
int cfsetospeed (struct termios *termios-p, speed_t speed)
termios.h (POSIX.1): Line Speed.
int cfsetspeed (struct termios *termios-p, speed_t speed)
termios.h (BSD): Line Speed.
int chdir (const char *filename)
unistd.h (POSIX.1): Working Directory.
int chmod (const char *filename, mode_t mode)
sys/stat.h (POSIX.1): Assigning File Permissions.
int chown (const char *filename, uid_t owner, gid_t group)
unistd.h (POSIX.1): File Owner.
double cimag (complex double z)
complex.h (ISO): Projections, Conjugates, and Decomposing of Complex Numbers.
float cimagf (complex float z)
complex.h (ISO): Projections, Conjugates, and Decomposing of Complex Numbers.
_FloatN cimagfN (complex _FloatN z)
complex.h (TS 18661-3:2015): Projections, Conjugates, and Decomposing of Complex Numbers.
_FloatNx cimagfNx (complex _FloatNx z)
complex.h (TS 18661-3:2015): Projections, Conjugates, and Decomposing of Complex Numbers.
long double cimagl (complex long double z)
complex.h (ISO): Projections, Conjugates, and Decomposing of Complex Numbers.
int clearenv (void)
stdlib.h (GNU): Environment Access.
void clearerr (FILE *stream)
stdio.h (ISO): Recovering from errors.
void clearerr_unlocked (FILE *stream)
stdio.h (GNU): Recovering from errors.
clock_t clock (void)
time.h (ISO): CPU Time Inquiry.
int clock_getres (clockid_t clock, struct timespec *res)
time.h (POSIX.1): Getting the Time.
int clock_gettime (clockid_t clock, struct timespec *ts)
time.h (POSIX.1): Getting the Time.
int clock_settime (clockid_t clock, const struct timespec *ts)
time.h (POSIX): Setting and Adjusting the Time.
clock_t
time.h (ISO): Time Types.
clockid_t
time.h (POSIX.1): Getting the Time.
complex double clog (complex double z)
complex.h (ISO): Exponentiation and Logarithms.
complex double clog10 (complex double z)
complex.h (GNU): Exponentiation and Logarithms.
complex float clog10f (complex float z)
complex.h (GNU): Exponentiation and Logarithms.
complex _FloatN clog10fN (complex _FloatN z)
complex.h (GNU): Exponentiation and Logarithms.
complex _FloatNx clog10fNx (complex _FloatNx z)
complex.h (GNU): Exponentiation and Logarithms.
complex long double clog10l (complex long double z)
complex.h (GNU): Exponentiation and Logarithms.
complex float clogf (complex float z)
complex.h (ISO): Exponentiation and Logarithms.
complex _FloatN clogfN (complex _FloatN z)
complex.h (TS 18661-3:2015): Exponentiation and Logarithms.
complex _FloatNx clogfNx (complex _FloatNx z)
complex.h (TS 18661-3:2015): Exponentiation and Logarithms.
complex long double clogl (complex long double z)
complex.h (ISO): Exponentiation and Logarithms.
int close (int filedes)
unistd.h (POSIX.1): Opening and Closing Files.
int close_range (unsigned int lowfd, unsigned int maxfd, int flags)
unistd.h (Linux): Opening and Closing Files.
int closedir (DIR *dirstream)
dirent.h (POSIX.1): Reading and Closing a Directory Stream.
void closefrom (int lowfd)
unistd.h (GNU): Opening and Closing Files.
void closelog (void)
syslog.h (BSD): closelog.
int cnd_broadcast (cnd_t *cond)
threads.h (C11): Condition Variables.
void cnd_destroy (cnd_t *cond)
threads.h (C11): Condition Variables.
int cnd_init (cnd_t *cond)
threads.h (C11): Condition Variables.
int cnd_signal (cnd_t *cond)
threads.h (C11): Condition Variables.
cnd_t
threads.h (C11): Condition Variables.
int cnd_timedwait (cnd_t *restrict cond, mtx_t *restrict mutex, const struct timespec *restrict time_point)
threads.h (C11): Condition Variables.
int cnd_wait (cnd_t *cond, mtx_t *mutex)
threads.h (C11): Condition Variables.
size_t confstr (int parameter, char *buf, size_t len)
unistd.h (POSIX.2): String-Valued Parameters.
complex double conj (complex double z)
complex.h (ISO): Projections, Conjugates, and Decomposing of Complex Numbers.
complex float conjf (complex float z)
complex.h (ISO): Projections, Conjugates, and Decomposing of Complex Numbers.
complex _FloatN conjfN (complex _FloatN z)
complex.h (TS 18661-3:2015): Projections, Conjugates, and Decomposing of Complex Numbers.
complex _FloatNx conjfNx (complex _FloatNx z)
complex.h (TS 18661-3:2015): Projections, Conjugates, and Decomposing of Complex Numbers.
complex long double conjl (complex long double z)
complex.h (ISO): Projections, Conjugates, and Decomposing of Complex Numbers.
int connect (int socket, struct sockaddr *addr, socklen_t length)
sys/socket.h (BSD): Making a Connection.
cookie_close_function_t
stdio.h (GNU): Custom Stream Hook Functions.
cookie_io_functions_t
stdio.h (GNU): Custom Streams and Cookies.
cookie_read_function_t
stdio.h (GNU): Custom Stream Hook Functions.
cookie_seek_function_t
stdio.h (GNU): Custom Stream Hook Functions.
cookie_write_function_t
stdio.h (GNU): Custom Stream Hook Functions.
ssize_t copy_file_range (int inputfd, off64_t *inputpos, int outputfd, off64_t *outputpos, ssize_t length, unsigned int flags)
unistd.h (GNU): Copying data between two files.
double copysign (double x, double y)
math.h (ISO): Setting and modifying single bits of FP values.
float copysignf (float x, float y)
math.h (ISO): Setting and modifying single bits of FP values.
_FloatN copysignfN (_FloatN x, _FloatN y)
math.h (TS 18661-3:2015): Setting and modifying single bits of FP values.
_FloatNx copysignfNx (_FloatNx x, _FloatNx y)
math.h (TS 18661-3:2015): Setting and modifying single bits of FP values.
long double copysignl (long double x, long double y)
math.h (ISO): Setting and modifying single bits of FP values.
double cos (double x)
math.h (ISO): Trigonometric Functions.
float cosf (float x)
math.h (ISO): Trigonometric Functions.
_FloatN cosfN (_FloatN x)
math.h (TS 18661-3:2015): Trigonometric Functions.
_FloatNx cosfNx (_FloatNx x)
math.h (TS 18661-3:2015): Trigonometric Functions.
double cosh (double x)
math.h (ISO): Hyperbolic Functions.
float coshf (float x)
math.h (ISO): Hyperbolic Functions.
_FloatN coshfN (_FloatN x)
math.h (TS 18661-3:2015): Hyperbolic Functions.
_FloatNx coshfNx (_FloatNx x)
math.h (TS 18661-3:2015): Hyperbolic Functions.
long double coshl (long double x)
math.h (ISO): Hyperbolic Functions.
long double cosl (long double x)
math.h (ISO): Trigonometric Functions.
complex double cpow (complex double base, complex double power)
complex.h (ISO): Exponentiation and Logarithms.
complex float cpowf (complex float base, complex float power)
complex.h (ISO): Exponentiation and Logarithms.
complex _FloatN cpowfN (complex _FloatN base, complex _FloatN power)
complex.h (TS 18661-3:2015): Exponentiation and Logarithms.
complex _FloatNx cpowfNx (complex _FloatNx base, complex _FloatNx power)
complex.h (TS 18661-3:2015): Exponentiation and Logarithms.
complex long double cpowl (complex long double base, complex long double power)
complex.h (ISO): Exponentiation and Logarithms.
complex double cproj (complex double z)
complex.h (ISO): Projections, Conjugates, and Decomposing of Complex Numbers.
complex float cprojf (complex float z)
complex.h (ISO): Projections, Conjugates, and Decomposing of Complex Numbers.
complex _FloatN cprojfN (complex _FloatN z)
complex.h (TS 18661-3:2015): Projections, Conjugates, and Decomposing of Complex Numbers.
complex _FloatNx cprojfNx (complex _FloatNx z)
complex.h (TS 18661-3:2015): Projections, Conjugates, and Decomposing of Complex Numbers.
complex long double cprojl (complex long double z)
complex.h (ISO): Projections, Conjugates, and Decomposing of Complex Numbers.
cpu_set_t
sched.h (GNU): Limiting execution to certain CPUs.
double creal (complex double z)
complex.h (ISO): Projections, Conjugates, and Decomposing of Complex Numbers.
float crealf (complex float z)
complex.h (ISO): Projections, Conjugates, and Decomposing of Complex Numbers.
_FloatN crealfN (complex _FloatN z)
complex.h (TS 18661-3:2015): Projections, Conjugates, and Decomposing of Complex Numbers.
_FloatNx crealfNx (complex _FloatNx z)
complex.h (TS 18661-3:2015): Projections, Conjugates, and Decomposing of Complex Numbers.
long double creall (complex long double z)
complex.h (ISO): Projections, Conjugates, and Decomposing of Complex Numbers.
int creat (const char *filename, mode_t mode)
fcntl.h (POSIX.1): Opening and Closing Files.
int creat64 (const char *filename, mode_t mode)
fcntl.h (Unix98): Opening and Closing Files.
char * crypt (const char *phrase, const char *salt)
unistd.h (X/Open): Passphrase Storage.
crypt.h (GNU): Passphrase Storage.
char * crypt_r (const char *phrase, const char *salt, struct crypt_data *data)
crypt.h (GNU): Passphrase Storage.
complex double csin (complex double z)
complex.h (ISO): Trigonometric Functions.
complex float csinf (complex float z)
complex.h (ISO): Trigonometric Functions.
complex _FloatN csinfN (complex _FloatN z)
complex.h (TS 18661-3:2015): Trigonometric Functions.
complex _FloatNx csinfNx (complex _FloatNx z)
complex.h (TS 18661-3:2015): Trigonometric Functions.
complex double csinh (complex double z)
complex.h (ISO): Hyperbolic Functions.
complex float csinhf (complex float z)
complex.h (ISO): Hyperbolic Functions.
complex _FloatN csinhfN (complex _FloatN z)
complex.h (TS 18661-3:2015): Hyperbolic Functions.
complex _FloatNx csinhfNx (complex _FloatNx z)
complex.h (TS 18661-3:2015): Hyperbolic Functions.
complex long double csinhl (complex long double z)
complex.h (ISO): Hyperbolic Functions.
complex long double csinl (complex long double z)
complex.h (ISO): Trigonometric Functions.
complex double csqrt (complex double z)
complex.h (ISO): Exponentiation and Logarithms.
complex float csqrtf (complex float z)
complex.h (ISO): Exponentiation and Logarithms.
complex _FloatN csqrtfN (_FloatN z)
complex.h (TS 18661-3:2015): Exponentiation and Logarithms.
complex _FloatNx csqrtfNx (complex _FloatNx z)
complex.h (TS 18661-3:2015): Exponentiation and Logarithms.
complex long double csqrtl (complex long double z)
complex.h (ISO): Exponentiation and Logarithms.
complex double ctan (complex double z)
complex.h (ISO): Trigonometric Functions.
complex float ctanf (complex float z)
complex.h (ISO): Trigonometric Functions.
complex _FloatN ctanfN (complex _FloatN z)
complex.h (TS 18661-3:2015): Trigonometric Functions.
complex _FloatNx ctanfNx (complex _FloatNx z)
complex.h (TS 18661-3:2015): Trigonometric Functions.
complex double ctanh (complex double z)
complex.h (ISO): Hyperbolic Functions.
complex float ctanhf (complex float z)
complex.h (ISO): Hyperbolic Functions.
complex _FloatN ctanhfN (complex _FloatN z)
complex.h (TS 18661-3:2015): Hyperbolic Functions.
complex _FloatNx ctanhfNx (complex _FloatNx z)
complex.h (TS 18661-3:2015): Hyperbolic Functions.
complex long double ctanhl (complex long double z)
complex.h (ISO): Hyperbolic Functions.
complex long double ctanl (complex long double z)
complex.h (ISO): Trigonometric Functions.
char * ctermid (char *string)
stdio.h (POSIX.1): Identifying the Controlling Terminal.
char * ctime (const time_t *time)
time.h (ISO): Formatting Calendar Time.
char * ctime_r (const time_t *time, char *buffer)
time.h (POSIX.1c): Formatting Calendar Time.
char * cuserid (char *string)
stdio.h (POSIX.1): Identifying Who Logged In.
double daddl (long double x, long double y)
math.h (TS 18661-1:2014): Miscellaneous FP arithmetic functions.
int daylight
time.h (SVID): Functions and Variables for Time Zones.
char * dcgettext (const char *domainname, const char *msgid, int category)
libintl.h (GNU): What has to be done to translate a message?.
char * dcngettext (const char *domain, const char *msgid1, const char *msgid2, unsigned long int n, int category)
libintl.h (GNU): Additional functions for more complicated situations.
double ddivl (long double x, long double y)
math.h (TS 18661-1:2014): Miscellaneous FP arithmetic functions.
dev_t
sys/types.h (POSIX.1): The meaning of the File Attributes.
double dfmal (long double x, long double y, long double z)
math.h (TS 18661-1:2014): Miscellaneous FP arithmetic functions.
char * dgettext (const char *domainname, const char *msgid)
libintl.h (GNU): What has to be done to translate a message?.
double difftime (time_t end, time_t begin)
time.h (ISO): Calculating Elapsed Time.
struct dirent
dirent.h (POSIX.1): Format of a Directory Entry.
int dirfd (DIR *dirstream)
dirent.h (GNU): Opening a Directory Stream.
char * dirname (char *path)
libgen.h (XPG): Finding Tokens in a String.
div_t div (int numerator, int denominator)
stdlib.h (ISO): Integer Division.
div_t
stdlib.h (ISO): Integer Division.
struct dl_find_object
dlfcn.h (GNU): Dynamic Linker Introspection.
double dmull (long double x, long double y)
math.h (TS 18661-1:2014): Miscellaneous FP arithmetic functions.
char * dngettext (const char *domain, const char *msgid1, const char *msgid2, unsigned long int n)
libintl.h (GNU): Additional functions for more complicated situations.
double drand48 (void)
stdlib.h (SVID): SVID Random Number Function.
int drand48_r (struct drand48_data *buffer, double *result)
stdlib.h (GNU): SVID Random Number Function.
double drem (double numerator, double denominator)
math.h (BSD): Remainder Functions.
float dremf (float numerator, float denominator)
math.h (BSD): Remainder Functions.
long double dreml (long double numerator, long double denominator)
math.h (BSD): Remainder Functions.
double dsqrtl (long double x)
math.h (TS 18661-1:2014): Miscellaneous FP arithmetic functions.
double dsubl (long double x, long double y)
math.h (TS 18661-1:2014): Miscellaneous FP arithmetic functions.
int dup (int old)
unistd.h (POSIX.1): Duplicating Descriptors.
int dup2 (int old, int new)
unistd.h (POSIX.1): Duplicating Descriptors.
char * ecvt (double value, int ndigit, int *decpt, int *neg)
stdlib.h (SVID): Old-fashioned System V number-to-string functions.
stdlib.h (Unix98): Old-fashioned System V number-to-string functions.
int ecvt_r (double value, int ndigit, int *decpt, int *neg, char *buf, size_t len)
stdlib.h (GNU): Old-fashioned System V number-to-string functions.
void endfsent (void)
fstab.h (BSD): The fstab file.
void endgrent (void)
grp.h (SVID): Scanning the List of All Groups.
grp.h (BSD): Scanning the List of All Groups.
void endhostent (void)
netdb.h (BSD): Host Names.
int endmntent (FILE *stream)
mntent.h (BSD): The mtab file.
void endnetent (void)
netdb.h (BSD): Networks Database.
void endnetgrent (void)
netdb.h (BSD): Looking up one Netgroup.
void endprotoent (void)
netdb.h (BSD): Protocols Database.
void endpwent (void)
pwd.h (SVID): Scanning the List of All Users.
pwd.h (BSD): Scanning the List of All Users.
void endservent (void)
netdb.h (BSD): The Services Database.
void endutent (void)
utmp.h (SVID): Manipulating the User Accounting Database.
void endutxent (void)
utmpx.h (XPG4.2): XPG User Accounting Database Functions.
char ** environ
unistd.h (POSIX.1): Environment Access.
error_t envz_add (char **envz, size_t *envz_len, const char *name, const char *value)
envz.h (GNU): Envz Functions.
char * envz_entry (const char *envz, size_t envz_len, const char *name)
envz.h (GNU): Envz Functions.
char * envz_get (const char *envz, size_t envz_len, const char *name)
envz.h (GNU): Envz Functions.
error_t envz_merge (char **envz, size_t *envz_len, const char *envz2, size_t envz2_len, int override)
envz.h (GNU): Envz Functions.
void envz_remove (char **envz, size_t *envz_len, const char *name)
envz.h (GNU): Envz Functions.
void envz_strip (char **envz, size_t *envz_len)
envz.h (GNU): Envz Functions.
double erand48 (unsigned short int xsubi[3])
stdlib.h (SVID): SVID Random Number Function.
int erand48_r (unsigned short int xsubi[3], struct drand48_data *buffer, double *result)
stdlib.h (GNU): SVID Random Number Function.
double erf (double x)
math.h (SVID): Special Functions.
double erfc (double x)
math.h (SVID): Special Functions.
float erfcf (float x)
math.h (SVID): Special Functions.
_FloatN erfcfN (_FloatN x)
math.h (TS 18661-3:2015): Special Functions.
_FloatNx erfcfNx (_FloatNx x)
math.h (TS 18661-3:2015): Special Functions.
long double erfcl (long double x)
math.h (SVID): Special Functions.
float erff (float x)
math.h (SVID): Special Functions.
_FloatN erffN (_FloatN x)
math.h (TS 18661-3:2015): Special Functions.
_FloatNx erffNx (_FloatNx x)
math.h (TS 18661-3:2015): Special Functions.
long double erfl (long double x)
math.h (SVID): Special Functions.
void err (int status, const char *format, …)
err.h (BSD): Error Messages.
volatile int errno
errno.h (ISO): Checking for Errors.
void error (int status, int errnum, const char *format, …)
error.h (GNU): Error Messages.
void error_at_line (int status, int errnum, const char *fname, unsigned int lineno, const char *format, …)
error.h (GNU): Error Messages.
unsigned int error_message_count
error.h (GNU): Error Messages.
int error_one_per_line
error.h (GNU): Error Messages.
void (*error_print_progname) (void)
error.h (GNU): Error Messages.
void errx (int status, const char *format, …)
err.h (BSD): Error Messages.
int execl (const char *filename, const char *arg0, …)
unistd.h (POSIX.1): Executing a File.
int execle (const char *filename, const char *arg0, …, char *const env[])
unistd.h (POSIX.1): Executing a File.
int execlp (const char *filename, const char *arg0, …)
unistd.h (POSIX.1): Executing a File.
int execv (const char *filename, char *const argv[])
unistd.h (POSIX.1): Executing a File.
int execve (const char *filename, char *const argv[], char *const env[])
unistd.h (POSIX.1): Executing a File.
int execvp (const char *filename, char *const argv[])
unistd.h (POSIX.1): Executing a File.
void exit (int status)
stdlib.h (ISO): Normal Termination.
struct exit_status
utmp.h (SVID): Manipulating the User Accounting Database.
double exp (double x)
math.h (ISO): Exponentiation and Logarithms.
double exp10 (double x)
math.h (ISO): Exponentiation and Logarithms.
float exp10f (float x)
math.h (ISO): Exponentiation and Logarithms.
_FloatN exp10fN (_FloatN x)
math.h (TS 18661-4:2015): Exponentiation and Logarithms.
_FloatNx exp10fNx (_FloatNx x)
math.h (TS 18661-4:2015): Exponentiation and Logarithms.
long double exp10l (long double x)
math.h (ISO): Exponentiation and Logarithms.
double exp2 (double x)
math.h (ISO): Exponentiation and Logarithms.
float exp2f (float x)
math.h (ISO): Exponentiation and Logarithms.
_FloatN exp2fN (_FloatN x)
math.h (TS 18661-3:2015): Exponentiation and Logarithms.
_FloatNx exp2fNx (_FloatNx x)
math.h (TS 18661-3:2015): Exponentiation and Logarithms.
long double exp2l (long double x)
math.h (ISO): Exponentiation and Logarithms.
float expf (float x)
math.h (ISO): Exponentiation and Logarithms.
_FloatN expfN (_FloatN x)
math.h (TS 18661-3:2015): Exponentiation and Logarithms.
_FloatNx expfNx (_FloatNx x)
math.h (TS 18661-3:2015): Exponentiation and Logarithms.
long double expl (long double x)
math.h (ISO): Exponentiation and Logarithms.
void explicit_bzero (void *block, size_t len)
string.h (BSD): Erasing Sensitive Data.
double expm1 (double x)
math.h (ISO): Exponentiation and Logarithms.
float expm1f (float x)
math.h (ISO): Exponentiation and Logarithms.
_FloatN expm1fN (_FloatN x)
math.h (TS 18661-3:2015): Exponentiation and Logarithms.
_FloatNx expm1fNx (_FloatNx x)
math.h (TS 18661-3:2015): Exponentiation and Logarithms.
long double expm1l (long double x)
math.h (ISO): Exponentiation and Logarithms.
_FloatM fMaddfN (_FloatN x, _FloatN y)
math.h (TS 18661-3:2015): Miscellaneous FP arithmetic functions.
_FloatM fMaddfNx (_FloatNx x, _FloatNx y)
math.h (TS 18661-3:2015): Miscellaneous FP arithmetic functions.
_FloatM fMdivfN (_FloatN x, _FloatN y)
math.h (TS 18661-3:2015): Miscellaneous FP arithmetic functions.
_FloatM fMdivfNx (_FloatNx x, _FloatNx y)
math.h (TS 18661-3:2015): Miscellaneous FP arithmetic functions.
_FloatM fMfmafN (_FloatN x, _FloatN y, _FloatN z)
math.h (TS 18661-3:2015): Miscellaneous FP arithmetic functions.
_FloatM fMfmafNx (_FloatNx x, _FloatNx y, _FloatNx z)
math.h (TS 18661-3:2015): Miscellaneous FP arithmetic functions.
_FloatM fMmulfN (_FloatN x, _FloatN y)
math.h (TS 18661-3:2015): Miscellaneous FP arithmetic functions.
_FloatM fMmulfNx (_FloatNx x, _FloatNx y)
math.h (TS 18661-3:2015): Miscellaneous FP arithmetic functions.
_FloatM fMsqrtfN (_FloatN x)
math.h (TS 18661-3:2015): Miscellaneous FP arithmetic functions.
_FloatM fMsqrtfNx (_FloatNx x)
math.h (TS 18661-3:2015): Miscellaneous FP arithmetic functions.
_FloatM fMsubfN (_FloatN x, _FloatN y)
math.h (TS 18661-3:2015): Miscellaneous FP arithmetic functions.
_FloatM fMsubfNx (_FloatNx x, _FloatNx y)
math.h (TS 18661-3:2015): Miscellaneous FP arithmetic functions.
_FloatMx fMxaddfN (_FloatN x, _FloatN y)
math.h (TS 18661-3:2015): Miscellaneous FP arithmetic functions.
_FloatMx fMxaddfNx (_FloatNx x, _FloatNx y)
math.h (TS 18661-3:2015): Miscellaneous FP arithmetic functions.
_FloatMx fMxdivfN (_FloatN x, _FloatN y)
math.h (TS 18661-3:2015): Miscellaneous FP arithmetic functions.
_FloatMx fMxdivfNx (_FloatNx x, _FloatNx y)
math.h (TS 18661-3:2015): Miscellaneous FP arithmetic functions.
_FloatMx fMxfmafN (_FloatN x, _FloatN y, _FloatN z)
math.h (TS 18661-3:2015): Miscellaneous FP arithmetic functions.
_FloatMx fMxfmafNx (_FloatNx x, _FloatNx y, _FloatNx z)
math.h (TS 18661-3:2015): Miscellaneous FP arithmetic functions.
_FloatMx fMxmulfN (_FloatN x, _FloatN y)
math.h (TS 18661-3:2015): Miscellaneous FP arithmetic functions.
_FloatMx fMxmulfNx (_FloatNx x, _FloatNx y)
math.h (TS 18661-3:2015): Miscellaneous FP arithmetic functions.
_FloatMx fMxsqrtfN (_FloatN x)
math.h (TS 18661-3:2015): Miscellaneous FP arithmetic functions.
_FloatMx fMxsqrtfNx (_FloatNx x)
math.h (TS 18661-3:2015): Miscellaneous FP arithmetic functions.
_FloatMx fMxsubfN (_FloatN x, _FloatN y)
math.h (TS 18661-3:2015): Miscellaneous FP arithmetic functions.
_FloatMx fMxsubfNx (_FloatNx x, _FloatNx y)
math.h (TS 18661-3:2015): Miscellaneous FP arithmetic functions.
double fabs (double number)
math.h (ISO): Absolute Value.
float fabsf (float number)
math.h (ISO): Absolute Value.
_FloatN fabsfN (_FloatN number)
math.h (TS 18661-3:2015): Absolute Value.
_FloatNx fabsfNx (_FloatNx number)
math.h (TS 18661-3:2015): Absolute Value.
long double fabsl (long double number)
math.h (ISO): Absolute Value.
float fadd (double x, double y)
math.h (TS 18661-1:2014): Miscellaneous FP arithmetic functions.
float faddl (long double x, long double y)
math.h (TS 18661-1:2014): Miscellaneous FP arithmetic functions.
int fchdir (int filedes)
unistd.h (XPG): Working Directory.
int fchmod (int filedes, mode_t mode)
sys/stat.h (BSD): Assigning File Permissions.
int fchown (int filedes, uid_t owner, gid_t group)
unistd.h (BSD): File Owner.
int fclose (FILE *stream)
stdio.h (ISO): Closing Streams.
int fcloseall (void)
stdio.h (GNU): Closing Streams.
int fcntl (int filedes, int command, …)
fcntl.h (POSIX.1): Control Operations on Files.
char * fcvt (double value, int ndigit, int *decpt, int *neg)
stdlib.h (SVID): Old-fashioned System V number-to-string functions.
stdlib.h (Unix98): Old-fashioned System V number-to-string functions.
int fcvt_r (double value, int ndigit, int *decpt, int *neg, char *buf, size_t len)
stdlib.h (SVID): Old-fashioned System V number-to-string functions.
stdlib.h (Unix98): Old-fashioned System V number-to-string functions.
fd_set
sys/types.h (BSD): Waiting for Input or Output.
int fdatasync (int fildes)
unistd.h (POSIX): Synchronizing I/O operations.
double fdim (double x, double y)
math.h (ISO): Miscellaneous FP arithmetic functions.
float fdimf (float x, float y)
math.h (ISO): Miscellaneous FP arithmetic functions.
_FloatN fdimfN (_FloatN x, _FloatN y)
math.h (TS 18661-3:2015): Miscellaneous FP arithmetic functions.
_FloatNx fdimfNx (_FloatNx x, _FloatNx y)
math.h (TS 18661-3:2015): Miscellaneous FP arithmetic functions.
long double fdiml (long double x, long double y)
math.h (ISO): Miscellaneous FP arithmetic functions.
float fdiv (double x, double y)
math.h (TS 18661-1:2014): Miscellaneous FP arithmetic functions.
float fdivl (long double x, long double y)
math.h (TS 18661-1:2014): Miscellaneous FP arithmetic functions.
FILE * fdopen (int filedes, const char *opentype)
stdio.h (POSIX.1): Descriptors and Streams.
DIR * fdopendir (int fd)
dirent.h (GNU): Opening a Directory Stream.
int feclearexcept (int excepts)
fenv.h (ISO): Examining the FPU status word.
int fedisableexcept (int excepts)
fenv.h (GNU): Floating-Point Control Functions.
int feenableexcept (int excepts)
fenv.h (GNU): Floating-Point Control Functions.
int fegetenv (fenv_t *envp)
fenv.h (ISO): Floating-Point Control Functions.
int fegetexcept (void)
fenv.h (GNU): Floating-Point Control Functions.
int fegetexceptflag (fexcept_t *flagp, int excepts)
fenv.h (ISO): Examining the FPU status word.
int fegetmode (femode_t *modep)
fenv.h (ISO): Floating-Point Control Functions.
int fegetround (void)
fenv.h (ISO): Rounding Modes.
int feholdexcept (fenv_t *envp)
fenv.h (ISO): Floating-Point Control Functions.
int feof (FILE *stream)
stdio.h (ISO): End-Of-File and Errors.
int feof_unlocked (FILE *stream)
stdio.h (GNU): End-Of-File and Errors.
int feraiseexcept (int excepts)
fenv.h (ISO): Examining the FPU status word.
int ferror (FILE *stream)
stdio.h (ISO): End-Of-File and Errors.
int ferror_unlocked (FILE *stream)
stdio.h (GNU): End-Of-File and Errors.
int fesetenv (const fenv_t *envp)
fenv.h (ISO): Floating-Point Control Functions.
int fesetexcept (int excepts)
fenv.h (ISO): Examining the FPU status word.
int fesetexceptflag (const fexcept_t *flagp, int excepts)
fenv.h (ISO): Examining the FPU status word.
int fesetmode (const femode_t *modep)
fenv.h (ISO): Floating-Point Control Functions.
int fesetround (int round)
fenv.h (ISO): Rounding Modes.
int fetestexcept (int excepts)
fenv.h (ISO): Examining the FPU status word.
int fetestexceptflag (const fexcept_t *flagp, int excepts)
fenv.h (ISO): Examining the FPU status word.
int feupdateenv (const fenv_t *envp)
fenv.h (ISO): Floating-Point Control Functions.
int fexecve (int fd, char *const argv[], char *const env[])
unistd.h (POSIX.1): Executing a File.
int fflush (FILE *stream)
stdio.h (ISO): Flushing Buffers.
int fflush_unlocked (FILE *stream)
stdio.h (POSIX): Flushing Buffers.
float ffma (double x, double y, double z)
math.h (TS 18661-1:2014): Miscellaneous FP arithmetic functions.
float ffmal (long double x, long double y, long double z)
math.h (TS 18661-1:2014): Miscellaneous FP arithmetic functions.
int fgetc (FILE *stream)
stdio.h (ISO): Character Input.
int fgetc_unlocked (FILE *stream)
stdio.h (POSIX): Character Input.
struct group * fgetgrent (FILE *stream)
grp.h (SVID): Scanning the List of All Groups.
int fgetgrent_r (FILE *stream, struct group *result_buf, char *buffer, size_t buflen, struct group **result)
grp.h (GNU): Scanning the List of All Groups.
int fgetpos (FILE *stream, fpos_t *position)
stdio.h (ISO): Portable File-Position Functions.
int fgetpos64 (FILE *stream, fpos64_t *position)
stdio.h (Unix98): Portable File-Position Functions.
struct passwd * fgetpwent (FILE *stream)
pwd.h (SVID): Scanning the List of All Users.
int fgetpwent_r (FILE *stream, struct passwd *result_buf, char *buffer, size_t buflen, struct passwd **result)
pwd.h (GNU): Scanning the List of All Users.
char * fgets (char *s, int count, FILE *stream)
stdio.h (ISO): Line-Oriented Input.
char * fgets_unlocked (char *s, int count, FILE *stream)
stdio.h (GNU): Line-Oriented Input.
wint_t fgetwc (FILE *stream)
wchar.h (ISO): Character Input.
wint_t fgetwc_unlocked (FILE *stream)
wchar.h (GNU): Character Input.
wchar_t * fgetws (wchar_t *ws, int count, FILE *stream)
wchar.h (ISO): Line-Oriented Input.
wchar_t * fgetws_unlocked (wchar_t *ws, int count, FILE *stream)
wchar.h (GNU): Line-Oriented Input.
int fileno (FILE *stream)
stdio.h (POSIX.1): Descriptors and Streams.
int fileno_unlocked (FILE *stream)
stdio.h (GNU): Descriptors and Streams.
int finite (double x)
math.h (BSD): Floating-Point Number Classification Functions.
int finitef (float x)
math.h (BSD): Floating-Point Number Classification Functions.
int finitel (long double x)
math.h (BSD): Floating-Point Number Classification Functions.
struct flock
fcntl.h (POSIX.1): File Locks.
void flockfile (FILE *stream)
stdio.h (POSIX): Streams and Threads.
double floor (double x)
math.h (ISO): Rounding Functions.
float floorf (float x)
math.h (ISO): Rounding Functions.
_FloatN floorfN (_FloatN x)
math.h (TS 18661-3:2015): Rounding Functions.
_FloatNx floorfNx (_FloatNx x)
math.h (TS 18661-3:2015): Rounding Functions.
long double floorl (long double x)
math.h (ISO): Rounding Functions.
double fma (double x, double y, double z)
math.h (ISO): Miscellaneous FP arithmetic functions.
float fmaf (float x, float y, float z)
math.h (ISO): Miscellaneous FP arithmetic functions.
_FloatN fmafN (_FloatN x, _FloatN y, _FloatN z)
math.h (TS 18661-3:2015): Miscellaneous FP arithmetic functions.
_FloatNx fmafNx (_FloatNx x, _FloatNx y, _FloatNx z)
math.h (TS 18661-3:2015): Miscellaneous FP arithmetic functions.
long double fmal (long double x, long double y, long double z)
math.h (ISO): Miscellaneous FP arithmetic functions.
double fmax (double x, double y)
math.h (ISO): Miscellaneous FP arithmetic functions.
float fmaxf (float x, float y)
math.h (ISO): Miscellaneous FP arithmetic functions.
_FloatN fmaxfN (_FloatN x, _FloatN y)
math.h (TS 18661-3:2015): Miscellaneous FP arithmetic functions.
_FloatNx fmaxfNx (_FloatNx x, _FloatNx y)
math.h (TS 18661-3:2015): Miscellaneous FP arithmetic functions.
double fmaximum (double x, double y)
math.h (C2X): Miscellaneous FP arithmetic functions.
double fmaximum_mag (double x, double y)
math.h (C2X): Miscellaneous FP arithmetic functions.
double fmaximum_mag_num (double x, double y)
math.h (C2X): Miscellaneous FP arithmetic functions.
float fmaximum_mag_numf (float x, float y)
math.h (C2X): Miscellaneous FP arithmetic functions.
_FloatN fmaximum_mag_numfN (_FloatN x, _FloatN y)
math.h (C2X): Miscellaneous FP arithmetic functions.
_FloatNx fmaximum_mag_numfNx (_FloatNx x, _FloatNx y)
math.h (C2X): Miscellaneous FP arithmetic functions.
long double fmaximum_mag_numl (long double x, long double y)
math.h (C2X): Miscellaneous FP arithmetic functions.
float fmaximum_magf (float x, float y)
math.h (C2X): Miscellaneous FP arithmetic functions.
_FloatN fmaximum_magfN (_FloatN x, _FloatN y)
math.h (C2X): Miscellaneous FP arithmetic functions.
_FloatNx fmaximum_magfNx (_FloatNx x, _FloatNx y)
math.h (C2X): Miscellaneous FP arithmetic functions.
long double fmaximum_magl (long double x, long double y)
math.h (C2X): Miscellaneous FP arithmetic functions.
double fmaximum_num (double x, double y)
math.h (C2X): Miscellaneous FP arithmetic functions.
float fmaximum_numf (float x, float y)
math.h (C2X): Miscellaneous FP arithmetic functions.
_FloatN fmaximum_numfN (_FloatN x, _FloatN y)
math.h (C2X): Miscellaneous FP arithmetic functions.
_FloatNx fmaximum_numfNx (_FloatNx x, _FloatNx y)
math.h (C2X): Miscellaneous FP arithmetic functions.
long double fmaximum_numl (long double x, long double y)
math.h (C2X): Miscellaneous FP arithmetic functions.
float fmaximumf (float x, float y)
math.h (C2X): Miscellaneous FP arithmetic functions.
_FloatN fmaximumfN (_FloatN x, _FloatN y)
math.h (C2X): Miscellaneous FP arithmetic functions.
_FloatNx fmaximumfNx (_FloatNx x, _FloatNx y)
math.h (C2X): Miscellaneous FP arithmetic functions.
long double fmaximuml (long double x, long double y)
math.h (C2X): Miscellaneous FP arithmetic functions.
long double fmaxl (long double x, long double y)
math.h (ISO): Miscellaneous FP arithmetic functions.
double fmaxmag (double x, double y)
math.h (ISO): Miscellaneous FP arithmetic functions.
float fmaxmagf (float x, float y)
math.h (ISO): Miscellaneous FP arithmetic functions.
_FloatN fmaxmagfN (_FloatN x, _FloatN y)
math.h (TS 18661-3:2015): Miscellaneous FP arithmetic functions.
_FloatNx fmaxmagfNx (_FloatNx x, _FloatNx y)
math.h (TS 18661-3:2015): Miscellaneous FP arithmetic functions.
long double fmaxmagl (long double x, long double y)
math.h (ISO): Miscellaneous FP arithmetic functions.
FILE * fmemopen (void *buf, size_t size, const char *opentype)
stdio.h (GNU): String Streams.
double fmin (double x, double y)
math.h (ISO): Miscellaneous FP arithmetic functions.
float fminf (float x, float y)
math.h (ISO): Miscellaneous FP arithmetic functions.
_FloatN fminfN (_FloatN x, _FloatN y)
math.h (TS 18661-3:2015): Miscellaneous FP arithmetic functions.
_FloatNx fminfNx (_FloatNx x, _FloatNx y)
math.h (TS 18661-3:2015): Miscellaneous FP arithmetic functions.
double fminimum (double x, double y)
math.h (C2X): Miscellaneous FP arithmetic functions.
double fminimum_mag (double x, double y)
math.h (C2X): Miscellaneous FP arithmetic functions.
double fminimum_mag_num (double x, double y)
math.h (C2X): Miscellaneous FP arithmetic functions.
float fminimum_mag_numf (float x, float y)
math.h (C2X): Miscellaneous FP arithmetic functions.
_FloatN fminimum_mag_numfN (_FloatN x, _FloatN y)
math.h (C2X): Miscellaneous FP arithmetic functions.
_FloatNx fminimum_mag_numfNx (_FloatNx x, _FloatNx y)
math.h (C2X): Miscellaneous FP arithmetic functions.
long double fminimum_mag_numl (long double x, long double y)
math.h (C2X): Miscellaneous FP arithmetic functions.
float fminimum_magf (float x, float y)
math.h (C2X): Miscellaneous FP arithmetic functions.
_FloatN fminimum_magfN (_FloatN x, _FloatN y)
math.h (C2X): Miscellaneous FP arithmetic functions.
_FloatNx fminimum_magfNx (_FloatNx x, _FloatNx y)
math.h (C2X): Miscellaneous FP arithmetic functions.
long double fminimum_magl (long double x, long double y)
math.h (C2X): Miscellaneous FP arithmetic functions.
double fminimum_num (double x, double y)
math.h (C2X): Miscellaneous FP arithmetic functions.
float fminimum_numf (float x, float y)
math.h (C2X): Miscellaneous FP arithmetic functions.
_FloatN fminimum_numfN (_FloatN x, _FloatN y)
math.h (C2X): Miscellaneous FP arithmetic functions.
_FloatNx fminimum_numfNx (_FloatNx x, _FloatNx y)
math.h (C2X): Miscellaneous FP arithmetic functions.
long double fminimum_numl (long double x, long double y)
math.h (C2X): Miscellaneous FP arithmetic functions.
float fminimumf (float x, float y)
math.h (C2X): Miscellaneous FP arithmetic functions.
_FloatN fminimumfN (_FloatN x, _FloatN y)
math.h (C2X): Miscellaneous FP arithmetic functions.
_FloatNx fminimumfNx (_FloatNx x, _FloatNx y)
math.h (C2X): Miscellaneous FP arithmetic functions.
long double fminimuml (long double x, long double y)
math.h (C2X): Miscellaneous FP arithmetic functions.
long double fminl (long double x, long double y)
math.h (ISO): Miscellaneous FP arithmetic functions.
double fminmag (double x, double y)
math.h (ISO): Miscellaneous FP arithmetic functions.
float fminmagf (float x, float y)
math.h (ISO): Miscellaneous FP arithmetic functions.
_FloatN fminmagfN (_FloatN x, _FloatN y)
math.h (TS 18661-3:2015): Miscellaneous FP arithmetic functions.
_FloatNx fminmagfNx (_FloatNx x, _FloatNx y)
math.h (TS 18661-3:2015): Miscellaneous FP arithmetic functions.
long double fminmagl (long double x, long double y)
math.h (ISO): Miscellaneous FP arithmetic functions.
double fmod (double numerator, double denominator)
math.h (ISO): Remainder Functions.
float fmodf (float numerator, float denominator)
math.h (ISO): Remainder Functions.
_FloatN fmodfN (_FloatN numerator, _FloatN denominator)
math.h (TS 18661-3:2015): Remainder Functions.
_FloatNx fmodfNx (_FloatNx numerator, _FloatNx denominator)
math.h (TS 18661-3:2015): Remainder Functions.
long double fmodl (long double numerator, long double denominator)
math.h (ISO): Remainder Functions.
int fmtmsg (long int classification, const char *label, int severity, const char *text, const char *action, const char *tag)
fmtmsg.h (XPG): Printing Formatted Messages.
float fmul (double x, double y)
math.h (TS 18661-1:2014): Miscellaneous FP arithmetic functions.
float fmull (long double x, long double y)
math.h (TS 18661-1:2014): Miscellaneous FP arithmetic functions.
int fnmatch (const char *pattern, const char *string, int flags)
fnmatch.h (POSIX.2): Wildcard Matching.
FILE * fopen (const char *filename, const char *opentype)
stdio.h (ISO): Opening Streams.
FILE * fopen64 (const char *filename, const char *opentype)
stdio.h (Unix98): Opening Streams.
FILE * fopencookie (void *cookie, const char *opentype, cookie_io_functions_t io-functions)
stdio.h (GNU): Custom Streams and Cookies.
pid_t fork (void)
unistd.h (POSIX.1): Creating a Process.
int forkpty (int *amaster, char *name, const struct termios *termp, const struct winsize *winp)
pty.h (BSD): Opening a Pseudo-Terminal Pair.
long int fpathconf (int filedes, int parameter)
unistd.h (POSIX.1): Using pathconf
.
int fpclassify (float-type x)
math.h (ISO): Floating-Point Number Classification Functions.
fpos64_t
stdio.h (Unix98): Portable File-Position Functions.
fpos_t
stdio.h (ISO): Portable File-Position Functions.
int fprintf (FILE *stream, const char *template, …)
stdio.h (ISO): Formatted Output Functions.
int fputc (int c, FILE *stream)
stdio.h (ISO): Simple Output by Characters or Lines.
int fputc_unlocked (int c, FILE *stream)
stdio.h (POSIX): Simple Output by Characters or Lines.
int fputs (const char *s, FILE *stream)
stdio.h (ISO): Simple Output by Characters or Lines.
int fputs_unlocked (const char *s, FILE *stream)
stdio.h (GNU): Simple Output by Characters or Lines.
wint_t fputwc (wchar_t wc, FILE *stream)
wchar.h (ISO): Simple Output by Characters or Lines.
wint_t fputwc_unlocked (wchar_t wc, FILE *stream)
wchar.h (POSIX): Simple Output by Characters or Lines.
int fputws (const wchar_t *ws, FILE *stream)
wchar.h (ISO): Simple Output by Characters or Lines.
int fputws_unlocked (const wchar_t *ws, FILE *stream)
wchar.h (GNU): Simple Output by Characters or Lines.
size_t fread (void *data, size_t size, size_t count, FILE *stream)
stdio.h (ISO): Block Input/Output.
size_t fread_unlocked (void *data, size_t size, size_t count, FILE *stream)
stdio.h (GNU): Block Input/Output.
void free (void *ptr)
malloc.h (ISO): Freeing Memory Allocated with malloc
.
stdlib.h (ISO): Freeing Memory Allocated with malloc
.
FILE * freopen (const char *filename, const char *opentype, FILE *stream)
stdio.h (ISO): Opening Streams.
FILE * freopen64 (const char *filename, const char *opentype, FILE *stream)
stdio.h (Unix98): Opening Streams.
double frexp (double value, int *exponent)
math.h (ISO): Normalization Functions.
float frexpf (float value, int *exponent)
math.h (ISO): Normalization Functions.
_FloatN frexpfN (_FloatN value, int *exponent)
math.h (TS 18661-3:2015): Normalization Functions.
_FloatNx frexpfNx (_FloatNx value, int *exponent)
math.h (TS 18661-3:2015): Normalization Functions.
long double frexpl (long double value, int *exponent)
math.h (ISO): Normalization Functions.
intmax_t fromfp (double x, int round, unsigned int width)
math.h (ISO): Rounding Functions.
intmax_t fromfpf (float x, int round, unsigned int width)
math.h (ISO): Rounding Functions.
intmax_t fromfpfN (_FloatN x, int round, unsigned int width)
math.h (TS 18661-3:2015): Rounding Functions.
intmax_t fromfpfNx (_FloatNx x, int round, unsigned int width)
math.h (TS 18661-3:2015): Rounding Functions.
intmax_t fromfpl (long double x, int round, unsigned int width)
math.h (ISO): Rounding Functions.
intmax_t fromfpx (double x, int round, unsigned int width)
math.h (ISO): Rounding Functions.
intmax_t fromfpxf (float x, int round, unsigned int width)
math.h (ISO): Rounding Functions.
intmax_t fromfpxfN (_FloatN x, int round, unsigned int width)
math.h (TS 18661-3:2015): Rounding Functions.
intmax_t fromfpxfNx (_FloatNx x, int round, unsigned int width)
math.h (TS 18661-3:2015): Rounding Functions.
intmax_t fromfpxl (long double x, int round, unsigned int width)
math.h (ISO): Rounding Functions.
int fscanf (FILE *stream, const char *template, …)
stdio.h (ISO): Formatted Input Functions.
int fseek (FILE *stream, long int offset, int whence)
stdio.h (ISO): File Positioning.
int fseeko (FILE *stream, off_t offset, int whence)
stdio.h (Unix98): File Positioning.
int fseeko64 (FILE *stream, off64_t offset, int whence)
stdio.h (Unix98): File Positioning.
int fsetpos (FILE *stream, const fpos_t *position)
stdio.h (ISO): Portable File-Position Functions.
int fsetpos64 (FILE *stream, const fpos64_t *position)
stdio.h (Unix98): Portable File-Position Functions.
float fsqrt (double x)
math.h (TS 18661-1:2014): Miscellaneous FP arithmetic functions.
float fsqrtl (long double x)
math.h (TS 18661-1:2014): Miscellaneous FP arithmetic functions.
struct fstab
fstab.h (BSD): The fstab file.
int fstat (int filedes, struct stat *buf)
sys/stat.h (POSIX.1): Reading the Attributes of a File.
int fstat64 (int filedes, struct stat64 *buf)
sys/stat.h (Unix98): Reading the Attributes of a File.
float fsub (double x, double y)
math.h (TS 18661-1:2014): Miscellaneous FP arithmetic functions.
float fsubl (long double x, long double y)
math.h (TS 18661-1:2014): Miscellaneous FP arithmetic functions.
int fsync (int fildes)
unistd.h (POSIX): Synchronizing I/O operations.
long int ftell (FILE *stream)
stdio.h (ISO): File Positioning.
off_t ftello (FILE *stream)
stdio.h (Unix98): File Positioning.
off64_t ftello64 (FILE *stream)
stdio.h (Unix98): File Positioning.
int ftruncate (int fd, off_t length)
unistd.h (POSIX): File Size.
int ftruncate64 (int id, off64_t length)
unistd.h (Unix98): File Size.
int ftrylockfile (FILE *stream)
stdio.h (POSIX): Streams and Threads.
int ftw (const char *filename, __ftw_func_t func, int descriptors)
ftw.h (SVID): Working with Directory Trees.
int ftw64 (const char *filename, __ftw64_func_t func, int descriptors)
ftw.h (Unix98): Working with Directory Trees.
void funlockfile (FILE *stream)
stdio.h (POSIX): Streams and Threads.
int futimes (int fd, const struct timeval tvp[2])
sys/time.h (BSD): File Times.
int fwide (FILE *stream, int mode)
wchar.h (ISO): Streams in Internationalized Applications.
int fwprintf (FILE *stream, const wchar_t *template, …)
wchar.h (ISO): Formatted Output Functions.
size_t fwrite (const void *data, size_t size, size_t count, FILE *stream)
stdio.h (ISO): Block Input/Output.
size_t fwrite_unlocked (const void *data, size_t size, size_t count, FILE *stream)
stdio.h (GNU): Block Input/Output.
int fwscanf (FILE *stream, const wchar_t *template, …)
wchar.h (ISO): Formatted Input Functions.
double gamma (double x)
math.h (SVID): Special Functions.
float gammaf (float x)
math.h (SVID): Special Functions.
long double gammal (long double x)
math.h (SVID): Special Functions.
char * gcvt (double value, int ndigit, char *buf)
stdlib.h (SVID): Old-fashioned System V number-to-string functions.
stdlib.h (Unix98): Old-fashioned System V number-to-string functions.
long int get_avphys_pages (void)
sys/sysinfo.h (GNU): How to get information about the memory subsystem?.
char * get_current_dir_name (void)
unistd.h (GNU): Working Directory.
int get_nprocs (void)
sys/sysinfo.h (GNU): Learn about the processors available.
int get_nprocs_conf (void)
sys/sysinfo.h (GNU): Learn about the processors available.
long int get_phys_pages (void)
sys/sysinfo.h (GNU): How to get information about the memory subsystem?.
unsigned long int getauxval (unsigned long int type)
sys/auxv.h (???): Auxiliary Vector.
int getc (FILE *stream)
stdio.h (ISO): Character Input.
int getc_unlocked (FILE *stream)
stdio.h (POSIX): Character Input.
int getchar (void)
stdio.h (ISO): Character Input.
int getchar_unlocked (void)
stdio.h (POSIX): Character Input.
int getcontext (ucontext_t *ucp)
ucontext.h (SVID): Complete Context Control.
int getcpu (unsigned int *cpu, unsigned int *node)
<sched.h> (Linux): Limiting execution to certain CPUs.
char * getcwd (char *buffer, size_t size)
unistd.h (POSIX.1): Working Directory.
struct tm * getdate (const char *string)
time.h (Unix98): A More User-friendly Way to Parse Times and Dates.
getdate_err
time.h (Unix98): A More User-friendly Way to Parse Times and Dates.
int getdate_r (const char *string, struct tm *tp)
time.h (GNU): A More User-friendly Way to Parse Times and Dates.
ssize_t getdelim (char **lineptr, size_t *n, int delimiter, FILE *stream)
stdio.h (GNU): Line-Oriented Input.
ssize_t getdents64 (int fd, void *buffer, size_t length)
dirent.h (Linux): Low-level Directory Access.
int getdomainnname (char *name, size_t length)
unistd.h (???): Host Identification.
gid_t getegid (void)
unistd.h (POSIX.1): Reading the Persona of a Process.
int getentropy (void *buffer, size_t length)
sys/random.h (GNU): Generating Unpredictable Bytes.
char * getenv (const char *name)
stdlib.h (ISO): Environment Access.
uid_t geteuid (void)
unistd.h (POSIX.1): Reading the Persona of a Process.
struct fstab * getfsent (void)
fstab.h (BSD): The fstab file.
struct fstab * getfsfile (const char *name)
fstab.h (BSD): The fstab file.
struct fstab * getfsspec (const char *name)
fstab.h (BSD): The fstab file.
gid_t getgid (void)
unistd.h (POSIX.1): Reading the Persona of a Process.
struct group * getgrent (void)
grp.h (SVID): Scanning the List of All Groups.
grp.h (BSD): Scanning the List of All Groups.
int getgrent_r (struct group *result_buf, char *buffer, size_t buflen, struct group **result)
grp.h (GNU): Scanning the List of All Groups.
struct group * getgrgid (gid_t gid)
grp.h (POSIX.1): Looking Up One Group.
int getgrgid_r (gid_t gid, struct group *result_buf, char *buffer, size_t buflen, struct group **result)
grp.h (POSIX.1c): Looking Up One Group.
struct group * getgrnam (const char *name)
grp.h (SVID): Looking Up One Group.
grp.h (BSD): Looking Up One Group.
int getgrnam_r (const char *name, struct group *result_buf, char *buffer, size_t buflen, struct group **result)
grp.h (POSIX.1c): Looking Up One Group.
int getgrouplist (const char *user, gid_t group, gid_t *groups, int *ngroups)
grp.h (BSD): Setting the Group IDs.
int getgroups (int count, gid_t *groups)
unistd.h (POSIX.1): Reading the Persona of a Process.
struct hostent * gethostbyaddr (const void *addr, socklen_t length, int format)
netdb.h (BSD): Host Names.
int gethostbyaddr_r (const void *addr, socklen_t length, int format, struct hostent *restrict result_buf, char *restrict buf, size_t buflen, struct hostent **restrict result, int *restrict h_errnop)
netdb.h (GNU): Host Names.
struct hostent * gethostbyname (const char *name)
netdb.h (BSD): Host Names.
struct hostent * gethostbyname2 (const char *name, int af)
netdb.h (IPv6 Basic API): Host Names.
int gethostbyname2_r (const char *name, int af, struct hostent *restrict result_buf, char *restrict buf, size_t buflen, struct hostent **restrict result, int *restrict h_errnop)
netdb.h (GNU): Host Names.
int gethostbyname_r (const char *restrict name, struct hostent *restrict result_buf, char *restrict buf, size_t buflen, struct hostent **restrict result, int *restrict h_errnop)
netdb.h (GNU): Host Names.
struct hostent * gethostent (void)
netdb.h (BSD): Host Names.
long int gethostid (void)
unistd.h (BSD): Host Identification.
int gethostname (char *name, size_t size)
unistd.h (BSD): Host Identification.
int getitimer (int which, struct itimerval *old)
sys/time.h (BSD): Setting an Alarm.
ssize_t getline (char **lineptr, size_t *n, FILE *stream)
stdio.h (GNU): Line-Oriented Input.
int getloadavg (double loadavg[], int nelem)
stdlib.h (BSD): Learn about the processors available.
char * getlogin (void)
unistd.h (POSIX.1): Identifying Who Logged In.
struct mntent * getmntent (FILE *stream)
mntent.h (BSD): The mtab file.
struct mntent * getmntent_r (FILE *stream, struct mntent *result, char *buffer, int bufsize)
mntent.h (BSD): The mtab file.
struct netent * getnetbyaddr (uint32_t net, int type)
netdb.h (BSD): Networks Database.
struct netent * getnetbyname (const char *name)
netdb.h (BSD): Networks Database.
struct netent * getnetent (void)
netdb.h (BSD): Networks Database.
int getnetgrent (char **hostp, char **userp, char **domainp)
netdb.h (BSD): Looking up one Netgroup.
int getnetgrent_r (char **hostp, char **userp, char **domainp, char *buffer, size_t buflen)
netdb.h (GNU): Looking up one Netgroup.
int getopt (int argc, char *const *argv, const char *options)
unistd.h (POSIX.2): Using the getopt
function.
int getopt_long (int argc, char *const *argv, const char *shortopts, const struct option *longopts, int *indexptr)
getopt.h (GNU): Parsing Long Options with getopt_long
.
int getopt_long_only (int argc, char *const *argv, const char *shortopts, const struct option *longopts, int *indexptr)
getopt.h (GNU): Parsing Long Options with getopt_long
.
int getpagesize (void)
unistd.h (BSD): How to get information about the memory subsystem?.
char * getpass (const char *prompt)
unistd.h (BSD): Reading Passphrases.
double getpayload (const double *x)
math.h (ISO): Setting and modifying single bits of FP values.
float getpayloadf (const float *x)
math.h (ISO): Setting and modifying single bits of FP values.
_FloatN getpayloadfN (const _FloatN *x)
math.h (TS 18661-3:2015): Setting and modifying single bits of FP values.
_FloatNx getpayloadfNx (const _FloatNx *x)
math.h (TS 18661-3:2015): Setting and modifying single bits of FP values.
long double getpayloadl (const long double *x)
math.h (ISO): Setting and modifying single bits of FP values.
int getpeername (int socket, struct sockaddr *addr, socklen_t *length-ptr)
sys/socket.h (BSD): Who is Connected to Me?.
int getpgid (pid_t pid)
unistd.h (POSIX.1): Process Group Functions.
pid_t getpgrp (void)
unistd.h (POSIX.1): Process Group Functions.
pid_t getpid (void)
unistd.h (POSIX.1): Process Identification.
pid_t getppid (void)
unistd.h (POSIX.1): Process Identification.
int getpriority (int class, int id)
sys/resource.h (BSD): Functions For Traditional Scheduling.
sys/resource.h (POSIX): Functions For Traditional Scheduling.
struct protoent * getprotobyname (const char *name)
netdb.h (BSD): Protocols Database.
struct protoent * getprotobynumber (int protocol)
netdb.h (BSD): Protocols Database.
struct protoent * getprotoent (void)
netdb.h (BSD): Protocols Database.
int getpt (void)
stdlib.h (GNU): Allocating Pseudo-Terminals.
struct passwd * getpwent (void)
pwd.h (POSIX.1): Scanning the List of All Users.
int getpwent_r (struct passwd *result_buf, char *buffer, size_t buflen, struct passwd **result)
pwd.h (GNU): Scanning the List of All Users.
struct passwd * getpwnam (const char *name)
pwd.h (POSIX.1): Looking Up One User.
int getpwnam_r (const char *name, struct passwd *result_buf, char *buffer, size_t buflen, struct passwd **result)
pwd.h (POSIX.1c): Looking Up One User.
struct passwd * getpwuid (uid_t uid)
pwd.h (POSIX.1): Looking Up One User.
int getpwuid_r (uid_t uid, struct passwd *result_buf, char *buffer, size_t buflen, struct passwd **result)
pwd.h (POSIX.1c): Looking Up One User.
ssize_t getrandom (void *buffer, size_t length, unsigned int flags)
sys/random.h (GNU): Generating Unpredictable Bytes.
int getrlimit (int resource, struct rlimit *rlp)
sys/resource.h (BSD): Limiting Resource Usage.
int getrlimit64 (int resource, struct rlimit64 *rlp)
sys/resource.h (Unix98): Limiting Resource Usage.
int getrusage (int processes, struct rusage *rusage)
sys/resource.h (BSD): Resource Usage.
char * gets (char *s)
stdio.h (ISO): Line-Oriented Input.
struct servent * getservbyname (const char *name, const char *proto)
netdb.h (BSD): The Services Database.
struct servent * getservbyport (int port, const char *proto)
netdb.h (BSD): The Services Database.
struct servent * getservent (void)
netdb.h (BSD): The Services Database.
pid_t getsid (pid_t pid)
unistd.h (SVID): Process Group Functions.
int getsockname (int socket, struct sockaddr *addr, socklen_t *length-ptr)
sys/socket.h (BSD): Reading the Address of a Socket.
int getsockopt (int socket, int level, int optname, void *optval, socklen_t *optlen-ptr)
sys/socket.h (BSD): Socket Option Functions.
int getsubopt (char **optionp, char *const *tokens, char **valuep)
stdlib.h (???): Parsing of Suboptions.
char * gettext (const char *msgid)
libintl.h (GNU): What has to be done to translate a message?.
pid_t gettid (void)
unistd.h (Linux): Process Identification.
int gettimeofday (struct timeval *tp, void *tzp)
sys/time.h (BSD): Getting the Time.
uid_t getuid (void)
unistd.h (POSIX.1): Reading the Persona of a Process.
mode_t getumask (void)
sys/stat.h (GNU): Assigning File Permissions.
struct utmp * getutent (void)
utmp.h (SVID): Manipulating the User Accounting Database.
int getutent_r (struct utmp *buffer, struct utmp **result)
utmp.h (GNU): Manipulating the User Accounting Database.
struct utmp * getutid (const struct utmp *id)
utmp.h (SVID): Manipulating the User Accounting Database.
int getutid_r (const struct utmp *id, struct utmp *buffer, struct utmp **result)
utmp.h (GNU): Manipulating the User Accounting Database.
struct utmp * getutline (const struct utmp *line)
utmp.h (SVID): Manipulating the User Accounting Database.
int getutline_r (const struct utmp *line, struct utmp *buffer, struct utmp **result)
utmp.h (GNU): Manipulating the User Accounting Database.
int getutmp (const struct utmpx *utmpx, struct utmp *utmp)
utmp.h (GNU): XPG User Accounting Database Functions.
utmpx.h (GNU): XPG User Accounting Database Functions.
int getutmpx (const struct utmp *utmp, struct utmpx *utmpx)
utmp.h (GNU): XPG User Accounting Database Functions.
utmpx.h (GNU): XPG User Accounting Database Functions.
struct utmpx * getutxent (void)
utmpx.h (XPG4.2): XPG User Accounting Database Functions.
struct utmpx * getutxid (const struct utmpx *id)
utmpx.h (XPG4.2): XPG User Accounting Database Functions.
struct utmpx * getutxline (const struct utmpx *line)
utmpx.h (XPG4.2): XPG User Accounting Database Functions.
int getw (FILE *stream)
stdio.h (SVID): Character Input.
wint_t getwc (FILE *stream)
wchar.h (ISO): Character Input.
wint_t getwc_unlocked (FILE *stream)
wchar.h (GNU): Character Input.
wint_t getwchar (void)
wchar.h (ISO): Character Input.
wint_t getwchar_unlocked (void)
wchar.h (GNU): Character Input.
char * getwd (char *buffer)
unistd.h (BSD): Working Directory.
gid_t
sys/types.h (POSIX.1): Reading the Persona of a Process.
int glob (const char *pattern, int flags, int (*errfunc) (const char *filename, int error-code), glob_t *vector-ptr)
glob.h (POSIX.2): Calling glob
.
int glob64 (const char *pattern, int flags, int (*errfunc) (const char *filename, int error-code), glob64_t *vector-ptr)
glob.h (GNU): Calling glob
.
glob64_t
glob.h (GNU): Calling glob
.
glob_t
glob.h (POSIX.2): Calling glob
.
void globfree (glob_t *pglob)
glob.h (POSIX.2): More Flags for Globbing.
void globfree64 (glob64_t *pglob)
glob.h (GNU): More Flags for Globbing.
struct tm * gmtime (const time_t *time)
time.h (ISO): Broken-down Time.
struct tm * gmtime_r (const time_t *time, struct tm *resultp)
time.h (POSIX.1c): Broken-down Time.
int grantpt (int filedes)
stdlib.h (SVID): Allocating Pseudo-Terminals.
stdlib.h (XPG4.2): Allocating Pseudo-Terminals.
struct group
grp.h (POSIX.1): The Data Structure for a Group.
int gsignal (int signum)
signal.h (SVID): Signaling Yourself.
int gtty (int filedes, struct sgttyb *attributes)
sgtty.h (BSD): BSD Terminal Modes.
char * hasmntopt (const struct mntent *mnt, const char *opt)
mntent.h (BSD): The mtab file.
int hcreate (size_t nel)
search.h (SVID): The hsearch
function..
int hcreate_r (size_t nel, struct hsearch_data *htab)
search.h (GNU): The hsearch
function..
void hdestroy (void)
search.h (SVID): The hsearch
function..
void hdestroy_r (struct hsearch_data *htab)
search.h (GNU): The hsearch
function..
struct hostent
netdb.h (BSD): Host Names.
ENTRY * hsearch (ENTRY item, ACTION action)
search.h (SVID): The hsearch
function..
int hsearch_r (ENTRY item, ACTION action, ENTRY **retval, struct hsearch_data *htab)
search.h (GNU): The hsearch
function..
uint32_t htonl (uint32_t hostlong)
netinet/in.h (BSD): Byte Order Conversion.
uint16_t htons (uint16_t hostshort)
netinet/in.h (BSD): Byte Order Conversion.
double hypot (double x, double y)
math.h (ISO): Exponentiation and Logarithms.
float hypotf (float x, float y)
math.h (ISO): Exponentiation and Logarithms.
_FloatN hypotfN (_FloatN x, _FloatN y)
math.h (TS 18661-3:2015): Exponentiation and Logarithms.
_FloatNx hypotfNx (_FloatNx x, _FloatNx y)
math.h (TS 18661-3:2015): Exponentiation and Logarithms.
long double hypotl (long double x, long double y)
math.h (ISO): Exponentiation and Logarithms.
size_t iconv (iconv_t cd, char **inbuf, size_t *inbytesleft, char **outbuf, size_t *outbytesleft)
iconv.h (XPG2): Generic Character Set Conversion Interface.
int iconv_close (iconv_t cd)
iconv.h (XPG2): Generic Character Set Conversion Interface.
iconv_t iconv_open (const char *tocode, const char *fromcode)
iconv.h (XPG2): Generic Character Set Conversion Interface.
iconv_t
iconv.h (XPG2): Generic Character Set Conversion Interface.
void if_freenameindex (struct if_nameindex *ptr)
net/if.h (IPv6 basic API): Interface Naming.
char * if_indextoname (unsigned int ifindex, char *ifname)
net/if.h (IPv6 basic API): Interface Naming.
struct if_nameindex
net/if.h (IPv6 basic API): Interface Naming.
struct if_nameindex * if_nameindex (void)
net/if.h (IPv6 basic API): Interface Naming.
unsigned int if_nametoindex (const char *ifname)
net/if.h (IPv6 basic API): Interface Naming.
int ilogb (double x)
math.h (ISO): Exponentiation and Logarithms.
int ilogbf (float x)
math.h (ISO): Exponentiation and Logarithms.
int ilogbfN (_FloatN x)
math.h (TS 18661-3:2015): Exponentiation and Logarithms.
int ilogbfNx (_FloatNx x)
math.h (TS 18661-3:2015): Exponentiation and Logarithms.
int ilogbl (long double x)
math.h (ISO): Exponentiation and Logarithms.
intmax_t imaxabs (intmax_t number)
inttypes.h (ISO): Absolute Value.
imaxdiv_t imaxdiv (intmax_t numerator, intmax_t denominator)
inttypes.h (ISO): Integer Division.
imaxdiv_t
inttypes.h (ISO): Integer Division.
struct in6_addr
netinet/in.h (IPv6 basic API): Host Address Data Type.
struct in6_addr in6addr_any
netinet/in.h (IPv6 basic API): Host Address Data Type.
struct in6_addr in6addr_loopback
netinet/in.h (IPv6 basic API): Host Address Data Type.
struct in_addr
netinet/in.h (BSD): Host Address Data Type.
char * index (const char *string, int c)
string.h (BSD): Search Functions.
uint32_t inet_addr (const char *name)
arpa/inet.h (BSD): Host Address Functions.
int inet_aton (const char *name, struct in_addr *addr)
arpa/inet.h (BSD): Host Address Functions.
uint32_t inet_lnaof (struct in_addr addr)
arpa/inet.h (BSD): Host Address Functions.
struct in_addr inet_makeaddr (uint32_t net, uint32_t local)
arpa/inet.h (BSD): Host Address Functions.
uint32_t inet_netof (struct in_addr addr)
arpa/inet.h (BSD): Host Address Functions.
uint32_t inet_network (const char *name)
arpa/inet.h (BSD): Host Address Functions.
char * inet_ntoa (struct in_addr addr)
arpa/inet.h (BSD): Host Address Functions.
const char * inet_ntop (int af, const void *cp, char *buf, socklen_t len)
arpa/inet.h (IPv6 basic API): Host Address Functions.
int inet_pton (int af, const char *cp, void *buf)
arpa/inet.h (IPv6 basic API): Host Address Functions.
int initgroups (const char *user, gid_t group)
grp.h (BSD): Setting the Group IDs.
char * initstate (unsigned int seed, char *state, size_t size)
stdlib.h (BSD): BSD Random Number Functions.
int initstate_r (unsigned int seed, char *restrict statebuf, size_t statelen, struct random_data *restrict buf)
stdlib.h (GNU): BSD Random Number Functions.
int innetgr (const char *netgroup, const char *host, const char *user, const char *domain)
netdb.h (BSD): Testing for Netgroup Membership.
ino64_t
sys/types.h (Unix98): The meaning of the File Attributes.
ino_t
sys/types.h (POSIX.1): The meaning of the File Attributes.
int ioctl (int filedes, int command, …)
sys/ioctl.h (BSD): Generic I/O Control operations.
struct iovec
sys/uio.h (BSD): Fast Scatter-Gather I/O.
int isalnum (int c)
ctype.h (ISO): Classification of Characters.
int isalpha (int c)
ctype.h (ISO): Classification of Characters.
int isascii (int c)
ctype.h (SVID): Classification of Characters.
ctype.h (BSD): Classification of Characters.
int isatty (int filedes)
unistd.h (POSIX.1): Identifying Terminals.
int isblank (int c)
ctype.h (ISO): Classification of Characters.
int iscanonical (float-type x)
math.h (ISO): Floating-Point Number Classification Functions.
int iscntrl (int c)
ctype.h (ISO): Classification of Characters.
int isdigit (int c)
ctype.h (ISO): Classification of Characters.
int iseqsig (real-floating x, real-floating y)
math.h (ISO): Floating-Point Comparison Functions.
int isfinite (float-type x)
math.h (ISO): Floating-Point Number Classification Functions.
int isgraph (int c)
ctype.h (ISO): Classification of Characters.
int isgreater (real-floating x, real-floating y)
math.h (ISO): Floating-Point Comparison Functions.
int isgreaterequal (real-floating x, real-floating y)
math.h (ISO): Floating-Point Comparison Functions.
int isinf (double x)
math.h (BSD): Floating-Point Number Classification Functions.
int isinff (float x)
math.h (BSD): Floating-Point Number Classification Functions.
int isinfl (long double x)
math.h (BSD): Floating-Point Number Classification Functions.
int isless (real-floating x, real-floating y)
math.h (ISO): Floating-Point Comparison Functions.
int islessequal (real-floating x, real-floating y)
math.h (ISO): Floating-Point Comparison Functions.
int islessgreater (real-floating x, real-floating y)
math.h (ISO): Floating-Point Comparison Functions.
int islower (int c)
ctype.h (ISO): Classification of Characters.
int isnan (float-type x)
math.h (ISO): Floating-Point Number Classification Functions.
int isnan (double x)
math.h (BSD): Floating-Point Number Classification Functions.
int isnanf (float x)
math.h (BSD): Floating-Point Number Classification Functions.
int isnanl (long double x)
math.h (BSD): Floating-Point Number Classification Functions.
int isnormal (float-type x)
math.h (ISO): Floating-Point Number Classification Functions.
int isprint (int c)
ctype.h (ISO): Classification of Characters.
int ispunct (int c)
ctype.h (ISO): Classification of Characters.
int issignaling (float-type x)
math.h (ISO): Floating-Point Number Classification Functions.
int isspace (int c)
ctype.h (ISO): Classification of Characters.
int issubnormal (float-type x)
math.h (ISO): Floating-Point Number Classification Functions.
int isunordered (real-floating x, real-floating y)
math.h (ISO): Floating-Point Comparison Functions.
int isupper (int c)
ctype.h (ISO): Classification of Characters.
int iswalnum (wint_t wc)
wctype.h (ISO): Character class determination for wide characters.
int iswalpha (wint_t wc)
wctype.h (ISO): Character class determination for wide characters.
int iswblank (wint_t wc)
wctype.h (ISO): Character class determination for wide characters.
int iswcntrl (wint_t wc)
wctype.h (ISO): Character class determination for wide characters.
int iswctype (wint_t wc, wctype_t desc)
wctype.h (ISO): Character class determination for wide characters.
int iswdigit (wint_t wc)
wctype.h (ISO): Character class determination for wide characters.
int iswgraph (wint_t wc)
wctype.h (ISO): Character class determination for wide characters.
int iswlower (wint_t wc)
ctype.h (ISO): Character class determination for wide characters.
int iswprint (wint_t wc)
wctype.h (ISO): Character class determination for wide characters.
int iswpunct (wint_t wc)
wctype.h (ISO): Character class determination for wide characters.
int iswspace (wint_t wc)
wctype.h (ISO): Character class determination for wide characters.
int iswupper (wint_t wc)
wctype.h (ISO): Character class determination for wide characters.
int iswxdigit (wint_t wc)
wctype.h (ISO): Character class determination for wide characters.
int isxdigit (int c)
ctype.h (ISO): Classification of Characters.
int iszero (float-type x)
math.h (ISO): Floating-Point Number Classification Functions.
struct itimerval
sys/time.h (BSD): Setting an Alarm.
double j0 (double x)
math.h (SVID): Special Functions.
float j0f (float x)
math.h (SVID): Special Functions.
_FloatN j0fN (_FloatN x)
math.h (GNU): Special Functions.
_FloatNx j0fNx (_FloatNx x)
math.h (GNU): Special Functions.
long double j0l (long double x)
math.h (SVID): Special Functions.
double j1 (double x)
math.h (SVID): Special Functions.
float j1f (float x)
math.h (SVID): Special Functions.
_FloatN j1fN (_FloatN x)
math.h (GNU): Special Functions.
_FloatNx j1fNx (_FloatNx x)
math.h (GNU): Special Functions.
long double j1l (long double x)
math.h (SVID): Special Functions.
jmp_buf
setjmp.h (ISO): Details of Non-Local Exits.
double jn (int n, double x)
math.h (SVID): Special Functions.
float jnf (int n, float x)
math.h (SVID): Special Functions.
_FloatN jnfN (int n, _FloatN x)
math.h (GNU): Special Functions.
_FloatNx jnfNx (int n, _FloatNx x)
math.h (GNU): Special Functions.
long double jnl (int n, long double x)
math.h (SVID): Special Functions.
long int jrand48 (unsigned short int xsubi[3])
stdlib.h (SVID): SVID Random Number Function.
int jrand48_r (unsigned short int xsubi[3], struct drand48_data *buffer, long int *result)
stdlib.h (GNU): SVID Random Number Function.
int kill (pid_t pid, int signum)
signal.h (POSIX.1): Signaling Another Process.
int killpg (int pgid, int signum)
signal.h (BSD): Signaling Another Process.
char * l64a (long int n)
stdlib.h (XPG): Encode Binary Data.
long int labs (long int number)
stdlib.h (ISO): Absolute Value.
void lcong48 (unsigned short int param[7])
stdlib.h (SVID): SVID Random Number Function.
int lcong48_r (unsigned short int param[7], struct drand48_data *buffer)
stdlib.h (GNU): SVID Random Number Function.
struct lconv
locale.h (ISO): localeconv
: It is portable but ….
double ldexp (double value, int exponent)
math.h (ISO): Normalization Functions.
float ldexpf (float value, int exponent)
math.h (ISO): Normalization Functions.
_FloatN ldexpfN (_FloatN value, int exponent)
math.h (TS 18661-3:2015): Normalization Functions.
_FloatNx ldexpfNx (_FloatNx value, int exponent)
math.h (TS 18661-3:2015): Normalization Functions.
long double ldexpl (long double value, int exponent)
math.h (ISO): Normalization Functions.
ldiv_t ldiv (long int numerator, long int denominator)
stdlib.h (ISO): Integer Division.
ldiv_t
stdlib.h (ISO): Integer Division.
void * lfind (const void *key, const void *base, size_t *nmemb, size_t size, comparison_fn_t compar)
search.h (SVID): Array Search Function.
double lgamma (double x)
math.h (SVID): Special Functions.
double lgamma_r (double x, int *signp)
math.h (XPG): Special Functions.
float lgammaf (float x)
math.h (SVID): Special Functions.
_FloatN lgammafN (_FloatN x)
math.h (TS 18661-3:2015): Special Functions.
_FloatN lgammafN_r (_FloatN x, int *signp)
math.h (GNU): Special Functions.
_FloatNx lgammafNx (_FloatNx x)
math.h (TS 18661-3:2015): Special Functions.
_FloatNx lgammafNx_r (_FloatNx x, int *signp)
math.h (GNU): Special Functions.
float lgammaf_r (float x, int *signp)
math.h (XPG): Special Functions.
long double lgammal (long double x)
math.h (SVID): Special Functions.
long double lgammal_r (long double x, int *signp)
math.h (XPG): Special Functions.
struct linger
sys/socket.h (BSD): Socket-Level Options.
int link (const char *oldname, const char *newname)
unistd.h (POSIX.1): Hard Links.
int linkat (int oldfd, const char *oldname, int newfd, const char *newname, int flags)
unistd.h (POSIX.1): Hard Links.
int lio_listio (int mode, struct aiocb *const list[], int nent, struct sigevent *sig)
aio.h (POSIX.1b): Asynchronous Read and Write Operations.
int lio_listio64 (int mode, struct aiocb64 *const list[], int nent, struct sigevent *sig)
aio.h (Unix98): Asynchronous Read and Write Operations.
int listen (int socket, int n)
sys/socket.h (BSD): Listening for Connections.
long long int llabs (long long int number)
stdlib.h (ISO): Absolute Value.
lldiv_t lldiv (long long int numerator, long long int denominator)
stdlib.h (ISO): Integer Division.
lldiv_t
stdlib.h (ISO): Integer Division.
long int llogb (double x)
math.h (ISO): Exponentiation and Logarithms.
long int llogbf (float x)
math.h (ISO): Exponentiation and Logarithms.
long int llogbfN (_FloatN x)
math.h (TS 18661-3:2015): Exponentiation and Logarithms.
long int llogbfNx (_FloatNx x)
math.h (TS 18661-3:2015): Exponentiation and Logarithms.
long int llogbl (long double x)
math.h (ISO): Exponentiation and Logarithms.
long long int llrint (double x)
math.h (ISO): Rounding Functions.
long long int llrintf (float x)
math.h (ISO): Rounding Functions.
long long int llrintfN (_FloatN x)
math.h (TS 18661-3:2015): Rounding Functions.
long long int llrintfNx (_FloatNx x)
math.h (TS 18661-3:2015): Rounding Functions.
long long int llrintl (long double x)
math.h (ISO): Rounding Functions.
long long int llround (double x)
math.h (ISO): Rounding Functions.
long long int llroundf (float x)
math.h (ISO): Rounding Functions.
long long int llroundfN (_FloatN x)
math.h (TS 18661-3:2015): Rounding Functions.
long long int llroundfNx (_FloatNx x)
math.h (TS 18661-3:2015): Rounding Functions.
long long int llroundl (long double x)
math.h (ISO): Rounding Functions.
struct lconv * localeconv (void)
locale.h (ISO): localeconv
: It is portable but ….
struct tm * localtime (const time_t *time)
time.h (ISO): Broken-down Time.
struct tm * localtime_r (const time_t *time, struct tm *resultp)
time.h (POSIX.1c): Broken-down Time.
double log (double x)
math.h (ISO): Exponentiation and Logarithms.
double log10 (double x)
math.h (ISO): Exponentiation and Logarithms.
float log10f (float x)
math.h (ISO): Exponentiation and Logarithms.
_FloatN log10fN (_FloatN x)
math.h (TS 18661-3:2015): Exponentiation and Logarithms.
_FloatNx log10fNx (_FloatNx x)
math.h (TS 18661-3:2015): Exponentiation and Logarithms.
long double log10l (long double x)
math.h (ISO): Exponentiation and Logarithms.
double log1p (double x)
math.h (ISO): Exponentiation and Logarithms.
float log1pf (float x)
math.h (ISO): Exponentiation and Logarithms.
_FloatN log1pfN (_FloatN x)
math.h (TS 18661-3:2015): Exponentiation and Logarithms.
_FloatNx log1pfNx (_FloatNx x)
math.h (TS 18661-3:2015): Exponentiation and Logarithms.
long double log1pl (long double x)
math.h (ISO): Exponentiation and Logarithms.
double log2 (double x)
math.h (ISO): Exponentiation and Logarithms.
float log2f (float x)
math.h (ISO): Exponentiation and Logarithms.
_FloatN log2fN (_FloatN x)
math.h (TS 18661-3:2015): Exponentiation and Logarithms.
_FloatNx log2fNx (_FloatNx x)
math.h (TS 18661-3:2015): Exponentiation and Logarithms.
long double log2l (long double x)
math.h (ISO): Exponentiation and Logarithms.
double logb (double x)
math.h (ISO): Exponentiation and Logarithms.
float logbf (float x)
math.h (ISO): Exponentiation and Logarithms.
_FloatN logbfN (_FloatN x)
math.h (TS 18661-3:2015): Exponentiation and Logarithms.
_FloatNx logbfNx (_FloatNx x)
math.h (TS 18661-3:2015): Exponentiation and Logarithms.
long double logbl (long double x)
math.h (ISO): Exponentiation and Logarithms.
float logf (float x)
math.h (ISO): Exponentiation and Logarithms.
_FloatN logfN (_FloatN x)
math.h (TS 18661-3:2015): Exponentiation and Logarithms.
_FloatNx logfNx (_FloatNx x)
math.h (TS 18661-3:2015): Exponentiation and Logarithms.
void login (const struct utmp *entry)
utmp.h (BSD): Logging In and Out.
int login_tty (int filedes)
utmp.h (BSD): Logging In and Out.
long double logl (long double x)
math.h (ISO): Exponentiation and Logarithms.
int logout (const char *ut_line)
utmp.h (BSD): Logging In and Out.
void logwtmp (const char *ut_line, const char *ut_name, const char *ut_host)
utmp.h (BSD): Logging In and Out.
void longjmp (jmp_buf state, int value)
setjmp.h (ISO): Details of Non-Local Exits.
long int lrand48 (void)
stdlib.h (SVID): SVID Random Number Function.
int lrand48_r (struct drand48_data *buffer, long int *result)
stdlib.h (GNU): SVID Random Number Function.
long int lrint (double x)
math.h (ISO): Rounding Functions.
long int lrintf (float x)
math.h (ISO): Rounding Functions.
long int lrintfN (_FloatN x)
math.h (TS 18661-3:2015): Rounding Functions.
long int lrintfNx (_FloatNx x)
math.h (TS 18661-3:2015): Rounding Functions.
long int lrintl (long double x)
math.h (ISO): Rounding Functions.
long int lround (double x)
math.h (ISO): Rounding Functions.
long int lroundf (float x)
math.h (ISO): Rounding Functions.
long int lroundfN (_FloatN x)
math.h (TS 18661-3:2015): Rounding Functions.
long int lroundfNx (_FloatNx x)
math.h (TS 18661-3:2015): Rounding Functions.
long int lroundl (long double x)
math.h (ISO): Rounding Functions.
void * lsearch (const void *key, void *base, size_t *nmemb, size_t size, comparison_fn_t compar)
search.h (SVID): Array Search Function.
off_t lseek (int filedes, off_t offset, int whence)
unistd.h (POSIX.1): Setting the File Position of a Descriptor.
off64_t lseek64 (int filedes, off64_t offset, int whence)
unistd.h (Unix98): Setting the File Position of a Descriptor.
int lstat (const char *filename, struct stat *buf)
sys/stat.h (BSD): Reading the Attributes of a File.
int lstat64 (const char *filename, struct stat64 *buf)
sys/stat.h (Unix98): Reading the Attributes of a File.
int lutimes (const char *filename, const struct timeval tvp[2])
sys/time.h (BSD): File Times.
int madvise (void *addr, size_t length, int advice)
sys/mman.h (POSIX): Memory-mapped I/O.
void makecontext (ucontext_t *ucp, void (*func) (void), int argc, …)
ucontext.h (SVID): Complete Context Control.
struct mallinfo2
malloc.h (GNU): Statistics for Memory Allocation with malloc
.
struct mallinfo2 mallinfo2 (void)
malloc.h (SVID): Statistics for Memory Allocation with malloc
.
void * malloc (size_t size)
malloc.h (ISO): Basic Memory Allocation.
stdlib.h (ISO): Basic Memory Allocation.
int mblen (const char *string, size_t size)
stdlib.h (ISO): Non-reentrant Conversion of Single Characters.
size_t mbrlen (const char *restrict s, size_t n, mbstate_t *ps)
wchar.h (ISO): Converting Single Characters.
size_t mbrtowc (wchar_t *restrict pwc, const char *restrict s, size_t n, mbstate_t *restrict ps)
wchar.h (ISO): Converting Single Characters.
int mbsinit (const mbstate_t *ps)
wchar.h (ISO): Representing the state of the conversion.
size_t mbsnrtowcs (wchar_t *restrict dst, const char **restrict src, size_t nmc, size_t len, mbstate_t *restrict ps)
wchar.h (GNU): Converting Multibyte and Wide Character Strings.
size_t mbsrtowcs (wchar_t *restrict dst, const char **restrict src, size_t len, mbstate_t *restrict ps)
wchar.h (ISO): Converting Multibyte and Wide Character Strings.
mbstate_t
wchar.h (ISO): Representing the state of the conversion.
size_t mbstowcs (wchar_t *wstring, const char *string, size_t size)
stdlib.h (ISO): Non-reentrant Conversion of Strings.
int mbtowc (wchar_t *restrict result, const char *restrict string, size_t size)
stdlib.h (ISO): Non-reentrant Conversion of Single Characters.
int mcheck (void (*abortfn) (enum mcheck_status status))
mcheck.h (GNU): Heap Consistency Checking.
void * memalign (size_t boundary, size_t size)
malloc.h (BSD): Allocating Aligned Memory Blocks.
void * memccpy (void *restrict to, const void *restrict from, int c, size_t size)
string.h (SVID): Copying Strings and Arrays.
void * memchr (const void *block, int c, size_t size)
string.h (ISO): Search Functions.
int memcmp (const void *a1, const void *a2, size_t size)
string.h (ISO): String/Array Comparison.
void * memcpy (void *restrict to, const void *restrict from, size_t size)
string.h (ISO): Copying Strings and Arrays.
int memfd_create (const char *name, unsigned int flags)
sys/mman.h (Linux): Memory-mapped I/O.
void * memfrob (void *mem, size_t length)
string.h (GNU): Obfuscating Data.
void * memmem (const void *haystack, size_t haystack-len,
const void *needle, size_t needle-len)
string.h (GNU): Search Functions.
void * memmove (void *to, const void *from, size_t size)
string.h (ISO): Copying Strings and Arrays.
void * mempcpy (void *restrict to, const void *restrict from, size_t size)
string.h (GNU): Copying Strings and Arrays.
void * memrchr (const void *block, int c, size_t size)
string.h (GNU): Search Functions.
void * memset (void *block, int c, size_t size)
string.h (ISO): Copying Strings and Arrays.
int mkdir (const char *filename, mode_t mode)
sys/stat.h (POSIX.1): Creating Directories.
char * mkdtemp (char *template)
stdlib.h (BSD): Temporary Files.
int mkfifo (const char *filename, mode_t mode)
sys/stat.h (POSIX.1): FIFO Special Files.
int mknod (const char *filename, mode_t mode, dev_t dev)
sys/stat.h (BSD): Making Special Files.
int mkstemp (char *template)
stdlib.h (BSD): Temporary Files.
char * mktemp (char *template)
stdlib.h (Unix): Temporary Files.
time_t mktime (struct tm *brokentime)
time.h (ISO): Broken-down Time.
int mlock (const void *addr, size_t len)
sys/mman.h (POSIX.1b): Functions To Lock And Unlock Pages.
int mlock2 (const void *addr, size_t len, unsigned int flags)
sys/mman.h (Linux): Functions To Lock And Unlock Pages.
int mlockall (int flags)
sys/mman.h (POSIX.1b): Functions To Lock And Unlock Pages.
void * mmap (void *address, size_t length, int protect, int flags, int filedes, off_t offset)
sys/mman.h (POSIX): Memory-mapped I/O.
void * mmap64 (void *address, size_t length, int protect, int flags, int filedes, off64_t offset)
sys/mman.h (LFS): Memory-mapped I/O.
struct mntent
mntent.h (BSD): The mtab file.
mode_t
sys/types.h (POSIX.1): The meaning of the File Attributes.
double modf (double value, double *integer-part)
math.h (ISO): Rounding Functions.
float modff (float value, float *integer-part)
math.h (ISO): Rounding Functions.
_FloatN modffN (_FloatN value, _FloatN *integer-part)
math.h (TS 18661-3:2015): Rounding Functions.
_FloatNx modffNx (_FloatNx value, _FloatNx *integer-part)
math.h (TS 18661-3:2015): Rounding Functions.
long double modfl (long double value, long double *integer-part)
math.h (ISO): Rounding Functions.
int mount (const char *special_file, const char *dir, const char *fstype, unsigned long int options, const void *data)
sys/mount.h (SVID): Mount, Unmount, Remount.
sys/mount.h (BSD): Mount, Unmount, Remount.
int mprotect (void *address, size_t length, int protection)
sys/mman.h (POSIX): Memory Protection.
long int mrand48 (void)
stdlib.h (SVID): SVID Random Number Function.
int mrand48_r (struct drand48_data *buffer, long int *result)
stdlib.h (GNU): SVID Random Number Function.
void * mremap (void *address, size_t length, size_t new_length, int flag)
sys/mman.h (GNU): Memory-mapped I/O.
int msync (void *address, size_t length, int flags)
sys/mman.h (POSIX): Memory-mapped I/O.
void mtrace (void)
mcheck.h (GNU): How to install the tracing functionality.
void mtx_destroy (mtx_t *mutex)
threads.h (C11): Mutexes.
int mtx_init (mtx_t *mutex, int type)
threads.h (C11): Mutexes.
int mtx_lock (mtx_t *mutex)
threads.h (C11): Mutexes.
mtx_plain
threads.h (C11): Mutexes.
mtx_recursive
threads.h (C11): Mutexes.
mtx_t
threads.h (C11): Mutexes.
mtx_timed
threads.h (C11): Mutexes.
int mtx_timedlock (mtx_t *restrict mutex, const struct timespec *restrict time_point)
threads.h (C11): Mutexes.
int mtx_trylock (mtx_t *mutex)
threads.h (C11): Mutexes.
int mtx_unlock (mtx_t *mutex)
threads.h (C11): Mutexes.
int munlock (const void *addr, size_t len)
sys/mman.h (POSIX.1b): Functions To Lock And Unlock Pages.
int munlockall (void)
sys/mman.h (POSIX.1b): Functions To Lock And Unlock Pages.
int munmap (void *addr, size_t length)
sys/mman.h (POSIX): Memory-mapped I/O.
void muntrace (void)
mcheck.h (GNU): How to install the tracing functionality.
double nan (const char *tagp)
math.h (ISO): Setting and modifying single bits of FP values.
float nanf (const char *tagp)
math.h (ISO): Setting and modifying single bits of FP values.
_FloatN nanfN (const char *tagp)
math.h (TS 18661-3:2015): Setting and modifying single bits of FP values.
_FloatNx nanfNx (const char *tagp)
math.h (TS 18661-3:2015): Setting and modifying single bits of FP values.
long double nanl (const char *tagp)
math.h (ISO): Setting and modifying single bits of FP values.
int nanosleep (const struct timespec *requested_time, struct timespec *remaining)
time.h (POSIX.1): Sleeping.
double nearbyint (double x)
math.h (ISO): Rounding Functions.
float nearbyintf (float x)
math.h (ISO): Rounding Functions.
_FloatN nearbyintfN (_FloatN x)
math.h (TS 18661-3:2015): Rounding Functions.
_FloatNx nearbyintfNx (_FloatNx x)
math.h (TS 18661-3:2015): Rounding Functions.
long double nearbyintl (long double x)
math.h (ISO): Rounding Functions.
struct netent
netdb.h (BSD): Networks Database.
double nextafter (double x, double y)
math.h (ISO): Setting and modifying single bits of FP values.
float nextafterf (float x, float y)
math.h (ISO): Setting and modifying single bits of FP values.
_FloatN nextafterfN (_FloatN x, _FloatN y)
math.h (TS 18661-3:2015): Setting and modifying single bits of FP values.
_FloatNx nextafterfNx (_FloatNx x, _FloatNx y)
math.h (TS 18661-3:2015): Setting and modifying single bits of FP values.
long double nextafterl (long double x, long double y)
math.h (ISO): Setting and modifying single bits of FP values.
double nextdown (double x)
math.h (ISO): Setting and modifying single bits of FP values.
float nextdownf (float x)
math.h (ISO): Setting and modifying single bits of FP values.
_FloatN nextdownfN (_FloatN x)
math.h (TS 18661-3:2015): Setting and modifying single bits of FP values.
_FloatNx nextdownfNx (_FloatNx x)
math.h (TS 18661-3:2015): Setting and modifying single bits of FP values.
long double nextdownl (long double x)
math.h (ISO): Setting and modifying single bits of FP values.
double nexttoward (double x, long double y)
math.h (ISO): Setting and modifying single bits of FP values.
float nexttowardf (float x, long double y)
math.h (ISO): Setting and modifying single bits of FP values.
long double nexttowardl (long double x, long double y)
math.h (ISO): Setting and modifying single bits of FP values.
double nextup (double x)
math.h (ISO): Setting and modifying single bits of FP values.
float nextupf (float x)
math.h (ISO): Setting and modifying single bits of FP values.
_FloatN nextupfN (_FloatN x)
math.h (TS 18661-3:2015): Setting and modifying single bits of FP values.
_FloatNx nextupfNx (_FloatNx x)
math.h (TS 18661-3:2015): Setting and modifying single bits of FP values.
long double nextupl (long double x)
math.h (ISO): Setting and modifying single bits of FP values.
int nftw (const char *filename, __nftw_func_t func, int descriptors, int flag)
ftw.h (XPG4.2): Working with Directory Trees.
int nftw64 (const char *filename, __nftw64_func_t func, int descriptors, int flag)
ftw.h (Unix98): Working with Directory Trees.
char * ngettext (const char *msgid1, const char *msgid2, unsigned long int n)
libintl.h (GNU): Additional functions for more complicated situations.
int nice (int increment)
unistd.h (BSD): Functions For Traditional Scheduling.
char * nl_langinfo (nl_item item)
langinfo.h (XOPEN): Pinpoint Access to Locale Data.
nlink_t
sys/types.h (POSIX.1): The meaning of the File Attributes.
long int nrand48 (unsigned short int xsubi[3])
stdlib.h (SVID): SVID Random Number Function.
int nrand48_r (unsigned short int xsubi[3], struct drand48_data *buffer, long int *result)
stdlib.h (GNU): SVID Random Number Function.
uint32_t ntohl (uint32_t netlong)
netinet/in.h (BSD): Byte Order Conversion.
uint16_t ntohs (uint16_t netshort)
netinet/in.h (BSD): Byte Order Conversion.
int ntp_adjtime (struct timex *tptr)
sys/timex.h (GNU): Setting and Adjusting the Time.
int ntp_gettime (struct ntptimeval *tptr)
sys/timex.h (GNU): Setting and Adjusting the Time.
struct obstack
obstack.h (GNU): Creating Obstacks.
void obstack_1grow (struct obstack *obstack-ptr, char c)
obstack.h (GNU): Growing Objects.
void obstack_1grow_fast (struct obstack *obstack-ptr, char c)
obstack.h (GNU): Extra Fast Growing Objects.
int obstack_alignment_mask (struct obstack *obstack-ptr)
obstack.h (GNU): Alignment of Data in Obstacks.
void * obstack_alloc (struct obstack *obstack-ptr, int size)
obstack.h (GNU): Allocation in an Obstack.
obstack_alloc_failed_handler
obstack.h (GNU): Preparing for Using Obstacks.
void * obstack_base (struct obstack *obstack-ptr)
obstack.h (GNU): Status of an Obstack.
void obstack_blank (struct obstack *obstack-ptr, int size)
obstack.h (GNU): Growing Objects.
void obstack_blank_fast (struct obstack *obstack-ptr, int size)
obstack.h (GNU): Extra Fast Growing Objects.
int obstack_chunk_size (struct obstack *obstack-ptr)
obstack.h (GNU): Obstack Chunks.
void * obstack_copy (struct obstack *obstack-ptr, void *address, int size)
obstack.h (GNU): Allocation in an Obstack.
void * obstack_copy0 (struct obstack *obstack-ptr, void *address, int size)
obstack.h (GNU): Allocation in an Obstack.
void * obstack_finish (struct obstack *obstack-ptr)
obstack.h (GNU): Growing Objects.
void obstack_free (struct obstack *obstack-ptr, void *object)
obstack.h (GNU): Freeing Objects in an Obstack.
void obstack_grow (struct obstack *obstack-ptr, void *data, int size)
obstack.h (GNU): Growing Objects.
void obstack_grow0 (struct obstack *obstack-ptr, void *data, int size)
obstack.h (GNU): Growing Objects.
int obstack_init (struct obstack *obstack-ptr)
obstack.h (GNU): Preparing for Using Obstacks.
void obstack_int_grow (struct obstack *obstack-ptr, int data)
obstack.h (GNU): Growing Objects.
void obstack_int_grow_fast (struct obstack *obstack-ptr, int data)
obstack.h (GNU): Extra Fast Growing Objects.
void * obstack_next_free (struct obstack *obstack-ptr)
obstack.h (GNU): Status of an Obstack.
int obstack_object_size (struct obstack *obstack-ptr)
obstack.h (GNU): Growing Objects.
obstack.h (GNU): Status of an Obstack.
int obstack_printf (struct obstack *obstack, const char *template, …)
stdio.h (GNU): Dynamically Allocating Formatted Output.
void obstack_ptr_grow (struct obstack *obstack-ptr, void *data)
obstack.h (GNU): Growing Objects.
void obstack_ptr_grow_fast (struct obstack *obstack-ptr, void *data)
obstack.h (GNU): Extra Fast Growing Objects.
int obstack_room (struct obstack *obstack-ptr)
obstack.h (GNU): Extra Fast Growing Objects.
int obstack_vprintf (struct obstack *obstack, const char *template, va_list ap)
stdio.h (GNU): Variable Arguments Output Functions.
off64_t
sys/types.h (Unix98): Setting the File Position of a Descriptor.
off_t
sys/types.h (POSIX.1): Setting the File Position of a Descriptor.
size_t offsetof (type, member)
stddef.h (ISO): Structure Field Offset Measurement.
int on_exit (void (*function)(int status, void *arg), void *arg)
stdlib.h (SunOS): Cleanups on Exit.
once_flag
threads.h (C11): Call Once.
int open (const char *filename, int flags[, mode_t mode])
fcntl.h (POSIX.1): Opening and Closing Files.
int open64 (const char *filename, int flags[, mode_t mode])
fcntl.h (Unix98): Opening and Closing Files.
FILE * open_memstream (char **ptr, size_t *sizeloc)
stdio.h (GNU): String Streams.
DIR * opendir (const char *dirname)
dirent.h (POSIX.1): Opening a Directory Stream.
void openlog (const char *ident, int option, int facility)
syslog.h (BSD): openlog.
int openpty (int *amaster, int *aslave, char *name, const struct termios *termp, const struct winsize *winp)
pty.h (BSD): Opening a Pseudo-Terminal Pair.
char * optarg
unistd.h (POSIX.2): Using the getopt
function.
int opterr
unistd.h (POSIX.2): Using the getopt
function.
int optind
unistd.h (POSIX.2): Using the getopt
function.
struct option
getopt.h (GNU): Parsing Long Options with getopt_long
.
int optopt
unistd.h (POSIX.2): Using the getopt
function.
size_t parse_printf_format (const char *template, size_t n, int *argtypes)
printf.h (GNU): Parsing a Template String.
struct passwd
pwd.h (POSIX.1): The Data Structure that Describes a User.
long int pathconf (const char *filename, int parameter)
unistd.h (POSIX.1): Using pathconf
.
int pause (void)
unistd.h (POSIX.1): Using pause
.
int pclose (FILE *stream)
stdio.h (POSIX.2): Pipe to a Subprocess.
stdio.h (SVID): Pipe to a Subprocess.
stdio.h (BSD): Pipe to a Subprocess.
void perror (const char *message)
stdio.h (ISO): Error Messages.
pid_t
sys/types.h (POSIX.1): Process Identification.
int pipe (int filedes[2])
unistd.h (POSIX.1): Creating a Pipe.
int pkey_alloc (unsigned int flags, unsigned int restrictions)
sys/mman.h (Linux): Memory Protection.
int pkey_free (int key)
sys/mman.h (Linux): Memory Protection.
int pkey_get (int key)
sys/mman.h (Linux): Memory Protection.
int pkey_mprotect (void *address, size_t length, int protection, int key)
sys/mman.h (Linux): Memory Protection.
int pkey_set (int key, unsigned int rights)
sys/mman.h (Linux): Memory Protection.
FILE * popen (const char *command, const char *mode)
stdio.h (POSIX.2): Pipe to a Subprocess.
stdio.h (SVID): Pipe to a Subprocess.
stdio.h (BSD): Pipe to a Subprocess.
int posix_memalign (void **memptr, size_t alignment, size_t size)
stdlib.h (POSIX): Allocating Aligned Memory Blocks.
int posix_openpt (int flags)
stdlib.h (POSIX.1): Allocating Pseudo-Terminals.
double pow (double base, double power)
math.h (ISO): Exponentiation and Logarithms.
float powf (float base, float power)
math.h (ISO): Exponentiation and Logarithms.
_FloatN powfN (_FloatN base, _FloatN power)
math.h (TS 18661-3:2015): Exponentiation and Logarithms.
_FloatNx powfNx (_FloatNx base, _FloatNx power)
math.h (TS 18661-3:2015): Exponentiation and Logarithms.
long double powl (long double base, long double power)
math.h (ISO): Exponentiation and Logarithms.
ssize_t pread (int filedes, void *buffer, size_t size, off_t offset)
unistd.h (Unix98): Input and Output Primitives.
ssize_t pread64 (int filedes, void *buffer, size_t size, off64_t offset)
unistd.h (Unix98): Input and Output Primitives.
ssize_t preadv (int fd, const struct iovec *iov, int iovcnt, off_t offset)
sys/uio.h (BSD): Fast Scatter-Gather I/O.
ssize_t preadv2 (int fd, const struct iovec *iov, int iovcnt, off_t offset, int flags)
sys/uio.h (GNU): Fast Scatter-Gather I/O.
ssize_t preadv64 (int fd, const struct iovec *iov, int iovcnt, off64_t offset)
unistd.h (BSD): Fast Scatter-Gather I/O.
ssize_t preadv64v2 (int fd, const struct iovec *iov, int iovcnt, off64_t offset, int flags)
unistd.h (GNU): Fast Scatter-Gather I/O.
int printf (const char *template, …)
stdio.h (ISO): Formatted Output Functions.
printf_arginfo_function
printf.h (GNU): Defining the Output Handler.
printf_function
printf.h (GNU): Defining the Output Handler.
struct printf_info
printf.h (GNU): Conversion Specifier Options.
int printf_size (FILE *fp, const struct printf_info *info, const void *const *args)
printf.h (GNU): Predefined printf
Handlers.
int printf_size_info (const struct printf_info *info, size_t n, int *argtypes)
printf.h (GNU): Predefined printf
Handlers.
char * program_invocation_name
errno.h (GNU): Error Messages.
char * program_invocation_short_name
errno.h (GNU): Error Messages.
struct protoent
netdb.h (BSD): Protocols Database.
void psignal (int signum, const char *message)
signal.h (BSD): Signal Messages.
int pthread_attr_getsigmask_np (const pthread_attr_t *attr, sigset_t *sigmask)
pthread.h (GNU): Controlling the Initial Signal Mask of a New Thread.
int pthread_attr_setsigmask_np (pthread_attr_t *attr, const sigset_t *sigmask)
pthread.h (GNU): Controlling the Initial Signal Mask of a New Thread.
int pthread_clockjoin_np (pthread_t *thread, void **thread_return, clockid_t clockid, const struct timespec *abstime)
pthread.h (GNU): Functions for Waiting According to a Specific Clock.
int pthread_getattr_default_np (pthread_attr_t *attr)
pthread.h (GNU): Setting Process-wide defaults for thread attributes.
void *pthread_getspecific (pthread_key_t key)
pthread.h (POSIX): Thread-specific Data.
int pthread_key_create (pthread_key_t *key, void (*destructor)(void*))
pthread.h (POSIX): Thread-specific Data.
int pthread_key_delete (pthread_key_t key)
pthread.h (POSIX): Thread-specific Data.
int pthread_setattr_default_np (pthread_attr_t *attr)
pthread.h (GNU): Setting Process-wide defaults for thread attributes.
int pthread_setspecific (pthread_key_t key, const void *value)
pthread.h (POSIX): Thread-specific Data.
int pthread_timedjoin_np (pthread_t *thread, void **thread_return, const struct timespec *abstime)
pthread.h (GNU): Functions for Waiting According to a Specific Clock.
int pthread_tryjoin_np (pthread_t *thread, void **thread_return)
pthread.h (GNU): Functions for Waiting According to a Specific Clock.
ptrdiff_t
stddef.h (ISO): Important Data Types.
char * ptsname (int filedes)
stdlib.h (SVID): Allocating Pseudo-Terminals.
stdlib.h (XPG4.2): Allocating Pseudo-Terminals.
int ptsname_r (int filedes, char *buf, size_t len)
stdlib.h (GNU): Allocating Pseudo-Terminals.
int putc (int c, FILE *stream)
stdio.h (ISO): Simple Output by Characters or Lines.
int putc_unlocked (int c, FILE *stream)
stdio.h (POSIX): Simple Output by Characters or Lines.
int putchar (int c)
stdio.h (ISO): Simple Output by Characters or Lines.
int putchar_unlocked (int c)
stdio.h (POSIX): Simple Output by Characters or Lines.
int putenv (char *string)
stdlib.h (SVID): Environment Access.
int putpwent (const struct passwd *p, FILE *stream)
pwd.h (SVID): Writing a User Entry.
int puts (const char *s)
stdio.h (ISO): Simple Output by Characters or Lines.
struct utmp * pututline (const struct utmp *utmp)
utmp.h (SVID): Manipulating the User Accounting Database.
struct utmpx * pututxline (const struct utmpx *utmp)
utmpx.h (XPG4.2): XPG User Accounting Database Functions.
int putw (int w, FILE *stream)
stdio.h (SVID): Simple Output by Characters or Lines.
wint_t putwc (wchar_t wc, FILE *stream)
wchar.h (ISO): Simple Output by Characters or Lines.
wint_t putwc_unlocked (wchar_t wc, FILE *stream)
wchar.h (GNU): Simple Output by Characters or Lines.
wint_t putwchar (wchar_t wc)
wchar.h (ISO): Simple Output by Characters or Lines.
wint_t putwchar_unlocked (wchar_t wc)
wchar.h (GNU): Simple Output by Characters or Lines.
ssize_t pwrite (int filedes, const void *buffer, size_t size, off_t offset)
unistd.h (Unix98): Input and Output Primitives.
ssize_t pwrite64 (int filedes, const void *buffer, size_t size, off64_t offset)
unistd.h (Unix98): Input and Output Primitives.
ssize_t pwritev (int fd, const struct iovec *iov, int iovcnt, off_t offset)
sys/uio.h (BSD): Fast Scatter-Gather I/O.
ssize_t pwritev2 (int fd, const struct iovec *iov, int iovcnt, off_t offset, int flags)
sys/uio.h (GNU): Fast Scatter-Gather I/O.
ssize_t pwritev64 (int fd, const struct iovec *iov, int iovcnt, off64_t offset)
unistd.h (BSD): Fast Scatter-Gather I/O.
ssize_t pwritev64v2 (int fd, const struct iovec *iov, int iovcnt, off64_t offset, int flags)
unistd.h (GNU): Fast Scatter-Gather I/O.
char * qecvt (long double value, int ndigit, int *decpt, int *neg)
stdlib.h (GNU): Old-fashioned System V number-to-string functions.
int qecvt_r (long double value, int ndigit, int *decpt, int *neg, char *buf, size_t len)
stdlib.h (GNU): Old-fashioned System V number-to-string functions.
char * qfcvt (long double value, int ndigit, int *decpt, int *neg)
stdlib.h (GNU): Old-fashioned System V number-to-string functions.
int qfcvt_r (long double value, int ndigit, int *decpt, int *neg, char *buf, size_t len)
stdlib.h (GNU): Old-fashioned System V number-to-string functions.
char * qgcvt (long double value, int ndigit, char *buf)
stdlib.h (GNU): Old-fashioned System V number-to-string functions.
void qsort (void *array, size_t count, size_t size, comparison_fn_t compare)
stdlib.h (ISO): Array Sort Function.
int raise (int signum)
signal.h (ISO): Signaling Yourself.
int rand (void)
stdlib.h (ISO): ISO C Random Number Functions.
int rand_r (unsigned int *seed)
stdlib.h (POSIX.1): ISO C Random Number Functions.
long int random (void)
stdlib.h (BSD): BSD Random Number Functions.
struct random_data
stdlib.h (GNU): BSD Random Number Functions.
int random_r (struct random_data *restrict buf, int32_t *restrict result)
stdlib.h (GNU): BSD Random Number Functions.
void * rawmemchr (const void *block, int c)
string.h (GNU): Search Functions.
ssize_t read (int filedes, void *buffer, size_t size)
unistd.h (POSIX.1): Input and Output Primitives.
struct dirent * readdir (DIR *dirstream)
dirent.h (POSIX.1): Reading and Closing a Directory Stream.
struct dirent64 * readdir64 (DIR *dirstream)
dirent.h (LFS): Reading and Closing a Directory Stream.
int readdir64_r (DIR *dirstream, struct dirent64 *entry, struct dirent64 **result)
dirent.h (LFS): Reading and Closing a Directory Stream.
int readdir_r (DIR *dirstream, struct dirent *entry, struct dirent **result)
dirent.h (GNU): Reading and Closing a Directory Stream.
ssize_t readlink (const char *filename, char *buffer, size_t size)
unistd.h (BSD): Symbolic Links.
ssize_t readv (int filedes, const struct iovec *vector, int count)
sys/uio.h (BSD): Fast Scatter-Gather I/O.
void * realloc (void *ptr, size_t newsize)
malloc.h (ISO): Changing the Size of a Block.
stdlib.h (ISO): Changing the Size of a Block.
void * reallocarray (void *ptr, size_t nmemb, size_t size)
malloc.h (BSD): Changing the Size of a Block.
stdlib.h (BSD): Changing the Size of a Block.
char * realpath (const char *restrict name, char *restrict resolved)
stdlib.h (XPG): Symbolic Links.
ssize_t recv (int socket, void *buffer, size_t size, int flags)
sys/socket.h (BSD): Receiving Data.
ssize_t recvfrom (int socket, void *buffer, size_t size, int flags, struct sockaddr *addr, socklen_t *length-ptr)
sys/socket.h (BSD): Receiving Datagrams.
int regcomp (regex_t *restrict compiled, const char *restrict pattern, int cflags)
regex.h (POSIX.2): POSIX Regular Expression Compilation.
size_t regerror (int errcode, const regex_t *restrict compiled, char *restrict buffer, size_t length)
regex.h (POSIX.2): POSIX Regexp Matching Cleanup.
regex_t
regex.h (POSIX.2): POSIX Regular Expression Compilation.
int regexec (const regex_t *restrict compiled, const char *restrict string, size_t nmatch, regmatch_t matchptr[restrict], int eflags)
regex.h (POSIX.2): Matching a Compiled POSIX Regular Expression.
void regfree (regex_t *compiled)
regex.h (POSIX.2): POSIX Regexp Matching Cleanup.
int register_printf_function (int spec, printf_function handler-function, printf_arginfo_function arginfo-function)
printf.h (GNU): Registering New Conversions.
regmatch_t
regex.h (POSIX.2): Match Results with Subexpressions.
regoff_t
regex.h (POSIX.2): Match Results with Subexpressions.
double remainder (double numerator, double denominator)
math.h (ISO): Remainder Functions.
float remainderf (float numerator, float denominator)
math.h (ISO): Remainder Functions.
_FloatN remainderfN (_FloatN numerator, _FloatN denominator)
math.h (TS 18661-3:2015): Remainder Functions.
_FloatNx remainderfNx (_FloatNx numerator, _FloatNx denominator)
math.h (TS 18661-3:2015): Remainder Functions.
long double remainderl (long double numerator, long double denominator)
math.h (ISO): Remainder Functions.
int remove (const char *filename)
stdio.h (ISO): Deleting Files.
int rename (const char *oldname, const char *newname)
stdio.h (ISO): Renaming Files.
void rewind (FILE *stream)
stdio.h (ISO): File Positioning.
void rewinddir (DIR *dirstream)
dirent.h (POSIX.1): Random Access in a Directory Stream.
char * rindex (const char *string, int c)
string.h (BSD): Search Functions.
double rint (double x)
math.h (ISO): Rounding Functions.
float rintf (float x)
math.h (ISO): Rounding Functions.
_FloatN rintfN (_FloatN x)
math.h (TS 18661-3:2015): Rounding Functions.
_FloatNx rintfNx (_FloatNx x)
math.h (TS 18661-3:2015): Rounding Functions.
long double rintl (long double x)
math.h (ISO): Rounding Functions.
struct rlimit
sys/resource.h (BSD): Limiting Resource Usage.
struct rlimit64
sys/resource.h (Unix98): Limiting Resource Usage.
int rmdir (const char *filename)
unistd.h (POSIX.1): Deleting Files.
double round (double x)
math.h (ISO): Rounding Functions.
double roundeven (double x)
math.h (ISO): Rounding Functions.
float roundevenf (float x)
math.h (ISO): Rounding Functions.
_FloatN roundevenfN (_FloatN x)
math.h (TS 18661-3:2015): Rounding Functions.
_FloatNx roundevenfNx (_FloatNx x)
math.h (TS 18661-3:2015): Rounding Functions.
long double roundevenl (long double x)
math.h (ISO): Rounding Functions.
float roundf (float x)
math.h (ISO): Rounding Functions.
_FloatN roundfN (_FloatN x)
math.h (TS 18661-3:2015): Rounding Functions.
_FloatNx roundfNx (_FloatNx x)
math.h (TS 18661-3:2015): Rounding Functions.
long double roundl (long double x)
math.h (ISO): Rounding Functions.
int rpmatch (const char *response)
stdlib.h (GNU): Yes-or-No Questions.
struct rseq
sys/rseq.h (Linux): Restartable Sequences.
struct rusage
sys/resource.h (BSD): Resource Usage.
void *sbrk (ptrdiff_t delta)
unistd.h (BSD): Resizing the Data Segment.
double scalb (double value, double exponent)
math.h (BSD): Normalization Functions.
float scalbf (float value, float exponent)
math.h (BSD): Normalization Functions.
long double scalbl (long double value, long double exponent)
math.h (BSD): Normalization Functions.
double scalbln (double x, long int n)
math.h (BSD): Normalization Functions.
float scalblnf (float x, long int n)
math.h (BSD): Normalization Functions.
_FloatN scalblnfN (_FloatN x, long int n)
math.h (TS 18661-3:2015): Normalization Functions.
_FloatNx scalblnfNx (_FloatNx x, long int n)
math.h (TS 18661-3:2015): Normalization Functions.
long double scalblnl (long double x, long int n)
math.h (BSD): Normalization Functions.
double scalbn (double x, int n)
math.h (BSD): Normalization Functions.
float scalbnf (float x, int n)
math.h (BSD): Normalization Functions.
_FloatN scalbnfN (_FloatN x, int n)
math.h (TS 18661-3:2015): Normalization Functions.
_FloatNx scalbnfNx (_FloatNx x, int n)
math.h (TS 18661-3:2015): Normalization Functions.
long double scalbnl (long double x, int n)
math.h (BSD): Normalization Functions.
int scandir (const char *dir, struct dirent ***namelist, int (*selector) (const struct dirent *), int (*cmp) (const struct dirent **, const struct dirent **))
dirent.h (BSD): Scanning the Content of a Directory.
dirent.h (SVID): Scanning the Content of a Directory.
int scandir64 (const char *dir, struct dirent64 ***namelist, int (*selector) (const struct dirent64 *), int (*cmp) (const struct dirent64 **, const struct dirent64 **))
dirent.h (GNU): Scanning the Content of a Directory.
int scanf (const char *template, …)
stdio.h (ISO): Formatted Input Functions.
int sched_get_priority_max (int policy)
sched.h (POSIX): Basic Scheduling Functions.
int sched_get_priority_min (int policy)
sched.h (POSIX): Basic Scheduling Functions.
int sched_getaffinity (pid_t pid, size_t cpusetsize, cpu_set_t *cpuset)
sched.h (GNU): Limiting execution to certain CPUs.
int sched_getparam (pid_t pid, struct sched_param *param)
sched.h (POSIX): Basic Scheduling Functions.
int sched_getscheduler (pid_t pid)
sched.h (POSIX): Basic Scheduling Functions.
struct sched_param
sched.h (POSIX): Basic Scheduling Functions.
int sched_rr_get_interval (pid_t pid, struct timespec *interval)
sched.h (POSIX): Basic Scheduling Functions.
int sched_setaffinity (pid_t pid, size_t cpusetsize, const cpu_set_t *cpuset)
sched.h (GNU): Limiting execution to certain CPUs.
int sched_setparam (pid_t pid, const struct sched_param *param)
sched.h (POSIX): Basic Scheduling Functions.
int sched_setscheduler (pid_t pid, int policy, const struct sched_param *param)
sched.h (POSIX): Basic Scheduling Functions.
int sched_yield (void)
sched.h (POSIX): Basic Scheduling Functions.
char * secure_getenv (const char *name)
stdlib.h (GNU): Environment Access.
unsigned short int * seed48 (unsigned short int seed16v[3])
stdlib.h (SVID): SVID Random Number Function.
int seed48_r (unsigned short int seed16v[3], struct drand48_data *buffer)
stdlib.h (GNU): SVID Random Number Function.
void seekdir (DIR *dirstream, long int pos)
dirent.h (BSD): Random Access in a Directory Stream.
int select (int nfds, fd_set *read-fds, fd_set *write-fds, fd_set *except-fds, struct timeval *timeout)
sys/types.h (BSD): Waiting for Input or Output.
ssize_t send (int socket, const void *buffer, size_t size, int flags)
sys/socket.h (BSD): Sending Data.
ssize_t sendto (int socket, const void *buffer, size_t size, int flags, struct sockaddr *addr, socklen_t length)
sys/socket.h (BSD): Sending Datagrams.
struct servent
netdb.h (BSD): The Services Database.
void setbuf (FILE *stream, char *buf)
stdio.h (ISO): Controlling Which Kind of Buffering.
void setbuffer (FILE *stream, char *buf, size_t size)
stdio.h (BSD): Controlling Which Kind of Buffering.
int setcontext (const ucontext_t *ucp)
ucontext.h (SVID): Complete Context Control.
int setdomainname (const char *name, size_t length)
unistd.h (???): Host Identification.
int setegid (gid_t newgid)
unistd.h (POSIX.1): Setting the Group IDs.
int setenv (const char *name, const char *value, int replace)
stdlib.h (BSD): Environment Access.
int seteuid (uid_t neweuid)
unistd.h (POSIX.1): Setting the User ID.
int setfsent (void)
fstab.h (BSD): The fstab file.
int setgid (gid_t newgid)
unistd.h (POSIX.1): Setting the Group IDs.
void setgrent (void)
grp.h (SVID): Scanning the List of All Groups.
grp.h (BSD): Scanning the List of All Groups.
int setgroups (size_t count, const gid_t *groups)
grp.h (BSD): Setting the Group IDs.
void sethostent (int stayopen)
netdb.h (BSD): Host Names.
int sethostid (long int id)
unistd.h (BSD): Host Identification.
int sethostname (const char *name, size_t length)
unistd.h (BSD): Host Identification.
int setitimer (int which, const struct itimerval *new, struct itimerval *old)
sys/time.h (BSD): Setting an Alarm.
int setjmp (jmp_buf state)
setjmp.h (ISO): Details of Non-Local Exits.
void setlinebuf (FILE *stream)
stdio.h (BSD): Controlling Which Kind of Buffering.
char * setlocale (int category, const char *locale)
locale.h (ISO): How Programs Set the Locale.
int setlogmask (int mask)
syslog.h (BSD): setlogmask.
FILE * setmntent (const char *file, const char *mode)
mntent.h (BSD): The mtab file.
void setnetent (int stayopen)
netdb.h (BSD): Networks Database.
int setnetgrent (const char *netgroup)
netdb.h (BSD): Looking up one Netgroup.
int setpayload (double *x, double payload)
math.h (ISO): Setting and modifying single bits of FP values.
int setpayloadf (float *x, float payload)
math.h (ISO): Setting and modifying single bits of FP values.
int setpayloadfN (_FloatN *x, _FloatN payload)
math.h (TS 18661-3:2015): Setting and modifying single bits of FP values.
int setpayloadfNx (_FloatNx *x, _FloatNx payload)
math.h (TS 18661-3:2015): Setting and modifying single bits of FP values.
int setpayloadl (long double *x, long double payload)
math.h (ISO): Setting and modifying single bits of FP values.
int setpayloadsig (double *x, double payload)
math.h (ISO): Setting and modifying single bits of FP values.
int setpayloadsigf (float *x, float payload)
math.h (ISO): Setting and modifying single bits of FP values.
int setpayloadsigfN (_FloatN *x, _FloatN payload)
math.h (TS 18661-3:2015): Setting and modifying single bits of FP values.
int setpayloadsigfNx (_FloatNx *x, _FloatNx payload)
math.h (TS 18661-3:2015): Setting and modifying single bits of FP values.
int setpayloadsigl (long double *x, long double payload)
math.h (ISO): Setting and modifying single bits of FP values.
int setpgid (pid_t pid, pid_t pgid)
unistd.h (POSIX.1): Process Group Functions.
int setpgrp (pid_t pid, pid_t pgid)
unistd.h (BSD): Process Group Functions.
int setpriority (int class, int id, int niceval)
sys/resource.h (BSD): Functions For Traditional Scheduling.
sys/resource.h (POSIX): Functions For Traditional Scheduling.
void setprotoent (int stayopen)
netdb.h (BSD): Protocols Database.
void setpwent (void)
pwd.h (SVID): Scanning the List of All Users.
pwd.h (BSD): Scanning the List of All Users.
int setregid (gid_t rgid, gid_t egid)
unistd.h (BSD): Setting the Group IDs.
int setreuid (uid_t ruid, uid_t euid)
unistd.h (BSD): Setting the User ID.
int setrlimit (int resource, const struct rlimit *rlp)
sys/resource.h (BSD): Limiting Resource Usage.
int setrlimit64 (int resource, const struct rlimit64 *rlp)
sys/resource.h (Unix98): Limiting Resource Usage.
void setservent (int stayopen)
netdb.h (BSD): The Services Database.
pid_t setsid (void)
unistd.h (POSIX.1): Process Group Functions.
int setsockopt (int socket, int level, int optname, const void *optval, socklen_t optlen)
sys/socket.h (BSD): Socket Option Functions.
char * setstate (char *state)
stdlib.h (BSD): BSD Random Number Functions.
int setstate_r (char *restrict statebuf, struct random_data *restrict buf)
stdlib.h (GNU): BSD Random Number Functions.
int settimeofday (const struct timeval *tp, const void *tzp)
sys/time.h (BSD): Setting and Adjusting the Time.
int setuid (uid_t newuid)
unistd.h (POSIX.1): Setting the User ID.
void setutent (void)
utmp.h (SVID): Manipulating the User Accounting Database.
void setutxent (void)
utmpx.h (XPG4.2): XPG User Accounting Database Functions.
int setvbuf (FILE *stream, char *buf, int mode, size_t size)
stdio.h (ISO): Controlling Which Kind of Buffering.
struct sgttyb
termios.h (BSD): BSD Terminal Modes.
int shm_open (const char *name, int oflag, mode_t mode)
sys/mman.h (POSIX): Memory-mapped I/O.
int shutdown (int socket, int how)
sys/socket.h (BSD): Closing a Socket.
sig_atomic_t
signal.h (ISO): Atomic Types.
const char * sigabbrev_np (int signum)
string.h (GNU): Signal Messages.
int sigaction (int signum, const struct sigaction *restrict action, struct sigaction *restrict old-action)
signal.h (POSIX.1): Advanced Signal Handling.
struct sigaction
signal.h (POSIX.1): Advanced Signal Handling.
int sigaddset (sigset_t *set, int signum)
signal.h (POSIX.1): Signal Sets.
int sigaltstack (const stack_t *restrict stack, stack_t *restrict oldstack)
signal.h (XPG): Using a Separate Signal Stack.
int sigblock (int mask)
signal.h (BSD): BSD Signal Handling.
int sigdelset (sigset_t *set, int signum)
signal.h (POSIX.1): Signal Sets.
const char * sigdescr_np (int signum)
string.h (GNU): Signal Messages.
int sigemptyset (sigset_t *set)
signal.h (POSIX.1): Signal Sets.
int sigfillset (sigset_t *set)
signal.h (POSIX.1): Signal Sets.
sighandler_t
signal.h (GNU): Basic Signal Handling.
int siginterrupt (int signum, int failflag)
signal.h (XPG): BSD Signal Handling.
int sigismember (const sigset_t *set, int signum)
signal.h (POSIX.1): Signal Sets.
sigjmp_buf
setjmp.h (POSIX.1): Non-Local Exits and Signals.
void siglongjmp (sigjmp_buf state, int value)
setjmp.h (POSIX.1): Non-Local Exits and Signals.
int sigmask (int signum)
signal.h (BSD): BSD Signal Handling.
sighandler_t signal (int signum, sighandler_t action)
signal.h (ISO): Basic Signal Handling.
int signbit (float-type x)
math.h (ISO): Setting and modifying single bits of FP values.
double significand (double x)
math.h (BSD): Normalization Functions.
float significandf (float x)
math.h (BSD): Normalization Functions.
long double significandl (long double x)
math.h (BSD): Normalization Functions.
int sigpause (int mask)
signal.h (BSD): BSD Signal Handling.
int sigpending (sigset_t *set)
signal.h (POSIX.1): Checking for Pending Signals.
int sigprocmask (int how, const sigset_t *restrict set, sigset_t *restrict oldset)
signal.h (POSIX.1): Process Signal Mask.
sigset_t
signal.h (POSIX.1): Signal Sets.
int sigsetjmp (sigjmp_buf state, int savesigs)
setjmp.h (POSIX.1): Non-Local Exits and Signals.
int sigsetmask (int mask)
signal.h (BSD): BSD Signal Handling.
int sigstack (struct sigstack *stack, struct sigstack *oldstack)
signal.h (BSD): Using a Separate Signal Stack.
struct sigstack
signal.h (BSD): Using a Separate Signal Stack.
int sigsuspend (const sigset_t *set)
signal.h (POSIX.1): Using sigsuspend
.
double sin (double x)
math.h (ISO): Trigonometric Functions.
void sincos (double x, double *sinx, double *cosx)
math.h (GNU): Trigonometric Functions.
void sincosf (float x, float *sinx, float *cosx)
math.h (GNU): Trigonometric Functions.
_FloatN sincosfN (_FloatN x, _FloatN *sinx, _FloatN *cosx)
math.h (GNU): Trigonometric Functions.
_FloatNx sincosfNx (_FloatNx x, _FloatNx *sinx, _FloatNx *cosx)
math.h (GNU): Trigonometric Functions.
void sincosl (long double x, long double *sinx, long double *cosx)
math.h (GNU): Trigonometric Functions.
float sinf (float x)
math.h (ISO): Trigonometric Functions.
_FloatN sinfN (_FloatN x)
math.h (TS 18661-3:2015): Trigonometric Functions.
_FloatNx sinfNx (_FloatNx x)
math.h (TS 18661-3:2015): Trigonometric Functions.
double sinh (double x)
math.h (ISO): Hyperbolic Functions.
float sinhf (float x)
math.h (ISO): Hyperbolic Functions.
_FloatN sinhfN (_FloatN x)
math.h (TS 18661-3:2015): Hyperbolic Functions.
_FloatNx sinhfNx (_FloatNx x)
math.h (TS 18661-3:2015): Hyperbolic Functions.
long double sinhl (long double x)
math.h (ISO): Hyperbolic Functions.
long double sinl (long double x)
math.h (ISO): Trigonometric Functions.
size_t
stddef.h (ISO): Important Data Types.
unsigned int sleep (unsigned int seconds)
unistd.h (POSIX.1): Sleeping.
int snprintf (char *s, size_t size, const char *template, …)
stdio.h (GNU): Formatted Output Functions.
struct sockaddr
sys/socket.h (BSD): Address Formats.
struct sockaddr_in
netinet/in.h (BSD): Internet Socket Address Formats.
struct sockaddr_un
sys/un.h (BSD): Details of Local Namespace.
int socket (int namespace, int style, int protocol)
sys/socket.h (BSD): Creating a Socket.
int socketpair (int namespace, int style, int protocol, int filedes[2])
sys/socket.h (BSD): Socket Pairs.
speed_t
termios.h (POSIX.1): Line Speed.
int sprintf (char *s, const char *template, …)
stdio.h (ISO): Formatted Output Functions.
double sqrt (double x)
math.h (ISO): Exponentiation and Logarithms.
float sqrtf (float x)
math.h (ISO): Exponentiation and Logarithms.
_FloatN sqrtfN (_FloatN x)
math.h (TS 18661-3:2015): Exponentiation and Logarithms.
_FloatNx sqrtfNx (_FloatNx x)
math.h (TS 18661-3:2015): Exponentiation and Logarithms.
long double sqrtl (long double x)
math.h (ISO): Exponentiation and Logarithms.
void srand (unsigned int seed)
stdlib.h (ISO): ISO C Random Number Functions.
void srand48 (long int seedval)
stdlib.h (SVID): SVID Random Number Function.
int srand48_r (long int seedval, struct drand48_data *buffer)
stdlib.h (GNU): SVID Random Number Function.
void srandom (unsigned int seed)
stdlib.h (BSD): BSD Random Number Functions.
int srandom_r (unsigned int seed, struct random_data *buf)
stdlib.h (GNU): BSD Random Number Functions.
int sscanf (const char *s, const char *template, …)
stdio.h (ISO): Formatted Input Functions.
sighandler_t ssignal (int signum, sighandler_t action)
signal.h (SVID): Basic Signal Handling.
ssize_t
unistd.h (POSIX.1): Input and Output Primitives.
stack_t
signal.h (XPG): Using a Separate Signal Stack.
int stat (const char *filename, struct stat *buf)
sys/stat.h (POSIX.1): Reading the Attributes of a File.
struct stat
sys/stat.h (POSIX.1): The meaning of the File Attributes.
int stat64 (const char *filename, struct stat64 *buf)
sys/stat.h (Unix98): Reading the Attributes of a File.
struct stat64
sys/stat.h (LFS): The meaning of the File Attributes.
FILE * stderr
stdio.h (ISO): Standard Streams.
FILE * stdin
stdio.h (ISO): Standard Streams.
FILE * stdout
stdio.h (ISO): Standard Streams.
int stime (const time_t *newtime)
time.h (SVID): Setting and Adjusting the Time.
time.h (XPG): Setting and Adjusting the Time.
char * stpcpy (char *restrict to, const char *restrict from)
string.h (Unknown origin): Copying Strings and Arrays.
char * stpncpy (char *restrict to, const char *restrict from, size_t size)
string.h (GNU): Truncating Strings while Copying.
int strcasecmp (const char *s1, const char *s2)
string.h (BSD): String/Array Comparison.
char * strcasestr (const char *haystack, const char *needle)
string.h (GNU): Search Functions.
char * strcat (char *restrict to, const char *restrict from)
string.h (ISO): Concatenating Strings.
char * strchr (const char *string, int c)
string.h (ISO): Search Functions.
char * strchrnul (const char *string, int c)
string.h (GNU): Search Functions.
int strcmp (const char *s1, const char *s2)
string.h (ISO): String/Array Comparison.
int strcoll (const char *s1, const char *s2)
string.h (ISO): Collation Functions.
char * strcpy (char *restrict to, const char *restrict from)
string.h (ISO): Copying Strings and Arrays.
size_t strcspn (const char *string, const char *stopset)
string.h (ISO): Search Functions.
char * strdup (const char *s)
string.h (SVID): Copying Strings and Arrays.
char * strdupa (const char *s)
string.h (GNU): Copying Strings and Arrays.
char * strerror (int errnum)
string.h (ISO): Error Messages.
char * strerror_l (int errnum, locale_t locale)
string.h (POSIX): Error Messages.
char * strerror_r (int errnum, char *buf, size_t n)
string.h (GNU): Error Messages.
int strerror_r (int errnum, char *buf, size_t n)
string.h (POSIX): Error Messages.
const char * strerrordesc_np (int errnum)
string.h (GNU): Error Messages.
const char * strerrorname_np (int errnum)
string.h (GNU): Error Messages.
int strfromd (char *restrict string, size_t size, const char *restrict format, double value)
stdlib.h (ISO/IEC TS 18661-1): Printing of Floats.
int strfromf (char *restrict string, size_t size, const char *restrict format, float value)
stdlib.h (ISO/IEC TS 18661-1): Printing of Floats.
int strfromfN (char *restrict string, size_t size, const char *restrict format, _FloatN value)
stdlib.h (ISO/IEC TS 18661-3): Printing of Floats.
int strfromfNx (char *restrict string, size_t size, const char *restrict format, _FloatNx value)
stdlib.h (ISO/IEC TS 18661-3): Printing of Floats.
int strfroml (char *restrict string, size_t size, const char *restrict format, long double value)
stdlib.h (ISO/IEC TS 18661-1): Printing of Floats.
char * strfry (char *string)
string.h (GNU): Shuffling Bytes.
size_t strftime (char *s, size_t size, const char *template, const struct tm *brokentime)
time.h (ISO): Formatting Calendar Time.
size_t strlcat (char *restrict to, const char *restrict from, size_t size)
string.h (BSD): Truncating Strings while Copying.
size_t strlcpy (char *restrict to, const char *restrict from, size_t size)
string.h (BSD): Truncating Strings while Copying.
size_t strlen (const char *s)
string.h (ISO): String Length.
int strncasecmp (const char *s1, const char *s2, size_t n)
string.h (BSD): String/Array Comparison.
char * strncat (char *restrict to, const char *restrict from, size_t size)
string.h (ISO): Truncating Strings while Copying.
int strncmp (const char *s1, const char *s2, size_t size)
string.h (ISO): String/Array Comparison.
char * strncpy (char *restrict to, const char *restrict from, size_t size)
string.h (C90): Truncating Strings while Copying.
char * strndup (const char *s, size_t size)
string.h (GNU): Truncating Strings while Copying.
char * strndupa (const char *s, size_t size)
string.h (GNU): Truncating Strings while Copying.
size_t strnlen (const char *s, size_t maxlen)
string.h (GNU): String Length.
char * strpbrk (const char *string, const char *stopset)
string.h (ISO): Search Functions.
char * strptime (const char *s, const char *fmt, struct tm *tp)
time.h (XPG4): Interpret string according to given format.
char * strrchr (const char *string, int c)
string.h (ISO): Search Functions.
char * strsep (char **string_ptr, const char *delimiter)
string.h (BSD): Finding Tokens in a String.
char * strsignal (int signum)
string.h (GNU): Signal Messages.
size_t strspn (const char *string, const char *skipset)
string.h (ISO): Search Functions.
char * strstr (const char *haystack, const char *needle)
string.h (ISO): Search Functions.
double strtod (const char *restrict string, char **restrict tailptr)
stdlib.h (ISO): Parsing of Floats.
float strtof (const char *string, char **tailptr)
stdlib.h (ISO): Parsing of Floats.
_FloatN strtofN (const char *string, char **tailptr)
stdlib.h (ISO/IEC TS 18661-3): Parsing of Floats.
_FloatNx strtofNx (const char *string, char **tailptr)
stdlib.h (ISO/IEC TS 18661-3): Parsing of Floats.
intmax_t strtoimax (const char *restrict string, char **restrict tailptr, int base)
inttypes.h (ISO): Parsing of Integers.
char * strtok (char *restrict newstring, const char *restrict delimiters)
string.h (ISO): Finding Tokens in a String.
char * strtok_r (char *newstring, const char *delimiters, char **save_ptr)
string.h (POSIX): Finding Tokens in a String.
long int strtol (const char *restrict string, char **restrict tailptr, int base)
stdlib.h (ISO): Parsing of Integers.
long double strtold (const char *string, char **tailptr)
stdlib.h (ISO): Parsing of Floats.
long long int strtoll (const char *restrict string, char **restrict tailptr, int base)
stdlib.h (ISO): Parsing of Integers.
long long int strtoq (const char *restrict string, char **restrict tailptr, int base)
stdlib.h (BSD): Parsing of Integers.
unsigned long int strtoul (const char *restrict string, char **restrict tailptr, int base)
stdlib.h (ISO): Parsing of Integers.
unsigned long long int strtoull (const char *restrict string, char **restrict tailptr, int base)
stdlib.h (ISO): Parsing of Integers.
uintmax_t strtoumax (const char *restrict string, char **restrict tailptr, int base)
inttypes.h (ISO): Parsing of Integers.
unsigned long long int strtouq (const char *restrict string, char **restrict tailptr, int base)
stdlib.h (BSD): Parsing of Integers.
int strverscmp (const char *s1, const char *s2)
string.h (GNU): String/Array Comparison.
size_t strxfrm (char *restrict to, const char *restrict from, size_t size)
string.h (ISO): Collation Functions.
int stty (int filedes, const struct sgttyb *attributes)
sgtty.h (BSD): BSD Terminal Modes.
int swapcontext (ucontext_t *restrict oucp, const ucontext_t *restrict ucp)
ucontext.h (SVID): Complete Context Control.
int swprintf (wchar_t *ws, size_t size, const wchar_t *template, …)
wchar.h (GNU): Formatted Output Functions.
int swscanf (const wchar_t *ws, const wchar_t *template, …)
wchar.h (ISO): Formatted Input Functions.
int symlink (const char *oldname, const char *newname)
unistd.h (BSD): Symbolic Links.
void sync (void)
unistd.h (X/Open): Synchronizing I/O operations.
long int syscall (long int sysno, …)
unistd.h (???): System Calls.
long int sysconf (int parameter)
unistd.h (POSIX.1): Definition of sysconf
.
void syslog (int facility_priority, const char *format, …)
syslog.h (BSD): syslog, vsyslog.
int system (const char *command)
stdlib.h (ISO): Running a Command.
sighandler_t sysv_signal (int signum, sighandler_t action)
signal.h (GNU): Basic Signal Handling.
double tan (double x)
math.h (ISO): Trigonometric Functions.
float tanf (float x)
math.h (ISO): Trigonometric Functions.
_FloatN tanfN (_FloatN x)
math.h (TS 18661-3:2015): Trigonometric Functions.
_FloatNx tanfNx (_FloatNx x)
math.h (TS 18661-3:2015): Trigonometric Functions.
double tanh (double x)
math.h (ISO): Hyperbolic Functions.
float tanhf (float x)
math.h (ISO): Hyperbolic Functions.
_FloatN tanhfN (_FloatN x)
math.h (TS 18661-3:2015): Hyperbolic Functions.
_FloatNx tanhfNx (_FloatNx x)
math.h (TS 18661-3:2015): Hyperbolic Functions.
long double tanhl (long double x)
math.h (ISO): Hyperbolic Functions.
long double tanl (long double x)
math.h (ISO): Trigonometric Functions.
int tcdrain (int filedes)
termios.h (POSIX.1): Line Control Functions.
tcflag_t
termios.h (POSIX.1): Terminal Mode Data Types.
int tcflow (int filedes, int action)
termios.h (POSIX.1): Line Control Functions.
int tcflush (int filedes, int queue)
termios.h (POSIX.1): Line Control Functions.
int tcgetattr (int filedes, struct termios *termios-p)
termios.h (POSIX.1): Terminal Mode Functions.
pid_t tcgetpgrp (int filedes)
unistd.h (POSIX.1): Functions for Controlling Terminal Access.
pid_t tcgetsid (int fildes)
termios.h (Unix98): Functions for Controlling Terminal Access.
int tcsendbreak (int filedes, int duration)
termios.h (POSIX.1): Line Control Functions.
int tcsetattr (int filedes, int when, const struct termios *termios-p)
termios.h (POSIX.1): Terminal Mode Functions.
int tcsetpgrp (int filedes, pid_t pgid)
unistd.h (POSIX.1): Functions for Controlling Terminal Access.
void * tdelete (const void *key, void **rootp, comparison_fn_t compar)
search.h (SVID): The tsearch
function..
void tdestroy (void *vroot, __free_fn_t freefct)
search.h (GNU): The tsearch
function..
long int telldir (DIR *dirstream)
dirent.h (BSD): Random Access in a Directory Stream.
char * tempnam (const char *dir, const char *prefix)
stdio.h (SVID): Temporary Files.
struct termios
termios.h (POSIX.1): Terminal Mode Data Types.
char * textdomain (const char *domainname)
libintl.h (GNU): How to determine which catalog to be used.
void * tfind (const void *key, void *const *rootp, comparison_fn_t compar)
search.h (SVID): The tsearch
function..
double tgamma (double x)
math.h (XPG): Special Functions.
math.h (ISO): Special Functions.
float tgammaf (float x)
math.h (XPG): Special Functions.
math.h (ISO): Special Functions.
_FloatN tgammafN (_FloatN x)
math.h (TS 18661-3:2015): Special Functions.
_FloatNx tgammafNx (_FloatNx x)
math.h (TS 18661-3:2015): Special Functions.
long double tgammal (long double x)
math.h (XPG): Special Functions.
math.h (ISO): Special Functions.
int tgkill (pid_t pid, pid_t tid, int signum)
signal.h (Linux): Signaling Another Process.
thrd_busy
threads.h (C11): Return Values.
int thrd_create (thrd_t *thr, thrd_start_t func, void *arg)
threads.h (C11): Creation and Control.
thrd_t thrd_current (void)
threads.h (C11): Creation and Control.
int thrd_detach (thrd_t thr)
threads.h (C11): Creation and Control.
int thrd_equal (thrd_t lhs, thrd_t rhs)
threads.h (C11): Creation and Control.
thrd_error
threads.h (C11): Return Values.
_Noreturn void thrd_exit (int res)
threads.h (C11): Creation and Control.
int thrd_join (thrd_t thr, int *res)
threads.h (C11): Creation and Control.
thrd_nomem
threads.h (C11): Return Values.
int thrd_sleep (const struct timespec *time_point, struct timespec *remaining)
threads.h (C11): Creation and Control.
thrd_start_t
threads.h (C11): Creation and Control.
thrd_success
threads.h (C11): Return Values.
thrd_t
threads.h (C11): Creation and Control.
thrd_timedout
threads.h (C11): Return Values.
void thrd_yield (void)
threads.h (C11): Creation and Control.
thread_local
threads.h (C11): Thread-local Storage.
time_t time (time_t *result)
time.h (ISO): Getting the Time.
time_t
time.h (ISO): Time Types.
time_t timegm (struct tm *brokentime)
time.h (???): Broken-down Time.
time_t timelocal (struct tm *brokentime)
time.h (???): Broken-down Time.
clock_t times (struct tms *buffer)
sys/times.h (POSIX.1): Processor Time Inquiry.
struct timespec
time.h (POSIX.1): Time Types.
struct timeval
sys/time.h (BSD): Time Types.
long int timezone
time.h (SVID): Functions and Variables for Time Zones.
struct tm
time.h (ISO): Time Types.
time.h (ISO): Broken-down Time.
FILE * tmpfile (void)
stdio.h (ISO): Temporary Files.
FILE * tmpfile64 (void)
stdio.h (Unix98): Temporary Files.
char * tmpnam (char *result)
stdio.h (ISO): Temporary Files.
char * tmpnam_r (char *result)
stdio.h (GNU): Temporary Files.
struct tms
sys/times.h (POSIX.1): Processor Time Inquiry.
int toascii (int c)
ctype.h (SVID): Case Conversion.
ctype.h (BSD): Case Conversion.
int tolower (int c)
ctype.h (ISO): Case Conversion.
int totalorder (const double *x, const double *y)
math.h (TS 18661-1:2014): Floating-Point Comparison Functions.
int totalorderf (const float *x, const float *y)
math.h (TS 18661-1:2014): Floating-Point Comparison Functions.
int totalorderfN (const _FloatN *x, const _FloatN *y)
math.h (TS 18661-3:2015): Floating-Point Comparison Functions.
int totalorderfNx (const _FloatNx *x, const _FloatNx *y)
math.h (TS 18661-3:2015): Floating-Point Comparison Functions.
int totalorderl (const long double *x, const long double *y)
math.h (TS 18661-1:2014): Floating-Point Comparison Functions.
int totalordermag (const double *x, const double *y)
math.h (TS 18661-1:2014): Floating-Point Comparison Functions.
int totalordermagf (const float *x, const float *y)
math.h (TS 18661-1:2014): Floating-Point Comparison Functions.
int totalordermagfN (const _FloatN *x, const _FloatN *y)
math.h (TS 18661-3:2015): Floating-Point Comparison Functions.
int totalordermagfNx (const _FloatNx *x, const _FloatNx *y)
math.h (TS 18661-3:2015): Floating-Point Comparison Functions.
int totalordermagl (const long double *x, const long double *y)
math.h (TS 18661-1:2014): Floating-Point Comparison Functions.
int toupper (int c)
ctype.h (ISO): Case Conversion.
wint_t towctrans (wint_t wc, wctrans_t desc)
wctype.h (ISO): Mapping of wide characters..
wint_t towlower (wint_t wc)
wctype.h (ISO): Mapping of wide characters..
wint_t towupper (wint_t wc)
wctype.h (ISO): Mapping of wide characters..
double trunc (double x)
math.h (ISO): Rounding Functions.
int truncate (const char *filename, off_t length)
unistd.h (X/Open): File Size.
int truncate64 (const char *name, off64_t length)
unistd.h (Unix98): File Size.
float truncf (float x)
math.h (ISO): Rounding Functions.
_FloatN truncfN (_FloatN x)
math.h (TS 18661-3:2015): Rounding Functions.
_FloatNx truncfNx (_FloatNx x)
math.h (TS 18661-3:2015): Rounding Functions.
long double truncl (long double x)
math.h (ISO): Rounding Functions.
void * tsearch (const void *key, void **rootp, comparison_fn_t compar)
search.h (SVID): The tsearch
function..
int tss_create (tss_t *tss_key, tss_dtor_t destructor)
threads.h (C11): Thread-local Storage.
void tss_delete (tss_t tss_key)
threads.h (C11): Thread-local Storage.
tss_dtor_t
threads.h (C11): Thread-local Storage.
void * tss_get (tss_t tss_key)
threads.h (C11): Thread-local Storage.
int tss_set (tss_t tss_key, void *val)
threads.h (C11): Thread-local Storage.
tss_t
threads.h (C11): Thread-local Storage.
char * ttyname (int filedes)
unistd.h (POSIX.1): Identifying Terminals.
int ttyname_r (int filedes, char *buf, size_t len)
unistd.h (POSIX.1): Identifying Terminals.
void twalk (const void *root, __action_fn_t action)
search.h (SVID): The tsearch
function..
void twalk_r (const void *root, void (*action) (const void *key, VISIT which, void *closure), void *closure)
search.h (GNU): The tsearch
function..
char * tzname [2]
time.h (POSIX.1): Functions and Variables for Time Zones.
void tzset (void)
time.h (POSIX.1): Functions and Variables for Time Zones.
ucontext_t
ucontext.h (SVID): Complete Context Control.
uintmax_t ufromfp (double x, int round, unsigned int width)
math.h (ISO): Rounding Functions.
uintmax_t ufromfpf (float x, int round, unsigned int width)
math.h (ISO): Rounding Functions.
uintmax_t ufromfpfN (_FloatN x, int round, unsigned int width)
math.h (TS 18661-3:2015): Rounding Functions.
uintmax_t ufromfpfNx (_FloatNx x, int round, unsigned int width)
math.h (TS 18661-3:2015): Rounding Functions.
uintmax_t ufromfpl (long double x, int round, unsigned int width)
math.h (ISO): Rounding Functions.
uintmax_t ufromfpx (double x, int round, unsigned int width)
math.h (ISO): Rounding Functions.
uintmax_t ufromfpxf (float x, int round, unsigned int width)
math.h (ISO): Rounding Functions.
uintmax_t ufromfpxfN (_FloatN x, int round, unsigned int width)
math.h (TS 18661-3:2015): Rounding Functions.
uintmax_t ufromfpxfNx (_FloatNx x, int round, unsigned int width)
math.h (TS 18661-3:2015): Rounding Functions.
uintmax_t ufromfpxl (long double x, int round, unsigned int width)
math.h (ISO): Rounding Functions.
uid_t
sys/types.h (POSIX.1): Reading the Persona of a Process.
long int ulimit (int cmd, …)
ulimit.h (BSD): Limiting Resource Usage.
mode_t umask (mode_t mask)
sys/stat.h (POSIX.1): Assigning File Permissions.
int umount (const char *file)
sys/mount.h (SVID): Mount, Unmount, Remount.
sys/mount.h (GNU): Mount, Unmount, Remount.
int umount2 (const char *file, int flags)
sys/mount.h (GNU): Mount, Unmount, Remount.
int uname (struct utsname *info)
sys/utsname.h (POSIX.1): Platform Type Identification.
int ungetc (int c, FILE *stream)
stdio.h (ISO): Using ungetc
To Do Unreading.
wint_t ungetwc (wint_t wc, FILE *stream)
wchar.h (ISO): Using ungetc
To Do Unreading.
int unlink (const char *filename)
unistd.h (POSIX.1): Deleting Files.
int unlockpt (int filedes)
stdlib.h (SVID): Allocating Pseudo-Terminals.
stdlib.h (XPG4.2): Allocating Pseudo-Terminals.
int unsetenv (const char *name)
stdlib.h (BSD): Environment Access.
void updwtmp (const char *wtmp_file, const struct utmp *utmp)
utmp.h (SVID): Manipulating the User Accounting Database.
struct utimbuf
utime.h (POSIX.1): File Times.
int utime (const char *filename, const struct utimbuf *times)
utime.h (POSIX.1): File Times.
int utimes (const char *filename, const struct timeval tvp[2])
sys/time.h (BSD): File Times.
int utmpname (const char *file)
utmp.h (SVID): Manipulating the User Accounting Database.
int utmpxname (const char *file)
utmpx.h (XPG4.2): XPG User Accounting Database Functions.
struct utsname
sys/utsname.h (POSIX.1): Platform Type Identification.
type va_arg (va_list ap, type)
stdarg.h (ISO): Argument Access Macros.
void va_copy (va_list dest, va_list src)
stdarg.h (C99): Argument Access Macros.
void va_end (va_list ap)
stdarg.h (ISO): Argument Access Macros.
va_list
stdarg.h (ISO): Argument Access Macros.
void va_start (va_list ap, last-required)
stdarg.h (ISO): Argument Access Macros.
void * valloc (size_t size)
malloc.h (BSD): Allocating Aligned Memory Blocks.
stdlib.h (BSD): Allocating Aligned Memory Blocks.
int vasprintf (char **ptr, const char *template, va_list ap)
stdio.h (GNU): Variable Arguments Output Functions.
void verr (int status, const char *format, va_list ap)
err.h (BSD): Error Messages.
void verrx (int status, const char *format, va_list ap)
err.h (BSD): Error Messages.
int versionsort (const struct dirent **a, const struct dirent **b)
dirent.h (GNU): Scanning the Content of a Directory.
int versionsort64 (const struct dirent64 **a, const struct dirent64 **b)
dirent.h (GNU): Scanning the Content of a Directory.
pid_t vfork (void)
unistd.h (BSD): Creating a Process.
int vfprintf (FILE *stream, const char *template, va_list ap)
stdio.h (ISO): Variable Arguments Output Functions.
int vfscanf (FILE *stream, const char *template, va_list ap)
stdio.h (ISO): Variable Arguments Input Functions.
int vfwprintf (FILE *stream, const wchar_t *template, va_list ap)
wchar.h (ISO): Variable Arguments Output Functions.
int vfwscanf (FILE *stream, const wchar_t *template, va_list ap)
wchar.h (ISO): Variable Arguments Input Functions.
int vlimit (int resource, int limit)
sys/vlimit.h (BSD): Limiting Resource Usage.
int vprintf (const char *template, va_list ap)
stdio.h (ISO): Variable Arguments Output Functions.
int vscanf (const char *template, va_list ap)
stdio.h (ISO): Variable Arguments Input Functions.
int vsnprintf (char *s, size_t size, const char *template, va_list ap)
stdio.h (GNU): Variable Arguments Output Functions.
int vsprintf (char *s, const char *template, va_list ap)
stdio.h (ISO): Variable Arguments Output Functions.
int vsscanf (const char *s, const char *template, va_list ap)
stdio.h (ISO): Variable Arguments Input Functions.
int vswprintf (wchar_t *ws, size_t size, const wchar_t *template, va_list ap)
wchar.h (GNU): Variable Arguments Output Functions.
int vswscanf (const wchar_t *s, const wchar_t *template, va_list ap)
wchar.h (ISO): Variable Arguments Input Functions.
void vsyslog (int facility_priority, const char *format, va_list arglist)
syslog.h (BSD): syslog, vsyslog.
void vwarn (const char *format, va_list ap)
err.h (BSD): Error Messages.
void vwarnx (const char *format, va_list ap)
err.h (BSD): Error Messages.
int vwprintf (const wchar_t *template, va_list ap)
wchar.h (ISO): Variable Arguments Output Functions.
int vwscanf (const wchar_t *template, va_list ap)
wchar.h (ISO): Variable Arguments Input Functions.
pid_t wait (int *status-ptr)
sys/wait.h (POSIX.1): Process Completion.
pid_t wait3 (int *status-ptr, int options, struct rusage *usage)
sys/wait.h (BSD): BSD Process Wait Function.
pid_t wait4 (pid_t pid, int *status-ptr, int options, struct rusage *usage)
sys/wait.h (BSD): Process Completion.
pid_t waitpid (pid_t pid, int *status-ptr, int options)
sys/wait.h (POSIX.1): Process Completion.
void warn (const char *format, …)
err.h (BSD): Error Messages.
void warnx (const char *format, …)
err.h (BSD): Error Messages.
wchar_t
stddef.h (ISO): Introduction to Extended Characters.
wchar_t * wcpcpy (wchar_t *restrict wto, const wchar_t *restrict wfrom)
wchar.h (GNU): Copying Strings and Arrays.
wchar_t * wcpncpy (wchar_t *restrict wto, const wchar_t *restrict wfrom, size_t size)
wchar.h (GNU): Truncating Strings while Copying.
size_t wcrtomb (char *restrict s, wchar_t wc, mbstate_t *restrict ps)
wchar.h (ISO): Converting Single Characters.
int wcscasecmp (const wchar_t *ws1, const wchar_t *ws2)
wchar.h (GNU): String/Array Comparison.
wchar_t * wcscat (wchar_t *restrict wto, const wchar_t *restrict wfrom)
wchar.h (ISO): Concatenating Strings.
wchar_t * wcschr (const wchar_t *wstring, wchar_t wc)
wchar.h (ISO): Search Functions.
wchar_t * wcschrnul (const wchar_t *wstring, wchar_t wc)
wchar.h (GNU): Search Functions.
int wcscmp (const wchar_t *ws1, const wchar_t *ws2)
wchar.h (ISO): String/Array Comparison.
int wcscoll (const wchar_t *ws1, const wchar_t *ws2)
wchar.h (ISO): Collation Functions.
wchar_t * wcscpy (wchar_t *restrict wto, const wchar_t *restrict wfrom)
wchar.h (ISO): Copying Strings and Arrays.
size_t wcscspn (const wchar_t *wstring, const wchar_t *stopset)
wchar.h (ISO): Search Functions.
wchar_t * wcsdup (const wchar_t *ws)
wchar.h (GNU): Copying Strings and Arrays.
size_t wcsftime (wchar_t *s, size_t size, const wchar_t *template, const struct tm *brokentime)
time.h (ISO/Amend1): Formatting Calendar Time.
size_t wcslcat (wchar_t *restrict to, const wchar_t *restrict from, size_t size)
string.h (BSD): Truncating Strings while Copying.
size_t wcslcpy (wchar_t *restrict to, const wchar_t *restrict from, size_t size)
string.h (BSD): Truncating Strings while Copying.
size_t wcslen (const wchar_t *ws)
wchar.h (ISO): String Length.
int wcsncasecmp (const wchar_t *ws1, const wchar_t *s2, size_t n)
wchar.h (GNU): String/Array Comparison.
wchar_t * wcsncat (wchar_t *restrict wto, const wchar_t *restrict wfrom, size_t size)
wchar.h (ISO): Truncating Strings while Copying.
int wcsncmp (const wchar_t *ws1, const wchar_t *ws2, size_t size)
wchar.h (ISO): String/Array Comparison.
wchar_t * wcsncpy (wchar_t *restrict wto, const wchar_t *restrict wfrom, size_t size)
wchar.h (ISO): Truncating Strings while Copying.
size_t wcsnlen (const wchar_t *ws, size_t maxlen)
wchar.h (GNU): String Length.
size_t wcsnrtombs (char *restrict dst, const wchar_t **restrict src, size_t nwc, size_t len, mbstate_t *restrict ps)
wchar.h (GNU): Converting Multibyte and Wide Character Strings.
wchar_t * wcspbrk (const wchar_t *wstring, const wchar_t *stopset)
wchar.h (ISO): Search Functions.
wchar_t * wcsrchr (const wchar_t *wstring, wchar_t wc)
wchar.h (ISO): Search Functions.
size_t wcsrtombs (char *restrict dst, const wchar_t **restrict src, size_t len, mbstate_t *restrict ps)
wchar.h (ISO): Converting Multibyte and Wide Character Strings.
size_t wcsspn (const wchar_t *wstring, const wchar_t *skipset)
wchar.h (ISO): Search Functions.
wchar_t * wcsstr (const wchar_t *haystack, const wchar_t *needle)
wchar.h (ISO): Search Functions.
double wcstod (const wchar_t *restrict string, wchar_t **restrict tailptr)
wchar.h (ISO): Parsing of Floats.
float wcstof (const wchar_t *string, wchar_t **tailptr)
wchar.h (ISO): Parsing of Floats.
_FloatN wcstofN (const wchar_t *string, wchar_t **tailptr)
wchar.h (GNU): Parsing of Floats.
_FloatNx wcstofNx (const wchar_t *string, wchar_t **tailptr)
wchar.h (GNU): Parsing of Floats.
intmax_t wcstoimax (const wchar_t *restrict string, wchar_t **restrict tailptr, int base)
wchar.h (ISO): Parsing of Integers.
wchar_t * wcstok (wchar_t *newstring, const wchar_t *delimiters, wchar_t **save_ptr)
wchar.h (ISO): Finding Tokens in a String.
long int wcstol (const wchar_t *restrict string, wchar_t **restrict tailptr, int base)
wchar.h (ISO): Parsing of Integers.
long double wcstold (const wchar_t *string, wchar_t **tailptr)
wchar.h (ISO): Parsing of Floats.
long long int wcstoll (const wchar_t *restrict string, wchar_t **restrict tailptr, int base)
wchar.h (ISO): Parsing of Integers.
size_t wcstombs (char *string, const wchar_t *wstring, size_t size)
stdlib.h (ISO): Non-reentrant Conversion of Strings.
long long int wcstoq (const wchar_t *restrict string, wchar_t **restrict tailptr, int base)
wchar.h (GNU): Parsing of Integers.
unsigned long int wcstoul (const wchar_t *restrict string, wchar_t **restrict tailptr, int base)
wchar.h (ISO): Parsing of Integers.
unsigned long long int wcstoull (const wchar_t *restrict string, wchar_t **restrict tailptr, int base)
wchar.h (ISO): Parsing of Integers.
uintmax_t wcstoumax (const wchar_t *restrict string, wchar_t **restrict tailptr, int base)
wchar.h (ISO): Parsing of Integers.
unsigned long long int wcstouq (const wchar_t *restrict string, wchar_t **restrict tailptr, int base)
wchar.h (GNU): Parsing of Integers.
wchar_t * wcswcs (const wchar_t *haystack, const wchar_t *needle)
wchar.h (XPG): Search Functions.
size_t wcsxfrm (wchar_t *restrict wto, const wchar_t *wfrom, size_t size)
wchar.h (ISO): Collation Functions.
int wctob (wint_t c)
wchar.h (ISO): Converting Single Characters.
int wctomb (char *string, wchar_t wchar)
stdlib.h (ISO): Non-reentrant Conversion of Single Characters.
wctrans_t wctrans (const char *property)
wctype.h (ISO): Mapping of wide characters..
wctrans_t
wctype.h (ISO): Mapping of wide characters..
wctype_t wctype (const char *property)
wctype.h (ISO): Character class determination for wide characters.
wctype_t
wctype.h (ISO): Character class determination for wide characters.
wint_t
wchar.h (ISO): Introduction to Extended Characters.
wchar_t * wmemchr (const wchar_t *block, wchar_t wc, size_t size)
wchar.h (ISO): Search Functions.
int wmemcmp (const wchar_t *a1, const wchar_t *a2, size_t size)
wchar.h (ISO): String/Array Comparison.
wchar_t * wmemcpy (wchar_t *restrict wto, const wchar_t *restrict wfrom, size_t size)
wchar.h (ISO): Copying Strings and Arrays.
wchar_t * wmemmove (wchar_t *wto, const wchar_t *wfrom, size_t size)
wchar.h (ISO): Copying Strings and Arrays.
wchar_t * wmempcpy (wchar_t *restrict wto, const wchar_t *restrict wfrom, size_t size)
wchar.h (GNU): Copying Strings and Arrays.
wchar_t * wmemset (wchar_t *block, wchar_t wc, size_t size)
wchar.h (ISO): Copying Strings and Arrays.
int wordexp (const char *words, wordexp_t *word-vector-ptr, int flags)
wordexp.h (POSIX.2): Calling wordexp
.
wordexp_t
wordexp.h (POSIX.2): Calling wordexp
.
void wordfree (wordexp_t *word-vector-ptr)
wordexp.h (POSIX.2): Calling wordexp
.
int wprintf (const wchar_t *template, …)
wchar.h (ISO): Formatted Output Functions.
ssize_t write (int filedes, const void *buffer, size_t size)
unistd.h (POSIX.1): Input and Output Primitives.
ssize_t writev (int filedes, const struct iovec *vector, int count)
sys/uio.h (BSD): Fast Scatter-Gather I/O.
int wscanf (const wchar_t *template, …)
wchar.h (ISO): Formatted Input Functions.
double y0 (double x)
math.h (SVID): Special Functions.
float y0f (float x)
math.h (SVID): Special Functions.
_FloatN y0fN (_FloatN x)
math.h (GNU): Special Functions.
_FloatNx y0fNx (_FloatNx x)
math.h (GNU): Special Functions.
long double y0l (long double x)
math.h (SVID): Special Functions.
double y1 (double x)
math.h (SVID): Special Functions.
float y1f (float x)
math.h (SVID): Special Functions.
_FloatN y1fN (_FloatN x)
math.h (GNU): Special Functions.
_FloatNx y1fNx (_FloatNx x)
math.h (GNU): Special Functions.
long double y1l (long double x)
math.h (SVID): Special Functions.
double yn (int n, double x)
math.h (SVID): Special Functions.
float ynf (int n, float x)
math.h (SVID): Special Functions.
_FloatN ynfN (int n, _FloatN x)
math.h (GNU): Special Functions.
_FloatNx ynfNx (int n, _FloatNx x)
math.h (GNU): Special Functions.
long double ynl (int n, long double x)
math.h (SVID): Special Functions.
Next: Library Maintenance, Previous: Summary of Library Facilities, Up: Main Menu [Contents][Index]
Before you do anything else, you should read the FAQ at https://sourceware.org/glibc/wiki/FAQ. It answers common questions and describes problems you may experience with compilation and installation.
You will need recent versions of several GNU tools: definitely GCC and GNU Make, and possibly others. See Recommended Tools for Compilation, below.
Next: Installing the C Library, Up: Installing the GNU C Library [Contents][Index]
The GNU C Library cannot be compiled in the source directory. You must build it in a separate build directory. For example, if you have unpacked the GNU C Library sources in /src/gnu/glibc-version, create a directory /src/gnu/glibc-build to put the object files in. This allows removing the whole build directory in case an error occurs, which is the safest way to get a fresh start and should always be done.
From your object directory, run the shell script configure located at the top level of the source tree. In the scenario above, you’d type
$ ../glibc-version/configure args…
Please note that even though you’re building in a separate build directory, the compilation may need to create or modify files and directories in the source directory.
configure
takes many options, but the only one that is usually
mandatory is ‘--prefix’. This option tells configure
where you want the GNU C Library installed. This defaults to /usr/local,
but the normal setting to install as the standard system library is
‘--prefix=/usr’ for GNU/Linux systems and ‘--prefix=’ (an
empty prefix) for GNU/Hurd systems.
It may also be useful to pass ‘CC=compiler’ and
CFLAGS=flags
arguments to configure
. CC
selects the C compiler that will be used, and CFLAGS
sets
optimization options for the compiler. Any compiler options required
for all compilations, such as options selecting an ABI or a processor
for which to generate code, should be included in CC
. Options
that may be overridden by the GNU C Library build system for particular
files, such as for optimization and debugging, should go in
CFLAGS
. The default value of CFLAGS
is ‘-g -O2’,
and the GNU C Library cannot be compiled without optimization, so if
CFLAGS
is specified it must enable optimization. For example:
$ ../glibc-version/configure CC="gcc -m32" CFLAGS="-O3"
The following list describes all of the available options for
configure
:
Install machine-independent data files in subdirectories of directory. The default is to install in /usr/local.
Install the library and other machine-dependent files in subdirectories of directory. The default is to the ‘--prefix’ directory if that option is specified, or /usr/local otherwise.
Look for kernel header files in directory, not /usr/include. The GNU C Library needs information from the kernel’s header files describing the interface to the kernel. The GNU C Library will normally look in /usr/include for them, but if you specify this option, it will look in DIRECTORY instead.
This option is primarily of use on a system where the headers in /usr/include come from an older version of the GNU C Library. Conflicts can occasionally happen in this case. You can also use this option if you want to compile the GNU C Library with a newer set of kernel headers than the ones found in /usr/include.
This option is currently only useful on GNU/Linux systems. The version parameter should have the form X.Y.Z and describes the smallest version of the Linux kernel the generated library is expected to support. The higher the version number is, the less compatibility code is added, and the faster the code gets.
Use the binutils (assembler and linker) in directory, not
the ones the C compiler would default to. You can use this option if
the default binutils on your system cannot deal with all the constructs
in the GNU C Library. In that case, configure
will detect the
problem and suppress these constructs, so that the library will still be
usable, but functionality may be lost—for example, you can’t build a
shared libc with old binutils.
Use additional compiler flags cflags to build the parts of the library which are always statically linked into applications and libraries even with shared linking (that is, the object files contained in lib*_nonshared.a libraries). The build process will automatically use the appropriate flags, but this option can be used to set additional flags required for building applications and libraries, to match local policy. For example, if such a policy requires that all code linked into applications must be built with source fortification, ‘--with-nonshared-cflags=-Wp,-D_FORTIFY_SOURCE=2’ will make sure that the objects in libc_nonshared.a are compiled with this flag (although this will not affect the generated code in this particular case and potentially change debugging information and metadata only).
Use additional compiler flags cflags to build the early startup code of the dynamic linker. These flags can be used to enable early dynamic linker diagnostics to run on CPUs which are not compatible with the rest of the GNU C Library, for example, due to compiler flags which target a later instruction set architecture (ISA).
Specify an integer NUM to scale the timeout of test programs.
This factor can be changed at run time using TIMEOUTFACTOR
environment variable.
Don’t build shared libraries even if it is possible. Not all systems support shared libraries; you need ELF support and (currently) the GNU linker.
Don’t build glibc programs and the testsuite as position independent executables (PIE). By default, glibc programs and tests are created as position independent executables on targets that support it. If the toolchain and architecture support it, static executables are built as static PIE and the resulting glibc can be used with the GCC option, -static-pie, which is available with GCC 8 or above, to create static PIE.
Enable Intel Control-flow Enforcement Technology (CET) support. When the GNU C Library is built with --enable-cet or --enable-cet=permissive, the resulting library is protected with indirect branch tracking (IBT) and shadow stack (SHSTK). When CET is enabled, the GNU C Library is compatible with all existing executables and shared libraries. This feature is currently supported on i386, x86_64 and x32 with GCC 8 and binutils 2.29 or later. Note that when CET is enabled, the GNU C Library requires CPUs capable of multi-byte NOPs, like x86-64 processors as well as Intel Pentium Pro or newer. With --enable-cet, it is an error to dlopen a non CET enabled shared library in CET enabled application. With --enable-cet=permissive, CET is disabled when dlopening a non CET enabled shared library in CET enabled application.
NOTE: --enable-cet has been tested for i686, x86_64 and x32 on non-CET processors. --enable-cet has been tested for i686, x86_64 and x32 on CET processors.
Enable memory tagging support if the architecture supports it. When
the GNU C Library is built with this option then the resulting library will
be able to control the use of tagged memory when hardware support is
present by use of the tunable ‘glibc.mem.tagging’. This includes
the generation of tagged memory when using the malloc
APIs.
At present only AArch64 platforms with MTE provide this functionality, although the library will still operate (without memory tagging) on older versions of the architecture.
The default is to disable support for memory tagging.
Don’t build libraries with profiling information. You may want to use this option if you don’t plan to do profiling.
Compile static versions of the NSS (Name Service Switch) libraries. This is not recommended because it defeats the purpose of NSS; a program linked statically with the NSS libraries cannot be dynamically reconfigured to use a different name database.
By default, dynamic tests are linked to run with the installed C library. This option hardcodes the newly built C library path in dynamic tests so that they can be invoked directly.
By default, timezone related utilities (zic
, zdump
,
and tzselect
) are installed with the GNU C Library. If you are building
these independently (e.g. by using the ‘tzcode’ package), then this
option will allow disabling the install of these.
Note that you need to make sure the external tools are kept in sync with the versions that the GNU C Library expects as the data formats may change over time. Consult the timezone subdirectory for more details.
Compile the C library and all other parts of the glibc package (including the threading and math libraries, NSS modules, and transliteration modules) using the GCC -fstack-protector, -fstack-protector-strong or -fstack-protector-all options to detect stack overruns. Only the dynamic linker and a small number of routines called directly from assembler are excluded from this protection.
Disable lazy binding for installed shared objects and programs. This provides additional security hardening because it enables full RELRO and a read-only global offset table (GOT), at the cost of slightly increased program load times.
The file pt_chown is a helper binary for grantpt
(see Pseudo-Terminals) that is installed setuid root to
fix up pseudo-terminal ownership on GNU/Hurd. It is not required on
GNU/Linux, and the GNU C Library will not use the installed pt_chown
program when configured with --enable-pt_chown.
By default, the GNU C Library is built with -Werror. If you wish to build without this option (for example, if building with a newer version of GCC than this version of the GNU C Library was tested with, so new warnings cause the build with -Werror to fail), you can configure with --disable-werror.
By default for x86_64, the GNU C Library is built with the vector math library. Use this option to disable the vector math library.
Install the legacy passphrase-hashing library libcrypt and the
header file crypt.h. unistd.h will declare the function
crypt
regardless of this option. Using this option does not
change the set of programs that may need to be linked with
-lcrypt; it only means that the GNU C Library will provide that
library.
This option is for hackers and distributions who may not yet be able to use libcrypt alternatives such as libxcrypt and need this legacy implementation as a temporary workaround. Note that libcrypt may be removed in a future release.
Disable using scv
instruction for syscalls. All syscalls will use
sc
instead, even if the kernel supports scv
. PowerPC only.
These options are for cross-compiling. If you specify both options and
build-system is different from host-system, configure
will prepare to cross-compile the GNU C Library from build-system to be used
on host-system. You’ll probably need the ‘--with-headers’
option too, and you may have to override configure’s selection of
the compiler and/or binutils.
If you only specify ‘--host’, configure
will prepare for a
native compile but use what you specify instead of guessing what your
system is. This is most useful to change the CPU submodel. For example,
if configure
guesses your machine as i686-pc-linux-gnu
but
you want to compile a library for 586es, give
‘--host=i586-pc-linux-gnu’ or just ‘--host=i586-linux’ and add
the appropriate compiler flags (‘-mcpu=i586’ will do the trick) to
CC
.
If you specify just ‘--build’, configure
will get confused.
Specify a description, possibly including a build number or build date, of the binaries being built, to be included in --version output from programs installed with the GNU C Library. For example, --with-pkgversion='FooBar GNU/Linux glibc build 123'. The default value is ‘GNU libc’.
Specify the URL that users should visit if they wish to report a bug, to be included in --help output from programs installed with the GNU C Library. The default value refers to the main bug-reporting information for the GNU C Library.
Use -D_FORTIFY_SOURCE=LEVEL to control hardening in the GNU C Library. If not provided, LEVEL defaults to highest possible value supported by the build compiler.
Default is to disable fortification.
To build the library and related programs, type make
. This will
produce a lot of output, some of which may look like errors from
make
but aren’t. Look for error messages from make
containing ‘***’. Those indicate that something is seriously wrong.
The compilation process can take a long time, depending on the configuration and the speed of your machine. Some complex modules may take a very long time to compile, as much as several minutes on slower machines. Do not panic if the compiler appears to hang.
If you want to run a parallel make, simply pass the ‘-j’ option
with an appropriate numeric parameter to make
. You need a recent
GNU make
version, though.
To build and run test programs which exercise some of the library
facilities, type make check
. If it does not complete
successfully, do not use the built library, and report a bug after
verifying that the problem is not already known. See Reporting Bugs,
for instructions on reporting bugs. Note that some of the tests assume
they are not being run by root
. We recommend you compile and
test the GNU C Library as an unprivileged user.
Before reporting bugs make sure there is no problem with your system. The tests (and later installation) use some pre-existing files of the system such as /etc/passwd, /etc/nsswitch.conf and others. These files must all contain correct and sensible content.
Normally, make check
will run all the tests before reporting
all problems found and exiting with error status if any problems
occurred. You can specify ‘stop-on-test-failure=y’ when running
make check
to make the test run stop and exit with an error
status immediately when a failure occurs.
To format the GNU C Library Reference Manual for printing, type
make dvi
. You need a working TeX installation to do
this. The distribution builds the on-line formatted version of the
manual, as Info files, as part of the build process. You can build
them manually with make info
.
The library has a number of special-purpose configuration parameters
which you can find in Makeconfig. These can be overwritten with
the file configparms. To change them, create a
configparms in your build directory and add values as appropriate
for your system. The file is included and parsed by make
and has
to follow the conventions for makefiles.
It is easy to configure the GNU C Library for cross-compilation by
setting a few variables in configparms. Set CC
to the
cross-compiler for the target you configured the library for; it is
important to use this same CC
value when running
configure
, like this: ‘configure target
CC=target-gcc’. Set BUILD_CC
to the compiler to use for programs
run on the build system as part of compiling the library. You may need to
set AR
to cross-compiling versions of ar
if the native tools are not configured to work with
object files for the target you configured for. When cross-compiling
the GNU C Library, it may be tested using ‘make check
test-wrapper="srcdir/scripts/cross-test-ssh.sh hostname"’,
where srcdir is the absolute directory name for the main source
directory and hostname is the host name of a system that can run
the newly built binaries of the GNU C Library. The source and build
directories must be visible at the same locations on both the build
system and hostname.
The ‘cross-test-ssh.sh’ script requires ‘flock’ from
‘util-linux’ to work when glibc_test_allow_time_setting
environment variable is set.
It is also possible to execute tests, which require setting the date on the target machine. Following use cases are supported:
GLIBC_TEST_ALLOW_TIME_SETTING
is set in the environment in
which eligible tests are executed and have the privilege to run
clock_settime
. In this case, nothing prevents those tests from
running in parallel, so the caller shall assure that those tests
are serialized or provide a proper wrapper script for them.
cross-test-ssh.sh
script is used and one passes the
--allow-time-setting flag. In this case, both sets
GLIBC_TEST_ALLOW_TIME_SETTING
and serialization of test
execution are assured automatically.
In general, when testing the GNU C Library, ‘test-wrapper’ may be set to the name and arguments of any program to run newly built binaries. This program must preserve the arguments to the binary being run, its working directory and the standard input, output and error file descriptors. If ‘test-wrapper env’ will not work to run a program with environment variables set, then ‘test-wrapper-env’ must be set to a program that runs a newly built program with environment variable assignments in effect, those assignments being specified as ‘var=value’ before the name of the program to be run. If multiple assignments to the same variable are specified, the last assignment specified must take precedence. Similarly, if ‘test-wrapper env -i’ will not work to run a program with an environment completely empty of variables except those directly assigned, then ‘test-wrapper-env-only’ must be set; its use has the same syntax as ‘test-wrapper-env’, the only difference in its semantics being starting with an empty set of environment variables rather than the ambient set.
For AArch64 with SVE, when testing the GNU C Library, ‘test-wrapper’ may be set to "srcdir/sysdeps/unix/sysv/linux/aarch64/vltest.py vector-length" to change Vector Length.
Next: Recommended Tools for Compilation, Previous: Configuring and compiling the GNU C Library, Up: Installing the GNU C Library [Contents][Index]
To install the library and its header files, and the Info files of the
manual, type make install
. This will
build things, if necessary, before installing them; however, you should
still compile everything first. If you are installing the GNU C Library as your
primary C library, we recommend that you shut the system down to
single-user mode first, and reboot afterward. This minimizes the risk
of breaking things when the library changes out from underneath.
‘make install’ will do the entire job of upgrading from a previous installation of the GNU C Library version 2.x. There may sometimes be headers left behind from the previous installation, but those are generally harmless. If you want to avoid leaving headers behind you can do things in the following order.
You must first build the library (‘make’), optionally check it (‘make check’), switch the include directories and then install (‘make install’). The steps must be done in this order. Not moving the directory before install will result in an unusable mixture of header files from both libraries, but configuring, building, and checking the library requires the ability to compile and run programs against the old library. The new /usr/include, after switching the include directories and before installing the library should contain the Linux headers, but nothing else. If you do this, you will need to restore any headers from libraries other than the GNU C Library yourself after installing the library.
You can install the GNU C Library somewhere other than where you configured
it to go by setting the DESTDIR
GNU standard make variable on
the command line for ‘make install’. The value of this variable
is prepended to all the paths for installation. This is useful when
setting up a chroot environment or preparing a binary distribution.
The directory should be specified with an absolute file name. Installing
with the prefix
and exec_prefix
GNU standard make variables
set is not supported.
The GNU C Library includes a daemon called nscd
, which you
may or may not want to run. nscd
caches name service lookups; it
can dramatically improve performance with NIS+, and may help with DNS as
well.
One auxiliary program, /usr/libexec/pt_chown, is installed setuid
root
if the ‘--enable-pt_chown’ configuration option is used.
This program is invoked by the grantpt
function; it sets the
permissions on a pseudoterminal so it can be used by the calling process.
If you are using a Linux kernel with the devpts
filesystem enabled
and mounted at /dev/pts, you don’t need this program.
After installation you should configure the timezone and install locales for your system. The time zone configuration ensures that your system time matches the time for your current timezone. The locales ensure that the display of information on your system matches the expectations of your language and geographic region.
The GNU C Library is able to use two kinds of localization information sources, the
first is a locale database named locale-archive which is generally
installed as /usr/lib/locale/locale-archive. The locale archive has the
benefit of taking up less space and being very fast to load, but only if you
plan to install sixty or more locales. If you plan to install one or two
locales you can instead install individual locales into their self-named
directories e.g. /usr/lib/locale/en_US.utf8. For example to install
the German locale using the character set for UTF-8 with name de_DE
into
the locale archive issue the command ‘localedef -i de_DE -f UTF-8 de_DE’,
and to install just the one locale issue the command ‘localedef
--no-archive -i de_DE -f UTF-8 de_DE’. To configure all locales that are
supported by the GNU C Library, you can issue from your build directory the command
‘make localedata/install-locales’ to install all locales into the locale
archive or ‘make localedata/install-locale-files’ to install all locales
as files in the default configured locale installation directory (derived from
‘--prefix’ or --localedir
). To install into an alternative system
root use ‘DESTDIR’ e.g. ‘make localedata/install-locale-files
DESTDIR=/opt/glibc’, but note that this does not change the configured prefix.
To configure the locally used timezone, set the TZ
environment
variable. The script tzselect
helps you to select the right value.
As an example, for Germany, tzselect
would tell you to use
‘TZ='Europe/Berlin'’. For a system wide installation (the given
paths are for an installation with ‘--prefix=/usr’), link the
timezone file which is in /usr/share/zoneinfo to the file
/etc/localtime. For Germany, you might execute ‘ln -s
/usr/share/zoneinfo/Europe/Berlin /etc/localtime’.
Next: Specific advice for GNU/Linux systems, Previous: Installing the C Library, Up: Installing the GNU C Library [Contents][Index]
We recommend installing the following GNU tools before attempting to build the GNU C Library:
make
4.0 or newer
As of release time, GNU make
4.4 is the newest verified to work
to build the GNU C Library.
GCC 6.2 or higher is required. In general it is recommended to use the newest version of the compiler that is known to work for building the GNU C Library, as newer compilers usually produce better code. As of release time, GCC 13.2 is the newest compiler verified to work to build the GNU C Library.
For PowerPC 64-bits little-endian (powerpc64le), a GCC version with support for -mno-gnu-attribute, -mabi=ieeelongdouble, and -mabi=ibmlondouble is required. Likewise, the compiler must also support passing -mlong-double-128 with the preceding options. As of release, this implies GCC 7.4 and newer (excepting GCC 7.5.0, see GCC PR94200). These additional features are required for building the GNU C Library with support for IEEE long double.
For ARC architecture builds, GCC 8.3 or higher is needed.
For s390x architecture builds, GCC 7.1 or higher is needed (See gcc Bug 98269).
For AArch64 architecture builds with mathvec enabled, GCC 10 or higher is needed due to dependency on arm_sve.h.
For multi-arch support it is recommended to use a GCC which has been built with support for GNU indirect functions. This ensures that correct debugging information is generated for functions selected by IFUNC resolvers. This support can either be enabled by configuring GCC with ‘--enable-gnu-indirect-function’, or by enabling it by default by setting ‘default_gnu_indirect_function’ variable for a particular architecture in the GCC source file gcc/config.gcc.
You can use whatever compiler you like to compile programs that use the GNU C Library.
Check the FAQ for any special compiler issues on particular platforms.
binutils
2.25 or later
You must use GNU binutils
(as and ld) to build the GNU C Library.
No other assembler or linker has the necessary functionality at the
moment. As of release time, GNU binutils
2.41 is the newest
verified to work to build the GNU C Library.
For PowerPC 64-bits little-endian (powerpc64le), objcopy
is required
to support --update-section. This option requires binutils 2.26 or
newer.
ARC architecture needs binutils
2.32 or higher for TLS related fixes.
texinfo
4.7 or later
To correctly translate and install the Texinfo documentation you need
this version of the texinfo
package. Earlier versions do not
understand all the tags used in the document, and the installation
mechanism for the info files is not present or works differently.
As of release time, texinfo
7.0.3 is the newest verified to work
to build the GNU C Library.
awk
3.1.2, or higher
awk
is used in several places to generate files.
Some gawk
extensions are used, including the asorti
function, which was introduced in version 3.1.2 of gawk
.
As of release time, gawk
version 5.2.2 is the newest verified
to work to build the GNU C Library.
bison
2.7 or later
bison
is used to generate the yacc
parser code in the intl
subdirectory. As of release time, bison
version 3.8.2 is the newest
verified to work to build the GNU C Library.
Perl is not required, but if present it is used in some tests and the
mtrace
program, to build the GNU C Library manual. As of release
time perl
version 5.38.0 is the newest verified to work to
build the GNU C Library.
sed
3.02 or newer
Sed
is used in several places to generate files. Most scripts work
with any version of sed
. As of release time, sed
version
4.9 is the newest verified to work to build the GNU C Library.
Python is required to build the GNU C Library. As of release time, Python 3.11 is the newest verified to work for building and testing the GNU C Library.
The pretty printer tests drive GDB through test programs and compare its output to the printers’. PExpect is used to capture the output of GDB, and should be compatible with the Python version in your system. As of release time PExpect 4.8.0 is the newest verified to work to test the pretty printers.
GDB itself needs to be configured with Python support in order to use
the pretty printers. Notice that your system having Python available
doesn’t imply that GDB supports it, nor that your system’s Python and
GDB’s have the same version. As of release time GNU debugger
13.2 is the newest verified to work to test the pretty printers.
Unless Python, PExpect and GDB with Python support are present, the
printer tests will report themselves as UNSUPPORTED
. Notice
that some of the printer tests require the GNU C Library to be compiled with
debugging symbols.
If you change any of the configure.ac files you will also need
autoconf
2.71 (exactly)
and if you change any of the message translation files you will need
gettext
0.10.36 or later
As of release time, GNU gettext
version 0.21.1 is the newest
version verified to work to build the GNU C Library.
You may also need these packages if you upgrade your source tree using patches, although we try to avoid this.
Next: Reporting Bugs, Previous: Recommended Tools for Compilation, Up: Installing the GNU C Library [Contents][Index]
If you are installing the GNU C Library on GNU/Linux systems, you need to have
the header files from a 3.2 or newer kernel around for reference.
(For the ia64 architecture, you need version 3.2.18 or newer because this
is the first version with support for the accept4
system call.)
These headers must be installed using ‘make headers_install’; the
headers present in the kernel source directory are not suitable for
direct use by the GNU C Library. You do not need to use that kernel, just have
its headers installed where the GNU C Library can access them, referred to here as
install-directory. The easiest way to do this is to unpack it
in a directory such as /usr/src/linux-version. In that
directory, run ‘make headers_install
INSTALL_HDR_PATH=install-directory’. Finally, configure the GNU C Library
with the option ‘--with-headers=install-directory/include’.
Use the most recent kernel you can get your hands on. (If you are
cross-compiling the GNU C Library, you need to specify
‘ARCH=architecture’ in the ‘make headers_install’
command, where architecture is the architecture name used by the
Linux kernel, such as ‘x86’ or ‘powerpc’.)
After installing the GNU C Library, you may need to remove or rename directories such as /usr/include/linux and /usr/include/asm, and replace them with copies of directories such as linux and asm from install-directory/include. All directories present in install-directory/include should be copied, except that the GNU C Library provides its own version of /usr/include/scsi; the files provided by the kernel should be copied without replacing those provided by the GNU C Library. The linux, asm and asm-generic directories are required to compile programs using the GNU C Library; the other directories describe interfaces to the kernel but are not required if not compiling programs using those interfaces. You do not need to copy kernel headers if you did not specify an alternate kernel header source using ‘--with-headers’.
The Filesystem Hierarchy Standard for GNU/Linux systems expects some components of the GNU C Library installation to be in /lib and some in /usr/lib. This is handled automatically if you configure the GNU C Library with ‘--prefix=/usr’. If you set some other prefix or allow it to default to /usr/local, then all the components are installed there.
As of release time, Linux version 6.1.5 is the newest stable version verified to work to build the GNU C Library.
Previous: Specific advice for GNU/Linux systems, Up: Installing the GNU C Library [Contents][Index]
There are probably bugs in the GNU C Library. There are certainly errors and omissions in this manual. If you report them, they will get fixed. If you don’t, no one will ever know about them and they will remain unfixed for all eternity, if not longer.
It is a good idea to verify that the problem has not already been reported. Bugs are documented in two places: The file BUGS describes a number of well known bugs and the central GNU C Library bug tracking system has a WWW interface at https://sourceware.org/bugzilla/. The WWW interface gives you access to open and closed reports. A closed report normally includes a patch or a hint on solving the problem.
To report a bug, first you must find it. With any luck, this will be the hard part. Once you’ve found a bug, make sure it’s really a bug. A good way to do this is to see if the GNU C Library behaves the same way some other C library does. If so, probably you are wrong and the libraries are right (but not necessarily). If not, one of the libraries is probably wrong. It might not be the GNU C Library. Many historical Unix C libraries permit things that we don’t, such as closing a file twice.
If you think you have found some way in which the GNU C Library does not conform to the ISO and POSIX standards (see Standards and Portability), that is definitely a bug. Report it!
Once you’re sure you’ve found a bug, try to narrow it down to the smallest test case that reproduces the problem. In the case of a C library, you really only need to narrow it down to one library function call, if possible. This should not be too difficult.
The final step when you have a simple test case is to report the bug. Do this at https://www.gnu.org/software/libc/bugs.html.
If you are not sure how a function should behave, and this manual doesn’t tell you, that’s a bug in the manual. Report that too! If the function’s behavior disagrees with the manual, then either the library or the manual has a bug, so report the disagreement. If you find any errors or omissions in this manual, please report them to the bug database. If you refer to specific sections of the manual, please include the section names for easier identification.
Next: Platform-specific facilities, Previous: Installing the GNU C Library, Up: Main Menu [Contents][Index]
Next: Fortification of function calls, Up: Library Maintenance [Contents][Index]
The process of building the library is driven by the makefiles, which
make heavy use of special features of GNU make
. The makefiles
are very complex, and you probably don’t want to try to understand them.
But what they do is fairly straightforward, and only requires that you
define a few variables in the right places.
The library sources are divided into subdirectories, grouped by topic.
The string subdirectory has all the string-manipulation functions, math has all the mathematical functions, etc.
Each subdirectory contains a simple makefile, called Makefile,
which defines a few make
variables and then includes the global
makefile Rules with a line like:
include ../Rules
The basic variables that a subdirectory makefile defines are:
subdir
The name of the subdirectory, for example stdio. This variable must be defined.
headers
The names of the header files in this section of the library, such as stdio.h.
routines
aux
The names of the modules (source files) in this section of the library.
These should be simple names, such as ‘strlen’ (rather than
complete file names, such as strlen.c). Use routines
for
modules that define functions in the library, and aux
for
auxiliary modules containing things like data definitions. But the
values of routines
and aux
are just concatenated, so there
really is no practical difference.
tests
The names of test programs for this section of the library. These should be simple names, such as ‘tester’ (rather than complete file names, such as tester.c). ‘make tests’ will build and run all the test programs. If a test program needs input, put the test data in a file called test-program.input; it will be given to the test program on its standard input. If a test program wants to be run with arguments, put the arguments (all on a single line) in a file called test-program.args. Test programs should exit with zero status when the test passes, and nonzero status when the test indicates a bug in the library or error in building.
others
The names of “other” programs associated with this section of the library. These are programs which are not tests per se, but are other small programs included with the library. They are built by ‘make others’.
install-lib
install-data
install
Files to be installed by ‘make install’. Files listed in
‘install-lib’ are installed in the directory specified by
‘libdir’ in configparms or Makeconfig
(see Installing the GNU C Library). Files listed in install-data
are
installed in the directory specified by ‘datadir’ in
configparms or Makeconfig. Files listed in install
are installed in the directory specified by ‘bindir’ in
configparms or Makeconfig.
distribute
Other files from this subdirectory which should be put into a
distribution tar file. You need not list here the makefile itself or
the source and header files listed in the other standard variables.
Only define distribute
if there are files used in an unusual way
that should go into the distribution.
generated
Files which are generated by Makefile in this subdirectory. These files will be removed by ‘make clean’, and they will never go into a distribution.
extra-objs
Extra object files which are built by Makefile in this
subdirectory. This should be a list of file names like foo.o;
the files will actually be found in whatever directory object files are
being built in. These files will be removed by ‘make clean’.
This variable is used for secondary object files needed to build
others
or tests
.
Up: Adding New Functions [Contents][Index]
It’s sometimes necessary to provide nonstandard, platform-specific features to developers. The C library is traditionally the lowest library layer, so it makes sense for it to provide these low-level features. However, including these features in the C library may be a disadvantage if another package provides them as well as there will be two conflicting versions of them. Also, the features won’t be available to projects that do not use the GNU C Library but use other GNU tools, like GCC.
The current guidelines are:
The general solution for providing low-level features is to export them as follows:
__arch_
, such as
__ppc_get_timebase
.
The easiest way to provide a header file is to add it to the
sysdep_headers
variable. For example, the combination of
Linux-specific header files on PowerPC could be provided like this:
sysdep_headers += sys/platform/ppc.h
Then ensure that you have added a sys/platform/ppc.h header file in the machine-specific directory, e.g., sysdeps/powerpc/sys/platform/ppc.h.
Next: Symbol handling in the GNU C Library, Previous: Adding New Functions, Up: Library Maintenance [Contents][Index]
This section contains implementation details of the GNU C Library and may not remain stable across releases.
The _FORTIFY_SOURCE
macro may be defined by users to control
hardening of calls into some functions in the GNU C Library. The definition
should be at the top of the source file before any headers are included
or at the pre-processor commandline using the -D
switch. The
hardening primarily focuses on accesses to buffers passed to the
functions but may also include checks for validity of other inputs to
the functions.
When the _FORTIFY_SOURCE
macro is defined, it enables code that
validates inputs passed to some functions in the GNU C Library to determine if
they are safe. If the compiler is unable to determine that the inputs
to the function call are safe, the call may be replaced by a call to its
hardened variant that does additional safety checks at runtime. Some
hardened variants need the size of the buffer to perform access
validation and this is provided by the __builtin_object_size
or
the __builtin_dynamic_object_size
builtin functions.
_FORTIFY_SOURCE
also enables additional compile time diagnostics,
such as unchecked return values from some functions, to encourage
developers to add error checking for those functions.
At runtime, if any of those safety checks fail, the program will
terminate with a SIGABRT
signal. _FORTIFY_SOURCE
may be
defined to one of the following values:
__builtin_object_size
compiler builtin function.
If the function returns (size_t) -1
, the function call is left
untouched. Additionally, this level also enables validation of flags to
the open
, open64
, openat
and openat64
functions.
%n
only in read-only format strings.
__builtin_dynamic_object_size
compiler builtin
function. If the function returns (size_t) -1
, the function call
is left untouched. Fortification at this level may have a impact on
program performance if the function call that is fortified is frequently
encountered and the size expression returned by
__builtin_dynamic_object_size
is complex.
In general, the fortified variants of the function calls use the name of
the function with a __
prefix and a _chk
suffix. There
are some exceptions, e.g. the printf
family of functions where,
depending on the architecture, one may also see fortified variants have
the _chkieee128
suffix or the __nldbl___
prefix to their
names.
Another exception is the open
family of functions, where their
fortified replacements have the __
prefix and a _2
suffix.
The FD_SET
, FD_CLR
and FD_ISSET
macros use the
__fdelt_chk
function on fortification.
The following functions and macros are fortified in the GNU C Library:
asprintf
confstr
dprintf
explicit_bzero
FD_SET
FD_CLR
FD_ISSET
fgets
fgets_unlocked
fgetws
fgetws_unlocked
fprintf
fread
fread_unlocked
fwprintf
getcwd
getdomainname
getgroups
gethostname
getlogin_r
gets
getwd
longjmp
mbsnrtowcs
mbsrtowcs
mbstowcs
memcpy
memmove
mempcpy
memset
mq_open
obstack_printf
obstack_vprintf
open
open64
openat
openat64
poll
ppoll64
ppoll
pread64
pread
printf
ptsname_r
read
readlinkat
readlink
realpath
recv
recvfrom
snprintf
sprintf
stpcpy
stpncpy
strcat
strcpy
strlcat
strlcpy
strncat
strncpy
swprintf
syslog
ttyname_r
vasprintf
vdprintf
vfprintf
vfwprintf
vprintf
vsnprintf
vsprintf
vswprintf
vsyslog
vwprintf
wcpcpy
wcpncpy
wcrtomb
wcscat
wcscpy
wcslcat
wcslcpy
wcsncat
wcsncpy
wcsnrtombs
wcsrtombs
wcstombs
wctomb
wmemcpy
wmemmove
wmempcpy
wmemset
wprintf
Next: Porting the GNU C Library, Previous: Fortification of function calls, Up: Library Maintenance [Contents][Index]
With respect to time handling, GNU C Library configurations fall in two
classes depending on the value of __TIMESIZE
:
__TIMESIZE == 32
These dual-time configurations have both 32-bit and 64-bit time
support. 32-bit time support provides type time_t
and cannot
handle dates beyond Y2038. 64-bit time support provides type
__time64_t
and can handle dates beyond Y2038.
In these configurations, time-related types have two declarations,
a 64-bit one, and a 32-bit one; and time-related functions generally
have two definitions: a 64-bit one, and a 32-bit one which is a wrapper
around the former. Therefore, for every time_t
-related symbol,
there is a corresponding __time64_t
-related symbol, the name of
which is usually the 32-bit symbol’s name with __
(a double
underscore) prepended and 64
appended. For instance, the
64-bit-time counterpart of clock_gettime
is
__clock_gettime64
.
__TIMESIZE == 64
These single-time configurations only have a 64-bit time_t
and related functions, which can handle dates beyond 2038-01-19
03:14:07 (aka Y2038).
In these configurations, time-related types only have a 64-bit
declaration; and time-related functions only have one 64-bit definition.
However, for every time_t
-related symbol, there is a
corresponding __time64_t
-related macro, the name of which is
derived as in the dual-time configuration case, and which expands to
the symbol’s name. For instance, the macro __clock_gettime64
expands to clock_gettime
.
These macros are purely internal to the GNU C Library and exist only so that a single definition of the 64-bit time functions can be used on both single-time and dual-time configurations, and so that glibc code can freely call the 64-bit functions internally in all configurations.
Note: at this point, 64-bit time support in dual-time configurations is work-in-progress, so for these configurations, the public API only makes the 32-bit time support available. In a later change, the public API will allow user code to choose the time size for a given compilation unit.
64-bit variants of time-related types or functions are defined for all configurations and use 64-bit-time symbol names (for dual-time configurations) or macros (for single-time configurations).
32-bit variants of time-related types or functions are defined only for dual-time configurations.
Here is an example with localtime
:
Function localtime
is declared in time/time.h as
extern struct tm *localtime (const time_t *__timer) __THROW; libc_hidden_proto (localtime)
For single-time configurations, __localtime64
is a macro which
evaluates to localtime
; for dual-time configurations,
__localtime64
is a function similar to localtime
except
it uses Y2038-proof types:
#if __TIMESIZE == 64 # define __localtime64 localtime #else extern struct tm *__localtime64 (const __time64_t *__timer) __THROW; libc_hidden_proto (__localtime64) #endif
(note: type time_t
is replaced with __time64_t
because
time_t
is not Y2038-proof, but struct tm
is not
replaced because it is already Y2038-proof.)
The 64-bit-time implementation of localtime
is written as follows
and is compiled for both dual-time and single-time configuration classes.
struct tm * __localtime64 (const __time64_t *t) { return __tz_convert (*t, 1, &_tmbuf); } libc_hidden_def (__localtime64)
The 32-bit-time implementation is a wrapper and is only compiled for dual-time configurations:
#if __TIMESIZE != 64 struct tm * localtime (const time_t *t) { __time64_t t64 = *t; return __localtime64 (&t64); } libc_hidden_def (localtime) #endif
Previous: Symbol handling in the GNU C Library, Up: Library Maintenance [Contents][Index]
The GNU C Library is written to be easily portable to a variety of machines and operating systems. Machine- and operating system-dependent functions are well separated to make it easy to add implementations for new machines or operating systems. This section describes the layout of the library source tree and explains the mechanisms used to select machine-dependent code to use.
All the machine-dependent and operating system-dependent files in the library are in the subdirectory sysdeps under the top-level library source directory. This directory contains a hierarchy of subdirectories (see Layout of the sysdeps Directory Hierarchy).
Each subdirectory of sysdeps contains source files for a particular machine or operating system, or for a class of machine or operating system (for example, systems by a particular vendor, or all machines that use IEEE 754 floating-point format). A configuration specifies an ordered list of these subdirectories. Each subdirectory implicitly appends its parent directory to the list. For example, specifying the list unix/bsd/vax is equivalent to specifying the list unix/bsd/vax unix/bsd unix. A subdirectory can also specify that it implies other subdirectories which are not directly above it in the directory hierarchy. If the file Implies exists in a subdirectory, it lists other subdirectories of sysdeps which are appended to the list, appearing after the subdirectory containing the Implies file. Lines in an Implies file that begin with a ‘#’ character are ignored as comments. For example, unix/bsd/Implies contains:
# BSD has Internet-related things. unix/inet
and unix/Implies contains:
posix
So the final list is unix/bsd/vax unix/bsd unix/inet unix posix.
sysdeps has a “special” subdirectory called generic. It is always implicitly appended to the list of subdirectories, so you needn’t put it in an Implies file, and you should not create any subdirectories under it intended to be new specific categories. generic serves two purposes. First, the makefiles do not bother to look for a system-dependent version of a file that’s not in generic. This means that any system-dependent source file must have an analogue in generic, even if the routines defined by that file are not implemented on other platforms. Second, the generic version of a system-dependent file is used if the makefiles do not find a version specific to the system you’re compiling for.
If it is possible to implement the routines in a generic file in
machine-independent C, using only other machine-independent functions in
the C library, then you should do so. Otherwise, make them stubs. A
stub function is a function which cannot be implemented on a
particular machine or operating system. Stub functions always return an
error, and set errno
to ENOSYS
(Function not implemented).
See Error Reporting. If you define a stub function, you must place
the statement stub_warning(function)
, where function
is the name of your function, after its definition. This causes the
function to be listed in the installed <gnu/stubs.h>
, and
makes GNU ld warn when the function is used.
Some rare functions are only useful on specific systems and aren’t defined at all on others; these do not appear anywhere in the system-independent source code or makefiles (including the generic directory), only in the system-dependent Makefile in the specific system’s subdirectory.
If you come across a file that is in one of the main source directories (string, stdio, etc.), and you want to write a machine- or operating system-dependent version of it, move the file into sysdeps/generic and write your new implementation in the appropriate system-specific subdirectory. Note that if a file is to be system-dependent, it must not appear in one of the main source directories.
There are a few special files that may exist in each subdirectory of sysdeps:
A makefile for this machine or operating system, or class of machine or
operating system. This file is included by the library makefile
Makerules, which is used by the top-level makefile and the
subdirectory makefiles. It can change the variables set in the
including makefile or add new rules. It can use GNU make
conditional directives based on the variable ‘subdir’ (see above) to
select different sets of variables and rules for different sections of
the library. It can also set the make
variable
‘sysdep-routines’, to specify extra modules to be included in the
library. You should use ‘sysdep-routines’ rather than adding
modules to ‘routines’ because the latter is used in determining
what to distribute for each subdirectory of the main source tree.
Each makefile in a subdirectory in the ordered list of subdirectories to be searched is included in order. Since several system-dependent makefiles may be included, each should append to ‘sysdep-routines’ rather than simply setting it:
sysdep-routines := $(sysdep-routines) foo bar
This file contains the names of new whole subdirectories under the top-level library source tree that should be included for this system. These subdirectories are treated just like the system-independent subdirectories in the library source tree, such as stdio and math.
Use this when there are completely new sets of functions and header files that should go into the library for the system this subdirectory of sysdeps implements. For example, sysdeps/unix/inet/Subdirs contains inet; the inet directory contains various network-oriented operations which only make sense to put in the library on systems that support the Internet.
This file is a shell script fragment to be run at configuration time.
The top-level configure script uses the shell .
command to
read the configure file in each system-dependent directory
chosen, in order. The configure files are often generated from
configure.ac files using Autoconf.
A system-dependent configure script will usually add things to the shell variables ‘DEFS’ and ‘config_vars’; see the top-level configure script for details. The script can check for ‘--with-package’ options that were passed to the top-level configure. For an option ‘--with-package=value’ configure sets the shell variable ‘with_package’ (with any dashes in package converted to underscores) to value; if the option is just ‘--with-package’ (no argument), then it sets ‘with_package’ to ‘yes’.
This file is an Autoconf input fragment to be processed into the file
configure in this subdirectory. See Introduction in Autoconf: Generating Automatic Configuration Scripts,
for a description of Autoconf. You should write either configure
or configure.ac, but not both. The first line of
configure.ac should invoke the m4
macro
‘GLIBC_PROVIDES’. This macro does several AC_PROVIDE
calls
for Autoconf macros which are used by the top-level configure
script; without this, those macros might be invoked again unnecessarily
by Autoconf.
That is the general system for how system-dependencies are isolated.
A GNU configuration name has three parts: the CPU type, the manufacturer’s name, and the operating system. configure uses these to pick the list of system-dependent directories to look for. If the ‘--nfp’ option is not passed to configure, the directory machine/fpu is also used. The operating system often has a base operating system; for example, if the operating system is ‘Linux’, the base operating system is ‘unix/sysv’. The algorithm used to pick the list of directories is simple: configure makes a list of the base operating system, manufacturer, CPU type, and operating system, in that order. It then concatenates all these together with slashes in between, to produce a directory name; for example, the configuration ‘i686-linux-gnu’ results in unix/sysv/linux/i386/i686. configure then tries removing each element of the list in turn, so unix/sysv/linux and unix/sysv are also tried, among others. Since the precise version number of the operating system is often not important, and it would be very inconvenient, for example, to have identical irix6.2 and irix6.3 directories, configure tries successively less specific operating system names by removing trailing suffixes starting with a period.
As an example, here is the complete list of directories that would be tried for the configuration ‘i686-linux-gnu’:
sysdeps/i386/elf sysdeps/unix/sysv/linux/i386 sysdeps/unix/sysv/linux sysdeps/gnu sysdeps/unix/common sysdeps/unix/mman sysdeps/unix/inet sysdeps/unix/sysv/i386/i686 sysdeps/unix/sysv/i386 sysdeps/unix/sysv sysdeps/unix/i386 sysdeps/unix sysdeps/posix sysdeps/i386/i686 sysdeps/i386/i486 sysdeps/libm-i387/i686 sysdeps/i386/fpu sysdeps/libm-i387 sysdeps/i386 sysdeps/wordsize-32 sysdeps/ieee754 sysdeps/libm-ieee754 sysdeps/generic
Different machine architectures are conventionally subdirectories at the top level of the sysdeps directory tree. For example, sysdeps/sparc and sysdeps/m68k. These contain files specific to those machine architectures, but not specific to any particular operating system. There might be subdirectories for specializations of those architectures, such as sysdeps/m68k/68020. Code which is specific to the floating-point coprocessor used with a particular machine should go in sysdeps/machine/fpu.
There are a few directories at the top level of the sysdeps hierarchy that are not for particular machine architectures.
As described above (see Porting the GNU C Library), this is the subdirectory that every configuration implicitly uses after all others.
This directory is for code using the IEEE 754 floating-point format,
where the C type float
is IEEE 754 single-precision format, and
double
is IEEE 754 double-precision format. Usually this
directory is referred to in the Implies file in a machine
architecture-specific directory, such as m68k/Implies.
This directory contains an implementation of a mathematical library usable on platforms which use IEEE 754 conformant floating-point arithmetic.
This is a special case. Ideally the code should be in sysdeps/i386/fpu but for various reasons it is kept aside.
This directory contains implementations of things in the library in terms of POSIX.1 functions. This includes some of the POSIX.1 functions themselves. Of course, POSIX.1 cannot be completely implemented in terms of itself, so a configuration using just posix cannot be complete.
This is the directory for Unix-like things. See Porting the GNU C Library to Unix Systems. unix implies posix. There are some special-purpose subdirectories of unix:
This directory is for things common to both BSD and System V release 4. Both unix/bsd and unix/sysv/sysv4 imply unix/common.
This directory is for socket
and related functions on Unix systems.
unix/inet/Subdirs enables the inet top-level subdirectory.
unix/common implies unix/inet.
This is the directory for things based on the Mach microkernel from CMU (including GNU/Hurd systems). Other basic operating systems (VMS, for example) would have their own directories at the top level of the sysdeps hierarchy, parallel to unix and mach.
Previous: Layout of the sysdeps Directory Hierarchy, Up: Porting the GNU C Library [Contents][Index]
Most Unix systems are fundamentally very similar. There are variations between different machines, and variations in what facilities are provided by the kernel. But the interface to the operating system facilities is, for the most part, pretty uniform and simple.
The code for Unix systems is in the directory unix, at the top level of the sysdeps hierarchy. This directory contains subdirectories (and subdirectory trees) for various Unix variants.
The functions which are system calls in most Unix systems are implemented in assembly code, which is generated automatically from specifications in files named syscalls.list. There are several such files, one in sysdeps/unix and others in its subdirectories. Some special system calls are implemented in files that are named with a suffix of ‘.S’; for example, _exit.S. Files ending in ‘.S’ are run through the C preprocessor before being fed to the assembler.
These files all use a set of macros that should be defined in sysdep.h. The sysdep.h file in sysdeps/unix partially defines them; a sysdep.h file in another directory must finish defining them for the particular machine and operating system variant. See sysdeps/unix/sysdep.h and the machine-specific sysdep.h implementations to see what these macros are and what they should do.
The system-specific makefile for the unix directory (sysdeps/unix/Makefile) gives rules to generate several files from the Unix system you are building the library on (which is assumed to be the target system you are building the library for). All the generated files are put in the directory where the object files are kept; they should not affect the source tree itself. The files generated are ioctls.h, errnos.h, sys/param.h, and errlist.c (for the stdio section of the library).
Next: Contributors to the GNU C Library, Previous: Library Maintenance, Up: Main Menu [Contents][Index]
The GNU C Library can provide machine-specific functionality.
Next: RISC-V-specific Facilities, Up: Platform-specific facilities [Contents][Index]
Facilities specific to PowerPC that are not specific to a particular operating system are declared in sys/platform/ppc.h.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
Read the current value of the Time Base Register.
The Time Base Register is a 64-bit register that stores a monotonically incremented value updated at a system-dependent frequency that may be different from the processor frequency. More information is available in Power ISA 2.06b - Book II - Section 5.2.
__ppc_get_timebase
uses the processor’s time base facility directly
without requiring assistance from the operating system, so it is very
efficient.
Preliminary: | MT-Unsafe init | AS-Unsafe corrupt:init | AC-Unsafe corrupt:init | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
Read the current frequency at which the Time Base Register is updated.
This frequency is not related to the processor clock or the bus clock. It is also possible that this frequency is not constant. More information is available in Power ISA 2.06b - Book II - Section 5.2.
The following functions provide hints about the usage of resources that are shared with other processors. They can be used, for example, if a program waiting on a lock intends to divert the shared resources to be used by other processors. More information is available in Power ISA 2.06b - Book II - Section 3.2.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
Provide a hint that performance will probably be improved if shared resources dedicated to the executing processor are released for use by other processors.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
Provide a hint that performance will probably be improved if shared resources dedicated to the executing processor are released until all outstanding storage accesses to caching-inhibited storage have been completed.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
Provide a hint that performance will probably be improved if shared resources dedicated to the executing processor are released until all outstanding storage accesses to cacheable storage for which the data is not in the cache have been completed.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
Set the Program Priority Register to medium value (default).
The Program Priority Register (PPR) is a 64-bit register that controls
the program’s priority. By adjusting the PPR value the programmer may
improve system throughput by causing the system resources to be used
more efficiently, especially in contention situations.
The three unprivileged states available are covered by the functions
__ppc_set_ppr_med
(medium – default), __ppc_set_ppc_low
(low)
and __ppc_set_ppc_med_low
(medium low). More information
available in Power ISA 2.06b - Book II - Section 3.1.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
Set the Program Priority Register to low value.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
Set the Program Priority Register to medium low value.
Power ISA 2.07 extends the priorities that can be set to the Program Priority Register (PPR). The following functions implement the new priority levels: very low and medium high.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
Set the Program Priority Register to very low value.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
Set the Program Priority Register to medium high value. The medium high priority is privileged and may only be set during certain time intervals by problem-state programs. If the program priority is medium high when the time interval expires or if an attempt is made to set the priority to medium high when it is not allowed, the priority is set to medium.
Next: X86-specific Facilities, Previous: PowerPC-specific Facilities, Up: Platform-specific facilities [Contents][Index]
Cache management facilities specific to RISC-V systems that implement the Linux ABI are declared in sys/cachectl.h.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
Enforce ordering between stores and instruction cache fetches. The range of
addresses over which ordering is enforced is specified by start and
end. The flags argument controls the extent of this ordering, with
the default behavior (a flags value of 0) being to enforce the fence on
all threads in the current process. Setting the
SYS_RISCV_FLUSH_ICACHE_LOCAL
bit allows users to indicate that enforcing
ordering on only the current thread is necessary. All other flag bits are
reserved.
Previous: RISC-V-specific Facilities, Up: Platform-specific facilities [Contents][Index]
Facilities specific to X86 that are not specific to a particular operating system are declared in sys/platform/x86.h.
Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | See POSIX Safety Concepts.
Return a pointer to x86 CPU feature structure used by query macros for x86 CPU feature leaf.
This macro returns a nonzero value (true) if the processor has the feature name.
This macro returns a nonzero value (true) if the processor has the feature name and the feature is active. There may be other preconditions, like sufficient stack space or further setup for AMX, which must be satisfied before the feature can be used.
The supported processor features are:
ACPI
– Thermal Monitor and Software Controlled Clock Facilities.
ADX
– ADX instruction extensions.
APIC
– APIC On-Chip.
AES
– The AES instruction extensions.
AESKLE
– AES Key Locker instructions are enabled by OS.
AMD_IBPB
– Indirect branch predictor barrier (IBPB) for AMD cpus.
AMD_IBRS
– Indirect branch restricted speculation (IBPB) for AMD cpus.
AMD_SSBD
– Speculative Store Bypass Disable (SSBD) for AMD cpus.
AMD_STIBP
– Single thread indirect branch predictors (STIBP) for AMD cpus.
AMD_VIRT_SSBD
– Speculative Store Bypass Disable (SSBD) for AMD cpus (older systems).
AMX_BF16
– Tile computational operations on bfloat16 numbers.
AMX_COMPLEX
– Tile computational operations on complex FP16 numbers.
AMX_INT8
– Tile computational operations on 8-bit numbers.
AMX_FP16
– Tile computational operations on FP16 numbers.
AMX_TILE
– Tile architecture.
APX_F
– The APX instruction extensions.
ARCH_CAPABILITIES
– IA32_ARCH_CAPABILITIES MSR.
ArchPerfmonExt
– Architectural Performance Monitoring Extended
Leaf (EAX = 23H).
AVX
– The AVX instruction extensions.
AVX2
– The AVX2 instruction extensions.
AVX_IFMA
– The AVX-IFMA instruction extensions.
AVX_NE_CONVERT
– The AVX-NE-CONVERT instruction extensions.
AVX_VNNI
– The AVX-VNNI instruction extensions.
AVX_VNNI_INT8
– The AVX-VNNI-INT8 instruction extensions.
AVX512_4FMAPS
– The AVX512_4FMAPS instruction extensions.
AVX512_4VNNIW
– The AVX512_4VNNIW instruction extensions.
AVX512_BF16
– The AVX512_BF16 instruction extensions.
AVX512_BITALG
– The AVX512_BITALG instruction extensions.
AVX512_FP16
– The AVX512_FP16 instruction extensions.
AVX512_IFMA
– The AVX512_IFMA instruction extensions.
AVX512_VBMI
– The AVX512_VBMI instruction extensions.
AVX512_VBMI2
– The AVX512_VBMI2 instruction extensions.
AVX512_VNNI
– The AVX512_VNNI instruction extensions.
AVX512_VP2INTERSECT
– The AVX512_VP2INTERSECT instruction
extensions.
AVX512_VPOPCNTDQ
– The AVX512_VPOPCNTDQ instruction extensions.
AVX512BW
– The AVX512BW instruction extensions.
AVX512CD
– The AVX512CD instruction extensions.
AVX512ER
– The AVX512ER instruction extensions.
AVX512DQ
– The AVX512DQ instruction extensions.
AVX512F
– The AVX512F instruction extensions.
AVX512PF
– The AVX512PF instruction extensions.
AVX512VL
– The AVX512VL instruction extensions.
BMI1
– BMI1 instructions.
BMI2
– BMI2 instructions.
BUS_LOCK_DETECT
– Bus lock debug exceptions.
CLDEMOTE
– CLDEMOTE instruction.
CLFLUSHOPT
– CLFLUSHOPT instruction.
CLFSH
– CLFLUSH instruction.
CLWB
– CLWB instruction.
CMOV
– Conditional Move instructions.
CMPCCXADD
– CMPccXADD instruction.
CMPXCHG16B
– CMPXCHG16B instruction.
CNXT_ID
– L1 Context ID.
CORE_CAPABILITIES
– IA32_CORE_CAPABILITIES MSR.
CX8
– CMPXCHG8B instruction.
DCA
– Data prefetch from a memory mapped device.
DE
– Debugging Extensions.
DEPR_FPU_CS_DS
– Deprecates FPU CS and FPU DS values.
DS
– Debug Store.
DS_CPL
– CPL Qualified Debug Store.
DTES64
– 64-bit DS Area.
EIST
– Enhanced Intel SpeedStep technology.
ENQCMD
– Enqueue Stores instructions.
ERMS
– Enhanced REP MOVSB/STOSB.
F16C
– 16-bit floating-point conversion instructions.
FMA
– FMA extensions using YMM state.
FMA4
– FMA4 instruction extensions.
FPU
– X87 Floating Point Unit On-Chip.
FSGSBASE
– RDFSBASE/RDGSBASE/WRFSBASE/WRGSBASE instructions.
FSRCS
– Fast Short REP CMP and SCA.
FSRM
– Fast Short REP MOV.
FSRS
– Fast Short REP STO.
FXSR
– FXSAVE and FXRSTOR instructions.
FZLRM
– Fast Zero-Length REP MOV.
GFNI
– GFNI instruction extensions.
HLE
– HLE instruction extensions.
HTT
– Max APIC IDs reserved field is Valid.
HRESET
– History reset.
HYBRID
– Hybrid processor.
IBRS_IBPB
– Indirect branch restricted speculation (IBRS) and
the indirect branch predictor barrier (IBPB).
IBT
– Intel Indirect Branch Tracking instruction extensions.
INVARIANT_TSC
– Invariant TSC.
INVPCID
– INVPCID instruction.
KL
– AES Key Locker instructions.
L1D_FLUSH
– IA32_FLUSH_CMD MSR.
LA57
– 57-bit linear addresses and five-level paging.
LAHF64_SAHF64
– LAHF/SAHF available in 64-bit mode.
LAM
– Linear Address Masking.
LASS
– Linear Address Space Separation.
LBR
– Architectural LBR.
LM
– Long mode.
LWP
– Lightweight profiling.
LZCNT
– LZCNT instruction.
MCA
– Machine Check Architecture.
MCE
– Machine Check Exception.
MD_CLEAR
– MD_CLEAR.
MMX
– Intel MMX Technology.
MONITOR
– MONITOR/MWAIT instructions.
MOVBE
– MOVBE instruction.
MOVDIRI
– MOVDIRI instruction.
MOVDIR64B
– MOVDIR64B instruction.
MPX
– Intel Memory Protection Extensions.
MSR
– Model Specific Registers RDMSR and WRMSR instructions.
MSRLIST
– RDMSRLIST/WRMSRLIST instructions and IA32_BARRIER
MSR.
MTRR
– Memory Type Range Registers.
NX
– No-execute page protection.
OSPKE
– OS has set CR4.PKE to enable protection keys.
OSXSAVE
– The OS has set CR4.OSXSAVE[bit 18] to enable
XSETBV/XGETBV instructions to access XCR0 and to support processor
extended state management using XSAVE/XRSTOR.
PAE
– Physical Address Extension.
PAGE1GB
– 1-GByte page.
PAT
– Page Attribute Table.
PBE
– Pending Break Enable.
PCID
– Process-context identifiers.
PCLMULQDQ
– PCLMULQDQ instruction.
PCONFIG
– PCONFIG instruction.
PDCM
– Perfmon and Debug Capability.
PGE
– Page Global Bit.
PKS
– Protection keys for supervisor-mode pages.
PKU
– Protection keys for user-mode pages.
POPCNT
– POPCNT instruction.
PREFETCHW
– PREFETCHW instruction.
PREFETCHWT1
– PREFETCHWT1 instruction.
PREFETCHI
– PREFETCHIT0/1 instructions.
PSE
– Page Size Extension.
PSE_36
– 36-Bit Page Size Extension.
PSN
– Processor Serial Number.
PTWRITE
– PTWRITE instruction.
RAO_INT
– RAO-INT instructions.
RDPID
– RDPID instruction.
RDRAND
– RDRAND instruction.
RDSEED
– RDSEED instruction.
RDT_A
– Intel Resource Director Technology (Intel RDT) Allocation
capability.
RDT_M
– Intel Resource Director Technology (Intel RDT) Monitoring
capability.
RDTSCP
– RDTSCP instruction.
RTM
– RTM instruction extensions.
RTM_ALWAYS_ABORT
– Transactions always abort, making RTM unusable.
RTM_FORCE_ABORT
– TSX_FORCE_ABORT MSR.
SDBG
– IA32_DEBUG_INTERFACE MSR for silicon debug.
SEP
– SYSENTER and SYSEXIT instructions.
SERIALIZE
– SERIALIZE instruction.
SGX
– Intel Software Guard Extensions.
SGX_KEYS
– Attestation Services for SGX.
SGX_LC
– SGX Launch Configuration.
SHA
– SHA instruction extensions.
SHSTK
– Intel Shadow Stack instruction extensions.
SMAP
– Supervisor-Mode Access Prevention.
SMEP
– Supervisor-Mode Execution Prevention.
SMX
– Safer Mode Extensions.
SS
– Self Snoop.
SSBD
– Speculative Store Bypass Disable (SSBD).
SSE
– Streaming SIMD Extensions.
SSE2
– Streaming SIMD Extensions 2.
SSE3
– Streaming SIMD Extensions 3.
SSE4_1
– Streaming SIMD Extensions 4.1.
SSE4_2
– Streaming SIMD Extensions 4.2.
SSE4A
– SSE4A instruction extensions.
SSSE3
– Supplemental Streaming SIMD Extensions 3.
STIBP
– Single thread indirect branch predictors (STIBP).
SVM
– Secure Virtual Machine.
SYSCALL_SYSRET
– SYSCALL/SYSRET instructions.
TBM
– Trailing bit manipulation instructions.
TM
– Thermal Monitor.
TM2
– Thermal Monitor 2.
TRACE
– Intel Processor Trace.
TSC
– Time Stamp Counter. RDTSC instruction.
TSC_ADJUST
– IA32_TSC_ADJUST MSR.
TSC_DEADLINE
– Local APIC timer supports one-shot operation
using a TSC deadline value.
TSXLDTRK
– TSXLDTRK instructions.
UINTR
– User interrupts.
UMIP
– User-mode instruction prevention.
VAES
– VAES instruction extensions.
VME
– Virtual 8086 Mode Enhancements.
VMX
– Virtual Machine Extensions.
VPCLMULQDQ
– VPCLMULQDQ instruction.
WAITPKG
– WAITPKG instruction extensions.
WBNOINVD
– WBINVD/WBNOINVD instructions.
WIDE_KL
– AES wide Key Locker instructions.
WRMSRNS
– WRMSRNS instruction.
X2APIC
– x2APIC.
XFD
– Extended Feature Disable (XFD).
XGETBV_ECX_1
– XGETBV with ECX = 1.
XOP
– XOP instruction extensions.
XSAVE
– The XSAVE/XRSTOR processor extended states feature, the
XSETBV/XGETBV instructions, and XCR0.
XSAVEC
– XSAVEC instruction.
XSAVEOPT
– XSAVEOPT instruction.
XSAVES
– XSAVES/XRSTORS instructions.
XTPRUPDCTRL
– xTPR Update Control.
You could query if a processor supports AVX
with:
#include <sys/platform/x86.h> int avx_present (void) { return CPU_FEATURE_PRESENT (AVX); }
and if AVX
is active and may be used with:
#include <sys/platform/x86.h> int avx_active (void) { return CPU_FEATURE_ACTIVE (AVX); }
Next: Free Software Needs Free Documentation, Previous: Platform-specific facilities, Up: Main Menu [Contents][Index]
The GNU C Library project would like to thank its many contributors. Without them the project would not have been nearly as successful as it has been. Any omissions in this list are accidental. Feel free to file a bug in bugzilla if you have been left out or some of your contributions are not listed. Please keep this list in alphabetical order.
argp
argument-parsing package, and the
argz
/envz
interfaces.
strstr
function.
memmem
,
strstr
and strcasestr
.
arm-ANYTHING-linuxaout
) and ARM standalone
(arm-ANYTHING-none
), as well as for parts of the IPv6
support code.
libio
library which
is used to implement stdio
functions.
locale
and
localedef
utilities.
hsearch
and drand48
families of functions,
reentrant ‘…_r
’ versions of the random
family; System V shared memory and IPC support code
iconv
)
ftw
and nftw
functions
printf
and friends
and the floating-point reading function used by scanf
,
strtod
and friends
catgets
support and the entire suite of multi-byte
and wide-character support functions (wctype.h, wchar.h, etc.).
mktime
function, for his direction as
part of the GNU C Library steering committee, and numerous fixes.
crypt
and related
functions.
malloc
, realloc
and free
and related
code.
memcpy
, strlen
, etc.).
qsort
and malloc checking functions like mcheck
.
iconv
and locale
implementations.
alpha-anything-linux
) and software floating-point support.
x86_64-anything-linux
and his work on Linux for MIPS
(mips-anything-linux
), implementing the ldconfig
program, providing a test suite for the math library and for his
direction as part of the GNU C Library steering committee.
libidn
add-on.
powerpc-anything-linux
).
mips-dec-ultrix4
) and the port to the DEC Alpha
running OSF/1 (alpha-dec-osf1
).
utmpx
interface and a utmp
daemon, and for a Hesiod NSS module.
mips-anything-gnu
) and for his work on the
SH architecture.
malloc
, realloc
and free
and related
code.
getopt
function and writing the tar.h header.
i386-sequent-bsd
).
tilegx-anything-linux
and
tilepro-anything-linux
) and support for the generic Linux
kernel syscall interface used by several newer ports.
sparc*-anything-linux
).
alpha-anything-linux
).
powerpc64-anything-linux
) and for adding optimized
implementations for PowerPC.
mips-sgi-irix4
).
qsort
.
m68k-anything-linux
), for his direction as part of
the GNU C Library steering committee, and for various bug fixes.
s390-anything-linux
) and s390x
(s390x-anything-linux
).
ia64-anything-linux
).
getopt
function.
mips-dec-ultrix4
).
wordexp
function family.
explicit_bzero
implementation and for various
fixes.
Some code in the GNU C Library comes from other projects and might be under a different license:
random
, srandom
,
setstate
and initstate
, which are also the basis for the
rand
and srand
functions, were written by Earl T. Cohen
for the University of California at Berkeley and are copyrighted by the
Regents of the University of California. They have undergone minor
changes to fit into the GNU C Library and to fit the ISO C standard,
but the functional code is Berkeley’s.
getaddrinfo
and getnameinfo
functions and supporting
code were written by Craig Metz; see the file LICENSES for
details on their licensing.
fdlibm-5.1
by Sun
Microsystems, as modified by J.T. Conklin, Ian Lance Taylor,
Ulrich Drepper, Andreas Schwab, and Roland McGrath.
Next: GNU Lesser General Public License, Previous: Contributors to the GNU C Library, Up: Main Menu [Contents][Index]
The biggest deficiency in the free software community today is not in the software—it is the lack of good free documentation that we can include with the free software. Many of our most important programs do not come with free reference manuals and free introductory texts. Documentation is an essential part of any software package; when an important free software package does not come with a free manual and a free tutorial, that is a major gap. We have many such gaps today.
Consider Perl, for instance. The tutorial manuals that people normally use are non-free. How did this come about? Because the authors of those manuals published them with restrictive terms—no copying, no modification, source files not available—which exclude them from the free software world.
That wasn’t the first time this sort of thing happened, and it was far from the last. Many times we have heard a GNU user eagerly describe a manual that he is writing, his intended contribution to the community, only to learn that he had ruined everything by signing a publication contract to make it non-free.
Free documentation, like free software, is a matter of freedom, not price. The problem with the non-free manual is not that publishers charge a price for printed copies—that in itself is fine. (The Free Software Foundation sells printed copies of manuals, too.) The problem is the restrictions on the use of the manual. Free manuals are available in source code form, and give you permission to copy and modify. Non-free manuals do not allow this.
The criteria of freedom for a free manual are roughly the same as for free software. Redistribution (including the normal kinds of commercial redistribution) must be permitted, so that the manual can accompany every copy of the program, both on-line and on paper.
Permission for modification of the technical content is crucial too. When people modify the software, adding or changing features, if they are conscientious they will change the manual too—so they can provide accurate and clear documentation for the modified program. A manual that leaves you no choice but to write a new manual to document a changed version of the program is not really available to our community.
Some kinds of limits on the way modification is handled are acceptable. For example, requirements to preserve the original author’s copyright notice, the distribution terms, or the list of authors, are ok. It is also no problem to require modified versions to include notice that they were modified. Even entire sections that may not be deleted or changed are acceptable, as long as they deal with nontechnical topics (like this one). These kinds of restrictions are acceptable because they don’t obstruct the community’s normal use of the manual.
However, it must be possible to modify all the technical content of the manual, and then distribute the result in all the usual media, through all the usual channels. Otherwise, the restrictions obstruct the use of the manual, it is not free, and we need another manual to replace it.
Please spread the word about this issue. Our community continues to lose manuals to proprietary publishing. If we spread the word that free software needs free reference manuals and free tutorials, perhaps the next person who wants to contribute by writing documentation will realize, before it is too late, that only free manuals contribute to the free software community.
If you are writing documentation, please insist on publishing it under the GNU Free Documentation License or another free documentation license. Remember that this decision requires your approval—you don’t have to let the publisher decide. Some commercial publishers will use a free license if you insist, but they will not propose the option; it is up to you to raise the issue and say firmly that this is what you want. If the publisher you are dealing with refuses, please try other publishers. If you’re not sure whether a proposed license is free, write to licensing@gnu.org.
You can encourage commercial publishers to sell more free, copylefted manuals and tutorials by buying them, and particularly by buying copies from the publishers that paid for their writing or for major improvements. Meanwhile, try to avoid buying non-free documentation at all. Check the distribution terms of a manual before you buy it, and insist that whoever seeks your business must respect your freedom. Check the history of the book, and try reward the publishers that have paid or pay the authors to work on it.
The Free Software Foundation maintains a list of free documentation published by other publishers, at https://www.fsf.org/doc/other-free-books.html.
Next: GNU Free Documentation License, Previous: Free Software Needs Free Documentation, Up: Main Menu [Contents][Index]
Copyright © 1991, 1999 Free Software Foundation, Inc. 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301, USA Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies of this license document, but changing it is not allowed. [This is the first released version of the Lesser GPL. It also counts as the successor of the GNU Library Public License, version 2, hence the version number 2.1.]
The licenses for most software are designed to take away your freedom to share and change it. By contrast, the GNU General Public Licenses are intended to guarantee your freedom to share and change free software—to make sure the software is free for all its users.
This license, the Lesser General Public License, applies to some specially designated software—typically libraries—of the Free Software Foundation and other authors who decide to use it. You can use it too, but we suggest you first think carefully about whether this license or the ordinary General Public License is the better strategy to use in any particular case, based on the explanations below.
When we speak of free software, we are referring to freedom of use, not price. Our General Public Licenses are designed to make sure that you have the freedom to distribute copies of free software (and charge for this service if you wish); that you receive source code or can get it if you want it; that you can change the software and use pieces of it in new free programs; and that you are informed that you can do these things.
To protect your rights, we need to make restrictions that forbid distributors to deny you these rights or to ask you to surrender these rights. These restrictions translate to certain responsibilities for you if you distribute copies of the library or if you modify it.
For example, if you distribute copies of the library, whether gratis or for a fee, you must give the recipients all the rights that we gave you. You must make sure that they, too, receive or can get the source code. If you link other code with the library, you must provide complete object files to the recipients, so that they can relink them with the library after making changes to the library and recompiling it. And you must show them these terms so they know their rights.
We protect your rights with a two-step method: (1) we copyright the library, and (2) we offer you this license, which gives you legal permission to copy, distribute and/or modify the library.
To protect each distributor, we want to make it very clear that there is no warranty for the free library. Also, if the library is modified by someone else and passed on, the recipients should know that what they have is not the original version, so that the original author’s reputation will not be affected by problems that might be introduced by others.
Finally, software patents pose a constant threat to the existence of any free program. We wish to make sure that a company cannot effectively restrict the users of a free program by obtaining a restrictive license from a patent holder. Therefore, we insist that any patent license obtained for a version of the library must be consistent with the full freedom of use specified in this license.
Most GNU software, including some libraries, is covered by the ordinary GNU General Public License. This license, the GNU Lesser General Public License, applies to certain designated libraries, and is quite different from the ordinary General Public License. We use this license for certain libraries in order to permit linking those libraries into non-free programs.
When a program is linked with a library, whether statically or using a shared library, the combination of the two is legally speaking a combined work, a derivative of the original library. The ordinary General Public License therefore permits such linking only if the entire combination fits its criteria of freedom. The Lesser General Public License permits more lax criteria for linking other code with the library.
We call this license the Lesser General Public License because it does Less to protect the user’s freedom than the ordinary General Public License. It also provides other free software developers Less of an advantage over competing non-free programs. These disadvantages are the reason we use the ordinary General Public License for many libraries. However, the Lesser license provides advantages in certain special circumstances.
For example, on rare occasions, there may be a special need to encourage the widest possible use of a certain library, so that it becomes a de-facto standard. To achieve this, non-free programs must be allowed to use the library. A more frequent case is that a free library does the same job as widely used non-free libraries. In this case, there is little to gain by limiting the free library to free software only, so we use the Lesser General Public License.
In other cases, permission to use a particular library in non-free programs enables a greater number of people to use a large body of free software. For example, permission to use the GNU C Library in non-free programs enables many more people to use the whole GNU operating system, as well as its variant, the GNU/Linux operating system.
Although the Lesser General Public License is Less protective of the users’ freedom, it does ensure that the user of a program that is linked with the Library has the freedom and the wherewithal to run that program using a modified version of the Library.
The precise terms and conditions for copying, distribution and modification follow. Pay close attention to the difference between a “work based on the library” and a “work that uses the library”. The former contains code derived from the library, whereas the latter must be combined with the library in order to run.
A “library” means a collection of software functions and/or data prepared so as to be conveniently linked with application programs (which use some of those functions and data) to form executables.
The “Library”, below, refers to any such software library or work which has been distributed under these terms. A “work based on the Library” means either the Library or any derivative work under copyright law: that is to say, a work containing the Library or a portion of it, either verbatim or with modifications and/or translated straightforwardly into another language. (Hereinafter, translation is included without limitation in the term “modification”.)
“Source code” for a work means the preferred form of the work for making modifications to it. For a library, complete source code means all the source code for all modules it contains, plus any associated interface definition files, plus the scripts used to control compilation and installation of the library.
Activities other than copying, distribution and modification are not covered by this License; they are outside its scope. The act of running a program using the Library is not restricted, and output from such a program is covered only if its contents constitute a work based on the Library (independent of the use of the Library in a tool for writing it). Whether that is true depends on what the Library does and what the program that uses the Library does.
You may charge a fee for the physical act of transferring a copy, and you may at your option offer warranty protection in exchange for a fee.
(For example, a function in a library to compute square roots has a purpose that is entirely well-defined independent of the application. Therefore, Subsection 2d requires that any application-supplied function or table used by this function must be optional: if the application does not supply it, the square root function must still compute square roots.)
These requirements apply to the modified work as a whole. If identifiable sections of that work are not derived from the Library, and can be reasonably considered independent and separate works in themselves, then this License, and its terms, do not apply to those sections when you distribute them as separate works. But when you distribute the same sections as part of a whole which is a work based on the Library, the distribution of the whole must be on the terms of this License, whose permissions for other licensees extend to the entire whole, and thus to each and every part regardless of who wrote it.
Thus, it is not the intent of this section to claim rights or contest your rights to work written entirely by you; rather, the intent is to exercise the right to control the distribution of derivative or collective works based on the Library.
In addition, mere aggregation of another work not based on the Library with the Library (or with a work based on the Library) on a volume of a storage or distribution medium does not bring the other work under the scope of this License.
Once this change is made in a given copy, it is irreversible for that copy, so the ordinary GNU General Public License applies to all subsequent copies and derivative works made from that copy.
This option is useful when you wish to copy part of the code of the Library into a program that is not a library.
If distribution of object code is made by offering access to copy from a designated place, then offering equivalent access to copy the source code from the same place satisfies the requirement to distribute the source code, even though third parties are not compelled to copy the source along with the object code.
However, linking a “work that uses the Library” with the Library creates an executable that is a derivative of the Library (because it contains portions of the Library), rather than a “work that uses the library”. The executable is therefore covered by this License. Section 6 states terms for distribution of such executables.
When a “work that uses the Library” uses material from a header file that is part of the Library, the object code for the work may be a derivative work of the Library even though the source code is not. Whether this is true is especially significant if the work can be linked without the Library, or if the work is itself a library. The threshold for this to be true is not precisely defined by law.
If such an object file uses only numerical parameters, data structure layouts and accessors, and small macros and small inline functions (ten lines or less in length), then the use of the object file is unrestricted, regardless of whether it is legally a derivative work. (Executables containing this object code plus portions of the Library will still fall under Section 6.)
Otherwise, if the work is a derivative of the Library, you may distribute the object code for the work under the terms of Section 6. Any executables containing that work also fall under Section 6, whether or not they are linked directly with the Library itself.
You must give prominent notice with each copy of the work that the Library is used in it and that the Library and its use are covered by this License. You must supply a copy of this License. If the work during execution displays copyright notices, you must include the copyright notice for the Library among them, as well as a reference directing the user to the copy of this License. Also, you must do one of these things:
For an executable, the required form of the “work that uses the Library” must include any data and utility programs needed for reproducing the executable from it. However, as a special exception, the materials to be distributed need not include anything that is normally distributed (in either source or binary form) with the major components (compiler, kernel, and so on) of the operating system on which the executable runs, unless that component itself accompanies the executable.
It may happen that this requirement contradicts the license restrictions of other proprietary libraries that do not normally accompany the operating system. Such a contradiction means you cannot use both them and the Library together in an executable that you distribute.
If any portion of this section is held invalid or unenforceable under any particular circumstance, the balance of the section is intended to apply, and the section as a whole is intended to apply in other circumstances.
It is not the purpose of this section to induce you to infringe any patents or other property right claims or to contest validity of any such claims; this section has the sole purpose of protecting the integrity of the free software distribution system which is implemented by public license practices. Many people have made generous contributions to the wide range of software distributed through that system in reliance on consistent application of that system; it is up to the author/donor to decide if he or she is willing to distribute software through any other system and a licensee cannot impose that choice.
This section is intended to make thoroughly clear what is believed to be a consequence of the rest of this License.
Each version is given a distinguishing version number. If the Library specifies a version number of this License which applies to it and “any later version”, you have the option of following the terms and conditions either of that version or of any later version published by the Free Software Foundation. If the Library does not specify a license version number, you may choose any version ever published by the Free Software Foundation.
If you develop a new library, and you want it to be of the greatest possible use to the public, we recommend making it free software that everyone can redistribute and change. You can do so by permitting redistribution under these terms (or, alternatively, under the terms of the ordinary General Public License).
To apply these terms, attach the following notices to the library. It is safest to attach them to the start of each source file to most effectively convey the exclusion of warranty; and each file should have at least the “copyright” line and a pointer to where the full notice is found.
one line to give the library's name and an idea of what it does. Copyright (C) year name of author This library is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it under the terms of the GNU Lesser General Public License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2.1 of the License, or (at your option) any later version. This library is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU Lesser General Public License for more details. You should have received a copy of the GNU Lesser General Public License along with this library; if not, write to the Free Software Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301, USA.
Also add information on how to contact you by electronic and paper mail.
You should also get your employer (if you work as a programmer) or your school, if any, to sign a “copyright disclaimer” for the library, if necessary. Here is a sample; alter the names:
Yoyodyne, Inc., hereby disclaims all copyright interest in the library `Frob' (a library for tweaking knobs) written by James Random Hacker. signature of Ty Coon, 1 April 1990 Ty Coon, President of Vice
That’s all there is to it!
Next: Concept Index, Previous: GNU Lesser General Public License, Up: Main Menu [Contents][Index]
Copyright © 2000, 2001, 2002, 2007, 2008 Free Software Foundation, Inc. https://fsf.org/ Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies of this license document, but changing it is not allowed.
The purpose of this License is to make a manual, textbook, or other functional and useful document free in the sense of freedom: to assure everyone the effective freedom to copy and redistribute it, with or without modifying it, either commercially or noncommercially. Secondarily, this License preserves for the author and publisher a way to get credit for their work, while not being considered responsible for modifications made by others.
This License is a kind of “copyleft”, which means that derivative works of the document must themselves be free in the same sense. It complements the GNU General Public License, which is a copyleft license designed for free software.
We have designed this License in order to use it for manuals for free software, because free software needs free documentation: a free program should come with manuals providing the same freedoms that the software does. But this License is not limited to software manuals; it can be used for any textual work, regardless of subject matter or whether it is published as a printed book. We recommend this License principally for works whose purpose is instruction or reference.
This License applies to any manual or other work, in any medium, that contains a notice placed by the copyright holder saying it can be distributed under the terms of this License. Such a notice grants a world-wide, royalty-free license, unlimited in duration, to use that work under the conditions stated herein. The “Document”, below, refers to any such manual or work. Any member of the public is a licensee, and is addressed as “you”. You accept the license if you copy, modify or distribute the work in a way requiring permission under copyright law.
A “Modified Version” of the Document means any work containing the Document or a portion of it, either copied verbatim, or with modifications and/or translated into another language.
A “Secondary Section” is a named appendix or a front-matter section of the Document that deals exclusively with the relationship of the publishers or authors of the Document to the Document’s overall subject (or to related matters) and contains nothing that could fall directly within that overall subject. (Thus, if the Document is in part a textbook of mathematics, a Secondary Section may not explain any mathematics.) The relationship could be a matter of historical connection with the subject or with related matters, or of legal, commercial, philosophical, ethical or political position regarding them.
The “Invariant Sections” are certain Secondary Sections whose titles are designated, as being those of Invariant Sections, in the notice that says that the Document is released under this License. If a section does not fit the above definition of Secondary then it is not allowed to be designated as Invariant. The Document may contain zero Invariant Sections. If the Document does not identify any Invariant Sections then there are none.
The “Cover Texts” are certain short passages of text that are listed, as Front-Cover Texts or Back-Cover Texts, in the notice that says that the Document is released under this License. A Front-Cover Text may be at most 5 words, and a Back-Cover Text may be at most 25 words.
A “Transparent” copy of the Document means a machine-readable copy, represented in a format whose specification is available to the general public, that is suitable for revising the document straightforwardly with generic text editors or (for images composed of pixels) generic paint programs or (for drawings) some widely available drawing editor, and that is suitable for input to text formatters or for automatic translation to a variety of formats suitable for input to text formatters. A copy made in an otherwise Transparent file format whose markup, or absence of markup, has been arranged to thwart or discourage subsequent modification by readers is not Transparent. An image format is not Transparent if used for any substantial amount of text. A copy that is not “Transparent” is called “Opaque”.
Examples of suitable formats for Transparent copies include plain ASCII without markup, Texinfo input format, LaTeX input format, SGML or XML using a publicly available DTD, and standard-conforming simple HTML, PostScript or PDF designed for human modification. Examples of transparent image formats include PNG, XCF and JPG. Opaque formats include proprietary formats that can be read and edited only by proprietary word processors, SGML or XML for which the DTD and/or processing tools are not generally available, and the machine-generated HTML, PostScript or PDF produced by some word processors for output purposes only.
The “Title Page” means, for a printed book, the title page itself, plus such following pages as are needed to hold, legibly, the material this License requires to appear in the title page. For works in formats which do not have any title page as such, “Title Page” means the text near the most prominent appearance of the work’s title, preceding the beginning of the body of the text.
The “publisher” means any person or entity that distributes copies of the Document to the public.
A section “Entitled XYZ” means a named subunit of the Document whose title either is precisely XYZ or contains XYZ in parentheses following text that translates XYZ in another language. (Here XYZ stands for a specific section name mentioned below, such as “Acknowledgements”, “Dedications”, “Endorsements”, or “History”.) To “Preserve the Title” of such a section when you modify the Document means that it remains a section “Entitled XYZ” according to this definition.
The Document may include Warranty Disclaimers next to the notice which states that this License applies to the Document. These Warranty Disclaimers are considered to be included by reference in this License, but only as regards disclaiming warranties: any other implication that these Warranty Disclaimers may have is void and has no effect on the meaning of this License.
You may copy and distribute the Document in any medium, either commercially or noncommercially, provided that this License, the copyright notices, and the license notice saying this License applies to the Document are reproduced in all copies, and that you add no other conditions whatsoever to those of this License. You may not use technical measures to obstruct or control the reading or further copying of the copies you make or distribute. However, you may accept compensation in exchange for copies. If you distribute a large enough number of copies you must also follow the conditions in section 3.
You may also lend copies, under the same conditions stated above, and you may publicly display copies.
If you publish printed copies (or copies in media that commonly have printed covers) of the Document, numbering more than 100, and the Document’s license notice requires Cover Texts, you must enclose the copies in covers that carry, clearly and legibly, all these Cover Texts: Front-Cover Texts on the front cover, and Back-Cover Texts on the back cover. Both covers must also clearly and legibly identify you as the publisher of these copies. The front cover must present the full title with all words of the title equally prominent and visible. You may add other material on the covers in addition. Copying with changes limited to the covers, as long as they preserve the title of the Document and satisfy these conditions, can be treated as verbatim copying in other respects.
If the required texts for either cover are too voluminous to fit legibly, you should put the first ones listed (as many as fit reasonably) on the actual cover, and continue the rest onto adjacent pages.
If you publish or distribute Opaque copies of the Document numbering more than 100, you must either include a machine-readable Transparent copy along with each Opaque copy, or state in or with each Opaque copy a computer-network location from which the general network-using public has access to download using public-standard network protocols a complete Transparent copy of the Document, free of added material. If you use the latter option, you must take reasonably prudent steps, when you begin distribution of Opaque copies in quantity, to ensure that this Transparent copy will remain thus accessible at the stated location until at least one year after the last time you distribute an Opaque copy (directly or through your agents or retailers) of that edition to the public.
It is requested, but not required, that you contact the authors of the Document well before redistributing any large number of copies, to give them a chance to provide you with an updated version of the Document.
You may copy and distribute a Modified Version of the Document under the conditions of sections 2 and 3 above, provided that you release the Modified Version under precisely this License, with the Modified Version filling the role of the Document, thus licensing distribution and modification of the Modified Version to whoever possesses a copy of it. In addition, you must do these things in the Modified Version:
If the Modified Version includes new front-matter sections or appendices that qualify as Secondary Sections and contain no material copied from the Document, you may at your option designate some or all of these sections as invariant. To do this, add their titles to the list of Invariant Sections in the Modified Version’s license notice. These titles must be distinct from any other section titles.
You may add a section Entitled “Endorsements”, provided it contains nothing but endorsements of your Modified Version by various parties—for example, statements of peer review or that the text has been approved by an organization as the authoritative definition of a standard.
You may add a passage of up to five words as a Front-Cover Text, and a passage of up to 25 words as a Back-Cover Text, to the end of the list of Cover Texts in the Modified Version. Only one passage of Front-Cover Text and one of Back-Cover Text may be added by (or through arrangements made by) any one entity. If the Document already includes a cover text for the same cover, previously added by you or by arrangement made by the same entity you are acting on behalf of, you may not add another; but you may replace the old one, on explicit permission from the previous publisher that added the old one.
The author(s) and publisher(s) of the Document do not by this License give permission to use their names for publicity for or to assert or imply endorsement of any Modified Version.
You may combine the Document with other documents released under this License, under the terms defined in section 4 above for modified versions, provided that you include in the combination all of the Invariant Sections of all of the original documents, unmodified, and list them all as Invariant Sections of your combined work in its license notice, and that you preserve all their Warranty Disclaimers.
The combined work need only contain one copy of this License, and multiple identical Invariant Sections may be replaced with a single copy. If there are multiple Invariant Sections with the same name but different contents, make the title of each such section unique by adding at the end of it, in parentheses, the name of the original author or publisher of that section if known, or else a unique number. Make the same adjustment to the section titles in the list of Invariant Sections in the license notice of the combined work.
In the combination, you must combine any sections Entitled “History” in the various original documents, forming one section Entitled “History”; likewise combine any sections Entitled “Acknowledgements”, and any sections Entitled “Dedications”. You must delete all sections Entitled “Endorsements.”
You may make a collection consisting of the Document and other documents released under this License, and replace the individual copies of this License in the various documents with a single copy that is included in the collection, provided that you follow the rules of this License for verbatim copying of each of the documents in all other respects.
You may extract a single document from such a collection, and distribute it individually under this License, provided you insert a copy of this License into the extracted document, and follow this License in all other respects regarding verbatim copying of that document.
A compilation of the Document or its derivatives with other separate and independent documents or works, in or on a volume of a storage or distribution medium, is called an “aggregate” if the copyright resulting from the compilation is not used to limit the legal rights of the compilation’s users beyond what the individual works permit. When the Document is included in an aggregate, this License does not apply to the other works in the aggregate which are not themselves derivative works of the Document.
If the Cover Text requirement of section 3 is applicable to these copies of the Document, then if the Document is less than one half of the entire aggregate, the Document’s Cover Texts may be placed on covers that bracket the Document within the aggregate, or the electronic equivalent of covers if the Document is in electronic form. Otherwise they must appear on printed covers that bracket the whole aggregate.
Translation is considered a kind of modification, so you may distribute translations of the Document under the terms of section 4. Replacing Invariant Sections with translations requires special permission from their copyright holders, but you may include translations of some or all Invariant Sections in addition to the original versions of these Invariant Sections. You may include a translation of this License, and all the license notices in the Document, and any Warranty Disclaimers, provided that you also include the original English version of this License and the original versions of those notices and disclaimers. In case of a disagreement between the translation and the original version of this License or a notice or disclaimer, the original version will prevail.
If a section in the Document is Entitled “Acknowledgements”, “Dedications”, or “History”, the requirement (section 4) to Preserve its Title (section 1) will typically require changing the actual title.
You may not copy, modify, sublicense, or distribute the Document except as expressly provided under this License. Any attempt otherwise to copy, modify, sublicense, or distribute it is void, and will automatically terminate your rights under this License.
However, if you cease all violation of this License, then your license from a particular copyright holder is reinstated (a) provisionally, unless and until the copyright holder explicitly and finally terminates your license, and (b) permanently, if the copyright holder fails to notify you of the violation by some reasonable means prior to 60 days after the cessation.
Moreover, your license from a particular copyright holder is reinstated permanently if the copyright holder notifies you of the violation by some reasonable means, this is the first time you have received notice of violation of this License (for any work) from that copyright holder, and you cure the violation prior to 30 days after your receipt of the notice.
Termination of your rights under this section does not terminate the licenses of parties who have received copies or rights from you under this License. If your rights have been terminated and not permanently reinstated, receipt of a copy of some or all of the same material does not give you any rights to use it.
The Free Software Foundation may publish new, revised versions of the GNU Free Documentation License from time to time. Such new versions will be similar in spirit to the present version, but may differ in detail to address new problems or concerns. See https://www.gnu.org/licenses/.
Each version of the License is given a distinguishing version number. If the Document specifies that a particular numbered version of this License “or any later version” applies to it, you have the option of following the terms and conditions either of that specified version or of any later version that has been published (not as a draft) by the Free Software Foundation. If the Document does not specify a version number of this License, you may choose any version ever published (not as a draft) by the Free Software Foundation. If the Document specifies that a proxy can decide which future versions of this License can be used, that proxy’s public statement of acceptance of a version permanently authorizes you to choose that version for the Document.
“Massive Multiauthor Collaboration Site” (or “MMC Site”) means any World Wide Web server that publishes copyrightable works and also provides prominent facilities for anybody to edit those works. A public wiki that anybody can edit is an example of such a server. A “Massive Multiauthor Collaboration” (or “MMC”) contained in the site means any set of copyrightable works thus published on the MMC site.
“CC-BY-SA” means the Creative Commons Attribution-Share Alike 3.0 license published by Creative Commons Corporation, a not-for-profit corporation with a principal place of business in San Francisco, California, as well as future copyleft versions of that license published by that same organization.
“Incorporate” means to publish or republish a Document, in whole or in part, as part of another Document.
An MMC is “eligible for relicensing” if it is licensed under this License, and if all works that were first published under this License somewhere other than this MMC, and subsequently incorporated in whole or in part into the MMC, (1) had no cover texts or invariant sections, and (2) were thus incorporated prior to November 1, 2008.
The operator of an MMC Site may republish an MMC contained in the site under CC-BY-SA on the same site at any time before August 1, 2009, provided the MMC is eligible for relicensing.
To use this License in a document you have written, include a copy of the License in the document and put the following copyright and license notices just after the title page:
Copyright (C) year your name. Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3 or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation; with no Invariant Sections, no Front-Cover Texts, and no Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
If you have Invariant Sections, Front-Cover Texts and Back-Cover Texts, replace the “with…Texts.” line with this:
with the Invariant Sections being list their titles, with the Front-Cover Texts being list, and with the Back-Cover Texts being list.
If you have Invariant Sections without Cover Texts, or some other combination of the three, merge those two alternatives to suit the situation.
If your document contains nontrivial examples of program code, we recommend releasing these examples in parallel under your choice of free software license, such as the GNU General Public License, to permit their use in free software.
Next: Type Index, Previous: GNU Free Documentation License, Up: Main Menu [Contents][Index]
Jump to: | !
.
/
4
:
?
_
A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z |
---|
Jump to: | !
.
/
4
:
?
_
A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z |
---|
Next: Function and Macro Index, Previous: Concept Index, Up: Main Menu [Contents][Index]
Jump to: | _
B C D E F G I J L M N O P R S T U V W |
---|
Jump to: | _
B C D E F G I J L M N O P R S T U V W |
---|
Next: Variable and Constant Macro Index, Previous: Type Index, Up: Main Menu [Contents][Index]
Jump to: | *
_
A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W Y |
---|
Jump to: | *
_
A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W Y |
---|
Next: Program and File Index, Previous: Function and Macro Index, Up: Main Menu [Contents][Index]
Jump to: | (
_
A B C D E F G H I L M N O P R S T U V W X Y |
---|
Jump to: | (
_
A B C D E F G H I L M N O P R S T U V W X Y |
---|
Previous: Variable and Constant Macro Index, Up: Main Menu [Contents][Index]
Jump to: | /
A C D E F G H I K L M N O P S T U W Z |
---|
Jump to: | /
A C D E F G H I K L M N O P S T U W Z |
---|
Versions of the GNU C Library before 2.25 required that a
custom malloc
defines __libc_memalign
(with the same
interface as the memalign
function).
Additions are welcome. Send appropriate information to bug-glibc-manual@gnu.org.
Actually, the terminal-specific functions are implemented with IOCTLs on many platforms.
Now you might ask why this information is duplicated. The answer is that we want to make it possible to link directly with these shared objects.
There is a second explanation: we were too lazy to change the Makefiles to allow the generation of shared objects not starting with lib but don’t tell this to anybody.